THE STANDARD CYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE THE MACMILLAN COMPANY NEW YORK • BOSTON • CHICAGO ATLANTA • SAN FRANCISCO MACMILLAN & CO., LIMITED LONDON • BOMBAY • CALCUTTA MELBOURNE THE MACMILLAN CO. OF CANADA, LTD. TORONTO LXXXI. Ray peach THE STANDARD CYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE A DISCUSSION, FOR THE AMATEUR, AND THE PROFESSIONAL AND COMMERCIAL GROWER, OF THE KINDS, CHARACTERISTICS AND METHODS OF CULTIVATION OF THE SPECIES OF PLANTS GROWN IN THE REGIONS OF THE UNITED STATES AND CANADA FOR ORNAMENT, FOR FANCY, FOR FRUIT AND FOR VEGETABLES; WITH KEYS TO THE NATURAL FAMILIES AND GENERA, DESCRIPTIONS OF THE HORTI- CULTURAL CAPABILITIES OF THE STATES AND PROVINCES AND DEPENDENT ISLANDS, AND SKETCHES OF EMINENT HORTICULTURISTS BY L. H. BAILEY Illustrated with Colored Plates, Four Thousand Engravings in the Text, and Ninety-six Full-page Cuts IN SIX VOLUMES VOL. V— P-R PAGES 2423-3041. FIGS. 2694-3515 THIRD EDITION gorfe THE MACMILLAN COMPANY LONDON: MACMILLAN & CO., LTD. 1919 The rights of reproduction and of translation are strictly reserved "£> COPYRIGHT, 1901 BT THE MACMILLAN COMPANY REWRITTEN, ENLARGED AND RESET COPYRIGHT, 1916 BY THE MACMILLAN COMPANY Set Up and Electrotyped. Published October 4, 1916 Reprinted May, 1917; March, 1919 DFPT, .mount Pleasant Press J. HORACE MCFARLAND COMPANY HARRISBURG , PENNSYLVANIA FULL-PAGE PLATES LXXXI. Ray Peach (in color). Frontispiece Facing page LXXXII. Peony, Baroness Schroeder 2431 LXXXIII. An avenue of palms in southern Florida. — Oreodoxa regia .... 2446 LXXXIV. A plantation of papaya in the Hawaiian Islands ..... 2462 LXXXV. Good pods of the garden pea, variety Peter Pan . . . . . 2491 LXXXVI. The common garden geranium, a form of Pelargonium ; 2527 LXXXVII. A branch of Pereskia aculeata, one of the leaf-bearing cacti. (From a photo- graph by H. K. Sloat) . . . . 2547 LXXXVI II. Picea canadensis (or P. alba). — A golden variety ..... 2616 LXXXIX. Planting. — Rhododendrons in a landscape composition (in color) . . 2659 XC. Bavay or Reine Claude (Reine Claude de Bavay), one of the Green Gage plums of American orchards ........ 2716 XCI. Harvest scene in the potato country ....... 2767 XCII. A plant of Primula obconica . . ..... 2800 XCIII. Prunus serruJata var. sachalinensis. — The form Fugenzo .... 2832 XCIV. The bloom of Pyrus pidcherriina (P. floribunda) 2869 XCV. Radish, in several varieties (in color) . ..... 2898 XCVI. Rhododendron well placed. — One of the Rhododendron catawbiense varieties . 2935 XCVII. A rock-garden .... . 2969 XCVIII. Romneya CouUeri, the Matilija poppy, one of the most showy of California flowers 2978 XCIX. Rose. — White, Bride; pink, Bridesmaid (in color) 3000 C. Rose, American Beauty ......... 3018 (v) 497721 PACHIRA (native Guiana name). Bombacacese. A group of .tropical American trees of variable size, some of which are known to be deciduous, all with striking showy flowers and exceptionally large fruits. Calyx almost tubulose, mostly short, truncate; staminal column long, divided at the top into 5 short branches, each of which in its turn ends more or less regularly in 3 bundles of about 15 stamens, with unequal slender filaments: caps, dehiscent, rounded- depressed to elongate-oblong, 5-celled, each cell con- taining several seeds coated in fleshy tissue. Allied genera are Bombax and Adansonia; the first one differs in having the small seeds imbedded in the woolly inside lining of the caps, (whence their name of silk cotton trees), the latter (the African baobab) in its 5-lobed calyx. In Bombax, the arrange- ment of the stamens is distinct and their num- ber much greater. — Over 30 species of Pacbira have been listed, of which at least 3 belong to Bombax, 4 are syno- \\ nyms, and among the remainder sev- eral are likely to be dropped on one account or an- other. Botanically speaking, only 7 species are well known, all of v which may be dis- tributed into 3 main groups. The fls. may reach 13 in. long with a spread of 9 in. in certain species; the petals are nar- row and grace- fully recurved in some cases, ob- ovate and some- what stiff in others. The color varies from a rich pink to white or pale brownish yel- low, distinct shades occurring in every species. The digitate foliage also contributes to give the trees their peculiar appearance. As to distribution, P. aquatica is found all over Trop. Amer., 3 species are restricted to Cent. Amer., 2 to the W. Indies, and the others are natives of S. Amer. They are easily cult, under glass and prop, either by seeds or cuttings, but, on account of their large size, most species are hardly desirable for conservatories. One species, P. insignis, has edible seeds, alike in size and flavor to the chestnut and on which account it is sometimes cult, in Venezuela and some of the Lesser W. Indies. The seeds of P. macro- carpa are sometimes used as a cacao substitute; it is probably the xiloxochitl of the Aztecs, being still called by that name (jelinjoche) in Nicoya (Costa Rica). A. Cops, globose-depressed, i.e., its diam. greater than its length. (Brachy corpse.) insignis, Savigny (Carolinea princeps, Linn. f.). A small tree : Ivs. 5-7-foliolate, the If ts. glabrous, subsessile, oblong, 8-24 in. long: fls. 7 in. long, erect; calyx cup- like, short and broad; petals oboyate, long-cuneate, crimson or dark purple, covered without with a thick brownish down; staminal tube short, the stamens not reaching the end of the corolla: caps, about 5 in. long by 7 in. diam. Trinidad and Lesser W. Indies; also in Venezuela. J.F. 3:295. AA. Caps, ovate-rounded, its diam. more than half the length. (Mesocarpse.) B. Calyx covered with large, crater-like glands: fls. sessile. pustulifera, Pittier. A small tree: Ivs. 7-f olio- late; Ifts. briefly petiolulate, o b - ovate, 43^-9 in. long, minutely to- mentose beneath: fl. about 7 in. long; calyx stipi- tate, truncate, pubescent within and irregularly covered with large glands without; petals laciniate, pinkish, yellowish pubescent with- out ; staminal tube short, pubescent, the stamens much shorter than petals: caps. 10 in. long by 8 in. diam. Costa Rica. BB. Calyx smooth or with only a few glands at the base: fls. pedunculate. macrocarpa, Schlecht. (P.fas- tudsa, Decne. P. longifolia, Hort.). Fig. 2694. A small or medium-sized tree: Ivs. 5-7-foliolate; Ifts. subsessile or briefly petiolu- late, oblong or oboyate, 2J^-8 in. long, glabrous: fls. up to 9 in . long ; calyx stipitate, cuplike, smooth or nearly so ; petals laciniate or linear, brownish to greenish pubescent without, pink to white or pale yellow within; staminal tube glabrous, the stamens about as long as the petals: caps, ovoid, 9 in. long by 8 in. diam. Cent. Amer., from Mex. to Costa Rica. B.M. 4595. G.C. III. 54: 325. J.F. 2:109, 110. villosula, Pittier. A tree reaching 90 ft. : Ivs. 5-7- foliolate; Ifts. petiolulate, obovate or elliptic-lanceolate, 2-7 in. long, villous beneath: fl. up to 10 in. long; calyx funnel-shaped, truncate, ferruginose-pubescent outside; petals laciniate, pubescent on both faces, pinkish 154 (2423) 2424 PACHIRA within, rusty colored without; siaminal tube long, pubescent, the stamens shorter than the petals: caps, ovoid, 7 ii long byjo in.. the lower twice as long; centrals 4, still longer; all the spines amber-yellow, becoming brown: cephalium terminal or sometimes unilateral, a foot long, woolly and setose. Mex. — The indications are that the plant in cult, under the above name is a true Cephalocereus and not the Pilocereus chrysomallus of Lemaire. PACHYCEREUS 2425 Columna-Trajani, Brit. & Rose (PUocereus Coltimna- Trajdni, Salm-Dyck). TRAJAN'S COLUMN. Treelike, attaining a height of 50 ft. and a diam. of over 2 ft., simple below: areoles large, elliptic; radial spines 1(M2, the upper very short, the lower longest, nearly an inch long; centrals'2, the upper an inch long, the lower 4-5 in. : fls. about 2 in. long, scarcely projecting from the unilateral woolly and bristly cephalium. Mex. R.H. 1890, p. 129. — The specific name refers to the famous Trajan's Column. marginatus, Brit. & Rose (Cereus marginatus, DC. C. gemmatus, Zucc.)- Simple or branching at apex, 2-3 in. diam.. with 5-6 obtuse ribs, which are woolly their whole length: spines short-conical, rigid, 7-9, all nearly alike: fls. brownish purple, about i%in. long: fr. globu- lar and spiny. Mex. — Frequently used for hedges in S. Mex. The st. is often covered with a woody crust. pecten-aboriginum, Brit. & Rose (Cbreus pecten- aboriginum. Engelm.). This species is sometimes cult, but does not do well under glass. The large burry frs. used by the Sonoran Indians for hair-brushes are some- times seen in museums and curio stores. Pringlei, Brit. & [Rose (Cereus Pringlei, Wats.). Fig. 2695. One of the cordon cereuses of X. Mex. Not so tall as Carnegia gigantea, ribs, fewer, and fls. scattered. Not in cult. G.F. 2:65 (adapted in Fig. 2695). J. N. ROSE. PACHYPHtTUM (Greek, thick plant). Crassu- lacese. Succulents, likely to be found in the under-glass collections of amateurs, and out-of-doors far South. See page 870, Volume II. Caulescent, more or less branched, with very thick Ivs. which are often terete: fls. solitary or in secund racemes; calyx deeply lobed, the lobes shorter than the corolla, and appressed to it; corolla 5-7-parted and not at all 5-angled; petals erect below, spreading above; stamens 10, the 5 alternating with the petals free from the corolla, the other 5 borne on the petals each usually with a pair of appendages at the base; scales broad : carpels 5, erect, free to the base. — About 7 species from Mex. Pachyphytum is usually included in Cotyledon but some recent American botanists keep the genus distinct. P. uniflorum, Rose, is a stout spe- cies usually woody below with green hardly glaucous terete Ivs., appendaged stamens and acute calyx- lobes, said to be cult, in shady courtyards at San Luis Potosi, Mex. P. bracteosum, Klotzsch (Echeveria brac- teosa, Lindl. & Paxt.). This species has oblanceolate to spatulate thickish Ivs. and a curved, finally erect, secund raceme which is 12-18-fld.: its calyx is deeply campanulate with unequal lobes and a bright red corolla. Mex. B.M. 4951. PACHYPODIUM (Greek, thick foot, alluding to the roots). Apocyndcete. About 15 remarkable succulent shrubs and trees of Madagascar, S. Afr. and Trop. Afr., a very few of which are mentioned in horticultural literature. They are grown with succulents, and prop, by cuttings. Frequently the trunk is much swollen: Ivs. simple, in spirals; stipules represented by rigid spines; or, according to Stapf, the Ivs. suppressed with the exception of a terminal rosette, and the spinous stipules crowded more or less irregularly on the swollen branches: cymes terminal, with few or many sessile or peduncled pink, white or yellow fls.; sepals 5; corolla salver-shaped, constricted at base, or funnelform to campanulate, 5-lobed; anthers conniving into a cone, with appendages longer or shorter than the pollen- bearing part, the structure complex. P. Geayi, Cost. A: Bois. Tree, 30 ft. or more, with succulent cactus- like spiny trunk, branching at summit : Ivs. in terminal tufts, long and narrow. Madagascar. R.H. 1907, p. 490. P. namaquanum, Welw. St. 5-6 ft. high and 9-15 in. diam., fleshy, tapering upward, tubercled and spiny: Ivs. obovate-oblong to oblong, crowded in a little 2696. Pachyrhizus palmatilobus. crown at the top of the trunk: fls. reddish tinged yellow and green. S. Afr. G.C. III. 46:371, showing the strange plants in the wild. P. succulentum, DC. Tuberous at base, 1-2 ft. high, producing several some- what branched sts., bearing Ivs. scattered on long shoots: Ivs. oblong-linear or linear, 1% in. long, pubes- cent above; stipules spiny: fls. 1 in. or more across, the oblong lobes white and purple. S. Afr. L. H. B. PACHYRHIZUS (Greek, thick, and root). Legu- minosae. Climbing herbs bearing large tuberous roots often 6 to 8 feet long and weighing fifty to seventy pounds, which are used for food and as a source of starch. Leaves pin- nately 3-foliolate; Ifts. stipellate, lobed, 3-4 in. wide: racemes with swollen nodes and fasci- cled pedicels, bracts and bract- lets setaceous, caducous; calyx 2- lipped, limb as long as the tube, upper lip emargi- nate, lower lip deeply 3-lobed; corolla much ex- serted, petals sub- equal, keel obtuse; stamens diadel- phous ;anthers uni- form; ovary sub- sessile, many- ovuled; style long, circinate at the apex, bearded down the inner side below the very oblique stigma: pod large linear, turgid, deeply depressed between the seeds. — A genus of 3 or 4 species distributed throughout the tropics of both hemispheres. Blanco, Flora de Filipinas, describes and figures the roots as turnip-shaped. When young, the roots are palatable. A. Lfts. entire. erosus, Urban (Dolichos erosus, Linn. D. bulbbsus, Linn. P. bulbosus, Kurz. P. angulatus, Rich. Cacdra erosa, Kuntze). YAM BEAN. Root tuberous: st. twin- ing, shrubby, hirsute, becoming glabrate with age: Ivs. pinnately 3-foliate, often long-petioled ; stipules del- toid or ovate-lanceolate, short; terminal 1ft. long- pedicelled, broadly cuneate at base, deeply or shallowly lobed in the upper half; lateral Ifts. oblique, short- pedicelled, stipels subulate : racemes 6-12 in. long, long- peduncled, base often branching, branches ascend- ing; calyx J^in., as long as the pedicel; corolla reddish, 1 in. or more long: pod 6-9 in. long, ^£-^jin. broad, 8-12-seeded, straight glabrescent. Tropics of both hemispheres. H.I. 19:1842. — Eaten both raw and boiled. tuber6sus, Spreng. JICAMA. Root tuberous, much larger than the above: st. twining, 10-20 ft. long: Ivs. entire or obscurely sinuate: racemes densely fld.: pod 8-12 in. long, %-%in. broad. Trop. Amer. H.I. 19:1843. — Young pods superior to many cult, beans in the absence of fibrous strings about the sutures of the pods; seeds said to be poisonous. Perhaps only a cult, form of the above species. The root is said to be a great favorite with travelers, as it quenches thirst and is nutritious. They are cut in thin slices and sprinkled with sugar. Two forms are recognized in Mex., one called agua, with a watery juice, and one called leche, with a milky juice. It is said that they 2426 PACHYRHIZUS PACKAGES can not be distinguished except by tasting the root. To have good roots, the blossoms and seed-pods must be kept pinched off, for if they are allowed to mature the roots are not good. The roots mature in about 5 months and may be allowed to remain in the ground longer, as they become sweeter ' as the cold season approaches. 2697. Pachysandra procumbens. (Flowers Xl. Leaves XH-) AA. Lfts. lobed. palmatilobus, Benth. & Hook. (Dblichos palmatiloba, Moc. & Sesse). Fig. 2696. St. twining, glabrous or pubescent : Ivs. pubescent, often long-petioled, pinnately 3-foliolate, terminal 1ft. broadly ovate, deeply 3-lobed, with lateral lobes often somewhat 2-lobed, lateral Ifts. less deeply 2-4-lobed, lobes ovate, mucronate: fls. purplish, in long-peduncled racemes. Trop. Amer. — Not so common, root smaller and less cult, than the preceding. p. L. RICKER. PACHYSANDRA (Greek, thick stamen). Buxaceas. Perennial herbs or subshrubs of some value as ground- cover in shade for their more or less evergreen leaves. Stems prostrate or ascending, 6-12 in. high, from rootstocks, scaly below: Ivs. alternate, usually coarsely toothed, evergreen or deciduous, 3-nerved: spikes staminate above, with a few pistillate fls. at the base of each; staminate fls. with 4 sepals and stamens and a rudimentary pistil; sepals variable in the pistillate fls.; petals none; pistil 3-celled, 2 ovules in each cell, the 3 styles spreading, filaments thick, exerted, conspicu- ous, usually white : seeds smooth. — Two species known: of low and dense growth, with very early fls. attractive to bees, and masses of bright green Ivs. Easily prop, by division in ordinary soils. Good for rockeries. In the vicinity of Boston, P. procumbens is decidu- ous, and is desirable only from the feature of its curi- ous flowers borne so extremely early in the spring. The foliage is of a dingy color and deciduous, whereas P. terminalis is a true evergreen with thick, glossy foliage forming a dense mat, making a very desirable low- growing cover-plant, succeeding admirably either in full sun or partial shade. The variety variegata is a very choice cover plant for ornamental effects. (J. Woodward Manning.) procumbens, Michx. MOUNTAIN SPURGE, Fig. 2697. One foot high or less: Ivs. ovate to obovate, 2-4 in. long: spikes of white or purplish fls. from the base of the sts. March-May. W. Va. to Fla. B.M. 1964. L.B.C. 10:910. B.R. 33. G.C. III. 55:335. terminalis, Sieb. & Zucc. Smaller: Ivs. obovate- cuneate: the small spikes of whitish fls. terminal. May. Japan. Var. variegata, Hort., with white variegated Ivs., is in the trade. P. coriacea, Hook.=Sarcococca pruniformis, Lindl. J. B. S. NORTON. PACHYSTIMA: Pachistima. PACHYSTOMA (Greek, meaning thick mouth, refer- ring to the thick lip). Orchiddcese. Terrestrial orchids with leafless scapes from underground nodose rhizomes : pseudobulbs producing 1-2 Ivs.: sepals and petals similar, the lateral sepals occasionally forming a chin, all upright; labellum 3-lobed, forming a sack with the base of the column; anthers bent over; pollinia 8, lying in pairs and bound into 4 by elastic threads. About 10 species, chiefly E. Indian and Malayan, but 1 from Trop. Afr. P. Thomsoniana, Reichb. f. (Ancis- trochUus Thomsonidnus, Rolfe), is the most commonly cult, species. It has large fls. with white sepals and petals, and the lip has green erect side lobes thickly dark purple-spotted and a narrow recurved midlobe which is white nearly covered with deep purple lines. Trop. Afr. B.M. 6471. J.H. III. 51:147. G.C. II. 12:582 (note), 624, 625; 18:501. Gt. 30:1061.— A warmhouse plant. P. Thomsoniana is now referred to Ancistrochilus by Rolfe. Ancistrochilus has 2 species and is readily distinguished from Pachystoma by the pollinia being united to a single stipitate appendage as well as by the remarkable lip and spreading segms. PACHYSTROMA (Greek for thick layer). Euphor- bidcese. The one species, P. ilicifolia, Muell. Arg., is a shrub or tree of S. Brazil rarely cult, and chiefly in botanical gardens; the oily seed has been used in medi- cine. Juice milky : Ivs. simple, pinnately veined, spinu- lose dentate: fls. apetalous; sepals valvate or slightly imbricate; stamens 3; styles 3, undivided; ovules 1 in each cell of the ovary. Related to Manihot. J. B. S. NORTON. PACKAGES for horticultural produce. The choice of a package and the method of packing horticultural products are very important considerations to every grower who is interested in establishing a reputation for his goods. The commercial value of well-grown produce of choice varieties may be greatly lessened or utterly destroyed if the attempt is made to market it in poor uninviting packages, or if it is poorly packed. Inferior produce or poor varieties are some- times sold for prices above their real value when packed in an extra attractive way. 2698. A good pack of apples in a box-tray. PACKAGES PACKAGES 2427 The choice of a marketing package for horticultural Eroducts is based largely on customs. These customs ave developed gradually along with the growth of the industry in any special region, and when suitable and valuable they persist and become firmly fixed for the 2699. Well-packed and not packed dessert apples. crop in that section. However, the supply of the raw material and the possibility of securing large quantities of it at a low price are important considera- tions besides custom. Examples of the custom of adopting a special package in a certain region might be cited, as barrels for apples hi the eastern states, boxes in the western states. Peaches are generally packed in flat boxes in the western orchards, and each fruit is wrapped in paper; the same varieties of peaches are marketed from the southern states in six-basket car- riers and the fruits are not wrapped, while from Michi- gan the same variety may be shipped hi bushel baskets and from New York orchards in the Delaware type of basket. In general, it would not be advisable to pack any crop in a way that would widely violate the general 2700. Sizing machine. custom of the community, unless the grower has a special market to receive his produce prepared in his special way. The illustrations accompanying this article (Figs. 2698-2718) show some of the diverse forms of packages for fruits and vegetables now in use in North America. The methods of packing cut-flowers are discussed in the article devoted to that subject, pages 922-925, Volume II. The separate fruits may also be consulted under their alphabetic entries. Apples (Figs. 2698-2704, to show the classes only). Since the beginnings of commercial apple orcharding, the barrel has been regarded as the standard package for the holding and shipping of apples. The size used has varied at different tunes and hi different sections. The size now specified by the United States Government as standard for apples is, when measured with- out distention of its parts: Length of stave, 28 J^ niches; diameter of head, 17J^ inches; distance between heads, 26 niches; cir- cumference o f 2701. Machine for sizing fruit. bulge, 64 niches i^T~T outside measure- jyT ment ; represent- ing as nearly as 1 , 1 possible 7,056 I" cubic inches. Barrels for apples have been hi favor for many years, and promise to re- main so, for the reason that they are cheap, easily secured hi most regions, can be readily handled and easily and quickly packed, and the trade has become thoroughly accustomed to them. The bushel box has been the standard package for apples in the western United States since apple-produc- tion has been of commercial importance in those regions. The box is occasionally used by growers in the east- ern apple regions. Formerly its use was always asso- ciated with fancy grade high-quality fruit. Western fruits shipped to eastern markets were of this class and always came in boxes. Some eastern growers thought that if even ordinary grades and quality of fruit were packed hi bushel boxes, the attractive prices that were secured for western fruit could be secured upon the reputation of the package. The delusion was not long- lived. As compared with the barrel, the box is a more attractive package, more easily handled, shipped and stored. It is easier to sell from in a store or on a fruit- stand, and when the apples are closely sized, the exact number in every package is known, and they are of 2702. A sizer 2428 PACKAGES PACKAGES uniform size, and this is of value to dealers and restau- rant-keepers. Boxes cost about one-third as much as barrels, and they hold about one-third as much, but more time is required properly to pack three boxes with apples than to pack one barrel properly. The Government stand- 2706. Delaware peach basket. 2704. A lined picking- basket, for apples, pears and other tree-fruits. 2703 . Another form of sizer. ard bushel box for apples is 18 by \11A by 10 ^ inches, inside measurement. There are various styles, those used in the western states being made with solid ends, and two pieces each for the top and bottom, and one piece for the sides. In the East, where the box is used, panel ends instead of solid pieces are used; otherwise the same as the western style. Apples are usually packed into barrels in the orchard, but sometimes may be carried to a packing-house or shed. A common way is to empty them from the picking- bag or -basket upon a packing- or sorting-table. From this pile, the "facers" are selected. These are fruits of a uniform size and should be of such a color as will honestly represent the average of the crop. The facers are then laid by hand in the then bottom, but later top, of the barrel. Sometimes two layers are placed in by hand. The barrel is then filled by emptying the apples from a basket that can be lowered into the barrel, or emptied from the apron attached to the lower end of the table. The barrel should be frequently "racked," i. e., given several short, quick, vigorous shakes, to settle the fruit and cause one to roll or slip over the other and thus become firmly lodged. When the barrel is well filled, a layer of apples is placed by hand on top. This operation is known as "tailing," and the cover is pressed into place and held there by driv- ing the hoops down toward the larger part of the barrel, and sometimes by nailing. Appliances or machines to size the fruits are used when apples are packed in bushel boxes, and with the recent enact- ment of laws in several states requiring that the minimum size of the fruits be marked upon the package this becomes necessary when packed in barrels. This sizing may be done by the eye and hand or with the aid of a sizing-board, but for rapid work a machine is necessary. There are a great many 2705. Bamboo basket for shipping kinds, and new styles citrous fruits in the Philippines. are manufactured and offered for sale every season. (Figs. 2700-2703.) These machines are shown not necessarily for recommenda- tion but to illustrate some of the types. Grading is the operation of selecting the fruits that are similar in appearance and value. No machine can do this; it must be done by hand. Grades are variable, depending upon the general crop of the season, the ideals of the packer, and the governmental requirements. Usu- ally there is a "Fancy," "Grade A," and "Grade B;" or, it is frequently designated as "Fancy," "Standard," and "Choice." The art of properly packing the graded and sized apples in the bushel box requires skill and prac- tice. There are well-known stan- dardized ways of doing this work. Details of this opera- tion may be found in Cornell Bulletin Xo. 298. Apples are also packed in one-bushel hampers, a commonly used package for summer varieties in the Atlantic Coast states, and also in peck and one-half- bushel market baskets (Fig. 2699), and peck crates. It is always necessary to exercise the greatest care in the picking of the fruit and in handling it from the tree. A good lined picking - basket, with swing handle, is shown in Fig. 2704. Citrous fruits. Citrous fruits are cut from the trees with shears. Care always should be taken to make a smooth close cut, as any injury to the skin or a long stem that may puncture a fruit that it comes in contact with may lead to serious decay. The picked fruit is placed in a bag, or sack, or bas- ket, and, when filled, this is emptied into a "picking-," "field-," or "lug-" box. It is then hauled to the packing-house, where it is graded by skilled workmen and then care- fully sized. The different sizes are packed into stan- dard-size boxes. The orange box, which is made of wood and is 12 by 12 by 26 inches outside measurement, with a partition in the center, may hold from 40 to 400 fruits, but the common sizes are 96, 112, 120, 150, 176, and 200. Lemons are very carefully graded and sized by hand. A lemon box has outside measurements of 11 by 14^ by 27 inches and holds from 180 to 540 fruits, but the most common and valuable sizes are 300 and 360 fruits. Pomelos, commonly called grapefruit, are handled in a similar way and packed in the same kind of package as is used for oranges. In a few cases, half- boxes of all these fruits are packed. All citrous fruits are wrapped in tissue paper. In Fig. 2705 is shown an interesting native bas- ket or hamper in the Philippines. (Wester.) Cherries. Cherries are hand- 2708. Berry crate holding picked from the tree with thirty-two boxes. 2707. Six-basket crate. Used for tomatoes and peaches in Georgia and Florida. PACK.V-I > PACKAGES 2429 the whole stems adhering to the fruit, or the stems are cut with shears; rarely, when the fruit is to be canned soon after picking, it is pulled from the stem. In this case it is carried to the canning plant in boxes which are lined with newspapers. As the fruit is picked, it is placed in baskets or pails and carried to the packing-station, where it is weighed or measured, graded and packed. The packages may be Climax baskets, ten - pound flat boxes, or sixteen - quart crates. The fine varieties of sweet cherries, especi- ally from the western states, are often packed in the ten-pound box. The layer is carefully placed in by hand and 2709. Portable hinged crate bottom enough fruit to make a firm tight pack distributed over the bottom layer, and the cover pressed on. Grapes. Grapes are cut from the vines with special grape shears. Fine varieties for fancy market are handled with care, so as not to rub off the bloom. They may be packed in the shipping package in the field, but are usually carried to the packing-house in trays. Some growers prefer to hold them in the packing-house for a day or two, to allow the stems to "wilt," as they can 2710. A vegetable basket 2711. Bushel basket with cover, useful for vegetables and hard fruits. then be more easily handled. The packing is usually performed on a table or bench, and from the picking- box or tray into the shipping package. The most common package is a five-, eight- or ten- pound Climax basket with a solid wooden cover. Grapes intended for wine are marketed in peck or half- bushel baskets, and in New York flat trays are com- monly used. Pears. Pears were formerly packed in a small barrel or keg holding about five pecks, and more recently pear bar- rels were commonly used. These held about a peck less than the standard apple barrel. The packages now used are the standard barrel and the bushel box, the same as the apple. When the box is used, each fruit is wrapped in paper. Pineapples. Pineapples are packed in crates that hold two dozen fruits, and each one is wrapped in paper. Peaches. Peaches are picked into baskets of various t ypes, the one-half bushel swing- handle type being the most common, and are carried to the packing- house. In some regions 2712. A bushel box. Useful for the fruits are run over fruits and vegetables. mechanical sizing ma- 2713. Ventilated barrel. chines, similar to apples, or sized by hand. They may be packed for shipment into flat twenty-pound wooden boxes, and each fruit wrapped in paper. This is the general custom in the western states. In the eastern states the stovepipe or Delaware basket (Fig. 2706), holding sixteen quarts, is used. There may be a slat cover or netting cover, and a light crate that will hold three of these baskets is some- times used. The six-basket Georgia carrier is a standard peach package (Fig. 2707). It requires special skill to pack fruit into these baskets properly and rapidly. The half-bushel and bushel bas- kets are also well recognized peach packages. A round stick placed in the center of the package to support the cover insures a minimum amount of bruised fruit. Plums. Plums are shipped in a great variety of packages. Fancy grades are wrapped in paper and packed in two- quart baskets and four of these are held in a flat wooden box or crate that weighs about twenty pounds. Large fruit varieties are wrapped in paper and packed in flat twenty-pound boxes the same as peaches. Climax baskets, holding from five to twenty pounds are used, also half-bushel and bushel baskets. Small-fruit varie- ties, like the Dawson, may be shipped in sixteen-quart cans. Small-fruits (Figs. 2708, 2709). The berry-like fruits, as blackberry, currant, dew- berry, gooseberry, loganberry, raspberry, and straw- berry, are almost universally packed in the sixteen- quart crate. In the past, these fruits, especially the strawberry, have been marketed in a great variety of packages, but in recent years the sixteen-quart crate 2714. A good commercial method of packing cauliflowers for special trade. has rapidly become the standard and widely recognized package. This package is also commonly used for the small- fruit plums, especially Damsons, and for cherries, both sweet and sour. The quart boxes are often taken into the field and "picked into," and then carried to the packing-station and placed in the case: or the fruit pickers use a special picking-basket or -box, and this is delivered to the packing-station and the quart boxes filled there, where 2430 PACKAGES PJEDERIA the fruit may be graded and the work of the pickers examined. Cranberries are picked from the vines by special machines or by hand, and packed in barrels. Occa- sionally twenty-pound wooden cases are used. Vegetables (Figs. 2710-2718). Packages used for the shipment of vegetables are not so evenly standardized as those used for fruits. Custom, however, seems to be of about the same importance, for similar vegetables grown in different regions are packed in different ways. Asparagus is cut and tied in bunches of various sizes. In a few sections the loose stalks are packed in small boxes or crates, but the usual form is a "bunch," and these bunches are packed in any handy-sized box. Hamper baskets holding from twenty-eight quarts to one and one-fourth bushels are commonly used for packing beans, corn, cucumbers, lettuce, peas, radishes, spinach, sweet potatoes; but a variety of packages is used for some of these products and for most of them ventilated barrels are used. Beets are packed in crates, the same as cabbage. Brussels sprouts are shipped in quart boxes like small- fruits, and these are placed in cases holding thirty- two, forty-eight or sixty quarts, the forty-eight-quart size being the most common. Field-grown cauliflower is packed in ventilated bar- rels; the greenhouse product is packed in small flat boxes or trays that will hold six heads (Fig. 2714). Packages for shipping celery are of many kinds. Each producing district has its own packages. A common one is a slat crate that varies from 6 by 8 by 24 inches to 10 by 26 by 24 inches. The plants, after being trimmed, are packed upright in these crates, which may or may not be lined with paper. With a fancy product, each bunch is wrapped in paper. A tight flat box, holding twenty-four or more bunches, is frequently used for express shipments. Cucumbers are packed in baskets (Fig. 2715), hamp- ers, flat boxes, and barrels. Lettuce is packed in barrels, is wrapped in paper. Special retail packages for celery and sweet corn are shown in Figs. 2717 and 2718. Onions are shipped in bags holding two bushels, in slat crates holding one bushel, in half-barrel hampers, and various other types of packages, and also in bulk. 2715. Basket-packed cucumbers, for a home trade. hampers, and frequently in crates 16 inches wide, 23 inches long and 8^ inches deep. Such a case will hold two dozen heads of No. 1 or two and one-half dozen heads of No. 2. Muskmelons are packed in Climax baskets, flat boxes (Fig. 2716), and crates. Sometimes each melon 2716. A twelve-melon package, used for the small dessert varieties. Potatoes are commonly shipped loose in a box-car. In cold weather, the car must be lined with paper and a heater in each car keeps them warm enough to prevent freezing. In some sections, the practice is to use bags holding about two bushels. Barrels are frequently used. Ventilated barrels are commonly used for sweet potatoes. Special baking potatoes from some regions are wrapped- in paper and packed in bushel boxes. Squash is usually packed in ventilated barrels. Sweet potatoes from New Jersey are packed in hamper baskets; those grown in Virginia, in barrels. Tomatoes are packed in flat boxes, Climax baskets, six-basket Georgia peach-carriers, and hamper baskets. They may or may not be wrapped in paper. For local markets, a great assortment of packages are used, but the peck and half-bushel market basket is the most common. jj_ j. EUSTACE. P^DERIA (Latin, psedor, bad smell, refer- ring to P. fatida). Rubiacese. Tropical shrubby twiners. Slender twining plants, fetid when bruised, with terete flexuous branches: Ivs. oppsite, rarely in whorls of 3, petioled: fls. small, mostly reddish or whitish, in axillary and terminal dichotomous or trichotomously branching panicled cymes, with or without bractlets; corolla tubular or funnel-shaped; throat glabrous or villous; lobes 4-5, valvate, with crisped margins, often 3-lobed at apex: fr. a small berry. Distinguished from allied genera by the 2-locular ovary and 2 capillary twisted stigmas. — Species about 25, India, Burma, Malay Archipelago, China, Mada- gascar, Mex. to Brazil. They are little known in cult., the following being a warmhouse climber. It is sometimes known as Chinese fever-plant. fcetida, Linn. Glabrous or nearly so: Ivs. long- petioled, ovate or lanceolate, base acute, rounded or cordate: fls. pink, the cyme branches opposite: fr. broadly elliptic, much compressed : pyrenes black, with a broad pale wing, separating from a filiform car- pophore. India, Malaya. — Oliver writes that it is LXXXII. Peony, Baroness Schroeder. P.EDERIA P.EOXIA 2431 "usually grown as a stove and greenhouse climber, but it is hardier than is generally supposed. It is rather an attractive-looking but not free-blooming vine. The leaves, or any part of the plant, when bruised emit a most offensive odor. Cuttings should be put in any time after the growths are matured." P. WUsonii, Hesse. A strong climber from China, with hairy branches: Ivs. long-petiolate, ovate-lanceolate, to 6 in. long: fls. cream-white with a purple-red eye, less than }^a\.. across, in a clus- ter somewhat like tnat of the lilac; corolla-tube J$in. long. This species stood two winters at the Arnold Arboretum, Boston, and blossomed, but was finally winter-killed. L H B 2717. Basket-packed celery, for home trade. PyEDEROTA (from p&deros, a name applied by the ancients to a species of Acanthus). Scrophidariaeex. Hardy perennial herbs suitable for garden use: low, many-stemmed, puberulent or pilose, with opposite serrate or cut Ivs. and dense terminal spikes: fls. short- pedicelled, solitary in the axils of small bracts; calyx 5-parted, the segms. narrow; corolla with a cylindrical tube and a sub-2-lobed limb, the lobes erect or erect- spreading; stamens 2, affixed to the tube: caps, acute, turgid. About 5 species, Eu. and the Orient in the mountains. By some considered a section of Veronica. The following species, which though perennial are usually treated as annuals, require a dry situation and light sandy soil. Prop, by seed. P. Ageria, Linn. Plant puberuloiis. 6-12 in. high: Ivs. all acute, the lower ovate, middle ones 1}^ in. long, almost 1 in. broad, the upper longer and narrower-lanceolate, cut-serrate: fls. yellow, in short compact spikes; corolla nearly Jiin. long with erect segms. May. Eu. P. Bonarota, T^irin. Plant pilose. 4-6 in. high: lower Ivs. orbiculate; upper Ivs. ovate or lanceolate, serrate or cut: fls. blue, in compact globose or oblong spikes which are 1-1% in. long; corolla ^in. long with somewhat spreading segms. May. Eu. (after the mythical physician Paeon). Ranunculac(x . PEONY. PIXXY. P.EONY. Specially attractive and important flower-garden perennials, prized for the showy spring and early summer bloom. Herbaceous or woody: roots thickened to form upright rootstocks: Ivs. large, alternate, pinnately com- pound or dissected, mostly ternate: fls. terminal and mostly solitary, but sometimes several, a very few species yellow, but mostly red, purple or white; sepals 5, persistent: petals conspicuous, broad, 5-10, but doub- ling may take place in any species: stamens numerous: carpels 2-5 on a fleshy disk, becoming dehiscent; fol- licles bearing the indurated more or less conspicuous style; seeds large, fleshy. — Species about 25, Eu. and A>ia, and one small-fld. species (P. Brownii) in Calif. and northward. Peonies are among the dozen common- est and best hardy herbaceous perennials. By varia- tion and hybridization, the garden forms are now very many. A botanical monograph by E. Huth, is in Engler's Jahrbucher, Vol. 14 (1891). An account by Baker, from which much of the recent botanical char- acterization is drawn, appears in G.C. II. 21, pp. 732, 779, 828, and Vol. 22, p. 9 (1884). See also R. Lynch, Journ. Roy. Hort. Soc. 12:428 (1890). According to Peter Barr, even.- species mentioned in Index Kewensis had been intro. to cult . in Eu. except P. obovata, a native of Manchuria; this species, once intro. but long ago lost, has very recently been brought again into horti- cultural notice. It is customary to divide the genus into two groups, one including the herbaceous species and the other (chiefly P. suffrulicosa or P. Moulan) comprising the woody kinds. This division is not invariable as the plants grow under cultivation, and to the horticulturist who wishes to distinguish the stem-species it is con- fusing. It may be better from the modern gardener's point of view to make the primary divisions on color of the flowers, into the red-white species and the yellow species. The yellow-flowered species have played a small part in the evolution of the cultivated forms, although P. lutea is now beginning to contribute a strain, and other yellow species are very promising. The species are difficult to distinguish, even in unmodi- fied forms; and the garden forms are very puzzling to a systematic botanist. The confusion is increased by the use of Latin names for many of the garden varieties. Xo two systematists could be expected to agree on the limits and nomenclature of species. The following descriptive account is a compromise arrangement of the species. As with most important genera of a considerable number of members, only a few species are in general cultivation and the others are known mostly only to amateurs and collectors. From the cultural point of view, there are two groups of peonies, — the shrubby or "tree" peonies, and the herbaceous peonies. The former are the product of P. suffruticosa, although the woody section has been, extended lately by the addition of P. Delavayi and P. lutea. The Moutans are low shrubs, branching near the ground and bearing many large flowers in shades of red and running to white and even yellowish. This group is now much eclipsed by the popularity of the herbaceous kinds, which bloom 2718. Paper packages or cartons for sweet corn, and other vege- tables supplied direct to consumer. each year on shoots that arise from the crown, the plant dying completely to the ground on the approach of winter. These garden forms are probably the issue of different species, as P. officinalis of Europe and P. aOnflora of Siberia and the far East. The set derived most directly from the former species are mostly earlier- flowering than those from P. albiflora. The botanical parentage of the horticultural herbaceous peonies needs 2432 P^ONIA P^ONIA 2719. One of the modern type of herbaceous peony. to be worked out from living material combined with a study of the historical development. It is commonly understood, however, that the present race of herba- ceous peonies is mostly the progeny of P. albiflora, but many are from P. officinalis. The importance of the shrubby or tree peonies is not now great, at least npt in this country. The species, P. suffruticosa was formerly prized for its bushy habit and wide range of flowers both sin- gle and double. The varieties of this species were once commonly propagated by grafting them on the fleshy roots of the herbaceous species. Non- blooming shoots are chosen as cions, and the union is made in late summer, the tuber and its cion then being handled through the winter in a frame, to be ready for planting out in the spring. A yellow- flowered shrub-peony is lately offered by Lemoine (La Lorraine) as a cross between P. lutea and P. suffruticosa. This bloomed first in 1904; it was awarded a prize in Paris in 1909. The flowers are soft sulfur- yellow with a salmon tinge when opening, becoming lighter when fully open. The herbaceous peony has come into great promi- nence in recent years. In this country, the merits of the plant have been recognized by the organization, in 1903, of the American Peony Society. This Society has now begun the publication of bulletins. It early under- took the study of varieties in a systematic way, coopera- ting in an extensive test at Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. The test-grounds and the studies corollary to the work, under the leadership of the late Professor John Craig, have yielded four publications: "Peony Check-List," by Coit, 1907; "The Peony," by Coit, Bulletin No. 259, Cornell Agricultural Experiment Station, 1908, in which is given an historical account of the peony, description of the species, and bibliog- raphy, as well as cultural advice; "Classification of the Peony" [varieties], by Batchelor, Bulletins Nos. 278 and 306, 1910 and 1911. The reasons for the popularity of the modern race of herbaceous peonies is given by Coit to be the ease with which they are grown, hardi- ness, permanence in the garden when once established, large size and wide range in color and form of the very showy flowers, fragrance of many of the varieties, freedom from disease and insects, usefulness both for cut-flowers and for landscape effects. As to season of the stem-types, he writes that it is begun, at Ithaca, "about the middle of May by P. tenuifolia, and carried along by the well-known old double red peony (P. officinalis var. rubra). Then come the tree peonies (P. Moutan [P. suffruticosa]) and, before they are gone, the earlier varieties of the Chinese peonies (P. albi- flora). Somewhere near July 14, the blooming season closes with the latest varieties of the albiflora group." The garden herbaceous peonies. (Wm. A. Peterson.) Herbaceous peonies (Figs. 2719-2722) are among the most hardy, showy, and easily grown of all garden flowers. They stand the severe cold as far north as Duluth without any ground covering. In the southern states their growing season is so extended that they do not develop as fine blooms. In delicacy of tint and fragrance, the peony more nearly approaches the rose than any other flower. The old-fashioned early red "piny," cultivated since the time of Pliny, is still a favorite in our gardens. Nearly all of the many hundred named varieties grown at pres- ent have been obtained by crossing the various forms of P. albiflora. Of the great host of double varieties, nearly all have been developed since 1850. The single- flowering sorts are not so popular as the doubles. They do not seem to keep so long when cut, and fade more rapidly when on the plant. Propagation of iierbaceous peonies. The easiest and most satisfactory method of propa- gation is by division of the large, thick roots. The roots may be lifted and divided any time from the middle of August until the stalks appear again in the spring. The best time, however, is in early autumn, when the cut surfaces soon callus over and new root- lets form before the frost sets in. Choose a large stool, cut off the leaves and separate into as many divisions as can be made with an eye to each tuber. In digging, care should be taken that all of the tubers are dug up, for if not they may remain dormant a season and then produce a shoot, giving rise to the many stray plants fre- ' quently found in old beds. Tubers divided without an eye should also be planted, as they often act in a similar way and make a showing above ground in two years' time. Peonies, like most tuberous plants, when dor- mant stand considerable exposure and can be shipped long distances with safety. Grafting is resorted to in herbaceous peonies when new and rare varieties are to be rapidly increased. An eye of the desired sort is inserted into the tuber of some strong-growing variety, from which all the pre- vious eyes have been removed. This operation is usu- ally performed in August. The grafted plants should be placed in frames for the winter and transplanted the next year into nursery rows. Propagating by seed is somewhat tedious, and is employed only for increasing distinct species and for obtaining new varieties. The seeds should be gathered as soon as ripe and kept damp until sown in November. A mulch the first season will keep the ground moist and prevent weeds from growing. Usually two years are required for the seed to germinate and three more before a well-developed bloom can be expected. Soils and culture. Peonies grow in all kinds of soil, but do best in a deep, rich, rather moist loam. A clay subsoil, if well drained, is very beneficial when blooms are desired, but the tubers ramify more in lighter soil if grown for propagating pur- poses. In pre- paring the bed, trench the soil thoroughly 2 or more feet deep, working in a great quantity of well- rooted cow-ma- nure, as the plants are gross feeders. The ground should be kept well tilled, and an annual top- dressing put above the plants in November; this 2720. A modern herbaceous peony of good habit. should be forked into the earth the next spring. They should have a liberal supply of water at all times, and especially while in bloom. Liquid manure, when applied in the growing season and at a time when the ground is dry, gives good returns, both in the growth of the plant and size of the bloom. The eyes should be set 2 inches below the surface. In transplanting, it is a good plan to remove all the old P.EONIA earth so as to start with fresh unimpoverished soil next to the roots. The flowers produced on small divided plants are likely to be imperfect, but when thoroughly established a plant will continue to bloom if undis- turbed for upward of twenty years. During the period of blooming an inconspicuous wire support is desirable, as a heavy rain often beats down the flowers. The host of ancient and modern varieties available, ranging from purest white to deepest crimson, in such a diversity of form 'and size, afford great opportunity for the making of extensive color schemes. Peonies do fairly well in partial shade, which prolongs and intensi- fies the color of the bloom, and therefore may be used to advantage to brighten up somber nooks. The period of blooming for herbaceous peonies ranges from the middle of May through June. They grow 1 to 4 feet high and are therefore suitable for planting in front of shrubbery, along driveways, and are especially pleas- ing when entering into a distant vista. The richly colored shoots, which find their way up through the soil in the early spring, have considerable value for striking effect. When planted in a border with fall- blooming perennials, such as phlox and funkia, their rich glossy foliage is very effective. The old flowers should be cut off, so that no unnecessary seed follicles will be formed, and thereby exhaust the plant. It is important to remove the faded foliage on all peonies in November so that it may not interfere with the next year's shoots. Because peony buds admit of being shipped long dis- tances without water, and arrive in good condition, they are now used very extensively on -Decoration Day and for June weddings. When cut in tight buds and closely wrapped in paraffin paper, some varieties can be held in cold storage for over a month and then open up very satisfactorily. For forcing, lift the plants in September and place in a coldframe where they will be accessible when the time for forcing arrives. Wlien brought under glass, a uniform temperature of 55° to 60° should be main- tained. By feeding well with liquid manure, strong blooms can be produced in eight weeks. A two years' rest is necessary before the plants are forced again. To secure extra-fine blooms on double-flowering varieties, remove the lateral buds as soon as formed. \Vhen the first lateral bud is retained instead of the terminal one, a later period of blooming is secured. Diseases. (A. C. Beal.) Among the peony diseases, the most prevalent and destructive is the botrytis blight, which attacks the stems, buds, and leaves. Early in the spring the young stems are attacked at the surface of the ground. The tissue turns black, and later the stems wilt and fall over. Sometimes this trouble is seen as late as the fol- lowing season. The use of green manure appears to favor the attacks of the disease, and only well-rotted manure or mineral fertilizers should be employed. Later, the young flower-buds are attacked, and these turn black and dry up. This is the so-called "bud- blast." When the buds are not attacked until they are well developed, they turn brown and fail to open. The petals are then found to be a dark brown rotten mass, and this is known as the "bud-rot." In very wet sea- sons, as high as 80 to 90 per cent of the buds may be thus affected. Even the flowers may be discolored by spots resulting from this fungus. The leaves are usually the last to be attacked, and the symptoms are large irregular spots which become brown and dry. While control methods have not been devised against this and other peony diseases, it is probable that sani- tary measures will prove to be most practicable. The prompt and thorough removal of the wilted stems and rotted buds, together with the complete destruction by fire of all leaves and stems in the fall, will tend to lessen the extent of diseases the following year. For an P^ONIA 2433 account of peony diseases by a specialist, see Whetzel, "American Florist," April 10, 1915. alba. 19. albo-plena, 15. albiflora, 8. amaranthescens, 16. Andersonii, 18. anemoneflora, 15. angustiloba, 6. anomala, 14. arborea, 5. arietina, 18. Banksii, 5. Baxteri, 18. blanda, 15. Brownii, 4. califomica, 4. Cambessedesii, 12. chinensis, 8. corallina, 11. coriacea, 10. cretica, 18. A. Fls. yeUow or orange. 1. lutea, Franch. (P. Delavayi var. lutea, Finet & Gagnep.). St. woody, short, the plant glabrous: Ivs. ternately parted, coriaceous, strongly nerved, glaucous beneath^ the segms. obovate-oblong and cut or more INDEX. decora, 19. Pallasii, 19. Delavayi, 1, 6. papaveracea, 5. edulis, 8. paradoxa, 17. elatior, 19. peregrina, 16. festiva, 8, 15. •pulcherrima, 16. fimbriata, 17. Reevesiana, 8. flore-pleno, 13. Reevesii, 8. fulgida, 15. roeea, 5. 15. Humei, 5. roseo-superba, 5. hybrida, 13. rubro-plena, 5. insignia, 14. Sabini, 15. intermedia, 14. sinensis, 8. lobata, 15. suffruticosa, 5. lutea, 1. superba, 1. Mlokosewitechii, 2. tenuifolia, 13. Moutan, 5. Veitchii, 7. obovata, 9. vittata, 5. officinalis, 15. Whitleyi, 8. oreogeton, 9. Wittmanniana, 3 2721. Single peony or less lobed above the middle: fls. 2-4 in. across, termi- nal; golden yellow; outer sepals leaf like and long, the inner ones orbicular and yellowish green; petals 6-10, orbicular, concave, the outer ones irregularly crenate; filaments short, the golden yellow anthers long-linear: carpels 3, turgid, glabrous, the style short and recurved. China. B.M. 7788. Gn. 61, p. 267 (note); 76, p. 416. F.S.R. 1:230. R.H. 1906:14. Var. superba, Lemoine. Seedling from P. lutea, with larger fls. (3—4 in. across) and with carmine base to petals when the plant attains age: Ivs. bronze-red during development, but becoming deep green. G.C. III. 44: suppl. July 18 (1908). 2. Mlokosewitschii, Lomak. Herbaceous perennial, the sts. stout and glabrous: Ivs. 2-ternate, the Ifts. or segms. broad-oblong or nearly elliptic, short-pointed or acuminate, 3—4 in. long, dark bluish green above and short-pubescent, pale glaucous beneath, the nerves and margins red : fls. 4-5 in. across, yellow, on glabrous reddish pedicels 4 in. long; sepals unlike, one of them oblong-lanceolate and constricted above the base and the other nearly orbicular; petals about 8, roundish, 2434 P.EONIA P.EONIA concave; stamens very numerous, the filaments twice as long as anthers : carpels 3, oblong, whitish tomentose, the stigmas subsessile and purple. Caucasus; discovered by Mlokosewitsch and only recently intro.; said to be the most handsome of the yellow-fld. species. B.M. 8173. G.C. III. 44, suppl. July 25 (1908). R.H. 1911, pp. 432, 433. 3. Wittmanniana, Stev. Herbaceous perennial, 2-3 ft., green, glabrous and smooth: Ivs. 4-8 in. long, 2-ter- nate; Ifts. variable, usually ovate to ovate-cordate and the lateral ones often oblique at base, glabrous above, rather glaucous and lax-hairy beneath: fls. 4 in. across, solitary, pale or whitish, yellow or greenish; sepals irreg- ular, green, concave; petals about 7, broad-elliptic- obovate, membranaceous, concave; stamens with orange-yellow anthers and slender red filaments: carpels 2 or 3, oblong-ovoid, glabrous, the stigmas recurved. Caucasus region. B.M. 6645. B.R. 32:9. R.H. 1906, pp. 348, 349. G. 27 : 135.— The first intro. of the yellow peo- nies, although not strongly yellow; intro. to gardens of 2722. Pseonia albiflora. Royal Hort. Society (England) in 1842. Light and not pronounced in color, and apparently not of great promise. AA. Fls. white, in shades of red or purple (exceptions sometimes in No. 11). B. Petals scarcely longer than the sepals. 4. Brdwnii, Douglas (P. calif arnica, Torr. & Gray). Low and somewhat fleshy, about 1 ft. : Ivs. glaucous or pale, lobes obovate to nearly linear: fls. dull brownish red; petals 5 or 6, thickish, little if any longer than the concave sepals; outer sepals often leaf like and com- pound; fl.-sts. reclining or recurved; disk many-lobed: follicles 4-5, nearly straight, glabrous, the fr. finally resting on the ground from the bending over of the st.; seeds oblong. Early spring or summer. Calif, to Wash, and northward, and in Nev. and Utah. B.R. 25:30. BB. Petals much exceeding the sepals. c. Disk expanded and involving or enveloping the carpels: plants woody. 5. suffrutic&sa, Andr. (P. Moutdn, Sims. P. arbdrea, Donn). TREE PEONY. St. 3-6 ft. or even higher much branched, distinctly shrubby: Ivs. glabrous; Ifts. more often entire at the base of the plant than above: fls. large, various in color, as rose, red, to white: follicles numerous, very hairy, rather small. May, June. N. W. China. — Long cult, in the Orient, where varieties are numbered by the hundreds. The following varietal names have been transferred from combination with P. Moutan, now making new combinations: Var. rilbro- plena, Bailey. Rose-colored, almost single. Var. rdseo- superba, Bailey. Fls. much more doubled. Gn. 31:76 (as Reine Elizabeth). F.S. 14:1395, 1396 (asTriomphe de Grand). Var. vittata. Bailey. Fls. single white, rose and flesh-color, striped, fragrant. F.S. 7:747. Var. papa- veracea, Bailey. Petals thin and poppy-like, white, with red at center of fl. B.M. 2175. L.B.C. 6:547. Gn. 38: 370; 52:325, and pp. 324, 325. Var. Banksii, Bailey. Fls. much doubled, rose-colored, and large. B.M. 1154. Var. Humei, Bailey. Fls. semi-double, whitish or blush with darker center. B.R. 379. Var. rosea, Bailey. Fls. bright rose-colored, fragrant, more or less double. L.B.C. 11:1035. 6. Delavayi, Franch. Woody or subshrubby, branch- ing, glabrous, 3 ft., more or less stolonif erous : Ivs. ternate, somewhat glaucous beneath, 1 ft. long; segms. lanceolate or ovate-lanceolate, 2-4 in. long, cuneate, decurrent and confluent at base: fls. small (about 2 in. across), dark purple or velvety crimson; petals sub- orbicular, 5-9, remarkable for their firm substance; stamens yellow: carpels 5, glabrous, spreading. July. China, at high altitudes. Var. angustiloba, Rehd. & Wils., has more finely divided Ivs., the Ifts. being nar- row-lanceolate. G.C. III. 53:403 (as P. Delavayi) .—In Ireland P. Delavayi is said to be cut to the ground sometimes by the winter but it throws up new shoots in spring. Somewhat like P. lutea except in color of fls. CC. Disk little if at all expanded and not enveloping base of carpels: plants herbaceous. D. Blooms several on one st. 7. Veitchii, Lynch. Herbaceous, 2 ft., with 6 or 7 Ivs. on st.: Ivs. shining, light green, with many (about 15) very acute lance-oblong segms. which are about Hin. broad; petiole of lowest If. about 4-8 in. long: fls. several on the st. rather than solitary, nearly 4 in. across, often nodding and sometimes becoming flat, purplish crimson. W. China. G.C. III. 46:2. Gn. 73, p. 539. R.H. 1914, pp. 196, 197.— A recently described species; a compact, attractive plant. DD. Blooms mostly solitary or single on each st. (partial exception in No. 8 and others under cult.). E. Lfts. all entire, sometimes confluent at base. 8. albifldra, Pallas (P. edulis, Salisb.). Fig. 2722. Root of fusiform parts or tubers: st. 2-3 ft., often branching and bearing from 2-5 fls. : lower Ivs. biter- nate; parts petiolulate or the lateral ones sessile, the Ifts. (secondary Ifts.) 3-4 in. long, oblong, lanceolate or elliptic, veining red: peduncle long, often with a large entire or lobed bract; outer sepals large, leaf like; petals large, various in color, usually white or pink, 8 or more; stamens golden yellow: follicles 3-5, ovoid, recurved- spreading, with spiral or reflexed stigmas. June. Siberia, China, Japan. B.M. 1756. F.S. 8:812. Gn. 30:588 (var. Adrian); 50, p. 170; 51:448. J.H. III. 58:493. Gt.7: 362 (forms). A.G. 23:643; 25:203. Var. Reevesiana, Loud. (P. Reevesii, Hort.). A double form, with deep red petals. P.M. 1:197. Var. sinensis, Steud. (P. chinensis, Vilm.). A tall Chinese variety, with large, double, crimson fls. One of the commonest forms in gardens. B.M. 1768. Var. festiva, Planch. Fls. double, white, with a few marks of carmine in the center. F.S. 8:790-91. Var. Whitleyi, Hort. (not var. Whitleyi, Anders., which has double pinkish fls.). Fls. single, large, white. Gn. 36:8; 63, p. 352. 9. obovata, Maxim. (P. oreogeton, S. Moore). Root or rhizome of elongated cylindrical tubers: st. 2 ft. high: P.KoXIA P.EONIA 2435 lower Ivs. twice ternate; Ifts. membranaceous, broadly ovate or obovate, more or less pubescent, especially beneath, the central one stalked: fls. not fragrant, 4-5 in. across, white according to G.C. III. 57:290 (usually described as red-purple) ; petals about 6, obovate, con- cave, very obtuse; sepals white or pale rose: carpels recurved, the seeds blue-black and berry-like. June. Siberia, S*. China, Japan. 10. coriacea, Boiss. Allied to P. albiflora: glabrous, the st. nearly simple and reddish: Ivs. coriaceous, glaucous beneath, the lower ones biternate; Ifts. very broad: fls. bright crimson: carpels 2-3, deflexed, gla- brous; seeds dark purple. June. Spain, N. Afr. 11. corallina, Retz. Tall, from carrot-form roots: lower Ivs. biternate or rarely triternate; Ifts. ovate or obovate, glabrous, or pubescent beneath: fls. purple or rarely whitish or even yellowish: carpels about 5, spreading or recurved, densely tomentose when young but glabrous at ma- ^ turity; seeds round, reddish to dark blue and becoming black. April, May. S. Eu. 12. Cambessedesii, Willk. Like P. cor- allina, but that species has glaucous- green never purple Ivs. and hairy car- pels: herbaceous per- ennial, about IK ft-, simple, erect and gla- brous: Ivs. ternately pinnatisect, with ovate - lanceolate or oblong acute entire glabrous segms. that are deep green above and purple beneath: fls. deep rose-pink, solitary, erect, 3K in. across, the petals 5-10,broadly obovate and crenulate; sta- mens many, with pur- ple filaments and yellow anthers: carpels 5-7, erect., glabrous and shining, purple. Balearic Isls., Corsica. B.M. 8161. EE. Lfts. more or less lobed. F. Lrs. and st. glabrous throughout. 13. tenuifolia, Linn. Fig. 2723. Root or rhizome creeping, tuberous: st. 1-1 K ft. high, 1-fld., densely leafy up to the fl. : Ivs. ternate, glabrous, cut into numer- ous segms. often less than 1 line broad: fl. erect; pet- als dark crimson, elliptic-cuneate, 1-1 K in. long; an- thers shorter than the filaments; stigma red, spirally recurved: follicles 2-3, about Kin. long. June. Cau- casus region. B.M. 926. A.G. 17:658. Var. fibre- plena, Hort. (Fig. 2723). Fls. double, crimson. F.S. 4 : 308. Var. hybrida, Hort. Fls. of a rich crimson color: Ivs. very pretty. 14. anomala, Linn. Root tuberous: st. 2-3 ft., 1-fld., glabrous: Ivs. biternate, glabrous beneath, cut into numerous, confluent lanceolate long-acute segms.: fl. bright crimson, very large; outer sepals often produced into compound leafy points; petals obovate to oblong: follicles 3-5, ovoid, arcuate, tomentose or glabrous. June, July. Eu. and Asia. B.M. 1754. Gn. 67, p. 375. Var. insignis, Lynch. The variety most cult.: st. \Ys-1 ft. high: lys. about 10, the lower ones very large, gradually reducing to the fl.: carpels with red pubes- cence. Var. intermedia, C. A. Mey. Lvs. deeply lobed: fls. rosy crimson. 2723. Pseoaia tenuif olia. 15. officinalis, Linn. (P.fulgida, Sabine). Fig. 2724. St. stout, 2-3 ft. high, 1-headed: Ivs. dark above, pale beneath, the lowest more divided than the others, hav- ing 15-20 oblong-lanceolate Ifts., 1 in. or more broad: outer sepals leaf like; petals dark crimson, lJ^-2 in. broad, obovate; stigmas crimson, recurved: follicles 2—3, becoming 1 in. long. May, June. Eu. One of the old forms in gardens. B.M. 1784. Gn. 53, p. 233. — By some combined with P. peregrina. Var. albo-plena, Hort. Fls. double, white tinged with red. Gn. 19:14. Garden forms are given trade names, as: anemonaeflora, crimson, globular fls., with a mass of twisted crimson stamens, edged with yellow. A.G. 17:663. Gn. 31:512; Wanda, pale pink; lobdta, Ivs. distinctly lobed : fls. cerise-salmon, a very unusual color. Gn. 79, p. 351; rbsea, rich deep rose; Sabini, rich deep crimson petals and vellow stamens. L.B.C. 11:1075. Var. f estiva, Tausch. Fls. white, with red centers. Native of Eu. FT. Lvs. and st. pubes- cent, at least in the upper part. 16. peregrina, Mill. Sts. about 1^-2 ft. high: Ivs. 5-6 on a st., deep green and gla- brous above, pale green and pilose beneath; otherwise the Ivs. and fls. are much like those of P. officinalis. Eu. — Two garden forms with double fls. are: amar- anthescens spherica, and pulcherrima plena, the latter differing from the former in the purple shade of crim- son fls. This species- officinalis. (XJfl ^a3ne « USed by Huth. to cover a number of the forms that by others are regarded as tenable species. 17. paraddza, G. Anders. Plant one of the dwarfest : Ivs. in a dense tuft ; Ifts. 3-lobed and incised : fls. purple- red: carpels pressed closely together. S. Eu. — Differs from P. peregrina by smaller ovate and more glaucous Ivs., Ifts. more divided and crowded. Var. fimbriata, Hort. Double purple fls., with projecting purple stamens; very pretty, but not much cult, in Amer. The species is sometimes referred to P. peregrina. 18. arietina, G. Anders. St. 2-3 ft, high, hairy toward the top: Ivs. 5-6 on a st., rather glaucous and pubes- cent beneath; segms. oblong to oblong-lanceolate, strongly confluent, decurrent: fls. always solitary, dark red, large: follicles 3—4, densely tomentose, ovoid, spreading widely, becoming 1 in. long, strongly arched; stigma recurved. S. Eu. B.R. 819 (as P. cretica). — There are a number of horticultural varieties, under vernacular names. Andersonii, bright rose; Bdxteri, crimson; cretica, blush-pink. The species is by some combined with P. peregrina. 19. decora, G. Anders. Tubers oblong: sts. 2-3 ft. high : Ivs. horizontal, diminishing to the top; Ifts. oblong- obtuse: fls. rather small, deep purple; petals few, small, narrow, peduncle long: follicles hairy, large, spreading from the base when mature. S. Eu. Var. alba, Hort., has satiny white fls., slightly tinted pink. Gn. 72, p. 291. Var. Pallasii, G. Anders. Lvs. narrow-oblong: fls. rich crimson. G. 29:225. 2436 PJEONIA Var. elatior, G. Anders. Lvs. broadly oblong: fls. rich crimson, very large: receptacle with few processes, and a connection between the carpels at their base of similar surface and appearance to that of the carpels. P. Brdteri, Boiss. & Reut. (P. corallina var. Broteri, Huth) Fls red, varying to white: carpels densely white-tomentose: allied to P. officmahs and P. corallina in Ivs. and habit. — P. cdrsica Sieber Much like P. coriacea.— P. Emddii, Wall. Closely related' to and sometimes regarded as a synonym of P. anomala. B.M. 5719 Gn. 45:70.— P. humilis, Retz. (P. peregrina var. humilis, Huth).' Rather low: fls. bright red: carpels glabrous or very nearly so B.M. 1422.— P. microcdrpa, Boiss. & Reut. Allied to the preceding and referred to it by Huth, but dwarfer. Var. Jonathan Gibson is a garden form, with very downy Ivs. — P. mtllis, G. Anders. Low, about 1 ft., with 1 fl. to the st.: Ivs. dull green above, glaucous and pubescent beneath, with many oblong-lanceolate segms. : fls. deep red and subsessile: carpels 2-3, pilose, erect-curved. A doubtful species allied to P. anomala. L.B.C. 13:1263.— P. piibens, Sims. Allied to P. officinalis probably: Ivs. hairy below, margins red — P. . Russii, Biv. (P. corallina var. Russii, Huth). Allied to P. cor- allma, but with the Ivs. decidedly hairy below. — P. sessilifldra feims. Nearly related to P. mollis; very low: fls. subsessile, white. —P. tnternata, Pallas (P. corallina var. Pallasii, Huth). Differs from P. corallina in its rounded Ivs., green st., and rose or whitish fls. B.M. 1441 (P. daurica). v r< *r\ K. C. DAVIS. L. H. B.f PAINTED CUP: Castilleja. PAINTED LEAF: Euphorbia heterophylla. PALAF6XIA HOOKERlANA: Polyopteris. PALAQUlUM: Isonandra. PALAUA (after Anton Palau y Verdera, professor of botany at Madrid the latter half of the eighteenth cen- tury). Also written Palava, under which name it appears in lists. Malydcese. Flower-garden herbs. Annual or perennial, tqmentose or somewhat gla- brous: Ivs. usually lobed, dissected or sinuate: bractlets 0: fls. purple or purplish, axillary, peduncled, solitary: calyx 5-cut; stamens in a column which is much divided at the top; ovary many-celled; style stigmatose at the apex: carpels crowded without order. — Species 9 in 1908, as accepted by Ulbrich in Engler's Jahrb. 42; Peru and Chile. dissecta, Benth. (P.flexubsa, Mast.). Slender annual, branched from roots: sts. 8-12 in. long, ascending, flexuous above: If .-stalks 1-2 in. long; blades 1-2 in. long and broad, triangular in outline, pinnatifid, the segms. lobed; lobes obtuse: fls. many, well separated from the foliage, about 1 in. across, lilac with whitish center, the stamens rose-purple and arranged in 5 longitudinal series; styles 25-30. Peru. B.M. 5768 H.F. II. 12:43. L. H. B PALAVA: Palava. PALISOTA (named in honor of A. M. F. J. Palisot de Beauvois, 1752-1820, French administrator, traveler and botanist). Commelinacese. Perennial herbs, some- times grown as pot or tub specimens under glass, as in palm houses, for the foliage. Stem or caudex either long or very short, simple or nearly so, with the Ivs. crowded at the top or base: Ivs. long, parallel-veined, hairy when young and the mar- gins with reddish or grayish hairs: fls. mostly white or purplish or rose, in many small cymes which are arranged in a dense or elongated panicle on mostly 1 peduncle that is terminal or essentially so; sepals and petals 3, the latter obovate; stamens 3, perfect, and 2 or 3 bearded staminodes; ovary 3-celled, with 1-several ovules in each: fr. a colored fleshy or succulent inde- hiscent berry.— Species about 15, in Trop. Afr. Little known in cult, outside of collections. The Ivs. are often banded or striped, and the colored hairs make them conspicuous. For cult., see Commelina, p. 835. P. Albertii, Gentil. Sub-caulescent: much like P. Elizabeth® but Ivs. not variegated and petioles without marginal hairs, also stronger-growing: Ivs. very dark green, grayish hairy beneath, •j I Lg • ,4~10 ln- mde- l°ng-attenuate to petiole, the latter widely channeled. Habitat not given.— P. Bdrteri, Hook. f. Sts 1-5 in. long, with Ivs. near the base (i. e., practically radical), the young parts shaggy hairy: Ivs. to 2 ft. long by about 4 in. wide, obovate-lanceolate, abruptly contracted into a tip 1 in. long at PALIURUS maturity with densely hairy margins but otherwise often nearly glabrous: mfl about 2 in. long (or longer in cult.), very many-fld • fls. pale purplish. Upper Guinea. B.M. 5318.— P. tricolor Mast' imperfectly known, has oblong-obovate Ivs. about 1 ft lone with a A a Cand ln ,center of greenish yellow, the margins brown-hairy 1 fleshy petiole with broad purplish band. Upper Guinea F Elizabeths, Gentil (P. Pynaertii var. Elizabeths, Hort.). Caules- cent: Ivs. long-acuminate, obovate-lanceolate, marked with greenish yellow variegation along the median line, 2-3 ft. long and 4-10 in wide, long-attenuated to petiole, the latter thick and several inches HK!* b/oadly canaliculate with rufescent hairs on the margin. Habitat not given. G.C. III. 48:423. Gt. 64, p. 49.-P. Pynaertii, em. I be plant in cult, seems to be the variegated-lvd. form and which is probably the same as P. Elizabeths, although the atter is said to differ in general form of growth and to have longer Jvs. and with widely channeled petiole. Trop. Afr. R.B. 35-376 (as fol. var.) —P. Schweinfurthii, Clarke. St. 3-7 in. long and V2in. diam., with 2 or 3 Ivs. at the nodes: Ivs. to 2 ft. or somewhat more and 8 m. broad, elliptic, short-acuminate at either end, densely :airy on margin but more or less glabrate otherwise: infl. 4-7 in long, cylmdric and very dense, containing several hundred fls Troo Afr., widely spread. G.W. 8, p. 553.— P. thyrsifldra, Benin! knaggy-hairy on young parts, the sts. to 15 ft. long: Ivs very large, lance-obovate or oblong-elliptic, the margins densely hairy- fls. white, m a loose panicle often 2 in. wide and 10 in. long- ovary glabrous: berry J^in. or more diam., blue. Upper and 'Lower Guinea. The Dichorisandra thysiana, Hort. (G C III 28-302 R.B 28:133) is probably this plant. It is described as 'a "plant of striking habit, and bold ascending foliage:" from Hort. Linden. L. H. B. PALIURUS (ancient Greek name). Rhamnacese. Ornamental woody plants sometimes grown for their attractive foliage and curiously shaped fruits. Trees or shrubs: stipules usually changed into spines: Ivs. alternate, 3-nerved, entire or serrate: fls. small, per- fect, in axillary or sometimes terminal cymes; petals 5> 2-lobed; stamens 5: fr. woody, 3-celled, depressed subglobose, with a broad orbicular horizontal wing; cells 1-seeded. — Six species from S. Eu. to Tonkin, China, and Japan. These are spiny trees or shrubs sometimes procum- bent with two-ranked generally ovate medium-sized leaves and small greenish yellow flowers in axillary clusters followed by orbicular broadly winged, curiously shaped fruits resembling a head with a broad-brimmed hat. The one species cultivated in this country is not reliably hardy north of Washington, D. C.; in Mas- sachusetts it is killed every winter almost to the t round even with protection, and the young shoots ower but bear no fruit. It is not very ornamental, but the dark green foliage is pretty and the curious fruits are interesting. It thrives in any well-drained soil and prefers a sunny and warm position. Propaga- tion is by seeds stratified or sown in autumn and by layers or root-cuttings. Spina-Christi, Mill. (P. australis, Gaertn. P. aculea- lus, Lam. Zizyphus Paliurus, Willd. tfhdmnus Pali- iirus, Linn.). JERUSALEM THORN. CHRIST'S THORN. Spreading, spiny shrub or small tree to 20 ft., sometimes procumbent: branches brown: 1 of the 2 spines at the base of the petioles straight, the other hooked and recurved: Ivs. rather slender-petioled, ovate, usually unequal at the rounded base, obtuse, minutely ser- rulate, glabrous, dark green above, pale or grayish beneath, %-l}/2 in. long: fls. in axillary short-peduncled cymes: fr. brownish yellow, about %-\ in. across, glabrous. June, July. S. Eu. to Himalayas and N. China. B.M. 1893; 2535 (as P. virgatus.) G.C. III. 50:377. — This plant is supposed to have furnished the crown of thorns which was placed on the head of Christ before his crucifixion; others think Zizyphus Spina-Christi to be the shrub the crown was made of. These two shrubs resemble each other closely, but the branches are whitish and the frs. berry-like in Zizy- phus; the shape of the spines is exactly the same in both species. P. orientdlis, Hemsl. Tree, to 30 ft. : sometimes unarmed: Ivs. 2-4 in. long, glabrous: fr. 1-1 H in. across, glabrous, purplish. China. This but recently intro. species is perhaps the most orna- mental of the genus; it has not proved hardy at the Arnold Arbor- etum.— P. ramosissimus, Poir. (P. Aubletia, Roem. & Schult.). Shrub similar to P. Spina-Christi, but with both spines straight, with larger Ivs. pubescent beneath, and smaller tomentose frs. with narrow wing. China, Japan. ALFRED REHDER. PALM PALM 2437 PALM. Palms are amongst the most striking plants in tropical floras. The tall mostly straight unbranched trunks surmounted by a spreading canopy of huge pin- nate or digitate leaves distinguish them from nearly all other forms of vegetation. They are widely spread in warm regions, being most abundant in America and Asia and few in Africa. They are particularly conspic- uous in the Pacific Islands. Although the palms are such bold and interesting plants, the species are imper- fectly understood. This is due to the great difficulty of making herbarium specimens, to the fact that the greater number of botanists are residents of regions in which palms do not grow, and to the differences of opinion as to the relative importance of the various botanical characters. Many of the palms have been named first from cultivated specimens, and often before the flowers and fruits are known. When the specimens finally come to fruit, the names are usually shifted, causing much confusion. The proper generic position of a palm may be unknown for several years after it becomes popular in the horticultural trade. Consider the changes in nomenclature which have occurred in palms that have been referred to the genera Areca and Kentia. The species of palms are not very numerous as compared with orchids, composites and grasses. They probably do not greatly exceed 1,200, as at present known, although more than that number have been described. Bentham & Hooker accept 132 genera, and Drude, in Engler & Prantl's "Pflanzenfamilien," accept 128 genera. Most of the genera are small, and many of them are monotypic. The largest genera are Calamus, with about 200 species, all Old World, mostly Asian; Geonoma, with about 100 species, all American; Bactris, about 100, American; Chamsedorea, with about 60. all American; Licuala, with 30, ranging from eastern Asia to Australia; Desmoncus, about 25, American; Cocos, 30, all confined to America but the coconut, which is now cosmopolitan; Pinanga, with about 25 species, of the oriental tropics; Areca, nearly two dozen, oriental. Many of the species, particularly in the small genera, are restricted to very small geo- graphical regions, often to one island or to a group of islands. The palms represent an old type of vegetation, and they are now, probably, on the decline, as measured General characteristics. The members of this family are essentially tropical in habitat, are highly ornamental in appearance, and many of them also of very great economic value, their fruits, stems and leaves not only entering largely into the manufactured products of both Europe and America 2725. Flower and fruit of Pritchardia Wrightii. — a, flower in anthesis, with one segment remaining attached to corolla-tube; b, flower in lengthwise section, segments and anthers wanting; c, anther, dorsal view; d, anther, ventral view; e, lengthwise section of carpel; /, young fruit, with remains of sterile carpel at apex; g, section of kernel, showing entire seed inside; h, section of seed along line of raphe. in geological epochs. — Perhaps the most complete account of the botany of certain groups of palms is by O. Beccari in such works as: "The species of Calamus," "Le Palme Americane della tribu della Corypheae," "Notes on Philippine Palms," and many smaller papers. O. F. Cook has also written extensively of the American species. 2726. Flowers and fruit of Thrinax Wendlandiana. — a, top part of flowering branch! et; b, flower; c, fruiting perianth, seen from above, from which the fruit has been taken; d, fruit; e, longi- tudinal section of seed, through embryo. but also providing both food and shelter for thousands of the inhabitants of tropical countries. One notable characteristic of palms in general is their unbranched stems, the exceptions to this rule being very few and mostly limited to the members of one genus, Hyphaene, of which the doum palm of Egypt, H . thebaica, is the best example. While these unbranched stems form a prominent feature in connection with this order of plants, yet great variations are found in size and habit, some of them towering up like a slender marble shaft to a height of more than 100 feet and then terminating in a crown of magnificent plume-like leaves, while others may reach a height of only 3 to 4 feet when fully developed, and some species are permanently stemless. In some examples the stems are so long and slender that a scandent haoit is the result; these rope-like stems of the rattan palms in particular are described as wander- ing through the tops of some of the great trees of the Malayan Peninsula to a length of several hundred feet, — reported as long as 1,700 feet, but report unreliable. The foliage of the palms is of two chief kinds, the fan-veined leaves, in which the venation radiates from a common center, and the feather-veined, in which the veins run out from the sides of a long midrib, the leaf being frequently divided into long narrow segments. Of the first group, the common fan palm, Livistona chinensis, is a good example, while the date palm, Phce- nix dactylifera, and also the coconut, Cocos nucifera, are common examples of the feather -veined class. There are also minor characteristics of foliage that mark many of the genera, some having pinnate leaves with erose tips, a few having bipinnate leaves (as Car- yota wrens), others with flabellate leaves having erose segments, and many with the segments of the leaves bifid or split at the tips. The flowers of palms in general are not specially attractive either in size or coloring, many of them being greenish white or yellow, and some orange or red; but these flowers are produced in prodigious quantities by some of the species, perhaps the most prolific in this respect being the talipot palm (Corypha umbracidifera), which throws up a branching inflorescence to a height of 30 feet above the foliage, such an inflorescence having been estimated to include fully 60,000,000 flowers ! This, of course, applies only to wild specimens. The seeds of palms are also found in many sizes and various shapes, ranging from the size of a pea in some of the Thrinax to the unwieldy fruit of the double coco- 2438 PALM PALM nut, Lodoicea maldivica, which will sometimes weigh forty pounds each and require several years to reach maturity. As a rule, the members of any single genus of palms are found in one hemisphere, either the eastern or western as the case may be, probably the greater num- 2727. Flowers and fruits of Accelorhaphe Wrightii. — a, part of flowering branchlet; b, unopened flower; c, flower full open; d, fruit; e, kernel of fruit; /, seed as shown on the raphal side; g, lengthwise section through embryo. her of species being of Asiatic and American origin, rather than African. An apparent exception is found to this system of hemispheric distribution in the case of the coconut, this plant being so very widely distrib- uted throughout the tropical world that ita original habitat is still in doubt. On the other hand, some spe- cies are known to be very local in their natural state, in proof of which the howeas may be cited; this genus has been found only within the circumscribed area of Lord Howe's Island, which, from a comparative point of view, may be termed merely a fragment of land (probably of volcanic origin), a mere dot on the broad bosom of the South Pacific. Few palms are found within the limits of the United States as natives, the most common being the well- known palmetto, Sabal Palmetto, a member of the fan- leaved section, to which many of the American palms belong. But while the species of palms native in the United States are limited in numbers, yet there is at least one unique species in the group in the form of Pseudophoenix Sargentii, a monotypic palm, that is known to exist in a wild state only on certain of the Florida Keys, and in limited numbers even there, and recently in Cuba and Santo Domingo. Europe is even less favored as to native palms, there being but one species known there in that condition, Charmerops humilis, also a fan-leaved species and com- paratively hardy, being capable of enduring moderate frosts. The palm tree of the Bible is doubtless the date palm, Phoenix dactylifera, which is found in large numbers throughout Syria to this day; and in fact the small grove of dates within easy reach of the Syrian house- holder forms one of his most valuable assets, for it provides food not only for his family, but frequently for his horses or camels also. The act of producing- flowers does not necessarily ter- minate the life of a palm, though in some instances such an effect may be produced by this cause; but a singular habit has been noted in regard to the flowering of the fish-tail palm, Caryota urens, which when it reaches maturity begins to throw out a flower-spike from the top of the stem, this being followed by succes- sive spikes of flowers, and ultimate bunches of seeds from the top of the plant downward, the flower-spikes appearing at the joints of the stem, and when this pro- cess of flowering has proceeded down to the ground, or until the vitality of the plant has been exhausted, death ensues. There are also a number of species of palms that develop a soboliferous habit, throwing up a number of shoots from the base of the plant, Rhapis flabellifor- mis, sometimes known as the ground rattan, being a good example of this class, among which the widely grown and elegant Chrysalidocarpus lutescens is also found, together with the geonomas, some of the phrenix and various other genera. Many of the palms are unisexual, but there are also many others in which both male and female flowers are produced on the same spadix, in some examples the males being grouped together near the ends of the branches of the inflores- cence and the females nearer to the main stem, while in others a female is placed between two males, thus arranging the flowers in threes. Cross-pollination of palms by artificial means has probably been seldom practised, there being few culti- vated collections in which the opportunity for such an operation has presented itself; but it seems highly prob- able that such cross-fertilization has been accidentally effected among wild plants, for in large lots of seed- lings intermediate forms are frequently seen, this peculiarity having been noted among howea seedlings, where forms intermediate between H. Belmoreana and H. Forsteriana are found, and sometimes seedlings that seem to combine the characteristics of H. Belmo- reana and those of its near relative Hedyscepe Canter- buryana. Similar variations from a given type have also been noted among the phoenix, several so-called species being most likely merely varieties. Many palms are armed with stout thorns or prickles, not only the stems but also the leaves and even the fruits in some species being thus guarded, these prickles being usually very hard and tough. In some cases, notably Acanthorhiza aculeata, the prickles around the stem are often branched, and are decidedly unpleas- ant to come in contact with. In the case of Desmoncus, this being the western representative of the rattan palms, the tip of the midrib of the leaf is continued in the form of a hooked spine, and helps to support the plant in its scandent career. The sharp spines of cer- tain palms are used for poisoned arrows by some of the South American tribes, these arrows being pro- jected through a blow-pipe formed from a section of the hollow stem of another palm. Among the species of Phoenix, it is -often found that several of the leaflets nearest to the base of the leaf are developed as spines, these thorny leaflets becoming stiff and hard, and capa- ble of making a very sore wound. The very great economical value of many of the palms can only be touched upon within the limits of the pres- ent article, the uses to which not only the fruits but also the stems and leaves are put by the natives of many tropi- cal countries being enough of themselves to fill volumes. One prominent example of this great utility is the Palmyra palm, of which a Hindoo poet enumerated over 800 differ- ent uses. Other notable ex- amples include 2728. Flowers and fruit of Coccothrinax Miraguano. — a, part of flowering branchlet; b, flower from which ovary has been removed, inner view; c, flower viewed, from behind; d, seed, with hilum in center; e, seed, upper surface; /, seed in transverse section; g, lengthwise section of seed, through embryo. PALM PALM 2439 the coconut palm, the fruits of which are imported by hundreds of tons even- year, and in addition to provid- ing a valuable food, either fresh or in a desiccated con- dition, also produce that very valuable fiber from which cordage, matting and a great variety of goods are manufactured; also the Phoenix family, which pro- duces the dates of commerce in apparently endless supply, and the date sugar of Bengal, this being con- tributed by Phcenix sykestris, while the stems of date palms are often used in house-building in the East. Another very valuable palm product is found in palm oil. this being largely derived from the fruits of Elans ffuineensis, the oil being expressed from the ripe fruits in much the same manner that olive oil is manufac- tured. The rattan of commerce is chiefly composed of the flexible stems of various calami, the plentiful sup- ply of this material being sufficiently attested by the great variety of articles manufactured therefrom. Various palms have been mentioned under the name of ''wine palm," but it seems likely that some species of Raphia are most used for liquors, some portions of these palms giving a large amount of sap when tapped, and as the juice is rich in sugar, the sap soon ferments and may become strongly alcoholic. The best sago is produced from the pith of Metroxy- lon or Sagus, the trees being cut down and split into seg- ments for the removal of the pith, the latter being then prepared in a rough granulated form for export. Sago is also procured from Caryota and some other genera, but the product is not equal to that of Metroxy- lon. The so - called whale - bone brooms frequently used in stables and for street- cleaning are mostly made from Piassaba ( or Piagaba ) fiber, this being gathered from around the base of plants of attaleas, mostly A. funifera. The attaleas also produce large seeds or nuts, those of A. funifera being known as coquilla-nuts, and very largely used for ornamental purposes, being very hard and capa- ble of receiving a fine polish. Many small articles are manufactured from vegetable ivory, this being secured from the nuts of Phytelephas macrocarpa, a singular palm from South America, bearing a large fruit in which are contained from six to nine of the ivory-nuts, the plant itself having a short and sometimes creeping stem from which proceeds a noble head of pinnate fronds that are frequently 15 to 20 feet in length. The seeds of Areca Catechu, after preparation with lime and the leaves of the pepper-plant, become the betel-nut of the East Indies, so much used by the natives of that portion of the world as a mild stimulant. The cabbage palm of the West Indies is Oreodoxa deracea, the smooth and straight stems of which are frequently 80 to 100 feet high, and the removal of the "cabbage," so-called, means the destruction of such a tree, for the portion eaten is composed of the central bud in which the young leaves are compactly gathered together. Botanical structure. As the trunk of the palm rises, the leaves underneath the crown die and fall. Usually the old petioles, or 155 their bases, remain for some time, forming a shaggy capital to the column; this is well marked in the large or cabbage palmetto of the South. The palms are mostly trees, and sometimes rise to the height of nearly 200 feet, but some are climbing and others are low shrubs. Some palms are only a foot or two tall at 2729. Flowers and fruit of Goper- nicia Curtissii. — a, summit of flower- ing branch; b, single flower; c, flower in longitudinal section; d, fruit; e, seed, from the raphal side; /, seed, side view; g, seed in longi- tudinal section through embryo. / a 2730. Flowers and fruit of Hemithrinaz compacts. — a, part of flowering branchlet; b, c, flowers in an thesis; d, e, anthers, from dorsal side; /, anther from inner side; g, flower with anthers removed; h, lengthwise section of ovary; f, fruit; fc, seed; /.length- wise section of seed, showing embryo. maturity, as Malortiea. In some species the stems are prickly. Usually they make very straight comely boles, but a few species produce branches above. The inflorescence of palms usually arises underneath or in the crown, from the axils of the leaves. The clus- ters are really spadices, although often branched, and are covered in the bud by a dry spathe composed of one or several leaves or parts. The remains of these spathes are well shown in Fig. 2538 (page 2298). In the upper cluster on the left, the spathe is arching over the fruits. The blossoms are relatively small, and usually dull colored and not showy, but in some species the spadix is scarlet or yellow and often very gracefully branched. The spathes are sometimes immense woody coverings, like troughs or bowls. The flowers of palms are not greatly differentiated or specialized. The essential structure may be understood by comparing the details in Figs. 2725 to 2731, which are adapted from Beccari's account of palms indigenous to Cuba in Pomona College Journal of Economic Botany, February, 1913. Of most palms, the flowers are small or minute, quite regu- lar, and they may be either hermaph- rodite, monoecious, or dioecious. Often the whole flower is nearly woody, even the perianth-parts being hard and scarcely resembling petals. In most species there are two series of peri- anth - parts : three distinct imbricated sepals inclosing three distinct or partially united petals. Manymodi- ~f . 2731. Flowers of Copermcia glabres- fications of this eem>_B( s^^ of flo^ering branch; arrangement are b top ^ew of open flower; c, flower, known, however, as sjde view; d, flower in lengthwise in the case of cer- section. 2440 PALM PALM tain species of Thrinax where the perianth is reduced and deformed, and of Nenga where the sepals are longer than the petals. There are nearly always six stamens, both in the pistillate and staminate flowers, and except in certain species of Oreodoxa (Roystonea) they are always included. They are often in two series, one opposite the sepals, the other opposite the petals, always free, and nearly always inserted on the short perianth-tube. The anthers are linear, oblong or arrow- shaped, two-celled, the pollen usually ellipsoid or nearly round, very rarely minutely spiny. The ovary is free, ovoid or oblong or globose, and often found in a rudi- mentary form even in staminate flowers, but some- times lacking in the latter. There are mostly three cells, but four and even up to seven cells are known in rare cases. The ovule in each cell is solitary and almost always erect. Great variety characterizes palm fruits. Some are dry and hard almost stone-like fruits, others are fleshy and even drupe-like. In many species there is a hard fibrous coating to the fruit, as in the case of the coco- 2732. A palm-house. nut. In other species the seed is free, but often it ad- heres to the inner coat of the fruit; it nearly always contains a copious albumen. The individual flowers and fruits of palms are borne on a large inflorescence (spadix) which may or may not be inclosed in a sheath-like structure (spathe). The form and branching of this spadix varies much. One character that seems to hold is that of the branching, in one group of genera the spadix being either simple or imperfectly branched, if compound then paniculate, such as is found in Geonoma, Euterpe, and allied genera; and in others the spadix is always pinnately branched, the ultimate branches distichous if greater ramification is present. Horticultural importance, and culture. Palms have been favorite greenhouse subjects from the period of the first development of the glass plant- house. The stereotyped form of conservatory is a broad or nearly square structure, with narrow benches around the sides over the heating-pipes and a palm-bed in the center. In these conservatories a variety of palms will succeed, requiring neither a very high tem- perature nor much direct sunlight. (Fig. 2732.) In fact, palms usually succeed best under shaded roofs. The palms are most satisfactory in their young state, before the trunks become very prominent, and before the crowns reach the glass. The larger number in houses have pinnate or pinnatisect leaves, and these species are usually the more graceful in habit, although the fan palms are also much prized. Small palms are now in great demand for room and table decoration, and a few species are grown in enormous quantities for this trade. They are sold when small. They usually perish before they are large enough to be cumbersome. Among the most popular of these palms are Chrysalidocarpus lutescens, Howea Belmoreana and H. Forsteriana, Cocos Weddelliana, Livistona chinensis, and possibly one or two species of Phoenix. Some palms endure considerable frost without injury. Of such are the sabals and the palmettoes of the south- ern states. The saw palmetto (Serenoa serrulata) and the blue palmetto (Rhapidophyllum Hystrix) occur as far north as South Carolina. In Asia, Nannorhops occurs naturally as far north as 34° and grows in the mountains of Afghanistan where snow falls, and in Europe. Chamaerops (the only palm indigenous to Europe) reaches 44°. The genera chiefly known to horticulturists are the following : TRIBE ARECE^E. Lvs. pinnatisect, the Ifts. free or joined so as to form a plaited limb, the sides in vernation reduplicate: fls. monoecious or dioecious: seeds umbilicate, with ventral raphe and dorsal embryo. Areca, Pinanga, Kentia, Hydriastele, Kentiopsis, Hedyscepe, Nenga, Archontophcenix, Rhopalostylis, Dictyosperma, Ptychpsperma, Cyrtostachys, Drymo- phlceus, Cyphophcenix, Clinostigma, Cyphosperma, Euterpe, Acanthophoenix, Oreodoxa, Acrista, Bacularia, Linospadix, Howea, Ceroxylon, Verschaffeltia, Dypsis, Chamsedorea, Hyophorbe, Rpscheria, Geonoma, Calyp- trogyne, Bentinckia, Wallichia, Didymosperma, Arenga, Caryota, Phytelephas, Pseudophcenix, (Enocarpus. TRIBE PHOENICE.E. Lvs. pinnatisect, segms. acuminate and ivith induplicate sides in vernation: spadices interfoliar, the spathe solitary: fls. dioecious: carpels 3, only 1 maturing, the stigma terminal; seed strongly ventrally sulcate, the embryo usually dorsal. Phoenix. TRIBE CORYPHEE. Lvs. fan-shaped, wedge-shaped or orbicular, plaited, more or less cut, the lobes with induplicate sides: spadices interfoliar, the spathes many: fls. usually perfect; ovary entire or 3-lobed or sometimes the 1-3 carpels distinct, the ovule erect; pericarp usually smooth; seeds with ventral raphe and small hilum. Corypha, Sabal, Washingtonia, Chamaerops, Rha- pidophyllum, Acanthorhiza, Brahea, Erythea, Pritch- ardia, Licuala, Livistona, Trachycarpus, Rhapis, Thrinax, Nannorhops, Serenoa, Copernicia, Teys- mannia, Trithrinax, Coccothrinax. TRIBE LEPIDOCARYE^E. Lvs. pinnatisect or fan-shaped, the segms. with reduplicate sides in vernation: spadices terminal or axillary, the spathes numerous: fls. polygamo-monoscious; ovary entire, more or less 3-loculed: fr. clothed with reflexed, shining, imbri- cate, oppressed scales; seed with dorsal raphe and ventral embryo. Calamus, Ceratolobus, Raphia. TRIBE BORASSE.E. Lvs. orbicular, the segms. fan- shaped and the sides induplicate: spadices inter- foliar, the spathes many and sheathing: fls. dioecious, the male minute and sunk in cavities on the spadix, the female very large, ovary entire, 3-loculed, the ovule ascending: fr. various. Borassus, Lodoicea, Latania, Hyphsene. PALM PALM 2441 2733. Germination of Chrysalidocar- pus lutescens. TRIBE COCOIXE.E. Lis. pinnatiscct, the Ifts. with reduplicate sides: spadices interfoliar, unisexual or androgynous, the spathes 2 or more: inferior fls. often in S's, the middle one female; ovary 1-7-loculed: fr. large, drupe-like, 1-7-loculed, the stigma terminal, the endocarp or sheU hard and woody and provided irith 3-7 pores. Bactris. Astrocaryum, Acrocomia, Martinezia, Ekeis, Diplothemium, Cocos, Maximiliana, Scheelea, Attalea, Jubaea, Desmoncus. There is very little accessible mon- ographic literature on the palms. Mar- tius' "Historia Xaturalis Palmarum," Munich, three volumes, 1823 to 1850, is a standard work. Kerchove de Denter- ghem's "Les Pahniers," Paris, 1878, is an important work. A popular running account of palms and the various kinds, by William Watson, will be found in the following places in Gardeners' Chronicle: (volume 22), pages 426, 522, 595, 728 74S: 1885 (volume 23), pages 338, 410, 439; 1885 (volume 24), pages 362, 394, 586, 748; 1886 (volume 25), pages 75, 139, 557; 1886 (volume 26) pages 491, 652; 1887 (volume 2, series 3) pages 156, 304; 1891 (volume 9), pages 234, 298, 671; 1893 (volume 13), pages 260. 332. Palm-culture, for decorative purposes in the United States, has made its greatest progress within the past twenty -five years, and now seems to be a well-established business, with the prospect of a steady increase as the adaptability of these plants becomes better understood. A great area of glass is now in use for palm-culture alone, the middle states being the cen- ter of this industry, though large num- bers are also grown in a few southern states; and owing to a favorable cli- mate and gradually improving business methods, it seems probable that Ameri- can growers will soon be able to com- pete with their more experienced brethren of Europe in this class of plants. The species most used in commercial horticulture in the United States are contained in a very short list, the greater quantity being confined to five species, namely, Livistona chinensis, Hoicea Belmoreana, Howea Forsteriana, Chrysalidocarpus lutescens, and Cocos Weddettiana, while less quantities of Caryota urens, several species of Phoenix, P. canariensis being very largely planted outdoors in the South and on portions of the Pacific coast, Seaforthia ekgans and some others of the Ptycho- spenna group, and some few livistonas cover the extent of the catalogue for many growers. Of these, the seeds are imported in most cases, and on the quality of these seeds the success of the grower de- pends, so far as getting up a stock is concerned. Most of these species germi- nate readily in a warm greenhouse, providing the seeds are fresh, the slow- est of the common commercial palms being the howeas. In small quantities these seeds are usually sown in about 6-inch pots, the pots being well drained 2734. Germina- tion of Livistona. and nearly filled with light soil, then the seeds sown thickly and covered with % inch of soil, watered thoroughly and placed where they may receive the benefit of some bottom heat ; and at no time should they be allowed to become very dry. The period required for germination varies greatly with different species, Livistona chinensis germinating in two or three weeks if fresh, and being ready for potting in about two months, while seeds of some of the attaleas have been known to remain in the earth for fully three years before starting. The seedlings of many species are very much alike, the seed-leaf in many instances being a long narrow simple leaflet, this description often applying equally to the seedlings of both fan-leaved and pinnate-leaved species; and from this fact it is somewhat difficult to recognize a species while in the juvenile form. Figs. 2733-2736 show stages in the germination of common palms. Special cultural notes for particular species of palms will be found throughout the Cyclopedia, but at this time a few general remarks regarding treatment of palms as a whole may be admissible. It has already been noted that palms in general are tropical in nature, and while there are a number of species that are found at considerable elevations, where the nights are decidedly cool, yet in a young state the same species may make more progress in a night temperature of 60° F.; and with this in view, a minimum tempera- ture during the winter of 56° to 60° is safest for young and growing palms, while an advance of 15° to 20° during the day will not hurt them. An abundance of water is required, for many palms grow on the banks of rivers or in swampy ground; and even those found on high and rocky ground send their roots down to such a depth as to find a liberal water- supply. Rotted sod is the basis for the best soil for palms, and a fair proportion of stable manure is a safe fertilizer, such a soil being mixed with various propor- tions of peat or sand, to make it lighter and more open for some delicate species. Insects are frequently troublesome if allowed to gain headway, various scale insects doing the greatest damage, while red-spiders and thrips may become established unless forcible syringing is persisted in. The most successful practice requires close observation on the part of the grower, and the prompt removal of all insects. Many other pests are also known and in the report of the Missouri Botanical Garden for 1898, Trelease gives an account of many of these. Busch in a report on investigation of diseases of the coconut palm in United States Department of Agriculture Bulletin of Entomology II. 38, 1902, gives an account of a disease that threatened the coconut industry in Trop. America. Summer care of palms. Some shading throughout the summer is best, the foliage grown under glass being more tender than that 2735. Germination of Cocos Weddelliana. 2442 PALM PALM naturally produced outdoors. Repotting should be done during the spring and summer months, preferably, there being comparatively little root-action on the part of most palms between November 1 and March 1. Give only moderate-sized shifts, that is, use pots only 1 or 2 inches larger, and always ram the soil firmly. Florists especially must understand the summer treatment of decorative palms. The usual weather of midsummer, which includes not only high temperature, but also fairly high humidity, is a help for the grower of palms, for such conditions do much to promote the growth of the stock, provided that watering, syringing, and proper atten- tion to ventilation be given. A little ventilation at night, in addition to fairly liberal airing during the day, tends to pre- vent an over- accumulation of moisture on the foliage, and also has an influence toward the pre- vention of fungoid growths on or about the plants, for in houses so continually" warm and moist as is the average palm-house, there is much encouragement for fungus on the woodwork of the benches and about the plants. . A sprinkling of slaked lime under the benches is also a help to the atmosphere and discourages snails to some extent, the latter pest being sometimes very troublesome, especially on the young growths of kentias. Two of the worst periods for the reproduc- tion of scale insects are in the months of May and September, and if these pests can be kept down at those periods, there will be much less trouble in the remainder of the year. Those who grow palms in quantity have to depend upon dips and spraying with vari- ous insecticides, from the fact that it is practically impossible to give the time to each plant that may be afforded by those who carry only a few dozens of palms in stock, but in either case most of the work of this charac- ter is likely to be done hi the summer months, when there may be a little more time devoted to such work than can be spared in the busier seasons of spring and fall. This fact probably accounts for some of the insect tribulations to which the grower is exposed, as he is seldom able to find time to fight insects at the time of the spring rush, and by this means new colonies are distributed before the danger is appreciated. Kentias and cocos are undoubtedly the palms for the million at this stage of the florists' art in America, and the necessities of these admirable plants are well understood. Seaforthias and ptychospermas were rather more common to the trade fifteen to twenty years ago than they are now, and were used for decora- tive work before the kentias absorbed so much atten- tion. Instead of using seaforthias for decorating, per- sons are adding them to the outdoor garden in those parts of the South where palms add so greatly to the permanent effect in the outdoor planting. 2736. Germination of Howea Belmoreana. The common Phoenix canariensis and other strong- growing members of that subfamily are also frequently in demand for outdoor use, while the dwarf date, Phoenix Roebelenii, continues to be in demand for house decoration, under which condition it is eminently satis- factory; it has found further usefulness even in small sizes, in being used to some extent for the centers of fern-pans. Livistona rotundifolia is one of the most charming of dwarf palms, but is easily spoiled by insects, requiring constant vigilance on that account, while a comparatively high temperature and moist atmosphere are also essential to its welfare. w jj TAPLIN. L.'H.'B. N. TAYLOR.| Palms in California. Palms grown in the open in California gardens do not exceed about twenty-six genera, and numbering about eighty species. In this account may be found the species growing in the gardens of Los Angeles and vicinity, and throughout southern Cali- •/ fornia in limited numbers from San Diego to Santa Barbara. Occasional plants of species not mentioned are found in some old gardens, but are not so plentiful as to be considered in a general list of the hardy palms. A complete list of palms grown somewhere in southern California is given by Franceschi as follows : Archonto- phcenix, 2 species; Hedyscepe, 1; Rhopalostylis, 2; Clinostigma, 1; Bacularia, 1; Howea, 2; Chamsedorea, 10; Gaussia, 1; Phcenix, 10; Sabal, 10; Washingtonia, 3; Chamserops, 1; Rhapidophyllum, 1; Serenoa, 2; Brahea, 3; Erythea, 4; Pritchardia, 2; Livistona, 6; Trachycarpus, 2; Rhapis, 2; Thrinax, 2; Trithrinax, 2; Copernicia, 1; Acrocomia, 1; Cocos, 10; Jubsea, 1. In enumerating the prevailing garden palms, they are placed as to their importance, or rather as to their numerical strength in California. The native fan-palms, the washingtonias, natives of San Bernardino and San Diego counties, have been most extensively planted, and may be found everywhere, serving, in some instances, a variety of purposes. (Fig. 2737.) In grow- ing this palm, water is of the first importance. When planted along a street, those adjoining vacant lots often remain nearly at a standstill, except in case of an unusually wet winter, while those along the cultivated lots or lawns grow faster than any other palm. When one in its native habitat blows over by the force of the desert winds, the hole left by the roots and stump invariably fills with water. Washingtonias are hardy 600 miles north of Los Angeles. It may be well to state that hardiness in palms is principally a question of size, the larger ones passing through the most severe winter unharmed, while the small ones may perish. So, also, some palms supposed to be very tender need protec- tion from sun more than from frost. This is particu- larly the case with the so-called kentias and rhapis. A certain howea (or Kentia Forsteriana) is protected only by a large overhanging branch of a sycamore, which is of course leafless in cold weather, yet it has reached a height of 12 feet, with a diameter at base of 12 inches, and it has never been injured by frost, yet water hydrants 10 feet away have been frozen so hard as to burst them. In Los Angeles is a kentia 15 feet high, growing on the north side of a house, protected from sun alone, being 20 feet from the building, where for several winters the ground nearby has frozen to the depth of 1 inch. This is in the bottom-lands, the coldest part of the city. Phoenix dactylifera, although not so ornamental as others of the genus, was extensively planted in early PALM PALM 2443 days and is one of the hardiest of palms (Fig. 2738). The most popular palm for the masses, who look for grace and beauty combined with cheapness, is Phoenix canariensiz. More of these are planted at present than of any other three species. In Los Angeles and 2737. A sentinel palm. — Washingtonia filif era, San Jacinto Mountains, California. vicinity they may be counted by tens of thousands. Like these two for hardiness is P. redinata; and all may be seen growing north of San Francisco some 200 miles. All the genus is hardy in southern California. Trachy- carpus excelsus and Chamaerops humilis, the latter vary- ing greatly in appearance, will grow as far north as any palms and are popular everywhere. The former in thirty years will grow to the height of 25 feet, while the latter will make 8 to 10 feet of trunk in the same time. Lii*istona australis and L. chinensis are both popular, though not hardy outside the southern part of the state, and the latter must be shaded from noonday sun. Erythea armata and E. edulis (often known as braheas) grow around San Francisco Bay luxuriantly. The dwarf sections of Cocos, represented chiefly by the one known in the trade as Cocos australis, is hardy even farther north than the erytheas, and are by far the most ornamental palms to be found in that section. Other cocos in southern California are C. flexuosa, C. plumosa, C.-coronata, C. Romanzoffiana, and many others. Any cocos will grow here in protected places except C. Wed- deUiana. Palms of the Cocos flexuosa-plumosa-Roman- zoffia.no, type are the most graceful grown, and at present very extensively planted in the southern citrous belt, sometimes for street or sidewalk trees. It is also one of the fastest growers, and will reach 20 feet in fifteen years, with ordinary care. Archontophcenix Alex- andras and A. Cunninghamii, the most elegant of our palms after the Cocos plumosa type, are not quite so hardy but will thrive from Santa Barbara southward, in warm locations. The same exposures, with shade dur- ing the hottest part of the day, will do for Hedyscepe Canterbury ana and Howea Forsteriana and H. Bel- moreana; also Rhopalostylis Baueri and R. sapida. The four species of sabals seem to thrive and seed well in this section, though S. Palmetto and S. Blackburnianum grow much faster than the others. RhapidophyUum Hystrix is perfectly hardy, but on account of its dwarf habit is not so extensively planted as its merits deserve. Rhapis flabeUiformis and R. humilis need protection from sun alone, though there is a rhapis growing for ten years without protection from either sun or frost, and in the coldest section of Los Angeles, but its color is not all that could be desired. Chamaedoreas are planted only where they can be protected from both frost and sun, though they thrive better under such circum- stances than they do under glass. In such situations they are just the plant for the purpose, as they do not grow away from the protecting tree as do sun- and light- loving palms, but remain erect. Brahea dulcis may occasionally be seen, but grows too slowly to be popu- lar. One of the grandest and hardiest palms, one that deserves for many reasons to be more extensively planted, is Jubaea spectabilis. There are a few speci- mens 20 feet in height with a bole 4 feet in diameter. List of California palms. (Wright.) The following list of palms for southern California has been compiled from many years of observation by J. Harrison Wright. While not entirely complete as regards the newest and untried introductions, it covers all the hardier species and it is made with special reference to the effects of the severe frosts of January, 1913. I. HARDY PALMS. Withstand a minimum temperature of 18° to 20° F. with little or no injury. Chamserops humilis (in a dozen varieties). Cocoe Alphonsii. Cocoe Bonnetii. Cocoe campestris. Cocoe erioepatha. Cocoe flexuosa (of Hort.). Cocoe Gaertneri. Cocos Yatay. Erythea armata. Erythea edulis. Jubzea spectabilis. Phoenix canariensis. Phoenix dactylifera. Phoenix reclinata. Phoenix sylvestris. Sabal Adanaonii. Sabal Blackburniana. Sabal mexicana. Sabal Palmetto. Sabal princeps. Serenoa serrulata. Trachycarpus excelsa. Trachycarpus Martiana. Washingtonia gracilis. Washingtonia robusta. Washingtonia Sonorae. 2738. Date palms at Old Town, San Diego. 2444 PALM PALM The following require protection from sun in the interior valleys: Livistona australis. Livistona chinensis. Phoenix Rcebelenii. Rhapidophyllum Hystrix. Rhapis flabelliformis. Rhapis humilis. The above are rather generally found and to them may be added the following, equally hardy but not yet in general cultivation: Brahea calcarea. Brahea Pimo. Cocos Arechavaletana. Cocos australis (true). Cocos Datil. Above are tall-growing Cocos of the plumosa type but hardy. Cocos odorata. Nannorhops Ritchiana. Cocos pulposa. Trachycarpus cicspitpsa. Erythea Brandegei. Trithrinax braziliensis. Erythea elegans. Trithrinax campestris. All the above can be grown wherever oranges are planted, and in addition the following are at home on the hill section of Los Angeles, in the frost-free foot- hills and sheltered coastal valleys like Santa Barbara and the Montecito. II. TENDER PALMS. Chamadorea desmoncoides. Chamaedorea elegans. Cocos botryophora. Cocos plumosa. Cocos Marise-Reginse. Cocos Romanzoffiana. Howea Belmoreana. Howea Forsteriana. Livistona Jenkinsoniana. The following have been are not thoroughly tested: Ceroxylon andicolum. Copernicia australis. Juania australis. Livistona Marise. Phoenix rupicola. Pritchardia Gaudichaudii. Pritchardia pacifica. Ptychosperma Alexandra;. Ptychosperma Cunninghami- ana (Seaforthia). Rhopalostylis Baueri. Rhopalostylis sapida. recently introduced, but Livistona decipiens. Sabal Uresana. Sabal Exul. [Juania australis, Drude, representing a monotypic genus in the Island Juan Fernandez (and for the first word of which it is named); is an unarmed palm with Einnatisect terminal Ivs. allied to Ceroxylon: If.-segms. >ng and narrow, acuminate, whitish beneath, thickened on the margins: fr. globular, size of a cherry.] ERNEST BRAUNTON. Hardy palms in Florida. A large proportion of the various species of palms tried by the writer in Florida have succeeded from moderately to exceedingly well. Close to 200 species belonging to some 60 genera have been in cultivation and of these more than 150 are surviving. The state itself is rich in palms for a region lying wholly outside the tropics, there being not less than fifteen native and one natural- ized species, the latter the common coconut, found within its borders. A few of these, such as Sabal Palmetto, Serenoa serrulata and Rhapidophyllum among native forms, and one or two species of Trachycarpus, one or two of the dates, Jubsea spectabilis and Washing- tonia should be fairly hardy, especially along the coastal region, throughout most of the northern part of the state. Most of the palms which do well in this state suc- ceed on ordinary pine land, but their growth would be improved if a liberal amount of muck or leaf-mold was incorporated with the soil, and a heavy mulch is always beneficial. Of course in poor soils a good fertilizer is necessary and it is an excellent plan to apply one rich in potash in the fall in order to harden up the growth for winter. Nearly all the palms must be propagated from seed; only a few are cespitose, such as chrysalidocarpus, rhapis, most of the phcenix and chamsedoreas, and these can often be propagated from suckers. When these are thrown out above the ground it is best to make an incision at their bases and set a flower-pot underneath, mounding up with earth around the sucker, when it will generally throw out roots into the pot, after which it may be severed and the whole removed. The entire state is subject to "northers" during which the wind blows from the northwest, and cold weather and frost may occur in any part of the state. A large part of the palms which can be [grown in Florida are tropical and if their seeds when in the ground are subjected to such a degree of cold they are almost sure to perish. If one is propagating any considerable number of palms, it will pay to have a frame covered with a sash or sashes. This can be sunk in the ground if necessary; the seeds should be planted in good soil, and during cold nights the whole may be heavily covered with fertilizer sacks. It should have a southern exposure and be well protected from the wind. In the southern part of the state such a pit, if covered early and thoroughly on cold nights, will generally answer all purposes, but if one could have a small glass house with 2739. A digitate-leaved palm, one of the best palms for small con- servatories— Rhapis flabelliformis. a bench along one side it would be better. The space in front and below it could be closed up and under the shelf a small kerosene stove or lamp could be kept going during cold nights. This would furnish bottom heat for the seeds planted on the bench and thus insure their germination. Fairly good-sized palms are best for planting in the open ground, say from 4- or 5-inch pots. Water well and mulch, then shelter by setting palmetto leaves around the plant so as to shade it. In case of danger of frost, mound up around the stem to above the growing point with dry soil and if the leaves are frozen the plant will not be seriously injured. The following notes are drawn from experience in the cultivation of these palms in central and southern Florida. Acodorraphe Wrightii grows in marl land on the southern shore of the mainland of Florida. It forms very dense, attractive clumps 30 feet or more across. Acrocomia. Rapid growers, and A. Totai is hardy in the southern half of Florida. It will not grow in dry or poor soils, but thrives in rich moist lands. Like most palms, this species is very responsive to an application of commercial fertilizer — from a pound to ten pounds according to the size of the plant. A. media, from Porto Rico, is an exceptionally vigorous grower. Archontophaenix. The two species, A. Cunninghamii and A. Alexandrx, which are such favorites in the North, are among the best palms in Florida, and will, without doubt, becomes favorites in the lower third of the state. They succeed well in shade or sun- shine, on pine or hammock land, and are fairly rapid growers, the former being somewhat the stronger plant. PALM PALM 2445 Areca glandiformis is a superb, rapid-growing palm which grows well in pine land; A. triandra is an elegant species, which should probably be grown in the shade, and the same may be said of A. Alictx. All are tropical. Arenga saccharifera is a noble palm and does well in pine land. AttaUa. Prefers rich soil and if well grown makes magnificent specimens. A. Cohune succeeds well in southern Florida, and also A. gomphococca. Badris. None of the species thrives in southern Florida. Caryota. Several species are cultivated in lower Florida. Some- times the specimens do well; at other times they fail. When in bloom they are among the most striking of palms. The ends of the leaflets are subject to a blight which decidedly injures the growth of many specimens. Chamsdorea. Lovely, often cespitose palms with reed-like stems. They are probably all tender, and do well in southern Florida in sheltered, more or less shaded places. Chanuerops. All of these do well in southern Florida and would doubtless prove hardy throughout a large part of the state. They are slow growers, especially until they attain to considerable size. C. humilis thrives best on high dry soils. The flowers, resembling a flat yellow fringe from a distance, appear in March, and exhale a very strong, aromatic perfume. All produce numerous suckers which should not be removed. Planted in small groups 10 to 15 feet apart, they soon form very beautiful specimens which look best in the foreground of magnolias or other taller palms. Each plant should receive a mulch of stable manure in M.arch or April, and some good commercial fertilizers during the rainy season. Chrysalidocarpus lutescens is a well-known palm in the North, and in southern Florida it forms large clumps 20 or 25 feet high. Coccothrinax jucunda and C. Garberi are elegant, low-growing palms from the extreme southern part of Florida and are as easily grown as the species of Thrinax. Cocos. All species of Cocos do well in southern Florida except C. insignis and C. Weddeiliana. The common coconut, C. nudfera, save that it sometimes is injured by frost, does as well as in many parts of the tropics and it is grown more than all other palms put together. It ripens nuts and is becoming naturalized in Dade and Monroe counties. C. plumosa and the species of its section are beau- tiful, rapid growers and all the australis section succeed admirably. The various species are sometimes attacked by what is apparently a fungous disease appearing as brown streaks in the young leaves. The only remedy is to pull the leaves apart and cut out the injured young leaf back as near the growing bud as possible. This may have to be repeated once or twice. This same disease attacks the royal palms, which may be treated in the same way. All the species do well on high pine land, if well fertilized and watered during long dry spells. The tall-growing, slender-stemmed species like C. plumosa, C. flexuosa, C. Romanzoffiana and C. coronata are hardy as far north as central Florida. The species and varieties of the australis group — C. australis, C. eriospatha, C. Datil, C. Gaertneri, C. Yatay — are better adapted to high pine land than most palms. They soon form beautiful specimens, flower regularly when only a few years old, and bear large bunches of edible fruit, sometimes as large as a big cherry or small plum. The fertilizers to be used for these palms should be equally rich in ammonia, phosphoric acid and potash. This should be applied in the months of December, January, and February. All the old dry leaves, spathes and fruit-stems should be removed at the end of September. Copernieia. A fine group of fan-leaved palms which is abun- dantly developed in Cuba. Corypha. None of the species seems to thrive in Florida. Dsemonorops. Tender, and easily killed during cold spells in lower Florida. Dictyosperma. Two species are grown in southern Florida, D. rubra and D. alba. Both are fine palms and when established are strong growers and soon make bold and beautiful specimens. They are hardier than some of the tropical species. .EZari's, the oil-palm of tropical Africa, is grown to some extent in lower Florida and it has produced perfect seeds. It seems to be a rank feeder and if planted in pine land should be well fertilized. Erythea edulis and E. armata should be hardy throughout the southern half of Florida. Gaussia princeps grows abundantly on limestone cliffs in the mountains of Cuba, and promises to do well also in southern Florida. Geonoma. Species of this genus are doing moderately well in southern Florida planted in a shaded situation in the edge of the hammock. Hedysctpe Cantfrburyana is doing excellently in southern Florida and should be hardy throughout the greater part of the state. Hoicea. These palms do not seem to do well in Florida, although they should be hardy over the southern half of the state. Hydriastele Wendlandiana is a handsome, rapid-growing palm which promises well when planted in partial shade in fairly good pine land. As it is a native of Queensland it is, no doubt, tender. Hyophorbe amaritaulis and H. Vergchaffeliii are strikingly orna- mental, richly colored palms which are doing fairly well in lower Florida. Both have bottle-shaped caudices. Hyph&ne Schatan has been introduced into southern Florida and does well in pine land, although very tender. It has massive leaves with spiny-edged petioles. Jubsa. The species grow very slowly. J. spectabilis should be hardy throughout Florida. Laiania. The latanias are among our noblest and most beautiful palms; L. Loddigesii is very robust and L. Commersonii, although not so strong a grower, is very fine. They will grow in salty soil and stand salt air well, but are tender. Licuala. Tropical palms from the Orient which do not do well in southern Florida. L. grandis and one or two others have suc- ceeded for a short time, but soon die. Licistona. Most of the species do well in southern Florida. L. chinensis and L. australis will probably prove hardy as far north as latitude 27°. They require rich moist soiL L. roiundi folia, L. aiiissima, L. Hoogendorpii, L. subglobosa and L. Jenkinsiana are fine tropical species. Afartinezia caryotaefolia is cultivated in southern Florida and seems to do best in a sheltered and partly shaded situation. fiipa. This grows successfully in brackish marshes in southern Florida, although often destroyed by land crabs. Oreodoxa. The species of this genus are unsurpassed for majesty and grace by anything in the vegetable kingdom. The common royal palm, O. regia, grows in the greatest abundance almost every- where throughout the island of Cuba and is universally respected and loved by the natives. It is generally a rather slender tree, rarely over 70 feet high and, as a rule, has a swelling somewhere along the stem. O. F. Cook considers that the species growing in the extreme lower end of this state is distinct and has named it Roystonea floridana. It grows to a height of 100 feet or more, the stem is not often swollen and the seeds are smaller than those of Cuban trees. Both flourish on rich or moist soil over the lower third of the state. O. Borinquena is a stouter species which will probably do well where the Cuban species will, while O. oleracea is a lofty growing species that is much tenderer. They generally do not succeed well on pine land but will do fairly well if abundantly mulched and treated with muck, especially if they are irrigated. Phoenix. All species and varieties of the date palm grow exceed- ingly well in Florida, and all the smaller kinds growing in tufts fruit abundantly, as do also the hybrids between P. dactylifera and P. syltestris. They flourish equally well on pine, hammock or swamp land, even in brackish marshes. P. dactylifera, P. canariensis and P. sylvestris are hardy in northern Florida. Hybrids between these three are numerous. The tufted kinds like P. reclinata, P. palu- dosa, P. farinifera and their varieties form magnificent specimens of medium size when well cared for. P. humilis and P. Roebelenii grow best in rich moist somewhat shaded soiL For the large-growing species like P. canariensis and P. syltestris, and for all the large- growing palmettos (sabals) it is necessary to make special prepara- tions before setting them out on high pine land. Dig a hole 6 feet deep and 6 feet wide. Old tin cans, bones, rotten oak wood should be placed at the bottom, then stable manure mixed with clay should follow. The upper 2 feet of the hole should be filled in with sur- face soil mixed with well-rotted manure. Three- or 4-foot speci- mens should be set out in such places. They will grow very fast and will form beautiful specimens within a few years. On low moist soils and in hammock woods, such preparations are not so neces- sary. But wherever planted, all palms need two good applications of fertilizer each year. A good plan is to mulch the plants in April and May with stable manure. This should be dug in around the plants in October, and a good application of commercial fertilizer rich in potash should follow immediately. Potash serves to harden the plants and makes them more resistant to cold. Phytelephas macrocarpa succeeds well in southern Florida. Pritchardia. A few species of magnificent fan-leaved palms from the South Seas, all of which are excessively tender in Florida. They can be grown in the more tropical parts of the state in sheltered places but are liable to have their leaves disfigured by frost. Pseudophamix Sargentii has been found rather abundantly on Elliott's Key, one of the northernmost of the lower chain. It is cultivated somewhat in southern Florida and when young is rather attractive but when old it has exceedingly dark foliage and is rather stiff and formal. Ptychosperma Macarthuri is an elegant tufted palm which suc- ceeds finely in southern Florida. It should have partial shade and shelter and if well fertilized it soon becomes a most attractive object. Rhapidophyllum. This beautiful little palm is a native of north- em and central Florida where it grows on low shaded ground. The low stems are covered with a very thick spongy mass of a peat-like substance. It is easily removed and thrives in any soil, even on ine land. It does not need much water or fertilizer. Rhapis. Slender, tufted, low-growing palms which are hardy in Florida and require moist soil and a shady place. R. humilis ta the most elegant species, growing in dense clumps about 7 feet high. R. flabeUiformis is more inclined to spread. Roscheria. Young plants of R. melanochtetes do well in southern Florida, in sheltered situations. Sabal. In good rich moist soil all the sabals grow well and soon form fine specimens. Such soils need no special care before planting, but good applications of fertilizers are necessary, if fine-looking and thrifty specimens are desired. All do well, however, on high dry pine hind soils if well watered and fertilized. If not well taken care of they are exceedingly slow growers. S. Blackburnianum has immense leaves, while those of the somewhat glaucous-colored S. mauritis forme are scarcely of less size. S. mexicanum resembles the native S. Palmetto. There are a number of distinct varieties, such as S. hatanensis and S. princeps. The species which do not form a trunk, like S. Adansonii, are only desirable for large palm collections. Serenoa. Common on high pine lands as well as in rich ham- mocks. It grows in dense clumps and when given an opportunity to grow makes a very ornamental plant. Sterensonia grandifolia is a magnificent palm but seems to be excessively tender in Florida. Perhaps it would succeed with pro- tection until it attained considerable size. 2446 PALM PAMPAS-GRASS Thrinax. The species of this fine genus do remarkably well in all kinds of situations and soils. They are all tropical and the beauty of the leaves is destroyed by frost. T. Wendlandiana, T. floridana, T. microcarpa and T. keyensis are natives of the extreme southern end of the state and are all fine. T. barbadensis and T. Morrisii are elegant species, the latter being dwarf. The magnificent leaves of T. altissima are liable to be injured by winds if planted in an exposed place. Trachycarpus. These palms do not seem to thrive well in Flor- ida, although a few specimens of T. excelsus in the central part of the state are doing well. Verschaffeltia also does not thrive in Florida. Wallichia caryotoides thrives in shady positions in southern Florida. Washingtonia. Three distinct species are grown in Florida. W. robusta is one of our finest palms, growing rapidly and vigorously in pine land and it is used to some extent for planting along streets and roads. W. filifera is not so handsome a tree or so rapid a grower as W. robusta but it is doing well. W. Sonorse promises well here. Everywhere in Florida where the soil is moist, the washingtonias grow to perfection. They will not thrive on high dry ground. They will occasionally require good applications of fertilizers. CHAS. T. SIMPSON. H. NEHRLING. PALMERELLA (Dr. Edward Palmer, American botanical collector, discoverer of the original species). Campanulacese. A genus of two or three species, with small blue fls. like those of a lobelia. The genus differs from Lobelia in the adnation of the stamens, as well as in the entire or closed corolla-tube, at least its upper part, but which soon splits from the base upward for a good distance, and before withering the lower part of the corolla is much disposed to separate into five claws (liberating also the lower part of the filaments); fila- ments adnate to the corolla-tube to near the throat and then monadelphous and adnate on one side or the other, or free: nectary an imperfect tubular cavity in the throat of the corolla. — Herbs of S. Calif, and Mex., very little known horticulturally. debilis, Gray. Slender glabrous branching perennial herb, 2 ft. high, very leafy : Ivs. alternate, linear-lanceo- late, entire, sessile, 2-3 in. long; floral ones gradually reduced to bracts: raceme lax, few-fid.; corolla-tube whitish, 9 lines long, lobes light blue, 2 of them smaller than the others, the larger ones 3-4 lines long. S. Calif, and Low. Calif. Var. serrata, Gray, was offered in 1881 but it is probably not in cult.: inn. and corolla-tube somewhat puberulent: Ivs. (except the upper ones) sharp-serrate, the lowest spatulate and obovate. S. Calif- L. H. B. PALMETTO: Sabal. PALMS, POPULAR NAMES OF: Alexandra P., Archontophosnix Alexandra. Assai P., Euterpe edulis. Betel-nut P., Areca Catechu. Blue P., Erythea armata. Blue Palmetto, Rhapidophyllum. Bourbon P., Latania. Broom P., Attalea funifera and Thrinax argentea. Cabbage P., Euterpe oleracea. Club P., Cordyline. Coconut P., Cocos nucifera; Double Coconut or Sea Coconut P., Lodoicea. Coquito P., Jubsea spectabilis. Corojo P., Acrocomia sclerocarpa. Curly P., Howea Belmoreana. Date P., Phoenix dactylifera. European P., Chamserops humilis. Fan P., any species with fan- shaped, rather than pinnate Ivs. Fern P., Cycas. Fish-tail P., Caryota wrens. Flat P., Howea Forsteriana. Guadeloupe P., Erythea edulis. Gru-gru P., Astro- caryum vulgare and Acrocomia sclerocarpa. Hemp P., Chamserops excelsa. Ivory-nut P., Phytelephas macro- carpa. Needle P., Rhapidophyllum. Nikau P., Rhopalostylis. Nipa P., Nipa. Norfolk Island P., Rhopalostylis Baueri. Oil P., Elseis guineensis; also Cocos butyracea, etc. Palmetto P., Sabal, Serenoa. Panama-hat P., Carludovica palmata. Para P., Euterpe edulis. Raffia P., Raphia. Royal P., Oreodoxa regia. Sago P., various species of Metroxylon and Cycas. Savanah P., Sabal mauritiseformis. Saw P., or Palmetto, Serenoa. Talipot P., Corypha umbraculifera. Thatch P., Sabal Blackburniana; Howea Forsteriana. Toddy P., Caryota wrens. Umbrella P., Hedyscepe Canterburyana. Walking-stick P., Bacularia monostachya. Wax P., Ceroxylon. Wine P. of E. Indies, Caiyota urens, Phoenix sylvestris and Borassus flabelliformis; of New Granada, Cocos butyracea. PALUMBINA (said to be from palumbes, wood- pigeon; from a supposed resemblance ol the fls.). Orchi- ddcese. A monotypic genus greatly resembling Oncid- ium, with which it was formerly united. It differs principally in having the lateral sepals entirely united, forming a single segm. resembling the dorsal sepal in shape and size, the labellum scarcely larger than the petals and resembling them in shape. Candida, Reichb. f . The only species is a small plant with narrow, compressed pseudobulbs, each with a single slender If., 6-12 in. long: fls. few, small, white, in a slender raceme; sepals, petals and labellum oblong, acute, differing but little in size and shape. Guatemala. B.M. 5546. G.C. 1865:793; 11.20:233 (as Oncidium candidum). — May be easily grown in a temperate house. Blooms in summer, the fls. lasting a long time. HEINRICH HASSELBRING. PAMBURUS (from the Singhalese name Pamburu). Rutacese, tribe Citrese. Small trees distantly related to Citrus but bearing frs. filled with gum : young branches often angled; older ones rounded, spines solitary or paired in the axils of the Ivs. : Ivs. simple, thick, gray- green: fls. 4— 5-parted (usually 4) with 8-10 stamens; pistil supported on a subcylindric disk. — Only one species is known. missionis, Swingle (Limbnia missionis, Wall, ex Wight. Ataldntia missionis, Oliver). Lvs. simple, elliptic-oblong, short-petioled, showing veins only very obscurely, wrinkling at the margins on drying: fls. in axillary racemes, shorter than the Ivs. ; filaments slender, anthers linear-oblong, disk long and slender; ovary 4-5-celled, with 2 ovules in each cell: fr. 1 in. diam., filled with a mucilaginous fluid. 111. Wight, 111. Ind. Bot. v. 3, pi. 33. Swingle, Journ. Wash. Acad. 6:336. — This tree occurs in India and Ceylon in sandy soil near the seacoast. It should be tested as a stock for Citrus. The wood is light-colored, but when variegated is used for furniture. WALTER T. SWINGLE. PAMPAS-GRASS (Cortaderia argentea, which see. Vol. II, p. 856.). A showy tall perennial subtropical grass grown for its whitish fluffy plumes of inflores- cence; native in Argentina and southern Brazil. The growing of pampas plumes for profit in Califor- nia has been undertaken for over forty years. Pampas- grass was introduced into the United States about 1848. In the northern states it is frequently planted on the lawn in summer, and upon the approach of cold weather transferred in a tub to a cellar for winter protection. In California, a hill will sometimes attain a height of 20 feet, a diameter as great, and a weight of 2,000 pounds. Such plants would be very inconvenient for our northern friends to handle in the cellar. Plants are easily produced from seed, but as the sex and variety are very uncertain, stock is usually increased by dividing the female plants, the plumes of which are much more beautiful than those of the male. The growing of pampas-grass in North America on a commercial scale dates from 1874, when the difference in sex was discovered. In 1872 the writer sowed seed which in two years gave several hundred plume-bearing plants. Even then the variations in color and fineness were very marked. In 1874, it was found that by pulling the immature plumes from the sheaths and exposing them to the hot sun, the male plumes would hang heavily like oats, while the female plumes would become fluffy, and light and airy. In November, 1874, samples of the female plumes were sent to Peter Henderson & Co., New York. Three hundred were ordered at once, and the following day instructions were received to double the order and send by express. This was the first lot of good plumes LXXXIII. An avenue of palms in southern Florida. — Oreodoxa regia. PAMPAS-GRASS PANCRATIUM 2447 ever sent east from California, and was the beginning of the present pampas industry. The writer's planta- tion was increased each year until 1889, when it com- prised about 5,000 hills. There were a number of other extensive plantations in the neighborhood of Santa Barbara. The crop of 1889 was estimated at 1,000,000 plumes. The demand has been good, but the prices have never been so high as at the beginning of the industry. The first prices were $200 for 1,000 plumes. The de- crease in price was gradual until 1886, when sales were slow at $30 for 1,000 plumes. Some of the growers did not harvest their crops that year, and destroyed their plants. In the fall of 1887 plumes were in demand at $40 the 1,000, and in 1888 they were scarce at $50 and $60 the 1,000. The following spring there was an increase in acreage. Since then the industry has had its ups and downs, and the price has ruled low for sev- eral years, the present prices being $9 to $10 for first- class,' and $5 to $6 for second size. Pampas-grass should be put on the best valley land, and set 10 by 16 feet apart. Before planting, the ground should be deeply plowed and put in first-class condition. In selecting stock, divide only female plants that pro- duce the finest white plumes. Young hills produce the best plants. From old hills the best plants are obtained around the outside, those in the center of the stool being mostly worthless unless planted hi large clumps. Some plumes will be produced the first year after plant- ing. They will not be first-class, but are worth saving. The second year, if well grown, they should produce 80 to 150 plumes to the hill. Not all plantations will yield this much. The third and fourth years there will not be much change in the yield. As a plant gets older the plumes are larger but the yield is less. After 8 to 10 years a quantity of dead matter will have accumulated, and the hills should be trimmed or burned. The appearance of the plumes is a signal for great activity among those who have large fields. The grass should be so trimmed early in September, before the plumes appear, that each hill will be easy of access. Young plants ripen their plumes two or three weeks earlier than old ones, and some varieties are earlier than others. It requires exercise of judgment to pick the plumes at the proper tune. They are generally ready when they are exposed from the husk a few inches and have a fluffy look. It is well to try a few at this stage, and if they cure well at the stem end when dry they are all right, but if they do not become fluffy at the stem end they have been picked too young. If the plume looks dark and seedy at the top when cured, it was too old when picked. Some varieties, especially those producing very long plumes, should be allowed to remain somewhat longer on the plant than those of the short-plumed varieties. By trying a few of each variety, the time of ripening can soon be ascertained. Some varieties are pulled from the husk in the field; others have to be hauled to husking benches, where the husk or sheath is removed. Some planters husk them like corn: others use a knife set in such a way as to split the husk without injuring the plume. When the husk has been split, a quick jerk or strike on the table will extract the plume. The plumes are then taken to the drying ground and evenly spread in long rows. This ground should be made smooth and free from any trash that is liable to adhere to the plumes. Clean stubble ground is the best. The plumes are left on the ground three days and two nights to cure, and are turned and shaken once each day. They are next packed away as broadly and smoothly as possible on shelves in a dry building, where they should lie ten days or two weeks, or until the stems are thoroughly dried, at which tune they are ready for market. They are packed in two grades: the first class, having plumes 26 inches long and over, clear of stem (sometimes as long as 45 inches), is packed in cases that hold three-quarters of a ton and contain 3,000 plumes; second-class stock is packed in cases of the same size, the plumes being 17 to 26 inches long clear of stem, and 6,000 in each case. If shipping by express, the writer uses bales of about 2,000 plumes, covered with canvas or burlap and some light strips of wood at the corners. If the plumes are packed smoothly and evenly they will withstand heavy pressure. Careful all-round cultivation is necessary to produce good plumes. The best market at present is London, the next Ham- burg. Berlin, Denmark, New York and Philadelphia take a few. Pampas plumes are colored in London. In America the pure white plumes give the best satis- faction. JOSEPH SEXTON. PANAX (old Greek name, meaning att healing or a panacea). Araliacex. A genus of seven or eight species of hardy perennials none of which is of cultural import- ance except P. quinquefolium, Linn., the GINSENG, which see (Vol. III). They have aromatic roots, digi- tately compound leaves and greenish white flowers in a terminal umbel. They are all natives of the North Temperate Zone, mostly in Asia and North American. For an account of the tender plants heretofore included in this genus, see Polyscias. The genus as now defined is distinguished by the thickish roots or tubers from which arise erect simple short sts. bearing 1 whorl of 3 digitate Ivs. which have 3 or 5 Ifts.: umbels terminal and soli- tary, simple, bear- ing small white or greenish p o 1 y g a- mous fls.; calyx ob- scurely 5 -toothed; petals 5, spreading; stamens 5, alter- nating with petals; styles 2 or 3 :fr. a 2- or 3 - seeded little drupe. Two species are native in the eastern U. S. and Canada. P. quin- quefolium, Linn. (Ginseng quinque- fblium, Wood. Ardlia quinqutfolia, Decne. & Planch.). GINSENG, growing in rich woods Que. to Minn, and south to Ala. : about 1 ft. high from a more or less branch- ing thick root: Ifts. usually 5, stalked, the basal pair much smaller than the others, all ovate or obovate, dentate, acuminate: peduncle an inch or two long, bearing a 6-20-fld. umbel; styles usually 2: fr. bright red. P. trifolium, Linn. (Ginseng trifolium, Wood. Aralia trifolia, Decne. & Planch.), GROUND'- NUT (Fig. 2740), native in moist mostly low or flat woods, Nova Scotia to Iowa and Ga. : delicate little plant about 6 in. high, with a deep globular blackish tuber or root about Hm- diam. : Ifts. mostly 3, sessile, oval to oblance- olate, obtuse, serrate: peduncles an inch or two long, bearing a few whitish often monoecious fls.; styles usually 3: fr. 3-angled or 2-sided, yellowish. An attrac- tive but not showy early spring bloomer, suitable for colonizing in moist shady places. L. ]j. B. PANCRATIUM (Greek, all-powerful; referring to sup- posed medicinal value). Amaryllidacex. Attractive summer- and winter-flowering bulbs, bloomed inside or some of them grown outside in mild climates with protection. Very like Hymenocallis, being the Old World repre- sentatives of this group, differing botanically in having many superposed ovules in each cell rather than (as in 2740. Panax trifolium. 2448 PANCRATIUM PANCRATIUM Hymenocallis) 2 basal collateral ovules. Bulb tuni- cated: Ivs. linear to lorate, mostly appearing with the fls., the latter in an umbel terminating an erect solid mostly stout scape or peduncle and white or greenish; perianth funnel-shaped, with a long tube, the segms. equal, short and spreading or ascending; stamens inserted at the throat of the perianth and joined by a web or cup: fr. a loculicidally 3-valved caps, with 2741. Pancratium: types of three sections. At the right, the short perianth-tube and small staminal cup of P. illyricum. At the left, the relatively short tube and large cup of P. maritimum. At the top, the long tube and small cup of P. tere- cundum, to which P. tortuosum is very closely allied. (From B.M. and B.R.) angled black seeds. — Species 14 or more in the Medit. region, eastward to India and southward in Afr. Pan- cratiums and hymenocallis, sometimes called spider- lilies or spirit-lilies, form a beautiful group of [bulbs, hardy or tender, some blooming in winter, others in summer, and all characterized by the beautiful floral structure known as a staminal cup. This cup is white and has the texture of petals. It is fringed or toothed in a great variety of ways. The filaments growing out of the cup are long or short. The perianth-segms. are usually long, slender, and gracefully recurved. The species of pancratium, coming as they do from Africa, southern Asia, and southern Europe, in most cases need a high temperature while in growth and a period of rest after flowering. The "rest" is secured by placing them in a house where there is plenty of ventila- tion and a cooler temperature. Gradually withhold water, giving only just sufficient to keep in a life-like state. The bulbs should be kept in this semi-dry state through the winter. After the middle of January, they may be repotted or have a top-dressing. For a compost, use a good strong loamy soil four parts, well-decayed cow-manure one part. When the roots get well through this compost, liquid manure will be useful once a week. Those bulbs that do not need repotting may have some of the old compost removed, but care must be taken not to injure any of the roots. They may now be placed in a house with a night temperature of 60°. As growth progresses, the temperature may be increased at night to 65° or 70° and at day, with sun, from 80° to 85°. Keep well up to the glass so their growth will be as stocky as possible. In their growing season, they will consume large quantities of water, and they should never become entirely dry at the roots. Give plenty of syringing in bright weather, and ventilate so as to keep temperature right. When they show flower, they may be given a drier and more airy house. For a winter temperature, 50° to 55° will be high enough, with about 10° increase with sunshine. — Pancratiums can be increased by offsets and seed. The offsets may be separated from the parent plant and placed rather close in pans in a light mixture of equal parts of leaf- mold, peat, and sand, given good drainage. When they have made a few roots, they may be potted up into small pots and grown on. When sowing seed, pre- pare some pans by giving plenty of drainage and filling with a mixture of leaf-mold, peat, and sand, screening some of it fine for the top. Sprinkle the seed all over the surface and coyer with the fine mixture, press firmly and give ordinary stove temperature. Main- tain an even moisture with these pans. When they start to come up, place well up to the glass. When large enough, prick out into other pans or flats, using a heavier compost. Pot off when larger and grow without rest through the winter. In the spring they will require 5- or 6-inch pots. Their management from this on will be that already mentioned. Give light fumigations often in order to keep down aphids and thrips. Scale and mealy-bug, which often get into the axils of the leaves, can be removed by the use of a soft brush. (J. J. M. Farrell.) A. Perianth-tube 3-6 in. long. B. Segms. more than 2 in. long. tortuSsum, Herb. Bulb globose, 2 in. or less diam., with long cylindrical neck: Ivs. 6-12, linear, spirally twisted, 1 ft. or less long, with the fls., the latter 2-4 in an umbel: perianth-tube 5-6 in. long, the segms. linear and ascending, greenish; staminal cup over 1 in. long, distinctly toothed between the short free tips of the filaments. Autumn and winter. Arabia and Egypt. BB. Segms. 1% in. long. verecundum, Ait. Fig. 2741. Bulb globose, 2 in. diam., with long cylindrical neck: Ivs. 6-10, sword- shaped, appearing with the fls.: peduncle compressed, 1 ft. long; fls. 2-6, white, with greenish tube, fragrant; tube 3-4 in. long; segms. linear; staminal cup or corona 1 in. or less long, bifid between the free filaments. India. B.R. 413. AA. Perianth-tube 1-3 in. long. B. Staminal cup small, 3-4 lines long. illyricum, Linn. Fig. 2741. Bulb very large: Ivs. 5-^), strap-shaped, glaucous, lJ^-2 in. wide, appearing with the fls.: scape 1 ft. or more long; fls. white, 6-12 in a centripetal umbel; perianth-tube 1 in. long, green; segms. \yi in. wide, bright green: scape 4-8-fld., pale green, downy; fls. about 3 in. across; dorsal sepal oblong-elliptic, pale yellow, green-veined, the upper part bent forward, the basal lateral margins revolute; petals twisted, linear, 4-6 in. long, pendulous, the basal part green, with few blackish dots, the upper half blackish purple, pale- margined; lip deep green, often stained brown-purple; 2466 PAPHIOPEDILUM PAPHIOPEDILUM staniinodium pale yellow, green-mottled, obovate- oblong. Autumn. Moulmein. B.M.5791. Gt. 47, p. 25. I.H. 22:214. 12. Ldwei, Pfitz. (Cypripedium Lowei, Lindl.). Lvs. ligulate, up to 15 in. long: scape much exceeding Ivs., nodding, 3-6-fld.; fls. 3-4 in. diam.; dorsal sepal oval, acute, yellowish green, veined with purplish brown at base, pubescent at the back; petals spatulate, twisted, about 3 in. long, deflexed, the basal part yellow, black- spotted, the upper part violet-purple; lip brown, paler beneath; staminodium obcordate, the border with purple hairs, a small erect hairy horn at the base. April and May. Borneo. F.S. 4:375. A.F. 11:1349. R.H. 1857, p. 402; 1883, p. 352; 1885, p. 473. Var. cruciforme, Hall. (Cypripedium cruciforme, Zoll. & Morr.). More slender, with narrower paler Ivs. which are often obscurely marbled. W. Java. 13. Haynaldianum, Pfitz. (Cypripedium Haynaldi- anum, Reichb. f.). Lvs. up to 16 in. long and 2 in. broad: scape much exceeding Ivs., long-hairy, 4-6-fld.; fls. 4 in. greatest diam.; dorsal sepal oval, obtuse, whit- ish tinted with rose above, the lower half with revolute margins pale yellowish green, with large brown spots: petals spatulate-linear, 3—4 in. long, twisted and recurved above, ciliate, yellowish green below with large brown spots, the upper half pale dull purple; lip pale green, tinged with dull purple; staminodium oblong, 2-lobed in front. Jan.-May. Philippine Isls. B.M. 6296. 14. Victdria-Mariae, Rolfe (Cypripedium Victoria- M arise, Rolfe). Lvs. broadly linear-oblong, paler beneath: scape several-fid., much exceeding Ivs., brown, pubescent; fls. about 4 in. greatest diam.; dorsal sepal nearly orbicular, concave, the margin reflexed, white- ciliate; petals about \y± in. long, spreading, linear- lanceolate, twisted, white-ciliate, green, red-margined; lip about as long as petals, purple, green-margined; staminodium rhomboid-ovate. Sumatra. B.M. 7573. 15. Chamberlainianum, Pfitz. (Cypripedium Cham- berlainidnum, O'Brien). Lvs. up to 1 ft. long and 1J^ in. wide, narrowly white-margined: scape much exceed- ing Ivs., several-fid., grayish brown, densely pilose, nodding; fls. about 4 in. greatest diam.; dorsal sepal almost orbicular, emarginate, the basal margin reflexed, white-ciliate, green, suffused with brown at base, the curved nerves brown; petals about 1% in. long, linear, spreading, twisted, long-ciliate, green, marked with small purple spots in lines along the nerves; lip about as long as sepals, pale green, with many violet dots. Sumatra. B.M. 7578. R.H. 1892, pp. 104, 105. G.F. 5:413. Gn.W. 8:641. G.W. 6, p. 471. R.B. 26:253. 16. glaucophyllum, J. J. Smith. Lvs. glaucous, broadly strap-shaped: scape many-fld.; dorsal sepal orbicular-ovate; petals linear, twisted, ciliate, red- dotted; lip large, violet; staminodium large, ovate, black-violet. Java. B.M. 8084. 17. hirsutissimum, Pfitz. (Cypripedium hirsutis- simum, Lindl.). Lvs. narrowly strap-shaped, up to 6 in. long and %in. wide, indistinctly marbled: scape shorter than the Ivs., black-purple, hirsute, 1-fld.; fls. 4-5 in. greatest diam.; dorsal sepal nearly orbicular, the base and central part marked with blackish purple, often confluent dots, the remainder green; petals about 3 in. long, broadly spatulate,' spreading, somewhat twisted, the margin undulate, the base marked with deep purple on a green ground and studded with many black hairs, the upper bright violet-purple; lip dull green, purple-stained and with minute blackish warts; staminodium almost square, with 3 protuberances and 2 white eyes. March-May. Assam. B.M. 4990. J.H. III. 52:513. R.H. 1859, pp. 182, 183. I.H. 4, p. 67 (note). F.S. 14:1430. 18. villdsum, Pfitz. (Cypripedium villdsum, Lindl.). Lvs. up to 18 in. long and 1^ in. broad, grass-green, with the lower surface paler and purple-spotted toward the base: scape nearly as long as Ivs., 1-fld., hairy; fls. 5-6 in. greatest diam., glossy, the sepals and petals ciliate; dorsal sepal broadly oval, green, the base and center marked with brown-purple, the margin with a narrow white band, the basal margins revolute; petals about 3 in. long, strongly dilated above, yellow-brown, undulate, purple-hairy at the base, the midvein brown- purple; lip brownish yellow, the broad infolded lobes tawny yellow; staminodium tawny yellow, oblong- cordate. Jan., Feb. Moulmein. I.H. 4:126. A.F. 6:555. Gn. 65, p. 435. Var. Boxallii, Veitch (Cypri- pedium Boxallii, Reichb. f. P. Boxallii, Pfitz.). Dorsal sepal narrower at base, the central part marked with numerous, often confluent, black spots, the marginal band broader. Moulmein. I.H. 26:345. G.W. 5, p. 545. Gng. 15:306. Other varieties are: var albo-mar- ginatum, Pfitz. , the white margin of dorsal sepal broader; var. atratum, Pfitz. (also known as var. Bdxallii atratum) f has the dorsal sepal strongly marked with black spots and the white border broad, the petals yellow-brown above, spotted below, and yellow-margined (R. II. 1:8); var. aureum, Pfitz. , dorsal sepal lemon-yellow, strongly black- spotted, the petals above red-lined; var. canariense, Pfitz., fls. with a general yellow tinge; var. giganteum, Pfitz., in color much like var. aureum, the petals and dorsal sepals larger; var. Gortonii, Pfitz., dorsal sepal with a narrow purple band, bright emerald, the petals pale rose-purple narrowly bordered with greenish black; var. Lindenii, Pfitz., fls. larger and more brilliant; var. Measuresianum, Pfitz., in color resembling var. atratum, the dorsal sepal yellowish green with a purple base, the lip pale cream; var. Moensii, Pfitz., dorsal sepal black for two-thirds its height, then olive-green bor- dered with pale cream, the petals reticulated, the stam- inodium large, the protuberance amethyst. 19. insigne, Pfitz. (Cypripedium insigne, Wall.). Lvs. linear, up to 1 ft. long and %in. broad, pale green: scape usually shorter than Ivs., 1-, rarely 2-fld., densely purple-pubescent; fls. 4-5 in. greatest diam., glossy; dorsal sepal broadly oval, with margins somewhat revolute, the base and central portion apple-green, marked with numerous brown-purple spots along the green veins, the upper part white; petals linear-oblong, spreading, undulate, pale yellow-green veined brown- purple; lip yellowish green, brown-shaded; stamino- dium nearly quadrate, pubescent, the tubercle orange- yellow. Winter. Nepal to Assam. B.M. 3412. G.C. 111.18:763. A.F. 7:633. F.E. 9:327. Gng. 1:243. A.G. 16:73; 19:825. J.H. III. 42:47. C.L.A. 11:43. Gn. 65, p. 101 ; 72, p. 40. — Extremely variable in coloration, the following being some of the prominent varie- ties. Var. albens, Pfitz. Fls. soft greenish yellow, with the dorsal sepal pure white in upper half. Var. albo- marginatum, Pfitz. Fls. yellowish; dorsal sepal white- bordered on entire margin, the light-colored spots only on the green portion. Nepal. Var. Amesianum, Pfitz. Fls. rather large, not spotted, resembling those of var. Maulei; dorsal sepal with a broad white margin, the green part suffused with brown. Var. amcenum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal olive-green, marked with large brown spots, and widely bordered with white, with violet spots in the lower part of the border; petals olive-green, suffused with brown; lip clear maroon-brown. Khasia. Var. apiculatum, Hort. Var. Arnoldianum, Pfitz. Fls. larger than in var. Maulei; dorsal sepal greenish yell0vv, broadly white-margined, the spots confined to the green part. G.F. 7:425. A.F. 6:115. Var. aureum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal yellow below; petals and lip clear yellow- brown. Var. Breevesianum, Hort. Dorsal sepal oblong, the lower two-thirds yellowish green, with brown dots in regular lines, the remainder white; petals reddish brown. Var. BrSwnii, Pfitz. Fls. large, pale green; dorsal sepal strongly marked with large pustules, each with a white dent at the apex; petals spotted. A.F. 7:65. Var. brugense, Hort. Var. Chantinii, Pfitz. One of the best PAPHIOPEDILUM PAPHIOPEDILUM 2467 varieties; dorsal sepal large, olive-green below heavily spotted with brown, the upper part only white with a few large mauve spots; lip mahogany, polished. Nepal. R.H. 1878:130. G. 25:60. Var. citrinum, Pfitz. Fls. clear citron-yellow, except dorsal sepal, which is clear green at base, bordered with white and some clear mauve spots. Yar. corrugatum, Pfitz. Lip corrugated. Var. Colsonianum, Pfitz. Fl. large, with a broad dor- sal sepal. Var. Cowperianum. Fls. greenish yellow; dorsal sepal like that of var. albo-marginaium, spotted at base; petals larger; lip large. Var. Cuhingianum, Pfitz. Fls. large, clear green; dorsal sepal broad, the upper part white, with numerous clear violet spots. Var. Dormanianum, Hort. Var. Dorothy. Fls. yellow, in form like those of var. Chantinii. Var. Dowminianum, Hprt. Var. Ernestii, Pfitz. In form and color resem- bling var. Sanderse, but^ the spots on dorsal sepal more distinctly defined. Var. Eyermannii, Hort. Resembles var. Sanderse: fls. clear greenish yellow, the dorsal sepal with a few indistinct small spots, the upper part white. Var. Eyennannianum = var. Eyer- mannii. Var. Forstermanii, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal with a broad white border; petals distinctly brown -veined. Nepal. Var. fuscatum, Pfitz. R.B. 20:25. Var. Gilmoreanum, Pfitz. Fls. large, resembling those of var. Chantinii; dorsal sepal very broad, bordered white, with large brown spots in the center and smaller ones toward the border. Var. gracile, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal narrow, yel- lowish green, irregularly brown-spotted, white bor- der broad. Var. Gravesi- anum, Pfitz. Fls. on a long peduncle; dorsal sepal with a broad white border and numerous brown spots arranged in regular lines. Var. guttatum, Hort. R.H. 1851:201. Var. Hallianum, Pfitz. Sepals longer and broader than usual. Var. Harefield Hall, Hort. A fine variety, with large fls. ; dorsal sepal large and round, with a broad white margin and large bright brown spots. Var. Horsmanianum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal cuneate-oblong, with the entire upper portion white. Var. Hurrelliamim, Hort. Dorsal sepal greenish yellow, the basal half suffused with reddish brown, the apex white. Var. illustre, Pfitz. Fls. yel- lowish, the sepals and petals spotted. Var. Kimballi- anum, Pfitz. Sepal more than 3 times longer than broad, flat, yellowish green, the spots running in lines into the white border; petals strongly veined. Khasia. Var. Lagerae, Hort. Dorsal sepal with a dark brown center, slightly suffused at edges with greenish yellow, with 4 or 5 pink marks, the whole margined with pure white. Var. Laura Kimball, Hort. Fls. resembling those of var. Sanderse, but of a chamois-yellow, with a few brown hairs at the base of the petals. Var. longise- palum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal very long and narrow, appearing narrower on account of its reflexed margins, pale green slightly tinted and veined brown at base, spotless, with a small white apex. Var. Lucianii, Pfitz. Fls. bright yellow, tinted green, dorsal sepal clear green at base, with only 2 or 3 large dots of bronzy yellow, white border very broad. Var. luteo-album, Hort. Upper two-thirds of dorsal sepal pure white, remainder yellowish green with few spots. Var. Lutchwyche- 2757. Paphiopedilum insigne var. Sanderse. anum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal narrower basal margins wavy, the upper white passing into pale yellow, spots hardly visible. Var. Macfarlanei, Pfitz. Fls. clear yellow; dorsal sepal with a broad white border, but without the usual pustules. Var. Mandevilleanum, Pfitz. Resembles var. albo-marginatum: petals with numerous spots in regular lines, yar. Maulei, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal with the white predominant, extending to the base on either side of the green center, the upper spots violet-purple, the others larger and brownish. Nepal. G.W. 6, p. 470. Var. maximum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal deep green, large. Var. montanum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal with a narrow yellow line, the lower three-fourths of a golden yellow, with a brownish tinge due to the large spots; petals yellow, striated with brown-red. Var. Mooreanum, Pfitz. Fls. pale yellow, petals pale greenish yellow; dorsal sepal broad-ovate, with a broad white margin; central spots largest, smaller toward the margin; petals brown-veined. Nepal. Var. Nflsonii, Pfitz. Lip small, round. Var. punctatissimum, Hort. Dorsal sepal entirely covered with brown spots except a narrow white margin. Var. Sanderae, Pfitz. Fig. 2757. Lvs. and scape pale: dorsal sepal primrose-yel- low with a few minute reddish brown dots, the upper part white; petals yellow; lip waxy yellow. Gng. 7: 196. A.G. 21:329. Gt. 56:1559. Var." Sanderianum, Pfitz. Fls. yellowish green, reticulated with darker green nerves, the dorsal sepal with a broad white border. Var. Studbyanum, Hort. Var. superbiens, Hort. Var. sylhetense, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal with large dark spots somewhat confluent in lines along the middle. 20. exul, Pfitz. (Cypripedium exul. O'Brien). Lvs. up to 8 in. long and nearly 1 in. broad, narrowly strap- shaped, lightly marbled, very narrowly white-margined: scape longer than Ivs., green, purple-hairy, 1-fld.; fls. about 3 in. greatest diam.; dorsal sepal broadly ovate, obtuse,' reticulate-veined, yellowish green with a white margin, brown-spotted; petals longer than the sepals, oblong, a little dilated toward the apex, ciliate, yellow sparselv spotted and lined with brown; lip marked like petals. Siam. C.O. pi. 13. B.M. 7510. 21. Charlesworthii, Pfitz. (Cypripedium Chdrles- worthii, Rolfe). Lvs. spotted, up to 10 in. long and 1 in. broad: scape 1-fld., about as long as Ivs., purple- spotted, pubescent; fls. about 3 in. greatest diam.; dorsal sepal broadly ovate, large, about 2}^ in. long, obtuse, nearly flat, white, mottled and suffused with pale carmine or purple-rose; petals horizontally spread- ing, a little shorter than sepal, oblong, obtuse, long- hairy at base on inner surface, sparsely ciliate, yel- lowish green, striated or reticulated with brown. Autumn. Bengal. B.M. 7416. R.B. 20:241. Gn. 47:252. A.F. 13:430. J.H. III. 45:469. O.R. 1:335. L. 10:443. A.G. 25:561. — Variable. The following varieties are known: Var. conchiflorum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal con- cave. Var. Crashawae, Pfitz. (Cypripedium Crdshawse, O'Brien) Has the fleshy Ivs. glaucous beneath, the fls. larger. Var. Desmetianum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal with the rose-veined white center surrounded by a band of rose-magenta, and with a white border. Var. Duvivie- rianum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal orbicular, nearly 3 in. diam., pure white at the base, the radiating nerves of a rose-lilac, the mahogany petals tessellated with amber, the staminodium white with a chrome-yellow umbo. Var. magnificum, Pfitz. Fls. very large and brilliantly colored. Var. marginatum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal is white with the base and border rose. Var. unicolor, Pfitz. Lip the same color as sepals and petals. 22. Drftryi, Pfitz. (Cypripedium Dritrii, Bedd.). Lvs. ligulate, up to 8 in. long and 1 % in. wide, lightly mar- bled: scape longer than Ivs., purple-hairy, 1-fld.; fls. about 3 in. greatest diam.; dorsal sepal about 1J^ in. long, rhombic-ovate, obtuse, nearly flat, glandular-black- hairy on the back, white-ciliate, yellowish green or citron-color, marked black-purple in center; petals 2468 PAPHIOPEDILUM PAPHIOPEDILUM longer than sepals, narrowly elliptic, obtuse, somewhat falcate, pubescent on back, the face manifestly hairy at base, golden yellow, purple-lined down middle and brown-dotted at the base; lip about as long as petals, yellow. May, June. Travancore. I. H. 24:265. A.F. 6:555. F.M. 1880:425. L. 6. O. 1914, p. 139. 23. Spicerianum, Pfitz. (Cypripedium Spicerianum, Reichb. f.). Lvs. up to 1 ft. long, and 2 in. broad, broadly linear-lanceolate, pale beneath: scape about as long as Ivs., glabrous, black-purple, 1-fld.; fls. about 3 in. greatest diam.; dorsal sepal transversely elliptic when spread out, about 1 H in. long, deeply sulcate, the margins strongly retroflexed, giving the sepal the appearance of a spathe, white, a crimson-purple band down the center, and a large green basal blotch speckled with red; petals a little longer than sepal, spreading, deflexed, somewhat falcate, oblong, strongly undulate at margin, pilose at base on inner surface, green, dotted and suffused with brown; lip longer than sepal, the claw green, the pouch violet, pale-green-margined. Oct.- Dec. Assam. B.M. 6490. I.H. 30:473. Gn. 48, p. 304. A.G. 11:159. A.F. 3:226. Gng. 1:242. F.E. 9:329. G.W. 14, p. 73. J.H. III. 44:27.— Quite variable. Among others, are the following varieties :Var . alboviride, Pfitz. Differs in absence of median color of the dorsal sepal. Var. grandifldrum, Hort. Fls. larger than usual. Var. leodiense, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal for upper three- fourths pure white, with tender green at base, the petals green at the very undulate margins, with the center brownish green, the lip bronzy green. Var. magnificum, Pfitz. Lower sepal pure white. Var. Mercatellianum, Pfitz. Fls. yellowish white marked with purple, green absent. Var. nanum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal without green basal spot. Var. nigrescens, Pfitz. Fls. smaller, lip blackish brown. Var. rubescens, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal pure white on back, strongly tinted with violet- red on face and marked down the center with a purple band, the petals bronzy green, marked with brown dots. 24. Fairieanum, Pfitz. (Cypripedium Fairieanum, Lindl.). Lvs. up to 6 in. long and 1 in. broad, strap- shaped, light green, paler beneath: scape much exceed- ing Ivs., green, hairy, 1-fld.; fls. about 3 in. greatest diam.; dorsal sepal nearly orbicular, about 1% in. long, the basal margin somewhat reflexed and undulate, reticulated at the recurved apex, ciliate, pubescent on back, greenish white, striated and reticulated with violet; petals lanceolate, undulate on the ciliate mar- gin, green, striated with violet; lip a little shorter than the sepal, white at base, green at apex. Autumn. Bhotan. G.C. III. 38:168. J.H. III. 51:321. Gn.M. 3:63. B.M. 5024. F.S. 12:1244. O. 1915, p. 15. 25. Appletonianuin, Rolfe (Cypripedium Appletoni- anum, Gower. C. Bullenianum Appletonidnum, Rolfe). Lvs. ligulate, indistinctly tessellated: scape much exceeding Ivs., slender, velutinous, 1-fld.; fls. about 4 in. greatest diam.; dorsal sepal ovate, shortly acuminate, the margin at apex involute, the basal margin revolute, yellowish green, brown-striated; petals half longer than sepal, horizontally spreading, somewhat rhombic- dilated above, glabrous, the margins at base undulate, the upper margin usually with a few warts, the lower part green, purple-dotted, the upper part rose; lip green, marked with purple. Siam. O.R. 4 : 17. C.O. 22. Var. Poyntzianum, Pfitz. (Cypripedium Poynt- zidnum, O'Brien). Petals pale green, the apex lilac; lip whitish, rose at base, purple-spotted within. Siam. 26. Bullenianum, Pfitz. (Cypripedium Bullenianum, Reichb. f. C. Hobkerae Bullenidnum, Veitch). Lvs. up to 8 in. long, about 1 in. wide, tessellated: scape much exceeding Ivs., 1-fld., hirsute; fls. about 3K in- greatest diam.; dorsal sepal ovate, acuminate, the basal margins reflexed, about 1J4 in- l°ng> olive-green, shaded with brown; petals deflexed, dilated from a narrowly oblong base, obtuse at apex, ciliate, the upper margin with hairless violet-brown warts, olive-green at base, rose- violet above; lip green, marked with greenish brown, longer than sepals but shorter than petals, the inflexed lobes with warts. March and April. Borneo. Var. anophthalmum, Reichb f. Petals not spotted; lip green. Var. oculatum, Reichb. f. Claw of the lip ochre-color, brown-spotted; lip red-brown, bordered with green. 27. Volonteanum, Pfitz. (Cypripedium Volontednum, Sand. C. Hobkerae Volonteanum, Rolfe. P. Hobkerae Volonteanum, Kerch.). Fig. 2758. Lvs. up to 8 in. long, 2 in. broad, obscurely tessellated above, paler beneath: scape much exceeding Ivs., 1-fld., pale brown with white hairs; fls. about 4 in. greatest diam.; dorsal sepal ovate, long-acuminate, ciliate, the basal margins reflexed, yellowish green; petals nearly twice as long as sepals, deflexed, the narrow base undulate, spatulate and somewhat falcate, long-acuminate at apex, minutely toothed, at the base long-ciliate and barbed, green, rose at apex, upper margin with black spots; lip pale green, suffused rose. June, July. Borneo. Var. gigan- teum, Pfitz. A robust form. Var. Lowei, Pfitz. Darker. 28. Hookerae, Pfitz. (Cypripedium Hobkerae. Reichb. f. C. barbdtum Hobkerae, Hort.). Lvs. up to 6 in. long, and 2 in. wide, dark green, tes- sellated: scape 1-fld., much ex- ceeding Ivs., purple, pilose; fls. about 4 in. greatest diam.; dorsal sepal ovate, acuminate, pubes- cent on back, ciliate, yellowish white, marked centrally with green; petals depressed, spatu- late, ciliate, the undulate basal part green with blackish spots, the margin purple, the apex purple; lip pale green, suffused with rose, the infolded lobes yel- lowish brown, purple-spotted. May and June. Borneo. B.M. 5362. F.S. 15:1565.— The fol- lowing varieties are known: cseru- lescens, liiteum, mdjus, Measure- sidnum, and superbiens. 29. venustum, Pfitz. (Cypripe- dium venustum, Wall.). Lvs. up to 6 in. long and 1^ in. wide, above dark green blotched with pale grayish green, beneath strongly violet-mottled: scape about as long as Ivs., 1-fld., purple, pubescent; fls. about 3 in. greatest diam.; dorsal sepal broadly ovate, acute, white, veined green; petals somewhat spatulate, spreading, ciliate, longer than sepals, barbed at base, the basal part green with blackish warts, the upper portion brownish dull purple; lip pale yellowish green, rose-tinged, reticulated with green, the infolded lobesyellow. Jan.-March. N.India. B.M. 2129. B.R. 788. Var. Measuresianum, Pfitz. Fls. white and green, without the brown or red tinge. Var. pardinum, Pfitz. (Cypripedium pardinum, Reichb. f. P. pardinum, Pfitz.). Warts extending over whole upper surface of the petals which are yellow, suffused with copper-color; inflexed lobes of lip with large conic warts. F.M. 51. Var. spectabile, Pfitz. Scape shorter than in the type, the petals strongly colored with mahogany at the apex, the middle area brownish, irregularly black-spotted, the lip large, bronzy green, reticulated with clear green. 30. tonsum, Pfitz. (Cypripedium tonsum, Reichb. f.). Lvs. up to 8 in. long and 2 in. wide, tessellated, usually beneath toward the base with purple : scape longer than Ivs., 1-fld., reddish brown, shortly pilose; fls. 4-5 in. greatest diam., shining; dorsal sepal broadly ovate, acute, ciliolate, white, green-veined, or the alternate shorter veins sometimes purplish; petals somewhat spatulate, pale green, sometimes stained with dull purple, green- veined, marked with a few black spots; 2758. Paphiopedilum Volonteanum. ( X 1A) PAPHIOPEDILUM PAPHIOPEDILUM 2469 lip dull green, tinged crimson and brown, the infolded lobes broad, warty. Autumn. Mountains of Sumatra. C.O. Cypripedium 6. The following varieties are known:" cupreum; superbiens, with the dorsal sepal white at the extremity marked with clear brown; and superbum. 31. Mastersianum, Pfitz. (Cypripedium Master- sidnum, Reichb. f.)- Lvs. up to 10 in. long and 2 in. broad, deep green, tessellated: scape longer than Ivs., 1-fld., brown-purple-long-hirsute; fls. 3-4 in. greatest diam.; dorsal sepal nearly orbicular, ciliolate, bright green, the border yellowish white, green-veined; petals horizontal, ciliate, obtuse, brownish red, the base paler with numerous blackish purple small warts on the upper margin and midvein; lip pale reddish brown, the infolded lobes spotted dull purple on a greenish brown ground. Spring. Amboina. G.C. III. 15:593; 25:274. B. M. 7629. O. 1910, p. 88. 32. virens, Pfitz. (Cypripedium virens, Reichb. f. C. jai'dnicum virens, Veitch. P. javdnicum virens, Kerch.). Lvs. up to 6 in. long and 2 in. wide, obscurely tessel- lated above: scape somewhat exceeding Ivs., brown, shortly pilose, 1-fld.; fls. 3-4 in. greatest diam.; dorsal sepal ovate, acute, ciliolate, the margin reflexed at base, about 1^2 ip- l°ng> pale green, striated darker green; petals divaricately spreading, longer than dorsal sepal, obtuse, green at base with scattered small, black warts, the apex pale purple; lip about as long as sepal, green suffused with rose, the inflexed lobes with numerous contiguous small warts. X. Borneo. 33. javanicum, Pfitz. (Cypripedium javdnicum, Reinw.). Lvs. up to 7 in. long and 2 in. wide, distinctly tessellated above, pale green beneath: scape longer than Ivs., pubescent, 1-fld.; fls. 3-4 in. greatest diam.; dorsal sepal nearly orbicular, long-acuminate, ciliolate, margin reflexed below, pale green, striated darker green; petals somewhat deflexed and falcate, oblong, obtuse, ciliolate, green, the inner surface with brown small warts; lip green, the inflexed lobes minutely warty. Java. F.S. 7:703. Var. majus, Du Buyss. Pis. larger and greener. Yar. minus, Pfitz. Fls. smaller. Var. superbum, Hort. 34. Dayanum, Pfitz. (Cypripedium Dayanum, Reichb. f. C. spectdbile Dayanum, Lindl. C. superbiens Day- anum, Reichb. f.). Lvs. up to 7 in. long and 2 in. wide, distinctly tessellated: scape much longer than Ivs., purple, pilose, 1-fld.; fls. 4-6 in. greatest diam.; dorsal sepal broadly ovate, acuminate, ciliolate, white, green- veined ; petals ligulate. somewhat deflexed, long- ciliate with black hairs, greenish brown at base, rose- purple above; lip brownish purple, green- veined, the infolded lobes with numerous small purple warts. May, June. Borneo. F.S. 15:1527. Var. Ernestianum, Pfitz. Petals crimson- veined at base, the apex white and ciliate with purple hairs. Var. Petri, Pfitz. (Cypri- pedium Petri, Reichb. f.). Dorsal sepal long-triangu- lar acute, the petals somewhat broadened above, the lip more conical. Var. Smithianum, Pfitz. Var. splendens, Pfitz. Fls. more brilliant in color. Var. superbum, Pfitz., has the petals maroon in the center, lined with green, the lip maroon veined with greenish brown. 35. purpuratum, Pfitz. (Cypripedium purpuratum, Lindl. P. sinicum, Hance). Lvs. up to 5 in. long and 1 ' 2 in. wide, distinctly tessellated, paler beneath : scape longer than Ivs., 1-fld., purple, hirsute; fls. 3-3 ^ in. greatest diam.; dorsal sepal nearly orbicular, abruptly acute, folded at the middle, the basal margins revolute, white with a greenish central stain, purple- veined, ciliolate; petals spreading, undulate, narrowlj- elliptic, somewhat falcate, ciliate with mixed longer and shorter hairs, purplish crimson, with purple or green veins, numerous small blackish warts at base; lip brownish purple, deeper veined and reticulated, in- folded purple lobes with numerous warts. Autumn. Hong-Kong. B.M. 4901. F.S. 11:1158. C.O. Cypripe- dium 12. Vars. Kimballianum and Seegeri are known. 36. Curtisii, Pfitz. (Cypripedium Curtisii, Reichb. f.). Lvs. up to 8 in. long, tessellated above: scape longer than Ivs., 1-fld., pubescent ; fls. 3-4 in. diam., the segms. ciliolate; dorsal sepal broadly ovate, acuminate, grass- green, white-margined, the numerous green veins purple toward the base; petals ligulate, deflexed, the tips recurved, the margin with black hairs and warts, pale purple, white along the midvein, uniformly purple- spotted, green-veined; lip helmet-shaped, 'brownish purple, the infolded narrow purple lobes with darker warts. May, June. Sumatra. A.F. 6:557. Gng. 1:41. L. 3 : 140. Var. amdenum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal brown at base with a broad white margin; petals green toward apex. Var. pallidum, Pfitz. Fls. more delicately colored; petals almost white at apex, strongly dotted "with clear purple; lip pale greenish, lightly tinted pale brown-purple. 37. ciliolare, Pfitz. (Cypripedium ciliolare, Reichb. f.). Lvs. obtuse, oblong-elliptic, 6-8 in. long, tessellated: scape longer than Ivs., 1-fld., hirsute, black-brown; fls. 4 in. greatest diam. ; dorsal sepal broadly ovate, acumi- nate, ciliolate, white, purple at the base, green-veined, or the lateral veins sometimes purple; petals deflexed, recurved, ciliate with long black hairs, green toward base with numerous blackish warts, pale purple at apex; lip manifest, helmet-shaped, dull brownish purple, the pale yellow-green infolded lobes with purple warts. April-July. Malay Archipelago and Philip- pines. I.H. 31:530. G.C. III. 21:348. Var. Miteau- anum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal nearly triangular, red- dish crimson at base and strongly black-nerved, the border white, lightly tinted rose; petals crimson at base, dotted with blackish brown. L. 3:146. Other varie- ties are: Elmirednum, grandiflorum, magnificum, maxi- mum, splendens, and splendidum. 38. superbiens, Pfitz. (Cypripedium superbiens, Reichb. f. C. barbatum var. Veitchii, Linn. C. barbatum var. superbiens, Morr. C. Veiichidnum, Hort.). Lvs. up to 8 in. long and 2% in. broad, oblong-elliptic, tessel- lated: scape longer than Ivs., brown, white-pilose, 1-fld.; fls. about 4 in. greatest diam., the segms. ciliate; dorsal sepal broadly ovate, acute, white, green-striped; petals deflexed, ligulate, white, green-veined, with numerous blackish warts, the marginal ones larger; lip somewhat helmet-shaped, brownish purple, pale green below, the infolded lobes crimson and wartv. May-July. Malay Peninsula. I.H. 12:429. F.S. 19:1996. A.F. 7:707. R.H. 1871, p. 596. J.H. III. 50:3. F.W. 1872: 33. — Vars. Demidoffii and Lindenii are known. 39. Argus, Pfitz. (Cypripedium Argus, Reichb. f. C. barbatum var. Argus, Hort. C. Pitcheridnum, Manda). Lvs. acute, up to 8 in. long and 1 % in. wide, tessellated : scape longer than Ivs., brown-hairy, 1- or rarely 2-fld.; fls. 2^-3 in. greatest diam.; dorsal sepal broadly ovate, acute, ciliolate, white, "the base rarely spotted blackish pxirple, green-veined, or the longer veins sometimes purple ; petals undulate, ligulate, deflexed, acute, ciliate, white, the veins pale green, the upper third pale purple, the inner surface with blackish warts; lip dull brownish purple, pale greenish brown beneath, the narrow infolded lobes pale purple, deeper spotted. March, April. Luzon. B.M. 6175. F.M. 1876:220. B.H. 32:241. R. 2:83. C.O. 5. A.F. 3:179. Var. Boddsertii, Pfitz. Petals narrower and more strongly deflexed. Var. Lindenii, Pfitz. Colors brighter; dorsal sepal larger. Var. Moensii, Pfitz. (Cypripedium Moensidnum, Hort.). Dorsal sepal very large, pointed, white, green- lined; petals broader, white, green-lined, strongly spotted with blackish crimson, the spots confluent in transverse masses; lip greenish j-ellow below, maroon above. L. 3:129. Var. nigricans, Pfitz. Spots con- gested and confluent. Var. nigro-maculatum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal white, lightly tinted rose, dotted reddish brown at base; petals green at base, strongly black- spotted; lip maroon above, olive below. Var. superbum, 2470 PAPHIOPEDILUM PAPHIOPEDILUM Pfitz. Dorsal sepal round, lightly acuminate, white, strongly veined with shining green, the border here and there spotted with reddish purple; petals white at base, green-lined, and almost entirely black-spotted; lip reticulated. Other varieties known are: bifldrum, giganteum, grandiflbrum, Mantinii, Morrenidnum, multi- color, nlgrum, purpuratum, and tigrlnum. 40. barbatum, Pfitz. (Cypripedium barbatum, Lindl. C. purpuratum, Wight). Lvs. acute, up to 6 in. long, tessellated: scape longer than Ivs., black-purple, pubes- cent, 1- or rarely 2-fld.; fls. 2H-3in. greatest diam.; dor- sal sepal nearly orbicular, pointed, folded at the mid- vein, white, more or less purple-stained, green at base, the veins prominent, deep purple, the cen- tral green at base; petals spreading, somewhat deflexed, oblong -linear, cili- ate, the upper mar- gin with small blackish warts, the base brownish green, the apex purple; lip helmet- shaped,deep brown- ish purple, paler below, the infolded purple lobes deeper- spotted. June, July. Malay Peninsula. B. M. 4234. B.R. 27, p. 53(desc.). F. 8.3:190. B.H.33:7. V. O. 4:12. Var. bifldrum, Pfitz. Scape 2-fld. Var. caerulescens, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal white and green in about equal proportions, the nerves dark green and crimson; petals olive-green, whitish rose at the apex with a few black dots; lip maroon. Var. Cr6ssii, Pfitz. (Cypripedium Crossii, Hort. C. barbatum var. Warneridnum, Warn.). Dorsal sepal large, nearly round, the upper half pure white, the center green, striped deep maroon and tinted rose- purple between the nerves; petals strongly reflexed, rose-violet toward the apex which terminates with a white spot; lip clear maroon. B.H. 15:227. Var. grandiflorum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal very large, the apex pure white, lined and veined with rose-purple at base; petals olive-green above, black-spotted, rose- magenta below toward the apex; lip large, deep purple- maroon. Var. Hendersonii, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal has a broad white border, the center shaded with violet, and the base lined with tender green; petals undulate, reflexed, the upper surface olive-green, the lower sur- face light rose heavily shaded green, the extremity with a white point; lip deep maroon. Var. illustre, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal round, acuminate, white, green-lined at base, banded with blackish purple, and broadly white- bordered; petals brownish green above, rose-salmon, below; lip very large, blackish brown. Var. ma jus, Pfitz. Resembles var. grandiflorum, but is more robust and has larger fls. of richer color. Var. nanum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal small, only about 1 in. long; petals some- what falcate, about \% in. long, with 2-4 warts. Var. nigritum, Pfitz. (Cypripedium nigritum, Reichb. f.). Dorsal sepal oblong, acute; petals narrower. Perhaps 2759. Paphiopedilum Lathamianum. Hy- brid. (See supplementary list.) ( X Ji) a natural hybrid. Borneo. Var. nigrum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal very large, oval, strongly lined with deep crimson and shaded violet-purple, the center greenish white, the border broad white; petals bronzy black above; lip blackish brown. A.F. 36:1184. Gng. 20:34. Var. O'Brienii, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal small, less than 1 in. long; petals falcate, with 6-8 warts. Var. orbum, Pfitz. (Cypripedium orbum, Reichb. f.). Fls. paler than in the type. Var. porphyreum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal very broad, round, reticulated, reddish violet on a white ground, the border pure white; petals olive-green above, rose- violet below; lip very large, blackish brown. Var. pulcherrimum, Pfitz. Perhaps a natural hybrid between P. Hookerx and P. hirsutissimum. Var. superbum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal orbicular, very flat, striped with very deep crimson and black-veined; petals reddish wine-color above, and olive-brown below with a central black band. Var. Warneri, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal very broad, nearly orbicular, white, strongly lined with dark green, stained with red-magenta, with a broad white border; petals shining dark green above; lip deep maroon. Other varieties known are: giganteum, grdcile, mosdicum, nobile, pictum, plumosum, purpureum. 41. calldsum, Pfitz. (Cypripedium callosum, Reichb. f.). Lvs. acute, up to 10 in. long; tessellated: scape longer than Ivs., brownish purple, 1-, or sometimes 2-fld.; fls. 4 in. greatest diam.; dorsal sepal broadly ovate, cordate, white, veins green at base, deep purple above, alternately longer and shorter; petals spreading, ligulate, pale green, tinted pale rose at apex, with 4 or 5 blackish warts on upper margin; lip helmet-shaped, brownish purple, the infolded lobes purple-spotted. Feb., March. Siam. R.H. 1888:252. L.2:73. C.O. Cypripedium 7. Var. giganteum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal broad, white, shaded with emerald-green lined with deep green. Var. Rossianum, Pfitz. Petals longer, narrower, and strongly falcate. Var. Sanderae, Pfitz. Fls. white, the dorsal sepal green-veined. C.O. Cypri- pedium 15o. Var. Schmidtianum, Pfitz. (Cypripedium Schmidtianum, Kranzl.). Petals at base deflexed; lobes of the lip inflexed, thickened, subacute at apex; stam- inodium less angled, nearly orbicular. Var. sublseve, Pfitz. Petals without warts or hairs on the surface. Var. viridifldrum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal and petals green- ish white, veined with deep gray. 42. Lawrenceanum, Pfitz. (Cypripedium Lawrence- dnum, Reichb. f.). Lvs. up to 10 in. long, 2K in. broad, tessellated: scape longer than Ivs., brownish purple, pubescent, 1-, or rarely 2-fld.; fls. 4-5 in. greatest diam.; dorsal sepal nearly orbicular, white, the veins alter- nately longer and shorter, deep purple, the central ones usually green at base; petals spreading, ciliate, ligulate, green, the tips purple, each margin with 5-10 blackish warts; lip dull purple, brown-tinged above, green beneath. April-July. B.M. 6432. I.H. 30:478. F.S. 23:2372. G.C. III. 21:291. G.Z. 24, p. 1. J.H. 111.51:51; 63:545. Var. Abbottianum, Pfitz. Fls. large, the dorsal sepal with veins deep crimson. Var. atropurpftreum, Hort. Same as following. Var. atrorft- brum, Pfitz. Fls. richly colored, especially the dorsal sepal. Var. biflfirum, Pfitz. Scape 2-fld., the lower fl. is normal, while the dorsal sepal of the upper fl. is reflexed. Var. coloratura, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal subacute, inter- nerves pale violet, warts of the petals numerous. Var. expansum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal much larger than in the type; petals larger. Var. Grenieri, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal very broad, round, emerald-green at base, with numerous deep blackish purple veins above, the ground- color white, shaded rosy magenta, the border white; petals emerald-green above, greenish white beneath, lined with rose; lip well developed, reddish maroon above, greenish yellow below. Var. Hyeanum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal white, green- veined ; petals horizontal, very long, white, green-dotted; lip olive. G.C. III. 21:37. Var. magnificum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal deep PAPHIOPEDILUM 2471 green at base, with a broad white border, lined with blackish purple at center. Var. Moensii, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal broad, strongly lined with blackish purple and carmine, the border pure white; petals sea-green; lip brownish maroon with a white terminal spot. Var. pleioleucum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal white above, the 2760. Paphiopedalum Leeanum. Hybrid. (See supplementary list). (XX) green veins short. Var. stendsemum, Pfitz. Dorsal sepal much narrower than in type, elliptic. Other varieties known are: auriculum, giganteum, grdnde, Lindenii, marmoratum, nigrum, pictum, Pitchendnum, purpiirdscens, roseum, superbum, virescens. The following list contains some of the hybrids. Many others are grown by fanciers but cannot be mentioned here. For cata- logues of hybrids, see G.C. III. 17:199, A.G. 16:118, and the "Orchid Stud-book," by Rolfe & Hurst. P. Acis=P. Lawrence- anum X P. insigne Maulei. — P. Acme=P. nitens X P. Bessie K. Pitcher. — P. Actxus=P. insigne X P. Leeanum. — P. Actseus Bianca=P. insigne Sanderse X P. Leeanum Prospero. G.C. III. 44:261. — P. Actaeus langleyense=P. insigne SanderaexP. Leeanum giganteum. G.C. III. 41:12. — P. Adrastus=P. Leeanum X P. Boxallii. — P. AK>ertidnum=P. insigne X P. Spicerianum. — P. Albert Truffaut=P. Harrisianum X P. Spicerianuin. — P. Alcibiades magnificum=P. Leeanum X P. Schlesingerianum. G.M. 49:55. — — P. Alcibiades superbum=P. Leeanum giganteum X P. Mons. de Curte. — P. Alcides—P. insigne X P. hirsutissimum. — P. Alector= P. barbatum Crossii X P. Spicerianum. — P. Alfred Hpllington— P. ciliolare X P. philippinense. — P. Alice=P. Spicerianum X P. Stonei. — P. Attanidnum=P. Spicerianum X P. Curtisii. — P. Almum =P. barbatum X P. Lawrenceanum. — P. Alson=P. insigne X P. Druryi. — P. Amandum=P. insigne X P. venustum. — P. Amesidnum =P. villosum X P. venustum. — P. Aphrodite=P. Lawrenceanum X P. niveum. — P. apiculdtum=P. barbatum X P. Boxallii. — P. Arnoldix=P. bellatulum X P. superciliare. G. 31 : 165. — P. Artemis =P. Dayanum X P. Swanianum. — P. Arthuridnum—P. insigne X P. Fairieanum. A. F. 6:557. — P. Arthuridnum pulchellum=P. insigne Chantinii X P. Fairieanum.; — P. Ashburtonix=P. barbatum XP. insigne. I.H. 35: 61.— P. Ashburtonix calospilum=P. bar- b,atum x P. insigne. — P. Ashburtonix expdnsum=preceding: — P. Ashworthix=P. insigne X P. Spicerianum. J.H. III. 55:481. — P. Aspasia=P. .Selligerum X P. tonsum. — P. Astrxa=P. philippi- nense X P. Spicerianum. — P. augustum=P. Haynaldianum X P. vil- losum.— P. aureum=P. nitens X P. Spicerianum. — P. aureum tfj/edrcum=preceding. G. 28:171. — P. aureum virgindle=same. J.H. 111.62:71. — P. aurdreum=P. Lawrenceanum X P. venustum. — P. BaUantinei=P. purpuratum X P. Fairieanum. — P. barbato- Mdstersii. — P. Baron Schrohder—P. Fairieanum X P. oenanthum. — P. Bdrteti=P. barbatum X P. insigne Chantinii. — P. Beatrice=P. Boxallii X P. Lpwii. — P. Beeckmanii—P. bellatulum X P. Boxallii. — P. Berggrenidnum=P. Harrisianum X P. insigne. — P. Bessie K. Pitcher=P. Leeanum X P. villosum. — P. Bragaianum=P. Boxallii X P. hirsutissimum. — P. Bridgei=P. Argus X P. Godseffianum. G.M. 52:184. J.H. III. 58:229.— P. Bryanii=P. philippinense X P. tonsum. — P. Buchanidnum=P '. Druryi X P. Spicerianum. — P. caldnthum=P. barbatum X P. Lowii. — P. caligdre=P. venustum XP. Dayanum. — P. cdllo-Rothschildidnum—P. callosum X P. Rothschildianum. — P. Calypso=P. Boxallii X P. Spicerianum. — P. Cdnhamii=P. villosum X P. superbiens. — P. Carnusidnum=P. Haynaldianum X P. Spicerianum. — P. Ceres=P. Spicerianum X P. hirsutissimum. — P. chelsiense=P. Lowii x P. barbatum. — P. chlo- roneurum=P. Harrisianum x P. venustum. — P. Cleopatra=P. cenanthum xP. Hookerae. — P Clinkaberridnum=P. philippinense X P. Curtisii. — P. Clothilde Moens=P. Leeanum X P. Haynaldianum. — P. Cdlmanii nigrum=P. Harrisianum X P. javanicum. — P. con- cinnum=P. Harrisianum X P. purpuratum. — P. con,spicuum=P. Harrisianum X P. villosum.— P. Constance=P. Curtisii X P. Stonei. — P. Cooksoni'jnum=P. Almum. — P. Creon=P. Harrisianum X P. 157 oenanthum. — P. Crethus=P. Spicerianum X P. Argus. — P. Cros- sidnum=P. insigne X P. venustum. — P. Crossidnum pdllidum= P. insigne X P. venustum pardinum. — P. Crossidnum Tautzia- num=preceding. — P. Cybele=P. LawrenceanumxP.' Druryi. — P. Dauthieri=P. barbatum X P. villosum. — P. Doodmanidnum=P. Chamberlainianum X P. Spicerianum. — P. Dibdin=P. Boxallii X P. Argus. — P. dilectum=P. Boxallii X P. hirsutissimum. — P. dls- color=P. venxistum X P. Harrisianum. — P. Donatidnum=P. in- signe X P. Harrisianum. — P. Doncasteridnum=P. hirsutissimum X P. callosum. — P. Doris=P. venustum X P. Stonei. — P. Drurio- Hodkerse=P. Druryi X P. Hopkerse. — P. Duchess of Sutherland=P. Rothschildianum X P. Youngianum. — P. ebordicum=P. insigne X P. nitens. J.H. III. 53:589. — P. Edithx=P. bellatulum X P. Charlesworthii. — P. Eismannidnum=P. Boxallii X P. Harrisianum. — P. Electra=P. Harrisianum X P. insigne. — P. enfieldense=P. Lawrenceanum x P. Hookerae. — P. Ephialtes=P. insigne Chantinii X P. aureorum. — P. Euryades excettens=P. Boxallii X P. Leeanum. G.M. 47:255. — P. Euryale=P. LawrenceanumxP. superbiens. — P. Euryandrum=P. barbatum X P. Stonei. G.Z. 24, p. 241.— P. Eurylochus=P. ciliolare X P. hirsutissimum. — P. Evelyn Ames— P. Calypso Oakwood X P. Leeanum giganteum. — P. Excelsior— P. Rothschildianum X P. Harrisianum. — P. Fairy Queen=P. Curtisii XP. Druryi. — P. Finetianum=P. philippinense X P. ciliolare. — P. Fitchidnum=P. Bullenianum X P. venustum. — P. Fletcheridnum= P. GodefroyffiXP. MabeUse. G.C. III. 40:254. J.H. III. 53:339. — P. Fdwleri=P. callosum X P. Rothschildianum. — P. Frdseri=P. barbatum X P. hirsutissimum. — P. Frau Ida Brandt=P. loxP. Youngianum. — P. Galatea=P. Harrisianum x P. insigne Maulei. — P. Galatea mdjus=P. Harrisianum X P. insigne. J.H. III. 46:47. — P. Garret A. Hobart=P. Lathamianum X P. insigne Chantinii. — P. Gaudidnum=P. Curtisii X P. Harrisianum. — P. gemmiferum= P. Hookeree X P. purpureum. — P. Germinydnum=P. villosum X P. hirsutissimum. — P. Gigas=P. Harrisianum X P. Lawrenceanum. — P. Godseffidnum=P. Boxallii X P. hirsutissimum. — P. Goweridnum ==P. Lawrenceaniom X P. Curtisii. — P. Goweridnum formdsum= preceding. G.M. 43:78. — P. grdnde=V. LawrenceanumxP. villosum. — P. grdnde oesix=P. Argus X P. niveum. — P. Greydnum=P. Druryi X P. ciliolare. — P. Harlequin. — P. Harrisidnum=P. barbatum X P. villosum. F.S. 22: 2289, 2290. R.B. 22, p. 148. A.F. 6 : 557. — P. Harrisianum DaiUhieri =P. Dauthieri. — P. Harrisianum linedtum=V. barbatum X P. Boxallii. — P. Harrisianum Pitcheridnum. — P. Harrisianum super- bum=P. barbatum X P. villosum. — P. Harvey dnum=P. Leeanum X P. Stonei. — P. Hephxstiis=P. barbatum x P. Lawrenceanum. — P. Hera Mrs. Tautz=P. nitens X P. Spicerianum. — P. Hindednum= P. GodefroyaexP. insigne. G.C. III. 33:53.— P. Hinkidnum=P. Godefroyae X P. insigne. — P. H6bsonii=P. Lawrenceanum X P. philippinense. A.F. 14:1094. Gng. 7:242.— P. Holbrook Gaskell= P. Leeanum X P. Charlesworthii. — P. Honnorise=P. Druryi X P. Godefroyse. — P. Hornidnum=P. Spicerianum X P. superbiens. — P. HurreUidnum=P. Argus X P. Curtisii. — P. hybridum=P. villosum XP. barbatxun. — P. Ianthe=P. Harrisianum X P. venustum. — P. ingens=P. insigne X P. Rothschildianum. — P. Ino—P. Hay- naldianum X P. Carihamii. — P. intermedium=P. hybridum. — P. Io=P. LawrenceanumxP. Argus. — P. James GarfieU='P. regale XP. tonsum. — P. James K. Polk=P. Chamberlainianum X P. nitens. — P. javdnico-Spiceridnum=P. lutescens. — P. javdnico- guperbiens=P. superbiens X P. virens. — P. Joseph Donat=P. Ashburtonte X P. Spicerianum. — P. Josephianum=P. Druryi X P. Se- menta. A.F. 7:707.— P. Juno=P. callosum X P. Fairieanum. — P. Kim- ballidnum=P. Rothschildianum X P. Dayanum. — P. Krameridnum= P. oananthum X P. villosum. — P. Krishna=P. insigne X P. tonsum. — P. Ldforxadei = P. barbatum X P. insigne Chantinii. — P. Lanieridnum. — P. Lathamianum (Fig. 2759)=P. Spicerianum X P. villosum. O. 1910, p. 88. — P. Leander=P. Leeanum X P. villosum. — P. Lebaudydnum=P. Haynaldianum X P. philippinense. A.G. 23:387. — P. Ledouxix = P. callosum X P. Harrisianum. — P. Leeanum (Fig. 2760)=P. insigne X P. Spicerianum. Gng. 10:53. G. 25:112. F.R. 11:363. A.F.16:1730; 35 : 108. — P. Leeanum aureum. — P. Leeanum burfordiense. — P. Leeanum Clinkaberrydnum. G.M. 52:1008. — P. Leeanum giganteum = P. insigne X P. Spicerianum. A. F. 9:765. J.H. III. 64:29.— P. Lee- anum grandifldrum. — P. Leeanum lutescens. — P- Lee- dnum Masereelidnum= P. insigne Chantinii X P. Spicerianum. I. H. 36:77. A.F. 6: 555. A.G. 12:65.— P. Leeanum nigres- cens. — P. Leeanum Eulch ilium. — P. eednum superbum la a good form raised by Veitch. — cum=P. bellatulum 2761. Paphiopedilum Niobe. Hybrid. (See X P . Swanianum. supplementary list.) ( X H) 2472 PAPHIOPEDILUM PAPYRUS — P. Lobengula=P. BoxalliixP. Harrisianum. — P. Loewegrenia- num=P. Spicerianum X P. lo. — P. Lord Derby=P. Rothschild- ianum X P. superbiens. — P. lucidum—P. Lowii X P. villosum. — P. litridum=P. Lawrenceanum X P. villosum. — P. luridum purpureum. — P. lutescens=P. Spicerianum X P. javanicum. — P. luteum=P. Fairieanum X P. Spicerianum. G.C. III. 49:402. — P. Lynchianum =P. Spicerianum X P. Selligerum. — P. Macfdrlanei—P. callosum X P. Spicerianum. — P. macropterum=P. Lowii X P. superbiens. — P. Mdhlerae=P. Lawrenceanum X P. Rothschildianum. — P. Mdngoldii. — P. marmorophyllum=P. HookersexP. barbatum. — P. Marshal- lidnum=P. venustum x P. concolor. — P. M asereelianum=P. Leea- num.—P. Massaidnum=P. superciliare x P. Rothschildianum. — P. Maitdix=P. Lawrenceanum Hyeanum X P. callosum Sanderse. A.G.I25:211. G. 33:737.— P. Maitdix magnificum=pTeceding. G.C. III. 30: 129. — P. Mdynardii—P. purpuratum X P. Spicerianum. — P. Measuresidnum=P. villosum x P. venustum. Gn.W. 4:73. — P. Measuresidnum pavoninum=P. Boxallii X P. venustum. — P. Melan- thus=P. Hookerse x P. Stonei. — P. Memoria-Moensii—P. Harrisia- num x P. Spicerianum. — P. microchilum=P. DruryixP. niveum. G.Z. 28, p. 267. — P. Afinos=P. Arthurianum X P. Spicerianum. — P. Mile. Madeline Gayot=P. DayanumxP. insigne Chantinii. — P. Mme. Barbey=P. Lawrenceanum x P. tonsum. — Mme. Cappe=P. Harrisianum x P. Spicerianum. — P. M6rganix=P. superbiens X P. Stonei. I.H. 34:5. G.C. III. 41:66. J.H. III. 50:49.— P. M6r- tenii=P. Chamberlainianum X P. Leeanum. G.M. 47 : 103. — P. Mrs. Canham=P. superbiens X P. villosum. — P. Mrs. G. D. Ower=P. euperciliare X P. villosum. — P. Mulus=P. hirsutissimum X P. Lawrenceanum. — P. Niobe (Fig. 2761 )=P. Spicerianum x P. Fairieanum. — P. nitens=P. villosum X P. insigne Maulei. — P. nitens Gravesidnum. — P. nitens Sallieri=P. insigne X P. villosum. — P. nitens Sallieri Hyednum—P. insigne X P. villosum. — P. nitens Schlesingeri&num=P. Boxallii x P. insigne. — P. nitens Mons de Curte—P. BoxalliixP. insigne Chantinii. — P. Numa=P. Lawrenceanum x P. Stonei. — P. Oakes Ames=P. ciliolarexP. Rothschildianum. — P. obsciirum=P. barbatum x P. insigne. — P. cendnthum=P. Harrisianum X P. insigne. — P. oendnthum superbum= P. Harrisianum x P. insigne Maulei. — P. Olipia=P. tonsum x P. niveum.— P. Orester=P. Harrisianum X P. insigne. — P. Orion=P. cpncolor x P. insigne. — P.Orphanum=P. barbatum x P.Druryi. — P. Osbornei=P. Harrisianum superbum X P. Spicerianum. — P. Page- Anum=P. superbiens X P. Hooker®. — P. pdttens=P. Spicerianum X P. Dayanum. — P. PdteTsonii=P. Lowii x P. Dayanum. — P. pa- voninum=P. BoxalliixP. venustum. A.F. 7:707. — P. Pelias=P. Haynaldianum x P. insigne. — P. pellucidum=P. Dayanum x P. insigne. — P. Pelops=P. Niobe X P. Sementa. — P. picturdtum=P. Spicerianum X P. superbiens. — P. Pitcheridnum=P. Harrisianum Buperbum X P. Spicerianum. — P. Pitcheridnum WUliamsii=P. Harrisianum X P. Spicerianum. — P. Pleistochldrum=P. barbatum X P. virens. — P. Pleuroneiiron—P. venustum X P. villosum. — P. Plumerum—P '. Harrisianum X P. venustum. — P. politum=P. bar- turn x P. venustum. — P. Pollettidnum=P. callophyllum x P. osnan- thum superbum. — P. polystigmdticum—P. Spicerianum X P. venus- tum.— P. Premier=P. Cymatodes X P. Rothschildianum. — P. Pre- weUii=P. Harrisianum X P. Lawrenceanum.— P. Priapus=P. phil- ippinense X P. villosum. — P. Princess=P. Coffinetii x P. Fairiea- num.— P. punctdtum=P. Boxallii X P. Leeanum. Gt. 51 : 1503. — P. radibsum—P . Lawrenceanum X P. Spicerianum. — P. Rapparti- &num=P. Charlesworthii X P. Lathamianum. G.M. 46:723. — P. regale=P. insigne Maulei X P. purpuratum. — P. Reginaldidnum= P. insigne X P. siamense. — P. Robinsonidnum—P. Lawrenceanum X P. superbiens. — P. R6lfei=P. bellatulum X P. Rothschildianum. R.H. 1911:254. — P. R6lfei swper6wm=preceding. G.C. III. 36:399. Gn.W. 21:1041.— P. Rosettii=P. insigne Sanderianum x P. Mau- dise. — P. Rothschildiano-B6xallii=P. Rothschildianum X P. Boxal- lii.— P. Rothschildidno-Lawrenced,num=P . Rothschildianum X P. Lawrenceanum.— P. Rothschildidno-superbiens=P. Rothschildia- num X P. superbiens. — P. Rothschildidno-tonsum=P. Rothschildia- num X P. tonsum. — P. Rowallidnum=P '. villosum X P. venustum. — P. rubescens=P. Boxallii X P. cenanthum. — P. Sallieri=P. insigne ^XP. villosum. — P. Sallieri aureum. — P. Sallieri Hyeanum=P. insigne X P. villosum — P. Sallieri nigro-maculdtum. — P. Sallieri pic- tum. — P. Sallieri platypetalum. — P. Sanactseus etoniense=P. Actaeus langleyense X P. insigne Harefield Hall. — P. Sanderidno-Curtisii. G.C. III. 27:75. — P. Sanderidno-superbiens. J.H. III. 54:251.— P. Sappho=P. barbatum X P. Lowii. — P. Savagednum=P '. Harrisia- num X P. Spicerianum. — P. Schlesingeridnum=P. Boxallii X P. in- eigne. — P. Schroederx=P. Fairieanum x P. cenanthum. Gn.W. 7: 201. — P. Settlgerum=P. barbatum X-P. philippinense. G.Z. 22, p. 193.— P.SeUlgerummdjus=pTecedins. Gng. 11:1349. 18:370. A.F. 35:108. — P. SeUlgerum porphyreum=same. — P. Seegeridnum=P. Harrisianum x P. Spicerianum. — P. Shillidnum=P. Gowerianum XP. Rothschildianum. Gn.W. 16:57. — P. siamense=P. Apple- tonianum X P. callosum. — P. sibyrolense=P. Boxallii X P. insigne. — P. Siebertidnum=P. Dayanum X P. insigne. — P. Spicero- nlT>eum=P. Spicerianum X P. niveum. — P. superciliare=P. bar- batum X P. superbiens. — P. Susan Ames— P. Leeanum X P. nitens. — P. Svend Brun=P. Curtisii X P. Lowii. — P. Swanidnum=P. bar- batum X P. Dayanum. — P. Su)tnburnei=P. Argus X P. insigne Maulei. — P. Swinburnei magntficum=pTeceding. — P. Tautzianum nlgricans—P. barbatum X P. niveum. Gn. 71, p. 89. J.H. III. 54:179.— P. T. B. Haywood=P. DruryixP. superbiens.— P. tessellatum=P. barbatum X P. concolor. A.F. 7:707. — P. tessel- Idtum porpftj/reuTO=preceding. — P. tesselldtum rubens=P. barbatum XP. concolor. G.C. III. 39:19.— P. Thalia Mrs. Francis Wellesley =P. insigne X P. Schroederge. — P. Thayeridnum=P. BoxalliixP. Lawrenceanum. — P. Thetis— P. barbatum x P. venustum. — P. Thibautidnum=P. Harrisianum x P. insigne Maulei.— P. Thomp- 8onii=P. Spicerianum X P. villosum. — P. Th6rntonii—P. insigne X X P. superbiens. — P. Thdrntonii Bldmbergii=pTeceding. — P. Tityus =P. cenanthum X P. Spicerianum. — P. tonso-Arthuridnum=P. ton- sum X P. Arthurianum. — P. tonso-Chdrlesworthii=P. tonsum x P. Charlesworthii. — P. tonso-purpurdtum=P. tonsum X P. purpura- tum.— P. tonso-Sdnderse—P. tonsum x P. insigne Sanderse. — P. tonso-tillosum—P. tonsum X P. villosum. — P. Tracydnum=P. au- reumxP. Leeanum. G.M. 52:260. Gn.W. 22: 159.— P. Transvaal —P. Chamberlainianum X P. Rothschildianum. — P. triiimphans= P. nitens X P. cenanthum. G.M. 48:742. — P. triumphans magntfi- cMW=preceding. G.M. 47 : 794. — P. Troilus=P. insigne X P. nitens. — P. Turpe=P. barbatum X P. Argus.— P. T. W. Bond=P. hirsu- tissimum X P. Swanianum. — P. Umlauftidnum=P. insigne X P. Lawrenceanum. — P. Van Houttednum=P. barbatum X P. villosum. — P. Vernixium=P. Argus X P. villosum. — P. Vexilldrium=P. barbatum x P. Fairieanum. — P. Wallxrtidnum = P. Harris- ianum x P. villosum. — P. west field ense=P. Leeanum X P. Pollettia- num. Gn.W. 22:69. — P. Wiganidnum=P. Ashburtonse X P. Harris- ianum.— P. William McKinley. — P. Williamsidnum=P. Harrisi- anum X P. venustum. — P. Winnidnum=P. Druryi x P. villosum. — P. W. R. Lee— P. Rothschildianum X P. superbiens. — P. W. W. Lunt — P. Boxallii X P. insigne. — P. Youngidnum=P. philippinense XP. superbiens. — P. Youngidnum superbum=preceding. G. 28: 67. G.C. III. 40:439.— P. Zampa=P. hirsutissimum x P. Leeanum — Other names may be expected in the trade. GEORGE V. NASH. PAP'^RUS (an ancient name, coming through the Greek, and from which comes indirectly the word paper). Cyperaceae. A group of aquatic or subaquatic very ornamental plants, now considered to represent one polymorphous species; by modern authors they are placed in the genus Cyperus (which see, page 941, Volume II). The paper-reed, Cyperus Papyrus, Linn. (Papyrus antiqudrum, Link. P. sicula, Parl. Cyperus syriacus, Parl.), 2762. Papyrus antiquorum. Fig. 2762, is of the Nile region and widespread in Trop. Afr., also of Sicily. It is a glabrous perennial with a woody rhizome, reaching 10-15 ft. in height in favor- able regions, the tall sts. solitary or very few from each root and varying from nearly terete to acutely 3-an- gled: Ivs. all radical (only sheaths produced on the flowering culm), long and sedge-like: umbel compound on the top of the high culm, the primary rays many and 6-20 in. long, drooping; spikelets 1 x l^i in., with PAPYRUS PARASITE 2473 many spreading spikelets; wings of rachilla lanceolate, yello'w, falling early with the glumes; stamens 3, the anthers joined by a crested connective: nut or fr. ellip- soidal, 3-cornered, gray. Var. antiqudrum, Clarke (P. antiquorum, Willd. P. mossambicensis, Parl. Cyperus Papyrus, Linn., in part), has spikelets more or less deciduous above the 2 lowest or empty glumes, the wings of the rachilla obtuse and tardily falling, the connective not crested. This variety occurs in Trop. and N. Afr. and in Palestine. The papyrus is popular about large tanks or aquaria in greenhouses, and is often bedded out about ponds in summer. Far South it may stand in the open. It is much used in California for adornment of lawns, doing well even with a moderate supply of water. The fluffy heads make attractive house decoration. The papyri of the ancient Egyptians were made of strips taken from the culm or stem, from base to apex, between the cortex and the core, being laid side by side and beaten and pressed together to form a continuous surface. The paper-reed is known best to horticulture as a tender decorative plant, almost solely as an aquatic. It stands by itself, unequaled and unrivaled as such. It has tall dark green stems 10 or more feet high, depending on mode of culture, surmounted with an umbel of threadlike leaves or filaments, subdivided, and forming a most graceful and ornamental object. It is at home on the margin of a natural pond, or it may be planted in a tub or box of rich soil and placed in the artificial pond, but should be only slightly sub- merged. The plant should not be subjected to a spray from a fountain jet, as the weight of water will bend and break the stems. They may also be planted in groups similar to cannas, but should receive copious supplies of water, otherwise they will be dwarf and stunted. Propagation is effected by seed. Sow and treat seedlings similar to Cyperus alternifolius, the com- mon umbrella plant. Sow in early autumn or spring; seedlings will make good plants the same season. Winter the medium-sized plants in a cool greenhouse with all light and air possible, else the plants become drawn and weak and crippled with aphis. Large plants may be divided in spring. (William Tricker.) L. H. B. PARACHUTE FLOWER: Ceropegia Sandenonii. PARADISEA (said to be from Paradise, of which this plant is supposed to be a fit inhabitant). Often written Paradisia. Liliaceie. ST. BRUXO'S LILY. Hardy herba- ceous perennial, a single species, with small white flowers, native in the Pyrenees, Apennines, Alps, and Juras. St. Bruno's lily and St. Bernard's lily are advertised in catalogues of hardy herbaceous plants as Anther- icum Liliastrum and Anthericum Liliago, but the former should be called Paradisea Liliastrum; the latter is St. Bernard's lily. Both have white fls., borne in early summer on scapes a foot or more high. The fls. of both are tipped green outside. The Ivs. are linear, all radical, and a foot or so long. Both plants are natives of Cent. Eu., and by their popular names recall the life- saving monks of the Alps. It is no wonder, then, that they are often confused, although they belong to differ- ent subtribes. The Paradisea has larger fls., which are funnel-shaped rather than rotate, but the funda- mental differences upon which Paradisea is made a separate genus lie in the stamens. In Paradisea (accord- ing to Bentham A: Hooker) the anthers are attached at the middle of the back and are versatile; in Antheri- cum the anthers are attached at their base and are erect; moreover, the stamens of Paradisea are hypogy- nous; of Anthericum, perigynous. Following are some of the other 'differences as given by Baker in Journ. Linn. Soc. 15:286, 287, 301 (1877): Liliastrum, Bertol. (Anthericum LUidstrum, Linn. Czdckia LUidstrum, Andrz.), has 6-8 Ivs.: scape 12-24 in. high; raceme 2-10-fld.; bracts lanceolate; perianth 18-21 lines long; style 15-18 lines long; ovary and caps. 2763. Paramigyna monophylla. ( X H) oblong. — Anthericum Liliago, Linn., has 12-20 Ivs.: scape 6-15 in. high; raceme (sometimes panicled) 10-^20- fld. ; bracts linear; perianth 6-9 lines long; style 5-6 lines long; ovary and caps, globose. Some of the above char- acters may not hold for cult, plants. Var. major, Hort., is much larger and a better form than the type, growing 2-3 ft. high and bearing more and larger fls. Gn. 9 : 12 (as Anthericum Liliastrum var.) has fls. 2 in. long and 2% in. across. Var. giganteum, Hort., is probably the same. P. Liliastrum and its vari- eties are plants of secondary importance in the hardy border; they are of simple cult.; prop, by division, or by seeds sown as soon as ripe. WILBCELM MILLER. L. H. B.j PARADISE FLOWER: Strditzia Regime. PARAMIGYNA (from the Greek to mix with). Rutdceae, tribe CUrese. Evergreen climbing shrubs native to India and distantly related to the orange, but having fruits filled with gum. Leaves alternate, unifoliolate, articulated with the long petiole; spines recurved: fls. solitary or in clusters in the axils of the Ivs., large, white, 4-5-merous with 8-10 free stamens; ovary 3-5-celled with 1-2 ovules in each cell: fr. globose or elliptical, gummy, with a lemon- like peel. — Several species are known. The following is being tested as a stock by the U. S. Dept. of Agric. monophylla, Wight. Fig. 2763. An evergreen climb- ing shrub related to Citrus: Ivs. simple, alternate; spines recurved: fls. large, white, 4-5-merous, with free stamens: the young Ivs. are pendent, the twigs, spines, petioles and leaves are all more or less hairy. Talbot, For. Fl. Bombay, p. 200, fig. 122. Wight, 111. Ind. Bot,, pi. 42. Several other species occur in the Indo-Malayan region; two have recently been described from the Philippines: P. longi~ pedunculaia, Merrill, a scandent shrub, closely related to P. mono- phylla, from which it differs in its longer peduncles and several other characters; P. mindanaensis, Merrill, a nearly glabrous scandent shrub, with shining Ivs. and glabrous fr., usually curved. WALTER T. SWINGLE. PARA-TrOT: BerthoUeiia. PARASITE. A parasitic plant or animal is one which fastens itself upon another living thing, pene- trating the tissues of the host or organism attacked, thus usually deriving some or all of its nutriment there- from. Parasitic plants are numerous, but the larger part of them are to be found among the fungi and the bacteria. These two classes of organisms are the chief causes of plant diseases, — such as rusts, smuts, mil- dews, and blights. It is with such parasites as these that plant pathology is primarily concerned, and path- 2474 PARASITE PARKINSONIA ologists estimate that in the United States alone the annual losses to crops from parasitic fungi and bacteria amount to not less than $600,000,000. Parasitic fungi commonly grow within the tissues of the host plant, reaching the surface only when forming certain types of spores, or propagative bodies. Parasites invariably cause some disturbance of the normal development of the tissues. Notwithstanding this fact, it can be said that there are beneficial parasites, such as the bacteria producing the nodules, or tubercles, on the roots of legumes; and these nodules are important because of the fixation therein of atmospheric nitrogen, which ultimately becomes a source of nitrogen supply for the legume host. There are also parasites among flowering plants. Of these, two principal classes may be noted: (1) those green in color, or chlorophyl-containing, such as the mistletoe and the bastard toad-flax; and (2) those practically devoid of chlorophyl, such as the dodder and the broom-rape. The members of the first class are commonly supposed to be active photosynthetically, that is, they are able to manufacture their own car- bonaceous food-supply from carbon dioxide and water, while members of the second class must receive all or nearly all similar foods through the host plant. Plants living upon dead organic substance are termed sapro- phytes (which see). There are all gradations between parasites and saprophytes, especially among the fungi. Some are parasitic during their more active vegetative growth, and then continue their development saprophy- tically. Again, there are many fungi which, while generally parasitic, may be grown in the laboratory upon a variety of culture media, or cooked plant prod- ucts. Finally, there are those which ordinarily live saprophytically in the soil, but under certain condi- tions are able to induce disease epidemics. B. M. DUGGAB. PARATROPIA (Greek, turned away, probably with reference to the twining habit). Araliaceae. Twining trees or shrubs similar to Aralia, with compound Ivs.: infl. paniculate or racemose. The genus is now included in Schefflera by most authorities. P. Steltzneriana, Barb.-Rodr. The plant intro. into Calif, under this name grows up to 24 ft. high, evergreen: If. palmately 6-foliate; Ifts. leathery, oblong, short deltoid acumi- nate, petioles articulate at the petiole. PARDANTHUS: Belamcanda. PARJETARIA (from parietarius, belonging to walls, referring to its habitat). Urticacese. Annual or peren- nial herbs widely scattered in the temperate zones, scarce in the tropics. Fls. polygamous, cymose or glomerate at the axils; perianth of the hermaphrodite and male fls. deeply 4-lobed, rarely 3-lobed; lobes val- vate; of the female fl. distinctly tubulous at the base, lobes shorter; stamens 4, rarely 3; ovary free within the perianth; stigma penicillate, short or linear: achene included in the persistent perianth. Ten or more species. P. arborea, Ait., an erect shrub, with Ivs. perfectly white underneath, has been offered in trade- lists. This belongs in the genus Gesnouinia, differing from Parietaria in being small trees with the involucre subtending 3-fld. glomerate -panicled branches: fls. monoecious, the central pistillate, with the achene included in the tube of the involucre. Gesnouinia con- tains 2 species belonging to the Canary Isls. PARIS (the berry of the plant is compared to the apple of discord, while the four leaves surrounding it are likened to Paris and the three envious goddesses, Juno, Minerva, and Venus. Others think the name is derived from par, equal, referring to the agreement in number between leaves and floral parts, and this is probably the correct derivation). Liliacex. HERB-PARIS. LOVE-APPLE. Hardy small herbs. Differs from Trillium in having its floral parts in 4's instead of 3's. There are about 6 species altogether, and in some of them the floral parts are in higher num- bers than four. They resemble trilliums in being small hardy rhizomatous plants, found in mountainous coun- tries of the North Temperate Zone, and even in the arctic regions; also they have a single whorl of lys. at the top of the scape and a single fl., but in Paris the outer perianth-segms. are more herbaceous and calyx- like, while the inner ones are much narrower and less showy, being mere strips of petal, or even entirely absent. quadrifdlia, Linn. HERB-PARIS. TRUE-LOVE. FOUR- LEAVED GRASS. Height 9-12 in. : Ivs. all cauline, netted- veined (exceptional among monocotyledons) : peduncle rising 1-2 in. above Ivs. : perianth-segms. yellowish green, the 4 inner ones rather more yellow: berry bluish black. The dominant European type, scattered over Eu. and Siberia from the Arctic Circle to the Medit., in woods and shady places, but usually local. Gn. 31, p. 165. — • Fls. in spring or early summer. Rarely the Ivs. and floral parts are in 5's. WILHELM MILLER. PARfTIUM : Hibiscus elatus and H. tiliaceus. PARK: Landscape Gardening, page 1801. PARKIA (named after Mungo Park, born in 1771). Leguminbsse. Tall unarmed trees: Ivs. evenly bipin- nate; Ifts. very numerous, small: fls. in dense, long- peduncled, obovoid heads; calyx tubular, shortly 5-cleft; corolla tubular, somewhat cleft; stamens 10; ovary stalked: pod large, flat, strap-shaped, coriace- ous.— About 10 species, tropics of both hemispheres. P. timoriana, Merr. CUPANG. A very large tree, up to 115 ft. high, with vase-shaped, wide-spreading crown: Ivs. fernlike, with very small Ifts.: fls. small, white and yellow, in dense pear-shaped panicles: pods pendulous, flattened, black, 18 in. long. Timor and Philippines. Intro, in U. S. by Dept. of Agric. and offered for distribution. PARKINSONIA (John Parkinson, 1567-1629, Lon- don apothecary, author of the delightful "Paradisus Terrestris" ana "Theatrum Botanicum"). Legumi- nbsse. Tropical trees or shrubs, with a thin smooth bark and armed with simple or three-forked spines. Leaves alternate or fascicled, bipinnate, with 1-4 pairs of pinnae; the common petiole short, often obsolete or spinescent; stipules minute or none: fls. yellow or whitish, on slender pedicels in short, loose axillary or terminal racemes; calyx 5-parted, produced at base and jointed upon the pedicel; petals 5, clawed, the upper one within and broader than the rest, somewhat cordate, the claw pubescent and nectariferous on the inner side; stamens 10, free, the upper one gibbous outside; ovary several-ovuled, shortly stipitate: pod compressed, leathery, 2-valved, linear to linear-oblong, more or less twisted, tapering at both ends; seeds compressed, albuminous, with a crusty brown testa. — Five species. The dominant type, both in the wild and in cult., is P. aculeata, the Jerusalem thorn, which is probably a native of Amer., but is naturalized or cult, in all tropical countries. One species is S. African, one is S. American, and the remainder belong to the region between Texas and S. Calif. P. aculeata is a thorny evergreen tree with feathery drooping branches and handsome yellow fls. ; it is admirable for hedges, thrives in the driest places and can endure some cold. It has been cult, in European conservatories, being usually raised from imported seeds, but it is of difficult cult. P. Torreyana, though generally destitute of Ivs., is known in N. Mex. as "palo verde," from the bright green color of the branches. It stands drought even better than P. aculeata. These plants belong to the same tribe with such fine northern trees as Gleditsia PARKINSONIA PARONYCHIA 2475 and Gymnocladus and such southern kinds as Caesal- pinia, Poinciana, and Colvillea. They are little known horticultural!}'. A. Lfts. numerous; rachis flat, long. aculeata, Linn. JERUSALEM THORN. Small glabrous tree, up to 10 ft. tall, the slender zigzag branches often pendulous: Ivs. 8-16 in. long, with spiny petioles 3^-1 in. long; Ifts. numerous, very small, distant, linear to linear-oblanceolate, y^ m- long> inequilateral, on slen- der petioles; rachis winged, 3^-1 K ft. long: racemes slender, axillary-, 3-6 in. long; fls. fragrant, pendulous; calyx glabrous, tube very short, lobes oblong, reflexed, exceeding the tube; petals yellow, jHf-fHj m- l°ng» blades suborbicular or oval, longer than the claws; stamens and ovary pubescent: pods narrow, 2-4 in. long, con- stricted between the seeds; seeds oblong. Probably Trop. Amer. S.S. 3:131. AA. Lfts. few; rachis terete. Torreyana, Wats. Small tree, 18-25 ft. tall, with light green, smooth bark: young branches and Ivs. sparingly pubescent: Ifts. 2 or 3 pairs, oblong, obtuse, narrowed toward the scarcely oblique base, glaucous, about Mp- long: racemes terminal with rather long pedicels, jointed near the middle, but joint not evident until in fr. ; petals bright yellow, a prominent gland on the upper one: pod acute, more or less constricted between the very thick ventral suture. Valley of the Colo, and eastward through W. Texas. — Usually naked in the S.W. as the Ivs. are early deciduous. P. L. RICKER. PARMENTIERA (named after Ant. Aug. Parmen- tier, who intro. potato-cult, into France). Bignoniaceas. Shrubs or small trees with spirally placed fls. in 3's: fls. from the old wood on rather long peduncles, almost regular; calyx spathe-like, splitting up one side; corolla campanulate-funnelform, little crooked, limb sub-2-labiate, posterior 2-parted, anterior 3-parted, lobes all broadly spreading; stamens 4, scarcely exserted; ovary sessile, 2-loculate, many-seeded: fr. elongate-cylindrical or oblong: Ivs. alternate or subopposite, 3-foliate or some simple, common petiole often broad. Species 2, from Mex. and Panama. P. cerifera, Seem., from Panama, called "palo de vela," or candle-tree, from its long cylindrical frs. which are smooth and white like candles, has been offeied in the trade. PARNASSIA (after Mt. Parnassus). Saxifragaceae. GRASS OF PARNASSUS. Low-growing moisture-loving hardy perennial herbs of tufted habit, sometimes transferred to gardens. Glabrous, from short rootstocks, mostly with scape- like sts.: Ivs. simple and entire, mostly radical (or basal) and petiolate, 1 on the st. sessile and mostly small: fls. usually 1, white or yellow; calyx 5-parted; petals 5, withering, but deciduous; fertile stamens 5, alternating with the petals; staminodia present or represented by glands; ovary 1-celled; style very short or none; stigmas usually 4; ovules many: caps. 1-celled, with 4 placenta? projecting within, 4-valved (some- times 3-valved). — In wet or moist places intemperate and subarctic regions in the northern hemisphere, about 25 species. They are suitable for shady positions along the water's edge, and are prop, by seeds or divis- ion. They commonly grow about 6 in. high, but attain 2 ft. They bloom from June to Sept.; the petals are conspicuously veined with green lines. The plant which Dioscorides called "grass of Parnassus" is P. palustris, the only species common in Eu. This is perhaps the best one for cult., but they are all much alike in horti- cultural value. Parnassias prefer a peaty soil, but such is not necessary. The species are usually tenacious of life and are good perennials. The N. Carolinian species are hardy N. A. Petals not clawed. B. Rudimentary stamens 9-20 at the base of each petal. c. Scape-lf. more or less clasping. palustris, Linn. GRASS OF PARNASSUS. Rootstock short and erect: Ivs. ovate, usually cordate at the base; scape-lf. ovate or cordate, at or below the middle of st.: fls. ^2~1 in. across; rudimentary stamens 9-15 scales at the base of each petal. Eu., Asia., N. Amer., south to Mich, and Wyo. Gn. 41, p. 500; 78, p. 450. G.L. 26:365. A.G. 13:696. cc. Scape-lf. not clasping. californica, Greene (P. palustris var. califdrnica, Gray). Height 1-2 ft.: Ivs. ovate or ovate-oblong, cuneate at base, 1-2 in. long; scape-lf. very small, and borne above the middle: fls. 1 ^ in. across; rudimentary stamens about 20 at the base of each petal. Calif . BB. Rudimentary stamens 3-5 at the base of each petal. caroliniana, Michx. Rootstock erect, very short: height 8-16 in.: Ivs. ovate, broadly oval or orbicular, more or less cordate at the base; scape-lf. borne below the middle: fls. %-l % in- across; rudimentary stamens usually 3 hi each set. Swamps and low meadows, New Bruns. to Man., south to Va. B.M. 1459. AA. Petals clawed. B. Rudimentary stamens usually 3 at the base of each petal. asarifolia, Vent. Rootstock erect, short and thick: height 10-16 in.: Ivs. orbicular, kidney-shaped at the base, often 2-3 in. wide; scape-lf. clasping, borne at about the middle: petals entire. Wet places in high mountains of Va. and N. C. B.B. 2:184. BB. Rudimentary stamens 5-9 at the base of each petal. fimbriata, Konig. Rootstock ascending, short: height 1 ft. or less: Ivs. kidney-shaped to cordate-ovate; scape-lf. cordate, more or less clasping, at or above the middle: petals fringed below the middle. Colo, to Calif, and north in Alberta and to Alaska. P. nubtcola. Wall. The largest and coarsest of all the species, and lacks the delicate beauty and white petals of P. palustris: Ivs. elliptic-ovate; scape-lf. borne below the middle: petals shorter than in the other kinds as compared with calyx-lobes; rudimentary fila- ments 3, not topped by anthers. Himalayas. B.M. 6609. WILHELM MILLER. L. H. B.f PAROCHETUS (Greek, beside, and ditch 'or canal). Leguminpsx. A half-hardy perennial trailer, with foliage like the shamrock, but with each of the 3 Ifts. marked at the base with a handsome brown crescent; the pea-shaped fls. have a cobalt-blue standard and pink wings. It is desirable for hanging-baskets, pots and rockeries, and is said to bloom the year round. Parochetus is a genus of one species. It is allied to the clovers, sweet clover, medick, and rest-harrow, and differs from them in having a more acute keel, a 2- valved pod, and the Ifts. not stalked. It is a native of Trop. Asia and E. Afr., ascending the Himalayas from 4,000-13,000 ft. If seeds could be secured from the greatest altitude the plants might be hardy hi the N. This plant was formerly offered by A. Blanc, of Phila- delphia, under the name of shamrock-pea, or blue oxalis. It has recently been distributed by the U. S. Dept. of Agric. in an effort to give this attractive plant a place in American horticulture. communis, Hamilt. SHAMROCK-PEA. BLUE OXALIS. Height 2-3 in.: rhizome thread-like, wide-creeping: petiole 2 in. long; Ifts. obovate, emarginate, glabrous or slightly pubescent: peduncles 1-2-fld.; fls. J^-^in. across, axillary: pod straight, glabrous, linear, %-l in. long. F.S. 15:1575. p. L. RicKER.f PARONtCHIA (old Greek name used by Dioscorides, meaning whitlow- wort, or a cure for whitlow, a disease of the fingers or toes). Caryophyllacese; by some sep- 2476 PARONYCHIA PARSLEY arated in Illecebracese. WHITLOW-WORT. Annual and perennial little herbs, without showy flowers, adaptable to rock-gardens and borders. Plant tufted, low, with minute clustered fls. and silvery stipules; erect or diffuse, often dichotomously branching: Ivs. opposite, broad or narrow, entire, the margins flat or very rarely recurved; stipules prominent, scarious, shining: fls. minute, without petals, axillary or rarely in terminal cymes, usually hidden among the stipules; sepals 5, awned; stamens 5; staminodia 5 (sometimes wanting), bristle-like or reduced to teeth; style 2-cleft: fr. an urticle inclosed in the calyx. — Species about 50, largely in the Medit. region, but widely dis- tributed; several are native in the U. S. A very few are cult, in the hardy border. The two European species here given do not appear in the leading catalogues, domestic or foreign, but P. serpyllifolia is said to be much used for carpet-bedding abroad. P. argentea furnishes the Algerian tea. Allied to Herniaria, which see for generic differences. The species described below are perennials. They are of simple cult.; prop, by seed and division. A. Lvs. narrow, linear or awl-shaped. argyr6coma, Nutt. (Anychia argyrdcoma, Michx.). Erect or ascending perennial, 3-8 in. high, making broad tufts or mats, clothed with silvery appressed scale-like hairs: Ivs. linear; stipules silvery white, scari- ous, entire, usually shorter than the Ivs. : fls. in forking cymes; bracts large, silvery, membranous; staminodia minute. Rocky places. Maine and N. H. to Ga. and Tenn. — Also called silver chickweed, silverhead, and silver whitlow-wort. The northern form is sometimes separated as yar. albimontana, Fern., differing from the type (which occurs from Va. south) in having branches mostly floriferous rather than most of them sterile, Ivs. glabrate and with involute margins, and calyx-awns subulate and glabrescent. — P. argyrocoma is not difficult of cult, and is prized for rockeries, its silvery tufted appearance lending a distinct charm to the collection for this purpose. Prop, by seeds and division. dichdtoma, Nutt. Woody at the base, glabrous or nearly so, tufted, 4r-14 in. tall: stipules entire, often 5-6 lines long, tapering into a slender awn: fls. in fork- ing cymes; awns of the calyx-segms. divergent; stam- inodia of minute bristles. Dry soil, Md. and N. C. to Ark. and Texas. AA. Lvs. rather broad, obovate or nearly so. argentea, Lam. Prostrate diffuse perennial, with long branches: Ivs. ovate to oblong or lanceolate, acute: fls. lateral and terminal, dense, intermixed with Ivs.; bracts ovate, acute, much longer than the fl.; calyx- lobes semi-scarious, hooded, mucronate on the back near the apex. Common in dry places, Medit. region. — Foliage nearly glabrous. serpyllifolia, DC. Prostrate creeping perennial: Ivs. obovate, flat, rather fleshy: fls. terminal; calyx-lobes blunt. Arid parts of S. and E. Eu. — Foliage ciliate at the margin. A disputed plant. Probably a form of P. capitata, Lam. WILHELM MILLER. L. H. B.f PAROSELA. By some used instead of Dalea, p. 960. PARROTIA (after F. W. Parrot, a German natural- ist and traveler, afterward professor of medicine at Dorpat; 1792-1841). Hamamelidacese. Ornamental woody plants grown chiefly for their handsome foliage and also for their early appearing flowers. Deciduous shrubs or small trees: Ivs. alternate, short- petioled, crenate, with large caducous stipules: fls. small, in dense heads surrounded by an involucre of several bracts; petals wanting; calyx 5-7-lobed, embra- cing the pubescent ovary about half; stamens 5-15; styles 2: caps. 2-celled, with 2 beaks, dehiscent between the beaks, with 1 oblong shining seed in each cell. — Two species in Persia and the Himalayas. The parrotias are spreading shrubs or small trees with medium-sized orbicular to obovate-oblong leaves, small flowers in dense heads appearing before the leaves, and with fruit similar to those of the witch-hazel. The Persian species is hardy as far north as Massachusetts. Its chief beauty consists in the brilliant autumnal tints of the foliage, which changes to golden yellow, orange, and scarlet and remains a long time on the branches. The early appearing flowers with the purple pendulous stamens, are also attractive. The Himalayan species is more tender and its foliage turns only to pale yellow, but the flowers are somewhat more showy from their rather large white bracts. The parrotias grow in any well-drained soil and like a sheltered position. The wood is very close-grained, hard and strong, and there- fore P. persica bears the name, "ironwood." The tough pliable branches of the Himalayan species are exten- sively used for basket-work and are also twisted into thick ropes used for the construction of twig-bridges over the great rivers of its native country. Propaga- tion is by seeds and layers and also by greenwood cuttings under glass. persica, C. A. Mey. Shrub or small tree, to 15 ft., with spreading branches: Ivs. oval to obovate-oblong, obtuse, coarsely and crenately dentate above the mid- dle, dark green above, pubescent beneath when young, 3-4 in. long: bracts of fl.-heads covered with dark brown tomentum; stamens 5-7, pendulous, with linear-oblong, purple anthers: fr. with recurved beaks. N. Persia. B.M. 5744. Jacquemontiana, Decne (Fothergilla involucrata, Falc. Parrotiopsis involucrata, Schneid.). Spreading shrub or small tree, to 20 ft.: Ivs. orbicular, crenately toothed, stellate-pubescent on both sides, 2-4 in. long: heads many-fld., with spreading white bracts sprinkled with a purplish scurf on the back; stamens about 15, erect, with yellow, oval-oblong anthers. Himalayas. B.M. 7501. ALFRED REHDER. PARROT'S BILL: Clianthus. PARROT'S FEATHER: Myriophyllum. PARRYA (Capt. W. E. Parry, Arctic explorer). Crudferse. Four or 5 N. American and a few Asiatic low perennial herbs, with thick caudices, scape-like peduncles, narrow Ivs. and mostly racemose rose- colored or purplish showy fls.; sepals oblong and erect, the lateral ones gibbous at base; petals broad, clawed: pod broad and flat, mostly elliptic, with orbicular seeds. The parryas are alpine or boreal often arctic plants, and some of them will no doubt prove useful for the alpine garden. So far they are practically unknown in American gar- dens. The most likely species to be used in rock- gardening is P. Menziesii, Greene (Cheirdnthus Men- ziesii, Benth. & Hook.). It has a leafy scape 3-8 in. high, with a raceme of many fls., the petals nearly Kin. long and bright purple: Ivs. spatulate or oblanceolate, entire, densely tomentose. N. Calif., north to the Lower Columbia River. L jj B. PARSLEY (Petroselinum hortense, which see). Fig. 2764. A leaf vegetable, used for garnishing and flavoring. While indispensable in the market-garden, parsley is not usually found in the home-gardens in this country. 2764. Curl-leaved parsley. PARSLEY PARTHEXOCISSUS 2477 The addition of a bit of parsley foliage, finely chopped, heightens the flavor of soups, fish, and the like. The principal use of this vegetable, however, is for garnish- ing meats and fish and other dishes, and for this pur- pose it seems to be the vegetable par excellence, equally desirable in the home as on the hotel table. A very few plants of parsley will suffice for the home- garden, and any spot of good soil will do for starting them from seed. Sow as early in spring as practicable, either in an early hotbed or coldframe, or in open ground. Parsley seed germinates somewhat slowly, and the plants are feeble at first. In open ground, early sowing aids the plants to get ahead of the weeds. In larger patches the rows should be a foot apart, and seed sown rather thinly in shallow drills. Thin the plants to stand 4 to 8 inches apart, and cultivate same as carrots. Gather the leaves as needed. For use in winter and early spring, start plants in open ground in early fall, and on the approach of cold weather set them in a corner of the greenhouse bench, or in a box or keg filled with rich loam placed in a light kitchen or cellar window. Old roots, if still vigorous, may be lifted in autumn and treated the same as seedlings. Parsley will stand considerable frost. Although biennial or perennial, a new stock should be started every year. The plants usually bear better if the leaves are removed a few at a time rather than to have the entire crown cut at once. When the plant is a year old (sooner or later), it throws up seed-stalks, and produces seed in abundance, even under glass protection. By keeping the seed-stalks closely cut out, the season of leaf-yield may be pro- longed for a time. Seed is easily gathered and cleaned. The varietal differences lie chiefly in the foliage, which in some sorts is rather coarse, as in the Plain or Common, or more finely divided, as in the Curled, Double Curled, Moss Curled, and Fern-leaved. T. GREKEB. L. H. B.f PARSNIP (Pastinaca saliva, which see). Fig. 2765. A favorite vegetable, cultivated for its edible root, which is used mostly in winter and spring. The average home-gardener thinks much of quick results. The drawback to parsnip-growing, in his esti- mation, is the length of time the crop requires for its development. When seed is sown, in early spring, the harvest seems a long way off. To offset this disadvantage, however, parsnips become available as green material when other things fresh from the garden are very scarce or entirely absent, that is, in open spells in winter, and in the very early days of spring. A crop of good straight roots may not be so easily produced as a crop of smooth carrots, but when once grown it does not burden one with much responsibility in regard to storage or keep- ing, which is an important point in its favor. The roots may be left in the ground where they grew or stored in moss or sand in the cellar. The winter freezing in the ground does not injure them; in fact, some growers suppose that it improves the quality. This ability to withstand the winter makes them valuable also as food for cattle, sheep, hogs and poultry in the early spring, in case the table or market should not call for them at that time. If dug hi autumn, they may be stored in a cool, moist cellar (or buried) as other roots are kept. The best soil for parsnips is a clean rich loam, which offers no obstruction to the uniform expansion of the roots. Straight deep roots must have a deep soil. Pre- pare it the same as for beets or carrots, or for any other garden crop. The seed should be strictly fresh, as it soon loses its vitality. Seeds germinate rather slowly and therefore the ground should be clear of roots and seeds of weeds, otherwise the young plants may be smothered. Sow hi early spring, preferably with a garden seed-drill, J^ to 1 inch deep, in rows 15 to 20 inches apart hi the garden, and somewhat farther hi field culture, in the place where the plants are to stand. Be prompt in thinning the young seedlings to 6 to 12 niches apart in the row; at the same time pull up or cut out all weeds. The free use of the hand wheel-hoe will keep the patch clean until the entire surface of the ground is covered with foliage, thus preventing further growth of weeds. Tillage may then cease. Seed is easily grown. Plant the roots in spring in any good soil, and gather the seed-heads in summer when most of the seeds hi them are mature. Dry them on sheets, and then thrash or strip. The varieties of parsnip are few hi number. For] shallow, stony or other- wise unfavorable soils the best varieties are the Round or Early Short Round; for better soils the Half-Long, Student, or Hollow Crown; and for deep clean soils the Long Smooth. T. GREINER. L. H. B.| PARSONSIA (after John Parsons, a Scotch naturalist). Apocynaceae. Twining shrubs with op- posite Ivs. : calyx 5-parted, glandular or naked, or with 5 scales; corolla salver- shaped, tube short; lobes overlapping to the right; 2765. Parsnip, stamens inserted in the tube, filaments often twisted, anthers conniving over and adhering to the stigma, cells spurred and empty below; disk of 5 lobes or scales; ovary 2-celled, cells many- ovuled. — About 20 species in Trop. Asia, Austral., and New Zeal. The genus as here defined is that of Robert Brown; some recent authors have revived the older genus of the same name of Patrick Browne, making it supplant the usual species of Cuphea (p. 913). P. Pdddisonii, R. T. Baker, is reported as under cult. It is a woody climber with glabrous sts., attaining a height of about 15 ft., and with stalked obovate- lanceolate Ivs. This species produces tubers the size of beet-root, which are used as food by colonists as well as natives of New S. Wales. R.H. 1901:322 (note). PARTHENIUM (ancient name transferred to this plant). Compdsitae. About a dozen perennial or annual, mostly canescent or pubescent, rather coarse herbs or shrubs of the western hemisphere, only rarely taken to gardens and apparently not domesticated. The heads are only inconspicuously rayed and not specially showy, the ray-florets about 5. P. integrifblium, Linn., the AMERICAN FEVERFEW, or PRAIRIE DOCK, has been offered as an ornamental hardy herbaceous perennial, but the plant is desirable only for foliage effects; and the fls. are not attractive. It is pictured in B.B. 3:411 and described hi American manuals; it grows on dry soils from Minn, to Ga. : stout, to 4 ft., from a tuberous rootstock: Ivs. ovate or ovate-oblong: heads many in a dense corymb, the rays whitish. The so-called "guayule rubber" of Mex., P. argentdtum, Gray, the difficulty of growing which has caused much discussion, is reported as being under cult, in Mexico City by M. Calvino. It is unknown hi horticulture. PARTHENOCISSUS (Greek, parthenos, virgin, and kissos, ivy; translation of its French name). Syn. Quinaria, Psedera. Vitacex. Woody vines planted chiefly for their handsome foliage. 2478 PARTHENOCISSUS PARTHENOCISSUS Deciduous or rarely evergreen shrubs climbing by means of tendrils with adhesive tips, rarely these tips not developed: bark with lenticels; pith white: Ivs. alternate, digitate or 3-lobed, long-petioled : fls. in peduncled compound cymes opposite to the Ivs., often crowded at the end of the branches and forming pani- cles, perfect, rarely polygamous; calyx minute, petals 5, rarely 4, spreading; stamens 5 or 4; style short and thick; a distinct disk wanting; ovary 2-celled, each cell with 2 ovules: fr. a 1-4-seeded berry. — About 10 species in N. Amer., Mex., E. Asia, and Himalayas. Formerly usually classed with Ampelopsis, which see for the differentiating characters between the allied genera. These are high-climbing vines with handsome three- to seyen-foliolate or three-lpbed leaves assuming beauti- ful tints in autumn and with small greenish flowers in cymes or panicles followed by bluish black or black berries. They are particularly valuable as they cling firmly to walls and trees by means of adhesive tips of the tendrils without any other support. P. quinquefolia, P. vitacea, and P. tricuspidata are hardy North, while the other species are more or less tender; P. Henryana may be grown in the greenhouse for its beautiful foliage. In humid and good soil all species grow vigorously and soon cover large spaces. Propagation is by seeds or by hardwood cuttings or by layers, but P. tricuspidata and its varieties are usually grown from greenwood cuttings. A. Lvs. 5-foliolate. B. Young branchlets terete: Ivs. green. vitacea, Hitch. (P. quinquefolia, Graebn. Ampeldpsis quinquefolia var. vitacea, Knerr. A. dumetdrum, Hort. P. dumetdrum, Rehd. P. laciniata, Small). Usually low and rambling over bushes, occasionally climbing high into trees, glabrous: tendrils with 3-5 twining branches only exceptionally ending in adhesive disks: the young growth green : If ts. oval or elliptic to oblong, acuminate, usually cuneate at the base, dark green and lustrous above, lighter green and usually lustrous below, coarsely serrate, glabrous, 2-5 in. long: cymes dichotomous on peduncles l%-3 in. long, opposite the Ivs.: fr. bluish black, about J^in. thick, usually slightly bloomy, with 3-4 seeds. June, July; fr. July, Aug. E. Canada and 2766. Parthenocissus quinquefolia. — Virginia creeper. ( X K) New England to Assiniboia and from Mich, south to Texas and Colo. B.M. 2443. S.T.S. 1:89. Var. lacin- iata, Rehd. (P. quinquefolia var. laciniata, Planch.). Lfts. smaller, narrower, more deeply and incisely ser- rate, usually yellowish green. Wyo. to New Mex. Var. macrophylla, Rehd. (Ampeldpsis macrophylla, Hort. A. quinquefdlia var. latifdlia, Dipp. A. Rdylei, Hort.). Lfts. elliptic, large, dark green, sometimes 8 in. long and 5 in. broad. Garden form. Var. dubia, Rehd. (P. hirsuta, Graebn.). Young branchlets and Ivs., at least on the veins beneath, more or less hairy. — This species is somewhat hardier than the following, but does not cling to walls; it may be used for covering trellis-work. The foliage is darker green and more lustrous. quinquefdlia. Planch. (Vitis quinquefolia, Lam. Ampelopsis quinquefolia, Michx. A. hederdcca, DC. A. virginidna,Kort.). VIRGINIA CREEPER. Fig. 2766. High- climbing: tendrils with 5-8 branches ending in adhesive tips : the young growth purplish : If ts. elliptic to obovate- oblong, acuminate, usually cuneate at the base, coarsely and often crenately serrate, dull green above, glaucescent beneath: cymes crowded into terminal panicles: fr. bluish black, slightly bloomy, about J^in. thick, with usually 2 or 3 seeds. July, Aug.: fr. in Sept., Oct. New England south to Fla. and Mex., west to Ohio, 111., and Mo. Em. 2:535. S.T.S. 1:88. Var. murorum, Rehd. (P. quinquefdlia var. latifdlia, Rehd. P. radicantissima, Graebn. Ampeldpsis murdlis, Hort. A. radicantissima, Schelle). Tendrils with shorter and more numerous, usually 8-12 branches: Ifts. generally broader, the outer ones usually broadly ovate and rounded at the base. This is a more southern form and somewhat tenderer. Var. minor, Rehd., is similar to the preceding variety, but Ifts. smaller and broader, oval to orbicular-ovate, rounded at the base, on slender stalks about J^in. long. Var. hirsuta, Planch. (P. hirsuta, Small. Ampelopsis hirsuta, Don. A. Graebneri, Bolle. A. pubescens, Schlecht. A. quin- quefdlia var. radicantissima, Rehd. A. radicantissima, Hort.). Young branchlets, infl. and the Ivs. soft-pubes- cent, at least beneath, usually bright red while young, otherwise like the type. Gt. 48:1462. Var. Saint-Paillii, Rehd. (P. Saint^Paulii, Graebn. Ampeldpsis Saint- Paillii, Hort. ) . Young branchlets and Ivs. beneath pubes- cent: Ifts. oblong-obovate, cuneate at the base, short- stalked or nearly sessile, sharply serrate with usually spreading teeth: panicles elongated: tendrils with 8-12 branches: aerial rootlets often present. Iowa and 111. to Mo. and Texas. R.H. 1907, p. 567. Var. Engelmannii, Rehd. (P. Sngelmannii, Graebn. Ampeldpsis Sngel- mannii, Hort.), does not differ much from the typical form except in its generally smaller foliage. — The species is a very valuable climber of vigorous growth with the foliage changing to bright scarlet in fall; the vari- eties hirsuta, Saint-Paulii, and murorum, are particu- larly adapted for covering walls; they cling firmly and form a dense, close covering like P. tricuspidata, but grow more quickly and more straight upward than that species. BB. Young branchlets quadrangular: Ivs. usually with white markings above and purplish below. Henryana, Diels & Gilg (Vltis Henryana, Hemsl. Ampeldpsis Henryana, Hort.). Climbing to 20 ft. or more : tendrils with 5-7 slender branches with adhesive tips.: Ifts. 5, stalked, elliptic-ovate to cuneate-obovate, acuminate, toothed usually only above the middle, glabrous or hairy on the midrib beneath, 1H-2J^ in. long, bright scarlet when unfolding, changing finally to dull reddish green, with silvery markings along the veins above, purple or purplish beneath: fls. in narrow panicles, 3-6 in. long: fr. dark blue, usually 3-seeded. Cent. China. G.C.III. 37:309; 39:354. Gn. 69, p. 341. M.D.G. 1908:259. R.H. 1907, p. 211. R.H.B. 32:213. — This is a very handsome but tender species; the coloring of the Ivs. is more beautiful when grown in the greenhouse or outdoors in a partly shaded place; in the full sun the Ivs. lose finally the white markings and the purple color. AA. Lvs. partly 3-lobed and partly S-foliolate. tricuspidata, Planch. (Vltis incdnstans, Miq. Ampe- ldpsis tricuspidata, Sieb. & Zucc. A. Veltchii var. robusta, Hort. A. Hdggii, Hort. A. incdnstans, Hort. A. japdnica, Hort.). JAPANESE IVY. BOSTON IVY. Fig. 2767. High-climbing: tendrils short, much-branched, with adhesive tips: Ivs. slender-stalked, cordate, either simple and 3-lobed with acuminate serrate lobes, to 10 in. long, or 3-foliolate; Ifts. ovate, sessile, serrate,. PARTHENOCISSUS PASPALUM 2479 shining and glabrous on both sides or puberulous on the veins beneath: cymes mostly on short branchlets, axillary or terminal, narrow and somewhat elongated: fr. bluish black, bloomy. June, July; fr. in Sept., Oct. Japan, Cent. China. B.M. 8287. G.C. II. 14:664. A.G. 15:94. B.H. 27:244. R.H. 1877, p. 176. Gng. 1:373; 4:353. R.B. 1877:11. Var. Veitchii, Rehd. (P. Veitchii, Graebn. Vitis Veitchii, Hort. Ampeldpsis Veitchii. Hort.). Lvs. smaller, crenately serrate, pur- ple while young; Ifts. with only 1-3 coarse teeth on each side, the lateral ones inside without teeth. Apparently only a juvenile form which may pass later into the type. Var. purpurea, Hort. (Ampeldpsis Veitchii var. pur- piirea or atropurpurea, Hort.). Lvs. dark purple, not changing to green. Var. Ldwii, Rehd. (Ampeldpsis Lou-ii, Hort. Vitis inconstans var. Lbwii, Hort.). Lvs. small, %r\yi in. long, mostly entire or 3-foliolate, often broader than long, ineisely dentate or almost palmately lobed with very unequal teeth, apple-green, purplish when young, changing to deep red in autumn. Gn. 71, p. 516. J.H. III. 56:335. R.H.B. 33:388. A.F. 30: 1238. M.D.G. 1908:261. Var. aurata, Hort. Lys. marbled with golden yellow and green. — This species is a hardy and very useful climber, clinging firmly and covering walls densely; the glossy foliage stands dust and smoke well, and turns to a brilliant orange and scarlet in fall. Probably the favorite of all hardy vines in cities. The varieties Veitchii and Lowii are much slenderer and smaller and are very effective as basket plants (M.D.G. 1892:8). P. heptaphyUa, Small (P. texana, Rehd. A. quinquefolia var. hepta- phylla. Bailey. A. heptaphylla, Buckl.). High-climbing: tendrils with 2-4 branches without disks: Ifts. usually 7, oblong-obovate, cuneate at the base, coarsely serrate, 1 }^-2 }^ in. long: cymes dichotomous, opposite the Ivs. Texas. S.T.S. 1:90. — P. himalayana, Planch. (Ampe- lopsis himalayana. Royle). Allied to P. tricuspidata: Ifts. 3, ovate to oblong-ovate, the lateral ones rounded or subcordate at the base, coarsely serrate, 2-5 in. long: cymes about as long as the Ivs. Himalayas. Var. rubrifilia, Gagnep. (Vitis mbrifolia, LeVeill6 & Vaniot !. Lfts. smaller and broader, purplish while young: cymes smaller. W. China. — P. keierirens, Rehd. Allied to P. quinquefolia. Tendrils with 5-8 slender branches: Ivs. obovate or elliptic, coarsely serrate, bright yellowish green on both sides, 2^4 in. long, glabrous or hairy on the veins below: fls. in large terminal panicles. Cent. China. — P. Thomsonii, Planch. (Vitis rubrifolia. Laws. P. Henryana var. glaucescens, Diels & Gilg. Ampelopsis Thomsonii, Hort.). Ten- drils with 3^5 disk-bearing branches: Ifts. 5, slender-stalked, elliptic- ovate to elliptic-oblong, cuneate, serrate, glabrous or slightly pubes- cent on the veins beneath, bluish green, 1 J£-3 in. long: fls. in dichot- omous cvmes 1 12-3 in. broad, opposite the Ivs.: fr. black. Hima- layas, Cent. China. Gn. 63, p. 203. J.H.S. 28, p. 216, fig. 184. — A very handsome slender vine; foliage purplish while young, and pur- plish red in fall. Tender. ALFRED REHDER. PARTRIDGE-BERRY: MitcheOa repent. Sometimes applied to Gaultheria procumbent. PASANIA (the vernacular name of one of the species in Java). Fagacex. Ornamental trees grown for their handsome foliage. Evergreen: winter-buds with few foliaceous scales: Ivs. short-petiqled, entire or dentate: staminate fls. in upright catkins, with a rudimentary ovary; stamens usually 12, much longer than the 4-6-lobed calyx; pistillate fls. solitary or 3-5, on separate catkins or at the base of the staminate catkins; ovary 3-celled, with 3 cylindric styles stigmatic only at the apex: fr. a 1- seeded nut, surrounded at the base or wholly inclosed by the cup, its scales distinct and imbricate or connate into concentric rings. — About 100 species in S. E. Asia, one in Calif. Closely related to Quercus, from which it is easily distinguished by the upright staminate catkins and the cylindric styles stigmatic only at the apex. — The pasanias can be grown in wanner temperate regions only and are little known in cult. Their treat- ment and propagation is the same as that of the ever- green species of oak. densifldra, Oerst. (Quercus densiflora, Hook. & Am.). TAXBARK OAK. Evergreen tree, to 70, occasionally to 100 ft., with spreading branches forming a dense, broad, round-topped head: Ivs. oblong-obovate or oblong, acute, remotely dentate, with short acute callous teeth, fulvous-tomentose when young, at maturity glabrous and pale green above, rusty tomentose beneath and finally glabrous and bluish white: fr. peduncled; acorn ovoid or ovate, %-l^ in. long, embraced only at the base by the shallow cup coated with linear spreading scales. S. Ore. to Calif . S.S. 8:438. G.F. 5:523.— One of the most beautiful oaks of the Pacific states. The bark is exceedingly rich in tannin and is used for tanning leather. The only representative of the genus in Amer. 2767. Parthenocissus tricuspidata. ( X M) P. cornea, Oerst. (Quercus cornea. Lour.). Evergreen tree: Ivs. oblong, acuminate, glabrous and green beneath, 2—1 in. long: frs. in short spikes; cup broadly turbinate with small prominent scales embracing the hemispherical flat-topped nut. S. China. H.I. 27:2665. The nut is edible. Young plants have proved hardy at Washington, D. C. — P. cuspidata, Oerst. (Quercus cuspidata, Thunb. Castanopsis cuspidata, Schottky). Evergreen tree, to 40 ft., with slender branches: Ivs. ovate to oblong, acuminate, cre- nately serrate toward the apex or entire, glabrous at length, 1 J4~3 J4 in. long: fr. in short spikes; cup ovate, inclosing the acorn. S. Z. 1:2. G.C. III. 12:233. S.I.F. 1:34. Very desirable ever- green tree of vigorous growth- Var. varitgata, Hort. Lvs. smaller, with a broad, irregular, creamy white margin. G.C. II. 12:233. — P. glabra, Oerst. (Quercus glabra, Thunb.). Evergreen tree: Ivs. oblong, obtusely acuminate, entire, glabrous, light green beneath, 3-^6 in. long: fr. in spikes, ripening the second year: the oblong nut embraced about one-third by the cup. Japan. G.C. II. 14:785; in. 16:377. R.H. 1858, p. 351. S.Z. 1:89. S.I.F. 1:32.— P. thaldssica, Oerst. (Quercus thalassica, Hance). Evergreen tree: Ivs. elliptic to obovate-oblong, acuminate, serrate toward the apex or entire, glaucous-tomentulose beneath, 3-;5 in. long: fr. in short spikes; cup with appressed scales, embracing one-fourth to one- t£ird of the nut. Cnma. S.I.F. 1:33. J^^j, REHDER. PASCALIA: Wedelia. PASPALUM (Greek, paspalos, an ancient name for millet). GranAnex. Spikelets 1-fld., plano-convex, mostly rounded, subsessile and overlapping in 2 rows on one side of a narrow or winged axis forming slen- der racemes. About 150 species in the warmer parts of both hemispheres, but more abundant in Amer., form- ing an important part of the pampas and campos of S. Amer. P. dilatatum, Poir., of Argentina, a coarse species 3-5 ft. high, is sparingly cult, as a forage grass in the Gulf states and has become naturalized through- out the S. P. compressum, Nees, CARPET-GRASS, a native, 6 in. to 2 ft. high, with creeping sts. and rather broad Ivs. makes a good lawn grass in the Gulf region; it is less difficult to eradicate than Bennudargrass. P. distichum, Linn. Extensively creeping rather wiry perennial, the erect fl.-culms 6-12 in., bearing a pair of divergent spikes. Occasionally used for lawns in the South. S. U. S. to S. Amer. P. membranaceum, Lam. Slender perennial with few to several spikes, the silvery spikelets arranged on a broad ribbon-like axis, banded with drab and orange. S. Amer. Cult, in Eu. under the name P. elegans; worthy of intro. A. S. HITCHCOCK. 2480 PASSERINA PASSIFLORA PASSERINA (Latin, sparrow, from the supposed resemblance of the seed to the head of a sparrow; or possibly after one of the Passerinis, two Italian bota- nists). Thymelseacese. Heath-like shrubs sparingly used in horticulture: Ivs. small, decussately opposite: fls. hermaphrodite, in axillary, branched spikes; perianth- tube ovoid, with 4 spreading lobes often about as long as the tube; stamens 8; ovary subsessile, glabrous, 1-celled. — About 5 species from S. Afr. P. filifdrmis, Linn. Branches puberulent: Ivs. acerose-linear, 3- cornered, rather acute: spikes terminal, many-fid.; fls. rose; calyx-lobes oval or oblong. S. Afr. PASSIFLORA (i. e., passion flower). Including Disemma and Tacsonia. Passifloracese. PASSION- FLOWER. Highly interesting herbs, shrubs, or trees, most of the cultivated kinds climbing by means of tendrils, with flowers of odd structure; some of them produce edible fruits. Mostly vines, but some species erect: Ivs. alternate, rarely opposite, the petiole usually gland-bearing, the blade entire, digitately lobed or parted, stipules some- tunes present: tendrils (sometimes wanting) lateral, simple: fls. solitary or racemose, mostly axillary, on articulated and often 3-bracted peduncles, mostly hermaphrodite, with colors in yellow, green, blue and red, often large and showy; calyx with short tube (also with long tube when Tacsonia is included), the lobes or petals 4 or 5 and narrow, often colored inside, bearing on the throat a simple double or triple showy fringe or crown; petals 4 or 5 (sometimes wanting, or 3), attached on the calyx-throat; stamens 4 or 5, the filaments joined into a tube in which is the gynophore or stalk of the ovary, the anthers linear-oblong and versatile; ovary oblong or nearly globular, with 3 styles and 3 many-ovuled parietal placentae: fr. large or small, berry-like, many-seeded, oblong or globular; seeds flat, mostly ovate, with a fleshy aril. — Species probably 250-300. By some, the genus Tacsonia is separated from Passiflora, but it is here combined; it differs in having an elongated rather than very short calyx-tube or hypanthium; An- dean species. See Tacsonia. With the exception of a few Malayan, Chinese and Australian species, the true passi- floras are natives of tropical America, some of them in the sub- tropical and warm tem- perate parts. Many of them are cultivated as curiosities, and some of them for the beauty of their flowers and for their festooning foliage. The fruit is of many kinds, in most cases not edible. The ovary is 2768 Fruit of Maypop.— Passiflora supported on a long incarnata. (X%) stalk, which is inclosed in or usually united with the tube formed by the union of the bases of the filaments. The structure of the fruit is well shown in Fig. 2768; the remains of the floral envelopes have broken from the attachment on the torus and rest on the fruit. A dozen passifloras occur in the United States, and one of them, P. lutea, grows naturally as far north as southern Pennsylvania and Illinois. From Virginia south, the Maypop, P. incarnata, is a very common plant in fields and waste places. Both these species are herbaceous perennials. In cultivation, the passifloras have been considerably hybridized, and they are also confused with Tacsonia. In 1871 Masters enumerated 184 species (Trans. Linn. Soc. 27), but many species have been discovered since that time. Most of the passion-flowers are yellow or green in color of envelopes, but there are fine reds in P. racemosa, P. Raddiana,P. coccinea, P. alata,P. vitifolia, and others. The species known to gardeners are few, although many kinds are or have been in cultivation by fanciers and in collections. They usually require much rafter room in greenhouses. According to G. W. Oliver, P. cserulea and Constance Elliott are both hardy at Washington. Not many of the tender species and hybrids are grown to any great extent in this country. P. alata and P. quadrangularis are desirable climbers for a roomy warm greenhouse. P. quadrangularis var. variegata seems to flower quite as freely as the green- leaved one. Passifloras are propagated from cuttings of the half-ripened growth, with bottom heat. P. racemosa and P. Loudonii are a trifle difficult to root from cuttings; the growths should be as ripe as possible for this purpose. Keep the under surface of the leaves flat on the sand while rooting. The native P. incarnata grows very freely at Washington, becoming more or less of a weed and hard to eradicate. The peculiar charm of these plants lies in the odd flowers, the parts of which were fancied by the early Spanish and Italian travelers to represent the imple- ments of the crucifixion (whence both the technical and popular names) . Legend and superstition have attached to these plants from the first. The ten colored parts of the floral envelope were thought to represent the ten apostles present at the crucifixion, Peter and Judas being absent. Inside the corolla is a showy crown or corona of colored filaments or fringes, taken to repre- sent the crown of thorns, or by some thought to be emblematic of the halo. The stamens are five, to some suggestive of the five wounds, by others thought to be emblematic of the hammers which were used to drive the three nails, the latter being represented by the three styles with capitate stigmas. The long axillary coiling tendrils represent the cords or the scourges. The digitate leaves suggest the hands of the persecutors. The following sketch of the passion-flower legend is from Folkard's "Plant Lore, Legends and Lyrics," and the illustration (Fig. 2769) is also produced from that book : "The passion-flower (Passiflora cserulea) is a wild flower of the South American forests, and it is said that the Spaniards, when they first saw the lovely bloom of this plant, as it hung in rich festoons from the branches of the forest trees, regarded the magnificent blossom as a token that the Indians should be converted to Chris- tianity, as they saw in its several parts the emblems of the passion of our Lord. In the year 1610, Jacomo Bosio, the author of an exhaustive treatise on the Cross of Calvary, was busily engaged on this work when there arrived in Rome an Augustinian friar, named Emman- uel de Villegas, a Mexican by birth. He brought with him, and showed to Bosio, the drawing of a flower so 'stupendupusly marvelous,' that he hesitated making any mention of it in his book. However, some other drawings and descriptions were sent to him by inhabi- tants of New Spain, and certain Mexican Jesuits, sojourning at Rome, confirmed all the astonishing reports of this floral marvel; moreover, some Domini- cans at Bologna engraved and published a drawing of it, accompanied by poems and descriptive essays. Bosio therefore conceived it to be his duty to present the Flos Passionis to the world as the most wondrous example of the Croce trionfante discovered in forest or field. The flower represents, he tells us, not so directly the Cross of our Lord, as the past mysteries of the Passion. It is a native of the Indies, of Peru, and of New Spain, where the Spaniards call it 'the Flower of the Five Wounds,' and it had clearly been designed by the great Creator that it might, in due time, assist in I'ASSIFLORA PASSIFLORA 2481 the conversion of the heathen among whom it grows. Alluding to the bell-like shape assumed by the flower during the greater part of its existence (i.e., whilst it is expanding and fading), Bosio remarks: 'And it may well be that, in His infinite wisdom, it pleased Him to create it thus shut up and protected, as though to indicate that the wonderful mysteries of the Cross and of His Passion were to remain hidden from the heathen people of those countries until the time preordained by His Highest Majesty.' The figure given to the Passion- flower in Bosio's work shows the crown of thorns twisted and plaited, the three nails, and the column of the flag- ellation just as they appear on ecclesiastical banners, etc. 'The upper petals,' writes Bosio in his description, 'are tawny in Peru, but in New Spain they are white, tinged with rose. The filaments above resemble a blood-coloured fringe, as though suggesting the scourge with which our blessed Lord was tormented. The col- umn rises in the middle. The nails are above it; the crown of thorns encircles the column; and close in the center of the flower from which the column rises is a portion of a yellow colour, about the size of a reale, in which are five spots or stains of the hue of blood, evi- dently setting forth the five wounds received by our Lord on the Cross. The colour of the column, the crown, and the nails is a clear green. The crown itself is sur- rounded by a kind of veil, or very fine hair, of a violet colour, the filaments of which number seventy-two, answering to the number of thorns with which, accord- ing to tradition, our Lord's crown was set; and the leaves of the plant, abundant and beautiful, are shaped like the head of a lance or pike, referring, no doubt, to that which pierced the side of our Savior, whilst they are marked beneath with round spots, signifying the thirty pieces of silver.1 " Passifloras as gardener's ornamental plants. (J. J. M. Farrell.) These plants constitute a large family or group of evergreen climbers. They will show to best advantage when they can be planted out permanently in a warm conservatory and where they can have comparatively large space to climb. They may also be grown in pots when the conditions do not permit other methods of handling. Passifloras may be propagated either by cuttings or seeds. They may be rooted from young growth taken any time from the middle of January until April. These cuttings are placed in a warm propagating-bed, and kept shaded and moist, and in a short time they will root ; they are also inserted in small pots in a mixture of loam, peat, and sand, in equal parts, and plunged in the propagating-bed. When rooted, the cuttings are potted off, using a compost of loam four parts, leaf- mold two parts, well-rotted cow-manure one part, and which should contain enough sand to keep it porous. Keep shaded until they become well established, when they may be given a place well up to the glass in full sun. The passifloras are also readily raised from seed sown in spring, and the plants potted off as soon as big enough. The plants will stand a night temperature of 65° to 70° : this can be increased until it reaches 80° to 85° for a day temperature with sun. Give ventilation daily, taking into account the state of the weather; while they like plenty of heat, they will not do well in a stagnant atmosphere; therefore, give air on all favor- able occasions. Even,- morning in bright weather, give them a good syringing, as this is a great aid in keeping them in vigor and supplying the desired atmospheric moisture, but this does not mean a very humid atmos- phere. By pinching, the plants are made to produce several growths. These plants can be shifted until they are in 10- or 12-inch pots. The growth may be trained on pillars or along rafters of the conservator}'. When planted out in about 8 or 10 inches of soil, passi- floras will cover a very large space, but sometimes to such an extent as to obscure the whole glass. The best place is on a back wall in some house where they may ramble at will. Keep well syringed until they show flower, when syringing should be discontinued until 2769. Old conception of the passion-flower. From Folkard'a "Plant Lore," and there taken from Zahn. they are through blooming. After the plants have covered the position allotted to them, all that is required is the regulation of the young growth, so as to keep them from becoming entangled. In winter they may be cut back and the exhausted soil replaced by good rich compost. Thev will not need a high temperature, doing well in 55° to~60° at night. When they start off into growth again, keep raising the temperature until it has reached the figures already stated. They may now be given manure water regularly and throughout the growing season. Keep down thrip, red-spider, and mealy-bug by syringing and sponging. The edible-fruited passifloras. (F. W. Popenoe.) The principal species of Passiflora that are cultivated for their fruits in tropical and subtropical regions are P. quadranguLaris, the granadilla, granadilla real of Costa Rica, barbadine of the French colonies, pasion- aria of Cuba, maracujd melao of Bretzil; P. edulis, also called granadilla, as well as passion-fruit; and P. laurifolia, the water-lemon of the British West Indies, pomme-liane of the French colonies. While P. quad- rangularis is a common garden plant in tropical America, it is not so extensively grown in any region as is P. eduLis in Australia. In the United States these species can be grown only hi the warmest regions; in California P. edulis is the only one that is success- fully cultivated in the open, the other two species being much more susceptible to frost; in south Florida all three can be grown, although the tropical species are sometimes injured by frost. 2482 PASSIFLORA The true granadilla (P. quadrangularis) is a strong rapid-growing climber, frequently planted for orna- ment in tropical regions and allowed to cover arbors and pergolas. Its brownish yellow ovoid fruits are sometimes 8 inches in length, and within the thin brittle pericarp is a large number of small flattened seeds surrounded by gelatinous pulp and subacid juice. When green, they are sometimes boiled and used as a vegetable; when ripe, the acidulous pulp is refreshing, and is used to prepare cooling drinks, or is eaten with a spoon directly from the fruit. The passion-fruit (P. edulis) is considerably smaller than the granadilla, rarely larger than a hen's egg, and dull purple when ripe. Its pulp is slightly more acid than that of the granadilla, but of very pleasant flavor, and highly esteemed in Queensland and New South Wales, where the plant is cultivated commercially. It is used for flavoring sherbets, for confectionery, for icing cakes, for "trifles," — a dish composed of sponge cake, fruits, cream, and white of egg, — for jams, and for other table purposes. The pulp is also eaten directly from the fruit, after adding a little sugar, or is used to prepare a refreshing drink, by beating it up in a glass of ice-water and adding a pinch of bicarbonate of soda. The plants are grown on trellises about 6 feet high; at the top of the trellis is nailed a crosspiece 18 inches long, from the ends of which are run two wires, the long branches being allowed to hang down over these to the ground. The rows are placed 15 feet apart, with the vines 15 feet apart in the row. The young plants must be protected in regions subject to frost; they begin bearing the second year, sometimes producing a few which have not yet come into bearing. Like P. quad- rangularis, this species is often grown as an ornamental plant, and makes an excellent and rapid-growing cover for fences and trellises. The passifloras are easily propagated by seeds or cuttings, the latter method being preferable in most cases. Seeds should be removed from the fruit, dried in a shady place, and planted in flats of light soil. They do not germinate very quickly, but the young plants are easily raised, and may be set out in the open ground when six months to a year old. Cuttings should be taken from fairly well-matured shoots, and should be about 6 inches in length. They are easily rooted in sand, no bottom heat being required. Cuttings of P. edulis will often fruit in pots at the age of one to two years, and form very interesting greenhouse plants. While this species usually fruits prolificacy, P. quad- rangularis sometimes requires hand-pollination when grown outside its native habitat. adenophylla, 22. adenopoda, 2. alata, 12. alba, 21, 24. amabilis, 8, 14. atomaria, 21. aucubi folia, 11. brasiliana, 12. Buchananii, 17. cserulea, 24. coccinea, 16. Decaisneana, 13. edulis, 19. eriantha, 31. exoniensis, 29. fulgens, 16. gracilis, 1. grandiflora, 24. Hahnii, 3. INDEX. ignea, 30. incarnata, 18. insignis, 26. Jamesonii, 28. kermesina, 9. latifolia, 12. laurifolia, 15. Lawsoniana, 12. ligularis, 7. Loudpnii, 9. Lowei, 7. lutea, 5. maculifolia, 6. manicata, 30. mascarensis, 12. mauritiana, 12. mixta, 31. mollissima, 32. oviformis, 12. Parritffi, 25. phoenicea, 12. princeps, 8. pruinosa, 20. quadrangularis, 11. racemosa, 8. Raddiana, 9. sanguined, 17. Smythiana, 33. tini folia, 15. trifasciata, 4. tubiflora, 32. Van Volxemii, 27. variegata, 11. relutina, 16. violacea, 23. vitifolia, 17. Watsoniana, 10. 2770. Granadilla — Passiflora quadrangularis. ( X 1A~ fruits the first season, and continue in profitable pro- duction four to six years, when they must be renewed. By proper pruning, two crops a year can be secured, in regions not subject to frost. The most suitable soil seems to be sandy loam, although other soils will grow the plant successfully. Manure should be supplied liberally. In Australia, the profits of passion-fruit cul- ture are reported to run from $100 to $300 an acre annually. Because of the short life of the vines, they are often planted as a catch-crop in young orchards 1. PASSIFLORA proper, with short hypanthium or calyx- lube (species 1-24)- A. Corona with sharp folds, and crinkled at the edge. B. Fls. apetalous, usually with no bracts. 1. gracilis, Jacq. Slender annual: st. terete, glabrous: Ivs. rather small, broadly deltoid-ovate, very shallowly and ^— bluntly 3-lobed: fls. solitary, pale green or whitish, considerably sur- passed by the Ivs., the calyx-lobes oblong or lanceolate, the filiform rays of the corona in a single row and equal, the inner corona a lacerated membrane: seeds with 6 elevated ridges. Brazil. B.R. 870.— Fl. about across. Easily grown either indoors or in the open, as a garden annual. BB. Fls. petaliferous, with large bracts. 2. adenopoda, Moc. & Sesse. Lvs. glabrous, cordate. 3-nerved and 5-lobed, the lobes ovate-acuminate and somewhat serrate: bracts cut-serrate. Mex. to S. Amer. — Once advertised in the U. S. 3. Hahnii, Mast. Tall, glabrous climber, with very slender terete pendulous branches: Ivs. ovate, peltate at base, strongly 3-nerved and each of the side nerves ending in a tooth, but the If.-margin otherwise entire but bearing minute red glands: stipules kidney-shaped, dentate, purplish, nearly or quite 1 in. across: fl.-bracts 2, entire: fl. about 3 in. across, solitary, whitish and pale green, the corona shorter than the envelopes, the outer filaments being orange-yellow, about %in. long. Mex. B.M. 7052. R.H. 1869:430 (as Disemma Hahnii). G.C. II. 12:504. BBS. Fls. with small or minute petals and also small or minute bracts. c. Lvs. oblong-ovate. 4. trifasciata, Lem. Lvs. 3-lobed to one-third or one- half their depth, the margins entire, with an irregular PASSIFLORA PASSIFLORA 2483 reddish purple band along each of the 3 midribs: fls. yellowish, fragrant, small. Brazil. I.H. 15:544. G.Z. 12:96. — Interesting for its ornamental foliage. cc. Li-s. broader than long. 5. lutea, Linn. WILD YELLOW PASSION-FLOWER. Perennial herb, 5-10 ft. tall or long, glabrous or very nearly so: Ivs. broader than long, shallowly and bluntly 3-lobed, cordate at base, the petiole glandless: fls. solitary or in pairs, about ?.iin. across, green- ish yellow: fr. a globular berry about J^in. diam., smooth, purple at maturity. Pa. south and west, in thickets and more or less damp places. B.R. 79.— It has been offered by dealers in native plants. 6. maculiffilia, Mast. Notable for its spotted or variegated foliage : branches slender and wiry, puberulous: Ivs. short-stalked, roundish cordate, 3-nerved, with 3 shallow lobes at the truncate apex, green and yellow-blotched above, purplish and glandular beneath: fls. in pairs, cream- colored, nearly 1 in. across, the peduncles with 3 remote minute bracts; calyx cup-shaped, with acuminate recurved lobes; petals shorter than calyx-lobes or sepals; crown plicated and with hatchet-shaped processes. Venezuela. G.C. III. 32:suppl. Nov. 8. AA. Corona not crinkled or folded on the edge, plain or nearly so. B. Bracts grown together. 7. ligularis, Juss. (P. Ldrvei, Heer). Woody below, tall, branchy: Ivs. large, cordate, ovate- acuminate, neither lobed nor toothed: fls. soli- tary, the petals and sepals greenish, the corona white, with zones of red-purple: fr. as grown in S. Calif . described as oval, larger and more oblong than that of P. edulis, with a hard shell and buff- brown in color. Trop. Amer. B.M. 2967. — Young foli- age has metallic hues. BB. Bracts free. c. Tube of fl. evident and cylindrical, swollen at the base. 8. racemosa, Brot. (P. princeps, Hort. P. amdbilis, Hort., in part). Lvs. glabrous, usually truncate at base, mostly deeply 3-lobed, the margins entire: fls. 4 in. or more across, the narrow petals deep red and wide- spreading, the short, upright crown purplish; calyx keeled on the lower side; fls. solitary, but the peduncles usually 2 from an axil, becoming racemose on the ends of the shoots: bracts 3: fr. described in cult, as cylindri- cal-ovate, greenish vellow at maturity. Brazil. B.M. 2001. B.R. 285. L.B.C.1:84. Gn. 39:168. G.L. 24: 222. — A fine old species and a parent of various garden hybrids. One of the best of the red-fld. passifloras. Summer and fall. 9. Raddiana, DC. (P. kermesina, Link & Otto). Rather slender climber, glabrous: Ivs. shallow-cordate, 3-lobed and sparingly dentate, purplish beneath: fls. solitary, with very narrow distinct sepals and petals of a bright crimson-red, which are wide-spreading at first but finally turning almost straight back; crown black- purple, upright, with smaller whitish filaments inside. Summer and fall. Brazil. B.M. 3503. B.R. 1633. G. 1:453. F.W. 1874:161.— An old and well-known spe- cies: said to prop, from cuttings of old well-formed wood. P. Loudonii, Hort., is considered to be a hybrid of this and P. racemosa. 10. Watsoniana, Mast. Sts. wiry, purplish, with leafy dentate stipules: Ivs. shallow-cordate, rather broader than long, 3-lobed to the middle, with a few teeth: peduncles 1-fld.; fls. about 3 in. across, the sepals linear and shaded with violet ; petals also very narrow, lilac ; crown of many rows of filaments, violet with bars of white below the middle, the inner and shorter set deep violet. Probably Brazilian. G.C. II. 26:648, 649. I.H. 36:74. Gn. 33:194. A.F. 6:571.— Good grower. cc. Tube of fl. very short, thick or fleshy in substance. D. Sts. and branches strongly l^-angled or even winged: Ivs. simple. 11. quadrangularis, Linn. GRANADILLA. Fig. 2770. Tall strong cumber, glabrous: Ivs. ovate or round-ovate, cordate at base, mu- cronate, entire, the petiole with 2 or 3 pairs of glands: stip- ules large: fl. large (3-5 in. across) and interesting, fragrant, 2771. Passiflora edulis. (XJi) with ovate sepals and petals (the former white within and the latter reddish), the crown composed of 5 series of white-and-purple parti- colored filaments, of which the outermost exceed the floral envelopes: fr. oblong, 5-9 in. long, yellowish green, pulpy and edible. Trop. Amer. B.R. 14. R.H. 1898, p. 569. Gn. 51, p. 313; 59, pp. 4, 7. G. 33:161.— Widely grown in the tropics, and variable, both as a vine and for its edible frs. Frequent in collections of economic plants in the N. It is a good cumber for covering a greenhouse roof. Best results are secured if the temperature does not fall below 50°. The fr. ripens in summer. The fls. usually need to be hand-pollinated if fr. is wanted on house-grown plants. Var. variegate, Hort. (P. variegata, Hort. P. aucubifolia, Hort.), has foliage blotched with yellow. 12. alata, Dry. St. winged: Ivs. glabrous, oval to ovate, somewhat cordate at base, the margin often undulate but otherwise entire, the petiole with 2 pairs of glands: fl. 3-4 in. across, very fragrant, the interior of the sepals and petals carmine; corona nearly or quite as long as the envelopes, the numerous filaments parti- colored with red, purple, and white: fr. yellow, ovoid- pointed, about 5 in. long, very fragrant and one of the most edible. S. Amer. B.M. 66. G.C. III. 15:19; 22:449-51; 43:187. R.B. 20, p. 104 (see R.H. 1902, pp. 287-9, for taxonomic discussion). — An excellent old species, ripening its fr. in midsummer. It is very vari- able, and is perhaps one form of a polymorphous spe- cies including the granadilla. P. pheenicea, Lindl. (B.R. 1603), P. brasiliana, Desf., P. onformis, Roem., P. latifolia, DC., P. mauritiana, Thouars, and P. mascarensis, Presl., are all considered to be forms of this species. P. Lawsoniana, Hort., not Mast., is a hybrid of P. alata and P. racemosa: Ivs. oblong-oval, somewhat peltate, entire: fls. 3-4 in. across, brownish inside, the corona with filaments in several series. 13. Decaisneana, Hort., is perhaps a hybrid of P. quadrangularis and P. alata: fls. bright carmine inside, about 4 in. across; corona as long as or longer than the 2484 PASSIFLORA PASSIFLORA envelopes, the more or less tortuous filaments banded with deep blue and white: Ivs. bearing about 6 glands. R.H. 1855:281; 1902:288 (as P. Decaisneana and P. quadrangularis var. Decaisneana, where a botanical and historical discussion by Andr6 may be found). F.S. 8:848. DD. Sts. and branches terete, or at least not winged. E. Lvs. not lobed. 14. amabilis, Hook. St. slender and terete: Ivs. ovate, very sharp-pointed, entire, rather thin, the petiole with about 2 pairs of glands: fl. solitary, about 3 in. across, the sepals and petals alike and bright brick- red within; corona or white filaments in 4 series, the 2 inner series being short. Brazil. B.M. 4406. Gn. 55:272. 15. laurifolia, Linn. (P. tinifdlia, Juss.). JAMAICA HONEYSUCKLE. WATER- LEMON. St. terete, plant glabrous: Ivs. oval to oval-oblong, thickish, entire, with 2772. Passiflora caerulea, the commonest cultivated passion-flower. (X%) a short sharp point; petiole with 2 glands at apex: fl. about 2^2 in. across, white, with red spots or blotches; corona somewhat exceeding the petals or at least about equaling them, in 3 series, violet with white bands: fr. about 3 in. long, yellow, spotted with white, edible, according to Lindley, but the plant cult, under this name in S. Calif, said to have frs. not yellow spotted white, but much like those of the plant there known as P. ligularis(seeNo.7). Trop. Amer. B.R. 13. B.M. 4958. 16. coccinea, Aubl. (P. velutina, DC. P. fulgens, Walhs). Glabrous: Ivs. ovate and coarsely toothed; petioles with 2-3 pairs of glands: fl. scarlet; corona orange: fr. pulpy, edible. S. Amer. G. 28:512. H.F. II. 6:6. — A free-flowering species, of good constitution. EE. Lvs. 3-7-lobed. F. Blossoms bright red. 17. vitifdlia, HBK. (P. sanguinea, Smith. Tacsonia Buchdnanii, Lem.). St. shrubby, climbing, terete: Ivs. cordate-ovate in outline, deeply 3-lobed or divided and the divisions coarsely toothed, strong-veined, usu- ally pubescent beneath: fl. 4-6 in. across, nearly flat, the linear-oblong sepals and petals bright scarlet, the sepals with a spine at the tip; outer corona filaments red, the inner ones white, all of them upright or spread- ing and much shorter than the envelopes. Brazil. B.M. 7936. F.M. 1878:317. G.C. III. 8:213; 43:187. G.Z. 28:145. F.W. 1868:289.— An old species, but not common in cult. Said not to be free-flowering. A very brilliant species. FF. Blossoms white, greenish, purplish, or variously tinted, but not red. G. Rays of corona (or the outer ones) about as long as the floral envelopes: If .-margins strongly serrate (except sometimes in No. 20). 18. incarnata, Linn. WILD PASSION-FLOWER. MAY- POP. Fig. 2768. Tall-climbing strong perennial vine, glabrous or nearly so, becoming 20-30 ft. long: Ivs. 3-lobed to about half their depth, broadly cordate- ovate in outline, serrate, the petiole bearing 2 glands near the top: fl. axillary and solitary, about 2 in. across, white, with a light purple corona band at its center: fr. oblong, about 2 in. long, with 3 sutures, yellow when ripe, edible. Dry places, Va., south and west. B.M. 3697. Mn. 9:17.— A weedy plant, but offered by dealers in native plants. With protection, the roots will survive the winter as far north as Baltimore, and the strong herbaceous vines make a fine cover for arbors and verandas. Easily grown from seeds. 19. edfilis, Sims. Fig. 2771. More woody and stronger: Ivs. large, deeply 3-lobed and serrate: fl. white, often tinted with purple, the rays nearly as long as the envelopes, white for the upper half but purple at the base: fr. globular-oblong, thickly purple-dotted when ripe, the rind hard. Brazil. B.M. 1989. R.H. 1857, p. 224; 1883, p. 489. Gn. 50:414; 62, p. 259. G.C. 111.23:101. A.G. 13:120.— Runs into several forms. The fr. is fragrant and edible, but there is little pulp, the seeds occupying most of the interior. Readily grown from seeds. Naturalized in tropical countries. 20. pruindsa, Mast. Climbing, the sts. terete, gla- brous: Ivs. broad in outline, 3-lobed beyond the middle, the lateral lobes diverging, the margins remotely glandular-toothed, glaucous beneath: stipules very large and If .-like, cordate, 2 in. long: fls. 3 in. across, pale or pearly violet, the corona of numerous filaments, the outermost of which are nearly as long as the petals and are deep violet at the base, yellowish in the middle and curly at the top. British Guiana. G.C. III. 22:393 (desc.). — First described in 1897. GG. Rays distinctly shorter than envelopes: If. -margins nearly or quite entire. 21. ilba, Link & Otto (P. atomaria, Planch.). St. terete: stipules very large and If .-like: Ivs. broad- ovate and somewhat cordate, rather shallowly 3-lobed, glaucous beneath, the margins entire: peduncles exceed- ing the Ivs., 1-fld.; fl. little more than 2 in. across, clear white: fr. obovoid, the size 'of an egg, green at first, but becoming yellowish. Mex. to S. Amer. G.C. 11.19:693. R.H. 1883, p. 201; 1884:36. G.W. 14, p. 151. 22. adenophylla, Mast. By some thought to be probably identical with P. alba: Ivs. glabrous, cordate at base, 3-lobed nearly to middle, glandular in the sinus, the lobes oblong and apiculate; petiole with sessile glands: fls. white, the peduncle equaling or exceeding the petiole; sepals bearing a subulate append- age near apex on the back; petals shorter than sepals and narrower. Mex. 23. violacea, Veil. Tall, glabrous, with drooping branches: Ivs. straight at base and somewhat peltate, with 3 long, narrow lobes, of which the side ones stand at nearly right angles to the central one, the margins PASSIFLORA PASSIFLORA 2485 entire or with a few teeth in the bottom of the sinus, the under surface slightly glaucous: fl. about 3 in. across, the petals and sepals lilac-pink inside (sepals ending in a long spur), the numerous filaments of the corona 2773. Passiflora (Tacsonia) Van Volzemii. Central leaflet broader than common. ( X H) white-tipped and barred with violet and white. Brazil. B.M. 6997. R.H. 1885:468. G.W. 14, p. 151. 24. caerillea, Linn. Fig. 2772. Slender, but a strong grower, glabrous and somewhat glaucous: Ivs. divided nearly to the petiole into 5 lanceolate or lance-elliptic entire sharp-pointed segms. of which the 2 lower ones are sometimes again lobed: fl. 3-4 in. across, slightly fragrant, greenish white, the sepals tipped with a short point, the rays of the corona in 2 series, blue at the tip, white in the middle and purple at the base, the styles light purple. Brazil. B.M. 28. Gn. 31, p. 421; 34, p. 114; 46, p. 369. G. 3:611. J.H. III. 47:57.— The commonest of passion-flowers in American green- houses, and now represented by several named forms and hybrids. It can be grown in the open in the S. and in Calif, as far north as San Francisco. Var. grandiflora, Hort., is only a somewhat larger-fld. form. Constance Elliott (P. caeriilea var. dlba), is a white-fld. fragrant form. G.C. III. 43:186. Gn. 31:420. There are hybrids with P. Raddiana, P. racemosa, P. alata, and others. P. caerulea grows readily from seeds. II. TACSONIA, the hypanthium or calyx-tube long (}4in. long and usually much more). A. Fls. orange or rosy orange. 25. Parritae, Bailey (Tacsonia Pdrri- tse, Mast.). Lvs. deeply 3-lobed, glabrous above, pilose beneath, lobes narrow and entire; stipules entire, subulate-acuminate: fl. with a long and slender tube, glabrous, swollen at the base; sepals winged and with points, rosy-orange; petals oblong and flat, shorter than the sepals, orange; corona double, the outer row of tooth-like projections. Colombia. G.C. II. 17:225. I.H. 35:41— Named for Senor Parra ("better known as Parrita"), through whom it was intro. AA. Fls. scarlet or rose-colored. B. Bracts beneath thefl. not united. c. Lvs. simple or not lobed. 26. insignis, Hook. (Tacsonia insignis, Mast.). Pilose: Ivs. ovate-lanceolate, subcordate, dentate, rugose or blistered above and red-downy beneath, the stipules dissected: fl. about 6 in. across, violet, rose or crimson; tube cylindrical, swollen at the base, downy; sepals about twice longer than the tube, lance-oblong, spurred at the end; petals similar in shape, obtuse; corona of one series of short threads, blue and white. Probably Peruvian. G.C. 1873:1113. F.S. 20:2083, 2084. B.M. 6069. cc. Lvs. 3-lobed or divided. D. Foliage glabrous at maturity. 27. Van Volxemii, Triana & Planch. (Tacsonia Van Volxemii, Hook.). Fig. 2773. Sts. slender and slightly pubescent: Ivs. cordate-ovate in outline, deeply 3- lobed, the lobes long-lanceolate-acuminate, serrate: fls. 5-7 in. across, bright red with short green calyx-tube that has a swollen base, the acute calyx-lobes green externally; corona an inconspicuous toothed rim. Colombia. B.M. 5571. G.C. 1866:171. G.Z. 9:144.— Less showy than some others, but a well-known species. 28. Jamesonii, Bailey (Tacsonia Jdmesonii, Mast.). Lvs. suborbicular, 3-lobed, glabrous: fl. large, bright rose or coral-red, with a cylindrical tube 4 in. long: fr. said to be green at maturity, oval. Peru. DD. Foliage downy beneath at maturity. 29. exoniensis, Hort. (hybrid of P. Van Volxemii and P. moUissima). Fig. 2774. Lvs. downy, cordate, ovate-oblong, divided nearly to base into 3 lanceolate, serrate segms. : fls. 4J^-5 in. across; sepals brick-red out- side, brilliant rose-pink within; throat violet; tube white inside, 2^ in. long. Resembles P. Van Volxemii in having peduncles as long as Ivs., linear stipules, free downy bracts, filamentous corona near base of tube 2774. Passiflora (Tacsonia) exoniensis. 2486 PASSIFLORA PASSIFLORA and violet color of throat. Resembles P. mollissima in having downy Ivs., long flower-tube, color of fl. and aristate sepals. BB. Bracts beneath the fl. more or less united, c. Lf .-lobes short, obtuse or nearly so. 30. manicata, Pers. (P. ignea, Hort. Tacsonia mani- cata, Juss.). RED PASSION-VINE. Fig. 2775. St. nearly terete, finely pale-pubescent: Ivs. coriaceous, 3-lobed to about the middle, finely serrate, the lobes broad- oblong, pale beneath; stipules ovate, 1 in. across, notched, clasping: fls. solitary on slender axillary pedun- cles, brilliant scarlet, 4 in. across; perianth-tube 3^m. long, inflated and 10-ribbed at base; outer corona of many short blue filaments, some of which surround the column; inner corona of an inflexed membrane: fr. egg-shaped or almost globular, yellow-green, the skin thick; seeds many in a thin pulp. Colombia, Ecuador, and Peru. B.M. 6129. G.F. 7:265 (from which Fig. 2775 is reduced). R.H. 1903:356. — This plant seems to be grown with difficulty in greenhouses, but it is at home in the open in S. Calif., climbing into the tops of trees and blooming profusely, making a brilliant dis- play. It grows with great vigor and rapidity, renewing itself freely from seeds. cc. Lf. -lobes long-acute. 31. mixta, Linn. f. (Tacsonia mixta, Juss. T. eri- dntha, Benth.). Glabrous or somewhat pubescent: Ivs. orbicular-ovate, thick, 3-lobed to the middle, the lobes long-acute and serrate : fl. 3-4 in. across, rose-pink, the oblong sepals not equaling the green scarcely saccate tube; corona a short multiple rim or disk. Andes. — It is reported that the P. mixta that has been grown in Calif, is P. mollissima. 32. mollissima, Bailey (Tacsbniamottissima,HBK.). Pubescent: Ivs. cordate-ovate in outline, very pubes- cent beneath, the lobes extending nearly to the base of the blade and ovate-lanceolate in shape and serrate, the stipules laciniate: fl. about 3 in. across, rose-color, the green tube exceeding the sepals and swollen at the base; corona a short rim. Andes. B.M. 4187. B.R. 32:11. F.S. 2:78. G. 28:17— P. tubifldra, offered about 20 years ago in Calif, (and now apparently lost) is said not to differ much from P. mollissima. 33. Smythulna, Hort. Seedling of P. mollissima or hybrid with it, with very brilliant orange-scarlet or rosy-crimson fls. G.C. III. 12:705. Gn.W. 8:149. P. aldio-cseriilea (P. Pfordtii, Hort.) is a hybrid from seed of P. alata by pollen of P. cserulea: Ivs. much like those of P. alata, 3-lobed: fls. fragrant, beautiful; sepals white; petals pink; corona of 3 series, the outer filaments being white at tip, blue-purple in the middle, and black-purple at the base. B.R. 848. R.H. 1847: 121. — P. dlbo-nigra, Hort. Said to be a hybrid of P. alata and P. Raddiana: Ivs. 5-lobed: petals white;, corona white above and blackish purple below. Gt. 1:68.— P. AUardii, Hort.=P. quadrangularis X P. cserulea Constance Elliott, raised by Mr. Allard of the Botanic Garden, Cambridge, England: Ivs. usually with 3 broad lobes: free-flowering; petals white shaded pink; corona deep cobalt-blue. — P. ambigua, Hemsl. Possibly a hybrid of P. laurifolia and P. maliformis: fls. more than double the size of P. laurifolia (5 in. diam., pink and purple): petiole biglandular in middle: If .-blades attenuate at base; stipules linear. Nicaraugua. B.M. 7822. G.C. 111.31:171. — P. atropurpurea, Hort. Hybrid: has foliage of P. racemosa, but infl. and fl. in general shape more like P. Raddiana: fls. about 3 in. diam., tube less than }iin. long; sepals deeply keeled, reddish violet or prune-colored; petals about length of sepals, dark blood-red; outer corona violet spotted white, the filaments or threads half the length of the petals; inner corona shorter, violet, each thread enlarged at top. G. 26:495. — P. Bel- loUii, Hort. Sepals flesh-colored; petals rose; corona blue. Thought to be a hybrid of French origin, having been received in England about 1847.— P.^Bournapdrtea, Hort., hybrid of P. alata and P. quadrangularis, "possessing the sweet-scented and richly colored fls. of the former with the handsome foliage of the latter:" blooms freely when young: fls. solitary in the axils, reddish crimson, the corona of rich red, white, and blue filaments. J.H. III. 51:253. — P. capsularis. Linn. Tall slender pubescent climber with red ten- drils: Ivs. with 2 lunate ovate-oblong lobes: fls. solitary, 2 in. across, rose-red; calyx-tube J^in. long, cylindric, the sepals narrowly linear-oblong and obtuse; petals narrower and paler; outer corona much shorter than petals, white; inner corona, short and incurved, white; ovary hairy. Brazil. B.M. 7751 (not 2868, which is P. rubra). — P. cheliddnea, Mast. Lvs. oblong, forked at the end to one-fourth the length and with a small middle lobe, marked witn dots: fl. 2 in. across, greenish, with a folded corona. Ecuador. G.C. II. 12:40. — P. cinnabarina, Lindl. Branches terete: Ivs. broad- ovate, 3-lobed, margins entire: fls. solitary, 2% in. across, red; corona short, folded, yellowish. Austral. G.C. 1855:724. B.M. 5911. — P. colimensis, Mast. & Rose. A Mexican species first de- scribed in 1899, but cult, for several years in Washington. It is an herbaceous species, with shallow-lobed obtuse denticulate Ivs. and small whitish blue-marked fls. on single peduncles. Promising as an outdoor climber. — P. europh^lla, Mast. Lvs. oblong, very broad, rounded and biglandular at base, 2-lobed at apex with small lobe between, upper surface dull green and lower surface purplish: fls. whitish, not specially attractive. British Guiana. — P. fdtida. Linn. (P. hirsuta and P. hircina, Hort.). Allied to P. adenopoda: an- nual or sometimes perennial: Ivs. pubescent, 3-lobed, the mar- gins entire or obscurely angled: fls. whitish, small, the corona as long as the petals and colored purple and blue: fl. -bracts pinnatifid. Trop. Amer. L.B.C. 2:138. B.M. 3635, the form known as var. nigelliflora, Mast.; and 288, the yar. ciliata, Mast. Perhaps in cult., but apparently not offered in the trade. Variable. — P. galb&na, Mast. Sts. terete: Ivs. lance-oblong, short-petioled, entire: stipules 2775. Passiflora manicata. ( X about } ovate-pointed: fl. solitary on a long peduncle, 3 in. across, greenish yellow, the sepals and petals very narrow, the not folded corona short. Brazil. G.C. III. 20:555. — P. Imthurnii, Mast. Lvs. broad, oblong, acute, entire, thick, glabrous above, but not beneath: fl. erect, 4-5 in. across, brilliant scarlet and rose-color, with white in the center; corona very short. British Guiana. G.C. III. 23:307. Very showy. — P. kewensis, Hort. "It is a cross raised by Mr. Watson, the assistant curator, between the hardy Passiflora cserulea and the Brazilian P. Raddiana. The fls. are larger than those of P. Raddiana, the petals and fringe longer, while the color is carmine suffused with blue, which, though perhaps not so bright and pleasing as it is in the parent, is a lovely color." — P. macro- cdrpa, Mast. Of the P. quadrangularis group: st. 4-angled, strong- climbing: Ivs. oval, obtuse: fl. white and purple: fr. as large as a small melon, weighing several pounds. Brazil. — P. maliformis, Linn. Of the granadilla section: st. described as cylindrical: Ivs. ovate or ovate-oblong, entire, the petiole 2-glandular: fl. fragrant, large; petals white; corona blue: fr. yellow, round, and smooth, 2 in. diam., with agreeable pulp. W. Indies to S. Amer. — P. Miersii, Mast. Sts. slender and wiry: Ivs. lance-ovate and entire, claret- colored beneath: fl. 2 in. across, white, shaded with pink, the corona half the length of the petals, white, barred with purple. Brazil. G.C. III. 4:353. — P. milMris, Hort. (Tacsonia militaris, Hort.). A showy winter-bloomer intro. from the Transvaal, supposed to be a hybrid of P. manicata X P. insignis or P. Van Volxemii X P. insignis: Ivs. green and glabrous above, hairy beneath, deeply 3-lobed and sharp-serrate: fls. bright crimson taking on purplish tinge with age, 4-5 in. across, on hairy stalks 5 in. long; tube short, as in P. manicata, glabrous, inflated at base; outer calyx-lobes striped on outside, green in center, dull crimson on margins; corona small, purple; bracts 3 at base of tube, ovate, serrate. — P. pendu- lifldra, Bert. Lvs. very broad, slightly 3-lobed: fls. yellow and green, solitary or twin, often pendulous; corona in 1 series and 12- PASSI FLORA PAULLIXIA 2487 14-parted. W.Indies. B.M. 4565. J.F. 2: 114.— P. pinnatisHpula, Cav. (Tacsonia pinnatistipula, Juss.). Resembles T. molhssima, but the bracts are free: stipules pinnatisect: fls. rose-colored. Chile. B.M. 4062. B.R, 1536. — P. punctata. Linn. Herbaceous climber, minutely puberulous: Ivs. nearly semi-circular or almost lunate, shallowly 3-lobed, the middle lobe much smaller, variegated on both surfaces with purple: fls. in pairs, pale yellow, about IJi in. across; sepals ovate-oblong, obtuse, nearly ^iin. long; petals similar but much shorter; corona in 3 rows, yellow, the filaments of the outer row with violet heads. S. Amer. B.M. 8101. — P. quadriglindulosa, Rodsehied. Fls. solitary, 4-5 in. diam., rose-color with a darker shade in the center; corona with an outer ring of dark red filaments: inner filaments tubular and paler; sepals and petals much alike, very long and narrow, acuminate-pointed. Habitat unknown. G. 28:575. — P. serratif&lia. Linn. Lvs. ovate-lanceolate, acute, serrulate, pubescent beneath; petiole 4-glandular: fls. pur- ple; corona pale purple and bluish. Mex. B.M. 651. H.U. 2, p. 71. — P. suberosa. Linn. Glabrescent, with corky bark: Ivs. roundish or ovate, 3-lobed, the lobes ovate to oblong to lanceolate, the peti- ole 2-glandular above the middle: fls. greenish yellow, without pet- als: corona short: berry ovoid, small. W. Indies, Venezuela, etc. — P. triloba, Ruiz -plant. Twining shrubs: Ivs. alternate, stipulate, compound, 1— 3-ternate or pinnate, or decompound; petiole often winged; Ifts. usually dentate, dotted or minutely lined: racemes axillary, usually with 2 tendrils; fls. whitish or pale, small; sepals 5, the 2 upper larger, connate; petals 4, but there is a fifth abortive one, two of the petals smaller and bearing a scale below the apex; stamens 8; ovary 3-celled, bearing a 3-parted style. Trop. Amer., and sparingly in Afr.; species about 140. Distinguished from allied genera, as Cardiospermum, by the septicidal fr., which is often pear-shaped. P. thalictrifolia is a handsome stove foliage plant, with much divided Ivs. somewhat resembling a rue, maidenhair, or dayallia. The fls. are inconspicuous, pinkish and borne in au- tumn. Forty to fifty years ago, when the interest in foliage plants was at its height, this plant was widely- distributed. It used to be trained to a trellis for exhi- bition or grown on the pillars and rafters of hothouses. It is now a rare but choice plant for clothing the tops of unsightly tubs in which palms are growing. It is also excellent for large vases and stands the sun well. The young Ivs. have a pretty bronze that unless they are shaded too much. The plant is prop, by cuttings of young shoots taken in early spring. If the tops are pinched, the young plants will branch out and make handsome specimens in 4- or 5- in. pots. thalictrifdlia, Juss. Lvs. 4-10 in. long, triangular in outline, 3-ternately-pinnate; pinna? in 6-8 pairs; pin- nules 4-8 pairs, 4-& lines long: fls. inconspicuous, pink- 2488 PAULLINIA PAVETTA ish. Brazil. B.M. 5879. Gn. 51, p. 160. F. 1873, p. 124. J.H. III. 46:99. G. 7:153; 19:650. G.M. 46:397. Var. argentea, Hort., has foliage suffused silvery gray. L. H. B. PAULOWNIA (after Anna Paulowna, princess of the Netherlands). Scrophulariacese. Ornamental trees, grown for their beautiful flowers in showy panicles and for their large handsome foliage. Deciduous, rarely half-evergreen: Ivs. opposite, long- petioled, entire or sometimes 3-lobed or coarsely toothed, without stipules: fls. in terminal panicles; calyx campanulate, 5-lobed; corolla with long slightly curved tube, and spreading oblique 5-lobed limb; stamens 4: fr. a 2-celled caps., loculicidally dehiscent, with numerous small winged seeds. — About 8 species hi China; in Japan only cult. The paulownias are medium-sized or fairly large trees with stout spreading branches, large long-petioled leaves similar to those of catalpa, and violet or nearly white large flowers resembling those of the foxglove or gloxinia in shape, appearing in terminal panicles before or with the leaves and followed by ovoid pods remain- ing on the tree and conspicuous during the winter. P. tomentosa is fairly hardy in sheltered positions as far 2776. Paulownia tomentosa, showing verdurous growth of the young shoots. north as Massachusetts, but the flower-buds are usually killed in winter, and it does not flower regularly north of New York City; plants raised from seed collected in Korea have proved hardier at the Arnold Arboretum than the commonly cultivated Japanese plant, also the var. lanata from Central China seems to be some- what hardier. As an ornamental foliage plant it may be grown as far north as Montreal, where it is killed to the ground every winter, but throws up from the root vigor- ous shoots attaining 10 to 14 feet, with leaves over 1 foot and occasionally even 2 feet long. If used as a foliage plant and cut back to the ground every spring, the young shoots should be removed, except one or very few on each plant; during the first years of this treatment they will grow more vigorous every year, but afterward they will decrease in size, weakened by the continuous cutting back; they should then be replaced by strong young plants. Where the flower-buds which are formed the previous year are not killed by frost, the paulownia is one of the most conspicuous flowering trees in spring, and in summer the foliage, although it is of somewhat dull color, attracts attention by the size of the leaves. In temperate climates it is sometimes used as an avenue tre,e. It thrives best in a light deep loam, and in a sheltered position. The other species are still little known in cultivation and are probably tenderer; they are great favorites with the Chinese and much planted in central and southern China. Propa- gation is by seeds sown in spring or by root-cuttings, and by greenwood cuttings under glass; it may be grown also from leaf -cuttings; the young unfolding leaves when about 1 inch long are cut off close to the stems and inserted in sand under a hand-glass in the propagating-house. Paulownia tomentosa in southern California reaches a height of 40 feet in twenty-five years, with a spread nearly as great. When in full leaf it makes a dense shade. It starts to bloom before the leaves come and all is over before the tree is in full leaf. For this reason it is not a favorite. The jacaranda is a prettier blue, more floriferous, lasts three times as long, the blooms continuing until the tree is in full leaf. It is out of leaf not more than half as long as is paulownia and in mild winters holds much of its foliage throughout, being properly an evergreen. It makes as dense shade as the paulownia, has . a prettier leaf and is more desir- able in every way. The growth of the two trees is about the same at the end of a quarter century. The habit of the paulownia in retaining dry seed-pods on dead limbs 3 or 4 feet long is very unpleasing, and necessitates a thorough cleaning each year to the tip end of the uppermost branch — often a hard task to accomplish. (Ernest Braunton.) tomentdsa, Steud. (P. imperialis, Sieb. & Zucc.). Fig. 2776. Tree, to 40 ft., with stout spreading branches forming a round or ovate head : Ivs. rather long-petioled, broadly cordate-ovate, entire or sometimes 3-lobed, acuminate, pubescent above, tomentose beneath, 5-8 in. long or on vigorous shoots even larger: panicles to 10 in. long; fls. fragrant, pale violet, 1^-2 in. long; pedicels and calyx densely rusty tomentose; calyx- lobes short, rounded: caps, woody, broadly ovoid, pointed, 1 in. or somewhat longer. April, May. Cent. China, cult, in Japan. S.Z. 1:10. B.M. 4666. P.M. 10:7. Gn. 34, p. 79; 54, p. 476; 60, p. 130. G.C. III. 48:277; 51:430, 431. S.I.F. 1:85. H.U. 4, p. 102. R.H. 1907, p. 378. G. 35:769. Mn. 7, p. 171.— It is some- times escaped from cult, in the southern states. Var. pallida, Schneid. (P. imperialis var. pdllida, Dode). Fls. pale or whitish violet: Ivs. dull green above. Var. lanata, Schneid. (P. imperialis var. lanata, Dode). Lvs. more densely yellowish tomentose beneath: calyx more tomentose with longer acutish lobes. Cent. China. P. Dudouxii, Dode. Tree, to 60 ft.: Ivs. oblong-ovate, with open sinus at the base, tomentose below, to 1 ft. long: fls. about 3 in. long, pale lavender-purple, not spotted; calyx with acute tomen- tose lobes and glabrous or glabrescent tube; corolla rather gradually narrowed toward the base. Cent, and S. W. China. — P. Fdrgesii, Franch. Tree, to 60 ft.: branchlets usually pilose: Ivs. pubescent or glandular above, slightly pubescent beneath, entire or with few coarse teeth: fls. lavender or whitish, 2}4 in. long; calyx tomentose outside with triangular acutish lobes. W. China. — P. Fortunei, Hemsl. Tree, to 20 ft.: Ivs. sub-coriaceous, densely tomentose below, ovate or ovate-oblong, to 10 in. long: fls. to 4 in. long, white, spotted purple inside; calyx 1 in. long, glabrous outside except the acutish lobes; corolla rather gradually narrowed toward the base. S. E. China. — P. Sihislrii, Pampanini & Bonat. Small tree: Ivs. densely brown-woolly, narrow, deeply cordate, 3-5 in. long: fls. in leafy panicles, sky-blue; calyx densely tomentose, with oblong obtusish lobes. Cent. China. — P. thyrsoidea, Rehd. Tree, to 20 ft. : branchlets and petioles pilose: lys. ovate, usually truncate at the base, sparingly pubescent, often irregularly and remotely toothed, 4-6 in. long: fls. with the Ivs., lavender, 1 J^ in. long, in spike-like racemes forming terminal panicles about 1 ft. long; calyx tomentose, about Min. long. Cent, and S. E. China. ALFRED REHDER. PAVETTA (Malabar name of P. indica}. Rubiacese. Tropical shrubs and small trees closely allied to the brilliant ixoras but less showy, not often seen but deserving of attention; flowers white or greenish. Leaves opposite or ternate, simple, sometimes parti- colored, stipules present and joined at base: fls. in mostly terminal bracted corymbs; calyx top-shaped or bell-shaped, the limb mostly with 4 or 5 persistent or deciduous lobes; corolla usually salver-shaped, with a PAVETTA PAVOXIA 2489 cylindrical or funnel-shaped commonly slender tube, the throat mostly bearded or pubescent, the limb pre- vailingly 5-parted (rarely 4-parted) into oval or oblong contorted lobes; stamens 4 or sometimes 5, affixed at the mouth of the corolla: style conspicuously exserted, the stigma entire or 2-toothed: fr. a pea-shaped some- what fleshy 2-pyrenous berry. — One hundred or more spjecies in the tropical and subtropical parts of the Old World, to the Philippines, with recent numerous exten- sions in Trop. Afr. Only a few of the species are in cult., and these are known as warmhouse or warm temperate plants. The pavettas are fine tropical stove evergreens and should be more grown. P. borbonica can be propagated from half-ripened wood, leaving an eye and a leaf attached. These cuttings may be put into 2-inch pots, using a mixture of fibry peat and sand in equal parts. These pots may be plunged in a propagating-bed that has a bottom heat of 80° to 85°. Coyer with glass so as to keep a humid atmosphere. It will take some little time before they make roots. Keep shaded and moist until this takes place. When roots are seen in the pots, gradually give more air until they are exposed to the full atmosphere of the house. They may also be propa- gated by being cut down well to make them throw many young soft cuttings that can be rooted with a brisk bottom heat. P. caffra will root freely from cuttings of young growth, placed where they have plenty of bottom heat. The pots may be plunged in the propa- gating-bed up to the rims. Keep shaded, moist and close for about a month. The best season for the increase of this class of plants is January to March. — The general culture for P. borbonica is to keep increasing the shifts until they are in 7- or 8-inch pots, using a compost of fibrous loam three parts, fibrous peat two parts, and well-decayed manure one part. Give each pot good drainage. In the spring and summer provide a night temperature of 70°, with 10° to 15° more by day with sun. Supply water when they show dryness of the ball. Keep well syringed. They will need some shade in the summer to keep the foliage perfect. In midwinter the temperature for night may be lowered to about 60°. P. caffra. which is a free bloomer, will need different culture. It should be kept growing by shifting as the plants may require, until they are in 6- or 7-inch pots or larger. For summer culture, treat the same as for P. borbonica only they will not need so much heat, 60° to 65° being sufficient, with 10° more during the day. They will stand pinching to make them bushy. The tempera- ture in the winter should be from 50° to 55°. The fol- lowing spring give more pot room and grow on the same as before. Give liquid manure at intervals in the grow- ing season and by autumn they will show bloom. By giving root room, with liquid feeding and by heading in annually, they will bloom for years. Scale and mealy- bug thrive on pavettas, and the plants must be care- fully watched. (J. J. M. Farrell.) A. Foliage variegated. borbonica, Hort. A foliage plant with unknown fls., referred arbitrarily to this genus: Ivs. about 9 in. long, oblong-acuminate, rounded at the base, with a salmon- red midrib, mottled with light green on a dark green ground. Bourbon Isl. Lowe 5. AA. Foliage not variegated. B. Calyx-teeth setaceous and much longer than the tube. caffra, Linn. f. (libra caffra, Poir. P. corymbbsa, Houtt.). Shrub with whitish branches, to 6 ft., the branches terete and glabrous: Ivs. almost sessile, obo- vate. glabrous (or in var. piibescens, Sond., branches and Ivs. pubescent), the margins slightly recurved, to 2 in. long; stipules broad and cuspidate: fls. white, the tube J^in. long, in densely fld. corymbs; calyx-teeth Kin. long: fr. black and shining. S. Afr. B.M. 3580. Gn. 60. p. 414. J.F. 3:294. natalensis, Sond. Shrub, glabrous, with young branches compressed: Ivs. petioled, lance-acuminate, attenuate at base, shining, 3-4 in. long; stipules cus- pidate-acuminate: fls. white, in a loose corymb. Natal. BB. Calyx-teeth short-triangular, shorter than the tube, or sometimes practically wanting. indica, Linn. A variable small tree or bush, common in India, extending to China and Austral.: glabrous, pubescent or tomentose : Ivs. from elliptic to obovate or oblaneeolate or even orbicular, at the apex from obtuse to caudate: fls. slender-stalked, white, fragrant, the corolla-tube %~%in. long: infl. corymb-like, terminal and sessile. B.R. 198, which is var. polydntha, Hook, f., with densely crowded pubescent fls. The species has many synonyms. L. H. B. PA VIA: jEsculus. PAVONIA (J. Pavqn, joint author of Ruiz and Pavon's "Flora Peruviana et Chilensis"; died 1844). Malvacex. Herbs or shrubs, one or two of which are sometimes grown under glass as pot subjects, for the showy bloom. Tropical plants, tomentose, hispid or glabrescent: Ivs. often angled or lobed: fls. of various colors, pedun- cled or crowded at the tips of the branches: bractlets 5 to many, distinct or more or less connate and resem- bling a calyx, usually not colored: calyx 5-cut or 5- toothed; petals spreading or con volute-conni vent; stamina! column truncate below the apex or 5-dentate; ovary 5-loculed, 1-ovuled: ripe carpels surrounding the axis and separating from it, rounded or truncate at top, sometimes winged, indehiscent or imperfectly dehis- cent, prickly or awned. — Species about 100, Cent. Amer. to Argentina; also in Trop. Afr. and Asia, to Austral, and the Pacific. The genus is more or less confused with Goethea, but that genus, as usually denned, differs in its larger and more showy fl.-bracts and in the smooth carpels. The plants in cult, derive much of their interest from the showy bracts, although Pavqnia is usually characterized as having bracts less conspicu- ous than those of Goethea. multifldra, St. Hil. (P. Wloti, Morr. Goethea multi- flora, Nichols.). Robust, with a stout usually simple st.: Ivs. alternate, 6-10 in. long, narrowly oblong- or obovate-lanceolate, long-acuminate, serrate or dentic- ulate: fls. in a short terminal corymb; bractlets beneath the fl. numerous, narrow-linear, whorled, red-hairy, curving, in length about equaling the rolled-together purple corolla (which is 1-1 K m- long); calyx-segms. much shorter than the bractlets; column of stamens 2J^ in. long and prominently exserted. Brazil. B.M. 6398. F.M. 1877:276. — What is known as P. intermedia by gardeners is apparently not P. intermedia, St. Hil.; it is said to be derived from P. multiflora. There are forms of P. intermedia, Hort., known as var. rosea, var. flori- bunda, and var. kermesina. This group of plants is readily grown from cuttings taken in spring or early summer, and good blooming plants in 5-in. pots may be had by winter. They grow naturally to about one st., and should not be pinched back. They make attractive pot subjects with the terminal clusters of fls. marked by the long-protruding stamina! column with hanging bluish anthers, the narrow rolled corolla and the slender conspicuous bracts. spinifei, Willd. Shrub, to 20 ft., from S. Amer., the st. slender, branches few and virgate: Ivs. ovate, cor- date, crenate sometimes angled, pubescent on both surfaces: fls. large, yellow, not fragrant, the corolla open ; petals obovate ; calyx-lobes lanceolate : bracteoles 5 or more, linear, hairy on margin : caps, with 3 spines. B.R. 339. prsemorsa, Cav. Shrub with rodlike branches, from S. Afr. : Ivs. broad-ovate or fan-shaped, truncate, obtusely dentate, canescent beneath, with petiole and 2490 PAVONIA PEA setaceous stipules : fls. bright yellow and dark-centered, single on axillary pedicels exceeding the Ivs., with 12-14 linear involucral bracts : f r. of downy carpels. — This and P. spinifex are reported in Calif. P. Makoy&na, Morr. (Goethea Makoyana, Hook.). Lvs. elliptic, short-stalked, with large stipules: fls. in terminal clusters, subtended by large cordate-ovate crimson bractlets. Brazil. B.M. 6427. G.Z. 22:169. — P. semper flbrens, Garcke (Goethea semper- florens, Nees & Mart.). Tall: Ivs. elliptic, serrate: fls. usually terminal, purple, with brown bractlets. Brazil. L H B PAWPAW: Cart co Papaya and Asimina. 2777. Garden pea, American Wonder. The illustration shows an entire plant, cut off at the surface of the ground. ( X H) PEA. As known to horticulturists, the pea is the seeds and plant of Pisum sativum and its many forms, one of the Leguminosae, grown for its edible seeds and sometimes for the edible pods. (Figs. 2777-2783.) The garden pea is native to Europe, but has been cultivated from before the Christian era for the rich seeds. The field or stock pea differs little from the gar- den pea except in its violet rather than white flowers and its small gray seeds. There are many varieties and several well-marked races of garden peas. Whilst peas are grown mostly for their seeds, there is a race in which the thick soft green pods, with the inclosed seeds, are eaten. The common or shelling peas may be separated into two classes on the character of the seed itself, — those with smooth seeds and those with wrink- led seeds. The latter are the richer, but they are more likely to decay in wet cold ground, and therefore are not so well adapted to very early planting. Peas may also be classified as climbing, half-dwarf or showing a tendency to climb and doing best when support is provided, and dwarf or those not requiring support. Again, the varieties may be classified as to season, — early, second-early, and late. Vilmorin's classification (Les Plantes Potageres) is as follows: A. The pea round (smooth). B. Plant climbing. c. Seed white. cc. Seed green. BB. Plant half-dwarf. c. Seed white, cc. Seed green. BBB. Plant dwarf, c. Seed white, cc. Seed green. AA. The pea wrinkled (divisions as above). Left to themselves, the varieties of peas soon lose their characteristics through variation. They are much influenced by soil and other local conditions. There- fore, many of the varieties are only minor strains of some leading type, and are not distinct enough to be recognized by printed descriptions. Garden or green peas. Peas are one of the earliest garden vegetables to reach edible maturity. The date at which a mess of green peas could be gathered used to be regarded as an indication of a man's horticultural ability. In modern times, green peas grown far away to the South come to northern markets while the ground is still frozen and are eagerly purchased only to result in disappoint- ment and a longing for the old-time quality. Such dis- appointment is inevitable, for even with refrigerator cars, express trains, and modern skilful handling, green peas grown hundreds of miles away cannot come to our tables for many hours, often not for days, after they have been gathered, and with an inevitable loss of the freshness, which is essential for satisfactory quality. Peas do well in cool moist weather and will germinate and make a slow but healthy and vigorous growth in lower temperatures than most garden vegetables. The young plants will even endure some frost with little injury, but the blossoms and young pods will be injured or killed by a frost which did not seem materially to check the growth of the plant. For this reason it is generally most satisfactory to delay planting until there is little probability of a frost after the plants come into bloom. The cultural requirements are simple, but a thorough preparation of the soil before planting is desirable, and the use of green and fresh manure should be avoided. The best depth of planting varies with the season and character of the soil, and early plantings on clay land should be covered only 1 to 2 inches deep, while later plantings on sandy land do best in drills 6 or 8 inches deep to be gradually filled as the seedlings grow. Gen- erally anything more than surface tillage will do a growing pea crop more harm than good; but any crust formed after rains, particularly while the plants are young, should be promptly broken up. Of the better garden sorts, from fifty to one hundred good seeds are in an ounce, and a half-pint should plant 50 to 80 feet of row and furnish a sufficiency of pods for a small family for the week or ten days in which they would be in prime condition. For a con- tinued supply one must depend upon repeated plantings. Most of the best garden varie- ties can be well grown without trellising, but the sorts growing over 2 feet high will do better if sup- ported. Nothing better for this purpose is known than brush from the woods, but this is not always available and a good substitute is the wire pea trellis offered by most dealers in horti- cultural supplies, or a home-made one made by strings stretched 2 to 4 inches apart 2778. Garden pea, Champion of England, on alternate sides ( x M) LXXXV. Good pods of the garden pea, variety Peter Pan. PEA PEA 2491 of supporting stakes. The ingenuity of the home-gar- dener will devise good forms of trellising. It is evident that green peas occupy too much ground to be a practical crop for a city lot or small town gar- den, and generally the town dweller can be most satis- factorily supplied from a nearby market-garden; and the great superiority of freshly gathered local-grown peas over those which have to be shipped in make this one of the best of crops for a gardener with permanent cus- tomers. The best cultural methods for field plantings do not differ materially from those given for the garden. No planting is so likely to give a satisfactory yield both as to quantity and quality as on an old clover sod on a well-drained clay loam, which should be well plowed in the fall or early winter and the surface worked into a good tilth as early as practicable in the spring. Planting can be best done with a seed-drill so arranged that the rows are 12 to 36 inches apart, according to the variety, with occasional rows left blank for con- venience in gathering. 2779. Garden pea, Nott Excelsior. ( X Ji) Picking should be done after sundown or in early morning before nine o'clock and care be taken not to bulk the pods, as they are liable to heat and spoil. Peas for canning. There is no modern industry in which there has been greater improvement within the past ten or more years, both as to methods and the quality of the prod- uct, than in the canning of vegetables. This is espe- cially noticeable in canned peas. First there has been a great betterment as to the varietal quality of the stock used. For canning, particularly when modern methods of harvesting and processing are used, it is important not only that the green peas be sweet and palatable, but that the largest possible proportion of the pods shall be in prime edible condition at the same time, and canners are influenced by these qualities in selecting varieties for their plantings, and in the cultural methods followed. The development of each planting is closely watched by an expert, who directs that it be cut and delivered at the factory on the day when he judges it will be in the best condition, the time for individual crops being sometimes modified by the capacity of the farmer to deliver and the factory to handle it. Not infrequently certain crops are left to ripen and be har- vested as grain because of such conditions. In hot and sunny weather, the vines are cut either after five in the afternoon or before nine in the morning, hauled to the factory and from the wagon go direct to a specially constructed threshing-machine or "viner," which separates the peas and delivers them on a moving inclined belt, which throws out any bits of vines or pods. They are then washed and graded, and go to the processer. So promptly is this work done that it is known of peas being in the cans and being cooked before the wagon on which they were brought from the field could start for home. Usually peas put up by a well -managed cannery come to the table in more palata- ble condition than so-called fresh peas which were gathered ten to twenty-four hours before and shipped from 10 to several hun- dred miles to market. Canners who are particular as to the labeling of their output often separate it into different grades, determined by the variety and size of peas and labeled somewhat as follows: 2780. Pea, Nott Excelsior. (XH) 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Varieties Small, smooth seed, not over 16/64 18/64 20/64 Run of crop Small, wrinkled seed, not over 18/64 20/64 22/64 Run of crop Large, smooth seed, , not over 20/64 22/64 24/64 Run of crop Large wrinkled seed, not over 20/64 24/64 26/64 Run of crop Varieties and seed. Few vegetables have developed greater varietal dif- ferences affecting their horticultural or culinary value than garden peas. As to vines, there are sorts from 6 inches to 6 feet in height and those which very rarely form more than a single stem, while others are so branched that they often are wider than tall; some mature their crop very early and all at once, others not until the vines are fully grown or continuing through a long season; pods which are so broad and long that the inclosed peas never fill them, others in which the growing peas very often split the pod open; peas which are green, yellow or white, smooth and hard; others which are wrinkled, distorted and comparatively soft, even when fully mature. Very con- spicuous variations of little practi- cal importance are sometimes correlated with invisible qualities which are of great importance. When grown for seed, peas of the garden varieties yield a com- paratively small fold of increase, seldom over 10 or 12 and often only 2 or 3, so that it is more difficult than with most vegetables always to secure full supplies of certain sorts, and seedsmen's stocks are constantly changing, not only as to character but name. The following are now very popular varieties: Extra-early smooth-seeded — Alaska or Prolific Extra Early; early wrinkled seeded — Thomas Laxtpn, Gradus, Surprise; dwarf Excelsior, either the Notts or the Suttons: midseason — Advancer, Admiral. Senator; late — Champion of Eng- land, Strategem. However, one 2781. Pea, Pride of should confer with the seedsmen the Market. 2492 PEA PEACH as to the most available stock best suited for the particular needs. Sugar or edible-podded peas. These are a class little known in this country, but are largely grown in Europe. They are characterized by large more or less fleshy and often distorted pods, which are cooked when in the same stage of maturity and in the same way as string beans. Varieties have been developed in which the pods are as white, tender, and wax-like as those of the best varieties of wax- podded beans. Field peas. There are a number of kinds of field peas in which the vines are very vigorous, hardy, and productive and the peas generally small, hard, and becoming tough, dry, and unpalatable as they ripen. In one variety of this class known as French Canner, the very young and small peas are sweet and tender, and in this stage are put up by French canners under the name of "petit poise." The larger-seeded Marrowfat peas were form- erly commonly used by canners, and large quantities are still packed. If this is done while the peas are sufficiently young and ten- der they make a fairly good product. 2782. Pea, Stratagem. 2783. Pea, Melting Sugar. ( X H) ( X 1A) Split peas. Large quantities of field peas, mostly of the smaller- seeded kinds, are used for split peas, the preparation of which consists in cleaning and grading, kiln-drying, splitting, and screening out the hulls and chips from the full half peas. This is all done by special machines, mostly of American invention. The annual consump- tion of split peas in the United States is about 50,000 barrels, of which, before the European war, 75 per cent came from abroad. \y\ W_ TRACT. PEA. Congo P., Cajanus indicus. Everlasting P., Lathyrus lati- folius. Glory P., Clianthus Dampieri. Hoary P., Pigeon P., Caja- nus indicus. Scurfy P., Psoralea. Sweet P., Lathyrus odoratus. PEACH. The tree and fruit of Prunus Persica (or Persica vulgaris), widely cultivated in the United States and parts of Canada for home use and market. In the northern prairie states and on the plains, and in the colder parts of the mountain regions of the West, the peach is little grown or is even altogether absent; yet the range of adaptability is constantly extending as the local conditions and requirements become better known. There is less dependence on "fruit-belts" than formerly, in which some special favor of climate or location was supposed to exist. Some parts of New England are well adapted to com- mercial peach-culture. Parts of Canada bordering the Great Lakes, and regions in Nova Scotia, are promi- nent peach districts. Varieties of special adaptability to climate and useful also for particular purposes have arisen in recent years; and the requirements of the peach are now better understood than formerly. The range of its cultivation will probably be considerably broadened in years to come. The discussion of the peach is here comprised in four articles: Page The culture of the peach (M. A. Blake) 2492 Peach-culture in the South (J. H. Hale) 2500 Peach-growing in California (George C. Roeding) . 2503 Protecting peach trees in cold climates (W. Pad- dock) 2504 The culture of the peach. The marked feature in the development of the peach industry hi the United States since about 1900 has been the extension of the areas of commercial peach- production because of the introduction of hardier varieties such as Carman, the discovery of materials and methods that make certain the control of peach- scab and brown-rot, and the organization of fast-freight and refrigerator-car service that permits of successful long-distance shipment of this perishable fruit. The introduction of the San Jos6 scale was the cause of the destruction of hundreds of thousands of peach trees throughout the country from about 1900 to 1907, the period of greatest damage varying to some extent in each district. The growers who persisted in the business were those who had the capital, energy, and persistence to take up the new problem of spraying, and these men may appropriately be termed the pioneers of the modern peach business. The necessity of spraying to control the scale also focused the attention of the growers upon all other factors of peach-production except marketing, which for the tune presented few difficulties because of the great reduction in the number of bearing trees and the ability of the local markets to absorb much of the crop produced. Peach-scab and brown-rot caused serious damage to the crop annually in central and southern peach districts until the self-boiled lime-sulfur summer spray was proved to be a successful remedy. The development of large commercial areas at long distances from market has resulted in better grading and packing. The Georgia six-basket carrier has become the popular shipping package from southern New Jersey to Georgia, Alabama, and Texas. (Fig. 2707.) Innumerable changes and improvements in the growing and handling of the crop have occurred within the last ten years. The United States Census reports show many inter- esting facts in connection with the extent and develop- ment of the peach industry. A few trees are found in every state in the Union. According to the Census of 1910 only three states, Wyoming, North Dakota, and Montana, have less than 5,000 trees. Five other states, Minnesota, South Dakota, Wisconsin, Maine, and Vermont, have less than 10,000 trees. The most signifi- cant fact, however, is that twenty-six states reported a total of more than 1,000,000 bearing trees each, which definitely shows the extended area over which this crop is produced to some commercial degree. The Census for 1910 shows Georgia to lead in the total number of bearing trees with 10,609,119; Texas is second with 9,737,827; and California is third with 7,829,011 trees. On the basis of total number of trees, however, Texas leads with 12,696,640; California is second with 12,238,- 573, and Georgia is third with 12,140,486. PEACH PEACH 2493 The Census reports also indicate the general trend of the industry in no uncertain way. In 1890, five states led prominently in the total number of bearing trees, as follows: Maryland, 6,113,287; Kansas, 4,876,- 3il; Delaware, 4,521,623; Texas, 4,486,901; and New Jersey. 4.413,568. The greatest peach district in the 2784. Peen-to peach.— Prunus platycarpa. ( X W) country at that time was comprised by the states of Maryland, Delaware, and Xew Jersey, with a total of more than 15,000,000 trees. The three leading states in 1900 were, Michigan with 8,104,415 trees, Georgia with 7,668,639 trees, and California with 7,472,393 trees. The states of Mary- land, Delaware, and New Jersey, which geographically comprise one district, reported a total of a little more than 9,000,000 trees, the San Jose scale and other factors having reduced the total about 6,000,000 trees. Yet as a peach district, this still held its place as having the greatest total number of trees. The Census of 1910, however, shows that this num- ber was greatly reduced during the period from 1899 to 1909, having less than 4,000.000 bearing trees. This great reduction and loss was due largely to the introduction of the scale. Michigan reports a loss dur- ing this period of more than 5,000.000 trees, and Ohio more than 3,000,000. The following states made gains during this period: Xew Hampshire, Vermont, Illi- nois, Idaho, Missouri, Nebraska, South Carolina, Georgia, Tennessee, Alabama, Arkansas, Louisiana, Texas. Colorado, New Mexico, Utah, Washington, and California. Summarized to a few words, the Census indicates that while the Middle Atlantic and Great Lakes districts were suffering severe destruction of trees, the southern and western districts were develop- ing. These facts lead one to wonder as to how much of a part the San Jose scale played in the development of these latter districts, and whether such development could have maintained itself in some cases without the good markets and high prices occasioned by the wide- spread destruction of trees in the East. The Census of 1910 is of particular value in showing the recent trend of the industry, because the number of trees in bearing and those not in bearing were tabu- lated separately. The western states, Idaho, Oregon, Utah, and Washington are increasing their plantings. The young trees not in bearing in Massachusetts, Michigan, and New Jersey were greatly in excess of those producing fruit in 1909. West Virginia has also been planting peaches extensively in recent years. The extensive planting of peaches in the eastern and Middle Atlantic states, following the earlier de- struction by yellows, was only just beginning in 1909, when the last Census was taken. Since that time, mil- lions of trees have been planted and have come into bearing. As a result, the marketing factor became the most important peach problem in 1915. Southern districts can no longer expect the prices of former years in the great eastern markets, the Middle West is growing quantities of peaches and so also are the states along the Great Lakes. The problem at the beginning of 1916 is where and how can the crops from these trees be marketed profitably. In any broad discussion of the peach regions of North America, the Ontario district of Canada should not be overlooked. Situated south of the western end of Lake Ontario, climatic conditions are so modified that such yellow-fleshed varieties of peaches as St. John, Fitzgerald, Elberta, and Niagara can be grown successfully in large quantities. The northern limits of peach-production extend from the southeastern shore of Lake Ontario along the southern shore of Lake Erie and the eastern shore of Lake Michigan as far north as the Grand Traverse on the 44th parallel. This area is often termed the "Great Lakes Belt." Beginning in southwestern and central Massachusetts, another commercial peach area extends across Connecticut, Long Island, the Hudson River Valley, New Jersey, eastern Pennsylvania, Delaware, and Maryland. The Coastal Plain areas in New Jersey, Delaware, and along the eastern shore of Maryland are favorable to peach-production, and the fruit 'is grown to within a few miles of the seaboard. Farther south, the Coastal Plains area is unfavorable to successful commercial production and the industry is transferred to the Piedmont area across Virginia, North Carolina, and southward to the Gulf districts in Alabama and Texas. Florida has too warm a climate to suit the common standard varieties of peach and has developed a special type from the South China race. The central or Mississippi Valley district extends from Texas across Okla- homa and Arkansas, Mis- souri and Kansas to Iowa, Illinois and Indiana, practi- cally connecting with the Great Lakes area. The Pacific Coast Belt includes fr California, and areas in Nevada, Utah, Colorado, Oregon, and Washington. 2785. Honey peach. ( x }t) There are many areas in these so - called " peach- belts" that are not favorable to peach-production, but they indicate the general grouping of the industry. Varieties and types. AU of the common forms of the peach belong to the species Prunus Persica, but are sometimes grouped under the name Amygdalus Persica. The flat or Peen- to peach is P. platycarpa. The United States Depart- ment of Agriculture, through its Bureau of Foreign Plant and Seed Introduction, has secured a form of peach from China known as A . Davidiana which is used there as a stock for certain cherries. It is said to be very hardy and may prove of value in breeding work, or as a stock for the peach. Its fruit is not attractive enough for use as it is now developed. Several other forms • •' ..* 2786. Cabler peach. (XH) 2494 PEACH PEACH or types have been collected in China by Frank N. Meyer, of the Department of Agriculture, and sent to the United States for propagation and study. See the article Prunus. The common types of peaches have been grouped into certain races. Onderdonk (Kept. Commr. Agric., 2787. Crawford peach. ( X \i) 1887) and also Price have placed North American peaches in five groups: (1) The Peen-to or flat peach race, comprising the variety known as Peen-to (Fig. 2784), and also the Angel, and Waldo; (2) the South China race, with oval long-pointed fruit with deep suture near the base, represented by the Honey (Fig. 2785); (3) the Spanish or Indian race, with very late yellow firm often streaked fruit, represented by various southern varieties, as the Cabler (Fig. 2786), Columbia, Galyeston, Lulu, Texas, and Victoria; (4) the. North China race, with large mostly cling or semi-cling fruit and very large flat leaves, represented by the Greensboro, Waddell, and Carman; (5) the Persian race, including the common varieties of the mid-country and the North, as Crawford (Fig. 2787), Mountain Rose, and the like. The so-called North China and Persian types of peaches are now very much mixed in commerical varieties. We have been content to say that Elberta (Fig. 2788) is of the North China type, when it is plainly mixed with the Persian, and when studied carefully its characters resemble the Persian type even more than they do the North China. Two types of peach blos- soms are commonly recognized (as shown in Fig. 2790), yet there are three distinct types, the large bloom, typical of Greensboro and Waddell and the North China type, the medium bloom of such varieties as Elberta and Belle, and the small bloom of Early and Late Crawford, and others. The botanical significance of these types is not well understood. A double-flowered peach (Fig. 2789) is sometimes cultivated as an ornamental, as well as a purple-leaved form. A form- of the cultiyated peach growing wild near Pekin, large-flowered, is shown in Fig. 2791. Propagation. The peach is universally propagated by means of the pits or seeds. A few are sometimes secured by budding upon plum or even cherry stocks, but this dwarfs the tree and makes it susceptible to various stock troubles. So-called natural seedling pits or seeds gathered in Tennessee and North Carolina are said to be the best for propagation work. Such seeds are considered to be more viable and to produce hardier stock than pits from cultivated varieties. Considerable quantities of so-called "seedling" seeds have undoubtedly been secured from canning factories and represent commer- cial varieties, although one can readily detect the dif- ference between them. It has not been definitely shown that wild seedling pits will produce a stock that is any more hardy than that which might be secured from the pits of some of our hardier cultivated varie- ties. Seeds or pits for propagation are treated in two ways. Where severe freezing weather occurs they are commonly planted in the autumn in nursery rows from 4 to 6 feet apart. The pits are scattered a few inches apart in the rows and covered to a depth of about 2 inches. In less severe climates, the pits are stratified very shallow in autumn, are dug up in the spring and the kernels separated from the soil and shells, and planted in nursery rows. By this method, any pit or seed which is not cracked open by the action of the frost may be broken by the use of a hammer. Pits not affected by the frost usually fail to grow the first season, but may do so the second year. The pits should be planted in good soil and be given careful cultivation so that the seedlings will be at least 24 to 30 inches high by the latter part of August of the first season, and in condition for budding. The buds are inserted the latter part of August or early in September, and simply become united with the seedling stock without making any growth. Early the following spring the seedlings are cut back just above the inserted buds, and all shoots developing from buds of the stock itself are kept rubbed off. In this way the desired bud develops into a vigorous well-branched shoot or tree which should be from 3 to 6 feet high at the close of the season's growth, and is ready for sale that fall or the following spring. So-called "June buds" are secured by budding vigorous seedlings in June and selling the resulting trees in the fall or the spring fol- lowing. Such trees are smaller and are seldom equal to one-year-old trees except possibly for planting in the South. In Fig. 2792, at the left, is a well-branched one-year-old nursery tree; at the right a slender tree of the same age and height, and in the center a June bud. The question as to whether trees should be propa- gated north of the region in which they are grown is a common one. Evidence has shown that it makes little difference as to the latitude in which the trees are raised if they are well grown and are free from injurious 2788. Elberta peach. ( X nearly insects and diseases. It is generally best, however, to purchase trees as near at hand as good ones may be secured. The ideal climate for the peach is one in which the winter extremes do not go much lower than zero at any time, and no warm periods of many days' duration occur in winter. The absence of late spring frosts and presence of bright sun during the ripening period are also important essentials. Extremes of either warmth or cold in winter are almost equally detrimental. PEACH PEACH 2495 Soil. The peach will succeed upon a wide range of soil- types, but prefers a sandy loam. It will also develop exceptionally well upon gravelly or stony loams, if deep and well drained. Heavy poorly drained soils should be avoided. It also thrives on sands. Site and elevation. The type of peach-growing business one expects to engage in has much to do with the kind of location and site that should be chosen. A successful local market business may be established even upon disconnected areas and at some disadvan- tage. But extensive peach plantings for supplying the wholesale markets should be planted upon uniformly favorable areas near good shipping-points and where plenty of labor is available. Locations should be sought where peaches can be grown and placed on the market cheaply because of large annual yields and low cost of production and marketing. The elevation above sea-level at which peaches are planted in any region is a most important matter. It is not sufficient that the orchard be on land that is higher than its immediate surroundings. In some localities an elevation of 150 to 200 feet is sufficient to secure good yields, while in others one must seek alti- tudes of 800 to 900 feet, or even more, for successful crops. The site of the orchard should also be readily accessible, so that fertilizers, spray materials, and packages can be delivered cheaply and so that the crop may be picked, packed, and shipped economically. Uneven land broken up by gullies or wet areas is to be avoided, as well as hilly areas that are difficult to reach by team and expensive to manage. The particular exposure is not important in a rela- tively flat country. In hilly or mountainous sections, it may become so. Severely exposed situations should be avoided, as well as warm pocketed areas. Some pro- tection from severe prevailing winds is most desirable and does not increase the danger of too early blooming if good air-drainage prevails. Establishing the orchard. A well-defined plan should be drawn up before plant- ing is begun. The peach is a relatively short-lived tree, and packing-houses and permanent buildings should be located in con- nection with road- ways and plantings so as to result in the most economi- cal procedure of the work. The selection of varieties must be made previous to the planting of the orchard. Specific recommendations for each district cannot be given in a brief article, but some general statements as to the variety question follow. Yellow-fleshed peaches are preferred by most 2789. Bloom of double-flowered Peach. (X}4) 2790. Bloom of large- flowered and small-flow- ered peaches. ( X Ji) 2791. Chinese peach, as grown at the Arnold Arboretum, from seeds of wild trees in China. ( X %) See Garden and Forest, 5 : 438. markets. Such varieties as Mountain Rose, Reeves, Stump, Oldmixon, and the Crawfords are falling behind in popularity except in a few localities. Better varieties are needed commercially. Carman and Belle (of Georgia) are rapidly gaining in commercial impor- tance. New varieties, such as the J. H. Hale, are demanding recognition. Elberta is still the most popu- lar single variety. It is the most widely successful commercial variety of any of our tree-fruits. In mak- ing a choice of commercial varieties for any section, a few hardy sorts that are known to do well in the locality are the safest to plant. One should also have enough trees of each variety for economical growing and marketing. Vigorous one-year-old trees that will caliper % to % inch and are from 3 to 5 feet in height, as illustrated at the left in Fig. 2792, are an ideal size to plant. They should be free from yellows or little-peach or rosette, root-gall, scale, peach-borers, or other injurious peach enemies. Fall planting is successful with well-ripened trees in localities in which the winter weather is not severe and where soils are sandy and. well drained. In northern districts, fall planting is less likely to be successful. In spring planting, the land should be prepared and the trees set as early as soil conditions permit. The trees should be set about 20 feet apart each way under average conditions. In some localities 18 feet is sufficient distance, while in others 25 feet is not too much. Vegetable crops, such as peas, beans, tomatoes, and potatoes, may be grown between the rows of young peach trees for the first and second seasons, after which the practice is of doubtful economy. Tillage. The apple is sometimes grown successfully under the sod-mulch system, but attempts to manage the peach in the same way have commonly resulted in failure. The soil of the orchard should be plowed or disced into 2496 PEACH PEACH a fine mellow condition in the spring as soon as it becomes dry enough to "work" well. This state of tillage should then be maintained until about mid- season by frequent harrowing. The time when culture should cease varies with the locality and the variety. 2792. Different forms of peach trees for planting. It is seldom possible to cultivate later than ten days or two weeks previous to the ripening of the fruit, as the branches become bent down with the crop. Early vari- eties should commonly receive one or more cultiva- tions after the crop has been picked. In the South, tillage is often stopped in bearing orchards in late June, while in the North it is continued until late July. In dry seasons, late varieties require additional culture to reach good size. A large proportion of vegetable matter in the soil is an important factor in the production of large fruit, especially in dry seasons. Cover-crops should be grown wherever possible. Fertilizing. Rate and character of growth is a great limiting factor in peach-production. A certain amount of growth is necessary to maintain vigor and a proper number of flower -buds. The. extent and time of greatest growth determines size, color and quality of fruit to a marked degree. The application of plant-food or fertilizers is a feature of orchard practice that directly concerns rate of growth. Trees in full bearing should make an annual growth of at least 12 to 18 inches at the tips of leading branches in most peach regions to maintain a maximum produc- tion. Fruit-growers should apply fertilizers to secure a growth according to their soil type and its conditions. If such a growth is obtainable without fertilizer, its application may prove detrimental, while if the soil is thin and poor, heavy fertilizing will be required for good results. Under the average conditions, the equivalent of 100 pounds nitrate of soda, 150 pounds muriate of potash, and 400 pounds acid phosphate will not be found to be excessive, and additional nitrate will be needed in many cases. In districts where the winters are severe, however, nitrogenous fertilizers must be applied sparingly. Pruning. Two distinct types of pruning are practised with the peach. One is to allow the tree to form its own particu- lar habit of development except to thin out the branches somewhat as illustrated in Fig. 2794 as contrasted with Fig. 2793. Figs. 2795 and 2796 show other exam- ples of this treatment. The other is to practise annual cutting back of the branches as well as thinning out, to produce a strong compact and yet well-spread tree, as illustrated in Fig. 2797. The first method may result in the somewhat earlier production of fruit, as much pruning tends to delay fruiting. Trees whose main branches are not cut back annually are more likely to suffer from breakage not only in seasons of heavy crops, but also during ice-storms in winter. On each tree, also, the vigorous fruit-bearing parts tend to extend farther away from the main trunk each year. Fig. 2793 illustrates the habit of growth assumed by an unpruned tree. The peach produces its fruit-buds upon the one- year-old wood-growth. On vigorous twigs the buds commonly occur in groups of three, as illustrated in Figs. 2798, 2799, the two outer buds being flower-buds and the center bud a leaf-bud. Sometimes all three buds are flower-buds and sometimes only one. Single flower-buds may frequently occur also. Many fads in pruning prevail, which have no eco- nomic bearing upon the amount and quality of the crop. The height to which the trees should be cut back when planted varies with different growers, but from 18 to 24 inches is a good average. Some prefer the extreme of 6 inches, but such low trees often make borer- removal difficult. At the end of the first season's growth, the real pruning of the tree begins. At that time the main branches of the tree should be chosen. The best three or four well-placed branches should be chosen to form the framework for the future top of the tree as illus- trated in Figs. 2800, 2801. These should be distributed upon the trunk and not issue from the same point, although on different sides, as in Fig. 2802. In some cases a tree may have developed only a single irregu- lar shoot and this will then require severe cutting back to encourage branching at the desired height. Fig. 2803 shows a good two-year-old tree, low-headed. When several side branches occupy much the same space or cross one another, a choice of one should be made and the remainder pruned off. The amount of cutting-back to be practised at the close of the first season upon the main branches selected for the perma- nent framework of the tree depends on the form of the tree. If it is compact, vigorous, and of the desired form, the cutting back of each tip to the first good side branch is all that is necessary. Should one main branch be irregular in growth, more severe pruning is desirable. Severe cutting- back, save in the case of poorly formed trees, only delays fruiting and in- creases the ex- pense. During the second summer, the necessity for severe winter pruning may be prevented by the rubbing off of any shoots that tend to develop as suckers low down upon the trunk, or in the center of the tree where they are not wanted, 2793. Unpruned thick-topped peach tree. PEACH PEACH 2497 and the pinching back of the tips of any branches that tend to develop in an irregular manner. The removal of shoots should be done before they are more than an inch or two in length. The pinching back of irregular shoots should be accomplished in June or early July before they are more than 18 or 20 inches in length. The removal of much growth and foliage in the summer may cause a severe check to the tree. The annual dormant-season pruning beginning with the second year should be somewhat as follows: The main branches will develop numerous _ side branches and the strongest and best placed of these should be retained. A well-formed tree is not only agreeable to look upon, but furthermore the maximum production of good fruit is secured only when the greatest possible amount of vigorous fruit-bearing surface is properly exposed to light. The annual cutting back of the leading branches to the first good side branch will result in well-spread vigorous trees. The cutting of a branch to an "outside bud," however, does not change the direc- tion of growth of that branch to anywhere near the same degree. The cutting back of the branches causes a thickening of the top, and some thinning out of shoots and branches is necessary, otherwise the fruit will lack color. A central leader is avoided in the pruning of peach trees, and any shoots which tend to shut out the light from the center of the tree should be kept pruned back and not allowed to become more than fruiting twigs. The general form of the tree should be about complete at the close of the third or fourth summer after plant- ing, and the annual pruning will largely consist of the removal of any broken branches and the cutting back of the annual growth on each branch about one-third or one-half, according to the variety and the amount or length of growth. Pruning is often the most economi- cal method of thinning, and this point should not be overlooked. After peach trees have fruited for several years, they commonly require a severe cutting back to reduce the size of the top and to secure more vigorous wood. Such a cutting back should be practised whenever the fruit-buds are destroyed in winter. All branches may be cut back into wood-growth formed the two or three previous seasons. It is never advisable to saw the main branches back to mere stubs a foot or more in length except upon young trees that are to be top-worked. Thinning the fruit. Thinning is now a regular feature of good orchard- management. Small fruit sells for low prices at all times and in seasons of heavy crop-pro- duction can hardly be disposed of at any price. When trees are allowed to mature as much fruit as will set in a favorable season, much breakage of branches is the usual result. The small green fruits should be thinned as soon as the so- called "drop" or the natural thinning occurs. Some- times this fails to take place and then the fruit should be thinned as soon as it is about the size of 2794. The interior weak branches are a shelled hickory- removed. (Compare Fig. 2793.) nut. Thinning the fruits to not less than 6 inches apart will not reduce the yield of the tree, and 8 inches apart is not too much to secure extra-large fruit, especially upon such sorts as Waddell, Crosby, Mountain Rose, and Stump, which tend to be small to medium in size under average conditions. Harvesting the fruit. This part of the peach business really begins as soon as a crop is definitely assured for the season. The 2795. Peach trees allowed to take their natural form. necessary number of packages should be purchased, the packing-house put in order, and arrangements made for the needed number of teams, trucks, pickers, packers, and other labor. When the fruit is ready to pick, the work should be organized with one man in constant charge in the orchard. He should direct the pickers and see that each one picks all the fruit that is mature enough at any one time and yet does not take off that which is too green. An efficient picking-crew is necessary in order to secure good results at the packing-house. White-fleshed peaches change from a light green to a cream-white ground- or under-color as they mature. So-called yellow-fleshed varieties change from a yellow- ish green to various shades of yellow or orange as they ripen. Pickers should be instructed to determine the maturity of a fruit by its color, and be corrected if they attempt to test it by pressure with the ringers. Good pickers will harvest from sixty to one hundred sixteen- quart baskets a day from well-pruned trees. The fruit is not uncommonly picked directly into the package in which it is sold, but this practice is rapidly passing in favor of a distinct picking-basket. The most common type in use is a round flat-bottomed wooden stave basket of sixteen quarts capacity. A low-wheeled wagon is best adapted for hauling the fruit from the orchard to the packing-house. Packing the fruit for market. Some sort of a packing-house is necessary when any considerable amount of fruit is handled. A shelter against rain is imperative to prevent the warping of wooden packages. Rapid work in packing can best be organized in a building with a wooden or cement floor and where stencils and tools can be kept in order. A long and relatively narrow packing-house with large doors upon either side is likely to prove the most eco- nomical for the handling of the fruit. Packages, tables, and box- or crate-presses should be arranged in a way to promote rapid and efficient work. No distinct grades of peaches, unfortunately, have become recognized in any broad way. Persons em- ployed as packers should be chosen for their honesty and interest in the business as well as for their rapidity in rilling the packages. 2498 PEACH PEACH The common commercial packages now in use are the sixteen-quart Jersey or Delaware basket and its modifications, the Georgia six-basket carrier, the Michi- gan bushel and half-bushel, the Climax basket (Fig. 2804) and the western or California box. Packages often arrive on the market hi bad condition because they have not been suffi- ciently well-filled at the orchard. The fruit must be packed tightly enough so that it cannot move in the package during transit. Simple mechanical 2796. The vase-form, or so-called graders have been used natural-headed tree, in old age. for some time in some of the peach regions, but have never been entirely satisfactory. The new types of graders are still in the experimental stage. See Pack- ages, page 2426, for description of types of fruit-graders. Markets. All the large cities in the United States and Canada, in addition to the local towns, consume large quantities of peaches. A grower who is situated near a large local market can allow his fruit to become well-ripened and haul it by wagon or truck without requiring other transportation facilities. Much of the crop must go to market by rail, however, and if in transit more than a few hours, some refrigeration is necessary. Refrigerator cars are employed for this. The large so-called "Fruit- Growers Express" or "Dispatch Cars" will hold five and one-half tons of ice and are capable of carrying 448 Georgia carriers in four tiers, or 558 crates in five tiers. All crates, boxes, or baskets should be so arranged when placed in refrigerator cars as to allow of a free circulation of air. Precooling of peaches previous to shipment is practised to some extent, but is not yet common. One who engages in peach-production upon a large scale cannot depend upon local markets to take his entire crop at a profit and must be prepared to ship to the wholesale markets. The ideal shipment is the car- load. To ship at least a carload of fruit constantly, one needs to have from about 1,000 to 1,200 trees of each variety in full bearing. Insects. The most serious insect enemies of the peach are the borer, San Jose scale, and curculio. A few years 2797. Headed-in peach tree. ago the scale was considered the most troublesome of the three, but the borer is now the most difficult to control. The mature insect is wasp-like in appearance, the male shining steel-blue in color with an orange- yellow band about the abdomen, while the female is of a deeper and duller color. The eggs are laid on the trunk near the ground from June to as late as Septem- ber, or possibly October. The "grubs" hatch and work their way under the bark and there feed upon the inner bark for about twelve months, when a case is formed of the "sawdust" and other materials, in which the pupa stage is passed. One or two borer larvae may completely girdle a nursery tree, while several may accomplish similar damage on a young tree in the orchard. In any case the infested tree is greatly weak- ened. The presence of borers is easily detected by the mass of gum and "chewings" at the base of the tree. A great variety of materials has been tested as coatings to prevent the entrance of borers, but none has proved to be entirely successful. The expansion of the bark because of growth causes numerous cracks in the coating of most materials that are applied and the borers gain entrance. A soft grade of asphaltum applied to the trunk for a few inches above and below ground is a promising material now under test . Lime -sulfur, white- wash, and other materials may have some value as repellants, but are not very efficient. The common practice is to remove the soil to a depth of 6 to 8 inches about the trunks of the trees in early spring and to kill the borers by means of a knife and a short piece of wire. Some growers examine their trees in autumn, but there is danger of winter injury unless the soil is put back before severe winter weather occurs. The San Jose scale is now easily con- trolled by a thorough dormant-season spray- ing of lime-sulfur diluted to a specific gravity of 1.03 to 1.04. The plum-curculio is a small snout beetle about ft inch in length with four irregular humps upon the wing-covers. It is dark mottled gray in color with black markings. 2798. The principal damage caused by this insect Fruit-buds is during seasons of light crops or upon trees of *he Pe*ch just coming into bearing when the loss of a proportion of the green fruits reduces the crop. In seasons of heavy crops, the loss of a proportion of the green fruit may not prove to be of economic importance. The beetle appears in the orchard about blooming time and feeds on the foliage until the calyces are shed from the fruits, when egg-laying begins. If the egg hatches, the larva makes its way to the center of the peach and feeds upon the developing germ, causing the fruit to fall from the tree later. The mature beetle may also do considerable feeding upon the outside of the peach while it is still small, causing irregular blemishes that may markedly effect the commercial value of the fruit. The curculio is most troublesome when the orchard is surrounded by grasslands and hedgerows of weeds and native trees. When much of the area is under cultiva- tion and good orchard practice prevails, the damage is greatly reduced. A spraying of arsenate of lead just after the petals fall, and again just as the calyces are shedding from the fruits, will destroy many of the curculio. It is best to combine the lead with the self-boiled lime-sulfur to secure a better distribution of the lead and prevent any burning of foliage by an inferior product. The bark-beetle is a small black insect not more than y§ mcn m length that attacks the bark upon weakened trees, causing gum to exude in spots upon the trunk and branches. Fortunately, the insect usually causes little or no damage to vigorous healthy trees and its presence indicates that some other factor is really to blame, although it is sometimes reported on healthy trees. The black peach aphis is occasionally trouble- some upon light soils, but good culture and a vigorous tween. PEACH PEACH 2499 growth commonly prevents any serious check to the trees. Various beetles and grasshoppers may cause some damage at times by feeding upon the peach, such injuries being most common in orchards in which grass or weeds are allowed to grow freely. Diseases. The peach is subject to the attacks of a considerable number of diseases. The most difficult to combat are yellows, little-peach, and rosette. The causes of these diseases are still unknown. Some suggest the presence of a fungus, others an organism too small to be detected by the ordinary microscope, and there is also the possi- bility of enzymes. The advanced stages of yellows are indicated by a prematuring of the fruit from a few days to at least two weeks in advance of the normal season. Such fruit is commonly red-spotted and blotched in its coloring and may be insipid or bitter in flavor. Affected trees may also develop sickly wiry twig-growths on the trunks and branches. Little-peach is indicated by a characteristic drooping of the foliage and by the fact that the fruit is smaller and matures later than the fruit on healthy trees. Rosette occurs only in southern districts and is readily distinguished by the tufts of leaf-development. This disease is fatal within twelve months in many instances. It is not known whether these diseases are entirely dis- tinct or not, but they have been so regarded. Yellows and little-peach attack all varieties in about the same pro- portion. Infection does not appearto take place through the soil, flowers, or seed. These diseases can readily be transmitted to healthy trees or stocks, however, by bud- ding. Buds taken from the apparently healthy parts of diseased trees have invariably reproduced the diseases. The recognition of early stages of yellows and little- peach have shown that these diseases are too frequently distributed in nursery stock. It is now known that a tree may be infected with either of these diseases for three or four years without showing any prominent symptoms. When good growing conditions are pro- vided, the true state of affairs may be masked for a time, but a check to growth will result in the prompt appearance of the advanced stages of disease. Many cases of so-called "cures" of yellows have been announced, but all have been without sound basis. Too often trees affected with borers, winter injury and other troubles are considered to be affected with yellows. Diseased trees should be destroyed as soon as detected. When such trees are left in an orchard, the disease spreads to surrounding trees until all are affected. If all diseased trees were destroyed annually in any dis- trict and no diseased nursery trees were introduced, the annual loss could readily be kept as low as 1 per cent, without much doubt. Yellows attacks Japanese plums as well as peaches, and this should not be overlooked in control work. Peach leaf-curl, brown-rot, peach-scab and mildew are fungous diseases of the; peach which cause much damage annually. The leaf-curl attacks the foliage in early spring just as the leaf-buds open, and the leaves become curled, thickened, and distorted. The tips of shoots may also become affected and the disease is occasionally seen upon the fruit in a fan-shaped dis- colored area. The affected leaves finally turn brown, and fall from the trees in early summer. In severe attacks, the trees are almost completely defoliated, greatly reducing their vigor and causing them to lose most of the fruit which may have set. This disease is readily controlled by a spraying with lime-sulfur, as directed for the scale, before the leaf-buds begin to make growth. After the leaf -buds begin to expand, however, the spraying may not prove effective. Recent experiments have been tried with apparent success in New York of fall spraying for leaf-curl, as late as the first part of December. Brown-rot was formerly one of the dreads of the peach-grower. Thousands of baskets of fruit fre- quently rotted on the trees just at harvest time. Not until the value and safety of self-boiled lime-sulfur summer spray was demonstrated by Scott were the peach-growers supplied with an effective remedy for the disease. This affliction may not only cause a rapid decay of the fruit at ripening time, but it sometimes attacks the blossoms and causes their death. The affected blooms are distinguished from frost injuries from the fact that they cling to the twigs, and gum commonly oozes out from the canker formed upon the twig at the base of the bloom. The small green fruits may also decay at all stages, and the twigs may be killed outright from numerous cankers upon the bark. Such varieties as Triumph and Connecticut frequently begin to rot before they ripen, and the entire crop may be lost even when well sprayed. Such sorts should never be planted. Varieties as susceptible as Champion are not very satisfactory shipping varieties. A thor- ough system of summer spraying, as outlined under "spraying" (page 2500), should control brown-rot. Peach-scab is a fungous disease which appears upon the fruits in the form of small black dots. In severe cases these dots may be so numerous as to form a sooty blotch. The skin of the fruit may then crack, offering an excellent opportunity for brown-rot to begin its destruction. Peach-scab is most serious from central New Jersey south to Georgia. Upon hilly areas, north of central New Jersey, it is rather uncommon 2799. The three leaves at a joint, where fruit-buds are forming. Fruit-buds sometimes form in the axil of single leaves, and sometimes on short spurs. and it seldom requires any attention. The disease occurs only upon the upper surface and ends of the peach as it grows on the branch. It makes its appearance in the form of very minute black spots or dots from about the middle to the last of June upon early varieties in New Jersey, Delaware and Maryland. Farther south it occurs correspondingly earlier. It may be readily controlled by thorough summer spraying with the self- boiled lime-sulfur. Peach-mildew most frequently occurs along the northern limits of peach-production near the Great Lakes, and in the Northwest. This is probably because of the wider extremes of temperature during the day. Mildew appears in the form of a white powdery sub- stance upon the leaves and fruit. It may do consider- able damage to nursery stock in some cases. Sprayings 2500 PEACH PEACH with self-boiled lime-sulfur will commonly hold it in check. Spraying. The peach is subject to the attacks of numerous disease and insect enemies, and thorough spraying is required for success in most cases. The peach foli- age is very sensitive to caustic sprays, however, and 2800. Young peach trees pruned, one of them headed back. great damage may be done from ignorance. Copper sprays, such as bordeaux, are dangerous to use on peach foliage in humid climates. San Jose" scale and leaf-curl can be controlled by a winter spraying of lime-sulfur. Peach-scab and brown-rot can be held in check by several sprayings of the self-boiled lime- sulfur summer spray. When San Jose1 scale, leaf-curl, peach-scab, brown- rot and curculio appear to any considerable extent, the following spraying schedule is suggested: 1. For scale and leaf-curl, apply concentrated lime- sulfur diluted to a specific gravity of 1.03 to 1.04 before the leaf-buds start to make growth in early spring. 2. Just after the petals fall, apply self-boiled lime- sulfur of an 8-8-50 formula and arsenate of lead at the rate of three pounds of paste, or one and one- half pounds of powdered lead to each fifty gallons of spray. 3. Repeat this when the calyces are shedding from the fruits or when the latter are about the size of green peas. 4. Apply self-boiled lime-sulfur without the addition of arsenate of lead three weeks after the third spraying. 5. Apply self-boiled lime-sulfur again three weeks later to all varieties ripening later than Carman. 6. In wet seasons and especially for varieties as late as Fox, Salway, or Bilyeu, an additional spraying may prove profitable. No spraying should be done within less than three weeks of the ripe stage, or the fruit may have a white- washed appearance. Where the plum-curculio causes little or no damage, the second spraying may be omitted, and where peach- scab and brown-rot are uncommon, the fourth, fifth, and sixth sprayings may be omitted. Winter injuries. There are several forms of winter injury, including bud-killing, twig-killing, collar injury and bark-split- ting. Bud-killing takes place when the temperature is too severe in winter. The pistils and stamens are killed in their rudimentary state, giving the center of the bud a brown or black appearance when a cross- section is made. Poorly formed buds often die even when the winter temperatures are not particularly severe. Alternate warm and cold periods may also result in bud-killing. Varieties such as Reeves, Early Crawford, and Mountain Rose suffer more from bud- killing than Greensboro, Carman, or Crosby. Vigorous trees that ripen their wood-growth early are best able to withstand low temperatures successfully. Trees that make a relatively late growth are, however, more successful in resisting the effects of a variable winter. Twig-killing is a more severe form of injury than bud- killing, and following such injury the trees should be well cut back before growth begins. Collar injury is caused by the action of the weather upon the bark of the trunk just at or below the sur- face of the ground. In mild cases, the inner bark becomes yellow in color and very spongy. The tree is checked in growth and the fruit forced to an unusually large size. The lenticels or dots are large and the flavor of the fruit is often astringent, due to a large propor- tion of tannin. In more severe cases of injury, the trees suddenly die in midsummer with the shriveled fruit clinging to the twigs. Bark-beetles often attack trees checked by winter injury and the death of the trees is often entirely attributed to their attacks. The Elberta appears to be more susceptible to this form of winter injury than such varieties as Greensboro or Carman. The soil should be firmly mounded up for about a foot against the trunks of peach trees just before freezing weather each fall to prevent such winter injury. The bark on the trunks of old peach trees may occasionally crack open as a result of winter weather. The most that can be done is to cut away the bark that has separated from the sap-wood and to paint the latter to prevent decay. Peach trees not infrequently suffer injury to the sap-wood of the branches and twigs, and the trees may fail to grow vigorously the following spring. Such trees should be given liberal fertilizing and be kept well cultivated to promote a good growth. M. A. BLAKE. Peach-culture in the South. Peaches have been abundant in the southern states since the very earliest settlement, the so-called Spanish varieties being first distributed by the early settlers in Florida, and to this day, all through the South Atlantic States, the old "Spanish Blood" or "Tinsley" peach, is spoken of as one of the choice fruits of the earth. From time to time all the improved varieties were scattered through the South by the more progres- sive horticulturists and nurserymen and these and their seedlings were abundant on nearly every planta- tion. The South being strictly an agricultural country, there was little chance for commercial peach-culture until along between 1870 and 1875, when the introduc- tion of a number of new extra-early varieties of the Alexander type, seedlings of Hale and Rivers, gave such bright showy peaches the latter part of May and early June that attempts were made to market them at a profit in our northern cities. A lack of quick through railway-express service caused them to be three and four days on the way, and usually to be delivered in poor condition. Occasional lots, arriving in fair to good condition and selling at $12 to $20 a bushel, convinced a few of the shippers that the extra-early peaches of the South were appreciated at the North, and persistent efforts were continued to get them to market in sound condition. Every con- ceivable style of shipping package was used, — paper- wrapped fruit placed between layers of cotton, excelsior, paper, and the like, and sent by express or steamer, — and all brought about the same returns, "Arrived in bad order." Only occasional lots paid a profit. Finally, heavy refrigerator boxes that would hold about six bush- els of fruit in packages, and a sufficient quantity of ice, with strong castor wheels under them so they could PEACH PEACH 2501 be trundled in and out of freight cars, were utilized to bring peaches north by Savannah and Charleston steamers; and by re-icing on the steamers, much of the early fruit came through in good order and sold at such satisfactory prices as to encourage the sending of the large midsummer peaches to market in the same way, and the planting of moderate-sized orchards and the further experimenting with seedlings and varieties best suited to long shipments. The perfection of the refrigerator car for fruit trans- portation, improved machinery for the cheap manufac- ture of ice, the consolidation of various small railway lines into great through routes of transportation, and a full appreciation by their managers of the importance of a successful peach industry, and last but not least, the originating of the Elberta peach by Mr. Rumph, were the final factors in rapidly developing the great commercial peach industry in Georgia, and its smaller counterparts in South Carolina, Alabama, Mississippi, and the more recent rush of overplanting in Texas, Arkansas, Oklahoma, and southern Missouri. The year 1889 saw the first large peach crop success- fully harvested and marketed. Profits were large, and being reported in the press many tunes greater than they really were, stimulated much planting by those entirely unfamiliar with fruit-culture, and with no special love for it except the money that might be made out of it. Cheap lands and the abundance of good low-priced labor were encouragements to exten- sive plantings. In nearly every state of the South, land in vast tracts suitable for peach-culture could be had at $3 to $10 an acre, and labor from sun to sun at 40 to 60 cents a day; while in 1915 these lands are selling at $25 to $100 an acre, with a possible average of $40, and labor costs $1 a day or more, while the added expense of three or more sprayings each year has helped to double the cost of peach-production in the South. Along the Atlantic and Gulf coasts, varying from 100 to 200 miles inland, most of the land being low and flat, early blooming, followed by spring frost, makes the peach industry too uncertain to be profitable. The hill lands in western sections of Atlantic Coast states, and northern sections of the Gulf States, is really the peach country of the South, where extended lists of varie- ties are grown, covering a season of fully two months; while the southwestern states, planting almost entirely of one variety, have a season of less than two weeks in many orchards. Fort Valley and Marshallville, the great peach centers of Georgia, though on tablelands about 200 miles from both ocean and Gulf, and at an elevation of a little over 500 feet, are not in what might strictly be called the hill country, being just below the southern edge of it. In this section of Georgia, most of the peach orchards have been planted on old cotton- land, much of which has been in cultivation a century or more, and while the surface-soil is worn and poor, down deep in the red clay soil underlying the 6 or 8 inches of sandy gray loam of the surface, there must be a vast amount of fertility from the way peach trees grow when once started and a reasonable amount of culture is given. In the early days most of the orchardists, who were cotton-planters as well, planted second- and third- class yearling trees, or else small June-budded trees any time from October to March, opening furrows for the trees and cross-checking the rows 18 to 22 feet apart, later plowing this land and planting it in cotton, continuing it for three and often four years. Two to four hundred pounds of low-grade fertilizer is applied in drills for the cotton and usually very thorough cul- ture given; trees are allowed to grow at will, then* culture being incidental to the cotton crop. In such orchards very little if any pruning was ever attempted. After the trees become so large as to drive out the cot- ton, one plowing is given in winter, then anything from fairly good culture to none at all the remainder of each season. Such a system resulted in many "scrub orchards," that were not very profitable after six or seven years. In the recent and more highly developed peach orcharding of this section of the South, better prepara- tion is given the land at the start, dynamiting of the holes for planting being largely practised. There is a more careful selection of trees, far more liberal fertiliz- ing, planting at greater distances, seldom less than 20 by 20 feet, better culture, less and less of intercropping, except of cowpeas and other cover-crops, and somewhat more of systematic pruning, though as yet this art is not fully enough practised to show best results. Many of the land-booming orchards, planted between 1890 and 1900, proved financial failures and are either no longer in existence or else have been absorbed into other and better propositions. There are less and less of the cotton farmer orchardists and more peach specialists, as time and experience have shown the business to be unprofitable, except under best business conditions. The writer's plantations, which ten years ago aggre- gated some 265,000 trees, have now been reduced to less than 100,000 trees, as only by planting at greater dis- tances and giving a less number of trees better care and attention, can any profit be assured. All land is plowed deep, and sometimes subsoiled before planting. Young orchards are given frequent and thorough tillage up to midseason, when two or three rows of cowpeas are drilled in at least 4 feet away from the rows of trees; these and the trees are culti- vated frequently, until the peas have taken almost full possession of the ground, and it is time for both the land and trees to have a rest from cultivation. In the fall when peas are ripe, enough are gathered for next year's seed, after which hogs or mules may be turned in to pasture for a time. The stubble furnishes a fine winter cover, and is turned down at first plowing in February or March, when summer culture begins, and at proper time the orchard is again seeded to cowpeas, across the former direction of the rows. Three years of this usually builds up a perfect orchard without the aid of any other fertilizers, except possibly a very little about the trees at time of planting to give them a start. Low-headed trees are the rule, the trunks seldom branching over 18 inches up, and often 8 inches to 2801. Before and after pruning. a foot from the ground. As a rule, the close cutting- back at time of planting, and a general shortening-in of the leading branches for the first two or three years, is about all the pruning given, even in the best orchards. A good plan is to shorten-in every year much of the past season's growth, and from the central head often cut back two or three seasons' growth; but under no circumstances are any of the good side shoots cut out 2502 PEACH PEACH that force themselves on all the main stems when the top is properly headed back. These little side branches have given several full crops of fruit, when without them there has been failure. Soil and climate favor the very brightest of color on all peaches in the South; qualities of the soil and the long, hot summer sun give a richness and sweetness of flavor superior to any other section of America, though the same varieties are not so juicy or luscious as when grown farther North. The orchards in connection with cotton plantations run all the way from 10 to 100 acres in extent, while the "straight-out peach farm" seldom has as few as 50 acres in fruit, more of them having from 100 to 200 acres, while orchards all the way from 300 to nearly 1,000 acres in extent are no uncommon sight. The Georgia peach industry turns out 5,000 to 7,000 carloads of peaches in seven or eight weeks of a busy picking season, even though the 18,000,000 trees estimated to have been in that state ten years ago have now been reduced to less than 8,000,000. Growth usually ceases early in August, and the trees shed their leaves the last of September, a month or six weeks before any frosts occur. Should the fall be warm and wet, some fruit-buds will be forced into bloom, while the greater number will remain dormant until late January or early February, when spring growth commences, The season of full bloom is usually about the first week in March, though it varies all the way from February 15 to March 25, and no matter whether early or late, the entire blooming season of most varieties covers a period of nearly three weeks. While spring frosts are the greatest menace to southern peach- culture, this long blooming period often gives a chance for a setting of fruit between the various frosts, or after the last one, from some belated buds. Even with these varying chances of escaping between frosts, about one year in three frost destroys the peach crop in some one or more of the great centers of peach-production in the South.- Two other serious troubles hamper the southern peach cultivator — curculio and monilia or brown-rot. Curculios are very abundant; beginning early in April, they keep up their destructive work until the end of the fruiting season. In recent years in the summer spraying for monilia, the addition of arsenate of lead has controlled the ravages of curculio so well that now they are far less destructive than before. The early spring months at the South are inclined to be pleasant and very dry, and the sum- mer rains, which are fre- quent and abundant when they do come, often do not set in until the latter part of July or early August, near the end of the peach- shipping season. Often, however, they begin in June, and continue for two or three weeks, and in the case of the season of 1900 it rained for six weeks through the main part of the peach harvest. Hot sun between showers and the general' mugginess of a warm climate rapidly breed the monilia fungus, and brown-rot is the most serious trouble the southern peach-grower has to contend with, though with proper spraying it may be held almost entirely in check, and except for the extra expense is not now to be feared as in the earlier days of southern peach-culture. In the ten years from 1895 to 1905, probably more than 50 per cent of peaches grown in Georgia rotted on the trees, or else 2802. A bad form of top. reached market in specky condition as the results of monilia fungus. The first great crop of Georgia peaches that made a strong impress on all northern markets was in 1889, when the Elberta variety by its large size, great beauty, and fine keeping qualities showed up so strongly for the first time as to outclass all other varieties. Great profits were made and, being reported as even greater, there was a mad rush to plant Elberta, and Elberta only. This was kept up until 1896-7 before it came to be realized that there could be too much of even a good thing. The rushing of a great volume of fruit, no matter how choice, into the markets in two or three weeks, before they had been "toned up" to at least a liberal supply of good fruit, was a business mistake. To remedy this there has been a hunt after a good early variety to precede the Elberta, as well as later ones to follow it. So that, while prior to 1896 more than 75 per cent of the plantings were of Elberta, since that time not more than 15 to 20 per cent of Elberta have been planted. There is a better balance of varieties, and a longer and more profitable season of marketing has been assured. Many early and mid-early varieties growing ten or fifteen years ago have mostly been abandoned, Greensboro, Carman, Hiley and Belle (of Georgia) being varieties most largely grown to precede Elberta. Growers are now beginning to abandon the Greensboro and plant excessively of other extra-early varieties, notably Uneeda, Arp (Arp Beauty or Queen of Dixie), and Early Rose. These varieties having sold at extremely high prices in recent years, there now appears as great a tendency to plant extra-early ripening peaches as there was for the Elberta in the earlier days. When loading in cars, the crates are placed side by side about 2H inches apart across the car, taking seven crates. Then two strips of inch-square stuff, just long enough to reach across the car, are put on top of the crates at each end and are lightly nailed down. Tier upon tier is built np in this way, either five or six crates high, until the car is full. Spacing of the crates and the slatting provides space for cold air around each and every crate. In dry seasons, when fruit is free from rot- germs, cars as now constructed can with safety be loaded five crates high, but in wet seasons, with rot prevalent, they arrive in market in much better condi- tion when loaded only four high. Besides the original icing, which requires four to six tons to a car, a re-icing after loading takes one to three tons, depending upon how long the car is loading. A car will hold 448 to 525 crates, according to the size of the car and whether loaded four or five crates high. Handled along best modern tines, with careful inspection from start to fin- ish, it costs for the six-basket Georgia carrier, from 30 to 35 cents to take peaches ripe from the tree and place them in the car. Some peaches of the Crawford type are grown all through the South, but they do not succeed [so well as most others of the Persian strain, and none of the Persians does so well in the far South as the North China strains, to which Carman, Hiley, Early Rose, Belle, and Elberta belong. The South China peaches, to which the Peen-to, Honey, and Angel belong, suc- ceed best in Florida and close along the Gulf Coast. While their bitter-sweet flavor is appreciated by some, they are not generally profitable for market. In preparation for marketing the fruit crop, many of the large orchards have railroad side-tracks running to their packing-houses in the orchard; refrigerator cars are brought South, and every available bit of side- track for 300 or 400 miles about is filled with these cars. At leading centers, refrigerator-car people have constructed great ice-storage-houses, with every con- venience for quickly icing and re-icing cars. Agents of these refrigerator-car companies, by frequently driv- ing about among the orchards and keeping in touch with the managers, plan to have enough cars iced and PEACH PEACH 2503 cooled off so as to be ready for each day's demand, and by placing an order with the railroad agent the night before, the orchardist may have one or a dozen refrigera- tor cars delivered on his side-track in the morning. For smaller shippers, who cannot load in carlots, the railroads keep at all times in season refrigerator cars on siding at each station in the peach district, into which any number of shippers may load; more often there will be a number of such cars loading at the same time, so that a shipper may have a choice as to which market he will consign his fruit. Except in the height of the season, these cars are often two and sometimes three days in loading, and the continued opening of the car to put in small lots of fruit prevents perfect refrigera- tion ; consequently fruit f rein small shippers more often goes to market in bad order than from the larger orchards, where a car can be quickly loaded and at once closed up, not to be opened until ready for sale in some northern market. In the Hale orchards, a car is often loaded in an hour, and very little of the fruit is ever so long as two hours passing from the tree through the assorting- and packing-houses to the car. In some of the smaller orchards, fruit is packed in crates or baskets under the trees, and then hauled in open wagons, often without springs, to the railroad station. In others, some of the old farm buildings are used as packing-houses; more often special fruit-houses are used, their size depending upon the requirements of the orchards, while in style and convenience more depends upon the intelligence of the orchardists and desire to handle the fruit rapidly in best possible man- ner. The picking-basket most generally used is a shal- low, round basket, with a drop handle, and holding about a half-bushel. With good refrigerator cars and prompt railroad service, fruit is now allowed to come to full maturity on the tree, and is picked just before it begins to soften. Since the organization of the Georgia Fruit Exchange, some eight or ten years ago, about 75 per cent of the peach-growers of Georgia, Alabama, and South Caro- lina have, through this cooperation, been enabled to secure a wider distribution and a more uniform market- price for their products, and their business is on a more secure foundation than in any other section of the South. j. H. and a number of experiments have been made with Canada field peas, fenugreek, and vetch. To grow a cover-crop successfully, it is necessary to have water in the fall, and as water from the canals is not obtain- able, it must be secured by pumping. Barnyard manure, when it is to be had, is given the preference by growers. This is becoming very scarce, however, and eventually commercial fertilizers will come into general use. Peach-growing in California. The peach is a fruit of wide commercial importance in California. The great peach-growing sections are principally in the San Joaquin and Sacramento valleys, but orchards are found and are profitable not only in the mountains up to an altitude of 3,000 feet, but also in the coast sections. The most important districts are the first named. For size, flavor, color, and shipping qualities, the peaches grown in this state have a national reputation. The tree thrives not only on the sandy, loamy soils which are adapted to irrigation and are well drained, but also on the heavier red and black soils, which are more or less mixed with gravel and are found both in the foothill and coast regions of California. On account of the arid climate, there being no rainfall from May until October, it goes without saying that to produce high-class peaches for either shipping, canning, or dry- ing, irrigation is very essential. The theory that was formerly advanced that irrigated fruit would not keep, has not been borne out in practice, and to attempt to grow peaches without irrigation, particularly in the great valleys, would now be considered the height of folly. Xo systematic plan has been followed in fertilizing orchards, although growers are realizing that to grow good fruit and to maintain an orchard up to the very highest standard, the application of fertilizers is essen- tial. Considerable interest is now taken in cover-crops, 159 2803. A good two-year-old peach tree. Peach trees are transplanted in California when they are one year old from the bud, except in years when stock is scarce and trees sell at high prices, when many growers purchase June buds, which transplant readily, providing care is taken to allow them to mature fully in the nursery before digging. Nothing will bring a peach tree to a premature end more quickly than not to prune. Trees when trans- planted to the orchard should be pruned both root and top. The root-pruning should be the shortening-in of all the roots at least one-third and the removal of all bruised and lacerated roots. After the trees are set, they should have the top cut off to within 20 inches of the ground, even if the tree be 6 feet or more in height. In most cases, the failure of trees to grow may be attributed to the orchardist's failure to observe this simple rule. It is very necessary to settle the soil around the tree, either by irrigating (running the water in furrows), or by tanking (using not less than fifteen gallons of water to a tree). The winter following the planting in the orchard, the branches forming the head should be confined to not more than five at the very outside, and four is better. These should be cut back at least two-thirds and all laterals removed. This pruning will not only cause the trees to grow stocky, but it will probably also serve the purpose of making the framework branches very sturdy. The tree will respond by making an immense growth and in the second winter the shortening-in of this growth will again have to be very severe, and thinning will have to be practised. The point to be considered in this case again is to give the tree not only the goblet form, but to perfect it, for this pruning increases its vigor 2504 PEACH PEACH and makes it capable of producing heavy crops which are well protected from any injury by the sun, due to its wealth of foliage. From the third year,- two or three laterals are allowed to grow on each of the frameworks, and their growth is again shortened-in severely. In the fourth year, the pruning need not be so severe, and a reasonable crop of fruit may be expected. Pruning in after years should be followed out regularly each season if good crops are to be secured and the longevity of the tree maintained. It is a mistake to plant peach trees too close together. In former years it was customary to plant 20 by 20 feet, but now trees are planted 24 by 24 feet, as better results have been secured at this distance. Thinning must be practised when the crop is heavy, for, if not followed carefully, the fruit will lack size, and no matter for what purpose it is used it will go into an inferior grade and at prices which would be very unsatisfactory to the grower. The peaches should never be closer than 4 inches apart. If the ground underneath the tree has the appearance of being covered with a green carpet from the effect of the thinning, it is evidence that the work has been well done. When shipped fresh, peaches are wrapped in soft paper and packed in twenty-pound boxes. The number 2804. Peach-packing. The Climax basket. of peaches shipped out of California is about 2,200 car- loads annually. For local consumption in the larger cities, the peaches are shipped in open lug boxes, hold- ing about forty pounds. The free-stone peaches are the only ones dried, as a rule. These are first halved, the pits are removed, and the fruit is placed in trays. The drying takes place in the sun altogether. Before drying, the peaches are exposed to the fumes of sulfur for not less than four hours. This not only kills any insect life but gives the peaches a much more appetizing appearance. The very heavy tonnage of dried peaches, averaging 30,000 tons annually, would be utterly impossible to handle unless the same could be dried by exposure to the sun's rays. It requires from six to seven pounds of fresh peaches to make one pound of the dried product. Many persons object to the fuzzy skins on the dried fruit and in recent years peeled peaches have been in the markets in a limited way. The method of peeling has been to expose the halved peaches to the sulfur fumes for several hours. This loosens the skins and they peel off readily. This handling of the fruit is expensive, however, and with the difficulty of securing labor, it has not been practicable except on a small scale. This method has been very much improved, however, and the peaches after being halved are now dipped in a hot lye bath for fifty seconds, using about one pound to ten gallons of water. The peaches are then given a bath in cold water, not only to remove every vestige of lye, but to cause the skins to slough off. Peaches treated in this way sell at twice the price of the unpeeled peaches and the entire character of the fruit is changed. Outside of the Ive bath, which is the only additional treatment the fruit receives, the pro- cess is the same as is followed when the peaches are not peeled. The canning of peaches is another important branch of the industry, the output from California being in the neighborhood of 84,000 tons annually. This work is conducted exclusively by commercial concerns having every modern appliance to handle the fruit expeditiously and turn out uniform grades. Outside of the halving of the peaches, which work is done by women, the work is accomplished entirely with machinery. Sani- tary cans are used as containers and a limited quan- tity of the fruit is placed in glass jars. The commer- cializing of the industry has created a demand for well- defined standards. To illustrate this, the only peaches which are regarded as the leaders by the canning trade are the clings; and in the list of varieties, the Tuskena, Orange, and Phillips, all of which are yellow, are in the heaviest demand. Peaches that have no red at the pit are preferred for canning, as the syrup never becomes discolored. The important place which the canning industry occupies in the peach business will be sure to bring about improvements in varieties to meet the demand for peaches with smaller pits, finer-grained and more highly flavored flesh. Already several new varie- ties, mostly chance seedlings, have been introduced and are attracting considerable attention. For shipping, Alexander, Briggs (Red May), Early Hale, Dewey, Imperial, Sneed, Elberta, and Salway are recognized as standards; for drying, Elberta, Foster, Late Craw- ford, Lovell, Muir, Susquehanna, and Wheatland; for canning, Tuscan, Runyon, and Seller (Orange) Clings, McDevitt and Phillip and Levy (or Henrietta). Fortunately, the California peach orchards have never been threatened with insect pests or diseases that cannot be controlled. The crown root-borer is trouble- some, in some sections, but it has always been under control. The San Jose scale is no longer regarded as a very serious pest, for it is held in check by predaceous insects and by spraying with lime-sulfur washes. Leaf- curl in some years gives considerable trouble, but if the trees are given a thorough spraying with bordeaux, it is easily controlled. The average life of a peach orchard is twenty years, but there are many profitable orchards much older than this, when they have received good care. A failure of a peach crop has never been known in California, and although in some years the crop has been curtailed by late spring frosts, growers have never practised smudging to any extent. GEORGE C. ROEDING. Protecting peach trees in cold climates. Numerous ways of protecting peach trees from the effects of trying winter weather have been devised. Such plans include the placing of a protective covering about the trunk and branches of the tree. Cornstalks, straw, hay, evergreen boughs, and similar materials may be used for this purpose. Some persons have tried the plan of laying the tree on the ground in an effort to make the work of covering easier as well as more effective. Peach trees may be laid on one side with compara- tive ease and without much injury, providing the pro- cess is begun when the trees are small. The root-system is manipulated at this time in such a way that most of it extends in two opposite directions. This is accom- plished by cutting the roots, beginning when the trees are small, preferably the first winter after planting and thus accustoming them to the operation from the beginning. If this plan is followed from the start, a PEACH PEAR 2505 little work with the spade will suffice to lay a tree down. Once on its side, the branches should be gathered together with twine and the covering put in place and weighted down. An interesting method of laying a tree down without disturbing its roots was devised a number of years ago. This is accomplished by bending the newly planted tree over to the ground, where it is fastened. The side branches are cut off at first as fast as they appear, thus inducing a long straight growth. After the prostrate stem has attained a length of 10 to 12 feet, an upright top is allowed to develop. At the approach of winter, the top of a tree trained in this manner can be pushed over easily, as the long prostrate trunk serves as a lever or pivot. The long exposed trunk will need to be protected at all times from the effects of the sun. This is easiest done by using an inverted trough made of light boards. The process of laying trees down under irrigated conditions is somewhat simplified, as the ground can be made very soft by the use of water. Here, again, the work should be begun the first winter after planting. The ground about the young tree is first saturated with water from the irrigation ditch. The trees are then pushed over in the direction that offers the least resist- ance. After the branches have been drawn together with cord, they are covered first with burlap, then with a light coating of earth. As the trees become more mature, a basin about 4 feet in diameter is made in the earth about the trunks before the water is turned in. The nicest of judgment must be used in removing the covering in the spring, as a little too much warmth or a slight exposure to cold may mean the loss of the year's work. At the first sign of swelling buds in the spring, the earth covering must be lightened during the middle of the day and replaced for the night. As growing weather comes on, still more of the covering is removed and a certain amount put back each night until the tree is raised for the summer. The danger of damage by cold continues until the fruits have attained considera- ble size, consequently the work of uncovering in the middle of the day and of covering for the night extends through a comparatively long period. After the danger of damage by frost is passed, the ground is again irrigated and the trees are raised. Trees so handled are unable to support themselves in an upright position, consequently they are supported at an angle by props. It is estimated that the entire labor of laying a tree down, covering and of raising again in the spring, can be done at a cost of 50 cents a W. PADDOCK. PEANUT (Arachis hypoqsea). Popularly the pea- nut, as the name indicates, is called a nut, but it more properly falls into the class of grain or forage crops. The fruit or "nut" is really a pod, comparable with a bean-pod or pea-pod. The plant is related to beans and peas. The seeds (comparable with bean seeds) furnish excellent food for man as well as for his beasts and fowls, and the cured tops make an excellent hay or forage. The peanut is usually not classed with hor- ticultural crops; for a fuller account, see Vol. II, "Cy- clopedia of American Agriculture." Commercially, the peanut is not grown" north of the latitude of Washington, D. C., but on the sandy and loamy soils to the south and west of the above-named city, on lands that have recently been limed, it may be used as a rotation or as a special money crop. North of this territory the plant can be used with profit as a forage for hogs, although only a portion of the pods set will come to maturity. As a garden plant, the peanut can be grown as far north as central New York, but only a few pods will actually mature seeds, except in long warm growing seasons, There are two general types of peanuts: those known as bunch nuts, and as vine or trailing nuts. The bunch nuts are most desirable because the tops can be more easily harvested for forage, the rows may be closer together and the distance between the plants in the row may be less than with the vining types. The culti- vation as well as the harvesting (digging) is easier. The bunch type of nuts, such as the Spanish and Valencia, may be planted in rows 30 to 36 inches apart, with the seeds scattered 6 to 10 inches apart along the row. The large-seeded thick-shelled nuts require to be shelled before planting in order to insure satisfactory germina- tion, but the smaller thin-shelled sorts may be planted whole and a good stand secured. The planting season, as well as the field care of peanuts, is practically the same as for corn. They are tender to frost and grow best during warm weather. The vines will be killed by the first frosts, but when desired for forage should be harvested in advance of that date. As the pods or nuts are borne beneath the surface of the soil, the crop is harvested by lifting or plowing out the whole plant, separating it from the earth and curing the plant and pods together by stacking them in tall narrow stacks built up around a slender stake about 6 feet high, at the bottom of which cleats 3 feet long have been nailed in such a way as to keep the plants off the ground. The stacks are so built as to cause the vines to protect the nuts. The roots with the nuts attached are placed next to the stake, with the tops out. This method permits the nuts to be cured slowly and without discoloration or staining that would result were the nuts exposed to the weather. The plant is a most interesting one, both horticulturally and botanically, and is at the same time an important economic crop as well as a garden novelty. L. C. CORBETT. PEAR. A popular fruit and tree of the genus Pyrus, long cultivated and much modified. The cultivated pear, as known in North America, is derived from two distinct sources, the European Pyrus communis and the Oriental Pyrus serotina. Pears of the European stock have been grown in North America from the earliest settle- ment of the country. They thrive particularly well in the New England states and New York, and west to the Great Lakes, and again on the Pacific slope. In the great interior basin, pear-culture always hajS been precarious, due pri- marily to the great liabil- ity of the trees to blight. In the southern states, the climate is too hot for the best development of the tree and the best quality of the fruit. In the north prairie states, the winter climate is so severe that the pear tree will not grow. Forms of pears are shown in Figs. 2806 and 2807, as representing the common species. Some time before the middle of the preceding cen- tury the sand or Chinese pear (Pyrus serotina, formerly and, as it now appears, erroneously, identified as P. sinensis), Fig. 2808, was introduced into the eastern states, although it attracted little attention. It soon hybridized with the common pear, and a race of mon- grel varieties was the result. Of these hybrids, only two have gained great commercial prominence. These are LeConte and Kieffer (Figs. 2809, 2810, 2811). The LeConte, which appeared about the middle of last century and which is the first of the American hybrids, so far as we know, was found to be well adapted to the southern states and its general intro- duction there after the close of the Civil War was the beginning of commercial pear-culture in the South. It was first supposed to be blight-proof, but, in later years, orchards have been nearly decimated by the 2805. Cluster of pear flowers (Pyrus communis). (XJi) 2506 PEAR blight, with the result that the LeCpnte is gradually lessening in importance and its place is being taken by the Kieffer, although the latter is by no means blight- free. The Kieffer pear originated with Peter Kieffer, of Roxborough, Philadelphia, an Alsatian gardener, who died in 1890. He grew the Chinese sand pear or Sha 2806. Bartlett pear. The pyriform or "pear-shaped" form of fruit. ( X J-3) Lea and sold the seedlings as ornamental trees, for this species is of very distinct and handsome growth and the fruit is ornamental and fragrant. Alongside the sand pears were Bartletts. Amongst one of the batches of seedlings from the sand pear he noticed a plant with different foliage, and this he saved. Its fruit was found to be superior to the sand pear, and it was introduced as the Kieffer. It fruited in 1873. The Kieffer pear is now very popular in many parts of the country because of its great vigor, healthiness, productiveness, and the keeping qualities of the fruit. In point of quality, the fruit is distinctly inferior, but it meets the demands of the market and is an excellent fruit for canning. Pyrus serotina itself bears a very hard pear which is inedible in the raw state, but it is excellent when used as quinces are. It is fragrant and ornamental. The tree is a most vigorous and clean grower. The plant is well worth growing as an ornamental. It is used for stock for ordinary pears, particularly in the southern states. For an historical and horticultural account of the oriental pears and their hybrids, see Bulletin No. 332, Cornell Experiment Station, by Cox (under direc- tion of the late John Craig). In the cold prairie countries and other parts of the cold north, Russian pears have gained some headway in recent years. These are hardy types of Pyrus corn- munis. The fruit is usually of low quality, but the trees are considerably hardier than the ordinary pear. Pear-culture is the one American fruit industry which seems to show little expansion. Pears are not a popu- lar dessert fruit in this country, and the product is largely used in canning. This is a great pity, and a loss to the people. The cultivation of the Kieffer on a large scale has probably bred a generation of people who are little aware that the pear is a fruit that may be good to eat out of hand; and the commercial and cultural difficulties are greater than with other fruits. The pear thrives on a variety of soils, but it succeeds best on those that are rather hard clay. On sandy and loamy lands it tends to be short-lived. This is perhaps due, in part, to the fact that trees grow rapidly on such lands, and are, therefore, more liable to the attacks of blight. It is now generally accepted that trees which are making a strong and soft growth are more susceptible to blight than those which grow rather slow and firm, PEAR although all trees are liable to attack. Some varieties are more nearly immune than others. Caution must be exercised, therefore, in the tilling of the pear orchard. Whilst pears profit by the best tillage, as apples and potatoes do, it is easy to carry the tilling and fertilizing so far as to produce too vigorous growth and thereby invite the blight, and this disease is the one great menace to pear-culture. Therefore the most careful pear- growers use sparingly of stable manure and of nitrog- enous cover-crops. They prefer to supply fertility by means of concentrated fertilizers which are not very rich in nitrogen. If, however, the trees are not making a strong and steady growth, it is as necessary to apply nitrogenous fertilizers to the pear tree as to any other. In the interior country, pears are likely to suffer from sun-scald, and therefore the tops are started very low, usually not more than 2 or 3 feet from the ground. Standard pears (those not grown as dwarfs) are pruned much as are apple trees, except not so severely. Heavy pruning may open the top and invite sun-scald, and it also tends to make too strong and sappy growth. After the top of the pear tree is well formed and established, it is customary to do little pruning, only keeping the top fairly free and open. The pear bears mostly on spurs which con- tinue to branch and to bear for a number of years, and in pruning it is important that these spurs be not removed unless it is desired to thin the fruit. The flowers are borne in umbel-like cymes (Fig. 2805), but in most k:nds only one fruit sets in a cluster. Pear trees are usually planted much closer than apple trees. The customary distance is 18 to 20 feet. Fig. 2812 shows an average east- American pear orchard. Fig. 2813 is a picking scene. Many of the varieties of pears are infertile with them- selves: they need the pollen of other varieties to cause them to set fruit freely. Probably any variety will fertilize any other variety in case the two bloom simul- taneously. Such varieties as Kieffer and Bartlett are usually classed as self-sterile kinds, but the degree of sterility varies in different places and with different conditions. The safest plan in the setting of a pear orchard is to plant not more than two rows of one variety together, and to alternate with one or two rows of another variety. Good varieties of pears are numerous. The one most important variety is the Bartlett (Fig. 2806), which was early introduced into the United States from Europe, 2807. The globular or apple-shaped form of fruit. — Idaho pear. where it is known as the Bonchretien. At present, the Kieffer probably holds second place. In the eastern states, the Seckel (Fig. 2814) is a prominent variety, and is the standard of quality. Other prominent varie- ties are Anjou (Fig. 2815), Clairgeau, Hardy, Howell, Sheldon, and Diel. The list might be almost indefinitely extended. In the Gulf region, the oriental hybrids PEAR PEAR 2507 alone are successful, and the leaders are Kieffer, LeConte, Garber, and Smith. The most notable pear of early American origin is undoubtedly the Seckel, which originated near Philadelphia in the eighteenth century. As late as 1880, the tree presented the appear- ance shown in Fig. 2816, which appeared (in larger size) in the Gardener's Monthly. In 1908, all that remained was a dead and decayed stump (Fig. 2817). The season of the maturity of pears runs from mid- summer, when it is introduced by Summer Doyenne and (Manning) Elizabeth, to late winter, when it is closed with such late winter varieties as Nelis (Winter Xelis), Malines, and others. The winter pears are rela- tively little known in the eastern states. As a rule, they come into bearing late or are not very prolific; but there is no reason why they should not be better known. Winter pears are kept as are winter apples, although somewhat greater care is necessary. They should be stored in a uniformly cool temperature. If allowed to hang too long on the tree, they become over-ripe, and then if placed in an ordinarily warm cellar, they do not keep more than one or two months. Unlike most other fruits, all pears are greatly improved in quality if they are ripened indoors. They should be picked as soon as they have reached their full size and have begun to color, but before they have become soft, and be placed in a dry and rather cool room. If the wind is allowed to blow over them, they are likely to shrivel. If kept too warm, they ripen too quickly and soon rot. The best quality is secured when they are picked about two weeks in advance of their normal ripening. Pears are marketed much as are apples, although the barrel is little used for the dessert varieties. For export, as well as for a good home trade, the following sentences by George T. Powell are useful: "The fruit should be gathered when it has reached its most perfect develop- ment, but not allowed to come to its full maturity or approximate ripening. This is the right condition of fruit when it i3 to be shipped without refrigeration. With refrigeration, a little fuller maturity may be allowed. Each specimen should be wrapped in paper. A layer of excelsior should be placed on the bottom of the box, which is marked to be opened; over this place a sheet of paper. Pack the pears in single layers, covering each with paper and excelsior until the box is filled, nailing cover securely under considerable pres- sure. Boxes should hold thirty-six large pears, and sixty of medium size. [Fig. 2818.] This is a refinement of even the best packing for the common domestic trade. [Fig. 2819.]" Dwarf pears. When worked on the quince root, the pear is easily grown as a dwarf. The free stocks — those grown nor- mally' on pear roots — are known in this country as standards. The dwarf pear comes into bearing earlier, and, since the trees are small, the fruit can be thinned and the trees sprayed, and the fruit therefore should be of the highest quality. Dwarf pear trees require more care than the ordinary standards, however, and they should not be planted unless the cultivator understands this fact and is willing to give the attention that they need. Although the trees are by nature dwarf, since they are worked on a smaller-growing species, they nevertheless tend to become half standard if left to themselves. Therefore they must be very severely headed-in every year. A dwarf pear tree should never reach a greater height than 12 feet. To keep it down to this stature, from one-half to two-thirds of the annual growth is removed late each winter. The trees are often planted as close together as 10 feet each way, but this is too close. With the ordinary broad-top pruning, which nearly all American growers give, 1 rod apart each way is not too great. A good dwarf pear tree is one in which the union with the quince stock is very close to the ground. When the tree is planted, this union should be 4 to 6 inches below the surface after the ground has settled. This deep planting prevents the breaking of the union and places the quince beyond the reach of borers. If planted deeper than this, the pear cion may throw out roots of its own; in fact, it sometimes does this if planted only 6 inches deep. This rooting of the stock is no particular disadvantage, although the tree thereafter tends to grow stronger and greater pruning is necessary. An expert grower can pick out the trees which are rooted from the pear stock by their more vigorous growth: if he desires to check this redundant growth he may cut off the pear roots. It is the common opinion that dwarf pear trees are 2808. The sand pear.— Pyrus serotina. ( X H) short-lived. This may be true as regards the greater number of specimens which one sees about yards and on untilled areas, but a dwarf pear orchard on good well-drained ground, which is well-tilled and given regular pruning, will last a lifetime. Many varieties of pears do well when grafted on the quince root, but the one that is oftenest grown as a dwarf is the Angouleme (Duchesse d' Angouleme). (Fig. 2820.) This is a large pear of irregular shape which sells well because of its size, but it is of indifferent quality and may not be good enough for a special or personal market. Other varie- ties popular for dwarfs are Louise Bonne, Anjou, Clair- geau, Elizabeth, and, to a less extent, Bartlett and Seckel. Even Kieffer is sometimes dwarfed with satis- factory results. The growing of dwarf pears is a special practice; in general it is not commercially profitable. Writing on dwarf pears from a long experience in New York, L. T. Yeomans says: "The soil best adapted to dwarf pears is a rich loam, with a subsoil that requires thorough underdraining — a tile drain within 5 feet of every tree in the orchard would be thorough draining. The soil should be good strong corn or potato ground, and kept in such condition of fertility from year to year, for which purpose good well-composted barn- yard manure has no equal, but may be supplemented by other fertilizers — as ground bone and potash. Small crops, as beans and potatoes, may be grown between the trees the first few years after planting, but never should they be allowed in the least to interfere with thorough tillage, or to rob the trees of proper and desira- 2508 PEAR PEAR ble nourishment. The growth of the tree is of far greater value than any farm crops which can be grown between the trees. The soil should be thoroughly cultivated at least every ten to fifteen days during the growing season till about August 15 to September 1. It should cease in time that the wood may fully ripen. Suitable culti- vation can hardly be given with any crop on the ground, except, possibly, when sufficient space is left without a crop next to the trees. "The trees should be planted in rows 15 feet each way, or in rows 20 feet apart each way, with one tree in the center of each square. As the trees become older, the entire ground should be given up to frequent culti- vation; and under no conditions should a dwarf pear orchard be seeded to grass, unless to clover for the purpose of plowing it under for fertilization. "Dwarf pears require thorough annual pruning, which may be done at any convenient time after the falling of the foliage and before the buds become in the least swollen in the spring; but, where the cold is severe, it is better not to prune till about the first to middle of March. This .pruning should begin with the first year, and be continued annually during the life of the tree, cutting back all of the growth to within four to eight buds, and thinning out all surplus branches which will not be wanted for limbs to the tree, so that at maturity the tree shall be open-headed, with opportunity for plenty of air and sunshine all through the tree, without which superior quality of fruit cannot be grown. The lower limbs should be within 20 to 24 inches of the ground. Trees when twency to fifty years old should not be more than 12 to 14 feet high, and the diameter of the branches about 12 to 16 feet. [See Fig. 2821.] It is a very erroneous impression that a dwarf pear orchard under proper conditions is short-lived. There are in the United States orchards in vigorous condition, and now producing annual crops, that are from thirty to fifty years old. "Some of the advantages of dwarf over standard pears are: more trees can be planted to the acre, they com- mence bearing much younger, the fruit is not so liable to be blown off by early winds before maturity, it is much more quickly and easily gathered than from high 2809. LeContepear. (XM) trees, the fruit is larger and of better quality than that on standards. All varieties do not succeed equally well as dwarfs, because they do not all form an equally per- fect union with the quince. Angouleme is the leading and most profitable variety now grown as dwarf, although many others succeed well." Pears in the prairie region. On the northern plains, the culture of pears follows the general lines of pear-growing in the Atlantic states, but there are some radical points of difference. Accord- ing to C. L. Watrous, "The difficulties of pear-growing in the upper Mississippi Valley are many and grievous. Above the 40th parallel and west of the Great Lakes, nearly all efforts have been failures. The best suc- cesses have been on high rather steep ridges and bluffs near watercourses, with light-colored clay soils and northerly exposures. Pear trees are not planted to the bottom or to the top, but in belts midway around the slopes. Plums may be used lower down and cherries above. The ground should be already set in clover or blue-grass. Small circles are spaded out for the trees. These are cultivated with the hoe and widened with the growth of the tree. Small trees branched very low are best. The trees may be cut back the second year to within a few inches of the ground. Only a very moderate annual growth is desirable. Use no manure until the tree has borne several crops of fruit, and then only with extreme care. Rich black soils, plenty of manure, and clean culture are deadly to pear trees in this region. The critical period is that of the first fruit crop. The deadly enemy is blight, which is sure to appear then. The successful pear-grower must not neglect his orchard a single day during the season of blight, but watch for the enemy and cut out and burn every blighted twig as soon as seen. Sultry damp weather in June is most critical. Such varieties as Warner, Longworth, Vermont (Beauty), Koonce, and Kieffer are said to succeed farther north and resist blight better than any others. Under slightly more favorable conditions, Clairgeau, Howell, Seckel, Tyson, Washington, and Flemish (Beauty) may be used. The hardiest and blight-resistant varieties may be grown, and when in bearing a branch or two grafted with a more delicate sort with success." Insects and diseases. The insect enemies of the pear are numerous, but, with two or three exceptions, are not very serious. The tree is attacked by borers, although to a less extent than peaches and apples. These are kept in check by digging them out once or twice a year as on other fruit stocks. The fruit is attacked to some extent by the codlin- moth, but the arsenical sprays keep this insect in check. Of late years the psylla, attacking the growing parts, has been very damaging in parts of the East, although it is irregular in its outbreaks. It can be controlled by thorough work with a spray in winter and also when the blossom-buds are expanding, at the former time by the use of "Black Leaf 40" tobacco preparation or kerosene emulsion and similar compounds, and at the latter period by lime-sulfur. If the rough bark is removed in winter and burned, very many of the pests will be destroyed. In some parts of the East the fruit is attacked by the pear midge, a minute fly whose mag- gots work in the very young fruit. Thorough cultiva- tion will check this serious pest, but its complete con- trol often involves the destruction of all the young fruit on the infested trees; the application of kainit to the soil in the second half of June (1,000 to 2,000 pounds to the acre on sandy soils in New Jersey) is said to kill the insect after it leaves the fruit to undergo its trans- formations. Repeated shallow tillage in early summer is a good protection. The foliage and fruit of the pear are attacked by para- sitic fungi, which cause the leaves to drop and the fruit to become scabby. These diseases are readily held in check by spraying with bordeaux mixture or lime-sul- fur. Mor,e than fifty years ago the White Doyenne pear was the most popular variety for growing on the quince root, but because of the pear scab it passed away. It was supposed that the disease was due to uncongenial climate. Since the advent of the sprays, however, it has been found that the White Doyenne can be grown as well as ever. Flemish (Flemish Beauty) is also an example in point. Years ago it was one of the most popular standard varieties, but of late years it has been little grown because of the cracking of the fruit. Pear-blight or fire-blight is the most serious disease of pear trees. It is an American disease. It is caused by a microbe which enters through the growing points PEAR PEAR 2509 ^flowers and tips of shoots) and thrives in soft or suc- culent" parts. Gradually the micro-organism works down the stems, killing the tissues and causing the leaves to die. In the leaf-blight, which is a distinct disease the leaves are more or less spotted and they fall- in the pear-blight, the leaves turn black and hang on the tree. The fire-blight also attacks apple trees, 2810. The Kieffer pear (pointed form), now one of the most important varieties. ( X >i) particularly in the Plains region. It is probably aborigi- nal on hawthorns and related plants. There is no perfect preventive of the disease. Some varieties seem to be relatively immune, as, for example, the Angouleme. It is now generally believed that trees are more sub- ject to the disease when they are making excessive growth; therefore it is advised that tillage and the application of stimulating manures be moderate. As soon as the disease appears, cut out the affected parts, severing them some inches below the lowest point of visible attack. Do not allow blighted branches to remain on the tree over winter. Disinfect the wounds or stubs and the implements with bichloride of mercury or other antiseptic. Destroy hedgerows and thickets in which are other trees on which the blight is carried, as hawthorns, quinces, and diseased apple and pear trees. It is probable that there is a connection with insects in the spread of pear-blight. Literature. There are no recent American books on the pear. Two books have been written on this fruit: Thos. W. Fields' "Pear Culture," New York, 1858; P. T. Quinn's "Pear Culture for Profit," New York, 1869, new edition, 1883. There are bulletins from the United States Department of Agriculture and some of the state experiment stations. Many years ago the writer secured from the venerable T. T. Lyon (Vol. Ill, page 1585), an article, for publication, on the pear. This was pub- lished in the "Cyclopedia of American Horticulture." The Editor is glad again to place this article alongside the others in order to contrast the viewpoints of two generations. Mr. Lyon's article, which is excellent and cautious and characterized by beauty of style, is of the tvpe that we no longer see. The person who is familiar with present-day points of view will discover that it lays the emphasis on formal presentation, propagation, pruning, varieties, whereas little or no attention is given to systems of tillage, pollination, spraying, and commercial methods. The methods in pear-culture, and the varieties, have probably changed less in the last fifteen to twenty-five years than those of any other standard fruit ; as a whole, pear-culture is not extending to any marked degree; and the article that follows is still timely. L. H. B. The pear and its cultivation. So far as cultivators generally are concerned, this fruit is less important than its near relative, the apple, for the reason that, while the two begin to ripen at nearly the same season, there are few, if any, desirable varieties of pears in season later than December (if we except a few austere ones, suitable only for culinary purposes), while apples are abundant for four or five months longer. Moreover, during its entire season, the pear is supplemented by the mass of luscious, though perishable, summer and autumn fruits. The liability of very many usually excellent varieties to be rendered indifferent in quality by unfavorable seasons, neglect or unsuitable soil, is also a serious detriment to the general popularity of this fruit. The liability to the loss of the trees by blight, beyond question detracts greatly from the value of the pear, especially for com- mercial purposes; while it also exerts a dis- couraging influence upon amateur planting. To the careful and discriminating amateur, as well as to the man of wealth, with a fondness for '^ fruit-culture whether in person or by proxy, ^Jgr? this fruit often assumes a prominence over any, 5^E^~ if not all, others. Extent of cultivation. Doubtless, for reasons heretofore stated, pear trees are but sparingly planted by most per- sons. TJie fruit sent to market comes largely from the plantations of specialists who, with soils adapted to the purpose and the necessary knowl- edge of varieties, have undertaken the business as a commercial enterprise. In the climates of the seaboard, and, to a considerable extent, in the region of the Great Lakes, the pear is exceptionally successful; while away from the influence of large bodies of water, and especially in the prairie regions of the Mississippi Valley, from unsuitableness of climate or soil, or both combined, the trees are liable to be either killed or seriously injured in winter, and hence are short-lived and unprofitable. Aspect. Perhaps in no other important particular does the climate of eastern and central North America differ more widely from that of the pear-growing regions of Europe than in its liability to sudden and extreme variations of temperature. Owing to this climatic pecularity, aspect becomes an important consideration in the selection of a location for a plantation of pear trees. As a means of avoiding the full influence of exposure to the rays of the sun, during the severer paroxysms of summer heat, while the trees are in actual growth, and also to mitigate the liability to alter- nate freezing and thawing in winter, a northerly or north- easterly slope is to be pre- ferred ; which, however, should be so gradual as not seriously to interfere with the conveni- ence of cultivation. As we approach the northern limit of practicable pear-culture, however, a modification of this rule of selection may be found desirable, since, with the shorter growing season, a warmer exposure may prove necessary as a means of hastening maturity. Soils. 2811. Section of the Kieffer While the pear tree will pear, to show its ordinary yield more or less satisfac- form in the North. 2510 PEAR PEAR tory results in a variety of soils, it is found to succeed most perfectly in a strong loam, of moderate depth, overlying a porous subsoil. Soils which are liable to be wet during any considerable portion of the growing season are unfit for this purpose, unless deeply and thoroughly underdrained; while even then they are quite liable not to prove fully satisfactory. A few 2812. A pear plantation. varieties are found to be moderately successful on sandy soils, but for general planting such soils should be avoided. Manures. The liability of the pear tree, in this climate, to the attacks of blight is thought to be increased by excessive growth. It is, therefore, desirable that the annual growth be completed, and ripened at as early a date as practicable; and the more so since the liability to blight apparently exists only while growth is in actual progress. Stable and other nitrogenous manures should, for this reason, be applied in moderate quan- tities, in autumn, after the liability to excite renewed growth shall be past. Potash, lime, and phosphorus, which enter more or less largely into the composition of both tree and fruit, and which rarely exist in excess in the soil, may be profitably applied in either autumn or spring. Salt may also be profitably applied to the comparatively dry soils recommended for the pear, but with care not to apply in excess. One or even two quarts may be safely applied to each tree, before the commencement of growth in the spring, if well dis- tributed upon the surface over a space of at least 6 or 8 feet in diameter, and left to be carried gradually into the soil by dew and rain. It is believed to possess little, if any, manurial value; but to act rather as a conservator of moisture, and probably also as a repel- lent of insects. Coarse mulch may be placed about the trees, covering the soil as far out as the roots extend, for the purpose of keeping the earth cool, and also to check evaporation from the soil; but this should not be done as a substitute for cultivation; and the soil beneath the mulch should be kept well pulverized. Propagation. (a) By seedlings: Seeds, when to be planted for the origination of new varieties, should be selected from well-grown and fully matured fruits, of such varieties as possess in a high degree the qualities sought to be reproduced or improved, since a variety in which a characteristic is strongly developed and persistently manifested is the more likely to transmit such peculi- arity to its offspring. Seeds resulting from known or artificial cross-fertilization, and therefore of known and selected parentage on both sides, offer increased probability of valuable results. Seeds intended for the origination of new varieties should be planted very thinly in strong, rich, deeply prepared soil, in a single row, and covered with not more than an inch of earth, so that the young plants shall have ample space for development. Seeds intended for the growing of stocks for nursery purposes should be collected from varieties in which the seeds are plump and well developed, as well as from healthy, vigorous trees. American nurserymen obtain pear seeds mostly from Europe. Seeds intended for nursery stocks are usually planted in broad, shallow drills. In our American climate the foliage and unri- pened wood of seedling pears is very liable to be attacked during midsummer by leaf-blight or mildew, which prematurely arrests their growth. For this reason Euro- pean stocks are generally preferred fc, *y s.. by nurserymen. This attack of mildew may often be partially or wholly- avoided by planting in virgin soil remote from other cultivated grounds. Pear seedlings form a very long tap- root during their first year, with few, if any, side-roots. For this reason they are taken up preferably in autumn, and the tap-roots shortened to 6 or 8 inches, when they may be replanted in nursery rows, and earthed up, or otherwise protected from heaving, or other injury during winter; or, preferably, they may be heeled-in, in a frost-proof cellar, and planted in spring, to be budded during the ensuing summer or left to become more fully established for budding a year later. Seedlings intended for fruiting are usually trans- planted in rows, about 8 feet apart each way, with the expectation that many will be found worthless, and either removed or destroyed. Seedling pears usually require to be fruited several years before their charac- teristics become fully developed. This generally recog- nized fact may be taken as a warning that the occa- sional effort to hasten the puberty of a seedling by fruiting a cion from it upon a bearing tree of different variety cannot be trusted to indicate the ultimate char- acter of the fruit of the yet incipient variety, since it is impossible to foresee to what extent such transfer may interfere with the occult formative processes through which its ultimate qualities would have been developed. (6) By budding: Seedlings of one or two years' growth, intended for standard trees, are usually planted from 6 to 10 inches apart in the nursery row; for the reason that space, as well as cultivation, must be econo- mized to correspond with prices, although it is impos- sible to grow trees of good form and properly branched of the size and age demanded by most planters when thus closely planted. Trees thus closely planted should 2813. Ladders used in picking pears. be removed, or at least thinned, after haying made one year's growth from the bud; while trees intended to be grown two or more years in the nursery row, and prop- erly branched, should be given twice or even three times the space mentioned. The budding of pear stocks may be done during July and August if they continue in a growing condition, PEAR PEAR 2511 but they are liable to be attacked by mildew of the foli- age, for which reason they must be closely watched, and should the malady prove troublesome the budding must be done as soon as properly matured buds can be obtained. Such stocks as, for any cause, were left unbudded at budding time, together with any in which buds shall have failed, may be grafted the following spring; but this, as well as any and all grafting of the pear, must be done very early, before the earliest move- ment of the sap in spring. In the spring, as soon as the swelling of the buds indicates that the germs are alive, the stocks are cut back to force them into growth. Often to insure the formation of straight, upright, sym- metrical trees, careful nurserymen leave 3 or 4 inches of the stock above the insertion of the bud, to which the young shoots may be tied, if it shall fail otherwise to take an upright direction. Shoots may also be thus tied to prevent their being blown out, or otherwise injured by the wind. These stubs should be cut back to the bud when no longer needed for the purposes indicated. Such sprouts as spring from the stock in consequence of the cutting back must be removed from time to time to encourage the growth of the bud. This should be done while they are yet tender and succulent and can, there- fore, be taken off without the use of a knife. This pro- cess must be repeated as they reappear, unless it is rendered unnecessary by the failure or loss of the bud. Pruning. Beyond that described under the head of budding, little pruning is required during the first season, except to pinch in such side shoots as threaten to rob the one intended to become the trunk of the future tree. Early in the spring of the second year, all lateral shoots must be wholly cut away, and since the pear tends strongly to renew its growth from the terminal buds of the previous year, the shoot intended to become the trunk of the future tree must be cut down to the point at which the top is to commence, when the branches to form the head will start from the buds nearest the top. The uppermost shoot must, if needful, be confined in an upright position to constitute the continuation of the trunk. The habits of growth of varieties differ so widely that no inflexible rule can be laid down to determine the height at which the top of a pear tree should be commenced, unless it be that the heads of the more spreading varieties should be started higher than those of a more upright habit. The preferences of the larger number of purchasers have begotten among nur- serymen the practice of forming the heads of all varie- ties at a height of 3 or 4 feet. This height is open to the objection that, while not seriously faulty in the case of such spreading varieties as Onondaga, Osband (Sum- mer), or Flemish (Beauty), it is essentially unsuited to such very upright growers as Buffum, Sterling, Clapp (Favorite), and even Anjou. In this particular, as in various others, the practice of nurserymen, begotten by the preferences of the average of their customers, fails to adapt itself to the needs of the more intelligent and considerate orchardist, and to those of even smaller planters, who regard the health and productiveness of their trees as of higher importance than the possibly increased convenience of cultivation. A proper system of primary branches, upon which to grow a permanent head, should be provided from the growth of the second season. Probably the most satis- factory provision for this purpose consists of a central shoot, with from three to five laterals diverging from the trunk at its base. A head should, in no case, be grown upon two shoots, forming a crotch, since this will be very liable to split and thus ruin the tree. A few varieties, of which Rostiezer is a notable example, have the habit of producing but few branches, and also of making successive annual growths, mainly from the terminal buds of the previous year, thus forming a too open or straggling head. Such tendency is best over- come by cutting back the branches in spring, the effect being to increase their number, though at the expense of vigor. After the primary branches have been developed, and the growth of the third year is in progress, compara- tively little pruning will be found necessary beyond the occasional cutting away of a straggling or crossing branch, although there is a class of varieties, of which Summer Doyenne and Winter Nelis are types, which, especially when growing vigorously, incline to twist and 2814. Seckel, the standard of quality. straggle so awkwardly that the branches must fre- quently be tied in position to insure the formation of a satisfactory head. Prior to the third or fourth year, all pruning must necessarily have for its object the direction and encour- agement of wood-growth, for which purpose it is most effective when performed in late winter or early spring, while the trees are yet dormant. The fact should not be forgotten that pruning, in pro- portion to its extent or severity, may be a tax upon the vigor and health of the tree, and, therefore, to be prac- tised as sparingly as possible. Such necessity may be to a considerable extent avoided if the orchardist, with a well-defined ideal in mind of a tree such as he desires to produce, will, during the growing season, pass fre- quently through his plantation and pinch out, while yet small and succulent, all growths not needed for his purpose, at the same tune "stopping" such of the reserved ones as may be too far outgrowing their fellows. With the efficient performance of this process while the framework of the top is being developed, very little pruning will remain to be done on the arrival of spring, while nearly the entire growth, which would otherwise have been pruned away in spring, will have been employed in developing the reserved branches. While the cutting away of an occasional small branch may be done at almost any time, large branches should be removed only in case of actual necessity, and at a period early enough to permit the thorough drying and hardening of the cut surface prior to the movement of the sap in spring, as a means of preventing bleeding and consequent decay. Summer pruning tends to check rather than encour- age wood-growth, and since it acts to a greater or less extent as an obstruction to the circulation, it also tends,. 2512 PEAR PEAR as does the permanent bending of the branches and the hardening of the tissues, to hasten the formation of fruit-buds and the production of fruit. The pear may be successfully grafted upon the white thorn, the mountain-ash, and the apple, and such grafts have occasionally proved more or less productive for a time, but in such cases the union between stock and cion is generally, if not always, imperfect; and such uncongenial combinations are therefore usually short- lived. The quince is the only dissimilar stock upon which the pear is extensively grown. Quince stocks for this purpose are largely imported from France. The Angers quince is generally preferred for this purpose. These stocks are usually planted in nursery rows at the age of two years, to be budded during the following summer, in the same manner as pear stocks. When intended for dwarf trees, nurserymen usually cut them back after one year's growth from the bud to the nearly uniform height of 18 inches, although with the more 2815. Anjou, one of the popular late autumn and early winter pears. ( X 1A) upright-growing varieties it is by many deemed prefer- able to branch them even 6 or 8 inches lower. Aside from the height at which they should be branched, the pruning and management should be identical with that prescribed for standards, with the important exception that when planted out for fruiting the junction between the quince and the pear should be 3 or 4 inches below the surface to encourage the formation of roots from the pear. Trees thus planted will begin to bear while yet growing solely from the quince stock, and will continue to produce fruit after rooting from the pear, thus affording the early fruiting of the dwarf, as well as the permanency of the standard. Not more than a specimen or two should be permitted to grow upon a dwarf the first and second years after planting. Such trees, if left to fruit freely, will almost certainly be ruined from overbearing before they are fully established. Many varieties when grown as dwarfs can never be safely allowed to mature more than a small portion of the fruit which they will naturally set. While several varieties are found to be especially suc- cessful when grown upon the quince, most others prove only moderately so, requiring careful and expert man- agement to insure satisfactory results. A few others, of which Bosc may be named as a prominent case, are obstinately unsuccessful upon the quince, and even when double-worked upon a dwarf of a congenial variety, their success appears to be by no means assured. Dwarf trees trained as hereinbefore specified are commonly known as half-standards. Other and more elaborate forms are known as pyramids, cordons, and the like, descriptions of which are not deemed necessary here. Choice of trees. Aside from the selection of the location for an orchard, the first important particular is the selection of the trees, leaving the choice of varieties for subsequent con- sideration. Trees of one year's growth from the bud are to be preferred for the following reasons: (1) Fewer roots need be injured or lost in the process of lifting and replanting, for which reason the tree may be expected the more promptly to recover from the shock of removal. (2) The single season's growth may be cut back and the top commenced to suit the preferences of the planter. (3) The top will present little or no obstacle to the force of the wind until the roots shall have gained such hold upon the soil that there will remain little liability to displacement from this cause. (4) The risk of failure from removal is greatly diminished, while the more prompt recovery and increased rate of growth of the trees in the more open orchard rows may be expected to compensate fully for one or two years more of growth in crowded nursery rows. (5) Something will also be saved in the cost of the trees and in the expense of transportation, as well as in the labor of planting. If older or high-branched trees are not objected to, it will usually be found that they are but imperfectly branched from having been grown hi crowded rows. Preparation of the soil. When the late John A. Warder was asked how large the holes should be dug for planting orchard trees, he replied, "Of the full size of the orchard;" and it may also be remarked that when the ground for an orchard has been well tilled and fertilized to a depth at least equal to that at which trees are to be planted, there is no longer occasion for holes larger than shall be necessary to receive the roots in their proper position. If the sub- soil be not freely pervious to water, the ground must be deeply and thoroughly underdrained, and in no case should the hole in which a tree is to be planted be sunk into a subsoil so impervious as to retain water beneath or about its roots. If such retentive subsoil occurs too near the surface and is not considered suitable to be mixed with the surface soil, it should be thoroughly dis- integrated to the requisite depth by means of a subsoil plow or other equivalent device. In all nearly level retentive soils, it will be found advantageous to "back- furrow" a land along the line of each row in the direc- tion of the surface drainage, so that when the trees have been planted the drainage will be away from them. Laying out, staking, and planting. The most economical mode of laying out and plant- ing an orchard, so far as space is concerned, is doubtless that commonly, but erroneously, designated as quin- cunx, and more correctly as hexagonal; but whether planted thus, or in rectangles, the work may be most rapidly and accurately done by planting a stake where each tree is to stand, and using what is known as a planting-board, consisting of a strip of board 6 or 7 feet long, with a hole for a stake near each end, and a notch or slot intermediate and in line between them to receive the stake, and to support the tree while the earth is being carefully filled in, under, among, and above its roots. The following are good general rules to be observed PEAR PEAR 2513 in the digging, handling, preparing, and planting of trees: 1. In digging trees, aim to secure as many of the main fibrous roots as possible. 2. Expose the roots as little as possible to the drying influence of sun and wind. 3. Prepare the roots for planting by cutting away the bruised and broken portions. 4. If the roots have been essentially shortened in lifting, cut away the superfluous branches and also cut back such as are to remain till a proper balance of root and top is secured. 5. In heavy retentive soil, plant the tree very little if any deeper than it stood in the nursery, and, in addi- tion, raise a slight mound about the trunk to avoid the occurrence of standing water at that point. 6. In strong but dry soil, a tree may be planted an inch or two deeper than it stood in the nursery. 7. In light sand, with dry subsoil, a tree should be planted 3 or even 4 inches deeper than it stood in the nursery. 8. Dig the hole in which a tree is to be planted deep enough to receive 2 or 3 inches of fine soil, before putting the tree in place, making it large enough to allow the roots to be spread out in their natural position. 9. See that good, friable surface soil is well filled in beneath, among, and over the roots. 10. Should the soil be dry, with no immediate pros- pect of rain, it will be well after nearly filling the hole with earth, to apply a pail of water, and, after it shall have settled away, to fill up the hole with earth and tramp it down firmly. Staking will rarely be found necessary, except, possibly, in the case of trees old enough to have been already branched, but such stake must be watched and the tree protected against injury by rubbing against it. Subsequent cultivation. (a) Newly planted trees: Ground occupied by young trees must be kept well cultivated during the spring and 2816. The Seckel pear tree as it stood in 1880. early summer. If hoed crops are planted, larger quan- tities of manure will be required; but, in either case, cultivation should cease as early as the beginning of August in order to hasten the ripening of the young wood. This process should be continued during at least five or six years, after which green crops may be grown and plowed under as a means, in part, of main- taining the fertility of the soil. (6) Mulching: Especially during the first few years 2817. Stump of the Seckel pear tree. 1908. after planting, in case of hot dry weather during the growing season, mulch may be applied to check evap- oration from the soil and to keep it cool, but it should not be permitted to take the place of cultivation. The soil should be well pulverized before applying it. (c) Manuring: As stated previously, manures should be applied sparingly but regularly, preferably in late autumn, and should be plowed under, or other- wise mixed with the soil at that time or in the early spring, as a means of pro- moting early growth and the thorough ripen- ing of the wood in advance of severe cold. Thorough ma- turing of the wood should also be assisted, as already said, by ceasing cultivation the early part of August. Gathering and ripening the fruit. All selected pears, whether intended for the market or for use at home, should be carefully hand-picked. (a) Gathering summer and autumn pears: With very few exceptions all pears acquire a higher quality if gathered before they are fully ripe. The generally accepted rule is to gather the crop when an occasionally full-grown wormy specimen is ripe, or when there is a perceptible change in the color of the maturer speci- mens, or when the stem parts readily from the branch if the fruit is slightly lifted. (6) Ripening summer and winter pears: When gath- ered, the fruit should be placed in a cool room devoted to the purpose, and spread upon shelves, or in lack of a suitable room they may be placed in shallow boxes or drawers, where in due time they will acquire their full color and flavor. Since this fruit parts with moisture quite freely, it, and especially the later ripening varie- ties, should be protected from a drying atmosphere, par- ticularly from drafts of air, which will cause the fruit to shrivel and become tough and leathery. It is also true of at least very many varieties that even if blown off or gathered when but two-thirds grown, the fruit if put away as already described will usually acquire a satisfactory quality. Fruits thus gathered and ripened are found to have less tendency to decay rapidly at the core. (c) Gathering and ripening of winter dessert pears: These should remain upon the tree as long as practi- cable without danger from frost. When gathered, they should be placed in a cool frost-proof room, and it will be well also to wrap each separately in soft paper. Some varieties are found to ripen perfectly without further attention, but the quality of most kinds will be much improved if they are brought into a temperature of 60° or 70° a fortnight before their usual season of maturity. (d) Winter cooking pears: These should be gathered and put away in close packages in a cool, frost-proof room, in the same manner as russet apples, like which they will shrivel, and become tough and leathery if left exposed to the air. They may remain in this con- dition until needed for use. Packing and marketing. In America, pears are generally packed for market directly from the tree, without awaiting the process of ripening. Barrels are largely used as packages, although this fruit is frequently put up in half-barrels and some- times in bushel, peck, and even in half-peck baskets. 2514 PEAR PEAR American growers rarely ripen their fruit before mar- keting it. This, if done at all, is more generally accom- plished by the dealer, doubtless with decided profit, since in the larger cities fully $50 have been known to be paid for a single barrel of selected fruit, and yet the same fruit ripened and offered in quantities to suit cus- tomers has been sold at two or three times the original cost. The marketing of unripened pears is obviously unprofitable so far as the producer is concerned. In Europe, the choicest fruits are carefully selected and house-ripened. When approaching their best con- dition the fruits are separately wrapped in soft paper, and are then put up in packages of perhaps one or two dozens, and sent so as to appear upon the market when in the best possible condition. Such fruits com- mand prices quite in excess of what they would have realized had they been offered in an immature condition. Varieties. Since the popular and desirable varieties of pears may be found fully described in standard pomological works, such descriptions here are not deemed necessary. Among the very numerous varieties of pears described in such works there are doubtless many possessing high quality and other valuable characteristics, which, for some unexplained reason, have failed to attract the attention of growers. Since varieties vary in their season of ripening with change of latitude, and often, to some extent, with change of location, even in the same latitude, the desig- nation of such season becomes a matter of more or less difficulty. In the following lists the season given will be approximately that between parallels 42 and 43 of north latitude. (a) Amateur pears: It is as true of the pear as of most other species of fruits that very many varieties are of small size, unattractive appearance, or of such delicate texture when ripe as to disqualify them for the market, although they may possess, in an eminent degree, the peculiar characteristics which render them desirable, and to persons of cultivated taste, indis- pensable for the supply of the family. Such are termed amateur pears. The following is a list of a few of the most popular of these, arranged approximately in the order of maturity: Name. Season.* Madeleine , m. e. July Summer Doyenne e. July. Bloodgood e. July. m. Aug. Giffard m. Aug Dearborn m. e. Aug. Rostiezer m. Aug. m. Sept. Elizabeth e. Aug. Brandywine e. Aug. b. Sept. Tyson e. Aug. b. Sept. . Stevens (Genesee) b. Sept Clapp b. m. Sept Washington m. Sept. (Belle) Lucrative m. e. Sept. Bosc e. Sept. Oct. White Doyenne e. Sept. Nov Seckel Oct. Sarah Oct. Anjou Oct. Nov. Gray Doyenne m. Oct. Nov. Reeder Nov Remarks. Earliest good pear. Excellent, but very per- [ishable. A tardy bearer. Rots soon at the core. Rots soon at the core. Liable to crack badly. Heyst (Emile d'Heyst) . Nov Mount Vernon Nov Dana Hovey Nov Dec. Dec. Jan. Langelier Nov Feb. Germain Nov March. Lawrence Dec. Winter Nelis Dec. Jan. Easter Jan. March. *e, early; m, middle; b, beginning. (b) Culinary pears: Very few dessert pears are found to be satisfactory for culinary uses, since they too gen- erally lose at least a portion of their flavor and aroma in the process of cooking. There are, however, several varieties of high, austere character which prove adapted to this purpose, among which are the following: Name. Season. Vicar Nov. Jan (Black) Worcester Nov. Feb. Catillac Nov. March. Pound Dec. Feb. Remarks. .Occasionally good [enough for dessert. (c) Market pears: The markets demand varieties of attractive appearance, of at least medium size and of fine texture. To the grower, productiveness and vigor of tree are also of primary importance. If possessing 2818. Packing pears in boxes. the foregoing characteristics, a variety may prove at least temporarily popular, even though of compara- tively low quality. The following varieties, some of which may also be found in the amateur list, are all more or less popular as market fruits: Name. Tyson Season. e. Aug. b. Sept. Remarks. tardy Sterling e. Aug. m. Sept Clapp b. m. Sept Bartlett b. e. Sept (Souvenir du) Congress. b. e. Sept Buffum m. Sept Howell m. Sept. Oct. Flemish (Beauty) m. e. Sept Bosc e. Sept. Oct Boussock e. Sept. Oct. Louis Bonne e. Sept. Oct. . . . Onondaga e. Sept. Nov. Superfin Oct. Sheldon Oct Rutter Oct. Nov. Anjou Oct. Nov. Kieffer. Oct. Nov LeConte Oct. Nov Angouleme Oct. Nov. Die) Oct. Dec Clairgeau Oct. Jan. Columbia Nov. Jan. McLaughlin Nov. Jan. Lawrence Dec. Malines Jan. Feb. ..Excellent, but bearer. .Productive, and exceed- ingly beautiful. . Rots soon at the core. . Leading market pear. .Sometimes very large. . Variable in quality. . Rots soon at the core. . .Excellent for all pur- [poses. .Grown only as a dwarf. .Is russeted and dull in (color. Not valuable north of 43°. .Succeeds best at the extreme South. .Grown only on quince [stocks. Relative desirableness of dwarfs. There are a few varieties, among which Louise Bonne and Angouleme may be especially mentioned, which on free (pear) stocks are either tardy bearers or require to be fruited several years before developing their ultimate qualities, but which succeed unusually well upon the quince. These, especially the Angouleme, are valued as market varieties when grown as dwarfs. Angouleme, and perhaps some other varieties as dwarfs, occasionally bloom so profusely as apparently to prove unable to develop the fruit, which in conse- quence proves abortive. The natural and obvious rem- edy in such case is disbudding, or its equivalent, cut- ting back the fruit-bearing shoots before growth is commenced. The fact that very many varieties are not perma- nently successful when grown upon the quince is doubtless partially, if not in many cases even wholly, PEAR PEAR 2515 due to their incieased tendency to early and excessive productiveness when grown upon that stock, which, owing to the very common unwillingness of the grower to remove the excess of fruit, is allowed to consume the material needed for wood-growth, and thus to occasion exhaustion before the tree has gained a thorough hold upon the soil. If, with any variety capable of forming a satisfactory union with the quince, and with the tree planted in the manner heretofore described, the entire crop of bloom or incipient fruit of the first one, two, or even three j'ears (dependent upon the vigor of the tree) were removed, and if subsequent crops were carefully and thoroughly thinned, it is at least highly probable that permanent health and longevity would prove nearly or quite as general with dwarfs as with standards, thus permitting the more extensive growth of the pear in greater variety in small or amateur plantations and in limited grounds than is practicable with the use of standards. T. T. LTON. The pear in the South. The following table from the. Thirteenth Census shows the status of the pear industry in thirteen southern states, 1910 (crop data 1909) : „ Number Production state, of trees, in bushels. Alabama 142,300 100,041 Arkansas 221,764 37,547 Florida 110,709 98,223 Georgia 262,982 149,667 Kentucky 337.355 251,536 Louisiana 57 630 35,554 Mississippi.. 118.536 101,288 North Carolina 243,367 84,019 Oklahoma 235 22 South Carolina 105,251 65,680 Tennessee 233,407 83,557 Texas 558,478 110,967 Virginia 457,177 74,486 Total 2,849,191 1,192,587 Throughout the whole South the average production of pears to the tree is less than one-half bushel. Vir- ginia and Kentucky have many pear trees in comparison with the other southern states, but should hardly be considered with the remainder of the South, as their pears are produced mainly on the northern borders of the states. Texas, on account of its area, has more pear trees than any other southern state; and El Paso County, the most western county, produces over 22,000 bushels. Conditions existing in this region are not at all comparable with the other pear sections in the South. It can hardly be said that pears are well adapted to southern conditions, although in certain sections, particularly in the mountains, it is possible to produce fruits of good quality; but on account of the blight the industry has never attained importance. At one time, the late P. J. Berckmans, of Augusta, Georgia, had 600 different pears under test in his nursery, 500 of them being named varieties. Berckmans says that of the 600, those of any worth in the South would not exceed twelve in number, and that the great commercial varieties were the LeConte, Garber, and Kieffer, although Bulletin No. 126 of the Bureau of Plant Industry shows seventy-seven varieties of pears that have originated in the thirteen southern states. The history of the southern pear industry begins with the introduction of the LeConte into ThomasvUle, Georgia, in the early seventies of the last century by L. L. Varnadoe. The original cutting carried into Thomas County came from Liberty County, Georgia. This pear was planted extensively around Thomasville, being taken from there into northern Florida, southern Alabama, Mississippi, Louisiana, and Texas. The propagation was mainly by cuttings, and in the early days of the industry $1 apiece was often paid for trees. At one time it was conservatively stated that there were at least 200,000 trees in Thomas County. Great prices were received for the product, the growers in those days netting from $3 to $7 a barrel. There are reports from H. H. Sanford, one of the early growers of this fruit, of LeConte trees producing thirty bushels or more. The growing of this pear, like many other horticultural industries in the South, was along exten- sive rather than intensive lines. The growers thought that they did not need to till or to fertilize their lands and that they could plant these wonderful trees and reap a harvest of dollars, and for a time it seemed as if this were so; then the blight appeared. The "die- back," as it was originally called, began, and between 1890 and 1895 the industry was in a fair way to suc- cumb. No systematic efforts were made to combat this disease, except by introduction of the Kieffer, which was considered at that time resistant, and which was largely planted in the pear sections of the South. Because of the blight and lack of care, with no systematized methods of marketing, the pear industry of the southern states fell to a low ebb. For the past several years no commercial orchards have been set, and a great number of the trees that were planted in this early period are either dead or cut down; therefore the production of the hybrid pears in the South is not only at a standstill, but is at this time declining. The management of these orchards, even while the industry was at its height, was very crude. It is 1 reported on good authority that 95 per cent of the pear plantings in the southern pear sections were most seri- ously neglected. Some orchards were cropped, to the detriment of the land; others so badly neglected that young pine trees contended with the pears for space; consequently the fruits were not of the best quality. The growers who followed approved methods of tillage and fertilizing received a serious set-back when the blight appeared, as these plantings seemed to be more susceptible to this disease. In time a balance was 2819. Box of fancy pears; each fruit wrapped in paper. reached, and it is now considered good practice to run the orchards in sod and every third year to give a light E lowing, the application of fertilizers being determined y the growth of the tree. Spraying was little practised in the older orchards. The growers who are still pro- ducing pears now find the use of a spray-pump advisa- ble. Harvesting during the height of the pear industry in south Georgia was aptly described by the Thomas- ville "Times Enterprise:" "The annual slaughter of the LeConte pears has commenced. The trees are full of little gamins, picking a few, flailing some and shaking off the remainder. All — good, bad, and bruised — are dumped into barrels and rushed to market." It is unfortunately true that many of these fruits were gathered in this way. There were growers who hand- picked their product, carefully packing it into ven- tilated barrels. These, however, were the smaller 2516 PEAR PEAR number. There is an instance on record of a gentle- man having sold three hundred and odd dollars' worth of pears from a small orchard, on which he had expended $5 since the last harvest. Most of the pears were shipped in barrels, though some were shipped in bulk. The distribution is still poor, and for the past few years 2820. Angouleme pear, the most popular variety for growing on quince roots. the profits from the remaining trees have not been sufficient to warrant further planting. At present, the South as a whole cannot be consid- ered as a pear-producing section. There are still quite a number of pear trees around the homes. These are rapidly disappearing, due to the blight and the lack of care. The old orchards along the Atlantic and the Gulf are rapidly dying with blight. The hybrid pears, LeConte, Kieffer, and Garber, do remarkably well in this part of the country; but the pear industry will never thrive as it did once until there is a systematic fight made upon the blight. Besides this disease, the pears are subject to bitter-rot, brown-rot and crown- gall, as well as the codlin-moth and the San Jose' scale; but of course these insects and diseases can be easily controlled by spraying. In the catalogue of fruits appended to the Pro- ceedings of the Thirty-Ninth Annual Session of the Georgia State Horticultural Society is to be found this remark concerning pears: "Owing to the prevalence of the pear blight, the commercial production of pears is an uncertain and hazardous industry. Until it is demonstrated that pear-blight can be successfully controlled, it is useless to recommend the planting of pears in commercial quantities. So far as is known, the Kieffer pear is the most resistant to the pear-blight of the commercial varieties." This report of the Georgia State Horticultural Society can be taken as a general recommendation for practically all of the South, except for particularly isolated and special places. T. H. McHATTON. The pear in California. Visitors at the old California missions during the early part of the last century noted many thrifty seed- ling pear trees in the mission gardens. Many of these trees survived the neglect which came upon the mission properties after their secularization, and were in thrifty growth and bearing at the time of the American occu- pation. The first pears sold in San Francisco and in the mines in 1849-1850 were gathered from the old mission trees, and some of these old trees grafted over gave the first California product of the European and American varieties of more than half a century ago. From this beginning the growth of pears increased until the commercial product of 1914 included the following: 2,725 carloads sent overland to eastern and foreign markets (about the same as for the five years preced- ing); 2,000,000 pounds dried pears shipped to the same destination (a decreasing product because of the increasing demand for shipping fresh and canning); 805,740 cases of canned pears, mostly Bartletts — a prod- uct which is rapidly increasing. There are about 2,000,000 pear trees in California orchards. The decade 1905-1915 was a sensational period in California pear- growing because of the appearance of the pear-blight about 1902. It made such rapid progress that in 1904 practically all the pear trees in one district were seriously attacked and largely destroyed. Control measures were provided by state appropriation in 1905 and continued several years, and it was demon- strated that the disease can be held in check and profita- bility of trees continued by cutting out all blighted parts from twig to root — disinfecting between cuts all tools used in the work. This demonstration, coupled with an apparent lessening of the virulence of the disease, restored confidence among growers and resulted in largely increased new planting in 1914-1915. It is a most interesting fact that a single variety furnishes a very great part, perhaps even as much as four-fifths, of the pear products of the state, and that is the Bartlett. Whatever it may lack in high quality is more than compensated for by its commercial ser- viceability. It is handsome and of good size, endures long carriage, cans well and dries well, and is of suffici- ently good quality to please consumers: in fact the California-grown Bartlett is said to be better than the same variety grown in the Atlantic states and in the west of Europe. This is not, however, the chief reason why the Bartlett so largely preponderates in Cali- fornia. The ruling condition is found in the fact that owing to the marked differences in localities not widely distant and yet differing in elevation, in exposure to coast influences and away from them, and other local causes, the Bartlett has a very long ripening season, and valley, coast, and mountain Bartletts follow each other through nearly three months and thus make suc- cession of different varieties during this period unneces- sary. There is, however, at present a greater disposition than heretofore to extend the season by growing other varieties, but they are selected for resemblance to the Bartlett type. Clapp Favorite is sold as an "Early Bartlett," and a Winter Bartlett, an Oregon seedling, has been planted to carry the same style of pear as late as possible. Still some progress is being made in extend- ing the California list of popular pears and some of local and of distant origin will probably achieve prominence, especially in the shipments to distant markets. California pears are grown on pear-seedling roots (especially of the Japanese pear because of less liability to blight in the root), very little recourse being had to rooted cuttings or to dwarfing stocks. A dwarf pear tree is almost a curiosity. The heavier loams and even clays are sometimes planted with pear trees, not because they are best for pears but because other fruits do 2821. Dwarf pear trees forty-five years old, in a New York orchard. PEAR PECAN 2517 worse than they. To plant fully the area intended for fruit, pears will go on the intrusions of heavy or too moist soils, while the freer soil will be given to other fruits. Still the chief product of pears is from the best loams California affords, and the profits from the tree warrant the use of such land. Pear trees are regularly pruned to a low vase form, but seldom opened in the center, the interior being used for bearing wood, and foliage enough retained partially to shade the fruit. The fruit is thinned to favor size and to relieve the tree from overbearing. Irrigation is employed in some parts of the state. The varieties chiefly grown are the fol- lowing: Bartlett, Winter Nelis, Easter, Cornice, Glout Morceau, Hardy, P. Barry (a California seedling), Seckel, Lawson (Comet), Winter Bartlett, Wilder. E. J. WTICKSON. PEAR. Alligator P., Persea ffraiissima. Avocado P., Persea gratissima. Balsam P., Momordica Charantia. Garlic P., Cratseta gynandra. Prickly P., Opuntia. PEARL BUSH. Exocfiordagrandiflora. P. Fruit: Margyricarpus ••. P. Weed or Wort: Sagina. PEAT is a kind of soil formed by the partial decay of plants in the swamps of the temperate zone. It is a standard potting material in greenhouse work for cer- tain classes of plants, as ferns, orchids, heaths, rhodo- dendrons, and other ericaceous plants, woody plants from Australia and the Cape of Good Hope, and many other choice and difficult subjects. American gardeners complain that they are handicapped in grow- ing such plants because American peat is poorer than European, the lack of fiber being chiefly deplored, but it is probable that just as good peat is to be found in this count ry. The peat-bogs of England are often 5 or 6 feet deep, and some of the Irish ones are said to be as deep as 40 feet. They have been forming ever since the glacial period, but are now on the decline, owing largely to natural causes. Peat-bogs consist of the remains of many kinds of aquatic and marsh plants, but chiefly sphagnum (which see). This moss grows upward and decays parti- ally below, complete decay being prevented by the antiseptic organic acids formed in the process. Near the top the peat is brown, fibrous, light and porous: lower down it tends to be black, heavy, dense and without visible indication of its vegetable origin. The ash varies from 1 or 2 per cent in newly formed peat to 10, 20, or even 30 per cent in the older peat. Peat is commoruV used for fuel by the Irish peas- antry, but almost never in America, where other and better fuel is plentiful. In greenhouse work peat is valued more for its porous moisture-holding properties than for its plant-food. If dried, it may be used as an absorbent for liquid manure, "not so much for its inher- ent value," says Roberts (in his "Fertility of the Land"), "as for conserving the nitrogen in the manure, and for improving the condition of the stables." For this rea- son the half-decayed peat is extensively used in Europe, under the name of moss litter, as a bedding in stables, and later of course applied to the land. The transformation of peat-bogs into arable land is rarely a pressing problem in America. It is usually too ccstly for a new country. The notion, however, is very common that peat lands are extraordinarily rich in plant-food. Nevertheless, according to Roberts, swamp muck and peat are not richer in plant-food than the good soils, with the exception of the nitrogen in the peat, which, however, is far less available than it is in good soils. (American peat contains about .67 per cent nitrogen, .21 per cent phosphoric acid, and .13 per cent potash.) Peat lands differ from good arable soil in being cold, sour, and too wet. To reclaim them, one must drain off the superfluous water and apply lime freely to destroy the harmful organic acids. Sometimes sand or clay may be added to improve the texture of such soils. It takes time to reclaim peat lands. Thor- oughly decayed peat intermingled with wet soils is muck. See the article on Muddand-Gardening, Vol. IV, page 2072, WILHELM MILLER. PECAN, Carya Pecan, Engler and Graeb. (Con/a olivseformis, Nutt. Hicoria Pecan, Brit.). Plate LXXV, Vol. IV. Of the nut-trees native to North America, the pecan unquestionably ranks first in economic impor- tance. This is true both because of the quantity and value of the wild crop and because of its cultural promise. The acceptability of the quality of the kernel and the relative thinness of shell and ease of cracking in contrast with the other hickories and the native walnuts, have since an early day continued to win favor among consumers, so that the wild crop of Louisiana and Texas long ago assumed commercial importance and for at least thirty years has, in the 2822. Foliage and flowers of pecan. The hanging parts are the staminate catkins. A pistillate catkin is below P. Details are at a (staminate flowers) and at b (a pistillate flower). latter state, been systematically harvested and distrib- uted in carload shipments to northern markets. The relatively wide climatic range of the species and the extent of variation in form, size, and quality of nut have stimulated effort to develop methods of nursery propagation in widely separated localities. This has resulted in a larger and more widely scattered develop- ment of commercial nursery propagation of the pecan than of any other nut-tree. Under favorable conditions of growth, the pecan tree attains very large size, trunk diameters of 4 to 6 feet being not infrequent, with heights ranging from 100 to 175 feet and tops spreading 60 to 70 feet. Some of the largest trees reported were in the Wabash Valley, near the northern limit of natural distribution. A tree having a girth of 18 feet 3 inches breast high from the ground, with an estimated height of 130 feet and a spread of 125 feet, is recorded by Reed in Ascension Parish, Louisiana. One having a girth of 19 feet 6 inches with an estimated height of 150 feet and spread of 100 feet, is recorded in Nachitoches Parish, Louisiana. A still larger tree near Webbers Falls, Oklahoma, has the following dimensions: Girth 23 feet 9 inches at 3 feet from ground; estimated height 180 feet. -2518 PECAN PECAN The pecan is one of the hickories which comprise an American group of great interest. The trees are monoecious; that is, the male and female (staminate and pistillate) are separate on the same plant. (Fig. 2822; adapted from Bulletin No. 251, Bureau of Plant Industry.) The staminate or pollen-bearing flowers are in slender hanging catkins, and the pistillate or fruit- bearing flowers are in small erect or stiff clusters (Fig. 823, page 676). Several of the staminate or male flowers are shown separately at a, Fig. 2822, and one of the pistillate or female flowers at 6. Natural and cultural range. The species is native in river-bottoms and lowlands of the Mississippi River and its tributaries as far north as Davenport, Iowa; Covington, Kentucky; Terre Haute, Indiana; and the vicinity of Kansas City, Missouri. It is also found throughout most of the river-valleys of Texas and the adjacent parts of Mex- ico. It does not appear to have been found native at any point in close proximity to the Gulf of Mexico. Jt thus occurred wild in considerable regions • of Texas, 2823. Pecan tree, the Centennial, St. James Parish, Louisiana. Grafted about 1847. Oklahoma, Louisiana, Mississippi, Alabama, Arkansas, Missouri, Kansas, Tennessee, Kentucky, Indiana, and Illinois, and small areas in southeastern Nebraska and southeastern Iowa. The species was scatteringly introduced throughout the southeastern states from Florida northward to Virginia at an early date, so that trees of considerable age are found at many points in them. The earliest efforts at commercial planting appear to have been made in Louisiana, Mississippi, and Texas, but some of the greatest activity in this direction in recent years has been outside of the native habitat, in Georgia, Florida, and South Carolina, and considerable plantings have been made also in North Carolina, Virginia, Maryland, and some on the Pacific Coast in California and Oregon. Commercial importance. As an article of commerce, the pecan did not receive much recognition until after the Civil War; but, increas- ingly large shipments of wild nuts moved northward from Louisiana and Texas from 1870 to 1890 at prices which encouraged farmers and ranchers to harvest them systematically, though not to engage in orchard planting. Early in the nineties, as the result of the marketing in New Orleans of the product of a few individual trees yielding nuts of large size and thin shells, demand developed for such nuts at much higher prices, frequently bringing 40 to 75 cents and in some cases as high as $1.50 to $2.50 a pound. This stimu- lated interest in the planting of seedling orchards grown from the nuts of these high-priced varieties, with the result that many thousands of such trees, mostly dating to the decade 189071899, are now found in the Gulf and South Atlantic states. While these seedling orchards contain many productive trees yielding nuts of desirable quality, few of them have proved profitable, largely because of the wide variation in precocity, pro- ductiveness, and disease-resistance of the trees, and in the size, cracking quality, and other features of the nuts, so that a large part of the present production still consists of wild nuts. Reed estimated in 1912 ("The Pecan," Bureau of Plant Industry Bulletin No. 251) that the annual wild crop of pecans in Texas dur- ing the preceding six or eight years had varied from 3,645,000 to 17,820,000 pounds, the crop of that state being considered approximately three-fifths of the entire product. The census of 1910 reported the crop of 1909 as 9,890,769 pounds, valued at $971,596. While no accurate statistics regarding later produc- tion are available, the product of the orchards of named varieties planted prior to 1905 is now gradually coming to market, and may be expected to appear in rapidly increasing quantity in the future, to offset the gradually declining production of wild nuts resulting from the destruction of trees as the fertile river-bottom lands on which they stand have been brought under cultivation in farm crops. The gradual development of power nut-cracking machinery, mainly accomplished since 1900, has resulted in a greatly increased demand for pecan meats from confectioners, which promises to keep pace with production for many years to come. These devices greatly lessen the labor cost of cracking, and render possible much more varied use of the nut. Climatic and soil requirements. Much confusion of thought with regard to the climatic range of the pecan has resulted from failure to recognize the difference in cold endurance of wild trees of the species in different parts of its native range. Rather early in the period of pecan exploitation, which began about 1885-1890, nuts and young trees of the large varieties conspicuous in the exhibits and adver- tising matter of that time were planted at many points in the northern states. These rather promptly suc- cumbed to the winter temperatures of the North, very few surviving north of the Potomac, Ohio, and Mis- souri rivers. More recently, trees well worthy of propa- gation because of the good size and excellent quality of their nuts have been found in the surviving wild groves of the Ohio and Wabash valley bottoms in Indiana, Illinois, and Kentucky, which give promise of enduring the winters considerably farther north, and which are now in process of experimental introduction. On suitable soils it now appears probable that among these varieties of northern origin may be found sorts fairly well adapted to most of the eastern United States. Though practically restricted in its native distribu- tion to the low-lying moist sandy loams of the river- and creek-bottoms, gradually accumulated experience has demonstrated the suitability under cultivation of a wide range of soils. The essentials are good depth and fertility, adequate drainage, and freedom from drought. Shallow soils underlaid with hardpan or other impervious strata and loose droughty sands are unsuitable, as are mucks and peats. Occasional over- flow, as experienced on creek- and river-bottom lands, is beneficial, but the pecan is about as sensitive to a water-logged soil condition as most orchard trees. While the orchards thus far planted are too young to determime with accuracy, the area of profitable com- PECAN PECAN 2519 mercial planting will, from present indications, be south of Pennsylvania and Iowa with some probability of success under irrigation in the Southwest and in the great valley of California. Propagation and top-working. Few of the earlier efforts to perpetuate trees bearing superior nuts by budding and grafting were successful, the methods commonly practised with fruit-trees in the Gulf States not proving effective with the pecan. Because of this, most of the plantings prior to 1900 were of seedling trees grown from selected parents, even where orchards as large as 500 acres were involved. Occasionally skilful propagators succeeded in secur- ing fair stands with crown-, trunk- and top-grafting, however, and some by annular-, patch- and chip- budding, so that by 1895 there were a number of 2824. Top-budded pecan. Four years after the operation. budded and grafted trees of several choice varieties growing in Louisiana, Mississippi, and Texas and a few nurseries offering such trees for sale. The earliest successful grafting was by Antoine, a slave gardener, on Oak Alley Plantation, St. James Parish, Louisiana, who, under the instruction of his owner, the late Telesphqre J. Roman, in 1846 or 1847 succeeded in trunk-grafting sixteen trees of the variety later named the Centennial (Fig. 2823). Somewhat later he propagated 110 more trees of the same variety, so that 126 grafted trees of this variety were growing on that plantation at the end of the Civil War. About 1877, the late Emil Bourgeois, of Central, Louisiana, successfully top-grafted the variety now known as the Van Deman upon his Rapidan Plantation in the same parish, while in 1882 the Rome and Frotscher, as well as Centennial, were propagated by Wm. Nelson in the nursery of the late Richard Frotscher at New Orleans from the original trees in St. James and Iberia parishes. In 1886, the variety now known as Stuart 160 2825. Cleft-grafting. Successive steps in the operation: a and b, views of the cion; c, cross-section of the cion, thicker on one side; d, the cion in place and the stock securely tied to prevent split- ting; e, the union covered with grafting wax; /, outer wrapping securely held with string. was successfully budded by the- late A. G. Delmas on his place at Pascagoula, Mississippi, from the original tree of that sort on the Castanera place near by. Successful top-working of wild trees was accomplished by E. E. Risien, of San Saba, Texas, about 1889. He transformed a num- ber of such trees by cutting back heavily in late win- ter with a cross-cut saw, practically be- heading trees of diameters up to 12 to 15 inches at points 20 to 30 feet from the ground. An abundant growth of strong shoots was secured by hacking the bark of the trunk for some distance down from the stubs. A sufficient number of the best of these shoots were budded in July by the annular method quickly to develop a symmetrical top. The San Saba va- riety was chiefly used, the original tree of this stand- ing on Risien's place (Fig. 2824). Although most early efforts failed, as propagators have acquired experience in pecan-prop- agation most of the methods of budding and grafting practised on the apple and pear have been found to succeed, so that at the present time practically all except shield-budding are more or less practised. The methods most commonly used by nurserymen are ordi- nary cleft- and whip-grafting, and annular-, patch-, and chip-budding. While there has been much discussion of other stocks for the pecan and considerable individual experimentation with mockernut (Carya alba), pignut (Carya glabra), and water-hickory (Carya aquatica), commercial nur-' sery propagation is practi- cally all upon pecan stocks. Nuts from trees of vigorous growth, yield- ing well-filled kernels, are preferred for seed and should be from a region at least as far north as that where trees are to be planted to insure stocks of sufficient cold -endur- ance. Nuts for seed should not be permitted to dry out . before planting in fall, or, if spring-planted, should be stratified in moist sand soon after harvest. Soil ^f WhiP - grafting- Early >r the nursery should be «% ^JTS^ VSA rich, deep, Enable, and stock md cion properiy cut; c, well drained, as the con- stock and cion in position and trol of growth during the ready for wrapping. 2520 PECAN PECAN propagating season necessitates maintenance of a high state of cultivation with which clods, stones, or continued wetness seriously interfere. Nursery rows should be 5 to 6 feet apart, with nuts planted 8 to 12 inches apart in the row, 2 to 3 inches deep. When stocks exceed % inch in diameter at the point of grafting, cleft-grafting is preferred. If done above ground, the grafted stub should be securely bound with raffia or waxed cord to avoid splitting, and then thoroughly waxed and wrapped with waxed cloth to exclude air and moisture. (Fig. 2825.) Cions should be entirely dormant and have all exposed cut ends waxed to reduce evaporation. All grafting in place is best done shortly in advance of the pushing of buds on the stock. When stocks are under % inch in diameter at the crown, ordinary whip-grafting in place is considerably practised, selecting cions as near the size of the stock as practicable and tying securely with raffia or waxed cloth. (Figs. 2826 and 2827.) Bench-graft- ing, though possible, is rarely practised with the pecan. On account of the length of season during which these methods may be practised, annular- and patch- budding have been widely adopted by pecan-propa- gators, and special tools for cutting the "rings" and "patches" have come into general use in the southern states (Figs. 2828 and 2829), though expert operators succeed well with the ordinary budding-knife. These methods may be used at any time during the growing season when the bark of both stock and cion "slip" well and the bark and buds of the new growth on the cion trees are sufficiently mature to endure the neces- sary manipulation. The essentials are good "slipping" condition of both stock and cion, close fitting of "rings" or "patches," secure tying with raffia or other suitable material, careful attention to removal of ties and grad- 2827. Whip-grafting. Later steps in the operation: a, proper method of tying; b, improper method of tying; c, one year's growth follow- ing a successful union. 2828. A metal tool specially designed for use in annular-budding. ual heading back of stock as growth proceeds to avoid "drowning out" the bud, and after growth begins the protection of it against splitting off or breaking down by wind and storms, by tying up to stubs or stakes. (Fig. 2830.) One of the simplest and most effective methods is that long used by E. W. Kirkpatrick, of McKinney, Texas, commonly known as "chip-budding." This may be practised prior to and during the early growing season. Dormant cions are used. It consists essentially of the removal of a "chip" from the stock and its replacement by a bud-bearing chip of approximately identical size from the cion, which is securely tied in place without waxing. As this method requires only the ordinary budding-knife and is equally applicable to walnut, persimmon, and other species rather difficult to propagate, it is growing in favor, especially in Louisiana and Texas. (Fig. 2831.) With all methods of budding and grafting, both in nursery and orchard, careful attention to the tying up of the young buds during the first growing season is required. Their soft and luxuriant growth renders them peculiarly subject to destruction by storms, the only effective protection against which is secure tying to stock, stubs, or stakes. yl 2829. A tool with wooden handle and steel blades specially designed for use in annular-budding. The large number of seedling trees in orchards and gardens yielding nuts of indifferent quality is arousing much interest in top-working. This can be done by all methods described, but all top-budding or grafting should be as low hi the tree as practicable to prevent the head from becoming "leggy" and "prongy." Successful methods of budding and grafting the pecan are described by Charles L. Edwards, of Texas. The budding method is shown in Fig. 1686, page 1367, Vol. III. The crown-graft or crown-bud is shown in Fig. 2832 and is described as follows: "Buds from wood that has partially lost its vitality, or has been injured by sap starting before it is cut or after it is cut in early spring, may often be saved by this method when all others fail. But the work must be carefully done and instructions strictly observed, for if the bud is lost, the remaining stock is badly disfigured. The stock is cut off bodily at the desired height. A slit is then made at the top, the bark opened, the bud inserted and part of the flaps of bark pared away. Then the wrapper is put on so as to cover not only the cut made for the insertion of the bud, but the top of stump also. The wrapper should cover not only the stump, but should be long enough at the top to pass over and go down far enough on the opposite side to be caught by the string used for tying on the bud. The waxed cloth covering the top of the stump should be pressed down firmly before tying, and if the top of the stump is % inch across or more, there should be two thicknesses of cloth put over it and firmly pressed down. On large stumps, two buds may be placed on opposite sides so as to increase chances of a 'take .' If both buds live, one of the shoots may be a 2830. Annular-budding, a, Bud stick from which the bud has been removed; b, the bud ready for insertion in the matrix of the stock ; c, the stock ready to receive the bud; d, the bud after being placed in position and carefully wrapped; e, growth taking place, the wrapping having been re- moved; /, growth from the bud supported by being tied to the stock, g, above the union. Note the scars above the union, where the buds were removed in order to direct the flow of sap to the new bud. PECAN PECAN 2521 removed later. In working over-grown nursery seed- lings and stout wildings, this has been found to be an excellent plan. With good workmanship and favor- able weather conditions, excellent savings may be had, and the bud shoots make a beautiful upright growth, with the slightest crook at the point of union. And, oddly enough, they grow straight with- out stakes to support them, even in a windy country. Buds put on in March and April on nursery stocks easily make a salable tree with 4 to 6 feet of bud-growth the same season in Texas. In summer work, the modi- fied shield-bud may be peeled from the cion, but it is well to cut them to beveled edges on the sides (D, Fig. 2832) before removing from the cion. The bark of the stock fits down over them more snugly when so treated and they seem to live better. But the lower ends should always be so trimmed as to remove the fleshy rim of bark at the lower end, in order that the inner bark of the bud and the inner bark of the stock may be brought into contact. The flaps of bark folding down over the bud should always be pared down, so that the waxed wrappers may fit 'close and exclude those pestiferous little insects that get in under other forms of wrapper and destroy so many buds. Another thing requiring eternal vigilance is to be sure that sap is flowing more freely in the stocks than in the budwood." Distance, method of planting, and cultivation. The large size of the tree and the lack of any suitable dwarfing stock render wider planting necessary than for other orchard trees. Many of the earlier orchards were spaced at 40 or 50 feet, with some planted as close as 25 feet, with a view to thin- ning out to 50 feet after some years of bearing. Accumu- lated experience indicates that upon all soils suitable for the pecan, a distance of 60 feet will be required before the age of maxi- mum productiveness is reached, and that closer planting than this is inadvisable unless in sections where growth of trees thirty years old and upward indicates that closer distances will not involve harmful crowding and shading, to which the pecan as a nut-bearer is peculiarly sensitive. Well-ripened trees two years from the bud or graft are preferred by most planters and 24 to 30 inches of tap-root is retained in trans- planting. In the Gulf States, planting is usually done during the winter months and completed by February, to insure thorough settling of earth and callusing of roots before growth starts. Special care to prevent drying put during shipment and handling is necessary, protection against sun and wind and thorough soaking of roots before planting being advisable. Holes should be of ample size, 6 to 8 inches deeper than the roots require, and be filled in at bottom with good top-soil. Fertilizer should not be in contact with roots. The unsatisfactory behavior of close-planted orchards and the necessity of deriving profit from the land dur- ing the six to twelve years before the trees come into bearing have given rise to varied practice in inter- cropping. Peaches, Satsuma oranges, truck crops, cotton, corn, and the like, are used in various sections. It is essential on most soils to maintain good culti- vation throughout the growing season. This is satis- 2831. Chip- or "dormant" budding, a, The bud stick; b, the bud ready for insertion; c, the bud inserted in the matrix of the stock ; d, the bud securely tied in place. factorily accomplished with cotton, corn, truck crops, cowpeas or other tilled crops, provided fertility is maintained by adequate fertilizer application and plowing in of leguminous cover-crops. The laying down of pecan orchards in Bermuda-grass for pasture or mowing even on the deep moist soils of the Missis- sippi Delta has invariably been followed by stunting of growth and lessened productiveness of trees. The use of winter cover-crops such as hairy vetch and bur clover for plowing under in spring has everything to commend it. Harvesting and marketing. The preferred practice in harvesting is to permit the nuts to fall as the hulls open, gathering frequently to prevent soiling by contact with the ground. As the efficiency of this method is largely dependent on the continuance of clear and reasonably dry weather throughout the harvest season, it is usually necessary gently to "thresh" the later-maturing portion of the crop from the trees with bamboo or other light poles. Premature threshing results both in an immature quality of crop and in injury to the trees through the breaking off of fruit-spurs. After gathering, the nuts should be cured by storing in a cool dry place for two or three weeks, during which time there is some loss of weight by evaporation of moisture, after which they are ready for marketing. A considerable portion of the wild crop is washed and polished by friction in re- volving barrels or drums. Some tinting of the nuts with dye is also practised. While polishing and tinting are not in themselves harm- ful, they have so frequently been used to conceal infe- riority of damaged or stale nuts and such as are imma- ture that discriminating purchasers show preference for the nuts in their natural state. This is specially true with regard to the prod- uct of the named varie- ties, which is coming to be sold on known varietal merit as to cracking quality, plumpness of kernel, flavor, and the like. While the product of cultivated orchards still constitutes but a small proportion of the market supply, it is destined to early and considerable increase. Marketing by parcel post direct to consumers is coming into practice and cooperative selling by growers' associations is being undertaken to some extent. Prices of wild nuts have risen considerably in recent years as the result of increased demand from commer- cial crackers. Prices of the leadiag orchard varieties, though gradually receding from the fictitious and novelty values of the exploitation period, range from 30 to 50 cents a pound wholesale, with good demand, and retail at 50 to 75 cents in most markets. Varieties. The fact that until about 1900 there were few nursery- men able to propagate the pecan by budding and graft- ing, coupled with the very high prices received for choice nuts from certain individual trees, stimulated the sale of nuts from such trees under varietal names for the planting of seedling orchards throughout the Gulf States. This was true to a large extent with regard 2832. The crown-graft or -bud. A, B, C, the cion; D, cion trimmed at point; E, stock ready to receive the cion; F, cion in place; G, H, the work completely protected by waxed cloth. 2522 PECAN PECAN to Centennial, Rome, Frotscher, Stuart, Russell, Pabst, Jewett, Van Deman, Post, and Hollis, thousands of seedlings of which in dooryards and orchards are now found throughout the South. These seedlings, while frequently bearing a general resemblance to the parent, usually vary widely in important features and, as might be expected, in a large proportion of in- stances are inferior to the parent variety. Names have in many cases been applied to the nuts of wild trees sold for planting, with the result that much confusion has existed in the varietal nomenclature. The adoption of a code of nomenclature by the National Nut- Growers' Association in 1903, and its systematic application by a standing committee of that organi- zation, has to a large extent clarified the situation in recent years. The adaptability of varieties to sections, including the important feature of relative resistance to such dis- eases as scab under varying climatic conditions, is gradually being worked out and is essential to the establishment of commercial pecan-growing on an economically sound basis. At the present time there is much working over of trees of bearing age in progress, with the end in view of replacing the varieties originally planted by those found better adapted to the regional or local conditions. Out of several hundred named trees, somewhat more than one hundred varieties have been propagated by nurserymen. Of these, many are as yet untested out- side of the localities of their origin. Some twenty to thirty sorts have been sufficiently distributed for a long enough time to afford indication of their proba- ble cultural range and value, with the result that a number of the earlier distributed varieties, including Centennial, Jewett, and Rome, and a number of sorts of local repute, have been practically discarded by planters. The varietal adaptability of the pecan so far as pos- sible to summarize as the result of several years of systematic study in the field was outlined by Reed in 1915 (Farmers' Bulletin No. 700, "Pecan Culture," with special reference to varieties and propagation) as follows: Varieties now considered best for planting in the plains section of southeastern Virginia and eastern North Carolina are the Stuart, Mantura, Van Deman, Moneymaker, Schley, Pabst, and James. Varieties which may be recommended for eastern South Carolina, eastern and central Georgia, central Alabama, and central Mississippi are the Schley, Stuart, Van Deman, Moneymaker, James, and Carman. Varieties for planting in south Georgia and north Florida are the Schley, Curtis, Bradley, Alley, Van Deman, Stuart, Moneymaker, President, Pabst, and Russell. Varieties for central and north Florida: Curtis, Bradley, Kennedy, President, Schley, Van Deman, and Moneymaker. Varieties for the coastal section of Alabama, Missis- sippi, and Louisiana: Schley, Curtis, Alley, Van Deman, Russell, Stuart, Pabst, Success, and Havens. Varieties for east Texas: Very few sorts have been given a fair trial in this section. The varieties here mentioned are recommended very largely because of their performance farther east. They are the Stuart, Moneymaker, Schley, Curtis, Van Deman, Bradley, Carman, and James. Varieties for west Texas: Sovereign (syn. Texas Prolific), Kincaid, Colorado, San Saba, Halbert, and Burkett. Varieties for northern Louisiana, southern Arkansas, and northern Mississippi: Very few sorts have been given a fair trial in this section. The following varie- ties are mentioned because of certain evidence of supe- rior hardiness which they have shown and the general merit of the nuts themselves, but they are recommended for conservative planting only: Moneymaker, Carman, Stuart, Van Deman, Schley, Pabst, and Success. Varieties for the section including central and western Tennessee, central and western Kentucky, southern Indiana, southern and southwestern Illinois, eastern and southern Missouri, southeastern Kansas, Okla- homa, and northern Arkansas: Only varieties of north- ern or local origin should be considered for planting in this general area, as none of the southern sorts is sufficiently hardy to justify their recommendation. The best of these are the Major, Niblack, Indiana, Busseron, and Posey. Some of the best known sorts now in the trade, with locality of origin indicated, are the following: 2833. Varieties of the pecan: 1, Moneymaker; 2, Russell; 3, Frotscher; 4, Rome; 5, Alley; 6, Success; 7, Curtis. ( X%) Alley (Fig. 2833). — Pascagoula, Mississippi. A thin-shelled nut of medium size, with plump kernel of good flavor. Tree a vigorous grower and heavy bearer, though subject to scab in some locations. Busseron. — Knox County, Indiana. Recently disseminated and considered promising for Indiana and other northern sections. Centennial (Fig. 2834). — St. James Parish, Louisiana. The first variety propagated by grafting. Exhibited at Philadelphia in 1876. A large long nut, with rather thick shell and slender kernel. Tree a symmetrical, vigorous grower but very tardy in bearing. Practi- cally discarded in favor of better varieties. Curtis (Fig. 2833). — Orange Heights, Florida. Though rather small in size, a thin-shelled nut with plump kernel of fine quality. Very productive and popular in Florida. Delmas (Fig. 2834). — Pascagoula, Mississippi. A large, rather thick-shelled productive variety of very sturdy growth, but rather subject to scab. Kernel plump and of high quality. Frotscher (syns., Eggshell, Frotscher's Eggshell, Olivier, Majes- tic) (Fig. 2833).— Olivier, Louisiana. One of the most widely dis- seminated and distinct of the older varieties. Very large and thin- shelled but with kernel rather dark and unattractive in appear- ance, frequently not filling well. Rapidly giving way to more reliable sorts. Hollis (syns., Hollis's Jumbo, Jumbo, Risien, Georgia Belle, Post's Select, in part). — Bend, Texas. A medium to large, roundish PECAN PECTINARIA 2523 nut, rather widely disseminated for several years as Post's Select. Mainly planted in central Texas. Indiana. — Knox County, Indiana. Of medium size, with thin shell and kernel of excellent quality. Promising for northern planting. Jewett. — Pascagoula, Mississippi. Widely disseminated at one time, but generally discarded because of unproductiveness and unthriftiness of tree and unsatisfactory filling of the large long nut. Kincaid. — San Saba, Texas. A large, oblong nut, with moder- ately thin shell and plump kernel of fine quality. Scabs badly in South Atlantic States. Major. — Henderson County, Kentucky. Recently introduced, but considered promising in northern pecan territory. Of only medium size but thin-shelled, with plump kernel of fine quality. Mobile (syns., Laurendine, Batey's Perfection). — Bayou La Batre, Alabama. A very large and handsome nut, coming into bearing early but not filling well in most sections where tested, and therefore little planted in recent years. 2834. Varieties of the pecan: 1, San Saba; 2, Teche; 3, Stuart; 4, Van Deman; 5, Centennial; 6, Schley; 7, Delmas. ( X %) Moneymaker (Fig. 2833). — Mound, Louisiana. A medium-sized, rather thin-shelled nut of excellent cracking and fair dessert quality. A precocious, productive sort. One of the hardiest of the southern varieties. Niblack. — Knox County, Indiana. Recently introduced. Below medium in size, but its excellent cracking and fine dessert qualities make it promising for the North. Pabst. — Ocean Springs, Mississippi. A large, rather thick-shelled sort with a very plump and attractive kernel of excellent quality. Post (syn., Post's Select). — Milburn, Texas. Nuts and seedling trees were widely disseminated for several years under this name, at first from a tree on the Colorado River bottom near Milburn, Texas, later from other trees nearby, and still later from the Hollis tree in the same county. The nut of the original Post tree is of medium size and very attractive appearance and thousands of seedlings from it have been planted throughout the South, but neither the variety nor its seedlings are now propagated. Rome (syns., Columbia, Columbian, Century, Twentieth Cen- tury, Pride of the Coast, Southern Giant) (Fig. 2833). — Convent, Louisiana. One of the largest varieties and for several years the most widely exploited, but now practically discarded by planters. Shell thick and kernel frequently defective. Russell (Fig. 2833). — Ocean Springs, Mississippi. A rnedium- sized conical nut with very thin shell. Quality excellent when well filled but often faulty. Tree slender and tender but very produc- tive along the Gulf Coast of Mississippi. Son Saba (syns., Papershell, Risien's Papershell, Royal) (Fig. 2834). — Though small, its thinness of shell, plumpness and sweet- ness of kernel make it a highly desirable nut where it succeeds. Tree a vigorous, though slender grower; very productive; scabs badly in eastern districts. Schley (syn., Admiral Schley) (Fig. 2834). — Pascagoula, Missis- sippi. One of the most widely successful commercial sorts. Nut generally large, with thin shell and plump kernel of excellent quality. Tree pendulous in habit but vigorous and productive. Sovereign (syn., Texas Prolific). — San Saba, Texas. Seedling of San Saba, larger than the parent, with somewhat thicker shell. Very productive in Texas but susceptible to scab in eastern dis- tricts. Stuart (syn., Castanera) (Fig. 2834). — Widely planted and generally productive. Nut large, filling well but rather difficult to crack and, therefore, less planted as a commercial nut than formerly. Success (Fig. 2833). — Ocean Springs, Mississippi. A large nut with a relatively thin shell and plump kernel. Teche (syns., Frotscher No. 2, Duplicate Frotscher, Fake Frotscher, Spurious Frotscher) (Fig. 2834). — Probably a seedling of Frotscher, mixed with that variety in nursery and disseminated as Frotscher. Rather small and not of high quality, but very pro- ductive throughout the southeastern states. Van Deman (syns., Mire, Duminie Mire, Paragon, Bourgeois) (Fig. 2834). — A large to very large nut, cracking well, with plump kernel of high quality. Widely planted in lower Mississippi Valley and Gulf Coast sections. Subject to scab farther east. Hybrids. — Numerous hybrids of C. Pecan with C. laciniosa and C. aquatica are known and some have been named and propagated in a small way. Of these the McCattister (syn., Floyd), found near Mt. Vernon, Indiana, is a very large nut, probably the largest known hickory-nut. The original tree has for many years failed to mature more than a small proportion of plump kernels and top- grafted trees of the variety have exhibited the same weakness, so that it cannot be regarded as of commercial value. Literature. Books and bulletins have been published on nut- and pecan-culture and varieties. Some of the works are: "Nut Culture in the United States," Division of Pomology, 1896; "The Nut Culturist," A. S. Fuller, 1896; "Nuts for Profit," John R. Parry, 1897; "Pecan Culture for Western Texas," E. E. Risien, 1904; "The Pecan and Its Culture," H. Harold Hume, 1906: "Pecans," J. B. Wight, 1906. Detailed historical accounts and descriptions of forty of the best known varieties, with colored plates, occur in Department of Agriculture Yearbooks for the years 1904-1909 and 1912. The following bulletins on the pecan have been issued: Florida Experiment Station Bulletins Nos. 54, 57, 85; Texas Experiment Station Bulletin No. 69; North Carolina Department of Agriculture Bulletins Nos. 30, 156, 224; Georgia State College of Agricul- ture Bulletin No. 82; Georgia Experiment Station Bulletin No. 116; Bureau of Plant Industry Bulletins Nos. 30, 251; Farmers' Bulletin No. 700. WM. A. TAYLOR. PECTINARIA (comb-like). Asdepiadacex. The genus as described by Haworth, not of other authors, com- prises succulent leafless herbs: sts. tufted, usually pro- cumbent, acutely, obtusely or obscurely 4-8-angled: fls. small, solitary or in fascicles in the grooves or on the sides between the angles; calyx 5-parted; corolla small, budlike, with a short cup-shaped hemispheric or broad and shallow tube and 5 lobes connate at the apex; corona double, outer cuplike and variably cut into 10 to numerous teeth or of 5 minute lobes, inner of 5 lobes incumbent upon the backs of the anthers or erect and about equaling or longer than them and connivent-erect over them; filaments of the sta- mens connate, forming a tube around the ovary and adnate to the dilated top of the style: follicles narrowly fusiform, glabrous. — Five species, all S. African. The following species have been intro. at Kew: P. sax- dtilis, N. E. Br. Sts. acutely 4-angled, with flat or slightly concave sides and distant acute deltoid teeth along the angles: corolla broadly ovoid or subglobose, covered with fine hairs on the inner surface, blackish purple or purple-brown. P. asperifolia, N. E. Br. Sts. cylindric, with 6-8 series of closely placed tubercles: corolla papillate outside and within also pentagonally subglobose, with the papillae on the inner surface 2524 PECTINARIA PEDILANTHUS covered with short spikelike processes, dull purplish outside, the whole surface inside frosted white, dotted with crimson. p. TRACY HUBBARD. PEDDIEA (named after Major Peddie). Thymel- seacese. Glabrous shrubs, hardy in the extreme south of the United States. Leaves sparse, subcoriaceous or membranaceous: fls. yellowish green, in peduncled umbels at the tips of the branches, pedicelled, perfect; perianth-tube cylindrical, lobes 4 (rarely 5?), short, spreading; sta- mens 8 (rarely 10?); disk hypogynous, cup^shaped, entire or toothed; ovary glabrous or densely villous at the apex, 2-celled: drupe succulent, with 2 nutlets. — About 10 species, Trop. and S. Afr. africana, Harv. Shrub: Ivs. subopposite, elliptic, nearly sessile, glabrous: fls. in terminal stalked umbels, tubular, %-%in. long, 4-5-lobed, the lobes revolute: fr. a drupe with 2 stones, ovoid, about 1 in. long. S. Afr- F. TRACY HUBBARD. PEDICULARIS (from Latin for louse; application not evident). Scrophularidcese. LOUSEWORT. Herbs, mostly perennial, sometimes planted in grounds for the showy spikes of flowers and often finely cut foliage. Mostly erect, only seldom annual or biennial: Ivs. alternate or whorled (sometimes opposite), rarely sub- opposite, 1 to many times pinnately divided, rarely merely dentate: fls. purplish, red, rose-color to white, in spring and summer, borne mostly in a terminal bracted spike; calyx anteriorly cut, variously 2-5- toothed, sometimes also posteriorly; corolla 2-lipped, the upper one (or galea) with or without a long beak, the tube cylindrical; stamens 4, didynamous: caps, ovate or lanceolate, oblique; seeds usually few. — There are about 250 species of Pedicularis in many parts of the northern hemisphere (a few S. American), many of them arctic and alpine. Thirty to 40 are native in the 2835. Pedicularis Grayi. ( X M U. S., and the genus has a large extension in Asia. They are little known as garden plants, not being really domesticated. Some of them are adaptable to banks and borders, and others to rock-gardens and alpine work; some are swamp plants. They are likely not to persist long without renewal, as they appear to be par- tially parasitic and may require a particular host plant. Prop, by seeds and division. The following American species are perennial. A. Lvs. undivided: galea long-beaked. racemosa, Douglas. Height 12-18 in. : sts. leafy and simple or branched: Ivs. lanceolate, undivided, minutely and doubly crenulate: fls. white; galea (upper lip of the corolla) with a long beak (Min. long), circinate-in- curved, nearly reaching the lower lip. Colo, to Brit. Col.; subalpine. AA. Lvs. variously divided: galea with very short beak or none. Grayi, A. Nels. (P. procera, Gray). Fig. 2835. Robust, lJ^-4 ft. high, leafy: Ivs. pinnately divided, the segms. lanceolate and pinnatifid and the lobes again dentate or cut, the radical Ivs. 1 ft. or more long: fls. sordid yellowish and greenish striate, in a dense-fld. Eubescent spike 10-20 in. long, the galea not beaked; .-bracts long. Mountains of Colo, and New Mex. lanceolata, Michx. SWAMP LOUSEWORT. Glabrous or nearly so, 1-3 ft. high, simple, or branched above: Ivs. alternate and opposite, pinnately lobed, upper ones sessile: fls. yellow in a short spike; bracts shorter than the fls.: caps, ovate, scarcely longer than the calyx. Aug.-Oct. Swamps, Conn, to Man., to Ohio and Neb. canadensis, Linn. WOOD BETONY. The common American lousewort, usually more or less hairy: sts. commonly tufted, 3^-1 Yi ft. high: Ivs. mostly alternate, oblong-lanceolate, pinnately parted, all but the upper- most petioled, the lobes oblong and obtuse, incised or dentate: fls. yellow or reddish, rarely white, in a short spike that elongates in fr. : caps, lanceolate, 3 times as long as the calyx. April-June. Dry woods and thickets, Nova Scotia to Man.; south, Fla. to Mex. B.B. 3:186. B.M. 2506. P. curvipes, Hook. f. Sts. 1 ft. long, very slender and curving: Ivs. far apart, 1 in. or less long, pinnatifid, the lobes 3 or 4 pairs and incised: fls. rose-colored, axillary, long-pedicelled, the stalka recurving in fr. Himalaya, W.OOO ft. B.M. 7735. — P. folidsa, Linn. Sts. simple, 1-3 ft.: Ivs. pinnatifid, the segms. lanceolate and toothed: fls. cream-color, in a dense spike; galea very blunt. Eu. Gn. 62, p. 97. — P. mollis, Wall. Annual, 2-3 ft., strict: Ivs. all on the St., ovate or oblong, pinnatifid, the segms. linear and crenate or pinnatifid: fls. dark pinkish purple, in strict spikes 6-16 in. long. Himalaya, Thibet, 10,000-14,000 ft. B.M. 4599. J.F. 2:166.— P. Sceptrum-Carolinum, Linn. St. few-lvd., 3-4 ft.: Ivs. pinnatifid, the lobes ovate and crenulate: fls. golden yellow, 1 in. long, in an interrupted spike, the lower lip tinged red. Eu. G.C. III. 40:385. — P. siphondntha, Don. Sts. 1 ft. high or less, erect or ascending: Ivs. radical, linear-oblong, pinnatifid: fls. red or pink, axillary and in terminal racemes, the corolla-tube 1-6 times as long as calyx. Afghanistan to Thibet. L H B t PEDILANTHUS (Greek, shoe-flower). Euphorbiaceas. SLIPPER PLANT. BIRD CACTUS. REDBIRD CACTUS. SLIPPER SPURGE. JEW BUSH. Low tender cactus-like shrubs, grown in collections of succulents. Stems thick and fleshy, juice milky: Ivs. alternate, often rudimentary, the midrib thickened and often keeled below: infl. of terminal or axillary cymes; the fl. and fr. characters as in Euphorbia, but the involucre with a deep fissure and a short spur on the upper side, the spur containing the glands. — About 30 species in Trop. Amer. Prop, and cult, similar to the succulent euphorbias. See Millspaugh in Field Museum Nat. Hist., Publication 172, 1913, for a revision of the species. A. Lobe of the involucre above the spur entire. tithymaloides, Poit. (Euphorbia tithymaloides, Linn. E. canaliculata, Lodd. E. carindta, Donn). St. 4-^6 ft. high: Ivs. dark green, ovate or oblong, acute; midrib keeled below and dentate: involucres bright red or PEDILAXTHUS PELARGONIUM 2525 purple, M~Mm- long. m dense terminal cymes, glabrous inside and out; pedicels of the stamens hairv, of the ovary smooth. Fla. to Venezuela. B.R. 837^ L.B.C. 8:727. B.M. 2514. — Two varieties are in cult., cuad- latus and variegatus, Hort ., both with white-bordered Ivs. padifolius, Poit. Sts. green, glabrous: Ivs. few, oblong-ovate, obtuse: cymes terminal, open; tube of the involucre hairy only within; pedicels of both stamens and ovary hairy. \V. Indies. AA. Lobe above the spur 2-parted; bracts of the infl. green aphyllus, Boiss. Branches slender, leafless: cymes terminal; the pubescent peduncle attached at the back of the involucre, which is hairy within; pedicels of the stamens and ovary glabrous. Mex. — Intro, as a wax- yielding plant. macrocarpus, Benth. Shrubby: sts. whitish: Ivs. minute: cymes open, few-fld.; peduncle attached to the center of the involucre, pedicels glabrous. W. Mex. J. B. S. NORTON. PEDIOCACTUS (plains cactus). Cactdceae. Globular, resembling in habit and flower the so-called mammil- larias: fls. small, with a rather indefinite funnel-shaped tube; petals pinkish, broad; sepals smaller than the petals and duller in color; bracts on corolla-tube few; stamens numerous; ovary green, nearly globular, usually without bracts (rarely 1, otherwise naked), apex with a truncate or depressed scar left by the deciduous corolla: fr. dry, greenish, bursting irregularly; seeds dull black, tuberculate, keeled on the back, with a large sub-basal hilum. The fl. originates just above the spine areole on the very young tubercles, and therefore this genus belongs to the Echinocactus type rather than to the so-called mammillarias. The seeds are also of the Echinocactus type. Simpsonii, Brit. & Rose. Subglobose or depressed, turbinate at base, simple, often clustered, 3 }£-5 in. diam.: ribs 8-13, only indicated by the spiral arrange- ment of the prominent tubercles, which are Y^'^m long, somewhat quadrangular at base and cylindric above; exterior spines 20-30, slender, rigid, straight, whitish, yy-ytf&.. long, with 2—5 additional short seta- ceous ones above; interior spines 8-10, stouter, yellow- ish and reddish brown or black above, erect-spreading, -,in. long; no truly central spine: fls. M-^sin. long and nearly as broad, yellowish green to pale purple. Mountains of Colo., Wyo.. Utah, and Nev. — This spe- cies does not grow well in cult., although it is fre- quently intro. This is the species which forms the "snake cactus" or "brain cactus" often seen in cult. J. N. ROSE. PELARGONIUM (storfc, because the fruit is long and slender like a stork's bill). Geraniacex. GERANIUM of gardens. PELARGONIUM. STORK'S BILL. Many kinds of pot-plants, popular for indoors and for bedding; and some of them much planted permanently out-of-doors in California and elsewhere; flowers showy. Plants of various habit : some are fleshy and tuberous and are treated as succulents, but those commonly grown are erect or trailing leafy herbs or woody below (sometimes shrubby) with sts. somewhat soft and suc- culent or small and firm: Ivs. mostly opposite, entire to decompound, stipulate, the foliage often strong- scented: infl. mostly umbel-like, on axillary peduncles; fls. irregular, the petals 5 (rarely fewer by abortion), the 2 upper usually larger and more prominently colored, the lower mostly narrow and rarely very small, the colors pink, red, purple, white, sometimes yellow, often attractively blotched or veined; calyx 5-parted (or the sepals said to be connate at base), the uppermost segm. produced at base into a slender nectar-bearing tube or spur adnate to the pedicel; stamens 10, of which 7 or less are anther-bearing and fertile: fr. of 5 valves, each 1-seeded and separating from the beak- like apex mostly by coiling and more or less hygro- metrically. — Nearly all the pelargoniums are from S. Afr. All the species mentioned in this article are from that region, unless otherwise stated. Harvey, in Vol. I of Harvey & Sender's Flora Capensis (1859^60), admits 2836. Pelargonium inquinans (and a variety of it) as figured by Dillenius in 1732. 163 species; and his descriptions are followed closely in the characterizations of species given below. Knuth, the most recent monographer (in Engler's Pflanzen- reich, IV. 129, 1912), admits 232 species and very many well-marked hybrids. Pelargonium is distinguished from the genus Geranium by technical characters. In most cases, the fls. of Geranium are regular, but those of Pelargonium are irregular, the 2 upper petals differing from the others in size and shape and often hi coloring. The most constant difference between the two genera is the presence hi Pelargonium of a nectar-tube, extend- ing from the base of one of the sepals and adherent to the side of the calyx-tube or pedicel. This tube is not seen by the casual observer, but it may be discovered by making a longitudinal section of the fl. and pedicel. The person who wishes to study the contemporaneous evolution of plants may find his heart's desire in Pelargonium. With great numbers of species and many 2526 PELARGONIUM PELARGONIUM of them variable and confusing in a wild state, with plant-breeding in many places and continued through two centuries, and with a large special literature, the genus offers exceptional advantages and perplexities to the student. Most of the species early came into cultivation by the English and Dutch, the South African plants forming at one time almost a separ- ate department of horticultural knowledge. P. cucullatum, the domi- nant parent in the florist's pelar- goniums, was known in England as early as 1690. The two originals of the race of zonal or bedding gera- niums were introduced into Eng- land in 1710 and 1714. Early in that century, a half-dozen species were grown at Eltham, in the famous garden of James Sherard, and these were pictured in 1732 in Dillenius' account of that garden, "Hortus Elthamensis," a sumptuously illus- trated work in quarto. Even at 2837. Gardener's that time, P. inquinans had varied ' ideal, and the original markedly (see Fig. 2836). In his form, as depicted in "Species Plantarum," 1753, Linnaeus 1841. described the few species which he knew (about twenty-five) under the genus Geranium. In 1787, L'Heritier founded the genus Pelargonium, and transferred many of the Linnsean species. L'Heritier's work "Geraniologia," a quarto, appeared in Paris in 1787 to 1788, with forty-four full- page plates. Recently Kuntze has revived the pre- Linnaean name Geraniospermum (1736) for this genus, but it is not likely to find acceptance. Early in the nineteenth century, many species were in cultivation in Europe, and experiments in hybridizing and breeding became common. There appears to have been something like a geranium craze. The experi- ments seem to have been confined largely to the development of the show or fancy pelargoniums, as greenhouse subjects, for bedding plants had not reached their present popularity. The geranium interest seems to have culminated in Robert Sweet's noble work on "Geraniaceae," published in five volumes in London, 1820 to 1830, containing 500 well-executed colored plates of geraniaceous plants. At that time many dis- tinct garden hybrids were in cultivation, and to these Sweet gave Latin botanical names. His fifth volume is devoted chiefly to garden forms of the show pelar- gonium type, to which the general class name Domes- ticum is given in the following sketch. The develop- ment of the zonal or bedding geraniums had begun in Sweet's time, and he includes them in his pictures, but the larger part of their evolution is subsequent to his history. Various small works on pelargonium have appeared. De Jonghe's "Traite M6thodique de la Culture du Pelargonium," Brussels, 1844, contains good bibliographical and cultural data. Few classes of plants should have more interest to the amateur and fancier because the species are numerous and varied, the colors mostly very attrac- tive, the habit of the plant interesting, and the foliage often with pleasing fragrance ; yet, excluding the common window and bedding geraniums of the P. zonale and P. inquinans type and the Lady Washington or Show types, they are very little known to gardeners. A cool greenhouse could be made to yield very interesting sub- jects in the species here described and others that may be secured from collectors in the regions where they grow. Most of the cultivated forms of pelargonium may be grouped into four general horticultural classes: I. The zonal, horseshoe, fish, or bedding types, known to gardeners as "geraniums." They comprise a mongrel class, designated as the Hortorum class This race seems to be derived from P. zonale and P. inquinans. These two species were made by Linnaeus in 1753, but he founded them on descriptions in earlier works rather than directly on the plants. In America, the zonal geraniums are very popular, for they develop their colors well in the bright climate. They are popu- lar in all countries, however. They probably stand closer to the lives of a great number of persons than any other ornamental plant. If a window or a garden can have but one plant, that plant is likely to be a geranium. The old race of large-flowered and large-clustered geraniums was known as "nosegay geraniums," because they were bouquet-like, but this term is not known in America. Another race has been developed for its zone- marked leaves. There is also a race of double-flowered zonals, which have appeared chiefly since 1860. The very full double and close-clus- tered forms lose much of the grace and charm of the single types. Some of them are little better, to a sensitive eye, than balls of colored paper. In the development of the individual flower of the geranium, there have been two ideals — the English ideal for a cir- cular flower with the petals broadened and overlapping, and the continental ideal with a somewhat two-lipped flower and the petals well separated. In the "Gardeners' Chroni- cle" in 1841, p. 644, the proper form is set forth in an illustration, and this is contrasted with the "original form;" the picture is reproduced, somewhat smaller, in Fig. 2837. "The long, narrow, flimsy petals of the old varieties," the writing says, "moved by every breath of wind, and separated to their very base by broad open spaces, have been suc- ceeded by the beauti- ful compact flowers of the present day, with broad stout petals so entirely overlaying each other as to leave scarcely an indentation in the outline of the flower; while the coarseness which pre- vailed in the larger of the old sorts is replaced by a firmer substance, and a far more deli- cate texture." Fig. 2838 shows contrasting ideals, although the 2838. Three forms of garden ger- picture does not repre- amum. The upper two show the £ , ,, PYtrpTTlp(, two-lipped ideal. Uppermost is Mrs. E. G. Hill; middle one, Maculatum; In more recent years lowest, Wistre. a French type has ap- LXXXVI. The common garden geranium, a form of Pelargonium. PELARGONIUM PELARGONIUM 2527 peared under the name of "gros bois," or "large-wood" race. It is characterized as follows by Dauthenay: umbels ordinarily 4 to 5 inches in diameter: flowers very large; petals roundish, or sometimes triangular, the limb always very large and giving the corolla a remarkably round contour: leaves very large, thick and coriaceous, plane or incurved, more or less indented, strongly nerved, their diameter averaging about 5 inches, pedi- cels large and short: peduncles large, rigid, and pro- jecting beyond the foliage: wood soft, fleshy, very large, often \Yi inches around. To this type Dauthenay refers the Bruant geraniums, dating from 1882. A special hand- book is devoted to these plants : Dauthenay, "Les Geraniums," Paris, 1897. . No. 7. II. The ivy-leaved geraniums, products largely of Pelargonium peltatum (Fig. 2839). The species is said to have been introduced into England in 1701. It is a weak and straggling plant, used mostly in vases, hang- ing-baskets, and other places in which an overhanging subject is desired. The foliage is thick and shiny, slightly peltate and prominently angle-lobed, and the pink or reddish two-lipped flowers are always admired. Much-improved and double forms are now in commerce. III. The "show" or fancy type is known to gardeners as "pelargonium," and in this country also as Lady Washington geraniums (Fig. 2845). These plants are very popular in Europe, being grown in numerous varieties. They are prominent at the exhibitions. Because of the hot trying summer climate, these plants are of very secondary importance in America, although there are many gardeners who succeed well with them. This race of pelargoniums seems to have descended chiefly from P. cucullatum, although P. angulosum may be nearly equally concerned in it. P. grandiflarum is also thought to have been a formative parent. It is probable that two or three other species are concerned in the evolution. In fact, the late Shirlev Hibbard once wrote (G.C., July 3, 1880) that "it must be evident to even- cultivator of these flowers that the blood of a score or so of species is mingled in them." This marked garden race, which represents no single wild species, is designated as the Domesticum group. IV. Various scented-leaved geraniums, known mostly as "rose geraniums." These are of several species, with their hybrids and derivatives. The common rose geraniums are nearest P. graveolens and P. Radula. The nutmeg geranium is P. odoraiissimum or P. fragrans. Aside from the above groups there are several species which appear sporadically in the trade, as P. tomen- tosum, P. echinatum, P. triste, P. quinqiievulnerum, P. fulgidum, and P. quercifolium or the derivatives of them. Few great collections of pelargonium species and varieties have been made in this country, and this is much to be regretted. Culture of zonal geraniums. (C. W. Ward.) While the general florist may consider geranium- culture the easiest of all gardening, the fact remains that it is as necessary to observe the requirements of the geranium as it is to observe the requirements of any other plant, in order to succeed and produce the best effects attainable. While it is true that the geranium will grow and make a good showing with comparatively little care, there is as much difference between a skil- fully grown geranium plant and one carelessly grown as there is between a fancy and a common rose or carnation. To secure the best results it is necessary to propagate from perfectly healthy stock. The dangers of over- propagation are as great with the geranium as with most other plants. To keep most varieties in good health it is necessary to plant the stock intended for propagation in the field and to propagate either from the field-grown wood in August or early September, or to lift the plants in the month of September and plant them on benches in the greenhouse, where they will become established and will maintain a vigorous constitution throughout the winter season. The propagation from field-grown wood is far less successful than from wood grown inside, and when the field-grown cuttings are placed in sand, a large percentage of them is likely to damp-off, especially S there has been a comparatively abundant rainfall in the month of July. The best method that the writer has found for striking the field- grown cuttings is to put them in 2-inch pots, using a light sandy soil free from all manure and chemicals, and to place the pots in the full sunlight either in a coolhouse or a frame. These cuttings must be kept on the dry side until the calluses have been well formed, although they should not be allowed to shrivel at any time. If the cuttings show signs of shriveling, a light syringing is preferable to a heavy watering. After the roots have started, the treatment of the plants is the same as if the cuttings had been rooted in the sand and repotted. The writer considers wood grown inside superior to field-grown wood, as the cuttings are much shorter-jointed; most of them can be taken from the plant with a heel and 95 to 100 per cent of them will root in sand in the ordinary cutting-bench. A good temperature for* the geranium propagating- house is 56° to 60°, with a bottom heat of 65° to 68°. While the cuttings are in the sand and before they are rooted, care must be taken about keeping them too moist for fear of "damping-off," or what geranium- growers know as "black-rot." As soon as the cutting is thoroughly callused and begins to emit roots, it should be potted up at once. The best soil for gera- niums, according to the writer's experience, is a firm pliable clay loam; this is best if used absolutely without any manure, especially fresh manure. After potting the cuttings they should be lightly watered and shaded for a day or so if the sun is extremely hot, until the roots take hold and the foliage fills up and the stems begin to look plump. The geranium should not be grown at any time in its young state in a soil that is too rich, and care must also be taken that the plants are not kept too wet. The geranium is subject to few diseases, and so far as the writer has been able to observe these diseases are brought on by improper treatment, such as having too much fresh rank manure in the soil or keeping the plants too wet. Too much strong plant-food in the earth combined with too much moisture induces a condition of the leaves ordinarily called "spot." It usually appears in the hottest weather or immediately after extreme heat accompanied by copious showers or rains. Excellent specimen geranium plants may be grown in pots, especially of some of the newer French and Eng- lish round-flowered varieties. In order to produce the best results, choose young vigorous plants that have 2528 PELARGONIUM PELARGONIUM been propagated either in the latter part of August or the forepart of September, and that have shown a dis- position to take hold immediately, both in rooting and in starting to grow after being potted. The soil should not be too rich, and it is best to start with the plant in a rather small pot, say 2% inches, and proceed onward with light shifts, — that is, shifting the plant from a 2^-uich to a 33^-inch pot, and so on, letting the sizes increase an inch at each shift until a 7-, 8-, or 9-inch pot is reached, which will usually be large enough to flower the finest speci- mens. Whenever shifting the geranium, be sure to pot firmly, as a firm soil produces a short-jointed stocky growth, and far more bloom than a loose or over-rich soil. When the plants reach a 5- or 6-inch pot they may be regularly fed with manure- water. The most critical tune for these specimen geraniums will be in the months of July, August, and September; in these periods exposure to in- tense sunshine should be avoided. Too much water and a close tem- perature are always detrimental to the geranium. Syringing the foli- age frequently to keep down the tem- perature is also injurious. If these plants are kept under glass, a light shading or stripping upon the glass is beneficial. Probably the best posi- tion for such plants in these three extreme months is on the north side of a row of trees, some distance away from the trees, where the plants will have the benefit of the subdued shad- ing of the foliage. If kept under glass and shaded, abundant ventilation should always be provided. As the winter approaches, a night temperature of 60° and day tem- perature of 70° to 75°, with plenty of ventilation in the daytime, especially in bright weather, seem best to suit the plants. Syringing rums the flowers, and too much moisture either in the pot or upon the foliage causes the spotting of the leaves known as "dropsy." In planting the geranium in the field or in beds, always avoid an over-rich soil. The earth should be in good condition and fertile, but must not be loaded with either chemical or animal fertilizer. Too much water at any period during the hot weather produces a rank growth, reduces the quantity of bloom and in most instances induces the spotted foliage to appear. Another disease, which is sometimes seri- ous, especially in extremely hot seasons accompanied with a superabundance of moist- ure, is "stem-rot." This frequently attacks imported stock. It is most serious in intensely hot seasons; the entire plant turns black and fades and withers away. The stem-rot occurs in varieties that have been very heavily propagated. The insects that affect the geranium are also comparatively few. The red-spider is some- times a serious pest in summer and is difficult to get rid of when it is once well established. The only method is to syringe the plants with an extremely fine spray, and also to pick off the leaves that are seriously affected and burn them. The green-fly is also troublesome at tunes, but is easily managed with the ordinary fumigation of tobacco. There is a small caterpillar that eats the foliage and sometimes proves a serious pest. If one can induce a few ground sparrows or any of the warblers, or even English sparrows, to make their home about the green- house, they will put a speedy end to these caterpillars. Another remedy is to go over the plants carefully and to pick the caterpillars off and destroy them. This is tedious, as it must be done frequently. In the way of bedding geraniums, as a rule the Bruant section produces the best results, but there are a number of English and French varieties that do espe- cially well in our hot climate. The greatest difficulty in successful geranium-culture in America is the intense heat of the summer months, chiefly July and August. Some varieties withstand the heat better than others. Show pelargoniums. (T. D. Hatfield.) What are known as show pelargoniums have enjoyed a long popularity. By the general public, and by old people especially, they are known as Lady Washington geraniums. They are not so commonly grown as the so-called geraniums, chiefly on account of their limited season of bloom and the fact that they cannot endure our hot midsummer suns. Through the greater part of the summer they are liable to be neglected. They also require differ- ent treatment from geraniums, and — if skill there be — more skill in cultivation. At the end of the blooming season, they require rest, — a season of ripening the growth already made. At this time very little water will be needed, and they may be stood out in the full sun. Only the old flower-stems may be removed. In no sense should they be cut back at this tune, neither should water enough be given to encourage new growth. All the leaves should stay on until they naturally turn yellow with age, thus securing a thoroughly ripened growth. In September, one may prune them into shape, some- times rather severely, but in any case cut out all weak and soft shoots. They should then be shaken out and repotted in a light compost, not rich, into the smallest-sized pots that will hold them, for the process of growing them on has to be gone over every season. After potting, a good soaking will be necessary, and they may be placed in a well-lighted coldframe. There is no need to keep them close; the stimulation of water, and the slight protection of a frame are usually enough to start them into new growth. No forcing will ever be needed at any season, and if the grower wished, he might keep them in a cold- frame until very late in the season, so long as adequate protection against frost is afforded. They are at their best in May, and to have them hi good condition, 2840. Leaves of various fancy-leaved one may grow them slowly geraniums. — Hortorums (X}^). No. 13. in a house averaging about PELARGONIUM PELARGONIUM 2520 50° night temperature (slightly less in midwinter), from October onward. After the turn of the days — in January — repot them, using now a richer compost. Give a fairly good shift, depending in part on the size of plants desired, the vigor they show, and the difference in varieties. If wanted to bloom in April or, as some florists might, at Easter, they should have been potted at once — in late August or September — into the size they should bloom in, — a medium size, prob- ably the same as they had lately occupied, and have pollination has any effect, as the seedlings seldom show any particular affinity to either parent. INDEX. 2841. Pelargonium odoratissimum (Natural size). No. 15. been taken indoors to grow on continuously. But for dis- / play in May and June, they are potted again in January, and some plants may be gi%-en another shift when extra vigor or the possible need of a few extra-large specimens demand it. They will need careful stopping. Some rubbing out of weak shoots, when they break abundantly, will help those that remain, and one may even have to do a little pruning. Stopping, however, must be discontinued as soon as the flowering stems begin to show, which is about the end of February in the writer's practice. These stems can be distinguished easily by a slightly different manner of growth. Up to this time the plants may be allowed to grow naturally; but if the gardener wants trained specimens he must begin to bend them as he wishes them to grow, as their growth speedily hardens and the plant will readily take and keep the form to which it is shaped. Water should be given sparingly through the dead of winter. February and March are the months when the most growth is made, and at this time one may stimulate them materially by the judicious use of artificial manures, which may be continued, if necessary, until they come into bloom. They are much subject to the attacks of green-fly and red-spider; and as the foli- age is fairly tender and liable to injury from tobacco smoke, reliance must be placed on fluid insecticides almost wholly. The blooming season is very much lengthened by giving a slight degree of shade. The best time to take cuttings is soon after the flower- ing season. Often toward the last of the season, the plants make a few "growing" shoots, and these may be taken; but off and on during the summer one can get cuttings, and any time until August will do. Cut- tings taken in winter-time with a heel make pretty little plants in 4- or 5-inch pots without stopping. Cut- tings taken at the usual time and grown in 6- or 7- inch pots come in handy in grouping for the front lines. It is necessary to raise a few plants every season to replace older plants which have grown too large. New varieties are raised from seed, which is freely produced. In hybridizing it does not appear that hand- angulosum, 20. filipcndulifolium, 1. odoratissimum, 15, 16. artemisaefolium, 5. fragrans, 16. odoratum, 31. artemisioides , 5. fulgidum, 3. pastinaezf folium, 1. betulinum, 17. glabrum, 7. peltatum, 7. capitatum, 23. grandiflorum, 8. quercifolium, 25. clypeatum, 7. graveolens, 26. quinquevulnerum, 2. cordatum, 18. hederxfolium, 7. Radula, 28. crispum, 30. hispidum, 27. rerolulum, 28. cucullatum, 19. hortomm, 13. scutatum, 7. daucifolium, 1 inquinans, 12. Thorncroftii, 10. denticulatum, 29. lateripes, 7. tomentosum, 22. domesticum, 21. latifolium, 30. transvaalense, 10. Drummondii, 23. laxatum, 1. triste, 1. echinatum, 14. Limoneum, Ul. riUosttm, I. Endlicherianum, 6. multibracteatum 9. vitif olium, 24. erectum, 16. multifidum, 28. zonale, 11, exstipulatum, 4. I. Lvs. on the pinnate order, although sometimes entire, usually pinnately lobed or compound. (Nos. 1-ff). A. Plant with short, more or less succulent st. and tuberous or thickened roots: Ivs. pinnate or pinnately parted, long-petioled: fls. in many-fld. dense umbels, on very short pedicels; petals 5, nearly equal; stamens 6-7, one filament broad. (Polydctium.) 1. triste, Ait. (Geranium triste, Linn. G. pastinacae- folium and P. vittosum, Mill.). St. or caudex very short, succulent: Ivs. large, 2-3 pinnately compound, pubes- cent, the ultimate teeth gland-tipped: calyx-tube long and stalk-like, much exceeding the pedicel, the lobes half as long as the petals: fls. brown-yellow with dark spots. — A well-marked species, sometimes offered in the trade. It runs into several forms. The various names and synonyms suggest the divided Ivs. of the umbellifers and other plants. Var. filipendulifolium, Sims. Caulescent: Ivs. sub-bipinnatifid, the segms. oblong. B.M. 1641. Var. daucifolium, Harv. (Geranium daucifolium, Linn.), has If. -segms. narrow -linear or linear-oblong. Var. laxatum, Harv., has Ivs. 4-pinnate, the pinna? stalked and ultimate segms linear. 2. quinquevulnerum, Willd. Somewhat shrubby at base, sparingly branched, hirsute: Ivs. 2-pinnatifid with linear toothed segms., the stipules broadly cor- date and mucronate: fls. purple, scentless, the petals obovate, velvety, and pale-edged; calyx-tube as long as the pedicels, somewhat hairy, the lobes obtuse. — Thought by Sweet to be a hybrid of P. triste and P. bicolor, and so regarded by Knuth. 3. fulgidum, Ait. (Geranium fulgidum, Linn.). St. shrubby, densely pubescent: Ivs. pinnately 3-parted, silky dn both sides, the lateral segms. 3-lobed, all 2842. Pelargonium cordatum (XX). No. 18. 2530 PELARGONIUM PELARGONIUM 2843. Pelargonium corda- tum. Leaves often are much more cordate at base. ( X 1A) deeply toothed, the terminal lobe oblong and pinnatifid ; stipules acute, broadly cordate: peduncles usually branched, many-fld.; fls. small, bright scarlet, the petals obtuse; calyx-tube conspicuously swollen at the base and again just underneath the fl., thrice as long as the pedicel, the lobes linear- obtuse; petals brilliant scar- let with dark lines. — Per- haps not now seen in its pure form, but it is probably a remote parent in various small-fld. scarlet geraniums. Cult, in England as early as 1723. AA. Plant either succulent, or shrubby and slender, the root branching: Ivs. mostly cut or decom- pound (rarely entire), pinnately formed: petals nearly equal, narrow- spatulate; fertile stamens 7. (Ligularia.) 4. exstipulatum, L'Her. Shrubby, canescent: Ivs. round-ovate, small, velvety, about 3-lobed, the lobes cut-toothed or lobed, the lateral lobes small; stipules adnate and very minute: peduncles slender and few- fld., with very small bracts; fls. small, white, with short spatulate petals. — Lvs. about Kin. across, with odor of pennyroyal. Ap- pears not to be in the trade, at least not in a pure form. 5. artemisaefdlium, DC. (P. artemisioldes, Hort.). Suffruticose, erect and slender, glabrous, nearly sim- ple: Ivs. long-petioled, 2-pinnately parted, nearly glabrous, the segms. linear-filiform and channeled; stipules free, subulate: peduncles long, 2-3-fld.; fls. white or blush; calyx-tube swollen at base, 2-3 times as long as the lance-cuspidate segms., not ribbed; petals about twice longer than calyx-segms. or sepals, spatu- late or obovate, rounded at apex, more or less veined and spotted at base. G.M. 54:629. II. Lvs. on the palmate order, although sometimes entire, usually lobed (Nos. 6-31). A. Plant shrubby, or sometimes succulent and jointed: Ivs. palmately nerved or lobed; stipules persistent and either rigid or membranaceous: petals £ or 5, the two uppermost broadly obovate and long- clawed, very much longer than the lower ones; fertile stamens 7. (Jenkinsdnia.) 6. Endlicherianum, Fenzl. Herbaceous peren- nial, 1-1 K ft. high, noteworthy in being W. Asian: st. little branched, somewhat fleshy, terete, pubescent: basal Ivs. more or less numer- ous, glaucous, cordate-orbicular, broadly and obscurely 5-lobed, lobes crenate-dentate, with whitish appressed hairs; stipules lanceolate, hairy: fls. many in the umbel, rose-colored; spur of calyx exceeding pedicel; upper 2 petals 2-3 times longer than sepals. Asia Minor, Syria. B.M. 4946. G.C. 111.30:149. Gn. 60, p. 185. G.M.52:214. H.F.II.7:71. AA. Plant weak and usually trailing, the branches slender and not succulent: Ivs. thick or fleshy and glossy, lobed, mostly marginally peltate: infl. umbellate; good stamens 7, 2 upper shorter; petals unequal. (Dibrdchya.) IVY-LEAVED GERANIUMS. 7. peltatum, Ait. (Geranium peltdtum, Linn.). Fig. 2839. Plant with slender-jointed more or less zigzag angled sts. which are glabrous or very nearly so (except at the top): Ivs. glabrous or minutely pubescent, fleshy, the petiole inserted just inside the margin at the base, about 5-nerved and with 5 short wide mostly obtuse main lobes and often with smaller minor lobes or angles and notches, the margins very entire: peduncle very long, originally 4-8-fld., but now bearing many greatly modified fls., the calyx-tube slender and stalk-like, often longer than the pedicel and 2-3 times longer than the pointed nerved and mostly ciliate lobes ; petals twice as long as calyx-lobes, red to white or purplish, the 2 upper ones erect and purple-blotched or striped, the 3 lower ones usually smaller and not marked and separated from the upper as if the fl. were 2-lipped. B.M. 20. — Parent of the ivy-leaved geraniums, now much unproved and varied. Prized for baskets. There are forms with double fls. and colors of various kinds. It is a most desirable plant and very floriferous in most of the garden sorts. In the wild there are the following forms: Var. glabrum, Harv. Calyx and foliage gla- brous: fls. purplish pink. Var. scuta turn, Harv. (P. scutdtum, Sweet). Calyx villous: Ivs. glabrous. Var. clypeatum, Harv. (P. clypedtum, Steud.). Calyx and Ivs. soft-pubescent. P. lateripes, L'Her. (P. hederse- fdlium, Salisb.), has Ivs. cordate, not peltate. AAA. Plant woody or herbaceous, with slender sts.: Ivs. very long-petioled, palmately 5-7-nerved, lobed or cut; stipules free, ovate or lanceolate: petals unequal, the two upper ones broad; fertile stamens 7, unequal. (Eumorpha.) 8. grandifldrum, Willd. Shrubby, glabrous and glaucous: Ivs. long-stalked, strongly 3-7-nerved from the top of the petiole, deeply 5-7-lobed, the lobes broad &enmium,j{fri& aricrtjccru.fvliu cucuttaJis 2844. Pelargonium angulosum. From Dillenius' figure in 1732. (One-half the size of the original plate.) No. 20. PELARGONIUM PELARGONIUM 2531 and sharp-toothed, the stipules ovate and mucronate: fls. about 3 on each peduncle, the stalk-like calyx-tube 3-4 times as long as the lanceolate segms., the obovate white petals (upper 2 with red lines) 3 times as long as calyx-segms. — A handsome and distinct species, probably not now in cult, in its pure form. Intro, to England in 1794. 9. multibracteatum, H o c h s t . Somewhat shrubby below, 1-2 ft., thinly hairy but be- coming glabrous: Ivs. palmately about 7-cut or -lobed, the segms. broadly oblong or ovate, serrate or cre- nate, more or less hairy , 2-5 in. across; stipules about Hin. long, ovate to elliptic.: peduncles long, 6 in. to 1 ft., bearing 6-10-fld. um- bels; fls. whitish or white, on pedicels about 1^ in. long; petals obovate -spatu- late, entire, twice longer than the narrow sepals. Trop. Afr. G. M. 54: 628. 10. transvaalense, Knuth (P.Thorncroftii, Hort.). Erect, 16 in. to 2 ft. in bloom, the st. terete and soft-hairy, sparingly branched : Ivs. few, cordate-angu- lar in outline, 5-7- lobed, the lobes tri- angular or rhomboid, serrate-dentate, the petiole as long as blade or longer; stipules broadly ovate, acute: umbels many, corym- bose at apex of st.; fls. nearly Sessile, rose- 284S. Domesticum pelargonium, colored or carmine- one of the Show or Lady Washing- rose, or pale pink, 1% ton pelargoniums (X^). No. 21. in. across vertically, the 2 larger petals strongly narrowed at base and emarginate at top, the 3 smaller ones paler and retuse or emarginate. Transvaal, 3,000 ft. altitude. G.C. III. 55:103. AAAA. Plant with thick succulent branches, and strong fishy odor, shrubby in the wild and in warm coun- tries: Ivs. obovate, orbicular or reniform, shal- lowly if at all lobed: infl. umbel-like; good stamens 7, the 2 upper ones short; petals typically all of one color. (Ciconium.) FISH or BEDDING GERANIUMS. 11. zonale, Willd. (Geranium zonale, Linn.). ZONAL or HORSESHOE GERANIUM. Shrubby, becoming woody at the base even in pots, the young branches succulent and somewhat hispid: Ivs. round-cordate, glabrous or pubescent, long-stalked, usually with a zone or horse- shoe mark of deeper color on the upper surface, the margin crenate-dentate, with several very shallow rounded lobes; stipules broad, cordate-oblong: pedun- cles long, the many fls. nearly sessile; calyx-tube gla- brous or nearly so, 4-5 times longer than the lanceolate segms.; petals separated, narrow-wedge shape or spatulate. — S. Afr., "among shrubs and on hillsides. . . . The fls. vary from scarlet and crimson through all shades of red to pure white." — Harvey. Probably originally red. P. zonale was intro. into England in 1710. Linnaeus described it in 1753 as Geranium zonale, founding the species on previous descriptions, not on specimens. It is probable that the species had been considerably modified by domestication when Linnaeus wrote. There seems to be no accepted early portrait of the original form of the plant. 12. inquinans, Ait. (Geranium inquinans, Linn.). FISH GERANIUM. Fig. 2836. Plant more velvety than P. zonale, sometimes more or less viscid, the Ivs. not zoned: Ivs. long-petioled, orbicular-reniform, crenate, only obscurely many-lobed, velvety and somewhat viscid: calyx-tube densely glandular and viscid, 3-4 tunes longer than the lanceolate segms. ; petals broadly obovate, scarlet, but now varying to lighter colors. — "Among shrubs and on hillsides." This is the Geranium inquinans of Linnaeus, who founded the species on pre- vious descriptions. One of the descriptions '-, (Dillenius, in "Hortus Elthamensis," 1732) was accompanied by a picture, and this pic- ture, reduced, is reproduced in Fig. 2836. It will be seen that even in that early day the species had varied into a form with short- notched petals and short pedicels. Intro, into England in 1714. Said by Harvey (1859-60) to be the parent of most of the "scarlet geraniums" of English gardens. 13. hortSrum class. COMMON FISH or BEDDING GERANIUM. Fig. 2840. The com- mon geranium in great numbers of forms, derived from the variation and probably J the blending of P. zonale and P. inquinans (and possibly others) in more than a cen- tury of careful selection. The original species are not now in cult. Practically all garden geraniums have the zonal marks on the Ivs., or bands, or a cen- tral blotch of variegation. Some of them have inter- mingled colors of green, white, and red on the same If. Some are "silver-banded" and some "gold-banded." (See Fig. 2840.) AAAAA. Plant with a short and thick more or less fleshy st. or caudex, from which arise slender branches, the Ivs. long-stalked and reniform or cordate and obscurely lobed: stamens 6 or 7. (Cortusina.} B. With spine-like stipules. 14. echinatum, Curt. Fleshy caudex armed with persistent spine-like stipules: Ivs. long-petioled, white- tomentose, cordate-ovate and obtuse, about 3-7-shal- low-lobed, the lobes rounded and crenulate: peduncle long and branched; fls. white, with a spot near the center (varying to all purple), the petals notched ; calyx downy, the tube several tunes longer than the lobes. B.M. 309. G.C. III. 46:245. J.H. III. 49:71. G.W. 15, p. 203. — Now and then advertised. The fls. are said to change color during the day; and the color may be shades of purple. It is offered in S. Calif. BB. Without spines. 15. odoratissimum, Ait. (Geranium odoratissimumt Linn.). NUTMEG GERANIUM. Fig. 2841. Plant lax, the sts. ascending or more or less tortuose: st. or caudex very short, throwing up many slender and weak soft- pubescent branches: Ivs. very long-stalked, soft, round- cordate and very obtuse, the blade 1 in. or somewhat more in length and broader, obscurely 3- or more-lobed. the margins dentate-crenate; petioles 3-4 in. long and shorter above; stipules triquetrous or broadly ovate, usually connate : peduncles long and borne opposite the Ivs., 5-10-fld.; fls. pedicelled, white or whitish; calyx more or less pubescent, the spur Mjn- or less l°nS» the sepals or lobes lanceolate, acute, with membranaceous margins; petals twice or less longer than calyx-lobes, about ^in. long, linear-spatulate, rounded at apex. — 2532 PELARGONIUM PELARGONIUM Apparently a common plant., cult, for its pleasant- scented foliage. The plant known to gardeners as P. fragrans is either this species or a close derivative from it. Harvey refers P. fragrans, Willd., to P. exstipulatum; but Knuth separates it as follows: 16. fragrans, Willd. (P. odoratissimum x P. exstipu- latum, Sweet. Geranium fragrans, Poir. G. odoratis- simum erectum, Andr.). Plant strict, the branches more or less erect: scarcely suffruticose, the sts. more or less squarrose-branched, leafy: If .-blade to 1 in. long and nearly as wide, obtuse-cordate, the margin crenate or crisped, pubescent, the upper Ivs. sessile and the lower long-petioled; stipules triquetrous, free: fls. nearly sessile, whitish, and more or less red-veined; calyx Eubescent, the spur J^-Kin. long; sepals or calyx-lobes mceolate or ovate-lanceolate, acute; petals twice or more longer than calyx-lobes, about Km- long) much narrowed at base, the apex rounded. AAAAAA. Plant woody, not succulent, much branched, the foliage often scented but not "fishy:" Ivs. various, but not pinnately parted: infl. paniculate or umbel- like; 2 upper petals longer and broader than the others, marked; good stamens 7 or 6. (Peldrgium.) B. Lvs. not distinctly lobed, though often angled, mostly oval or ovate and cordate (exceptions in P. domesti- cum). 17. betulinum, Ait. (Geranium betullnum, Linn.). Erect and shrubby, downy on the young growths: Ivs. eubglabrous, stalked, oval or ovate, obtuse or not prominently acute, rounded or truncate at base, the stipules sharp and deciduous: fls. light purple, the broad upper petals with dark streaks; petals 2-3 times longer than lanceolate sepals, nearly equal, 1 in. or more long, cuneate-obovate, rounded and entire at apex. B.M. 148. — A handsome and neat plant. 18. cordatum, L'Her. Figs. 2842, 2843. Shrubby and erect, villous or nearly glabrous: Ivs. long-stalked, cordate-acute, denticulate and sometimes obscurely lobed; stipules with broad base but subulate, deciduous: peduncles usually branched, the pedicels and calyx soft-hairy; fls. purplish, the petals twice as long as the sepals, the two larger nearly or quite 1 in. long, cune- ate-obovate, the apex rounded and entire. B.M. 165 (as P. cordifolium) . G.M. 54:627. — Distinguished from P. cucullatum by its flat cordate acute Ivs. It is a hand- some plant in bloom. The plant in cult, as P. cordatum (Fig. 2843), has Ivs. more truncate at the base than the descriptions and old pictures call for, although on some shoots the Ivs. may be typically cordate. In the wild, the plant runs into several forms, distinguished largely by pubescence. 19. cucullatum, Ait. (Geranium cucullatum, Linn.). Tall and shrubby plant, much branched, softly and densely villous: Ivs. long- stalked, kidney - shaped and cupped or cucullate, denticulate, very soft- pubescent, the stipules ovate-acute and wither- ing: fls. red or reddish, in many-fld. panicles, the pedicels and calices densely silky-hairy, the petals twice as long as the lance -acuminate 2847. Forms of leaf of Pelargonium graveolens ( X 1A). No. 26. 2846. Pelargonium quercifolium. Leaves often more deeply lobed (X1A). No. 25. sepals, the two larger ones about 1 in. long and broad, rounded or retuse at apex, red with darker veins. — "Very common round Capetown and in the western districts, where it is often used as an ornamental hedge- plant." — Harvey. Known in England from 1690, and the parent, with P. angulosum and probably others, of the fancy or show pelargoniums of gardeners. Proba- bly not known in cult, in its pure or original form. 20. anguldsum, Ait. (Geranium angulosum, Mill.). Fig. 2844. Differs from P. cucullatum in its harsh-hairy covering and rigid angled Ivs.: the Ivs. are short- stalked, truncate or broadly cuneate at base, with 3-5 shallow angular and acute short rigid lobes: panicles with fewer-fld. umbels; pedicels and calices densely rough-hairy; petals twice as long as the acuminate sepals. — Linnaeus included this plant in his Geranium cucullatum, but Aiton separated it as a distinct species. Linnaeus' cucullatum was founded on literature. One of his sources of information was Dillenius' "Hprtus Elthamensis," with a picture; but this picture, which is reduced in Fig. 2844, is what is now known as P. angu- losum. This is one of the species which has entered largely into the pelargoniums of florists. Has been cult, since 1724. 21. domesticum class. COMMON, SHOW, FANCY, and LADY WASHINGTON GERANIUMS (or PELARGONIUMS). Fig. 2845. This name distinguishes the garden type of florist's and fancy pelargonium. The race is said to be derived chiefly from P. cucullatum, P. angulosum, and P. grandiflorum, but the writer can see little evidence of the blood of P. grandiflorum. It seems to be near- est to P. cucullatum, having the cucullate or disk- shaped not lobed Ivs. and mostly the soft-hairiness of that species. In many of them, however, the Ivs. are distinctly angle-lobed, suggesting P. angulosum. P. domesticum is meant to comprise the whole range of garden forms of the Show or Lady Washington pelar- goniums. The name will enable one to talk about these garden plants with precision. To many of these garden forms specific botanical names have been given, so that PELARGONIUM PELARGONIUM 2533 P. domesticum is not the first name that has been applied in this group, but the writer is not aware that any col- lective or group name has been given. Sweet, in particu- lar, has given Latin names to various forms. These old names, however, apply to particular historical forms, and it would be violence to enlarge their application to cover the entire group, and it would be difficult to choose any one of them as more applicable, under botanical rules, than others. It is probably also inaccu- rate to call this garden form either P. cucuttatum or P. angulosum. BB. Lvs. cordaie-ldbed, soft and velvety. 22. tomentdsum, Jacq. Plant rather thick- and soft- stemmed, the branches becoming several feet long, white-hairy all over: Ivs. very long - stalked, very broadly cordate -ovate or hastate - cordate at base, 3-5-7-lobed and small- toothed, soft and velvety on both surfaces; stipules ovate-acuminate, withering: fls. small, white, with red near the center, in a lax panicle, the pedicels many times longer than calyx-tube; 3 lower petals longer than sepals. B.M. 518. — Scent like peppermint, and for that reason it is somewhat grown. The sts. are long and straggly. 2848. Pelargonium Radula. BBB. Lvs. sharply 3-7-lobed and sharply toothed or serrate. 23. capitatum, Ait. (P. Drummondii, Turcz. Gera- nium capitatum, Linn.). Sts. weak and trailing, but suffruticose at base, with long white hairs: Ivs. long- stalked, cordate, 3-5-lobed and the lobe rounded and toothed; stipules broad-cordate, pointed: peduncles longer than the Ivs., densely many-fld., the fls. sessile, rose-purple, with calyx-tube much shorter than the hairy mucronate calyx-lobes. B.M. 7346. — Plant rose-scented, but not in general cult, in its pure form; fls. in dense many- fld. heads. 24. vitifdlium, Ait. (Geranium viti- folium , Linn.) . Erect, more or less woody, densely hairy and villous: Ivs. long- petioled, cordate at base, 3-lobed, the lobes shallow and very obtuse and rounded, dentate; stipules broad-cordate: peduncle longer than If., simple and densely many-fld. ; fls. sessile, small, pur- ple; calyx-tube not half so long as the hairy aristate segms. ; petals twice longer than sepals, 2 of them larger and purple at base and the other 3 smaller and unicolored. — Differs from P. capitatum in erect habit and Ivs. less deeply cut. BBBB. Lvs. deeply several to many-lobed, with narrow divisions, rather rough or stiff, strong-scented. ROSE GERANIUMS. 25. quercifolium, Ait. (Geranium quercifdlium, Linn. f.). OAK-LEAVED GERANIUM. SCARLET-FLOWER- ING ROSE GERANIUM. Fig. 2846. Shrubby and branchy, somewhat hairy and glandular: Ivs. with stalks 2-4 in. long, cordate-ovate in outline, with 2-3 pairs of oblong side lobes (Ivs. pinnatifid), which extend nearly to the midrib and are again toothed and notched; stipules small, 2 pairs at each node (or bifid) : fls. few to several, rather small, red or purplish, in umbels and with short pedicels, the bracts laciniate; sepals elliptical and mucronate, half as long as the petals. — A rather com- mon greenhouse plant, the Ivs. often with a dark spot, and not agreeably scented. 26. graveolens, L'Her. (Geranium 0rai>eokns,Thunb.) . Fig. 2847. Much like the last, but Ivs. longer-petioled and palmately 5-7-lobed or parted, the broad lobes flat and pinnatifid into many mostly obtuse lobes; stipules cordate-acute: fls. many, on mostly long pedun- cles, pink or light purple, small, the calyx hairy and nearly sessile, the calyx-lobes half as long as the petals. — This is one of the commonest forms of rose geranium, a leafy plant with a rather heavy balsamic odor. A If. is well depicted in Fig. 2847. There are many derivatives from it. 27. hispidum, Willd. (Geranium hispidum, Linn. f.). Woody at base but herbaceous upward, 2-3 ft., much branched, hairy and glandular: Ivs. long-stalked, hispid on both surfaces, 4-5 in. across, 5-7-lobed, the lobes acuminate and unequally sharp-toothed and more or less lobulate; stipules cuspidate: fls. panicled, small, white to carmine; calyx-tube shorter than pedicels, the segms. lance-acuminate; petals about twice longer than sepals. — An old cult, plant. 28. Ridula, L'Her. (P. muUifidum, Salisb. Geranium Radula, Cav. G. revolutum, Jacq. f .) . Fig. 2848. Differs from P. graveolens in the narrower divisions with revo- lute margins of the Ivs.: the Ivs. are deeply palmately parted, the lobes narrow linear and pinnatifid, all rough-hispid on the upper surface and soft-pubescent beneath: fls. small, pale purple, with dark streaks, the peduncles short and hispid and about 4-5-fld., fls. pedi- cellate; calyx-tube short, the lobes or sepals setose and glandular. B.M. 95. — Does not appear to be in the trade in a pure form, but the narrow-lvd. rose geraniums are probably hybrids between this and P. graveolens. 29. denticulatum, Jacq. (Geranium denticulatum, Poir.). Fig. 2849. Much like P. Radula, but the lf.- lobes very denticulate and flat: Ivs. gla- brous and viscid above, somewhat hispid beneath; stipules ovate-lanceolate: fls. 3—4, subsessile, on short hairy peduncles, lilac or rose-purple, the 2 upper petals toothed or 2-lobed and with dark streaks; calyx - tube short, the segms. or lobes oblong, mucronate and villous. — Plant weaker than P. Radula. It has a bal- samic odor. Perhaps it has entered into the garden forms of rose geranium. Intro, into England in 1789. BBBBB. Lvs. smatt, round-cordate, 3-lobed half their depth and the margins toothed or jagged. 30. crispum, L'Her. Much branched and very scabrous or rough, shrubby, glandular: Ivs. 2-ranked, small and rigid, short - stalked, cuneate, truncate or slightly cordate at base, coarsely toothed, more or less 3-lobed: fls. 2-3 on short peduncles, violet, the lower petals nar- row; calyx-tube glandular and roughish, shorter than the pedicels, the lobes or sepals oblong and acuminate. — A neat strict-growing plant with lemon-scented 2849 Pelargon- foliage. Probably not in genera) cult, ium denticulatum. n9w m a pure form. Variable in the wild. Var. latifdlium, Harv., Figs. 2850, 2534 PELARGONIUM PELLvEA 2851, has Ivs. twice the size of the type, and is a worthy plant. 31. Limdneum, Sweet. LEMON GERANIUM. Lvs. larger than in the last, not 2-ranked, soft: fls. purple and lilac. — A garden hybrid, P. crispum probably being one of its parents. There is a form with variegated Ivs. Sometimes known to garden- ers as P. odoratum. It is a neat and worthy plant, and showy when in flower. It has a lemon or balm scent. The variety known as Lady Mary is of this group. 2850. Pelargonium crispum var. latifolium. ( X H) 2851. Pelargonium crispum var. latifolium. A lower leaf. (X1A) Any number of Latin-formed names of Pelargonium may appear in the trade, for the hybrids and varieties are numerous and not always readily referable to the species as forms or varieties. — P. Blandfordianum, Sweet (P. graveolens X P. echinatum). A good grower, shrubby, the branches roughish pubescent: Ivs. flat, 7- lobed, the lower lobes deeply lobed again, all bluntly toothed, strong-scented: fls. white or pale blush, the upper petals with 2 red spots. G.M. 54:626.— P. brevipetalum, N. E. Br.=P. polycephalum. — P. Cotyled6nis, L'Her. Lvs. evergreen, at base of plant, cordate, 3 in. across, entire or nearly so, whitish beneath, wrinkled above: fls. on scape-like peduncles above the Ivs., J£in. across, white. St. Helena. Requires little heat. G. 35:235. — P. insequilobum, Mast. Allied to P. multibracteatum. Pilose: Ivs. 3-lobed, the terminal lobe ovate-lanceolate and again lobed in middle, margins toothed: fls. greenish yellow with purple in base. Trop. Afr. Perhaps same as P. Fischeri, Engl. — P. luteolum, N. E. Br. A very recent species from S. Afr.: herb with bulbous root- stock: Ivs. 4 or 5, all radical, twice ternately divided, Yr^A in. long and broad, the ultimate segms. linear: petals nearly Hin. long, pale yellow with 2 red lines at base. — P. polycephalum, E. Mey. (P. brevipetalum, N. E. Br.). St. thick and fleshy, ovoid, rising very little above the ground, short-branched at top : Ivs. in a rosette, bipinnately divided, ovate-oblong in outline, thick and fleshy; pinnae 5 or 6 pairs, pinnatisect: fls. pale yellow, the petals shorter than sepals. Cape Colony. — P. rdseum, Hort., is a name of no botanical standing, applied to some of the common forms of rose geranium of the P. Radula group. L H B PELEC^PHORA (Greek, hatchet-bearing; from an alleged resemblance in the tubercles). Cactacese. HATCHET CACTUS. Two species closely allied to Mammillaria; sometimes seen in cactus collections. Stems globular, short-cylindric or clavate, small, often cespitose : tubercles strongly compressed from the sides; areoles very long and narrow, bordered on each side by a row of about 20 very short, appressed comb- like spines: fr. naked. aselliformis, Ehrb. (from a fancied resemblance to Asellus, the wood-louse). Juice watery: tubercles ashy green, more or less deeply grooved to the woolly axil; spines not projecting beyond the margin of areole: fls. purple with paler sepals : fr. near the center, red. Nuevo Leon and San Luis Potosi, Mex. I.H. 5:186. Var. concolor has pure purple fls. B.M. 6061. pectinate, Schum. Juice milky: tubercles bright green with naked axils; spines projecting a little beyond the margin of tubercle: fls. yellow, lateral. Oaxaca, Mex. KATHARINE BRANDEGEE. PELIOSANTHES (Greek, livid flowers, referring to the flowers of certain species). Liliacese. Plants with short horizontal rhizomes, long-petioled radical Ivs. and fls. borne in spikes or simple racemes: perianth- tube above the ovary, short, broad, campanulate; limb spreading-rotate with 6 subequal, broad, obtuse lobes; stamens 6 with very short filaments; ovary inferior, 3- celled; stigma 3-lobed; cells with 2 ovules erect from the base, anatropous; seeds oblong or globose, fleshy. About 12 species from India, the E. Indies, and Ma- layan Peninsula. The following have occasionally appeared in cult: P. Teta, Andr. Lvs. 2-7; petiole varia- ble in length: scape naked or with a few scales above and large membranous sheaths at the base; raceme 6- 12 in.; bracts 1-3 to every fascicle of fls., pedicels short; fls. J^-J^in. diam., purplish or bluish green: seeds as large as a pea, olive-blue. Himalaya, Malaya. B.M. 1302. The var. Mantegazziana, Pampanini, is a form with less rigid Ivs. than the type. Malaya. P. violacea, Wall., has the habit of P. Teta and fls. of the same size and color but solitary in the bracts: seeds %in. long, oblong. Himalaya, Burma. Var. Cldrkei, Baker, differs from the type in having more conspicu- ous transverse nervules and a darker purple fl. Assam and Malaya. B.M. 8276. Cult, in botanic gardens in the tropical house. F. TRACY HUBBARD. PELLflJA (Greek, pellos, dusky; from the usually dark-colored leaf -stalks) . Polypodiacese. Small rock- loving ferns thriving best on limestone rocks. Sori at the ends of free veins forming a mostly con- tinuous marginal band around the segms. and covered by the more or less changed margin of the segms. The species are perhaps 40 or more, widely scattered in many countries. Some of them are glasshouse subjects and others are hardy. A. Lvs. simply pinnate. B. Lfts. 4~5 pairs. Pringlei, Dav. Lvs. with 4-5 pairs of large triangular hastate stalked Ifts. 1 in. or more across either way: sorus forming a wide marginal band. Mex. BB. Lfts. 5-8 pairs. Bridgesii, Hook. (Platyldma Bridgesii, J. Smith). Lfts. subsessile, orbicular or subcordate, 4-5 lines long: sori confluent in a broad intramarginal band. Calif. BBB. Lfts. 20-40. rotundifdlia, Hook. Fig. 2852. Lfts. mostly short- stalked, oblong or roundish, entire, obtuse. New Zeal. falcata, Fee (Platyldma falcatum, J. Smith). Lfts. nearly sessile, lanceolate or lanceolate-oblong, mucro- nate and often slightly falcate : sori in broad lines. India to Austral, and New Zeal. 2852. Pellaa rotundifolia. PELL^A PELORIA 2535 AA. Lvs. bipinnaie. B. Pinnae formed of 3 sessile Ifts. ternifdlia, Lank. Lvs. 6-12 in. long on strong dark chestnut stalks, narrow, with 6-12 opposite pairs of pinnae; Ifts. closely rolled together, linear. Trop. Amer. BB. Pinnae (at least the lower ones) of more than 3 Ifts. mucronata, Eaton (P. Wrightiana, Hook.). Lvs. 3-6 in. long, 1-3 in. wide, deltoid; pinnae with several linear-oblong pinnules on each side Hin. long, with inrolled edges and a sharp mucronate point. Texas to Calif. atropurpurea, Link. Lvs. 4-12 in. long, 2-6 in. wide, lanceolate to ovate-lanceolate, with several pinnules which are sessile, auricled or heart-shaped at the base, the broad line of sporangia nearly hiding the narrow marginal indusium. E. Amer., to the Rocky Mts. 2853. Pelltea viridis. A good greenhouse fern, likely to be known to gardeners as P. hastata. AAA. Lvs. at least tripinnatifid. B. The Ivs. triangular-deltoid, with narrow ultimate divisions. densa, Hook. CLIFF BRAKE. Lvs. 2-3 in. long, 1-1; f 2 in- wide, on slender brown stalks; segms. linear with inrolled edges sharp-pointed: indusium perma- nently covering the sori. Pacific N. Amer., and east- ward to Wyo. BB. The Ivs. elongate, ovate, or lanceolate. andromedaefolia. Fee. Lvs. 6-12 in. long, 3-6 in. wide; ultimate divisions l^y-2 lines long, linear-oblong, with inrolled edges. Calif. — Sometimes known as the coffee fern. viridis, Prantl (P. hastata, Link). Fig. 2853. Lvs. 6-24 in. long, 6-12 in. wide; ultimate divisions ovate or lanceolate, 1-2 in. long, nearly sessile: sori hi a nar- row marginal line. E. and S. Afr. Small Ivs. are some- times only bipinnate. Very commonly used in small ferneries. P. SteUeri, Beddome (P. gracilis, Hook.), a rare membranous species of the eastern states, is more closely allied to the genus Cryptogramma, to which Prantl has referred it, L. M. UNDERWOOD. 161 2854. Toad-flax— Linaria. Showing normal flowers above and an abnormal or peloric flower beneath. PELLIONIA (J. Alphonse Pellion, officer in Frey- cinet's voyage around the world). Urticaces. Two choice tender creeping foliage plants of this genus are cultivated, suitable for baskets and for the borders of greenhouses under the benches. Herbs, often creepers, rarely subshrubs from Trpp. and E. Asia and the Pacific Isls. : Ivs. alternate, 2-ranked, unequal at the base, entire or serrate: fls. monoecious or dioecious, mostly in dense cymes; perianth - segms. 5, rarely 4, in fr. sometimes unchanged but usually in- creased and investing the fr. —Species 1^20. The cult, species require warm tem- perature and moist atmos- phere. Prop, by cuttings and division. One of the species was once advertised as a Peperomia. Daveauana, N. E. Br. Pros- trate, 1-2 ft. long, the sts. succulent and creeping below, the tips pubescent: Ivs. 1-2 % in. long, sessile, obliquely oblong or orbicular, crenate and obtuse at tip, dark bronzy olive- green more or less flushed violet or red, with a fern-like figure of light green down the middle of the If., the figure being narrowly oblong and crenate. This figure is sometimes absent from some of the Ivs. The Ivs. are more acuminate than in the next. Burma to Cochin-China. R.H. 1880:290 (as Begonia Daveauana, a charming picture). I.H. 29:472. pulchra, N. E. Br. Practically glabrous, with creep- ing fleshy sts. tinged purplish: Ivs. obliquely oblong and very obtuse, dull blackish along the midrib and veins, the inter-spaces being light green, the under surface pale purplish. Cochin-China. I.H. 30:479. A.G. 15:4. WILHELM MILLER. L. H. B.t PELORIA (Greek for monster). A term applied to the phenomenon when usually irregular flowers, such as those with some of the petals or sepals spurred or saccate, de- velop all the parts of each set alike, thus becoming radially sym- metrical. The case was observed by Linnaeus in Linaria vulgaris, Fig. 2854, and the term peloria was given by him. Flowers of ten be- come peloric on account of changes in their relations to light, but other causes certainly contribute. A reverse change, by which radial flowers become zygo- morphic, occurs in many Composite when the corollas of disk- florets become strap- shaped, as in the culti- vated asters and chry- santhemums. Some- times, on the contrary, 2855. Normal columbine flower, all spurs fail to develop. with spurs present. 2536 PELORIA PENNISETUM 2856. Peloria. — Lack of spurs in the columbine. (Compare Fig. 2855.) (Figs. 2855, 2856.) Peloric forms have been of little significance in horticulture. See Keeble, Pellew and Jones on inheritance of peloria in foxgloves, "New Phytologist," Vol. IX, page 68 (1910). PELTANDRA (Greek, referring to the peltate anthers). Aracex. ARROW ARUM. Stemless herbs, being excellent subaquatic plants, their large thick sagittate leaves always adding variety and interest to margins of ponds and to bog-gardens. Leaves glossy, arrow-shaped, arising from strong under- ground parts: fls. monoecious and naked, the staminate ones on the upper part of the long spadix, the anthers sessile and imbedded and opening by terminal pores, the 1-loculed ovaries attended by 4 or 5 scale- like bodies or staminodia: spathe usually exceeding the spadix: fr. a 1- 3-seeded, mostly leathery berry, borne in large globose clusters. — Two species in E. Amer. which have been much confused. Single specimens or clumps are usually most prized. Peltandras are easy to colonize. virginica, Kunth (P. undulata, Raf.). Lvs. narrow- sagittate, the basal lobes long and nearly or quite acute: spathe 4-8 in. long, green, convolute around the spadix for its whole length; sterile part of the spadix much longer than the pistillate part: fr. green, 1-3- seeded. In shallow pools or bog margins, New Eng- land to Fla. and west. A.G. 14:111. — The root is com- posed of thick cords or fibers. sagittaefdlia, Morong (P. dlba, Raf.). Lvs. broader the basal lobes short: spathe white, the upper part expanded and calla-like; sterile part of spadix little, if any, longer than pistillate part: fr. red, 1-seeded. Va., south. — Root tuberous. L, jj, g_ PELTARIA (Greek, small shield, referring to the roundish form of the pod). Crudferse. Tall glabrous herbs with entire cauline Ivs., sagittate-cordate at base: fls. white, subcorymbose; fruiting pedicels spread- ing or recurved, filiform, without bracts; sepals broad; stamens free, not toothed: silique orbiculate or obo- vate, 1-celled, indehiscent, much compressed, reticu- late. About 4 species, natives of S. Eu., Asia Minor, Syria, and Persia. P. alliacea, Jacq. About 1 ft. high, with entire petals, smooth flat pods, and sagittate- clasping Ivs. This species has the odor of garlic, as its name would suggest. E. Eu. Offered in the trade as a cut-fl. R.H. 1908, p. 131. PELTIPHfLLUM: Saxifraga. PELTOPHORUM (Greek, shield and bearing, refer- ring to the peculiar stigma). Leguminosse. A few spe- cies of splendid tropical trees, belonging to the same tribe as the gorgeous Poinciana and Caesalpinia. Flowers yellow; petals 5, roundish; stamens 10, free, declinate; filaments pilose at base; ovary sessile, 2- to many-ovuled: pod flattish, indehiscent, with narrowly winged margins. Peltophorum is distinguished from Csesalpinia and Poinciana by the valvate calyx-segms. of the latter, while the two former have their calyx- segms. strongly imbricated. The peculiar stigma of Peltophorum readily distinguishes it from its close allies, Caesalpinia and Hasmatoxylon (logwood). These genera represent a type of structure widely different from the northern pea-shaped fls., as they have 5 dis- tinct petals which are all about the same size and shape. There is a fine colored plate of a Peltophorum in Bfanco's "Flora of the Philippines," where the golden fls. are nearly 1J^ in. across, a dozen of them in each raceme, and 4 racemes uniting to form a great panicle. Peltophorums have the Mimosa type of foliage. Each If . of P. inerme has 8-10 pairs of pinnae, and each pinna 10-20 pairs of Ifts. The generic name is pre- occupied by Peltophorus, a genus of grasses, and is consequently replaced by some recent authors by the name Baryxylum. A. Lfts. %-%in. long, 10-20-pinnate. inerme, Naves (Csesalpinia inermis, Rqxbg. P. fer- rugineum, Benth. Baryxylum inerme, Pierre). Tree, attaining 100 ft., taking its specific name from the dense rusty tomentum which covers the young branches, petioles, and infl. : Ivs. 8-10-pinnate, oblong, obtuse or retuse, oblique at the base, M~/4in. long, shining above, rusty tomentose beneath: racemes 5-6 in. long, in a large terminal panicle; calyx about %m. long; petals obovate, undulate, villous at the base: pod 3-4 in. long, %-l in. wide, 1-3-seeded. Austral., Philippines. — Intro, at Santa Barbara, Calif., by Franceschi, but has not been a success there. AA. Lfts. YrYfan- long, 20-80-pinnaie. dubium, Taub. (Csesalpinia dubia, Spreng. P. Vogelianum, Walp. Baryxylum dubium, Pierre). A large beautiful tree with rusty tomentose branches, petioles, and infl.: Ivs. 9-18 in. long, 12-20-pinnate, 2-4 in. broad; Ifts. 20-30-pinnate, oblique, oblong, obtuse, symmetrical or base unequal, M-Mm- l°ng> minutely rusty tomentose beneath, becoming glabrate: infl. a broad terminal panicle; fls. in simple or branched racemes; pedicels M~/^m- long; calyx-tube very short, turbinate; petals broadly obovate, M~Mm- long, margin wrinkled; very short-stalked, rusty tomentose: pod 3 in. long, %in. broad, acute at both ends, 2-seeded. Brazil. p. L. RICKER. PENIOCEREUS (Latin combination, meaning phal- loid Cereus). Cactacese, Low slender erect plants, grow- ing from very large fleshy turnip-shaped roots: sts. usually 4- or 5-ribbed: fls. large, nocturnal, usually white: fr. ovoid, long-acuminate, bright scarlet, edible. Greggii, Brit. & Rose (Cereus Greggii, Engelm.). Slender, branching, 2-3 ft. high, %-l in. diam., from an extraordinarily large tuberous root (often 6-10 in. long and 4-6 in. diam.) : ribs 3-6, acute; spines subulate from bulbous base, very short and sharp, 7-11, 1 or 2 being central: fls. white or yellowish, 6-8 in. long: fr. ovate, alternate at base and apex, bright scarlet, fleshy and edible, 1-2 in. long. Borders of Texas, New Mex., Ariz., and southward. j. N. ROSE. PENNISETUM (Latin, penna, feather; seta, bristle). Graminese. Mostly stout grasses with bristly spike-like inflorescence, making conspicuous border and lawn plants. Spikelets as in Panicum, but surrounded by several bristles that fall with the spikelet. — Species about 40 in tropical regions, one species cult, for fodder, some of the others for ornament. The plumy grass known to gardeners as P. longisty- lum is much used for bedding. It is, perhaps, the finest dwarf grass which is grown chiefly for its flower parts. It sometimes survives the winter at Washing- ton, D. C., but should always be treated as a tender PEXXISETUM PENNYROYAL 2537 subject. Plants raised every year from seed are satis- factory if seed is sown early enough, but divisions of old plants will give larger pieces which flower sooner and require less attention than seedlings. The old plants may be wintered anywhere out of reach of frost. About February 1, in the latitude of Washington (a month later North), cut off the old leaves to within 6 inches of the crowns ; divide the clumps into small pieces, trim the roots so that they will ultimately go into 3^ or 4-inch pots, and place the pieces thickly together in boxes of sandy soil in a greenhouse with a temperature of about 60°. As soon as new roots have started, pot the young plants. The}- may be removed to a coldframe long before the soft bedding material demands all the avail- able indoor space. (G. W. Oliver.) A. Annual: bristles about as long as the spikdet. americanum, Schum. (Penicittaria spicata, Willd. Pennisetum typhoideum, Rich.). PEARL MILLET. Culm 3-8 ft., pubescent below the spike: Ivs. long and broad: spike cylindrical, 3-10 in. long, %in. thick, the globose grain bursting through its lemma and palea. Native country unknown. — Occasionally grown in the southern states, where it ripens seed. May be grown farther north for forage. A luxuriant annual, long cult, in the Old World for forage and more or less for the grain which is used as food. AA. Perennials: bristles much exceeding the spikdet. B. Bristles plumose. villdsum, Brown (P. longistlyum of florists, not of Hochst.). Fig. 2857. Spike broad, 2-4 in. long, and feathery from the bearded bristles; culm 1-2 ft. high, pubescent below the spike. Abyssinia. R.H. 1890, p. 489. Ruppelii, Steud. (P. Ruppdianum of some works). Fig. 2858. Culms taller and spikes 6-10 in., longer and more graceful than the preceding. Abyssinia. R.H. 1897, pp. 54, 55. I.H. 42, p. 206. G.W. 1:363.— The form most frequently cult, has a pale roseate spike. This is sold under the names P. atrosanguineum, P. hybridum Henkdianum, or CRIMSON FOUNTAIN GRASS. G.W. 13:255. R.B. 36, p. 58.— A half-hardy form with \ 2857. Pennisetum villosum. dark purplish foliage and purplish crim- son spikes has recently been intro. under the name of P. cupreum. It does not reproduce reliably from seed. BB. Bristles naked. c. Spikes several on each main culm, borne on short branches; one bristle in each duster much longer than the others. latifdlium, Spreng. (Gymndthrix latifdlia, Schult.). Culm 3-4 ft., bearing several nodding spikes 1-2 in. long: Ivs. lanceolate, J^in. broad. Argentina. R.H. 1890, p. 546. G.W. 3, p. 424; 6, p. 113. cc. Spikes single, terminating each main culm; bristles more or less equal. japonicum, Trin. (P. compressum, R. Br. Gymndthrix japonica, Kunth). Culm 2-3 ft., scabrous, especially under the dense cylindrical 2-3-in.-long spike: blades long and narrow. China. macrourum, Trin. (Gymndthrix caudata, Schrad.). Culms tall, bearing a slender spike as much as a foot long. S. Afr. macrostachyum, Trin. (Gymndthrix macrostdchys, Brongn.). Culms 4-5 ft., blades broad, flat; spike 8-12 in., resembling that of P. Ruppdii. E. Indies. — A half- hardy form with dark purplish foliage and handsome dark crimson spikes has recently been intro. under the name of P. macrophyttum atropurpureum. M.D.G. 1906:9. Does not reproduce reliably from seed. nervosum, Trin. Tall branching perennial with tawny or purplish compact spikes is offered by a western nursery. S. Amer. A. S. HITCHCOCK. PENNYROYAL of Europe, Mentha Pulegium; of America, Hedeoma pulegioides. Bastard P., or blue curls, is Trichostema dichotomum. All are members of the mint family. The garden pennyroyal, Mentha Pulegium, is a Euro- pean perennial, used for seasoning. It is one of the 2538 PENNYROYAL PENTAS "sweet herbs." It is easily grown, profiting by a win- ter protection of leaves or litter. Propagation is mostly by division. Beds should be renewed frequently. PENTACILETA (Greek, referring to five bristles at the base of the pappus). Composite. A few species of low slender- Calif ornian annuals with thread-like alternate Ivs. and small or medium-sized heads, the rays when present usually yellow, sometimes white: the disk-fls. sometimes turning purple. P. aurea, Nutt., growing 3-12 in. high and with 7-40 deep golden rays, was once offered and was pictured in Gt. 33:1153, but it has no horticultural standing. PENTAPETES (Greek, having five leaves; an ancient name of some cinquefoil, transferred by Linnaeus to this plant, which has five leafy growths (staminodes) accompanying the stamens; or perhaps to the 5-merous arrangement). Sterculiacese. A pretty red-flowered tender annual, widely distributed in tropical Asia, rare in gardens. Species one, P. phoenicea, Linn. Erect branched herb, nearly or quite glabrous, 3-5 ft. : Ivs. 3-5 in. long, hastate-lanceolate, 1-nerved, crenate-serrate; petiole 1 in. long; stipules awl-shaped: fls. red, about 1% in. across, opening at noon and closing early following morning; bractlets 3, caducous; sepals 5, lanceolate, connate at the base; petals 5; stamens 20, connate at the base, 15 fertile in 5 groups of 3 each, alternating with 5 staminodes which are nearly as long as the petals; ovary 5-celled; cells many-ovuled: caps, loculicidally 5- valved; seeds 8-12, in 2 series in each cell. B.R. 575. — An interesting plant for amateurs in the warmhouse or for cult, in the open in summer. Prop, by seeds and cuttings. L H. B. PENTAPTERfGIUM (Greek words, five and a small wing; alluding to the five-winged calyx). Ericaceae. Epiphytic shrubs, glabrous or strigose-hirsute, with alternate subsessile Ivs., rather large and scattered or small and sub-distichously clustered: fls. rather large, axillary, solitary or in few-fid, corymbs; calyx-tube turbinate or hemispherical, 5-winged; limb of 5 per- sistent leafy lobes; corolla tubular, 5-angled, with a limb of 5 suberect or recurved lobes; stamens 10; ovary 5-celled. About 6 species, 1 from the Malay Peninsula, the remainder from the temperate Himalayan region. Two species have been occasionally in cult. P. rugbsum, Hook. Fls. pendulous; corolla nearly white, beautifully marked between the 5 angles with purple or blood-red bands: Ivs. almost sessile, subcordate at base, very much wrinkled, lanceolate or ovate-lanceolate. Khasia Mts. B.M. 5198. G. 36:617. G.W. 2, p. 502. F. serpens, Klotzsch. Fls. numerous, axillary, hanging along the under side of the branches; calyx green, 5- angled; corolla bright red, with darker V-shaped marking: Ivs. small, lanceolate: sts. slender, drooping: rootstock large, tuberous. Himalayas. B.M. 6777. G.W. 13, p. 90. PENTARHAPHIA (Greek, five needles, referring to the form of the open calyx) . Gesnerioceae. Shrubs or subshrubs, one or two of which are grown under glass for the fls. This genus is most commonly treated as a section of the genus Gesneria, but is considered dis- tinct by some. The principal characters of the section are the relatively bare branches, the 1- to several-fld. elongated peduncles borne in the If .-axils: fls. with a crooked cylindrical tube; stamens more or less long- exserted. At least 15 species, Mex., W. Indies, and S. Amer. F. floribtinda, Carr. Much of the material cult, under this name is referable to Gesneria libanensis (Vol. Ill, p. 1333), but some of it may be other species, as there appears to be more than one plant passing under this name. R.H. 1878:30. B.M. 4380. R.B. 25: 241. These portraits may not all represent the same plant. PENTAS (Greek, five, referring to the floral parts) Rubiacese. Tender herbs and subshrubs, resembling bouvardias and of the same family, grown under glass for the lilac or white bloom. Herbs or subshrubs, erect or prostrate, hispid or tomentose: Ivs. opposite, stalked, usually ovate or ovate-lanceolate; stipules multifid or multi-setose: infl. usually corymbose; calyx-lobes 4-6, unequal; corolla pilose, the long tube dilated and villous in the throat; lobes valvate; stamens 4-6, inserted below the throat; filaments short or long; anthers fixed at the back, included or exserted; disk tumid or annular, often produced into a cone after anthesis; ovary 2-loculed; ovules numerous; style-branches papillose: caps, mem- branous or leathery, 2-loculed, loculicidal; seeds minute. — There are about 30 known species in Trop. and S. Afr., including Madagascar. Only one is well known in cult., whose color varieties range through lilac and flesh-color to crimson-pink and rosy purple. A good cluster is 3 in. across and contains 20 or more fls., each of which is ^in. across. The fls. are about %in. long, funnel-shaped, and usually have 5 spreading lobes, sometimes 4 or 6. It is mostly grown like bouvardia in warm conservatories for winter bloom, but it is some- times used for bedding in warmer countries, as it gives 3 months of rather showy bloom when treated like lantana. In general, the species seem to be less worthy than bouvardias. The pentas may be propagated from February to the middle of April. Choose cuttings of half-matured wood and place in a warm propagating-bed; by keeping moist and shaded they will root. Before they have made too long roots, lift and transfer into small pots. They like a sandy open mixture, as of loam, peat, and sand in equal parts for the first potting. Place where they may have shade until well started, when they should have sun. In their growing season, which is from the end of January until autumn, they should have a temperature of 60° to 65° at night with 10° to 15° rise during the day with sun. Keep the young plants vigorous by giving larger pots until they are in 6- to 8-inch pots. For a compost give them fibrous loam four parts, fibry peat one part, well-decayed cow-manure one part, and enough sand to keep it open. Always give plenty of drainage in the pots, and pot moderately firm. In the spring and summer they will require plenty of water. In the hot days of summer give daily syringing, getting well under the foliage. As they grow, tie the branches out horizontally; they then will break away into a number of growths which will make headway for flowers in autumn. If they show bloom before this time, pinch the flowers out. When the pots become well supplied with roots, give liquid feed once a week. The flowers are very useful for cutting. The care in winter should require a lower temperature; they do well in 55° to 58° at night, with about 10° more with sunshine. Give enough water to keep them in good health and a good syringing now and then. After January, they may have any necessary repotting, such as renewing the old compost with a good rich material and growing on as treated the preceding spring and summer with the exception of cutting back the shoots well. (J. J. M. Fan-ell.) lanceolata, Schum. (Ophiorrhiza 'lanceolata, Forsk. F. cdrnea, Benth., under which name it is known to gardeners) . Erect or decumbent, 1-2 ft. high, shrubby at base, merely puberulous, not rusty-hairy: Ivs. 1-6 in. long, 4 lines to 2 in. broad, ovate, elliptic or lance- oblong, more or less acute, narrowed at base into a short petiole, the lateral veins many: cymes peduncled or not; fls. nearly sessile, to 1 in. long, dimorphic, naturally pale purple; corolla very hairy at throat. Trop. Afr., Arabia. B.M. 4086. B.R. 30:32. R.B. 21:217. Gn. 21, p. 329. J.H. III. 30:209; 52:417. G.W. 10, p. 378. Var. kermesina, Hort. Fls. carmine-rose, tinted violet in throat. R.H. 1870:130. Var. alba, Hort., has PENTAS PENTSTEMON 2539 white fls. G.W. 10, p. 611. Var. Quartiniana, Hort. (P. Quartiniana, Oliver) is a rosy-fld. variety said to be much better than the type. Gt. 45, p. 464. WlLHELM MlI^LER. L. H. B.f PENTLANDIA: Urceolina. PENTSTEMON (Greek for five stamens, all five stamens being present, whereas related genera have only four; but in Pentstemon one of the stamens is sterile). Sometimes written Pentastemon. Scrophu- lariacese. PEXTSTEMON. BEARD-TONGUE. Tubular- flowered bedding and border plants, mostly of bright colors; many are natives in the United States. Perennial herbs or shrubs of medium or small size, spring- and summer-blooming, glabrous or pubescent, the sts. mostly little branched : Ivs. opposite or whorled, entire or toothed (the upper ones sometimes alternate): fls. in terminal racemes or thyrsoid clusters, mostly showy, blue, red, purple, white ; calyx 5-parted, with imbricated segms. : corolla tubular, usually dilated at the throat, distinctly or obscurely 2-lipped, the upper lip 2-lobed or notched and the lower 3-lobed; fertile stamens 4, didynamous, the fifth sterile and sometimes bearded, all of them included or not exserted; style filiform and stigma capitate: fr. an ovoid, globose or oblong dehis- cent caps., with numerous seeds. Pentstemon is a typical American genus. One species is native to N. E. Asia and many to the copier parts of Mex., but the larger number of the species inhabit the U. S. and Canada, particularly the western parts. Krautter admits 148 species in his monograph in 1908 (Contr. Bot. Lab., Univ. of Pa, III). They are all herbs, although some species are somewhat woody at the base. It is difficult so to arrange the species of Pents- temon as to make them easy of determination by the horticulturist. Gray's account in the Synoptical Flora (Vol. 2, Part 1) describes the American species north of Mex. ; and this account has been followed here in the main. The arrangement of species, however, has been modified considerably to admit the Mexican species and to make the group easier for the beginner. Later writers are inclined to raise the Grayan varieties to the rank of species. For the hardy border, pents- temons are most satisfactory plants, and the great number of showy species allows much lati- tude in choice of color and habit. All are perennial, but some of them bloom the first year from seed. In a dry and hot place they are likely to be short-lived, although nearly all the species thrive best in full exposure to sun. They should have good deep garden soil. They are propagated by division and by seed, the latter usually being preferred. Many of the species are not hardy in the northern states, but P. barbaius and its varieties, P. hirsutus, P. Isevigatus and variety, P. confer- tus and variety, P. diffusus, P. ovalus, P. grandiflorus, P. acuminatus, P. angustifolius, P. glaber and varieties, and also others, may be expected to stand in the North, particularly if given a protection of leaves. An excellent garden race has been produced, here designated as P. gloxinioides. This seems to be a product of hybridization and selection. It is little known in American gardens, although it is a handsome and deserving plant. Some of the forms of it are treated as annuals. Most of the species described in this account are not domesticated or modified plants, but are sold or distributed as stock secured more or less directly from the wild. acuminatus, 21. alpinus, 15. angustifolius, 22, 26. antirrhinoides, 5. argutus, 41. arizonicus, 16. atropurpureus, 26. azureus, 46. barbatus, 7, 8. Bridgesii, 48. INDEX. Douglasii, 1. Eatonii, 9. erianthera, 36. Fendleri, 21. fruticosus, 1. gentianoides, 12. glaber, 15. glandulosus, 39. gloxinioides, 13. Gordonii, 15. csBruleo-purpureu8,24. gracilentus, 43. cxruleus, 22. campanulatus, 26. centranthifolius, 14. Clevelandii, 32. Cobsea, 35. coccineus, 7. confertus, 24. cordifolius, 3. crassifolius, 1. cristaivji, 36. cyananthus, 15. cyanthus, 15. Davidsonii, 2. deustus, 33. diffusus, 41. Digitalis, 30. Murray anus, 20. Newberryi, 1. nitidus, 21. ovatus, 37. Palmeri, 31. procerus, 24. •pubescent, 38. pulchellus, 26. puniceus, 17. Kichardsonii, 42. Robinsonii, 1. Roezlii, 45. roseus, 26. rotundifolius, 25. Scouleri, 1. secundiflorus, 23. Smallii, 30. speciosus, 15. spectabili?, 34. staticifolius, 39. ternatus, 4. Torreyi, 7. triflorus, 11. tubiflorus, 29. venustus, 40. Wrightii, 18. 2859. Pentstemon Menziesii var. Newberryi. By many authors considered to be a distinct species, and then known as P. Newberryi. (XhO gracilis, 28. grandiflorus, 19. Hartwegii, 12. heterophyllus, 47. hirsutus, 38. humilis, 27. isophyllus, 10. Jaffrayanus, 46. labrosus, 8. ketus, 44. kevigatus, 30. Lemmonii, 6. Lobbii, 5. Mackayanus, 38. Menziesii, 1. miniatus, 9. A. Cells of anthers de- hiscent for nearly or quite their whole length, united or connivent at the apex and soon spreading from each other. (Nos. 1-38.) Nos. 4, 10, 16 are in doubt as to position in key. Anthers covered with long wool. 1. Menziesii, Hook. Woody at base, 1 ft. or less high: Ivs. thick, obovate to oblong, serrate or entire, mostly glabrous, the lower ones short-stalked: cluster a raceme, pubescent; fls. 1 in. or more long, violet-blue to purple, usually 1 on each pedicel, the upper lip 2-cleft and the lower 2-cleft. Wash., north. G.M. 45:100. Var. Newbenyi, Gray (var. Robinsonii, Mast.). Fig. 2859 (adapted from Pacific R. R. Re- port). Fls. pink or rose-purple: Ivs. oval or ovate-oblong, serru- late. Calif, to Wash. G.C. 1872: 969. — Kept specifically distinct by recent authors as P. Newberryi. Var. Scouleri, Gray (P. Scou- leri, Douglas). Fls. violet-purple: Ivs. lanceolate to linear-lanceolate, sparsely serrulate. Wyo. to Ore., north. B.R. 1277. B.M. 6834. G.C. III. 7, p. 204. Gn. 52, p. 42; 70, p. 250. G. 36:23; 37:408 — Kept specifically distinct by some as P. fruticdsus, Greene (Gerdrdia fruticosa, Pursh). P. fruticdsus var. crassifolius, Kraut. (P. crassifdlius, Lindl. P. Douglasii, Hook.). Fls. lilac-purple, pink at base: Ivs. oblong or obovate-lanceolate, entire. Ore., north. B.R. 24:16. 2. Davidsonii, Greene. An alpine dwarf, differing from P. Menziesii in having its tough and almost her- baceous branching sts. underground except the very short and erect flowering branches, and obovate and oval obtuse or acutish entire veinless Ivs.: proper st. mainly subterranean and horizontal, rooting at joints; free branches 1-2 in. high, the fls. usually exceeding in size all the remainder of the plant above ground : corolla 2540 PENTSTEMON PENTSTEMON 1 in. long, lilac-purple, ventricose from near the tips of the sepals, the lobes rather short and not very unequal; stamens included, woolly. Discovered by George Davidson, on Mt. Conness, Calif., altitude 12,300 ft.: occurs on Mt. Shasta and north to Wash.— Offered abroad. BB. Anthers glabrous or only hairy (not wootty). C. Plant semi-scandent (somewhat climbing) by means of long slender branches, or at least some of the branches long and weak or slender. 3. cordifdlius, Benth. Plant very leafy, somewhat pubescent, clambering over shrubs: Ivs. ovate, often more or less cordate, serrate, 1 in. or less long: cluster or thyrse short and leafy, the peduncles several-fld. ; corolla tubular, scarlet, the tube 1 in. long and the limb half as long. S. Calif. B.M. 4497. R.H. 1850:221. J.F. 1:14. 4. ternatus, Torr. Flowering shoots 2-4 ft. long, virgate, glabrous and glau- cous: Ivs. linear- lanceolate, rigid, serrate or denticu- late, the upper ones in 3's: fls. in a raceme-like thyrse, pale scarlet; calyx with ovate-acumi- nate parts; corolla 1 in. long, the lips Kin. long. S. Calif., in mountains. cc. Plant erect, self' supporting. D. Fls. lemon-yellow to yellow-red. 5. antirrhinoides, Benth. (P. Ldbbii, Hort.). Plant 1-5 ft., glabrous or nearly so, branched and leafy: Ivs. small, oval or spatu- late, entire: fls. in leafy panicles, the peduncles 1-fld., the broad fls. about 1 in. long, the lower lip deeply 2-lobed; sterile filament bearded on one side. S.Calif. B.M. 6157. I.E. 9:315. 2860. Pentstemon Hartwegii. ( X K) 6. Lemmonii, Gray. Slender shrub, 5 ft. or less tall, bright green and glabrous: Ivs. ovate-lanceolate, toothed: panicle loose and branchy, the long peduncles 2-7-fld.; fls. small, dull yellowish and red, the segms. nearly equal. Cent. Calif. DD. Fls. not yellow (unless sometimes in P. confertus), mostly in shades of red or purple, sometimes white. E. St. and Ivs. glabrous, at least up to the infl. (Nos. 7-84). F. Corolla long and slender, not swollen near the base or greatly widened at the mouth: straight-fld. species. 7. barbatus, Nutt. (Cheldne barbata, Cav.). Tall, erect, branching, glabrous and more or less glaucous herb: Ivs. firm, varying from lanceolate to linear, entire, strong-veined, the radical ones oblanceolate or spatulate: fl. -cluster long and open, narrow, the pe- duncles about 2-3-fld.; fls. slender, about 1 in. long in wild forms, stpongly 2-lipped, varying from light pink and flesh-color to carmine, the lower lip usually bearded. Colo., south. B.R. 116; 25:21. R.H. 1896, p. 347. G. 32:75. Mn. 7:141. — Showy perennial, common in cult. Var. Torreyi, Gray (P. Torreyi, Benth.), is a scarlet- fld. form, with almost no beard on the lower lip; the commonest form of the species hi cult. Hillsides, Utah, Colo., south and to Texas. — Excellent. Var. coccineus, Hort., is a scarlet-fld. horticultural form. 8. labr&sus, Hook. (P. barbatus var. labrdsus, Gray). Much like P. barbatus, but narrower-lvd., the infl. almost simply racemose and the corolla more slender, light scarlet, not bearded, the limb longer; 3 lobes of lower lip linear, spreading, half the length of tube, equaling those of upper lip. Calif, and Low. Calif. B.M. 6738. G.C. 11.20:537.— A good perennial, 1-2 ft., making many sts. 9. Eatonii, Gray. Sts. 1-2 ft. high: Ivs. lanceolate to ovate, the upper ones partly clasping: fls. bright carmine-red, in a simple and strict thyrse, the peduncles 1-3-fld.; calyx-lobes or sepals ovate-lanceolate; corolla 1 in. long, tubular, the throat naked and scarcely enlarged, the lobes broadly oval and all much alike; sterile filament sometimes minutely bearded. Utah, Nev., New Mex., Ariz., and S. Calif. B.R. 10:14. F.S. 3:232 (as P. miniatus). 10. isophyllus, Robs. St. somewhat decumbent at base, erect, 2 ft. or so high, simple, purplish, pulverulent, very leafy, with Ivs. in nearly equal pairs: Ivs. lanceo- late, entire, thickish, glabrous, sessile, acute, margin revolute: fls. in a long secund panicle, nodding, scarlet; calyx deeply 5-parted; corolla about 1^ in. long, the 5-lobed limb erose-crenulate, the throat somewhat enlarged and more or less white-puberulent. Mex. 11. trifldrus, Heller. Perhaps to be entered at this point: glabrous or nearly so to the infl., 2-3 ft.: lower Ivs. spatulate or oblong, almost entire, with margined petioles; upper Ivs. oblong to ovate: fls. rose-purple, the peduncles glandular-pubescent and usually 3-fld.; calyx-lobes lanceolate or oblong-lanceolate; corolla about 1 in. long, the tube gradually dilated; sterile filament glabrous. Cent. Texas. — Under this name a coral-red pentstemon with fls. lJ^-1% in. long is offered abroad, said to be Mexican. 12. Hartwegii, Benth. (P. gentianoides, Lindl.). Fig. 2860. Tall and erect (3-4 ft. high), somewhat branched, the sts. dark purple: Ivs. lanceolate to lance-oblong- linear, or the upper ones broader, sessile, glabrous and entire: fl.-cluster somewhat pubescent, long and open, the pedicels 3-6-fld.; fls. drooping, dark rich scarlet- red, slightly curved, the limb somewhat 2-lipped and the lobes acute. Cool regions in Mex. B.M. 3661. B.R. 24:3. Gn. 37, p. 603; 49, p. 406. G. 2:391. J.F. 3:231. Gn.W.23:679. G.L. 17:397. G.W. 2, p. 157 (as var. hybridus grandiflorus.) — A fine garden plant, now much modified by domestication. P. gentianoides, Poir., and in F. S. 7 : 730, from S. Mex. and Guatemala, is kept distinct by Krautter, the infl. being a long leafy raceme rather than a loose naked panicle : fls. purplish. 13. gloxinioides, Hort. A race of garden hybrids, issuing largely from P. Hartwegii, the other most impor- tant parent being P. Cobaea. Probably other species have entered into the amalgamation. The group needs critical study from the growing plants. The fls. are large, with a broad nearly regular limb, and in many colors. The plants are strong and floriferous. Fls. sometimes measure 2 in. across. Some of the strains bloom freely from seed the first year. Not hardy in N. Y. unless very thoroughly protected; it is probably better to winter it in deep coldframe. 14. centranthifdlius, Benth. (Cheldne centranthi- fdlia, Benth.). Plant strict and leafy, 1-3 ft. tall, very- glaucous: Ivs. thick and entire, from ovate-lanceolate PENTSTEMON to linear, mostly sessile and clasping: infl. long and nar- row, the pedicles 2-3-fld.; fls. about 1 in. long, scarlet, narrow-tubular, the lobes short and acute; I sterile filament naked. Calif, to W. Ariz. B.M. 5142. B.R. 1737. F.S.22:2309. FF. Corolla (except in P. rotundi- folius) with, a prominently en- larging tube, which is often contracted near the base: thick- fid, species. Corolla nearly straight but short in P. con- fertus. G. Lvs. entire (sometimes serrulate in P. confertus). H. Infl. usually rather close and compact. i. Some or att the Ivs. lanceolate to broad-lanceolate. 15. glaber, Pursh (P. Gordonii, Hook. P. specidsus, Douglas). Erect herb (1-2 ft.), with simple sts. gla- brous and somewhat glaucous: Ivs. oblong-lanceolate to ovate- lanceolate: fl. 1 in. or more long, broad, and wide at the mouth, bright blue to pur- plish. Missouri River, west. B.M. 1672 (as P. glabra) and 4319. B.R. 1270. Gn. 27, p. 42. R.H. 1895, p. 383; 1896, p. 347. G.M. 44:563.— A very handsome plant, known by its large blue fls. Variable. Var. cyananthus, Gray (P. cyandnthus, Hook. P. cydn- thus, Hort.). Tall and less glaucous, the Ivs. broader (ovate or cordate-ovate to lance-ovate) :fl. -cluster dense; fls. bright blue. Rocky Mts., Colo., Mont., Utah. B.M. 4464. F.S. 6: 157. R.H. 1851 : 453. — Preferable to the type. By many considered to be specifically distinct. Var. alpinus, Gray (P. alpinus, Torr.). A foot or less high: st. -Ivs. narrow- or broad-lanceolate: thyrse short and few-fld. High plains and mountains, Rocky Mts. Kept distinct from P. glaber by some authors. n. Some or att the Ivs. as broad as ovate, oval or obovate. 16. arizonicus, Heller. St. slender but erect, 6-8 in. high, usually with several leafy short prostrate branches at base: Ivs. glabrous, dull green, coriaceous, oval and finely crenate or undulate on prostrate branches, oblanceolate to ovate-lanceolate on the erect sts. and crenate or entire: fls. in a lax more or less secund infl., purplish; calyx nearly %in. long, pubescent and somewhat glandular, the lobes long-acuminate and cilia te; corolla about 1 in. long, minutely puberulent, abruptly dilated above calyx; sterile filament glabrous, not enlarged above. Mt. San Francisco, Ariz. 17. puniceus, Gray. Very glaucous, with short ovate sometimes connate Ivs.: fl. about 1 in. long, more fun- nelform (or widening upward) and with wide-spread- ing rounded lobes, scarlet; sterile filament bearded down one side. N. Mex. R.H. 1892, p. 448. 18. Wrightii, Hook. Rather stout, 2 ft. or less tall, more or less glaucous : lowest Ivs. obovate, the upper ones oblong and clasping: infl. long and loosely fld., to ped- uncles about 2-fld.; fls. about %in. long, bright red, the mouth broad and the rounded lobes spreading %in. ; sterile stamen bearded. W. Texas to Ariz. B.M. 4601. F.S. 7:685. J.F.2:190. PENTSTEMON 2541 Pentstemon grandiflorus. (XJi) 19. grandifldrus, Xutt. Fig. 2861. Stout, very glau- cous: Ivs. thick, broad and obtuse, the floral ones with very broad bases: peduncles very short or almost none; fls. nearly or quite 2 in. long, lilac or blue, enlarging near the base, somewhat flipped and the upper lip the smaller; sterile filament minutely pubescent at the tip: fr. large. Prairies, 111. and Minn., westward. G. 29:82. — Handsome. 20. Murrayanus, Hook. Erect, 3 ft.: Ivs. broad- ovate, clasping, and the upper pairs grown together into a cup-shaped body (connate) : pedicels 2-3 in. long; fls deep scarlet, with rather small lobes; sterile filament glabrous. Ark., Texas. B.M. 3472. Gn. 26, p. 229. R.H. 1896, p. 348. 21 acuminatus, Douglas. Glaucous, strict and usually stiffish, 2 ft. or less tall: Ivs. thickish, the lower- most broadly ovate to obovate, the uppermost broad- lanceolate to broad-ovate and clasping and usually acuminate, the floral Ivs. shorter than the fls.: inn narrow, the peduncles 1-3 or more-fld.; fls. nearly 1 hi long lilac to violet, wide at the throat, the obtuse lobes spreading; sterile filament bearded at the tip. Neb. and Minn., south and far westward. B.K. L£*5. —Very satisfactory. There is confusion in the applica- tion of the name P. acuminatus. P. nitidus, Douglas (P. Fendleri, Gray), sometimes referred here, is con- sidered to be a distinct species, with upper Ivs. ovate or narrower. Sask. to Mex., and westward. m. Some or att the Ivs. lanceolate to linear. 22 angustifolius, Pursh (P. caeruleus, Nutt.). Fig. 2862. Mostly lower: Ivs. linear to lanceolate, those at the base of the fl.-cluster usually exceeding the fls.: infl. usually close; fls. blue, varying to lilac or white. Dakota to Colo, and New Mex. G.M. 54:377.— Seems to run into P. acuminatus. 23. secundifldrus, Benth. About 2 ft. tall: Ivs. nar- row-lanceolate, somewhat glaucous, the radical ones spatulate: infl. long and strict, the peduncles 1-3-fld.; fls. lilac or purple, the basal tube about twice the length of the calyx, the throat broad and bell-shaped and about equaled by the spread- ing rounded lobes; sterile filament glabrous or bearded only at the top. Colo, and Wyo. — Handsome. 24. confertus, Douglas. One to 2 ft., pubescent in the infl. : Ivs. oblong to lanceolate to linear, usually entire but sometimes minutely serrate: infl. a narrow interrupted spike, the peduncles sessile or the lower ones stalked; fls. J^in. or less long, cream- white to sulfur-yellow, nar- row, 2-lipped, the lower lip bearded within. Rocky Mts. to Ore. and Calif. B.R. 1260. — Variable, and has received many names, but little known in cult. Var. caeruleo - purpureus, Gray (P. prbcerus, Douglas). Fls. blue -purple to violet. Colo., west and north. B.M. 2954. L.B.C. 17:1616.— A common form in gardens, and a reliable and satisfactory ^^ plant, often kept as specifi- folius. cally distinct. 2862. Pentstemoc angusti- A slender form. 2542 PENTSTEMON PENTSTEMON HH. Infl. very open and loose, due to the fact that the peduncles are 3-6 in. long and the pedicels 1 in. or more long and the fls. drooping. 25. rotundifdlius, Gray. Fig. 2863. About 2 ft. tall, branching from the base, glaucous: lower Ivs. thick and leathery, orbicular-ovate and obtuse, long-petipled, st.- Ivs. sessile and cordate-orbicular: fls. 1-1 K m- l°ng> narrow-tubular, yellow-red, the lobes short and acute; sterile filament glabrous. N. Mex. B.M. 7055. G.C. III. 4:265. G.F. 1 :473 (reduced in Fig. 2863). GG. Lvs. serrate or dentate. H. Sterile filament bearded at the tip or along one side (Nos. 26-32}. I. Color of fls. purple, blue or rose, sometimes ranging to white. 26. campanulatus, Willd. Branching from the base, 2 ft. or less tall : Ivs. lanceolate or the upper ones ovate- lanceolate, long-acuminate, broad at the base and ses- sile, strongly serrate: infl. long and narrow, the pedun- cles usually 2-fld.; fls. 1 in. long, rose-purple or violet (sometimes white in cult.), the corolla funnelfonn, the lobes rounded and spreading and the lower lip broader than the upper, the sterile filament hairy at the top. Mex. and Guatemala. B.M. 3884. — An old garden plant which is variable in color and which has received many names, as P. angustifolius, P. atropurpeus, P. roseus. See B.R. 1122. L.B.C. 15:1429, 1438. G.C. III. 50:93 (a white form). P. pulchellus, Lindl., by some referred here, is by others kept distinct, differing in corolla abruptly ventricose or swollen above, violet or lilac with white veins, the lips nearly equal, throat spotted and villous, sterile filament bearded at end. Mex. B.R. 1138. 27. hftmilis, Nutt. Low, usually not over 6 in. tall, pubescent in the infl.: Ivs. oblong to lanceolate, some- what glaucous, the upper ones small-toothed: infl. 3-4 in. long, with 2-5-fld. peduncles; fls. ^in. long, rather narrow, deep blue or sometimes ranging to white, the lower lip bearded within. Rocky Mts., west. F. 1875:241. 28. gracilis, Nutt. Taller, sometimes minutely puberu- lent, slender: Ivs. linear- lanceolate, sometimes nearly entire, the radical ones spatulate or oblong: infl. strict, the peduncles 2- or more-fld. ; fls. nearly 1 in. long, mostly narrow-funnelform, lilac - purple rang- ing to white. Neb. to Colo, and north- ward, on moist prairies. B.M. 2945. L.B.C. 16:1541.— A pretty species. n. Color of fls. nearly or quite white, but sometimes shaded with red or purple. 29. tubifldrus, Nutt. St. 2-3 ft., erect, not leafy above : Ivs. oblong to ovate-lanceolate, barely serrulate, passing into small 2863. Pent stemon rot undifolius. (Xi4) bracts above: infl. of densely-fld., somewhat whorled clusters; fls. about %in. long, scarcely 2-lipped, the spreading limb nearly as long as the tube, white or nearly so and sometimes tinged with purple. Mo., Kans., and Ark. 30. laevigatus, Soland. (Chelone Pentstemon, Linn.). Tall and slender, 2-4 ft., more or less glaucous: Ivs. rather firm, purplish, somewhat glossy, ovate to ovate- oblong-lanceolate and clasping, the radical ones oblanceolate or broader, all small-toothed: infl. long and loose; fls. about 1 in. long, white and sometimes tinged with color, rather slender, narrow at the base, the short lobes not wide-spreading, the small lower lip bearded at the base. Pa., west and south. B.M. 1425. — A com- mon plant, best known in the following form. Var. Digitalis, Gray (P. Digitalis, Nutt. Chelone Digitalis, Sweet). Very tall, 4-5 ft., with larger white abruptly inflated fls. B.M. 2587. — Sometimes becomes a weed in old fields, from Maine south and west, but probably not indigenous in all this range. It is in cult., as a border plant. By some authors kept dis- tinct as a species. P. Sm&llii, Heller, is a handsome allied species from N. C. and Tenn., with bright pink- purple gibbous corolla, pubescent or puberulent sts.: root-lvs. oval or ovate; st.-lvs. lanceolate or ovate- lanceolate, smooth both sides, serrate. 31. Palmeri, Gray. Plant 2-3 ft. tall, the foliage glaucous: Ivs. thick, ovate to oblong-lanceolate, the lower petioled and the upper connate, very sharp-den- tate or sometimes almost entire: infl. long, mostly glandular; fls. cream-white tinted with pink, the narrow part of the tube about as long as the calyx, the upper part very wide and open, the mouth Mm- across and 2-lipped; sterile filament yellow-bearded. Utah, south and west. B.M. 6064. F.S. 20:2094. F. 1874:37. ra. Color of fls. red. 32. Clevelandii, Gray. Two ft. or above, more or less glaucous, becoming woody at the base: Ivs. rigid, oblong or ovate, sharp-toothed, the upper ones usually connate by their bases: infl. long and narrow; fls. %in. long, crimson, with narrow throat; sterile filament bearded at top. S. Calif, and Low. Calif. G.M. 36: 626. F. 1878, p. 149. HH. Sterile filament glabrous. 33. deustus, Douglas. Sts. 1 ft. or less tall, from a woody base, glabrous throughout: Ivs. thickish, vary- ing from nearly linear to lanceolate to ovate, some or all of them serrate, the uppermost sessile: infl. many- fld., loose and open; fls. not over ^in. long, dull white or yellowish white and sometimes tinged with purple, wide-mouthed, the lobes wide-spreading. Mont, and Wyo. to Calif. B.R. 1318. 34. spectabilis, Thurb. Two to 4 ft., erect, some- what glaucous: Ivs. ovate to ovate-lanceolate or some- times oblong, acute, the upper ones acuminate and connate by their bases, very sharp serrate-dentate: infl. long and many-fld. ; fl. 1 in. or more long, rose-purple or lilac, the narrow part of the tube about twice the length of the calyx, the upper part broad and full, the lobes rounded. New Mex. to S. Calif. B.M. 5260.— A beau- tiful species. EE. St. and Ivs. more or less pubescent or hirsute. F. Corolla 2 in. long. 35. Cobsea, Nutt. Fig. 2864. Straight and erect, stout, about 2 ft., minutely pubescent: Ivs. thick, ovate- oblong to oblong to broad-lanceolate, the upper ones clasping: infl. mostly simple and open; fls. very large, reddish purple to white, the base very narrow but the upper part of the fl. broad and open, the limb only obscurely 2-lipped; sterile filament bearded. Prairies, Mo. and Neb., south. B.M. 3465. Gn. 49:406. G. 29:83. F.S.R.2, p. 271. Mn. 4:113.— Very showy, and probably one of the parents of the garden race of hybrid pentstemons (see No. 13). PENTSTEMON PEPEROMIA 2543 FF. Corolla 1 in. or less long. 36. erianthera, Pursh (P. cristatus, Nutt.). Only a few inches high, pubescent, usually viscid above: Ivs. linear-lanceolate to narrow-oblong: infl. erect, leafy below; fls. about 1 in. long, purplish, rather abruptly dilated above, the lower lip bearded; sterile filament strongly yellow-bearded. Dakota to Colo., north and west. — Good. 37. ovatus, Douglas. St. slender but erect, 2-4 ft., more or less pubescent : Ivs, ovate, rather thin, bright green, serrate, the upper ones clasping: infl. erect but lax, the peduncles 2- to several-fld.; fls. about %in. long, blue changing to purple, 2-lipped and the lower lip bearded. Idaho, west and north. B.M.2903. — Good. 38. hirsutus, Willd. (P. pubescens, Soland. Chelone hirsuta, Linn.). Loose-growing, the slender often decum- bent sts. reaching 2 ft., usually viscid-pubescent: Ivs. oblong to narrow-lanceolate, small-toothed, the radical ones ovate to spatulate : infl. loose and open,the peduncles 2-3 in. long and the pedicels often 1 in. long; fls. about 1 in. long, drooping, dull purple or violet or varying to flesh-color, rather narrow, with 2 short lobes densely bearded on the palate; sterile filament densely bearded. Dry fields and banks from Maine and Ont. to Fla. and Texas. B.M. 1424. G.M. 56:493.— The common pentste- mon of the E., and useful in cult. P. Mackayanus, Knowles & Weste., is perhaps distinct: corolla often shorter, sparingly bearded in throat, purple: upper st. -Ivs. with dilated or rounded bases rather than nar- row-lanceolate. Ala. to Ark. AA. Cells of anthers not dehiscing or opening to the base, the basal part remaining saccate B. Li-s. dentate or serrate. C. Plant viscid and soft-pubescent. 39. glanduldsus, Douglas (P. staticifolius, Lindl.). Rather stout, 2-3 ft. tall: Ivs. rather thin, ovate-lanceo- late, acuminate, the upper ones clasping, the radical ovate or oblong, all toothed or serrate: infl. narrow, leafv below, the peduncles few- to several-fld.; fls. large, somewhat over 1 in. long, lilac, with inflated throat, the lips short and broad; sterile filament gla- brous. Idaho to Wash, and Ore. B.M. 3688. B.R. 1262; 1770.— Showy. cc. Plant not viscid, either glabrous or puberulent. 40. venustus, Douglas. St. erect, nearly simple, leafy, 2 ft. or less tall, glabrous: Ivs. thickish, oblong- lanceolate to ovate-lanceolate, very sharply serrate: infl. narrow, not leafy, the peduncles 1-3-fld.; fls. usually more than 1 in. long, somewhat 2-lipped, light purple, somewhat hairy within; sterile filament hairy above. ' Idaho, Ore., and Wash. B.R. 1309. 41. diffusus, Douglas (P. argutus, Paxt.). Sts. about 2 ft. tall, diffuse: Ivs. ovate to oblong-lanceolate to cordate-ovate, unevenly and deeply serrate: infl. leafy, the pedicels very short ; fls. %in. long, light purple, 2-lipped; sterile filament hairy above. Ore., north. B.M. 3645. B.R. 1132. R.H. 1872:410. BB. Lvs, deep-cut. 42. Richardsonii, Douglas. Rather loosely branch- ing: Ivs. ovate-lanceolate to narrow-lanceolate, deeply cut or pinnatifid, the upper ones not opposite: infl. loose; fls. %in. long, light purple; sterile filament somewhat hairy at top. Ore. and Wash. B.M. 3391. B.R. 1121. L.B.C. 17:1641. BBB. Lvs. entire, c. Sterile filament somewhat bearded. 43. gracilentus, Gray. A foot or more tall from a •woody base, naked above: Ivs. lanceolate to linear or oblong, glabrous: infl. loose, the viscid peduncles 2-5- fld.; fls. Kin. long, violet-blue, the lobes very short. N. Calif., Nev., and Ore. cc. Sterile filament glabrous. 44. laetus, Gray. About 1 ft. tall, from a woody base, closely pubescent: Ivs. lanceolate to linear- lanceolate, the radical ones spatulate: fls. 1 in. long, blue. Calif, and Nev. 45. Roezlii, Regel. Smaller than the last, 1 ft. or less, glabrous or minutely puberulent below: Ivs. lanceolate, linear, or oblanceolate: fls. pale blue or violet, on divergent branches, the corolla %-%va. long. Nev., Calif., Ore.— The plant cult, under this name may be, in some cases, P. azureus var. Jaffray- anus. 46. azureus, Benth. Erect or ascending, 3 ft. or less, glaucous, sometimes minutely pubescent: Ivs. nar- row-ovate to narrow- lanceolate: infl. loose and open; fls. IK in- or less long, blue to violet, sometimes red- dish at the base, the limb about 1 in. across. Calif. B.M. 7504. J.F. 2:211. Var. Jaffrayanus, Gray (P. Jaffray- anus, Hook.). Lower (about 1 ft. tall), young sts. tinged with red: Ivs. oblong to oval or the upper ones ovate-lanceolate, glaucous: fls. large and showy, rich blue and reddish at base and in the throat. Calif. B.M. 5045. R.H. 1874:430. H. F.II. 1:5. G.C. in. 58:67.— By some kept specifically distinct. 47. heterophyllus, Lindl. Sts. reaching 3-5 ft., from a woody base, the plant mostly green : Ivs. vary- ing from oblong-lanceolate above to lanceolate and linear below: infl. loose and open, the peduncles usu- ally 1- or 2-fld.; fls. about 1 in. long, pink or rose-pur- ple, very slender at the base but fufl or inflated above, the lips" well marked. Calif. B.R. 1899. B.M. 3853. R.H. 1875:110; 1896, p. 348; 1901:164. 48. Bridgesii, Gray. Sts. 1-2 ft., from a somewhat woody base, glabrous or perhaps puberulent up to the thyrse: Ivs. lanceolate to linear: peduncles 1-5-fld., short, glandular; corolla about 1 in. long, bright scarlet, narrow, the lips one-third length of tube; anthers sagittate. S. W. Colo, and N. Ariz, to Calif. Gn. 66, p. 348. As the pentstemons are mostly attractive plants, any number of them may appear in the lists of distributors of native plants. P. baccharifdliut. Hook. Glabrous or only obscurely puberulent, leafy at base, 2 ft.: hrs. oblong, sharp-toothed, sessile: fls. deep carmine- red, on 1-3-fld. peduncles: corolla 1 in. long, broadly tubular, with short 2-lipped limb; sterile filament naked. Texas. J.F. 3:227. — P. pygmxus is a name listed abroad: "very compact-growing; pale pur- ple and white fls." — P. rirgatus. Gray. Glabrous or slightly glandu- lar, the st. strict and long: Ivs. linear-lanceolate: fls. lilac with purple veins, in a virgate thyrse; corolla J^n. long, with a wide throat and distinctly 2-lipped. "Xew Mex., Aria. j^ jj g PEONY: Pseonia. PEPEROMIA (Greek, pepper-like). Piperdceae. An enormous genus of tropical and subtropical herbs, including a few small but choice foliage plants for wannhouse, conservatory, or house decoration. Annual, or perennial by a creeping caudex or by 2864. Pentstemon Cobawu (XJi) 2544 PEPEROMIA PEPEROMIA 2865. Peperomia Sandersii, usually known as P. arifolia var. argyreia. tubers formed at the base: sts. prostrate, creeping and thread-like, or erect and slender, or short thick, and succulent: Ivs. alternate, opposite, or in whorls of 3-4 (rarely 5-6), entire, fleshy or membranous, often with pellucid dots, sometimes attractively veined or colored: fls. minute, usually disposed in a dense spike; stamens 2; anther-cells confluent; stigma sessile, undivided, often tufted: fr. a small or minute berry, 1-seeded, with thin pericarp. — Species perhaps 500 or more, widely dispersed, but mostly in Amer., from Fla. to Chile and Ar- gentina. Very few are cult. The names of peper- omias are much confused, partly owing to the vast size of the genus, which always in- creases the diffi- culties of discrimi- nation, and partly to the minuteness of the fls. More- over, the duration of many kinds is uncertain, while great numbers are monocarpic, that is, they flower and fruit once and then die. In the following account, the names are those that mostly appear in the trade and in horticultural literature; how far these names may be properly deter- mined botanically is a subject for investigation. Peperomias are very attractive and beautiful small- stature glasshouse plants, having particularly a very decorative appearance among other foliage plants. For their general culture they need a warm house. By the end of January they will become active both in root and foliage. From February on they will stand an increase in temperature to about 62° at night; this may be increased until they are having 65° to 70° with an increase of 10° to 15° on bright days. As the sun gets powerful in the spring, they will need shade, or as soon as the foliage shows signs of losing color. In the sum- mer they need a good supply of water, but in autumn and winter they require very careful watering. In spring and summer they profit by frequent light spray- ing. Keep the atmosphere of the house in a moist state, but avoid a stuffy or stagnant condition. In the slow time of winter, they will stand the temperature to be lowered to -about 60° with 10° to 15° increase with sun. Give less spraying and be very careful in giving water during the dark and dull time, otherwise the roots will rot. — They can be propagated readily from pieces of the stems or leaves placed hi pans of silver sand and plunged where they will have bottom heat of 75° to 80°. Do not cover with glass as it tends to make them rot. Keep shaded and be very careful about watering, and they will soon root. When they make sufficient roots, they may be potted up into small pots, using loam four parts, fibrous peat two parts, and enough sand to keep it open. For larger shifts, use a more lumpy mixture of fibrous loam, fibrous peat, and well-decayed cow-manure. By July or August they should get their last shift, until the coming of spring. They will stand full sun by the end of September and through the winter, and this greatly aids in keeping them in good condition at that season. (J. J. M. Farrell.) A. Plants for pots or pans, erect-habited. B. Lvs. alternate. c. Sts. short or wanting. Sandersii, A. DC. (P. arifdlia, Hort., not Miq.). Fig. 2865. Stemless: Ivs. alternate, peltate, 5 x 3K in., rounded at base; petioles dark red, 4-8 in. long. Cult, only in the form var. argyreia, Hook., f., which differs from the type in having broad, parallel longitudinal bands of white between the nerves. Brazil. B.M. 5634. F.S. 23:2438. G. 25:197. A.G. 19:17. F.R. 1:637.— This plant seems to be the commonest in cult, here, under the name of P. arifolia var. argyreia. However, Casimir DeCandolle thought that this plant is not the true P. arifolia, and he renamed it P. Sandersii (after Wilson Sanders), but the name is often spelled Saun- dersii in trade catalogues. The distinctions which De- Candolle makes are technical. The evident ones are that P. arifolia has a short st. and catkins much longer than the Ivs., while P. Sandersii has no st. and the catkins are about as long as the Ivs. Verschaffeltii, Lem. Distinguished from P. mar- morata, which it much resembles, by the Ivs. being alternate, by the basal lobes, which do not overlap but are separated by a notch as in a typical cordate If. A smaller and more delicate but more branched plant: st. short: st., branches, petioles, and peduncles much longer, translucent, and pale rose (not green) : Ivs. heart- shaped at base. Upper Amazon, Brazil. I.H. 16:598. tithymaloides, A. Dietr. (P. magnolisefblia, A. Dietr.). Lvs. alternate, subovate, acutish, narrowed at base, 2-3 in. long, base acute; more than 9-nerved; nerves subqpposite; petiole 1 in. long, keeled beneath: st. rooting below. Santo Domingo. — Monocarpic (annual or biennial.) maculosa, A. Dietr. Lvs. alternate(?), ovate-lanceo- late, bright shining green, very fleshy; petioles beauti- fully spotted with purple. Santo Domingo. — A good subject for a pan. Perennial. cc. Sts. numerous, long, slender. metallica, Lind. & Rod., is distinct from all others here described by its numerous slender unbranched sts. 12-16 in. high, and lanceolate Ivs. It probably belongs in some other genus or family. It was intro. in 1892 before the fls. were known and its exact botanical position determined. Lvs. blackish green, painted white down the middle, red-veined below; petioles short, reddish brown. Peru. I.H. 39:157. G.W. 3, p. 160. BB. Lvs. opposite or in whorls. marmorata, Hook. St. short, much-branched, nearly 2/2in. thick: Ivs. opposite, ovate-cordate, deeply 2-lobed at the base, the lobes rounded and overlapping. The Ivs. are 3-5 x lj^-2% in., not so broad as P. Sandersii, and less concave. Not advertised, but has been unneces- sarily confused with P. Sandersii. latifdlia, Miq. St. 10 in. high, decumbent: Ivs. obovate or obtusely ovate, 5-7-nerved, opposite or in whorls of 3, base acute, glabrous above, pubescent beneath; petiole 7-8 lines long. Hawaii. — Monocarpic (annual or biennial). AA. Plants for hanging-baskets, drooping. nummularifolia, HBK. Delicate creeper, with long, thread-like, rooting sts. and small orbicular Ivs., puber- ulous or glabrate: Ivs. alternate, ciliate, obscurely pal- mately 3-neryed, 3-4 lines diam. Trop. Amer. — The above description is from Grisebach. Five other species in the W. Indies have the same habit. P. pros- trdta, Hort., is probably a synonym. It is a stove basket- plant figured in G.C. II. 11:717 and F. 1881, p. 103, with a good-sized petiole. The Ivs. are very small for the genus, and are said not to exceed %in. Lvs. bordered and nerved with greenish white. Annual. Nicholson refers P. prostrata to P. brevipes, and keeps P. nummu- larifolia separate. P. brevipes, C. DC., has Ivs. alternate, orbiculate, younger ones hirsute, older ones glabrate, ciliate, 1-nerved: style none: berry with a very short stipe. Trop. Amer. PEPEROMIA PEPPER 2545 In some collections is a plant known as P. crassi/olia (which is probably not P. crassifolia, Baker, of Trop. Afr.). It is a very dis- tinct species with dark green, ovate, fleshy Ivs. 3x5 in., becom- ing very hard when old: sts. branched and upright in habit, a foot in height: fls. in insignificant catkins. It is a very good plant and deserves to be more generally known. — P. pubifolia, Veitch. Peren- nial creeper of unknown habitat, suitable for hanging-baskets. Lvs. small, ovate, marked with a central gray bar. — P. resedxfldra, Andr6, intro. in 1865, was "found in all stoves" 2 years later and said to be "a plant for the million." It differs from all the above in being a flowering plant rather than a foliage plant, for the Ivs. are merely bordered lighter green and the fls. are about as showy as those of a mignonette, each one 3-4 lines long, and 100 or so in a raceme. St. 1-1 3 2 ft. high, red, forked: Ivs. broadly ovate, cordate. Colombia. B.M. 6619. WlLHELM MlLLER. L. H. B.f PEPONIA (Greek, melon, gourd). Cucurbitacex. Climbing or sprawling plants, little known in hor- ticulture. Perennial herbs, prostrate or scandent, often villous, with fibrous roots: Ivs. lobed or rarely entire, dentate: fls. large, yellow or whitish, monoecious, .the males solitary or racemose; corolla-lobes 5, obovate; stamens 3; female fls. solitary: fr. large or medium, fleshy, oblong or cylindrical; seeds many, black, flattened. — Species about a dozen in Trop. and S. Afr. Because of an earlier genus of the same name, Engler has pro- posed the name Peponium for this group. Mackennii, Naudin. Lvs. broadly ovate-cordate, 5-lobed to the middle: male fls. solitary; calyx-tube subglabrous, narrowed from apex to base. It is hardly scandent, densely villous and the st. grows J^-6 ft. long: Ivs. 4 in. long: petals over 1 in. long: fr. oblong-ovoid, about the size of a hen's egg, green at first, then marbled with white, finally all red; pulp orange-colored, insipid. Natal. — Once intro. in S. Calif., but now apparently lost; probablv not of much value as an ornamental. L. H. B. PEPPER. With American horticulturists "pepper" usually means the red pepper (Capsicum, which see) of which the green pepper is merely the unripe stage. The black and white pepper of commerce are treated under Piper. The red pepper (Capsicum) is doubtless native of the New World, 'as there is no record of its having been known prior to the discovery of America. According to Irving's "Life of Columbus," this plant was first men- tioned by Martyr in 1493, who says Columbus brought home "pepper more pungent than that from Caucasus," evidently comparing it with the black pepper of com- merce from the oriental countries. It was cultivated by the natives in tropical and southern America before this time, and about a century later Gerarde speaks of its being brought into European gardens from Africa and southern Asia. The ease with which the plant spreads in warm latitudes, together with the increased commer- cial trade immediately following the discovery of Amer- ica, doubtless caused a rapid dissemination through tropical Asia and Africa, where it was supposed by many to be indigenous and from there introduced into European gardens. The first record of the use of pepper is apparently by Chauca, physician to the fleet of Columbus, who in 1494 alludes to it as a condiment. Writers about a cen- tury later considered it valuable as an aid to digestion and also mentioned its use in dressing meats, dyeing, and other purposes. Medicinally it was much used for various ailments, such as dropsy, colic, ague, and tooth- ache, and when mixed with honey and applied externally was used as a remedy for quinsy. At a later date preparations were given for black vomit and various tropical fevers, and for a tonic, also for gout, paralysis and other diseases. Its modern use is largely as a condiment, forming a seasoning in almost every dish eaten by the inhabitants of warm countries. The smaller varieties are mostly used for this purpose. The cayenne pepper of commerce consists of the small pungent fruits reduced to a powder. The unground fruit is also made into pepper sauce of various brands by preserving in brine or strong vinegar. The Tabasco variety furnishes the well-known Tabasco pepper sauce and Tabasco catsup. "Chilli con carnie" con- sists of the small pungent varieties finely ground and mixed with meat. These hot varieties are often eaten raw by native Mexicans, as are radishes, and also form an important ingredient of tomales so common in that country and fairly well known in the southern United States. The large thick -fleshed sweet varieties are desired more by persons farther north, who use them in various ways, served like tomatoes in either ripe or green state, with vinegar and salt, or made into man- goes by cutting one side, removing seeds and filling with chow-chow pickles. The parts are then tied together, S laced in jars with vinegar and kept until wanted. The •uit is often used in stuffing pitted oh" ves after being cooked in olive oil. In Spain some are canned after being thus cooked and eaten with French salad dressing. Paprika is a well-known Hungarian and Spanish condiment made from the long, and more or less pointed type of peppers. The Spanish paprika is much milder in flavor than the Hungarian, it being made from a less pungent pepper and doubtless in its preparation more of the seeds and placentae are removed, which process makes a milder condiment. The seed of peppers is more or less used as a bird food; and the plants of some varieties, like Little Gem and Celestial, are grown more especially for ornamental purposes. Some thirty varieties are recorded by American seedsmen. They differ from one another mainly in the form and pungency of fruit and habit of growth. There are endless forms among peppers, but certain types are 2866. Pepper.— The Ruby King variety. well fixed, as indicated by the botanical varieties under Capsicum. Pungency is to be found in all peppers and while located in the placentae, other parts may acquire it by contact. Most of the smaller sorts, like Coral Gem, Tabasco, Chilli, Cayenne, and Cherry contain more of the pungent properties than the large kinds, like Ruby King (Fig. 2866), Squash, Bell, Sweet Moun- tain, and Golden Queen. Some medium-sized varieties, 2546 PEPPER PERENNIALS like Long Red, Celestial, and Oxheart, are hot; others, like County Fair and Kaleidoscope, are mild. Peppers are classed as one of the minor vegetables in that they have not been grown in large quantities in any one locality and the aggregate production is smaller than the so-called truck crops, such as tomatoes, cucum- bers, and the like. Most gardens near large cities in the central and southern states have been growing a few to supply the local markets. During the last decade there has been a decided increase in acreage. The census report for 1900 gives no report of production of peppers, but for 1910 there were recorded for the United States, 1,641 farms containing 3,483 acres, valued at $408,741, an average of $117.47 an acre. Four states with the largest acreage are: No. of farms New Jersey 822 California 55 Florida 143 New Mexico 266 Aver, area Aver, value Acres a farm Value an acre 1,882 2.29 $149,433 $79 40 52,294 417 296 260 7.56 2.07 0.97 94,246 17,228 124 92 318 40 66 26 This record ignores quantities of less than an acre with the evident exception of New Mexico, which averages .03 less than 1 acre to a farm. It is estimated that approximately 4,000,000 pounds of paprika were imported each year during the last three or four years. The United States Department of Agri- culture has demonstrated that this product can be profitably produced in the South, but if the consump- tion is limited to the above figure the acreage must continue to be very limited. In growing peppers, the seed is usually planted under glass in February or March, and the young plants trans- planted to pots or boxes when of sufficient size to han- dle. From twelve to twenty days are required for the seed to germinate, the time varying according to the age of the seed and the manner in which it has been kept. Its germinating power is said to last four years, and if kept in pods until sown will grow when six or seven years old. A light warm soil, heavily charged with humus and one that will not quickly dry out, ap- pears to be the best. In May or June, or after all danger of frost is past, the plants (Fig. 2867) are set in the field in rows about 2J/£ feet apart and 18 inches apart in the rows. The ground is kept thoroughly cultivated, not only to keep down weeds but to maintain an even but not excessive moisture at all times, which is very essential for best results in growing this plant. By keeping the soil well worked up around the plants, they stand up much better against the winds and weight of their own fruit. Pruning or pinching the tip ends after the fruit begins to mature is occasionally recom- mended, but is rarely practised except when specimens of especially fine fruit are desired, in which case the fruit is thinned, leaving only a few on each plant of the larger sorts. In gathering, the fruit should not be torn off but cut with a knife or scissors, leaving at least 1 inch of stem. The usual vegetable crate is used for packing and marketing the crop. Insects rarely injure peppers growing in the field. The pepper weevil (Anthonomus eugenii) has done some damage to crops in the South. It is said to be easily 2867. Pepper plant ready to transplant to the field. kept in control by gathering and destroying infested pods. Tomato-worm, bollworm, white-fly and Colorado potato-beetle sometimes attack the plant, but seldom do noticeable injury. Red-spider and green-fly (aphis) frequently attack plants growing under glass. The red- spider may be kept in check by repeatedly syringing with water, and the green-fly may be killed by fumigating with tobacco dust. Two fungous diseases frequently occur on the large varieties growing outdoors. One is a pink anthracnose (Gloeosporium piperatum), which causes the fruit to rot about the time it begins to ripen; the other is a dark anthracnose (Colletotrichum nigrum) . In preparing peppers for table use, handle them with gloves to prevent burning the fingers. Neither soap nor water will soothe hands burned by peppers, but milk will. H. C. IRISH. PEPPER-GRASS: Lepidium. PEPPERMINT: Mentha. P. Stringy-bark: Eucalyptus piperita. PEPPER-ROOT : Dentaria diphylla. PERAPHYLLUM (from Greek, pera, excessively, and phyllon; alluding to the crowded Ivs.). Rosacese, sub- fam. Pbmese. A much-branched rigid shrub, with deciduous alternate rather small and narrow partly fascicled Ivs., white fls. similar to apple-blossoms in few-fld. upright umbels appearing with the Ivs., and berry-like edible fr. Hardy as far north as Mass., but seems to possess only little ornamental value. It is of very slow growth and blooms only when rather old. It grows in well-drained soil and in sunny position, and is best suited to be planted on rocky slopes of southern aspect. Prop, by seeds and layers and by grafting on amelanchier or cratsegus. It is closely allied to Amelan- chier, but distinguished by its nearly umbellate fls., cylindric calyx-tube, the perfectly inferior ovary, and also by its narrow Ivs. The only species is P. ramosis- simum, Nutt., a rigid shrub, 2-6 ft. high : Ivs. oblong to oblanceolate, almost sessile, entire or sparingly ser- rulate, silky pubescent when young, %-2 in. long: fls. in few-fld. erect umbel-like racemes, white or slightly tinged pink, with rose-colored disk, %in. across; petals obovate, spreading; styles 2-3, free; ovary 2- or incom- pletely 4-celled: fr. pendulous, globose, yellow with brownish cheek, about Hm- across. May. Ore. to Calif, and Colo. B.M. 7420. ALFRED REHDER. PERENNIALS tend to live from year to year, as opposed to annuals and biennials, which die root and branch after flowering and fruiting. Annuals live only one year, biennials two years. Perennials include trees, shrubs and herbs, the two former being woody, the latter not. "Perennials," as commonly used by gar- deners, is a convenient shortening of the phrase "hardy herbaceous perennials," which includes peony, phlox and other non-w9ody plants whose roots live over the winter while their tops may die to the ground. The phrase "hardy herbaceous perennials" is also shortened in common speech to "herbaceous plants;" or one speaks of the "hardy border." See Herbs and Border; also Annuals and Biennials. A popular fallacy about perennials lies in the com- mon statement that "they die down every year and come up again in the spring." Many of them never come up after two or three years of flowering; that is, perennials are not necessarily perpetual. Peonies may be as long-lived as shrubbery, and a clump of fraxinella has been known to outlive father, son, and grandson in the same spot. But these are exceptions. The general practice with perennials is to divide them every second or third year. Nearly all hardy herbaceous plants should be lifted now and then, because the crowns that give the flowers in most desirable kinds flower only two or three seasons and then die; but the plant may be continually spreading and making new growths, which LXXXVII. A branch of Pereskia aculeata, one of the leaf-bearing cacti. PERENNIALS PERFUMERY-GARDENING 2547 furnish the flowers, and, unless lifted and divided, the stocks become scattering and unattractive. Another very good reason for lifting and dividing the perennials i? that, being mostly strong-rooted plants, they deplete the soil; when shifted, they are likely to be set in a new place. PERESKIA (named for Nicolas Claude Fabry de Peiresc). Also written Peirescia, Peireskia, and Peres- da. Caciacese. Shrubs or clambering vines, grown for ornament and also for the edible fruit. Spines in the axils in the Ivs. : Ivs. alternate, broad and flat, resembling those of ordinary flowering plants: fls. wheel-shaped, more or less clustered; ovary naked or leafy: fr. juicy, sometimes edible; seeds black, thin- shelled. — Some 40 names have been given in Pereskia for species in this and related genera, but only 13 are now recognized. Only two species are very common in collections, although P. cubensis, P. amapola, and the true P. Bleo have recently been intro. acule&ta, Mill. (Cddus Pereskia, TJnn. Pereskia fdetans, Speg.). LEMON VINE. BLADE APPLE. BAB- BADOS GOOSEBEBRY. Branches woody, clambering, 10- 20 ft. long: Ivs. flat, lanceolate, 2-3 in. long, 1-2 in. broad : spines on old wood hi clusters and straight, 1-2 in. long, on young branches 2, short and curved: fls. pale yellow with pink varieties, 1-1 M in- broad: fr. lemon-colored, the size of an olive, in age smooth. Widely spread in Trop. Amer. B.M. 7147. B.R. 1928. G.C. III. 20:625. — This species is much used as stock on which to graft other species of cacti. Var. Godsef- fiina, Hart. Lvs. richly colored, when young crimson, yellow and green above. G.C. in. 43:257 (note). grandifdlia, Haw. (P. Bleo of authors, not Cactus Bleo, HBK.). Usually tall shrubs, but sometimes grow- ing as half clambering: Ivs. often large, some 5 hi. long: spines form large clusters on the old wood, usually soli- tary on young branches, straight: fls. in small clusters, purple, 1J4-2 in. broad: fr. 2 in. long, pear-shaped. Brazil, and now grown in manv warm countries. B.M. 3478. G.C. m. 20: 427. P. svbulafa, and P. spathvlata are to be excluded from Peretkia, Schumann in his Monograph of the Cactacese referred them to the genus Opuntia, but they more properly belong to the genus PeresMopsis, Brit. & Rose, which see. j_ j^ ROSE. PERESKIOPSIS (like Pereskia). Cactacese. Opuntia- like plants grown for ornament and curiosity. Trees and shrubs: sts. and branches cylindrical: Ivs. large, flat, and persistent: areoles bearing spines and glochids: fr. usually red; seeds covered with matted hairs. This genus, lately segregated from Opuntia, where recent writers have placed it, is very different from Opuntia in many ways, and resembles more closely in habit and foliage the genus Pereskia, although it is very different in fr. and seeds from that genus. — Eleven species have been recognized, of which 9 are now grown in Washington and in the New York Botani- cal Garden, although none is known in the trade. velutina, Rose. Sts. weak, forming compact bushes: branches soft, velvety: Ivs. broadlv ovate: fls. yellow. Mex. subulata, Brit. & Rose (Pereskia subulata, Muehl.). St. 2 ft. or less high, below half wood, above fleshy and branching: Ivs. persisting a few years, dark green, shiny, as thick as a pencil, about 3 in. long, half-cylin- drical and ending in a spine: areoles felted, in the young plant with a few hair-bristles, later with 2-4 straight, pale yellow spines 3-4 in. long. Mex. — Can be used as stock for epiphyllum. spathulata, Brit. & Rose (Pereskia spathvlata, Otto). St. upright, with few horizontal, spatulate, shiny green Ivs. : the diffuse areoles at first somewhat woolly, later felted, above with a bunch of short bristles, below with 1-2 yellowish white, straight spines. Mex. J. X. ROSE. PERFUMERY -GARDENING. The growing of plants commercially as a source for perfume-making. The perfumes of the market are derived in part from animal secretions (musk, civet), in part from artificial chemical compounds, and in part, and chiefly, from the class of vegetable products loosely called essential oils. "Synthetic" or chemical perfumery materials are the more or less perfect artificial reproductions of organic compounds used in perfumery. If it were possible hi all cases and with perfect success to compound these sub- stances, the production of floral perfumes would soon be at an end, as the chemical process would be sure to be cheaper than the horticultural. But nature knows how to add some touches which the chemist's art can- not imitate, and even when synthetic manufacture is possible, the result is in general regarded as a cheaper substitute. At the same tune, sentimental reasons count considerably in favor of the natural perfume, and considering, further, that some perfumes cannot well be imitated chemically, there is no present cause to apprehend the extinction, or, in view of increasing demand, even the decline, of the industry of produ- cing natural perfumery oils. The essential oils used in perfumery are secreted in different parts of the plant. The flowers are naturally thought of first, being the seat of the fragrance of the rose, violet, cassie, jasmine, tuberose, the orange in part, and numberless other plants whose perfume is extracted or only enjoyed as naturally exhaled. The oil of lavender is yielded more by the green parts of the flower-head than by the corollas. In rose geranium, thyme, wintergreen, and patchouli the foliage is the fragrant part. A number of essences are derived from woods, as those of sandalwood, red cedar, and rhodium. The ou of sweet birch comes partly from the wood, but mainly from the inner bark, and the same is true of sassafras. In the case of the latter, however, the roots only are used; in the case of the former, the young tops. Several herbaceous roots also furnish oils, as orris-root, Canada snakeroot, and sweet flag. The rinds of the orange and other citrous fruits contain important perfumery oils, and the oil of bitter almonds comes from the fermented kernel of the nut. The standard methods of extracting essential oils are four, namely, the use of mechanical means (chiefly expression), distillation, enfleurage or inflowering, and maceration. Expression appears to be applied only to the rinds of the citrous fruits. These are placed under pressure in a screw press, or sections turned wrong side out are squeezed in the fingers, the oil being taken up with a sponge, or the fruit is rubbed in a cup lined with spikes (ecuelle a piquer), the oil collecting in a hollow handle. An ecuette on a larger scale in the shape of a hollow drum has also been used. In distillation, the oil-bearing material is heated with water or subjected to hot steam, and the oil, being vola- tile, passes off with the steam. The oil would be lost if the vapor were not condensed, and this is accom- plished by passing it through a coil or equivalent arrangement of pipe kept cool by a flow of water. The condensed steam and oil fall into a "Florentine recipi- ent," a vessel with a spout coming out at the base but rising to the level of the top, so that the heavier liquid, sometimes oil, sometimes water, alone will enter it and can be poured off separately. After the water and oil have mainly separated, the water will still contain enough oil to make it highly fragrant, and in this state it goes to market as rose-water, orange- flower water, and the like, or is returned to the still to be redistilled with the next charge. The remaining two methods depend on the fact that grease has the power of absorbing essential oils. In enfleurage the grease, without heating, is spread over both surfaces of panes of glass which are set in frames (chassis), so that they can be piled one over another with spaces between. In these spaces are placed the 2548 PERFUMERY-GARDENING PERFUMERY-GARDENING flowers, the charge being renewed daily until the grease is sufficiently impregnated, when it constitutes a "pomade." "Extracts" are made by digesting the pomade in alcohol, which has a still stronger attraction for the perfume than has the grease. The alcohol must first be deodorized, to save perverting the floral per- fume, and is then known as "Cologne spirit." The grease used in this and the next process, moreover, must be freed from ah1 corruptible matter by a special process. Tallow and lard, commonly mixed, and some- times the fat of the deer and other animals, are employed. In maceration, the pomade is produced by immersing repeated charges of the flowers in melted grease or fine olive oil. In recent times, various chemical processes for extracting perfumery have been tried, apparently with some practical success; but they have not yet sup- planted the old methods. Carbon bisulfid and petro- leum ether are among the solvents employed. These methods would be less easily practised by beginners and amateurs than the ordinary ones. The art of distilling is not only not difficult to learn, but is already in practice in this country in the case of peppermint, sweet birch, sassafras, eucalyptus, and the like. More care and better apparatus would be required for distilling roses and other flowers, but the process is essentially the same. Nor do the grease pro- cesses involve any difficulties which may not be over- come by the application of a little American ingenuity and capital. In fact, the production of the raw mate- rials of perfumery might proceed almost at once, so far as the difficulty of the processes is concerned. But can we grow the requisite plants? That many of the standard perfumery plants will grow in this country needs no proof, and there is no reason to doubt that their fragrance in properly chosen localities will equal that of the same plants in the European centers. In general, success in this line must be looked for only southward, even in dealing with hardy plants, though there may be exceptions to this rule. Cool trade-winds and fogs at flowering time are to be shunned. The natural conditions in Florida and large parts of the other Gulf states seem not very dif- ferent from those of the south of France, the great center of perfumery-farming in Europe, ana in fact the feasibility of successful perfumery-farming in Florida has been demonstrated by actual trial. California has also been the scene of experiments, some of them seem- ing to promise success as soon as economic conditions admit. A large territory between these two points is available for some lines of the industry. Among the particular plants to be noticed, the citrous fruits deserve a leading place. Nearly or quite all of the trees of this group, including the sweet, the bitter or Seville, and the bergamot oranges, the sweet and sour limes, the lemon, the citron, and the shaddock, con- tain valuable perfumes either in the peel of their fruit, or in then- flowers, or in their leaves, or in more than one of these. Of the fruit-oils, that of lemon is imported into this country in largest quantity, followed by oil of bergamot, oil of orange — bitter and sweet, oil of limps and "cedrat" or citron oil, the last two in very small quantities, but the cedrat at a very high price. These oils are extracted by expression, the distilled being inferior, though it is asserted that when the "rag," or inner soft layer, is removed, the distilled oil equals the other. The oil of the bitter orange is superior to that of the sweet; the oil of bergamot is far more val- uable than either, but can rarely be had in an unadul- terated state. The flowers of the orange treated by distillation yield "neroli." The scent of neroli, how- ever, is not that of the flowers, an alteration taking place during the distillation. Orange-flower water, consisting of the condensed vapor of water with a little unchanged oil adhering, affords the true odor of the flowers. By maceration, likewise, the true floral fra- grance is obtained. The abortive flowers which fall from the trees are available for perfumery use, but the flowers are also sometimes picked, presumably with a better result. Besides the product of fruit and flowers, the leaves and young twigs pruned from the sweet and bitter oranges yield to distillation the oil of "petit grain," of considerable though minor value. There is no reason to doubt the perfumery capacity of American orange groves. Indeed it has been asserted that the orange flowers of Louisiana excel in sweetness those of foreign parts. In Los Angeles, California, something has been done toward utilizing the peel, and in Florida a beginning has been made with both peel and flowers, but for the most part these resources are at present suffered to go to waste. The lemon verbena, Lippia citriodora (Fig. 2868), may be mentioned in passing as furnishing an attrac- tive perfume of the citrous order, and as available at least in Florida and California. The perfumery products of the rose and its allies merit next attention. The value of the importation of attar of roses — to say nothing of rose perfume in other forms — exceeds that of any single citrous perfume, and at the same time the capacity of this country for pro- ducing this and the other rose perfumes can scarcely be called in question. The present supply of the Euro- pean and American markets is derived chiefly from Turkey and from the perfumery region of the south of France. The attar or oil of roses is produced most largely in Bulgaria and parts of other Balkan states as well as in Asiatic Turkey, principally from the damask rose, which may be taken as a form of Rosa gallica. A white-flowered rose, R. alba, is much grown in the more exposed situations, as it is considered hardier than the red-flowered damask rose. It is very free in bloom and productive of oil, which is, however, inferior in quality. The attar is obtained by distillation, which is there conducted in a crude manner. In the Grasse district (southern France), the rose-water, obtained as explained above, is considered to yield more profit than the attar, which is rather regarded as a by-product of the dis- tillation. But the best rose perfumes hi France are extracted by maceration, finishing with enfleurage, processes that secure the true rose odor, which is not altogether represented by attar or rose-water. Rose pomade and its alcoholic extract are perhaps the finest of rose products. What is known as the Provence rose, a hybrid or variety of Rosa centifolia, the type to which the cabbage or hundred-leaf rose of old gardens and the moss roses belong, is almost exclusively used in France and also in Germany, where a limited quantity of very fine attar is produced. The centifolia and gallica varieties of perfume roses, as weh1 as a hybrid of Rosa rugosa under the name of Rose Parfum de L'Hay, have been tried in this country with encouraging results as far as facility of culture, quantity, and quality of perfume-content are con- cerned, but the economic possibilities of rose-culture here for this purpose are far from being worked out at this tune. These varieties are all quite hardy and may, without doubt, successfully be grown over a vast extent of country, though for practical perfume-pro- duction the warmer climates, coupled with abundant summer moisture, seem to be needed. Deep fertile and retentive but well-drained clay or loam soils are best adapted for rose-culture, and these may be had hi abundance in the Southern and Middle Atlantic states, where the future rose industry of the United States, when it becomes a commercial possibility, may be expected to develop. The luxuriant growth of roses on the Pacific Coast has long attracted attention, but exuberant vegetation does not always imply a rich perfumery-content, and there is a suspicion that the cool fogs of the coast and the hot aridity of the interior PERFUMERY-GARDENING PERFUMERY-GARDENING 2549 valleys of the Pacific States do not favor perfume- production, however stimulating local conditions may be to vegetative growth; but direct experiments in this connection appear to be lacking. The centifolia and gallica roses have practically but one season of bloom in this country. They are covered with flowers in May or June, according to the latitude in which they are grown, producing only occasional blooms in the' fall, the gallicas being most free in this respect; but the hybrid with R. rugosa has a long bloom- ing season, with repeated crops coming on in late sum- mer and autumn. This peculiarity might be of advan- tage in localities where labor is scarce, as a smaller force of workers could care for the same amount of bloom developing over a longer season. The perfume of the hybrid rugosa is of the most exquisite quality and the yield somewhat greater than of the older types of perfume roses, but there is greater difficulty of propagation, as rugosa varieties are increased only by budding or grafting, while the centifolias and gallicas are freely propagated by means of layers or cuttings. the main question being that of efficient labor for promptly collecting the blooms during the relatively short productive season. It requires in this country, as abroad, fully 3,000 pounds of fresh rose petals to produce a pound of oil, valued at the present tune at $125, or more if of really high quality. The value of the rose-water represented by this amount of oil would be considerably greater. The oil distilled from the green parts of the common rose geraniums, Pelargonium capitatum (?) and P. Radida, resembles in fragrance the oil of roses and is largely used as a substitute for it. Although generally not sold at retail under its own name, it is in itself a legitimate perfume, and its production should be under- taken in this country — only, however, in the South, where the long season admits of three crops of leaves and where the stumps with the soil heaped around them will survive the winter. The largest crop is to be had on rich lowland, but the finest quality is produced on drier and less fertile ground. In France, it is now grown mainly on irrigated land, but the product has to be ameliorated by the admixture of oil from drier loca- tions. The rose geranium is largely grown in Algeria, and in Spain, Sicily, and so on, as well as in France. 2868. Perfumery plants : Iris florentina, Jasminum grandiflorum, Lippia citriodora. The production of high-quality rose-water, rather than attar, appears Likely to be more profitable in this country, as the latter requires repeated distillations, or washing out by ether and subsequent evaporation of the menstruum, and realizes a relatively less price in market on account of competition with adulterated imported oils and synthetic imitations. The type of rose bloom best suited for perfume pur- poses is semi-double, with large, thick petals that can easily be collected, rather than the more showy varie- ties with full disks of shorter petals so crowded that they hide the pistils. Many of the latter varieties possess exquisite fragrance and possibly a satisfactory oil-content, but are seldom sufficiently vigorous or free in bloom to offset the added difficulty of manipula- tion. In a field trial of "Princess Bonnie," one of the most fragrant of American-raised hybrid tea roses, not enough blooms could be collected at a given time for a practical distillation. New varieties will be de- veloped especially adapted to the purpose as interest in rose-perfume production increases, and those with peculiarly attractive odors may become available for the grease process, when not altogether suited for distillation. The culture of perfume roses and the extraction of their fragrance present no difficulties to American skill, Geranium oil, in turn, has its substitutes, among which the oil of lemon-grass from India is conspicuous. The European sweet violet, Viola odorata, affords the finest example of a favorite type of odors quite different from the citrine and the rose. The oil of the violet itself is necessarily so expensive as to be little used. The large amount of flowers required and the amount of hand labor necessary for gathering such small flowers, each growing on a separate stem, are apparently insurmountable obstacles to the extensive use of true oil of violet. Still it may be presumed that there will permanently be a class of buyers willing to pay the necessary cost of so choice a perfume. The violet yields its full fragrance only southward, but it must be grown in partial shade. When labor conditions admit, true violet perfume may be produced in Cali- fornia and in the South. An expert grower of violets has even thought that they might be grown under glass for this purpose. Of the same general type and in some wise a substi- tute for violet perfume, is that of Acacia Farnesiana, the "cassie" of the French, known in the South as "opopanax." The small yellow balls of flowers are treated by the grease processes, particularly macera- tion. While not ranked so high as violet, the perfume is in entirely good standing and produced in large 2550 PERFUMERY-GARDENING PERFUMERY-GARDENING quantities. The flowers, dried with proper care, have a market value for sachets. The opopanax tree grows freely in Florida, is apparently native in Texas, and is suited to the climate of Arizona and southern Cali- fornia. The labor of picking the flowers would be some- what expensive. Several other acacias are eligible for perfumery use. To the same group belongs the perfume of orris- or iris-root. It is afforded by the rootstocks of three spe- cies of iris, formerly gathered wild and now cultivated near Florence and at other points in Italy. The species are Iris germanica (Fig. 1968, Vol. Ill), /. pallida, and I. florentina (Fig. 2868), the first of these being our com- mon garden iris, with deep blue flowers, the second a paler-flowered species, the third having white flowers. High authority affirms that the use of the first two spe- cies is only a falsification, and, in fact, that the root of 7. germanica causes serious inflammations. It is certain that the first two are extensively grown; but 7. floren- tina alone appears to be much used for distillation. When cultivated, the iris is generally propagated by root-division, the cuttings being placed for the first year in a nursery, afterward set in rows a foot apart. It is grown in stony dry soils on hillsides or mountains. The crop is gathered once in two or three years. The cuticle is scraped from the root, which after being dried in the sun is stored in a dry place for the development of its fragrance. This is wanting in the fresh root, and does not reach its maximum under three years. When distilled, the root yields "orris butter," but it is more largely used in the form of an alcoholic tincture or ground up for sachets. There is no reason why orris- root should not be grown in many parts of this coun- try, but the returns at present are not large. Another important group of perfumery plants con- sists of several members of the mint family. Pepper- mint and spearmint (Fig. 2359, Vol. IV) can hardly be placed in the perfumery class, but lavender, thyme, and rosemary could not easily be spared from the per- fumer's resources. Lavender is native on dry slopes in the Mediterranean region, and the oil is most largely produced in the region of the maritime Alps. The plant has been introduced, however, into some of the southern counties of England (Mitcham and Hitchin being the centers), and found to produce there an oil which has commonly been regarded as far superior to the French, and at any rate is different in kind (see Menthd). The English lavender is grown in light and well-drained calcareous soils. In well-drained ground, lavender will bear some cold, especially if protected, but profit can- not be looked for far north. Lavender of the French type may be expected to succeed in California out of the reach of the trade-winds, and may perhaps not require irrigation. There are shallow calcareous soils in the ''black belt" of the Gulf States which might per- haps yield an oil like the English, and the same may be true of some tracts northward on the Pacific slope. Lavender is treated by distillation, and it is said in England that direct contact with the water yields better results than the application of dry steam. (See, also, Lavandida.) Thyme (chiefly the garden thyme, Thymus vulgaris) furnishes a perfume particularly suited to soaps and imported into this country in large quantities. Rose- mary has a stimulating property and is an essential ingredient in Cologne water. Both of these could quite possibly be grown, say in California, but might not be able to compete well with the spontaneous product of Europe. Some notice should be taken, too, of the rather hum- ble group of odorous plants belonging to the parsley family, including anise, caraway, and fennel. Not only are the oils of these three (chiefly anise) largely imported but also their seeds (chiefly caraway). Caraway runs wild northerly, fennel has established itself on the lower Potomac, and anise could doubtless be grown, but there is no reason to expect large profits from these plants. There are several plants deserving consideration which do not fall into any of these groups. One is the jasmine (Jasminum grandiflorum and J . Sambac) (Fig. 2868). This furnishes almost the only odor which cannot be imitated by combinations of others. The oil of jasmine is very valuable. The plants can be grown in our warmest regions. The tuberose furnishes another choice perfume and has been very successfully grown for the purpose in Florida and South Carolina. (See Polianthes.) The heliotrope (Fig. 1801, Vol. Ill), jonquil (Fig. 2448, Vol. IV), and mignonette are also to be named. Of a quite different scent from any of these is the oil of bitter almond, so important for fine soaps. This so-called oil is a poisonous compound formed in the process of fermenting the cake of the kernels from which the fixed oil has been expressed. Its production should be considered in our almond-growing regions, especially California. Several tropical grasses of the genus Cymbopogon, including Cymbopogon Schoenanthus, which yields the previously mentioned lemon-grass oil, are of easy cul- ture in Florida and the Gulf States generally, and doubtless will be largely used in the future for the pro- duction of fragrant oils having a wide range of useful- ness, especially in the form of combinations for scent- ing soaps. Those best known are vetiver, Vetiveria zizanioides, citronella, C. Nardus and the true lemon- grass, C. dtratus, not possessing the geranium-like odor found in C. Schoenanthus. With the exception of veti- ver, which contains the fragrant principle in the roots, the leaves and flowering parts of the Cymbopogon grasses are used for distillation. Of our native growths there are some which are already utilized as the source of scenting materials. The root of sassafras is or has been distilled in Pennsylvania, Maryland, and Virginia, and in other northern states, and sparingly southward. Wintergreen, Gaultheria pro- cumbens, is distilled in small quantity in several eastern states, but has very largely given place to sweet or cherry birch, Betula lento,, which yields a similar oil with less expense. The wood of the red cedar, Juniperus virginiana, has long been distilled in Germany, and latterly in this country. It furnishes a finer cedar-of- Lebanon perfume than the cedar of Lebanon itself. Three native plants representing respectively the thyme-like and citrine odors, — widely known as weeds but amenable to cultivation over a great extent of country, — are wild bergamot, Monarda punctata, moun- tain mint, Pycnanthemum albescens and Canada flea- bane, Erigeron canadense. The first two yield oils use- ful for soaps as well as for the production of thymol, now a valued medicament, while the latter contains a high percentage of limonene that may largely displace turpentine in the manufacture of agreeable varnishes for inside uses. The root of the wild ginger or Canada snakeroot, Asarwn canadense, yields a fragrant oil quoted in market reports, and said to be used especially for strengthening other perfumes. The sweet goldenrod, Solidago odora, furnishes an oil which has a market standing. The rich odor of the yellow jessamine of the South has been successfully extracted in Florida. The common market perfume of magnolia is doubtless mostly or entirely an imitation, and the same is proba- bly true of Clethra alnifolia perfume. The great mag- nolia, Magnolia grandiflora, abounds in the South, but its flowers might be difficult to secure in quantity. Clethra is abundant enough in the Atlantic Coast region, but some difficulty might be experienced with it owing to the fact that only a part of the flowers in the raceme open at one time. The flowers of the swamp magnolia or sweet bay, Magnolia virginiana or M. glauca (Fig. 2298, Vol. IV), should be tried. The spice bush, Benzoin xstivale, affords several scents. The sweet PERFUMERY-GARDENING PERGOLA 2551 and copious bloom of Rhododendron arborescens in the southern mountains has been suggested for treatment. It L« to be feared that the delicious odor of the native crab-apples would be too expensive, considering the difficulty of collecting enough petals. The bloom of the wild grape might well be thought of. Many of our plants — these are only examples — will eventually be tried and a few will be found steadily valuable. It is useless to expect commercial success with small and scanty-flowered plants like trailing arbutus, Epigsea repens, however pleasing in their natural state. The production of perfumery oils may be conducted on large farms by capitalists; or a central establish- ment may contract with individuals for flowers, and other materials; or the business may be conducted cooperatively; or individuals may operate on a small scale in connection with other lines of farming. Some competent women to whom other avenues are closed may find this work available and congenial. Intending experimenters should seek further informa- tion in one or more of the books which are before the public. With regard to methods of extraction, Asian- son's ''Perfumes and Their Preparation" may be con- fident! y recommended. Sawer's "Odorographia" (espe- cially the first series) is valuable both to the extractor and the grower. Piesse's "Art of Perfumery" will also be found useful on both sides of the subject. Gilde- meister and Hoffman's ''Volatile Oils" is also very valuable. Also consult E. S. Steele's article on "Per- fumery-Gardening" in the Yearbook of the United States' Department of Agriculture for 1898. Vol. XXII, part 2, of the Journal of the Royal Horticultural Soci- ety (London, 1898) contains a list of perfumes and plants that yield them, and also a list of books on perfumes. E. S. STEELE. W. VAN FLEET.! PERGOLA. The word "pergola" closely interprets its original meaning: from the Latin "pergula," a projecting roof, shed, or vine arbor, from "pergere," to reach forward or project; and from the Italian "pergola," a grape which remains upon its trellis all winter. From this derivation and use of the word, it will readily be seen how the term has become one of common usage in modern garden design, rightly or wrongly to designate almost any type of arbor or vine- support in the present-day garden. In order to under- stand the purer and less general meaning of the word, the garden vine-supports may be divided into two kinds or types: (1) treillages, decorative or otherwise, which may broadly be considered as designed in one simple geometric plane, perpendicular to the garden, their dimensions, height, and length being determined only by their use and detail design; and (2) pergolas and arbors, designed or planned in three planes, having height, length, and breadth, and, in brief, being archi- tecturally conceived tunnels over which vines are- trained or grown, the arbor and the pergola differing only in the detail of their design. The pergola is invariably flat-topped, its semi-open roof being formed either by rustic poles or timbers of varying size, laid at right angles to the length of the structure, or by similarly laid but regularly spaced rafters or timbers of definite size and cut, this partially open roof being supported in either case by posts or columns of an architectural character equally and oppositely spaced. In simpler description, the pergola is a horizontal vine-support raised upon piers or columns, each of the latter standing free and independent of the other, the vines being encouraged to lie flat over its top. The arbor, in distinction from the pergola, is, in its simplest form, a treillage or vine-support of a skele- tonized form, with sides and top generally alike, its top, or roof, being flat or curved as its design may determine. In detail, its construction consists usually of regularly and oppositely spaced wooden posts sup- 162 porting not over-thick strips and rails of the same material, these extending horizontally. Other material than wood is often used in arbor-construction, but the design and character remain generally the same, — a skeletonized tunnel for the support and training of vines over its entire surface. Therefore, while similar in origin and use in the garden, the pergola and the arbor must not be confused in their character and design. The arbor is, in fact, a development of the even earlier-used pergola, which in medieval gardening often became the pleached alley (or alle€), and in the early French and English gardens the very decorative and often complicated tunnel or gallery of treillage. The pergola is numbered among the oldest pieces of garden architecture extant. The Egyptian used it as a covered walk from one part of his domicile to another, or to his garden house; Pompeii and ancient Rome prove its constant use, Vitruvius, describing the garden attached to the villa of Diomedes, saying, "behind the fish pond ornamented by a fountain, there was a plat- form over which vines were trained on a wooden frame- work supported upon six columns of stucco. " In Italy, the pergola can be traced through the various transitions of the Italian gardens from those of earl}' imperial times through the medieval, to the architectural or formal gardens of the Renaissance and today. In the great medieval period, the pergola and the cloister were often synonomous in use, differing only in the material of their construction, the latter being largely the outgrowth and development of the former. As early as the begin- ning of the fifteenth century, the pergola was in com- mon use in France, being found not only in the mag- nificent gardens of the kings, but as a feature of the smallest town gardens of Paris. Riat, in his most authentic garden history, "I/ Art des Jardins," care- fully notes and describes the use of the pergola at this time; Hill, one of the earliest of English writers on gardening, in his "Gardener's Labyrinth," published about the middle of the sixteenth century, claims the pergola to be "so winded that the branches of the vine, melon, or cucumber, running or spreading all over, might shadow and keep both the heat and the sun from the sitter there under, and offer him cool and shaded passage." William Herman, in his "Vulgaria," published in 1519, tells us that "alleys in gardens, covered with vines, do great pleasure with the shadow in parch j-nge heat, and clusters of grapis maketh a pleasant walkynge alley." Thus, in brief, it will be seen that the pergola and its close kin, the arbor, have been used in all time and manner of gardening, the earlier English colonists bringing both to America, where their popularity, especially of late, has been so great as often to cause their degeneration in design and misconception in use. There is no decorative or useful feature in the garden scheme which has been more inadvisedly used than the pergola. Like our gardening, which has naturally become composite and therefore often impure in taste, so the pergola has become subjected to all manner of diversity in use, material, and design. It can be made an excellent motif and component of a good garden scheme, if properly and carefully considered. Its value is not as a mere floating incident, untied and non- related to some stronger element or to the frame of the garden. It must be given a "tying-together" or cor- ridor value in order best to serve and express its use. The garden should be designed in a manner to call for its use as a covered passage between the house and the garden entrance; or to connect one garden, or part of a garden, with another; or to separate garden from garden, offering substitute for the wall, hedges, or lattice, which might otherwise be used; or allowed to enframe or terminate the garden, a situation in which it may often be used to fine advantage either alone or in combination with a garden house or shelter; but it should not be so designed and placed as to serve merely 2552 PERGOLA PERICOME as an isolated decorative garden feature. For such loca- tion and use there is the garden shelter, the tea-house, the pavilion, the seat, and various exedra, far more suitable. As is generally the case with all decorative garden motifs, the design and material of the pergola should be in strict harmony with its more important and control- ling architectural surroundings. This does not mean, nor does it necessarily follow, that the material of the pergola should be like that of the house, garden wall, or other more or less important adjacent architectural features; but it does mean that its architectural char- acter or style, design, and scale, must be determined and dominated by that common to the entire problem, and its material be in harmony or at least reflective. The designer or builder is safest when he considers not only his pergola but all of the architectural features of the garden as details, the character of which are to be largely determined by, or closely interrelated with, the architectural treatment of the garden and its environ- ment as a whole. Materials and minor methods of • COHMtCTINS • ttou/t A«O GAXDE.H TYPICAL • WOOD CCX.UMN PERGOLA (As. a* Toulknep Form (finish Entire G«rden 2869. Pergolas. — Various architectural forms; also diagrams of proportions in A to E. expression may vary with personal taste, but archi- tectural period and style cannot, for with a lack of appreciation of the proper architectural relation between the interrelated parts of a garden comes a breaking down of one of the most important principles of garden or other composition, namely unity of idea. While, of course, there can be no rules governing the dimensions of pergolas, the relation of width to height is most important, as is the relation of height to length. The scale may be either human or relative. The width of a pergola or arbor, however, is seemingly best when slightly greater than its height, for if less it will appear stilted and in poor proportion. From diagrams A to E in Fig. 2869, it will readily be seen that (A), showing a proportion of 4 to 3 is less pleasing than (B), 4 to 4, or even (C), 4 to 5. When the width increases noticeably over the height, as in (D) 4 to 6, or (E) 4 to 7, there is a resultant weakening in propor- tion. As for length, this of course is determined by the individual problem, but in no case should the length be merely equal to, or less than, the width or height. In summary, the dimen- sion of the pergola should produce a form of suffi- ciently dominant and pleasing horizontal and perpendicular dimensions to produce a satisfactory feeling of stability and repose. In regard to plant ma- terials used in connection with pergolas, the effect sought is that the pergola shall count as a support for vines; the variety and kind of growth, however, must naturally be deter- mined by the exigencies of the particular case. Vines of fine and delicate foli- age, flower, and fruit are better suited to the deli- cate arbor or treillage, and the larger-leaved, more heavily fruited vines to the architecturally stronger and coarser pergola. Also, vines with coarse and woody stems, such as the wistaria, the grape, the bittersweet and the like, are better adapted to the true use of the pergola, as a rack upon which vines lie, not a treillage or sup- port up which they climb or against which they are trained. BRYANT FLEMING. PERICOME (from the Greek for around, and tuft, from the tuft of hairs around the achene). Com- pdsitse. A small group of hardy perennials grown for their golden yellow conspicuous flowers. Strong-scented much- branched herbs with long- ITALY TYPt • acuminate lys. and numer- "PtRGOLA- ous heads in a terminal corymbiform cyme : in- volucral bracts slightly connected by their edges,. PERICOME PERISTERIA 2553 thus forming a bell-shaped cup: disk-fis. sticky, the anthers much exserted: achenes villous and ciliate. — There are only 2 known species, both of W. N. Amer. The genus is of little horticultural importance and is offered only by dealers in western native plants. The showy golden yellow fls. are not unattractive. caudata, Gray. Lvs. opposite, long-petioled, triangu- lar-hastate with crenate or entire margins, the apex and sometimes the basal lobes long, caudate-acuminate: heads many, the fls. conspicuously longer than the involucre. Rocky canons in the mountains, Colo, to New Mex. and Ariz. — Useful in dry or exposed places. N. TAYLOR. PERILLA (said to be a native name in India; by others, a Greek and Latin proper name). Labiates. Herbs, one of which is sometimes grown for the col- ored foliage. Erect, with opposite Ivs. and small fls. in whorls of 2 that are aggregated into axillary and terminal simple or panicled racemes: calyx bell-shaped, 5-toothed, much enlarged and gibbous in fr.; corolla short-tubed, the tube not exceeding calyx, limb oblique and somewhat unequally 5-lobed; stamens 4, erect and separate; disk represented by a large gland; style 2-parted. — Two or 3 species, Himalaya region to China and Japan. The plant known in gardens as P. nankinensis is distinct by the color of its foliage. The Ivs. are a dark wine-purple, with a bronzy luster. These colors are more or less toned with green, especially in young plants. It is an annual herb, growing about 1^ ft- high. It is con- siderably used in subtropical beds and for the back of ribbon borders. It is sometimes planted next to a dusty miller or other white-lvd. plants for the sake of contrast. The foliage has an odor suggesting cinnamon. In Japan the perilla is of economic importance for the production of oil. Perillas need a sunny or at least half-sunny position. They thrive under the treatment given half-hardy annuals. Sow the seeds thinly and cover nearly an inch. Avoid planting too closely; leggy specimens are unat- tractive, and the plant has a tendency to become weedy. The flowers are inconspicuous and produced in autumn. Before the introduction of the coleus, this plant was much used as an ornamental flower-garden plant, but in our warmer summers it is displaced by the more brilliantly colored and free-growing forms of that plant. frutescens, Brit. (Ocimum frutescens, Linn. P. ocymmdes, Linn. Mentha perilloides, Willd.). The typical form has Ivs. green on both sides and is worth- less for gardens. Annual : Ivs. opposite, rarely speckled with brownish purple, only slightly wrinkled, base wedge-shaped or narrow; bkde broadly ovate or round- ish, pointed or blunt, hairy or not, dentate or variously cut at the margin. In the wild, it is a coarse often shaggy plant, 2-4 ft. high, with Ivs. 3-6 in. long, petioles 1-3 in. long: racemes 3-8 in. long; corolla white or red- dish, 2 lines long; fruiting calyx about J^in. long. Himalayas, Burma, China, Japan. B.M. 2395. — Sparingly run wild. Following are new combinations. Var. nankinensis, Bailey (P. nankinensis, Decne. P. ocymmdes var. nankinensis, Voss). Slightly hairy, rarely glabrous: Ivs. dark purple-brown, with a bronzy luster; base wedge-shaped (rounded in strong-growing specimens); blade ovate, acute, coarsely and deeply saw-toothed, margin wavy. Seedlings are sometimes green. R.H. 1852:60; 1879, p. 272. Forms of this variety are: (1) Var. laciniata, Bailey (P. laciniata, Hort. P. nankinensis foliis atropurpureis lacinidtis, Hort.), has Ivs. cut nearly to the middle, foliage undulate, wrinkled or crisped. Colors said to be more intense. Intro, about 1872. P.O. 2:77. (2) macrophylla, Bailey (P. nankinensis macrophylla compdcta, Hort.), is a large-lvd. form characterized by its almost "bell- shaped" form. The Ivs. are wavy-fringed. Habit com- pact. (3) Var. elatior, Bailey (P. nankinensis macrophylla eldtior, Hort. Benary) , is a taller form of var. macrophylla. (4) Var. variegata, Bailey (P. nankinensis foliis varie- gdtis, Hort.), differs in having the foliage spotted with white. (5) Var. microphylla, Bailey (P. nankinensis microphytta nigricans, Hort.), is a small-lvd. form intro. about 1899. WILHELM MILLER L. H. B.f PERIPLOCA (Greek, around, and to twine; alluding to the twining habit). Asclepiadacex. Ornamental vines grown for the handsome glossy foliage and the fragrant flowers appearing in summer. Twining or upright decidu- ous or evergreen shrubs, glabrous, with milky juice: Ivs. opposite, entire, without stipules: fls. in axillary or terminal cymes; calyx 5- lobed; corolla 5-parted, bear- ing inside at the base a 5- or IWobed crown; stamens 5, with very short filaments and with the anthers connected at the apex and villous; style short, with broad stigma: fr. consisting of 2 follicles, con- taining numerous, small, winged seeds. — About 12 species from S. Eu. to Trop. Afr., China and E. India. The periplocas in cultiva- tion have dark green and glossy leaves and dull-colored fragrant flowers followed by long and slender pods. P. sepium has proved perfectly hardy as far north as Mas- sachusetts and P. grseca is hardy north to New York, and can be grown even in Canada when trailing on the ground and somewhat protected during the winter. They thrive in any well- drained soil and prefer sunny positions; they are well suited for covering arbors, trelliswork and trunks of trees. Propagation is by seeds or by greenwood cut- tings hi summer under glass; also by layers. graeca, Linn. SILK-VINE. Deciduous shrub, twi- ning to 40 ft. : Ivs. petioled, ovate to oblong-lanceolate, acuminate, dark green and glossy above, 13^-^t in. long and 1-2 hi. broad: fls. hi loose, long-peduncled cymes, brownish purple inside, greenish at the margin and outside, 1 hi. across; corolla-lobes oblong, spreading, villous; crown with 5 slender thread-like incurved gla- brous appendages: follicles narrow, about 4 in. long. July, Aug. S. Eu., W. Asia. B.M. 2289. B.R. 803. L.B.C. 14:1389. Gn. 34, p. 78.— A vigorous and high- grqwing climber with handsome dark green and shining foliage remaining unchanged until late hi fall. Under the name of P. angustifolia a narrow-lvd. form is some- tunes cult., which is P. graeca var. angustifolia, Jag. The true P. angustifolia, Labill., is synonymous with P. Isevigata, Ait., from the Canary Isls. and N. Afr., with persistent Ivs. and pubescent appendages of the crown. sepium, Bunge. Fig. 2870. Lower and slenderer than the preceding species: Ivs. lanceolate, long-acumi- nate, dark green and glossy above, paler beneath, 2- 3H in. long and J^-%in. broad: fls. hi few-fid, cymes, similar to those of the preceding species, but smaller, about Min. across and with revolute corolla-lobes: fol- licles 4-5 hi. long. June, July. N. China. ALFRED REHDER. PERISTERIA (Greek, dove, from the form of the column and wings). Orchidacex. A group of stately South American pseudobulbous wannhouse orchids. Leaves large, plicate, unfolding successively: fl.- 2870. Periploca sepium. 2554 PERISTERIA PERISTROPHE spikes tall, erect or hanging; fls. nearly globular or cup- shaped, of a waxy texture, with broad concave segms. The genus is distinguished from the related genera Acineta, Lacaena, Gongora, and the like, by the curious shape of the labellum and column. The base of the labellum (hypochil) is united with the column by broad wings (pleuridia). The upper part of the labellum (epichil) is mov- ably joined to the hypo- chil.— Five species, of which 2 are commonly cult. The chief factors in growing peristerias are moisture during the grow- ing period, the ideal loca- tion being in proximity to water, in a temperature of 65° to 70° F., and a decided rest when growth is completed. The grow- ing medium should consist of two-thirds fibrous sod soil and one-third peat and sand, an addition of dried cow-manure being beneficial. The pots should be well supplied with drainage. When the plant is growing freely, water occasionally with organic fertilizer until the growth is completed. Then reduce the water-supply to induce flowering when the young growth appears. An ex- cellent specimen of P. elata in the Missouri Botanical Garden recently produced a flower-spike 3 feet 6 inches high and produced twenty well-formed flow- ers. From the first ap- pearance of the spike until the last flower opened, covered a period of three and a half months. This noteworthy specimen was grown over a tank of water, hi a house of miscellaneous warmhouse plants, and organic manure was given freely during growth. The plant, was then transferred to the cactus house to rest, enough water was given to prevent shriveling of the pseudobulbs, until the young growth appeared bearing a well-formed flower-spike: it was again transferred to its former position and watered freely to develop the spike. (G. H. Pring.) elata, Hook. DOVE-FLOWER. HOLY-GHOST-FLOWER. Fig. 2871. Pseudobulbs 4-5 in. high, bearing several strongly veined Ivs. 2-3 ft. high: fl.-st. 3-4 ft. high; fls. in a raceme covering about one-third the length of the fl. -stalk, cup-shaped, creamy white, wax-like and fragrant, 2 in. across; sepals broadly ovate to rotund; petals more delicate; labellum fleshy, broadly obovate, truncate, sprinkled with deep purple; column with large, curious wings, supposed to bear resemblance to a dove. June-Sept. Panama. B.M. 3116. Gng. 5:151. V. 8:163. Gn. 12, p. 153; 30, p. 574; 42, p. 324. R.H. 1876, p. 133; 1877:110.— The labellum and wings of the column are sometimes spotted with purple. Intro, into cult, in 1826. pendula, Hook. Pseudobulbs ovate-oblong, 4-5 in. high, bearing lanceolate, strongly veined Ivs.: scape 2871. Peristeria elata.— Holy Ghost plant. (Flower pendulous, from the base of the pseudobulb, bearing as many as 20 fls.; fls. globular in outline, 1H in. across, fragrant, greenish white outside, tinged with rose and thickly dotted with purple within; sepals roundish con- cave, united at base; petals rather smaller; labellum fleshy, curiously shaped, inclosed within the fl. Guiana. B.M. 3479. G.C. II. 25:116.— Requires tropical treat- ment, but rarely flowers in cult. cerina, Lindl. Pseudobulbs oblong-ovoid, up to 3 in. long, 3-4-lvd.: Ivs. oblong-lanceolate, up to 1 ft. long: scape pendulous, short, bearing a dense raceme of 6-10 fls.; fls. about 1 in. across, pale lemon-yellow, waxy; sepals and petals broadly ovate, concave; lip 3-lobed, the acute lateral lobes ovate, the midlobe emarginate, inflexed, the margin crisped. Cent. Amer. B.R. 1953. P. dspera, Rolfe. Pseudobulbs ovoid-oblong: racemes dense, 8-10-fld.; fls. light brownish yellow, densely spotted with reddish brown, the front lobe of lip brownish crimson; sepals and petals elliptic-oblong, obtusish. Venezuela. L. 267. — P. Hiimboldtii, LindL =Acineta. GEORGE V. NASH.f PERISTROPHE (Greek, peri, around, and strophos, belt; alluding to the involucre). Acanthaceas. Green- house plants, grown for the bloom. Erect, branched or loosely creeping herbs or half- shrubby: Ivs. entire: fls. solitary or in clusters of 2-3 surrounded by an involucre, in loose cymes or cymose panicles, or distant on slender branches; bracts of the involucre narrow; calyx deeply 5-parted, shorter than the bracts, scariose or hyaline; corolla-tube long, slen- der, slightly enlarged above, limb deeply bilabiate, the posterior lip narrow, erect, concave, entire or emargi- nate, lower lip spreading, apex 3-parted; stamens 2, a little shorter than the corolla-lips; anthers 2-celled; sterile stamens none; style filiform: caps, oblong, con- tracted into a solid stalk. — About 15 species, ranging from Trop. Afr. and India to the Malay Isls., Philip- pines, and Austral. The plants are cultivated like jacobinias or justicias, of the same family. Cuttings taken at any tune when the wood is soft will root in a warm bed in three to four weeks, after which the potted plants may be removed to a house of lower temperature. They require a rich loam mixed with some leaf-mold, and plenty of air. speciSsa, Nees (Justicia speciosa, Roxbg.). Fig. 2872. The plant erect, spreading and branched, be- coming 2-3 ft. high: Ivs. oppo- site, petiqled, ovate - acuminate, smooth: fls. in clusters of 2-3 on slender branches, violet-purple, 1% in. long. Blooms for a long period in winter. India. B. M. 2722. L.B.C. 20:1915. B. 2:74. Gn. 73, p. 42.— A pot-plant of bushy compact habit when well grown. Good for the window. Usu- ally thrives best in partial shade. angustifolia, Nees. Plant low, erect, very much branched : 2872. Peristrophe speciosa. ( x Yd PERISTROPHE branches nearly horizontal, pubescent above: Ivs. lanceolate, pointed at both ends: fls. sparse, in terminal cymes, rose-colored. Flowers freely. Java. Var. afcrea variegata, Hort.. has the center of the Ivs. variegated with yellow. Useful for vases and baskets. HEIXRICH HASSELBRTNG. PERIWINKLE: Vinca. PERNETTYA (after A. J. Pernetty, 1716-1801; he accompanied Bougainville on his voyage and wrote "A Voyage to the Falkland Islands"). Ericaceae. Orna- mental plants grown chiefly for their attractive vari- ously colored and profusely produced berries, also for their neat evergreen foliage and white or pinkish flowers. Evergreen shrubs: Ivs. alternate, short-petioled, small, usually serrate: fls. axillary, usually solitary on slender nodding pedicels, rarely in racemes; calyx 5-parted; corolla urceolate, with short 5-lobed limb; stamens 10, the anthers 4-awned at the apex: fr. a 5-celled many-seeded berry. — About 25 species from Mex. to the Magellan region, mostly in the mountains, and 1 species in Tasmania and New Zeal. Allied to Gaultheria, but the calyx not enlarged and rarely fleshy after flowering. The pernettyas are low much-branched shrubs with dense and small evergreen leaves and small nodding flowers, followed by very decorative berries van-ing in color from white to" purplish black or bluish black and remaining on the branches all winter. These exceed- ingly pretty shrubs are great favorites in England, but are little known in this country. P. mucronata and P. angustifolia. the hardiest, are probably hardy in sheltered positions as far north as New York. They are well suited for rockeries and borders of evergreen shrub- beries and also make very handsome pot-plants. They grow best in a peaty and porous moderate!}- moist soil and prefer sunny positions, but seem to grow almost as well in any other well-drained soil; in shade they will not fruit so profusely as in the full sun. Propagation is by seeds or by cuttings of half -ripened wood in sum- mer under glass; also by means of layers and suckers, mucronata, Gaud. (Arbutus mucronatus, Linn. f.). Much-branched shrub, to 2 ft., with glabrous or spar- ingly hairy branches: Ivs. almost 2-ranked, ovate to ovate-oblong, spiny-pointed, serrate, dark green and shining above, glabrous, H~^tm- long: fls. solitary, nodding, globose-ovoid, white or slightly tinged pink, about Vs'in. long, on pedicels 2-3 times as long as the fl.; stamens longer than the ovary: fr. white to dark purple, H~/^m- across, red in the typical form. May, June. Magellan region to Chile. "B.M. 3093; 8023. B.R. 1695. L.B.C. 19:1848. Gn. 23:389; 59, p. 41. Gt. 34, p. 214. G.M. 40:811. M.D.G. 1898:397.— Many varieties (P. hybrida, Zabel), partly originated by hybridizing with the following species are cult, in English and Dutch nurseries, mostly differing in the color of the fr., which is usually indicated by the name of the variety, as vars. alba," atropurpurea, coccinea F.M. 1879:339), lilacina (F.M. 1879:339), nigra, purpurea F.M. 1879:339), rosea, sanguinea, Hort. Also P.Drummondii,P.Cummingii, P.speciosa, P.flari- bunda (G.C. II. 18:649 and III. 28:465) belong here. P. mucronata and its varieties are among our most ornamental fruiting shrubs in wintertime, when they are loaded with bright-colored berries contrasting well with the dark glossy foliage; they are also very hand- some in spring when covered with their numerous white fls. angustifdlia, Lindl. (P. mucronata var. angustifolia, Nichols.). Closely allied to the preceding: Ivs. lanceo- late to linear-lanceolate, usually arched backward, smaller, not spiny-pointed: fls. somewhat smaller, on slender pedicels; anthers twice as" long as filaments; style as long as ovary. May, June. Chile. B.R. 26:63. PERSEA 2555 B.M. 3889.— The plant usually cult, under this name is a narrow-lvd. form of the preceding species. P. ciliaris, Don. Spreading shrub: Ivs. oblong to narrow-oblong, serrulate, 1A-1 in. long: fls. solitary, ovate, white: fr. almost black. Me, _p riUdri*, Lindl., not Don. J.H.S. 1851. p. 268. G.C. II. 10-89 and III. 28:463, belongs probably to P. furens. — P. furens, Klotrsoh. Upright shrub: Ivs. ovate to ovate-lanceolate, tiliate, to 1 U in. long: fls. in axillary, secund, rather dense racemes: fr. brown- ish red. Peru, Chile. B.M. 4920. — P. Pentlandii, DC. Similar to P. mucronata, but Ivs. not spiny-tipped: fr. dark purplish blue, with the calyx-lobes fleshy. Venesuela to Chile, B.M. 6.2O4. — P. phillyreiefdlia, DC. Similar to P. mucronata: branches spa- ringiy hispid: corolla ovate, pubescent inside; anthers twice as long as filaments. 'Peru, Chile.— P. pildsa, Don (Arbutus pilosa, Gra- ham). Prostrate shrub, with densely hispid branches: Ivs. elliptic- oblong, serrate, to *iin. long: fls. ovate, white, solitary. Mex. B.M. 3177. — P. rupfcoJa, Phil. Closely allied to P. mucronata: Ivs. smaller, with few minute teeth: fls. on pedicels scarcely twice as long as fl.; stamens not exceeding the ovary. Chile. Sometimes cult, as P. mucronata. — P. rupicoloide*, Schneid. Supposed hybrid of the preceding species and P. mucronata. ALFRED REHDER. PEROVSKIA (after B. A. Perovski, about 1840, gov- ernor of the Russian province Orenburg). Also spelled Perowskia. Labiate. About 4 herbaceous or shrubby plants from Cent. Asia, allied to Salvia, with opposite serrate or pinnatifid Ivs. and rather small heterostylous fls. in whorls usually arranged in terminal spikes: calyx tubular-campanulate, 2-lipped; corolla 2-lipped, the upper lip unequally 4-lobed, the lower undivided; 2 sterile and 2 fertile stamens, the latter with 2 distinct contiguous anther-cells: fr. consisting of 4 ovoid- oblong nutlets inclosed by the calyx. The only species in cult, is P. atriplicifdlia, Benth. Shrub, to 5 ft., erect, of aromatic sage-like odor when bruised: sts. hoary- tomentose: Ivs. ovate-lanceolate to lanceolate, acutish, unequally and coarsely serrate, at first pubescent, finally nearly glabrous, glandular, 1>£-2K in. long: fls. blue, about ^m. long, in 276-fld. remote whorls arranged in slender spikes forming terminal panicles 1-1 H ft- long; calyx densely villous. Aug., Sept. Afghanistan to W. Himalayas and W. Thibet. B.M. 8441. R.H. 1905:344. G. 33:511: 36:539— Handsome shrub, valuable for its late blue fls. forming a pleasing contrast with the silvery gray sts. Not quite hardy N., but if killed partly back, it sends forth young shoots which will flower the same year. It prefers sunny posi- tions and well-drained loamy soil. Prop, is usually by greenwood cuttings, which grow readily in summer under glass. ALFRED REHDER. PERSEA (ancient Greek name of an Egyptian tree with sweet fruit ; derivation unknown, probably from Perseus). Lauracex. Woody plants sometimes grown for ornament ; and one of them yields the avocado, one of the best of the semi-tropical fruits. Leaves alternate, entire: fls. small, hermaphrodite, usually in panicles; corolla wanting, the calyx deeply 6-parted; stamens usually 12, in 4 series, with one series sterile; ovary sessile and tapering into a slender style bearing a simple stigma. — Shrubs and trees dis- tributed throughout the tropics and subtropics, most of the species being confined to S. Amer., but one com- ing from the Canary Isls. and a few from S. E. Asia. As defined by Bentham & Hooker, the genus contains about 100 species, but Meissner (DC. Prodr. 15, pt. 1, 43) distributes some of the species in other genera and retains only 50 in Persea. Mez, in his monograph on the American Lauracese (Jahrb. Konigl. Bot. Gart. 1889, 5. 135), describes 47 American species. P. gratissima, the avocado, widely cult, throughout Trop. Amer. and elsewhere for its fir., is the only species of great eco- nomic importance. Others are of ornamental value, and may prove useful as stocks upon which to bud or graft the avocado, although experiments have not been very encouraging up to the present. P. Borbonia grows nat- urally as far north as N. C.; P. indica is now and then seen "in cult, in Fla. and Calif. Some of the Cent. American types referred to P. gratissima seem distinct, and may be found to constitute good species. 2556 PERSEA PERSIMMON A. Older calyx-lobes distinctly shorter than the inner. Borbdnia, Spreng. (P. carolinensis, Nees). RED BAY. BULL BAY. Tree, reaching 40 ft., with smoothish branches: Ivs. 2-3 in. long, oblong to lanceolate-oblong, glabrous and deep green above, glaucous beneath: fls. pubescent, the peduncles of the clusters shorter than the petioles: fr. a small blue drupe. Woods, N. C. to Fla. — A handsome evergreen, with wood useful for cabinet work and other purposes. AA. Outer calyx-lobes equaling the inner, or very nearly so. indica, Spreng. Handsome tree, with elliptic-oblong or lanceolate-oblong attenuate-acute glabrous Ivs., 3-8 in. long: panicle 3-6 in. long, the peduncles compressed, and the branches 3-5-fld., the fls. white and J4m- long: fr. scarcely fleshy. Canary Isls., Madeira, and the Azores. gratissima, Gaertn. f . (P. americana, Mill.). AVOCADO. ALLIGATOR PEAR. AHUACATE. AGUACATE. AVOCAT. AVOCATO. ABACATE. Fig. 2873; Figs. 445, 446, Vol. I. A large tree, commonly with broad crown up to 60 ft.: Ivs. oblong-lanceolate or elliptic-lanceolate to oval or 2873. Persea gratissima. — Avocado. (XH) obovate, 4-10 in. long, 2^-6 in. broad, apex acute or shortly acuminate, sometimes almost blunt, the base acute to truncate, frequently rounded, surface gla- brous above, usually somewhat glaucous with the vena- tion prominent below; petiole %-2 in. long, canalicu- late above: fls. shortly pedicellate, in broad compact panicles at the ends of the young branchlets, about •^jin. across, greenish, the calyx-lobes oblong-lanceolate, acute, slightly concave, finely pubescent; fertile sta- mens 9, in 3 series, each stamen of the inner series bearing just above its base 2 oval flattened orange- colored glands; filaments slender, finely hairy, the anthers oblong-ovate, dehiscing by 4 valves hinged distally, the 2 outer series dehiscing extrorsely, the inner series with the 2 distal valves extrorse and the proximal pair introrse; staminodes 3, flattened, orange- colored; ovary ovate-elliptic, the style slender, attenu- ate, finely pubescent: fr. a large fleshy drupe, commonly pyriform, ovate or spherical, 2-8 in. long, green, maroon or purple in color, the epicarp membranous to thick and woody; mesocarp soft, yellow, and buttery; seed 1, large, conical to oblate, inverted, exalbuminous, with 2 thin seed-coats often distinct, reticulated. Certainly indigenous in Mex. and Cent. Amer., extend- ing perhaps to N. S. Amer. The avocado is cultivated commercially in Florida and California, as well as in other parts of tropical America. See Avocado. Several distinct forms are known in cultivation, some of them having been con- sidered botanical varieties by certain botanists. The horticultural varieties grown in the United States are generally grouped into three types, which may be dis- tinguished as follows: A. Lvs. anise-scented: skin of fr. thin and soft 1. Mexican type AA. Lvs. not anise-scented: skin of fr. thick. B. Surface of fr. usually smooth; skin leathery, usually not more than -fain, thick; seed-coats frequently distinct, the outer one adhering to wall of seed-cavity; cotyledons often rough 2. West Indian type BB. Surface of fr. usually rough or warty; skin brittle, granular, fj- -fain, thick; seed-coats adhering closely to the nearly smooth cotyle- dons 3. Guatemalan type Occasional forms will be found which are difficult to classify by the above key. Especially is this true of the Guatemalan type, of which there are several varieties in California with the skin no thicker than in some varieties of the West Indian type, and nearly as smooth. These can usually be distinguished, however, by the character of the seed and its coats. Solano and Blakeman may be mentioned as smooth-skinned exam- Eles of this class. Trees of the Guatemalan type usually ave darker-colored foliage than those of the West Indian, and ripen their fruit from January to April, while the West Indian ripens from July to November. The Guatemalan type is considerably the hardier of the two. Both are greatly exceeded in hardiness by the Mexican type, which has been known to withstand temperatures of 18° to 20° without serious injury. Chappelow, Ganter, and Harman are varieties of this type well known in Cali- fornia, where they originated. This type is exceedingly common in northern Mexico; the g. Guatemalan type is found in southern Mexico (whence are derived many of the varieties culti- vated in the United States), Guatemala, and doubtless in other Central American states. The West Indian type is the commonest one in Flor- ida, Cuba, and the West Indies in general, and • on the eastern coast of South America. The well-known Florida varieties, Trapp and Pollock, are representatives of it. P. drymifdlia, Cham. & Schlect., is now considered to be a form of P. gratissima; it is the type with anise-scented Ivs. and small, thin-skinned frs. described above as Mexican. Mez recognizes it as a botanical variety, and describes it along with another variety, P. ffratissima var. Schiediana, also indigenous to Mex. — The hardy avocado or yas of San Jos£, Costa Rica, has been referred by Werckle1 to P. jrlgida, Lind., but this name is of doubtful validity. The fr. is figured by Collins (Bull. 77, Bur. PI. Ind.), and is said to be of possible value for hybridization with more tender species. It is spherical, about 3 in. diam., with a very large seed. — P. lingue, Nees, and P. Meyeni&na, Nees, are two species which have recently been intro. to the U. S. from Chile. p Ty Poppi^op t PERSIC A: Prunus. PERSICARIA: Polygonum. PERSIMMON. Interesting and valuable edible fruits. Of edible persimmons, two distinct types are grown in this country, — Diospyros virginiana, the native species, and D. Kaki, the Chinese- Japanese species, known as the kaki. The latter is much the more improved, and is the source of the commercial persim- mons. See Diospyros. Other species have been intro- duced, but are yet under experiment (cf. "Yearbook, United States Department of Agriculture," 1911, page 416). The native persimmon. The American persimmon (Diospyros virginiana} is found wild in most of the southern states and as far north as 38° latitude. It will thrive and ripen its fruit, however, as far north as Rhode Island and the Great Lakes. The fruit is little known except to those who live in localities in which it grows wild, and even there PERSIMMON PERSIMMON 2557 but little attention has been given to its cultivation and improvement. The tree is usually of small size when grown in the open ground, reaching a height of 20 to 30 feet ; when grown in the forest, it often reaches a height of 60 to 80 feet ; and in the rich alluvial river bottoms, from 2 to 3 feet in diameter. In exceptional cases, it may attain still greater size, even to 7 feet in circumference and 125 to 130 feet high ("Journal Heredity.'' November, 1915). The wood is hard and elastic, and very durable when used for inside work but it will rot quickly when placed under ground. The fruit is subglobose and ranges in size from }-2 to 2 inches in diameter, depending largely on the number of seeds which it contains, although seedless varieties an inch in diameter are sometimes found. The fruit has a very disagreeable astringent quality when green, but this disappears in most varieties when it becomes fully ripe. The date of ripening in the cen- tral states varies from August 1 to December 1. The old notion that this fruit must be subjected to the action of frost before it becomes edible is erroneous; many of the very best varieties ripen long before the appearance of frost, while others never become edible, being so exceedingly astringent that neither sun nor frost has any appreciable effect on them. The persimmon is readily propagated from seeds, which should be procured in autumn or early winter and planted in the same way as peach pits; but as the seedlings, especially from cultivated varieties, cannot be relied upon to reproduce themselves, they should be budded or grafted when two or three years old. This should be done in the spring as soon as the bark will slip freely. Ordinary shield-budding works well; also annular- or ring-budding, patch-budding, and chip-bud- ding. Large trees may be cleft-grafted, and small shoots or stocks may be whip-grafted. This tree is more difficult to transplant successfully than almost any other kind of fruit. If too much of the long tap-root is cut off, the tree will be sure to die. Transplant in the autumn, cut back most of the top, but preserve as much of the root as possible, and plant in a deep well-prepared soil. The persimmon wUl do fairly well on almost any land not too wet, but it will give good results if planted on a rich warm soil, well exposed to the sunlight, and kept well tilled for the first few years after planting, until it becomes adapted to its new surroundings. The orderly growing of per- simmon trees in nurseries will remove much of the diffi- culty in establishing the plantation. The tree and fruit are little attacked by insects and fungous diseases. The trees should be planted in the orchard 2 or 3 inches deeper than they stood in the nursery. The trees may be kept low-headed so that the fruit can be picked by hand; in this case, they may stand 16 to 20 feet apart each way. If the fruit is not to be hand- picked but gathered as it falls and size and quality are not so important, the trees may stand at about one-half these distances. As the roots run deep, the plantation is adapted to other crops until the tree require the space. Several chance seedlings of superior size or quality have received names. They are small fruits, yellow or reddish in color, about \}/% to 1% inches in diameter. Some of the forms are shown in Figs. 2874 and 2875. For a general horticultural account of the native persimmon, see W. F. Fletcher, Farmers' Bulletin No. 685, United States Department of Agriculture (1915), from which most of the following descriptions of varie- ties are taken. Boone (Daniel Boone). — Origin Indiana, where it ripens dur- ing October and November: form roundish oblate, size medium, color yellow, with a dull blush in the sun: skin rather tough; seeds numerous: flavor sweet but not rich; quality good. Burner. — Origin central Kentucky, where it ripens rather early; form oblate, size medium, color yellow; practically seedless; flesh soft; quality very good. Delmas. — Orizin Scranton, Mississippi, where it ripens during October and early November; form roundish oblate, sire medium to large, color reddish yellow; skin thin and tough; seeds numerous; flavor sweet and rich; quality very good. Early Bearing. — Introduced from Cartersburg, Indiana, where it ripens early in October; form round-ovate, size medium, color dull yellow; quality good. Early Golden. — Origin Illinois, where it ripens in September; form oblong, size medium to large, color yellow; skin thin; seeds few, flavor sweet; quality very good. Golden Gem (Fig. 2875). — Introduced from Borden, Indiana, where it ripens from August to October; form roundish oblong, size medium to large, color dark orange to red; seeds few, flavor rich and sweet; quality good. Hicks. — Origin Washington County, Indiana, where it ripens in October; form roundish oblate, size medium to large, color dark red; skin thin and tender; seeds few, flavor rich; quality very good. Josephine (American Honey, Honey) (Fig. 2875). — Origin near Bluffton, Missouri, where it ripens in September; form roundish oblate, size medium, color bright yellow, Changing to pale trans- lucent; skin tough; seeds few, flavor sweet and rich; quality good. Kansas. — Introduced from Missouri, where it ripens in Sep- tember; form roundish oblate, size rather large, color yellow splashed with red; flavor rich; quality very good. 2874. The native persimmon, Diospyros virginiana. ( X K) Marion (Fig. 2875). — Original tree found near Fulton, Missouri, where the fruit ripens in October; form roundish oblate, size large, color dull red; skin rather tough; seeds few; quality good though less rich than some other kinds. Miller (Fig. 2875). — Origin Jackson County, Missouri, where it ripens in September; form roundish oblate, size large, color red- dish yellow, translucent; skin tough; seeds rather numerous; flavor sweet; quality good. Ruby (Little's Ruby) (Fig. 2875). — Introduced from Cartersburg, Indiana, where it ripens during September and for some time later; roundish oblate, small to medium, yellowish red, shading to deep red; skin tender; seeds few, flavor sweet; quality very good. Shoto. — Introduced from Danville, Indiana, where it ripens during October; form oblong-ovate, size large, color dull yellow, blushed in the sun; skin rather tough: seeds few; quality very good. Smetch. — Introduced from Pennsylvania, where it ripens during October and November; form roundish oblate, size medium, color dull yellow, splashed with red; flavor rich and sweet; very good. The kaki. The Japanese persimmon (Diospyros Kaki) is con- sidered by the Japanese as their best native pomological product. Although cultivated in the south of France for more than ninety years, there is no record of its successful introduction into the United States pre- vious to about 1870. Trees were first sent to California and subsequently to Augusta, Georgia, but owing to defective roots and long delay in transit, the first and second shipments proved a failure, and not until 1876 came the first success with a few trees. All early impor- 2558 PERSIMMON PERSIMMON tations of trees grown in Japan consisted of trees of small sizes with long tap-roots and no laterals; and probably the stocks on which they were grafted were not adaptable to this country. American enterprise, however, remedied this, as nurseries were established near Yokohama and well-grown trees of the best varie- ties were exported to the United States. Experiments were made in the South by grafting upon native stocks. This proved successful when the graft was inserted upon the collar of the root, 3 to 4 inches below the sur- face of the soil. The United States Department of Agriculture received a large quantity of trees from Japan about 1878 or 1879, and fearing that the winter of Washington might prove too cold the trees were sent to Norfolk, Virginia, where many bore fruit the follow- ing year. The first fruiting of which there is any record was at Augusta, Georgia, in 1879, upon trees grafted upon native seedlings growing in the forest. The kaki, or Japanese persimmon, is a fruit for the cotton-belt. However, as regards the hardiness of the 2875. Native persimmons: a, Josephine; b, Marion; c, Golden Gem; d, Miller; e, Ruby. Japanese persimmons, experience demonstrates that some varieties are more resistant to excessive cold than others; but few can withstand a temperature of zero; and as a rule they are more successful below the 32d degree of latitude than farther north. Many seedlings have been produced that seem to have increased frost- resisting powers. Instances are reported in which some of these trees have withstood the winters of east Ten- nessee. By successive sowing of seeds from these hardier seedlings we may look for a race of trees that will be adapted to the middle sections of the United States. There is a probability, also, that importations from the north of Japan and China may considerably extend the range northward in this country. Some varieties have succeeded in central Virginia and Ken- tucky. Attempts to cross with the native species have so far been unsuccessful. The best method of propagating Japan persimmons is by collar-grafting upon seedlings of the native spe- cies (Diospyros virginiana), which are grown either by planting the seed in nursery rows or transplanting the young seedlings from seed-beds early in the spring. The seedlings can be budded in summer, and in favor- able seasons a fair proportion of the buds will succeed. Thus propagated, the trees seem to be longer-lived than those imported from Japan. Inasmuch as the native stock is used, the range of adaptation as to soils and similar conditions is very great. As a stock, Diospyros Lotus is adapted to the drier parts of the West, where D. virgini- ana does not succeed. D. chinensis will probably be a good stock, but has not yet been tested in this country. One of the great drawbacks in the cultivation of the Japanese persimmon has been the dropping of the flowers, so that trees and plantations may remain barren. Recently this has been shown to be due to lack of pollination (see Hume, "Proceedings of the Society for Horticultural Science," 1913). A constantly staminate variety is now on the market, the Gailey, which, if planted one tree to seven or eight trees of sterile varieties, will insure a crop so far as pollination is concerned. The Tane-Nashi, however, is self-fertile. It is to be expected that the subject of sterile and fertile varieties, and of inter-pollination, will now receive much attention, with considerable change in the prac- tice of persimmon-growing. Another difficulty is the great variation in fruits in the same variety or even on the same tree, in shape, size, and other characters. While the cause of all this varia- tion has not been determined, it is known that much of it is eliminated by the good inter-pollination of which we have spoken. Hume writes: "All varieties of Jap- anese persimmons so far studied are light-fleshed when seedless but certain varieties always show a dark area in the flesh when seeds are present and others are always light-fleshed even when seeds are present. Both dark- and light-fleshed fruits may occur on the same tree. The physiological causes which underlie the changes in color of the flesh are not understood, and offer an interesting field for investigation." In color, size, and surface texture, the Japanese per- simmons somewhat resemble ripe tomatoes. They are now frequently seen in the northern markets. Some of the varieties ship well. Many persons do not like them at first, largely because of the very soft flesh and their sweetness, but the quality is good, it varies much in the different varieties, and the fruit is cer- tain to find increased demand. It is eaten out of hand. Some of the varieties ripen in August, some in November, and others intermediate between these dates. It requires some experience to determine just when the fruit has reached the proper stage to be marketed, and this varies with the different varieties. Some of the varieties have dark flesh, others light flesh, still others a mixture of the two. The light and dark flesh differ radically in texture and consistency, as well as appearance, and when found in the same fruit are never blended, but always distinct. The dark flesh is never astringent; the light flesh is astringent until it softens. The dark-fleshed fruit is crisp and meaty, like an apple, and is edible before it matures. Some of the entirely dark-fleshed kinds improve as they soften. The light-fleshed kinds and those with mixed light and dark flesh are very delicious when they reach the cus- tard-like consistency of full ripeness. In some, the astringency disappears as the fruit begins to soften; in others, it persists until the fruit is fully ripe. The round-shaped varieties usually ripen first, the oblong are likely to last and keep the longest; these latter should be slowly house-ripened to remove the slight astringency inherent to these varieties. The market value of the fruit is at present more or less uncertain. A large proportion of the fruit-eating people of the North do not yet know what a fine fruit the Japanese persimmon is. The fruits have to be shipped while hard and allowed to ripen after reaching destination. Commission men are likely to sell them and the public to eat them — or attempt to dp so — a week or two ahead of the proper stage of ripeness; hence the Japan persimmon in its best condition is yet comparatively little known. In Japan, the dried fruit, somewhat like a dried or cured fig, is much esteemed. PERSIMMON PERSIMMON 2559 2876. Kaki, or Japanese persimmon, in various forms as grown in Florida. 1, Tamopan; 2, Hyakume; 3, Fuyugaki; 4, Triumph; 5, Boufarik (said to be Diospyros chinensis) ; 6, Gailey ; 7, Tsuru; 8, Tane-Nashi. ( X about %) 2560 PERSIMMON PESCATORIA There is a great difference also in the habit of growth and foliage of the varieties. All have broad and shiny simple leaves. Some varieties make a growth of 5 to 7 feet the first year from graft, and at ten years form a tree 10 feet in height. Others assume a dwarf compact habit and seldom grow above 5 to 6 feet in height; this class is more precocious in reaching the bearing age than the taller-growing sorts, and is also likely to overbear. It is not uncommon for a three-year-old tree to yield several hundred perfect fruits. Thinning the fruit as soon as set in early summer will prevent an early failure of the tree. Trees thrive in any soil in which the native species grows, but usually fail in wet soils. They respond well to good care and treatment, and yet they thrive with less attention than is required by most other fruits. The insects and diseases are few. In the orchard, they are set about 15 to 20 feet apart, except for very dwarf kinds. The general culture is the same as for other fruits. Some of the varieties of kaki, now known in this, country, are as follows: Bennett.-^Of medium size, measuring 2% by 2% inches in cross- section; fruit almost quadrangular-conical, the sides often deeply creased, basin shallow, fairly regular; calyx depressed; apex rounded to a rather blunt point, marked by a brown tip: color deep orange- red. Seedless, owing to lack of pollination. A remarkable fruit, noteworthy for its hardiness; the original tree is a seedling some twenty years old standing in the yard of Dr. C. D. Bennett, Newark, New Jersey. Boufarik (Fig. 2876). — Size medium, 1% by 2J^ inches; shape round-ovate to ovate, apex rounded, slightly depressed, the remains of the pistil set in the depression, base rounded, with obtuse shallow rounded cavity; color yellowish green, the skin greasy, slightly sticky, covered with rather rusty colored hairs which are most abundant about the apex; calyx broken up and reflexed; stem short, rather stout; cells eight, pith open, seedless; flesh light-colored, very as- tringent before ripening and with strong odor of jimson weed. Costata. — Medium size, conical, pointed, somewhat four-sided; diameter iy% inches longitudinally and 2^8 inches transversely; skin salmon-yellow; flesh light yellow, dark flesh and seeds occurring seldom, astringent until ripe, then very fine; a good keeper. Tree distinct; a rapid, upright grower; foliage luxuriant; the most orna- mental of all the varieties mentioned. Fuyugaki (Fig. 2876). — Size medium large, measuring 2 by 2J^ inches to 1J4 by 2% inches; color deep orange-red; oblate in form, very smooth, sometimes quartered with four slight creases from the top, apex rounded, very slightly depressed with remains of style persisting, basin very smooth, regular, shallow, calyx reflexed in the ripe fruits; skin thin, tough, smooth; flesh firm, meaty when ripe, light-colored, of a deep carrot-orange; close examination shows the presence of minute widely scattered dark specks; taste sweet, of fine flavor and quality; seeds present, slightly curved along the inner face, the back rounded, brown-shiny, % inch long by 1A inch broad by A inch thick. An excellent fruit and a decided acquisition. Gailey (Fig. 2876). — Recommended as a pollinizer, not for its fruit, although the latter is good though smafl; fruit oblong-conical with a rounded apex and a small sharp point, dull red with pebbled surface; flesh nteaty, firm, and juicy. Hachiya. — Very large, oblong, conical, with short point; very showy; diameter 3% inches longitudinally and 3J^ inches trans- versely; skin dark, bright red, with occasional dark spots or blotches and rings at the apex; flesh deep yellow, sometimes having occa- sional dark streaks, with seed, astringent until ripe, then very fine. The largest and handsomest of all. Tree vigorous and shapely; bears fairly well, but is not so prolific as some of the other varieties. Hyakume (Fig. 2876). — Large to very large, varying from round- ish oblong to roundish oblate, but always somewhat flattened at both ends; generally slightly depressed at the point opposite the stem; diameter 2% inches longitudinally and 3^ inches trans- versely; skin light buffish yellow, nearly always marked with rings and veins at the apex; flesh dark brown, sweet, crisp, and meaty, not astringent; good while still hard; a good keeper; one of the best market sorts. Of good growth and a free bearer. Miyo-tan. — Round or slightly oblong, 2^ inches diameter; average weight, five and one-half ounces; slightly ribbed; deep orange-red; flesh usually deep brown-red, but bright red- or half red- and half brown-fleshed specimens are often produced upon the same tree the results of cross-fertilization by other varieties. Tree of medium or dwarf growth; exceedingly prolific. Fruit keeps very late. The brown-fleshed specimens are edible while solid, and as early as October 1. Okame.— Large, roundish oblate, with well-defined quarter marks, point not depressed; diameter 2% inches longitudinally and 3J^ inches transversely; skin orange-yellow, changing to bril- liant carmine, with delicate bloom and waxy, translucent appear- ance; the most beautiful of all; light, clear flesh when ripe, with light brown center around the seeds, of which it has several; loses its astringency as soon as it begins to ripen; quality fine. Tree vigorous and good bearer. Ormond (Bostrom Vining). — Small to medium, oblong, with a tapering pointed four-furrowed apex and rounded base, the large calyx strongly reflexed; surface deep bright red, carrying a thin bloom, the skin thin and tough; flesh orange-red, becoming very soft when ripe. December in northern Florida, long-keeping. Taber No. 23. — Medium, oblate, flat or depressed point; diame- ter \l/% inches longitudinally and 2^ inches transversely; skin rather dark red, with peculiar stipple marks; flesh dark brown, sweet and not astringent; seedy; good. Prolific. Taber No. 129. — Medium, roundish, flattened at base; has a small but welWefined point at the apex; diameter about 2]/% inches both ways; skin dark yellow-red, with peculiar roughened surface, somewhat resembling alligator leather in appearance and markings, except that the marks are usually very small and uniform; flesh light brown, crisp, sweet, meaty, free from astringency; excellent; a good keeper and shipper. Tamopan (Fig. 2876). — Imported recently from China, and known as the Chinese Grindstone persimmon; fruit perfectly seedless, not astringent and may be eaten when green and hard; large (3 to 5 inches diameter), sometimes weighing more than one pound, broadly oblate and constricted all the way around below the middle so that it has a turban-like shape; color bright orange-red, the skin tough and rather thick; flesh light-colored, astringent until ripe, excellent in quality; tree strong and upright. Tane-Nashi (Fig. 2876). — Large to very large, roundish conical, pointed, very smooth and symmetrical; diameter 3J4 inches longi- tudinally and 3% inches transversely; skin light yellow, changing to bright red at full maturity; flesh yellow and seedless; quality very fine; perhaps the most highly esteemed of light-fleshed kinds. Triumph (Fig. 2876). — Medium; tomato-shaped; skin yellow; flesh yellow; generally has a few seeds; very productive; quality of the best. Ripens from September till November. Tsuru (Fig. 2876). — Large, slender, pointed, longest in propor- tion to its size of all; diameter 3% inches longitudinally and 2^ inches transversely; skin bright red; flesh orange-yellow, some dark flesh around the few seeds; astringent until fully ripe, then good. Yeddo-Ichi. — Large, oblate; diameter 2J^ inches longitudinally and 3 inches transversely; very smooth and regular in outline, with dinted appearing surface and slight depression at end opposite the stem; skin darker red than most varieties, with heavy bloom; flesh very dark brown, verging toward purplish; sweet, rich, crisp; in quality one of the best. The fruit is good to eat when still hard. Yemon (Among). — Large, flat, tomato-shaped, somewhat four- sided; diameter 2K inches longitudinally and 3K inches trans- versely; skin light yellow, changing to dull red, mottled with orange- yellow; distinct in color; flesh deep, dull red, brown around the seeds, of which there are usually a few ; some specimens are entirely light-fleshed and seedless; there is no astringency after the fruit begins to soften; quality fine; one of the best. In form some of the fruits have the corrugations converging to the depressed apex, as it is usually figured, but most do not. Zengi. — The smallest of all; round or roundish oblate; diameter 1% inches longitudinally and 2 14 inches transversely; skin yel- lowish red; flesh very dark, quality good; seedy; edible when still hard; one of the earliest to ripen. Vigorous, prolific. L. H. B.f PERTYA (after A. M. Perty, professor of natural history at Berne, Switzerland). Composite. A genus of about 4 shrubs from Japan, Cent. China and Afghan- istan, allied to Mutisia but the corolla tubular and 5-parted: Ivs. alternate, often crowded under the fl.- heads, entire or serrulate, deciduous: heads homoga- mous, solitary, with 5-15 fls.; involucre campanulate, with few large, imbricate bracts; corolla tubular, deeply 5-lobed: achene pubescent, with a conspicuous dense whitish or purplish pappus. They are not particularly ornamental, but interesting for botanical collections, as hardy shrubby Compositse are few. Prop, by seeds and probably by cuttings of half-ripened wood. The only species in cult, is P. sinensis, Oliver. Slender upright shrub, to 6 ft. : Ivs. ovate- to oblong-lanceolate, acutish, entire, glabrous, 2-3 in. long: heads pinkish, 10-12-fld., on slender pedicels ^-1 in. long; involucre nearly glabrous: achenes sericeous; pappus whitish. June. Cent. China. H.I. 23:2214.— The Japanese P. scdndens, Schultz. Bip., which is likely to be intro., is a slender decumbent shrub with serrulate Ivs., sessile somewhat larger heads with light purple pappus. ALFRED REHDER. PESCATO-BOLLEA (compounded from Pescatoria andBollea). Orchidacese. A genus established to contain hybrids between the genera Pescatoria and Bollea. P.-B. bella=P. Klabochorum x B. ccelestis. PESCATORIA (after M. Pescatore, who had a large collection of orchids at St. Cloud, near Paris). Some- times spelled Pescatorea. Orchidacese. A group of orchids often united with Zygopetalum, but in horticul- tural works usually treated as a distinct genus. PESCATORIA PETALOSTEMUM 2561 Leaves equitant, tufted, without pseudobulbs: fls. solitary on sts. 3-6 in. long, from the axils of the Ivs., mostly large and showy and fragrant; sepals and petals broad, concave, spreading, the lateral sepals forming a mentum; labellum clawed, lateral lobes small, middle lobe rounded, spreading; crest thick, consisting of a number of keels arranged in a semi-circle near the base of the lip; column slender, not boat-shaped. — About 12 species. For cult., see Zygopetalum. Klabochorum, Reichb. f. Lvs. strap-shaped, 1 ft. or more long: fls. 3-3 K in- across, variable in color; sepals oblong, obtuse; petals shorter, all white with chocolate- purple points; labellum 3-lobed, yellowish or white, and having many purple-tipped hairs; callus sulfur-colored, with brown keels. June, July. Ecuador. Gn. 22:24. Dayana, Reichb. f. Lvs. tufted, 6-10 in. long: fls. on short scapes; sepals oblong-obovate, acute, white, with green tips; petals rhomboid-rotund; labellum clawed, angled on each side of the base; limb oblong, emargi- nate, revolute on the sides, white with a callous ring which is purple-violet, the base being of the same color; column yellow, with a red band near the base and the anther of the same color. Late autumn. Colombia. Yar. rhodacra, Reichb. f. Sepals and petals with rose tips; labellum orbicular, suf- fused crimson. B.M. 6214. cerina, Reichb. f . Fig. 2877. Lvs. in tufts of 4 or 5, cune- ate-oblong, pointed, 1 ft. long: peduncles 2-6 in. long, 1-fld. ; sepals and petals nearly equal, the latter somewhat clawed, fleshy, rounded, con- cave, pale straw-color; label- lum ovate, yellow, with a thick semi - circular crest. Chiriqui. B. M. 5598 (as Huntleya cerina). F.S. 17: 1815 (as Zygopetalum ceri- num). — Flowers at various seasons, the fls. lasting a long tune. P. cochlfdris, Rolfe. Lvs. ob- 2877. Pescatoria cerina. lanceolate-oblong, acute, 5-9 in. long: sepals and petals nearly equal, lower halves ivory-white, upper reddish maroon; lip 3-lobed, white; column maroon. Andes. HEIXRICH HASSELBRIXG. PETALOSTEMUM (Greek for petal and stamen, alluding to the way in which these organs are joined). Sometimes spelled Petalostemon. By some authors, the species have been referred to Kuhnistera. Leguminbsx. American herbs, mostly western, with long or deep perennial roots, sometimes planted for ornament. Leaves glandular, alternate; blades unequally pin- nately compound; Ifts. often broadest above the middle and involute: fls. perfect, in short or elongated spikes; calyx-teeth nearly equal, rather broad, shorter than the tube; corolla white, pink, purple, or violet; petals on long slender claws; standard oblong or obcordate; wings and keel-petal similar, their claws adnate to the sheath of the stamen-tube almost to its summit; sta- mens 5, monadelphous, alternate with the petals; ovary sessile, 2-ovuled; style subulate: pod included in the calyx, mostly dehiscent, 1-2-seeded. Distinguished from its close relative Dalea by having only 5 stamens instead of 9-10 as in that genus. — About 27 species. These low bushy plants with fine-cut Ivs. and bearing a constant succession of showy spikes of fls. are very attractive, and well adapted for borders and rock- gardens. A. Fls. white. candidum, Michx. (Dalea Candida, Willd.). WHITE PRAIRIE CLOVER. Plants glabrous: sts. erect or rarely prostrate, simple or sparingly branched, 1-2 ft. tall: Ifts. 5-9, the blades linear, oblong or oblanceolate, Yy-\y% in. long, acute, or mucronulate, glandular beneath, more or less cuneate at base, very short- stalked: peduncles terminal, elongated, bracted; spikes cylindric, 1-4 in. long, about J^in. thick; bracts aculeate, longer than the calyx; corolla white, 2-3 lines long; wings and keel oval; standard cordate; calyx- teeth and pod slightly pubescent. Term, to Minn., La., and Texas. B.B. 2 (ed. 2): 369. AA. Fls. rosy purple or violet. B. Pubescence of the calyx of short close-set oppressed hairs. decumbens, Nutt. Plants sparingly pubescent above or glabrate: sts. solitary or cespitose, ascending or decumbent, 1-2 ft. tall, mostly simple: Ifts. 5-7, linear or linear-oblong, %- %in. long, acute or mucro- nulate, glandular, often involute: spikes ovoid or oblong, %-%in. long; bracts ovate-lanceolate, with subulate tips; calyx strigillose, shorter than the bracts, tube campanu- late, lobes lanceolate or ovate-lanceolate, shorter than tube, acute; corolla pink or rose-purple; standard with an oblong-ovate cordate blade, other petals with oblong blades. N. E. Texas. BB. Pubescence of the calyx vittous or sdky-vittous. c. Bracts glabrous or merely pubendent tips. purpureum, Rydb. (Dalea purpurea, Vent. P. viold- ceum, Michx.). VIOLET PRAIRIE CLOVER. Glabrous or slightly pubescent, erect, 13^-3 ft. high, branching above: Ivs. short-petioled; Ifts. 3-5, narrowly linear, M-Mia- long, ^-1 line wide, acute or mucronate at the apex, narrowed at the base, shortnstalked: spikes peduncled, oblong to cylindric, ^-2 in. long, about Hin. thick; bracts above mucronate, nearly glabrous, nearly equaling the pubescent calyx; corolla violet to purple, about 2 lines long; standard cordate, wings and keel oblong. Ind. to Sask. and Texas. B.M. 1707. B.B. 2 (ed. 2): 370. cc. Bracts with silky-pubescent tips. tenuifdlium, Gray. SILKY PRAIRIE CLOVER. Erect, somewhat pubescent, branching, 1-2 ft. high: Ivs. short-petioled; Ifts. 3-5, linear, obtuse, glandular- dotted, margin somewhat involute, ^-^in. long, nearly sessile: spikes cylindric, %-!% in. long, about %in. thick; rachis pubescent; fls. rose-purple, about J^in. long; bracts ovate-pointed, pubescent, equaling the calyx; standard somewhat orbicular to cordate. Kans. to New Mex. B.B. 2 (ed. 2) :370. P. L. RICKER. 2562 PETASITES PETREA PETASITES (Greek, a broad-brimmed hat; referring to the large broad leaves). Composite. Hardy peren- nial herbs much like the common coltsfoot (Tussilago Farfara), having large leaves of the same general shape, but the flowers range from purple to white, not yellow, and are borne in corymbs instead of singly. They are rather coarse and weedy, but the big felty Ivs., appearing after the very early leafless scapes, make a good cover for rough or unoccupied places. The genus is widely distributed in north temperate and subarctic regions. The number of species is about 20; the essential character of the genus (as distin- guished from Tussilago) is that the heads are nearly or quite dkecious, and rayless or with very short and mostly not showy rays; also the fact that the scapes usually have many heads instead of one. The Ivs. are orbicu- lar or reniform, always with a deep heart-shaped base and the scapes are covered with scales like a coltsfoot, but sometimes the lower ones are more leafy. japonicus, F. Schmidt. Lys. large, 33^-4 ft. across, radical: peduncle with 2 or 3 linear bracts: fl. -heads in a fastigiate thyrse. Isl. of Sachalin. B.M. 8032. Var. giganteus, Hort. Lvs. orbicular, margin wavy: fl.- heads densely clustered. Gn.M. 10:180. — The stalks are eaten as a vegetable after being boiled, and are also preserved in salt or sugar. The fl.-buds, which appear in Feb., are used as a condiment, as they have a slightly bitter but agreeable flavor. The plant has been adver- tised in Amer. since 1900 by several dealers. Grows as high as a man, and is useful for bold effects in the sub- tropical garden. fragrans, Presl. WINTER HELIOTROPE. SWEET COLTS- FOOT. Height 8 in.: Ivs. appearing during or after anthesis, orbicular, margined with small cartilaginous teeth, glabrous above, pubescent and green below: heads fragrant, the marginal fls. of the female heads in the form of short rays; fls. small, varying from pale lilac to purple. Medit. region. Gn. 23, p. 113; 53, p. 328; 62, p. 58. — Has the merit of blooming in winter and its fls. have a delightful vanilla-like odor. A few sprays are desirable for cutting during winter. The plant also differs from the common coltsfoot in having darker colored and evergreen foliage. It is suitable for carpeting shrubberies and for dry banks of stiff clay where choicer subjects will not thrive. Like most others of the genus, it spreads rapidly by underground runners. palmatus, Gray (Narddsmia palmata, Hook.). Height 6-24 in.: Ivs. orbicular or somewhat kidney-shaped, deeply 7-11-cleft beyond the middle, and the lobes sharply dentate, green and glabrous above, densely white-tomentose beneath: heads fragrant, 4-6 lines across, the marginal fls. of the female heads in the form of short rays, whitish. E. Asia, N. Amer. B.B. 3:469. — Blooms from April to June, its fls. varying from nearly white to pale blue or purplish. It is found in rich dark swamps or sphagnum bogs from Newfoundland to Alaska and south to N. Y., Wis., and Calif. It has been offered by dealers in native plants. omcinalis, Moench (P. vulgaris, Desf.). Height 16 in.: Ivs. 3 in. to 3 ft. diam., reniform or orbicularly cor- date, white-hairy below: fls. purplish, appearing before the Ivs. in March-May, borne in cylindric panicles. Eu., N- Asia' WILHELM MILLER. L. H. B.f PETIVERIA (named after James Petiver, 1665- 1718, an apothecary and botanist of London). Phy- tolaccacese. Shrubby herbs: Ivs. alternate: fls. small, in axillary and terminal racemes, solitary or in 2's; perianth herbaceous, conical at base, 4-parted, segms. subequal, lanceolate, spreading; stamens inserted at the base of the perianth on a hypogynous disk, either 4 alternate with the segms. of the perianth or 5-8 placed without order; ovary 2-celled.— About 2 species, S. Fla. to Paraguay. The genus has been recently mono- graphed by Hans Walter in Engler's Pflanzenreich, hft. 39 (IV. 83). P. allidcea, Linn. (P. octdndra, Linn. P. alliacea var. octdndra, Moq.). GUINEA-HEN WEED. Half -shrubby, perennial: sts. 2-3 ft. high: Ivs. alternate, ovate, entire, membranaceous, attenuate at both ends, pellucid-dotted: inil. erect in a lax raceme; fls. rose or white. Mex. to Brazil. An ornamental stove plant probably not now in cult. PETREA (Robert James, Lord Petr6, 1710-1742, a patron of botany who had the finest collection of exotic plants in Europe). Sometimes spelled Petrxa. Verbe- nacex. Tropical American woody plants, one of which is a choice blue- or purple-flowered climber. Twining or arborescent shrubs: Ivs. opposite, leathery, pinnate- veined: fls. violet, purple or bluish, in 2878. Petrea volubilis. From a cluster 7 or 8 inches long. long terminal racemes; calyx with 5 scales in the throat; calyx-lobes colored during anthesis but often becom- ing green and rigid in fr.; corolla usually a little more intensely colored; limb 5-cut, oblique, the tube short and cylindrical; stamens 4, didynamous; ovary imper- fectly 2-loculed; locules 1-ovuled: fr. included in calyx, indehiscent, 2-celled and 2-seeded or 1-seeded by abortion. — Species about a dozen, Mex., W. Indies to Brazil. Petrea is well adapted to be grown with other stove climbers. The plants do well when trained to a balloon- shaped or flat wire frame, to pillars, or carried near the roof, where they add greatly to the beauty of the house. When it is intended to plant them out in the border, the first point to be considered is the drainage in the pot. This is best effected by placing a layer of brick rubbish of about 4 to 5 inches. This will keep the com- post from becoming sour or stagnant in the pot. For a compost, use turfy loam four parts, turfy peat one part, well-decayed cow-manure one part, with admix- ture of a liberal quantity of sharp gritty sand. By the end of January the temperature may be increased to about 62° for night with 10° to 15° higher by day. Just as soon as they show renewed vigor they will not stand to become dry at the roots. They will want a good syringing over and under the foliage every morning on bright days. Give enough ventilation to keep the air pure and sweet. In midsummer they need some shade if only during the most powerful sunshine. When they are well established, they will be benefited by liquid manure once a week. For midsummer the tempera- ture may be allowed to run up 80° or 85° with sun, and a night temperature of 70°. They are easily propagated from shoot-cuttings placed in a brisk bottom heat and PETREA PETUNIA 2503 subjected to the usual condition of moisture and shade required for other plants. When they are wanted to grow in pots, keep shifting until they are in 8- or 10- inch pots. The compost may be renewed in the spring. (J. J. M. Farrell.; volftbilis, Jacq. PURPLE WREATH. Fig. 2878. Twining: Ivs. 3-4 in. long, short-stalked, ovate, elliptic or oblong, acuminate or obtuse, entire or wavy: fls. blue, in terminal elongated racemes (7-8 in. long); calyx with a tube one-fourth to one-half as long as the pedicel, and in fr. one-third to one-fourth as long as the narrow lobes; corolla included in the calvx. Cuba to Brazil; a showy plant. B.M. 628. G.C. III. 39:24, 25; 4.5:252; 51:287. J.H. III. 54:390. G. 29:192. H.F. 8:50. F.E. 23:582. F.C. 3:108. Gn. 12:40.— The pur- ple wreath is one of the most distinct and beautiful of tender climbers. The fls. are like a 5-pointed star of lilac with a violet in the middle. The fls. begin to open at the base of the raceme and the showy 5-pointed star is the calyx, whose sepals are colored like petals. The calyx spreads open while the corolla is still a round bud in the middle, and it remains after the corolla has fallen, so that the vine, at first glance, seems to bear two kinds of fls. The blooms appear in March and April. It does not bloom freely in small plants; it probably has other drawbacks, for it has always been a rare plant in Eu.. though enthusiastically com- mended. Offered in S. Calif. The fls. seem to vary considerably in color. WILHELM MILLER, L. H. B.j PETROCALLIS (Greek, rock beauty). Crudfers. This genus has been commonly included in Draba but differs from it in technical botanical characters as fol- lows: silique oval with swollen reticulate valves having 1-2 seeds in a cell with the funiculum adnate to the septum. One species in the Pyrenees, P. pyrenaica, R. Br. Height 2-3 in.: Ivs. wedge-shaped, 3-lobed at apex: fls. white at first, changing to rosy pink. May. Mountains, S. Eu. B.M. 713. — Also found under Draba pyrenaica, page 1068; grown as a little rock-plant in choice collections. PETROCOPTIS (Greek, equivalent to the Latin Saxifraga, — to break or deft the rock: rooting in the clefts of rocks). Caryophyilace^e. Two or 3 perennials from the Pyrenees, sometimes used in alpine- and rock- gardening. Allied to Lychnis and sometimes united with it, differing in imbricated rather than convolute estivation and in bearded or woolly seeds. Perennials of small size with uncut petals and a corolla-crown, the Ivs. mostly tufted or in a rosette: st.-lvs. opposite. P. pyrenaica, A. Br. (Lychnis pyrenaica, Berger). Three to 4 in. high from a fusiform root: Ivs. glaucous- green, spatulate, those on the st. cordate and sessile: fls. pale flesh-color or rose-color, about ^in. across, in forked clusters, the slender pedicels 1-fld.; petals shal- lowlv notched at top, bearing 2 erect serrate scales. B.M". 3269. Var. alba, Hort., is listed as a beautiful and easily grown alpine, late blooming. P. Lagascae, Willk. .(Lychnis Lagdscx, Hook. f.). Low and tufted, glabrous and glaucous, 2—4 in. high: st. densely distichous, leafy below : lowest Ivs. linear and obtuse, middle ones ovate- lanceolate, subacute: fls. pale rose with white center, about 2iin. across, with 2 white acute scales at base, slightly notched at apex. B.M. 5746. — A charming Plant- L. H. B. PETR6PHYES: Monanthes. P. muraiis, Webb=Monanthes . Hook, f., which equals M. atlantiea. PETROPHYTUM (petros, rock, and phyton, plant; alluding to its habitat1!. Rosaces. A genus of 5 ces- pitose undershrubs with prostrate branches in W. N. Amer., allied to Spiraea, but differing in its follicles being dehiscent on both sutures and in its habit : Ivs. crowded, spatulate or. oblanceolate, entire: fls. in terminal racemes; sepals and petals 5; stamens 20; pistils 3-5, hairy, style slender, glabrous except at the base: follicles leathery, with few linear seeds. Only the following species has been intro. into cult, and is offered bv several European nurseries. It is perfectly hardy and grows best in a rockery in a sunny and well-drained position between rocks; it demands limestone soil. Prop, is by division or by seeds treated like those of spirea, but the young seedlings are particularly impatient of too much moisture. P. caespitosa, Rydb. (Spiraea cxspitbsa, Xutt. Eriogynia caespitosa, Wats. Luetkea csespitosa, Kuntze). Densely cespitose, forming flat patches: Ivs. oblanceolate, obtuse or mucronate, 1-ribbed, densely silky, M-Kin- long: fls. small, white, in dense spikes %~l% in. long on upright stalks 1-4 in. long; petals spatulate, obtuse; stamens exserted. Julv, Aug. S. D. and Mont, to Calif, and New Mex. M.D.G. 1907:85. ALFRED REHDER. PETROSELOTUM (Greek, rock-parsley}. Umbel- liferse. About a half-dozen European chiefly biennial herbs, one of which is cult, for its ornamental and edible herbage. Closely allied to Carum and Apium, with the former of which it is often united and from which it is chiefly distinguished by the greenish yellow fls. and broader incised If.-segms. Lvs. ternately pinnate- compound, the segms. toothed and cut: fls. in com- pound umbels with few parts to the involucre and several or many parts to the involucels, the petals with incurved points: fr. ovate and compressed, glabrous. P. hortense, Hoffm. (P. satirum, Hoffm. Carum Petrose- finum, Benth. & Hook. f.). PARSLEY (which see). Erect, 1-3 ft.: Ivs. ternate-pinnate, the Ifts. ovate and 3-cleft (much cut in the "curled" garden varieties), the upper ones narrower and nearly entire: fls. yellowish. Old World. — Much cult., and sometimes runs wild about plantations. L H. B. PETTERIA (after Franz Fetter, a Dalmatian bota- nist; died 1853). Legumindsx. One species, a shrub, very similar in habit to Laburnum, but with the yellow fls. in upright dense racemes, terminal on leafy branch- lets. It is but rarely cult., since it is less showy in bloom than Laburnum or many species of Cytisus. It is hardy as far north as Mass., and requires the same cult, as Laburnum, which see. If grafted, laburnum is to be used as a stock. This monotypic genus differs from Laburnum in its upright racemes, in the tubular calyx, the wings and keel being at the base adnate to the stamens, and in the sessile ovary. It is said to possess the same poisonous properties as that genus. ramentacea, Presl (Cytisus fragrans, Welden, not Lam. C. Weldenii, Vis. C. ramantaceus, Sieb. Laburnum ramentaceum, Koch. L. Weldenii, Lavallee). Upright, to 6 ft. : Ivs. 3-foliolate, almost glabrous or sparingly pubescent when young, on about l-in.-long stalks; Ifts. cuneate, obovate to oblong, usually obtuse, %-2 in. long: fls. fragrant, very short-pedicelled, in l-3-in.-long dense racemes; calyx 3-lobed, silky; keel silky: pod lin- ear-oblong, sparingly silky, to 1J^ in. long. May, June. Dalmatia, Istria. B'.R. 29:40. ALFRED REHDER. PETUNIA (Petun, South American aboriginal name, said to have been applied to tobacco). Solanacex. PETUNIA. Small herbs, grown for their showy bloom as garden annuals. Annual or perennial, branching, viscid-pubescent, of weak or straggling growth : Ivs. alternate, or opposite above, soft, entire: fls. white or purple, or in shades of reddish, on solitary, terminal or axillary peduncles; calyx deeply 5-parted, the lobes narrow or often foli- aceous; corolla funnelform or salverform, the tube long and nearly or quite straight and sitting loosely in the calyx, the limb broad and normally 5-lobed, unequal or 2564 PETUNIA PETUNIA oblique and in some species obscurely 2-lipped; stamens 5, attached in the tube, one of them sometimes sterile; ovary small, 2-celled, the style slender, the stigma dilated and sometimes obscurely 2-lobed. — There are 12 or more species of Petunia, mostly natives of the southern part of S. Amer. One or two grow in Mex. and 2879. Petunia axillaris. ( X M) another (P. parviflora) is naturalized in the southern parts of the U. S., and is found frequently on ballast about seaports. The genus is closely allied to Salpiglos- sis, being distinguished by 5 perfect stamens, whereas that genus has 4 stamens and Ivs. narrow or usually dentate or pinnatifid. Garden petunias are small soft plants of straggling or decumbent habit, pubescent and usually more or less sticky, with large showy flowers. The colors are white to light purple, not blue, clear red, nor yellow. They are properly perennial, but are treated as annuals in cultivation. The common kinds are rather weedy in habit, but their great profusion of bloom under all con- ditions makes them useful and popular. They are particularly useful for massing against shrubbery, for they make a florid undergrowth with almost no care. Some of the modern unproved named varieties are very choice plants. Petunias emit a powerful fragrance at nightfall, and sphinx-moths visit them. The varieties of present-day gardens are considered to be hybrids and modifications of two-stem types. The types were white-flowered in one case and rose- violet in the other, and the flowers were small. In some of the garden strains, the flower is very broad and open, measuring 4 or 5 inches across. There are types with the flowers deeply fringed; others with star-like markings radiating from the throat and extending nearly or quite to the margin of the limb; others with full double flowers. Petunias should begin to bloom about two or two and one-half months after sowing in the open and continue profusely till killed by hard frost (the first light frosts usually do not injure them). The plants are at first erect, but soon begin to sprawl. The highest blooms of mature but sprawled plants will stand 18 to 24 inches above the ground. There are very dwarf and compact kinds, but they are not much seen in this country. Varieties or strains naturally fall into the small- flowered and large-flowered classes. The former are singles and are mostly used for bedding or massing. Some of the small lilac-limbed kinds are apparently very closely related to the stem-species, P. violacea, possibly . direct derivatives of it. Countess of Ellesmere, Rosy Morn, and similar ones are among the best rosy or pink kinds for edgings and hanging-baskets and window- boxes. Large-flowered petunias are double or single, fringed, ruffled, fluted, and otherwise modified, some of them having deep velvety colors of great richness and flowers of much substance. There are marbled, spotted, and penciled flowers among them. Double forms • are produced by crossing the most double flowers that are capable of producing good pollen on the best single strains. Only a part of the seed- lings produce doubles, but all the others are likely to produce superior semi-double and single forms. Single flowers carefully pollinated from double flowers will produce seed which will average 25 per cent doubles, and single flowers bearing petaloid anthers similarly polli- nated will give an average as high as 40 per cent doubles. The weaker seedlings are most likely to give full double flowers. Petunias thrive on both ordinary and rich soil, bloom- ing well on land too rich for other plants, and some of the bedding and small kinds doing well even on poor soil with plenty of moisture. They are sun-loving plants, although they bloom well in partial shade. The cul- ture is simple and easy. Seeds may be sown directly in the open, or the plants may be started in flats or pots indoors for early results. The plants are tender and therefore should not be trusted in the open until set- tled weather comes. The high-bred types require more care in the growing. They would best be started indoors, and be given the choicest positions in the open garden. Extra care should be given to the germination, for every seed that is lost may mean the loss of a form unlike any other; for these high-class petunias are not fixed into definite seed-varieties to any extent. Usually the weakest plants in the lot of seedlings will produce the choicest results among the high-bred single and double strains, the strongest seedlings tending to make weedy plants. Transplanting is recommended for the high- bred fringed and double strains, as well as for early bloom. The seeds are small and should be covered lightly in well-pulverized soil. On ordinary soil, petunias may be thinned or transplanted to 10 or 12 2880. Petunia hybrida. ( X %) PETUNIA PEUMUS 2565 inches apart each way; but on fertile soil, and particu- larly with the larger-growing forms, the distance may be as much as 15 to 18 inches. Young petunia plants are very susceptible to frost. It is well to pull out some of the least desirable plants as they grow and begin to crowd. The stronger common strains of petunia are likely to self-sow or volunteer (come up themselves in the spring from seed). Fancy kinds are sometimes propagated by cuttings or slips from plants carried over winter, after the manner of geraniums. The best double strains particularly are often perpetuated by cuttings. There are no special insects or diseases attacking the petunia. Winter bloom is easy to secure from petunias under glass. Best, or at least quickest, results are secured from cuttings; these may be taken from good shoots in late September or early October from selected outdoor plants, and bloom should be secured by February 1. If plants are grown from seeds, the sowing should take place in late summer, for seedlings grow slowly in the short days of fall and winter; the seedlings should be handled in pots. Sometimes old plants that are not spent are lifted in the fall and cut back, and the new growth will give good winter bloom. Petunias under glass require cool treatment, a night temperature of 45° to 50° suiting them well. A somewhat warmer treat- ment than that given carnations may be expected to produce satisfactory results. axillaris, BSP. (P. nyctaqiniflbra, Juss. Nicotiana axillaris, Lam.). Fig. 2879. LARGE WHITE PETUNIA. Tall and relatively stout, usually growing erect: Ivs. large and rather thick, oval-oblong, upper ones nearly or quite sessile and the lower ones narrowed into a dis- tinct petiole: fls. dull white, long-tubed (the tube 3 or 4 times the length of the calyx), fragrant at evening. Argentina. B.M. 2552. — Frequently seen in old gar- dens, and also escaped. violacea, Lindl. VIOLET-FLOWERED PETUNIA. Sts. slender: Ivs. oval or ovate, sessile or very short-stalked: fls. smaller, broad-tubed (the tube twice or less the length of the linear calyx- lobes), rose-red or violet, the limb relatively short. Argen- tina. B.R.1626. B.M. 3113 (as Salpiglossis in- tegrifolia) .—This species, or its garden deriva- tives, sometimes runs wild from gardens. hybrida,Hort. Figs. 2880-2882. Common petu- nia, probably a hybrid deriva- tive of the two E receding. For. istory, see Bailey, "Survi- val of the Un- like." P.M. 2: 173 (asP.nycta- giniflara viola- cea). B.M. 3556. — This type is remarkably variable, but it differs markedly from either parent: from P. axillaris in its broader tube and many colors; from P. violacea in its longer tube, wider limb, and many colors; from both in its much larger and multiform fls. and more stocky growth. In some of the strains, the fl. is very broad and open, measuring 4 or 5 in. across. There are types with the fls. deeply fringed; others with star-like mark- ings radiating from the throat and extending nearly or quite to the margin of the limb; others with full double fls. The colors range from white to deep red-purple, and variously striped and barred. There are forms of very dwarf and compact habit. L H. B. 2881. Petunia hybrida. A double form. (XK) 2882. A modern race of fringed petunia. i) DD. Ovules only 2 on each placenta. E. Lvs. all simple and entire (except perhaps the lowest). 9. humilis, Torr. & Gray. Annual, unbranched or branched from the base, 2-6 in. high, pubescent or infi. often hirsute: Ivs. spatulate, oblong or oblanceolate, generally obtuse, the lower rarely with 1-2 ascending lobes: spikes loosely paniculate or solitary; corolla indigo-blue, rather deeply lobed, surpassing the usually linear calyx-lobes; filaments moderately exserted, glabrous or sparingly bearded above. Calif, to Wash. — A pretty little plant. EE. Lvs. oblong or narrower, pinnately toothed to compound. 10. bipinnatifida, Michx. Biennial, erect, branche_d, 1-2 ft., viscid above: Ivs. with slender petioles, to 5 in. long, pinnatifid, with 3-7 ovate or oblong dentate or pinnatifid segms. : fls. violet or blue, J^in. or more broad, in loose racemes which are little scirpioid; calyx-lobes linear; corolla rotate-campanulate with conspicuous ciliate appendages in pairs between the stamens. X. C. to Mo. and south. 11. glanduldsa, Xutt. (Eutoca glanduldsa, Hook.). Viscid-pubescent and glandular annual, softly if at all hirsute, 9-12 in. or more high: Ivs. irregularly and inter- ruptedly 2-pinnatifid, or below divided; the numerous lobes oblong, small, somewhat incised, obtuse: calyx- lobes oblong or spatulate; corolla about 2 lines long, bluish, purplish or white, with lobes shorter than the tube; stamens and 2-cleft style moderately or conspicu- ously exserted : seeds with the minute reticulations even. Texas to Ariz, and north to Mont. 163 2568 PHACELIA PH^NOCOMA 12. congesta, Hook. (P. conferta, Don). Pubescent and commonly cinereous erect annual, hardly viscid or glandular in the least, a foot or more high : Ivs. pinnately 3-7-divided or -parted, and with a few interposed small lobes, the main divisions oblong or oval, incisely pin- natifid or irregularly lobed, the lower ones mostly petiolate and the upper confluent: calyx-lobes linear or somewhat spatulate; corolla blue, 3 lines long, the lobes as long as the tube; stamens more or less exserted: seeds reticulate scabrous, the fine sharp meshes being, as it were, toothed at the junctions. Texas, New Mex. B.M. 3452. V. 5:154; 12:140. 13. tanacetifdlia, Benth. (P. tripinnata, Hort.). Erect annual, often cult., roughish hirsute or hispid, not glandular, or above slightly so, 1-3 ft. high: Ivs. pinnately 9-17-divided into linear or oblong-linear once or twice pinnately parted or cleft divisions, all sessile or nearly so, the lobes mostly linear-oblong: spikes cymosely clustered, at length elongated: very short fruiting pedicels ascending or erect: calyx-lobes linear or linear-spatulate, not twice the length of the ellipsoidal caps. ; stamens and style conspicuously exserted : seeds with very narrow pits bounded by thick walls. Calif. B.M. 3703. B.R. 1696.— Said to be sometimes cult, as a bee-plant. According to Jepson, "Cows fed on it show a marked increase in yield of milk but will not eat it alone at first." Variable. Var. alba, Hort., has been offered. L. F. HENDERSON. L. H. B.f PHJEDRANASSA (Greek, gay queen, suggested by the beauty of the flowers). Amaryllidacese. Tender mostly sximmer-blooming bulbs, with flowers that are tubular in appearance, borne in umbels, generally drooping and usually bright red with green tips. Bulb tunicated : fls. on a peduncle or scape 10 in. to 2 or 3 ft. long; perianth subcylindrical; segms. 6, equal, regular, spreading only at the tip; stamens inserted at or below the throat of the tube; ovary 3-celled; ovules many, superposed: caps, globose, loculicidally 3-valved; seeds many, small, black: Ivs. petioled, oblong or lan- ceolate, produced after the fls. according to Baker, but this point is doubtful for all species. — Species 4 or 5, in the Andes at 7,000-12,000 ft., except P. Carmiolii, a native of Costa Rica, which differs from all other species in having the perianth-segms. much shorter than the tube. Probably the choicest species is P. chloracra, the tube of which seems at first sight over 2 in. long; however, the segms. are merely connivent and it is only for a distance of Min. at the base that they are really grown together into a tube. This species has 6-12 fls. in an umbel. P. gloriosa, Hort., recommended by some dealers, seems to be unknown to botanists. The species are kept rather dry in winter, and bloomed in the open or perhaps under glass in spring, summer, or autumn ; prop, by offsets. They apparently thrive under the treatment afforded by a cool greenhouse. A. Tube of perianth much shorter than the segms. B. Fls. chiefly red. chloracra, Herb. (P. obtusa, Herb. Crinum quitense, Spreng.). Bulb globose, 2-3 in. thick: Ivs. produced after the fls.; blade 8-12 in. long, 2-3 in. wide, oblong- lanceolate and acute, the petiole clasping: peduncle 2-3 ft. long, nearly terete, glaucous; fls. scarlet, tipped green, 6-12 in the umbel, usually drooping, l^2~2 in. long. Andes of Ecuador, to 12,000 ft. B.M. 5361. B.R. 31:17. — The name is sometimes erroneously written P. chloracea. BB. Fls. chiefly green. viridifldra, Baker. Bulb ovoid, 1*4 in. thick: If. solitary, bright green, lanceolate, nearly 1 ft. long; petiole short: peduncle 1 ft. long, terete; fls. about 4 in an umbel, green toward the tip, without any red, passing into whitish toward the base, drooping, the perianth-limb 1J4-1M in- long. Andes of Ecuador. — Possibly a color variety of P. chloracra. AA. Tube of perianth much longer than segms. Carmi61ii, Baker. Bulb globose, 2-3 in. diam.: Ivs. 1-2, equaling peduncle, oblong-lanceolate, acute, bright green, the petiole much shorter than blade: peduncle about 2 ft. long, terete, pale glaucous-green, bearing 8-10 fls. in an umbel; fls. with perianth-limb 2 in. long, the bright red tube cylindrical and 3 tunes as long as the oblong-lanceolate green pale-edged segms.; stamens exserted. Costa Rica. B.M. 8356, where it is said the plant requires complete rest after the Ivs. die down. "The tall fl.-stalk precedes the Ivs., which, however, develop while the plant is hi flower." WILHELM MILLER. L. H. B.f PRffiDRANTHUS (Greek for, splendent or gay, and flower, alluding to the brilliantly colored flowers). Big- nonidcese. Ornamental vine grown for its very showy flowers and also for its handsome foliage. Evergreen climbing shrub: Ivs. opposite, with 1 pair of entire Ifts., the terminal 1ft. usually replaced by a 3-parted or repeatedly 3-parted tendril : fls. in terminal racemes; calyx campanulate, 5-10-nerved, leathery, tomentose, with 5 unequal short teeth; corolla tubular- funnelform, curved; stamens slightly exserted; disk annular, raised; ovary ovoid, tomentose, with many ovules in several rows.-^-One species in Mex. Formerly usually referred to Bignpnia, from which it differs chiefly in the slender filiform tendrils, the leathery tomentose calyx, the exserted stamens and tomentose ovary. — A very handsome strong-growing vine for subtropical regions or in the N. for the cool greenhouse; one of the most showy bignoniads on account of its large brilliantly colored fls. For cult, and prop., see Bignonia. buccinatorius, Miers (Bignonia Cherere, Lindl. B. Kerere, Hort., not Aubl. B. buccinatdria, Mairet). Tall tendril-climber; branches obtusely angled: Ifts. 2, or sometimes 3, elliptic to ovate-oblong, cuspidate or obtuse, thinly coriaceous, glabrous and lustrous above, tomentose beneath while young, later hairy only on the veins, glandular, 2-3 in. long: fls. pendulous, in terminal racemes with erect stout and short rachis; calyx 2^in. long; corolla 4 in. long, blood-red, yellow at the base, lobes spreading, emarginate, about Kin. long. Summer. Mex. B.M. 7516. Gn. 26:520. B.R. 1301. R.H. 1898:580. ALFRED REHDER. PK/ENOCOMA (shining hair, Greek, alluding to the involucre). Compdsitse. A South African little shrub, sometimes grown under glass for the showy flower- heads. Of the Gnaphalium-Helipterum-Helichrysum rela- tion, one species: heads heterogamous, very many-fld., showy because of the brilliant and elongated inner scales of the involucre; florets all tubular and 5-toothed, the marginal female and in a single row, the others male with abortive stigma; receptacle naked; pappus of many rough bristles in a single row, equaling the corolla, somewhat unlike as between the female and male fls. The stiff parts of the involucre make it useful as an everlasting, for which use it is a very showy subject. These are handsome and distinct evergreen plants. They need a cool airy and shaded house during the summer. They should have plenty of ventilation in the spring and well into the autumn; this will tend greatly to solidify the growth, this causing the greater production of flowers. It is better to place the pots on screened coal-ashes, as this helps to keep the roots cool and moist. They are better if kept by themselves, as they should not be syringed. Watering is a matter of great importance at all seasons. They need some stak- ing and tying so as to keep them in shape. When the weather is cool enough, they should have a temperature PH.EXOCOMA PHAIUS 2569 of 45° to 50° at night, with about 10° rise with sunshine. In midwinter the temperature may drop to 40° at night. Any repotting may be done after they are through flowering. Compost used for potting these plants should be loam and fibrous peat in equal parts, left lumpy, and about one-third of silver sand added to the mixture. Give the pots thorough drainage. — They may be increased from cuttings made of the points of some of the moderately strong growths, leaving them about 3 inches long. Place in pans filled with sand. Give them a temperature of about 55°, keeping them moderately close, shaded, and moist. When they show signs of root-formation they may be given more light. When rooted, pot off into small pots using the compost mentioned above, and by shifting and the same culture they grow into good plants in two years. When they get into 8- or 10-inch pots, with plenty of roots, they may have liquid feeding which will help to retain their vigor. These plants are not much seen in this country, but should be more grown. (J. J. M. Farrell.) prolifera, Don (Xerdnthemum prdiferum, Linn. Hdichrysum proliferum, Willd.). An old cult, plant, now little grown: sts. woody, 1-2 ft. high, much branched, short side-branchlets tomentose and with minute closely imbricated scale-like Ivs., on the main sts. the Ivs. acuminate, rigid, and deciduous: heads terminal, solitary, 1-1^ in- across; involucre with many rows of woolly-based scales, the inner ones being rosy purple as if rays and lanceolate-acuminate. Mount- tains in the Cape" region. B.M. 2365. B.R. 21. Var. Barnesii, Hort., has heads of deep crimson. L.H. B. PHJEOMERIA (Greek, dark and j>arf). Zinoibera- cea?. Perennial herbs from a thick rhizome, grown in the hothouse for their foliage and fls. Flowering sts. separate from the leafy ones; the latter not rarely tall, sometimes gigantic and forming very dense reed-like thickets; the former erervwhere smaller although sometimes about 3 ft.: Ivs. distichous, often numerous, rather large, provided with a commonly leathery ligule: fls. sessile, in spikes or heads, often large or very large, either broad-pyramidal or subglobose, rarely concave at the top, surrounded commonly by a rather large involucre composed of colored bracts, the flowering bracts smaller and less intensely colored; calyx tubular or subclavate, frequently deeply split on one side, often very short-acuminate or not at all tabulate at the top; corolla-tube narrowly cylindrical, dilated toward the top; the lobes narrow, subspatulate, subequal: caps, or rather berries massed together somewhat resembling a pineapple. — About 16 species. Ceylon, to New Guinea. Phaeomeria was formerly included in Amomum but is now considered a distinct genus. P. magnified, Schu- mann (Alplnia magnified, Roscoe. Amomum magnifi- cum, Benth. £-4 in. across. June. Cent. Japan. I.T. 5:171 (as P. amurense). — Often confused with P. japonicum and cult, under that name. japdnicum, Maxim. Tree, to 30 ft., with slightly fissured dark brown bark, not corky: 1-year-old branches reddish brown: If.-rachis densely villous or tomentose; Ifts. 9-13, ovate to ovate-oblong, acuminate, truncate or subcordate and very unequal at the base, minutely crenulate and ciliate, dull green above, villous beneath all over, more densely on the veins, 3-4 in. long: infl. hoary-tomentose : fr. black, nearly Kin. thick, in broad panicles 2-3 K in. across. June. Cent. Japan. S.T.S. 1:95. BB. Infl. distinctly higher than broad: ovary pubescent. chinense, Schneid. Tree, to 30 ft. : bark dark grayish brown, slightly fissured, not corky: 1-year-old branch- lets purplish brown: Ifts. 7-13, oblong-ovate to oblong- lanceolate, acuminate, rounded or broadly cuneate at the base, dark yellowish green above, villous beneath, 3K-5K in. long: infl. densely pubescent: fr. black, nearly Kin. across, in panicles about 1-2K in. broad and 2-3 in. long. Cent. China. Var. glabriusculum, Schneid. (P. sinense, Dode). Lfts. pubescent only on the veins beneath. Cent, and W. China. ALFRED REHDER. PHELYR&A (after Louis and Hier. Phelipeaux). Also spelled Phelipsea. Orobanchaceae. Herbs, puber- ulent or glabrous, from a thick short few-scaled base: scapes simple, elongated, remotely few-scaled or the elongated peduncles naked, scape-like, always 1-fld., bractless; calyx 5-parted, broad-campanulate, lobes acute, unequal; corolla-tube broadly ventricose, in- curved, limb sub-2-labiate, with 5 broadly rounded not very unequal lobes, anterior lip at base gibbous or with 2 broad glandulose-pubescent spots; stamens included; ovary with 4 placenta?: fr. a perfect 2-valved acute, ovate caps. — About 5 species, chiefly in the Orient, but also in N. Afr. and Asia. P. folidta, Lamb. Parasitic leafless herb 1-1 K ft. high: sts. simple, rather stout, glandular-puberulous, reddish: fl. solitary, termi- nal, ebracteate; calyx campanulate, unequally 5-lobed, usually somewhat 2-lipped, lobes oblong or ovate, deep red or chestnut-brown; corolla ringent, tube widely and obliquely campanulate, orange flushed with red outside, limb 2-lipped, reddish yellow outside, brilliant crimson within, the throat with 2 black hirsute spots: fr. a wide ovate caps, nearly Kin. long. Caucasus. It has been raised in botanic gardens in Eu. F. TRACY HUBBARD. PHENOLOGY (contraction of phenomenology; that is, the science of phenomena) is the study of the rela- tionships between the climate of any place and the annual periods of plants and animals. Plants vege- tate, bloom, and ripen fruit at more or less definite seasons, each after its kind; animals mate, bear young, migrate and hibernate each also after its kind; but these recurring events are related to the climate in which these things live: with these inter-relationships phenology has to do. The most complete means of comparing the climate of one year with that of another are the life-events of the animals and plants of the years. Thermometrical readings are the customary measures, but the thermometers record only tempera- ture, whereas local climate is modified by conditions of humidity, cloudiness, the sequence of atmospheric changes., and many subtle agencies which cannot be measured by means of instruments. Living things are the agents that really measure climate. A record of the life-events of living things, therefore, even though imperfect, should contribute to the science of clima- tology; and incidentally it should contribute much to the science of biology. Records of plant-events are more comparable than those of animal-events, because plants are stationary and have no volition to adapt themselves to inclemencies by means of change of position, diet, or otherwise; therefore, plants emphati- cally express climatal influence. A record of the first blooming of a given apple tree, for example, during a series of years would give comparable measures of the lateness or earliness of the different seasons. Most so- called phenological observations in this country have been mere records of dates of blooming, leafing, migra- tion of birds, peeping of frogs, and the like, without correlative data respecting the local climate. They are therefore of relatively little consequence to science. In this country the literature of phenology is meager. See Bailey, Essay 17, "Survival of theUnlike,"and "Weather Review," Sept. 1896, U. S. Weather Bureau. L. jj. B. PHENOMENAL BERRY PHENOMENAL BERRY: See article on Loganberry, page 1900. PHILADELPHUS (named for the ancient Egyptian king, Ptolemy Philadelphus, who reigned from 285 to 247 B.C.). Saxifragdcex. SYRIXGA. MOCK ORANGE. Popular ornamental deciduous or rarely half-evergreen shrubs. Leaves opposite, entire to variously toothed, occa- sionally slightly revolute, and almost invariably ciliate: fls. often very "fragrant, mostly white, a few creamy or with purple or rosy spots at or near the base of the petals, in racemes, or solitary or in cymose groups of 1-6; calyx-lobes, petals, and styles usually 4; stamens numerous: fr. a dehiscent commonly 2-parted 4- valved many-seeded caps. — About 30^-35 species have been described. The genus is essentially Asiatic and American. P. coronarius is certainly a native of Armenia and the Caucasus, and several varieties of it PHILADELPHUS 2579 ™f * Vf^r 2902. Philadelphus coronarius. extend the range to Japan, and it is wild in Eu., but whether or where it is native is uncertain, because it has undoubtedly sometimes escaped from cult. The genus has 3 roughly defined areas of distribution, — X. Asia and Japan, W. Amer. from Brit. Col. to Calif.), S. Atlantic States, and Mex. It has no well-marked characters which may be used to separate the species, which therefore often resemble each other closely and are sometimes connected by intermediate forms. The latest treatment of the genus is in Schneider's Illus- triertes Handbuch der Laubholzkunde, vol. 1, p. 362 (1905). On account of the great confusion of names in the genus, rather more synonymy than usual is given, but the selection is nevertheless of the names more likely to be met with or to cause confusion. The com- plete synonymy is far larger. Syringa. the common name of Philadelphus, is identical with the generic name of the lilac. This arises from the use of Syringa by the old herbalists. Thus, in 1597, John Gerarde in his "Herball" gives Syringa alba, white pipe, S. caerulea, blue pipe, and S. arabica, Arabian pipe, the first being Philaddphus coronarius, the second Syringa rulgaris (lilac), and the third Jas- minum Sambac. Tournefort, in 1700, selected Syringa for the first, but Linnaeus, whom we follow, chose to use it for the second. However, Tournefort 's usage pre- vailed in English speech, while the Germans call Philadelphus either Pfeifenstrauch (=pipe-shrub, like the herbalists' "pipe," above) or Jasmin, perpetuating the third element in the original heterogeneous syringa. The French also use syringa as the common name of Philadelphus, but in the form seringat. Philadelphus generally blossoms in June; in fact, it is remarkable for the uniformity of the blossoming period, both in cultivation and in its native haunts, throughout the world. Most of the members of the genus are hardy North, except P. Coulteri, P. mexicanus, and the other Mexican species. They are well adapted to shrubberies and mostly do not grow very high, the tallest being P. pubescens, attaining a height of about 20 feet; others, as P. coronarius, P. Zeyheri, and P. inodorus, grow nearly as high, while P. microphyUus hardly exceeds 3 feet. If priming is needed it should be done after flowering, since the flowers appear on the wood formed the previous year. Usually propagation is by hardwood cuttings, or by suckers and greenwood cuttings under glass; also by layers and by seeds, but when several species are growing together they are likely to hybridise. INDEX. For a few vernacular names, sometimes popularly written with- out a preceding specific name, see P. Lemoinei, of which they are really varieties. acuminatus, 6. guatemdlensis, 24. Perle Blanche, 16. BiUiardii, 18. hirsutus, 23. phantasia, 11. ealifornicut, 5. incanus, 8. primvlxflants, 6. eolumbianus, 5. inodorus, 21, 23. pubescens, 18, 22. Conquete, 13. insignis, 18. purpureo-maculatus, cordifoliu*, 5. intectus, 18. coronarius, 3, 4, 6,21. Kochianut, 4. Rehdenanus, < . Coulteri, 26. latifoliui, 18. Rosace, 15. dianthiflorug, 6. laxus, 21, 22. roszflorus, 6. erectus, 10. Lemoinei, 10. sahcifohus, 6. Eitoile Rose, 12. Lewisii, 5. soteumanu*. 6. Falconeri, 17. Magdalen* 20. soteurm, 6. fimbriatus 10. mexicanus, 24, 26. sempemrens,_2i. flore-pleno, 6. microphyllus 25. sencanthus, /. floribundus, 9. multiflanttpknus, 6. speciosissimus, 6. foliis argenteo-mar- nanus, 6. tpeciosus, £2.. giaatis, 6. nepalensis, 1, 6. tomentosus, 6. foliis aureis, 6. """^H,,6' , tnnernus, •"• Gordonianws, 5, 18. Nuee Blanche, 14. yemicosus^ 19. aracilis, 23. poflu/u*, 6. \ oie Lactee, 2. grandiflorus, 6, 9, 18, pekmensis 3. ypkohama, 6. 21, 22. penduhfohus, 19. Zeyhen, 4, 6. A. Fls. in simple or rarely compound racemes (Nos. 1-20). B. Calyx glabrous without, or with some scattered hairs (except in P. sericanthus and P. incanus). c. Pistils little or not at all exceeding the stamens. D. Styles separating less than half way down (except often in varieties of P. Lemoinei) (Aros. 1-12). E. Lvs. some, generally most, of the mature ones more than 1% in. long. F. The Ivs. of young succulent shoots and suckers not approaching a circular outline, usually moderately toothed, if at att. G. The calyx essentially glabrous without. 1. nepalensis, Koehne. Upright shrub to about 5ft.: Ivs. at maturity about 1^-1% in. long, ovate-lanceo- late, acuminate, evenly and distantly mucronate- denticulate, with white or yellowish tufts of hairs in the axils of lateral veins, especially on Ivs. of young succulent shoots and suckers: fls. practically scentless; cup of the calyx and caps, plainly acute to long- pointed at base. June. X.E. Himalayas. 2. Voie Lactee. Hybrid between P. nepalensis and P. microphyUus. Similar to the preceding and superior to it, most readily distinguished by the Ivs. of the young succulent shoots and suckers, which are more coarsely toothed, and not so long-pointed: caps, not seen but probably more rounded at base. June. G.M. 55:554. G.W*. 17, p. 103. 3. pekinensis, Rupr. (P. coronarius var. pekinensis, Maxim.). Erect shrub, to 5 ft., closely resembling P. nepalensis, but without the characteristic tufts of hairs on lower If .-surf aces, and usually with purplish petioles. May, June. Mongolia, X. China. 2580 PHILADELPHUS PHILADELPHUS 4. Zeyheri (P. Kochidnus, Koehne. P. coronarius Zey- heri, Schrad.). Hybrid of uncertain origin, probably between P. coronarius and P. inodorus. Lower than P. coronarius: Ivs. variable, ovate to ovate-lanceolate, acute to acuminate, with hard-tipped teeth, glabrous or nearly so, or hairy along the veins beneath, those of young succulent shoots and suckers ovate-lanceolate to broadly ovate, sometimes with tufts of hairs on the youngest, as in P. nepalensis: fls. white, slightly fragrant or scentless. — A puzzling shrub, at times confusingly similar to P. coronarius. June. 5. Lewisii, Pursh (P. columbianus, Koehne. P. Gordonianus, Lindl. P. califdrnicus, Benth. P. cordi- folius, Lange). Upright shrub, to 8 ft., very variable: Ivs. about 1-3 in. long, most not more than 2H in., about J^-2 (usually not more than \Y±) in. wide: racemes of varying length, generally but not always leafy; fls. white, borne in great profusion, in wild plants very fragrant, but, judging by some printed statements, not always retaining the odor under cult. June, July. Brit. Col. to Calif. B.R. 25:32.— Excellent.- 6. coronarius, Linn. (P. pdllidus, Hayek. P. coro- narius nivdlis, Hort.). Figs. 2902, 2903. Shrub, to 10 ft.: Ivs. ovate-lanceolate (rarely ovate), generally acuminate, usually rather evenly mucronate-denticu- late (exceptionally almost entire), rarely slightly ser- rate, thickish at maturity, about 1H-4 in. long, Yr-IVi in- broad, slightly hairy beneath: fls. in rather dense racemes, white or more often with a slight creamy tone, very fragrant. May, June. Caucasus, Armenia, and probably S. E. Eu. B.B. 2:186. F.E. 39:75 (habit). J.H. III. 70:471— This is the common syringa, or mock orange, with less attractive foliage than some, but the delicious fragrance unsurpassed. The following horticultural and 2 wild varieties are cult. Var. fldre-pleno, Hort. (P. coronarius dianthifld- rus, rosseflbrus, and probably primulaeflorus and multi- flbrus plenus, and other names), with more or less dou- ble fls. Var. foliis argenteo-marginatis, Hort., Ivs. white-margined. Var. foliis a&reis, Hort., lys. golden yellow. Var. speciosissimus, Hort. (P. speciosissimus, P. Zeyheri speciosissimus). Generally lower shrub than the species, with rather uniform and smaller Ivs., broadly ovate to rotund. Var. grandifldrus, Hort. (P. 2903. Philadelphia coronarius. — Mock orange. grandifloriis, Hort.), with larger fls. than in the species, mostly 2 in. or more diam. Not to be confused with P. inodorus var. grandiflorus, Gray, below. Var. salici- folius, Hort. (P. salicifolius Hort., in part). Lvs. typi- cally narrowly lanceolate, more or less willow-like, "but sometimes, probably by reversion, broadly ovate, more coarsely toothed. Var. nanus, Schrad. (P. ndnus, Hort. P. salicifolius, Hort., in part), dense bushy plants, usually not over \Y2 ft. high; long cult, and known to flower rarely. Var. acuminatus, A. H. Moore (P. acu- minatus, Lange, P. satsiimi, P. satsumanus, P. yoko- hama or yokohamse of cult.). Lvs. more acuminate than in the species, the tips often bent to one side, especially in wild specimens, with conspicuous hard- tipped teeth or serrations. Yunnan Province, China, Japan, and Tsu Shima. Var. tomentosus, Hook. f. & Thorns. (P. tomentosus, Wall. P. nepalensis, Lodd.). Shrub, to about 6 ft. : Ivs. very hairy beneath. Hima- layas and Thibet. Rather unattractive and of uncer- tain hardiness. GG. The calyx tomentose. 7. sericanthus, Koehne. Lvs. lanceolate, distantly blunt-toothed or entire, mature ones about ljhr-4 in. long, %-2 in. wide, glabrous beneath, or with few scattered hairs: fls. about 5^in. across. June. Hupeh Province, China. — Larger-lvd. specimens have been distinguished as var. Rehderianus, Koehne. 8. incanus, Koehne. Lvs. ovate, more or less abruptly acuminate, dentate, with 5 principal veins, mature ones 13^-4/4 m- l°ng> Y&&- across. June. Hupeh and Szechuan provinces. China. FF. The Ivs. of young succulent shoots and suckers very large, ovate-lanceolate to orbicular, very coarsely toothed. 9. floribundus (P. verrucbsus floribundus, P. grandi- florus floribundus, Hort.). Hybrid of uncertain origin, probably with P. coronarius as one parent. Shrub resembling P. coronarius: Ivs. generally hairier than in P. coronarius, and with characteristically very large, ovate-lanceolate to more often orbicular, generally coarsely toothed Ivs. on young succulent shoots and suckers: fls. in racemes of about 5, about 2 in. across, slightly fragrant. EE. Lvs. rarely over 1 % in. long (usually from about 10. Lemdinei. Hybrid of P. coronarius and P. microphyllus. Shrub with spreading branches, freely flowering: twigs and little branchlets with short hairs: ordinary mature Ivs. ovate to ovate-lanceolate, rather uniform, rather small, glabrous or nearly so, acute to acuminate, with a few minute teeth, those of the young succulent shoots and suckers entire or remotely few- toothed, somewhat larger: fls. 2-9, in dense racemes, having a delicate but charming perfume. G.F. 2:617. G.L. 28:225. — The following horticultural varieties are of interest: Var. erectus. Flowering branches irregularly ascending, forming a more compact bush and less desir- able. M.D.G. 1902:383. Avalanche. Graceful shrub, taller than other varieties, branches sometimes as long as 6 ft. : easily distinguished from the other varieties by its lanceolate Ivs. G.C. III. 21:89. M.D.G. 1896:293; 1907:379. Bouquet Blanc. Lower If. -surfaces and twigs with scattered hairs, distinctly visible : fls. in bou- quet-like masses, not very fragrant. G.M. 55:487. G.W. 17, p. 101. Candelabre. Very low shrub, ap- proaching P. microphyllus in size, hairy as in the pre- ceding, but with a more open candelabra-like infl. M.D.G. 1896:294. Mont Blanc. Normally, probably, the most profusely flowering variety, but very variable in this respect. Hairs scarcely visible, a character at once distinguishing it from all the preceding. Exceed- ingly fragrant. Manteau d'Hermine. Twigs nearly or quite glabrous. Pavilion Blanc. Profusely flowering shrub: branches rounded or squarish in habit, twigs hairy: Ivs. closely covered with silky hairs beneath. One of the most beautiful, and the sweetest scented of all the varieties, the perfume resembling that of P. micro- phyllus. Gerbe de Neige. Calyx hairy. Boule d'Argent. Fls. double, stamens mostly sterile, about 1*4 in. across, not very sweet-scented; calyx glabrous. Oldest and least desirable of double-fld. sorts. G.C. III. 18:18; 23:331. Virginal. Large double fragrant fls., 2H m- across, or wider. G.M. 54:459. R.H. 1910, pp. 408, 409. Mer de Glace. Double fls., similar to preceding. G.W. 17, p. 102. Var. fimbriatus is a distinct variety with large fls., petals twisted and deeply serrate. For other varieties of this hybrid consult list, p. 2582. PHILADELPHIA PHILADELPHIA 2581 11. phantasia (P. Lemoinei Fantaisie). Hybrid between P. Coulteri and an unknown variety of P. Lemoinei. Fls. fragrant, white, tinted with pale rose at the center of the fl.; petals fringed at the edge. June. Var. purpureo-maculatus, Hort. Derivative of P. phan- tasia. Lvs. essentially as in P. Lemoinei, but proportion- ately somewhat broader, with numerous, short, stiff hairs beneath: fls. large, about 1^-2 in. across, exqui- sitely fragrant, with a purple spot at base of each petal; calyx with a few short, silky hairs. B.M. 8193. 12. Etoile Rose. Hybrid between P. phantasia and P. purpureo-maculatus. Lvs. small: fls. delicately fragrant, in rounded panicle-like racemes; petals elon- gate, rose-purple at base, the color diminishing toward the center of the fl. June. DD. Styles separated almost or entirely to the base, especially after flowering. 13. Conquete. Hybrid of unknown origin. Lvs. lanceolate to narrowly ovate-lanceolate, glabrous, about 2-3 in. long, %-\y% in. wide, entire, or with a few small teeth, on young succulent shoots and suckers larger, long-acuminate, coarsely toothed : fls. in a more or less compact but not head-like cluster, very large, to 2 ^4 in. across, sweet-scented; the slender thread-like styles cleft almost to the base, especially after flowering, stigmas generally short and small; calvx glabrous with- out. May, June. G.W. 17, p. 102. 14. Nuee Blanche. Hybrid between P. microphyttus and P. nepalen-sis. Lvs. ovate to ovate-lanceolate, glabrous, about \yr-\% m- l°ngi %~1/^ m- wide, entire or nearly so, on young succulent shoots and suckers ovate, acuminate, conspicuously toothed: fls. not over 1^ in. across, sweet-scented; styles moder- ately slender, gradually broadening into the stigma; calyx glabrous without. May, June. 15. Rosace. Hybrid of unknown origin. Lvs. lanceo- late, glabrous, about 134-3J4 in. long, z/% to about 1 in. wide, entire, on young succulent shoots and suckers toothed: fls. very large, l%-2% in. across, sweet- scented; calyx glabrous without. May, June. 16. Perle Blanche. Shrub, to about 4% ft.: Ivs. ovate, medium-sized, toothed, with small stiff scat- tered hairs beneath: fls. partly double, in head-like clusters, sweet-scented; calyx rather hairy without. May, June. cc. Pistils far exceeding the stamens. 17. Falconeri, Sarg. Fig. 2904. Shrub, to 8 ft., with slender, arching branches: Ivs. ovate-lanceolate, 1^-3 in. long, 3^-1 in. wide, acuminate, entire or very minutely mucronate-denticulate : fls. in loose racemes of 1-6, fragrant, about 1^4 m. across; calyx-lobes very acuminate; petals rather narrow; pistils much longer than the stamens; styles separating as long slender filaments; stigmas scarcely broader than the styles. June. Origin unknown, probably Japanese. G.F. 8:497 (adapted in Fig. 2904). M.D".G. 1899:231. Gng. 8:340. BB. Calyx distinctly hairy or glabrate. 18. pubescens, Loisel. (P. latifolius, Schrad. P. grandiflorus, P. W. Wats., under which name it is often met with, a name commonly also applied to varieties of P. coronarius and of P. inodorus, P. nivalis, and many other species or supposed species; it is also wrongly called P. Gordonianus) . Shrub, to 20 ft.: bark of old branches grayish, either cracking when old and not peeling, or peeling in little flakes, so that shreds do not remain, of younger branches generally yellowish or greenish yellow: Ivs. ovate to broadly elliptic or ovate- lanceolate, lM-4>3 in. long, %-3 in. wide (those of young succulent shoots and suckers may attain dimen- sions of 7}4 X 6% in.), acute to acuminate, almost entire to more or less markedly mucronate-denticulate: fls. in long leafy racemes of 5-10, usually distant, somewhat fragrant. June, July. Term., Ala. (last, according to Rydberg). Souvenir de Billiard (also cult, under the names P. BUlidrdii and P. insignis) is a horticultural variety, with ovate Ivs. on the average smaller than in the species, about l}4-2% in. long, erroneously described as a native species. Var. intectus, A. H. 2904. Philadelphia Falconeri. Moore (P. intectus, Beadle). A natural variety with an externally wholly glabrous calyx, and with Ivs. glabrous or nearly so. Tenn. 19. verrucdsus, Schrad. A plant of uncertain origin: if hybrid, the parentage cannot be surmised. Similar to preceding, but bark of old branches purplish red or chestnut-brown, often peeling in shreds, of the younger generally brownish or reddish. June, July. Var. pendulif olius is a garden variety with slightly droop- ing branchlets. 20. Magdalenae, Koehne. Rather lower, spreading shrub, to about 5% ft. : the calyx generally with fewer short stiff hairs: otherwise closely resembling the pre- ceding, Ivs. inclined to be smaller. AA. Fls. borne singly or in clusters of 1-6 at the tips of the branchlets, not in racemes, except occasionally in P. mexicanus. B. Pedicels and, externally, the calyx glabrous or nearly so: Ivs. glabrous or with few scattered hairs. 21. inoddrus, Linn. (P. corondrius var. inodorus, Martyn. Deutzia corymbdsa, Hort,). Shrub, to about 1 ft., much resembling P. coronarius in general appear- ance: Ivs. ovate to ovate-lanceolate, about 1-6 in. long, K-1M in. broad, entire or with very few, usually very small, distant teeth. May, June. N. C. and Tenn. to Ga. and Miss. B.M. 1478. Usually hardy N. Long in cult.; inferior to P. coronarius. Var. grandifldrus, Gray (P. grandiflorus, Willd. P. laxus, Lindl., also of Lodd. P. Idxus var. grandiflorus, Loud.). Lvs. gen- erally more elongate, more coarsely toothed, especially on young succulent shoots and suckers. N. C. to Ga. and Fla. (last according to Rydberg), naturalized at Bushkill, Pa. 22. laxus, Schrad. (P. grandiflorus var. Idxus, Torr. & Gray. P. specidsus, Schrad. P. pubescens, Lodd.). Shrub, to scarcely more than 1^ ft.: Ivs. narrowly lanceolate, with rarely a few ovate-lanceolate, teeth small, evenly disposed, on young succulent shoots and suckers more or less ovate-lanceolate, more coarsely toothed, some- times with tufts of hairs in axils of lateral veins: fls. white. April, May. Szechuan Province, China. B.R. 25:39. 2582 PHILADELPHIA PHILESIA BB. Pedicels and calyx densely hairy to tomentose (some- times glabrate): Ivs. more or less densely hairy to tomentose beneath. c. Fls. white or cream-colored. 23. hirsiitus, Nutt. (P. hirsiitus var. grddlis, Schrad. P. inodbrus var. hirsiitus, Wood. P. trinervius, Schrad. P. inodbrus, Schrad.). Upright or spreading shrub, to 8 ft.: Ivs. lanceolate to ovate-lanceolate, 1-2% in. long, •Mrl/^ in. wide, acuminate, regularly serrate (rarely denticulate), usually with more or less numerous short, rough hairs above, closely silvery-gray coated beneath, thin and papery when young. April-June. Rocky river banks, Tenn., N. C., Ga., Ala. Gn. 26, p. 375; 34, p. 138. B.R.24:14. B.M. 5334. 24. mexicanus, Schlecht. (P. guatemalensis, and P. sempervirens applied to this in Calif, are apparently gar- den names). Evergreen shrub, to about 63^ ft.: Ivs. ovate; \Y% in. long, iHr-1^ in. wide, acute to short- acuminate, distantly blunt-toothed, glabrous or spar- 2905. Philadelphia Coulteri. ( X %) ingly hairy above, scabrous beneath with short stiff, closely appressed hairs, in general pointing toward the apex: fls. occasionally in short leafy racemes (a transi- tion to the first great subdivision of the genus, see A in key on p. 2579), 2 in. across, cream-colored, fragrant. Mex. and, it is said, Guatemala. B.M. 7600. B.R. 28: 37. R.H. 1852:381. G.C* II. 19:753; 34:218. 25. microphyllus, Gray. Erect, to 6 ft. (usually not so tall), or in its native habitat sometimes sprawling, with spreading slender or rigid branches: Ivs. oblong-ovate, ;H?-1 in. long, YvY$&- wide, acute or subacute (rarely obtuse), entire, scarcely if at all revolute more or less densely covered with silky hairs beneath, glabrous or with short hairs above: fls. M~%in. across, white, exquisitely fragrant: caps. J4-/^in. long, ^g-^m. wide, glabrous or slightly hairy. June, July. Utah and Colo, to Ariz., N. Mex., and Calif. G.C. III. 2:156; 11:86; 51:225. Gn. 40:288. P.G. 5:109. cc. Fls. with a purple spot at base. 26. Cdulteri, Wats. (P. mexicanus var. Coulteri, Burb.). Fig. 2905. Shrub, to about 10 ft.: Ivs. ovate, 1^-2 in. long, %-%in. wide, obtusely to sharply pointed, on young succulent shoots and suckers, larger toothed, those of both young and old covered with rough hairs above and very white-tomentose beneath, the whole like a rough piece of felt: fls. white, very fragrant; petals with red spot at the base; calyx cov- ered with silvery white silky hair: caps, unusually large, about J^in. long. States of Nuevo Leon and Hidalgo, Mex. G.F. 1 :233 (adapted in Fig. 2905). B.R. 14. — Very distinct, desirable for southern latitudes, and one of the most pleasing of the genus. P. argenteus, Rydb. Low straggling shrub, with handsome silvery calyx, and Ivs. silvery beneath. Fort Huachuca, Ariz. Rare plant for southern rockeries or borders. Because of rarity, only one plant, or preferably seeds, should be got, to prevent extermination. — P.brachybdtrys, Koehne (P. pekinensisvar. brachy- botrys, Koehne). Of uncertain standing, allied to P. coronarius. The following variety is of greater merit. Var. purpurdscens, Koehne. With purple calyx and pedicels. B.M. 8324 (as P. De- la vayi). — P. chinensis=P. coronarius var. acuminatus. — P. corona- rius var. nikoensis, A. H. Moore (P. satsumanus var. nikoensis, Rehd.). Related to var. acuminatus, differing in greater pubescence, especially on the veins of lower If.-surfaces. — P. coronarius var. semiplenus. Uncertain, probably=P. coronarius flore-pleno. — P. coronarius var. tenuifdlius, Maxim. A variety differing but slightly from the type, of no advantage to horticulture. — P. Delavayi, L. Henry. Chinese, with fragrant fls., and generally more or less fringed petals, often marked with purple on the back. R.H. 1903, p. 13. Var. melanocalyx, Hort., is a variety with dark purple calyx. — P. Dresden. Hybrid of P. Lemoinei erectus and P. pubescens. Desirable. — P. floridus, Beadle. Desirable shrub, erect, to 6% ft.; with attractive large, white fls., and calyx appressed silky. Suitable for S.E., and perhaps hardy N., like other southern species of this genus. — P. Godohdkeri. Name said to stand for P. hirsutus and P. laxus in gardens. — P. grandiflorus aiireus. Not possible to determine, because of confusion existing in regard to name grandi- florus.— P. grandifldrus laxus fldre-pleno. See note on preced- ing name. — P. inodorus sanguineus. Unknown. Name P. inodorus also variously applied. — P. Lemdinei. Of many varieties recently produced, but not yet intro. into American trade, the following seem worthy of mention. (See also derivatives of P. phantasia, originally treated as varieties of P. Lemoinei, under the former name.) Albdre. Branches more graceful than in the variety Vir- ginal: Ivs. smaller: fls. full double as in that variety. Banniere. Branches arched with the weight of the fls., which are about IMin. across. Dame Blanche. Fls. creamy white, very fragrant; petals fringed. Norma. Profusely flowering: fls. large, white. Ophelia. Gracefully arching branches: fls. white, fragrant. — P. magntficus, Rehd. Garden hybrid of P. inodorus and P. pubescens. — P. mdximus, Rehd. Garden hybrid of uncertain origin; resemb- ling P. coronarius (perhaps hybrid of that with P. pubescens), but with the Ivs. of young succulent shoots and suckers very large, hairy beneath. Not of horticultural merit. — P. nepalensis variegdtus. Name of unknown application. — P. phantdsia. The following varieties not yet in the American trade are of interest: Oeil de Pourpre. Fls. fragrant; petals with black-purple spot at base. Romeo. Profusely flowering: fls. creamy white, with a purple blotch. Sirene. Fls. large, fragrant, white, with a very slight suggestion of rose in the lower corners of the petals. Surprise. Fls. fragrant; petals spotted carmine-purple. Sibylle. Shrub with long curved branches, of pretty habit; fls. white, slightly fringed; petals pale pink spotted toward base. — P. purpurdscens, Rehd.==P. brachybotrys var. pur- purascens. — P. Schrenkii, Rupr. Closely related to P. coronarius. Upright: Ivs. large and thin: fls. scentless, smaller; style appressed pubescent at base. Var. Jdckii. Of uncertain hybrid parentage and doubtful merit. — P. sempervirens, Hort., offered in Calif., is P. mexicanus, described in No. 24; the name appears to have no botanical standing. — P. serpyllifdlius, Gray. Closely related to P. microphyllus, than which it is more straggling, and less attractive, although perhaps good for rockeries. The only species with leath- ery revolute Ivs. — P. splendens. Supposed garden hybrid, said to be worthy of cult. — P. stenopetalus, Carr. This is a species whose description in important particulars suggests P. Falconeri, for which it may prove to be an older name. — P. tenuifdlius, Rupr.= P. coronarius var. tenuifolius, Maxim. Not of horticultural merit. — P. umbellatus, Koehne. Probably hybrid of P. coronarius and P. inodorus: fls. in broad 2-5-fld. panicles, compound of long- peduncled cymes. Parentage unknown. — P. venustus, Koehne. Closely related to P. coronarius var. tomentosus. Perhaps dis- tinct.— P. Wilsonii, Koehne. New Chinese species of the group of P. incanus. Value unknown. ALBERT HANFORD MOORE. PHILAGERIA (a name composed from the parent genera). Liliacese. A hybrid genus between Philesia buxifolia and Lapageria rosea. A smooth climbing shrub: sts. flexuous, rigid, cylindrical: Ivs. alternate, petiolate, leathery, smooth, oblong-acute, 3-nerved: fls. pendulous; sepals glaucous, pale rose-purple; petals imbricate, scarcely open at the apex; anthers 6; ovary free, 1-celled. — One species, a greenhouse hybrid, P. Veitchii, Mast. G.C. 1872:358; III. 55:399. Appar- ently not in cult, at the present time. See Lapageria. PHILESIA (Greek, lovely}. Liliacese. An interest- ing shrub of extra-tropical South America, little grown. See Lapageria and Philageria. Species one, a woody plant bearing showy pendulous red lapageria-like fls. about 2 in. long. It is unlike the ordinary lily types with 6 similar perianth-segms., for it has distinct calyx and corolla parts of 3 sepals and 3 petals. It is closely allied to Lapageria, but differs in habit, in the calycine character of the outer perianth and the monadelphous stamens. It is said to live out- doors in the most favored localities of England and Ireland. Philesia is too slow-growing ever to become very popular. It is a short-jointed hard-wooded shrub, with rather leathery box-like leaves, and will grow to about 4 feet in height in time. The writer's experience with this plant was in a camellia house, in which a night temperature of 45° was maintained, the plants being firmly potted in a light peaty soil. It flowered but PHILESIA PHILODENDRON 2583 sparingly in the latter part of the summer. The flowers were borne only singly in the axils of the leaves. Cut- tings may be rooted when taken from ripened growth, but require careful management in a cool temperature, and are usually several months in rooting. If one tries to grow philesia in a too high temperature, the general result is a good crop of thrips and a case of general debilitv, much as with Pernettya mucronata under simi- lar conditions. Philesia is probably not extraordinarily hard to manage, provided it is kept cool and in a dewy atmosphere, but it will positively rebel against forcing. (W. H. Taplin.) buxifolia, Lam. (P. mageUdnica, Gmel.). Much branched, 3-4 ft. : Ivs. alternate, linear-oblong, 1-1 % in- long, leathery, evergreen, feather-veined, glabrous, glaucous beneath; margins reflexed; petiole jointed at the junction of the blade: fls. solitary, bright rosy red; petals wavy; filaments united into a tube below the middle, then free; ovary 1-celled, with 3 short parietal placentae which bear several ovules: fr. a berry. S. Chile to Magellan. B.M. 4738. F. 1854:65. G.C. II. 18:105; III. 55, suppl. June 6. J.H. III. 42:299. G. 36:329. H.F.4:72. WILHELM MILLER. PHILIBERTlLLA: Philibertia. PEOLIBERTIA (after G. C. Philibert). Incl. Sar- costemma and PhUibertella. Asdepiaddceae. Climbing shrubs or half-shrubs, white-pubescent or glabrous, sometimes grown under glass or far S. for ornament: Ivs. opposite: infl. umbelliform cymes, pedunculate in one axil or rarely sessile; fls. variable in size, often greenish white; calyx small, 5-parted, minutely 5- glandulose within, lobes acute; corolla very broadly campanulate or subrotate, divided slightly to the middle or deeply 5-cleft, with the lobes twisted and narrowly overlapping to the right; exterior crown membrana- ceous, ring-like, adnate to the base of the corolla, free from the stamen-tube or more or less connate with the median wings of the opposite anther, interior 5 crown- scales adnate with the base of staminal tube, with a variable lamina; stamens affixed to the base of the corolla, the filaments forming a short tube: fr. smooth, acuminate, somewhat thickened follicles. — About 30 species, Trop. and Subtrop. Amer. P. clausa, Schu- mann (PhUibertella clausa, Vail). Sts. glabrous or minutely pubescent at the nodes: Ivs. ovate-oblong or lanceolate-oblong, apex acute or acuminate, base rounded or subcordate, peduncles twice as long as the Ivs., or more: fls. many; calyx-lobes oblong-lanceolate, acute, pubescent ; corolla white, lobes oblong, fimbriate- eiliate. Fla. — A twining perennial with glossy ever- green Ivs. and very sweet-scented fls., which has been offered in the trade-lists. P. gracilis, D. Don (P. grandiflbra, Hook.). Twining shrub: Ivs. opposite, cordate at base: the umbels borne between the petioles; calyx 5 deep acuminate segms.; corolla rotate-cam- panulate, more than 1 in. diam., with 5 triangular segms. and a small tooth between them, cream-colored dotted and streaked with purple inside. S. Amer. B.M. 3618. H.U. 2, p. 261. Cult, to some extent in Eu- F. TRACY HUBBARD. PHTLLYREA (its ancient Greek name). Oledcese. Ornamental woody plants, grown for their handsome evergreen foliage. Evergreen shrubs or small trees: Ivs. opposite, short- petioled, entire or serrate, quite glabrous: fls. small, in axillary short racemes, dioecious; calyx 4-toothed; corolla 4-lobed, with short tube; stamens 2, with very short filaments; style shorter than tube; ovary 2- celled: fr. a 1 -seeded black drupe. — Five species in the Medit. region. The name is sometimes misspelled Filaria. The phillyreas have small, or in one species rather large leaves, and small white flowers, followed by small 164 berry-like purplish black fruits. The species are hardy only South, but P. decora, the handsomest of all the species, is probably hardy in sheltered positions as far north as Massachusetts. They may be used in the south- ern states and California for evergreen shrubberies in drier and more exposed localities. They grow in almost any soil and prefer sunny positions; but P. decora seems to grow better if partly shaded. Propagation is by seeds sown after maturity and by cuttings of half- ripened wood under glass in summer or by layers; they are also sometimes grafted on Ligustrum ovalifolium. A. Los. %-2 in. long: fr. small. B. Shape of Ivs. roundish oval to oblong-lanceolate, usually serrate. latifolia, Linn. Shrub or small tree, to 30 ft., with spreading, somewhat rigid branches: Ivs. ovate or oval to ovate-oblong, rounded or slightly cordate at the base, usually serrate, dark green and shining above, pale beneath, %-lM in. long: fr. globose, concave at the apex. May, June. S. Eu., N. Afr. H.W. 3, p. 123. R.F.G. 17:1075. There are several varieties. Var. laevis, Ait. Lvs. ovate, almost entire or slightly ser- rulate. Var. rotundifolia, Arb. Kew. Lvs. broadly ovate or roundish ovate. Var. spinosa, Ait. (P. Uici- fdlia, Willd.). Lvs. ovate or ovate-oblong, sharply serrate. media, Linn. (P. latifolia var. media, Schneid.). Spreading shrub, to 20 ft.: young branchlets puberu- lous: Ivs. oblong-ovate to ovate-lanceolate, entire or serrate, dark green and shining above, %-2 in. long: fr. ovoid, pointed. May, June. Medit. region. N.D. 2:27. G.O.H. 116. R.F.G. 17:1075.— This species seems to be somewhat hardier than the preceding and the following; the most important of the many varie- ties are the following: Var. buxifolia, Ait., with oblong- ovate, obtusish Ivs. Var. oleaefdlia, Ait. (P. oleaefolia, Hort.). Lvs. oblong-lanceolate, almost entire: branches erect. Var. pendula, Ait. Branches spreading and somewhat pendulous: Ivs. lanceolate. BB. Shape of Ivs. lanceolate to linear-lanceolate. angustifolia, Linn. Spreading shrub, to 15 ft., with glabrous branchlets: lys. oblong-lanceolate to linear- lanceolate, usually entire, dull green above, 1-2 in. long: fr. globose or ovoid-globose, pointed. May, June. Medit. region. G.O.H. 115. R.F.G. 17:1076. Var. lanceolata, Ait. Lvs. lanceolate, about 1 in. long. Var. rosmarinifolia, Ait., has linear-lanceolate Ivs., sometimes over 2 in. long, and erect branches. The 3 preceding species are very closely related to each other and considered by some botanists to be varieties of only 1 species and designated as P. varidbilis, Timbal & Loret, or P. vuLgaris, Caruel. AA. Lvs. 3-5 in. long: fr. ]^in. long. decdra, Boiss. & Bal. (P. VHmorinidna, Boiss. & Bal. P. laurifolia, Hort. P. Medwediewi, Sred.). Shrub, to 10 ft., with spreading branches: lys. oblong to oblong- lanceolate, acuminate, usually entire or remotely serru- late, dark green and shining above, yellowish green beneath: fr. oblong-ovoid, purplish black. June, July. W.Asia. B.M. 6800. G.C. III. 4:673; 16:369. R.H. 1889, p. 199; 1895, pp. 204, 205. M.D.G. 1898:349. S.H.2:523. Gn. 24, p. 490. G. 30:325; 36:657. G.W. 5:259. ALFRED REHDER. PHILODENDRON (Greek compound for tree-lov- ing) . Aracex. Shrubby or tree-like ornamental plants, usually climbing, rarely arboreous. Internodes more or less elongated: Ivs. from entire to bipinnatifid: fls. monoecious, on spadices, with no perianth, the sterile with 2-6 stamens united into a sessile obpyramidal body, the pistillate fls. with a 2-10- loculed ovary and some staminodia, the berries inclosed in the involute spathe. — The species are all Trop. 2584 PHILODENDRON PHILODENDRON American. They are monographed by Engler in Das Pflanzenrich, hft. 60 (IV. 23 Dd) 1913, who accepts 222 species. Some of them are prominent in tropical plantings. Only a few philodendrons can be grown to have an ornamental appearance in a small state. One which goes under the name of P. elegantissimum, with finely cut leaves, makes a good pot specimen, although it will reach considerable height when suitable opportunities are afforded. The same may be said of P. Selloum, a beautiful species with pinnatifid leaves. The arborescent kinds should have a very porous rooting medium and copious supplies of water while in active growth. When climbing, they must have provision made for the roots, which are produced along the stems. Some of the spe- cies do well climbing up the stems of tall palms, such as arenga and livistona: otherwise dead trunks of tree ferns make admirable rooting substances for the roots to penetrate and cling to. Propagation is by divi- sion of the climbing stems. P. elegantissimum is an unidentified trade name. A. Lvs. bipinnate. B. Terminal If.-segms. 3-lobed, the lobes unequal. Selldum, C. Koch (P. Sellowi, Hort.). Blade pinnatisect, the segms. again pinnate or lobed; terminal segms. 3- lobed, the cuspidate middle lobe about equaling the obtuse lateral ones: spathe slightly cuspidate, its tube longer than the ovate hooded blade, green without, white within. Distinguished from P. bipinnatifidum by the very numerous parallel trans- lucent spots, which are visible on both sides of the If. and are often excurrent on the margin. Brazil to Para- guay. B.M. 6773. G.W. 10, p. 211. BB. Terminal If.-segms. S-5-lobed, the middle lobe much longer than the lateral ones. bipinnatifidum, Schott. Blade pinnatisect, the segms. again pinnate or lobed; terminal segm. 3-5-lobed, the middle lobe ovate-lanceolate, acute, much longer than the obtuse lateral ones: spathe oblong-ovate, its' tube scarcely distinct from its blade, purple without, white within. S. Brazil. — Does well in the open in S. Calif. AA. Lvs. simple. B. Lf. -blade linear or lanceolate. crassinervium, Lindl. Climbing: Ivs. linear to lan- ceolate-acuminate, the midnerve very thick and in- flated: spathe obtuse and hooded, apiculate at the tip. Brazil. B.R. 1958.— P. n6bile, Bull, is like this but larger: Ivs. long-oblanceolate, large, coriaceous, and shining, obtuse or short-acuminate, narrowed at base: tube of spathe rosy crimson inside and outside, the limb white inside and spotted outside. Guiana. BB. Lf .-blade sagittate. specidsum, Schott. St. tall, arborescent: petioles terete at the base, concavo-convex above, twice as long as the midrib; blade triangular-oblong-ovate, bright green, acuminate, deeply sagittate, the basal lobes rhomboidal, obtuse, abruptly narrowed on the inner side above the middle : spathes thick, green with purple margins; spadix finger-shaped, shorter than the spathe. S. Brazil. BBB. Lf. -blade oblong to ovate-cordate. c. Color of Ivs. milky white above, with reddish veins. SSdiroi, Hort. Lvs. cordate, ovate, milky white with reddish veins above; petiole cylindrical, pink. P. Sodi- rodnum, Engler, is a different plant, apparently not in cult. CC. Color of Ivs. some shads of green above. D. Petioles tomentose. verrucSsum, Mathieu (P. Cdrderi, Hort. P. Lindenii, Hort.). St. long, branching, climbing, ashy gray, sca- brous, angular-cylindrical, swollen at the nodes; internodes 3-6 in. long: petioles stout-cylindrical or somewhat angled, bright metallic red, covered with soft, erect, twisted, fleshy bristles and greenish _ hairs 4-6 in. long; blade glabrous, green above, brilliantly polished, or with paler lines and immersed nerves, bright green beneath with salmon-violet lines between the lateral nerves, 6-8 in. long, 4-6 in. wide, ovate-cor- date, the semicircular basal lobes one-third as long as the slightly undulate apical one. Costa Rica south- ward. I.H. 18:79 (as P. daguense). DD. Petioles glabrous. giganteum, Schott. Climbing: petioles 3 ft. long, thick, cylindrical; blade cordate-ovate, 24-28 in. long, 16-20 in. wide, the basal lobes slightly introrse, semi- ovate or obliquely semicircular, one-fourth as long as the apical one, separated by a broad parabolic sinus: spathe-tube 2 in. long, oblong, pur- ple; spadix very thick. Trop. Amer. Imbe, Schott (P. Sellowianum, Kunth) . Branches rusty purple : peti- oles of young plant semi-cylindri- cal, terete, sparsely brown-spotted, 1 3^2-2 times longer than the midrib; blade like parchment, cordate-ob- long, the oblong basal lobes one- half as long as the apical, separated by a wide parabolic sinus, retrorse or subintrorse; apical lobe cuspidate: spathe green out- side, red within, its broadly ovate blade dirty yellow; spadix shaped like a finger. S. Brazil. The Mexican P. sanguineum has been called P. Imbe in gardens. P. sanguineum differs in having more elongated Ivs. which are red beneath. spectabile, Lind. Large, of vigorous habit: Ivs. 12-15 in. long, nearly as broad, silky or velvety green. Andreanum, Devans. Lvs. rather large, cordate- ovate, with short basal lobes, bronzy green. Colombia. R.H. 1886:36. R.B. 13, fig. 30— Sparingly grown. Looks like a narrow-lvd. anthurium. P. calophyllum, Brongn. (P. nobile, Bull, in part). Lvs. tufted, 2-3 ft. long, 5-6 in. broad at middle, linear-oblong, acuminate, shining above, the costa very thick at base, with linear depressions: spathe pale yellowish green outside, inside bright carmine with white margin. N. Brazil. B.M. 7827. — P. cannifdlium. Mart. Lvs. thick, coriaceous, oblong, shining above, the costa semi-terete: spathe cymbiform, green outside, purple, green and white inside. Brazil. — P. Corsonianum, Makoy. Lvs. 1J4-2J4 ft- long, 11-18 in. broad, shortly pinnatifid, deep green above, beneath purple with green veins: spathe with a purple-crimson spotted tube, the limb light green with red spots outside, the inside carmine with darker spots. Hybrid. B.M. 8172. — P. Devansayeanum, Lind., is a scandent species with rather small glossy green Ivs. which, even to the petioles, are blood-red when young. Peru. I.H. 42:48. — P. Duvivieri, Hort. Lvs. broadly and deeply lobed. Brazil. — P. erubescens, C. Koch. Climbing: Ivs. elongated ovate-triangular, 6-8 in. long, 4-6 in. wide: spathe black-purple. — P. Glazidvii, Hook, f., is a climber something like P. crassinervium: Ivs. oblong-acute, deep green, 12-18 in. long, 3-5 in. broad: spathe open, yellowish, 2906. Phlebodium aureum. PHILODENDRON PHLOMIS 2585 crimson within the tube. Brazil. B.M. 6813. — P. Ilsemanii, Hort. Lvs. oblong, cordate, dark green, splashed or marbled with white, and sometimes tinged rose-pink. G.C. III. 43:289. — P. imperiale is mentioned in European trade-lists. Engler accounts for only one P. imperiale (of Schott) and that he makes a synonym of P. asperatum, Koch. Sander & Co. advertise P. imperiale var. Laucheana: "a lovely trailing stove foliage plant, which is admirably adapted for growing on pillars or wire shapes. It is quite distinct from and greatly superior to the well-known P. imperiale. The habit is much more graceful, the heart-shaped foliage smaller and more elegant. Down the center, from either side of the broad light green midrib, extend irregular blotches of dark green, projecting into a clear glaucous color, the edges of which are relieved by green blotches. The bases of the petioles bear bright red and green phyl- lodes." P. asperatum is a short-jointed climbing Brazilian species with cordate-ovate entire dull green Ivs. — P. Mdmei, Andrg. Lvs. cordate-ovate, acute, variegated with white: spathe partly open above and whitish, the tube blood-red. Ecuador. R.H. 1883, p. 104 and 492; 1897, p. 573. I.H. 43:66. — P.pertusum is Monstera deliciosa. — P. Slmsii, Kunth. Lvs. coriaceous, elongated tri- angular-sagittate, long-cuspidate, up to 20 in. long: spathe outside black-purple on the tube, yellowish on the limb. Guiana. B.M. 2643. — P. tripartitum, Schott. (Anthurium insigne, Mast.). Lvs. 3- parted, 6-7 in. long: spathe-tube oblong, the blade whitish, ovate, shortly acuminate. Venezuela. — P. Warscewlczii, C. Koch. Lvs. triangular-sagittate, bipinnatifid, primrose, the lateral primary eegms. 5-8 in. long. Cent. Amer. G.W. 10, p. 211. Gt. 59, p. 23. GEORGE V. NASH.| PHLEBODIUM (Greek, a vein). Polypodiacese. A genus of ferns related to Polypodium and sometimes united with it, but differing widely in the venation, which is broken up into ample areoles, each of which contain 2 or more free veinlets which bear the son on their united tips. aureum, R. Br. (Polypodium aiireum, Linn.). Fig. 2906. Roqtstocks thick, creeping on surface, densely covered with bright yellowish scales: Ivs. 2-4 ft. long, deeply pinnatifid, the lobes 5-9 in. long, j/£-l in. wide, with numerous bright yellow sori. G. 37:405. — A rich ornamental species of easy cult, from Trop. Amer. with glaucous green Ivs. It produces, however, but a small number of Ivs. to a plant. In Fla. it grows on palmettos. Polypodium Mandaianum of the trade is a wavy-lvd. form, which originated as a spore sport of the species, P. aureum. It develops Ivs. of great beauty, which last for a long time on or off the plant. Cut off, they are used for florists' decorations. Polypodium Schndderi, Hort., is said to be a hybrid of P. aureum and Polypodium vulgare. P. glaitcum var. Mayii or P. Mayii. See Phymatodes. L. M. UNDERWOOD. R. C. BENEDICT.! PHLEUM (Phleos, an old Greek name for a kind of reed). Graminese. Perennial grasses, of great agricul- tural value, but scarcely horticultural subjects. Spikelets 1-fld., in a close cylindrical spike-like panicle; glumes 2,'persistent, keeled, short-awned ; lemma shorter, delicate, awnless. — -Species 10, in temperate zones. pratense, Linn. TIM- OTHY. HERD'S-GRASS. Figs. 2907, 2908. Com- monly cult, for hay and for pastures, either alone or together with red clover or other grasses. It was intro. into Md. about 1720 from Eu., where it is native, by Timothy Hanson, and hence called timothy. The other name is said to come from a man by the name of Herd, who found it growing in N. H. and began its cult. It is better adapted for hay than for pasture, and for the latter is suited to temporary rather than 2907. Phleum pratense.— Timothy. Permanent pasture. To show habit of root and top. A. S. HlTCHCOCK. PHLOGACANTHUS (Greek for flame, and acan- thus). Acanthaceae. Glasshouse plants grown for the ornamental flowers. Tall half-shrubby herbs with entire or somewhat toothed Ivs. : fls. white, red or greenish in long terminal or short lateral spikes; calyx 5-parted; segms. linear, awnlike, acuminate; corolla-tube long, broad, curved; limb 2-lipped, upper lip erect, entire or 2-lobed; lower Up 3-parted; perfect stamens 2, inserted on the lower part of the tube; anthers with 2 parallel cells; ovary many- ovuled: caps, round or obtusely 4-angled. — Species 12-15, India, Malaya, to New Guinea. Several of the species have been more or less cult, at one time or another. Used like the others of the family as decorative pot-plants in the greenhouse. They require a rather warm, damp atmosphere and a soil rich in humus. Prop, by cuttings or seeds. thyrsifldrus, Nees (Justicia thyrsiflora, Roxbg.). Shrub, 3-7 ft. high: Ivs. 7 x 1% in., lanceolate, glabrous: fls. orange, in long, dense, villous thyrses; corolla %jin. wide, tubular, 2-lipped. India. — Cult, in S. Fla. P. cunifldrus, Nees. Shrub, 3-6 ft. high: Ivs. large, elliptic, acute at both ends, toothed, glabrous: fls. yel- lowish, with an elongated corolla. Himalayas. B.M. 3783. H.U. 2, p. 259. JjEINRICH HASSELBRING. PHLOMIS (old Greek name used by Dioscorides). Labiatx. JERUSALEM SAGE. Stout mostly tall plants sometimes grown hi the open for the dense axillary whorls of rather large yellow, purple or white flowers. Plants more or less woolly, some of the species conspicuously white- woolly, shrubs or perennial herbs: Ivs. all alike, or the uppermost reduced to bracts: whorls many- or few-fld.; fls. sessile; calyx usu- ally plicate, truncate or with 5 equal teeth; upper lip of the corolla (galea) broad and compressed or strongly concave, rarely narrow 2908. Phleum and falcate; lower lip 3-cleft and pratense. — Timothy, spreading; tube usually bearing a woolly ring inside; stamens 4, didynamous, ascending under the upper lip, one pair of filaments often appendaged at base; style 2-lobed: nutlets 4, obovoid or ovoid, triquetrous, glabrous or pubescent. — Medit. region and to China, perhaps 70 species. Per- haps a dozen species have been cult., but they are rather coarse plants except for wild gardening and among shrubbery. They are of the easiest cult. Prop, by seeds, cuttings, and the herbaceous species by division. P. tuberosa, Linn., of Eu., has run wild spar- ingly in the E. It is a vigorous and hardy species, prop, by subterranean tubers. A. Fls. yellow. fruticdsa, Linn. JERUSALEM SAGE. Shrub, 2-4 ft. high, divaricately much-branched, yellowish tomentose: Ivs. ovate to oblong, rounded or wedge-shaped at the base, rugose, green above and white-tomentose beneath: whorls 20-30-fld., one or two at ends of branches; bracts broadly ovate or ovate-lanceolate: fls. yellow, showy. S. Eu. B.M. 1843. Gn. 79, p. 114. G. 7:177; 35:713. — In the E. it blooms from June to July. In S. Calif., it blooms in winter, and has the merit of with- standing drought and heavy sea winds. In New Eng- land it needs protection hi winter. lunarifolia, Sibth. & Smith. Undershrub, erect and branching, green but oppressed-tomentose, 6 ft.: Ivs. 2586 PHLOMIS PHLOX oblong or ovate-oblong, obtuse at apex, narrowed at base, paler and almost hoary beneath, the lower ones long-stalked: fls. golden yellow, 1^ in- long, in a showy terminal whorl or head 4 in. across with 2 pendulous floral Ivs. beneath; bracts small, or orbicular; calyx %in. long, 10-ribbed; corolla with villous 2-keeled galea, and large lower lip with 2 wings or lobes at end. Asia Minor. B.M. 7699. — A striking plant. Lychnitis, Linn. LAMP-WICK PLANT. Somewhat woody, 2 ft., hoary: Ivs. sessile and amplexicaul, oblong- linear, narrowed at both ends, white-tomentose beneath: whorls few-fld., much shorter than the floral Ivs.; bracts broad at base; fls. yellow, the corolla twice longer than calyx. S. Eu. B.M. 999. — The specific name Lychnitis refers to the use of the slender radical Ivs. as lamp- wicks. viscosa, Poir. (P. Russelidna, Benth.). Shrubby, glabrous, but viscid above, with elongated branches: Ivs. ovate and oblong-lanceolate, the lower ones petioled and strongly cordate at base; floral Ivs. cuneate-lanceo- late and acuminate, much surpassing the fls.: whorls many-fld., remote, with lance-linear rigid bracts; corolla yellow, twice longer than calyx, the galea emarginate, lower lip with broad lobe. Asia Minor. B.M. 2542 (as P. lunarifolia var. Russeliana). AA. Fls. purple, or pinkish, at least inside. tuberosa, Linn. Herb, 3-6 ft. high, nearly smooth, with thickened root: Ivs. deeply cordate, ovate, petioled, crenate, the lower ones triangular-ovate and 6 in. or more long; floral Ivs. 2-3 in. long, 6-8 lines wide, oblong- lanceolate: whorls 30-40-fld., bearing purple fls. that are white-bearded inside. S. Eu., E. and N. Asia. B.M. 1555. — Little planted; known mostly as a weedy naturalized species. Herba-venti, Linn. Much-branched, 1-2 ft., hairy: Ivs. oblong-lanceolate, or ovate-oblong, crenate, coria- ceous, rounded at base, either canescent or green beneath: whorls 10-20-fld., much surpassed by the long floral Ivs.; fls. purplish, tomentose on outside; galea much arched; lower lip short. Medit. B.M. 2449. G. 35:712. — The name Herba-venti means "wind herb." It is recorded that "when exposed to wind and rain, the leaves are apt to lose their softer parts, leaving merely a network of fibers, pervious to the wind, whence the old name of Herba-venti." cashmeriana, Royle. Sts. several, stout, terete, densely white-woolly, 2-3 ft. high: Ivs. linear-oblong, obtuse, rugose and crenate, cordate at base, pubes- cent above, the radical ones long-petioled: whorls many-fld., 1-1 J^ in. diam.; bracts numerous, filiform, ciliate and tomentose; fls. pale purple; galea very large, tomentose but not fringed; lower lip very broad; calyx- teeth spine-like and half length of the tube. Afghanis- tan, Himalaya. B.R. 30:22. J.F. 3:284. Samia, Linn. Pubescent, 2-3 ft., simple or sparingly opposite-paniculate-branched: Ivs. ovate-oblong, cor- date and somewhat acute, petioled, rugose and crenate, green above and tomentose beneath : whorls 10-15-fld., bracts many, linear, very acute; fls. hairy, greenish white outside, pinkish and purple-veined inside. Greece, Asia Minor. B.M. 1891. G. 35:711. L. H. B.f PHLOX (Greek for flame, once applied to species of Lychnis). Polemoniacese. Showy and popular flower- garden herbs, perennial and annual. Erect or diffuse, tall or low, mostly perennial, gla- brous, pubescent or hairy, a few of them woody at base but mainly herbaceous throughout: Ivs. mostly opposite or sometimes the upper ones alternate, entire: fls. in bright colors, blue, red, blue-red, purple, white, in terminal cymes or thyrse; calyx narrow-tubular or sometimes nearly campanulate, 5-ribbed and 5-cleft, the lobes sharp-pointed; corolla convolute in bud, salverform, with a very slender tube and a flat-spreading 5-lobed limb, the lobes obovate or broader and some- times notched; stamens 5, usually unequal in length or in point of attachment, usually included; ovary 3-celled, oblong or ovoid, the style slender: caps. 3-valved, the seeds 1 or few in each cell, usually 1. — Species 48 as defined by Brand in Engler's Das Pflanzenreich, hft. 27 (IV. 250), 1907, one of which is Siberian and the others N.Ameri- can, in woods and thickets and on prairies and plains, some of them alpine and arctic. From a horti- cultural point of view, the phloxes may be thrown into five groups: (1) the annual phloxes, P. Drummondii; (2) the highly de- veloped summer perennial tall phloxes of nurseries and gardens, P. paniculata and P. macu- lata; (3) the moss pinks, P. subulata and its vari- ants, useful as carpeters; (4) those useful in alpine and rock-gardening, although little employed for the purpose in America, represented by P. multi- flora and the cespitose Rocky Mountains set which seems not to be in the lists; (5) the early blooming perennial woods and plains species not yet much domesticated but often naturalized in grounds, as P. pilosa, P. divaricata, and others. As a group, phloxes are amongst the most satis- factory of garden plants. Their neat habit, bright-colored flowers, profuseness of bloom, and ease of culture make them favorites every- where. Most of the domesticated kinds are summer bloomers, but P. subulata is spring-flowering. The annual phloxes, derivatives of Phlox Drummondii, of Texas, have risen to first place as garden annuals. This species has been much modified by domestication, so that the named garden varieties are numbered by dozens. These garden forms differ in stature, color, size and shape of flower. Some are semi-double. An effort has been made to produce a yellow flower, but appar- ently a true yellow has not yet been secured. The colors run to the cyanic series, in many interesting variations. Phlox Drummondii is of the easiest cul- ture. This fact, together with the profusion and long season of its bloom, is an important reason for its popu- larity. It blooms all summer and until frost if the stock and conditions are good. It needs a warm sunny place. It will grow even in poor soil, but in order to develop to its highest perfection it must have good soil and the individual plants must be given room (say 1 foot apart each way). Seeds are usually sown in the open as soon as the weather is settled; sometimes they are sown indoors, but the plants bloom so young that this is rarely practised. If the ground is poor and dry, the plants usually cease blooming by midsummer, but if plant-food and moisture are abundant they may be expected to continue their bloom until late autumn. To attain this result most perfectly, the old flower- 2909. Cultivated forms of Phlox Drummondii. PHLOX PHLOX 2587 cluster should be removed; the plant is an end- bloomer, and when the terminal flower-cluster has matured the other shoots continue the growth and thereby provide a succession of bloom. This phlox has now varied so much under domestication that packets of mixed seed are likely to give tall and dwarf, large-flowered and small-flowered forms, with very unsatisfactory results. If mixed colors are desired, pains should be taken to secure seed that will produce plants of similar height and season. Some of the cheap seed may produce very disappointing plants even under the best conditions. The summer perennial phloxes of gardens are of several races. They are probably the issue of P. paniculata and P. maculata, although their origin and characteristics need to be worked over. This group of plants is amongst the most showy of garden herbs. The terminal panicles have become 1 foot long in some forms, and as densely filled as a hydrangea. They are specially desirable when color display is sought in con- nection with formal or semi-formal designs, as on ter- races and by balustrades. The colors are most frequent in reds, but there are many purple, white, salmon, and parti-colored varieties. The summer perennial phlox should have a rich and rather moist soil if it is to be grown to perfection. It should never suffer for moisture or food. Let each clump have a space, when fully developed, of 2 to 3 feet across. The plants as purchased from nurseries usually do not come into full floriferous- ness until their third year. For the highest satisfac- tion in blooms, the plants should be relatively young or at least often renewed by dividing the clump. The stool gradually enlarges outward. From the young vigor- ous shoots on the outside of the clump the new plants should be reared, if one desires to propagate the variety to any extent. Old stools should be taken up every year or two, and divided and transplanted. This work is performed in the fall, after the growth has ceased. By this process, the plants do not become weak and root- bound. Inferior and vigorous seedlings are often allowed to grow about the old plant, causing the named varie- ties to "run out." The modern varieties should not remain undisturbed for more than three or four years. One of the requisites is to secure in the first place stock that is strong and healthy. Phloxes usually bloom in early summer and midsummer, but if the tips of the shoots are pinched out once or twice in early summer, the bloom may be delayed until late summer or autumn. Named varieties are propagated by side shoots and by cuttings of well-maturing shoots. Seeds give new and often interesting forms. Ofuminata, 2. glabemma, 5. refleia, 3, 3a. adsurgens, 15. grandiflora, 1, 12. reptans, 7. alba, 3, Hentzii, 12. Roemeriana, 1. amoena, 8. Heynholdii, 1. rotundata, 1. amplifolia, 2. hortensiae flora, 1. setacea, 12. annulata, 12. Ingramiana. 3a. Shtperdii, 3a. aristata, 9, 12. insiffnis, 3a. speciosa, 16. aspera. 1. involucrata, 8. speciosissima , 3a. atrocaulis, 3a. Isabtttina, 1. splendens, 1. atropurpurea, 12. laciniata, 1. Stellaria, 11. bifida, 10. Laphamii, 6. stellaris, 1, 12. Bridgesii, 3a. lilacina, 12. stettata, 1. Broughtonii, 3a. longiflora, 3. stolonifera, 7. cserulescens, 12. maculata, 3. suaveolens, 3. canadensis, 6. Marianna, 3a. subulata, 12. Candida, 3. mistourica, 3a. suffruticosa, 5. Carolina, 4. multiflora, 14. tardiflora, 3. Coldryana, 3o. nana, 17. temiis, 1. cor data, 2. Xelsonii, 12. Iri flora, 4. cuspidata, 1, 9. nitidi, 5. triotulata, 17. decugsata, 2, 3a. nivalis, 12. undulata, 2. Deppei, 1. Oldryana, 3a. Van Hoattei, 3a. divaricata, 6. omniflora, 3a. Tcrbenae flora, 1. Dougiasii, 13. ovata, 4. verna, 7. Drummondii, 1. pallida, 12. Vernoniana, 3a. excflsa, 3a. paniculata, 2. villosissima, 1. fimbriata, 1. penduliflora, 3, 3a. Walteri, 8. foliis variegatis, 8. pilosa, 9. Wheeleriana, 3a. formoaa, 1. •pulcheUa, 3a. Youngii, 3a. frond osa, 12. p'jramidalig, 3, 3a. A. Species annual, pubescent: upper Ivs. often alternate. 1. Drummondii, Hook. Figs. 2909, 2910. Erect branching annual, more or less villous and viscid, 6-18 in. tall: Ivs. alternate, oblong-acute or lanceolate, the upper ones more or less clasping: fls. showy, in broad mostly flat-topped cymes, the calyx-lobes long and narrow and spreading or recurving in fr., the corolla- lobes broad-ovate. Sandy soils. Texas. B.M. 3441. B.R. 1949. — This is the original of the common annual garden phlox, now cult, in numerous varieties. The seeds were received in England in the spring of 1835, from Texas, having been collected by Drummond. In Oct. of that year it was described and figured in B.M., by W. J. Hooker, as Phlox Drummondii. The fl. was described as "pale purple without, within, or on the upper side, of a brilliant rose-red or purple, varying exceedingly on different individuals in intensity, and in their more or less red or purple tinge: the eye generally of an exceedingly deep crimson." Lindley described and figured it in B.R., for 1837, describing the fls. as "either light, or deep carmine, on the inner surface of their corolla, and a pale blush on the outside, which sets off wonderfully the general effect. A bed of this plant has hardly yet been seen; for it is far too precious and uncommon to be possessed by any one, except in small quantities; but I have had such a bed described to me, and I can readily believe that it produced all the brilliancy that my informant represented." "The annual garden phloxes are now of many kinds and races. They may be thrown into two groups: Var. rotundata, Voss, with petals large, broad, and entire or nearly so, making a circular outline; var. stellaris, Voss, the star phloxes, the petals narrow, cuspidate or variously fringed or cut. To the former belong such races or forms as Heynholdii, Deppei, IsabeUina, for- mosa, splendens, hortensiaeflora or verbeweflora, grandi- flora. With the latter (var. stellaris) may be classed cuspidata, fimbriata or laciniata, stettata. There are also dwarf and intermediate races of annual phloxes as well as semi-double forms. For a discussion of the heredity of color in Phlox Drummondii, see Gilbert, Journ. Agr. Research, July, 1915. There are several annual phloxes in Texas, some of them perhaps to be regarded as variants of P. Drum- mondii. P. villosissima, Small (P. Drummondii var. villosissima, Gray), is very villous and viscous, the fls. large and more scattered, the Ivs. mostly opposite and the blade thick and bristly: corolla pale lavender, the 2910. Quedlinburg or star phlox. A horticultural form of Phlox Drunraondii. (Natural size) 2588 PHLOX PHLOX limb ^-1 in. broad, lobes broad-obovate and often abruptly pointed. P. tenuis, A. Nelson (var. tennis, Gray) is small and slender, not villous, glabrous or slightly pubescent : Ivs. mostly alternate, the blades thin and linear or linear-lanceolate: fls. lavender, small, the limb about J^in. across, lobes rhombic-ovate and acute. P. aspera, A. Nelson. With short rigid hairs: Ivs. oppo- site, the blades thick, narrow-lanceolate to linear: calyx and pedicels glandular, the calyx-lobes awned; corolla violet, the tube glandular-pubescent; lobes cuneate- obovate, about ^in. long, mucronate. P. Roemeriana, Scheele. Glabrate or somewhat hirsute: lys. mostly alternate, spatulate-oblong or lanceolate, sessile, usually acute or acuminate: fls. solitary or few, pink or rose- colored; corolla-tube not surpassing the calyx (in this differing from the other annual Texan phloxes) ; limb of corolla less than 1 in. across, the lobes roundish obovate and entire; ovules 4 or 5 in each cell. AA. Species perennial, of various habit, either pubescent or glabrous. B. Flowering st. erect and usually stiffish (Nos. 2-9}. c. Plant mostly glabrous, at least below (exceptions in variety of No. 5). D. Infl. large and thyrse-like: plants tall. 2. paniculata, Linn. (P. decussata, Hort. P. acuminata, Pursh. P. cordata, Ell. P. undulata, Ait.). SUMMER PERENNIAL PHLOX of gardens, in many forms. Fig. 291 1 . Plant stout and erect, 2-4 or 6 ft., glabrous: Ivs. thin, oblong-lanceolate and mostly tapering at the base, acute or acuminate: calyx-teeth awl-like. Woods, Pa., west and south. Summer. B.M. 1880. — The parent of the greater number of perennial phloxes of gardens, although some of these may be hybrids with the next. "Fls. pink-purple, varying to white," according to Gray. In cult, varying much in color. This plant, in several 2911. Summer perennial phlox, of the P. paniculata and P. maculata group. 2912. Phlox glabemma. (XIJi) forms, persists about old homesteads and sometimes becomes naturalized. P. amplifdlia, Brit., with st. villous, glandular above; Ivs. broader, ranging from Ind. to Tenn. and Mo., is considered by some to be a form of P. paniculata. 3. maculata, Linn. (P. pyramidalis, Smith. P. refiexa and P. penduliflbra, Sweet). SUMMER PERENNIAL PHLOX. Slenderer, and mostly less tall, usually with purple-spotted st. : Ivs. very smooth and usually thicker than those of the above, the upper ones usually clasping: calyx-teeth short: fls. as in above. Range of the last, and in cult., but less important horticul- turally than P. paniculata. Summer. Var. suaveo- lens, Brand (var. Candida, Michx. P. suaveolens, Ait. P. tardifibra, Penny. P. longiflora, Sweet. P. alba, Moench). St. glabrous, not spotted: fls. sweet-scented, white. The foregoing treatment of the synonymy of the two species entering into the origin of the summer perennial phloxes is essentially that of Gray. Brand removes a number of these names into a separate category com- prising a range of hybrids, and accounts for other old horticultural names, as follows: 3a. paniculata x maculata, Brand. P. pyrami- dalis, Smith; P. decussata, Lyon; P. reflexa, P. excelsa, P. Wheeleriana, P. Sheperdii, P. penduliflbra, Sweet; P. missourica, Salm-Dyck; P. omniflbra, P. atrocaulis, P. Ingramiana, P. pulchella, P. Vernonidna, Hort.; P. Youngii, P. Coldryana, Court.; P. speciosissima, Maund; P. Bridgesii, P. Broughtonii, Marn.; P. Van Houttei, P. Maridnna, Lindl.; P. insignis, De Jonghe; P. Oldryana, Walp. Several other old Latin names are also referable to this hybrid group. DD. Infl. small and loose or flat-topped: plants lower. 4. ovata, Linn. (P. Carolina, Linn. P. triflbra, Maund). A foot or two tall, the sts. erect from a short decumbent base, glabrous or very nearly so: Ivs. nar- row-ovate to oblong-lanceolate, the lower ones tapering to base and the upper ones somewhat clasping: fls. pink or light red, about 1 in. across, the straight or slightly curving tube twice or more longer than the rather short and broad calyx-teeth. Pa. to Ala., mostly in elevated regions. B.M. 528. Gn. M. 2:168. 5. glaberrima, Linn. Fig. 2912. Differs in somewhat taller growth, linear-lanceolate to narrow-lanceolate taper-pointed firm nearly veinless Ivs. which have revolute margins, and in the narrow very sharp-pointed calyx-teeth. Va. to Wis., and south to Fla. PHLOX PHLOX 2589 Var. suffruticdsa. Gray (P. suffruticosa, Vent. P. nitida, Pursh). Stiff er, sometimes pubescent above: Ivs. considerably broader: fls. varying to flesh-color. Ga. and Term., south and west. B.M. 1344 (as P. Carolina), and B.R. 68. 2913. Phlox divaricate cc. Plant distinctly hairy or pubescent (exceptions in No. 9). D. Sterile, prostrate or running shoots arising from the base of the plant. 6. divaricata, Linn. (P. canadensis, Sweet). WILD SWEET WILLIAM. Fig. 2913. Sts. slender, pubescent, 10-18 in. tall: Ivs. varying from linear-oblong to ovate- lanceolate, mostly acute: fls. in small cymes termina- ting short branches, 1 in. across, blue or pinkish blue, handsome and somewhat fragrant, the corolla-lobes often notched, the calyx-lobes narrow and subulate. Woods and copses, in lowish grounds. Que., west and south, to Fla. and La. B.M. 163. G.F. 7:256 (reduced in Fig. 2913). Gn. 60, p. 251; 76, p. 45. G.L. 18:335. G.W. 2, p. 555. R.B. 24:185. Gn.W. 23:433. Gn.M. 2 : 167. — A very attractive early spring fl., often coloring the floor of woods. Prefers rich soil. Var. Laphamii, Wood. Lvs. ovate: fls. bright blue; petals obtuse and entire. This name is listed abroad; plant said to be stronger-growing and with longer-blooming season than the species. G.M. 55:556. — P. divaricata has received considerable attention from cultivators abroad. 7. stolonifera, Sims (P. reptans, Michx.). Low and weak, the flowering sts. reaching 6-12 in., the sterile ones long and prostrate, the plant thinly glandular- hairy: lys. short-ovate or obovate, more or less obtuse: fls. few in each cyme, purple or violet, the lobes mostly entire, the calyx-lobes narrow and subulate. Pa. and Ky. to Ga., mostly in the upper regions. B.M. 563. Var. yerna, Hort. (P. verna, Hort.), has rose-colored fls. with dark purple throat; a garden form. DD. Sterile prostrate shoots none. 8. amdena, Sims (P. Wdlteri, Chapm. P. involu- crata, Wood). Sts. 6 in. or less high from a decumbent base, pubescent or hairy: Ivs. numerous, mostly in rosettes at the base, few on the flowering sts., small, oblong-lanceolate to linear-oblong, mostly obtuse but sometimes nearly or quite acute: fls. numerous for size of plant, purple, pink or white, lobes usually entire, calyx-lobes narrow and sharp-acute. Dry lands, Va. to Ky. and south. B.M. 1308. G.M. 56:157. Var. foliis vaiiegatis, Hort., with Ivs. variegated, is listed. 9. pilosa, Linn. (P. aristata, Michx. P. cuspidata, Scheele). Sts. slender but erect, 2 ft. or less tall, pubes- cent or hairy (nearly glabrous forms occur) : Ivs. small, linear or linear-lanceolate, widest near the base, acu- minate: fls. numerous in rather loose cymes, varying through purple, pink and white, the lobes entire, the calyx-lobes awn-like. Dry fields, woods, Ont. and Man. to Fla. and Texas, growing as far east as N. J. B.M. 1307. L.B.C. 1251, 1731. G.L. 27:117. Gn.W. 23:495. BB. Flowering sts. diffuse and branching, often creeping, low, sometimes cespitose: plants of more or less tufted habit. c. Corolla-lobes 2-S-parted or very strongly notched. 10. bifida, Beck. Low, the sts. stiff and sometimes almost woody and often 1 ft. long and rising 3-8 in. from the ground, minutely pubescent: Ivs. linear and rigid, 2 in. or less long: fls. scattered, violet-purple, the lobes 2- or 3-cleft as far as the middle or farther into narrow spreading segm. Prairies, Mich, to Mo. and Tenn. — Rarely cult. 11. Stellaria, Gray. Fig. 2914. Stellaria-like: gla- brous: Ivs. linear, sparingly ciliate toward the base: fls. scattered, usually long- peduncled, pale blue to whit- ish, the lobes cleft only at the apex into short oblong parts. Lexington, Ky., to S. 111. and Tenn. G.F. 1:257 (adapted in Fig. 2914).— How much, if any, of the P. stellaria of the trade is this species and how much is forms of P. subulata, is to be determined. cc. Corolla-lobes shallow-notched or entire. D. Peduncles usu- ally bearing few to several slen- der -pedicelled fls. 12. subulata, Linn. (P. setacea, Linn.). GROUND PINK. Moss PINK. Fig. 2915. Tufted or matted species, in many forms, the depressed sts. more or less 2914. Phlox Stellaria ( X */£) 2590 PHLOX PHLOX 2915. Phlox subulata. pubescent: Ivs. crowded or fascicled (except on the flowering sis.), narrow-linear to linear-lanceolate, very sharp and usually stiff, ciliate: fls. nearly 1 in. across, light blue, pink or white, in small clusters standing 2-6 in. above the ground, the lobes obcordate or entire. Dry banks and fields, N. Y., west and south, reach- ing Fla.; run wild in patches along many roadsides, in cemeteries, and elsewhere. B. M. 411 and 415. Gn. 67, p. 218; 71, p. 166; 75, p. 29. F. W. 1878, frontis. Gn. M. 2:167. G.L.22: 358. — A much-prized old garden plant, useful for colonizing where it is desired to cover the earth with a mat. It blooms profusely in spring. The garden forms are many, as: Var. nivalis, Hort. (P. nivalis, Lodd.), white-fld., style short; ovules commonly 2 or 3 in each cell. L. B.C. 8 : 780. Var. aristata, Hort. (P. an's. St. bulbiform: Ivs. short. E. Lfts. scattered, irregularly fascicled. 6. humilis, Royle. Sts. short, tufted, bulbiform, rarely elongated: Ivs. subglaucous; Ifts. scattered, interruptedly fascicled. Very close to P. acaulis, but distinguished by the very long-peduncled, fruiting spadix. Hilly districts of India. Var. Hanceana, Becc. (P. Hanceana, Hort.), from China, is cult. 7. Roebelenii, O'Brien. Figs. 29182 2919. Lvs. 1 ft. or more long; Ifts. 5-7 in. long, shining, dark green, soft, curved, subglaucous, often approximate, mostly falcate, not spinous at the tip. Assam to Cochin- China. G.M. 38:80; 53:996. A.G. 15:201. G.C. III. 6:475; 11:731. G.F. 3:273 (adapted in Fig. 2918). A.F. 38:284. G. 22: 147; 37: 377. Gn. 65, p. 309. Gn.M. 6:289. J.H. III. 64:76. Gt. 61, p. 392.— This dwarf palm, like a date palm but only about 2 ft. high, is variously understood. Beccari; in Webbia, vol. 3 (1910), treats it as a valid species; but Blatter subse- quently, in Journ. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc., makes it a synonym of P. humilis var. Loureirii, Becc. EE. Lfts. in nearly opposite fascicles. 8. acaulis, Buch. Caudex bulbiform, 8-10 in. diam., densely clothed with sheaths and bases of spiny petioles: Ivs. 2-6 ft.; Ifts. in subopposite fascicles, many-ranked, y^r\y^ ft. long, very rigid, somewhat glaucous, marginal nerve very strong; petiole 1 ft. or more, with many spines: fr. bright red to blue-black. India. DD. St. erect: Ivs. long. E. Lvs. very slender. 9. pihnila, Hort. St. slender, graceful, 6-10 ft. : Ivs. 10-16 ft. long, recurved, drooping; Ifts. 8-12 in. long, 4-ranked. Gt. 20, p. 173 (desc.). 10. canariensis, Hort. (P. tennis, Versch. P. Jubse, Webb). Resembling P. dactylifera, but more slender and graceful in all its parts: Ivs. more numerous. Canary.Isls. R.H. 1888:181; 1893, pp. 126, 127; 1912, p. 77. G.C. III. 15:405; 32:81; 54:433. V. 19:51. Gng. 5:215; 12:657. Gn. 57, p. 255. A.F. 22:659. G.W. 8, pp. 26, 28. G. 3:379 (as P. tennis). J.H. III. 68:446. Var. macrocarpa is cult, in Florida. EE. Lvs. more robust. F. Foliage glabrous. 11. sylvestris, Roxbg. St. solitary, stout, 25-40 ft. high, clothed with persistent petiole-bases, the crown very large: Ivs. 10-15 ft., glabrous, grayish green; petiole spiny; Ifts. 1-2 ft., fascicled, 6-18 in. long and %-l in. broad, 2-4-ranked, rigid: fr. orange-yellow, the seed rounded at both ends, pale brown. Very close to P. dactylifera and perhaps the origin of that plant. India. I.H. 10:351. V. 16:101. F. 1872, p. 29. Gn. 54, p. 117. . G.C. III. 10:105. G. 1:248; 9:116. R.H. 1912, p. 149. — A hybrid of P. sylvestris and P. canariensis secured by E. H. Hart is highly praised. FF. Foliage glaucous. 12. dactylifera, Linn. (P. cycadifolia, Hort.). DATE PALM. Fig. 2920. St. erect, to 100 ft. and more: Ivs. glaucous, arcuate-ascending; Ifts. linear-lanceolate, acuminate, 8-16 in. long, strongly complicate, the lower 4-ranked, the upper 2-ranked, irregularly and remotely aggregate: fr. cylindrical-elliptical, 1-2 in. long. Arabia, N. Afr. R.H. 1893, p. 127; 1912, p. 109. G.W. 11, p. 24. Var. excelsa, Hort., is cult, in Fla. See Date. P. andamanensis, Hort. Similar to P. rupicola, but more elegant, differing from those in cult, by the regularity of its pinna and narrowness of the terminal one. Andaman Isls.— P. dumdsa, Hort. Saul, 1893. Of "dwarf habit." Seems unknown to botanists. — P. natalensis and var. variegata are offered, but no description is available. — P. paradtnia is advertised. — P. Sanderidna. Presumably intro. within recent years by Sander & Co., St. Albans, England. WILHELM MILLER. JARED G. SMITH. N. TAYLOR.! PHOLZDOCARPUS (Greek, scale and fruit: the fruit is covered with a scaly coat). Palmdcese. A palm of the oriental tropics. Trunk tall: Ivs. orbicular, 4-5- Earted ; petiole spinous : f r . globose or ovoid with a tessel- ited pericarp; seed laterally inserted. About 5 spe- cies, Malaya, all very imperfectly known. One spe- cies, P. Ihur, Blume, is sometimes grown in the warm- house and may be suitable for outdoor growth in S. Calif. This has Ivs. similar to those of Borassus flabel- lifer, the petioles are armed with stout spines, the spa- dix loosely branched and the drupe ovoid, about as large as a fair-sized hen's egg, the rind rugose and tes- sellated and has 3— 4 seeds. Malaya. PHOLIDOTA (Greek, scale and ear; the scales of the unopened raceme are said to recall the rattle of a snake). Orchidacex. Orchids with the habit of Coe- logyne, to be grown in a warmhouse, 55° to 65°. Rhizomes creeping: pseudobulbs consisting of a sin- gle internode: fls. small, short-pedicelled, in slender racemes, each with a large bract; sepals and petals short, broad; labellum excavated or sac-like; column very short, winged around the top. — A small genus contain- ing about 20 species, natives of India, S. China, and the Malay Archipelago. For cult., use strong light rich potting material, broken pots, old dry cow-manure, plenty of drainage. Do not allow to become very dry. imbricata, Lindl. Pseudobulbs oblong sulcate: Ivs. oblong-lanceolate, plicate, 6-12 in. long: raceme long- peduncled, 3-8 in. long; fls. small, rather crowded on the raceme, white or yellowish, with a shade of violet. Feb.-May. India. B.R. 1213; 1777. L.B.C. 20:1934. chinensis, Lindl. A small creeping epiphyte: pseu- dobulbs cespitose, 1-2-lvd.: lys. oblong-undulate, acu- minate: fls. greenish white, in drooping racemes not more than 2-3 in. long; sepals ovate; petals linear; labellum oblong, recurved. — This plant has long been known from Chinese drawings. HEINRICH HASSELBRING. PHORADENDRON (Greek, tree thief}. Loran- thacese. The mistletoe of E. N. Amer. is P. flavescens, Nutt. (Viscum flavescens, Pursh), Fig. 2921. It is parasitic on deciduous trees as far north as N. J. and S. Ind. and extending southward to Fla. and Texas; also Calif. F.R. 3:590. It makes dense bunches 1-3 ft. across, with thick oval or obovate yellowish green ever- green Ivs. The forking twigs are terete, and break easily at the base. The fls. are dioecious, borne in very PHOTIXIA 2595 2921. American mistletoe. — Phora- dendron flavescens. short spikes or catkins: berries amber-white, globular, small. It is collected for Christmas greens (see Greens, Christmas). The Old World mistletoe is Viscum; see also Loranthus. (Trelease, Phoradendron, 1916.) The phoradendrons are not cultivated. There are about 100 species of them, all American, largely tropi- cal, but a few in the western states. The oak mistletoe of Cali- fornia is P. vittosum, Nutt. A related genus is Arceuthobium (or Razoumofskya), ex- tending across the continent of North America, but too small, or even minute, to have decorative value. PHORMIUM (Greek, basket; refer- ring to one use to which this fiber plant /* is put). Ltiiaceae. NEW ZEALAND FLAX. Very stout rigid per- ennial herbs prized in subtropical gar- dening, and in New Zealand used for fiber. Leaves all radical from a short and stout branched fleshy-rooted rhizome, long-ensifonn, equitant, yield- ing an exceedingly tough fiber: scape tall and leafless, with caducous bracts, short-branched toward top: fls. dull red or yellow, in a terminal panicle, on jointed pedicels; perianth tubular and curved, of 6 segms. con- nate at base, the 3 inner ones long and spreading at tip; stamens 6, exceeding the segms.; ovary oblong and 3-angled and 3-celled, bearing a slender decimate st yle : caps, oblong or narrower, loculicidal, bearing many compressed black seeds. — Species 2, in New Zeal, and Norfolk Isl. These plants are popular outdoor sub- jects in Calif, and climates of like mildness, making very bold lawn clumps. In regions of cold winters, they are known as greenhouse tub-plants or as subjects for planting out in summer in subtropical bedding. They are prop, by seeds or division; if by the latter method, it is well that they be planted outdoors in sandy soil in May and divided in September. For certain combinations and in places where it can have plenty of moisture, Phormium tenax is a valuable plant, having a very distinct and unusual character all its own. The type is easier of cultivation than the variegated kinds. Much better results can be secured by raising the typical form from seeds than by division. Seed sown in February and grown on rapidly will make good plants for bedding purposes the spring of the fol- lowing year. The seedlings may be either planted out or grown in pots : in the latter case, give a rich compost and plenty of water after the plants have taken hold. With good treatment one may expect at the end of a year and a half a well-furnished specimen 3 to 3^ feet high in a 6-inch pot. If one can afford room in a wannhouse, so much the better. The variegated forms require partial shade and uniform moisture; they do not come true from seed. (J. F. Cowell.) A. Lvs. to 9 ft. long (in the wild), deep green, glaucous beneath, usually margined with a colored line. tenax, Forst. NEW ZEALAND FLAX. Fig. 2922, Robust: Ivs. attaining 9 ft., 2-5 in. wide, flat above, dark green, margin and keel bright red or brownish: scape 5-10 or even 15 ft. high, terete and glabrous, reddish purple, bearing numerous fls. which are usually dull red but varying almost to pure yellow; perianth 1-2 in. long: caps, stout, erect or inclined, 2-4 in. long. B.M. 3199. Gn. 26, p. 397; 50, p. 369; 70, p. 99; 73, p. 123. G. 33: 553; 36: 554. F.E. 18:288. G.L. 27:219. A.F. 13:748. R.H. 1848:5. V. 13:340. Var. atropur- pureum, Hort., has reddish purple foliage. R.H. 1877, p. 389. Var. atropurpureum variegatum, Hort., a "veri- table fountain of white, purple and rose-color." Var. atropurpureum nanum, Hort., is a dwarf form. Var. nigro-pictum, Hort. (P. purpureum nigro-limbatum, Hort.). Lvs. deep green, with a narrow margin of blackish purple, which becomes broader and more dis- tinct toward the base, making in mature plants a zigzag line which outlines the 2-ranked habit of the Ivs. Var. variegatum, Hort., Ivs. striped creamv yellow and white. R.H. 1878, p. 86. G.C. III. 29:169/Var. Veitcnianum, Hort. (var. Veitchii and P. Veitchianum, Hort.), broad creamy white stripes on a light green ground. A.F. 5 : 39. The type and varieties all have the red margin. Var. Powersco&rtii, Hort., differs from the type in narrower and more rigid Ivs.; said to be hardier and freer-bloom- ing. G.W. 1907, p. 3. — P. tenax is a most useful fiber plant in New Zeal., ranking in economic importance in the native flora only below the main timber trees. AA. Lvs. to 6 ft. long, pale green, seldom glaucous or margined. Cookianum, Le Jolis (P. Colensoi, Hook. f. P. Forsterianum, Col. P. Hookeri, Gunn.). A smaller plant and less rigid: Ivs. 2-5 ft. long, the apex usually much less split than in P. tenax: scape 3-7 ft. high, more slender, green, with smaller panicle: perianth 1-1% in- long, yellower than the above: caps, long, pendulous, terete and twisted, 4-7 in. long. Var. variegatum, Hort., has yellowish white stripes. F.M. 1874:112. G.Z. 19:113. P.fldccidum, Hort., is presuma- bly a form of this species. WILHELM MILLER. L. H. B.f 2922. Phormium tenax. PHOTINIA (Greek, photeinos, shining; alluding to the shining foliage). Including Heteromeles and Pour- thisea. Rosacese, tribe Pbmese. Ornamental woody plants, grown for their attractive flowers and fruits and the evergreen species also for their handsome foliage. Deciduous or evergreen shrubs or trees: Ivs. alternate, short-petioled, stipulate, usually serrate: fls. in corymbs or short panicles; petals 5, orbicular; stamens 10-20; styles 2, rarely 3 or 4, connate at the base: fr. a small, 1— t-seeded pome with persistent calyx and with the top of the fr. rounded and hollow. — About 30 species, nearly all in E. and S. Asia, only 2 in Calif, and Mex. 2596 PHOTINIA PHOTINIA Closely allied to the Aria group of Sorbus, which differs chiefly in the top of the fr. being solid and pointed. The photinias in cultivation are shrubs, rarely trees, with rather large evergreen or smaller deciduous leaves turning scarlet or deep red in fall and with white flowers in many-flowered or sometimes few-flowered corymbs followed by very attractive red or scarlet fruits. The evergreen species are tender in New England, and bear only a few degrees of frost; but the deciduous P. vittosa is hardy as far north as Massachusetts, and is very con- spicuous in fall by the scarlet coloring of the foliage and afterward by the numerous scarlet fruits, which retain their bright color until midwinter and are not eaten by birds. Of the evergreen species, P. arbutifolia, which is very similar to P. serrulata and also to P. glabra, is the best known; it is a very striking object in winter, with its large clusters of bright red fruit ripen- ing in December and contrasting well with the glossy dark green foliage. The photinias are not very particu- lar as to soil, but thrive best in a rather light sandy loam, and the deciduous ones prefer sunny positions. Propagation is by seeds or by cuttings of half-ripened wood under glass and by layers; also by grafting on hawthorn or quince. A. Lvs. deciduous: fls. in corymbs or umbels. (Pourthiaea.) villdsa, DC. (P. varidbilis, Hemsl. Pourthiaea vil- Idsa, Decne. Sorbus termindlis, Hort.). Upright shrub, to 15 ft., with slender spreading or upright branches, or small tree: Ivs. short-petioled, broadly obovate to oblong, cuneate, acuminate, sharply serrate, dark green and glabrous above, more or less pubescent beneath when young, l>£-3 in. long: fls. white, in l>^-2-m.- broad, glabrous or villous corymbs terminal on short lateral branchlets: peduncles warty : fr. about J^in. long, bright scarlet. June; fr. in Oct. Japan, China. G.F. 1:67. S.I. F. 1:49. — A very variable species. Var. l&vis, Dipp. (P. Ixvis, DC. Pourthiaea arguta, Hort.), Fig. 2923, has narrower Ivs., only sparingly pubescent when young and soon glabrous, glabrous infl. and somewhat larger fr. G.F. 4:377 (adapted in Fig. 2923). Var. sinica, Rehd. & Wilson. Shrub or tree, to 30 ft.: Ivs. thinner, elliptic or elliptic-oblong, spar- ingly pubescent at first, soon glabrous: infl. an umbel- like 5-8-fld. raceme, rarely corymbose, to 15-fld., loosely villous. Cent. China. subumbellata, Rehd. & Wilson. Slender-branched shrub, 3-10 ft.: Ivs. very short-stalked, elliptic-ovate to rhombic-ovate, acuminate, broadly cuneate or rounded at the base, sharply serrulate, glabrous, bright green above, pale or glaucescent beneath, lM-2}^ in. long: fls. in umbel-like 2-9-fld. glabrous racemes sub- tended by 2-3 crowded lys. ; pedicels slender, J^-l in. long: fr. ovoid, nearly ^in. long, scarlet. May, June; fr. in Oct. Cent. China. AA. Lvs. evergreen: fls. in broad panicles. B. Stamens 20. (Euphotinia.) c. Petioles longer than %in. : Ivs. usually 4~6 in. long. serrulata, Lindl. (P. glabra var. chinensis, Maxim. Cratsegus glabra, Sims, not Thunb.). Shrub, to 20 ft., quite glabrous: winter buds about J^in. across, ovoid: Ivs. with about l-in.-long petioles, oblong, usually rounded at the base, acuminate, serrulate, dark green and shining above, yellowish green beneath, 5-7 in. long; petioles about 1 in. long: panicles 4^6 in. broad, with thickish and slightly angular branches; fls. J^in. across: fr. globose, J^in. across, red. May- July. China. B.M. 2105. L.B.C. 3:248. L.D. 8:554 (all as Cratsegus glabra). G.W. 15, p. 247.— Stands fairly well in Wash- ington, D. C. Davidsoniae, Rehd. & Wilson. Tree, to 45 ft. : winter buds minute, acutish: branchlets appressed-pubescent while young: Ivs. oblong-lanceolate or oblong, acumi- nate or acute cuneate at the base, serrulate, lustrous and bright green above, paler beneath and pubescent on the veins at first, soon glabrous, 3-5 in. long; petioles about %in. long: panicles 4-5 in. broad with slender terete branches, sparingly pubescent; fls. nearly %in. broad: fr. subglobose, orange-red, Min. across or slightly more. May: fr. in Oct. Cent. China. — One of the handsomest evergreen trees of Cent. China; recently intro. ; probably as hardy as the preceding species. cc. Petioles shorter than %in,: Ivs. usually 2-8 in. long. glabra, Maxim. (Crattegus glabra, Thunb. Sdrbus glabra, Zabel). Shrub, to 8 ft.: Ivs. on nearly J^in.-long petioles, elliptic or obovate to oblong-obovate, cuneate at the base, acuminate, serrulate, 2-3% in. long: pani- cles 2-4 in. across; fls. Hm- across: fr. subglobose, red. May-July. China, Japan. S.I.F. 1:47. BB. Stamens 10. (Heteromeles.) arbutifdlia, Lindl. (Heterdmeles arbutifolia, Roem. H. salicifolia, Abrams. Cratiegus arbutifolia, Ait., not Lam.). TOYON. TOLLON. Shrub or small tree, to 20 ft. : 2923. Photinia villosa var. laevis. ( X %) young branches and infl. usually tomentulose: Ivs. oblong to oblong-lanceolate, acute at both ends, sharply serrate, shining above, 2-4 in. long: fls. white, in 2-5-in. broad panicles; stamens 10: fr. bright red, %in. across. June, July; fr. in Nov.-Feb. Calif. S.S. 3:193. B.R. 491. — Called Christmas berry in Calif., where the frs. are much used for Christmas decoration. P. amphidSxa, Rehd. & Wilson (Stranvsesia amphidoxa, Schneid.). Shrub, to 10 ft.: Ivs. deciduous, elliptic to oblong, ser- rate, loosely tomentose at first, soon glabrous, 2-3 % in. long: fls. 3-6; calyx densely tomentose: fr. subglobose, scarlet, J^in. across. Cent. China. — P. argiiia. Wall. (Pourthiaa arguta, Decne.). Closely allied to P. villosa: Ivs. longer and narrower, firmer, densely white- tomentose beneath when young: corymbs larger. Himalayas. — P. BeauterdiAna, Schneid. Shrub or small tree, to 20 ft.: Ivs. decidu- ous, oblong or obovate-oblong, densely serrulate, glabrous, 2)^-4 in. long: corymbs 2 in. across: fr. subglobose, scarlet, Min. across. Cent. China. Var. notdbilis, Rehd. & Wilson (P. notabilis, Schneid.). Lvs. elliptic to obovate-oblong, 3-5 in. long: corymbs loose, 3-4 in. across: fr. ovoid, Jim- long. Cent. China. — P. elliplica, Nichols., is Eriobotrya elliptica, Lindl., a Himalayan species not in cult, in this country. — P. japdnica, Nichols. =Eripbotrya japonica. — P. parmfdlia, Schneid. Shrub, to 6 ft.: Ivs. elliptic, long-acumi- nate, serrulate, nearly glabrous, 1^-2 in. long: fls. 2-3 on filiform stalks 1-2 in. long: fr. ovoid, scarlet, Hin- long. ALFRED REHDEB. PHOTOGRAPHY PHOTOGRAPHY 2597 PHOTOGRAPHY, HORTICULTURAL. As a means of description and of record, photography is of great importance to horticulture in all its branches. A refer- ence to newspapers, magazines, and to trade catalogues of the day shows an almost universal use of the "half- tone" engraving process; and these engravings are merely photographs transferred to a copper plate, and by means of minute chemically-etched dots given a printing surface for the typographic press. Many other illustrations — notably many in this Cyclopedia — are adapted from or drawn directly from photo- graphs, being then engraved by another photographic etching process on hard zinc. Other processes are now employed, as yet principally for newspaper use, which transfer much of the beauty of the photograph through the photogravure method. As will be noted farther on in this article, there is also actual photography in colors now available. To a limited and decreasing extent, photographs are also printed on the prepared surface of boxwood blocks, and used in lieu of a drawing as a sketch for the wood-engraver. Every experiment station and agricultural college finds in photography an indispensable adjunct both to its records and to its descriptive work. For the botanist, photography provides both an uniquely accurate means of recording plant details, and of portraying the appear- ance of the growing plant in its habitat. A photographic herbarium is an excellent supplement to the usual dried specimens of the botanist. Some of the larger nursery and seed establishments are also coming to maintain photographic equipments, in order that they may readily preserve views of the varieties which it is desired to advertise. In horticultural journalism, photography is of prime importance. In advanced collegiate institutions and at the meetings of various progressive horticultural societies and institutes, the presentation of photographs by means of the stereopticon is found to be of enor- mous advantage, and the teaching or entertainment is made more efficient through this means. Recently, the motion-picture camera, through the use of which in connection with suitable projecting apparatus, opera- tions in the field are presented a close simulation of actual life, has been availed of to advantage. For example, a "film" of considerable length records all the operations attendant upon the planting, cultiva- tion and marketing or preserving of asparagus in the large areas devoted in California to the culture of that vegetable. A drama has been "staged" at a great gladiolus farm, and one rather grotesque film inge- niously recorded the seemingly accelerated growth of an unfolding lily and of a rose in the process of opening. Therefore, all branches of horticultural activity are concerned with photography, and the progressive instructor dealing with horticultural problems in an educational institution, or handling the government's money in the experiment-station work, must be able to Eractise at least some one photographic method with a lir degree of proficiency, if he is to accomplish the best results. As horticultural photography differs essentially from the line of work in which the ordinary portrait photographer is engaged, some special skill and certain items of equipment are desirable for the tradesman, or experimenter, or teacher who wants to make his illus- tration effective. Those who deal with many photo- graphs from many "artists," come to know the thor- oughly inadequate work of the ordinary professional, who is fitted both as to equipment and skill only for the picturing of the human face and form. Not once in twenty times does satisfactory and efficient horticul- tural photographic work come from the professional; and, therefore, the horticultural instructor or trades- man is best served by taking up photography in an independent manner, if he gives the subject adequate attention. Apparatus. For views outdoors of trees, plants, and the like, any view camera of the regulation or of the "folding" type will answer, although, as it is often desirable to obtain relatively large details of fruits or flowers or plants in situ, a bellows of more than the usual focal capacity or length is preferred. The modern "long-focus" cameras are suitable, and the size most used by horticulturists is that taking a plate 5 by 7 inches in dimensions. For such size a rectilinear lens with a focal length of 7 or 8 inches is advisable; and if one of the two lenses form- ing the combination is available as an objective of about double the focal length of the combination, and the camera is provided with a bellows which draws out several inches beyond the focal length of this single lens, much facility in operation is provided. Any of the modern high-class view lenses are suitable, and those of the anastigmatic type, which are not only rectilinear but also render views in a flat and correct perspective, are preferable. It need not be assumed, however, that the very highest-grade lens is essential, for in the hands of a thoughtful and reasonably skilful operator, an ordinary rectilinear lens, costing, for the size mentioned, but $15 or $20, will often do satis- factory work. Whatever lens is used, it should be fitted into a quick-working shutter, as outdoor expo- sures, with modern rapid plates, must be made in small fractions of a second. The shutter, it may be explained to the unacquainted reader, is merely a con- venient device for opening and closing the lens to the light for the interval of time desired by the photog- rapher. As there is frequent misconception of the work done by a lens, it may not be amiss to suggest to the inquir- ing horticultural photographer an investigation on his own account. The Photo-Miniature No. 140, "Lens Facts You Should Know," is a brief, clear, and concise statement of the principles, properties, and construc- tion of lenses, which may be consulted to advantage. The focal length of any lens, in connection with the size of the plate upon which it is to be used, determines the angle and amount of view included. The human eye is a lens of about 16 inches focal length, and to have a photograph render perspective as seen by the average eye, an objective of the same focal length is required. Thus, on a 5 by 7 plate, a lens of 8 inches focal length will include twice as much in the view, and show It in half the size as seen by the eye. This forced perspec- tive is sometimes desirable and sometimes unpleasant. If the 8-inch lens is composed of two elements on what is known as the symmetrical plan, the rear element may usually be used alone (by screwing out the front lens), and it will have approximately double the focus of the combination. This will give about the perspective seen by the human eye, and will need to be used in con- nection with a bellows of at least the same length or "draw" as the focal length of the lens. Some of the high-grade lenses are now made on what is termed the "convertible" plan, each of the two elements being of a different focal length. Thus a certain lens which as a whole is of 7 J^ inches focus, includes one element of 12 inches focus and one element of 18 inches focus. Either of these single lenses, or the combination, may be used separately, so that from a given position three views, including proportions differing as 5, 8, and 12, may be made. To photograph an object in natural size, the double lens is preferable. If the lens is of 8 inches focus, it will give natural size when placed equidistant between the object and the ground-glass focusing-screen of the camera, at double its focal length. Thus the bellows would need to be drawn out so as to have 16 inches between the ground-glass and the lens, while the object to be photographed should be maintained in position 16 inches from the lens. A tripod, capable of adjustment as to height, and of 2598 PHOTOGRAPHY PHOTOGRAPHY sufficient rigidity to sustain the camera in a moder- ately high wind, is easily obtained. The cheaper forms are fairly efficient, but the photographer who has much traveling to do finds it preferable to obtain one of the more expensive and carefully fitted types, which fold into a smaller compass. For indoor work, including the making of photo- graphs of fruits, flowers, or plants in large detail, a special form of camera-stand is very desirable. One arranged so that the camera may be maintained in an inclined or nearly vertical plane, while the object to be photographed rests on a plate-glass exposing-stand in front of the lens, gives great facility and ease of opera- tion, and does away with many difficulties of illumina- tion. A few experiment stations possess devices of this kind. A form which has been found exceedingly satisfactory in practice is described in an out-of-print number of The Photo-Miniature, "Photographing Flowers and Trees," and is here reprinted by permis- sion in Figs. 2924 and 2925, showing the camera-stand both as arranged for horizontal and for vertical work. All the apparatus above mentioned is applicable to color-photography by the Lumiere method, as herein- after sketched; but motion-picture photography re- quires apparatus peculiar to itself. Under certain conditions, the use of the "flashlight" methods may be advantageous in horticultural photog- raphy; as, when an outdoor object must be obtained at night, or indoors where a flower may wilt under pro- longed exposure. Flashlight processes depend upon the explosion or the rapid combustion of certain metals — as magnesium — which, either alone or in combination with oxygen-giving chemicals, produce a light of great brightness and high actinic power for an instant. Further information upon flashlight may be found in 2924. Adjustable camera-stand, horizontal position. In operation with this device the flower, fruit, or plant to be photographed is laid upon or placed in front of the plate-glass stand, and the camera, fastened by its tripod screw upon a movable bed, is adjusted as a whole, or through its bellows, until the desired size and focus are secured. The background may be varied as desired by cardboards or cloths placed out of focus in relation to the plate-glass stand. The camera-stand is mounted on casters, so that it may be readily moved about to secure the most favorable lighting. Objects which can best be handled on a horizontal plane may be disposed somewhat as shown in Fig. 2924. For work of this sort a north side-light is found vastly preferable to the conventional sky-light. A greater mistake in the equipment of a studio for horti- cultural work could not be made than to provide the sky-light deemed essential by old-fashioned professional photographers, although now happily abandoned by the more progressive workers for a "single-slant" light, which gives far better results. There should be pro- vided in the workroom of the horticultural photog- rapher several good reflecting surfaces, so that the side of the object opposite the main source of light may be properly illuminated. 2925. Adjustable camera-stand, vertical position. The Photo-Miniature No. 135, "Flashlight Photog- raphy." The horticultural photographer also requires an outfit for developing and printing; but as this may be conventional, it is not deemed necessary to discuss it here. Plates and color-values. As practically all horticultural photography has to do with the tints of growing things, the well-known color inaccuracy of the ordinary dry-plate is a serious disadvantage. The ordinary plate responds most actively to the rays at the blue end of the spectrum, and is very sluggish in taking an impression from green, yellow and red, the latter color, indeed, being rendered practically the same as black. Yellow, which in actual color-value is on a par with light blue, and sometimes to the eye seemingly more intense than white, is ren- dered by the ordinary plate as a dark color, as all operators who have photographed yellow roses, yellow apples, yellow plums, and the like, will have observed. Fortunately, .there are available photographic plates, known as isochrpmatic or orthochromatic plates, which, to a certain extent, correct these difficulties; PHOTOGRAPHY PHOTOGRAPHY 2599 and the skilful operator may, by the use of the proper plate and in some cases a suitable ray-filter, give approximately correct values to all the colors of the spectrum. For all ordinary horticultural uses, when blue and yellow are not found in the same subject, the commercial orthochromatic or isochromatic plates of the most rapid speed are satisfactory. These give to yellow its proper value, at the same time improving the rendering of the green foliage and slightly increas- ing the truth of representation in pink, lavender, and the lighter red shades. It is very much better, then, for the photographer who has to do with horticultural work to confine him- self exclusively to these plates for all his work. If he has a subject including blue flowers, the especial activ- ity of the blue rays, which otherwise would render the photographic impression as intense as if the object was white, can be restrained by a suitable ray-filter, which is applied in front of the lens. This ray-filter is either a glass cell filled with a 1 per cent solution of potas- sium bichromate, or a piece of plane optical glass covered with a suitably stained collodion film sealed with another optical glass and provided with a con- venient mounting for slipping on the lens. (Such ray- filters may be commercially obtained at small cost, but ought to be known to be adequate for the particular plate to be used.) With this ray-filter and the plate before alluded to, the yellow is slightly over-valued, but the blue is given its proper relation. The beauty of out- door photographs is vastly increased by the use of the plate and ray-filter mentioned, because a proper color- value is given to the sky, and the cloud-forms are preserved in all their attractiveness. If the subject is a heavily loaded peach tree, for example, the accentua- tion of the yellow, brought about by the use of the ray-filter, will give a needed slight exaggeration of color- value to the fruit, which, under treatment by an ordi- nary plate, will be almost indistinguishable from the mass of foliage. With the usual ray-filter the exposure required is practically trebled. In this Cyclopedia, advantage has been taken of orthochromatic plates in photographing many of the subjects. The carna- tions, Plate XXII, Vol. II, show a variety of shades properly rendered by the means indicated. The grape- fruit, Plate L, Vol. Ill, is an example of the use of the ray-filter also to obtain the full color-value of the fruit. A difficulty known in photographic practice as halation must also be counteracted if the fine detail of subjects involving much light is to be preserved. Hala- tion is caused by the reflection of brilliantly lighted objects from the back of the glass plate carrying the sensitive emulsion. Light possesses enormous velocity, and there is an almost inconceivably rapid play back and forth between the two surfaces of the glass plate, which is covered only on its face by the sensitive photographic emulsion. This results in a thickening of all the finer lines which should be rendered in the positive as white. It may be counteracted by "back- ing" the plate with a composition which will absorb all the rays of light that pass through the emulsion on the face; but in current practice a slightly less ade- quate and much more convenient prevention of hala- tion is secured in the use of what are known as "double- coated" plates. A "slow" emulsion, first coated on the plate, is covered by a "fast" emulsion, with the effect of absorbing into the under-coating, in exposure, the overplus of light. These plates, incidentally, also give greater latitude of exposure, and their use is recom- mended, with the provision that both coatings should by all means be orthochromatic. Even with the aid of the isochromatic plate and the ray-filter, the photography of shades of red is difficult, because of the lack of actinic or chemical quality in the red rays of the spectrum. In practice it is found neces- sary to give a very much prolonged exposure to objects containing red, and then to restrain the over-exposure 165 upon development by means of a suitably compounded developing solution. Lantern-slides. A. lantern-slide is a positive on glass, and therefore is made from a negative. It is made preferably on a special plate, much slower than the regular photographic dry-plate, because coated with silver chloride rather than a silver bromide emulsion. The slide is usually faced with a paper mask, so as to include only the desired portions of the picture, and protected by a coyer glass. Negatives of any size may be used if a suitable arrangement is provided for reduction. This can readily be arranged by an adaptation of the camera- stand illustrated in Fig. 2924. A pair of light bars is added, running from the top of the plate-glass frame to a support at the other end of the stand, and a piece of heavy muslin or light canvas thrown over this serves to exclude the excess of light. A ground-glass frame is added back of the plate-glass, which latter is removed to give place to a turn-table arrangement, made to take and hold negatives of various sizes. In practice, the ground-glass end is turned toward the strong light, the negative to be used is adjusted in the turn-table, and the image focused in the camera as usual. The 5 by 7 size largely used by horticulturists is in just the right proportion for the ordinary lantern-plate of American practice, which is 3 J^ by 4 inches. Slides may also be made by contact, if the negative to be used is of suitable size. The familiar 4 by 5, 33^ by 3}^, and 3M by 4J4 hand-camera films are often so used, being placed in contact with a lantern-plate in an ordinary printing-frame, and given a short exposure to an artifi- cial light. Such slides are seldom of good quality. If it is required to make lantern-slides from diagrams, engravings or any positive material, a negative is first prepared,, for making which the vertical position of the camera-stand (Fig. 2925) is very convenient. For many diagrams and for most "reading slides," there is much advantage in making the slide directly without the intervention of a negative, with the result that the letters or lines are shown as clear glass. The audience sees only the message or object, the background being dark; and the excessive light reflection, tending to tire the eyes, is avoided. In making lantern-slides, it is important to learn the proper exposure, for errors in exposure cannot be cor- rected in development to any great extent. The care- ful worker will expose several plates upon the same subject, give all the same development, and act upon the experience thus gained. The standard all too often accepted by those who use lantern-slides is unfor- tunately low. Manufacturers competing wholly on the lowest price basis have accustomed even thoughtful persons to think their productions adequate, instead of which they are unfortunate, because they belie rather than reproduce the object to be shown. Lanterns for projecting these slides are now simple, convenient, and cheap. One form, available wherever access may be had to an electric-light socket, can be carried in a small case and set up for use in less than ten minutes. It perfectly projects an image up to 6 or 8 feet in diameter, and is without complications. Built of aluminum, it is solid and durable, and its cost is but one-fourth that of former apparatus. Colored lantern-slides. The value of a good lantern-slide is increased more than tenfold if the slide is so colored as to show upon the screen the object or scene in natural hues. It is not difficult, with suitable knowledge and sufficient prac- tice, so to tint the lantern-slide as to accomplish this object, and there are a number of notably successful colorists whose work has given information and pleasure to thousands. In practice, if a lantern-slide is to be colored, it is 2600 PHOTOGRAPHY PHOTOSYNTHESIS usually made slightly less dense or "contrasty" than if it is to be shown without color. A photographer's retouching stand, which excludes light from the eyes of the worker and reflects light through the ground- glass and also through the slide to be colored, is needed. Coloring is effected by means of the use of dyes and stains of various characters, usually obtainable in the market. The color is applied by the use of brushes of varying sizes. The capable worker constantly compares the result of his efforts, either with standard slides of high quality or through projection upon a screen by means of a small lantern. One reason why colored lantern-slides are so much more effective than those uncolored is in their exclusion of excessive light, which tends to dazzle and weary the eyes of the spectator, as previously suggested. Thus, a sky is blue and agreeable rather than white and dazzling. Transparent colors must be exclusively employed, inasmuch as the effect to be obtained on the screen through projection is wholly that of transmitted light, and not by reflection. The use of lantern-slides in general and of colored slides in particular for educational purposes has been greatly fostered by the action of several states in establishing departments of visual instruction, in which are grouped collections of carefully made lan- tern-slides upon various subjects, frequently available to residents of the particular states without other charge than transportation and a responsibility for damage. Pennsylvania, New York, Washington, Illinois, and Kansas are known to maintain such departments. Motion-picture photography. Reference has been made to the recent development of motion-picture photography. Motion-pictures are at present being viewed by many millions of persons daily in the various centers of population in the United States, but as yet little organized effort has been put forth for preparing motion-pictures primarily for educational purposes. Through the federal govern- ment, and in the Department of the Interior, the national parks are brought into notice by means of motion-picture films; and it is probable that a motion- picture outfit, both for the making of the exposures and for the proper display of the result, wih1 shortly become an essential factor in connection with any modern educational institution. Particularly in refer- ence to horticulture is it probable that the motion- picture will show to advantage orchard and planting operations and the growing of great crops (as before mentioned in connection with asparagus, for example), and similarly will teach quickly and entertainingly many things now less adequately presented. Photography in natural colors. Many investigators have worked on this problem, but without what might be called reasonable and avail- able success, until, in 1907, the Lumiere brothers, acute opticians and plate manufacturers at Lyons, France, painstakingly developed what is known as the auto- chrome process. This process uses the known but unappreciated fact that color is not an inherent prop- erty of matter, but a sensation of the eye relating wholly to the character of light reflected from any object. Exceedingly minute particles of nearly transparent starch, colored to three primary hues, are intermingled and spread in a single layer over the surface of a glass plate, and upon this layer there is coated a sensitive and so-called panchromatic photographic emulsion. These minute starch particles, averaging about 5,000,- 000 to the square inch, serve when the prepared plate is exposed glass side to the object (contrary to the usual practice) to separate or screen out the reflections from the object transmitting certain intensities relating to the colors then expressed in that particular light. Thus, from a red rose with green leaves, light is reflected through these dots to the effect that the underlying photographic emulsion is suitably affected for the pur- pose in mind. After exposure there occurs a process of development and re-development which removes most of the photographic emulsion save such as marks out the delineation of the object as depicted by the lens, and as will serve to obscure the colors not wanted. Under favorable conditions, the effect is an actual photograph in color upon a glass plate or transparency, which must be viewed as such by transmitted light suitably reflected from a white cloud or a white sur- face. If the light used in reflection has a differing spectrum from that used in the making of the view, the colors will not be seen as they were when the photograph was taken. As yet no means have been devised for adequately duplicating these transparencies on glass, which, therefore, while very beautiful when properly made and viewed, serve rather as color memoranda or records than for the reproductive purpose conceived of an ordinary photograph. In this book use has been made of the autochrome for obtaining the color records upon which the various color plates have been produced. For example, Plate VIII, Vol. I, showing the York Imperial apple, is a successful reproduction of an autochrome, as also is Plate XX, showing hardy bulbs in full color, and Plate XXV, celery, showing current commercial prac- tice in exact color. These autochromes are relatively expensive to make, but require only a special ray-filter in addition to the ordinary camera equipment. With autochrome plates the careful worker is able to obtain many important and delightful records. Inasmuch as the autochrome is viewed with success only by transmitted light, it early occurred to those working in this method to propose the autochrome as a means of obtaining a perfectly colored lantern-slide. Several collections have been made which show in an exceedingly beautiful manner great scenery, portraits, and the like, but the disadvantages encountered are to the effect that inasmuch as the autochrome is much less transparent than the average lantern-slide, it can- not be shown with success in connection either with an uncolored or a colored lantern-slide. If autochrome lantern-slides are grouped together and shown in a relatively small image with a very intense light (pref- erably that of the electric arc only), the result is excellent. Other methods said to accomplish color photography spring up from time to time. So far, however, not one of them has been found to be of a permanently valuable and desirable character, or in any sense equal to the autochrome, which in itself is rather inadequate. The use of photography in relation to horticultural education and merchandising is merely in its infancy. It is probable that greatly improved methods of re- production will permit of the more extensive and more effective use of photographs, and it seems certain that the moving-picture will assume a much greater impor- tance in educational, philanthropic, and commerical practice. Acquaintance with photography is, there- fore, likely to prove of increasing value to the horti- culturist, j. HORACE MCFARLAND. PHOTOSYNTHESIS. Green plants exposed to sunlight at a growing temperature are able to manu- facture organic food substances, that is, carbohydrates. The term photosynthesis, derived from Greek words signifying "light" and "putting together," is applied to this process of food manufacture. Green plants manu- facture not only their own food carbohydrates but also are the sources of practically all of the organic matter which may eventually furnish food for both plants and PHOTOSYNTHESIS PHRAGMOPEDILUM 2601 animals. It may be said, therefore, that life today is dependent upon the green leaf. The first carbon-con- taining compound made is a relatively simple sub- stance, but the first recognizable material is sugar. The crude materials out of which organic substance is made in the cells of the green tissues are CO2 (carbon dioxide) and water. The leaf green, chlorophyl, and the pro- toplasm of the cell may be regarded as the important mechanism, while the source of energy for the chemical change induced is radiant energy, light. Air ordinarily contains about .03 per cent of CO2, yet the ordinary green plant obtains all of its carbon for the making of organic matter from this extremely small quantity in the atmosphere. The chlorophyl is important inasmuch as it absorbs the radiant energy which is directly or indirectly responsible for the process. Chlorophyl is dis- tributed within the cells in definite granules, or small bodies, protoplasmic in nature, commonly ovoidal in form. The light absorbed is largely from the red or red-orange portion of the spectrum. It is possible that the energy so derived is first transformed into electrical energy, yet little is known upon this point. It is cer- tain, however, that green plants are unable to utilize energy derived, for example, from the absorption of heat. The process may be briefly pictured in the fol- lowing manner: The cell-sap absorbs the CO2 which diffuses into the tissues from the air. By means of the energy absorbed by the chlorophyl bodies, within the cells, the CO2 is supposed to be reduced to CO (carbon monoxide), and the same means resolves the water into its constituents. The products of these molecular changes form new substances, perhaps for- maldehyde (CH2O) and oxygen (O2). The formation of formaldehyde is still somewhat uncertain; but in any case sugar is soon recognized. In all probability the formaldehyde molecules are immediately condensed to sugar (C6H12O6). It will be noted that the surplus oxygen is in reality a by-product and during active photosynthesis it is produced in such quantity as to be actively eliminated from the plant by diffusion. The usual test for photosynthesis is carried out by counting the bubbles given off from the cut stem of a water plant exposed to sunlight in a well-aerated vessel of spring-water. The content of oxygen in these bubbles is greater than that of normal air, and the rate of bubble-production is a fair estimate of the rate of photo-synt hesis . As a rule the sugar formed in the leaf does not accumulate to any large extent, but is transformed into starch. Some of the sugar, however, may be immedi- ately diffused to other cells or •'transported," supplying the needs of this substance in growth. The starch which is deposited is in the form of insoluble granules, and the formation of these bodies on exposure of the green leaf to sunlight is so rapid as to make it possible in some cases to use starch formation as an index to rate of photosynthesis. During the night, when no photo- synthesis occurs, the transformation and removal of the starch usually goes on rapidly, so that within an interval of twelve hours most of that formed during the day seems to have disappeared from the leaf. It is, in fact, changed to sugar prior to transportation but may be removed to other organs of the plant, as, for example, to fleshy roots or tubers, where it may again be converted into starch, accumulating at times to a very considerable extent. Photosynthesis is most rapid under those conditions of temperature which are favorable for growth. Under strong light and favorable temperature, however, a slight increase in the amount of CO2 gives a higher rate of starch-production. The presence in the leaf or stem of other color bodies, such as browns and reds, is no indication that chlorophyl is absent. As a matter of fact, chlorophyl is generally present in such cases, but may be veiled by the more prominent color. In showy flowers, however, chlorophyl seldom occurs. Pho- tosynthesis is inhibited by any condition affecting the general health of the plant, and it is low during cold and dark weather. The larger number of plants are most active in the brightest sunlight, but certain shade-loving species are injured by such exposures, and are adjusted to conditions of half-shade, such as obtain in the shade of trees or bushes. g j^j DUGGAK PHRAGMITES (Greek, growing in hedges, apparently from its hedge-like growth along ditches). Gramineae. Large grasses, useful for planting in wet places. Tall stout perennials with long running rootstocks, strong culms and terminal panicles with the aspect of Arundo: spikelets 3-7-fld. Differs from Arundo chiefly in having glabrous sharp-pointed not bifid lemmas, the long hairs confined to the rachilla-joints, and in that the lowest floret is staminate. — Species 3, 1 in Trop. Asia, 1 in S. Amer. and 1, our species, cosmopolitan. commftnis, Trin. (P. vtdgaris, BSP). COMMON REED. Culm usually &-10 ft. nigh: Ivs. 1-2 in. wide. Marshes and along edges of ponds. Dept. Agric., Div. Agrost., Bull. No. 20:126. Gn. 31, p. 33.— The orna- mental feathery drooping panicles appear in late sum- mer or autumn. A form with variegated lys. is sold under the name P. communis variegata, or spire-reed. A. S. HITCHCOCK. PHRAGMOPEDILUM (Greek, phragmos, a fence, alluding to the divisions of the ovary). Orchidacex. Terrestrial or epiphytic glasshouse orchids, formerly included (with Paphiopedilum) in Cypripedium. Flowers numerous, deciduous, in a raceme or panicle; sepals 3, the lateral united into one organ located beneath the lip, the other back of the column known as 2926. Phragmopedilum Schlimii. the dorsal sepal; petals 3, the lateral similar, the other widely different, forming a pouch or sac known as the lip, the margins all around the orifice reflexed or turned in; column short; stamens 2; ovary cylindric, 3-celled, the walls thick, the ovules borne on placentae on the divi- sions.— About 11 species (Pfitzer, in Engler's Pflan- zenreich, hft. 12 [iy. 50], 1903), Trop. Amer. from Panama south. The species here considered were contained in 2602 PHRAGMOPEDILUM PHRAGMOPEDILUM Selenipedium in Cyclo. Amer. Hort. The genus Seleni- pedium is still retained by botanists, however, with which Phragmopedilum agrees in the 3-celled ovary but from which it differs in habit, conduplicate coriaceous strap-shaped Ivs., the fl. being articulated above the 2927. Phragmopedilum Sargentianum. (XH) 2928. Phragmopedilum Ainsworthii. (Hybrid; see sup- plementary list, page 2604) ovary and deciduous, and the seeds being fusiform. The orthography of the name is somewhat confused. The word was originally spelled Phragmopedilum as a section of Paphiopedilum, and this form is adopted by Pfitzer and by Index Kewensis. Rolfe, the English authority, at first wrote it Phragmi- pedium and more recently Phragmipedilum. (See dis- cussion by him in Orchid Review, 9, 174, 175.) All phragmopedilums enjoy plenty of heat and mois- ture in the growing season, March to November (65° to 90°). Give good drainage. Use chopped sphagnum with broken clinkers from the furnace, and the addi- tion of a little leaf-mold, raising the material as high above the rim of the pot as possible. This material is especially to be recommended for the young and divided plants. Give slight shade, and grow on raised benches near the glass. Water sparingly until growth begins. The four species, P. Dominianum, P. Sedenii, P. Schlimii and P. Sargentianum, should not be overpotted. Fill pots three-fourths full of drainage, then place a thin layer of coarse fern-root, which will fill pot to level of the rim. Place the plant on top of this and then fill 2 j^ to 3 inches with chopped sphagnum and leaf-mold mixed with coarse sand or pulverized coal-clinkers. Keep the moss in a growing condition. (Wm. Mathews.) INDEX. albiflorum, 1. Lindleyanum, 2. Sargentianum, 3. aureum, 10. - longifolium, 8. Schlimii, 1. Boissierianum, 9. luxemburgense, 10. Schomburgkianum, 5. caricinum, 4. magniflorum, 8. Seegerii, 10. caudatum, 10. nigrescens, 10. splendens, 10. giganteum, 1. Pearcei, 4. superbum, 1, 10. grandiflorum, 8. reticulatum, 9. vittatum, 6. Hartwegii, 7, 8. Roezlii, 8. Wallisii, 10. Klotzschianum, 5. roseum, 8, 10. Warscewiczianum, 10. latifolium, 8. rubrum, 10. Warscewiczii, 10. Lindeni, 10. A. Petals similar to the dorsal sepal; stigma 3-angled-pyramidal 1. Schlimii AA. Petals narrower and longer than dorsal sepal. B. Fls. appearing successively; petals not caudate, not over twice as long as sepals. c. Lip without horns between sac and claw. D. Lvs. narrowly yellow-margined: petals linear. E. Scape branched, many-fld.: petals but little longer than sepals. 2. Lindleyanum EE. Scape simple^, few-fld.: petals nearly twice as long as [tianum sepals 3. Sargen- DD. Lvs. not margined: petals nar- rowed from base into a twisted tail. E. Sepals and ovary glabrous. ... 4. caricinum EE. Sepals and ovary pubescent. . . 5. Klotzschi- cc. Lip with 2 horns between sac and | anum claw. D. Petals pendulous. E. Claw of lip equaling sac; horns glabrous 6. vittatum EE. Claw longer than lip; horns pubescent on inner side 7. Hartwegii DD. Petals divaricate or horizontal. E. Dorsal sepal broadly ovate, lined 8. longifolium EE. Dorsal sepal narrowly ovate, reticulate 9. Boissieri- BB. Fls. appearing simultaneously; [anum petals caudate, many times longer than sepals 10. caudatum 1. Schlimii, Rolfe (Cypripedium Schlimii, Lind. Selenipedium Schlimii, Reichb. f.). Fig. 2926. Lvs. 4-6, ligulate, leathery, sharp-pointed, 9-12 in. high: scape longer than the Ivs., hirsute, often branched, ,2-8-fld.: sepals less than 1 in. long, ovate obtuse, the lower a little larger than the upper and con- cave, white or spotted with crimson on the inner side; petals like the sepals; labellum an elliptic bag with a contracted opening, white with a large crimson blotch in front; staminodium yellow. Late summer. Colom- bia. B.M. 5614. F.S. 18:1917. Var. albiflorum, Hort. Fls. white, except the yellow staminodium and a 2929. Phragmopedilum Dominianum. ( X K) (Hybrid; supplementary list, page 2604) PHRAGMOPEDILUM suffused blotch on the labellum. I.H. 21:183. Vars. giganteum and superbum are also advertised. 2. Lindleyanum, Rolfe (Cypripedium Lindleyanum, Schomb. Selenipedium Lindleyanum, Reichb. f.). Lvs. 15-20 in. long, leathery, deep green, with yellow margins: scape many-fld., pubescent, 2-4 ft. high: upper sepal ovate-oblong, undulate, light green with brownish veins; petals 2 in. long, deflexed, green with brown veins, cili- ate; labellum olive-green, with brown veins and much spotted on the side lobes. Guiana. G. W. 13, p. 570 . 3. Sargentia- num. Rolfe (Selenipedium Sargentidnum, Rolfe). Fig. 2927. Lvs. tufted, 6-8 in. long, oblong- lanceolate, acuminate, with golden margins: scape 6 in. high, 2-3- fld.: dorsal sepal ob- long, acute, pale yel- low with red veins; lower sepal ovate, sub- acute, shorter than the lip; petals longer than the sepals, strap- shaped, slightly twisted, undulate, cili- ate, pale yellow streaked with red and with bright red mar- gins; labellum yellow, with pale red veins, deflexed side lobes speckled with red. Brazil. B. M. 7446. G.C. III. 15:781. A. G. 21:423. 4. caricinum, Rolfe (Cypripedium Pearcei, Hort. C. caricinum, Landl. & Paxt. Seleni- pedium caricinum, Reichb. f.). Lvs. 1 ft. long, springing in sedge-like tufts from the long creeping rhizome: scape longer than the Ivs., 3-6- fld. : fls. mostly pale greenish, with the segms. bordered with white and having purple tips; sepals broadly ovate, waved, as long as the lip; petals more than twice as long, pendent, narrow, and much twisted; labellum oblong, the upper margins flat; staminodium provided with 2 hairy processes. Peru. B.M. 5466. F.S. 16:1648. 5. Klotzschianum, Rolfe (Cypripedium Schom- burgkidinim. Klotzsch. Selenipedium Klotzschianum, Reichb. f. S. Schomburgkidnum, Debois). Lvs. linear, 6-12 in. long, scarcely Hin. wide, rigid, keeled: scape longer than the Ivs., hirsute, purple, 2-3-fld.: dorsal sepal ovate-lanceolate, pale rose-colored, with reddish brown veins, the lower ovate, boat-shaped, colored like the uper one; petals 3H m- long, linear, twisted, col- ored like the sepal ; labellum greenish yellow, the inflexed side lobes whitish, spotted. British Guiana. B.M. 7178. G.C. III. 15:625. 6. vittatum, Rolfe (Cypripedium vittatum, Veil. Selenipedium vittatum, Reichb. f.). Lvs. 1 ft. long, linear-ligulate, acute, margined with yellow: sts. few- fld., 12-18 in. high: dorsal sepal oblong, subacute, greenish striped with red; lower sepal about twice as broad as the upper, green; petals linear, pendent, undulate, reddish brown, striped with green and green PHRAGMOPEDILUM 2603 2930. Phragmopedilum Sedenii. (XH) (Hybrid; supple- mentary list, page 2604.) toward the base, longer than the sepal; labellum shorter than the sepals, brown, greenish spotted with reddish brown inside. Brazil. I.H. 23:238. 7. Hartwegii, Pfitz. (Cypripedium Hdrtwegii, Reichb. f . Selenipedium Hdrtwegii, Reichb. f . in part). Lvs. broadly ovate, much attenuated at apex: scape glabrous, many- fld.: dorsal sepal oblong, acute, pale green, with rosy veins and whitish margin; petals linear-ligulate, from a somewhat cordate base, velvety-glandulose on the inside toward apex, pale yellow-green with rose-pink border; lip yellowish green, tinged brown in front, the infolded margins dotted with rose. Peru. 8. longifSlium, Rolfe (Selenipedium Roedii, Reichb. f. S. Hdrtwegii, Reichb. f. in part. Cypripedium longi- fdlium, Warscz. and Reichb. f. C. Roedii, Regel). Lvs. tufted, 8-12 in. long, narrowly strap-shaped, tapering to point, strongly keeled: scape 2 ft. high, purplish, sparingly pubescent: fls. large; upper sepals ovate- lanceolate, pale yellowish green, faintly streaked with purple; lower sepals ovate, obtuse, shorter than the lip; petals 3^2 m- l°ng> spreading, narrowly lanceolate, twisted, pale yellow with rose-colored margins and with a white line on the edge; labellum 2 in. long, green shaded with dull purple or brown in front, side lobes yellow, spotted with pale purple. Costa Rica. B.M. 5970, 6217. I.H. 20:138. R.H. 1873, p. 416; 1893, pp. 18, 19. F.M. 1874:119. F. 1871 : 126.— S. Roedii, sometimes considered as a distinct species, is of more robust habit, having Ivs. 2 ft. long and green scapes. Var. magnifldrum, Hort. (Cypripedium magniflorum, Hort.), has the petals margined with white. A.F. 7:707. The following varieties also are distinguished ha cult. : grandiflorum, latif olium, and rdseum. 9. Boissierianum, Rolfe (Cypripedium reticuldtum, Reichb. f. C. Boissierianum, Reichb. f. Selenipedium Boissierianum, Reichb. f.). Plant of vigorous habit: Ivs. about 3 ft. long, acuminate: scape few-fld. or some- times paniculate, 3-;7-fld.: fls. of peculiar light green tints, with a few sepia-brown and green blotches on the whitish inflexed part of the Up and with some brown spots on the margins of the sepals; ovary dark brown, with green apex and ribs; upper sepals ligulate-lanceo- late, very crisp; lower sepals oblong, about equal to the labellum, crisp; petals spreading, long-linear, twisted and very crisp on the margins. Peru. G.C. III. 1:143; 21:54,55. G.F. 4:605. J.H. III. 55:51. 10. caudatum, Rolfe (Cypripedium cauddtum, Landl. C. Lindeni, Van Houtte. C. Warscewiczidnum, Reichb. f. Selenipedium caudatum, Reichb. f.). Lvs. strap- shaped, rather stiff upright, about 1 ft. long: scape 12-24 in. high, about 4-fld.: dorsal sepals 5-6 in. long, lanceolate, pale yellow, verging on creamy white and veined with greenish, lower sepal similar; petals pen- dent, twisted, often attaining a length of nearly a yard, yellowish, shaded with brown on the outside and be- coming brownish crimson toward the tips. Peru. F.S. 6:566. R.H. 1857, p. 318; 1883, p. 351; 1885, p.. 472. G.C. II. 3:211; 26:269. Gn. 3, p. 313; 26, p. 72; 32, p. 301; 46, p. 85. A.F. 3:132; 6:859; 35:479. R.B. 24:25. Gng. 5:265. G.M. 31:557; 33:795; 35:489.— One of the largest of the genus and remarkable on account of the extremely long petals. Peloric forms with the third sepal (labeflum) resembling the other two have passed under the name of Uropedium Lindeni, Lindl. Var. rdseum, Hort. (Selenipedium caudatum var. Warscewczii, Godfroy.). Sepals yellow, with orange veins; petals deep purple; labellum deep yellow in front, green behind. I.H. 33:596. Var. Wallisii, Hort. (Selenipedium Wallisii, Reichb. f. Cypripedium WdUisii, Hort.). Lvs. paler green: fls. pale, and in every way more delicate than the type. Gn. 49, p. 140. G. 19:34. Numerous other varieties of this species are distinguished in cult. The following names occur in trade lists: aureum, luxemburgense, rilbrum, super- bum, Seegerii, splendens, nigrescens, Hort. 2604 PHRAGMOPEDILUM PHYGELIUS P. Ainswarthii, Rolfe & Hurst. (Cypripedium Ainsworthii, Reichb. f. Selenipedium Ainsworthii, Reichb. f.). Fig. 2928. Hybrid between P. longifolium x P. Sedenii. Lvs. ligulate, acumi- nate, \Yi ft. long: scape shorter, pubescent, few-fld. ; upper sepal oblong, acutish, undulate, whitish or yellowish green with a pale purple border; lower sepaj very broad and concave with a reflexed margin, shorter than the lip; petal broad, purple, with a green mid- vein and a pale area near the base; side lobes of the lip yellow, with numerous spots. — P. albopurpureum, Rolfe & Hurst. (Cypripe- dium albopurpureum, Reichb. f. Selenipedium albopurpureum, Reichb. f.)=P. Dominianum X P. Schlimii. Fls. larger than those of P. Sedenii; sepals oblong, acute, whitish with a purplish tinge on margins; petals 5-6 in. long, pendent, twisted, purplish, lip pur- plish on borders, the white infolded margin purple-spotted. Gn. 21, p. 332. J.H. III. 52:69.— P. Brdwnii=P. longifolium X P. Sedenii. — P. Brdvmii leucoglossum. — P. Brysa.=P. Boissierianum X P. Sedenii. — P. Calurum=P. longifolium X P. Sedenii. Fls. large, about 5 in. across petals; dorsal sepal oblong-ovate, pale green, with longitudinal purplish ribs, flushed red on outside; petals lan- ceolate, undulate, pale green in the center and at the base, margins rose-red; labellum oblong, rose-red tinted with brown in front; side lobes deeply inflexed, cream-white, with irregular spots of pur- ple. G.Z. 29:241. F. 1884:145.— P. cardinale, Reichb. f. (Cypri- pedium cardinale, Reichb. f.)=P. Schlimii x P. Sedenii. Lvs. long, straight: dorsal sepal blush-white, slightly streaked with green; petals broad, ovate-oblong, undulate, white tinged with rose-pur- ple near the base; labellum intense purple; staminodium white. Gn. 27:520. — P. Chlvrops=P. caricinumxP. longifolium. — P. Cleola=P. Boissierianum X P. Schlimii. — P. conchlferum=P. cari- cinum X P. longifolium. — P. Coppinianum=P. conchiferum X P. Sedenii. — P. Cunia. — P. Dominianum, Reichb. f. (Cypripedium Dominianum, Reichb. f.)=P. caricinum X P. caudatum. Fig. 2929. Lvs. numerous, about 1 ft. long, acuminate: fls. yellowish green, with copper-brown shades and markings; labellum deep reddish brown, reticulated in front and yellowish green behind. Gn. 3, p. 491. F. 1874, p. 57. — P. Dominianum rubescens=sa,me. — P. Ger- alda=P. caudatum X P. Lindleyanum. — P. Gotianum=P. cauda- tum X P. macrochilum. — P. grdnde (Cypripedium grande, Reichb. f.)=P. caudatum x P. longifolium. Lvs. dark green, over 2 ft. long: scape over 3 ft. high, with several large, shining fls. : sepal long, oblong-lanceolate, yellowish white, veined with green; pet- als long, pendent, yellowish green above, becoming rose-pink; labellum large, greenish yellow in front, whitish behind; side lobes white, spotted with crimson. G.M. 32:87. A.F. 11:1349. G. 27:239; 28:297. Gn.W. 4:389. Var. atrdtum. A hybrid between P. longifolium, P. Roezlii and P. caudatum roseum. G.C. III. 15:692. — P. leucorrhddum=P. longifolium X P. Schlimii. J.H. III. 47:119. — P. macrochilum=P. caudatum X P. longifolium. A.G. 22:763. — P. macrochilum gigant&um=P. caudatum X P. grande. J.H. III. 53:543. — P. Mrs. W. A. Roeblino=P. caudatum X P. Sedenii. — P. nitidissimum=P. caudatum x P. conchiferum. — P. Penclans=P. CalurumXP. caudatum. — P. Perseus=P. Lindley- anum X P. Sedenii. — P. porphyreum (Cypripedium porphyreum, Reichb. f.)=P. longifolium X P. Sedenii. Lvs. broadly strap-shaped, acute, about 1 ft. long: fls. mostly purple, resembling those of P. Sedenii, but without protuberances on the open sides of the lip. The sepals and petals are oblong and more acuminate. — P. Saun- dersianum=P. caudatum X P. Schlimii. — P. Schroederse (Cypri- pedium Schroederse, Hort. Veitch, ex-Reichb. f.)=P. caudatum XP. Sedenii. Plant of the habit of P. Sedenii, with fls. resembling those of P. albo-purpureum but larger: upper sepals nearly ocher- cqlored, with purple veins; lower sepals very broad, ocher-colored, with purple veins; petals long-lanceolate, undulate, pendent, 4 in. long, greenish white in the middle, crimson-purple around the margin; labellum purple outside, inflexed lobes yellow, with brown blotches.— P. Sedenii (Fig. 2930)=P. longifolium X P. Schlimii. Lvs. numerous, crowded, 12-18 in. long, tapering to a point: scapes 12-18 in. high, about 4-fld. but often sending out secondary flower- ing branches from the axils of the bracts after the first fls. have fallen: fls. 3J^-4 in. across the petals; lower sepal oval, greenish white, upper sepal oblong, Acute, with faint purplish green veins; petals lanceolate, twisted, purple shading to greenish white at the base ; labellum rich crimson-purple shading to paler purple behind, spotted inside. A very luxuriant free-flowering plant. F.M. 1876: 206; 1878:302. R.H. 1879:470. G.Z. 21:1. O. 1910, p. 88. Var. candidulum, Reichb. f. Sepals white; petals white tinged with rose; labellum darker rose. The following names are also in the trade: grandiflorum, sangutneum, superbum. — P. tenellum=P. longifo- lium magnificum X P. Schlimii. — P. Titanum=P. Lindleyanum X P. longifolium. — P. Uranus=P. grande X P. Lindleyanum. — P. urgdndae=P. Lindleyanum X P. longifolium. — P. Weidlichidnum— P. longifoliumxP. Schlimii. G.M. 34:274. GEORGE V. NASH. PHRYMA (one of the many names which Linnseus never explained). Phrymaceae. One genus and one species comprises the family. It is a hardy perennial herb of little horticultural value. Erect, divaricately branching, with coarsely toothed ovate Ivs. and small purplish or rose-colored opposite small fls. borne in long slender terminal spikes. It seems to have been rarely cult, in Eu. and offered in America by dealers in native plants. Phryma has been con- sidered an outlying member of the verbena family. This is because its ovary is 1-celled, while others of the Verbenacese, as a rule, have a 2- or 4-celled ovary. There is some evidence for regarding it as a 2-celled verbenaceous plant in which only half the ovary develops. This plant has the infl. of the verbena tribe and the habit of Priva. Ovule solitary, erect, ortho- tropous, laterally affixed at the base; seed without albumen; cotyledons convolute; radicle superior; stamens 4, didynamous; style slender and stigma 2- lobed. Leptostachya, Linn. LOPSEED. Height 2-3 ft.: Ivs. 3-5 in. long, thin, the lower long-stalked: fls. at first erect, soon spreading, and the calyx in fr. closed and abruptly deflexed against the axis of the spike, the teeth long, slender, and hooked at the tip. June-Aug. Com- mon in moist and open woods, New Bruns. to Man., south to Fla. and Kans.; also E. Asia. — This very widespread and relatively unattractive plant has stimulated considerable speculation on the problem of the distribution of plants. Horticulturally, it may be worthy a place in the wild-garden for its botanical interest. The mature calices adhere to clothing, like a bur, by the hooked tips of the teeth. L jj_ g. PHRYNIUM (from Greek word for toad, because the plant inhabits marshes). Marantdceae. Maranta-like plants with creeping rootstocks and large oblong showy radical leaves. The genus is closely allied to Calathea and Maranta and is often confused with them. The Marantas are New World plants with 1 seed-bearing locule in the fruit, whereas Calathea and Phrynium have 3-seed- bearing locules, or at least a 3-celled ovary. In Calathea, the fl.-cluster is terminal on a leafy st. or rarely on a leafless scape arising directly from the rhizome; in Phrynium, the cluster is lateral from the sheathing petiole. In Calathea the corolla-tube is usually slender; in Phrynium it is usually short. — Species 14 and a few others of doubtful position are admitted to the mono- graph by Schumann in 1902 (Engler's Das Pflanzen- reich, iv. 48), and other species have been described since then; they are native in India, Malasia to New Guinea. Phryniums are grown the same as calatheas and marantas (which see). P. variegatum, N. E. Br., is probably a variegated form of Maranta arundinacea. It is a stove plant of dwarf habit with ovate-lanceolate acuminate green If.-blades which are marked with cream-white or white stripes and bands. I.H. 33:606. F.R. 3:469. Gt. 46, p. 581. J.H. III. 28:27; 61:560. It is a worthy plant, now coming to be popular. P. Micholitzii, Hort. Lvs. broadly oblong, about 10 in. long, acute, green and broadly white-striped above from the midrib outward, paler beneath, midrib claret- red, petiole red. New Guinea. G.C. III. 33:suppl. April 18. R.H. 1903, p. 226. P. floribtindum, Lem., is Calathea violacea, Lindl., a tall species with oblong or oblong-lanceolate Ivs. green above and purplish and glaucescent beneath and violet-colored fls., from Brazil. B.R. 961. L.B.C. 12:1148. For P. eximium, see Calathea eximia. L. H. B. PHYGELIUS (Greek, sun flight, because it was said to love the shade). Scrophulariacese. Small South African shrubs, hardy South and useful in greenhouses, something like pentstemon. Plants erect, glabrous or nearly so: Ivs. opposite, stalked, crenate-dentate : fls. many, long and tubular, scarlet, with exserted stamens in 2 pairs, and a long, filiform declined style; calyx 5-parted; corolla trumpet- shaped, the limb with 5 short nearly equal blunt lobes : fr. a many-seeded caps. — Species 2. capensis, Meyer. CAPE FUCHSIA. Fig. 2931. Two to 3 ft., becoming woody at the base, glabrous, the st. with 4 angles or narrow wings: Ivs. ovate to ovate- lanceolate, rounded at the base, firm and veiny, bluntly small-toothed : fls. slender, 2 in. long, somewhat curved, 2-lipped, purple-scarlet, 1-4 together on the ends of straight-spreading peduncles, drooping. Cape of Good PHYGELIUS PHYLLANTHUS 2605 Hope. B.M. 4881. R.H. 1857, p. 599; 1886, p. 473. F.S. 11:1111. R.B. 25:36. G. 4:607; 35:591. Gt. 7:168. G.W. 13, p. 91. — A fine subshrub blooming in summer and hardy in protected places as far north as Philadelphia. In the X. it is known as a greenhouse plant. It is excellent for planting out, enduring heat and dry weather as well as geraniums, or even better. It is prop, by seeds and also by cuttings. The cuttings may be taken from the late autumn shoots of outdoor plants. Phygelius is a showy plant, deserving to be better known. P. squalis, Harv. Infl. closer, the pedicels much shorter; calyx- segms. lanceolate or nearly oblong rather than ovate or oblong- lanceolate; corolla-tube nearly straight, about equal rather than oblique at apex: described as a handsome shrub with habit of a fuchsia. Transvaal to the eastern region of S. Afr., whereas P. capensis is more of the coast and central region, although reaching the Kalahari. Apparently not in cult. L H B PHYLICA (old Greek name, now transferred to these plants). Rhamnacese. Evergreen shrubs, rarely trees: Ivs. alternate, crowded, ovate, lanceolate or linear: fls. small, axillary or in dense crowded heads or spikes; calyx obconical, urceolate or cylindrical, 5- cleft, its limb persistent; petals wanting or bristle-like or cucullate; stamens 5; ovary 3-celled: fr. inferior, crowned by the permanent calyx. S. Afr. Prop, by cuttings of half-ripened shoots. P. plumosa, Thunb. Branches and twigs pubescent: Ivs. linear-lanceolate, smooth above, tomentose beneath with reyolute mar- gins: spike oblong or roundish; bracteples villous, twice as short as the tubular minutely pilose calyx, hairs of the tube reversed, appressed, segms. ovate-lanceolate. S. Afr. G.W. 10, p. 306. P. eriaMes, Linn. Branches fastigiate; twigs thinly pubescent: Ivs. short-petioled, spreading or erectish, linear or linear-subulate: infl. terminal heads on the rather umbellate twigs; fls. small; involucre hemispherical, its scales ovate, foliaceous, cuspidate; calyx turbinate, smooth, longer than the very villous bracteoles, segms. ovate, acute, hirsute; petals concave, cucullate: fr. a smooth caps. S. Afr. G.W. 10, pp. 305, 306. PHYLLAGATHIS (Greek, probably alluding to the involucrate head). Melastomace^e. Greenhouse woody plants, with ornamental foliage and attractive flowers. Plants with short thick sts.: Ivs. opposite or the terminal solitary, large, petioled, roundish, cordate at the base, entire or denticulate, prominently nerved: fls. crowded into a short-peduncled sometimes involucrate head, rosy, about Hm- across; petals 4, rarely 3; sta- mens 8, rarely 6; ovary 4-celled, rarely 3-celled: caps, top-shaped, 4-valved.— -Species a half-dozen and more, Malay Archipelago and China. The Ivs. of P. rotundi- folia are praised for their colors, both above and below, their venation, their plaited character, and then- strong shadows and reflected lights. The Ivs. are glossy green above, tinted along the curved nerves with metallic blue and purple; beneath they are a rich coppery red, with the prominent nerves of a brighter color. For the general cult, of melastomaceous plants, consult Mdas- toma and Medinilla. These are very ornamental stove perennials. Their cultural requirements from March to the end of sum- mer call for a high temperature. From the end of February and through March the night temperature should stand at 65°; this may be gradually increased until it reaches 70° to 75° the middle of May. This high temperature should be held until the autumn, when it may be gradually reduced until the plants are held at about 60° for December and January. As the temperature is raised and the days become longer, increase the syringing, which will provide a moisture that greatly benefits this class of plants. In the spring and summer, they will require plenty of water at the roots. Give ventilation, to keep the temperature at the right mark, but not so as to cause cold drafts to strike the plants, otherwise they may be seriously injured. In the spring and summer, the plants will need sha- ding, but not too heavy as it will make the foliage soft. Late in autumn and winter they will stand full sun. Any renewing of the earth or compost or repotting should be done about the middle of February. A good compost to use is a fibry loam four parts, fibry peat one part, well-decayed cow-manure one part, and a moderate quantity of sand to make it open. — The plants may be increased by half-ripened wood or by leaf-cuttings taken in February or March. For wood cuttings, start a few old plants early and when the growth shows half- ripeness the cuttings may be taken off with three joints and placed in small pots, using a mixture of loam, peat, and sand in equal parts. These pots may be placed in a warm propagating-bed, where they have a bottom heat of 80° to 85° and by covering with glass, kept shaded and moist, they will soon root. Leaf -cut- tings may be placed in a warm propagating- bed, inserting the petiole in the sand; see that the under part of the leaf lies flat on the sand. Keep shaded and moist and they will show growth in different parts of the leaf. Another way to root them is when they have pushed out side growth of 2 or 3 inches, cut a piece of the woody stem with the young growth and insert in pots and plunge where they can have bottom heat. After they are rooted and potted, place them where they will get a fair amount of 2931. Phygelius capensis. (XH) light, and keep the atmosphere moderately humid, sha- ding when the sun becomes too strong. Grown on by shifting until they are in 8- or 10-inch pots, they will produce good and satisfactory plants. (J. J. M. Farrell.) rotundifdlia, Blume. St. short and thick, rooting at intervals, 4-sided, dark purple: Ivs. 6 in. or more by 4H in-* roundish ovate, abruptly acuminate, denticu- late, 10-ribbed lengthwise, plaited above: floral parts in 3's or 4's, in a many-fid, head: fls. reddish, subtended by dark purple scales. Sumatra. B.M. 5282. P. gymidntha, Korth. St. short: Ivs. cordate-ovate, glossy green, ciliate, 7-nerved: fls. pink, in a close head; petals lobed. Borneo. — P. hirsiUa, Cogn. Differs in floral characters: calyx-lobes very short and broadly rounded; petals obovate and rounded; ovary adherent to calyx: Ivs. cordate-ovate or broader, with 3 pairs of curving -lighter-colored side veins and also banded crosswise: infl. standing higher than the handsome Ivs. Borneo. I.H. 41:3. WILHELM MILLER. L. H. B.f PHYLLANTHUS (Greek for leaf-flower, the flowers of some species being apparently borne on leaves). Euphorbiacex. Mostly shrubs, some herbs or trees, often cultivated in greenhouses for their graceful or curious foliage; some species have economic uses for which they are cultivated in tropical lands. Leaves small, alternate, entire, usually 2-ranked on 2606 PHYLLANTHUS PHYLLANTHUS the small lateral branches which then resemble pin- nate Ivs., such as walnut or sumach, and even fall like Ivs., leaving conspicuous scars on the main branches; several species have the branches flattened into lf.- like organs with fls. and rudimentary Ivs. on the mar- gins: fls. axillary, apetalous, monoecious or dioecious, in small clusters or singly; sepals 4-6, imbricate; disk present but no rudimentary pistil in the staminate fls.; stamens 2-6 (or more), usually 3; styles slender; ovary 3-celled, 2 ovules in each cell. — About 500 species, mostly in tropical regions. Related to Breynia, Glo- chidion, and Securinega. Some of the species com- monly cult, under the name of Phyllanthus belong more properly to Breynia or Glochidion. The genus has not been thoroughly studied since Mueller monographed it in D.C. Prod. 15, II; 274, where it is divided into 44 sections, some of which, as Emblica, Cicca, Bradleia and Xylophylla, have been considered separate genera. Most of the species here included are grown as orna- mental shrubs in the greenhouse. P. acidus (P. dis- tichus) is often cultivated, especially in the gardens and lowlands 'of Jamaica and the West Indies for the fruit which is pickled or made into preserves; it is acid and astringent; the root is an active purgative and the seed is also cathartic. P. Emblica is also grown in the tropics for the edible fruit. P. nivosus is often used in greenhouses and for bedding out in summer, and in the warmer parts of Florida for permanent hedges. In general, phyllanthus is propagated from green- wood cuttings from the larger side shoots rooted in sand in the hothouse. They are usually taken in August or before. Some leaves are left on the cutting and the sand is kept just moist but not allowed to dry. The snow-bush grows readily from root cuttings. P. acidus and P. Emblica and some other species are often grown from seeds; the latter is difficult to propagate vegeta- tively except by layering. A. Branches terete or angled: Ivs. well developed. B. Lvs. not distinctly distichous, often variegated. nivdsus, Bull (Breynia nivdsa, Small). SNOW-BUSH. Shrub of loose habit, with dark, wiry, somewhat zig- zag branches: Ivs. 1-2 in. long, broadly ovate-elliptical, obtuse, white and green variegated, or sometimes all white at the tips of the branches: fls. small, greenish, hanging by long pedicels from the If.-axils. S. Sea Isls. F.M. 1874:120. I.H. 25:332. G.Z. 18:145. Var. rdseo-pictus, Hort. Lvs. mottled with pink and red as well as green and white. Gn. 10, p. 261. F. 1878, p. 13. Var. atropurpdreus, Hort. (P. purpiireus, Hort.?). Lvs. dark purple. Forms of this species are commonly planted in the tropics. Ferdinand!, Muell. Arg. Lvs. thick, oblong-ovate, 1-1 y anthers not opening vertically. acidus, Skeels (Averrhda dcida, Linn. Cicca disticha, Linn. P. distichus, Muell. Arg. P. Cicca, Muell. Arg. OTAHEITE GOOSEBERRY. WEST INDIA GOOSEBERRY STAR GOOSEBERRY. JIMBLING. Fig. 2932. Shrub or small tree, up to 20 ft. high, main branches stout and marked by scars of fallen foliage-branches: Ivs. ovate, acute, 1-2 in. long: fls. usually on separate branches below the foliage, sometimes in the If.-axils: fr. %in. long, thick, fleshy. India and Madagascar. 2932. Phyllanthus acidus — Otaheite gooseberry. pulcher, Wall. (P. pallidifdlius, Muell. Arg. Reidia glaucescens, Miq.). Small shrub, foliage branches straight, with 25-40 Ivs. : Ivs. J^in. long, ovate-elliptical, apiculate, pale green above, glaucous beneath: fls. small, red and yellow, drooping on pedicels 1 in. long. Malay region. B.M. 5437. G.F. 4:161. Gn. 67, p. 83. AA. Branches flattened into If. -like organs, with the fls. and rudimentary Ivs. along their margins. speci6sus, Jacq. (P. Arbiiscula, Gmel. P. latifolius, Hort. Xylophylla latifolia, Sims). SEASIDE LAUREL. Small shrub: floriferous branches lanceolate, striate, crenate, ^-1 in. wide, 2-4 in. long: fls. whitish, striate, pedicels slender. Sept. Jamaica. B.M. 1021. angustifdlius, Swartz (P. elongatus, Steud. Xylo- phylla elongdta. X. montana, Sims). Similar to P. spe- ciosus, the floriferous branches narrower, %-^in. wide, 3-6 in. long: fls. red. July. W. Indies. B.M. 2652. L.B.C. 1091. P. acumindtus, Vahl, related to P. distichus. Trop. Amer. — P. caroliniensis, Walt., an infrequent low weed from Pa., south. — P. Chantrieri, Andr£, related to P. pulcher. Cochin-China. R.H. 1883, p. 537. — P. epiphylldnthus, Linn., related to P. angustifolius, the flat branches curved. B.R. 373. — P. falcatus, Swartz=P. epi- phyllanthus. — P. glaucescens, HBK., related to P. puicher. Trop. PHYLLANTHUS PHYMATODES 2607 Amer.— P. isolepis. Urban, similar to P. speciosus, but the flat branches tend to be rhomboid— P. iincons, Swartz, related to P. ang^tifolius. W. Indies.-P. mucronatus HBK.=P acummatus. —P. A'lrftri, Linn. A tropical weed with lys. hke P. Embhc^— P. sahixfolius, HBK., related to P. pulcher. S. Amer R.H. 1883, p. 176.— P. Seemannianus, Muell. Arg. Fiji Isb.— P. turbinaius Suns =Breynia turbinata.-P. zeyldnicu*, Muell. Arg.=Glochidion zevlanicum, A. Juss, which is a small tree of Malaya, with coria- ceous elliptic-oblong or oblong-lanceolate Ivs., and depressed caps. often nearly 1 in. long. J g, g. NORTON. PHYLLAUREA: Codixum. PHYLLITIS (Greek, a leaf, from the simple foliage). Polypodiacese. A group of ferns, including several or only the following species, according to different fern students. Lvs. simple, strap-shaped, with the sori almost at right angles to the midrib, grouped in pairs on contiguous veins, the indusia facing together. Scolopendrium, Newman (Scolopendrium vulgare, Smith. -S. officinarum, Hort.). HART'S TONGTJE. Lvs. 10-15 in. long, cordate at base or sometimes long-eared, 1-2 in. wide, herbaceous, in tufts sometimes of 50 or more Ivs. Probably the rarest wild fern in Amer., grow- ing only in three localities hi Tenn. and N. Y., and near Owen Sound, Ont. Its usual habitat in Cent. N. Y. is on steep rubble limestone slopes, where it roots among loose stones, usually hidden by jewel-weed. In Eng- land it is a common wall fern, and has given rise to more than a hundred varieties, some of the commonest of which are listed below. One or two American dealers offer the species for sale. The differences between the numerous English forms depend mainly on differences in the crispiness and forking of the Ivs. and on combina- tions of these two features. The following varieties are offered commonly in England under Scolopendrium vid- gare: vars. Drummondae superba, crispum, crispum multifidum, crispum muricato-fimbriatum, ramo-crista- tum, Daedalea, sagitto-grandiceps, Hort. R. C. BENEDICT. PHYLLOCACTUS: Epiphyllum. PHYLLOCLADUS (Greek, leaf branch, referring to the phyllodia which are characteristic). Taxdceae. Trees or shrubs: branches often whorled; branchlets flattened and expanded into rigid and coriaceous toothed or lobed If .-like cladodia: true Ivs. reduced to linear scales: fls. monoecious or dioecious, the male fls. fascicled at the tips of the branchlets, the female fls. sessile on the margins of the cladodia or on peduncle- like divisions of the same: ovuliferous scales 1 or several, thick and fleshy, free.— Six species, Malaya to the Philippines and New Zeal. P. rhomboiddlis, L. C. Rich. (P. osplenifplius, Hook. f.). Tree up to 60 ft., or shrub on mountain tops: persistent branches more or less reticulate, cladodia or deciduous If.-like branchlets cuneate or rhomboidal: Ivs. very small, subulate: male catkins 2 or 3 together; female catkins globular, with 1, 2, or 3 fertile scales surmounted by 1 or 2 barren ones. Austral. Occasionally seen in Calif, gardens and eastern conservatories. The following species have also been cult.: P. glaucus, Carr., New Zeal., P. hypophytta, Hook, f., Borneo, and P. trichomanmdes, D. Don., New Zeal. PHYLLODOCE (after Phyllodoce, a sea-nymph men- tioned by Vergil). Ericacese. MOUNTAIN HEATH. Orna- mental low shrubs grown for their handsome flowers. Evergreen prostrate and ascending shrubs: Ivs. alternate, crowded, linear: fls. in terminal umbels, or axillary, nodding on slender pedicels; calyx 5-parted, small; corolla urceolate or campanulate, 5-lobed; stamens 10: fr. a many-seeded caps., dehiscent into 5 valves. — Six species in arctic regions of N. Eu. and N. Asia, in N. Amer. hi the Rocky Mts. south to Calif. Often united with Bryanthus, which is easily distin- guished by its 4-cleft rotate corolla. The mountain heaths are heath-like, with small leaves and handsome delicate flowers often appearing hi great profusion. They are perfectly hardy, but do not thrive under ordinary conditions; they are best grown hi a rockery in peaty and moist soil shaded from the mid-day sun and they like cool and moist air. The hybrid P. erecta is more vigorous and less particular; it is therefore better known in cultivation than the true species. Propagation is by seeds in spring in peaty soil or cut sphagnum and kept moist and shady, also by cuttings hi August under glass or by layers. A. Corolla urceolate (urn-shaped). caerulea, Babington (Menziesia cserulea, Swartz. Brydnthus taxifdlius, Gray. B. cseruleus, Dipp.). To 6 in. high: Ivs. slightly glandular while young, later glabrous, K~Mm- long: fls. 2-6; calyx pubescent; corolla oblong-urceolate, Mm- l°ng> glabrous, purple, turning bluish in drying. June-Aug. N. Asia, N. Eu. and boreal N. Amer. L.B.C.2:164. S.B.F. (ed. 3) 6:886. G.W. 17, p. 261. AA. Corolla campanulate (bett-shaped) . empetrif6rmis, Don (Brydnthus empetriformis, Gray. Menziesia empetriformis, Smith). Five to 8 in.: Ivs. glabrous, J^-^in. long: fls. 6 or more; pedicels slender, glandular; calyx glabrous; corolla campanulate, rosy purple, about J^in. long. May-July. Brit. Col. to Calif. B.M.3176. C.L.A.21,No. 11:41. Var. amabilis, Rehd. (P. amabilis, Stapf). Fls. smaller, broadly cam- panulate, whitish or pinkish; anthers short. B.M. 8405. Var. alba, Hort. Fls. white. Var. polifdlia, Hort. Taller: fls. purple. erecta, Drude (Brydnthus erectus, Lindl. Phytto- thdmnus erectus, Schneid.). Hybrid between the pre- ceding species and Rhodothamnus Chamaecistus. Six to 10 hi.: Ivs. slightly serrate, glabrous, >#n. long: fls. 2-10, corolla rotate-campanulate, rosy pink, Kin. across. F.S. 7:659. J.F. 1:58.— Originated about 1845 hi the nursery of Cunningham & Fraser, at Comely Bank, Edinburgh. P. Breweri, Heller (Bryanthus Breweri, Gray). Allied to P. empetriformis. Corolla larger, divided to the middle; stamens exserted; fls. axillary, forming terminal spikes. Calif. B.M. 8146. — P. glanduliflbrus, Howell (Bryanthus glanduliflorus, Gray). Allied to P. coerulea. Lvs. glandular: fls. ovate-urceolate, sulfur- yellow, pubescent outside. Ore. to Alaska and Sitka. ALFRED REHDER. PHYLL6STACHYS: Bamboo. PHYLLOT/JSNIUM: Xanthosoma. PHYMATODES (Greek, a close network). Polypo- diacese. A group of stove ferns allied to Polypodium and sometimes united with that genus, but differing hi the fine copious irregular areoles formed by the anastomos- ing veinlets and the free included veinlets spreading hi every direction. For culture, see Fern. A. Lvs. simple. Swartzii, TJnderw. (Polypodium Swdrtzii, Baker). Lvs. 2-4 in. long, %-\ in. wide, narrowed gradually toward both ends: son hi a single row each side of the midrib. Fla. Keys and Trop. Amer. musaeffilium, Blume. Lvs. 1-3 ft. long, 3-4 in. wide, with an acute point, the lower part winged to the base; main veinlets very distinct, forming rectangular meshes, with numerous small sori almost covering the whole surface. E. Indies. — Known also as Drynaria and Polypodium mussefolium. AA. Lt>s. deeply pinnatifid. nigrescens, Blume (Polypodium nigrescens, Blume). Lvs. 2-3 ft. long, 1 ft. or more broad, cut nearly to the rachis into numerous entire lobes 1-2 in. wide; surfaces naked, dark green; sori in a single row nearer the mid- rib than the edge, sunk hi deep cavities which are promi- nent as wart-like projections on the upper side. India to Polynesia. 2608 PHYMATODES PHYSALIS glaucum, Kunze (Polypbdium glaitcum, Kunze). Lvs. 12-18 in. long, 6-8 in. broad, cut down to a winged rachis into entire lobes }/<$&.. or more wide, both sides naked, glaucous; veinlets indistinct: sori forming a single row close to the midrib. Philippine Isls. — Phlebo- dium Mayii, Hort. (A.G. 19:455. F.E. 10:600), is a horticultural form with crinkly Ivs. G.C. III. 23:328, fi§- l^l. L. M. UNDERWOOD. PHYSALIS (Greek for bladder, because the thin calyx enlarges and incloses the 'fruit). Solanacese. HUSK TOMATO. GROUND CHERRY. Herbs of warm and tem- perate countries grown somewhat for the edible fruits and also for the ornament of the great colored fruiting calyx of some species. Annual and perennial plants, sometimes lightly woody at base, straggling or diffuse in growth, glabrous or pubescent, summer-flower- ing: Ivs. alternate (often opposite or suboppo- siteon short shoots), mostly angled and distinctly petioled, usually soft in texture: fls. not showy, usually on axillary or extra-axillary peduncles, mostly blue or yellowish or whitish; calyx 5- toothed or -cleft, becoming large and bladder-like and inclosing the 2-celled globular yellow or greenish often more or less viscid berry; corolla rotate or short bell-shaped, usually with purplish spots in the center, plicate, short-tubed and mostly 5-toothed; stamens 5; style slender, the stigma somewhat 2-lobed. — Probably 75 species, mostly American, but a few in Eu. and Asia. The species are variable and therefore confusing to the systematist. The genus is allied to Nicandra, and more remotely to Capsicum, Lycopersi- cum and others. Most of the species are of little consequence horti- culturally, although P. Alkekengi and P. Franchetii are much prized for the glowing red very large calices, and P. pubescens and P. peruviana are grown for their edible fruits. Several of the species are known for their fruits where they grow in a wild state, and they may sometimes be transferred to gardens. In most parts of the United States and Canada one or more spe- cies grow about gardens, in fields, and in waste places. These species are popularly known as "ground cherry." The fruits are often made into preserves, although they are sometimes eaten raw. The common cultivated species are annuals, or are usually treated as such in this country. They require no extra care. The seeds are sown indoors in the North, in order to secure as much of the crop as possible before frost. Most of the A. Plants with large red calices in fr. Alkekengi, Linn. ALKEKENGI. STRAWBERRY TOMATO. WINTER CHERRY. BLADDER CHERRY. Diffuse grower, usually with zigzag mostly simple angled setose pubescent sts.: Ivs. ovate, with broad base, angular, 2933. Physalis ixocarpa in its cultivated form. (Fruits cultivated species are long-season plants, and there- fore need to be forwarded in the spring. The high colors of P. Alkekengi and P. Franchetii do not develop until the fruit is ripe; give a warm, sunny exposure; the plants do not withstand frost; let the plants stand 1 to 2 feet apart in the row. 2934. Physalis pubescens. (Fruits the petiole widening at the top: fls. whitish, the anthers yellow: fr. red (sometimes eaten), the ripe large calyx blood-red and very showy. Seems to be native from S. E. Eu. to Japan, but now adventive or naturalized in many parts of the world; it represents a variable group, from which different forms may be separated. Gn. 41, p. 577; 49, p. 233; 57, pp. 28, 432. — The strawberry tomato is an old garden plant, grown for its highly colored bladders. The plant grows 12-18 in. tall. Of easiest cult. In the N., plants are usually started indoors. It is a perennial, the root withstanding much frost if protected, but it is usually grown as an annual. Not hardy in the northern states. Franchetii, Mast. (P. Alkekengi var. Franchetii, Hort.). CHINESE LANTERN PLANT. Differs from P. Alkekengi chiefly in its greater size, making a plant 2 ft. tall, glabrous, petioles shorter, and bearing calices 2 in. diam. : originally described as an annual, by others said to be sometimes biennial, but apparently peren- nial; probably variable in duration. Japan. G.C. III. 16:441. Gn. 48, p. 435; 49:232; 57, p. 28; 58, p. 196. G.M. 37:626. J.H. III. 29:343. R.H. 1897:376, and p. 35. R.B. 22:61; 23, p. 91. Gt. 45, p. 636; 46, p. 193. G.W. 4, p. 196. A.G. 18:81. F.R. 1:426.— One of the most profusely advertised novelties of recent years. It is a most striking and showy plant. It was brought to England from Japan by James H. Veitch, and first described with a name by Masters in 1894. In 1879, however, it had been described by Franchet, of the Jardin des Plantes, Paris, as a form of P. Alkekengi, but without name. The frs. are very brilliant orange-red in autumn. The berry is said to be edible. It is very likely a variant of P. Alkekengi. The plant called P. Bun- yardii, Hort., is a very free-fruiting form, not so robust as P. Franchetii, with glowing calices; probably a form of this species or by some sug- gested as a hybrid with P. Alkekengi. AA. Plants with green or yellow or at most only red-veined calices. Mostly grown- for the edible berry. B. Sts. glabrous or very nearly so. ixocSrpa, Brot. TOMATILLO. Fig. 2933. Erect annual, 3 or 4 ft. tall, bearing smooth branches and Ivs., the latter thin, ovate or lance-ovate and variously toothed or notched: fls. large and open (Mm- or more across), the border bright yellow and the throat bear- ing 5 black-brown spots; anthers purplish: husk or enlarged calyx purple-veined and entirely filled by the PHYSALIS PHYSIANTHUS 2609 large round, purplish sticky berry, and is sometimes torn open by it. Mex., and intro. northward to the northern states. — The form in cult., described here, is probably P. capsicifolia, Dun., now regarded by some as a form of the cosmopolitan P. angidata. The writer prefers, however, to refer the plant to P. ixocarpa, although there is doubt as to the identity of the cult, plant with this species. Although the cult, plant is sometimes sold as P. edulis (erroneously), the frs. are usually too mawkish to be eaten from the hand (at least as grown in the N.). It is a very vigorous and pro- ductive plant and is of some consequence as an orna- mental, but it is too weedy to be of much value. The fr. is larger than in the native P. angulata. The plant figured by Carriere as P. violacea (R. H. 1882:216) is the one here described. In Mex., the frs. are said to be used in the making of chilli sauce and as a dressing for meats, usually under the name of "tomatoes." The Mexican forms are confused. BB. Sts. pubescent or hairy. pubescens, Linn. STRAWBERRY TOMATO of vegetable- gardens. DWARF CAPE GOOSEBERRY. HUSK TOMATO. GROCXD CHERRY. Fig. 2934. Low annual, trailing flat on the ground, or sometimes ascending to the height of a foot : Ivs. rather thin and nearly smooth, more or less regularly and prominently notched with blunt teeth: fls. small (^sm- °r I688 l°ng)> bell-shaped, the limb or border erect and whitish yellow, the throat marked with 5 large brown spots; anthers yellow: husk smooth or nearly so, thin and paper-like, prominently o-angled and some- what larger than the small yellow sweetish and not glutinous fr. X. Y. to the tropics. — The plant is very prolific, and the frs. are considerably earlier than in the other species. When ripe the frs. fall, and if the season is ordinarily dry they will often keep in good con- dition on the ground for 3 or 4 weeks. The frs. will keep nearly all winter if put away in the husks in a dry chamber. They are sweet and pleasant, with a little acid, and they are considerably used for preserves, and sometimes for sauce. The plant is worthy a place in even,- home-garden. It is grown more or less by small gardeners near the large cities, and the frs. are often seen in the winter markets. The chief objection to the plant is its prostrate habit of growth, which demands much ground for its cult. In good soil it will spread 4 ft. in all directions, if not headed in. The plants are set in rows 3 or 4 ft. apart and 2 or 3 ft. apart in the row. This physalis has been long in cult. It was figured by Dillenius in 1774, in his account of the plants grow- ing in Sherard's garden at Eltham, England. In 1781-6 it was figured by Jacquin, and by him called Physalis barbadensis, from the island of Barbados, whence it was supposed to have come into cult. In 1807, Martyn also described it under the name of Barbados winter cherry, or Physalis barbadensis, and says that it is a native of Barbados. None of these authors says anything about its culinary uses. Dunal, in 1852, described it as var. barbadensis of Physalis hirsuta, but later botanists unite Dunal's P. hirsuta with Linnaeus' P. pubescens, of which this common husk tomato is but a cult. form. peruviana, Linn. (P. edulis, Sims). CAPE GOOSE- BERRY. Fig. 2935. As compared with P. pubescens, this is a much stronger grower, the plant standing par- tially erect and attaining a height of l>£-3 ft.: Ivs. thicker, less regularly toothed, more pointed, heart- shaped at the base, and very pubescent or fuzzy: fls. larger (>£-%in. long), open-bell-shaped, the limb or bonier widely spreading and light yellow, the interior of throat blotched and veined with 5 purple spots, the anthers blue-purple: husk thicker and larger than in the last, somewhat hairy, and has a much longer point. Tropics. B.M. 1068. R.H. 1913, p. 85 (as var. edulis). — This species is too late for the northern states. The berry is yellow, not glutinous, and much like that of P. pubescens in appearance, but it seems to be less sweet than of that species. This plant has been cult, for two centuries, probably. It was described and figured by Morison in 1715 in England. In 1725, Feuillee gave a description of its cult, in Peru, saying that it was then cult, with care and was greatly esteemed as a preserve. The particular form of the species cult, in our gardens is that described and figured by Sims in 1807 as Physalis edulis, the "edible physalis." Sims' account says that "this plant is a native of Peru and Chili, but is cult, at the Cape of Good Hope, in some parts of the E. Indies, and more especially at the English settlement of New 2935. Physalis peruviana. (Fruits S. Wales, at which latter place it is known by the name of Cape gooseberry, and is the chief fr. the colonists at present possess; is eaten raw, or made into pies, puddings or preserves." The plant is rarely sold by American seedsmen. L. H. B. PHYSARIA (Greek, a pair of beUows, alluding to the didymous fruit and slender style). Crudferx. Peren- nial herbs, low, canescent: sts. many and spreading: Ivs. mostly entire: fls. yellow; calyx inflated, arched, net- veined; petals spatulate to oblong, entire: fr. strongly didymous with a narrow partition; cells inflated, membranaceous, nerveless, several-seeded. Four species, N. W. Amer. P. didymocdrpa, Gray. Very canescent, about 3 in. high: radical Ivs. petiolate with roundish toothed angled or entire blade or oblanceolate and more or less sinuately toothed below; cauline Ivs. mostly entire, spatulate: racemes dense; fls. variable in size; sepals lanceolate, surpassed by the rather narrow pale yellow petals: fr. strongly didy- mous, rather deeply notched above, entire or more or less cordate at base. This species has been intro. abroad, in botanic gardens. PHYSIANTHUS (Greek, bladder flcncer, referring to the base of the corolla-tube). Asdepiadacese. The plants known to gardeners as Physianthus are species of Araujia, Physianthus now being referred to that genus. They are twiners with showy flowers, grown under glass or in the open in summer. Including Physianthus and Schubertia (as is done by Bentham & Hooker), Araujia comprises a dozen or more species in the warmer parts of Amer., all with opposite Ivs. and whitish or rosy fls. : corolla-tube short or long, inflated at the base; lobes 5, very wide or nar- row, overlapping toward the right in the bud; crown with 5 scales attached to the middle of the tube or lower, flat and erect or convex and appressed to the staminal tube: seeds long, bearded. Schubertia and Physianthus should perhaps be considered as subgenera, the former containing the hairy plants with somewhat funnel-shaped fls.; the latter nearly glabrous plants 2610 PHYSIANTHUS PHYSOCARPUS with somewhat salver-shaped fls. Schumann, in Engler & Prantl, separates Schubertia from Araujia, with more than half the species of the combined groups. Under this disposition, A. graveolens is transferred from Araujia. See Schubertia. The species of Araujia resemble in superficial char- acters the popular stephanotis, having the same large white waxy fragrant 5-lobed fls. A. graveolens, in par- ticular, has been suggested as a rival to the stephanotis, especially as it requires less winter heat, but its foliage when bruised emits a strong and offensive odor, espe- cially with young plants. A. sericofera has considerably smaller fls. and is one of the several plants advertised as "cruel plants," because they entrap insects, though they may not digest their dead bodies as in the case of nepenthes. These "cruel plants" are mostly members of the milkweed and dogbane families, which have essentially the same kind of floral structure — a highly complicated and specialized type adapted to cross- fertilization by insects. In Fig. 398 of this work, an insect is seen struggling in the clutch of a common milkweed, with a pair of pollen-masses (a) , like saddle- bags, which he may extract with one of his legs. Araujia sericofera catches moths in a slightly different fashion. See G.C. III. 20:523. For other "cruel plants," see Cyananchum and Vincetoxicum. When well grown, araujias or physianthuses bloom freely throughout September and October. They seem to have no special soil requirements and may be flow- ered outdoors from seed sown indoors in early spring, or they may be kept permanently in a cool greenhouse and grown from cuttings. It is seldom that A. graveo- lens is seen grown well in greenhouses, the plants being usually sickly and infested with mealy-bug. As a summer vine in the open it makes vigorous growth, and after midsummer it usually blooms profusely. The flowers are larger than those of stephanotis. Cut- tings make the best flowering vines. These may be taken from the ripe wood before cool weather. Seeds are freely produced, and germinate well soon after being sown. Araujias are considered hardy in the most favored parts of England, and are grown outdoors in California. A. graveolens can be flowered in pots, but the border of the greenhouse is better. (G. W. Oliver.) The two species likely to be met with in cult, may be characterized as follows: Araujia graveolens, Mast. (.Physidnthus graveolens, Hort. P. auricomus. R. Gra- ham. Schubertia graveolens, Lindl.) Stout, woody climber, densely covered with harsh spreading yel- low hairs: Ivs. 3-4^x2-2% in., obovate, acuminate, greatly narrowed and cordate at the base, hairy on both sides: fls. funnel-shaped, i. e., swollen at the throat, 2-2J-3 in. across, umbellate. S. Brazil. B.M. 3891. B.R. 32:21. G.C. III. 4:271. See discussion under Schubertia. — Araujia sericdfera, Brot. (A. dlbens, Don. Physidnthus dlbens, Mart.). Name originally spelled, by Brotero, sericofera, in description and on plate, but usually now written sericifera. Nearly gla- brous: Ivs. 3x1% in., oblong-acuminate, wide and square at the base, minutely pubescent below: fls. salver-shaped, i.e., not swollen at the throat, pale rose in the bud and only faintly odorous, 1 in. across, cymose. S. Brazil. B.M. 3201. B.R. 1759. G.C. III. 2:653; 20:523. R.H. 1857, p. 89; 1883, p. 488. Gn. 24, p. 409; 34, p. 397. Mn. 6, p. 206. G. 6:363. The plant as above described is the Physianthus albens or Araujia albens of the trade. A. hortorum, Fourn., is probably a form of this species. WILHELM MILLER. L. H. B.t PHYSIC NUT: Jatropha Curcas. PHYSOCARPUS (Greek, physa, bladder, and karpos, fruit; alluding to the inflated capsules). Syn., Opulds- ter. Rosaceae, tribe Spiraeex. NINEBARK. Ornamental shrubs, grown for their white flowers, the attractive inflated pods and the bright green foliage. Deciduous: bark peeling off in thin strips: Ivs. alternate, petioled, stipulate, serrate and more or less lobed: fls. in umbel-like racemes; calyx-tube cup-shaped; sepals 5, valvate; petals white or rarely pinkish, spread- ing; stamens 20-40; pistils 1-5, more or less united at the base: follicles inflated, opening along both sutures; seeds 2-4, yellowish shining. — Thirteen species have been distinguished in N. Amer. and* one in N. E. Asia. Formerly usually referred to Spiraea, from which it is easily distinguished by the stipulate Ivs., by the inflated follicles and the long glossy seeds; sometimes united with Neillia, which differs chiefly in the not inflated pods dehiscent only along the ventral suture, the campanulate or tubular calyx-tube, and in the elongated inflorescence. The ninebarks are hardy, small or medium-sized spreading or upright shrubs with usually 3-lobed leaves and with umbel-like heads of whitish or some- times pinkish flowers appearing late in spring, and fol- lowed by clusters-of small pods, inflated in some species and often assuming a bright red color late in summer. They are well adapted for shrubberies and grow in almost any soil. They propagate easily by either hard- wood or greenwood cuttings, also by seeds. A. Carpels 4~5, rarely 3. B. Pods glabrous. opulifdlius, Maxim. (Spiraea opulifolia, Linn. Opu- Idster opulifdlius, Kuntze. NeUlia opulifdlius, Brew. & Wats.). NINEBARK. Fig. 2936. Shrub, to 10 ft. high, with wide-spreading and recurving branches: Ivs. roundish ovate, usually cordate at the base, 3-lobed, with the lobes crenately dentate, 1-3 in. long, usually glabrous beneath: corymbs 1-2 in. broad, many-fld.; pedicels and calyx glabrous or pubescent: pods 3-5, inflated, twice as long as the calyx-lobes. June. Que. to Ga., west to Man. and Kans. B.B. (ed. 2)2:244. R.H. 1912, p. 221. Var. mteus, Kirchn. (var. aftreus, Hort.). Lvs. bright yellow at first, changing to golden bronzy yellow. Var. Debrichyanus, Schneid. (var. "DeBrichy," Simon-Louis). Lvs. elongated, irregularly lobed, yellowish varie- gated. Var. nanus, Kirchn. Dwarf form with smaller, less lobed, dark green Ivs. BB. Pods tomen- tose. amurensis, Maxim. (Spirsea a m u r e n sis, Maxim. Opuldster amurensis, Kuntze. Neillia amurensis, Nichols.). Similar to the former, higher and of more vigorous growth : Ivs. 3-5-lobed, with acute or acuminate, doubly serrate lobes, usually pubescent beneath, 2-5 in. long: fls. large, with grayish tomentose pedicels and calyx: pods only one-third longer than calyx - lobes. June. Amurland. Gt. 14:489. intermedius, Schneid. (Opuldster intermedium, Rydb. 0. Ramdleyi, Nelson). Shrub, to 5 ft. : Ivs. orbicular in outline, 3-lobed with rounded lobes, doubly crenate, usually sparingly hairy beneath or glabrous, 1-2 5^ in. long: corymbs dense; pedicels and calyx finely pubescent: pods 3-5, inflated, one-third longer than the calyx-lobes. June. 111. and Mo. to Colo, and S. D. 2936. Ninebark.— Physocarpus opulifolius. (XM) PHYSOCARPUS AA. Carpels 2, turgid, tomentose. B. Pedicels and calyx pubescent. bracteatus, Rehd. (Opuldster bracteatus, Rydb. 0. Ramaleyi, Nelson, partly). Shrub, to 6 ft.: Ivs. broadly ovate in outline, rounded or subcordate at the base, 3-lobed, doubly crenate-serrate, obtuse or acute at the apex, glabrous* or nearly so, 1-3 in. long: corymbs many-fld.; bracts obovate of spatulate, often foliace- ous, persistent: fls. nearly J^in. across, white : pods 2, united about half. June. Colo. — Plant more com- pact and fls. larger than in P. opuli- folius. BB. Pedicels and calyx glabrous or nearly so. monogynus, Coult. (Opuldster monogynus, Kuntze. Spiraeamonog- yna, Torr. .VeiZ/ia Torreyi. Wats.). Fig. 2937. To 3 ft. high: Ivs. smaller, %-lM in. long. incisely3— 5- lobed, with incisely serrate lobes, usually glabrous: corymbs rather few-fld. ; bracts lanceolate, caducous; pedicels usually only sparingly pubescent: pods 1-2. Colo, to Calif. G.F. 2:5 (adapted in Fig.2937). glabratus, Rehd. (Opuldster glabratus, Rydb.). Shrub. 2-4 ft.: Ivs. orbicular- ovate, truncate or cordate at the base. 3-5-lobed, doubly crenate-serrate, obtuse or rounded at the apex, glabrous, about 1 in. long: corymbs rather small, but numerous; bracts small, caducous: fls. about Hm- across, white or pink: pods 2. united to above the middle. June. Colo. — Very floriferous. P. capiiatu-?, Kuntze (Spiraea capitata, Pursh. Opulaster capita- tus. Kuntze. S. opulifolia var. mollis, Torr. & Gray). Closely allied to O. opulifolia. To 20 ft.: Ivs. somewhat larger, with serrate, more elongated lobes, tomentose beneath: pedicels and calyx tomentose. Ore. to Calif. — P. mtdtaceus, Kunt*e (Neillia malvacea, Greene. Opulaster pubescens, Rydb. Spiitea pauciflora, Xutt.). To 5 ft.: Ivs. slightly 3-lobed, with crenately and obtusely toothed lobes, usuallv pubescent: corymbs rather few-fld.: pods 2-3, not inflated, tomentose, about as "long as sepals. Wyo., Idaho. B.M. 7758 (as Xeillia Torreyi). ALFRED REHDER. PHYSOCHLAINA (Greek, bladder, outer garment, having reference to the inflated calyx). Also spelled Physochlsena. Solanacex. Erect, nearly glabrous herbs: Ivs. petioled, subentire: infl. a terminal corymb; calyx campanulate. lobes 5, short, elongated in fr., over- topping the caps.; corolla elongate, lobes 5, short- imbricate in bud; stamens attached at the middle of the tube; ovary 2-celled: fr. a 2-celled caps. — About 5 species. Cent. Asia. P. praidUa, Hook. (P. grandiflbra, Hook.). Perennial: sts. 2-4 ft., corymbose upward: Ivs. 4-^6 in. long, 3 in. broad, irregular, base cuneate or cordate on the same branch: fls. all pedicelled; calyx- lobes lanceolate; corolla tubular -funnel -shaped or sometimes shorter-funnel-shaped in wild examples, in cult, examples wider sub-campanulate: fr. a caps. Hm- diam. Himalaya region. B.M. 4600. PHYSOPTYCHIS (Greek, bladder fold). Cruciferae. Perennial plant, felty with stellate hairs: fls. yellow, short-peduncled; calyx not saccate: fr. spherical, valves net-veined; seeds without wings. Formerly included in Vesicaria, but now separated chiefly by the mem- PHYSOSTEGIA 2611 2937. Physocarpus monogynus. branaceous not crustaceous siliques. — One species, Persia. P. gnaphalodes, Boiss. (Vesicaria gnaphalbdes, Boiss.). Half shrub: sts. simple with basal Ivs.: Ivs. elliptic-lanceolate, obtuse, with prominent nerves below: fr. a short silique with deciduous style, 4-celled. Persia. A small alpine plant which in general appear- ance resembles an aubrietia, but its foliage is grayer and its fls. are of a bright citron-yellow color. Spar- ingly in cult, in Eu. PHYSOSLPHON (Greek, bladder tube). Orchidacea?. Tufted epiphytes: sts. in the form of creeping rhizomes, at the end 1-lvd., 1-2 sheaths below the If., not pseudo- bulbous: If. coriaceous, narrow at base: infl. an elon- gated raceme; fls. small, short-pedicelled, secund; sepals joined at the base in an ovoid or urceolate tube, above free, spreading; petals dwarfed in the base of the tube, fleshy, obovate-cuneate; labellum small, articulate with the base of the column, oblong-cuneate, concave, midlobe shortly exceeding the others; column below elevated, footless or produced in a short foot, clinan- drium short, often obtuse, 3-lobed; anthers terminal, deciduous, pollinia 2, waxy, ovoid. About 15 species, Mex. to Brazil. P. Loddigesii, Lindl. Lf.-stalks 1-2 in. high, sheathed with a brown membrane: Ivs. fleshy, about 4 in. high: scapes erect, 6-9 in. high, 12-15-fld., produced from the junction of the If.-stalk and blade; scapes are produced by the same If. in suc- cessive years: fls. small, petals and lip minute, hidden in a green, 3-sided tube formed by the connate bases of the sepals, free part of sepals orange-brown. Mex. J.H. HI. 48:71. A coolhouse orchid sometimes offered in trade-lists. P. osoroides, Kranzl. Rhizome long and slender: sts. very short, almost none: Ivs. 3-cornered, thick, lanceolate, up to 1J4 in. long, usually reddish: fls. solitary or hi pairs, very shortly stalked, green- spotted and suffused with purple outside, dark purple inside; tube of sepals 1 in. long; petals and lip 1-1 Yz in. long. S. Brazil. Said to be in cult, in Eu. F. TRACY HUBBAKD. PHYSOSTEGIA (Greek, bladder and covering, refer- ring to the inflated fruiting calyx). Labiate. FALSE DRAGON-HEAD. Hardy herbaceous perennials, native to America, with spikes of gaping flowers of purple, rose-color, or white; useful in borders and particularly in wild-gardens. Smooth erect herbs with slender and wand-like sts. : Ivs. opposite, sessile, mostly lanceolate or oblong and usually serrate or dentate: fls. showy, pink to purple and varying to white, in separate or panicled spikes; calyx bell-shaped, swollen and remaining open in fr., membranous, 10-nerved; teeth 5, equal; corolla 2-lipped, inflated above; upper lip concave, rounded, entire or nearly so; lower lip 3-lobed, the middle lobe commonly notched; stamens 4, didynamous; anther-cells parallel. — A few species, X. Amer., mostly along stream banks and in wet grounds, but thriving under good upland garden conditions; sometimes named under Draco- cephalum. P. austriaca of lists is probably Draco- cephalum austriacum. virginiana, Benth. (P. virginica, Hort. Dracocepha- lum virginianum, Linn.). Sts. mostly simple, to 4 ft., producing large clumps in. cult. : Ivs. lanceolate, oblong- lanceolate to linear-lanceolate, 3-5 in. long, finely or rather coarsely serrate, the Ivs. prominent up to the infl. : fls. an inch long, ranging from purplish red through rosy pink and lilac. Que., west and south. B.M. 467. Mn. 7:81. F.R.5:55. Gn.M. 1:121. F.E. 15:322. Var. Slba, Hort., is a white-fld. form. R.H. 1898:336. G.W. 7, p. 458. Var. speciosa, Gray, is a tall form with very acutely serrate lanceolate Ivs. and dense-panicled spikes. A Texan form with erect, imbricated fls. B.M. 3386 (P. imbricata). Var. gigantea, Hort., is advertised as a giant form, 6-7 ft. tall, with large deep rose fls. P. virginiana is a hardy vigorous plant of the easiest 2612 PHYSOSTEGIA PHYTEUMA cult., blooming in midsummer and later. The clumps should be frequently divided. denticulata, Brit. (var. denticulata, Gray. Draco- cephalum denticuldtum, Ait.). A lower and more slender plant with crenulate denticulate or obscurely serrate Ivs. and more slender or loosely fid. spikes: Ivs. few near the infl., so that the latter is as if long-peduncled. Pa. to 111. and far south. B.M. 214. WILHELM MILLER. L. H. B.f PHYSOSTELMA (Greek, bladder girdle, referring to the shape of the scales of the crown). Asclepiadacese. Twining glabrous shrubs: Ivs. opposite, leathery, shi- ning: fls. large, umbelled; sepals small, narrow; corolla cup-shaped, lobes very short; coronal processes 5, very large, ovoid-oblong, obtuse, adnate to the anthers; column tips inappendiculate : fr. long, smooth follicles; seeds comose. — About 5 species, India, Malaya. Wallichii, Wight (Hdya campanulata, Blume). Lvs. 3-5 in. long, elliptic-oblong, acuminate; nerves reticulate; petiole J^in. long: cymes globose, 3-4 in. diam.; peduncle stout; corolla pale yellow, lobes apic- ulate. India, Malaya. B.M. 4545. J.H. III. 49:461. J.F. 1:70. — Cult, in Great Britain. The treatment given to hoyas is suitable for this plant. PHYSURUS (Greek, bladder and tail; from the purse or pouch-like spur). Orchidacese. Of the type of Good- yera and Anoectochilus, and cultivated for the foliage. By late authors, the name Erythrodes is used for these orchids for nomenclatorial and botanical reasons. Stem simple, erect, leafy: lys. petiolate, ovate to lanceolate: fls. small, in -a terminal raceme; petals and dorsal sepals cohering, galeate; lateral sepals free; label- lum spurred, strongly concave above the entrance of the spur and abruptly contracted, middle lobe spreading or recurved; column short. — About 40 species, native of the warm regions of Asia and Amer. The American species have their Ivs. mostly spotted. querceticola, Lindl. (Goodyera querdcola, Chapm.). St. ascending, 6-12 in. high : Ivs. ovate or oblong-ovate, thin, on slender petioles, spotted with silver-gray: spike densely fld.; sepals and petals oblong, obtuse; labellum concave, ending in a broadly ovate, acuminate and recurved point; spur pouch-like. Aug. Low shady woods, Fla. and westward. Under the new nomencla- ture this species becomes Erythrodes querceticola, Ames. P. vdlidus, Rolfe. Lvs. elliptic-lanceolate, about 5 in. long: scape stout, bearing an elongated dense spike about 6 in. long: fls. small, whitish. Peru. HEINRICH HASSELBRING. PHYTELEPHAS (Greek, elephant plant; referring to the hard white seeds which can be worked like ivory). Palmacese. Low unarmed pinnate palms. Stems stout, erect or prostrate and rooting: Ivs. terminal, elongate, pinnatisect; segms. numerous, the upper opposite, the lower alternate or fascicled, linear- lanceolate, acuminate, midrib strong: spadices pedun- cled, scaled, male pendulous, female erect; spathes 2, complete, elongate: fls. dioecious; male minute, perianth lacking, stamens numerous; female very large, sepals 3, petals 5-10, 2-3 in. long, rather fleshy, staminoids many, ovary subglobose : fr. a collection of 4-6 drupes, forming a large cluster. — About 15 species, S. Amer. macrocarpa, Ruiz & Pay. IVORY-NUT PALM. Caudex about 6 ft. high, creeping, rooting: Ivs. 15-20 ft. long, erect, beautifully arched, pinnate, rich dark green; the pinnae very long. Colombia and Venezuela. B.M. 4913, 4914. Gn. 24, p. 468. G.M. 57:9.— This species furnishes the "vegetable ivory" of commerce. Sometimes known as "negro's head." F. TRACY HUBBARD. PHYTEUMA (old Greek name, meaning simply "a plant," used by Dioscorides for some mignonette-like herb). Campanulacese. HORNED RAMPION. Hardy herbaceous perennials, used for borders and alpine gardens; not much known in this country except by fanciers and those who grow rock-garden plants and alpines. Low or tall, with st.-lvs. alternate, and radical Ivs. larger and long-petioled, sometimes very narrow and grass-like : fls. mostly blue or purplish, varying to white, usually in dense terminal heads or spikes, sometimes somewhat umbellate, the fl.-bud long and curved; corolla opening more or less with 5 very narrow segms. 2938. Phyteuma comosum. A tufted alpine plant growing in a crevice. ( X Ji) (sometimes remaining closed); stamens 5, free from corolla, filaments more or less dilated at base, anthers free and distinct; styles 2-3-cleft, often protruding, the lobes very narrow: fr. a caps, crowned by the calyx- teeth, laterally dehiscent. — Species about 40, Eu. and adjacent Asia, mostly in the mountains, sometimes at great elevations. The flowers in phyteuma are mostly shades of blue, more or less purple, rarely white. There are two forms of inflorescence, the globular and the long-and-narrow, the former being the more interesting. The showy feature of P. comosum, at first glance, seems to be a group of colored and much elongated pistils; but these pistil-like bodies are really corollas wrhich usually show slits at their inflated base and are narrowed above into a very slender tube from which the style and stigmas are much exserted. In this species the corolla does not open, but in the others it finally splits at the top, making a spreading or wheel-shaped flower. The plants usually seed freely and may also be propagated by division, which is best performed in spring after growth begins. They thrive in ordinary garden soil in either rock- garden or border. In an account of the cultivated species, Correvon (Gn. 63, pp. 39-41, 58) distinguishes three cultural groups: (1) the mural or wall species, comprising only P. comosum; '(2) the rock-loving species, comprising P. Carestise, P. Charmelii, P. confusum, P. globulariaefolium, P. hemisphsericum, P. humile, P. pauciflorum, P. serratum, P. Sieberi, P. Scheuchzeri; (3) the open-ground species, as P. austriacum, P. betoni- csefolium, P. canescens, P. Halleri, P. limonifolium, P. Michelii, P. orbiculare, P. ' scorzonerifolium, P. spica- tum. The rock-loving species (2) require rock fissures in full sun, without damp, little soil and that only of leaf- mold and sand. The open-ground species (3) are those of woods and pastures and are easy to grow in gardens. The botanical account following is mainly derived from DC. Prod. 7:450 and Koch, Syn., Flor. Germ., with considerable additions in descriptions from Cor- revon. There is likely to be some confusion in the species and the forms known in cultivation. PHYTEUMA 2613 INDEX. austriacum, 14. betonicsefolium, 5. canescens, 1. Carestiae, 12. Charmelii, 13, 15. comosura, 2. confusum, 14. globularisefolium, 10. Halleri, 7. hemisphaericum, 11. humile, 12. limonifolium, 8. Michelii, 4. orbiculare, 14. pauciflorum, 9. Scheuchzeri, 16. scorzonerifolium, 3. serrotum, 12. Sieberi, 13. Bpicatum, 6. A. Infl. a raceme or panicle. 1. canescens, Waldst. & Kit. Scabrous, grayish green: st. unbranched: Ivs. sessile; lower ones ovate, crenate-serrate, narrowed at base; upper ones nearly entire: fls. blue, short-peduncled, solitary, sparse. Hungary, Caucasus. — The plant described by Correvon under this name is said to have fls. in close spikes. AA. Infl. a compact umbel. 2. comSsum, Linn. Fig. 2938. The only species in the genus with umbellate infl., and in which the corollas are not finally split at the apex. A decumbent un- branched glabrous plant, 3-6 in. high, native to the Alps: fls. pale lilac below, darker purple above: roots thick and fleshy, stoutly lodged in the fissures of rocks: Ivs. cordate-ovate or those on the st. lanceolate, coarsely toothed: the 2-lobed styles are long-protruded. B.M. 6478. G.C. II. 14:177. Gn. 18, p. 245, copied in Gn. 28, p. 91; 44, p. 554, and R.H. 1882, p. 452. Gn. 63, p. 39. J.H. III. 52:364. G.W. 8, p. 597. G.C. II. 26:81, copied in I.H. 34:11. — Said by Correvon to demand a fissure in a wall or face of lime-rock. A hand- some species. AAA. Infl. a spike or head. B. Fruiting spikes long and narrow, cylindrical. c. Flowering spikes roundish or oval. D. Stigmas 2. 3. scorzonerifdlium, Vill. Fig. 2939. This and P. betonicsefolium should probably be regarded as botani- cal varieties of P. Michelii, but for clearness and for horticultural purposes they may be considered as dis- tinct species. A native of the Alps with long-spiked fls. of sky-blue (B.M. 2066, erroneously as P. betonicse- folium) or purplish blue (B.M. 2271): Ivs. poly- morphous. 4. Michelii, All. This may also be distinguished from P. scorzonerifolium and P. betonicsefolium by having the calyx pilose at the middle, it being glabrous in the other two. A native of Mt. Cenis in Sardinia, with Ivs. ovate-lanceolate or narrow, not cordate: color of fls. deep blue, in lengthening spikes. DD. Stigmas 3. 5. betonicaefolium, Vill. Rather tall: rooUvs. cor- date-lanceolate, long-stalked : bracts fewer than in P. Michelii and probably not reflexed: spikes lengthen- ing toward end of season, on st. nearly 20 in. high: fls. blue. Eu. Not B.M. 2066, which is P. scorzoneri- folium. Gn. 63, p. 57. cc. Flowering spikes oblong or nearly so. D. Spikes dense. 6. spicatum, Linn. Woodland plant: Ivs. ovate- elliptical, serrate, often brown-blotched at base, the lower ones long-stalked and cordate : fls. in a close spike, white or blue, greenish at tips. Eu. B.M. 2347. Gn. 63, p. 57. G.W. 8, p. 596. 7. Halleri, All. Tall and stout: Ivs. ovate-orbicular, doubly and coarsely serrate, long-stalked: fl.-st. 2-2% ft. ; spike ovoid-oblong, long and close subtended by 2 long drooping bracts: fls. dark violet to white. Moun- tains in Eu. Gn. 63, p. 58. DD. Spikes loose. 8. limonif&lium, Sibth. & Smith. Fig. 2939. Tall, fl.-st. 20-28 in. high and branching: fls. light blue, open, in a long narrow spike: this may be distinguished by the st.-lvs., which are few and pass into bracts; radical Ivs. lanceolate, long-petioled, sparingly toothed. Asia Minor. B.M. 2145 (as P. stricta). L.B.C 7:667 (as P. virgata). BB. Fruiting spikes little elongated, merely oval. c. Number of fls. about 5. 9. pauciflSrum, Linn. Very dwarf, said by Correvon to be the smallest and most tufted of the genus, about 3 in. high: Ivs. entire or toothed at obtuse tip; root- Ivs. short, obovate-lanceolate : bracts ciliate, entire or subdentate at base, never dentate at apex: fls. few in heads with ovate-orbicular bracts, violet-blue. W. Alps, Carpathians and Pyrenees. Gn. 63, p. 40. cc. Number of fls. about 12. 10. globulariaefdlium, Sternb. & Hoppe. Probably a variety of P. pauciflorum with larger sts. and Ivs. widened in the upper part and toothed, and by more globular heads: root-lvs. 2-4 lines longer and thrice as wide, and the bracts always entire at the base: fls. violet. Austrian Alps. 2939. Phyteuma limonifolium and P. scorzonerifolium, showing loose-spiked and dense-spiked forms of inflorescence. 11. hemisphaericum, Linn. Small plant with grass- like foliage, forming large tufts: Ivs. erect; root-lvs. sub- entire, linear or lanceolate-linear, much or little shorter than the st.: bracts ciliate, subentire, ovate-lanceolate: fls. blue, white or yellowish. Granitic Alps. 12. h&mile, Schleich. Root-lvs. linear-lanceolate, narrowed at the base, upper ones remotely denticulate, larger than those of P. hemisphaericum: bracts narrowly lanceolate from an ovate base, sharply toothed: fls. 2614 PHYTEUMA PHYTOLACCA violet-blue, in globular heads. High Alps. — P. Carestise, Biroli, is a thick-set form of P. humile. Probably P. serrdtum is also a form of this species with larger st., somewhat wider Ivs., and calyx glabrous rather than minutely ciliate. Gn. 28:90; 63, p. 40. 13. Sieberi, Spreng. (P. Charmelii, Sieb., not Vill.). Lvs. cordate, ovate or ovate-lanceolate to ovate-orbic- ular, crenate: bracts ovate, acuminate, sharply ser- rate: fls. deep violet-blue, in globular heads. S. Alps and Apennines. ccc. Number of fls. 15 or more. 14. orbiculare, Linn. (P. confusum, Kerner. P. aus- trlacum, Beck). Rootstock mostly thick, the sts. simple and usually erect, ^-2 ft. tall: Ivs. crenate; root-lvs. cordate or ovate; upper st.-lvs. linear: bracts sub- serrate, spreading or reflexed: fls. purple. Eu. B.M. 1466 (as P. cordata). L.B.C. 2 : 122.— A very variable species, and widely distributed, from England to mountain pastures on the continent. Correvon keeps P. austriacum distinct, the basal Ivs. having blades longer than petioles, upper Ivs. ovate-lanceolate, and specially by the erect fl.-bracts; also P. confusum, from granitic rocks of the Tyrol, which seems from his description to be a very different plant, with long and grass-like Ivs. and deep violet fls. 15. Charmelii, Vill., not Sieb. Rootstock thick and brittle: sts. 6-12 in.: Ivs. soft and coarsely serrate: bracts linear-lanceolate: fls. dark blue, in globular heads. Probably a botanical variety of P. Scheuchzeri. Alps. Here probably belongs the cut-lvd. P. comosum in Gn. 19, p. 419; 44, p. 554; and P. orbiculare, Gn. 28, p. 90. 16. Sche&chzeri, All. Sts. slender and flexile, 4-16 in. tall: Ivs. ovate-elliptical, serrate, the upper ones long and narrow: bracts 18-24 lines long, reflexed or spread- ing: fls. deep violet-blue, in rounded heads, the bracts exceeding the head. S. Eu., in mountains. B.M. 1797. Gn. 63, p. 40. WILHELM MILLER. L. H. B.f PHYTOLACCA (a hybrid name: Greek, phytos, plant, and French lac, or Italian lacca, lake; referring to the crimson berries). Phytolaccaceae. Ornamental herbs and woody plants; some of them yield edible parts of minor value. Shrubs, herbs, or trees, sometimes climbers, with angled or sub terete branches, glabrous or nearly so: Ivs. alternate, sessile or mostly petiolate, acute or obtuse, entire; stipules none: fls. small, borne in erect or nod- ding racemes on spikes which are at first terminal but by further growth of the st. may come opposite the Ivs. ; calyx of 4 or 5 persistent rounded sepals; stamens about 5-30; ovary of 5-16 distinct or connate carpels: fr. a fleshy berry; seeds 1 in each cell. — Twenty-six species as denned by Walter in Engler's Das Pflanzen- reich, hft. 39 (IV. 83), published in 1909, distributed in tropical and subtropical regions, mostly in Amer., and a few in Asia and Afr., one species extending to Canada. They are plants of simple requirements in the regions where they grow, and are prop, readily by seeds. P. diolca is a very useful tree for ornament and shade in S. Calif. The common pokeweed (P. ameri- cana) is a familiar wild plant in E. N. Amer.; it is a plant of good habit, vigorous growth, and ornamental berries, and is sometimes placed in back borders and wild-gardens. Related genera in cult, are Ercilla, Rivina, Agdestis. A. Stamens and carpels 10. americana, Linn. (P. decdndra, Linn.). POKE. SCORE. GARGET. Tall stout bushy perennial herb, reaching 10- 12 ft. high, the sts. soft or semi-succulent and smooth, glaucous, and the maturer parts purple-tinged: Ivs. oval-oblong or oblong-lanceolate, gradually narrowed both ways, acuminate, the petiole more or less mar- gined: fls. purplish or greenish white, in peduncled simple racemes and borne on stout bracted pedicels; ovary 10-carpelled and green, ripening into a wine- purple berry. Maine through Ont. to Minn., and far southward; naturalized in Eu.; often a weed, particu- larly in clearings and new lands. B.M. 931. Gn. 21, p. 179. G. 7:667. Mn. 1, p. 53.— A robust plant with heavy odor, but of good habit and clean. This species, the common pokeberry, is offered by dealers in native plants and its young asparagus-like shoots are some- times used as a pot-herb. Its flattish berries yield a crim- son juice of a very distinct hue, but it has never been fixed for dyeing purposes. Children sometimes make red ink from the berries for amusement. The berries have been used to give color to pale wines, but its use for this purpose is injurious and in Portugal has been prohibited by royal decree. The roots are emetic, purgative, and somewhat narcotic. The word "poke" is supposed to come from the American Indian word pocan, which apparently referred to any plant yielding a red or yellow dye, as pokeweed or bloodroot. In President Folk's campaign his followers wore Ivs. of pokeweed. In collecting young shoots for greens, care must be taken not to include any portion of the root, as this would give a bitter taste and might cause serious illness, as the roots contain powerful drastic principles. Small pieces of the root eaten by mistake for horse-rad- ish or turnip are reported to have caused serious and in some instances fatal cases of poisoning. The seeds are also poisonous. Directions are given in some of the older writings for the cult, of poke for the young shoots, which are eaten early in the season as a substitute for asparagus; but the wealth of other pot-herbs renders this plant unnecessary. It may be increased by seeds or by division of the thick roots. A variegated form once cult, for ornament is shown hi R.H. 1887, p. 16, the Ivs. . light green above often shaded rose and more or less margined white, beneath pale rose to violet. AA. Stamens and carpels kss than 10, usually 8. esculenta, Van Houtte (Pircunia esculenta, Moq. Phytoldcca Kaempferi, Gray. P. pekinensis, Hance). Somewhat woody, suberect, the sts. thick, green and glabrous: Ivs. short-petioled, broad-elliptic or ovate, the apex somewhat acute or blunt : infl. suberect, loosely racemose, not surpassing the Ivs., the peduncle and rachis glabrous: fls. pedicellate; calyx white, the parts rounded; stamens commonly 8, with white filaments and rose-colored anthers; style recurved: fr. with 8 free carpels. China, Japan. — Cult, for the edible Ivs. This name is catalogued in England as "American grape." acinosa, Roxbg. Much like the last: peduncles and rachis scabrous: filaments and anthers white; style suberect; calyx-parts green at middle, white on margin, apex acute: Ivs. ovate-oblong, acuminate at apex. China and Japan; spontaneous hi India and said to be cult, for its Ivs. which are edible when cooked. AAA. Stamens 20-30; carpels 7-10: fls. dioecious. dioica, Linn. (Pircunia diolca, Moq. Phytoldcca populifolia, Salisb. P. arbbrea, Hort.). Evergreen tree, attaining great thickness of trunk and spread of top: branchlets glabrous: Ivs. slender-petioled, glabrous, elliptic or ovate, mostly broadly acute at apex, the mid- nerve extending at the tip: infl. racemose, scarcely sur- passing the Ivs., suberect or pendulous: male fls. with 20-^30 stamens, and calyx-parts elliptic and obtuse, white-spotted; female fls. with about 10 staminodia, the calyx parts broad, the ovary globose and 7-10- carpelled : fr. berry-like, the carpels connate at base and free at top. S. Amer., the "umbu" and "bella sombra" of Spanish-speaking people. — This species was intro. into Santa Barbara some 40 years ago, and is now well distributed in S. Calif.; there are trees with spread of top of 50 ft. and trunk 6 ft. diam., with buttresses 2 ft. high. It is a tree of astonishingly rapid growth, soon PHYTOLACCA PICEA 2615 making a good shade. In a recent freeze, it is reported that trees have lost their Ivs. but the growth remained uninjured. L. H. B.f PIARAUTHTJS in part: Caralluma. PICEA (ancient Latin name derived from pix, pitch). Pinaceae. SPRUCE. Ornamental trees, grown for their evergreen foliage and regular pyramidal habit; many species are valuable timber trees. Evergreen trees with usually whorled spreading branches : Ivs. usually 4-angled with white lines formed by numerous stomata arranged in rows and on all 4 sides, or compressed and stomatiferous only on the upper or ventral side which, on the lateral branchlets, by twisting of the If.-stalk appears to be the lower one, sessile and jointed at the base to a short stalk projected from a prominent cushion called a pulvinus: fls. monoe- cious, catkin-like, terminal or axillary; the staminate yellow or red, consisting of numerous spirally arranged anthers with the connective enlarged at the apex and scale-like; the pistillate greenish or purple, consisting of spirally arranged scales each subtended at the base by a small bract and bearing 2 ovules at the inner 'side: cones pendulous or spreading, with persistent scales not separating from the axis after shedding the seeds, which are provided with a large and thin obovate or oblong wing. — Thirty-eight species in the colder and temperate climates of the northern hemisphere from the arctic circle to the high mountains of the temperate regions. They are all mentioned below and all of them except 4 are in cult. The names Picea and Abies are often exactly transposed by horticulturists and others. The spruces are usually tall trees of pyramidal habit, sometimes dwarfed in horticultural varieties or in alpine forms, with spreading usually whorled branches clothed densely with acicular spirally arranged leaves. The catkin-like flowers appear in spring and are often very conspicuous by their bright red color. These are followed by usually pendent cones, green or purple before ripening and light to dark brown at maturity. The spruces are not only highly ornamental, but also very valuable forest trees, and as inhabitants of cooler climates they are especially adapted for cultivation in northern regions. Almost all are hardy North, except P. sitchensis, P. Smithiana and P. spinulosa, but they do not resist heat and drought well; some, however, as P. pungens, P. canadensis, P. Omorika, P. orienialis, P. excdsa. and some of the recently introduced Chinese species grow better in a drier climate than most others. For ornamental park planting the spruces belong to the most valuable evergreens on account of the symmetrical habit and rapid growth of most species. Only a few, like P. oriental**, P. obovata, P. Omorika, and P. polita, are of slower growth and therefore well suited for smaller parks and gardens; and so are the numerous horticultural forms, which are mostly dwarf and slow- growing and sometimes more interesting and curious than beautiful. The spruces are often planted as shelters and windbreaks, and also used for hedges, especially P. excdsa, which makes a very dense and durable hedge when regular!}' trimmed. ~ P. polita is also recommended as a good hedge plant and seems well adapted, with its rigid spiny leaves. The spruces thrive best in moderately moist sandy loam, but will grow in almost any kind of soil provided it contains enough moisture; wet and dry soils are equally unfavorable. Slopes of northern aspect are well suited for spruces, and they thrive better in shady positions than most other conifers. As the roots mostly spread horizontally near the surface, the spruces will grow in shallow soil and are easily transplanted even as rather large plants; they may be moved with success at any time of the year except when the young shoots are growing, but if possible avoid transplanting shortly before dry weather is expected to set in. 166 Spruces are propagated by seeds, which ripen in fall and are usually kept dry and cool during the winter and sown in spring outdoors in prepared beds or in frames or boxes. The young seedlings should be shaded and watered in dry weather and may remain a year or two before being transplanted in nursery rows when not sown too thickly. Varieties and rarer kinds are often increased by layers or by grafting on seedling stock of P. excelsa. P. canadensis is used for forms of this species and for P. mariana and P. rubra. Veneer-grafting in spring or August in the greenhouse is usually employed; less commonly cleft-grafting with half-hardened wood. The dwarf forms grow readily from cuttings under glass in August or fall and given slight bottom heat in early spring; also most other forms and species, espe- cially those with thinner and finer branches, can be raised from cuttings. The spruces are important timber trees. The soft and light straight-grained wood is much used for construc- tion, the interior finish of houses and for fuel, also for ship-building; but it is not durable in the ground. The bark of some species is used for tanning leather, and the resinous exudations are sometimes employed in medicine. From the red and black spruce, spruce beer is made by boiling the branches with honey. Spruces are often known in nurseries, especially in this country, under the name of Abies. The grafting of piceas, (E. P. Drew.) In the writer's experience, P. canadensis is a good stock on which to graft the finer varieties of spruce or those having four-sided leaves. Pot the stock the last of August, keep in shaded frame, syringe till danger of wilting is over and harden gradually. Be careful not to keep the earth in the pots too wet, as roots are liable to rot. Place the stocks in greenhouse after light frosts, and graft as soon as roots have started — about last of January generally. Do not wait until buds have made much growth, for then the sap will be running strongly to the upper buds, leaving the cion to remain dormant. When stock and cion are of same size, the veneer-graft may be used. In large stocks, use slit- or side- graft. Be sure that the knife is sharp enough to shave dry wood. Cut the cion in elongated wedge- shape; place it in the cleft by twisting the stock with left hand, fitting the cion exactly with the right. Be careful to wax well, as a hole the size of a pin left on the cut surface will be fatal to the cion. Place the grafted plants in a close frame until the cion is well started. Syringe from two to three times a day, shading when too hot. Give air gradually until well hardened. Do not cut back the stock for one year, as the cion may make second growth and winter- kill. If cion should die, do not use the stock again until after a year's rest, as two consecutive pottings will usually ruin the plant; this holds good only with Tsuga and P. canadensis. The above method can be used with equal success on Pinus, Abies, Juniperus, and other evergreens propagated by grafting. Ornamental value of spruces. (Thomas H. Douglas.) The piceas embrace some of the most useful as well as ornamental trees of the conifer family. They cover a great variety of forms, from the stiff -branched sturdy and rugged P. pungens to the lithe graceful and droop- ing P. Breweriana. The American species comprise 2940. Cone of Norway spruce. — Picea ezcelsa. (XH) 2616 PICEA PICEA P. mariana, P. canadensis, P. rubra, P. pungens, P. Engelmannii, P. Breweriana, and P. sitchensis. The grand and towering Douglas spruce and the graceful hemlock spruce, so called, are not true spruces and will not be noticed in this article. The white spruce, Picea canadensis, is a native of the northern parts of America and is justly thought to be one of our best conifers, a compact and upright grower of great longevity; trees growing at Waukegan, Illinois, of mature age, are well branched at the bottom, retain their pyramidal form, and annually make an upward growth. It is the most aromatic of the piceas; in fact, this odor is often used to identify it while young from the Norway spruce or Engelmann's spruce. It grows on a great variety of soils, bears crowding well and also will stand severe pruning; hence it is used for windbreaks and hedges. Seedlings vary considerably in color, some of them fairly rivaling the blue form of the P. pungens. This tree, being a native of a cold climate, is subject to the ravages of the red-spider in a warm 2941. Shedding of the leaves of Norway spruce. — Picea Excelsa. The picture shows the extremities of a limb that is eight years old. The part between the tip and A is last season's growth; between A and B it is two years old; and beyond £ is a part that grew three seasons ago. The section beyond C is six years old; from C to Z> is seven years of age. The four years' growth of this limb not shown in the drawing was as densely covered with foliage as is the part shown in the upper figure; but there are not many leaves between C and D (seven years old) and none on the eight-year-old wood (except those on the branchlets, and these are younger). This shows that the leaves persisted six or seven years. climate and should not be planted south of Philadel- phia or St. Louis. There is a variety of P. canadensis found in the Black Hills that stands extreme drought better than the northern form and is largely planted on the dry prairies of Nebraska and the Dakotas. It does not, however, do so well in northern Illinois or farther east as the northern variety. Picea Engelmannii, one of the gems of Colorado, resembles P. canadensis more than it does its near neigh- bor, P. pungens, being of finer foliage and not so stiff- branched as the latter. It is one of the few conifers that will stand the extreme cold of Petrograd, Russia, but on our western prairies it soon loses its lower branches, as it seems to be unable to withstand the hot and drying winds of that section in late summer and early autumn. In the eastern states, however, it does not have this fault, as the cooler and more humid air seems better to agree with it. Another Colorado conifer, P. pungens (the blue form being called by some the "queen of the piceas"), is a striking and noble tree, seeming to be hardy wherever tested and on all varieties of soil. Strong, sturdy, and upright in growth, its form alone would make it a strik- ing figure in any landscape. Its beautiful color varies from a light silvery hue in some specimens to a dark blue, almost purple in others. In some specimens the branches are in distinct and regular whorls, resembling Araucaria excelsa. Undoubtedly the oldest and finest specimens of this grand tree are found on the former grounds of the late Robert Douglas, at Waukegan, Illinois. These trees are now 35 to 40 feet high and show no signs of weakness anywhere, being one mass of foliage from the ground upward. The green form of P. pungens is an excellent tree, but is not so much appre- ciated by planters and lovers of trees as it should be, as it is always compared to its more striking variety, the blue spruce. There is a fine specimen growing on the above grounds, even larger than the blue form, which does not suffer in comparison with its near neighbors, Abies concolor, A. Fraseri, Picea Engelmannii, Tsuga canadensis or hemlock spruce, Pseudotsuga Douglasii or Douglas spruce, and Pinus Strobus, all large and fine specimens, equal to any in the Middle West. Picea mariana, or black spruce, is undoubtedly the poorest tree of the genus from a land- scape gardener's point of view. It has very short needles and is greatly dis- figured by its cones, which hang on for several years. It begins seeding when very young and is an exceedingly slow grower. Some good specimens of it are found, however, in the East, but in very restricted localities. P. rubra, long thought to be a variety of the preceding, is a much better tree in every respect, resembling P. excelsa in color and form. It seems to be a short- lived tree, especially in the West. This tree is undoubtedly the least known of the American piceas. P. sitchensis of the Pacific Coast strongly resembles P. pungens; in fact, when the latter was first introduced it was thought to be a variety of P. sitchensis. It has much finer branches and needles than P. pun- gens, varies in coloring as much as the latter, and, where hardy, makes a very fine tree. Unfortunately it is not hardy in any of the northern states. Unlike P. pungens, it will not stand close planting, as the needles fall off badly where the branches are rubbed together by the wind or strike other objects. Without doubt the most graceful and elegant picea is P. Breweriana, or weeping spruce, a native of the Siskiyou and Coast Ranges of mountains in northern California and Oregon. It has the true spruce form, tall and symmetrical, with horizontal branches and a beautiful dark green color. In its general features it resembles a well-grown specimen of the Norway spruce, but its distinguishing beauty is in the long pliant pendulous branchlets which hang straight down from the branches to a length of 6 to 8 feet and no larger around than a lead pencil. It has a stately grace in calm weather, but its characteristic impressiveness is seen only when the long flexible branches are undulat- ing in a light breeze or streaming before a gale. The bark is smooth and reddish in color, adding to its beauty where glimpses of it can be seen through the green foliage. It grows only at high elevations in its native habitat and on the northern slope of the moun- tains where the annual fall of snow is 15 to 25 feet. The cones are from 2^ to 3% inches long, of a pur- plish color, and as they grow only on the tips of the branches they add greatly to its beauty. Unfortunately this beautiful tree has not proved satisfactory. Out of over 300,000 seedlings raised in 1893, only one plant is now alive; it is growing on the Douglas grounds and is scarcely 5 feet tall, having cost over $100 a LXXXVIII. Picea canadensis (or P. alba). — A golden variety. PICEA PICEA 2617 foot, and this is doubtless one of the largest specimens in cultivation. Of the foreign piceas, P. excelsa is most popular; in fact is the best known and most largely planted of any of the genus. It makes a large fine-looking tree, grows in a great variety of soils, is hardy throughout most of North America, is the most rapid grower of any of the piceas, and stands close planting very well. It is used more than any other tree for windbreaks and shelter-belts. It bears pruning well. Hedges of this species and P. canadensis that have been planted more than forty years are growing on the Douglas grounds that are now 8 feet high, and 9^ feet across the base. One fine specimen tree on these grounds measures about 63 feet high and 64 feet from tip to tip of its lower branches. Other foreign species, but not so well known nor so thoroughly tested as the preceding, are P. obovata, a close compact-growing tree dark green in color. P. Smithiana or P. Morinda is one of the handsomest of the piceas, but is not hardy in the northern states, plants from seed collected at an elevation of 8,000 feet on the Himalaya Mountains not proving hardy. Fine speci- mens of this tree are found in California, where it is justly prized. P. Omorika from southeastern Europe is one of the best of the hardy foreign piceas; it does well in the eastern states and forms a narrow pyramid with slender branches clothed with dark glossy foliage. There are several species of Picea from China and Japan that will doubtless prove hardy in the eastern states. Of these P.jezoensis var. honddensis has proved one of the best in the eastern states; also P. bicolor, which forms a handsome pyramidal tree of rapid growth with dark green foliage, has proved perfectly hardy. All piceas will stand the pruning-knife, but this should be used not later than July 1 in the northern states and earlier farther south. They are propagated from seed the same as larix; and their varieties, of which there are a great number, are either grafted or raised from cut- tings over bottom heat. INDEX. For names not found here or in the supplementary list, con- sult Abies and Tsuga. Abies, 5. Ellwangeriana, 5. nova, 16. acicularis, 16. Engelmannii, 11. nutans, 7. ajanensis, 14. ereda, 5. obovata, 2, 6. alba, 10. erythrocarpa, 5. Omorika, 17. albertiana, 10. excelsa, 5, 6. orientalis, 7. Alcockiana, 14, 16. fastigiata, 9. Parryana, 12. alpestris, 5. fennica, 5. pendula, 5, 10, 12. argentea, 10, 11, 12. finedonensis. 5. polita, 3. argenteo-spicata, 5. flavescens, 12. ponderosa, 4. asperata. 4. glauca, 10, 11, 12. procumbens, 5. aurea, 5. 12. globosa, 2. pseudopungens, 1L aureo-spicata, 7. Gregoryana, 5. pumila, 9. australis, 8. hondoeasis. 14. pungens, 12. Barryi, 5. inversa, 5. purpurea, 15. Beissneriana. 9. japonica, 16. pygmsa, 5. bicolor, 3, 16. jeroensis, 14. pyramidalis, 5. brerifolia, 9. Khuiroir, 1. reflexa, 5, 16. Breweriana, 18. Kosteri, 12. Remontii, 5. caerulea, 10, 12. laxa, 10. repens, 5. canadensis, 10. mariana, 9. rubenf, 8. capitata, 5. Maxweltii, 5. rubra, 5, 8, 10. chlorocarpa. 5. mediarima, 5. Schrenkiana, 2. Clanbrasiliana. 5. Afenziesi'i, 12, 13. Eemi-virgata, 7. columbiana, 11. microsperma, 14. sitchensis, 13. columnaris, 5. Moerheimii, 12. Smithiana. 1. commulala, 11. 12. monocaulis, 5. speciosa, 13. compacta, 5, 12. monstrosa, 5. tabuliformis, 5. conica, 5. Morinda, II Torano, 3. cupreisina, 5. mutabilis. 5. viminalis, 5. dtnudata. 5. nana, 5, 7, 9. tiolacea, 10. Doumetii, 9. nigra, 9. virgata, 5, 8. dumosa, 5. notabilis, 4. vindis, 12. elata, 5. KEY TO THE SPECIE?. A. LTS. quadrangular, all 4 sides with stomata. B. Scales of cone obonate or orbicular, refunded, closely oppressed before ripening. c. Cones 2%-6 in. long. D. Length of Its. %-2 in.: young branchlets glabrous, more or less pendulous. E. Lrs. spreading, sometimes 2 in. long: winter buds acute. 1. Smithiana EE. Lts. pointing foward, not over 1% in. long: winter buds obtuse 2. Schrenkiana DD. Length of Ivs. %-l in. E. Lrs. spreading, rigid, sharply pointed: branchlets gla- brous, pale yellow 3. polita EE. Lts. pointing forward. F. Young branchlets pale yel- lowish gray, pubescent: petioles very prominent, often recurved 4. asperata FF. Young branchlets brown, puberulous or glabrous. o. Cones jfc-6 in. long, or shorter in some varie- ties with stiff scales: branchlets glabrous or sparingly hairy 5. excelsa GG. Cones less than 4 in- long, with flexible scales: branchlets puberulous 6. obovata DDD. Length of Its. less than %in.: Its. bright green, lustrous, obtusish: branchlets pubescent, light brown 7. orientalis cc. Cones %-2 in. long. D. Young branchlets pubescent. E. Color of Ivs. dark green, lus- trous: cones ovate-oblong, very short-stalked, decidu- ous; scales entire or den- ticulate 8. rubra EE. Color of Its. dull, usually bluish green: cones ovate, distinctly stalked, persistent for many years; scales erase or dentate 9. mariana DD. Young branchlets glabrous, light brownish yellow 10. canadensis BB. Scales of cone oblong or rhomboidal, erase at the margin and usually striate and undulate, thin, very loosely oppressed or slightly spreading. c. Winter buds with oppressed scales: branchlets pubescent: Ins. point- ing forward, rather flexible 11. Engelmannii cc. Winter buds with loose scales revolute at the apex: branchlets glabrous: Its. spreading, rigid. . . 12. pungens AA. Lts. more or less compressed, with 2 white lines above, green below or sometimes with few stomata. B. Cone-scales rhomboidal, erose-dentic- ulate, flexible, loosely oppressed. c. Cones brown at maturity: Ivs. flattened. D. Bracts visible between the scales of the cone: Ivs. rigid, pun- gent; mature branchlets orange-brown: winter buds ovate 13. sitchensis DD. Bracts not risiWe: Ivs. not pun- gent: mature branchlets green- ish to light reddish brown: winter buds conical 14. jezoensis CC. Cones purple: branchlets orange- yellow, setose: Its. quadrangular, somewhat compressed 15. purpurea BB. Cone-scales orbicular or obovate, closely oppressed before maturity, c. Branchlets glabrous, only leading shoot more or less hairy or all pubescent: Ivs. quadrangular, somewhat compressed 16. bicolor cc. Branchlets always pubescent: Its. much compressed. D. Lrs. keeled, lA~}^in. long: branchlets short 17. Omorika DD. Lrs. nearly rounded on both sides, }^-l in. long: branchlets long, drooping 18. Breweriana 2618 PICEA PICEA Section I. EUPICEA, Willk. Lvs. quadrangular, with stomata on all 4 sides: scales of cone closely oppressed before maturity, broad and entire or nearly so. 1. Smithiana, Boiss. (P. Morinda, Link. P. Khut- row, Carr.). Tree, to 150 ft., with wide-spreading branches and slender pendulous branchlets: Ivs. crowded, usually thicker than broad, acute, bright or dark green, %-2 in. long: pistillate fls. purple: cones 5-7 in. long, dark brown and glossy; scales suborbicu- lar, with entire margin, firm. Himalayas. G.C. II. 24:393; III. 35:325; 38:395. Gn. 19, p. 359; 35, p. 599; 39, p. 72. C.L.A. 7:364. F.E. 16:705.— One of the most graceful spruces; hardy as far north as N. Y. The young growth starts very early and is liable to be injured by frost in spring, especially when planted in warm and damp situations. 2. Schrenkiana, Fisch. & Mey. (P. obovata, var. Schrenkiana, Carr.). Tall pyramidal tree, with pendu- lous branchlets, somewhat similar to P. excelsa: Ivs. .equally 4-sided, acute, somewhat dull green, %-lH in. long, on young plants often slightly shorter: cones cylindric-ovate, 3-4 in. long; scales with entire margin. Siberia to N. China. — Similar in habit to the preceding species but branchlets not so long and Ivs. shorter. A very desirable and hardy spruce. Var. globdsa, Schelle. About 6 ft. high, globose in shape. 3. polita, Carr. (P. Torano, Koehne. P. bicolor, Hort., not Maxim.). Tree, to 90 ft., forming a dense, broad pyramid, with rigid stout branches when young, older trees with the habit of P. excelsa, with somewhat pendulous branches: young branches thick, glabrous, yellowish brown: Ivs. rigid, thicker than broad, often falcate, shining dark green, %-\ in. long: pistillate fls. green, staminate yellowish: cone oblong, 4-5 in. long, brown, glossy; scales with finely denticulate margin. Japan. S.Z. 2:111. G.C. II. 13:233; III. 21:251. Gn. 13, p. 239. S.I.F. 2 :2.— One of the most distinct spruces; of very striking appearance with its rigid spiny Ivs. spreading in all directions from the stout branches, but usually of rather irregular habit. 4. asperata, Mast. Tree, to 100 ft., with grayish brown bark peeling off in thin flakes: branchlets pale yellowish gray, pubescent: If .-cushions with often spreading or recurved petioles: Ivs. quadrangular, curved, j^in. long or slightly longer, acute or acutish and beveled at the apex: cones cylindric-oblong, 3J^- 4 in. long, fawn-gray when ripe, finally changing to 2942. Picea mariana (XJ4). No. 9. chestnut-brown; cone-scales usually rounded and en- tire at the apex. W. China. — A valuable timber tree. Var. notabilis, Rehd. & Wilson. Lvs. %-%\n. long: cones 3^-5 in. long; scales rhombic-ovate, narrowed toward the apex. Var. ponderosa, Rehd. & Wilson. Bark thicker, brownish gray: branchlets nearly gla- brous, yellowish: cones 5-6 in. long. 5. excelsa, Link (P. Abies, Karst. P. rubra, A. Dietr. PlnusA bies, Linn. Plnus Plcea, Dur.). NORWAY SPRUCE. Figs. 2940, 2941. Tree, to 150ft., with spread- ing branches and usually pendulous branchlets: bark reddish brown: young branches brown, glabrous or pubescent: Ivs. quadrangular, acute, dark green and usually shining, ^-1 in. long: staminate and pistillate fls. bright purple: cones cylindric-oblong, 4-7 in. long, light brown; scales obovate, with erose-denticulate mar- gin. N. and Cent. Eu. Em. 1 : 102. Mn. 4, p. 185; 6, p. 85. F.E. 15:350, pi. 50. H.W. 1:1, pp. 54-61. C.L.A. 11:311. G.W. 2, p. 535; 6, p. 322.— Though P. Abies is the correct name for this species according to the rules of priority, we have retained here the name P. excelsa, because Picea Abies and Abies Picea might be easily confused and are certainly somewhat perplexing. It seems therefore advisable to take the next oldest names which are Picea excelsa for the Norway spruce and Abies alba, Mill., for the silver fir. — This tree is extensively planted as an ornamental tree in the north- ern and eastern states; it is of rapid growth and is a handsome tree, with its graceful habit and dark green dense foliage, but, like many spruces and firs, loses much of its beauty when it grows old, and usually after 30 years it becomes thin and raggeu in the top. It is one of the best conifers to plant for shelters and windbreaks. The Norway spruce is very variable, and a great number of garden forms are in cult. Some of the more impor- tant are the following: Pendulous or sparingly branched forms of P. excelsa: Var. virgata. Gasp. (var. denudata, Carr.). Sparingly branched, with long and slender branches destitute of branchlets, spreading, usually the lower ones pendu- lous and the upper ones ascending. R. H. 1854, p. 102. G.W. 3, p. 523; 6, p. 607. M.D.G. 1894:31. H.W. 1, p. 63. P. excelsa var. elata, Hort., is probably a seedling of this variety and an intermediate form varying toward the type. Var. monstrdsa, Beissn. (var. monocaulis, Nordl. Abies excelsa monstrdsa, Loud.), is an extreme form of the preceding and is destitute of all branches; it consists only of a single st. clothed with thick rigid Ivs. Var. viminalis, Gasp. Branches in remote whorls, almost horizontal, with very long and slender branchlets without or with very few lateral branchlets. G.W. 3, p. 433; 9, p. 411. M.D.G. 1902:257; 1906:557. Gt. 38, p. 136. H.W. 1, p. 64. Var. pendula, Jacq. & Herincq (var. reflexa, Carr.). With pendulous branches and branchlets; whorls of branches often irregular. Gt. 48, pp. 618, 619; 50, p. 315; 52, p. 434. G.W. 6, p. 213. R.H. 1890, p. 259. Var. inversa, Beissn. (Abies excelsa inverta, Gord.). Similar to the preceding, but branches more closely appressed to the st., more densely branched, with thick lustrous Ivs. Gng. 6 : 100. F.E. 22:765. G.M. 54:976. Gn.M. 2:24. G.C. III. 22:369; 29:263. Gt. 50, p. 317. B.H. 10, p. 300. Columnar forms: Var. pyramidalis, Carr. (var. erecta, Schroter). With branches ascending at an acute angle, forming a narrow, nearly columnar pyramid. Var. columnaris, Carr. With very short, hori- zontal much ramified branches, forming a nar- row column. M.D. 1911, p. 260. Var. cupres- sina, Thomas, is similar. M.D. 1907, p. 252. Dwarf and dense, pyramidal, subglobose or prostrate forms: Var. conica, Carr. A dense conical pyramid with ascending branches and slender branchlets: Ivs. thin and pointed. Var. Rem6ntii, Beissn. A dense ovate or pyram- idal form with short and dense branches. G.M. 54:222. F.E. 16:491. M.D.G. 1906:557. Var. Clanbrasiliana, Carr. (Abies excelsa Clanbrasiliana, Loud.). A compact roundish or broadly conical form with short and crowded branches: Ivs. short and thick. M.D. 1906:222. G.M. 57:634. Var. compacta, Beissn. A subglobose dense form with slender branchlets and acute short Ivs. F.E. 16:585, pi. 65. Var. Gregoryana, Beissn. (Abies excelsa var. Gregoryana, Gord.). A com- pact subglobose form densely branched, with short thickish pungent lys. Var. pygmsea, Carr. A very dense, small, pyramidal form with ascending branches and bright green Ivs. Gn.M. 2:23. Var. nana, Carr. A depressed subglobose form with dense horizontally spreading branches and short sometimes monstrous branchlets. Var. tabuliformis, Carr. A low flat form PICEA PICEA 2619 with horizontally spreading branches. Var. procum- bens, Carr. A "prostrate form with numerous short branchlets and dense short and pointed Ivs. Var. dumdsa, Carr. Similar to the preceding, but less densely branched and Ivs. more distant. Var. repens, Simon- Louis. A creeping form. Low, irregularly branched monstrous forms: Var. Bir- ryi, Beissn. With vigorous thick branches and few short branchlets, dark green. Var. Ellwangeriana, Beissn. A broad growing form with crowded slender branchlets and small and thin, acute Ivs. Var. capitate, Carr. Dwarf bushy form, with numerous short branch- lets in dense heads at the end of the branches. R.H. p. 393. Var. Maxwellii, Beissn. Alow flat dense form, the young branches brown, often with short fas- cicled branchlets: Ivs. bright green, rigid, pointed. Variegated forms: Var. finedonensis, Beissn. (Abies excelsa finedonensis, Gord.). Lvs. pale yellow at first, becoming bronzy brown and finally green. Var. argen- teo-spicata, Hesse. Young shoots whitish. Var. aurea, Carr. Lvs. golden yellow on the exposed side; does best in a partly shaded situation. Var. mutabilis, Carr. Young shoots yellow, changing soon to green. G.W. 3, p. 556. The 'most important of the geographical forms are: Var. fennica, Rupr. Similar to P. obovaia: cones not more than 3 in. long. N. Eu. and X. Asia. Var. medioxima, X yland. Small tree or sometimes shrubby: Ivs. thick- ish. shorter, lustrous, green: cones to 3 in. long. Resem- bles somewhat P. orientalis. N. Eu. Var. alpestris, Brugg. Slow-growing compact tree: young branchlets velutinous: Ivs. shorter, usually obtusish, dull yellow- ish or grayish green: cones 3-5 in. long. Resembles in habit and foliage somewhat P. canadensis. In the Alps at high altitudes. — There are two forms of the common Xorway spruce differing in the color of the young cones: Var. chlorocarpa, Purk. Young cones green: Ivs. obtusish, more appressed; leafing later. Var. erythrocarpa, Purk. Young cones viole1>purple: Ivs. more spreading, pointed; leafing earlier. 6. obovata, Ledeb. (P. excelsa var. obovata, Koch). Tree, to 100 ft., similar in habit to the following, with somewhat pendulous branchlets: young branches brown, glabrous or slightly pubescent: Ivs. quadrangu- lar, acute, dull or bluish green, %-% in- long: pistillate fls. purple: cone oblong-ovate, light brown, about 23^ in. long; scales with entire margin. X. Eu. to Kamchatka and Manchuria. Gn. 20, p. 91. R.H. 1894, p. 274. Mn. 5. p. 189. — Of slower growth than P. excelsa and more graceful. 7. orientalis, Carr. Tree, to 120 ft., with ascending and spreading branches and somewhat pendulous branchlets: young branches brown, pubescent: Ivs, thick, obtuse, dark green and shining, crowded and more or less appressed to the branches: fls. carmine: cone cylindric-ovate, 2)^-33^ in. long, less than 1 in. thick; scales orbicular, entire at the margin. W. Asia, Caucasus. G.C. II. 21:308; 25:333; III. 3:754. A.G. 19:649. Mn. 5, p. 189. V. 20:185. C.L.A. 11:311. Gn.M. 2 :25. G.W. 16, p. 261.— A very graceful spruce with dark, glossy foliage; of slow growth and there- fore valuable for smaller gardens. It holds its lower limbs for many years. Var. nana, Carr. Low form of broadly pyramid'al habit, with wide-spreading branches. Var. aureo-spicata, Beissn. Young shoots yellow. Var.ntltans, Xiemetz. With graceful hanging branches. Var. semi- virgata, Schwerin. Branches with few lateral branch- lets, which gives the plant a loose slender appearance. 8. rftbra, Link, not A. Dietr. (P. australis, Small. P. riibens, Sarg.). RED SPRUCE. Tree, to 80 ft., or occa- sionally to 100 ft., with short and slender branches forming a narrow pyramidal head, with red-brown bark : young branches reddish brown : Ivs. quadrangular, acute or mucronate, dark or bright green, shining, about 3-i in. long: fls. purple: cones oblong, i%-2 in. long, green while young, later light reddish brown, glossy; scales obovate, rounded and entire or slightly erose at the margin. From Canada to N. C., along the Alle- ghany Mts. S.S. 12:597. — Handsome tree, but requires cool and moist situation and is less drought-enduring than most others. Var. virgata, Rehd., is a sparingly branched form with long and slender branches destitute of branchlets, very similar to P. excelsa var. virgata. G.F.8:45. 9. marina, BSP. (P. nigra, Link. P. brevifblia, Peck). The native BLACK SPRUCE. Figs. 2942, 2943. Tree, usually to 20-30 ft. or occasionally to 100 ft,, with slender, often pendulous branches forming a narrow, 2943. Cones of piceas. Largest one, P. pungens; lowest one, P. canadensis; upper right hand, P. mariana. ( X ^2) irregular head: bark gray-brown: young branches brown or yellowish brown: Ivs. quadrangular, obtusish, dull dark or bluish green, bloomy especially on the upper side, J^~5im- long: fls. purple: cones oval- oblong, globose-ovate when open, dark purple while young, later dull grayish brown, J^-l]^ m- long; scales rounded and finely denticulate at the margin. From Canada to Va., Minn, and Brit, Col. S.S. 12:596. — Very variable in habit; cone-bearing trees often only a few feet high when growing in swamps. The most ornamental garden form is var. Doumetii, Schneid. (P. nigra Doumetii, Carr.), with ascending crowded branches forming a dense conical pyramid. A similar form, somewhat broader at the base with more light bluish green foliage, is var. Beissneriana, Rehd. (P. nigra mariana, Beissn.). G.C. HI. 11:80. Var. fasti- giata, Rehd. (P. nigra fastigiata, Carr. Abie* nigra pumila, Knight). A columnar form with ascending branches and short, acute Ivs. Var. nana, Rehd. (P. nigra nana, Beissn.). A dwarf subglobose form with light bluish green Ivs. Gt. 50, p. 193. 10. canadensis, BSP. (P. alba, Link. P. Idxa, Sarg.). The native WHITE SPRUCE. Figs. 2943, 2944. Tree, usually 60-70 ft., with ascendent branches and usually pendent branchlets: bark light brownish gray: Ivs. slightly curved, acute or acutish, more or less bluish green, }$-%in. long, of a strong, aromatic odor when bruised: fls. pale red or yellowish: cones cylindric- oblong, light brown and glossy, 13^-2 in. long; scales orbicular, with usually entire margin, thin and flexible. From Labrador to Alaska, south to Mont., Mum., and N. Y. S.S. 12:598. G.F. 8:223 (adapted in Fig. 2944); 9:355. F.S. 21:2251. C.L.A. 11:311. F.E. 29:81. Gn. M. 4:19. M.D.G. 1899:80. — A decorative species of dense habit when young and with rather light bluish green foliage; it endures heat and drought much better than the two preceding species. The most important garden form is var. caerulea, Schneid. (P. alba cxrulea, Carr. P. alba argentea and var. glauca, Hort. Abies rubra violacea, Loud.). Of dense habit with light bluish green or almost silvery white Ivs. Var. pendula, Schneid. (P. alba pendula, Beissn.). With pendulous branches. An important geographical variety is var. albertiana, Rehd. (P. albertiana, S. Br. P. alba albertiana, Beissn.). Tree, to 100 or occasionally 150 ft,, of narrow pyramidal habit: branchlets sometimes minutely pubescent; Ivs. more crowded: If .-cushions longer: cones shorter with more rigid rounded scales. Alberta. M.D.G. 1905:117 (as P. alba). 2620 PICEA PICEA Section II. CASICTA, Mayr. Lvs. quadrangular or more or less compressed: scales of cone loosely oppressed before maturity, rhombic and usually elongated, erose-denticulate, and more or less wavy on the margin. 11. Engelmannii, Engelm. (P. columbiana, Lemmon). Abies commutata, Murr.). ENGELMANN SPRUCE. Tree, to 150 ft., with slender spreading branches in closely arranged whorls, forming a dense and narrow pyramid in young trees: winter buds with brownish yellow usually appressed or little spreading scales: young branches pale brownish yellow, pubescent: Ivs. slender, straight or slightly incurved, acute, bluish green to steel-blue, %-l hi. long, without resin canals, of a strong aromatic odor when bruised: fls. purple: cones oval- to cylindric-oblong, light brown, 1^-3 in. long; scales rhomboidal, narrowed and truncate or rarely acute at the apex. From Alberta and Brit. Col. to Ariz, and New Mex. S.S. 12:599. Gn.M. 2:26. F.E. 27:39. M.D.G. 1905:121, 122.— A very ornamental tree, varying in the color of foliage. Var. glauca, Beissn., has bluish or steel-blue, and var. argentea, Beissn., silvery gray foliage. M.D.G. 1906:557. P. pseudopungens, Dieck, seems not to differ from typical P. Engelmannii. The latter is said to be sold for P. pungens. It is more common, and its seeds are there- fore more readily secured. 12. pungens, Engelm. (P. Parryana, Sarg. Abies Menziesii, Engehn., not Lindl.). COLORADO SPRUCE. Fig. 2943. Tree, 80-100, or occasionally to 150 ft., with horizontal stout branches in rather remote whorls, forming a broad, regular pyramid: winter buds with brownish yellow usually reflexed scales: young branches glabrous, bright yellowish brown: Ivs. rigid, incurved, spiny -acuminate, bluish green to silvery white or rarely dull green, %-lK in. long, with 2 resin canals: cones cylindric-oblong, light brown and glossy, 234~4 in. long; scales rhomboidal, narrowed and erose at the apex. Wyo. to Colo, and Utah. S.S. 12:600. G.C. II. 20:725; III. 10:547. Mn. 7, p. 51. Gng. 7:49. S.H. 2:273. F. 1884, p. 5. G.M. 40:35. — A very handsome and very hardy tree of symmetrical habit, with light, sometimes almost silvery white foliage. According to the different shades of color of the foliage, the following varieties are distinguished: Var. glauca, Beissn. With bluish green Ivs. Gn. 63, p. 280. G.M. 50: 121. Gn. M. 2:26. G.W. 1, p. 355; 14, p. 14. R.B. 32, p. 106. Var. caeriilea, Beissn. With bluish white foliage. G.W. 1, p. 357. Var. argentea, Beissn. With silvery white foli- age. ' Gt. 53, p. 493. G.W. 2, p. 295; 8, p. 481; 10, p. 48. M.D.G. 1901:178. Var. K6s- teri, Beissn. With silvery white foliage and of very regu- lar pyramidal habit. G.W. 15, p. 467. F.E. 16: 461; 18: 82. Var. glauca pendula, Beissn. With bluish foliage and pendulous branches. R.H. 1901, p. 183. F.E. 32:1173. G.W. 6, p. 399; 9, p. 543; 16, p. 79. M.D.G. 1901:133. Var. viridis, Regel (P. commutata, Hort.), is the form with green Ivs. Var. compacta, Rehd. A dwarf com- pact form; originated at the Arnold Arboretum. Var. aurea, Niemetz. With golden yellow foliage. Var. flavescens, Niemetz. With whitish yellow foliage. Var. Mcerheimii, Rujis. Grows more compact and foliage deeper blue. 13. sitchensis, Carr. (Abies Menziesii, Lindl.). TIDELAND SPRUCE. SITKA SPRUCE. Tree, usually 100 ft., occasionally 200 ft. high, with 'slender horizontal branches, forming a broad pyramid in young trees; in old trees the upper branches short and ascending, the lower ones slender and spreading, clothed with slender 2044. Picea cana- densis. Abnormal spikes pistillate at apex. branchlets: bark bright or dark red-brown: young branches rigid, light brownish yellow, glabrous: Ivs. bright green, shining and rounded on the lower side, flat, slightly ridged and silvery white on the upper side, sharply acute or acuminate, )^-l in. long: staminate fls. red: cones cylindric-oval, pale yellowish or reddish brown, 2^/2-4 in. long; scales rounded at the apex and erose. Alaska to Calif. G.C. II. 25:728, 729. S.S. 12:602. G.F. 4:211 (erroneously named Douglas fir). M.D.G. 1896:403; 1905:123.— A very ornamental tree, especially attractive by the contrasting colors of the foliage, but it can hardly be grown successfully in the eastern states ; it does not stand the hot summers well, and is probably not hardy farther north than Mass. Var. specie sa, Beissn., is of slower growth and more compact habit, with more ascending branches and shorter, more rigid Ivs. 14. jezoensis, Maxim. (P. ajanensis, Fisch. Abies jezoensis, Sieb. & Zucc. Abies Alcockidna, Veitch, Eartly). Tree, 100-150 ft., or occasionally higher, with orizontally spreading slender branches: bark dark gray: young branches glabrous, shining, yellowish brown or yellowish green: If .-cushions slightly swollen, with usually recurved petioles: Ivs. slightly curved, acute, slender, slightly ridged on both sides, dark green and shining below, silvery white above, 3^-%in. long: fls. carmine: cones oblong, light brown, 1^-3H m- long; scales oval-oblong, erose. E. Siberia, Amurland, Saghalin, N. Japan. G.C. II. 13:115, 212; III. 3, p. 53. J.H.S. 26, p. 104. S.I.F. 2:3. Gt. 38, p. 217, figs. 2-5. Var. hondoensis, Rehd. (P. hondoensis, Mayr. P. ajanensis var. microsperma, Beissn., not Mast.). Tree, to 100 ft. : branchlets light reddish brown with much swollen If .-cushions : Ivs. shorter, more obtuse, dull green below. Cent. Japan. B.M. 6743. J.H.S. 26, p. 103, R.H. 1903, p. 341, and G.W. 1:358 (as P. ajanensis). S.I.F. 1:5. — The type is rarely cult; it does not grow well in the eastern states and suffers sometimes from late frosts, owing to its early leafing. The variety is much more satisfactory; it is not likely to suffer from frost, as it ' leafs later, and is a highly ornamental perfectly hardy tree. 15. purpurea, Mast. Tree, to 60 ft. with wide-spread- ing branches: branchlets orange-yellow, hispid: winter buds broadly ovoid: Ivs. quadrangular, more or less compressed, curved, obtuse or acutish, with 2 white bands above, green beneath, sometimes with a few stomata, J^-Kin- long: cones cylindric-oblong, 2-2 j/2 in. long, purple, even more or less so at maturity; scales rhombic-oblong, contracted, narrowed from about the middle, erose-denticulate, acutish or truncate at the apex. W. China. — Very handsome with its numerous purple cones. Section III. OMORIKA, Mayr. Lvs. more or less compressed, with glaucous lines above, green below: scales of cone closely appressed before maturity, broad and entire or nearly so on the margin. 16. bicolor, Mayr (P. Alcockidna, Carr., partly. P. Alcockidna nova, Hort. Abies bicolor, Maxim.). Tree, 80-150 ft., with rather stiff, spreading branches: bark grayish brown: young branches dull yellowish brown, glabrous, usually only leading shoots pubescent: Ivs. somewhat curved, with 2 bluish lines above, dark green beneath, sharply acuminate, /^>-/4in. long: cones oblong, brown, purple before ripening, 3^4 in. long; scales obovate, finely denticulate and slightly wavy at the often recurved margin. Japan. G.C. II. 13, p. 213. C.L.A. 11:311. Gn.M. 2:24. R.H. 1903, p. 340. S.I.F. 1:4. — Handsome tree, with less slender branches than P. jezoensis and of more rapid growth. Var. acicularis, Shirasawa (P. aciculdris, Maxim. P. japonica, Regel). Branchlets finely pubescent: Ivs. curved, acute, bluish white above: cones light reddish PICEA PIERIS 2621 brown, with entire not wavy scales. Cent. Japan. M.D. 1914:257. Var. reflexa, Shirasawa. Branchlets pubescent, light brown: Ivs. more or less curved, acute, bluish white above, about 3^in. long: cones light reddish brown; scales nearly entire, not wavy, at the apex slightly attenuate and recurved. Cent. Japan. M.D. 1914:257. 17. Omorika, Bolle (Plnus Omdrika, Pancic). Tree, to 100 ft. or higher, with rather short spreading and ascending branches forming a narrow pyramidal head: young branches brown, pubescent: Ivs. compressed, ridged on both sides, obtuse and mucronulate, dark green and shining below, with whitish lines above, H-%m. long: fls. purple: cones ovate-oblong, cinna- mon-brown, glossy, 1^2-2% in. long; scales almost orbicular, with finely denticulate margin. S. E. Eu. G.C. 11.21:308; 111.21:153. Gt. 47, p. 177. R.H. 1905, p. 239. — Handsome tree of rather slow growth, forming a dense and narrow pyramid when young; very hardy. 18. Breweriana, Wats. Tree, 80-120 ft. high, with the branches at the top slightly ascending, the lower ones horizontal or pendulous, with whip-like pendulous branchlets often 7 or 8 ft. long, furnished with similar, slender lateral branchlets; young branches reddish brown, pubescent: Ivs. straight or slightly curved, obtuse, rounded and dark green at the lower surface, almost flat and with white lines above, %-l in. long: staminate fls. purple: cones oblong, 2^-5 in. Jong, light orange-brown; scales obovate, with entire margin. Sis- kiyou Mts. in Ore. and N. Calif. S.S. 12:601. G.F. 3:66, 67; 5:595. G.C. II. 25:497. M.D.G. 1905:123.— One of the most distinct spruces, but does not seem to do well in the eastern states. The Roman figure indicates the section to which the species belongs: P. ascendens, Patschke. (Section III.) Tree, to 80 ft.: branchlets pale brown, glabrous: Ivs. about Jim. long, compressed, with 2 white lines above: cones 3-4 in. long, with obovate truncate scales. W.China. — P. auraniiaca, Mast. (I.) Allied to P. asperata. Tree, to 40 ft., with pale gray bark: branchlets orange, glabrous: Ivs. quandrangular, about }-£in. long: cones 4-5 in. long, brown, with broad, rounded, slightly erose scales. W. China. — P. Bal- fouriana, Rehd. & Wilson. (II.) Allied to P. purpurea. Tree, to 120 ft.: branchlets villous, yellowish: Ivs. H-Hin- long, compressed, whitish above, acute or obtusish: cones purplish, 2-3 Yi in. long, with rhombic denticulate scales. W. China. — P. brachytyla, Pritz. (P. pachyclada, Patschke). (III.) Tree, to 70 ft.: branchlets brown, nearly glabrous: Ivs. Hin. long, compressed, white above: cones 3-4 in. long, with obovate scales entire at the margin. W. China. — P. complanata, Mast. (III.) Tree, to 80 ft., with gray bark: branchlets orange-brown, pubescent or sometimes glabrous: Ivs. flattened, acute, white above, %in. long: cones reddish brown, 5-6 in. long, with broad rounded or truncate scales. W. China. G.C. III. 39:147.— P. Glehnii, Mast. (III.) Tree, to 150 ft.: branchlets brown, pubescent : Ivs. J-£in. long, obtusely quadrangular, whitish above, green beneath: cones brown, violet -purple while young, 1 J^-2 in. long, with broad rounded erose scales. AmurL, Saghalin, X. Japan. G.C. II. 13:301. S.I.F. 2:3. — P. heterdlepis, Rehd. & Wilson. (I.) Allied to P. asperata. Tree, to 80 ft.: branchlets brownish, glabrous: Ivs. quadrangular, thick, pungent, J^-Jiin. long: cones 3V6~5V£ in. long, pale brown, with rigid rhombic-obovate scales, emarginate or bifid at the apex. W. China. — P. Koyamai, Shirasawa. (III.) Allied to P. Glehnii. Tree, to 30 ft.: branchlets bright reddish brown, glabrous: Ivs. quadrangular, Ji~J^in. long, acutish, bluish white above: cones light brownish green, I1 2-2^ in. long; scales broadly obovate, rounded, entire. Cent. Japan. M.D. 1914:257.— P. lihiangensis, Pritz. (II.) Tree, to 80 ft.: branchlets light yellow-gray, sparingly hairy: Ivs. quadrangular, slightly compressed, Hin. long, white above: cone about 2 in. long with rhombic-ovate, erose, flexible scales. W. China. — P. Mdstersii, Mayr=P. Wilsonii. — P. Marimowlczii, Regel (P. Tschonoskii, Mayr. P. excelsa var. obovata japonica, Beissn.). (I.) Allied to P. obovata. Small bushy tree: branchlets reddish brown, glabrous: Ivs. rigid, pointed, spreading, about ^$in. long: cones 1 J^-2 in. long, lustrous brown, with broad rounded scales. Japan.— P. Meyeri, Rehd. & Wilson. (I.) Allied to P. asperata. Medium-sized tree: branchlets cinnamon-brown, hairy: Ivs. quadrangular, slightly compressed, curved, obtusish, ^i-^aa. long: cones 2-2 !/£ in. long, lustrous brown, with rounded or trun- cate scales. N. China. — P. montigena. Mast. (II.) Tree, to 100 ft.: branchlets pale brown, hairy: Ivs. quadrangular, j^in. long, curved, acutish: cones brown, 3-4 in. long, with rhombic-ovate, flexible, erose scales. W. China. G.C. III. 39: 146 (except the cone). — P. marindoides, Rehd.= P. spinulosa. — P. Mdseri, Mast. (P. jezoensis xP. mariana Doumetii). Branchlets smooth, olive: Ivs. quadrangu- lar, acute, J^-%in. long, glaucous above, green below. Garden ori- gin. J.H.S. 26: 105.— P. pachyclada, Patschke=P. brachytyla. — P. retroflexa. Mast. (I.) Tree, to 120 ft.: branchlets glabrous, rarely slightly hairy, bright yellow, rarely brownish orange: Ivs. quad- rangular, pungent, \^-\ in- long: cone lustrous brown, 3-4 ^ in. long, with obovate, rounded, stiff scales. W. China. — P. Sargen- tiana, Rehd. & Wilson. (III.) Tree, to 70 ft.: branchlets yellow or orange, glandular: Ivs. compressed, acutish or obtuse, about Hin. long, white above, lustrous green beneath: cones 2}^-5 in. long, brown, with obovate, rounded or truncate scales. W. China. — P. spinuldsa, Griff. (P. morindoides, Rehd.). (III.) Tree, with spread- ing branches and slender pendulous branchlets: Ivs. 1-1 % in. long, pungent, slightly compressed, glaucous above: cone 3—4 in. long, yellowish brown, with rhombic obovate scales minutely denticulate. E. Himalayas. B.M. 8169. G.C. III. 39:218, 274. R.H. 1908, p. 517. G.M. 51:47. S.T.S. 1:48. Tender.— P. Tscho- noskii, Mayr=P. Maximowiczii. — P. Watsoniana, Mast. (I.) Tree, to 40 ft.: branchlets glabrous: Ivs. quadrangular, slender, J4 in. long, bright green: cones 2-2}^ in. long with obovate, rounded scales. W. China. — P. Wilsonii, Mast. (P. Mastersii, Mayr). (I.) Tree, to 80 ft. : branchlets glabrous, pale gray: winter buds ovoid, dark brown, lustrous: Ivs. quadrangular, curved, acute, Jiin. long: cones cylindric-oblong, l%r~2 in., brown; scales suborbicular, en- tire, finally recurved at margin. Cent. China. G.C. 111.33:133. Not in cult, are the following species: P. gemmata, Rehd. & Wilson, P. hirtella, Rehd. & Wilson, P. NeoreUchii, Mast. (G.C. III. 33:116), from China, and P. Atorrisonicola, Hayata, from PICKEREL- WEED: Pontederia. PICOTEE: Carnation. ALFRED REHDER. PICRASMA (Greek, pikrasmos, bitterness; referring to the bitter bark and wood). Including Pier Sena. Simarubdcex. Trees and shrubs, with alternate odd- pinnate Ivs., yellowish green fls. in axillary long- peduncled looss cymes, and subglobose dry berry-like fr. About 8 species in S. and E. Asia and W. India. P. quassioides, Bennett (P. ailanthoides, Planch. P. japonica, Gray), seems to be the only species in cult. It is an upright shrub or small tree to 30 ft., almost glabrous except the tomentulose infl. : Ivs. with 4-8 pairs of Ifts. ; Ifts. ovate or oblong-ovate, acuminate, crenately serrate, 2^-33^ in. long: fr. -pea-sized, bright red, with 1 seed. Himalayas, China, Japan. S.I.F. 1:53. This is probably the hardiest species of the genus, and has proved hardy at the Arnold Arboretum in favorable positions but needs protection while young. Its chief ornamental value consists in the handsome foliage turning orange and scarlet in fall and in the bright red frs. Wood and bark are exceedingly bitter. The wood of some species, especially P. excelsa, Planch., from W. Indies, is used in medicine like that of Quassia. ALFRED REHDER. PIE-PLANT: Rhubarb. PIERIS (a mythological name). Including Portiina. Ericaceae. Ornamental shrubs, grown chiefly for their handsome white flowers. Evergreen or deciduous shrubs or rarely small trees: Ivs. alternate, short-petioled, entire or serrulate: fls. hi often panicled racemes or hi axillary clusters forming terminal racemes; calyx-lobes valvate or distinct; corolla globose or urceolate, with 5 short lobes; sta- mens 10; anthers obtuse, with a pair of awns near the base or the filaments 2-toothed below the apex: caps. with 5 dehiscent valves; seeds linear-oblong, not winged, with membranaceous testa. — About 10 species in N. Amer. and hi E. Asia south to the Himalayas. Often included under Andromeda. Closely allied to Lyonia, which is distinguished by its awnless anthers, and to Zenobia, which has the anthers 4-awned at the apex. The foliage of some species is said to be poison- ous to cattle. The pieris are handsome shrubs with medium-sized oval to lanceolate leaves and with rather small white flowers in large terminal panicles or hi racemes. The evergreen P. floribunda and the deciduous P. mariana are hardy North and, like the other species, are valua- ble for the earliness of their flowers. The most beauti- ful are P. japonica and P. formosa; the first thrives still in Massachusetts in sheltered positions, but the flowers are usually winter-killed, while P. formosa can be grown only South. They are easily forced, and P. japonica especially may be recommended for this purpose; it makes a very handsome and graceful pot-plant for 2622 PIERIS PIGAFETTA inside decoration with its slender racemes of pure white flowers hanging over the glossy bright green foli- age. The species of Pieris, like other Ericaceae, grow well in a moderately moist well-drained and porous soil, but dislike limestone and heavy clay; a partly shaded situation suits them best. Propagation is by seeds treated like those of azalea or rhododendron ; also by layers, and the ever- green kinds by cuttings of almost ripened wood in August under glass, kept during the winter in a cool greenhouse. They root very slowly; cuttings taken from forced plants root more readily. A. Lvs. evergreen. B. Fls. in terminal panicles formed the previous year and remaining naked during the winter: Ivs. ser- rulate. c. Panicles upright. floribunda, Benth. & Hook. (Andromeda floribunda, Pursh. Por- titna flori- bunda, Nutt.). Fig. 2945. Dense shrub, 2-6 ft. high : branches and petioles with strigose brown hairs: Ivs. ovate to oblong- 2945. Pieris floribunda. ( X 1A) lanceolate, acute, minutely serrulate and setosely cili- ate, otherwise glabrous, lYr^Y?, in. long: fls. nodding, in terminal dense upright panicles \Yr-^- in- long; corolla ovate, strongly 5-angled, white, J^in. long. April, May. Va. to Ga., in the Alleghany Mts. B.M. 1566. B.R. 807. G.C. III. 45:408. Gn. 31, p. 612. Gn.M. 6:280. Mn. 5, p. 132. M.D.G. 1898 : 333.— Very desirable ever- green shrub for its hardiness and earliness of the fls. cc. Panicles drooping. japonica, D. Don (Andromeda japdnica,. Thunb.). Fig. 2946. Shrub, with spreading branches or some- tunes small tree to 30 ft.: branches glabrous: Ivs. crowded at the ends of branches, obovate-lanceolate or oblanceolate, crenately serrulate, narrowly cuneate at the base, glabrous, l>^-2^ in. long: fls. in pendulous panicles, 2>£-5 in. long; corolla ovate, not angled, J^in. long. April, May. Japan. R.B. 11:10. B.H. 21:19. Gn. 12:98, and p. 424; 50, p. 307; 57, p. 399. G.C. II. 17:797. M.D.G. 1898:544. G.W. 9, p. 354. J.H. III. 51:109. G.M. 55:199. G. 24:141; 27:182; 31:593. S.I.F. 1:78. Var. albo-marginata, Rehd. Lvs. with whitish margin and smaller. Var. pygmaea, Maxim. Dwarf form with small linear-oblanceolate Ivs. Japa- nese botanists speak of a variety with the racemes a foot and more long; this form seems to be not yet intro. P. japonica is one of the most graceful early-blooming evergreens. formSsa, D. Don (Andrdmedaformdsa, Walt.). Shrub or small tree, to 20 ft. : branchlets glabrous: Ivs. crowded at the end of the branchlets, elliptic-oblong to lanceo- late, acuminate, broadly cuneate at the base, finely serrulate, glabrous, lustrous above, 2-5 in. long: fls. in terminal drooping or spreading panicles, to 6 in. long; corolla urceolate, white or tinged with pink, %\n. long. April, May. E. Himalayas. B.M. 8283. G.C. II. 15:569. Gn. 54, p. 77. G. 27:183; 35:425, 427. I.H. 5:162.— Very similar to the preceding species, but larger in every part; less hardy. BB. Fls. in axillary clusters, forming terminal leafy racemes: Ivs. entire. l&cida, Rehd. (P. nitida, Benth. & Hook. Andrdm- eda lucida, Jacq. A. nitida, Bartr. A. coriacea, Ait. Lyonia nitida, Fern. L. lucida, Koch). FETTER-BUSH. Shrub, 2-6 ft. high, with triangular branches, quite glabrous: Ivs. obovate or broadly elliptic to oblong, nar- rowed at both ends, bright green and shining above, entire and slightly revolute at the margin, \Yr^> m- long: corolla cylindric-ovate, white to pink, Y^~Y^- long: caps, ovoid-globose, with ridges at the sutures. March-May. N. C. to Fla. and La. B.M. 1095. Var. rubra, Rehd. (Andromeda coriacea rubra, Lodd.). Fls. deep pink. L.B.C. 7:672. AA. Lvs. deciduous or half-evergreen, entire: fls. in racemes. mariana, Benth. & Hook. (Andr6meda maridna, Linn. Lyonia maridna, D. Don. Leucdthoe maridna, DC.). STAGGER-BUSH. Fig. 2947. Deciduous shrub, 2-4 ft. high, glabrous or nearly so: Ivs. oval to oblong, obtuse or acute, usually cuneate at the base, entire, 1-3 in. long: fls. nodding, in axillary clusters on leafless branches of the previous year, forming 2-5-in.-long racemes; corolla cylindric-campanulate, white or pale pink, almost Y$n~ long: caps, ovate-pyramidal. April- June. R. I. to Fla. B.M. 1579. Mn. 2:47. G.O.H. 113. A.G. 10:281 (adapted in Fig. 2947).— The foliage is said to poison lambs and calves. ovalifdlia, D. Don (Andrdmeda ovalifdlia, Wall.). Half-evergreen or deciduous shrub or tree, to 40 ft.: branchlets glabrous: Ivs. coriaceous, ovate or elliptic to ovate-oblong, short-acuminate or acute, usually rounded at the base, glabrous or hairy on the veins beneath, 2-6 in. long: fls. in simple lateral racemes with a few Ivs. at the base, 2-6 in. long; sepals ovate to triangular-lanceolate; corolla oblong-urceolate, white, slightly pubescent outside, J^in. long. May-June. Himalayas. Var. lanceolata, Clarke (P. lanceoldta, D. Don). Lvs. elliptic-oblong to elliptic-lanceolate, nar- rowed at the base, smaller: sepals greenish, oblong to lanceolate. Himalayas, China. Var. elliptica, Rehd. & Wilson (P. elliptica, Sieb. & Zucc.). Lvs. thinner, 2946. Pieris japonica. ( X 1A) deciduous, elliptic-ovate to ovate-oblong. Japan, China. S.I.F. 2:60. This variety is hardier than the type. P. phillyrexfdlia, DC. Evergreen shrub, 1-2 ft., glabrous: Ivs. oblong, serrulate near the apex, 1-2 in. long: racemes axillary, 4-12-fld.; corolla ovoid, white. Feb., March. W. Fla. B.R. 30:36. ALFRED REHDER. PIGAFETTA (derivation not known). Palmdcess. Tall palms: sts. stout, aculeate above, remotely annu- late below, creeping at base: Ivs. terminal, pinnately PIGAFETTA PILOCARPUS 2623 divided; segms. opposite and alternate, lanceolate, acuminate: spadix paniculate, much branched, pen- dulous: fls. polygamous-monoecious; male calyx obconic, truncate or obscurely 3-toothed; petals 3, free, lanceo- late, valvate; stamens 6, filaments short, thick; ovary an inconspicuous rudiment: fr. globose or oblong, 1-celled. About 5 species, Malaya. P. data, Wendl. (Hyospdthe data, Hort. Metroxylon datum, Mart.). Trunk of very .hard wood, erect, naked : Ivs. spreading 2947. Pieris mariana. and drooping, similar to those of Cocos; petioles thick and having long bristles which become spiny with age: inn. long, spadices with pendulous branches: fr. with a solitary blackish seed. Celebes. Cult, occasionally abroad; for treatment, consult article Palm. PILEA (pileus, a Roman cap: one of the segments of the perianth in the first described species covering the achene). Syn., Adicea. Urticaceae. Mostly weedy plants, but forms of one or two species are grown in greenhouses for their compact fern-like sprays and for the interesting phenomenon of forcibly discharging the pollen, whence the name "artillery plant." Annual or perennial herbs, glabrous or pubescent: Ivs. opposite, usually strongly 3-neryed: fls. monoecious or dioecious, mostly very small and hi axillary clusters; stamens 3-4, and the sepal-lobes in the staminate fls. of the same number; sepal-lobes of pistillate fls. 3, the ovary 3-angled and erect and bearing a sessile tufted stigma, with 3 scale-like staminodia: fr. an achene, ovate or nearly orbicular, compressed, more or less invested in the perianth. — There are 150 or more spe- cies of Pilea in the tropics, chiefly of Amer., and few extra-tropical ; one, P. pumila, is a small nettle-like but stingless plant growing in the northern states. The artillery plants of the gardens are small branchy half-succulent herbs, usually grown in pots and allowed to reach a foot or so in height. The gracefully curving fronds of small ovate or obovate shining leaves are much prized. They are easy to grow, being propagated by cuttings. They thrive best when given an abun- dance of water. Sometimes they are used as edgings in orchid houses, to screen the pots with green, and they also tend to equalize the moisture conditions and thereby contribute to the welfare of the orchids. When the staminate flowers open, the pollen is usually dis- charged forcibly and visibly. If a plant is put in a sunny place when the pollen is ripe, it may set up a vigorous bombardment, particularly if the foliage is sprayed. (See I.H. 1, p. 64, 1854, for an account of this phenomenon.) The artillery plant is seen in nearly every greenhouse, but whether there is more than one species in common cultivation it is not easy to deter- mine, for specific characters are difficult to draw. The leaves, although opposite, are unequal. Usually the branchlets develop alternately on the branch. The species are confused. muscosa, Lindl. (P. microphytta, Liebm.? P. calli- tricholdes of some authors). Monoecious: small, rather weak plant: Ivs. less than Mm- l°ng as a rule, sometimes very small: fl.-clusters mostly sessile or nearly so. Mex., W. Indies, S. Amer. — Whether the plant in cult, is really the P. muscosa originally described by Lindley is in question. The plants are variable and characters apparently not well understood. P. microphytta, Liebm., is reported in Fla. serpyllifdlia, Wedd. (P. muscosa, Hort., in part. P. cattitrichoides of some). Fig. 2948. Dioecious: plant usually stronger and more upright: Ivs. usually J^in. or more long, and fl.-clusters more peduncled. Mex. — Seems to be the commoner species, out it is difficult to determine them. L. H. B. PILOCARPUS (Greek, pilos, a cap, and karpos, a fruit, from the shape of the fruit). Rutdcese. Shrubs or small trees, sometimes attaining 10 feet. Leaves pinnately compound, of 1-4 pairs and a terminal 1ft.; Ifts. opposite, but the Ivs. usually alter- nate: fls. in elongated racemes; petals 4-5, valvate; stamens 4-5; ovary 4-5-lobed, not tubercled. — Seven- teen species, natives of Trop. Amer., principally Brazil. The plants of the genus form the source of the alkaloid "pilocarpine," and together with plants of several other genera, the source of the drug "jaborandi." pennatifdlius, Lem. Branchlets glabrous or puberu- lent: Ivs. alternate, 1-1 H ft. long; Ifts. 2 or 3 pairs, besides the terminal one, 3-Q in. long, oblong; apex rounded or emarginate, coriaceous, yellowish green: 2948. Artillery plant.— Pilea serpyllifolia. (Left-hand spray about natural size) raceme spike-like, many-fld. (about 100) : rachis stout, pedicels stout, horizontal, with 2 small greenish tooth- shaped bracts at their bases : fls. reddish brown, rotate. Brazil. B.M. 7235. J.F. 3:263.— Intro, into Calif, and said to be hardy in the open wherever the lemon can be successfully grown. racemosus, Vahl. A small tree or shrub, 6-15 ft. high: Ifts. 1-5, lance-elliptic to oval or obovate, retuse at the apex, cuneate or somewhat rounded at the base, 2624 PILOCARPUS PIMELEA entire, coriaceous, pellucid-punctate: petals ovate or oblong-ovate, acute; filaments subulate: fr. a dark brown or blackish follicle; seeds glabrous. W. Indies. — Intro, into Calif. P. Jabordndi, Holmes, has been described as P. pennatifolius, by Bentl. & Trim., but is distinguished from it by shorter Ivs. and Ifts., stiffly pubescent branchlets and sts., more openly fld. racemes, with slender rachis and pedicels, and the presence of 2 inconspicuous bracteoles above the middle of the fl.-pedicels. B.M. ARNOLD V. STUBENRAUCH. F. TRACY HuBBARD.f PILOCEREUS of the "Cyclopedia of American Hor- ticulture" is mostly Cephalocereus. P. Celsidnus=Oreo- cereus. P. chrysomallus and P. Columna-Trajani = Pachycereus. P. Dautwitzii=Oreocereus. P. Houlletii, Auth. = Cephalocereus Sartorianus. P. Schdttii — Lophocereus. P. Strausii=Oreocereus Celsianus. PIL6GYNE: Melothria. PILULARIA (Latin, a little ball, alluding to the shape of the involucres). Marsileaceae, one of the fern allies. Small aquatic plants, sometimes used in ponds: root- stock filiform, creeping, rooting at the nodes: barren fronds reduced to filiform stipes, few or clustered at the nodes: involucres solitary at the nodes, sessile or shortly stipitate, globular: sori 2-4, vertically adnate. — About 6 species, Eu., W. Asia., Austral., New Zeal., and N. Amer. globulifera, Linn. Rootstock creeping under water, often to a considerable extent: barren fronds filiform, bright green, like the Ivs. of Isoetes, 1-3 in. long, usually few together at the nodes: involucre about the size of a pea, slightly hairy, sessile or borne on very short erect or recurved stipes. Eu., W. Asia, and Austral. PILtJMNA: Trichopilia. PIMELEA (Greek, fat, referring to the fleshy seeds). Thymelaeaceae. RICE-FLOWER. Mostly shrubs, fitted for greenhouse culture, although reported to be hardy in the open wherever the lemon can be grown suc- cessfully. Woody, or rarely herbaceous, with small opposite or alternate, always simple and entire Ivs. : inn. usually a terminal head or cluster, never umbellate, often with an involucre of 4 or more bracts at the base: fls. her- maphrodite or functionally dioecious, white, pink or reddish, small but showy in the clusters and the bracts are often colored; perianth tubular, with a spreading (rarely erect) 4-lobed limb, the throat sometimes folded or thickened but without scales; stamens 2, inserted in the throat opposite the 2 outer perianth-lobes; ovary 1-celled: fr. a small drupe, included in the base of the perianth. — Austral, and New Zeal. Of the 80 or more species, only 3 or 4 (as P. ferruginea, P. ligustrina and P. spectabilis) are much known in cult, here, but there are other very showy species, some of which are grown in the Old World. These fine evergreen shrubs may be increased readily from cuttings of the young half-ripened shoots in March. Make these cuttings 2 to 3 inches long and place in pans, leaving about an inch between the cuttings. The pans should be filled with a mixture of loam, peat and silver sand in equal parts. See that the pans are well drained. Place where they may have a temperature of 55° to 60° and keep covered with glass. See that they are shaded and moist, and they will soon root. When they have made a fair amount of roots, they may be potted up into small pots, using a mixture of fibrous loam, fibrous peat, and leaf-mold in equal parts, with enough of sand to keep the compost open. Be sure that each pot has plenty of drainage as this is necessary for their welfare. They should be grown in a house where they will get a fair amount of ventilation in the summer and be shaded. The atmosphere should be kept moist by damping down, and the plants should have a good syringing every bright day. In the summer they should have the tops pinched. The pots may be placed on ashes, and this will help to keep them moist. They are slow-growing plants, and therefore will need but one shift during the summer. When they have filled the pots with roots, they may be shifted into 3- or 4-inch pots, using the same mixture. When the autumn comes, they should be given more ventilation, to ripen up whatever wood they have made. In autumn they may have a temperature of about 50° at night with about 10° rise with sun heat. They will do well in about 45° for a winter temperature, with about 55° to 58° on bright days. In winter, give great care to water- ing so they will not become too wet, just keeping in a nice moist state. By February they may have any necessary potting, using a mixture of fibrous loam four parts, fibrous peat one peat, leaf-mold and well- decayed cow-manure one part each, and enough clean sharp sand to make it porous. Pot firmly. They may now be given a temperature of 50° during the night with about 65° on bright days and by April they should be standing 5° to 8° more. They will now need a shift into 5- or 6-inch pots, and give them a pinch back when they have made a little growth. In summer they may have the strongest growths tied out in a horizontal position. Give the same culture as advised for the previous summer and by the next spring the plants should flower. For established plants, they will require heading in after they are through flowering and encouraged to make growth freely during the summer. Give these plants plenty of syringing as they are liable to be affected with red-spider; their treatment year after year will be similar to that mentioned before, only with larger shifts and to be assisted by weekly applica- tions of liquid manure to give them renewed vigor. (J. J. M. Farrell.) INDEX. arenaria, 10. cernua, 16. decussata, 14. diosmifolia, 14. drupacea, 2. ferruginea, 14. filamentosa, 8. glauea, 7. graciliflora, 9. humilis, 7. hypericina, 4. imoricata, 3. incana, 13. intermedia, 7. involucrata, 8. ligustrina, 5. linifolia, 8. longiflora, 1. nivea, 13. pqludosa, 8. piligera, 3. rosea, 11. spathulata, 16. spectabilis, 15. suaveolens, 6. sylvestris, 12. A. Involucral Ivs. absent. 1. longifldra, R. Br. Sts. 4 ft. or more high, slender, erect, very leafy: Ivs. sometimes alternate, linear, hairy: fls. pure white, hairy externally, long and slender; heads globose, many-fld.; perianth silky; anthers yel- low, not exserted. W. Austral. B.M. 3281. AA. Involucral Ivs. reduced to 2 small bracts. 2. drupacea, Labill. A straggling shrub 6-8 ft. high or lower: branches leafy: Ivs. ovate to oblong-elliptical or oblong-linear, glabrous above, slightly silky hairy beneath, distinctly pennivemed: fls. white or tinged with pink, silky hairy ; anthers yellow, hardly exserted : heads sessile, few-fld.: fr. a red or black drupe. Vic- toria, Tasmania. L. B.C. 6:540. AAA. Involucral Ivs. 8, or usually more than 8. 3. imbricata, R. Br. Small erect shrub, much branched, from less than M-l^ ft. high, usually clothed with long, silky hairs, but sometimes glabrous : Ivs. usually crowded, alternate or opposite, oblong- lanceolate to linear; involucral Ivs. similar to stem- Ivs., much shorter than fls.: fls. white, outside hairy; tube cylindrical, heads terminal, globular, many-fld. W. Austral. B.M. 3833 (as P. nana, and which is included under var. piligera in Fl. Austral.). AAAA. Involucral Ivs. 4~8- B. Lvs. distinctly penniveined. c. Fls. white. 4. hypericina, A. Cunn. St. erect, slender, to 8 or 10 ft. high: branches not very leafy: Ivs. opposite, PIMELEA PIMEXTA 2625 elliptic-oblong, smooth: fls. white, hermaphrodite and female on distinct plants, very hairy externally; her- maphrodite fls. longer and more slender: heads many- fld. and crowded. — Very similar to P. ligujtrina, in fact placed as a variety of it in Flora Australiensis; dis- tinguished in having more involucral Ivs. much shorter than the fls. and silky pubescent or hoary. Austral. B.M. 3330. 5. ligustrina, Lab ill. Erect, 5-6 ft. high: Ivs. oppo- site, ovate to oblong or elliptical; involucral Ivs. 4, very rarely 5 or 6, as long as the fl.-tubes, glabrous: fls. sometimes female only, silky hairy, white, in rather large globular heads. Austral., Tasmania. B.R. 1827. cc. Fls. rose-colored or yellowish. 6. suaveolens, Meissn. Erect, often less than 1 ft. high, sometimes branching at base only, reaching 2-3 ft.: branches very leafy: Ivs. opposite, ovate-lanceolate to oblong-linear; involucral Ivs. 4-8, usually as long as the fls. and ciliate: fls. yellowish when fresh, usually hairy: heads globular, very large and many-fld. W. Austral. B.M. 4543 (as P. macrocephcda). BB. Lvs. not penniveined or very obscurely so. c. Color of ini'olucral Ivs. green. D. Fls. white. 7. glauca, R. Br. (P. humilis, Lindl., not R. Br. P. intermedia, Lindl.). Erect, much branched, J£-l H ft- high, glabrous below: Ivs. opposite, ovate to oblong- lanceolate or almost linear, small and short; involucral Ivs. usually 4. shorter than fls.: heads globular, not manv-fld.. the fls. silky-hairs', white. Austral, and Tas- mania. L.B.C. 17:1611. B~.R. 1268, 1439. 8. linifolia, Smith (P. filamentosa, Rudge. P. involiir- crata, Banks. P. paludosa, R. Br.). Erect, 1-3 ft. high: branches slender, bark ferruginous, not very leafy: Ivs. opposite, very short-petioled, linear-lanceolate to linear or oblong; involucral Ivs. 4, nearly as long as fls.: heads terminal, globular, erect, bearing white fls. Austral., Tasmania. B.M. 891. L.B.C. 17:1668. 9. graciliflora, Hook. Erect, slender, 2J^ ft. high: Ivs. lanceolate, dotted above; involucral Ivs. 6, shorter than fls.: fls. long, slender, glabrous. — Very similar to P. syh-estris, and described as the same in Fl. Austral.: distinguished from it by narrower Ivs. dotted above, and more slender pure white fls. B.M. 3288. 10. arenaria, A. Cunn. Small, erect shrub, dichoto- mously branched, to 2>£ ft.: Ivs. opposite, ovate, obscurely downy above, silky hairy beneath; involu- cral Ivs. not different from st.-lvs. : fls. silky on outside, white : anthers and style not protruded beyond perianth- tube: heads few-fld. and sessile. New Zeal. B.M. 3270. DD. Fts. mostly rose-colored (varying to whitish and Uui-sh). 11. rdsea, R. Br. Erect, small: branches sparsely leafy: Ivs. opposite, linear-lance_olate or linear, glabrous both sides, margins revolute; involucral Ivs. 4, as long as fls., ciliate on margins: fls. pink or whitish, with long spreading hairs on lower portion of tube, silky on upper portion. W. Austral. — Very closely allied to P. ferru- ginea, but fls. larger and bracts more acuminate. B.M. 1458; 3721 (as P. Hendersoni). L.B.C. 1:88. 12. sylvestris, R. Br. Shrub, 2-3 ft. high, copiously branched: Ivs. opposite, lanceolate or oblong-lanceolate, glaucous; involucral Ivs. 4-6, smaller than st.-lvs., shorter than fls. : fls. quite glabrous, blush, in globular heads; stamens and style very much protruded: heads large and many-fld. W. Austral. B.M. 3276. B.R. 1582. L.B.C. 20:1965. DDD. Fls. white and pink in same head. 13. nivea, Labill. (P. incana, R. Br.). Erect, bushy or straggling, 6 ft. or more high: branches and under side of the Ivs. white, with a dense tomentum: Ivs. ovate or orbicular, glabrous above; involucral Ivs. 4-6, larger than st.-lvs.: fls. white or pink, tomentose or silky: heads globular, terminal, many-fld. Tasmania. B.R. 24:24. F.C. 1:9. cc. Color of involucral h's. pink or red, or tinged only at margin. 14. ferruginea, Labill. (P. decussata, R. Br. P. diosmifolia, Lodd. Heterotiena decussata, C. A. Mey.). Short much-branched shrub, 1-3 ft. high: Ivs. opposite and usually crowded, ovate or oblong, firm, with margins revolute; involucral Ivs. 4, orbicular, glabrous, shorter than the fls.: heads terminal, globular, rose-colored; fls. hairy, lower portion hispid, upper silky. W. Austral. L.B.C. 13:1283; 18:1708. B.M. 8574. 15. spectabilis, Lindl. Erect, 3-4 ft. high, glabrous: Ivs. crowded, mostly opposite, linear-oblong or lanceo- late; involucral Ivs. 4-6, ovate or ovate-lanceolate, half as long to nearly as long as the fls., usually tinged only at margins: fls. white after expansion, hairy outside: heads very large, globular, many-fld. W. Austral. B.R. 27:33. B.M. 3950. R.B. 26:157. G.W. 3, 414. F.E. 16:610. — A very handsome, showy plant, now prob- ably the most popular species. 16. spathulata, Labill (P. cernua, R. Br.). Much branched, 2-3 ft. high: Ivs. linear to linear-oblong; involucral Ivs. ovate, glabrous, sometimes not colored: fls. silky hairy, much resembling P. linifolia: heads large, globular, many-fld. and nodding. Austral., Tasmania. F.C. 2:72. ARNOLD V. STTBEXRAUCH. L. H. B.f PIMENTA (from the Spanish pimento, allspice). Myrtacex. Highly aromatic trees, one species of which is the allspice. Leaves large, leathery, feather-veined, long-stalked, black-dotted beneath: fls. numerous, small, white; borne in terminal or axillary, trichotomous cymes; calyx-tube top-shaped; petals 4-5; stamens numerous: drupe 1-2-seeded. — Five or six species, native of Trqp. Amer. As a genus Pimenta is distinguished from its near allies (Eugenia, Myrtus) by the circular or spiral embryo and the 2-celled ovary with 1-6 ovules pendu- lous from the apex of each cell. 2949. Allspice.— Pimenta officinalis. ( X H) 2626 PIMENTA PINE Allspice is the unripe berry of P. officinalis, which is gathered and dried in the sun. Its name comes from the idea that allspice combines the flavors of clove, cinnamon, and nutmeg. Allspice is common in the wild in Jamaica, inhabiting limestone soil. It is more exten- sively cultivated or run wild in Jamaica than anywhere else. It is cultivated up to 4,000 feet. The plant is not 2950. Flowers of allspice. ( X 2) offered in the American trade, but there seems no reason why it could not be cultivated in Porto Rico. officinalis, Berg. (Eugenia Pimento., DC.). ALLSPICE. PIMENTO. Figs. 2949, 2950. Distinguished from the other species by the oblong Ivs., 4-lobed calyx and globose drupe. Tree, 30-40 ft. high: Ivs. 2-6 in. long; petiole ^in. long: fls. 3 lines long: drupe 3 lines thick. Cuba, Jamaica, Mex., Cent. Amer. B.M. 1236 (as Myrtus Pimento, var. longifolia) . P. den's, Kostel., the bayberry or bay-rum tree is by some separated in the genus Amomis (A. caryophyllata, Krug & Urb.), a shrub or small tree in the W. Indies, Venezuela, and Guiana, from the dried Ivs. of which (and probably also from other myrtaceous plants) the bay oil or oil of myrica is distilled: bark separating in shreds or plates: Ivs. shining above, very aromatic. L. H. B. PIMPERNEL!: Anagallis. PIMPINELLA (possibly from Latin bipinnula, bi- pinnate). Umbelliferas. About 75 species of herbs, one of which has been described under Anise. P. integerrima, Gray (see Tsenidia), has been offered by one dealer in hardy native plants. It differs from Anise in being a perennial plant with Ivs. 2-3-ternate and segms. entire. B.B. 2:526. P. major, Huds. (P. mdgna, Linn.). Sts. 1-2 ft., angularly striate: Ivs. pinnate, Ifts. all ovate-serrate, somewhat cut, the terminal one 3-lobed. Eu. Probably not in cult., but a form listed as P. mdgna rosea, Hort., with rose-colored fls. is cult, in England as a border and rock- work plant. PINANGA (Malay name). Palmacese, tribe Arecese. Slender spineless bamboo-like palms from India and the Malay Archipelago. Stems erect: Ivs. terminal, unequally lobed or pin- natisect, or simple and bifid at the apex; segms. plicate, many-nerved, the lower ones acuminate, the upper confluent, the margins not thickened, recurving at the base; rachis acute above, convex below; petiole convex above; sheath elongated: spadix usually small, very simple: peduncle short: branches in groups; spathe 1, symmetrical, swollen or compressed and 2-winged: fls. rather small, the staminate one on each side o7 a pistillate, thus differing from Areca in which the pistillate fls. are solitary: fr. ovoid or elliptical, orange or red, with a membranous husk. — About 40-50 species. For cult., see Palms. K&hlii, Blume. Fig. 2951. Sts. tufted, 20-30 ft. high, slender: Ivs. 3-4 ft.; Ifts. many, 1-2 ft., falcate- linear to linear-lanceolate, finely acuminate, strongly 2-3-ribbed, upper confluent; petiole variable in length, somewhat scurfy: fr. 3^in. long, shortly apiculate. Sumatra, Java. G.C. III. 31:104. G.W. 12, p. 209. Known also as Ptychosperma and Seaforthia Kuhlii. gracilis, Blume (Areca grdcilis, Roxbg.). Sts. 6-20 ft. high, 3^4 lines diam., thickening upward, usually gregarious: Ivs. 3-4 ft. long, sparingly pinnate; petiole and sheaths scurfy; Ifts. inserted by a very broad base, 1 ft. or more long, the lower ones 2-3-ribbed, finely acuminate, the upper 3-5 in. wide, many-ribbed: fr. ^in. long, scarlet or orange, smooth, tapering to the tip. Himalayas, Burma. P. maculata, Porte. A dwarf slender palm with apparently permanently variegated Ivs.: Ivs. elliptic, bifid nearly to the middle: spadix below the Ivs., recurved: fls. showy, scarlet. Philippine Isls. B.M. SOU. Not in cult, in Amer. — P. malaiana, Scheff. St. slender, 8-12 ft. high: Ivs. 5-8 ft. long; Ifts. numerous, linear acumi- nate: spadix 6 in. long, blood-red in fr.: fr. \-\Vi in. long, blackish purple. Malaya. — P. Micholitzii, Hort. Sander is a plant exhibited at Ghent in 1908, from Sumatra. G.C. III. 43:259. — P. ierna- tensis, Scheff. (Areca gigantea, Hort.) Lvs. 12 ft. long, with 30^40 lanceolate segms., the largest 3 ft. long: branches of spadix spirally disposed. Ternate Isl. -^ BAYLOR t PINCKNEYA (Charles Cotesworth Pinckney, of South Carolina, 1746-1825, distinguished statesman and general of the American Revolution). Rubiacese. This includes the fever tree or Georgia bark, a tall shrub or small tree with fls. in large terminal or axillary cymes, native to the marshy banks of streams in the pine barrens from S. C. to Fla. Its showy fl.-cluster attains a breadth of 4 in. and depth of 3 in., with as many as 20 fls., each 1 in. long, tubular, white, speckled red, with 5 revolute lobes. But the distinctive feature of the fever tree, both botanically and horticulturally, is the presence of 5 or more large showy colored floral Ivs. These are 2 in. long, 1-1 M m- wide, oval or roundish, acute, narrowed at the base, and peach-yellow margined with rosy red. The interesting feature of these floral Ivs. is that they are not bracts, but modifications of one of the calyx-lobes, which are normally small and awl- shaped. Only one other species of this genus is described, P. ionantha from Colombia. The fever tree has been cult, in Eu; under glass, but it is rarely successfully cult, in Amer. piibens, Michx. GEORGIA BARK. FEVER TREE. BIT- TER BARK. Attains 25 ft.: Ivs. oval or oblong, acute, 4 x \Yi in.; midrib rosy: calyx 5-lobed; lobes deciduous or one of them in the outer fls. often transformed into a showy floral If.; corolla hairy; sta- mens 5, exserted, stigma obtuse : caps. , globose, papery, 2- celled; seeds numer- ous, in 2 rows, hori- zontal, winged. F.S. \ 19:1937. S.S. 5:227, 228.— P. pubens grows in low marshy woods and on borders of swamps. It thrives best when shaded by other trees. Seedlings require very rich moist soil and should always be grown under shade. They are difficult to keep alive if exposed to ;-. direct sunlight until 4 or 5 feet high; $? then give partial shade. P. J. BERCKMANS and WILHELM MILLER. PINE. What the apple is among the fruits, what the oak is among the broad- leaved trees of the temperate zone, the pines represent among the conifers, excelling all other genera in this most important family in number of species, in fields of distribution, in extent of area occupied, in usefulness and im- portance to the human race. No other trees of the temperate zone have con- tributed so much to the building up of 2951. Pinanga civilization, and no other, it may be Kuhlii. predicted, will continue longer to fill PINE PINE 2627 the important place in the household of civilized men; for not only do they furnish in a number of species the most satisfactory qualities of wood for structural pur- poses, but their frugality in regard to soil conditions will preserve them a place as wood-producers in many of the poor sites, when the lands fit for agricultural use have all been turned over to food-production. Among the seventy or more well-distinguished species — over 600 species and varieties of Pinus have been described — all inhabitants of the northern hemisphere, ranging from the arctics through ^plains and moun- tains to near the equator, occurring in the tropics at least on high mountains, a variety of adaptation, of form, of usefulness, may be found to satisfy every requirement; and since more than half the number of species (about forty) are indigenous to North Amer- ica or the United States, it is hardly necessary to go out of this general region for plant material. For economic importance, as well as for a combi- nation of points of excellence in all directions, orna- mental as well as useful, rapidity and quantity of production and adaptability to climate and soil, the chief place belongs to the white pine (P. Strobus), and next in importance stands the longleaf pine (P. palus- tris) of the southern states. The red pine (P. resinosa), the shortleaf (P. echinata), the Loblolly (P. Taedd), with the Cuban pine (P. caribsea), add their stores to the enormous quantities furnished annually by the first and second. In the western mountains the bull pine (P. ponderosa), the sugar pine (P. Lambertiana), and the silver pine (P. manticola) are very large timber pines; and in Mexico P. Ayacahuite replaces the white pine, and P. arizonica and P. montezum^e are the important yellow pines. In the Philippine Archipelago one species, P. insularis, forms important mountain forests. In Europe the Scotch pine (P. sylvestris) furnishes the bulk of supplies, with P. nigra in the more southern countries. In Japan and northern China P. densiflora and P. Thunbergii and in the Himalayas P. excdsa, and P. longifolia are the important species. Besides the timber, several of the species furnish from their resinous contents naval stores, turpentine, tar, and pitch, the bulk of which is now still derived from the native longleaf pine. Pine wool is made from the leaves of this and other species, essential oils are distilled from leaves and young shoots and used medicinally, and the seeds of the nut pines are used for food and flavors. While the economic importance of the genus can hardly be overrated, the ornamental value is undoubtedly less than that of other genera like the spruces and firs. Nevertheless, at least interest and picturesqueness, if not beauty and symmetry of form, attach to a large number of species. Choice of material for planting with such a wealth of species is difficult; yet climatic limitations reduce the number that may be grown within each climatic zone, and further assistance in the choice may be found hi the fact that the botanical division of the species into three groups; viz., white pines, yellow pines (so called from the color of the wood), and nut pines, denotes at the same tune differences of habit and form. In no other group, perhaps, is it so necessary to keep in mind that form and habit change through the differ- ent periods of life from the juvenile through the adoles- cent to the virile and senile stages of development; while symmetrical and pleasing in their youth and grand or picturesque in their age, in their intermediate stages the trees may be straggling and unsightly. Starting in its youth with the pyramidal aspiring habit of all the conifers, the shaft dominating over the branch system and the latter surrounding the former in regular whorls, later on the symmetry is disturbed and finally the towering old pine may have its bole split up into many stout branches and the crown may have broadened and flattened or rounded off in the umbrella-like fashion which the stone pine (P. Pinea) exhibits so strikingly in the Italian landscape. This flattening of crown is characteristic of most yellow pines, while the pinons or nut pines have a tendency to the broom-like or apple- tree appearance. Of the eastern species, the white pines alone preserve to some extent the conical habit of the crown in imitation of the spruces with more or less symmetrical horizontally spreading branches, which render them pleasing objects throughout all periods of life. On the Pacific Coast a number of species preserve the conical form. In the choice and combination of plant material it should be kept in mind that the pines are essentially light-needing species, hence do not bear overtopping or crowding unless they have a chance by their rapid growth in height to escape from the pressure of their shade-making neighbors; the white pines, especially P. Strobus with its denser foliage, are more tolerant of shade than others; the dwarf P. montana is also tolerably shade-enduring. In each of the three groups there are rapid growers (in height) and slow growers, although all are slow dur- ing the first two to seven years. The common white pine (P. Strobus') and the Cuban pine (P. carib&a), with the European, Scotch, and Austrian pines, are good examples of the first class, making under favorable conditions annual shoots of 1 to 2 feet for a number of years; while the Swiss stone pine (P. Cembra) and other pines of high altitudes, like P. flexilis and P. dVbicavlis, are examples of slow growers. There are persistent growers reaching great heights, and laggards, remaining dwarfs or medium- sued trees; again the king of pines, the common white pine, and its giant congener the sugar pine, with the bull pine in favorable situations, take first rank, the first with a maximum height of 160 feet and more, the last with over 200 feet, while many of the so-called scrub pines, like P. virginiana, P. serotina,P. Banksiana, the Alpine white pines, P. flexilis, P. aristata, P. Pence, P. pungens, P. densiflora, and most nut pines reach rarely over 40 feet; some, like P. koraiensis, P. Bungeana, P. montana, with several of the nurserymen's vari- eties, remain actually dwarfs and maintain a compact bush-like appearance for a long time. In regard to foliage, quite a large variety can be secured. For grace and elegance nothing better again than the five-needled silver-lined white pine can be suggested, although P. excdsa from the Himalayas, with its slenderer and longer branches and more drooping foliage, and the dwarfs P. Peuce from Mace- donia and P. koraiensis, with then- denser and more compact crowns, and some others of the white pine tribe, may vie with it. Among the yellow pines, the native almost entirely overlooked, P. glabra, deserves mention in this connection, where the climate permits its use, as well as the interesting sand pine, P. dausa. For richness, fulness, and vigor of foliage, the red pine (P. resinosa) outranks even the much-planted more somber Austrian pine, and for interest in devel- opment nothing can compete with the longleaf pine (P. palustris). With its needles, which in young speci- mens exceed a foot' in length, surrounding in dense graceful tufts the big silvery buds at the tip of the candelabra-like branches, P. palnstris offers a most striking appearance. Unfortunately, it is not adapted for planting north of 32°. The thin, grayish, short foliage of the frugal Bank- sian pine and of several other of the scrub pines, and the stouter, also grayish, foliage of the Scotch pine, make a pleasing color contrast against the somber dark back- ground of spruces and firs, while the short stiff needles of the nut pine, P. edidis, and the interesting one-needle pine (P. monophytta) resemble the spruce foliage. Color of bark varying in species from silvery gray through red and yellow tints to almost black, and character or size of cones from the diminutive globose forms of P. contorta to the long pendulous cones of the sugar 2628 PINE PINE pine, 2 feet in length, and the hooked, ponderous cones of P. Torreyana and P. Sabiniana, may also influence choice of material. With wide range of distribution and hence adaptive- ness as far as climate is concerned, we have the short- leaf pine (P. echinata), which is found from Massa- chusetts to Texas, and in the West the bull pine (P. ponderosa), which ranges from the moist Pacific Coast in Washington to the dry slopes of Arizona. In Europe, the Scotch pine comes nearest to such wide distribution. Besides the native northern species, there have been found hardy in the northeastern states the Scotch and Austrian pines, P. Bungeana, P. Cembra, P. koraiensis, P. montana, P. Thunbergii, while the Mexican pines and those of southern Asia will endure only the light frosts of the southern states. Yet in the parks of Washington, D. C., the following pines are to be found: P. Strobus, P. Cembra, P. excelsa, P. Lambertiana, P. Ayacahuite, P. koraiensis, P. palustris, P. Tseda, P. ponderosa, P. rigida, P. nigra, P. glabra, P. virginiana, P. echinata, P. montana, P. Pinaster, P. edulis, P. pungens, P. sylvestris, P. Massoniana; and the prob- ability is that most of the other species could find a place there to live if not to thrive. The list of species hardy in the Arnold Arboretum (Boston) comprises the following: 1. Thriving well. Banksiana. Bungeana. Cembra. densiflora. echinata. Jeffreyi. koraiensis. Lambertiana. montana. monticola. nigra. parviflora. Peuce. pungens. resmosa. rigida. Strobus. sylvestris. Thunbergii. virginiana. P. excelsa and P. ponderosa pendula thrive well in a sheltered place, but are probably not quite hardy here. 2. Hardy, but not of promising growth. arista ta. contorta var. Murrayana. edulis. flfxilis. monophylla. In the interior middle states the number which would stand the extremes of drought and cold would probably be reduced; a partial list found in the Missouri Botani- cal Garden is given below: The best are given first. All of the later ones on the list die out sooner or later, as the city smoke is very detrimental to conifers. None does very well on that account. Mughus (Pumilio). ) austriaca. f best three. Strobus. ) Cembra. rigida. virginiana. resmosa. nigra. sylvestris. ponderosa. For seaside planting, P. rigida has shown itself most fit, and of foreigners'in proper climate, P. Pinaster and P. halepensis, while P. contorta on the northwest coast and the frugal P. radiata on the southwest coast are the seacoast trees par excellence. The pines are essentially inhabitants of the poor sandy soils and dry situations, their stout root-system enabling them to seek the scanty water-supplies where other species find it difficult. Some, like the white pine, are adapted to a variety of soil conditions, but only a few can endure a surplus of water: P. resinosa will fol- low the white cedar into the swamp and thrive there as well as with the Banksian pine on the poorest gravels; P. rigida is at home both in wet and dry places; the Scotch pine of the Baltic sand plains may be found in the peat-bogs, but only eking out a miserable existence, while P. T&da, the old field pine, makes magnificent trees in the southern swamp, and with its slow growth under such conditions an excellent timber. P. con- torta and P. serotina also are indifferent to water con- ditions at the root; so is the Cuban pine, but P. palus- tris belies its name, for it is only very rarely found in poorly drained places and does not thrive there. The propagation of pines does not offer any difficul- ties. The seed usually has a high germination percen- tage in most species if kept dry and cool, and it retains vitality for several years, deteriorating of course some- what from year to year. To avoid deterioration in transoceanic shipments, packing in charcoal dust has been found very serviceable. While most of the pine seeds sprout readily, the white pine, with some others, has the bad habit of lying over for one year in part, unless treated to a hot-water bath for twenty-four hours before so whig; or perhaps by sowing in autumn immediately after coming out of the cone, which is during the first two weeks of September. The seeds should be sown hi light mold early, rather thinly to permit a good root-system to develop, covering them thinly according to size of seed, not over % inch, which is best done by sifting sand over the seed with a sieve. During the first year special care is necessary to regu- late the water-supply and transpiration for the young seedlings; they need to be kept humid, not wet, but resent drought as much as a surfeit; and especially sudden changes from drought to wet are likely to pro- duce "damping-off." To prevent too rapid transpira- tion, the familiar lath screens should be applied. To prevent the formation of excessively long tap- roots which some species form, mechanical means may be adopted; but the best plan is to manure near the surface, so that fibrous roots will be formed. Such manure consists of one-third steamed bone-meal and two-thirds ammonia superphosphate. Root- pruning and transplanting in nursery rows when one or two years old is practised to secure a stocky root-system. In Germany one-year-old Scotch pines are planted by the million for forest purposes, but for ornamental purposes older plants are to be used; yet it is safest not to use them older than three or four years for permanent situations. In the third year usually the first branching occurs, indicating that the root-system is now well established. In transplanting, the utmost care must be taken not to expose the roots to drying influences, a thin loam puddle answering best to keep them moist. While trans- planting can be done at any tune of the year, it is safest to do so in early spring, except when a droughty season is likely to follow, hi which case fall planting is to be preferred. A large number of nurserymen's varieties, dwarf and pendulous, varicolored, and the like, have been devel- oped, especially from P. sylvestris and P. Strobus. The most interesting freaks perhaps are those bushy forms "derived from P. canariensis and P. Pinea produced by layering, in which single needles instead of the usual bundles of two in one sheath are produced, imitating the primary single needles of seedlings. The manner in which nurserymen's varieties are propagated by grafts or cuttings is discussed under Pinus. According to the nature of the pines, if there is choice of location possible, the well-drained situations, even dry ones, should be reserved for them. They belong, with few exceptions, to the hilltops not the bottoms, to the sands not clay soils, and will stand southern exposures better than the spruces. Pines are frugal by nature, and can stand poverty better than surfeit, — nevertheless they respond best to medium conditions, namely, a mellow surface and well- drained deep loamy sand, not too rich in organic matter and loose enough to permit the natural develop- ment of the heavy tap-root system. Under such conditions, the peculiar rich foliage gives most satis- faction and the rank luxuriant growth which leads to poor form is checked; disease from fungi is obviated; the cottony scale (almost the only enemy of the white pine) is more readily fought, and injuries from cater- pillars and beetles are more easily repaired. Lately, PINE 2629 two enemies of the white pine have developed which require attention. The one, a fungous disease, seems to be an importation from Germany, the white pine blister rust (Peridermium strobi), which attacks young trees and young foliage of the white pine tribe. It needs gooseberry and currant as intermediary host plants. The other pest is the white pine weevil, which works in the young shoots and disfigures the tree by inducing repeatedly new leaders to develop. To prune evergreens, and especially pines, requires an artist, or else the result will be malformation: the best plan is to correct form by breaking out the center bud from such shoots as project beyond proper limits; thereby also a more compact growth is induced, which in the pines with their open habit is desirable. If it becomes necessary to prune the branches, the cut must remove also the bolster at the base of the branch; the resinous exudation will prevent decay, and the cambium soon covers the scar if the cut has been made properly. For hedge planting the pines furnish no specially desirable material, being light-needing and therefore thinning out soon in the interior; yet the white pine will stand as a hedge for a considerbale time and also the dwarf P. montana. Perhaps some others may answer the purpose. For the botany of the pines, see Pinus. B. E. FEKNOW. PINEAPPLE. The pineapple (see Ananas) is indig- enous to America. It produces one of the most delicious fruits now regularly on the markets. The finest qual- ities are developed when the fruit is permitted to ripen naturally upon the plant. For distant markets the crop has to be gathered in varying degrees of unripeness to suit the time required in transit. The year 1850 seems to be the earliest date at which pineapple-growing was attempted in the United States. This attempt was made near St. Augustine, Florida, according to Taylor. In 1860, planting was begun on 2952. Cuttings of pineapple, ready to be planted. the Keys, but the want of facilities for rapid transpor- tation and the more favored Cuban and Porto Rican plantations, made the development slow. In 1897, about $15,000 worth was imported from the Hawaiian Islands. Good pineapple land may usually be obtained f9r $25 to $100 an acre, the higher-priced land being in favored locations at railway stations and near settle- ments. The cost of clearing and preparing varies from $20 to $80 an acre, according to the cost of labor and the character of the growth on the land. From 8,000 to 15,000 plants are needed to the acre, varying with the variety and the notion of the planter. The price of plants in the field varies from $3 the 1,000 for Red Spanish to $350 the 1,000 for the finer varieties. The cost of cultivating and fertilizing an acre for one year varies from about $20 to $150. It requires about eighteen months from the time of setting out to the maturing of the first crop, which yields 50 to 350 crates to the acre. Under favorable circumstances the second crop may be double that of the first. By careful atten- tion the plantation may be continued for eight or ten years without resetting; the second or third crop fre- quently bears the maximum amount of fruit. When a common variety is planted, the returns are mainly from the sale of fruit, but with fancy varieties the sale of plants constitutes the main source of returns. Four hundred dollars or more an acre has been realized frequently for a crop of the commonest varieties; in this case increase in plants cannot be considered as of much value. The value of a crop of fancy fruit is about double that of the common, and $1,000 worth of plants may be sold without detriment to the plantation, if it is a variety that is in demand. From this must be sub- tracted the cost of transporting to the markets, which varies more or less with the distance the fruit is hauled. This cost varies with the quantity shipped, from $20 to $80 or more an acre. The pineapple thrives in a variety of soils, but what- ever its texture it must not be moist or wet. The pine- apple plant will survive air-drying for months, but decays rapidly in a moist atmosphere. The greatest acreage is located upon dry sandy land, formerly over- grown with spruce-pine (Pinus dausa) or a mixture of spruce-pine and hardwood. Chemical analyses of the soil from pineapple fields show an exceedingly small fraction of a per cent of the essential fertilizer ingredi- ents present. A physical analysis shows that the water- content is very low. A considerable acreage is planted on the Florida Keys. Here there is only a small amount of leaf-mold, often not more than an inch on the aver- age, covering a coralline rock. But for the fact that pineapples actually grow and make crops on such soil it would seem entirely incredible. With conditions of soil as described above, it is imperative to fertilize, and under the existing condi- tions in the pineapple belt there is no other remedy than the addition of commercial fertilizers, and noth- ing better. While much is still to be learned about fertilizing this crop, it is fairly well established that for pineapples on spruce-pine land, dried blood, ground bone, and nitrate of soda are good sources of nitrogen; that low-grade sulfate of potash, carbonate of potash and high-grade sulfate of potash are good sources of potash; that acid phosphate should be used in small quantities only or avoided, using pulverized bone instead. A good plan for fertilizing is to drop a small handful of cottonseed meal into the bud immediately after setting out. In October, apply about 600 pounds blood and bone and 400 pounds low-grade sulfate of potash (not kainit) to the acre, or the equivalent of these fertilizers in some of the forms mentioned above. A second application may be made the following Feb- ruary; at this time the amount may be increased 10 to 25 per cent, according to the growth the plants have made. A third application may be made in June or July; and if the plants have grown vigorously a still further increase in amount may be made. A fourth application may be made in October, increasing the amount if the plants have grown vigorously. The suc- ceeding applications may be made at the time sug- gested above, and the increasing and decreasing of the amounts may be determined by the progress of the plants. As the average spruce-pine pineapple land is not sufficiently fertile to grow a full crop of pineapples, much more depends upon proper fertilizing than any other one operation. This plant is propagated by means of crowns, slips, suckers, and rattoons. The crown is the leafy part 2630 PINEAPPLE PINEAPPLE of the fruit as found in the market. Just below the fruit small plants form, which are left in the field when the fruit is gathered; these are known as slips. In the axils of the leaves buds occur; those that develop near the ground make strong plants in a few months and are known as suckers. (Fig. 2952, after Wester.) A strong plant will mature an "apple" in June and produce two to five suckers by the middle of September. Buds that 2953. The Queen pineapple. develop from an underground part and form a root- system independent of the parent plant are known as rattopns. Crowns are not planted extensively, as they remain on the fruit when marketed. Good strong suckers are usually employed for planting out. Rat- toons are left in the field to replace the plants which have borne a crop, but they are not sufficiently numer- ous to make a full stand; hence some of the suckers must be left also. Slips require a year longer than suckers to mature a crop. According to Webber, it requires ten to twelve years to mature a plant from seed. Plants are raised from seed only for breeding purposes. If spruce-pine land is prepared it is cleared of all stumps, wood, roots, and any other organic material, and is plowed deep and leveled off smooth. The fields are then laid off in beds of six or eight rows wide, depending on the variety. The beds should be narrow enough to permit fertilizing and working with a scuffle- hoe without entering the beds, as breaking the leaves is very detrimental. For Red Spanish the rows are made 18 to 20 inches.apart; for Queens, 20 to 22 inches; for Porto Ricos, 30 to 36 inches. They are usually placed in checks of about the same distances. The methods employed on the Keys are quite differ- ent. The land is cleared by cutting off the trees, shrubs, and the like, which are allowed to dry and are then burned. The plants are then set out with a grubbing- hoe; they must be set out irregularly, as the rocky soil does not furnish root-hold everywhere. Such fields become exhausted in a few years and have to be abandoned. Cultivation consists in running over the ground with a scuffle-hoe. When the plantation is set out in beds the handle of the hoe is long enough to permit cultivating to the middle without the laborer entering the bed. Only about an inch of the surface soil is agitated, usually immediately after the fertilizer has been applied. Weeds are not troublesome, excepting in fields that have been cultivated a long time. Under sheds tillage is more frequent and appears to be more necessary. On the Keys no tillage is possible, but tall- growing weeds and such ligneous plants as may spring up are cut off. In all of the work among pineapple plants the greatest care should be exercised to avoid breaking the leaves, which are very brittle. The fruit is picked a week before it would mature. It is packed at once into barrel (12 by 20 by 36 inches) and half-barrel (12 by 10 by 36 inches) crates, usually in the latter, the different sizes being packed in separate crates and designated as 18's, 24's, 30's, 36's, 42's, 48's, and 54's, according to the number required for a half- barrel crate. The fruit must be handled without being bruised and packed firmly to prevent its abrasion in transit. To protect the fruit each one is wrapped separately in brown paper. Since the propagation is accomplished by means of offsets, the varieties are fairly stable and rather definitely marked. The variety most extensively grown is called Red Spanish, Spanish, or Reds. It has a medium-sized apple, and is a hardy plant. Abachi (Abakka), Blood, Queen (Fig. 2953), Sugar Loaf , Enville (Fig. 2954), and White Antigua are varieties that produce medium-sized apples of excellent quality. Black Jamaica, Black Prince, and Prince Albert produce large fruits or apples of excellent quality. Smooth Cayenne and Porto Rico produce large apples of good quality, those of the latter being of greater size. Other varieties are grown more or less extensively, and there are different names for these varieties, but the foregoing have been officially recognized by the Florida State Horticultural Society. It has been found very advantageous to build a shelter for "pines;" in the winter a shed protects the plants from too great radiation of heat, and in the sum- mer it reduces the intensity of the sun. The original object of the shelter was to protect the plants from frosts and freezes. Pineapple plants freeze at 32° F. This degree of cold does not kill the heart of the plant, but only the larger part of the leaves. Pines under sheds have passed through a temperature of 25° F. without serious injury. The roof of a shed is usually flat, or undulating with the surface of the land. The height varies with the desires of the individual, but is usually about 8 feet above the ground. In Fig. 2955 the roof is slightly less than 7 feet from the ground. The stringers running crosswise in the fig- ure are 1%" by 3" by 21'; those running lengthwise are 1^* by \1A" by 15'. The material for the roof is cypress plastering lath of usual length and width. The stringers running lengthwise are 46 inches apart. The openings between the lath are just the width of a lath. The amount of lumber needed (to the acre) is about as follows: 424 posts (352 for roof, 72 for sides) 4" x 4* x 8'. 160 pieces 1 Vi" x 3" x 20'. 960 pieces (840 for roof, 120 for sides) 1 Vz" x 1 W x 15'. 80,000 lath (75,000 for roof, 5,000 for sides) %" x 1" x 4'. It requires about 9,000 feet of lumber for the above material exclusive of the lath. All lumber must be first- class and free from knots. This can still be reduced by about 2,500 feet by using wire in place of the 1^'by IY2" by 15' and weav- ing the lath in this. Under the most favorable circum- stances such a shed can be erected for $450 an acre, but this is about the cheapest and light- est form that will withstand the ele- ments. The following diseases and insects attack pineapples: 2954. The Enville pineapple. PIXGUICULA 2631 (1) Heart-rot; bitter-heart: The cause of this disease is not known, but it seems to be more prevalent in a rainy season than in a dry one. It manifests itself by the portion around the heart taking on a water-soaked appearance. This condition progresses outward until the whole apple is involved. It is not necessarily accompanied by rotting, although this usually follows. The whole apple becomes bitter, even before it is entirely involved. When this disease is present in a field, the fruit should be marketed as soon as possible, that the apples may be consumed before becoming badly affected. (2) Sanding: This disorder occurs immediately after setting out, especially if a long dry spell occurs at this time. It is produced by sand being blown into and filling the bud of plants. Immediately after setting out, drop into the bud a small handful of cottonseed-meal, or the same amount of a mixture of one part ground tobacco stems and three or four parts cottonseed-meal. This soon forms a firm plug in the 2955. Pineapple shed in Florida. bud, keeping out sand but not interfering with growth. Blood and bone, or blood, bone and tankage, may also be used. (3) Spike; longleaf: This disease manifests itself by the leaves failing to expand at the base, thus giving the plant a contracted appearance. The outer portion of the leaf spreads from the center of the plant, but usually fails to take on a broad flat healthy appear- ance. Experiments have proved that this disease may be produced by improper use of commercial fertilizers, although the disease has occurred where no fertilizer had been used. Abundant evidence is at hand to show that the disease is not due to an organic agent but rather to untoward condition in the soil. Change the fertilizer, avoiding acid phosphate, kainit, and cottonseed-meal in large quantities, and give protection as by a pine- apple shed (spike is a rare thing under sheds). (4) Blight ; wilt : This disease occurs in a sporadic manner, usually without any apparent regularity. In some varie- ties the first intimation of blight is by the outer end of the leaves turning red, and later by the tips wilting. This wilting progresses until the entire plant has dried up. According to Webber the direct cause is a soil- inhabiting fungus which attacks the roots. Remove the wilted plants and set in healthy ones. If the plants are of valuable varieties trim off all diseased roots and much of the stem, together with larger leaves, and reset. It is probable that the fungus will not survive until the roots again penetrate the soil. (5) Red-spider (Stig- maeus floridanus): This species attacks the tender white portion at the base of the leaves. The effect upon the plant is greatly out of proportion to the small amount of injury to the parts attacked. In later stages the leaves rot off at the place attacked. Drop a small handful of tobacco dust into the bud of the plants. 167 Subsequent rains and dews leach the tobacco and carry the solution down to the red-spiders. If they are not all dead in a week or ten days, repeat the dose. (6) Scale insect (Diaspis bromeliae): This scale insect becomes troublesome in dry localities and in greenhouses. The insect usually attacks the lower surface of the leaf, but each point of attack shows through as a yellow spot or blotch on the upper surface. Spray with resin wash, resin compound,- or whale-oil soap. (7) Mealy-bugs (Dactylopius citri and other species): These insects attack the base of the leaves just at or below the ground-level; also the bud, and when fruit matures they multiply in great numbers among the slips and in the eyes of the fruit itself. The remedy is the same as for scale insects, but it is very difficult to make the appli cation effective. When the mealy-bugs are pres- ent before the fruit-bud forms, much good can be done by applying a large handful of tobacco dust in the axils of the Ivs. See also under Florida, page 2230. p jj ROLFS. PINEAPPLE AIR-PLANT: TiOandtia utriculata. P. Flower: Eucomis punctata. PINE, DAMMAR: Agathis. P., Kauri: Agathis. P., Mpreton Bay: Arauearia. P., Norfolk Island: Araucaria. P., Prince's: Chimaphila. P., Screw: Pandanus. PINELIA: Restrepia. PINELLIA (after Pinelli). Aracex. About a half- dozen hardy perennial tuberous herbs, native to China and Japan. Foliage appearing with the fls.; Ivs. 3 or pedatisect: peduncle solitary: spathe marcescent: fls. monoecious in the appendiculate spadix, all fertile; per- ianth none; male fls. with 1 stamen; female fls. 1-sided; ovary 1-celled; ovule solitary, orthopterous. tuberifera, Tenore. Adult Ivs. 3-parted, the middle segms. 1H~2 times longer than wide and elliptic-oval. China. — There is a variety with narrower If.-segms. and another with Ivs. cut into 5 segms. PINGUICULA (diminutive of Latin pinguis, fat; referring to the succulent and greasy foliage). Lenti- buLariacex. BUTTERWORT. Small acaulescent herbs of carnivorous habits, with pretty long-spurred flowers something like a snapdragon; sometimes grown for their oddity and for the study of insectivorous habits. Plants of moist or wet grounds, sometimes growing on damp rocks, with fibrous roots: Ivs. in a basal tuft or rosette, broad and entire, soft, the upper surface usually glandular-viscid (secreting a digestive fluid) and the margins infolding when insects and other objects adhere: fls. white to purple and yellow, solitary on naked scapes which are coiled in vernation; calyx 5-lobed and somewhat 2-lipped; corolla mostly 2- lipped, ringent or more or less personate, with 5 spread- ing unequal lobes, the base extended into a sac or spur; stamens 2: fr. a 2-valved caps. — Species 30-^0, in the northern hemisphere and also along the Andes to Patagonia. The species are little seen in cult., P. can- data and P. lutea being best known to growers. Pin- guicula is one of the very few dicotyledonous plants with only 1 seed-leaf. The fls. of pinguicula are often reversed in position before and during anthesis. This interesting genus is rarely seen under cultiva- tion, except in botanic gardens. The most noteworthy species of the genus is the Mexican butterwort, P. cau- date, both for its floral and leaf characters. A peculiar feature of the plant is that it produces two kinds of growth, — the resting type, in which the small succulent leaves are imbricated and form a small dense rosette about 1 inch in diameter; also the growing type, in which the obovate leaves when fully grown measure 3 to 4 inches long by 2 to 3 inches wide. — In February the small rosettes of P. caudata should be potted in the pans large enough to carry them throughout the 2632 PINGUICULA PINUS growing period, because they are not conveniently transplanted. Three plants may be placed in 6-inch pans, keeping them close to the side of the pan in triangular form. A good growing medium consists of two parts peat soil, one part fibrous loam and one part sand, with plenty of drainage. When in full growth, the top of the pan will be fully covered by the viscid leaves. Watering the plants from above should not be prac- tised because of destroying the dew-like deposit on the surface of the leaves. The pans should be placed in saucers of water, and set in a light position in the warm- house; give plenty of sunshine and the plants will readily flower throughout the summer. In October place the plants in the cool end of the house to rest. The growth will gradually deteriorate until it assumes the rosettes of small succulent leaves to carry them through the resting period. — Young plants are propagated almost as readily as echeverias. The small rigid leaves should be carefully broken from the mam stem; if not broken clean they will not reproduce young plants. These should be laid flat on sand in pans of convenient size; the top of the pan should be protected by glass or a bell-jar, to retain the moisture} place the pan in a saucer of water. In four to six weeks the young plants with the leaf attached will be sufficiently rooted to allow potting. One of the worst pests are wood- lice. (G.H. Pring.) A. Color of fls. yellow. Ixltea, Walt. Exceptional by reason of its yellow fls. and nearly regular (not 2-lipped) corolla: variable in the size of all its parts, and in the obtuse toothing of the corolla-lobes: Ivs. ovate to oblong-ovate: scapes 5-12 in. high; fls. %-!% in- l°ng and broad; spur curved, about as long as the rest of the corolla; throat spotted and lined with red; palate very prominent and densely bearded. Low pine barrens, N. C. to Fla. and La. B.M. 7203. B.R. 126. AA. Color of fls. purple to lilac. B. Spur 2 or 4 times as long as remainder of the corolla. caudata, Schlecht. (P. orchidioides, A. DC. P. Bakeri- dna, Hort.). Lvs. in dense rosettes when young, long and narrow; on older plants few and large, obovate and obtuse: scapes 5-7 in. high; fls. deep carmine, with lighter throat and reddish lines, attaining 2 in.; lobes all rounded except the middle one of the lower lip, which is retuse. Mex. B.M. 4231. G.C. II. 15:541. R.H. 1902:456. Gn. 23, p. 309. G. 29:181. G.W. 9, p. 482; 12, pp. 308-10. Var. superba, Hort. Fls. rich rosy carmine with white eye, about 2 in. long and nearly as broad. — According to W. Watson, England, P. caudata "is largely grown by orchid-breeders, who find it an excellent trap for the tiny midge-like fly which lays its eggs in orchid seedlings when they are very young. . . . It is a most charming little pot-plant, and has become a favorite in many gardens." Rosei, W. Wats. Very like P. caudata and perhaps a. form of it, but the fl. deep violet-purple, almost a blue, nearly 2 in. across and remaining fresh for weeks. Prop, from the fleshy Ivs. Mex. G.C. III. 49:82. gypsicola, Brandeg. Plant 3-4 in. high: Ivs. when plant is in bloom linear from a rather broad base, about 2 in. long, revolute on margins, with viscid glandular hairs on upper surface; later or winter Ivs. spatulate- oblong and cotyledon-like, in a very dense rosette: fl. purple, with a very short white tube; upper lip 2-parted into linear-oblong lobes; lower lip 3-parted into similar lobes; spur more than 1 in. long, slender, purplish, 2-toothed at tip. Mex. B.M. 8602. BB. Spur about as long as remainder of the corolla, c. Fls. %-l in. long and broad. grandiflora, Lam. Scapes 3-8 in. long; fls. "blue, rarely purplish violet," according to De Candolle, 10-15 lines long, 9 lines broad (3 or 4 times longer than in P. vulgaris) ; lobes undulate; palate with 1 or 2 white spots; spur straight, a trifle shorter than the broadly funnel-shaped tube. W. Eu. G.C. III. 10:373.— Ac- cording to Bentham, this is a large-fld. variety of P. vulgaris, with longer spur and broader lobes, which in the western part of Eu. passes into the common form. hirtiflSra, Tenore. Scapes 3-4 in. high; fls. 8 lines long and broad, lilac or rose (blue according to Tenore, and shown as purple in B.M.), with a white tube; spur straight or curved, about as long as the rest of the corolla. S. Eu. B.M. 6785. Gn. 25, p. 291. G. 11:251. — Possibly distinguished from P. grandiflora by the color of the tube, which is white outside and yellow in the throat. According to Burbidge there is a variety with pure white fls. cc. Fls. %in. long and broad. vulgaris, Linn. According to Hooker, this differs from P. hirtiflora in the bright blue color and the retuse lobes of the corolla, as also in the less globose caps.: scapes 1-5 in. high; fls. bluish purple or violet, about 6 lines long; spur nearly straight, about 2 lines long or as long as the rest of the corolla. Wet rocks, Eu., Asia, New England, and north and westward. Gn. 57, p. 335; 69, p. 101. — Sometimes called "Labrador violet." P. eldtior, Michx., in N. C. to Fla., is a beautiful species that should be in cult.: plant 3-5 in. across and 10^12 in. tall: Ivs. viscid-glandular, in pale green rosettes: fls. whitish purple, to % in- broad- WILHELM MILLER. PINK: Dianthus. L. H. B.f PINUS (ancient Latin name). Pindcese. PINE. PINE- TREE. Ornamental trees grown for their handsome evergreen foliage and symmetrical or picturesque habit, some also for their conspicuous large cones; many spe- cies are valuable timber trees. See Pine. Resinous evergreen trees with usually whorled branches, rarely shrubby: winter buds covered with 2957. Pistillate flowers (enlarged) of Austrian pine; also, at bottom, a young pis- 2956. Staminate cone tillate cone (natural size), a, front view of Pinus rigida. (X2) of two ovules; c, side view. imbricate scales: Ivs. of 2 kinds; the primary Ivs. are spirally arranged and as they appear on young seedling plants and occasionally on shoots from the old wood, are green and subulate, but commonly they are reduced to small scarious bracts bearing in their axils the acicular, semi-terete or triangular secondary Ivs. borne on an undeveloped branchlet in clusters from 2-5, or occasionally more, rarely reduced to 1. surrounded at the base by sheaths of 8-12 bud-scales: fls. monoecious; the PINUS PINUS 2633 staminate ones axillary, clustered at the base of the young shoots, catkin-like, yellow, orange, or scarlet, composed of spirally arranged numerous 2^celled anthers with the connective enlarged and scale-like at the apex (Fig. 2956) ; pistillate lateral or subterminal, greenish or purplish, consisting of numerous spirally arranged scales each in the axil of a small bract and bearing 2 ovules inside near the base (Fig. 2957) : cone subglobose to cylindric, with woody scales closely appressed before maturity and tightly inclosing the seeds, which are usually furnished with a long thin wing, but in some species are wingless or short- winged; the apex of the scales is usually more or less thickened and the exposed part, which is usually rhombic in outline and termed apophysis, is often protracted into prominent bosses or knobs; the apophysis is terminated by the umbo, usually differing in color and ending mostly in a spine or prickle. In P. Strobus and the allied species the apophysis is flat and thin, and bears the spineless umbo at the upper end, while in most other pines the apophysis is thickened and transversally keeled and bears the umbo in the middle. These differences belong to the most important characters in the grouping of the spe- cies: other valu- able characters are furnished by the structure of the Ivs., which contain either 1 or 2 fibro- vascular bundles and usually 2 or more resin -ducts, being either ex- ternal (or periph- eral), i.e., situated beneath the epider- mis; or medial (or parenchy matous) , i.e., inclosed by the tissue of the If.; or internal, i.e., close to the fibre-vascu- lar bundles; some species, as P. Armandi, P. resinosa, P. sinensis, also P. txcdsa, P. Lambertiana, P. virginiana, and the like, have resin-ducts hi 2 positions, either external and medial or internal and medial, but such combinations are not found in all the Ivs. of these species. Strengthening cells, i.e., cells with thickened walls, are mostly present beneath the epidermis and often surround the resin- ducts, sometimes also along the fibro-vascular bundles. (See Figs. 2958-2961.) The number of the fibro-vascu- lar bundles and the position of the resin-ducts can be readily seen with a common magnifying glass in thin cross-sections made with a sharp razor from the middle of the If. and placed on a glass plate. — About 80 species are known, distributed throughout the northern hemi- sphere from the arctic circle to Mex. and the W. Indies, X. Afr., and the Malayan Archipelago; in the tropical and subtropical regions they are confined to the moun- tains. In the following enumeration the species are grouped according to Shaw's classification. To facilitate the determination of the cult, species, a key is given to determine plants without cones, but owing to the great variability in pines this key may fail, if the plant in hand represents some uncommon variation. Good illustrations are found in Sargent, Silva of N. America, vol. 11; Lambert, Description of the Genus Pinus; Lawson, Pinetum Britannicum; Forbes, Pinetum Woburnense; Antoine, Die Coniferen; Clinton-Baker, Illustrations of Conifers, vol. I; Pard6, Iconographie des Coniferes (in course of publication). For the horti- cultural varieties, see Beissner, Nadelholzkunde, second edition (1909), and the new edition by A. H. Kent of > eitch's Manual of the Coniferae. Among other impor- tant works may be mentioned E. A. Carriere's TraitS general des Coniferes, second edition, 1867; Heinrich Mayr's Die Waldungen von Nordamerika, 1890; G. Engelmann's Revision of the Genus Pinus, in Trans- actions of the Academy of Science of St. Louis, pub- lished in 1880; Maxwell T. Masters in Journal of the 2958. Pinus Strobus. Leaf with a single fibro-vascular bundle (a) , usually two external resin-ducts (6) ; strengthening cells (c) only beneath the epidermis; stomata (d) only on the two inner sides. -C -a 2959. Pinus Coulteri. Leaf with two fibro-vascular bundles (a) ; several medial resin- ducts (b) ; strengthening cells (c) around the resin-ducts, several layers beneath the epidermis and along the inner and outer side of the fibro-vascular bundles; stomata (d) all around. Linnean Society, vols. 22 (1886) and 27 (1889); Conifer Conference in Journal Royal Horticultural Society, vol. 14 (1892); Silva Tarouca's Unsere Freiland-Nadel- holzer (1913); G.R. Shaw's The Pines of Mexico (1909) and The Genus Pinus (1914), both well illustrated. The pines are usually tall trees, rarely shrubby, with spreading branches forming a pyramidal or round- topped, in old age often very picturesque head, and clothed with acicular leaves in clusters of 2-5, rarely solitary. The flowers are catkin-like, appearing in spring, the staminate yellow or purple, often conspicuous by their abundance, and the pistillate greenish or pur- plish, developing into subglobose to cylindric, usually brown cones, which sometimes attain 18 or more inches in length, ripening mostly not before the second or rarely the third year. The pines are among the most important timber trees of the northern hemi- sphere, and many of them are valuable for the decora- tion of parks and gardens. Young pines are with few exceptions of more or less regular, pyramidal habit; but in old age they are often very picturesque, especially P. Strobus, P. radiata, P. rigida, P. Pinea, P. Cembra, P. nigra, P. parviflora, and others. Of very graceful habit, with slender branches and more or less drooping foliage, are P. excelsa, and the tender P. Ayacahuite, P. longifolia, and P. canari- ensis. The very large cones of some species, as P. Lam- bertiana, P. Ayacahuite, P. Sabiniana, and P. Coulteri, are a conspicuous ornament. Most species are of vigor- ous growth when young, but the foreign species usually grow rather slowly and are therefore well suited for smaller gardens, especially P. koraiensis, P. Peuce, P. Bungeana, P. parviflora; the American P. aristata and P. flexilis may also be recommended for this , c 2960. Pinus palustris. Leaf with two fibro-vascular bundles (a) ; several internal resin- ducts (6) , one layer of strengthening cells (c) beneath the epider- mis and on the inner side of the fibro-vascular bundles; stomata (d) all around. 2634 PINUS PINUS purpose. For planting rocky slopes P. Banksiana, P. rigida, P. virginiana, and some western species are valu- able; and if dwarf forms are desired P. montana is one of the best, thriving better than any other species in shaded positions and as undergrowth in open woods. A great number of the species are hardy North. Among the hardiest are P. Strobus, P. Cembra, P. parviflora, P. Bungeana, P. koraiensis, P. rigida, P. Banksiana, P. Thunbergii, P. resinosa, P. sylvestris and P. montana. The Mexican species and those from southern Asia stand only a few degrees of frost. The pines are not very particular as to the soil, and in their native habitats they usually occupy the less fertile situations, as dry uplands and sandy plains. Some, as P. rigida, P. caribsea, and P. Tseda, can be grown both in dry and in swampy ground. P. palustris is very unhappily named, since it almost never grows in swamps. Pines are much used for the afforestation of barren sandy plains and dry rocky mountain slopes. For seaside planting P. rigida and the more tender P. radiata, P. Pinaster, P. halepensis, and P. canariensis 2961. Pinus echinata. Leaf with two fibro-vascular bundles (a) and several medial resin-ducts (ft) ; only one layer of strengthening cells (c) beneath the epidermis; stomata (d) all around. are valuable; the last three species are now much planted in California, both for timber and ornament. Pines cannot be transplanted as successfully as large plants on account of their long tap-roots, and only younger nursery-grown trees should be used for plant- ing. As they cannot usually be taken up with a good ball of earth, it is well to immerse the roots in a loam puddle immediately after the trees are dug up. Pines are propagated by seeds sown in spring in prepared beds or frames, or in boxes or pans; the seeds should be covered slightly with fine soil, but the larger ones about % inch, and the young seedlings shaded and watered when necessary. Varieties and rarer kinds are grafted on their types or allied species, usually by veneer-grafting on potted stock in the green- house in winter, or in spring outdoors by cleft-grafting in the terminal bud (M.D. 1901, p. 15). Cuttings even of the dwarf forms do not root readily; the easiest to root are young shoots with primary foliage, as they sometimes appear on older branches or on the trunk. The pines belong to the most important timber trees in their native countries; these are, in eastern North America, P. palustris, P. Strobus, and P. echinata; in the western states, P. Lambertiana, P. monticola, and P. ponderosa; in Europe, P. sylvestris and P. nigra; in eastern Asia, P. Thunbergii and P. densiflora, and in the Himalayas, P. excelsa. From the resinous secretions of many species, chiefly P. palustris, P. caribxa, P. Pinaster, P. halepensis, and P. longifolia, turpentine, tar, and pitch are obtained. An essential oil used medicinally is distilled from the leaves and young shoots of several species. Edible seeds are produced by some species, in America by P. edulis and P. cem- broides; in Europe by P. Pinea and P. Cembra; in East India by P. Gerardiana. Mats similar to cocoa mats are manufactured from the leaves of P. palustris, and pine wool for stuffing mattresses is made from leaves of European and American species. For another account of the relative value of species of Pinus and their culture, see Pine. INDEX. Aberdonix, 37. flcxilis, 4. parviflora, 5. alba, 8. Fremontiana, 15. pendula, 22, 25, 27, albo-terminata, 22. frutescens, 26. 30. albo-variegata, 4, 14. funebris, 29. pentaphylla, 5. alepensis, 36. glauca, 5, 8. Peuce, 6. arborea, 26. gracilis, 26. Pinaster, 37. argentea, 25. aristata, 18. halepensis, 36. Hamilton!!, 37. pindica, 27. Pinea, 19. Armandi, 3. Henryi, 29. Pityusa, 36. attenuata, 47. heterophylla, 35. Poiretiana, 27. aurea, 8, 22, 25. horizontalis, 27. ponderosa, 30, 31. aureo-variegata, 26. wops, 39, 40. prominens, 29. australis, 34. insignia, 46. prostrata, 8, 26, 27. austriaca, 27. Jeffrey!, 31. puniila, 1, 25. Ayacahuite, 11. koraiensis, 2. pumilio, 26. Balfouriana, 17, 18. Lambertiana, 10. pungens, 38. Banksiana, 41. lapponica, 25. pygmsea, 8, 27. Beissneriana, 25. Laricio, 27. pyramidalis, 8, 25. Benthamiana, 30. latifolia, 42. pyrenaica, 27, 36. Bolanderi, 42. Lemoniana, 37. quadri folia, 12. Bonapartea, 11. leucodermis, 27. radiata, 46. Boursieri, 42. leucosperma, 29. reflexa, 4. brevifolia, 8. longifolia, 21. resinosa, 24. brutia, 36. Loudoniana, 11. rigensis, 25. Bungeana, 16. macrocarpa, 48. rigida, 45. calabrica, 27. Mattetii, 30. rostrata, 26. californica, 47. mandshurica, 2. rotundata, 26. canariensis, 20. maritima, 37. Roxburghii, 21. caribsea, 35. Massoniana, 23, 28. Sabiniana, 49. carpatica, 26. Mastersiana, 3. Salzmannii, 27. cebennensis, 27. minor, 37. scipioniformis, 3. Cembra, 1. mitis, 32. scopulorum, 30. cembroides, 13. monophylla, 15. serotina, 44. clausa, 39. monspeliensis, 27. sibirica, 1. columnaris, 1, 25. montana, 26. sinensis, 29. compacta, 1, 25. montereyensis, 46. strobiformis, 4. contorta, 42. monticola, 9. Strobus, 8. corsicana, 27. Moseri, 27. sylvestris, 25. Coulteri, 48. Mughua, 26. tabuHformis, 29. crispata, 25. muricata, 43. Tseda, 33. cubensis, 35. Murrayana, 42. tenuifolia, 27. densata, 29. nana, 8. Thunbergii, 28. densiflora, 22. nepalensis, 7. Torreyana, 50. divaricata, 41. nigra, 27. tuberculata, 47. Don-Pedrii, 11. nigricans, 27. umbraculifera, 8, 22. echinata, 32. nivea, 8, 25. uncinata, 26. edulis, 14. Oculus-draconis, 22, variegata, 7, 22, 28. eldarica, 36. 28. virgata, 25. Elliotii, 35. osteosperma, 13. virginiana, 40. engadinensis, 25. Pallasiana, 27. Wilsonii, 29. excelsa, 6, 7. palustris, 34. yunnanensis, 29. fastigiata, 8, 25. Parryana, 12. zebrina, 7. NO. I. KEY TO THE SPECIES WITH THE CONES. I. SOFT PINES ( Haploxylon). Wood soft, close-grained, light-colored, the sap-wood thin and nearly white: sheaths of the If .-clusters deciduous; Ivs. with 1 fibro-vascular bundle. A. Umbo of scales terminal. B. Seeds wingless or with rudimentary wing. c. Margin of Ivs. serrulate. D. Branchlets hairy: cones inde- hiscent. E. Cones ovate: branchlets brownish tomentose 1. Cembra EE. Cones cylindric-conical: branchlets pubescent 2. koraiensis DD. Branchlets glabrous: cones de- hiscent, cylindric-conical. ... 3. Armandi cc. Margin of Ivs. entire: cones dehis- cent: Ivs. stout, 1 Yi-3 in. long. . 4. flexilis BB. Seeds winged, with long wing, short in No. 5. c. Cones less than 10 in. long. D. Scales of cone with convex thickening. E. Length of cone about 2 in., shape ovate: branchlets pubescent: Ivs. %-!}/% in. long 5. parviflora EE. Length of cone 8^-10 in., shape cylindric: branchlets glabrous. F. Lvs. 3-4 in. long, stiff. . . 6. Peuce FF. Lvs. 6—8 in. long, drooping 7. excelsa DD. Scales of cone uniformly thin. E. Branchlets glabrous: Ivs. thin, soft 8. Strobus EE. Branchlets at first pubes- cent: Ivs. stiff 9. monticola PINUS PINUS 2635 cc. Cones 1O-18 in. long: branchlets pubescent. D. Scales of cone rounded: hs. stout 10. Lambertiana DD. Scales of cone with elongated and more or less recurved apex: hs. slender 11. Ayacahuite AA. Umbo of scales dorsal. B. Seeds wingless or •with very short wing: cones green at maturity, c. Margin of If. entire; Ivs. %-l}4 in. long. D. Number of hs. 3 or 4- E. Lrs. usually 4 12- Parryana EE. Lrs. usually 3 13. cembroides DD. Number of hs. 1 or 2. E. Lrs. usually 2, sometimes 3. 14. edulis EE. Lrs. usually 1, sometimes 2. 15. monophylla cc. Margin of If. serrulate: hs. 3, 2-4 in. long 16. Bungeana BB. Seeds with long wing: cones purple at maturity. c. Cones with minute incurved prickles 17. Balfouriana cc. Cones with long slender prickles. . 18. aristata II. PITCH PINES (Diploxylon). Wood usually heavy, coarse-grained, generally dark- colored, sap-wood pale, often thick: sheaths of If.-clusters persistent (in the following species): Ivs. with 2 fibre-vascu- lar bundles, serrulate: umbo of cone-scales dorsal. A. Seed-wing very short or long and adnate. B. Wing very short, deciduous: hs. 2, 5-8 in. long 19. Pinea BB. Wing long, adnate: hs. 3, 8-12 in. long, c. Apophysis broad-pyramidal; seed Yiin. long 20. canariensis cc. Apophysis elongated and more or less recurved; seed %-l in. long 21. longifolia AA. Seed-wing articulate. B. Wing of seed membranous, long, c. Lrs. in 2's: cones deciduous, de- hiscent at maturity, in No. 29 persistent and hs. sometimes in S's. D. Resin-ducts external. E. Branchlets bloomy: hs. 2%- 5 in. long 22. densiflora EE. Branchlets not bloomy. F. Lvs. 4~8 in. long. G. Color of branchlets yel- lowish brown: Ivs. dark green, slender and thin 23. Massoniana GG. Color of branchlets orange: hs. stout, light green 24. resinosa FF. Lrs. %-3 in. long. G. Umbo obtuse, gray: hs. more or less bluish green 25. sylvestris GG. Umbo more or less prickly, surrounded by a Mack marking: hs. bright green 26. montana DD. Resin-ducts medial, or medial and external. E. Cones deciduous: resin-ducts medial. F. Winter buds brown, resin- ous, ovate-oblong 27. nigra FF. Winter buds grayish white, cylindric 28. Thunbergii EE. Cones tenaciously persist- ent: hs. in 2's and S's 29. sinensis cc. Lrs. in S's or in 2's and S's. D. The cones deciduous. E. Resin-ducts medial. F. Young cones subterminal. G. Branchlets orange: cones 3-6 in. long. . .30. ponderosa GG. Branchlets glaucous: cones 5-15 in. long. .31. Jeffreyi FF. Young cones lateral. G. Lvs. 3-5 in. long 32. echinata GG. Lvs. 6-9 in. long 33. Taeda EE. Resin-ducts internal: hs. 8-18 in. long. F. Winter buds whitish: cone dull brown, 6-10 in. long 34. palustris FF. Winter buds light brown: cone lustrous, brown, 3-6% in. long 35. caribsea DD. The cones tenaciously per- sistent, often serotinous: resin-ducts medial (except in No. 36). E. Lvs. in 2's. F. Resin-ducts external: umbo obtuse 36. halepensis FF. Resin-ducts medial. G. Cones symmetrical. H. Lrs. 5-8 in. long 37. Pinaster HH. Lvs. 1-SYi in. long, i. Prickles of cone stout 38. pungens n. Prickles of cone slender. j. Cones remaining closed for many years.. .39. clausa jj. Cones opening at maturity 40. virginiana GO. Cones unsymmetrical. H. Length of Ivs. less than 4 in. I. Cones not prickly, lateral 41. Banksiana n. Cones prickly, sub- terminal . . .42. contorta HH. Length of hs. 4~6 in.: cones with stout and large prickles. . 43. muricata EE. Lrs. in S's: cone prickly. F. Cones symmetrical. G. Length of hs. 6-8 in.: cones remaining dosed for 1 or 2 j/ears.44. serotina GG. Length of hs. 3-5 in.: cones opening at maturity 45. rigida FF. Cones unsymmetrical. G. Prickles of cone mi- nute: upper part of trunk rough 46. radiata GG. Prickles of cone stout: upper part of trunk smooth 47. attenuata BB. Wing of seed thick, short: hs. 3 or 5, 6-13 in. long: cones large. c. Lvs. in S's, 6-12 in. long. D. Cone conical-oblong; wings about 1 in. longer than the seed: hs. stout 48. Coulteri DD. Cones broadly ovate; wing about l/&n. longer than the seed: hs. slender, flexible. .49. Sabiniana cc. Lrs. in S's, rigid, 8-13 in. long: cone broadly ovate; seed short- winged 50. Torreyana NO. 2. KEY FOB DETERMINING PINES WITHOUT CONES. (Compare Figs. 2958-2961.) A. Number of hs. 5, only occasionally 3 or 4- B. Sheaths deciduous: fibro-vascular bundle 1. c. Edges of hs. serrulate. D. Length of hs. 1 14-8 in. E. Branchlets glabrous or nearly so. F. The hs. 6-8 in. long: branchlets glaucous .... 7. excelsa FF. The hs. 3-6 in. long: branchlets not glaucous. G. Tree a rather dense pyramid with ascend- ing branches 6. Peuce 2636 PINUS PINUS OG. Tree an open pyramid. H. Lvs. bluish green .... 8. HH. Lvs. bright green: habit loose, with wide-s preading branches 3. EE. Branchlets densely brownish tomentose 1. BEE. Branchlets pubescent or pu- berulous. F. Needles slender, somewhat pendulous, 4-6 in. long. 11. FF. Needles stiff, 1%~4 in. long. o. Back of Ivs. with fine white lines 10. oo. Back of Ivs. usually not lined. H. Color of Ivs. bluish or dark green 9. HH. Color of Ivs. bright green 2. DD. Length of Ivs. %-lii in.: Ivs. usually twisted, forming brush-like tufts at the end of the branchlets 5. cc. Edges of Ivs. entire. D. Lvs. lYz-S in. long 4. DD. Lvs. 1-1% in. long. E. Branchlets dark orange- brown: Ivs. rigid 17. EE. Branchlets orange: Ivs. usu- ally slender 18. BB. Sheaths persistent: fibro-vascular bundles 2: Ivs. 8-12 in. long, rigid 50. AA. Number of Ivs. 8, or 4 or 1, only occa- sionally 2 or 6. B. Usually solitary, sometimes in 2's. . 15. BB. Usually 4, sometimes 8 or 5 12. BUB. Usually 8, occasionally 2. c. Fibro-vascular bundle 1: sheaths deciduous. D. Margin of Ivs. entire: Ivs. %-2 in. long. E. Lvs. usually 3, 1-2 in. long. 13. EE. Lvs. usually 2, %-!% in- long 14. DD. Margin of Ivs. serrulate: Ivs. 2-4 in. long 16. cc. Fibro-vascular bundles 2: sheaths persistent. D. Branchlets glaucous: Ivs. bluish or grayish green (see also No. S3.) E. Habit of Ivs. slender, droop- ing 49. EE. Habit of Ivs. straight, stiff. F. Buds very resinous: Ivs. 6-12 in. long, dark bluish green 48. FF. Buds not or little resinous: Ivs. 5-8 in. long, pale bluish green 31. DD. Branchlets not glaucous: Ivs. dark yellow or bright green. E. Habit of Ivs. slender, droop- ing. _ F. Resin-ducts internal 34. FF. Resin-ducts external. G. Branchlets yellowish: buds brown 20. GG. Branchlets light yellow- brown: buds bright chestnut-brown 21. EE. Habit of Ivs. stiff. F. Length of Ivs. 6-12^ in. G. Resin-ducts internal: buds cylindric, with spreading scales: Ivs. dark green, in 2's and S's, 8-12 in. long.35. OG. Resin-ducts medial. H. Buds oblong-ovate, slightly or not resinous: Ivs. 6-9 in. long. i. Lvs. light bluish Strobus green 33. Txda. n. Lvs. dark yellow- green 44. serotina HH. Buds ovate, acumi- Armandi nate, resinous: Ivs. 6-11 in. long, dark Cembra yellowish green. ... 30. ponderosa FF. Length of Ivs. 3-7 in. (see also No. 29). G. Character of Ivs. slender. Ayacahuite H. Foliage pale yellow- ish or bluish green: buds oblong-ovate, dark brown 47. attenuata Lambertiana HH. Foliage bright green: buds ovate, bright chestnut-brown. . . .46. radiata GG. Character of Ivs. stout. monticola H. Form of buds thick, ovate, acute or koraiensis acuminate 30. ponderosa [var. scopulorurn HH. Form of buds oblong- ovate 45. rigida parviflora AAA. Number of Ivs. 2 (see also No. 14). B. Branchlets glaucous. flexilis c. Buds very resinous 40. virginiana cc. Buds not or little resinous. D. Hue of Ivs. dark bluish green. .32. echinata Balf ouriana DD% jjue of Ivs. bright green 22. densiflora BB. Branchlets not glaucous. anstata c> Length of Ivs. 1-3% in. D. Branchlets brown or orange: Torreyana resin-ducts medial. E. Character of Ivs. slender: branchlets brown 39. clausa monophylla EE. Character of Ivs. stout, Parryana twisted: branchlets orange or orange-brown F. Lvs. 1-3% in. long. G. Resin-ducts Ior2 42. contorts GG. Resin-ducts 2-5 38. pungens FF. Lvs. %-l in. long 41. Banksiana cembroides DD. Branchlets dull greenish yel- low or greenish brown: edulis resin-ducts external. E. Character of Ivs. slender: Bungeana buds not resinous 36. halepensis EE. Character of Ivs. stout: buds coated with resin. F. Generally a tree 25. sylvestris FF. Generally a shrub 26. montana cc. Length of Ivs. 3-9 in. D. Color of buds whitish or gray- Sabiniana ish white 28. Thunbergii DD. Color of buds brown (see also No. 36). E. Scales of the oblong buds Coulter! with reflexed tips, chestnut- brown. F. Position of resin-ducts Jeffrey! external. G. Habit of Ivs. very slen- der and thin 23. Massoniana GG. Habit of Ivs. stiff and rigid 19. Pinea palustris FF. Position of resin-ducts medial or internal. G. Buds not resinous: Ivs. canariensis lustrous green, 6—9 in. long 37. Pinaster GG. Buds resinous: Ivs. longifolia dark green, ^-6 in. long 43. muricata EE. Scales not reflexed. F. Resin-ducts external: Ivs. lustrous: buds ovate, acuminate, resinous. . . . 24. resinosa FF. Resin-ducts medial: Ivs^. caribaea dull: buds ovate, acumi- nate, resinous 27. nigra FFF. Resin-ducts medial and external: buds oblong- ovate, not resinous: Ivs. sometimes 3 29. sinensis PINUS PINUS 2637 Section I. CEMBRA. Group 1. CEMBR/E. 1. Cembra, Linn. Swiss STONE PINE. Tree, to 70 or sometimes 120 ft., with spreading usually short branches forming a narrow, dense pyramid, in old age often with very picturesque broad, open, round-topped head : branchlets coated with dense yellowish brown tomentum: winter buds globose-ovate, long-acumi- nate: Ivs. straight, dark green on back, bluish white inside, 2-3 H in- long: cones short-peduncled, ovate, obtuse, light brown, 2^-3Ji in. long; scales broadly ovate, rounded at apex, apophysis much broader than high; seed Km- long. Cent. European Alps. H.W. 1:8, pp. 174-7. G.W. 1, p. 352; 7, p. 19. G.C. II. 17:80, 81; III. 24:459. Gn. 19, p.369; 28, pp. 175, 182; 59, p. 59; 65, p. 431. Gt. 45, p. 205; 58, p. 443. — Handsome hardy pine of slow growth and symmetrical -habit when young. The large seeds are eaten. Var. columnaris, Beissn., is a form of narrow, columnar habit. G.W. 2, p. 209. Var. compacta, Beissn., is compact and conical in habit. Var. sibirica, Loud. (P. sibirica, Mayr), has shorter Ivs. and longer cones, and is of narrower habit and more vigorous growth. N. Russia and Siberia. Var. pumila, Pall. See F. pumila in suppl. list. 2. koraiensis, Sieb. & Zucc. (P. mandshiirica, Rupr.). Pyramidal tree, to 100 ft.: branchlets with yellowish brown pubescence: winter buds oblong-ovate, acumi- nate, dark chestnut-brown: Ivs. straight, dark green and glossy on the back, bluish white on the inner sides, 2^-4 in. long: cones almost sessile, conic-oblong, yellowish brown, 4-6 in. long; scales rhombic-obovate, with recurved obtuse apex; seed over Min. long, brown, sharply edged. Japan, Korea. S.Z. 2:116. Gng. 6:1. F.E. 18:333; 25:35. S.I.F. 1:2.— In cult, of slow growth, forming a rather dense, broad pyramid, with handsome foliage. One of the best hardy pines for smaller gardens. Group 2. FLEXILES. 3. Armandi, Franch. (P. scipionifdrmis, Mast. P. Mastersiana, Hayata). Tree, to 60 ft., with wide-spread- ing horizontal branches: branchlets glabrous: winter buds cylindric, chestnut-brown: Ivs. slender and thin, 3-6 in. long, serrulate, bright green: cones peduncled, oblong-conical, 4-6 or sometimes 8 in. long, yellowish brown; scales obovate, appressed, much thickened in the middle, with large broadly rhombic apophysis and small obtuse thickened umbo often slightly recurved; seeds pale reddish brown, ovoid, compressed, Kin- long, 2962. Pinus flerilis (XX). No. 4. 2963. Pinus Strobus (Xh)- No. 8. with a sharp edge all around. Cent, and W. China. B.M. 8347. G.C. III. 33:34 (as P. koraiensis), 66. R.H. 1910, p. 425. — A handsome pine which has proved hardy at the Arnold Arboretum. 4. flexilis, James. LIMBER PIXE. Fig. 2962. Tree, to 50, occasionally to 80 ft., with stout horizontal branches forming a narrow open pyramid, in old age with low, broad, round-topped head: whiter buds broadly ovate, slender-pointed: Ivs. rigid, acute, dark green, 1)^-3 in. long: cones short-stalked, ovate to cylindric-ovate, light brown, 3-6, rarely 10 in. long; scales rounded at the apex, tipped with an obtuse, dark umbo, the lower ones elongated and reflexed; seeds dark brown, mottled with black, J^-Hin. long, with narrow wing. Alberta to Calif, and New Mex. S.S. 11:546,547. G.F. 10:165. B.M. 8467. M.D. 1904:49. F.E. 29:47.— Hardy pine of slow growth; seems to be best adapted for ornamen- tal planting on rocky slopes. Var. reflexa, Engehn. (P. reflexa, Engehn. P. strobiformis, Sudw., not Engehn.). Tree, to 100 ft.: Ivs. slender, to 4 in. long, entire or remotely serrulate: cones 5-9 in. long, on longer stalks, with often thin reflexed scales. Ariz. S.S. 11:544, 545. Var. albo-variegata, Schwerin. Has many of Ivs. white. Group 3. STROBI. 5. parviflora, Sieb. & Zucc. Tree, to 80 ft., of dense, Cyramidal habit, with slender, horizontal branches: ranchlets light greenish brown, puberulous: Ivs. crowded, rather stiff, usually twisted, forming brush- like tufts at the end of the branchlets, bluish green, %-lK in. long: cones ovate or oblong-ovate, almost sessile, reddish brown, 2-3 in. long; seeds dark brown, hardly Kin. long, with short wing. Japan. S.Z. 2 : 115. S.I.F. 2:2. A.G. 14:212.— Hardy and very ornamen- tal pine, bearing numerous decorative cones when older. Cult, plants are often grafted and assume a more irregular habit. In Japan it is often cult, in pots and dwarfed. Var. glauca, Beissn. With bluish green Ivs. The wild form with somewhat longer Ivs., longer cones and seeds with longer wings has been described as P. pentaphylla, Mayr. 6. Peftce, Griseb. (P. excelsa var. Peitce, Beissn.). Attains 50 ft., with ascending short branches forming a narrow dense pyramid : branchlets greenish, glabrous, not glaucous: whiter buds ovate: Ivs. straight, bluish green, 3-4 in. long: cones short-stalked, cylindric, 3K~6 in. long, with obovate scales; seed 4 lines long. S.E. Eu. Gn. 76, p. 613. — An ornamental hardy pine of 2638 PINUS PINUS dense, regular habit and slow growth; forms a narrower and denser pyramid than the white pine (P. Strobus). 7. excelsa, Wall. (P. nepalensis, Chambr.). Attains 150 ft., with spreading and slightly ascending branches forming a broad open pyramid: branchlets greenish, glabrous, glaucous: winter buds cylindric- obovate, acute: Ivs. slender, flaccid, droop- ing, grayish or bluish green, 6-8 in. long: cones cylindric on l-2-m.-long stalks, 6-10 in. long; seeds brown, 4 lines long. Himal- ayas. Gn. 31, p. 195. A.G. 19:149. F.E. 13:664 (pi. 8); 33:113. Gn.M. 6:290. M.D.G. 1903:185.— Handsome tree, of somewhat loose habit, with graceful pen- dulous foliage, hardy as far north as Mass. in sheltered positions. Var. zebrina, Bailly has the Ivs. with a whitish zone near the tip. F.E. 31:191. R.H. 1889, p. 392. 8. Strdbus, Linn. (Strdbus Strdbus, Small). WHITE PINE. Figs. 2958, 2963, 2964. Attains 100, occasion- ally 150 ft., with horizontal branches in regular whorls form- ing a symmetrical open pyramid; in old age the head is usu- ally broad and open and often very pictur- esque: branchlets greenish or light greenish brown, gla- brous or slightly puberulous: winter buds ovate, acuminate: Ivs. soft, bluish green, 2-4 in. long (or 33^-5): cones on stalks 3^-1 in- long, cylindric, slender, often curved, 2-4 in. long, with oblong- obovate scales; seed red-brown, mottled with black, 3 lines long. Newfoundland to Man., south to Ga., 111. and Iowa. S.S. 11:538,539. A.G. 12:645; 13:1. Gn. 30, p. 404. F.E. 15:340. C.L.A. 11:310. H. W. 1:9, pp. 183-5. — Very valuable orna- mental hardy pine of rapid growth, sym- metrical when young, picturesque in old age: no tree is better adapted to break up the monotonous sky-line of plantations in northern parks. There are a number of gardens forms occasionally cult. Var. alba, Loud. (var. nivea, Carr.). Low form of irregular habit, with almost silvery white foliage. Var. afcrea, Carr. With yellow foliage. Var. gla&ca, Beissn. With light bluish green foliage. Var. brevifdlia, Loud, (var. nana, Knight. Var. pygmxa, Hort.). Dwarf, compact, round bush, with short Ivs. F.E. 20:788 (pi. 112); 29:569. Gt. 52, p. 435. Gn. M. 2:23. Var. fastigiata, Beissn. (var. pyramidalis, Hort.). With ascending branches, of narrow pyramidal or columnar habit. Var. prostrata, Arb. Kew. Dwarf, procumbent form, diffuse and trailing on the ground. Var. umbrac- ulifera, Knight. Dwarf, flat-topped bush, with short Ivs. R.H. 1869, p. 38. There are also forms with variegated foliage. 2964. Pinus Strobus. 2965. Cones of pines. Be- ginning at the top: P. Coul- teri, P. Lambertiana, P. pa- lustris, P. radiata. 9. monticola, Don. MOUNTAIN WHITE PINE. Tree, to 100 or occasionally 150 ft., with slender, spreading, somewhat pendu- lous branches forming a narrow open pyramid: branchlets puberulous, yellow- ish or reddish brown: winter buds ovate, acute: lys. stiff, bluish green and glaucous, 1)^-4 in. long, with few inconspicuous or no lines on the back: cones short- peduncled, cylindric, slender, slightly curved, 5-11 in. long, yellowish brown; scales pointed by the slightly thickened umbo; seed red-brown, mottled with black, Jiin. long. Brit. Col. to Idaho and Calif. S.S. 11:540, 541. G.F. 5:5, 7. R.H. 1869, p. 126 (as P. Groezelieri). F.E. 31:293.— Similar to P. Strobus, but forming a some- what narrower, more slender pyramid; hardy as far north as Mass. 10. Lambertiana, Douglas. SUGAR PINE. Fig. 2965. Tree, to 200 or 220 ft., with spreading somewhat pendulous branches forming a narrow open pyramid ; old trees usually with flat-topped wide- spreading open head: branchlets brown, pubescent: winter buds oblong-obovate, apiculate: Ivs. stout, sharply pointed, dark bluish green, 3-4 in. long, with con- spicuous white lines on the back: cones on peduncles 2-3^ in. long, cylindric, often slightly curved, light brown, lustrous, 10-20 in. long; seed about %in. long, dark brown or nearly black. Ore. to Mex. S.S. 11:542, 543. Gn. 31, pp. 152, 153. G.C. II. 23:11; III. 1:769. F.S.R. 1, p. 129. M.D.G. 1905:126. G.W. 8, p. 617.— One of the tallest trees of the Pacific Coast; in the eastern states it is hardy as far north as Mass., but grows slowly; has handsome dark foliage. 11. Ayacahuite, Ehrenb. (P. Bonapdrtea, Roezl. P. Don-Pedrii, Roezl. P. Loudo- niana, Gord.). Tree, to 100 ft., with spreading, slender branches: branchlets yellowish brown, finely pubescent: lys. slender and somewhat pendulous, bluish green, 4-6 in. long: cones short-stalked, cylindric-conical, gradually narrowed toward the apex, often slightly curved, brownish yellow, 9-15 in. long; seeds about J^in. long, gray -brown, mottled dark brown. N. Mex. G.C. II. 18:493; III. 20:751,753. Gn. 25, pp. 192, 193. C.L.A. 7:364. — Handsome tree, somewhat re- sembling the white pine, but foliage more slender, especially ornamental with its large cones. Not hardy N. Section II. PARACEMBRA. Group 4. CEMBROIDES. 12. Parryana, Engelm., not Gord. (P. quadrifolia, Sudw.). NUT PINE. PINNON. Tree, to 40 ft., with stout, spreading branches, forming a regular pyramid, but in old age usually round-topped and irreg- ular: branchlets puberulous, light grayish brown: Ivs. 3-5, usually 4, rigid, incurved, pale glaucous green, IJ^-IM m- long: cone subglobose, 1^-2 in. broad, chest- nut-brown, lustrous; apophysis thick, pyramidal, conspicuously keeled; umbo with minute recurved prickle; seed about Min. long. Calif. S.S. 11:549. M.D.G. 1903:97.— Not hardy N. PINUS PINUS 2639 13. cembroides, Zucc. (P. osteosperma, Engelm.). Small tree, usually not over 20 ft., with stout spreading branches forming a round-topped head: branchlets dark orange, pubescent at first: Ivs. usually 3, some- times 2, slender, dark green, with stomata on all 3 faces, much incurved, 1-2 in. long: cone subglobose, 1-2 in. broad; apophysis pyramidal, strongly keeled, lustrous brown, with broad obtuse umbo; seeds oblong- obovate, 3^-^in. long, dark brown, with very narrow wing. Ariz, to Low. Calif, and N. Mex. S.S. 11:550. G.F. 4:353. F.S. 4, p. 3256.— A slow-growing densely branched pine; tender. By some authors the preced- ing and the two following species are referred to this species as simple variations in the number of Ivs. 14. edulis, Engelm. (Carydpitys edulis, Small). NUT PINE. Fig. 2966. Small tree, 10-20 or occasion- ally to 40 ft., with horizontal branches, bushy when young, with low, round-topped head in old age: branch- lets light yellowish brown, puberulous at first: Ivs. 2^-3, rigid, dark green, %-lK in. long: cones almost sessile, broadly ovate, greenish yellow, lustrous, about 1H in. long; apophysis pyramidal, strongly keeled; umbo with minute recurved tip; seed %in. long, with narrow wing remaining attached to the scale. Colo, to N. Mex. and Texas. S.S. 11:552. F.E. 29:205— Hardy as far north as Mass., forming a slow-growing and com- pact bush. The seeds are an important article of food among the Indians. Var. albo-variegata, Hort., has white Ivs. mixed with the green ones. 15. monophylla, Torr. & Frem. (P. Fremontiana, Endl.). Tree, 15-20, occasionally to 50 ft., similar to the preceding: branchlets light orange, glabrous: Ivs. usually solitary, sometimes 2, terete, rigid, spinescent, glaucous green, %-lH in. long: cones broadly ovate, light brown, 1^4-2 in. long; apophysis depressed-pyram- idal, ridged, the flattened umbo with a minute in- curved tip; seed Y^- long. Calif, to Colo, and Ariz. S.S. 11 :551. G.C. II. 20:44; 26:137.^Of slow growth, hardy as far north as Mass. The solitary If. has been believed to consist of 2 connate ones, but this is cer- tainly not the case, as the solitary fibre-vascular bun- dle plainly shows. 2966. Pinus edulis. CXH) Group 5. GERARDIAN^E. 16. Bungeana, Zucc. LACE-BARK PINE. WHITE- BARK PINE. Tree, to 80 or 100 ft., with long and slen- der branches: bark flaky, light gray: young branches grayish green, glabrous: Ivs. rigid, acute, light green, 2-4 in. long: cones almost sessile, conic-ovate, light yellowish brown, 2-3 in. long; apophysis much broader than high, ridged, with a triangular pointed and recurved umbo; seed dark brown, with narrow wing, M-Min. long. N. W. China. B.M. 8240. G.C. II. 18:9. — Hardy slow-growing tree of bushy habit hi cult, and with rather sparse light green foliage. Group 6. BALFOURIANJE. 17. Balfouriana, Jeffrey. FOXTAIL PINE. Tree, to 40, occasionally 90 ft., narrow-pyramidal when young, irregular and open in old age: branchlets dark brown, 2967. Scotch pine.— Pinus sylvestris . No. 25. puberulous at first: Ivs. crowded, incurved and pressed against the branches, rigid, acute, dark green on the back, with conspicuous white lines inside, 1-1 3^ in. long, remaining for 10-12 years on the branches: cones pendulous, subcylindric, dark purplish brown, 3M~5 in. long; apophysis flattened, the concave oblong umbo with minute incurved prickle; seed Hm- long. Calif. S.S. 11:553.— Not hardy N. 18. aristata, Engelm. (P. Balfouriana var. aristdta, Engelm.). HICKORY PINE. FOXTAIL PINE. Bushy tree, occasionally to 50 ft., sometimes a semi-prostrate shrub: branchlets light orange and almost glabrous: Ivs. stout or slender, dark green, 1-1 ^ in. long, with white lines inside: cones cylindric-ovate, 3-3^ in. long; apophysis elevated; umbo with a slender incurved spine to Min. long; seed ]^n. long. Calif, to Utah and Ariz. S.S. 11:554. G.C. III. 20:719. M.D. 1904, p. 49 (pi. 5). — Hardy as far north as Mass.; in cult, usually a handsome low, bushy shrub of distinct habit: Ivs. often sprinkled with resinous dots. Section III. PARAPINASTER. Group 7. PINILE. 19. Rnea, Linn. STONE PINE. Tree, to 80 ft., with long, horizontally spreading branches forming in older trees a broad, flat-topped head: branchlets pale brown: buds with revolute scales, oblong-ovate, not resinous: Ivs. rigid, acute, bright green, 5-8 in. long: cones broadly ovate, chestnut-brown, 4-5 H in- l°ng> apophysis depressed-pyramidal, radiately ridged; umbo flat, obtuse; seed reddish brown, %in. long, edible. S. Eu. G.C. II. 20:45; III. 4:604, 605. Gn. 27, pp. 245-7; 50, p. 460; 76, p. 648. H.W. 1, pp. 170, 171. F.S.R. 2, p. 274. J.H. III. 68:447.— Tree of picturesque habit, with a trunk usually destitute of branches for a con- siderable height and with a wide-spreading parasol- like head. Not hardy N.; in warmer regions often cult, for its edible seeds. Group 8. LONGIPOLLB. 20. canariensis, C. Smith. Tree, to 80 ft., with slender branches forming a broad, round-topped head: branch- lets yellowish: Ivs. slender, spreading and pendulous, light green and lustrous, 9-12 in. long, with medial resin-ducts: cones cylindric-ovate, 4-8 in. long; apophy- sis low-pyramidal, irregularly 4-sided, light brown and 2640 PINUS PINUS glossy, with obtuse umbo; seed J^in. long. Canary Isls. G.C. III. 3:721.— Handsome pine cult, in Calif., where it does very well and grows faster than the native P. radiata, even in very rocky and dry locations; in colder regions grown sometimes in the greenhouse. 21. longifdlia, Roxbg. (P. Roxburghii, Sarg.). Tree, to 100 ft. or more, with round -topped symmetrical 2968. Mugho pine. — Pinus montana var. Mughus. No. 26. head: branchlets light yellow-brown: whiter buds oblong, light chestnut-brown, not resinous: Ivs. slen- der, pendulous, light green, 8-12 in. long, with external resin-ducts: cones short-stalked, conic-ovate, 4-7 in. long; apophysis elongated-pyramidal, compressed, more or less recurved; umbo obtuse; seed %-\ in. long. Himalayas. — Important forest tree in its native coun- try. Not hardy N., but cult, in Calif. Very decorative as a young plant, with its long drooping light green foliage. Section IV. PINASTER. Group 9. LARICIONBS. 22. densifldra, Sieb. & Zucc. JAPANESE RED PINE. Tree, to 100 ft., with spreading branches forming an irregular, rather broad head: branchlets orange-yellow, bloomy: buds oblong-ovate, chestnut-brown: Ivs. slender, acute, bright bluish green, 2*^-5 in. long: cones short-stalked, conic-ovate to oblong, grayish brown, somewhat oblique at the base, about 2 in. long; apophysis flattened and slightly ridged, those near the base sometimes elongated; umbo small, with a short prickle or obtuse; seed grayish yellow, J^in. long. Japan. S.Z. 2 : 112. S.I.F. 1 : 1. Gn.M. 2 :22.— Orna- mental hardy tree, rapidly growing when young, often very picturesque when older. Many garden forms are cult, in Japan, several of them with variegated Ivs. The best are perhaps var. umbraculif era, Mayr, a low form with horizontally spreading branches forming a flat head; var. pendula, Mayr, with pendulous branches; var. a&rea, Mayr, with yellow foliage; var. albo-termi- nata, Mayr, with the tips of the Ivs. yellowish white, and var. Oculus-draconis, Mayr, like var. variegata, Mayr, similar to the varieties, of the same name under P. Thunbergii. (No. 28.) 23. Massoniana, Lamb. Tree, to 80 ft., with slender, spreading branches: branchlets yellowish brown: Ivs. very slender and thin, light green, 5-8 in. long: cones oblong-ovate or ovate, dull brown, 2-3 in. long; apophysis flattened,' slightly keeled, with a small, flat, unarmed umbo; seed j^in. long. China. — Not hardy N. and rarely cult. Often confounded with P. sinensis and P. densiflora. 24. resinSsa, Ait. RED PINE. NORWAY PINE. Tree, to 70, occasionally to 150 ft., with stout spreading and sometimes pendulous branches forming a broad pyram- idal head when young and an open round-topped one in old age: branchlets orange-color: buds ovate, acumi- nate, light brown, resinous: Ivs. slender and flexible, acute, dark green and lustrous, 4-6 in. long: cones sub- sessile, conic-ovate, light brown, llArZlA in. long; apophysis flattened, conspicuously keeled, obtuse, with small dark unarmed umbo; seeds dark brown, }/gin. long. Newfoundland to Man., south to Pa. and Minn. S.S. 11:550, 551. A.G. 12:645. C.L.A. 11:310.— One of the most ornamental pines for northern parks, quite hardy and of vigorous growth. Lumber tree. 25. sylvestris, Linn. SCOTCH or SCOTS PINE. Fig. 2967. Tree, to 70, or occasionally 120 ft., with spread- ing, often somewhat pendulous branches, pyramidal when young, with broad and round-topped often pic- turesque head in old age: branchlets dull grayish yel- low: winter-buds oblong ovate, brown, resinous: Ivs. rigid, acute, twisted, bluish green, l}^-3 in. long: cones short-stalked, conic-oblong, grayish or reddish brown, 1/4-2H in. long; apophysis little thickened, slightly keeled, only those near the base elongated; umbo small, obtuse; seed dark gray, Km- long- Eu. to W. and N. Asia. Gn. 36, p. 167; 38, p. 455; 49, p. 296. H.W. 1:4, pp. 121-6. F.E. 29:157. G.C. III. 34:298. F.S.R. 1, p. 16. — One of the most important timber trees of Eu. It is quite hardy, but has little to recommend it as an ornamental tree. Several geographical and garden forms have been distinguished. Var. argentea, Stev. Foliage light bluish green, with silvery hue. Var. aurea, Beissn., with the young Ivs. golden yellow. F.E. 13 : 972 (pi. 14). Var. nivea, Schwerin. Lvs. a dirty greenish white. Var. Beissneriana, Schwerin. Lvs. green at first, changing to golden yellow in summer. Var. colum- naris compacta, Bailly. Slow-growing, dense, columnar form. R.H. 1889, p. 393. Var. fastigteta, Carr. (var. pyramiddlis, Hort.). Of pyramidal habit. Var. virgata, Casp. Sparingly branched form with long flagellate branches. H.W. 1, p. 126. Var. crispata, Schwerin. Lvs. curved in different directions, having a crisp appearance. Var. pendula, Beissn. With pendulous branches. Var. pumila, Beissn. Dwarf globose bush. Besides these varieties a number of geographical races have been distinguished which differ chiefly in habit, growth, and hardiness and are more of silvicultural than of horti- cultural interest. The best known are var. rigensis, 2969. Austrian pine. — Pinus nigra var. austriaca ( X 1A) • No. 27. Loud., with a straight tall st,; var. lapponica, Fries (P. lappdnica, Mayr). A pyramidal form of slow growth : Ivs. broader and shorter, remaining green on the branches for 4-7 years: cones more yellowish. N. Eu. Var. engadinensis, Heer. A slow-growing pyramidal form with thick and rigid Ivs. 1-13^ in. long and gray- ish green. Tyrol. PINUS PINUS 2641 2970. Pinus ponderosa. ( X H) 26. montana, Mill. Swiss MOUNTAIN PINE. Very variable in habit, usually low, often prostrate shrub, sometimes pyramidal tree to 40 ft., similar to the pre- ceding: branchlets usually of darker, brownish color: Ivs. bright green, acutish, stout, crowded, %-2 in, long: cones ovate or conic-ovate, M-2}£ in. long; apo- physis often pyramidal; umbo light gray, sur- rounded by a blackish ring. An anatomical character in the Ivs. to distinguish this species from the preceding is found in the cells of the epidermis which are of nearly equal diam. with a dot-like central space in P. syhestris, but in this species are much higher than broad with a dash-like central space. Mts. of Cent. Eu. Gn. 30, p. 225. Mn.5,p.49. H.W. 1:5, pp. 140-3. M.D. 1912, pp. 141-8. G.W. l,p. 351.— Hand- some hardy low shrub with ascending branches densely clothed with bright green foliage; ornamental as single specimens or for cover- ing rocky slopes and as undergrowth in open woods. A very variable species which has been divided according to the cones into the following 3 varieties or subspecies: Var. uncinata, Willk. (including vars. rostrdta and rotundata, Ant., var. arborea, Tubeuf)- Cone very oblique, usually deflexed; apophysis pyram- idal, with often reflexed umbo. Often arborescent. Var. pumilio, Willk. (P. pumilio, Haenke. P. carpdtica, Hort., var. frutescens erecta, Tubeuf). Cone regular, subglobose to ovate, before maturity glaucous and usually violet-purple, ripe yellowish or dark brown. Usually shrubby and upright. Var. Mughus, Willk. (P. Miighus, Scop., var. prostrate, Tubeuf). Fig. 2968. Cone regular, conical or conic-oval, with usually prickly umbos, not bloomy, yellowish brown before ripening, cinnamon-brown when ripe. Usually shrubby and prostrate. Gn. M.2:23. Var. aureo-variegata, Schwerin, has some of Ivs. golden yellow. Var. gracilis, Schwerin, is 'a regular pyramidal form with Ivs, 1-1 M m- long. M.D. 1906, p.' 193. 27. nigra, Arnold (P. Laricio, Poir.). AUSTRIAN PINE. Tree, to 100 or occasionally 150 ft., with stout, spreading branches in regular whorls forming a sym- metrical pyramid, in old age sometimes broad and flat- topped: branchlets usually light brown: buds ovate or oblong-ovate, light brown, resinous: Ivs. stiff, acute, dark green, 3-6 H in- long: cones sessile, ovate, yellow- ish brown, glossy, usually 2-3 % in. long; apophysis depressed, conspicuously keeled; umbo flattened, obtuse or with a very short prickle; seeds gray, ^in. long. S. Eu. to W. Asia. — Very variable and usually the following geographical varieties are distin- guished: Var. austriaca, Schneid. (P. Laricio var. austriaca, Endl. P. austriaca, Hoss. P. nigricans, Hort.). Fig. 2969. Tall tree, with dark gray bark, broadly ovate head and very dark green, rigid Ivs. 3-4 in. long: branchlets grayish or yellowish 297i. Pinus Tada brown. S.E. Eu., from Austria to No. 33. Dalmatia and Rumania. Gn. 19, p. 477; 38, p. 113. F.S.R. 3, p. 10. F.E. 18:376 (pi. 84). G.W. 15, p. 466, H.W. 1:6, pp. 148-51. Mn. 10, p. 170. R.H. 1894, p. 271. Var. Pallasiina, Schneid. (P. Pattasidna, Lamb.). CRIMEAN PINE. Tall tree, with long and stout branches: lys. dark green and glossy: cones light brown, about 4 in. long. W. Asia. G.C. II. 20:785; 21:481. Var. calabrica, Schneid. (P. Laricio calabrica, Delam.). CALABRIAN PINE. Tall tree, with shorter ascending branches forming a narrower, less dense head: Ivs. of lighter green: branchlets light brown. Italy, Sicily. Var. pindica, Rehd. (P. Laricio pindica, Mast. P. pindica, Formanek). Lvs. pale green, about 5 in. long: cones about 3 in. long with convex apophysis and small obtuse umbo. Thessaly. G.C. III. 31:304. Var.leuco- dermis, Rehd. (P. leucodermis, Ant.). Pyramidal tree: bark light gray, broken into angular plates: Ivs. dark green, 2-4 in. long: cones oblong-ovate, light grayish brown, dull, about 3 in. long. S. E. Eu. H.W. 1, p. 158-61. Var. Poiretiana, Schneid. (P. Laricio, Poir. P. Laricio corsicana, Hort.). CORSICAN PINE. Tall tree, to 2972. Seedlings and young plant of Pinus palustris. No. 34. 150 ft., with shorter ascending branches forming a nar- rower head: bark gray: branchlets reddish brown: Ivs. lighter green, 4-6 in. long. Corsica. R.H. 1897, pp. 355, 357. F.S.R. 1, p. 33. Gn. 27, p. 321; 29, p. 104; 36, p. 523; 52, p. 219. G.C. II. 21:15; IH. 4:693, 705. Var. tenuifdlia, Schneid. (P. Laricio tenuifblia, Part. P. Sdlzmannii, Dun. P. monspeliensis, Salzmann. P. pyrenaica, Lapeyr. P. cebennensis, Hort. P. horizon- talis, Hort.). Tree, to 60 ft.: branchlets orange-colored: Ivs. slender, to 6K in. long: cones small, about 2 in. long. Of the horticultural varieties may be mentioned var. pendula, Rehd. (P. Laricio pendida, Beissn.); var. pygmsea, Rehd. (P. Laricio pygmxa, Rauch), a dwarf. dense bushy form; var. prostrata, Rehd. (P. L. prostrata, Beissn.), of prostrate habit, and var. MSseri, Rehd. (P. L. Mbseri, Moser), compact and dwarf, needles turning golden yellow in winter. — The var. aus- triaca is hardy N., the others are at least hardy as far north as Mass. They are of rapid growth and conspic- uous by their large, dark green foliage. Var. tenuifolia 2642 PINUS PINUS is especially very handsome as a young plant, with its long, dense Ivs. 28. Thunbergii, Parl. (P. Massonidna, Sieb. & Zucc., not Lamb.). JAPANESE BLACK PINE. Tree, to 100 ft., or occasionally 120 ft., with spreading, often somewhat pendulous branches, forming a broad, pyramidal head: 2973. Cone of Pinus palustris (XJi)- No. 34. branchlets orange-yellow, the winter buds oblong, grayish or silvery white: Ivs. stiff, sharply pointed, bright green, 3-4H in. long: cones short-stalked, conic- ovate, grayish brown, 2-3 in. long; apophysis flattened, with small, depressed umbo, obtuse or with a minute Erickle; seed grayish brown, ^in. long. Japan. G.C. 1.23:345. S.Z.2:113. S.I.F. 1:1.— Handsome tree and hardy N. Several horticultural varieties have been intro. from Japan: one of the most distinct is var. Oculus-dracdnis, Mayr, each If. being marked with 2 yellow bands and therefore the tufts of the Ivs. at the end of the branches, if seen from above, show alternate yellow and green rings, hence the name Oadus-draconis (dragon-eye). Var. variegate, Hort., has the Ivs. partly yellow or occasionally wholly yellowish white. There are also similar forms in P. densiflora, which may be distinguished by the brown color of the winter buds. 29. sinensis, Lamb. (P. leucos- perma,' Maxim. P. funebris, Komar. P. Henryi, Mast. P. Wilsonii, Shaw. P. tabiMformis, Carr.). Tree, to 70 ft.: bark of trunk dark gray, fissured, red on the limbs: branchlets pale orange-yellow or pale grayish yellow, slightly bloomy while young: winter buds oblong, light brown, lustrous, slightly or not resinous: Ivs. 2^3, oftener 2, stiff, glaucescent, with rough margins, 2-4 in. long: cones subsessile, ovoid, llA-2^i in. long, persist- ent for several years, pale yellow- brown; apophysis rhombic, prominently keeled, with an ob- tuse or mucronate umbo; seeds brown, mottled or whitish, over J^in. long, with the wing %in. long. Cent, and W. China. Var. densata, Shaw (P. densdta, Mast. P. prdminens, Mast.). Lvs. 3-5 in. long, stiff: cones ovoid, 2-2^ in. long, oblique, with their pos- terior apophysis tumid and prominent. Var. yunnanensis, Shaw (P. yunnanensis, Franch.). Lvs. oftener 3, slender, 4-8 in. long: cones 2^-3^4 in. long; apophysis flat; umbo small; seed with wing nearly 1 in. long. S.W. China. G.C. III. 38:226. 2975. Pinus caribasa No. 35. 2974. Leaf-bundle of Pinus palustris. No. 34. Group 10. AUSTRALES. 30. ponderdsa, Douglas (P. Benthamiana, Hartw.). YELLOW PINE. BULL PINE. Fig. 2970. Tree, to 150, occasionally to 230 ft., with stout spreading and often pendulous branches usually ascending at the ends and forming a narrow, spire-like head : branchlets orange-brown, fragrant when broken: winter buds oblong-ovate or ovate, resinous: Ivs. acute, dark green, 5-11 in. long: cones almost sessile, often in clusters, ovate- oblong, light reddish or yel- lowish brown and lustrous, 3-6 in. long; apophysis depressed- pyramidal or flattened, with a broadly triangular umbo ter- minated by a stout, usually recurved prickle; lower scales with more elongated apex; seed Min. long. Brit. Col. to Mex., east to Neb. and Texas. S.S. 11:560,561. G.F. 8:395. G.C. III. 8:557, 561, 569. F.S.R. 3, p. 99. M.D.G. 1905:126.— One of the tallest and most im- portant pines of the western states. Hardy as far north as N. Y., and in sheltered positions to Mass. Var. pendula, H. W. Sarg., has drooping branches. Var. scopul&rum, Engelm. (P. scopulbrum, Lemm.), is a geo- graphical variety, smaller in every part; usually to 75 ft. high: Ivs. 5-7 in. long, some- times in 2's: cones smaller, ovate. S. D. to Mex. and Texas. S.S. 11:564. G.C. II. 9:797. M.D. 1912, p. 364. Somewhat hardier than the type. — P. Mdlletii, Mott., is probably a form of this species with more ascending branches forming a rather narrow pyramidal head. R.H. 1913, p. 265. Fig. 2970 is adapted from Pacific R. R. Report. 31. Jeffreyi, Balfour (P. ponder dsa var. Jeffreyi, Vasey). JEFFREY'S PINE. Tree, to 120 or occasionally to 180 ft., with short spreading or often pendulous branches, the uppermost ascending, forming an open pyramidal and sometimes narrow spire-like head : young branches glaucous, fragrant when broken : winter buds oblong-ovate, not resinous: Ivs. stout, acute, pale bluish green, 5-8 in. long: cones conic-ovate, light brown, 6-12 in. long; apophysis depressed, keeled; umbo elongated into a slender recurved spine; seed about Hin. long. Ore. to Calif. S.S. 11:562, 563. G.C. 11.22:813; III. 5:361,369. G.F. 5:185. B.M. 8257. G.W. 2, p. 199.— Distinct and ornamental pine of symmetrical habit when young, hardy as far north as Mass. Among the hardier species this pine has the longest Ivs. 32. echinata, Mill. (P. mltis, Michx.). SPRUCE PINE. YELLOW PINE. Tree, to 100 or 120 ft., with slender often pendulous branches in regular whorls: winter buds oblong-ovate, brown: Ivs. slender, acute, dark bluish green, some- times in 3's, 3-5 in. long: cones short - stalked or almost sessile, conic-oblong, dull brown, 1^-2 in. long; apophysis flattened; umbo little elevated, with short straight or curved prickle; 2976. Pinus caribaea. (X?i) PINUS seeds X-K™. long. N. Y. to Fla., west to Dl. and Texas. S.S. 11:587. — Handsome tree, with broad, oval head, hardy as far north as Mass. 33. Tseda, Linn. LOBLOLLY PINE. OLD FIELD PINE. FRAXKIXCEXSE PINE. Fig. 2971 (adapted from U. S. Forestry Report). Tree, to 100, occasionally to 170 ft., with spreading branches, the upper ascending, form- ing a compact round-topped head: branchlets yellow- ish brown, sometimes slightly bloomy: winter buds oblong, resinous: Ivs. slender but stiff, acute, bright green, 6-9 in. long: cones sessile, spreading, conic- oblong, light reddish brown, 3-5 in. long; apophysis flattened or depressed-pyramidal; umbd small, with short triangular, recurved spine, lower scales not elongated; seed ^in. long. Del. to Fla. and Texas. S.S. 11:577, 578. — Not hardy N., and rarely cult, for ornament. 34. palustris, Mill. (P. australis, Michx.). LONG- LEAF PIXE. SOUTHERN PIXE. Figs. 2965, 2972-2974. Tree, to 100 or 120 ft., with ascending branches forming an oblong open head: branchlets orange-brown: winter buds whitish, oblong: Ivs. crowded, forming tufts at the end of branchlets, dark green, 8-18 in. long, with internal resinnlucts: cones almost sessile, cylindric, dull brown, 6-10 in. long; apophysis flattened; umbo dark brown, with triangular, reflexed short spines; seed almost 3^in. long. Va. and Fla., to Miss., along the coast. S.S. 11: 589, 590. G.F. 10:115.— Very impor- tant timber tree, but rarely planted for ornament; hardy only S. PINUS 2043 G.C. II. 22:553; III. 3:629. G.W. 9, pp. 469, 471. H.W. 1:7, pp. 162-5.— Not hardy N. and of little orna- mental value, but recommended for seaside planting. Trunk usually slender and destitute of branches for a considerable height: foliage thin and sparse, in tufts 2977. Cone of Pinus clausa (natural size). No. 39. Branches are imported in great quantities into the northern cities in midwinter and used for decorations on account of their large handsome foliage. Figs. 2972-2974 are adapted from U. S. Forestry Report. 35. caribsea, Morelet (P. cubensis, Griseb. P. hetero- phylla, Sudw. P. Elliottii, Engelm.). SLASH PIXE. SWAMP PIXE. Figs. 2975, 2976. Tree, to 100 or 120 ft,, with horizontally spreading branches forming a round- topped broad and compact head: branchlets orange- brown: winter buds cylindric, light brown: Ivs. dark green and lustrous, acute, in 3's and 2's, 8-12 in. long, with internal resin-ducts: cones short-peduncled, conic- oblong, dark brown and glossy, 3-6 y> in. long; apophysis flattened, keeled; umbo small, with minute recurved prickles; seed J^-^in. long. Ga. to Fla., near the coast. Cuba. 8.8.11:591,592. G.C. III. 35:179. G.F. 8:223 (adapted in Fig. 2996). — Handsome pine, with compact broad head, hardy only S. Fig. 2975 is adapted from U. S. Forestry Report. Group 11. IXSIGXE<. 36. halepensis, Mill. (P. alepensis, Poir.). ALEPPO PIXE. Tree, to 60 ft., with short branches forming an open round-topped head: branchlets slender, yellow- ish or light greenish brown: winter buds small, cylin- dric, not resinous: Ivs. sometimes in 3's, slender, light green, 2J-4— 4 in. long: cones short-stalked, spreading or deflexed, usually 1-3, conic-ovate or conic-oblong, yellowish brown, unarmed, 2%-3% in. long; apophy- sis flattened, with a transverse line and slightly or not elevated obtuse umbo; seed J^in. long. Medit. region. 2978. Cone of Pinus clausa, grown over by the branch. ( X ?i) at the end of branchlets. Var. Pityilsa, Gord. (P. Pityiisa, Stev.), is a smaller tree with slenderer branches, longer Ivs., and smaller cones. W. Asia. Var. brutia, Henry (P. bridia, Ten. P. ddarica, Medw. P.pyren&ica, David). Lvs. 4-7, rarely 8 in. long, more rigid, bright or dark green: cones sessile, not deflexed, usually in whorls of 2-6, 2—4 in. long with rugose depressed knobs. S. Eu., W. Asia. G.C. III. 4: 268. H.W. 1, pp. 172, 173. R.H. 1867, pp. 150, 151. 37. Pinaster, Ait. (P. maritima, Poir.). CLUS- TER PIXE. Tree, to 100 ft., with spreading or sometimes pendulous branches forming a pyram- idal head: branchlets bright reddish brown: buds oblong-oval, brown, not resinous: Ivs. stiff, acute, usually twisted, glossy green, 5-9 in. long: cones short-peduncled, clustered, conic- oblong, light brown and glossy, 4-7 in. long; apophysis pyramidal, conspicuously keeled with prominent triangular, acute umbo; seed grayish brown, J^in. long. S. Eu., near the coast. Gn. 14, p. 20. G.W. 9, p. 470. H.W. 1, pp. 168, 169. — Handsome pine of regular, pyramidal habit and rapid growth, but not hardy N. In Eng- land it is much used for seaside planting and the vars. Hamiltonii, Parl., var. Lemoniana, Endl. (P. Pinaster Aberdbnix, Loud.), a.nd var. minor, Loisel., are occa- sionally cult, in English gardens. 38. pungens, Lamb. TABLE MOCXTAIX PIXE. POV- ERTY PIXE. Tree, to 30, occasionally to 60 ft,, with stout spreading branches forming a broad open often flat-top- ped head: branch- lets light orange: winter buds oblong, obtuse, dark chest- nut-brown: Ivs. stout, twisted, sharply pointed, dark green, 1K-2.M in. long: cones conic- ovate, oblique at the base, light brown, ly-r-^A in. long; apophysis pyram- idal and conspicu- ously keeled, the conical elongated umbo ending in a stout curved spine; seed light brown, 2979. Pinos contort* (X>i). No. 42. 2644 PINUS PINUS Min. long. N. J. to N. C. and Tenn. S.S. 11:584 — Hardy as far north as Mass., but of little ornamental value. 39. clausa, Vasey (P. inops var. clausa, Engelm.). SAND PINE. SPRUCE PINE. Figs. 2977, 2978. Tree, to 20, occasionally to 70 ft., with slender spreading 2980. Pinusrigida No. 45. branches: branchlets red-brown: winter buds oblong, obtuse, not or little resinous: Ivs. slender and flexible, acute, dark green, 2-3 in. long: cones short-stalked, often oblique at the base, conic-ovate, dark reddish brown, 2-3 H in. long, remaining closed for 3 or 4 years after ripening and occasionally becoming enveloped by the growing wood of the st. ; apophysis depressed-pyram- idal, conspicuously keeled; umbo with a short, stout spine. Fla. and Ala. near the coast. S.S. 11:582. G.F. 5:161. — Little known in cult., and not hardy N. 40. virginiana, Mill. (P. inops, Ait.). SCRUB PINE. JERSEY PINE. Tree, to 40, or sometimes to 100 ft., with slender horizontal or pendulous branches in remote and irregular whorls, forming a broad open pyramid or sometimes flat-topped : winter buds oblong, dark brown : Ivs. stiff, twisted, spreading, acutish, l%-2% in. long: cones conic-oblong, reddish brown, \yr^A in- long; apophysis little elevated, with a broad depressed- pyramidal umbo ending in a short recurved prickle; seed pale brown, Mm- long. N. Y. to S. C., west to Ky. and Ind. S.S. 11:581. — Hardy as far north as Mass., but of little ornamental merit. Valuable in the middle states for covering dry and barren soil. 41. Banksiana, Lamb. (P. divaricata, Dum.-Cours.). JACK PINE. Tree, to 70 ft., usually lower, sometimes shrubby, with slender spreading branches, forming broad open head: branchlets yellowish to purplish brown: winter buds oblong-ovate, light brown, very resinous: Ivs. stiff, twisted, spreading, acute or obtusish, dark or bright green, about 1 in. long: cones conic- oblong, usually curved, pale yellow-brown and lustrous, unarmed, 1^-2 in. long, remaining on the tree for 12- 15 years; apophysis flattened, with a transverse line and a small dark obtuse umbo; seed black, %in. long. Hud- son Bay to N. Y., west to Minn. S.S. 11:588.— The most northern of all American pines and quite hardy, but not of much ornamental value. 42. cont6rta, Douglas (P. Boldnderi, Parl. P. con- tdrta var. Boldnderi, Koehne). SCRUB PINE. Fig. 2979 (adapted from Pacific R. R. Report). Tree, to 20, occasionally to 30 ft., with rather stout branches form- ing a round-topped compact or open head: branchlets light orange or orange-brown: buds ovate, dark chest- nut-brown, resinous: Ivs. stiff, twisted, acutish, dark green, 1-2 in. long: cones ovate or conic-ovate, very oblique at the base, often remaining closed for several years after maturity, 1-2 in. long, light yellowish brown and lustrous, scales of the upper side with elevated, pyramidal apex, the dark umbo ending hi a slender incurved spine. Alaska to Calif., and the variety east to Mont, and Colo. G.C. II. 19:45. S.S. 11:567. Var. latifolia, Engelm. (P. contorta var. Murrayana, Engelm. P. Murrayana, Balfour. P. Boursieri, Carr.), LODGE- POLE PINE, is the form in the Rocky Mts. and a taller tree of pyramidal habit, to 80, or occasionally to 150 ft. tall, with longer, lighter green, 13^-3H-in.-long Ivs., less oblique cones. S.S. 11:518. G.C. 1869:191 and R.H. 1869, p. 278 (as P. Tamrac). R.H. 1854, p. 226. — In cult., it is usually a bushy low tree and is hardy N., while the typical form is tender. 43. muricata, Don. PRICKLE-CONE PINE. Tree, to 50, occasionally to 90 ft., with stout spreading branches forming a regular pyramid in young trees, in old age usually round-topped and compact: branches orange- brown: winter buds ovate, dark brown, resinous: Ivs. stiff, usually twisted, acute, dark green, 4-7 in. long: cones usually clustered, oblong-ovate, oblique at the base, chestnut-brown, 2-3 Y^, hi. long; scales of the upper side with elongated conical apex terminated by a dark triangular spiny umbo, scales of the lower side more flattened, with slender straight spines; the cones usu- ally remain closed for several years after maturity; seeds almost black, J^in. long. Calif. S.S. 11:585, 586. G.F. 10:235. F.S. 5, p. 517. G.C. II. 21:48, 49, 53; 111.45:259-61. Gn. 59, p. 129. G.M. 54:977— Hand- some pine, with regular, pyramidal head; not hardy N. 44. serotina, Michx. POND PINE. MARSH PINE. Tree, to 50, or occasionally to 80 ft.: branchlets dark orange-color: Ivs. 3, rarely 4, slender, dark green, 6-8 in. long, with stomata on all 3 faces: cones subglobose to ovate, short-stalked or nearly sessile, rounded or pointed at the apex, light yellow-brown, 2-2 }/% in. long, remaining closed for one or two years after maturity; scales thin with depressed apophysis and a small slender, mostly deciduous prickle; seeds with the wing about %in. long. N. C. to Fla. S.S. 11 : 580.— Not hardy N. 45. rigida, Mill. PITCH PINE. Figs. 2980-2983. Tree, to 80 ft., with horizontally spreading branches forming an open irregular pyramid: branchlets light brown: winter buds ovate or ovate-oblong, chestnut- brown: Ivs. stiff and spreading, acuminate, dark green, 2-5 in. long: cones almost sessile, often in clusters, 2981. Pinus rigida, with young cones. ( X *A) PINUS PINUS 2645 ovate, light brown, 2-A in. long; apophysis little ele- vated; umbo triangular, ending in a slender, recurved prickle; seed dark brown, Mm- l°ng- New Bruns. to Ga., west to Ont. and Ky. S.S. 11:579. G.F. 4:402; 10:195. G.C. III. 44:178. Gn. 31, pp. 128, 132. M.D.G. 1896:301.— Hardy pine of rapid growth when 2982. Pinus rigida, recent cone. ( X Ji) young and easily raised from seed; grows on dry and sterile soil. As an ornamental plant it may be used on dry and rocky slopes, where it becomes often very picturesque when older. It sprouts readily from stumps if cut down or destroyed by fire, but the sprouts are short-lived and never develop into trees. 46. radiata, Don (P. insignis, Douglas. P. monterey- ensis, Hort.). MONTEREY PINE. Fig. 2965. Tree, to 80 or 100 ft., with stout spreading branches forming an irregular open, round-topped head: bark thick, fur- rowed: branchlets brown: buds ovate, bright chestnut- brown: Ivs. acute, bright green, 4-6 in. long: cones short-stalked, conic-ovate, upper scales with elevated, rounded, almost hemispherical and obscurely keeled apex; umbo small, with minute straight or recurved prickle, lower scales with almost flattened apex; seed black, Min. long. S. Calif. S.S. 11:573, 574. F.S. 6, p. 44. G.C. III. 9:336, 341; 38:435. G. 12:263; 22: 131. R.H. 1906, p. 154. Gn. 36, p. 47; 49, p. 312 — Handsome species with bright green foliage and of rapid growth and bushy habit when young; valuable for seaside planting. Not hardy N. 47. attenuata, Lemm. (P.tuberculata, Gord.,notDon. P. calif drnica, Hartw., not Loisel.). KNOT-CONE PINE. Tree, usually 20, occasionally to 100 ft., with slender horizontal branches ascending at the ends, forming a broad pyra- mid, with open round -topped head in old age: bark thin, scaly: young branches slender, dark orange - brown : winter buds ob- long-ovate, dark brown: Ivs. slen- der, acuminate, pale yellowish or bluish green, 3-7, usually 4-5 in. long: cones short-stalked, usually in clusters, elongated-conical, 3J/£- 6 in. long, upper scales with pyramidal apex; umbo prominent, sharply pointed and recurved, lower scales with depressed apex 2983 Oid cone of and small prickly umbo ; seed J^m. pitch p i n e — P i n u s long. Ore. to Calif. S.S. 11:575, rigida. 576. G.C. II. 24:784, 785. G.M. 56:255. F.S. 5, p. 517c.— Of little ornamental value and not hardy N. Usually a bushy tree with sparse dull foliage. Group 12. MACROCARP^E. 48. Cdulteri, Don (P. macrocdrpa, Lindl.). PITCH PINE. Fig. 2965. Tree, to 80 ft., with stout branches, pendulous below and ascending above, forming a loose pyramidal head: winterbuds oblong-ovate, resinous: Ivs. stout, acuminate, dark bluish green, 6-12 in. long: cones short-stalked, pendent, cylindric-ovate, yellowish brown, 9-14 in. long; apophysis elongated-pyramidal, narrowed into the compressed spiny -tipped straight or incurved umbo. Calif. S.S. 11:571,572. G.C. II. 23:409, 413; III. 4:765.— Not hardy N. Old trees are often very picturesque and the large cones are con- spicuous and ornamental. 49. Sabiniana, Douglas. DIGGER PINE. BULL PINE. Fig. 2984 (adapted from Pacific R. R. Report). Tree, to 50 or occasionally 80 ft., usually divided into several sts. with short crooked branches, the lower ones pend- ent, the upper ones ascending, forming a round-topped head : Ivs. slender, flexible, pale bluish green, 8-12 in. long: cones pendent on about 2-in.- long stalks, oblong - ovate , light red- brown, 6-10 in. long; apophy- sis pyramidal, sharply keeled, flattened at the straight or in- curved apex, the lower scales with much-recurved apex ; seeds %in. long, short - winged. Calif. S.S. 11: 569. G.C. III. 4:43; 5:45. F. S. 9: 964— Not hardy N. Dis- tinct pine of loose habit and with sparse pale foliage. The seeds are edible. 50. Torreyana, Carr. SOLEDAD PINE. Tree, to 40, or occasionally to 60 ft., with spreading and sometimes ascending branches: branchlets greenish or purplish, bloomy, glabrous: Ivs. rigid, dark green, 8-13 in. long: cones broadly ovate, 4H3 in. long, chocolate-brown; apophysis low-pyramidal; umbo elongated and reflexed with short spiny tip; seeds %in. long, short-winged. S. Calif. S.S. 11:557, 558.— Rarely cult.; not hardy N. P. Abies, linn.=Picea excelsa. — P. aUncaitlis, Engelm. Pyram- idal tree, to 30, rarely 60 ft., sometimes shrubby, allied to P. flexilis: bark whitish or light brown: cones smaller, l%-3% in., subglobose or oval, purplish brown. Brit. Col. to Calif, and Wyo. S.S. 11:548. G.C. II. 24:9. Probably as hardy as P. flexilis.— P. arizonica, Engelm. (P. ponderosa var. arizonica, Shaw). Tree, to 100 ft. with pyramidal or open round-topped head, allied to P ponderosa: lys. shorter, 5-7 in. long: cones smaller, 2-2 J^ in., with recurved spines. Ariz. S.S. 11:559. — P. chihuahudna, Engelm.= P. leiophylla var. chihuahuana. — P. Gerardiana, Wall. Tree, to 60 ft., with broad round-topped head, allied to P. Bungeana: Ivs. bluish green, 2 J£-4 in. long: cones 6-9 in. long, with the tips of scales reflexed; seeds short-winged, to 1 in. long, edible. Hima- layas. Not hardy N. — P. glabra, Walt. CEDAR PINE. SPRUCE PINE. Pyramidal tree, to 80, rarely 120 ft., allied to P. echinata: Ivs. dark green, lJ^-3 in. long: cones broadly to oblong- ovate, 1J4-2 in. long. S. C. to Fla. and La. S.S. 11:583. Hardy only S. — P. Gordoniana, Hartw.=P. Montezumae. — P. Grentillex, Gord.=P. Montezumae. — P. Heldreichii, Christ. Small 2984. Pinus Sabiniana. (Cone X H, leaves and seed 2646 PINUS PIPER •tree, allied to P. nigra: Ivs. 3-4 in. long: cone 3 in. long, with im- pressed dull umbo furnished with a small curved prickle. Greece. G.C. II. 21:740.— P. insuldris, Endl. Tall tree: Ivs. 3, flaccid and very slender, 7-9 in. long: cones conic-ovate, 2^-3 in. long; scales with low pyramidal, sharply keeled apex and obtuse or on the upper scales mucronulate umbo. Philippine Isls. Not yet intro. — P. latifdlia, Sarg. (P. Mayriana, Sudw.) Tree, to 60 ft., allied to P. ponderosa: Ivs. 12-15 in. long and ^in. wide: cones oblique at the base, 3-1 in. long. Ariz. S.S. 11:565. G.F. 2:496; 8:25. Not hardy N. — P. latisquama, Engelm.=P. Pinceana. — • P. leiophjlla, Schlecht. & Cham. Allied to P. Lambertiana. Tall tree: Ivs. usually 5, slender, grayish green, 4-6 in. long: cones ovoid, nearly symmetrical, 2-3 in. long, with small recurved pricK- les. Mex. Var. chihuahuana, Shaw (P. chihuahuana, Engelm.). Lvs. usually 3 or 4, stouter and shorter. Calif, to New Mex. and Mex. S.S. 11:566. G.F.8:24. — P. macropAj/Wa, Lindl., not Engelm. =P. Montezumse. — P. Mayriana, Sudw.— P. latifolia. — P. Monte- ziimse, Lamb. (P. Gordoniana, Hartw. P. Grenvillse, Gord. P. macrophylla, Lindl., not Engelm.). Tree, to 80 ft. and more: allied to P. Torreyana: Ivs. glaucous or green, 7-16 in. long: ^ones 4-14 in. lone, light brown; apophysis depressed pyramidal, with a short, recurved spine. Mex. G.C. III. 8:465-7, 475; 15:271, 273. Gn. 56, p. 481; 58, p. 397. Very variable species, as the numerous (about 70) synonyms show. Not hardy N. — P. Nelsonii, Shaw. Allied to P. cembroides. Low bushy tree to 30 ft. : Ivs. with per- sistent sheaths 3, 2J^-3>i in. long, serrulate: cones on stout curved peduncles, cylindric; seeds wingless. Mex. G.C. III. 36:122; 37: 306.— P. pdtula, Schiede. Allied to P. Tseda. Tree, to 80 ft.: Ivs. sometimes 4 or 5, drooping, light green, 7-9 in. long: cones oblong- ovate, oblique with depressed knobs, 4 in. long. Mex. G.C. II. 23:108, 109, 117; III. 9:435. Graceful tree, but not hardy N. — P. Picea, Linn.=Abies Picea. — P. Pinceana, Gprd. (P. latisquama, Engelm.). Allied to P. cembroides. Low tree with slender branches: Ivs. usually 3, entire, 5-6 in. long: cones oblong-ovate, long-stalked, 2J4-3Ji in. long; seeds wingless. Mex. G.C. II. 18:713; III. 38: 122. — P. piimila, Regel (P. Cembra var. pumila, Pall.). Shrubby, often procumbent, allied to P. Cembra, but resin-ducts of Ivs. «xternal: Ivs. lJi-3 in. long: cone IJi in. long; seed %in. long. N.E. Siberia to Japan. Hardy. S.I.F. 2:1. G.C. III. 46:193. M.D. 1912, pp. 159, 161. ALFRED REHDER. PIPER (the ancient Latin name). Piperacese. PEP- PER. A vast genus (probably 600 to 700 species) of both the Old and New Worlds, mostly in the tropics, a few of which are in cultivation as greenhouse foliage sub- jects and in collections of economic plants. Pipers are mostly dioecious: erect or climbing woody plants, or sometimes herbaceous, and some are trees: fls. very minute, borne beneath decurrent bracts in slender, erect or drooping axillary spikes or catkins; perianth none; stamens usually 1-4; ovary 1-loculed, with a solitary erect ovule: fr. a small globular drupe or berry: Ivs. alternate, stipulate, usually entire. The pepper of commerce is the product of P. nigrum. The family contains many plants with aromatic, pungent and stimulating qualities. Some of them are used in medicine, and others yield intoxicating and masticatory products. For red pepper and chilli or chile pepper, see Capsicum and Pepper. To this genus are also referred Enckea and species sometimes grown under the name of Chavica. In choice collections, one is likely to find several species, but as they seldom fruit it is very difficult to determine then* species. In the following list are all the names that have appeared in the American trade. Piper is an exceedingly difficult genus to the systematist because of the great numbers of species, the variation of foliage in the same plant at different epochs, the diffi- culty of matching the sexes of the same species, the imperfect specimens in herbaria, and the scarcity of good studies of the plants in the wild. They are easy of cultivation. Most of those known in houses require a warmhouse temperature and a humid atmosphere. Easily multiplied by cuttings of the firm wood. They are grown for the decorative value of their drooping or bushy sprays. A. Plant erect, and bushy or arboreous. excelsum, Forst. (Macroplper excelsum, Miq.; see p. 1962, Vol. IV). Glabrous shrub, reaching 20 ft. in some of its native places: Ivs. aromatic, cordate-orbicu- lar to ovate, stalked, short-acuminate, 7-9-nerved from the base, the blade 2-4 in. across: spikes short-ped- uncled, the staminate ones 2-3 in. long and the bracts peltate, the stamens 2 or 3; pistillate spikes shorter, the fls. usually with 3 stigmas. New Zeal, and other S. Pacific islands. — Offered in Calif. A form with yellow- blotched or cream-colored foliage is known as var. aureo-pictum. methysticum, Forst. (P. inebrians, Spland. Macro- piper methysticum, Hook & Arn.). Dio3cious shrub, 8-10 ft., nearly glabrous: Ivs. round-oval, deeply cor- date at base, acuminate at apex, slightly pubescent beneath on the nerves and on the short petiole: spikes mostly shorter than the Ivs. and opposite them. Pacific islands. — From the root of this plant is made the drink known as kava, ava, yaquona. geniculatum, Swartz (Artdnthe geniculata, Miq.). Shrub with swollen nodes, the branchlets glabrous: lys. oblong or oblong-lanceolate, mostly acuminate, with several pairs of prominent veins, the petioles canalicu- late : spikes or catkins 3-5 in. long, on peduncles as long as the petioles. W. Indies, S. Amer. — Offered hi S. Calif. AA. Plant climbing, or drooping when not given support. B. Lvs. ovate-lanceolate, deciduous. Futokadsura, Sieb. JAPANESE PEPPER. Clinging closely to walls by its aerial roots: Ivs. ovate-lanceolate and acuminate, cordate at base, glabrous: fls. greenish: berries globose, red or brownish. Japan. — Handsome plant, withstanding considerable frost. BB. Lvs. broadly ovate or roundish, evergreen. nigrum, Linn. BLACK PEPPER. Plant woody below: st. strong, terete, emitting roots, tall-climbing, glabrous: Ivs. thickish, stalked, broadly ovate-oblong or nearly orbicular, the base usually rounded and oblique, 5-9-nerved above the base, the nerves alternate: fls. sometimes polygamous but usually dioecious: fr. glo- bose, red. Old World tropics, but now widely dispersed in warm countries. B.M. 3139. — Sometimes grown in hothouses, particularly amongst collections of eco- nomic plants. In the wild it is a strong climber, rooting at the nodes, sometimes reaching 20 ft. in height. It is reported as hardy at Santa Barbara, blooming but not fruiting. The dried berries, which are collected before ripe, are black and wrinkled, and constitute the black pepper of commerce. When the outer skin is removed from the ripe fruit, the product is white pepper. The commercial pepper comes mostly from eastern tropics. Cubeba, Linn. (Cubeba officinalis, Raf.). CUBES. Climbing or tree-like: Ivs. glabrous, oval, short-acumi- nate, obliquely cordate, the upper ones smaller and oval-oblong, somewhat unlike on plants of the different sexes: peduncle glabrous, about the length of petiole or somewhat surpassing it; stigmas 4: fr. a subglobose somewhat apiculate stalked berry, resembling that of P. nigrum. E. Indies. — The fr. is employed in medicine. ornatum, N. E. Br. Climbing, 10-15 ft. tall, glabrous, rooting at nodes: Ivs. glabrous "and directed to one side;" petioles slender and nearly terete, the blade pel- tate, ovate-orbicular, with a short, rather blunt point, the nerves 7 but not prominent above and uniting in loops on the margin, the upper surface of the young Ivs. shining green and covered with pinkish spots, the old Ivs. duller and whiter-spotted. Celebes. P. Betle, Linn. BETEL (which see, p. 496). Climbing, nearly or quite glabrous: Ivs. large and thick, ovate-oblong, acuminate, usually oblique at base, strongly 5-7-nerved: spikes often 4-6 in. long: fr. very fleshy, often cohering into a long-cylindrical mass. Eastern tropics. B.M. 3132. Lvs. of this and others chewed by natives with the betel-nut. — P. metdllicum, Hort. (Hallier?). Lvs. thick, rounded, handsome metallic green. Borneo. — P. officina- l-urn, C. DC. (Chavica officinarum, Hort.?) has long-elliptic some- what sharp-pointed feather-veined coriaceous Ivs. and globular united berries in a dense spike. India and Malaya. — P. porphy- rophyttum, N. E. Br. (Cissus porphyrophylla, Lindl., and of horti- culturists). Handsome climbing foliage plant with broadly cor- date-oval short-pointed Ivs. that are purple beneath and bronzy green and pink-spotted along the veins above. Probably E. Indies. F.S. 14:1491. R.H. 1883, p. 560. Lowe, 59. — P. rubronoddsum, Bull. Shrub, with red-jointed roughish sts. : Ivs. cordate-ovate, somewhat blistered, silvery gray, the petiole pubescent. Colombia. — P. rubrovendsum, Hort. Climbing: Ivs. cordate-ovate, acuminate, marked with rose-colored dots and streaks along the veins. Very like P. ornatum, and perhaps not distinct. Papua. I.H. 34:33. L. H. B. PIPSISSEWA PIQUERIA 2647 PIPSISSEWA: Chimaphila. PIPTADENIA (Greek, falling gland; meaning obscure). Leguminosae. About 45 species of shrubs or trees, mostly native to S. and Cent. Amer., a few in the tropics of the Old World, similar to Mimosa and Acacia: Ivs. bipinnate with numerous small Ifts., rarely with few and large Ifts. : fls. small, white, in axillary globose heads or cylindric spikes; petals small, equal, connate to the middle; stamens 10, free: pod broadly linear, 2-valved, not septate within and not pulpous. The following species has been intro. to Calif, by Fran- ceschi chiefly for its economic interest; in its native country it is valued for tan bark. Prop, by seeds. P. Cebfl, Griseb. (P. macrocdrpa var. Cebll, Chodat & Hassler). Tree, to 60 ft., glabrous: Ivs. with 10-16 pairs of opposite pinnae, each with 24-40 pairs of linear- oblong acutish Ifts. about Mm- long; petiole about 1 in. long with a conspicuous gland near the middle: fl.- heads globose, axillary, 1-4, J^in. across, on slender pedicels %-l in. long; stamens long-exserted : pod 6-8 in. long, about Min. wide, sinuate between the seeds. Argentina. The fol low-ing three species have been recently intro. by the Dept. of Agric.: P.communis, Benth. (Acacia gonoacantha, Mart.). Prickly tree or shrub sometimes sarmentose: branchlets puberu- lous, angled, older branches sometimes developing corky wings; prickles small: Ivs. with 5-12 pairs of pinna:-, each with many oblique, falcate, linear Ifts. : fl.-spikes 2-3 in. long, solitary or 2-3 in the axils or sometimes crowded at the end of the branches; ovary glabrous: pod linear, 3^1 in. long, reticulate, with scarcely thickened margin. Brazil. Fl. Brasil. 15, 2:74. — P. macrocdrpa, Benth. (Acacia grata, Willd.). Unarmed tree: branchlets and petioles grayish tomentulose: Ivs. about 6 in. long, with 10-25 pairs of pinnae, each with many oblique linear Ifts. scarcely 1 line long: fl.-heads peduncled, globose, many-fld., 2-4, axillary, sometimes crowded at the end of the branchlets: pod 4— 10 in. long, J^-l in. broad, with thickened margin. Brazil, 'Bolivia. — P. rlgida, Benth. (Acacia Angico, Mart.). Unarmed tree or shrub, nearly glabrous: Ivs. with 3-6 pairs of pinnae, each with many oblique linear, fal- cate, lustrous Ifts. about Hin- long: fl.-spikes axillary, 1-1 H in. long; ovary glabrous: pod linear, to 5 in. long, with slightly thick- ened margin. Brazil. It furnishes the Angico gum similar to gum arabic; the bark is rich in tannin. Other species, 'known as acacias, are likely to appear in cult. P. chrysdstachys, Benth. (Acacia chrysostachys, Sweet). Unarmed tree, puberulous: pinnae 3-6 pairs; Ifts. 8-15 pairs, oblong, obtuse, nearly J-2in. long: spikes solitary or 2, dense, 3 in. long; calyx and corolla grayish pubescent. Madagascar. The wood is used by the natives for musical instruments. — P. latifdha, Benth. (Acacia frutieosa, Mart.). To 4 ft. high: Ivs. bipinnate, glabrous, with 2 or 3 pbovate-elliptic Ifts.: fl.-spikes axillary, or terminal panicles. Brazil. — P. peregrina, Benth. The Acacia microphylla, Willd., is referred her.e. It is unarmed: pinnae 25 pairs; Ifts. 50-60 pairs, lin- ear, acute, ciliate; large gland' at base of petiole: branches and peti- oles pubescent: heads pedunculate, twin, in the axils: pod linear, ALFRED REHDER.J PIPTANTHTJS (Greek, to fall, and a flower; the teeth of the calyx, petals, and stamens fall off soon) . Legum- inosse. Two shrubs natives of the mountains of south- ern Asia, grown for ornament. Plants 3-10 ft. high: Ivs. digitately 3-foliate: fls. racemose, bracted; calyx campanulate, 5-toothed; teeth equal, lanceolate; corolla 3 times longer than the calyx; petals all with long claws; standard orbicular, erect, margins reflexed; wings oboyate; keel obovate-oblong, connate down the back, slightly incurved; stamens free; anthers uniform; ovary linear, stalked, downy, 6-10-ovuled; style filiform, incurved; stigma minute, terminal: pod linear, flattened, continuous within. Closely related to Baptisia and Thermopsis, from which it is at once distinguished by having its stipules oppo- site-connate instead of free or wanting as in those genera. As yet but little known in U. S. A. Lvs. glabrate on both sides, nepalensis, D. Don (Baptisia nepalensis, Hook. Thermopsis nepalensis, DC.). Shrub 6-10 ft. tall: branches downy: stipules small, connate; petiole 1 in. or less; Ifts. glabrescent, lanceolate, 2-4 in. long, nar- rowed to both ends: fls. 12-20 in rather dense racemes; bracts large, deciduous; calyx downy, deciduous from the base; corolla yellow, 1 in. or more long: pod 2-5 in. long, 3-10-seeded. Temperate slopes of Himalayas, 168 7,000-9,000 ft., and in Yunnan. R.H. 1914, p. 9. G.C. 111.43:178. J.H. III. 43:250. H.U. 1:260.— An at- tractive ornamental of the habit of laburnum. Flowers in May in the Middle States. Recently re-intro. from W. China; probably not hardy north of Washington, D. C. Prop, is by seeds sown in spring; if sown early in the greenhouse, the plants will sometimes bloom the same year; also prop, by soft-wood cuttings under glass in spring or early summer. AA. Lvs. reddish tomentose beneath, silky above and becoming glabrate. tomentdsus, Franch. Slender shrub 3-7 ft. tall: young branches tomentose, brownish glabrescent with age: Ifts. ovate to ovate-lanceolate, before flowering silky-white above, beneath pale reddish tomentose, nearly glabrous above with age: fls. similar to the above species but calyx with long silky hairs and sepals more acuminate: pod narrowly linear, about J^in. wide and 2-3^2 m- long. at maturity densely short-tomentose, 5-8-seeded. Wooded mountain slopes of Yunnan, China. — More beautiful and much more hardy than P. nepalensis, producing an abundance of fls. in April to May in the Middle States. Its white silky hairs give it a distinctive silvery appearance. p. L. RICKER. PrPTURUS (Greek, fallen tail, in allusion to the inflorescence of some species). Urticaceae. Erect, dioecious trees or shrubs: Ivs. alternate, 3- or 5-nerved; stipules bifid: fls. in axillary clusters or the clusters spicately arranged; male fls., perianth 4-5-fid, lobes valvate; stamens 4 or 5; female fls. on a somewhat fleshy receptacle, perianth ovoid, narrowed to a minute mouth; ovary adherent to the perianth: achenes small, surrounded by the accrescent fleshy perianths, form- ing a soft and fleshy fruit. — About 12 species, Mas- carene Isls. to Malaya, Austral., and Polynesia. P. argenteus, Wedd. Tree, 18720 ft.: Ivs. up to 8 in. long and 4 in. broad, oval-acuminate, recurved at the top, entire, dark green with silvery white marking on the upper surface, silvery white on the under surface : fls. in sessile glomerules, inconspicuous. Malaya, Austral., and Polynesia. G.W. 7, p. 111. "This has been intro. in botanic gardens. PIQUERIA (A. Piquer, Spanish physician of 18th century). Compdsitae. Under the name of Stevia ser- rata or S. serratifolia, florists grow Piqueria trinervia, Cav. (Fig. 2985), for its small white fragrant fls. and for bedding. It is native in Mex., Cent. Amer., and Hayti. It is perennial. The genus contains about 20 species of herbs or bushes, all of Trop. Amer. They have exclusively tubular fls. in densely cymose heads, the heads containing 3-5 whitish fls.; torus plane or convex, naked; pappus none or very short: achene 4-5-angled. It resembles a small eupatorium in foliage and fls. The small heads are borne in small panicled corymbs, each clus- ter terminating a slender axillary branch or peduncle. The Ivs. are opposite, lanceo- late to oblong -lanceolate, serrate - dentate, very short- stalked. There is a dwarf, compact form, var. nana, Hort., and also one with broadly white-edged Ivs., var. variegata, Hort., Fig. 2986, which are much used for bedding out. The Cent. American var. luxurians, O. 2985. Piqueria triner- Kuntze, has slightly larger via. Known to florists as heads but does not appear Stevia senata. ( x M) to have been intro. into 2648 PIQUERIA PISTACIA horticulture. The piqueria endures both sun and shade, and thrives with even indifferent treatment. For fls. it is much prized in winter, when delicate white sprays are not abundant. It demands the general treatment given zonal geraniums. Prop, by cuttings with great ease, and may begin to bloom when only 2 or 3 in. high. It often blooms in the cut- ting-bed. It also grows readily from seeds, which are handled by seeds- men. Frequent pinching will keep the plants within bounds and contrib- ute to floriferous- ness. Plants allowed to grow as they will soon become straggly and wiry. For winter bloom the plants may be handled in pots or grown in beds. A stock of compact 2986. Marginate form of pot-plants kept in Piqueria trinema. a cool corner is very useful for filling vacancies in the house. Cultivation of piqueria (by Wm. Scott). — Usually the best way to produce good flowering plants of stevia in midwinter is to save a few old plants after the flowers are cut at New Years. Cut off the old stems 5 or 6 inches above the pots and stand the plants in any cool house. The plant needs the coolest house at all times; 40° at night during the winter will grow it better than a higher temperature, but, for all that, it does not endure the slightest frost. About March 1, these old Elants will have sent out any number of small growths •om the base of the stems. These root very readily in a cool propagating-house. They should then be grown along, first in 2- and afterward in 3-inch pots, until the first of June, when they should be planted out in the open ground. It need not be very rich ground, for they are very rampant growers. Give every plant - 2 feet of space. They seldom need any artificial water- ing in summer, but they should have frequent pinching to produce bushy plants. The more shoots, the more flowers will be secured. Before there is any danger of frost in the fall, the plants should be lifted and put into 6-, 7-, or 8-inch pots. They lift well, and if stood in the shade and kept syringed for a few days they will show no bad results of the lifting. A position at the north side of a shed or wall is much better for them for the next month than under glass, but always have them in a position where they can be protected in case of a frost. By the end of October, if frost is escaped, put them in the lightest and coolest house available. If kept cool the very desirable sprays of flowers will be in perfection at Christmas, and that is the time they are most valuable. Although classed as a common cheap flower, there is a grace about stevias that makes them indispensable for many flower arrangements. T TT T) PIRCtTNIA: Phytolacca. PISCfDIA (Latin for fish and kill). Legumindsx. One or 2 species, including the fish-poison tree of the American tropics, or Jamaica dogwood. The Ivs., bark, and twigs of this tree when thrown into the water intoxicate or stun the fish so that they can be caught ' readily. (For the plant used in China for this purpose, see Cocculus.) The bark has also been used in medicine for its hypnotic effect. Botanically this genus is close to Lonchocarpus, differing mainly in the pod, which is long, thickish, and longitudinally 4-winged: calyx- teeth 5, short, broad: wings adhering to the falcate keel; vexillar stamen free at the very base, but grown together at the middle with the others into a closed tube; ovary sessile, many-ovuled. Erythrina, Linn. (P. piscipula, Sarg. Erythrina piscipula, Linn. Ichthyomethia piscipula, Hitchc.). FISH-POISON TREE. JAMAICA DOGWOOD. Lfts. 7-11, opposite, oblong or elliptical, pointed or blunt: fls. purplish white, J^in. across: pod 2-4 in. long, 4 lines broad; seeds &-8, black. Trop. Amer., especially com- mon in Jamaica. p PISONIA (named after Willem Piso, a physician and naturalist of Amsterdam, who died in 1648). Nyctagi- nacex. Erect or rarely subscandent trees and shrubs: Ivs. opposite or subverticillate: inn. terminal, axillary or lateral clusters; fls. direcious, rarely monoecious or hermaphrodite, pink, greenish or yellow; perianth 5-toothed; stamens 6-10; ovary elongate-ovoid, ses- sile: fr. an elongated utricle often bearing at its base the persistent filaments enveloped in the calyx and becoming fleshy, smooth or covered with spiny glands. About 80 species, mostly natives of Trop. and Sub- trop. Amer. but a few in Asia, in the Mascarene Isls., and Polynesia. P. Brunonidna, Endl. A tree reaching a height of nearly 50 ft. : Ivs. alternate, oval-oblong, up to 10 in. long and 4 in. broad, acuminate, entire or sin- uate; petiole somewhat thick, up to 1 in. long: fls. very inconspicuous in spreading terminal cymes. Tahiti and Marquesas Isls. Intro, in Belgian gardens. This species has been referred to both P. umbellifera, Forst., and P. inermis, Forst., not Jacq. The most recent treatment by Rock, "The Indigenous Trees of the Hawaiian Islands," regards it as a synonym of P. inermis. The following species are also reported as having been in cult.: P. aculeata, Linn., P. inermis, Forst., not Jacq. (P. grdndis, R. Br.), and P. obtusata, Jacq., but apparently are not now grown. PISTACIA (derived indirectly from ancient Persian pista). Anacar diocese. Trees or shrubs which exude turpentine or mastic. One species of the genus, P. vera, produces the pistachio-nuts or pistache of commerce which are used in confectionery and flavoring, and some of the other species are used for ornamental planting and as stock on which to graft the commercial species. Leaves alternate, evergreen or deciduous, 3-lvd. or even- or uneven-pinnate: inn. paniculate or axillary, racemose; fls. small, dioecious and without petals; males with 5-divided or -parted calyx and 5 stamens; females with 3-4-divided or -parted calyx, short 3- divided style and 1-celled ovary: fr. a dry drupe. — About 20 species, Medit. region to Asia, with one species from the Canaries, and one from Mex., which has also been found in Calif. The so-called nut of Pistacia is really the seed or kernel of a dry drupe. The seed is green, and has a highly peculiar flavor. P. Terebinthus exudes from its st. the fragrant Cyprian or Scio-tur- pentine used in medicine as early as the time of Hip- pocrates. Cultivation of the pistachio, or pistache. (G. P. Rixford.) Several species of Pistacia, P. vera, P. atlantica, P. Lentiscus, P. mutica, P. Terebinthus, P. chinensis, P. mexicana, P. integerrima, and P. verestina, a hybrid, have been introduced into this country by the Office of Foreign Seed and Plant Introduction of the United States Department of Agriculture and are being tested as stocks upon which to work the best varieties of P. vera. The cultivated species of pistache is indigenous to Asia Minor, Syria, and Palestine. It was first brought to Rome, according to Pliny, by Vitellius, then governor of Syria, during the reign of Tiberius early in the first century of the Christian era and was then carried to PISTACIA PISTACIA 2649 Spain by Flavius Pompeius. The first introduction into the United States dates from an importation of nuts by the Federal Patent Office in 1853-1854. These nuts were widely distributed throughout the middle and southern states but do not seem to have attracted much attention until trees were introduced into California by the writer, from southern France in 1876, and subse- quently by the United States Department of Agricul- ture at various times up to the present. The best named varieties, a half-dozen in number, have been imported from Syria, Sicily, and other Medi- terranean countries and have been extensively prop- agated at the Government stations, chiefly, at Chico, California. During the past seven or eight years, budded trees of the named varieties and seedlings of various species to the extent of 25,000 or 30,000 have been distributed to sections of the southwestern states, chiefly California. The best nuts in market are from the island of Sicily, where wild Terebinthus trees are thinned out and grafted with P. vera cions. In this country, the tree is propagated by either budding or grafting. In nursery rows the stocks are budded when one year old. One experienced nursery- man has best success by the use of dormant buds from old wood inserted in April or May when the bark peels freely. He sometimes takes buds in winter and keeps them in cold storage until ready for use. All the species mentioned above are successfully used for stocks, some, however, give the preference to P. Terebinthus, P. vera, P. matica, and P. ailaniica. The trees may be worked either in nursery or in the orchard when the seedlings are well established. In planting the orchard, it is best to put out trees one year from the bud or one or two years from the seed, as the tap-root is large and young trees are most success- fully moved. It is suggested that one form of the commonly cul- tivated pepper tree, Schinus terebinthifolius, is so closely related to the pistache that it may be used as a stock for P. vera. The vigor, hardiness, and rapid growth of P. chincnsis seemed to indicate it as an ideal stock upon which to work P. vera; but the growth of the bud the first year was a disappointment, as when it began to grow the stock in most cases stopped, resulting, at the end of the season, in a top-heavy tree, frequently % inch above and J^ inch below the union. However, the second or third year, the stock overtakes the bud, so that the only precaution required is to stake the tree the first year or two. The pistache is a dry-climate tree, somewhat hardier than the fig and olive. When once established in good deep soil, little irrigation is required. It flourishes in the southwestern states wherever the climate permits the growth of the olive. The trees are planted 25 feet apart, and one male to six or seven females must be put out as pollinizers. The males of P. vera blossom first and in some countries these flowers are gathered and preserved in a dry place until the female flowers open; the pollen is then dusted over them. Sometimes twigs of staminate flowers are cut from the tree and pushed into pots of moist earth where they will keep fresh a few days until the pistillate flowers open. P. atlantica male flowers open earlier than the female flowers of P. vera and have served as good pollinizers for the latter. In that case, of course, the seeds of such crosses, if planted, would produce hybrid trees. Sometimes the male cions are grafted into female trees. The male trees are invariably larger and more vigorous than the females. The grafts begin to bear the fourth year, and at the age of eight to ten years, with good care, should yield twenty-five to one hundred pounds of nuts in the shell, of which it takes three pounds to make one of shelled kernels, in which form most of them are imported. There are seedling trees in California eight and nine years of age which are producing annually twenty to twenty-five pounds of nuts. It is the highest-priced nut in our markets, selling at wholesale from 35 to 75 cents a pound. It is a curious fact, not mentioned by botanists, that the shells grow to about normal size and remain empty if not pollinized. After pollination the ovule rapidly expands and fills the shell. In central California, seeds are planted in March. The seeds should be soaked over night in lye-water made with a can of lye to twenty gallons of water; then put into a coarse sieve and rub with a piece of burlap to remove the pulp. If this is not done, the seeds will be long in germinating. Plant in good soil in house or hotbed. The pistache nut is greatly appreciated in the coun- tries bordering on the Mediterranean, especially in Syria, where it is extensively used, as is the almond and walnut in this country. In Syria it always forms an important ingredient of all wedding feasts. The part- ing guest after a social call is always provided with a bag of nuts. At present, in this country, owing to the high price, its use is restricted to confectioners who use it for coloring and flavoring. When processed as are salted almonds, but in the shell, they are widely liked. The dehiscent shell is penetrated by the salt-water, while the crack facilitates the opening by the fingernails It is not presumed that growing the nuts will become an important industry; still, as the tree is a good bearer and thrives in hot arid regions where the filbert and walnut cannot be grown, it will probably have a place in nut-production not now occupied by other species It is not segregated by the customs authorities from other nuts, but dealers estimate the annual importations into the United States at a value of $250,000. The cultivated species of Pistacia. Terebinthus, Linn. A small tree: Ivs. deciduous; Ifts. &-13, mucronate; the petiole slightly winged: fls. small, in axillary panicles; stamens purplish; stigmas red: fr. small, orbicular, slightly flattened, dark purple, and wrinkled. Medit. region. — It produces a trans- parent gum from incisions, and in hot countries it exhales a penetrating resinous odor in the evening. atlintica, Desf. Tree up to 60 ft. in height and 12 ft. circumference: Ivs. deciduous, odd-pinnate; Ifts. 7-11, alternate, lanceolate, obtuse, glabrous and sessile; petiole narrow-winged: pistillate fls. in loose, axillary racemes; staminate fls. axillary and more compact. Sahara region. — It exudes a gum similar to that of P. Lentiscus and P. Terebinthus. Its heart wood is brown, resemb- ling walnut. Preferred by some as stock for P. vera. chinensis, Bunge. CHINESE PISTACHIO. Tree, 50-^0 ft. high: Ivs. deciduous, odd-pinnate; Ifts. 5-6 pairs, short-petiolate, lanceolate: infl. compositely branched panicles: fr. an obovoid-rotundate drupe, compressed and about J^in. long and broad, scarlet turning pur- plish. China. — Used as stock for P. vera and also said to be a good shade tree in Fla. and useful for ornamental planting, being rapid-growing and the foliage coloring finely in the late fall. integemma, Stew. Medium-sized tree: Ivs. aromatic, even- or uneven-pinnate, finely pubescent when young; Ifts. 4-5 pairs, usually opposite, lanceolate from an oblique base; the petiole very short: drupe broader than long, J^in. diam. March-May. Himalayas. — Yields the zebra wood of India. It is said that the seeds must pass through the intestines of a fowl before they will germinate; tree also said to have promise as an ornamental and perhaps even as a timber tree in some parts of the S. W. Little known in cult. Lentiscus, Linn. Small evergreen tree, often shrubby, up to 12-15 ft.: Ivs. even-pinnate with winged petioles; Ifts. 3-5 pairs, coriaceous, glossy green above, light green below, ovate, obtuse: drupe about 1 in. diam., orbicular, slightly apiculate, reddish finally black at maturity, ^fedit. region. — In Algeria, it forms dense 2650 PISTACIA PITCAIRXIA copses along the coast of 15,000 hectares in extent. It is the mastic tree of the island of Chios. The gum is obtained by making transverse incisions in the bark. This gum is in constant use by Turkish and Arab women in the harems under the impression that it whitens the teeth and perfumes the breath. Oil is pressed from the seeds, one hundred kilos producing twenty litres of oil. It is used by the Arabs for food and lights. The flexible twigs are used by the same people for baskets. mexicana, HBK. A small shrub or tree: Ivs. odd- E innate on a somewhat winged or angled slightly airy petiole; Ifts. 9-12 pairs, ovate or cuneate, obtuse, glabrous, }/<$&. long, oblique at the base: fls. in axillary panicled spikes fr. 1M~2 lines diam., smooth and some- what compressed. Mex. and Calif. — A very ornamental shrub or small tree, sparingly in cult. m&tica, Fisch. & Mey. Tree up to 35 ft. high: the bark dark brown with longitudinal fissures: Ivs. decidu- ous, odd-pinnate; Ifts. 2-4 pairs, oblong or oblong- ovate, obtuse; the petioles marginate or slightly winged, puberulent: drupe 1J^ in. long, obovate, flattened, obliquely apiculate. Asia Minor. — The heartwood is dark brown and very hard. Some cultivators dislike it as a stock for P. vera, finding difficulty in making the grafts take. vera, Linn. PISTACHIO. Small tree up to 30 ft. high, with spreading branches : Ivs. pinnate, at first tomentose, then glabrous, somewhat coriaceous, borne on angular petioles; Ifts. 1-5 pairs, ovate, obtuse, nearly sessile (in one variety in cult, in Calif, the Ivs. have only 3-5 Ifts.): drupe ovoid, oblong, pedicelled, reddish and wrinkled. Medit. region and Orient. — The kernel has a rich, oily, agreeable flavor and in different varieties is either pale green or creamy yellow. F. TRACY HUBBARD. PISTIA (probably from Greek, pistos, watery; refer- ring to its aquatic nature). Aracex. WATER-LETTUCE. TROPICAL DUCKWEED. A small tender, perennial float- ing herb desirable for aquaria. Flowers unisexual; spadix without appendage, adnate to the back of the spathe; male fls. in whorls, with 2 very short stamens which are much grown together and inserted at the apex of the spadix; female fls. solitary; ovary 1-celled; ovules numerous, orthpt- ropous, in 4-6 series: fr. baccate, irregularly breaking open, normally with many seeds. Botanically, the genus Pistia is unique. The monographer of the aroids (Engler, in DC. Monogr. Phaner. 2, 1879) makes Pis- tia the sole representative of a subfamily, one of his 10 primary natural divisions of the arum family. He regards the pistias as all one species, though 9 or more have been described. He recognizes 4 well-marked varieties, based upon the shape of the Ivs., which he calls cuneata, spathidata, obcordata and linguiformis. After the continental fashion Engler takes no one of these as a type to which the others are referred. It is probable that the form with obcordate Ivs. is the one chiefly cult, in American water-gardens. It forms a loose rosette of Ivs. and has long slender feathery roots. The plant sends out runners on which may some- times be seen young plants in all stages of development. A healthy plant measures about 6 in. across. The Ivs.' are generally more or less wedge-shaped, 2-5 in. long, pea-green, velvety to the touch, and covered beneath with a sort of mealy down. The pistia rosette has been compared to a half-grown lettuce plant before the head has formed. Like many other aquatics, the water-let- tuce has an immense range. It is found in fresh waters throughout the tropics, and in the U. S. is native from Fla. to Texas. Water-lettuce is commonly grown outdoors in sum- mer in collections of tender aquatics, and also in aquaria. The summer temperature of the water should be 70° to 80° F. Although it grows well when floating free in several feet of water, it seems to do better when placed in shallow water where the roots may reach the soil. Larger-sized plants may be secured by using a thin layer of rich soil or well-rotted manure in the bottom of the vessel. Soft water is said to be essential. Running water is not necessary. The plants should be shaded during the middle of the day in summer, or the foliage is likely to become yellow and sickly-looking. Stratidtes, Linn. WATER-LETTUCE. TROPICAL DUCK- WEED. Tender perennial aquatic herb already described. The small white fls., though inconspicuous and borne at the bottom of the cup of Ivs., are large enough to show at a glance their relation to the arum family. B.M. 4564. F.S. 6:625. J.F. 2:137. Var. spathulata, Engler. Lvs. spatulate, velvety green, more deeply nerved than the type. S.E. U. S., Trop. Amer. WILHELM MILLER. PISUM (Greek and Latin name of pea). Legumi- ndsse. Mostly tendril-climbing herbs of the Medit. region and eastward, one of which is the common pea. Hardy annuals or perennials of easy culture, growing well in the cooler months: calyx-tube oblique at the base, the lobes more or less leafy; standard obovate or orbicular; wings adhering to the keel; style mostly rigid, widened above, bearded down the inner margin: Ifts. 1-3 pairs, the If. end- ing in a tendril or point, the stipules conspicuous. — Species about a half dozen. sativum, Linn. GARDEN PEA. Fig. 2987. Annual, glabrous and glaucous, tendril- climbing: stipules large and leafy (usually as large as Ifts.): Ifts. oval or ovate, 2-3 pairs, the If. ending in tendrils; fls. few, seeds globular. Eu., 2987. Pisum sativum. ( X Ji) on an axillary peduncle, white Asia. — The pea runs into many forms, which have been variously named. Two major types of garden peas are those grown for the seeds (shelling peas) and those grown for the edible pods (sugar peas). See Pea. Var. arvense, Poir. (P. arvense, Linn.). FIELD PEA. Fls. usually bluish, light lilac, or dull white, with purple wings, and greenish keel, 1-3 on peduncle about as long or little longer than stipules: seeds angular, often gray. Grown for forage. Var. saccharatum, Hort. SUGAR PEA. Fls. mostly in 2's: pod large and soft, more or less fleshy, sweet, not dehiscing, edible. L. H. B. PITANGA : Eugenia uniflora. PITCAIRNIA (W. Pitcairn, a London physician). Bromeliacex. Billbergia-like very short-stemmed per- ennial herbs or subshrubs. Leaves in dense rosettes, narrow, often prickly-mar- gined: infl. a central spike or raceme of long-tubular red, yellow or nearly white fls.; fls. perfect; sepals 3, free; petals 3, unguiculate, erect or spreading at the apex, usually with 2 small scales at the base; stamens 6, free, with linear anthers: fr. a 3-valved caps., with numerous seeds. — Mez, the recent monographer of the bromeliads (in DC. Monogr. Phaner. 9), admits 134 species of Pitcairnia. See also Baker in Journ. Bot. PITCAIRXIA PITHECOLOBIUM 2651 1881. They are American, mostly tropical. In choice collections, various species of pitcairnias may be ex- pected, but very few of them are in the American trade. For pictures of two Mexican species, P. Jaliscana and P. Palmeri (not cult,), see G.F. 1:197 and 211. P. Jarinosa is an undetermined trade name. For other species, see Puya. For cult, of pitcairnias, follow advice given under BiUbergia. A. Infl. on a scape. B. Fls. pendulous. corallina, Lind. & Andre. Stemless: outer Ivs. hard and dry. without marginal spines, the inner ones with brown-spined petioles and broad plicate recurved blades which are somewhat scurfy on the back: pedun- cle about 1 ft. long, bright red, the raceme of about equal length and drooping: fls. coral-red, about 3 in. long, the calyx part comprising about one-third of this length: stamens as long as the petals, with white fila- ments: stigmas twisted. Colombia. R.H. 1875:250. B.M. 6600.— Perhaps the best species. BB. Fls. erect. Moritziana, Koch (P. Klotzschiana, Baker). Stem- less: Ivs. linear, in a rosette, 12-18 in. long, usually spineless and the petiole short or none: raceme 1 ft. or less long, on a leafy peduncle of about the same length; fls. red or yellowish, usually not 3 in. long. Venezuela. R.H. 1903," p. 175. AA. Infl. sessile. heterophylla, Beer (P. Morrenii, Lem. Puya hetero- phylla, Lindl.). Stemless: Ivs. of two kinds, the outer ones narrow and spiny, brown, and being the termina- tion of bulb-like scales, the later ones being longer (16-24 in.) and green and entire: fls. rose or white, in a close oblong spike that is shorter than the green Ivs., the latter arising, however, from separate shoots. Mex. to Venezuela and Ecuador. B.R. 26:71. J.F. 3:291.— Odd. Var. exscapa, Mez (P. exscapa, Hook.). Differs in its intense purple-red fls. Ecuador. B.M. 4591. J.F. 2:151. P. a/p=Puya. — P. carruJ«j=Puya. — P. echinata. Hook. Lvs. of two kinds, the one scale-like, the other normally developed, up to 3 ft. long and 2'^ in. wide, spiny: panicle bipinnate; sepals acute, keeled, echinate with stellate hairs; petals yellow. Colombia, B.M. 4709. J.F. 4:407. — P. fl&mmea, LindL Lvs. up to 3 ft., and 1 :4 in. broad, linear-ensiform, entire: racemes densely many-fld., on a scape; sepals acute; petals red. BraxiL B.M. 7175 (as P. RoezliiV — P. Punckidna, A. Dietr. Lvs. 1-2 ft. long, 2 in. wide lanceolate, glabrous, unarmed: fls. in a lax raceme on a manifest scape: sepals obtuse: petals white. Guiana and Colombia. Gt. 4:44. B.M. 4705 (as P. macrocalyx). — P. Jdcksonii, Hook.=P. punicea. — P. Karirinfkyana, Schult. Lvs. of two kinds, the one per- sistent, setifonn, the other normal, deciduous when old, up to 1 ft. long, and >2in. broad, unarmed, glabrous, grass-like: raceme few- fld., on a manifest scape: sepals acute; petals red. Mex. — P. \Iieheiiana, Andr£. Tufted, Stemless: Ivs. linear, channeled, 2 ft. or more long: scapes tall, bearing spikes of scarlet-red fls. Mex. R.H. 1901:576. — P. punicea, Scheidw. Lvs. up to 10 in. long, less than HID- wide, narrowly linear-lanceolate, longly acute, glabrous above, pale scaly beneath: raceme on a scape, several- fld.: sepals obliquely acute, scaly; petals brick-red. Mex. J.F. 2: 127. B.M. 4540 as P. Jacksoni).— P. recurrata, Koch. Lvs. 2 ft. long, 1-2 in. broad, lanceolate, minutely serrulated toward the tip: fls. in dense raceme, 4-6 in. long, milk-white. Brazil. — P. ringem, Klotzsch & Link. Lvs. of two kinds, the one brown, awl-shaped, the other grass-like, 2lz ft. long, about J^in. broad, unarmed except at base, glabrous: raceme few- to several- fld., on a manifest scape; sepals acute: petals red. Mex. Gt. 2:53. — P. spaihacea, Griseb.= Puya spathacea, Mez. — P. suareolem, Lindl. Lvs. up to 18 in. long, and about Vjin. broad, narrowly ensifonn, unarmed, green: raceme dense, on a manifest scape: sepals very acute; petals yellow. Brazil. B.R. 1069. — P. tabula 'j 'amis, Lind. Lvs. up to 6 in. long, 1;4 in. wide, oblong-spatulate: infl. globose, head-like, sessile; sepals acute: petals red. I.H. 9:344. F.M. 5:297. B.M. 8410. —P. undulata, Scheidw. Outer Ivs. triangular, brown, entire, the inner ones few, up to 2 ft. long, *iin. wide, unarmed, undulate, pale scaly on back: raceme many-fld., on a manifest scape; sepals acute, scaly, becoming glabrous; petals red. S. Brazil. F.S. 2 : 162 GEORGE V. NAsn.f PITCHER PLANTS are various carnivorous plants bearing pitchers which in some cases contain a secreted liquid by the aid of which the plant digests the bodies of insects. The native pitcher plants of the northern and southern states are Sarracenias. The Cali- fornia pitcher plant is described under Darlingtonia. The favorite pitcher plants of greenhouses are Nepen- thes. All these plants have a morphological resemblance in their pitcher-bearing foliage, but their flowers and seeds are so apparently unlike that they suggest deriva- tion from widely different parts of the vegetable king- dom. The genus Nepenthes might possibly be derived from the Aristolochia family, being a derivative along one line, while the parasitic Cytinacese might be regarded as having degenerated along another line from the same source. The Australian genus Cephalotus, which has a pitcher strikingly like the pitchers of Nepen- thes, may be an outlying relative of the saxifrage family. Sarracenia, Darlingtonia, and the Venezuelan genus Heliamphora seem to be more closely allied to one another than to the others, and they make up the Sar- raceniacese. See the different generic entries for fuller accounts. PITHECOCTENIUM (Greek, monkey's comb; allud- ing to the spiny fruit). Bignoniaceie. Ornamental vines cultivated for their showy flowers. Evergreen shrubs climbing by If .-tendrils: young branches ribbed: Ivs. opposite, 3-foliolate or the middle 1ft, replaced by a filiform 3-parted tendril: fls. in terminal racemes or panicles; calyx campanulate, truncate or with small teeth; corolla campanulate, tubular at the base, curved, leathery, white or yellow- ish; stamens included; disk large; ovary warty, with many seeds in several rows: caps, broad, densely cov- ered with prickly warts; the persistent septum with enlarged margin. — About 20 species in Cent, and S. Amer. From the allied genera Bignonia and Anemo- paegma it is easily distinguished by the prickly caps, and the ovary with the seeds in several rows. Adapted for cult, in subtropical and tropical countries only. For cult, and prop, see Bignonia. cynanchoides, DC. (P. dematideum, Griseb. Anemo- psgma dematideum, Griseb. Bignonia alba, Hort., not Auth.). Branchlets slightly hairy at first: Ifts. ovate, long-acuminate and obtusely pointed, subcordate or broadly cuneate at the base, glabrous above, 1-2 in. long; petiole pubescent at the apex: fls. in terminal few-fld. racemes; the lowest pair of fls. long-stalked; corolla white, tubular-funnelform with spreading limb, pubescent outside, 1^-2 in. long; ovary tomentose: fr. 2H in- long, covered with yellowish spines. Nearly all the year. Argentina, Uruguay. Hieronymus, Icon. Descr. Plant. Argentina, 7. B.M. 8556. muricatum, DC. (Bignonia echinata, Jacq.). Gla- brous: Ifts. ovate, acute or acuminate, rounded or subcordate at the base: fls. in terminal many-fld. racemes; corolla about 1 in. long, white, with yellow throat: fr. oblong, 2-5 in. long, densely covered with prickles. Mex. P. buccinatdrium, Mairet=Phaedranthus buccinatorius. — P. cinereum, DC.=Distictis cinerea. ALFRED REHDER. PrrHECOLOBIUM (Greek, monkey, and ear-ring). Leguminosx. Tropical shrubs or trees planted for ornament and shade. With or without axillary stipular spines: Ivs. bipin- nate; Ifts. at first small, many pinnate or large, 1-3- pinnate, rarely with 1 1ft.; petiolar glands rarely want- ing; stipules small and inconspicuous or persistent, hardened or spiny: fls. 5- or rarely 6-merous, hermaph- rodite or rarely polygamous, in head -like spikes; calyx campanulate or tubular, short-toothed; corolla tubular or funnelform; stamens few or many, much exserted, at the base or above united into a tube; anthers small; ovary sessile or stipitate, many-ovuled, style filiform, stigma terminal, small or capitate: pod compressed or flattened, circinate, twisted falcate^or rarely nearly straight, coriaceous, thick or somewhat fleshy, 2-valved, not septate between the seeds; seed 2652 PITHECOLOBIUM pulpy, short, often dark-colored, ovate or orbicular, compressed; funiculus filiform or with variously ex- panded fleshy arils. — About 125 species. The subgenus Samanea of Bentham is of generic rank. See Samanea, Vol. VI. It is distinguished from Pithecolobium by its straight indehiscent septate pods, and from Entero- lobium by its straight, more or less constricted instead of short thick circinate or reniform pods. INDEX. latifolium, 11. lobatum, 4. mexicanum, 7. pruinosum, 5. scutiferum, 4. Sonorse, 10. texense, 8. tortum, 12. Unguis-cati, 3. angulatum, 6. brevifolium, 9. dulce, 1. flexicaule, 8. guadalupense, 2. A. Stipules mostly spiny: Ivs. 1- or rarely irregularly %-pinnate; Ifts. 1- or few-pinnate: pod spirally twisted; seed with funiculus dilated at apex into a fleshy aril. (Unguis-cati.) B. Heads with short peduncles. 1. dulce, Benth. (Mimosa dulcis, Roxbg. Inga dulcis, Willd.). GUAYMOCHIL, HUAMTJCHIL, or MANILLA TAMARIND. Large stately trees: Ivs. and Ifts. 1-pinnate; Ifts. obovate or oblong, obtuse, very oblique, about 1 in. long: heads short-peduncled, the upper paniculate- racemose; fls. white, finely pubescent; calyx 1 line, co- rolla \Yi lines long, white: pod twisted, 5-6 in. long, M-Min. broad. Mex., Philippines. Blanco Fl. Filip. 237. Beddome, Fl. Sylv. 188.— Widely cult, in the tropics as an ornamental. The pulpy aril of the seed is eaten by the poorer classes as food. The bark yields a yellow dye. It is said not to have fruited in S. Calif . BB. Heads with long slender peduncles. c. Lfts. leathery: ovary pubescent. 2. guadalupense, Chapm. (Inga guadalupensis, Desv.). An unarmed shrub, 3-7 ft. high: Ifts. 4, ob- liquely obovate, %-lH in. long, leathery, mucronate, undulate, delicately nerved, shining above; petioles shorter than the petiolules: heads yellow; peduncles solitary on the axils, lJ^-3 in. long, exceeding the sub- tending bracts; calyx campanulate, pubescent, trian- gular lobes shorter than the tube; corolla pubescent, stamens 3-4 times longer than the corolla: pods 2-4 in. long, contorted. Fla. and W. Indies. cc. Lfts. membranous: ovary glabrous. 3. Unguis-cati, Benth. (Mimdsa Unguis-cati, Linn.). CATS-CLAW. BLACK BEAD. BREAD-AND-CHEESES. UNA DE GATO. An armed or unarmed shrub or small tree, sometimes 25 ft. high: Ifts. 4, rather thin, obliquely obovate, oval, rounded or mucronate at the apex, finely reticulated; petioles slender, mostly larger than the petiolules: heads in terminal axillary panicles; calyx turbinate-campanulate, glabrous; corolla glabrous or nearly so; stamens twice as long as the corolla: pods 3-4H in. long, contorted. Fla., W. Indies, and Trop. Amer. Jacq. Hort. Schoenbr. 3:392. Vahl, Eclog. 3:25. — The bark is astringent, fr. edible, and the seeds medicinal. AA. Stipules inconspicuous: spineless: Ivs. 1- to several- pinnate; Ifts. 1- to several-pinnate, large or many- pinnate and small: heads small, paniculate: pod spirally twisted; seed without apex of funiculus dilated. (Clypearia.) B. Fls. mostly few, sessile, in heads. 4. scutiferum, Benth. (Mimdsa scutifera, Blanco. P. lobatum, Benth.). A small tree: Ivs. glabrous, 1-2- pinnate; Ifts. 2-3-pinnate, ovate or oblong, acuminate, 3-6 in. long: fls. in heads, few (often 2-3) sessile, gla- brous, or puberulent; calyx J^-l line long; corolla up to 2 lines long: pod twice or irregularly twisted, often nearly a foot long, 1-2 in. diam., often much constricted between seeds; seeds large, compressed, orbicular. Trop. Asia, Java, Borneo, Philippines. BB. Fls. many, in heads, distinctly pedicelled. c. Branches terete: Ivs. large, few-pinnate. 5. pruindsum, Benth. (Albizzia pruindsa, F. Muell.). A slender tree, brownish puberulent or glabrous: Ivs. 1-2-pinnate; upper Ifts. 3-4-pinnate, broadly ovate or subrhombic, largest acuminate, 2-3 in. long: fls. in heads in the upper axils or in short corymbose terminal panicles, pedicellate, glabrous; calyx Yz line long; corolla 2 lines long: pod spirally twisted or long-con- torted, glabrous, deeply constricted, about ^in. broad. E. Austral.— Intro, in 1901. cc. Branches angular: Ivs. several- to many-pinnate. 6. angulatum, Benth. (Jnga angulata, Graham. Mi- mdsa heterophylla, Roxbg.). An ornamental small tree: branches and petioles at first brownish, puberu- lent, becoming glabrous: Ivs. 2-4-pinnate; upper Ifts. 4-8-pinnate, oblique, ovate-oblong, acuminate, 3-5 in. long, lower shorter, ovate-rhombic: panicle terminal; fls. few, in heads, pedicellate, tomentulose ; calyx less than a line long; corolla about 3 lines long: pod circu- lar or elongated, contorted, about Yr-Y&n- broad. Trop. Asia, Borneo, Philippines. AAA. Stipules present: shrubs (or rarely trees): Ivs. 1- to several-pinnate; Ifts. small or rarely 1 in. long. (Ortholobium.) B. Spines straight. c. Li's. 2-6-pinnate. D. Lfts. 5-10-pinnate. 7. mexicanum, Rose. CHINO. A small tree, 15^-20 ft. high, 1 ft. diam.: Ivs. with straight stipular spines (sometimes wanting) 1 line long, 2-5-pinnate; Ifts. 5- 10-pinnate, oblong, 2-4 lines long, midrib a little excen- tric, puberulent, as are also the rachis and branches: infl. paniculate; fls. in heads, pedicellate; pedicels 1-2 lines long; calyx Yi. line long; corolla \Yi lines long; petals spreading or reflexed; stamens long, numerous: pods oblong, somewhat constricted, 3^4 in. long, 1 in. broad, straight, its valves not elastic nor revolute; seeds 2, oval, 2-4 lines long. Mex. — It has the habit of mesquit and is valued for its wood. Rare, and rapidly becoming exterminated. DD. Lfts. S-6-pinnate. 8. flexicaule, Coult. (P. texense, Coult. Acacia flexi- caulis, Benth.). EBONY. A shrub or small tree, 20-30 ft. high: trunk 2-3 ft. diam., branching 8-10 ft. from ground, with short stout stipular spines: Ivs. 4-6- G innate, long-petiolate ; petioles slender, puberulent; ts. 3-6-pinnate, lower pair shortest, ovate-oblong, rounded at apex, glabrous, membranaceous or sub- coriaceous, dark green, shining on the upper surface, paler below, J4~Hm. l°ng °n short broad petiolules: fls. in cylindrical dense or interrupted spikes, \Yi in. long on stout pubescent peduncles, fascicled in axils of Ivs. of preceding year, sessile, yellow or creamy, fragrant; stamens exserted; corolla 4-5 times longer than calyx, puberulent; ovary glabrous, sessile: pod flattened, turgid, straight or falcate, sessile, oblique at base, rounded and narrowed to a short point at apex, 4-6 in. long, 1-1 % in. broad, dehiscent, thick, woody; seed imbedded in a thick pitchy pulp, suspended on a short straight funiculus, J^in. long, ^|in. broad, irregularly obovate, bright reddish brown, sides faintly depressed. Texas to Low. Calif. S.S. 3 : 147. — The wood is heavy, hard, compact, close-grained, dark rich reddish brown tinged with purple, with clear bright yellow sapwood. Almost indestructible in contact with the ground and much used for fence- posts. The seeds are palatable and nutritious if boiled when green. They are roasted when ripe by the Mexi- cans who use the thick seed-coat as a substitute for coffee. A slow grower and not of sufficient size for timber. PITHECOLOBIUM PITTOSPORUM 2653 cc. Lvs. 6-10-pinnate; Ifts. 20-40-pinnate. 9. brevifdlium, Benth. (Acacia Neucidna, Buckl.). HUAJILLO. An evergreen shrub or small tree up to 30 ft. tall, armed with short spines: Ivs. 6-10-pinnate; Ifts. 20-40-pinnate, oblong or narrowly oblong, J^-^in. long, obtuse or acutish, reticulated beneath: panicles 2-4 in. long, peduncles %-%w. long: heads subglobose, %-%in. diam.; corolla 6-8 times longer than the calyx, lobes ovate, shorter than the tubes; stamens 2-3 times longer than the corolla: pods linear, oblong, flat, 2%-4 in. long, acuminate at apex, stipitate. Texas and Mex. S.S. 3:146. — The fls. are whitish and much sought by bees. BB. Spinrs recurved. 10. Sondrae, Wats. UXA DE GATO. A shrub or small tree 15-20 ft. high, armed with short recurved stipular spines: foliage, infl. and branches canescent with very short spreading pubescence: Ivs. 1-pinnate on a short (1-2-line) or very short rachis; Ifts. 10-15- pinnate, oblong-elliptic, about a line long: peduncles mostly solitary (1-3) in the axils, 6 lines long or less; heads loose; fls. white, finely pubescent, nearly 2 lines long: pod rather thin, short-stipitate, flat, straight, dehiscent, puberulent, 2—4 in. long and J^-%in. wide, 3-6-seeded. Mex. — Wood very hard and takes a fine polish. A good hedge plant for the Southwest if trimmed. A decoction of the branches is used for scours in horses. AAA.A- Stipular spines absent: Ivs. 1- or rarely 2- or more- pinnate; Ifts. 1- to several-pinnate, large: fls. usually short, in heads or spikes at nodes of leafless branches: pod stiff, leathery. (Caulanthon.) 11. latifolium, Benth. (Mimosa latifdlia, Linn, fnga latifdlia, Willd. Calliandra latifdlia, Griseb.). A small tree or tall shrub, entirely glabrous: stipules persistent, lanceolate-acuminate: Ivs. 1-pinnate; Ifts. often 2-pin- nate, ovate or ovate-oblong, acuminate, 3—6 in. long: fls. in loose nearly sessile or short-peduncled heads; calyx very small; corolla about J^in. long: pod curved, often a foot long and an inch broad. Brazil to Panama and in the W. Indies. Mart. Fl. Bras. 15,2:119. AAAAA. Stipules fascicled: Ivs. 2- to several-pinnate; Ifts. 5- to many-pinnate, small: infl. in heads, axillary, pedunded; fls. sessile, short, glabrous: pod smooth, leathery or somewhat fleshy, straight or curved, scarcely dehiscent. (Chloroleucon.) 12. t6rtum, Mart. A shrub or small tree, glabrous or pubescent: Ivs. 2-5-pinnate; Ifts. 5-9-pinnate, oblique, oblong, %-%in. long: calyx less than a line long; corolla about J^in. long: pod curved or almost circular, about 6 in. long, y about J^in. wide, entire; tips slender, recurved: fls. yellow, under Mm- long, pedicelled in the If .-axils: fr. about Kin. long, oval, com- pressed, yellow, granular. Australian deserts. Maiden, For. Fl. N. S. W. 4. — Remarkable tree, resembling weeping willow but evergreen and suited to dry regions: root-suckers abundant. P. bicolor, Hook. f. Shrub or tree with tomentose twigs: Ivs. linear, glabrous above, tomentose beneath: fls. axillary, lAm. long, yellow and purple. Austral. — P. Buchdnani, Hook. f. Closely allied to P. tenuifolium: Ivs. 2-5 in. long, oblong-lanceolate, acute, very thin, flat: fr. less than y$n. thick. New Zeal. — P. Colensoi, Hook. f. Sometimes considered as a form of P. tenuifolium: branches stouter: Ivs. 2-4 in. long, sharply pointed, flat, more coriaceous and deeper green. B.M. 8305. G.C. III. 26:370. Cult, in Eng- land. — P. Fdirchildii, Cheesem. Shrub, related to P. crassifolium: Ivs. broader, glabrous when mature, margins not revolute: fr. 9-12 lines long, glabrous when mature. New Zeal. — P. floribundum, Wight & Arn. A small tree: Ivs. lanceolate or oblong-lanceolate, glabrous, shining: fls. in terminal compound corymbs, numerous, yellow. Subtrop. Himalayas, ascending to 5,000 ft. — P. hawaii- PITTOSPORUM PLANER-TREE 2655 fnst, Hillebrand. Lvs. ample, acute, 7-10 in. long. 2-3 in. wide, sparsely to silvery hairy beneath: fls. in terminal clusters, cream- color. Hawaii. — P. hettrophyUum, Franch. Half -reclining: Ivs. medium-sized, ovate, acute, glabrous: fls. few, terminating short branchlets, light yellow. China. Offered by Franceschi for rock- eries and embankments: drought-resistant. — P. iUicioides, Makino. A handsome evergreen shrub: Ivs. glossy green: fls. greenish yel- low. Japan. In general appearance resembles Illicium anisatum. — P. Kirkii, Hook. f. Glabrous shrub: Ivs. narrow-obovate, very thick, obtuse: fls. yellow, in terminal umbels. New Zeal. — P. Rdlphii, Kirk. Shrub, related to P. crassifolium but If.-margin not revolute: Ivs. white-tomentose beneath: fr. 8 lines long, pubescent. New Zeal. G.C. III. 26:205 (as P. crassifolium). — P. tetraspir- mum, Wight & Arn. Shrub: Ivs. ovate, acute, 2-4 in. long, gla- brous: fls, terminal, yellowish: fr. glabrous, 4-seeded. India. HARVEY MONROE HALL. PITYROSPERMA: C.mici/uflo. PLACEA (possibly derived from a Chilean name). AmaryUiddc&e. Rare and beautiful Chilean bulbs, of difficult culture, bearing showy flowers something like an amaryllis (Hippeastrum), the colors being white or yellow, streaked with red. Perianth funnel-shaped, with scarcely any tube; corona funnel-shaped, inserted at the base of the segms., deeply cut, the divisions notched, stamens inserted inside the corona; ovary top-shaped, 3-celled; ovules many, superposed; styfe declinate; stigma capitate, obscurely 3-lobed. — Five or six species. Botanically the peculiar feature of Placea is its cup or corona, which is smaller than that of Narcissus, and red instead of yellow or white. The beauty of the placeas, however, is of the hippeastrum type, though the fls. are not so symmetrical, for at first sight it looks as if two of the perianth-segms. were torn away. The peduncle is long and hollow. Placeas are generally classed as autumn-flowering bulbs. Though natives of the Andes at considerable elevations, they are not hardy. The bulbs are said to lie deep in the ground in their native country, and pot culture is generally considered unsuitable for deep- lying bulbs. The bulbs go to rest about August and push up about December, flowering in May. In a pot they ought to have their time of rest, and must be buried in the soil, which ought to be very rich, but in pots they are not certain to flower. They must be planted with at least an inch of soil over their necks, and the\* prefer a loose soil. ornata, Miers. Bulb 1 in. thick: Ivs. 2, linear, appear- ing with the fls. : scape 6-9 in. high; umbel 4-6-fld. ; per- ianth-segms. 1-1 y^ in. long. B.R. 27:50. Gn. 54:510. P. grandifldra, Lem., is thrice as big as P. ornata, more florifer- ous, and is essentially distinguished by its perianth-segms., which are more acuminate and sharp-pointed. I.H. 15:574. F.S.20:2047 WILHELM MILLER. PLAGIANTHUS (Greek, oblique flower). Malvaceae. Trees or shrubs, rarely herbs, with large or small white 5-petaled flowers, little known in this country. Bractlets none or distant from the calyx, which is 5-toothed or cut; column of stamens divided at the apex into many filaments; cells of ovary 2-5, rarely 1 or many; ovules solitary, pendulous: carpels in a single series: style-branches longitudinally stigmatose within: foliage and infl. various. Distinguished from Abutilon by the number of ovules. — About 12 species from Austral., Xew Zeal., and Van Dieman's Land. They are hardy in the most favored parts of England. None of the species is offered in America. They are known as "ribbon trees." Lampenii, Booth. Botanically only a variety of P. pulchellus, but horticulturally very much superior. Shrub, attaining 6-8 ft.: Ivs. oblong-lanceolate, 4-5 x ^2~l in., sharply serrate: fls. in short, axillary leafy panicle.?, very numerous and crowded; styles very small. Van Dieman's Land. G.C. II. 22:201. pulchellus, Gray (Abutilon pulcheUum, Sweet. A. pulchrum, Don). Tall shrub: Ivs. lanceolate, cordate, acuminate, 2-3 in. long, coarsely crenate: fls. few, clustered along rachis of axillary racemes; ovary 5-«elled. Austral. B.M. 2753 (as Sida pulchella). P. bttulinus, A. Cunn. RIBBON-WOOD. Tree, 30-60 ft. high, with trunk sometimes 3 ft. diam.: Ivs. of mature plants 1-3 in. long, ovate or ovate-lanceolate, acuminate: fls. small, unisexual, in terminal or axillary decompound panicles, yellowish white. New Zeal. Said to be used by the Maoris for making rope and twine. — For P. Lyallii, Hook., see under Gaya, Vol. Ill, p. 1319, additional illustrations of which are G. 32:543; 35:677. G.M. 55: 572. Gn. 44:28; 75, p. 372. G.C. III. 4:2O9; 41:332,335. H.F. WILHELM MILLER. PLAGIOBOTHRYS (Greek, plagios, sideways, and bothros, pit or hollow; wherefore the name should have been written Ploffiobothrus) . Boraginacex. Several species of low-growing commonly diffuse annuals from W. Amer., with small white fls. Here belongs P. notho- fulvus, Gray, from Calif, to Wash., which was once advertised under its synonym Eritrichium nothofulnim, Gray. This plant has no horticultural standing. PLAGIOGtRLA. (Greek, oblique and round, alluding to the oblique ring around the sporangium). Poly- podiaceae. Warm-country ferns, formerly included as a section under Lomaria. Sori inserted on the more or less thickened ends of the forked side-nerves, finally often confluent, usually covered by the revolute margin; indusium lacking; sporangia long-stalked with a complete oblique ring; spores tetrahedral: Ivs. tufted, simple-pinnate, dimor- phous; petiole fleshy-swollen at the base, the upper side of which has 3-6 spongy protuberances; sterile Ivs. serrate; fertile Ivs. smaller, mostly entire. — About 10 species, in tropics of New World, in the Philippines, Formosa, S. China. costaricensis, Mett. (Lomaria costaricensis, Baker). A plant requiring warmhouse cult. : sterile Ivs. 1 ft. and more long and about hah" as wide, with entire falcate Ifts. which are less than J^in. broad and united at then- bases, thereby forming a winged rachis; fertile Ivs. 1 j/2 ft. long and 6 in. broad, with contracted Ifts. Costa Rica. PLAGIOSPERMUM: Prinsepia. PLANERA (after J. J. Planer, 1743-1789, professor of medicine at Erfurt; author of several books on botany). Urticacese. WATER- ELM. Monotypic genus, allied to Ulmus and Celtis: Ivs. pinnately veined, alternate: fls. polygamous, with deeply 4— 5-lobed calyx; staminate fls. short-stalked, in clusters at the base of the young branchlets, with 4-5 stamens; pistillate or perfect ones on rather slender stalks, 1-3 in the axils of the lower Ivs. : fr. a small muricate nut. The only species is P. aquatica, Gmel. (Anonymus aquations, Walt. P. ulmifolia, Michx.). Small tree, sometimes to 40 ft.: Ivs. short-petioled, somewhat unequal at the base, ovate to ovate-oblong, unequally serrate, gla- brous at length and somewhat leathery, 1^6-2^ in. long: fr. oval, Hm- long, with irregularly crested fleshy ribs. April, Mav. S. 111. and Ky. to Fla. and Texas. S.S. 7:316. R.H. 1903, p. 351. This tree is not in general cult, and has little to recommend it as an orna- mental plant. It would not prove hardy N. It probably thrives best in moist soil and is prop, by seeds sown soon after ripening in May and by layers, also by grafting on elm. The 'plants sometimes cult, under the name of P. aquatica belong either to Ulmus campestris var. nminalis, U. parnfolia, or U. alata, to which the true Planera is similar in foliage, or to some other small- Ivd. elm. P. acuminata, Lindl.=Zelkova serrata. — P. carpinifHia, Wats. =Zelkova ulmoides. — P. crendio=-Zelkova ulmoides. — P. Ke&kii, C. Koch=Zelkova serrata. — P. repent, Hort.=Ulmus pumila or parvifolia,— P. Ricftardi, Michx.=Zelkova ulmoides. ALFRED REHDER. PLANE-TREE: Platanus. PLANER-TREE: Planera. 2656 PLANT PLANTING PLANT (Latin, planta). A plant is a living organism consisting of one or more cells, some of which, in most of the higher forms, contain a green substance — chloro- phyl — by the aid of which they are able in the light to construct carbohydrate food-matters (as sugar, starch, and the like) from carbon dioxide and water. The cell protoplasm assimilates or uses these carbohydrates and is nourished by them, and from the elements they furnish it is able to make cellulose, the substance which walls it in and gives strength and solidity to the plant. Animals do not (as a rule, at least) have chlorophyl, and cannot construct carbohydrates from carbon dioxide and water, and the same is true of some plants, as explained below. Green plants absorb carbon dioxide from the air, and in the process of carbohydrate formation they give off a certain quantity of oxygen. However, in the further chemical activities of their cells, oxygen is absorbed and carbon dioxide is given off. In the plants which are not green (as in animals, also) the first pro- cess is wanting, while the second takes place. These facts have given rise to the view that plants and animals are quite opposite in their physiological relations to the surrounding air. They should not be contrasted, how- ever, in this way; it is more exact to say that green plants have two important nutritive functions, namely (1) carbon absorption and fixation (technically photo- synthesis), and (2) assimilation of food matters. Respiration — the process in which oxygen is absorbed and carbon dioxide is given off — occurs in all plants and animals. With this general definition of a plant before us we may say that while some lower plants are minute single cells, or rows of cells, and others are flat, expanded and often irregular growths, in all of which there is a marked simplicity of structure, in higher plants we find the plant-body composed of well-defined roots, stems, leaves, flowers, fruits, and seeds. The lower plants referred to perform all the functions necessary for their continued existence, and are not in any sense "imper- fect plants," as the older botanists used to denominate them. The difference between lower and higher plants is that the functions of the former are performed by fewer organs, while in the latter there is an approach to one organ for every function. Still it is true that some organs even in the highest plants have more than one function: so that it may be said that plants are theoretically capable of considerably higher develop- ment than they have yet attained. Thus while the chief function of the root may be for the absorption of food-matter, it commonly has in addition a holdfast function, and may become an organ of storage also. So, also, while the chief function of the leaf is to sup- ply green cells for carbohydrate making (photosynthe- sis), it may be used as a storage organ (as in cabbage leaves), or even for making the plant more conspicuous (ornamental), as in many euphorbias. Even the flower usually unites two functions (that of fertilization and of showiness), which in more highly specialized forms are separated, as in the wild snowball where the large marginal flowers are for show but are sterile, while the small inconspicuous central flowers are fertile. One more thing must be included in our general conception of the plant. While it is true that plants are normally, and typically, green in color, there are many plants which have so changed their food habits that they are no longer green. Thus parasitic plants that secure carbohydrates from living organisms, having no need of chlorophyl, are not green, and the same is true of saprophytic plants (those that get their food from dead or decaying organisms), which are also destitute of a green color. This is the explanation of the fungi, lichens, bacteria, and some flowering plants (e.g., dodder, Indian pipe, beech drops, and the like). Such plants are more or less degenerated, and are physiologi- cally like animals, but they still retain enough of the typical plant structure so that one is rarely at a loss where to place them. £5. E. BESSEY. PLANTAGO (the Latin name). Plantaginacese. A group of 200 or more species of annual and peren- nial herbs or subshrubs occurring in many parts of the world. It is a weedy genus, and only two or three species have any economic or commercial value worth men- tioning. They are generally known as plantains, although this name is also applied to certain bananas (see Musa), which are plants of widely different kind. P. lanceolata, Linn., or ribwort, is some- times used in pasture mixtures abroad, because it affords more or less spring pas- turage on dry and sterile soils. The seed is offered by American seedsmen for feed- ing birds, but not for sowing. In this country, however, it is one of the worst of lawn weeds, thriving in our hot dry soils when grass kills out. The best remedy for it is to secure a better stand of grass, and this is made possible by making the ground rich and so treating it that it will hold moisture. P. Corondpus, Linn., the buck's-horn plantain, native to Eu., Asia, and N. Afr., is sometimes eaten as a pot- herb (see p. 1411). It is a low perennial, with linear-lanceolate often pinnatifid Ivs. It is not in the American trade. P. cordata, Lam., of the E. U. S., has been offered by dealers in native plants as a subject for colonizing in bogs and margins of ponds. It is perennial, with a stout root- stock, large cordate-orbicular shining lf.- blades, and a slender spike rising 1-2 ft. high and bearing small pinkish fls. with exserted style and stamens. P. major, Linn. (Fig. 2990), is a very common door- yard weed. Var. variegata, Hort., a varie- gated If.-form, is offered in England. P. maxima, Jacq., from Siberia, said to have white feathery spikes, has been intro. into England. There are about 20 native or naturalized species in N. Amer. Plantago is the typical genus of the Plantaginacese, a family that contains two other genera, bitypic and monotypic, — Littorella in Eu. and N. N. 'Amer., and Bougueria in the Andes of Peru and Chile. ]J< jj g PLANTAIN: Plantago and Musa. P. Lily: Hosta. Rattlesnake P.: Hieracium venosum. Wild P.: Heliconia Bihai. PLANT-BREEDING: Breeding, p. 545. (1 2990. Spike PLANTING. This Cyclopedia considers o f Plantago two classes or kinds of horticultural work, major -Com- — the growing of plants, and the identify- "(Nat.'sTze!)1' mS '°* plants. The latter purpose runs through every generic entry, throughout the alphabet. The instructions for growing are combined with these generic entries, and are also extended in many separate articles, under the popular names of the -plants themselves, as Rose, Strawberry, Carnation, Lettuce, Mushroom, and many others; and they are also dis- played in class articles, as Alpine Plants, Kitchen-Gar- dening, Annuals, Biennials, Perennials, Herbs, Orchids, Palms, Arboriculture, and many others. At this point, another set of class articles is assembled, with the purpose to bring together such instruction as is commonly associated with what is known as "planting," — with the use of plants in the open and particularly in relation to their uses as a part of a landscape develop- ment. In connection with this symposium, the reader will naturally give special attention to the assembly on PLANTING PLANTING 2057 Herbs in Vol. Ill and on Landscape Gardening in Vol. IV. Inasmuch as trees are discussed under Arbori- culture and herbaceous plants under Herbs, the present treatment is mostly of shrubs. (Figs. 3001-3005, 3011-12, are adapted from "Garden and Forest.") 2991. A street improvement, exhibiting good community feeling. This svmposium on planting has the following parts: Page The relation of planting to the fundamental design (Pilat). . . .2657 Village improvement in relation to planting (Waugh) 2658 Shrubbery in the landscape (L. H. B., Simonds) 2660 Woods in the landscape (Manning) 2662 Wild-gardening (Miller) 2663 Bog-gardening (Taylor) 2666 Water-gardening (Trieker) 2668 Subtropical-gardening (Manning) 2669 Plants for the seaside (Manning) 2670 Succulent plants (Thompson) 2672 Topiary planting and garden architecture (Montillon) 2675 Planting for winter effect (Miller) 2677 Planting on walls (Miller) 2680 Screen-planting (Curtis) 2681 Winter protection of planting (Egan, Watson) 2684 Shrubs, small trees, and woody vines (Curtis) 2690 Shrubs for the Middle West (Miller) 2693 Shrubs for street and park planting (Mulford) 2694 Shrubs for midcontinental regions (Irish) 2694 Shrubs and climbers for the South (Berckmans) 2696 Ornamental shrubs for California (Gregg and Stevens) 2700 Vines for Calif ornia (Gregg, Stevens and Jones > 2705 The relation of planting to the fundamental design. It is the business of the landscape architect to com- bine beaut}- and utility into a harmonious composition. The artistic aim in the practice of landscape architec- ture is to produce beautiful pictures. To achieve such Eictures, the creative imagination must be controlled y familiarity with the accepted canons of design. Good design in landscape work must be based on the fundamental principles of art and the laws of nature. Fitness, proportion, variety, mystery or intricacy, unity, and harmony,— all these must be considered. While it is the aim, in creating landscape gardens and parks, to produce natural effects, the best results are not necessarily secured by a mere imitation of nature as it happens to exist in a given locality. It is possible to modify nature to fit artificial conditions; and by chang- ing the scale, by adding new features, or making different combinations, compositions may be produced which have all the charm of a natural scene, yet surpass nature in beauty and interest. Varied emotions are produced by different com- positions. Sometimes the mood is gay, as in flower-gardens. Awe, wonder, and admiration are produced by the large natural features, — rocks, cliffs, canons, waterfalls, the mountains, 2992 and the sea. Mystery and intricacy are conceived by rambles through the dense woods and jungles. Rest, peace, tranquillity are suggested by certain woodland scenes, a sheltered lake, or a meadow with a meander- ing stream. The sense of deliberation, dignity, and maturity is produced by the stately arched trees of avenue or mall, and by groves of matured trees. Many laymen and artists think of landscape archi- tecture only as a decorative art; and to their minds planting is of value only in so far as the foliage hides some ugly foundation, softens hard lines or relieves bare spaces, screens some unsightly view or forms a setting for an architectural feature. Sculptors and architects especially are prone to think that the most charming natural parts of our public parks are suitable sites for memorials in stone and statues in marble and bronze. They reason that the spreading branches of the trees and the background of foliage wfll enhance the beauty of their work of art. Their thought is of their own creation and they fail to realize that by introdu- cing anaitificial object, no matter how beautiful it may be in itself, the harmony and beauty of the natural scene may be destroyed. From the point of view of the landscape architect, planting is not merely a superficial decorative process. He considers the arrangement and disposition of the foliage-masses as well as the modeling of the earth's surfaces to be fundamental in landscape design. Neces- sary buildings, roads, paths, and other artificial features, must be provided for use and enjoyment; but the best design is the one that succeeds in effectively obscuring or subduing these necessary objects in the landscape and still provides fully the facilities required for use, shelter, and other enjoyments of the people. While design is the main consideration in creating a landscape, nature, life, and time are necessary for the completion of the design and the full development of its beauty. The beauty of a landscape is dependent largely on the green living things, as trees, shrubs, grass; but the success of the picture is due more to the disposition and arrangement of the material than to the materials themselves. Therefore, it sometimes happens that a thorough knowledge of horticulture, especially when this knowledge is combined with great enthusiasm and, perhaps, with an added interest in botany, is a decided handicap to the success of the amateur designer. The horticultural features are over- emphasized at the expense of the composition. Many places and parks that were originally well designed have been robbed of then" charm and beauty and landscape effects, because of the interest and enthusiasm on the part of gardeners, owners of estates, or park com- missioners in horticultural things. In the conviction that they are embellishing the beauty of a glade, valley, lawn, or meadow, they proceed to cover these open spaces with rare specimens of trees and shrubs, thus A series of back-yard improvements, exhibiting pride in premises. 2658 PLANTING PLANTING destroying the arrangement. Open areas should not be considered as waste space. A landscape design may be either formal or natural. The character of the planting of formal gardens and terraces and the embellishment of buildings by plant- ing should be in harmony with the type of architec- ture and with the nature of the site of the garden and its relation to the house. In the design of a natural landscape, the three general classes of planting material — woods, shrubbery, and lawns or meadow s — should intermingle to a certain extent, and yet be so arranged as to pre- sent in general an open central feature of lawn or meadow, with the masses of foliage sur- rounding. This provides unity, and the broad masses of light and shade produce a pleasing com- position. The outlines of the lawn or meadow should be irregular, and their limits somewhat ob- scured. Now and then trees or groups should be introduced, especially 2993. Planting plan for a busi- n,ear, the ^underies °f ness street in town. the lawn> to add diver- sity and interest; the shadows will relieve the monotonous expanse of light. To design effective plantations, a knowledge of planting material, a conception of composition, and imagination and taste are requisite. In planting, the landscape architect is more concerned with the color, texture, form, and size of flowers and foliage than with botanical families or with cultural requirements of plants; still, in order to design places and parks that will be in harmony with the general sur- roundings and to use material that will thrive, he must be familiar with the indigenous plant material, and know what soil conditions and locations are suitable for their peculiar needs. However, it must not be assumed that only those trees, shrubs, and plants that grow in the immediate vicinity may be used; but, in the creation of the natural landscape, the native plants and trees should predominate. The most important planting material used by the landscape architect is "grass seed." Ordinarily grass is not considered in the general conception of planting, but most landscape architects and many laymen realize that grass in the form of lawns and meadows is the most significant feature of our naturalistic landscapes. Its value when used within formal lines, the tapis vert and terrace, are generally recognized. It is not far-fetched to say that grass is the most important planting material used in the creation of landscape in this climate. Lawns and meadows provide color, texture, motion of the waving meadows, the play of light and the shadows of clouds and trees. The covering of grass over earth enhances the beauty of the contours and the modeling of the earth's surfaces — knolls, valleys, glades, and plains. The effects of space, breadth, dignity, and dis- tant views are dependent upon the proper framing of open spaces with foliage. Indeed, open spaces, whether in the form of sea, lakes, or streams, lawns or meadows, sand-dunes or even paved spaces, are one of the most important elements in landscape design. C. F. PILAT. Village improvement in relation to planting. Village improvement is a branch of civic art. Civic art in turn may be defined as the conservation, im- provement, and utilization of public property. Vil- lage improvement thus takes its place alongside of town-planning, country-planning, the development of garden cities, and other work of a similar nature. The public-property test may be rather strictly applied to all branches of civic improvement, includ- ing village improvement, for while village improve- ment does in fact undertake extensive work upon private grounds, this is undertaken solely in the public interest. In village improvement it is rather important to fix attention upon the village or small town as a permanent unit. For the most part, the small towns of America have had notable ambitions for growth. Each one has intended to grow up into a state capital or a large manu- facturing center. On this account it has been impracti- cable to make intelligent plans for the actual circum- stances, that is for an indefinite period of existence without further expansion. The growth problem, while it is largely a psychological factor, is a very important one in connection with village life and development. It is a problem which should be seriously faced. Each community should understand its actual circumstances and its ambitions, if it is to make any real improvement in its condition. Inasmuch as civic improvement is based upon public property, the scope of its work may be outlined rather strictly by the extent and character of property owned in any community. The more important types of public property, with some discussion of the problems attached to their improvement, are taken up herewith. The illustrations and plans (Figs. 2991-2996) suggest some of the important phases, particularly as related to planting. Streets. — Streets and public roads constitute perhaps the most important mass of public property in each com- munity. They are ab- solutely indispensable and have a very high monetary value judged by any scale whatever. Road and street im- provement is always looked upon as a practi- cal benefit to the com- munity and may, there- fore, naturally and properly become the starting-point of general village improvement . Street improvement should be studied with reference to (a) location, (6) design, (c) construc- tion, (d) furnishings, (e) maintenance, (a) The location of streets and roads is generally looked upon as an inviolable ac- complishment, yet many roads and streets can be, and should be relocated, or altogether abandoned. In other places new streets should be pro- vided. (6) Some streets ought to be straight, some ought to be curved, some ought to be wide, some should be narrow. Some should be provided with wide grass verges, with rows of trees and with parkings. In other parts of the village, streets should have no such furnishings. In fact, each street should be made a study by itself, and should be properly designed 2994. Plan for main residential village street. PLANTING PLANTING 2659 for its special conditions, (c) All streets, of course, should be well constructed. Macadam and tarvia are good materials. However, there are many streets which do not need such expensive improvement. The prob- lems of street construction are generally fairly well studied, but of course, final and perfectly satisfactory results are never achieved, (d) Besides the trees in the street, there are many other things to be considered, such as guide-posts, letter-boxes, and especially tele- phone, electric-light, and trolley poles. All these furnish- ings should be made as satisfactory as possible. Espe- cially in the matter of poles the ideal is to reduce their number to the minimum, (e) All streets need to be kept in good repair and to be kept clean. These are always important matters, but they cost considerably more care, labor, and money than most persons imagine. Village improvement can nearly always make con- siderable progress in this one point of keeping the streets clean and in good condition. Transportation may be reckoned as the second great problem of village improvement. The development of attractive railroad station-grounds, by proper planting of trees, shrubs, and grass is a matter always to be looked after. In rural communities, at the present time, with the large development of trollej" service, the design and location of first-class trolley waiting stations becomes a matter of great importance and should receive careful attention. Schoolhouses and school-grounds constitute a very important type of public property, and every campaign of village improvement should look after them care- fully. School-grounds should be kept clean and orderly and should have some tree plantings. Wherever pos- sible there should be grass, but the improvement of school-grounds with flower-beds is almost out of the question. Perhaps the most insistent problem of the improvement of the school-grounds themselves, lies in securing adequate area, which should be from 2 to 5 acres for each school instead of the K acre commonly allowed. Playgrounds are very much needed in every village and rural community. The problems connected with them are, (1) to secure the necessary allotment of land; (2) to have this ground properly planned and developed, (3) to have the play properly supervised. The embel- lishment will consist chiefly of large trees for shade and to improve the appearance. Flowrer-beds and borders are quite out of place on playgrounds. t.**5. Plan of country road, showing suggested arrangement of trees, shrubs, and flowers. . Reservations of several sorts are needed in every vil- lage. These should be primarily for recreation, but should include also places of historic importance or those of great scenic beauty. Public buildings, including churches, libraries, grange halls, town halls, and the like, must be of the best char- acter in order to secure proper results in village develop- ment. All these public buildings should be studied with reference to adaptation to use, proper location, group- ing with other public buildings, good architectural design, and substantial construction. The grounds about these public buildings should be developed to the best possible advantage. As a rule, shady lawns with good substantial trees give the best result. Home-grounds are of prime significance in every com- munity and every village-improvement society should undertake to secure the best treatment of them pos- sible. Neighborhood competitions are useful to this end but sound horticul- tural instruction is always necessary. The more strictly horticultural phases of village improve- ment, therefore, are the planting and care of trees, the de- velopment of grass areas, especially lawns, home-garden improvement with some emphasis upon front yards, and school-garden enter- prises of several sorts. In the care of trees on public streets and grounds, a com- petent tree-warden is greatly to be de- sired. When state legislation provides for such an officer he should be chosen with great care and 2996. Plan for country road four rods wide. supported with reasonable appropriations of public funds; and in states where tree-wardens are not pro- vided for by law such legislation should be secured as soon as possible. The Massachusetts law is perhaps as good a pattern as any. Street trees are subject to severe injuries even beyond the liability of other shade trees, such as the damage from leaky electric wires and gas-pipes, gnawing of horses, and sometimes the attacks of ignorant linemen putting up wires. Add to these the usual menace of insect attacks, such as elm leaf-beetle, leopard moth, forest caterpillar, gipsy moth, and the like, and it will be seen that the protection of valuable street trees is a real undertaking. (See Diseases and Insects and Arboriculture.) The improvement of home -grounds and similar areas is treated elsewhere. (See Landscape Gardening.) The peculiar agent of village improvement is the village-improvement society, but other organizations are equally useful. Woman's clubs and boards of trade are usually effective. Very often smaller groups which undertake to cover only a single street or a single small neighborhood accomplish the most intensive and satis- factory results. As a rule it is undesirable to form a new organization in any community for village improve- ment. It is better policy to seek the cooperation of the various existing societies. In certain circumstances these can be federated in a way to cover the problem satisfactorily. Four factors must always cooperate in order to secure satisfactory results in civic improvement of any sort. These factors are (a) local initiative, (b) expert advice, (c) time, and (d) money, (a) It is always necessary to have some energetic local society or group of men and women who will stand behind any improvement proposi- tion. Without this local initiative nothing can possibly be done. (6) In addition to this it is usually desirable and sometimes positively necessary to have work under- taken on the basis of practical plans drawTi by experts from outside the community. The outside assistance is valuable even when no more expert than advice which might be secured within the community itself. Good 2660 PLANTING PLANTING plans are, however, always indispensable, (c) It then requires a considerable amount of time to carry out important improvement projects. It has been esti- mated that from six to ten years are always necessary in order to bring a community around to a proper under- standing of its problems, and to secure sufficient unity of opinion to accomplish valuable results, (d) Money is 2997. Planting without composition. very important, but not one-half so important as per- sons usually suppose. As a rule the money can be raised whenever the community is convinced, as a whole, that the proposed improvement is worth while. It is best under all circumstances to have public prop- erty paid for and improved from public funds. This means that the money should be voted by the people themselves from the public treasury. The ordinary way of raising money for village improvement, by raffles, fairs, and other voluntary means, is wholly unsatisfactory. It can accom- plish only trivial results. FRANK A. WATTGH. Shrubbery in the landscape. Shrubs and bushes have two values: an intrinsic value as individual or single specimens; a value as part of the structure or design of an orna- mented place. As individual speci- mens, they are grown for the beauty of the species itself; as parts of the landscape, they are usually grown in masses, constituting a shrubbery. It is often advisable to plant shrubs as single specimens, in order to produce the characteristic beauty of the spe- cies; but the temptation is to plant exclusively as isolated specimens, and the emphasis needs, therefore, to be placed on mass-planting. Plants scattered over a lawn destroy all appearance of unity and purpose in the place (Fig. 2997). Every part of the place is equally accented. The area has no meaning or individuality. The plants are in the way. They spoil the lawn. The place is random. If the shrubs are sheared, the spotted and scattered effect is intensified. Rarely does a sheared shrub have any excuse for existence, unless as a part in an artistically designed formal garden. A mass or group of planting em- phasizes particular parts of the place. It allows of bold and broad contrasts. It may give the place a feeling of strength and purposiveness. The shrub- bery-mass usually should have an irregular outline and it often contains more than one species. Thereby are variety and interest increased. Fig. 2998 suggests the interest in a good shrubbery- mass. The shrubbery-masses should be placed on the boundaries; for it is a concept of landscape gardening that the center of the place shall be open. (Fig. 2999; also Figs. 2076, 2077, and others in Vol. IV.) The boundaries are the lines between properties, the foun- dations of buildings, the borders along walks and drives. Judicious planting may relieve the angularity of foun- dations and round off the corners of the yard. (Fig. 3000.) Individual specimens may be used freely, but only rarely should they be wholly isolated or scattered. They should be planted somewhere near the borders, that they may not interfere with the continuity of the place and that they may have background to set them off. The background may be a building, a bank, or a mass of foliage. In most places, the mass or border- planting should be the rule and the isolated specimen the exception; but, unfortunately, this rule is frequently reversed. It is not to be understood, however, that boundaries are always to be planted or that foundations are always to be covered. L jj B. The chief value of shrubbery comes from its use in an artistic way, although some shrubs have edible fruits. Many shrubs, such as lilacs, some of the spireas, gooseberries, and currants, produce leaves very early in the season and some, like forsythia, daphne, and the juneberry are covered with a profusion of blossoms at this time. From early spring until November in temperate latitudes leaves and flowers are to be found on deciduous shrubs, and from June until the following spring ornamental fruits can be seen on their branches, the red berries of the elder beginning and barberries ending the list. Some of these fruits are so richly colored and so abundant that they can be seen from a long distance. Many shrubs, like some of the viburnums and dogwoods, attain a height of 10 to 15 feet, while others, like bunch- berry and Daphne Cneorum, grow to a height of only a few inches. The leaves of some, 2998. A composition of shrub and tree forms. PLANTING PLANTING 2661 like the chokeberry, Thunberg's barberry, the hazels, viburnums, dogwoods, and sumachs are beautifully colored in autumn. The rhododendrons, laurels, and mahonias, and the daphne already named, are examples of shrubs having evergreen foliage. Some leaves, like those of the Saiix lucida, are glossy; others, as those of the common hazel, are hairy; some are thick, and others are thin; some large, some small; some entire, and some lobed, serrated or compound. Through- out the season the foliage of a good collec- tion of shrubbery will present the greatest variety of color, including all the hun- dreds of shades of green as well as yellow, white, gray, and purple. Even in winter shrubbery is wonderfully attractive in appearance from the gracefulness of its stems and branches, and from the color of its bark. With the right selections, it will serve almost as well as evergreens to shut out from view fences or other low unsightly objects. This great variety in foliage, flower, fruit, and habit of growth makes shrub- bery adapted to very extended use in the development of landscapes. It is especi- ally appropriate along the boundaries of ornamental grounds (Fig. 2999), upon steep slopes, and in the immediate vicinity of buildings where foliage and graceful lines are needed to connect the walls of a structure with the ground (Fig. 3000), without making too much shade. It might with advantage replace the grass upon all sur- faces too steep to walk upon with comfort. The foliage of shrubs that are well established remains green when dry weather turns grass brown. The broad mass of shrubbery will take care of itself when the grass needs frequent attention. Even some level surfaces might be improved in places by exchanging a lawn covering for the covering of low woody plants. Often a broad open space over a lawn is an important feature of a landscape, since it allows extended views. Many times a landscape would be more interesting if the green underneath this open space were produced by a broad mass of shrubbery, like a miniature forest, instead of grass. In planting borders or groups of shrubs, the ground to be occupied by such a group should be entirely spaded over or plowed. Perhaps no better advice could be given than to prepare the soil as it should be prepared for a field of corn. The bushes should then be planted so that there is room for about two years' growth before their branches intermingle. If placed closer they would have a crowded appearance from the start and would not join their branches as harmoniously as when the new growth is allowed to choose its own position. If placed farther apart the effect is also bad. Occasionally a single shrub at the margin of a belt may stand out almost by itself, but generally the effect of a group should be that of a continuous mass of varying foliage. """ . **'tx->f "-•.•.•• '-:''?*£ 2999. The open center and margined sides. • 3000. An effective planting against a hard corner. In arranging different shrubs, the taller-growing kinds should generally be placed in the center of the group, and the lower species along the border, the space being graded from the highest to the lowest. The reason for this arrangement is that the lower plants would be killed by the shade of the larger ones if placed back of them, and moreover would not be seen ; but one should avoid too uniform a slope. For example, in a continuous border there should be places where shrubs of larger size occupy the full width so as to bring growth of con- siderable height into the lawn. The arrangement should be varied so as to avoid all monotony, but in securing this variation a mixture of miscellaneous shrubs of all kinds does not give so good an effect as broader areas of single species or genera slightly interspersed at the margin with shrubs of another kind. Straight rows should be avoided. A laborer or a novice when told this wall arrange the plants in a zigzag manner, thinking that he is placing them irregularly, the result often being almost the same as that of two rows. If the group is being planted along a straight line, as the boundary of a lot, the distances of the successive plants from this line might be somewhat as follows: 2 feet, 4 feet, 5 feet, 3 feet, 1 foot, and the distances apart, measured parallel with a fixed line, should vary also. The ideal condition of a group of shrubbery is to have all the individual plants healthy, so that the foliage will appear fresh and of good color. This foliage should extend down to the surface of the adjacent lawn or walk, and shade the ground underneath so completely that nothing will grow there. The leaves which fall with the approach of winter should be allowed to remain as a perpetual mulch. The desired result cannot be secured the first year the shrubs are planted unless they are of large size and moved but a short distance. The aim in caring for a new plantation should be to secure thrifty plants, and this care, like the preparation of the soil, should be such as is given to a field of corn. Very little trimming should be done. If a bush is tall and spindling it may be well to cut it off next to the ground and allow it to sprout again. If there is any dead wood it should, of course, be cut off. But when a shrub is healthy and vigorous, let it grow in its own 2662 PLANTING PLANTING graceful way. If it encroaches upon the walk, cut away the encroaching branch near the root so that the mark of the knife will not be noticed. Such treatment will help to retain the winter beauty of the branches. The value of shrubbery is not appreciated, either as part in a landscape design or as furnishing for a place. In combination with trees and woods, it ties the planting together, providing easy gradations from greensward up to the tops of trees. Merely to relieve bareness, shrubs are of singular value, as in the suggestion in Fig. 3000, and again, even when slight in quantity, in Fig. 3001. The back- ground in Fig. 3002 is brought down to the ground-line by greenery, mostly of shrub growth. The beauties of Fig. 3003 are in large part the shrub forms and colors, and the arrangement insures much of the general effect. The reader will find that most verdurous landscapes that please him will have then- furniture of shrub and bush. o C. SIMONDS. Woods in the landscape. The principal elements of landscape are atmospheric conditions, irregularities of the earth's surface, water, artificial constructions, herb and shrub ground-cover, and the woods. In the United States the great areas east, west, north, and south of the treeless prairie regions were mostly in evergreen or deciduous woods. Industries, habitation, and cultivation have divided the great wooded areas into small wood-lots and into forests that are for the most part broken into sprout- and tree- growth areas as the cordwood or timber is harvested in thirty- to sixty-year periods. The corresponding land- scape modifications to that offered by this cutting of the forests is presented by homestead tree plantations that have broken the great unobstructed herb-covered prairie sweeps into series of tree-framed vistas. This offers a striking example of the importance of woods in landscape. 3001. A protection of shrub and tree forms. 3002. A verdurous landscape of tree and shrub. — Thiergarten, Berlin. In the arid regions of the West, the woods are con- fined to a meager growth in places made moist by springs, streams, or by irrigation, to mountain slopes and valleys, and to the humid regions and mountain valleys of the Northwest. In this last section, the region of sequoias, pines, spruces, and firs, are the state- liest cone-bearing forests of the continent. The white and Norway pines of the Northeast and the long-leaf pine of the Southeast, only approach the Pacific Coast Range trees in grandeur. As landscapes of the highest types of beauty include woods, and as wood has a high economic value, one should determine how best to save woods for their beauty and to set aside the areas that should be har- vested. To fix upon areas to be kept in woods and those to be used for agriculture, industries, and habitation, economic surveys should be made of large areas. In such surveys land that is ill fitted for cultivation should be outlined and set aside in public reservation, with a view to maintaining it largely in forests. Land that is suitable for cultivation, habitation, and industries should be set aside for these purposes, and the forests stripped therefrom as the land is needed. This country- side planning is already being worked out in the study of city and county. The plans of the regions about Boston, Massachusetts, in Essex County, New Jersey, and Cook County, Illinois, and of such towns as Hope- dale, Massachusetts, represent studies in which forest areas are set aside, in public reservations, and the forest growth encouraged thereon. It is not to be assumed that such forests are without other economic values than the recreation they offer to many persons. It has been found possible in the development of such areas to increase the beauty of the forests and to secure a money-return that will nearly, if not quite, cover the cost of the cutting from the sale of forest-thinning products. It is likely that under wise management such forests can be constantly increased in beauty with little or no burden of cost. In the areas that are assigned in the economic study of a region for other purposes than permanent forest holdings, the existing forest growth may often be con- tinued for many years as the principal crop, or new forests may even be planted and grown before the time comes to cultivate the land in annual crops. In the development of woods in landscape, the work can be performed in such a way as greatly to increase the beauty of the existing growth, which now is seldom the primeval growth, by thinning to develop the finest specimens and the finest groups of trees. A selection can also be made in the cutting to increase the domi- nance of different species in different localities. Cut- ting may often be made to open vistas and wide views from particularly attractive viewpoints. It can also be made to develop more attractive sky-lines and foliage- masses as seen from valley viewpoints or from hilltop and ridges to distant hills and ridges. The larger factors of beauty in land- scape and the economic values of woods are of interest to the general public. To the individual owner of estates and home- grounds the woods have a more intimate and personal interest. Such owners are concerned about the protection against drifting snow, bleak wind, and hot sun, a shelter for the bird-life that protects the crops, a setting and a background for their home buildings to merge them into an agreeable landscape picture, a ramble and a picnic place where the wild flowers, the fruits, and the autumn leaves can be found by the children who love the woods. The wood-lot is also a place where many sticks of timber for special purposes and some n :• i ,"'' ' • PLANTING PLANTING 2663 cordwood will be secured in the cutting from year to year of the weaker trees that are overtopped by their neighbors, and from thinning that must be made if the highest types of woodland beauty are to be developed. Bear in mind that the wood-lot in good soil may produce a cord of wood to the acre each year. as oak, maple, and magnolia. The last third would be of such undergrowth, shrubs, and small trees as the flower- ing dogwoods, red-bud, benzoin, viburnums, white fringe, rhododendrons, azaleas, callicarpa, manzanita, and madrona. Woodland ground-cover plants may be established by bringing them in from the woods with an abundance of the natural leaf-mold soil retained about their roots. The location for the wood-lot is at the point near the home buildings where it will best serve such purposes as are referred to early in this article, but as open land in this position is very valuable for farm uses the lot should not be large; elsewhere on the farm the wood-lot should occupy land least suited for annual crops, such as the very steep slopes and the rocky or bar- ren areas. Aside from woods themselves, tree forms have their special values in providing structural features in a landscape, combin- ing well with architectural forms and afford- ing good backgrounds and boundaries. Strip the trees from such constructions as shown in Figs. 3004 and 3005 and note the effect. WARREX H. MAXXING. 3003. A good open area, with attractive shrub forms and tree forms. Fortunate is the owner who has an established wood- lot, and especially if he appreciates and takes wise advantage of its utility and beauty. As woods would be included the thicket of few trees in the little town lot as well as the acres of trees on the large estates, because in the cool shade and leaf-mold soil of each the same plants and bird-shelters may be established. When there is no wood-lot one must plant either evergreen or deciduous trees to make one. If the home lot is a small one and it is desired to have a little wood-lot high enough to walk under at once, at reasonable cost, tall slender collected or nursery-grown trees may be planted close together and then thinned as they grow. If a shelter-belt for winter is the most important consideration, use .such cone-bearing evergreens as the pines, spruces, hemlocks, junipers, arbor-vitae, cypress, the last three for a narrow belt, or in the South and on the Pacific coast, such broad-leaved ever- greens as the magnolia, eucalyptus, cam- phor tree. It should be known that undergrowth and ground-cover plants with attractive flowers cannot be so easily established under evergreens as under deciduous trees ; also that among the deciduous trees are more rapid-growing species with attractive flowers and fruit. To grow a very interesting wood-lot in a few years from the small seedling plants that can be secured in large quantities at low cost, such plants would be set from 3 to 5 feet apart. At this distance they soon shade the ground so much with foliage as to kill out ordinary weeds and give en- couragement to the more attractive wood- land plants. Furthermore, close planting will force a rapid growth in height. In the selection of plants, about a third would be made up of the quick-growing low-cost species such as poplar, soft maple, ne- gundo, catalpa, locust, and in warm sec- tions the eucalyptus, pepper tree, grevillea. Another third would be made up of the slower-growing more permanent trees, such Wild-gardening. Wild-gardening is the art of arranging and growing colonies of hardy plants, native or foreign, so that they will look like wild flowers, multiplying with little or no care after planting. A wild-garden is not a garden that has run wild, reminding us of man's neglect; it is a poetic suggestion of the beauty of nature untouched by man. Beginners commonly suppose that wild- gardening is merely the cultivation of native flowers, as in a small border. Such an effort is worth while, but it is rarely artistic and can hardly be called wild-garden- ing. The main idea of the latter, originally, was to naturalize foreign flowers in larger masses than those of the garden. Wild-gardening is, therefore, a branch of landscape gardening which aims to reproduce the largest floral effects of nature with the least suggestion of man's interference. The large facts in wild-gardening are: (1) the place or location for it; (2) the composition, as part of the landscape; (3) the kinds of plants; and (4) the small 3004. Tree forms in relation to informal architecture. — House in Japan. 169 2664 PLANTING PLANTING or incidental effects of clumps and nooks here and there. Fig. 3006 shows a wild-garden composition; ordinarily, a wild-garden is supposed to be merely "wild" or grow- ing at random, as in Fig. 3007, and this effect is some- times much to be desired. The nook or corner effect of planting (4) is shown in Fig- 3008, representing a rear screen. Wild-gardening as a distinct department of floricul- ture first came into popularity about 1870, when "The Wild Garden" was written by William Robinson. Robinson's first aim was to introduce more variety into English gardens, which were monotonously gaudy in the Victorian era. Because of their greater showiness, tropical bedding-plants had driven hardy perennial flowers out of fashion. Robinson put the border on an artistic plane by paying more attention to grouping, color schemes, and new varieties; he popularized the rock- and water-garden; and he created the wild- garden. His second aim in wild-gardening was to reproduce some of the loveliest floral pictures of the 3005. A background protection for an architectural construction.- Temple entrance, Nikko, Japan. North Temperate zone which demand freedom from the garden inclosure. A third aim was to make a place for thousands of plants worth growing that are ban- ished from conventional gardens because they have small flowers, a short season, or are unsightly when out of bloom. A fourth aim was to satisfy the universal craving for wildness. The areas most commonly used for wild-gardening are woods, meadows, and orchards. Unfortunately, orchards cannot usually be kept in grass for many years, as in Europe. Those who are the fortunate possessors of waterside, bluffs, rocks, or sandy wastes have special opportunities for wild-gardening. Those who are con- fined to city lots can merely suggest the spirit of wild- gardening in lawns and borders. The finest effects in wild-gardening are suggested not by book-study but by nature-study, paying special attention to grouping and massing. For example, if the problem is to cover a bank, the books suggest locust, willows, or other suckering plants. The beginner then covers the bank exclusively with locusts or willows, which produces an artificial or gardenesque effect. Nature rarely adopts a one-plant solution of any prob- lem. She generally grows three or four crops on the same ground, e. g., tree, shrub, and vine, or shrub, carpeting- plant, and bulb. If one follows the nearest river-bank for a mile or so, the finest combination may be buckeye, wild goose- berry, and American bluebells, or sumach, blue phlox, and adder's-tongue. Such combinations always give more variety than one-plant solutions, generally more color, and look wilder because they represent a mode of living worked out by ages of struggle. When one com- bines roses, lilacs, and peonies on a sand-hill, the plants look unhappy, especially in August, but if one plants red cedar and bay berry the plants soon look as if they had been there from time immemorial. The skill of the wild-gardener lies in detecting plant associations that will solve each practical problem and look as if they were hundreds of years old. In massing plants so as to imitate nature the com- monest notion is to scatter them indiscriminately, but this is no longer considered the surest and quickest way to produce the finest effects. The showiest floral effect in nature is the solid mass or sheet of flowers of a single kind. But this is not the finest or wildest effect. Wil- liam Robinson often takes the clouds as patterns in out- lining his colonies. Clouds also suggest good combina- tions of density and thinness in sowing seeds or plant- ing bulbs. One of the finest floral effects in nature is the kind of massing known as "the mother country and her colonies." The object is to suggest that the flowers have sprung from seed scattered by the prevailing wind. The outlying masses, therefore, follow one general direction (without being in straight lines), and they decrease in number, size, and density as they recede from the largest mass. Design in wild-gardening. In the woods one generally has the greatest opportunity for intensifying the feeling of wildness, because it is often possible to shut out all suggestion of the outside world — including even the sounds of civilization. Therefore, woods are generally sur- rounded by an irregular belt of native shrubs dense enough to hide artificial objects from the interior of the wood, leaving openings only for the main trails. The entrances can be marked without mak- ing them too gardenesque by saving or planting any trees that naturally form a good arch or frame, as white pine often does, by planting some accent marks, such as red cedar, arbor-yitae, canoe birch, and mountain-ash, or by training into a bower vines such as wild grape, clematis, bittersweet, or Virginia creeper. A system of trails is next established and the planting is usually made near the trails, from which the colonies are generally expected to spread gradually into the remoter parts of the wood. To secure the finest effects, however, it is necessary to plant the dramatic, or picturesque places, such as spring, brook, rocks, glades, hilltop, or outlook with the wild flowers appropriate to each situation. Wild-gardening in the woods is also known as landscape forestry. In meadows it is possible to allow daffodil bulbs to multiply for many years, since they may not interfere with the hay crop. The foliage ripens and falls to the ground before harvest. Bulbs that bloom after har- vest-time, like Lilium superbum, are best restricted to the edges of the meadow. But the sunny meadow generally offers the greatest canvas for painting floral pictures — daffodils by the 10,000 and narcissi either in sheets or colonies. In fields, however, wild-gardening involves serious economic loss. Despite this fact, many efforts have been made to imitate the European grain-fields made glorious by Papaver Rhoeas, the scarlet annual weed which is the parent of the Shirley poppies. The seed is cheap but the poppies bloom in a half-hearted fashion and vanish after a year or two. In permanent pastures wild-gardening is limited to species that are not eaten by cattle, and the effects are necessarily scattering or spotty. On a hillside at Grave- tye, Robinson has naturalized the oriental poppy in isolated clumps of about a dozen plants. This is per- haps the most daring feat with which a wild-gardener may hope to succeed, for foreign flowers as gorgeous as this cannot pass themselves off as wild flowers. The PLAXTIX< 1 PLANTING 2665 distant effect, however, is very spirited, and the green background saves the effort from vulgarity. On rocks the arrangement is largely determined by the position of soil-pockets large enough to grow plants. Soil can be added, but at great expense. The waterside offers chances for unique effects, because the boldest tree-forms and colors have a mirror, scilla. and glory-of-the-snow. Unfortunately, they cannot ripen their foliage before the lawn must be mown, and therefore they die in a few years. Plant materials. There are three principles that grow out of the aim of wild-gardening, which is to grow self-supporting colon- ies that will look and act like wild flowers. (1) The esthetic principle is that all materials in landscape wild-gardening shall be primitive species or slightly im- proved varieties. This rules out all flowers that have been pro- foundly modified by man, such as double and round-petaled flow- ers of all kinds. Double daffodils thrive permanently in some meadows, but they do not look like wild flowers, as single daffo- dils do. May tulips and Darwins are permanent, but these also do not look like wild flowers, as do tulips with pointed petals. Cot- tage tulips look wilder than other late tulips, and the wildest of all is Tulipa syh-estris. The magnifi- cent red flower, Tulipa Gesneri- ana, which somewhat resembles the prototype of garden tulips, is too gorgeous to look like a wild flower in the woods, but it might be used for distant effects in the meadow, if oriental poppy is considered permissible. (2) The 3006. A wild-garden composition, showing the landscape effect. shrubs may obscure the line where land and water meet, and amphibious plants, like the aquatic buttercup, may swim out a few feet. Also the grace of falling water can be suggested by shrubs with arching branches, or vines planted at the top of the bank. Some of the best colonies of wild flowers are those formed by seeds fall- ing from the top of a bank. In roadside planting, ideals have changed greatly since 1900. Then the standard of beauty was the shrub- lined roadsides of Xew England. That type is rapidly vanishing from the main roads, owing to the laws against the gipsy moth and the use of the stone walls for road-making. Xo two miles of roadside planting should be alike. There should be shrubs enough to bring back the birds; and wild flowers arranged and maintained according to the principles of wild- gardening. On city lots, the wild-garden shrinks merely to a border of wild flowers but differs from the hardy bor- der of mixed perennials. The latter is a conventional arrangement of flowers, mostly of foreign origin, selected for their showy forms, colors, and succession of bloom. The border of wild flowers may become an artistic wild- garden by directly imitating some natural effect, especially a local combination or plant association. For example, in the shady border the flood-plain may be recalled by hepatica. bloodroot, meadow rue, and tril- lium: the swamp by cinnamon and royal fern and marsh marigold; the ra vine by Aster laevis and blue-stemmed goldenrod. In the sunny border the prairie may be recalled by cone-flowers, compass plant, and sunflowers; the swamp by boneset, joe-pye, and blue lobelia; the riverside by mist-flower (Eupatorium cadestinum) and sneezeweed; the dry roadside by butterfly weed and wild bergamot. < )n city lots, also, the free meadow contracts into a close-cropped lawn, but the wild-gardening spirit is expressed in numberless attempts to naturalize crocuses and the March-blooming bulbs — snowdrop, Siberian cultural principle demands per- manence in wild-gardening. Cro- cuses, early tulips, and hyacinths are too short-lived in long grass. English books and magazines illustrate exquisite effects in March and April made by winter aconite, European cyclamen, Grecian wind-flower, and Apennine anemone, but these are too tender or difficult for the American public to naturalize. (3) The economic principle requires that the materials of wild-gardening shall be cheap, for expensive varieties are instantly recognizable and look out of place. A good rule is to pay not more than 1 or 2 cents a bulb for daffodils by the 1,000 or 500. There are twenty to thirty varieties that can be had at this rate, and they fit the woods and meadows better than the varieties that cost 3 or 4 cents a bulb. Foreign species offer greater temptations for display than native kinds. The danger line is that between the garden and wild-garden. This has already been indi- cated for daffodils, which are the unquestioned favor- 3007. A wild-garden. 2666 PLANTING PLANTING ites for wild-gardening. Dutch hyacinths are inappro- priate in long grass, and they soon perish. The Roman hyacinth looks more like a wild flower, but it is better to plant English bluebells or wood-hyacinths, known to the trade as Scilla nutans and S. hispanica, and the prairie hyacinth, Camassia esculenta. In addition to the for- eign species commended, the lemon lily (Hemcrocallis) is also adaptable, as its foliage harmonizes with long grass. This species looks much better beside the water than the orange day lily, which is better suited to the roadside. The most beautiful group for the water-side, probably, is the genus Iris. The famous iris meadow of the Royal Horticultural Society at Wisley, which has inspired much American wild-gardening since 1908, is a standard for combining the maximum of splendor with good taste. There is no difficulty in making the Sibe- rian iris look wild, or the tall yellow iris of Europe, but the German and Japanese must be used with restraint, if at all. It is safer to use large masses of native varieties than of foreign ones, but it is easy to overdo bee-balm, New England aster, butterfly weed, blue flag, and purple cone-flower, unless they are softened by shade, mel- lowed by distance, or veiled by long grass. Other Ameri- can plants that are generally easy to manage on a large scale are marsh marigold, large-flowered trillium, wild 3008. A small wild-garden at the rear of a building. blue phlox, spiderwort, Lilium superbum, boltonia, sneezeweed, sunflower, swamp rose mallow, and cardi- nal flower. The ideal in the planting and after-care of a wild- garden is to betray no evidence of man's work. In planting bulbs, a good way is to scatter them on the ground, arranging them with the feet in cloud-like out- lines containing about fifty bulbs, and then plant them where they lie, using a dibber or bulb-planter when the ground has been softened by the rains. Another method is to cut three sides of a sod with a spade, raise the grass, and insert five to seven bulbs at irregular dis- tances. In the border the common unit of planting is a dozen plants; in the wild-garden fifty is a good unit. This is about the minimum that can be called a colony. Wild-gardening was formerly considered essentially cosmopolitan in its spirit, as it still is in England. In America, however, wild-gardening commonly means the cultivation of American wild flowers, and the number of pure American compositions has greatly increased. Over $6,000,000 worth of work done in the Middle West since 1901 has been inspired by the idea of restoration. Gardening within an inclosure is a matter of personal privilege, but wild-gardening has developed a distinct code of ethics, due largely to the Wild Flower Preserva- tion Society of America and walking clubs, like the Appalachian and Prairie, that do not permit their mem- bers to pick flowers, and a growing appreciation of wUd life- WILHELM MILLER. Bog-gardening. Bog-gardening depends for success on the distinction between bogs and other wet or swampy places (Vol. I, p. 519) . In the marsh or swamp, drainage is usually fairly regular and free; in the true bog, drainage is practically lacking or free only during the spring thaw. Because of this lack of drainage there is in all bogs an accumulation of sourness in the bog-water, which is strongly acid and dark-colored in some glacial pot- holes, more moderately so in some of the partly drained bogs of the coastal plain regions of the country. There is usually, but not always, a deficiency of lime in bog- soils, and in nature there is a very large percentage of mycorrhizal plants in them. The relation of the mycorrhizal habit of obtaining food and the acidity of the bog is a very delicate and complex one and little is actually known of it; but experience has shown such a relation to exist. The reason for having a bog-garden is that in it many very interesting plants may be grown that could not thrive in any other situation, and many ordinary swamp plants can also be grown along its edges. For those who have an undrained area or one poorly drained, the problem of having a bog-garden almost solves itself. But the demands of others who wish to grow the many beautiful species that will become naturalized only in such places, has led to the construction of artificial bogs. These may be of any size from a few square feet to comparatively large areas, and methods of construction must vary according to the nature of the subsoil. In places where there is a layer of hard-pan and the downward drainage is poor, it will be neces- sary only to dig out the desired amount, fill in enough blue clay to make the basin water-tight and then put in the mixture described below. A more permanent and satisfactory type of construction is to make the basin of concrete, the walls and floor of which should not be less than 6 to 8 inches thick, to prevent the concrete from cracking during frost. Waterproof the concrete, and it is best to smear clay over the walls and bottom because in all concrete mixtures there is lime. The completed bog, whether of concrete or merely scooped out of the ground, should be 2 feet deep, its edges practically flush with the surrounding ground. If of concrete, sods will easily grow over it and the hard line of the rim may thus be completely hidden. One should be sure, before filling with the mixture, that the tank is water-tight, as though it were for a lily- pond. The shape of the structure, whichever type of construction is used, must be a matter of individual taste. While informality is the essence of bog-garden- ing, a "regular irregularity" is most to be fought against. Observation of natural bogs, their shapes and shorelines, will put the imaginative bog-gardener in possession of all the suggestions needed. As an impor- tant feature, it should be remembered that the drainage from the surrounding region should be all in, not out. The mixture to go in the bog-garden is preferably one that has come out of a cranberry or natural bog, — muck, twigs, water, slime and all. From such a mix- ture, a host of very interesting bog-plants will spring up the first year and these may be isolated in clumps after the first season. A good plan when following this pro- cedure is to let the inner part of the bog run wild, clear- ing a strip of a foot or two all around the edges for the cultivation of species needing, for exhibition purposes, more open spaces. Provision should be made, either in this strip or in any other open place in the bog for: (1) a place where only sand and peat soil, mixed about half and half, is found, to be used for certain plants that are described in the lists following; and (2) some small space of practically open water where the very inter- esting bladder-worts may be grown. The latter situa- PLANTING PLANTING 2667 tion can be made by scooping out the muck for a few inches, filling in with sand and peat soil, leaving about 5 to 6 inches depth of water. For those who cannot secure muck from natural bogs, a soil may be mixed of leaf-mold, sand, and twigs and leaves of the oaks or of mountain laurel or rhododendron refuse. One should guard against getting the mixture too heavy and clave}'. Sand and plenty of twigs and leaves of the species men- tioned will lighten up the mixture, — leaf-mold makes it more heavy. The management of the bog-garden requires some skill and observation. As the amount of evaporation from the surface is enormous, water must be added, either artificially or naturally. Strive to keep the bog just full enough not to overflow, thus keeping the whole sponge wet, but preventing the leaking out of the valua- ble acids that are the life of the bog. Both for the effect and for the good of the bog, it is desirable to cover all the open spaces in it with live sphagnum moss, which when once established, will make a delightful carpet. Plants for the bog-garden. Many bog-plants are very showy and worthy of cul- tivation. Others, such as the insectivorous kinds, are among the most wonderful plants in nature, for they have the unique distinction of being able to digest ani- mal matter directly, a habit otherwise unknown in the realm of vegetable life. In the foUowing account of bog- plants many are necessarily omitted, and it should be remembered that a number of purely swamp species, not mentioned here, can also be grown in bogs. I. SHRCBS. Rhodora (Rhododendron canadense), purple flowers before the leaves in April and May; 3 to 5 feet. Swamp azalea (Rhododendron riscosum), white or pink flowers after the leaves in May or June; 5 to 8 feet. Sheep-laurel (Kalmia angustifolia) , purplish pink flowers, summer; 1 to 2 feet; also Kalmia polifolia in northern regions. Leather-leaf (Cham&daphne calyculata), small whit- ish flowers along one side of the branches, May; 1 to 2 feet. Labrador tea (Ledum groenlandicum), white flowers in terminal clusters; leaves russet-brown below; 2 to 5 feet. Wild rosemary (Andromeda polifolia), drooping white flowers, early spring; leaves silverv below; under 2*2 feet. Creeping snowberry (Chiogenes hispidula}, prostrate, with tiny white flowers and snow berries; leaves dark, evergreen. There are many others, but these are the best for the temperate regions of the United States. In the South many others are to be found. II. PERENNIALS, grown chiefly for their flowers. In any open part of the bog. Calla palustris. a greenish flowered water arum having a conspicuous white spathe; showy and hardy. Acorus Calamus, sword-shaped leaves and a finger- like flower-cluster; the root is the medicinal calamus. Viola lanceolata, a delicate, very free-flowered violet with lance-shaped leaves. Asclfpia-s lanceolata, a deep red milkweed, very show}-, and with smooth narrow leaves. Potentilla palustris. the purple marshlocks, a sprawl- ing rather rank bog-plant with purple flowers. Penthorum sedoides, greenish yellow flowers in curved spikes in summer; native plant, probably not in the trade. Orontium aquaticum, the golden-club, very early flowering, making a patch of gold in March or April. Menyanthes trifoliaia. with three-divided leaves and many conspicuous white flowers; the buck-bean is a valuable addition. Helonias bullala, flowering in April to May; the swamp pink is our most conspicuous spring flower. There are many asters, goldenrods, and eupatoriums that grow in bogs, as well as some gentians, but the bog species must be collected from the wild. In wet sandy places. Here must be grown all the species of Xyris or yel- low-eyed grass, curious plants with long, delicate, grass- like leaves and tiny heads of yellow flowers. Also species of Eriocaulon or bunch-flowers should be grown here. They are not large, have sword-shaped leaves and white erect heads not unlike the everlastings. With these two must go the meadow-beauty, different species of Rhexia with beautiful purplish red flowers. The common R. tirginica is the hardiest and easiest to procure. All the plants in this class and the following are to be secured from dealers in bog-plants or collected in the wild. There are others such as Lophiola, Xarthecium, and Zyadenus. In open water. The bladder-worts are different species of Utricularia, some with purple and some with yellow flowers, some floating on the surface and supported by air-bladders, others rooting near the edges of the pool. They are the most interesting and delicate of all bog species. III. BOG ORCHIDS. Many native orchids can be grown only in bogs, and from them the following have been selected, as the most noteworthy. All are perennials and may be secured from the dealers. Calopogon pulcheUus, pink-purple flowers about an inch in diameter, June and July; leaves grass-like. Cypripedium parviflorum, a small-flowered yellow lady's slipper; raise up so that the roots will not be too wet. Cypripedium spectabile (C. regime or C. hirsutum), showy lady's slipper; beautiful rose-purple or nearly white flowers; better for a little shade. Habenarid blephariglottis, a white-fringed orchid with a showy spike; 1 to 2 feet; does splendidly in the open sun. Habenaria cUiaris, yellow fringed orchid; very showy spike; 1 to 1^ feet. Arethusa bulbosa, beautiful purplish pink flowers, about the last of May; 3 to 6 inches. Spiranthes cernua, white, slender spikes; the ladies- tresses; several others, even more slender species are known. Besides these are over forty other species which may be collected by the enthusiast. Nearly all of our most beautiful native orchids are bog-flowers. Most of them can be grown in pure live sphagnum moss. IV. INSECTIVOROUS PLANTS. Grown more for their peculiar habits of getting food and for their odd form than for beauty. They are of several types; some catch insects in a tube-shaped leaf, drowning them at the bottom of the cup, others have stick}- hair to which the insect becomes fastened, and the most wonderful of all, the diona?a, actually traps its food by a contraction of its jaw-like, prickly leaves. The best insectivorous bog-plants are as follows: With pitchers. Sarracenia purpurea, having short purplish red pitch- ers, quite hardy northward, but not easy to maintain in an artificial bog. Sarracenia rubra, the red trumpet-leaf, with tall pitchers; does very well in artificial bog. Sarracenia flava, also with tall pitchers but yellow. Sarracenia Drummondii, with variegated pitchers, the largest and most showy of all. 2668 PLANTING PLANTING The last three must be taken in during the winter, north of Washington, D. C.; all of them grow rapidly and, if the season is favorable, will color up beautifully. With sticky hairs. All the species of Drosera have the curious habit of catching and digesting insects. They are all small plants which should be planted in masses on sphagnum moss. All native species are quite hardy and many can be secured from dealers in bog-plants. D. rotundifolia is the best; and D. capensis is a good species, but hardy only South. With contracting leajes. The Venus fly-trap, a low perennial with two valve- like leaves that contract whenever an insect or other irritation comes between them. Closing up rather rapidly these leaves are among the most interesting objects to see in the bog-garden. Not hardy north of Washington, D. C. The darlingtonia, a Califqrnian insectivorous plant allied to the eastern sarracenia, can be grown along the Atlantic coast only with protection, but south of Wash- ington it should be hardy. One of the most striking bog-plants. See Vol. II, page 964. N. TAYLOH. Water-gardening. Water -gardening is the cultivation of water-lilies and the other aquatic plants, those that grow in water rather then in bogs or wet soil, particularly those that have floating parts. Water-gardening is such a special form of plant- growing that it should be attempted only in the per- sonal parts of the grounds, and where all the conditions of control can be secured. The species formerly known were mostly collected from tropical climates and were adapted almost exclusively for warm greenhouse cul- ture and were to be found solely in botanic gardens and homes of the wealthy. However, the idea that our central Atlantic states were sufficiently warm to grow 3009. Nymphaea tuberosa, a native water-lily readily grown in ponds. The rootstock is shown in Fig. 2555 in Vol. IV. ( X M) some of the tropical varieties out-of-doors in summer was tested in the early eighties of last century by the successful flowering out-of-doors without artificial heat of a plant of Victoria regia. For many years the aquatic gardens in Lincoln Park, Chicago, the Shaw Botanic Garden in St. Louis, Missouri, the New York Botanical Garden at the Bronx, and Prospect Park, Brooklyn, as well as in other cities, have paved the way for the advancement of this popular and most interesting phase of gardening. But it was not until Latour-Marliac, of France, con- ceived the idea of crossing species of the hardy nympheas of the United States, notably the southern species N. mexicana (N. flava) and N. tuberosa (Fig. 3009, from G. F.), that a great impetus was aroused in the cultivation of water-lilies. The cost of maintain- ing a high temperature for the cultivation of the tropi- cal lilies, besides the necessity of having a glass struc- ture and water-tight tanks, cisterns, and so on, seemed still to impress the public generally that it was too costly to construct artificial pools and fountain basins. The products of Latour-Marliac found a ready market in England and as rapidly as he introduced a new hardy water-lily the more enthusiasm was aroused and the more the demand increased; and their popularity naturally spread to the United States. See also the dis- cussion under Nymphsea. It has been demonstrated that water-lilies can be grown successfully in the United States; not only the hardy varieties and the hybrids but the tender tropi- cal nympheas, the victorias, the Egyptian and Japanese lotus are to be seen, during our summer season. Many gardens and plantings of water-lilies and aquatic and subaquatic plants are too stiff and formal. Nothing is so inartistic as regular lines on the margins of some ponds and again of crowding too many varieties in one small pond. Natural planting is in masses and groups, and single plants are admissible only in small ponds or artificial basins in small and limited gardens. Since it is found that reinforced concrete is the sim- 8 lest means of construction and that water-tight and •ost-proof receptacles can be secured at moderate expense, water-gardening is rapidly developing. Also the number of species has so rapidly increased that it is no longer difficult to select water-lilies for a miniature garden, tubs, small pools, fountain basins, ponds, and lakes; also for all seasons of the year, as it has been demonstrated that these charming flowers can be had in the depth of winter. For the small garden where there is but a limited space, a miniature artificial stream terminating in a small pool could be constructed; on either side of this streamlet may be planted moisture-loving plants such as calamus, calthas, Calla palustris, rushes of various kinds, menyanthes, sagittarias, lobelias (cardinal flower), Myosotis Scorpioides, and iris in variety; and in the pool the miniature water-lily, Nymphsea tetragona (N. pygmsea) (white) and Nymphsea tetragona helvola (yel- low). This style of water-garden can be carried out on a much larger scale where space will permit and a much larger collection of subaquatic and moisture-loving plants can be used as well as more nympheas and of larger dimensions. Water-gardening on a small scale can be most suc- cessfully carried out with the use of tubst half-barrels sunken in the ground, two, three or more placed as thought best. In the rear of the tubs plant Japanese iris, flags, and moisture-loving plants, making a pleas- ing background, and between the tubs if ground can be kept moist, parrot's feather (Myriophyllum proser- pinacoides), or Myosotis scorpioides (M. palustris), or Lysimachia nummularia, or dwarf trailing plants. For tub culture nympheas of moderate growth are prefer- able. N. Laydekeri var. rosea and N. Laydekeri yar. lilacea are both charming varieties of pink rosy lilac, changing to rose and carmine, very free flowering. There PLANTING PLANTING 2G69 are several other nympheas of moderate growth and pleasing shades of color suitable for tub culture. Main- persons make serious mistakes by selecting strong and vigorous plants suited only for large ponds or even lakes. The plants may live and be very thrifty but will not flower. ^ used in outdoor planting. The fibrous-rooted exotics, such as palms and tree ferns, are grown in greenhouses for the full year, either in permanent beds or in pots and tubs. The larger and more perfect the specimen, the greater its value. Usually in such a collection of plants under glass there are numerous species each 3010. The native fish-grass, Cabomba caroliniana; sometimes confused with Myriophyllum. ( X Xt) A better and very satisfactory water-garden for a small place can be had by constructing a concrete pool 4 to 5 feet, or any size desired, bearing in mind that a large pool in a small garden is inconsistent. A pool or basin 4 to 5 feet in diameter and 2 feet deep will accommodate three nympheas. The surroundings may be similar as recommended for tubs, but no two gardens are alike. Other aquatics may be found under the genera Alisma, Aponogeton (Ouvirandra), Azolla, Brasenia, Butomus, Cabomba (Fig. 3010), Ceratopteris, Eichhornia, Elisma, Elodea, Euryale, Hottonia, Hydrilla, Hydrocharis, Hydrocleis, Lemna, Limnobium, Limnocharis, Lud- wigia, Myriophyllum, Nelumbo, Nuphar, Nymphoides (Limnanthemum), Pistia, Potamogeton, Riccia, Ric- ciocarpus, Sagittaria, Salvinia, Utricularia, Vallis- neria. See also the articles, Aquarium, Aquatics, Nymphxa, Victoria; also Bog-gardening, page 2666. WILLIAM THICKER. Subtropical-gardening. Under this denomination are included all those gardening efforts that aim to introduce into cool or cold climates the plant forms and the foliar luxuriance of tropical and semi-tropical regions. The subtropical garden may be permanent if it is under glass; but the term is usually employed to denote the summer effects secured by transferring glasshouse plants to the open and combining them in such a way as to produce a harmonious composition. It is not often that an approach to real tropical effects can be made in a northern garden, and yet it is well to have these effects in mind; Figs. 3011/3012, reduced from Garden and Forest, show real tropical vegetation. Subtropical plants are represented by the lush- leaved caladiums and cannas, the brilliant-colored foliage of crotons and dracenas, the towering plumes of palms, the succulent leaf or stem of century plant or cactus, and the dense rank ground-cover of selaginellas and todeas. The interest in such plants is chiefly in the foliage, rather than in the flowers. In the plant groups they stand at the opposite extreme from the rock-garden plants with tufts, cushions, and mats of miniature foliage that in the blossoming season are nearly covered with flowers, and thin films of mosses, lichens, and algae on the rock and earth surface. The subtropical plants of each of the climatic regions of the United States are usually from a warmer region, although natives having a like character may well be represented by one or a few plants, all grouped together in a crowded mass. Such a collection is not a subtropical garden and does not represent the most effective use of the material. The potted plants that have foliage tough enough to withstand summer winds and sun, such as palms, cycas, ficus, and crotons, are often used in the garden in sum- mer, or under the protection of trees, as subtropical beds or garden compartments. Each plant is valued for itself, just as it is in the greenhouse in winter, size and perfection of form being its chief attractions. Each has no relation to the foliage about it, except that its unu- sual character of leaf and growth makes a striking con- trast to the normal native vegetation. For this kind of planting a few well-grown specimens give the desired summer appearance to the garden. One of the very best of indoor subtropical gardens in America is the tropical house at Garfield Park, Chicago, where a comparatively few species, such as the tree- fern overhead and selaginellas as a ground-cover, are used in large numbers to make bands of foliage to arch paths and hide the glass roof, and to frame in vistas to glimpses of water, with carpets of green below. Here is a consistent and exquisite example of subtropical-gar- dening, the dominant note is light with the artificial construction that supports and protects it all, so cleverly disguised as to make it appear like a real glade in the 3011. A tropical planting. — Entrance to the botanic garden, Peradenia, Ceylon. 2670 PLANTING PLANTING tropics. There is an effect of airy lightness to it all that is a thrilling surprise as one passes in from the snows of winter out-of-doors. Equally as distinctive and effec- tive results would be secured by the use of such green- house vines as tacsonia, allamanda and bougainvillea, or by the use of the somber greens of ficus. In the open air, the use of palms, tree ferns, dracenas, crotons, caladiums, and ficus for summer decoration is not widespread. On large estates and in parks that can boast of greenhouses, a group planting of these subjects in the summer in the open is often to be found. In this case the outdoor use of the plants is more or less for the good of the plants and therefore little care or study is given to the grouping. The plants are "turned out to pasture" to rest up from the strenuous winter and stiffen their stems and roots for another year. Their winter appearance is their main purpose. Sometimes, especially in parks and botanic gardens, the plants are grouped by family or ecology, as a succulent group, desert group, or palm group, keeping closely to their winter arrangement under glass, more to put them under somewhat natural con- ditions for their best growth that they may require less personal at- tention from the gar- dener, than from a desire for any definite land- scape effects. The nearest approach in the United States (outside the very south- ernmost parts) to the tree-like palm vegetation of the tropics and sub- tropics is in the palmetto (Fig. 3013; also Fig. 3516, Vol. VI), which is native as far north as North Carolina, and is very useful as a decorative plant. The smaller - growing subtropical plants are much used in the produc- tion of the most studied designs in planting, namely, in the construc- tion of floral patterns, the very precise designs of city seals and the emblems of the many 3012. A tropical growth. — Giant bamboo in the Botanic Garden of Ceylon. Gigantochloa atter. secret orders, "floral signs," and rarely, as in Regent Park, London, in the making of floral clocks. In these plantings, use is made of celosias, alternan- theras, coleus, and echeverias and other tender succu- lents. This use of plants is decidedly on the wane on private estates and in the larger parks, for it has not now the sanction of fashion for the making of permanent seasonal garden features, but it has a value as display in horticultural or other exhibitions as a temporary affair, showing gardeners' ingenuity. One great use of individual subtropical plants in pots has been in formal gardens as decorative adjuncts. These are then distinct garden features, garden acces- sories of rank similar to statuary and special flower- beds. For such effects, large "orangeries" were main- tained in the great day of the formal garden in Italy and France, and the use of such plants has been retained in our elaborate gardens today. In park planting, the use of subtropical plants often produces pleasing pictures, but only when the entire surroundings are very artificial and refined. Since the final character of a finished planting is based solely upon the foliage mass, plants of the same character only should be used in the separate plantings. The most natural effect is gained when the plants are grown in the ground, either with the pots plunged or planted directly in the soil. For this purpose the plants must be given conditions under glass to keep them alive all winter, but not necessarily in active growth, or kept in a dormant condition in pits, or stored as tubers. Plants for this purpose may be thus grouped — the taller woody plants to give height of green foliage to the group, low tender flowering herbs to give color from leaf or flower, and bulbous plants for bold leafage or bright flowers as fillers among the foliage plants. Plantings of this kind involve considerable yearly cost for storage of potted plants or tubers, and great expense of annual planting and digging. Then there is a comparatively short sea- son of foliage and flow- ers, from the time that the semi-dormant vege- tation gets under way in July until cut down by early frosts. Yet effects not otherwise to be secured by plant ma- terials can be given gar- dens and parks in this way. This is a use of tender plants that will be greatly developed in the future, by park super- intendents and owners of large estates who have the courage to break away from the usual specimen or jumbled planting, and make real garden pictures. There is very little of this kind of gardening as yet. The temporary tropical foli- age of our summer gar- dens is much more effec- tively used today than it was a few years ago, but the problem must be studied more carefully before the best possible use is made of this material. The ideal subtropical garden gives in a small compass the feeling of the wonder and luxu- riance of the vegetation of the tropics, and suggests some of its pictures, whether under great glass roofs or in the open ground in the summer. WARREN H. MANNING. Plants for the seaside. Very distinctive types of American scenery are to be found along our seashores. The very dark green man- grove thickets come to the salt-water's edge on the Florida and the Gulf coasts with a backing of savannas of tall grasses, fringes, and islands of palms, and gloomy thickets of cypress trees draped heavily with the hang- ing gray moss-like tillandsias. Farther north on the Atlantic coast are great hills and sweeps of sand-dunes, constantly shifting, overwhelming the stunted growth of pine, cedar, oak, and maple. Here the sand-reeds push out their long fingers of undergrowth and root- fibers to hold the sand in place, and they establish con- ditions for shrubs of huckleberry, rose, deciduous holly, PLANTING PLANTING 2671 baccharis, and iva, and give protection to the young forest trees. Along the rock-bound New England coast are wind-swept compact masses and distorted individ- uals of cedar, pitch and Norway pine, corresponding in a way to the similar Monterey pine and cypress of the Lower California shore. With the pines and oaks of New England are maple and shad-bush with ground- cover thickets of baybeny, rose, beach plum, huckle- berry, and baccharis, and compact evergreen mats of bearberry, crowberry, and hanging curtains of the pros- trate juniper over faces of ledges. In the salt-marshes are great patches of the rich green sedges, and in the flats the brilliantly colored samphires. The main thing to be considered in the development of this native growth is to let it alone when it is well established. On the drifting sands of the dunes and plains of the seashore, plantations of the beach- grasses are made and protected as well as plantations of pines and shrubs. In California certain lupines and acacias have been successful, together with the reed, in holding the drifting sand. There are two kinds of seaside planting: the adapta- tion of the usual species used in the lawn and garden to seashore conditions for effects like the usual refined planting; the other the planting for definite seaside effects by the almost exclusive use of typical maritime flora. This second kind of seashore planting is rarely attempted, as natural seaside pictures are hard to imitate. The problem as usually conceived is one of finding plants that will endure seaside conditions. The tidal marshes are always fully planted by nature, and man can add little to good purpose. In sheltered bays, especially where the soil is good, the existing flora usually differs little from that common to the region inland, and it is no great problem to add to it. Even on the most exposed sites there is a low herbage and stunted undergrowth while a few picturesque wind-twisted trees give special distinction to the land- scape. Even evergreen trees are often found near the shore-line, and the black spruce on the Maine coast, pitch pine and red cedar in southern New England, Jersey pines on the sand-barren coast of the middle states, and farther south bald cypress, until this gives way to the tropical palmetto and mangrove. Given partial shelter near the taller woody plants, many low shrubs and herbs may be grown near the seacoast. There are many showy natives in the mari- time flora and many more may be brought from Europe, though few have been tried as yet. The salt in the soil or water is rather a minor factor to many plants. More important to their welfare is the light sandy or heavy clay soil on the seashore above the tide-line. For the woody plants, the great factor is the high wind which stunts the branches and foliage. Though the winds are high, yet the temperature is more even and usually higher than at the same latitude inland. This is a favorable factor. Since the sheltered nooks are not at all difficult to plant, it is on the exposed sites where the soil is poor that the problem is usually specially considered. If the soil is wet just above the tide-line, the beaches need no planting to hold the soil in place. When the soil is light and dry and shifts with the wind, not only is root- hold for the plants difficult, but the wind-driven sand cuts the twigs and foliage. It is here, where wind and wave meet, that several grasses do good work in hold- ing the shifting sand in place until larger-growing plants can get a foothold. Two good sand-binders are the beach-grass (Ammophila arenaria) and sea lyme- grass (Elymus arenarius). These can be set out as small Elants or the seeds sown upon the sand. Immediately ranches or heavy straw should be thrown on to hold the sand for a time until the grass takes hold. When these tall grasses are established, they may be rein- forced by lower tufted grasses, such as festuca and stipa. Immediately back of this line of exposure should begin the shelter-belt of trees and shrubs. This would consist of quick-growing trees, such as some of the willows, poplars, locusts, and some of the native cher- ries (Prunus serotina, P. pennsylvanica, P. nrginiana, and the like). These are to be followed by more permanent material, such as the stiff thick-growing thorns and native crab-apples, and the species of oaks and other native forest trees that will live in light soil. Trees with large or compound foliage are to be avoided. Several coniferous evergreen trees thrive in conditions close to the salt-water, particularly the white spruce, pitch pine, red cedar, and their geographical relatives. A great many trees, even the sturdiest natives, cannot thrive under extreme conditions along the seashore. Beneath the partial shelter of groups of trees, a great many shrubs will thrive under the handicap of sand and salt and wind. Particularly worthy of note are such common shrubs as Baccharis halimifolia, Lycium halimifolium, Ligustrum vulgare, Shepherdia canadensis, Hippophae rhamnoides, Salix riminatis, Rhamnus Frangula, Cornus paniculata, Rhus copallina, and the like, and among the beach-grasses Primus pumila, P. marUima, Myrica carolinensis, Cytisus scoparius, and the species of Tam- arix. To tie the shrubs to- gether, several vines, as the native species of grapes, ce- lastrus, and smilax, are very useful. For details of color, masses of native or exotic perennial herbs mav be grown. In dry soil select some of the species of Ar- meria, Sedum, Lathyms, As- clepias, Liatris, Silene, Statice, Opuntia, and so on. In wet soil try the native species of Hibis- cus, Iris, Aco- rus,Thalictrum, Lythrum, Soli- dago, and their near exotic relatives. The splash of salt-water is often fatal to many annuals, but those hardy annuals that like light warm soils, as pprtulaca and the Shirley poppy, will give masses of bright summer color. In the planting of herbs, there would be no special soil- preparation, or after-care, as refined garden effects are here out of place. Three distinct purposes are served by a judicious seaside planting: shelter from strong winds to benefit the crops and man, checking of shore erosion and sand movement, and definite landscape effects. One should not so much strive to secure gardenesque effects but rather to intensify the natural features of the land- scape. Examples of successful seashore planting are numer- ous along the coast of New England where summer colonies of the wealthy have been established, parts of Long Island, and in many places along the coast of the Middle Atlantic states. The first work in seaside plant- ing in this country was to prevent shore erosion, and from this work have developed the further uses for shelter and landscape effect. The problem of the shores of the Great Lakes is very similar, and much excellent " 3013. The palmetto or sabal of the southeastern states. 2672 PLANTING PLANTING work has been undertaken along the shore of Lake Michigan, just north of Chicago. A consistent plan for the development of this particular shore has been advocated. There are few books devoted wholly to the problem of seashore planting, and much experimenting is yet to be done. See "Seaside Planting of Trees and Shrubs," by Alfred Gaut (England) and "Gardens Near the Sea," by Alice Lounsberry. WARREN H. MANNING. Succulent plants and their culture. Succulents are fleshy plants of many kinds, but forming a cultural group well known as such to gardens. They are grown mostly for their striking or grotesque usually condensed form, and not for the verdurous character of foliage and spray; and some of them are notable for their showy bloom. Thi? aggregation of plants is comprised of genera and species of several very remotely related families. Cactaceae, perhaps, contains the largest number of genera and species belonging to this group, although not all members of the family are strictly succulent in 3014. A formal bedding design in succulents. habit. Next in point of number is undoubtedly Amaryl- lidacese, represented by Agave and Furcraea, with Euphorbiacese as a close third, represented almost wholly by the great genus Euphorbia, although a few species of Pedilanthus are to be included. Crassulaceae comprises a large number of genera and species, nearly all of which are succulent in habit of growth, although comparatively few genera are common in cultivation. Conspicuous among these crassulaceous things may be listed Bryophyllum, Cotyledon, Crassula, Echeveria, Kalanchoe, Sedum, and Sempervivum. In Asclepiada- cese the group is represented chiefly by Stapelia, although, to a limited extent, one finds in cultivation representatives of Caralluma, Ceropegia, Duvalia, Echidnopsis, and Heurnia. Bromeliacese gives two genera, Dyckia and Hechtia. Liliaceae contributes Aloe, Apicra, Gasteria, Haworthia, and a compara- tively small number of species of Yucca. The great family of Composite has representatives in a section of the genus Senecio. By some authors this group of senecios is considered as having generic standing under the name Kleinia. In their wild forms, succulents are native to widely separated geographical areas, for the most part being indigenous to the arid or semi-arid regions of Asia, Africa, North and South America, and the West Indies. They have this in common, however, that the climatic and soil conditions of these remote habitats are comparable and such as to induce just the characteris- tic growths that these plants exhibit. For this reason they are usually brought together, in cultivation, and given the same or very similar treatment. The use of succulents. Many of the succulents are very attractive and ornamental grown either as single specimens, in groups of one class, or when different genera and species are brought together in mixed planting. For the most part the agaves are too large and bulky to be used to advantage other than as single specimens and a few species are not uncommonly employed in this way. Among these may be mentioned Agave picta, the varie- gated forms of A. americana, A. atrovirens, and A. Milleri. They are commonly grown in tubs to facilitate handling. Thus treated, they are housed in winter and in summer are placed in some favorable location on the lawn. Some of the best yuccas are hardy as far north as New England and the lake region. Yucca filamentosa, Y. gloriosa, and Y. glauca have received considerable attention. They are attractive as single specimens, in small groups on the lawn, or when used as border plants with a shrubbery background. In summer they produce large panicles of showy white waxy flowers which are very striking throughout the daytime and are especially so by twilight. The foliage being evergreen gives an added value to the plants for winter effects. A considerable number of this group of plants is well adapted for use in window- gardens. The very grotesqueness of some and the remarkable symmetry of others appeal to one's interest as much as do many gaudy and highly colored flowers of other classes of plants. Furthermore, a large proportion of these plants produce very excellent flowers, and frequently the resulting fruits are equally showy. Among the species valuable for individual pot- plants may be mentioned the following. Nearly all the echeverias are attractive in both foliage and flower characters. The globose and stemless rosette forms of sempervivum, commonly known as hen- and-chickens, are especially noteworthy. The production of numerous offsets and these appearing from beneath the foliage of the parent are very interesting and suggest the application of the common name. A very large number of the smaller cacti deserve consideration. The crown of flowers, followed by a like crown of colored fruits, is particularly pleasing. The numerous species of stapehas are easily grown and in the autumn produce a variety of strikingly showy flowers. Their one objectionable feature is the dis- agreeable odor of the freshly opened flowers, but this passes away in a very short time, while the flowers remain open for several days. Not all the succulents lend themselves well to orna- mental planting, although many can be thus used and very pleasing effects are produced. The small globular and short cylindrical cacti, with their great diversity in color of the plant-body and of the spines, give ma- terial for very effective combinations in design work. They have this advantage over foliage plants used in such work, inasmuch as their growth is so slight that the plants may be placed close together at the beginning and, without any special subsequent care, the design thus formed will retain its full outline throughout the season. A suggestion of the possibility of using cacti in this way is to be seen in the accompanying illus- tration (Fig. 3014). For this class of planting echeverias are undoubtedly the best material obtainable. The individual plants are equally as symmetrical and pleasing as the "cacti, and the range of color variations among the species is fully as great. They have the added advantage that they can be propagated more easily and more abundantly than is possible with cacti. When a large number of mixed genera and species of succulents is available, exceptionally attractive plant- ings may be produced by a combination of these hi more natural rather than formal designs. (Fig. 3015.) These appear to best advantage when planted among rocks and the soil surface covered over with gravel and sand. Such treatment not only gives a more natural appearance to the planting but is advantageous because it keeps the plant-bodies from coming in contact with PLANTING PLANTING 2673 the earth, which to most of them is very injurious if the soil is wet for any considerable time. In northern climates these beds must necessarily be but temporary combinations, to receive the plants for the summer months. In the south and southwest regions, where most of the succulents are quite hardy, the planting may be made permanent. In such cases very pleas- 3015. An informal planting of succulent subjects. ing effects are produced by planting on a sloping surface, in more or less raised beds or, better still, in rockeries. The cultivation of succulents. For a general rule, it may be stated that all succulents require an open porous sandy soil and perfect drainage. Other conditions, such as watering and atmospheric humidity and temperature, must vary somewhat with individuals or with special groups. Nearly all the spe- cies are very easily grown from seed, although in many cases vegetative reproduction is more available. In fact, some species have natural adaptations for propaga- tion in this way as well as by seeds, and quicker returns may be had from the vegetative methods. The method employed in propagating cacti from seed has given equally excellent results when applied to all other genera of succulents and is therefore given in all essential detail. Cacti are especially easy to start from seeds and with proper care may be readily brought to maturity. Experience teaches that such plants are better adapted to greenhouse treatment than those brought in from their native wilds. The latter suffer from the shock of radically changed conditions. For a germinating vessel, nothing can be more convenient than a 3- or 4-inch pot. If not fresh from the pottery, this should be thoroughly sterilized. Sterilization can be accomplished by soaking and washing in a dilute solution of copper sulfate (blue vitriol) and subsequently rinsing well ; or the pots may be placed in a furnace till all organic matter has been destroyed. This sterilization is necessary for the reason that the seedlings must remain in the seed-pot for a considerable time before it is possible to trans- plant them. If not sterilized, the pot is likely soon to be covered with alga? or other organic growth and this, spreading over the surface of the soil, will quickly smother the young plants. For the same reason also, the soil should be thoroughly sterilized. This seeding soil should be very sandy with only sufficient humus mixed with it to furnish food for the young plant, of which a very little is sufficient. To insure perfect drainage, the pot is filled at least one-fourth full of broken bits of pots or charcoal, on top of which is placed the soil up to about % inch from the top. This is jarred down lightly and the surface leveled. The seeds are then scattered evenly over the surface and firmed down with a flat-faced cylindrical block. Over the seeds is placed a layer, about */$ mcn deep, of fine gravel not larger than a small pea. One of the chief drawbacks in growing cactus seedlings is their susceptibility to "damp off" in their younger stages. The protection afforded by this layer of gravel removes that danger. It also prevents any baking of the surface of the soil. The pots are then placed in a pan of water and allowed to remain until the water shows on the surface of the soil. Subsequent watering can be accom- plished with a fine spray, applied to the surface of the gravel. After planting, the seed-pote should be placed on a bench which is insulated in vessels of water or, better, in water with a surface coat of oil. This oil is to exclude ants, which have an especial liking for cactus seeds. Best results are secured in a humid atmosphere and a temperature of at least 70° F. The seedlings of most genera ought to appear within ten days, but opuntia may require a little longer. When the seedlings begin to show spines, they may be transplanted into small flats of earth into which a little more humus or sod soil has been mixed. They may remain in these flats for one to several years, depending on the rapidity of growth in different species. Eventually they are potted off as individual specimens or placed in the open ground. It is only in the southwest states that many of the cactus plants are hardy enough to be permanently planted out-of-doors. Throughout the greater part of the United States they are tender and require green- house protection in winter. In this colder region they may be planted in the open ground of a conservatory, where they thrive excellently, or they may be kept in pots in winter and, in the hottest part of summer, be removed to the outside and the pots plunged in beds. Almost any cactus will readily strike root from cut- tings. The cut surface must be allowed to dry for several days, until a corky layer has formed over it. The cutting may then be placed in sand to root, its base but little below the surface. If slender, the cut- ting should be tied in position to a supporting stick. Grafting of cacti is alfnost unlimited in its possibili- ties, although employed only in particular cases. Small globose forms, such as mammillaria (Fig. 3016), echino- cactus, echinopsis, and others, are frequently grafted on some abundantly rooting cereus. Good stocks are provided by Cereus Bonplandii and C. tortuosus, though 3016. A condensed cactus form. — Mammillaria micromeris. almost any of the smaller columnar forms may be used. With these cions and stocks, it is necessary only to make a smooth horizontal cut across each and place the two flat surfaces together. The cion is held in position by placing soft strings or raffia over it and tying the ends firmly about the stock or to sticks thrust into the earth. Zygocactus (the old epiphyllum), rhipsalis, and 2674 PLANTING PLANTING Aporocactus (or Cereus) flagelliformis, which are epiphy- tic species, do well when grafted on slender upright species of cereus, but are more commonly placed on pereskia. If zygocactus is used as a stock, cleft-graft- ing is usually employed; if rhipsalis, either the cleft- or saddle-graft. Cristate forms treated as cuttings usually develop normal - formed new growths, but when grafted will continue the cristate character. Although it is possible for cacti to survive a long drought in nature, yet when grown in pots they are seriously injured if their roots remain dry for any considerable time. They should not be placed on benches over the heating-pipes, where the soil soon dries. It is desirable to have the soil cool and the air overhead warm and rather dry for all desert forms. Contrary to a prevalent opinion, they require water. This should be applied in sufficient quantity only to keep the soil moist. A saturated soil quickly induces a soft watery rot which is fatal to the plant. This is especially likely if the soil contains any organic matter that has not been thoroughly decomposed. A small amount of lime in the soil is desirable, and soil should never be sour. Perfect drainage is necessary at all times. Many species of cereus s and phyllocactus (now properly epi- phyllum) climb over trees or rocks by means of aerial roots. These are indigenous to the more tropical regions and should be grown in a separate room from the desert forms, in one where the atmo- sphere can be kept at a higher degree of humidity. They should, also, be provided with suitable supports on which to climb. Zygocactus, rhipsalis, and other epiphytic cacti, may be successfully grown in this same room, but suspended in baskets in the way in which orchids are treated. Agaves and furcreas, although readily grown from seeds, are more commonly propagated from suckers, or from the bulblets produced in abundance in the inflor- escence of many species. For these plants a good soil is one of half sod and half sand. In nature they do not form deeply penetrating roots but widely spreading horizontal feeders. In pot or tub culture, the roots quickly reach the walls of the container and the plant very soon becomes pot-bound. Furthermore, if the con- tainer is allowed to remain dry for any time the roots are seriously injured thereby. When possible, it is better to plunge the pots or plant directly in open ground. Euphorbias and pedilanthuses are best treated in every way as are the cacti. Their cultural methods differ but very little. While it is possible to grow them from cuttings, it is less easily accomplished than with cacti. The cut surface should be placed immediately in powdered charcoal to check the flow of milky sap. When the surface is thoroughly dry, the cutting may be rooted in finely broken charcoal or in sterilized sand. These plants are very susceptible to bacterial rot. Grafting is possible but difficult. It is sometimes employed to preserve a cristate growth of the cion. Most genera of Crassulacese are propagated more readily from seeds or from stem-cuttings. There are a few noteworthy exceptions, however. Bryophyllum can be more quickly and just as abundantly multiplied 3017. An elongated cactus form. — Lopho- cereus Schottii. by placing matured healthy leaves flat on wet sand and kept in a moist warm atmosphere. In a very short time tiny plants will appear in the notches about the margin of the leaf (Fig. 673, Vol. 1). When of sufficient size these may be removed and potted as individual plants. In most species of echeveria, multiplication is best accomplished by carefully removing the healthy mature leaves and placing them on sand as with bryo- phyllum. The base of the leaf must not be injured, for it is from this point that the one or more young plant- lets develop. The leaf -like bracts on the flowering stock of many species are very easily detached and propagate even more readily than the normal leaves. The above method is adapted to the acaulescent spe- cies of echeveria. With the caulescent species the rosette is cut from the top of the stem and treated as a cutting. The parent plant, thus pruned, will soon throw out a number of growths from the dormant lateral buds. As soon as these have formed rosettes of about an inch in diameter they, too, may be removed and will readily grow as cuttings. Many Crassulacese, and echeverias in particular, suffer severely from attacks on their roots and the base of the stem by nematodes. For this reason only clean fresh or sterilized soil should be used in growing them. The various genera and species may be grafted back and forth but no special advantage is to be gained by the process. It is also possible to hybridize between the genera and the species, and a number of interesting results have been secured. 'Some of the echeveria hybrids have proved to be valuable additions to the group used in design work or for bordering other beds. Asclepiadaceae is most commonly represented in col- lections by the genus Stapelia. These plants fare excel- lently when given the treatment recommended for cacti. The chief difficulty in growing them, in the past, seems to have been their proneness to decay at the sur- face of the soil, especially in wintertime. This is easily prevented. See that the drainage is perfect and use porous sandy soil. Spread the roots out on the surface of the soil and cover not more than ^ inch deep with more soil. Over this place an inch layer of gravel about 3018. A garden scene in which topiary craft is a feature. PLANTING PLANTING 2675 the size of peas. Their susceptibility to decay at the surface is comparable to the damping-off of seedlings. The mulch of gravel is invaluable in remedying both maladies. Keep the soil moist but never saturated, and do not permit the roots to become excessively dry. This treatment will insure good continuous healthy trowth and, in autumn, a reward of many attractive owers. The other genera require like treatment. G raft ing of genera and species is easily effected but of no special cultural value. Owing to the highly special- ized structure of the flower in Asclepiadacea?, it has thus far been impossible to effect artificial pollination, although natural hybrids, through the agency of flies, are very common. This is especially true in stapelias. Bigeneric hybrids have been reported. Dyckia and hechtia of the Bromeliaceae and yucca, and the aloe group of the Liliaceae, should receive the same treatment as agave. The species are more com- monly propagated by seeds, and the hybrids by division and stem-cuttings or division of the crown. Senecio (Kleinia), of the Compositae, may be propagated either by seeds or by cuttings. With them, also, grafting is Possible. C. H. THOMPSON. Topiary planting and garden architecture. Topiary work includes sheared hedges, pollarded trees, clipped individual shrubs, whether shaped into simple, rounded, or pointed form, or into more elaborate designs. It includes the trimming of masses of foliage into the form of birds, beasts, furniture, architecture, and other conceits. The more intricate designs are usually attempted in evergreen plants.— ^-Garden architecture comprises all structural or architectural elements introduced into the landscape except the main buildings that are to serve the primary uses of a property. This definition thus includes all walls, trellages, posts, gates, pavilions, exedras, loggias, per- golas, shelters, fountains, bridges, seats, pavements; closely related with it are garden and lawn ornaments and furniture, such as statuary, vases, urns, dials, bird-fountains, lanterns, and the like. It includes the plain, the simple, and the rustic, as well as the more elaborate, ambitious, or ornate. Virtually all of the historical architectural styles are represented or suggested in the forms of garden architecture. For interesting illustrations and discussions of these sub- jects, the reader should consult Blomfield and Thomas, ''The Formal Garden" (London), from which Figs. 3018 to 3023 are adapted. Compare, also, Fig. 3025. Fig. 3024 shows a common form of vase, used not so much for its architectural placing as for a receptacle in which to grow flowers. Topiary and garden architecture, although distinct and separate, are nevertheless essentially related, both in origin and in use. Both have their inception in the virtually universal formality of all early landscape design, and historically and at the present day they frequently stand side by side as related elements of a design. For many centuries gardening was conducted behind inclosing and protecting walls, a practice made neces- sary by the uncivilized conditions. In general, such inclosed gardens were rectangular or geometrically regular, and comparatively small. They existed in immediate proximity to the owner's dwelling or adjacent to the building. The necessity of conserving ground and of utilizing it most efficiently lead naturally to arrange- ment and planting in straight lines and rows. Utility having thus first determined a regular arrangement of plant-materials in close proximity to architecture, esthetic composition, in its turn, attracted the attention of more cultured man and formal design in landscape gradually evolved. Both garden architecture and topiary are attributes of the formal in landscape design, which is determined by lines, axes, and balance of parts. The inappropriate use of either results in inharmonious and bad design and constitutes an esthetic abuse. The following plants are well adapted to topiary treatment : N'OTE: E means plants evergreen. P means plant must be protected in climate of Boston. S means plant is semi-evergreen. Acer campestre. Acer platanoides var. globosuni. Berberis Thunbergii. E — Buxus japonica. EP — Buxus sempervirens. Carpinus Betulus. Carpinus Betulus var. globosa. Catalpa bignonioides var. nana (=C. Bungei in the trade but not the true C. Bungei from northern China). A dwarf variety of the southern catalpa often grafted high on upright stem. E — Chamsecyparis nootkatensis. E — Chamaecyparis obtusa var. nana (=Retinispora in the trade). Cornus mas. Cratsegus Oxyaeantha. Evonymus alata. E — Evonymus radicans. EP — Ilex crenata. (A small-leaved variety of this has grown in the Arnold Arboretum at Boston entirely unprotected.) E — Ilex glabra. Ligustrum Ibota. Ligustrum Ibote var. Regelianum. PS — Ligustrum ovalifolium. S — Ligustrum vulgare. E — Picea excelsa. E — Picea orientalis. E — Pinus Cembra. E — Pinus densiflora var. pumila. E — Pinus montana. E — Pinus montana var. Mughus. E — Rhamnus cathartica. E — Taxus cuspidata. E — Taxus cuspidata var. brevifolia. E — Tsuga canadensis. Viburnum Opulus var. nanum. Viburnum prunifolium. In the growing of the plants for topiary use, no special care is required except to be sure that the plants are well grown in the nursery, vigorous, and naturally thick-topped and fine-twigged. If the piece 3019. A wall inclosure of topiary work. is to be a hedge or continuous line, the plants should be very uniform in size and vigor when set and the ground should be prepared in uniform condition so that all the subjects will have equal chance. The plants should be set close together. Clipping should be begun soon after the plants are established to keep them close and to develop and preserve the side and lower branches; and the clipping should be practised several times each year. If the plants once overgrow, so that they become open and scraggly below, they can never be brought into good condition. Great care must be exercised to see that insects and disease do not get started, and that the plants suffer neither from drought nor wet feet and that they are well supplied with nourishment. See Hedges. 2676 PLANTING PLANTING 3020. Topiary walls and a dial. Topiary work, as well as architecture, appears in gardens of many different ages. In fact, the whole history of gardens but emphasizes the continued use of formal foliage and architecture as essential elements in their design. As stated by Blomfield, "The word 'garden' itself means an enclosed space, a garth or yard surrounded by walls, as opposed to an unenclosed field or woods. The formal garden, with its insistance on strong bounding lines, is, strictly speaking, the only 'garden' . . . ; and it is not till the decay of archi- tecture, which began in the middle of the eighteenth century, that any other method of dealing with a garden was entertained." The common use of hedges for the inclosing of gardens doubtless came into use when the more settled conditions made it unnecessary to retain masonry walls for protection. In the writings of Pliny the Younger, who was born A. D. 62, is the most complete description of the Roman gardens. In a letter addressed to his friend Appolinaris, he describes the garden attached to his Tuscan villa: "In front of the Portico is a sort of Terrace, embellished with various figures, and bounded by a Box Hedge, from which you descend by an easy slope, adorned with the representation of divers animals in Box, answering alternately to each other; this is surrounded by a walk enclosed with tonsile evergreens, shaped into a variety of forms. Behind it is the Ges- tatio, laid out in the form of a Circus, ornamented in the middle with Box, cut into numberless different figures, together with a plantation of shrubs prevented by the shears from running up too high; the whole is fenced by a wall, covered with Box rising in different ranges to the top . . . ." After describing several summer-houses he proceeds: "In front of these agreeable buildings is a spacious Hippodrome encompassed on every side by Plane Trees covered with Ivy. Beneath each Plane are planted Box Trees, and behind tkese, Bays which blend their shade with that of the Plane Trees. This plantation forms a straight boundary on each side of the Hippodrome. . . . Having passed through these winding allies, you enter a straight walk, which breaks out into a variety of others divided off by box hedges. In one place you have a little meadow; in another the Box is cut into a thousand differ- ent forms; sometimes into letters expressing the name of the master; sometimes that of the artificer; whilst here and there little Obelisks rise intermixed alternately with fruit Trees; when on a sudden you are surprised with an imitation of the negligent beauties of rural Nature, in the center of which lies a spot surrounded with a knot of dwarf Plane Trees. Beyond these is a walk . . . where also Trees are cut into a variety of names and shapes. ... At the upper end is an Alcove of white marble shaded with Vines, supported by four small Pillars of Corystian Marble. From this bench the water, gushing through several small pipes, falls into a stone Cistern beneath, from whence it is received into a fine polished Marble Basin, so artfully contrived, that it is always full without ever over- flowing. . . . Corresponding to this is a fountain, which is incessantly emptying and filling; for the Water, which it throws up to a great height, falling back again into it, is, by means of two openings, returned as fast as it is received. Fronting the Alcove stands a Summer House of exquisite Marble, whose doors project into a green enclosure; as from its upper and lower windows the eye is presented with a variety of different Verdures. Next to this is a little private closet .... Here also a fountain rises and instantly disappears; in different quarters are disposed several marble seats, which serve, as well as the Summer House, as so many reliefs when one is wearied by walk- ing. Near each seat is a little fountain ; and throughout the whole Hippodrome, several small Rills run murmur- ing along, wheresoever the hand of Art thought proper to conduct them, watering here and there spots of verdure, and in their progress refreshing the whole." The Romans, establishing themselves in England, built gardens in which topiary work was doubtless to be found. Otherwise, in England prior to about the eleventh or twelfth centuries, gardening as an art of design and taste can scarcely be said to have existed. It is recorded, however, that in 1123 Henry the First formed a park at Woodstock, and it is the first of which authentic record has been preserved. It was probably intended chiefly as a game-preserve but contained, however, a labyrinth. And it is recorded as the custom of the times for the nobility to develop pleasure-gardens in the orchards beyond the walls of their castles, the chief embellishments of which consisted in "plants cut into monstrous figures, labyrinths, etc." It is in the gardens of England of the early Renais- sance periods and shortly before this time that the most extensive use of topiary work is found, in the greatest variety and elabora- tion of form. Topiary art was practised, however, in all European countries for cen- turies. It has been given particular and peculiar ex- pression in each of several countries. The Dutch devel- oped the art of carving in verdure at an early date and many strange and curious forms in box, along with many rare and flowering plants, 3021. A bit of topiary craft. were introduced into England from Holland. In France and Italy it was not so much a large variety of elaborate and intricate topiary as an extensive use of the simpler forms of clipped foliage as a means of gaining effect in larger, more monumental, and pretentious landscape arrangements than were elsewhere undertaken. The architectural gardens of the Italian Renaissance exem- plify the effective and appropriate use of architecture in the garden. Here trees, naturally formal in habit, are combined with sheared hedges and edgings. These wonderful gardens teach the remarkable effectiveness PLANTING PLANTING 2677 of such method in design when executed by the master hand. The designers of the tremendous and monumental landscape arrangements executed in France in the later Renaissance periods gained distinctive effects by the very bold use of sheared foliage; they virtually carved their broad axially related plans out of the woodland. The "Bosque" in French design is comparable to the "Topiary grotesque" in the English. The French parterre gardens, in which intricate and elaborate geometrical designs are worked out in low sheared foliage or bed edging and white or colored gravel, are another expression developing from the same original motive as produced the topiary bird. In the colonial gar- dens in America topi- ary work was com- mon, mostly in the simpler 'form of clipped hedges, gener- 3022. An attractive diaL ally of box, and DOX- edged parterre gar- dens. Remains of many of these old gardens are still to be found in the Atlantic states, and a few old gardens are still in a good state of preservation and cultivation. The box-garden at Mount Yernon is perhaps the most noted, and is in an excellently preserved and restored state at the present time. See Plate XLVI, Vol. III. A moderate amount of interesting and good topiary work is under way in gardens in this country' today, and a few nurserymen are in position to furnish good clipped specimens in a variety of designs. The use of topiary work other than simple clipped hedges should be carefully and advisedly undertaken, however, for it is appropriate only when the whole architectural style of a property makes it suitable and when it becomes an inherent part of the scheme as a whole. Garden architecture. Any structure or structural element placed out-of- doors in nature takes on the significance of architecture, and must bear judgment as such. Landscape as such is either nature's work or man's work with nature's materials in their natural form. The placing of archi- tecture in the landscape is always the combining of the obviously artificial with the natural, and the two must be brought into harmony. It is a deplorable fact that when, with the exercise of judgment and good taste, it is possible to attain harmony in the least costly as well as in the most expensive, so much bad and inharmonious architecture encumbers the landscape. Under any circumstances, architecture becomes to some extent a feature of accent in the landscape, at least within its immediate surroundings. It is emphatic in contrast with its setting and always functions as focalizing the composition of which it forms a part. In general, it is wiser to attempt a simple design and insure its substantial construction than to undertake the ornate in garden architecture. There is a world of interesting precedent in simple designs for the many smaller architectural embellishments of the garden, such as summer-houses or pools, pavements, seats, dial- bases, boxes, tubs, jars, and other ornaments and accessories. The use of simple boxes or ordinary pots for flowers and specimen plants is to be encouraged, and the conversion of such inappropriate materials as plumbing fixtures into garden ornaments is to be con- demned. The usual cast-iron vases and the like are marks of a passing era of bad taste. In lawn pottery, in the form of pots and vases, excellent designs are now to be had, as also of sun-dials. No one considera- tion is more impor- tant than that the architectural style of even the simplest seat or sun-dial be similar to that found in the larger archi- tecture of the build- ing or buildings to which the landscape development may be related. A number of rep- utable firms now produce substanti- ally made garden furniture in consider- able variety of good designs and in many different materials. Particularly good 3023. Vase at Hampton Court. garden seats and garden pottery are now obtainable at reasonable prices and may be found in shops in some of the larger cities. The advertisements and trade catalogues of the manufacturing concerns are interest- ing and instructive. However, the obtaining of individually well-designed and substantial articles having been assured, there remains still the selection of appropriate patterns. Garden architecture should correspond to the style, architectural and otherwise, of a property as a whole. Its appropriate use is its justification. Rustic work is fitting and often most appropriate in a naturalistic setting. It is, however, architecture and should be so designed as to bear analysis as such. It should be structural hi its line, and substantial. It is best when simple and unobtrusive in design. It is seldom appropriate when fantastic or whimsical. The occasional use of rustic work in such way that in its rough character it appears almost to have grown up with the surrounding wild conditions is very pleas- ing, particularly good unobtrusive seats, bridges, and shelters. EUGENE D. MOXTILLON. Ranting for winter effect. Winter is the season when there is the least sunshine, and the least sign of life and color in vegetation. As a floral festival, Christmas ranks second to Easter, owing doubtless to the relative scarcity and higher cost of materials. The ideal is for every family to grow its own flowers for Christ- mas gifts, but most persons have to content them- selves with less personal products purchased from 3024. Stone flower vase 4 or 5 feet the florist. Holly is the high, used as a plant basket. symbol of Christmas as 2678 PLANTING PLANTING the lily is of Easter, each exemplifying the dominant color of the season. The popular demand in winter is for signs of hope and courage — hence the red berry, flower, or ribbon. The phrase "winter-garden" has been used for a great variety of projects, indoors and out, ranging from the metropolitan restaurant with a few bay trees in tubs, to a winter home in Florida where one may work out- doors every day and all day. Notable progress has been made along many lines since 1900 in the art of living the year round amid beautiful vegetation. Indoor winter-gardens. Perhaps the oldest use of the phrase winter-garden refers to a type of unheated or little-heated greenhouse which was popular in England when plants from the Cape and Australia were fashionable, but was generally a museum of potted plants rather than a garden. A new stage began in America about 1905, when Mrs. J. W. Stewart, of Glen Ridge, New Jersey, made a real garden under glass. (C. L. A. 13 : 168-70.) It has a broad lawn to tread upon, instead of narrow concrete walks, and in place of potted plants raised in tiers for show, there is a continuous border 3 to 4 feet wide, with bulbs and other flowers growing out of the earth at the familiar garden level. The temperature is that of a living-room. An- other new stage began in 1906 when the conservatories in Garfield Park, Chicago, were completed. These were not the first attempts at landscape gardening under glass on a large scale, but they are believed to be the most impressive series of indoor nature-pictures in the world. Portable greenhouses and window-gardens now make it possible even for renters to have something more than a few potted plants on the window-sill. Those who can afford no glass may at least force twigs in water, preferring the early bloomers, like peach, plum, and forsythia to the late bloomers, like lilac and dog- wood. In this line, the most notable achievement, of late, is the forcing of stems 6 to 8 feet high, by keeping them in a slightly heated attic until wanted for the living-room. Outdoor winter-gardens. The southern states have a winter climate that makes outdoor work pleasant, and a landscape rich in types of beauty, as evergreen magnolias, long-leaved pines, and winter roses. Southern winter-gardens have their problems, but they can receive less notice here than the more acute problems of northern climates. A country with an evergreen grass, like Ireland, has a great advan- tage over America for winter beauty. English children are well protected from bitter winds by the omni- present walled-garden or high-hedged home grounds. The formal winter-garden of England is often merely a 3026. A good winter form. — One of the retinisporas. 3025. A winter-garden, presenting evergreen forms in tree, bush, and box borders. straight walk, between high walls of clipped yew. Words- worth's winter-garden is an early example of the natur- alistic winter-garden, i. e., a sheltered spot surrounded by informal masses of trees and shrubs noted for their winter attractions. ,. In the northern states, however, it is neither safe nor pleas- ant to garden out-of- doors every day, and the winter landscape is commonly bleak, ugly, bare, or com- monplace. Our most pressing problem, usu- ally, is shelter from winds. On the plains and prairies many homes are surrounded by shelter-belts, but the landscape effect is not the best, owing to the artificial outlines of the farmsteads, the ill-concealed barn- yards, and the inferior species used — soft maple, box elder, Norway spruce. Windbreaks in straight lines, protecting orchards or stock, sometimes give a spirited army-like effect, but may become monotonous in a country where everything seems to be rectangular. In the East naturalistic shelter-belts are commoner. The practice of moving large evergreens with a half-frozen ball has developed notably since 1900, and full-grown evergreen hedges can be secured to shelter winter playgrounds. Most persons see little beauty in the northern winter landscape. It is true that the East has little brilliant color or living green compared with England, China, or Japan, while the prairies and great plains have still less. Nature-study, however, opens the eyes of the people to a new world of beauty in outline and structure of trees, their trunks, and winter buds. The universal instinct for bright color, however, ought also to be gratified, and every family can receive and give satis- faction by means of foundation planting. Unfortu- nately, New York and Philadelphia may not have monu- mental evergreens to the extent that every London yard has box and holly, aucuba and veronica, yet many eastern homes may have mountain laurel on the sunny sides and rhododendron on the shady sides. Among the conifers most persons prefer the brilliant quick-growing but short-lived Japan cypresses, while lovers of perma- nence are willing to wait for Canadian and Japanese yew, Mugho pine, and Canadian juniper. Two superb evergreen vines, European ivy and evergreen bittersweet (Evonymusradicans var. vege to), enliven house walls of brick and stone. On sunny days the red branches of Siberian dogwood are a cheery sight. Among the shrubs with brightly colored berries, the favorite for foundation plant- ing is the Japanese barberry, largely because its red fruits are attractive all winter. Types of winter-gardens. Evergreen winter-gardens. — Perhaps the -oldest type of winter-garden is the pinetum, which is primarily a collection of evergreens, but is also full of beauty during the period when other trees are leafless. One example is the Hunnewell collection at Wellesley, Massachusetts, part of which is doubled in beauty by reflection in a lake. Another example is the conifer valley in the Arnold Arbor- etum, which has a brook meandering through the center, while the heights are crowned by trees, the cultivated specimens on one side being balanced PLANTING PLANTING 2679 3029. Attractive winter objects. — Cones of white pine. by a noble hemlock forest on the other. In the pmetum at Highland Park, Rochester, New York, the walk runs through the grassy center of the valley, with dwarf evergreens ascending the banks, these being disposed at convenient levels and distances for the eye, so that the different textures may be enjoyed to the full. The apparent height of this shallow valley is in- creased by planting the ridges with the tallest evergreens. Shrubby winter-gar- dens. — Every arbore- tum or botanical gar- den is likely to have a fruticetum, or collec- tion of shrubs. A gar- den composed almost exclusively of shrubs is attractive through- out the growing sea- son, as well as during winter. There is a naturalistic winter-gar- den at Llyndanwalt, Abington", Pennsyl- vania, where a wood of about an acre near the house has been provided with features of year-round interest, including a rhododen- dron collection, a dense underplanting of young hem- locks, and a border of shrubbery selected with special reference to winter beauty. From the outside, these shrubs give privacy, shelter, and color in delightful con- trast to the ordinary wooded pasture, which is rather colorless. From the interior these shrubs animate the trails and enliven the outlooks that have been purposely left toward the best features of the landscape. Skating-ponds. — It is now the fashion to border skating-ponds with shrubs that have brightly colored twigs. On sunny days these furnish bold masses of color that harmonize with the vigorous mood and gay costumes of the skaters. After providing for the casino and for the snow that must be removed from the ice, there is generally ample room for a collection of showy dogwoods, willows, and wild roses. At Rochester, New York, is a charming example, the shrubs being allowed to interlace like an old woodland border, so that the color of the twigs steals upon one unconsciously. Gardenesque effects. — That it is possible to spoil even a winter landscape by overdoing color has been much demonstrated recently in parks, where nurserymen and gardeners have been allowed to plant large masses of Siberian dogwood and salmon-barked willow, the brightest of all winter reds. Such swamp-type plants are particularly inappropriate and gaudy on hilltops. A more poetic effect is produced by the ''sunset willow" of the prairie states, a species of uncertain botanical status known to collectors as Salix longifolia. It is common along middle-western streams. The most bril- liant but least tasteful effects produced with shrubs that have brightly colored bark are in reality the carpet- bedding system. The willows and dogwoods are cut to the ground every year or two, in order to produce the greatest number of showy shoots, which are kept at a height of about 3 feet. This system sacrifices height, habit, and dignity to display. A standard park effect is white pine bordered by Siberian dogwood, which is about the strongest contrast that is in good taste on lawns. Perhaps the strongest contrast furnished by nature in the North is hemlock and canoe birch. Winter walk-s. — The cheapest and most practical winter-garden for the largest number, may be a simple walk leading to the front, back, or side door, bordered by shrubs and trees, of which half or more have winter attractions. Brick set on concrete is considered pleas- anter to the eye and foot than concrete, and is drier 170 than grass. The tapestry type of brick set on edge is expensive, but gives a rich texture. Materials for winter-gardening. One hundred and twenty-eight trees and shrubs that have pronounced winter beauty were listed by John Dunbar from the Rochester parks, not including the evergreens or plants that lose their vivid color before the end of the holidays. With such a wealth of material there should be little excuse for bare and ugly surround- ings. Only the classes of materials may be mentioned and exemplified here. Broad-leaved evergreens. — These are often more expensive than the narrow-leaved evergreens, and of smaller stature, but they have more ample foliage and frequently showier flowers or fruits. All require special care. Examples are American holly, mountain laurel, Rhododendron catawbiense and jR. maximum, evergreen thorn, trailing myrtle, evergreen bitter-sweet, box, and its substitute, Ilex crenata var. microphytta. The Eng- lish standard of beauty is European holly, laurel, and hybrid rhododendrons, because the darkest and shiniest foliage is commoiuy thought to be more beautiful than the duller and yellow-green type. A more practical stan- dard for our climate is furnished by American holly, laurel, and rhododendron. In nurseries where both classes of plants may be observed, the European kinds are unquestionably rich and aristocratic, but sound a foreign note, while the native kinds have a cheery, sunny color that is eloquent of adaptation to our climate and 3028. A good subject in the winter- garden. — Fruits of the barberry. scenery. The same principle applies to the narrow-leaved evergreens, Irish yew being commonly but mis- takenly preferred to Canadian or Japanese yew. Semi-evergreens, like Hall's honeysuckle, are listed in this work under A ut u mn-Gardening. X arrow-leaved evergreens. — The European standards are Scotch and Austrian pine, Norway spruce, silver fir, Irish juniper, and Irish yew. These are climatic misfits in America and constitute the bulk of the evergreen planting east of the Rockies that proves unsatisfactory. The American standards are white pine, hemlock, Douglas spruce, concolor fir, red cedar, and Canadian yew. The types of beauty represented in the two lists are not closely comparable. Deciduous trees and shrubs. — Though lacking in bril- liant color, the following are standards of quiet beauty. 2680 PLANTING PLANTING Marked for their outline or habit are pin oak, sweet gum, white birch, pepperidge, sassafras, tulip tree, white oak, and sycamore. Noted for their winter buds are flowering dogwood, beech, shagbark, balm of Gilead, honey locust, swamp bay, sassafras, and pussy willow. Familiar by their trunks are beech, birch, shagbark, sycamore, white oak, tulip tree, sweet gum, flowering dogwood, and mountain-ash. Shrubs with brightly colored berries. — These materials do more to transform ordinary city lots than any others here mentioned. Shrubs cost less than evergreens, 3029. A graceful winter form in dwarf juniper. mature more quickly than trees, are fairly permanent, and are cheap. Of the shrubs with decorative fruits, there are two main groups based on duration. Those which are attractive all winter, like barberries, must be reckoned more valuable than those which drop by New Year's or cease to be attractive then, like snow- berry and Indian currant. Each of these groups may be divided again on a basis of color. Red is the favorite color, because it seems to give the most warmth at the time it is most needed. Consequently the most popular shrubs for winter berries are the common and Japanese barberries, the multiflora and prairie roses, and the high-bush cranberry, all of which retain their red berries until spring. Of the other red berries, Viburnum dilatatum lasts until April; Japanese bitter-sweet until March; Viburnum Sargentii until February; while the following are attractive until February: Most species of Evonymus and Cotoneaster, Ilex verticillata, and red chokeberry (Aronia arbutifolid). The red-berried spe- cies tend to produce yellow varieties, but they have less popular appeal. Blue berries of great beauty are borne by the familiar white fringe and the little known symplocos. Theoretically black is an unattractive color, yet practically the black fruits appear well, especially against the snow, the most familiar example being the massive cluster of California privet, while the open cluster of Regel's privet has more grace. Viburnums furnish many dark berries, as do the following choice plants: Acanthopanax sessiliflorus, Rhamnus carthartica, rhodotypos, Phellodendron amurense, Rhamnus dahu- nca, and Aronia melanocarpa. Theoretically white should be the chilliest and least attractive color in winter, yet the snowberry is probably the only bush that is planted almost wholly for its winter berries, and its popularity continues although it often loses its attractiveness . before Thanksgiving. The small waxy berries of candleberry (Myrica) are an agreeable sight till January, but this plant is more famous for its fragrance. Shrubs with brightly colored twigs. — These materials are even more brilliant than shrubs with brightly col- ored berries. The ordinary 2- to 3-foot bush of bar- berry has few berries, when planted in the fall, while a Siberian dogwood of the same size is a consistent mass of red from planting day in October until April. These materials are showier on sunny days than clouded ones, and look best when the sun is at one's back. They do tolerably in the smallest yards of large and smoky cities but do not develop the brightest colors in dense shade. In this group, also, red is the favorite color, the most popular being Siberian dogwood, with the Britzensis willow a fair second, the latter being unsuitable for foundation planting. Vivid color is often confined to twigs or wood a year or two old, as in the lindens, but a four-year-old Siberian dogwood is showy from the ground up. Those who like a change from the Siberian sometimes plant the silky dogwood, which has purplish red wood, or the quieter-toned stolonifera, but the latter needs a moist situation and is too scaly for foundation planting. Yellow branches are more popular than yel- low berries. Willows furnish half a dozen yellow kinds, dogwood two good ones, and yellow poplar one. Vivid green wood is furnished by kerria, Forsythia viridissima, sassafras, Colutea arborescens, and a variety of Cornus sanguinea. Winter flowers. — The only hardy winter flower of importance is the Christmas rose (Helleborus niger), which blossoms in the North amid or under the snow any time from November to March. Winter crocuses are merely a coldframe hobby for enthusiasts. Scillas and the other March-blooming bulbs are often seen blooming in the snow, but they are essentially spring flowers. A unique and wonderful winter beauty is Pieris floribunda, which seems to be crowned by white flowers, but these are really buds. They are all the more wonderful because naked, and all the more beau- tiful because set off by evergreen foliage. WILHELM MILLER. Planting on walls. (Fig. 3030.) Wall-gardening and walled gardens are two different departments of horticulture. The walled garden is an old English development based on the need of protecting fruit from thieves and on the fact that grapes and peaches do not ripen in the cool summers of England without extra heat, such as a south wall gathers. Out of these conditions have grown high brick and stone walls aggregating hundreds of miles in extent and form- ing a familiar sight in the English landscape. The walls have come to be covered with all sorts of fancy fruits trained like vines. They also shelter many subtropical shrubs trained as climbers, which otherwise could be grown only under glass. Although these walls are often crowned with broken glass or spikes, they are generally beautiful in themselves, or are made so by a clothing of vines. Moreover, earth-filled holes are often purposely left on top for the growing of rock-loving flowers, such as wallflowers, snapdragons, wall pepper, Kenilworth ivy, houseleeks, and wild pinks. Time adds the crown- 3030. Piece of a wall-garden. PLANTING PLANTING 2681 ing touch of loveliness by encouraging mosses on the shady side and lichens on the sunny. This type of garden is not common in America because it is very costly to make and also to maintain, owing to the higher cost of skilled labor for training fruits. Moreover, a wall is not necessary in our own hot summer climate for the ripening of grapes and peaches. However, the walled garden will gradually increase in numbers, for several reasoas: It offers better protection from thieves than hedges or shrubbery; it makes a kitchen-garden yield from one to three months longer by giving pro- tection from cutting winds and frost; it makes a shel- tered outdoor playground for children in winter; it makes an effective background for hardy perennial flowers; and it gives privacy and charm, which gardens open to every eye do not possess. Wall-gardening, on the other hand, is a modern application, growing out of the English passion for alpine flowers and based largely upon the fact that many of these exquisite flowers perish in the hardy borders, because of the wet English winters, but flourish per- manently in the chinks of a wall, where they get better drainage. This is true of wallflowers and snapdragons, which have glorified many ruins for centuries, while on the level ground they are short-lived. Thus, dry-walling became fashionable at the beginning of the twentieth century. It was customary, whenever grading opera- tions left a bank of earth, to put in a retaining wall, avoiding cement, and laying alpine plants between the stones. The popularity of this type of garden is attested by Gertrude Jekyll's "Wall- and Water-Gardens," which has thirty-three plates illustrating the construc- tion and main floral effects. Steps are commonly made in such a way that nearly all parts not actually needed for treading are filled with carpets and cushions of rock- loving flowers. In America, wall-gardening was welcomed as an opportunity to replace some of the artificial, monoto- nous, and ill-kept grass-banks by retaining-walls clothed with the natural and varied beauty of flowers. Unfor- tunately, much of the most refined beauty of English wall-gardens, such as the mossy saxifrages give, is impossible here, because the hot summers are unfavora- ble to the choicer alpines. Analysis of the four largest and most successful examples of wall-gardening known in America in 1914 shows that great and new beauty has been achieved in this way, but that the largest floral effects are made by plants that are not particu- larly associated with mountains or rocks and which are easy to grow in ordinary gardens without the expense of dry-walling. Such desert plants as the houseleeks and stonecrops spread over large areas. Other suc- cesses are rock cress (Arabis albida), woolly chickweed (Cerastium tomentosum) , snow-in-summer, woodruff, wild pinks, alpine forget-me-nots, Kenilworth ivy, and veronicas. Such carpets, however, do not have the charm of the dainty rosettes and mossy cushions of the high-altitude alpines, such as saxifrages, primroses, gentians, and edelweiss. It is possible to have some of these finer things, if one does not stuff the walls with too much earth. This practice, which seems reasonable to every beginner, encourages the plants to make roots within the walls, and such roots are naturally destroyed by the first hot weather. It is better to give them a little grit and only a pinch of earth, so as to force the plants to send long roots through the walls into the earth banks where they will find the moisture, coolness, and drainage that are demanded by high alpines. Steps have been successfully filled in America with chink-loving flowers, but most gardeners are conserva- tive about experimenting, declaring that the colder winters of America will cause damage to stone and flowers by the heaving action of frost. It is certainly unwise to have wide spaces between stones filled with material that will expand too much, but the aim should be to give the plants as little root-room and food as pos- sible in order to encourage their rooting outside the stonework. WILHELM MILLER. Screen-planting. From the landscape architect's point of view, screen- planting may be used to hide unsightly objects, to afford protection from prevalent winds, to give a back- ground to the house, to lend an air of privacy and seclusion, or sometimes to add an ornamental feature. It may take the form of deep border planting, nar- row hedge lines or mere vine-covered screens. Trees, shrubs, and vines are all avail- able; but, what- ever is used, the denser its habit of growth, the better screen it will make. Other things being equal, evergreens are better than deciduous plants, for the latter lose their leaves in winter. However, if evergreens are not available, there are still many deciduous plants whose dense habit of growth make a good screen even after the leaves are gone. A border planting, as in Fig. 2999, is really a screen against objects l>3yond; so also are such cover-plantings as those in Figs. 3000, 3001, 3031 and others. The real screens, however, are those plantings made for this particular purpose, mostly narrow in form but dense. Vines for screen-planting. For brick, stone, tree-trunks, or other solid surfaces. Deciduous: Hydrangea petiolaris (climbs by root-like holdfasts). Parthenocissus quinquefolia var. Engelmannii. A variety of Virginia creeper with disks, or suckers, on the ends of the ten- drils, which enable the plant to fasten itself to a surface. Parthenocissus tricuspidata var. Veitchii. Evergreen: Evonymus radicans var. vegeta (climbs by root-like holdfasts). Hedera helix. Somewhat tender; in the N. should be planted where it will be shaded from winter sun or at least have its roots thoroughly mulched and the ground shaded by low growth about its base; climbs by root-like holdfasts. Rapid-growing vines for banks or unsightly objects. Annuals: Boussingaultia baselloides. Twining tender perennial treated as an annual, growing from 10 to 15 feet a season; roots must be taken up and stored away from frost. Calonyction aculeatum (twining). Echinocystis lobata (self -seeding -^tendrils). Humulus japonicus (twining). Ipomcea purpurea (twining). Phaseolus multiflorus (tendrils). Herbaceous perennials (dying down to the ground but springing up again from the root): Ipomoea pandurata (twining). This and next have fleshy roots and may become a nuisance if allowed to spread. Pueraria hirsuta. This is known also in commerce as Dolichos japonicus; grows 40 feet in a season; twining. Woody perennials (woody stem persisting above ground). Actinidia arguta (twining). Aristolochia macrophyUa (A. Sipho) (twining). Celastrus scandens (twining). Lonicera japonica var. Halliana (twining). Lycium chinense and L. halimifolium. Both are shrubs with recurving trailing stems which do not twine. Plant must be fastened to its support. Excellent to hold banks, but very vigorous and may become a nuisance. 3031. A screen subject in a corner. 2682 PLANTING PLANTING Tall-growing vines reaching eaves of the house. Actinidia arguta (vigorous; dark glossy foliage, twining). Aristolochia macrophylla. Twining; large heavy foliage; should not be used unless dense shade is desired. Campsis radicans. This is a heavy vine climbing by root-like holdfasts which are too weak to hold it in storm or wind; must be fastened to its support. Somewhat tender in the N. and usually has more or less dead wood. Better when used as porch or pillar vine where it can be reached and pruned easily. Celastrus scandens (twining). Parthenocissus. All kinds; tendrils with or without disks. Wisteria chinensis. The finest of tall-growing vines; vigorous and hardy at all times. Fines for foliage only. All in the following list are deciduous, i. e., drop their leaves in winter. The only evergreen vines which can be used in the North are Evonymus radicans and Hedera helix. Even the foliage of Evonymus radicans will occa- sionally burn in winter although it is hardier than English ivy in this respect. Vinca minor and Pachysandra terminalis are good creeping plants for evergreen ground-cover and Hall's honey- suckle is semi-evergreen, holding good foliage until Christmas. Other flowering vines also good in foliage are Clematis paniculata, Forsythia suspensa, which is a shrub with recurving and trailing stems excellent for running over a bank or hanging down a wall, Rosa Wichuraiana and some of its many hybrids, and Wisteria chinensis. Actinidia arguta. Akebia quinata. Very graceful vine with delicate five-parted foliage, semi-evergreen, remaining until January; twining. Aristolochia macrophylla. Celastrus scandens (berries red and orange all winter; twining). Lycium halimif olium. Parthenocissus quinquefolia. Beautiful red autumn color; first vine to color in the fall; climbs by tendrils usually without disks except in var. Engelmannii. Parthenocissus tricuspidata var. Veitchii (beautiful autumn color; climbs by tendrils ending in disks). Sniilax rotundifolia. A vigorous wild vine with thick glossy foliage enduring both shade and wet soil. Vitis Coignetiae. From Japan; a vigorous grower with immense leathery leaves usually brown Felty beneath; the foliage is especially strong and bold and turns a rich red color in fall. Vines for flower. Plants marked with an asterisk (*) have attractive foliage as well as bloom. Campsis radicans. A heavy vine. Clematis Jackmanii. Climbs by twisting leaf-stems. Flowers large and purple. C. Jackmanii var. alba is similar, but the flowers are creamy white. Both of these are good vines for bloom in July and August. . *Clematis paniculata. Climbs as does the preceding species. Flowers small and white, covering plant with a mass of bloom in September and October. Foliage remains glossy green, good until December. The best fall-blooming vine. *Forsythia suspensa. Flowers yellow, appearing before the leaves . covering the plant with a mass of bloom in April. Flower- buds often killed by cold in the northern tier of states. Lonicera Heckrqttii. Climbs by twining. This is a hybrid which blooms continuously during July, August, and September. The flowers are rose outside and yellow inside, and as open and closed flowers are present at the same time they make a very handsome showing. The only objection to the plant is that it is badly infested with aphids or green-flies. *Lonicera japonica var. Halliana. Bloom profuse and fragrant; flowers white, fading yellow in June and July. Rambler roses, in order of bloom, June and July. These must be tied up, but are hardy without protection except possibly in the northern tier of states. In such cold places one must be content with the upright shrubby Rosa rugosa in white, and red varieties, both single and double, beginning in early June; with the white Rosa multiflora, beginning from middle to late June; and with the pink Prairie, or Michigan, rose (Rosa setigera) which does not begin until the second week in July. R. multiflora and R. setigera are both shrubs with an arching habit and have produced many Rambler roses. Of the varieties following, those marked with a dagger (t) are the best: fTausendscbon, middle June, double, delicate pink, larger than Dorothy Perkins; Lady Duncan, single, rich salmon-pink; tExcelsa, late June, or early July, a long-season rose, double, rich crimson, a new variety, blooming at the same season as the old Crimson Rambler, but a better color; Dorothy Perkins, early July, double pink; white Dorothy Perkins, a white variety of the preceding; Alberic Barbier, middle July, semi-double or double creamy white, yellow in center, dark yellow in bud, excellent glossy foliage; Aviator Bleriot is a new variety, very similar to Alberic Barbier; fHiawat,ha, middle July, a long-season rose, single, bright red with white center and yellow stamens; *t"Mrs. H. M. Walsh, middle July, double, white, same long season and good foliage as Rosa Wichuraiana, the Memorial rose of which it is practically a double form; '''tR- Wichuraiana, which is blooming at this time, is the parent of many of the varieties named above, and is itself a very attractive rose. *Wisteria chinensis. A strong, twining vine, with long, hanging clusters of white or purple flowers, according to variety, in middle and late May. Leaves alternate, compound, large, loose, and feathery. Beautiful in flower, graceful in habit, satis- factory in foliage, and vigorous and hardy at all times. Large trees for wind protection and for background setting to the house. Deciduous: These deciduous types are dense and compact in habit and make a good screen or background even after the leaves are gone in winter. Acer platanoides. Acer saccharum. ^Esculus Hippocastanum. Fagus sylvatica. Quercus alba. Tilia europsea. Evergreen: The Scotch pine (Pinus sylvestris), Norway spruce (Picea excelsa), and Colorado blue spruce (Picea pungens) are probably the three most commonly planted evergreen trees. The Scotch pine is the best of the three for neutral mass planting but none is so satisfactory as the hemlock or the pines listed below. The Scotch pine has an irregular spreading habit with bluish green foliage, salmon-colored limbs and trunk and picturesque habit when old. It grows rapidly but is short- lived in America. The Norway spruce and Colorado blue spruce are both conical evergreens and for this reason alone they are always emphatic and conspicuous. Even when planted in mass the individuals are so distinct that it requires years for them to merge into a uniform solid mass. Comparing a solid planting of Norway spruce with a similar planting of hemlock, it is seen that in t'he former every individual spruce is stiff and conical and remains so for years, while the hemlocks with their graceful form and habit have lost their individuality and merged into one indefinite mass. The Norway spruce is also too somber and funereal for cheer- ful home-ground planting. It is also short-lived in America and while hardy and rapid-growing it begins to go back and die at the top after forty or fifty years except in very favorable locations. The Colorado blue spruce is also short-lived in the eastern states and is altogether too conspicuous and emphatic both in form and color for neutral background planting. Pinus austriaca. Pinus resinosa. Pinus Strobus. Pseudotsuga taxifolia. This is a large conical tree like Norway spruce and therefore not so good for neutral background plant- ing as either the pines or the hemlock mentioned in this same list. But it is the best of the conical spruce or fir type because more graceful in habit, with soft more flexible foliage which is green or gray-green in color. It is a vigorous grower and though little known it is a very promising evergreen tree. Only the Rocky M9untain form is hardy in the East. Tsuga canadensis, the common hemlock. Rapid-growing trees for screens. As a class, the rapid- growing trees are weak-wooded and transient. They are cheap and are usually thought of as fillers for temporary or quick effects until more permanent trees can be established. Deciduous: Acer Negundo. Acer saccharinum. Populus, Carolina poplar. Evergreen: Picea excelsa. Pinus sylvestris. These are probably the fastest growing ever- green trees but they are not so long-lived as white pine, nor do they make either as graceful or as effective screen. Screens tall and narrow (10 to 15 feet). Space the plants 2-3 feet apart in single row. For taller and more rapid-growing material, use Lombardy poplar (Populus nigra var. italica), or upright sugar maple (Acer saccharum var. monumentale) , 6 feet apart in the row. This latter is a new and very desirable form. It is durable and slower-growing like the sugar maple but narrow and upright like the Lombardy poplar. Bolle's poplar (Populus alba var. pyramidalis) is a narrow upright form of the European white poplar and is just as undesir- able as that tree. Moreover, the white woolly coating on the under side of the leaves makes the tree very conspicuous and when pronounced color is thus added to narrow upright form the tree becomes too emphatic for ordinary use. The Lom- bardy poplar with its normal green foliage is much safer to use when either vertical emphasis or a tall narrow screen is needed. PLANTING PLANTING 26S3 Deciduous: Carpinus Bet ulus var. globosa. This is a compact upright variety of the European hornbeam. Excellent hedge-plant but very slow- growing. A plant standing in the open at Arnold Arboretum, Boston, has grown 6 feet wide and 12 feet high in 25 years. Perfectly ha-dy and, like Berberis Thunbergii, so dense that it makes a definite screen even after the leaves have fallen. Quercus pedunculata var. fastigiata compacta (a compact up- right form of the English oak). Etfrgreen: Chamaecyparis nootkatensis. This is little known in the East as yet but has all the requirements for an ideal hedge-plant, tall and narrow. Plants observed in the open at Ithaca, New York, are perfectly hardy and have grown 5 feet wide and 7 feet high in twelve years. They have not been protected nor trimmed nor specially cared for in any way. They are upright and oval in shape and very dense and compact. The foliage is thick and soft to the touch. Juniperus chinensis. Resembles the native red cedar, J. vir- giniana, but is better because the foliage does not brown in winter. Also the leaves are more spreading and their bluish gray upper surfaces more noticeable which gives the spray a fuller and lighter-colored appearance. Juniperus communis var. hibernica. This should be trained in the nursery to one central stem. When young the Irish juniper is a handsome narrow upright plant with bright gray-green foliage; but it grows much more rapidly than other cedars and soon looks miserable because, as now grown, its more or less equal upright parts become too heavy to support them- selves and spread apart destroying the symmetry of the plant as well as revealing the dead and unsightly inner foliage. Juniperus virginiana. Taxus baccata var. hibernica (not quite hardy above N. Y. City). Thuya occidentalis var. pyramidalis. Thuya orientalis. This resembles the native arborvitae but is more handsome. Its branches and branchlets are also more distinctly vertical and the foliage smaller and brighter green. Shrubs for screen border-planting. Small (2 to 4 feet) (other native plants not so dense in habit but with good foliage will make very effective screen-planting when massed together): Deciduous: Berberis Thunbergii (occasionally 6 feet). Catalpa Bungei. This is the trade name for C. bignonioides var. nana. It is simply a dwarf variety of the southern catalpa and makes a dense round bush when growing on its own roots. It is often grafted high on upright stem and planted as a substitute for bay trees. Cnsenomeles japonica. Deutzia gracilis (2 to 3 feet). Deutzia Lemoinei (3 to 4 feet). Dirca palustris. This has t hornless flexible leathery twigs but is dense and symmetrical like Berberis Thunbergii. If allowed to grow naturally it will make good low hedge. Hypericum aureum. Hypericum prolificum. Kerria japonica. • ligustrum Ibota var. Regelianum. Ligustrum ovalifolium. This is not hardy north of Philadel- phia and can be used only for low hedge in the North. May be cut to the ground and will spring up vigorously every year. Lonicera thibetica. Lycium chinense. Lycium halimifolium. Philadelphus coronarius var. nanus (2 to 3 feet). Philadelphus Lemoinei (in variety, especially var. Avalanche Candelabre, and Gerbe de Neige). Philadelphus microphyllus (this and P. coronarius are the original parents of the "Lemoine hybrids). Rhus canadensis. Rosa rugosa (often 5 or 6 feet high but better if kept low and vigorous by frequent renewal from the base. Rosa rugosa var. Blanche de Coubert (beautiful semi-double, white). Rosa spinosissima var. altaica (often 5 feet). Spiraea Bumalda, Anthony Waterer variety (2 feet). Spiraea japonica i3 feet). Spiraea Thunbergii. Spiraea trilobata. Symphoricarpos albus (often 5 feet). Symphoricarpos orbiculatus (2 to 3 feet). Vaceinium corymbosum (often 5 to 6 feet). Viburnum Opulus var. nanum (2 to 3 feet. Seldom has flowers). Evergreen: Buxus japonica. A new and hardy box; will probably reach 8 feet, but is slow-growing and easily restrained by clipping. Buxus sempervirens. Must be protected in the North but is hardy and tree-like in the South. Chamaecyparis obtusa var. nana (6 to 8 feet, but very slow- growing and easily restrained). Evqnymus radicans var. vegeta (2 to 3 feet; with a little clip- ping can be brought into a low natural hedge mass). Ilex glabra, Picea exeelsa var. Clanhraziliana. Pieris floribunda (2 to 3 feet). Pinus densiflora var. pumila (often 6 feet). Pinus montana var. Mughus (often 5 to 6 feet). Rhododendron, Boule de Neige (white, blooming-period early). Rhododendron carolinianum. Color lavender-pink, blooming- period very early. S^e note on page 2692. Taxus cuspidata var. brevifolia. Thuya occidentalis var. nana. This may reach 3 to 4 feet but is very slow-growing and easily restrained by capping. Thuya orientalis var. nana. This may reach 3 to 4 Feet but is very slow-growing and is easily restrained by clipping. Medium (6 to 8 feet) (other native plants not so dense in habit but with good foliage will make very effective screen-plant- ing when massed together): Deciduous: Acanthopanax pentaphyllus. Acer palmatum loften larger but slow-growing). Berberis vulgaris. Cornus paniculata. Evonynius alata. Forsythia suspensa. Good definite form and best for individual specimen planting. Ilex verticillata. Lonicera fragrantissima. Lonicera Morrowii. Myrica carolinensis. Sometimes much larger than 6-8 ft. Can be kept lower very easily by thinning out and renewing from the base. Is still known in commerce as M. cerifera. Ranges north to Nova Scotia near the coast. Is more shrubby, with blunt leaves which are broader and more oblong than those of M. cerifera. Philadelphus inodprus. Has more definite and graceful form than P. coronarius and dark green almost glossy foliage. Rhodotypos kerrioides. Spiraea bracteata. Spiraea gemmata. Spiraja prunifolia var. flore-pleno. Spiraea VanhoutteL Evergreen: Ilex crenata. Kalmia latifolia (sometimes higher than 6 to 8 feet). Picea orientalis. Large tree but adapted to small-scale planting because very slow-growing and also because easily restrained by pruning or pinching back. Rhododendron, Caractacus (color bright red, blooming-period medium). Rhododendron catawbiense var. album. Compact habit of R. catawbiense but flowers white, blooming-period early. Rhododendron delicatissimum (color blush-white, blooming- period late). Rhododendron Everestianum (color lavender, blooming-period early). Rhododendron, H. W. Sargent (color dark red, blooming- period late). Rhododendron, Lady Armstrong (color pink, blooming-period early to medium). Rhododendron purpureum elegans (color purple, blooming- period medium). Taxus cuspidata. Tsuga canadensis. The most graceful and effective large ever- green for screen-planting. Takes up less room than white pine and is much slower-growing. Can be restrained easily and therefore is adapted to small-scale planting. Large (10 to 15 feet) (other native plants not so dense in habit but with good foliage will make very effective screen-plant- ing when massed together): Deciduous: Acer campestre (small compact tree, dense foliage). Acer ginnala (gorgeous autumn color). Acer platanoides var. globosum (dwarf, dense, slow-growing). Benzoin aestivale. Berberis aristata. Carpinus Betulus. Much used for hedges. Better than our native hornbeam, Carpinus caroliniana. Cornus mas (small compact tree, 15 to 20 feet). Cotinus Coggygria. Crataegus coccinea. Cratagus Crus-galli. Crataegus Oxyacantha var. Paulii. Cratsegus punctata. All these thorns are better as natural screens with room to spread at the bottom than when con- fined in restricted hedge lines. Hibiscus syriacus. Ten feet, dense and compact making good tall hedge, but thin at bottom. Plant low dense shrubs in front. The white variety is the best. Laburnum alpinum (compact large shrub or small tree 20 to 30 feet high). Ligustrum Ibota. Ligustrum vulgare. Lonicera tatarica. Philadelphus coronarius. Pyrus coronaria (small tree). Pyrus pulcherrima (small tree). Rhamnus cathartica. Rhamnus Frangula. Syringa chinensis var. alba. Syringa chinensis var. Sougeana (var. rubra). .Syringa vulgaris. Viburnum dentatum. Will reach 10 to 12 feet, but may be restrained easily by gradual renewal from the base. Viburnum Lantana. Viburnum prunifolium (small tree). Etergreen: Ilex opaca. Pinus montana a low, bushy tree, 20 feet high and 20 feet i broad; very slow-growing. 2684 PLANTING PLANTING Pinus Strobus. Excellent for screen-planting. More graceful, effective, and permanent than Norway spruce or Scotch pine. Pseudotsuga taxifolia. Rhododendron album elegans (color white, blooming-period medium). Tsuga canadensis. The most graceful and effective large evergreen for screen-planting. Takes up less room than white pine and is much slower-growing. Can be restrained easily and therefore is adapted to small-scale planting. RALPH W. CURTIS. Winter protection of planting. Winter protection is the preparing of plants to with- stand the winter (Figs. 3032-3047). All plants are usu- ally hardy in their own habitat, but many become tender when removed to a colder climate, requiring artificial protection. A permanent covering of snow furnishes ideal protection, but unfortunately the American win- ters are very changeable. Continued steady cold is seldom injurious, but the alternate freezing and thawing toward spring are often fatal, the damage varying accord- ing as the situa- tion is wet or dry and the soil light or heavy. For ex- ample, shallow- rooted plants, as Lobelia cardi- nalis, will often be thrown out of the ground in clayey soil. Such damage may be prevented by placing sods over the plants. Gail- lardias will win- ter safely in light well-drained soils with ordinary protection, but perish if wet and heavy. The remarks in this article are meant to apply in the vicinity of Chicago. Winter-covering intercepts the sun's rays and retards premature activity. It is as essential "to keep in the cold" during temporary warm spells as it is to retard excessive depth of frost. More damage is generally done in February and March than earlier. Roses and other shrubs may be prepared for the winter any time from the last half of November until well into December, but any plants of an herbaceous nature may be cov- ered much earlier. Where field-mice are troublesome it is well to defer covering until after a good freeze, so that these nibblers may seek other winter quarters. Rabbits are fond of the Japan quince, Spiraea Van- houttei, Evonymus alata, and some others, and often damage newly planted material the first winter. When the branches are beyond then- reach, protect the trunk with straw, tar paper, or burlaps, which will also prevent sun-blistering. If the shrubs are in groups or low- branched, run wire netting around them. Fall-planted material should be better protected against frost than established plants of the same species. All the Japanese flowering forms of the plum, peach, and cherry tribes should have their roots mulched 4 or more inches deep. The fatal damage in the winter of 1898-1899 was at the roots, not overhead. Figs. 3032, 3033 show protection by means of straw and boughs; Figs. 3034-3036, pro- tection inside of boxes, barrels, and wire netting. Plants with evergreen foliage, like Heuchera sangui- nea, are safer with a covering that will not mat down and rot the foliage or injure the crown. The danger is in open, wet seasons. Forest leaves are excellent for whiter covering, provided they do not mat down. Oak 3032. Straw overcoats for roses. leaves are good, but those of elm, maple, and other trees that shed their foliage early are soft and mat too much. Leaves may be held in place by evergreen boughs, brush, or tops of bushy perennials like the native asters, or coarse strawy material. When leaves are used in bar- rels or boxes, the top of the package should be water - tight, and the leaves dry when put in. This precaution is not essential in all cases, but it is a safe rule to follow. Tar paper is com- paratively cheap and comes handy in many phases of win- ter-covering. Gather the leaves when they are dry, and store under shel- ter until wanted. ::. .••.*?» 3033. A tender tree bound in branches of hemlock. The protected tree is a speci- men of gordonia about 10 feet high, at Arnold Arboretum, Boston. Save vines like those of Clematis paniculata and pole limas; they are good for covering climbing roses that are almost hardy. These keep off the bright sun when the plants are in a semi-frozen con- dition, shield them from the drying winds, and retard premature starting of the flower-buds. Forsythia sus- pense trained as a climber on a south wall is benefited by such covering, or by burlaps, as its sheltered position induces activity too early and its flowering buds become a victim to late frosts. Any rhizomatous iris, such as the German iris, should be planted where surface drain- age is ample, and in the case of young plants, or those recently divided, not covered with heavy manure or they are likely to decay in wet weather. Cover such plants with fight material. Old established plants seldom need protection. Chrysanthemum coccineum requires similar conditions and treatment. All lilies except the hardiest, such as L. tigrinum, L. elegans, L. canadense, L. superbum, L. philadelphicum, L. spe- ciosum, L. tenuifolium, and so on, are best covered by a mound of ashes — wood or coal — which retains an even temperature. The other lilies may be mulched with manure and L. candidum with leaves. Eremurus in all its species, and Alstroemeria aurantiaca, require a deep box of leaves and the surrounding soil well mulched. An inverted V-shaped trough placed over such low edging plants as Veronica circse- oides and Thy- mus Serpyllum var. montanus, is beneficial. It is well to take up a few plants of Monarda did- yma, the double perennial sun- flower, and Thy- mus Serpyllum, and winter them in a frame, over which place a wooden shutter to shed rain, - . ""i_. placing leaves or 3034. One way of protecting young rho- manure on those dodendrons. The space inside the wire that remain netting is filled with autumn leaves . PLANTING PLANTING 2685 Where permanent windbreaks, such as plantations of evergreens, buildings or solid fences, do not exist, tem- porary ones should be made of boards, evergreen boughs, corn-stalks, and the like, to protect arboreal plants that are not quite hardy, e. g., in this climate Halesia Carolina, and in the eastern states Magnolia grandi flora, hollies, and the like. Place the windbreak at the sides toward the prevailing winds, generally 3035. Protecting plants by covering with a bo- inside which are placed leaves or straw. north and west, and at the sunny side of any evergreen that browns. The boughs or stalks may be attached to wire netting or to cords fastened to stakes. The so-called retinisporas may have placed over them an empty box open at the top. Shrubs that are still more tender should be boxed, the box having a tight top and ventilation at the sides. In all cases mulch well at the roots. Magnolia Sovlangeana, M. speciasa, and plants of similar degrees of hardiness may have their branches tied in and empty casks placed over them, one sitting partially inside the other, and held in place by stakes. Put a cone-shaped covering over the top to shed the snow. Or poles may be set close to the tree, wigwam fashion. Wrap these with burlaps, or wind string around them for the straw to lean against, and in both instances wrap with straw. The so-called hardy climbing roses, such as the Seven Sisters and Prairie Queen, which are hardy without protection, but are benefited by it. Wichuraiana and its hybrids, Paul Carmine Pillar, Russell Cottage, Crimson Rambler, Thalia, and Lord Penzance Sweetbrier hybrids, if against a wall, may have clematis or other vines placed thickly over them; or if in an open exposed situation, they may be wrapped in straw. (Fig. 3033.) Better still, hill up the soil rather high at the roots, — to prevent break- ing and to afford protection and drainage, — and then take the trouble to extend the mound in the form of a gradually diminishing ridge. Bend the canes along the ridge, choosing a time when there is no frost in them; then cover the canes with tar paper, over which place soil, strawy manure, or any warm cover- ing. If the presence of a lawn prevents this method, lay on thnt for storing fruits and also brussels sprouts, celery, and cauliflower until Christmas. The forms of buildings larger than those above described vary much with different circumstances. Sometimes the cellar of a stable, tool-house, or other outbuilding can be utilized. The chief consideration is protection against frost, but provision must be made for thorough ventilation, and against a too high temperature in the autumn and early spring. It is because it is hardly possible to pro- vide for these matters that dwelling-house cellars do not make good pits; they cannot be sufficiently ventilated to keep the temperature low enough except in the mid- dle of winter. Growth is incited and cannot be main- tained owing to lack of light. Owing to their position, pits cannot well be made of wood, plank and cedar posts lasting from 4 to 6 years only. For large pits, stone and brick are most eco- nomical for walls and ceilings; for small ones concrete probably makes the cheapest and best wall; hollow tile might be used. At the Bussey Institution the concrete walls of several small pits have stood 15 to 20 years without showing any sign of deterioration. An excavation of the required dimensions is made, with due allowance for the walls. Inside the excavation a plank molding-frame is built at the proper distance; viz., the thickness of the walls, from the walls of earth which should have been cut as true as possible. This frame, which should also be true and plumb, is carried to the required height for the inside face of wall and another frame is made at the proper distance on the surface of the ground, the inner face of which will be the outside face of the completed wall. These frames must be well braced; they carry a heavy load until the cement hardens. It is not necessary to make a complete frame for the whole pit at once; one end and a half of both sides can be built first, and the same frame re- versed will serve for the remainder. Use a good quality Portland cement mixed one part of cement to two of sand with four or five parts broken stone or gravel which should not be larger than an egg; for floors the broken stone or gravel may be increased to seven or eight parts. The whole should be completely and quite carefully blended with hoe or shovel until each stone is coated. Throw this mass into the space between the molding-frame and earth wall and settle compactly with a rammer. It is not advisable to mix more than a barrel at once, nor so much as this unless at least six men are employed. Continuous batches are made until the work is finished. When the top layers are going in, insert %-inch iron bolts 6 to 8 inches long at intervals of 6 feet. These secure the wooden sills. In warm dry weather the frames can be removed within twenty- four hours or less, but first examine carefully the con- dition of the concrete. After removal, smooth off any roughness and grout in with a whitewash brush a coat of portland cement mixed with water, but without sand, thus obtaining a good color and a more homo- geneous surface. For several days the work should be shaded and occasionally sprinkled with the hose. Do not attach the woodwork until the concrete is fully hardened. One and one-half barrels of cement make about 1 cubic yard of concrete, that costs, in place, between five and six dollars, somewhat less if the cost of labor, sand, and gravel is moderate. Build in June or July, so that the concrete will be thoroughly dry before frost. The construction of a brick roof is shown in Fig. 3046. Concrete could also be used. A good grade hotbed sash make the best glass roof. All sills, cross-bars, and the like, should be made of cypress and painted. The wood- work must be made strong to endure the continual exposures. It is false economy to stint in quantity or quality. In cellars for nursery stock, a comparatively small amount of light is required, and the low roof is boarded in and shingled, building-paper being used. Planks may be substituted for boards, or the roof may be double. Sand or gravel, 1 foot deep, makes the best floor, or half sand and half loam where plants are to be heeled-in. A concrete floor should be used only where the drainage is absolutely perfect. The sides and ends should be banked with leaves or other material. (See Fig. 3039). In the vicinity of Boston this should be done about November 15. The same cov- ering can also be given to low roofs. The glass is pro- tected by mats and shutters, much as in ordinary hotbeds. It is a good plan to have on hand an extra supply of dry meadow hay to give additional shelter in zero weather. 3041. A doorway in Fig. 3040. 2688 PLANTING PLANTING Pits like those shown in Figs. 3043 and 3045, like greenhouses, should carry more than one "crop." In early autumn they hold chrysanthemums, carnations, stevias, and the like; next Rhododendron (Azalea) indica, Cytisus canariensis, heaths, and the like, some of whicn remain for the winter, while others are replaced by - 3042. Winter protection. Plants carried over winter in a living condition in an unheated glasshouse. hardy shrubs, bulbs, and other plants for forcing. For spring and summer use, see above. In eastern Massa- chusetts gardeners begin to use them in September, but the final storage sometimes is not finished until Christ- mas. The longer the plants can be kept in the open air the better fitted they are for then- winter quarters. In the care of pits, watering and ventilation are of prime importance. When first housed the plants should be well watered, and, if this is carefully done, it will often be found that no further water is required for plants in tubs and large pots (10 inches or more). This also is true of heeled-in stock. Everything, however, should be so arranged that inspection is easy, and water should be given when necessary. Plants on the shelves, particularly in small pots (4-inch), will go dry oftener than those placed on the gravel floor. It is best to water on bright days, when the sashes can be removed. The great difficulty in keeping plants in good condition is owing to the condensation of moisture within the pits at times when it is impossible to open them on account of severe weather; therefore no more water should be given than is absolutely needed. As long as the weather permits, keep the sashes off or the windows open night and day, and afterward open up whenever possible. On sunny days ventilate whenever the thermometer registers over 20 F., but do not begin until the sun strikes the frames, and shut off early in the afternoon. On mild days, with the mercury above freezing, remove the sashes entirely. This is the best way to get rid of the moisture-laden air, and is essential for keeping evergreen plants with soft foliage in good condition. To change the air in large cellars is more trou- blesome; here it is advisable to build an open fireplace in which a brisk fire may be kindled on mild days when all win- 3043. One of the simplest and least expen- dows "phina var. laciniata. Ribes aureum. Ribes Gordqnianum. Ribes sanguineum. Robinia hispida. Rubus odoratus. Salix discolor. Salis humilis. Salix pentandra. Salix petiolaris. Salix purpurea. Salix rostrata. Salix sericea. Salix tristis. Sambucus canadensis. Sambucus nigra. Sambucus nigra var. aurea. Sambucus nigra var. laciniata. Sambucus racemosa. Shepherdia argentea. Sorbus melanocarpa. Spirsea arguta. Spriaa Billardii. Spirsea Bumalda. Spirsea Bumalda, "Anthony Waterer." Spiraea Menziesii. Spiraea prunifolia. Spiraea prunifolia var. flore- pleno. Spiraea salicifolia. Spiraea Thunbergii. Spiraea Van Houttei. Staphylea colchica. Staphylea trifolia. *Stephandra incisa. Syringa persica. Syringa villosa. Syringa vulearis, in variety. Symphoricarpoa albus. Symphoricarpos orbiculatus. Tamarix africana. Tamarix gallica. Tamarix gallica indica. Tamarix hispida aestivalis. Tamarix tetandra purpurea. Viburnum acerifohum. Viburnum cassinoides. Viburnum dentatum. Viburnum Lantana. Viburnum Lentago. Viburnum molle. Viburnum Opulus. Viburnum Opulus var. sterile Viburnum tomentosum. Viburnum prunifolium. *Vitex Agnus-castus. Xanthoceras sorbifolia. *Xanthorrhiza apiifolia. 3055. Hydrangea panicu^iLu. , — . giaudiiiora. A few species commonly classed as woody are more herbaceous than most shrubs and hence more tender; top should be cut to the ground each spring and treated more as hardy perennials. Among these are the fol- lowing: Buddleia Davidii. Buddleia Lindleyana. Caryopteris incana. Coronilla Emerus. Trailing and climbing vines. *Actinidia arguta. *Akebia quinata. *Ampelopsis heterophylla var. amurensis. Aristolochia macrophylla. *Aristolochia tomentosa. *Bignonia capreolata. Campsis radicans Celastrus orbiculatus. Celastrus scandens. Clematis Flammula. Clematis lanuginosa var. Clematis Jackmanii. [Henryi. Clematis paniculata. Clematis virginiana. *Evonymus radicans. *Evonymus radicans var.vegeta. Forsythia suspensa. Shrubs suitable for hedges. Berber s Thunbergi . Berberis vulgaris Berberis vulgaris var. atro- purpurea. Deutzia all species listed. Elaeagnus multiflora. Forsythia intermedia. Hibiscus syriacus in variety. *Hippophae rhamnoides. Ligustrum, all listed species. Shrubs for shady places. Berberis Thunbergii. Berberis vulgaris. Berberis vulgaris var. atro- purpurea. Ceanothus americanus. Clethra alnifolia. Cornus, all species. Deutzia gracilis. Deutzia Lemoinei. Forsythia, al' species. Lespedeza bicolor. Stephanandra incisa. Vitex Agnus-castus. Lonicera Caprifolium. *Lonicera japonica. *Lonicera japonica var. aureo- reticulata. *Lonicera japonica var. Hal- liana. Lonicera Periclymenum var. belgica. Lonicera sempervirens. Parthenocissus quinquefolia. Parthenocissus quinquefoUa var. Engehnannii. Parthenocissus tricuspidata. *Periploca graeca. Vitls, native species. Wisteria chinensis. Wisteria magnifica. Wisteria speciosa. *Lonicera fragrantissima. Philadelphus, all species listed. Ribes Gordqnianum. Ribes sanguineum. Rhodotypos kerrioides. Shepherdia argentea. Spirsea Billardii. Spiraea Van Houttei. Tamarix, all species listed. Hydrangea arborescens. Hypericum Moserianum. Ligustrum, all species. Lonicera Periclymenum. Rhus canadensis. Ribes sanguines. Rubus odoratus. Viburnum acerifolium. Viburnum dentatum. Viburnum tomentosum. Shrubs with twigs of striking color. Cornus alba var. cerifera. Cornus sanguinea. Cornus stolonifera. Cornus stolonifera var. flavi- ramea. Elseagnus argentea. Elaeagnus multiflora. *Kerria japonica. Kinds with more or less conspicuous berries. Berberis Thunbergii. Berberis vulgaris. *Evonymus alata. Evonymus americana. 2696 PLANTING PLANTING Evonymus Bungeana. Evonymus radicans var. vegeta. Ilex verticillata. Ligustrum amurense. Ligustrum Ibota var. Regeli- anum. *Ligustrum ovalifolium. Lonicera Ledebourii. Lonicera Morrowi. Laoicera Ruprechtianum. Rhamnus cathartica Rhamnus Frangula. Rhus glabra. Rhus typhina. Sambucus, all species listed. Sorbus arbutifolia. Sorbus melanocarpa. Staphylea trifolia. Symphoricarpos albus. Symphoricarpos orbiculatus. Viburnum. H. C. IRISH. Shrubs and climbers for the South. Owing to the great diversity of soil, elevation, and climatic conditions found in the Mountain, Piedmont, and Coastal zones of the South, it is impossible to make or to give an absolutelj' accurate list of deciduous and broad-leaved shrubs and climbers adapted to the three above-mentioned zones. The planter must, therefore, make due allowances for local conditions. 1. Piedmont Zone extends from the Mountain Zone to the Fall Line, which follows approximately the follow- ing cities: Weldon and Raleigh, North Carolina, Cam- den, and Columbia, South Carolina; Augusta, Milledge- ville, Macon, and Columbus, Georgia; Montgomery, Alabama; Columbus and Holly Springs, Mississippi. Deciduous shrubs for the Piedmont Zone. Acanthopanax pentaphyllus. Acer japonicum. ^Esculus octandra. Amelanchier atropurpurea. Amelanchier canadensis. Amelanchier rotundifolia. Amorpha canescens. Amorpha fruticosa. Amorpha glabra. Amorpha tennesseensis. Aralia chinensis var. mandshur- ica. Aronia arbutifolia. Aronia melanocarpa. Azalea arboreseens. Azalea gandavensis. Azalea lutea. Azalea mollis. Azalea nudiflora. Azalea pontica. Azalea Vaseyi. Azalea viscosa. Baccharis halimifolia- Benzoin aestivale. Berberis aristata. Berberis asiatica. Berberis canadensis. Berberis heteropoda. Berberis Sieboldii. Berberis sinensis. Berberis Thunbergii. Berberis vulgaris. Berberis vulgaris var. atro- purpurea. Buckleya distichophylla. Buddleia Davidii. Buddleia Davidii var. mag- nifies,. Buddleia intermedia. Buddleia japonica. Buddleia Lindleyana. Buddleia officinalis. Caesalpinia Gilliesii. Callicarpa americana. Callicarpa purpurea. Calycanthus fertilis. Calycanthus florida. Calycanthus occiden- talis. Caragana arborescens. Caragana Chamlagu. Caryopteris incana. Cassia macrantha. Ceanothus americanus. Ceanothus hybridus. Cephalanthus occiden- talis. Cercis chinensis. Cercis Siliquastrum. Chaenomeles japonica. Chilopsis saligna. Clerodendron trichoto- mum. Clethra alnifolia. Colutea arborescens. Comptonia asplenifolia. Cornus alba. Cornus alba var. Spaethii. Cornus Amomum. Cornus Mas. Cornus racemosa. Cornus rugosa. Cornus sanguinea. Cornus stolonifera. Cornus stolonifera var. flavi- ramea. Coronilla Emeriis. Corylopsis pauciflora. Corylus americana. Corylus Avellana. Corylus Avellana var. laciniata. Corylus maxima var. purpurea. Corylus rostrata. Cotoneaster acutifolia. Cotoneaster multiflora. Cotoneaster racemiflora. Cratffigus coccinea. Cratsegus Phsenopyrum. Cratsegus Oxyacantha. Cratffigus uniflora. Cytisus prsecox. Cytisus scoparius. Daphne Genkwa. Daphne Mezereum. Deutzia gracilis. Deutzia Lemoinei. Deutzia rosea. Deutzia scabra. Deutzia scabra var. candidis- sima. Deutzia scabra var. flore-pleno rosea. Deutzia scabra var. Pride of Rochester. Deutzia Sieboldiana. Diervilln florida. Diervilla hybrida. 3056. English laurel. DiervillaTivularis. Diervilla sessilifolia. Dirca palustris. Elaagnus angustifolia. Eteagnus argentea. Elaeagnus multiflora. Elseagnus parvifolia. Elaeagnus umbellata. Evonymus alata. Evonymus americana. Evonymus Bungeana. Evonymus europsea. Evonymus nana. Evonymus patens. Exochorda Korolkowii. Exochorda racemosa. Fontanesia Fortunei. Fontanesia phillyriEoides. Forestiera acuminata. Forestiera ligustrina. Forsythia intermedia. Forsythia suspensa. Forsythia suspensa var. For- tunei. Forsythia viridissima. Fothergilla Gardenu. Fothergilla major. Fothergilla parviflora. Genista germanica. Genista tinctoria. Halimodendron halodendron. Harnameus yirginiana. Hibiscus syriacus. Hippophae rhamnoides. Hydrangea arborescens. Hydrangea arborescens var. sterilis. Hydrangea Hortensia. Hydrangea paniculata. Hydrangea paniculata var. grandiflora. Hydrangea paniculata var. prse- cox. Hydrangea quercifolia. Hydrangea radiata. Hypericum aureum. Hypericum calycinum. Hypericum densiflorum. Hypericum glomeratum. Hypericum lobocarpum. Hypericum Moserianum. Hypericum nudiflorum. Hypericum proUficum. Ilex decidua. Ilex verticillata. Indigofera Gerardiana. Itea yirginica. Jasminum fruticans. Jasminum humile. Jasminum nudiflorum. Jasminum officinale. Kerria japonica. Kerria japonica var. argeuteo- variegata. Kerria japonioa var. flore-pleno. Lagerstrcemia indica. Lespedeza bicolor. Lespedeza Sieboldii. Ligustrum acuminatum. Ligustrum amurense. Ligustrum Ibota. Ligustrum Ibota var. Regel- ianum. Ligustrum ovalifolium. Ligustrum vulgare. Lonicera bella. Lonicera fragrantissima. Lonicera Morrowii. Lonicera muscaviensis. Lonicera pyrenaica. Lonicera Ruprechtiana. Lonicera spinosa. Lonicera Standishii. Lonicera tatarica. Lonicera thibetica. Lonicera Xylosteum. Meratia praecpx. Muehlenbeckia complexa. Myrica carolinensis. Myrica cerifera. Myrica Gale. Myricaria germanica. Neviusia alabamensis. Paliurus Spina-Christi. Philadelphus, Avalanche. Philadelphus, Mont Blanc. Philadelphus coronarius. -> Philadelphus coronarius var. flore-pleno. Philadelphus Falconeri. Philadelphus gloriosus. Philadelphus grandiflorus (oor- pnarius var. ?) Philadelphus hirsutus. Philadelphus inodorus. Philadelphus laxus. Philadelphus Lemoinei. Philadelphus Lewisii. Philadelphus pubescens. Photinia villosa. Physocarpus opulifolius. eipn Philadelphus floridus. 3057. A good use of woody vines. Physocarpus opulifoliua var. aureus. Pieris mariana. Poncirus trifoliata. Potentilla fruticosa. Prunus japonica. Prunus maritima. Prunus pumila. Prunus triloba. Punica Granatum. Rhamnus cathartica. Rhamnus Frangula. Rhododendron canadense. Rhodotypos kerrioides. Rhus canadensis. Rhus Michauxii. Ribes curvatum. Ribes nigrum. Ribes sanguineum. Robinia hispida. Rosa blanda. Rosa Carolina. Rosa rubiginosa. Rosa rugosa. Rosa setigera. Roses, Bourbon. Roses, Brier and Penzance Sweetbriers. Roses, Hybrid Perpetual. Roses, Hybrid Tea. Roses, Japanese. Roses, Monthly or China. Roses, Moss. Roses, Polyantha. Roses, Tea. Rosmarinus officinalis. Rubus laciniatus. Salix discolor. Salvia Greggii. Salvia Greggii var. alba. Spartium junceum. Spiraa alba. Spiraea albiflora. Spiraea arguta. Spiraea Billardii. Spiraea Billardii var. longi« pedunculata. Spiraea blanda. Spiraea Bumalda. Spiraea cantoniensis. Spiraea cantoniensis flore-pleno. Spiraea Douglasii. Spiraea Fontenaysii. Spiraea Fortunei var. semper- florens. Spiraea Froebelii. Spiraea japonica. Spirsea macrophylla. Spiraea nipponica. Spiraea prunifolia. Spiraea prunifolia flore-pleno. PLANTING PLANTING 2697 Spires revirescena. Spiraea Schinabeckii. Spiraea Thunbergii. Spiraea tomentosa. Spiraea trilobata. Spiraea Van Houttei. Spira?a virginiana. Staphylea Bumalda. Staphylea colchica. Staphylea pinnata. Staphylea trifolia. Stephanandra incisa. Stewartia pentagyna. Styrax americana. Styrax japonica. Styrax Obassia. Symphoricarpos alb us. Symphoricarpos microphyllus. Symphoriearpos occidentalis. Symphoricarpos orbiculatus. Syringa chinensis. Syringa Josikea. Syringa pekinensis. Syringa persica. Vines for the Piedmont Zone. Aetinidia arguta. Actinidia chinensis. Actinidia Kolomitka. Akebia lobata. Akebia quinata. Ampelopsis arborea. Antigonon leptopus. Aristolochia macrophylla. Berchemia racemosa. Bignonia eapreolata. Campsis chinensis. Campsis hybrida. Campsis, Mme. Gallen. Campsis radieans. Celastrus orbiculatus. Clematis apiifolia. Clematis crispa. Clematis Flammula, Clematis hybrida. Clematis texensis. Clematis Viorna. Clematis virginiana. Decumaria barbara. Dioscorea Batatas, Elseagnus reflexa. Evonymus radicans. Evonymus radicans var. varie- gata. Eyonymus radicans var. vegeta, Ficus pumila. Gelsemium sempervirens. Gelsemium sempervirens flore- pleno. Hedera canariensis. Hedera helix. Humulus Lupulus. Hydrangea petiolaris. Syringa villosa. Syringa vulgaris. Tarnarix gallica. Tamarix gallica var. indica. Tamarix juniperina. Tamarix odessana. Tamarix parviflora. Vaccinium arboreum. Vaccinium corymboeum. Viburnum dentatum. Viburnum dilatatum. Viburnum Lantana. Viburnum macrocephalum. Viburnum macrocephalum var. sterile. Viburnum nudum. Viburnum Opulus. Viburnum Opulus var. nanum. Viburnum Opulus var. sterile. Vitex Agnus-castus. Vitex incisa. Xanthorrhiza apiifoUa. Zenobia speciosa. Kadsura japonica. Lonicera americana. Lonicera chinensis. Lonicera flava. Lonicera glaucescens. Lonicera HeckrottiL Lonicera japonica. Lonicera japonica var. aureo- reticulata. Lonicera Periclymenum var belgica. Lonicera prolifera. Lonicera sempen-irens. Lonicera VilmoriniL Menispermum canadense. Parthenocissus Henryana. Parthenocissus quinquefolia. Parthenocissus quinquefolia var. EngelmanniL Parthenocissus tricuspidata var. Veitchii. Passiflora caerulea. Periploca graeca. Polygonum baldschuanicum. Pueraria hirsuta. Solanum jasmin oides var. gran* diflorum. Trachelospermum jasminoides. Vitis aestiyalis. Vitis cordifoha. Vitis Labrusca. Vitis rotundifolia. Wisteria chinensis. Wisteria chinensis var. alba. Wisteria chinensis flore-pleno. Wisteria multijuga. Wisteria speciosa. Broad-leaved evergreens for the Piedmont Zone. Abelia floribunda. Abelia grandifiora. Arbutus Unedo. Ardisia crenulata var. rubra. Aucuba japonica. Aucuba japonica var. lati- maculata. Azalea amcena. Azalea indica. Azalea indica Kaempferi (Sar- gent's hybrids). Azalea obtusa. Berberis buxifolia. Berbens Darwinii. Berberis hakecides. Berberis ilicifolia. Berberis Xeubertii. Berberis Sargentiana. Berberis stenophylla. Butus japonica var. aurea. Burus sempervirens. Buxus sempervirens var. Hand- wort hii. Buxus sempervirens var. suf- fruticosa. Callistemon lanceolatus. Calluna vulgaris. Calluna %-ulgaris var. alba. Camellia japonica. Cleyera ochnacea. Cotoneaster hprizontalis. Cotoneaster microphylla. Cotoneaster microphylla var. glacialis. Cotoneaster rotundifolia. Cotoneaster rotundifolia var. lanata Cotoneaster SimonsiL Cotoneaster thymifolia. Daphne Cneorum. EL-eagnus macrophylla. Ekeagnus pungens. Elseagnus pungens var. Simoni. Ela?agnus variegata. Eriobotrya japonica. Escallonia montevidensis. Escallonia virgata. Evon>-mus japonica. EvonjTnus japonica var. aureo- variegata. Evonymus japonica var. micro- phylla. Fuchsia corallina. Fuchsia gracilis. Gardenia jasminoides. Gardenia jasminoides var. For- tuniana. Gardenia jasminoides var. radi- cans. Gardenia jasminoides var. Veitchii. Ilex Aquifplium. Ilex Aquifolium var. aureo- regina. Ilex Aquifolium var. ferox. Ilex crenata. Ilex glabra. Ilex integra. Ilex latif olia. Ilex vomitoria. Illicium anisatum. Ixora chinensis. Kalmia angustifolia. Kalmia latifolia. Laurus nobilis. Leiophyllum buxifolium. Leucothoe Catesbsei. Leucothoe populif olia. Logustrum coriaceum. Ligustrum excelsum superbum. Ligustrum japonicum. Ligustrum lucidum. Ligustrum macrophyllum. Ligustrum marginal uru aureum. Ligustrum nepalense. Ligustrum Quihoui. Ligustrum sinense. Mahonia Aquifolium. Mahonia japonica. Mahonia repens, Mahonia pinnata. Michelia fuscata. M\-rtus communis. Nandina domestica. Nerium. Osmanthus Aquifolium. Osmanthus fragrans. Osmanthus Fortunei. Pernettya mucronata. Pernettya speciosa. Phillyrea angustifolia. Phillyrea decora. Photinia serrulata. Pieris floribunda. Pieris japonica. Pittoeporum Tobira. Prunus caroliniana. Prunus Laurocerasus var. schip- kaensis. Prunus lusitanica. Pyracantha coccinea. Pyracantha coccinea var. La- landii. Raphiolepsis indica. Rhododendron arboreum. Rhododendron arbutifolium. Rhododendron catawbiense. Rhododendron catawbiense hy- bridum. Rhododendron m«TiTniim Rhododendron myrtifolium. Rhododendron ponticum. Rhododendron punctatum. Skimmia japonica. Thea sinensis. Veronica Traversii. Viburnum odoratissimum. Viburnum siispensum Viburnum Tinus. Yucca filamentosa. Yucca glauca. Yucca gloriosa. Yucca Treculeana. 3058. Berberis Thunbergii. 2. Coastal Zone extends from the Fall Line, as out- lined under the Piedmont Zone, to the Atlantic Ocean and Gulf of Mexico, but exclusive of that part of Florida south of a line drawn across the state to St. Augustine and Cedar Keys. Deciduous shrubs for the Coastal Zone. Cornus Amomum. Cornus sanguinea. Coronilla Emerus. Corylus americana. Cotoneaster multiflora. Cotoneaster race mi flora. Deutzia rosea. Deutzia Lemoinei. Deutzia scabra var. candidis- Acacia Farnesiana. Acanthopanax pentaphyllus. .Esculus octandra. .Esculus Pavia. Amelanehier rotundifolia. Amorpha canescens. Amorpha fruticosa. Aronia arbutif olia. Azalea arborescens. Azalea lutea. Azalea nudiflora. Azalea viscosa. Berberis aristata. Berberis sinensis. Berberis Thunbergii. Berberis vulgaris. Berberis vulgaris var. atro- purpurea. Buddleia Davidii. Buddleia Da\-idii var. magnifiea. Buddleia intermedia. Buddleia japonica. Buddleia Lindleyana. Buddleia offieinalis. Ca3salpinia Pillesii. Callicarpa americana. Callicarpa purpurea. Calycanthus fertilis. Calycanthus florida. Calycanthus occidentalis. Caryopteris incana Cassia macrantha. Ceanothus americanus. Ceanothus hybridus. Cephalanthus occidental^. Cercis japonica. Cercis Siliquastrum. Chaenomeles japonica. Chilopsis saligna. Clerodendron trichotomum. Clethra alnifolia. Cornus alba. Deutzia scabra var. flore-pleno rosea. Deutzia scabra, Pride of Rochester. Deutzia Sieboldiana. Dier^-illa florida. Diervilla hybrida. Dirca palustris. Elaeagnus angustifolia. Elaeagnus multiffora Elaeagnus parvifolia. Elaeagnus umbellata. Erythrina Crista-gallL Evonymus alata. Evonymus americana. Evonymus europaea. Evonymus nana. Evonymus patens. Exochorda KorolkowiL Exochorda racemosa. Fontanesia Fortunei. Fontanesia phillyrseoides. Forsythia intermedia. Forsyt hia suspensa. Forsythia suspensa var. For- tunei. Forsythia viridissuna. Halimodendron halodendron. Hamamelis yirginiana. Hibiscus syriacus. Hippophae rhamnoides Hydrangea arborescens- 2698" PLANTING PLANTING Hydrangea arborescens var. sterilis. Hydrangea Hortensia. Hydrangea quercifolia. Hypericum calycinum. Hypericum densiflorum. Hypericum glomeratum. Hypericum lobocarpum. Hypericum Moserianum. Hypericum prolificum. Ilex decidua. Ilex verticillata. Indigofera Gerardiana. Itea yirginica. Jasminum fruticans. Jasminum humile. Jasminum nudiflorum. Jasminum officinale. Kerria japonica. Kerria japonica var. argenteo- variegata. Kerria japonica var. flore-pleno. Lagerstrcemia indica. Lespedeza bicolor. Lespedeza Sieboldii. Ligustrum acuminatum. Ligustrum amurense. Ligustrum Ibota. Ligustrum Ibota var. Regel- ianum. Ligustrum ovalifolium. Ligustrum vulgare. Lonicera bella. Lonicera fragrantissima. Lonicera gracilipes. Lonicera Morrowii. Lonicera Ruprechtiana. Lonicera Standishii. Lonicera tatarica. Lycium halimifolium. Meratia praecox. Myrica carplinensis. Myrica cerifera. Myricaria germanica. Neyiusia alabamensis. Paliurus Spina-Christi. Philadelphus coronarius. Philadelphus coronarius var. flore-pleno. Philadelphus grandiflorus (cor- onarius var.). Philadelphus inodorus. Philadelphus pubescens. Philadelphus laxus. Philadelphus Lemoinei. Philadelphus Lewisii. Philadelphus pubescens. Philadelphus, Avalanche. Philadelphus, Mont Blanc. Physocarpus opulifolius. Poncirus trifoliata. Potentilla fruticosa. Prunus japonica. Prunus maritima. Prunus pumila. Prunus triloba. Punica granatum. Rhamnus cathartica. Rhodotypos kerrioides. Rhus canadensis. Vines for the Coastal Zone. Akebia quinata. Akebia lobata. Ampelopsis arborea. Ampelopsis heterophylla var. elegans. Antigonon leptopus. Berchemia racemose. Bignonia capreolata. Campsis chinensis. Campsis hybrida. Campsis, Mme. Gallen. Campsis radicans. Clematis crispa. Clematis Flammula. Clematis paniculata Clematis texensis. Decumaria barbara. Dioscorea Batatas Elseagnus reflexa. Evonymus radicans. Evonymus radicans var. varie- gata. Ficus pumila. Gelsemium sempervirens. Gelsemium sempervirens flore- pleno. Hedera canariensis. Hedera helix. Jasminum primulinum. Rhus Michauxii. Ribes curvatum. Robinia hispida. Rosmarinus officinalia. Rosa Carolina. Rosa rugosa. Rosa setigera. Roses, Bourbon. Roses, Brier and Penzance Sweetbriers. Roses, Hybrid Perpetual. Roses, Hybrid Tea. Roses, Japanese. Roses, Monthly or China. Roses, Polyantha. Roses, Tea. Rubus laciniatus. Salix incana. Salix sericea Salvia Greggii. Salvia Greggii var alba. Sambucus canadensis Sambucus nigra. Sambucus nigra var. laciniata Spartium junceum. Spiraea albiflora. Spiraea arguta. Spirasa Billardii. Spiraea blanda. Spiraea Bumalda. Spiraea cantonensis. Spiraea cantonensis flore-pleno. Spiraea Douglasii. Spiraea Fontenaysii. Spiraea Fortunei var. semperflorens. Spiraea Froebelii. Spiraea japonica. Spiraea macrophylla. Spiraea prunifolia. Spiraea prunifolia flore-pleno. Spiraea revirescens. Spiraea Thunbergii. Spu-aea Van Houttei. Stephanandra incisa. Stewartia pentagyna. Styrax americana. Styrax japonica. Symphoricarpos microphyllus. Symphoricarpos orbiculatus. Syringa chinensis. Syringa pekinensis. Syringa persica. Tamarix gallica. Tamarix gallica var. indica. Tamarix juniperina. Tamarix hispida var. aestivalis. Tamarix odessana. Tamarix parviflora. Viburnum macrocephalum. Viburnum nudum. Viburnum Opulus var. sterile. Vitex Agnus-castus. Vitex incisa. Zenobia speciosa. Kadsura japonica. Lonicera americana. Lonieera chinensis. Lonicera flava. Lonicera glaucescens. Lonicera Heckrottii. Lonicera japonica. Lonicera japonica var. aureo- reticulata. Lonicera Periclymenum var. belgica. Lonicera prolifera. Lonicera sempervirens. Lonicera Vilmorinii. Parthenocissus Henryana. Parthenocissus quinquefolia. Parthenocissus quinquefolia var. Engelmannii. Parthenocissus tricuspidata var. Veitchii. Passiflora caerulea. Periploca graeca. Polygonum baldschuanicum Pueraria hirsuta. Pyrostegia venusta. Solanum jasminoides var. gran- diflorum. Trachelospermum jasminoides. Vitis aestivalis. Vitis cordifolia. Vitis rotundifolia. Wisteria chinensis. Wisteria chinensis var. alba. Wisteria chinensis var. flore- pleno. Wisteria multijuga. Wisteria speciosa. Broad-leaved evergreens for the Coastal Zone. Abelia floribunda. Abelia grandiflora. Arbutus Unedo. Ardisia crenulata var. rubra. Azalea amcena. Azalea indica. Azalea obtusa. Ilex integra. Ilex latifolia. Ilex vomitoria. Illicium anisatum. Ixora chinensis. Kalmia latifolia. Laurus nobilis. 3059. A Cherokee rose cover, in the South. Berberis buxifolia. Berberis Darwinii. Berberis ilicifolia. Berberis Neubertii. Berberis stenophylla. Buxus japonica var. aurea. Buxus sempervirens. Buxus sempervirens var. Hand- worthii. Buxus sempervirens var. suf- fruticosa. Callistemon lanceolatus. Camellia japonica. Cleyera ochnacea. Cotoneaster horizontalis. Cotoneaster microphylla. Cotoneaster microphylla var. glacialis. Cotoneaster rotundifolia. Cotoneaster rotundifolia var. lanata. Cotoneaster Simonsii. Cotoneaster thymifolia. Eteagnus macrophylla. Elasagnus pungens. Eteagnus pungens var. Simoni. Elaeagnus variegata. Eriobotrya japonica. Escallonia virgata. Escallonia montevidensis. Evonymus japonica. Evonymus japonica var. aureo- variegata. Evonymus japonica var. micro- phylla. Fuchsia corallina. Fuchsia gracilis. Gardenia jasminoides. Gardenia jasminoides var. For- tuniana. Gardenia jasminoides var. radi- cans. Gardenia jasminoides var. Veitchii. Ilex cornuta. Ilex crenata. Ilex glabra. Lciophyllum buxifolium. Leucothoe Catesbaei. Leucothoe populifolia. Leucothoe racemosa. Ligustrum excelsum superbum. Ligustrum japonicum. Ligustrum lucidum. Ligustrum macrophyllum. Ligustrum marginatum aureum. Ligustrum nepalense. Ligustrum Quihoui. Ligustrum sinense. Mahonia Aquifolium. Mahonia japonica. Michelia fuscata. Myrtus communis. Nandina domestica. Nerium. Osmanthus Aquifolium. Osmanthus Fortunei. Osmanthus fragrans. Pernettya mucronata. Pernettya speciosa. Phillyrea angustifolia. Phillyrea decora. Photinia serrulata. Pieris floribunda. Pieris japonica. Pittosporum Tobira. Prunus caroliniana. Prunus Laurocerasus. Prunus Laurocerasus var. schipkaensis. Prunus lusitanica Pyracantha coccinea. Pyracantha coccinea var. La- landii. Raphiqlepsis indica. 7 hea sinensis. Viburnum odoratissimum. Viburnum suspensum. Viburnum Tinus. Yucca aloifolia. Yucca filamentosa. Yucca gloriosa. Yucca Treculeana. 3. Mountain or Upper Zone includes all that territory above Harper's Ferry, Maryland; Roanoke, Virginia; Winston-Salem, Morganton, and Rutherfordton, North Carolina; Spartanburg and Pendleton, South Carolina; PLANTING PLANTING 2699 Gainesville and Cartersville, Georgia; Huntsville, Alabama; Murfreesboro, Tennessee, and thence north to the Kentucky line. Deciduous shrubs for the Mountain or Upper Zone Acanthopanax pentaphyllus. Acer japonica. ^Eseulus octandra. jEsculus Pavia. Amelanchier atropurpurea. Amelanchier canadensis. Amelanchier rotundifolia. Amorpha canescens. Amorpha fruticosa. Amorpha glabra. Amorpha tennesseensis. Aralia chinensis var. mand- schurira. Aronia arbutifolia. Aronia melanocarpa. Ascyrum hyperieoides. Baceharis halimifolia. Benzoin aestivale. Berberis asiatica. Berberis canadensis. Berberis heteropoda. Berberis Siebolrtii. Berberis sinensis. Berberis Thunbergii. Berberis vulgaris. Berberis vulgaris var. atro- purpurea. Buckleya distichophylla. Buddleia Davidii var. magnifica, Buddleia intermedia. Buddleia japonica. Buddleia Lindleyana. Callicarpa americana. Callicarpa purpurea. Calycanthus fertilis. Calyeanthus florida. Calycanthus occidentalis. Caragana arborescens. Caragana Chamlagu. Ceanothus americanus. Ceanothus Fendleri. Ceanothus hybridus. Cephalanthus occidentalis. Cercis chinensis. Cercis Siliquastrum. Cha-nomeles japonica. Chilopsis saligna. Clerodendron trichotomum. Clethra ahiifolia. Colutea arborescens. Comptonia asplenifolia. Cornus alba. Cornus alba var. Spaethii. Cornus Amomum. Cornus mas. Cornus racemosa. Cormus rugosa. Cornus sanguinea. Cornus stolonifera. Cornus stolonifera var. flavi- ramea. Coronilla Emerus. Corylopsis pauciflora. Corylus americana. Corylus Avellana. Corylus Avellana var. laciniata. Corylus maxima var. purpurea. Corylus rostrata. Cotoneaster acutifolia. Cotoneaster multiflora. Cotoneaster racemiflora. Crata?gus coecinea. Crataegus Oxyacantha. Crataegus Phaeuopyrum. Cytisus praecox. Cytisus scoparius. Daphne Mezereum vars. alba and rubra. Daphne Genkwa. Deutzia gracilis. Deutzia Lemoinei. Deutzia rosea. Deutzia scabra. Deutzia scabra var. candidis- sima. Deutzia scabra var. plena. Deutzia scabra, Pride of Rochester. Deutzia Sieboldiana. Djervilla florida. Diervilla hybrida. Diervilla rivularis. Diervilla sessilifolia. Dirca palustris. Elaeagnus angustifolia. Elaeagnus argentea. Elaeagnus multiflora. Elaeagnus parvifolia. Elaeagnus umbellata. ' Evonymus alata. Evonymus americana. Evonymus Bungeana. Evonymus europsea. Evonymus Maackii. Evonymus nana. Evonymus patens. Exochorda Korolkowii. Exochorda racemosa.. Fontanesia Fortunei. Fontanesia phillyrfeoides. Forestiera acuminata. Forestiera ligustrina. Forsythja intermedia. Forsythia suspensa. Forsythia suspensa var. For- tunei. Forsythia viridissima. Fothergilla Gardenii. Fothergilla major. Fothergilla parvnflora. Genista germanica. Genista tinctoria. Halimodendron halodendron. Hamamelis virginiana. Hibiscus s>Tiacus. Hippophae rhamnoides. Holodiscus discolor. Hydrangea arborescens. Hydrangea arborescens var. sterilis. Hydrangea Hortensia. Hydrangea paniculata. Hydrangea paniculata var. grandiflora. Hydrangea paniculata var. pra> cox. Hydrangea quercifolia. Hydrangea radiata. H>T)ericum aureum. Hypericum calycinum. Hypericum densiflonrm. H>-pericum glomeratum. Hypericum lobocarpum. Hypericum Moserianum. H>"pericurn nudiflorum. Hypericum prolificum. Ilex decidua. Ilex verticillata. Indigofera Gerardiana. Itea yirginica. Jasminum fruticans. Jasminum hurnile. Jasminum nudiflorum. Jasminum officinale. Kerria japonica. Kerria japonica var. argenteo- variegata. Kerria japonica flore-pleno. Lagerstrojmeria indica. Lespedeza bicolor. Lespedeza Sieboldii. Leucothoe racemosa. Leucothoe recurva. Ligustrum acuminatum. Ligustrum amurense. Ligustrum Ibota. Ligustrum Ibota var. Regel- ianum. Ligustrum ovalifolium. Ligustrum vulgare. Lonicera bella. Lonicera fragrantissima. Lonicera gracilipes. Lonicera Morrowii. Lonicera muscaviensis. Lonicera pyrenaica. Lonicera Ruprechtiana. Lonicera spinosa. Lonicera Standishii. Lonicera tatarica. Lonicera thibetica. Lonicera Xylosteum. Lycium yulgare. Lyonia ligustrina. Menziesia pilosa. Meratia prsecox. Muehlenbeckia complexa. Myrica carolinensis. Myrica cerifera. Myrica Gale. Myricaria germanica. Neviusia alabamensis. Paliurus Spina-Christi. Philadelphus coronarius. Philadelphus coronarius var. flore-pleno. Philadelphus Falconer!. Philadelphus floridus. Philadelphus gloriosus. Philadelphus grandiflorus (cor- pnarius var.). Philadelphus hirsutus. Philadelphus inodorus. Philadelphus laxus. Philadelphus Lemoinei. Philadelphus Le\visii. , Philadelphus pubescens. Philadelphus, Avalanche. Philadelphus, Mont Blanc. Photinia villosa. Physocarpus opulifolius. Physocarpus opulifolius var. aureus. Pieris mariana. Poncirus trifoUata. Potentilla fruticosa. Prunus Besseyi. Prunus incana. Prunus japonica. Prunus maritima. Prunus pumila. Prunus triloba. Punica Granatum. Rhamnus cathartica. Rhamnus Frangula. Rhododendron arborescens. Rhododendron canadense. Rhododendron gandavensis. Rhododendron japonicum. Rhododendron luteum. Rhododendron nudiflorum. Rhododendron ponticum. Rhododendron Vaseyi. Rhododendron viscosum. Rhodotypos kerrioides. Rhus canadensis. Rhus Michauxii. Ribes aureum. Rjbes curvatum. Ribes Cynosbatii. Ribes glandulosum. Ribes Gordonianum. Ribes nigrum. Ribes rotundifolium. Ribes sanguineum. Robinia hispida. Rosa alpina. Rosa blanda. Rosa Carolina. Rosa nibiginosa. Rosa rugosa. Rosa setigera. Roses, Bourbon. Roses, Brier and Penzance Sweet briers Roses, Hybrid PerpetuaL Roses, Hybrid Tea. Roses, Japanese. Roses, Monthly or China. Roses, Moss. Roses, Polyantha. Roses, Tea. Rosmarinus officinalis. Rubus laciniatus. Rubus odoratus. Rubus parviflorus. Rubus rosseflorus. SaUx discolor. Salix humilis. Salix incana. Salix lucida. Salix sericea. Salix tristis. Sambucus canadensis. Sambucus nigra. Sambucus nigra var. laciniata. Sambucus pubens. Shepherdia argentea. Spartium junceum. Spircea alba. Spiraea albiflora. Spiraea arguta. Spiraea bethlehemensis var. rubra. Spiraea Billardii. Spiraea Billardii var. longj- pedunculata. Spiraea blanda. Spiraea Bumalda. Spiraea californica. Spiraea cantonensis. Spiraea cantonensis flore- pleno. Spiraea crenata. Spiraea Douglasii. Spiraea eximia. Spiraea Fontenaysii. Spiraea Fortunei var. semper- florens. Spiraea FroebeliL Spiraea japonica. Spiraea Lenneana. Spiraea macrophylla. Spirsea Margaritae. Spiraea Menziesii. Spiraea nipponiea. Spiraea prunifolia. Spiraea prunifolia flore-pleno. Spiraea Schinabeckii. Spirsea Thunbergii. Spiraea trilobata. Spiraea Van Houttei. Spiraea revirescens. Spiraea syringaeflora. Spiraea tomentosa. Spiraea virginiana. Staphylea Bumalda. Staphylea colchica. Staphylea pinnata. Staphylea trifolia. Stephanandra incisa. Stephanandra Tanakae. Stewartia pentagyna. Stewartia Pseudo-Camellia. Styrax americana. Styrax japonica. Styrax Obassia. Symphoricarpos albus. Symphoricarpos microphyllus. Symphoricarpos occidentilis. Symphoricarpos orbiculatus. Symphoricarpos ovatus. Syringa chinensis. Syringa Josikea. Syringa pekinensia. Syringa persica. Syringa villosa. Syringa vulgaris. Syringa vulgaris, named sorts. Tamarix gallica. Tamarix gallica var. indica. Tamarix hispida var. aestivalis. Tamarix juniperina. Tamarix Odessana. Tamarix parviflora. Ulex europseus. Ulex nanus. Vaccinium corymbosum. Vaccinium pallidum. Vaccinium pennsylvanicum. Viburnum acerifolium. Viburnum ahiifolium. Viburnum cassinoides. Viburnum dentatum. Viburnum dilatatum. Viburnum Lantana. Viburnum macrocephalum. Viburnum macrocephalum var. sterile. Viburnum nudum. Viburnum Opulus. Viburnum Opulus var. nanum. Viburnum Opulus var. sterile. Viburnum Sieboldii. Viburnum tomentosum. Viburnum tomentosum var. plenum. Vitex Agnus-castus. Vitex incisa. Xanthorrhiza apiifolia. Zenobia speciosa. Vines for the Mountain Zone. Actinidia arguta. Actinidia Kolomitka. Akebia lobata. Akebia quinata. Ampelopsis arborea. Ampelopsis cordata. Ampelopsis heterophylla. Ampelopsis heterophylla var elegans. Aristolochia macrophylla. Berchemia racemosa. Bignonia capreolata. 2700 PLANTING PLANTING Brunnichia cirrhosa (a some- what shrubby, tendril-climb- ing plant native in eastern United States; allied to Polygonella). Campsis chinensis. Campsis hybrida. Campsis, Mme. Gallen. Campsis radicans. Celastrus orbiculatus. Celastrus scandens. Clematis apiif olia. Clematis crispa. Clematis Flammula. Clematis hybrida. Clematis montana. Clematis orientalis. Clematis paniculata. Clematis Viorna. Clematis virginiana. Clematis Vitalba. Decumaria barbara. Eteagnus reflexa. Evonymus radicans. Evonymus radicans var. varie- gata. Evonymus radicans yar. vegeta. Gelsemium sempervirens. Hedera helix. Humulus Lupulus. Hydrangea petiolaris. Lonicera americana. Lonicera chinensia. Lonicera etrusca. Lonicera flava. Lonicera glaucescens. Lonicera Heckrottii. Lonicera japonica. Lonicera japonica var. aureo- reticulata. Lonicera Periclymenum var. belgica. Lonicera prolifera. Lonicera semperyirens. Lonicera Vilmorinii. Menispermum canadense. Parthenocissus quinquefolia. Parthenocissus quinquefolia var. Engelmannii. Parthenocissus tricuspidata var. Veitchii. Periploca grseca. Polygonum cilinode. Pueraria hirsuta. Vitis sestiyalis. Vitis cordifolia. Vitis Labrusca. Vitis rotundifolia. Wisteria chinensis. Wisteria chinensis var. alba. Wisteria chinensis flore-pleno. Wisteria multijuga. Wisteria speciosa. Broad-leaved evergreens for the Mountain Zone. Abelia grandiflora. Andromeda polifolia. Arctostaphylos Uva-ursi. Azalea amcena. Azalea indica (hardy sorts). Azalea indica Kaempferi (Sar- gent's hybrids). Azalea obtusa. Berberis hakeoides. Berberis ilicifolia. Berberis Neubertii. Berberis Sargentiana. Buxus japonica var. aurea. Buxus sempervirens. Buxus sempervirens var. Hand- worthii. Buxus sempervirens var. suffru- ticosa. Calluna vulgaris. Calluna vulgaris var. alba. Chamsedaphne calyculata. Cotoneaster hqrizontalis. Cotoneaster microphylla. Cotoneaster microphylla var. glacialis. Cotoneaster rotundifolia. Cotoneaster rotundifolia var. lanata. Cotoneaster Simonsii. Cotoneaster thymifolia. Daphne Blagayana. Daphne Cneorum. Elseagnus macrophylla. Elseagnus yariegata. Ephedra distachya. Erica carnea. Erica stricta. Erica Tetralix. Erica vagans. Evonymus japonica. Evonymus japonica var. aureo- variegata. Evonymus japonica var. micro- phylla. Evonymus patens. Ilex Aquifolium. Ilex Aquifolium var. aureo- regina. Ilex Aquifolium var. ferox. Ilex Aquifolium var. ferox va- riegata. Ilex Aquifolium var. laurifolia. Ilex cornuta. Ilex crenata. Ilex glabra. Ilex vomitoria. Kalmia angustifolia. Kalmia glauca. Kalmia latifolia. Leiophyllum buxifolium. Leiophyllum buxifolium var. prostratum. Leucothoe Catesbsei. Leucothoe populifolia. Ligustrum coriaceum. Ligustrum japonicum. Ligustrum lucidum. Ligustrum macrophyllum. Ligustrum nepalense. Ligustrum Quihoui. Ligustrum sinense. Mahonia Aquifolium. Mahonia japonica. Mahonia pinnata. Mahonia repens. Nandina domestica. Osmanthus Aquifolium. Osmanthus Fortunei. Phillyrea angustifolia. Phillyrea decora. Photinia serrulata. Pieris floribunda. Pieris japonica. Prunus Laurocerasus. Prunus Laurocerasus var. schipkaensis. Prunus lusitanica. Pyracantha coccinea. Pyracantha coccinea var. La- landii. Rhododendron arboreum. Rhododendron arbutifolium. Rhododendron catawbiense. Rhododendron catawbiense var. hybridum. Rhododendron maximum. Rhododendron myrtifolium. Rhododendron punctatum. Rhododendron ponticum. Rhododendron Wilsonii. Skimmia japonica. Veronica Traversii. Yucca filamentosa. Yucca glauca. Yucca gloriosa. Yucca Treculeana. L. A. BERCKMAN'S. Ornamental shrubs for California. No pretensions have been made in compiling the fol- lowing list to include every plant of desirable orna- mental characteristics that will grow in California. Many exotics are being continually introduced, some of which have proved highly satisfactory, while others are little known. The effort has been rather to classify under various subheads those shrubs which are undoubt- edly suited for the purpose indicated and which have proved themselves well adapted to the various sections of the state. Many of the deciduous ornamental plants commonly employed in the eastern United States for landscape planting have purposely been omitted, as they fail to produce the same wonderful spring-flower effects under the different climatic conditions of California. Only such deciduous shrubs as bloom freely and seem to have become more or less adapted to the drier climate of this state are included. Because of the great variety of climatic and soil con- ditions throughout the state, it has become necessary to think of it as divided into three general regions, — the interior valleys, the San Francisco Bay district, and that part of southern California in the vicinity of the coast. Those kinds marked with a dagger (f) will thrive only in southern California; those with a star (*) will grow in the South and as far north on the coast as the San Francisco Bay region, while such kinds as have no abbreviation attached will probably grow in all the cultivated areas of the state, including the large interior valleys. With one exception, the shrubs in the lists are arranged in the order of their desirability for the pur- poses described by the subhead. By cross-reference, the lists should prove helpful in selecting species of certain characteristics for given climatic and cultural conditions to produce the results desired. Group I. Shrubs which are more or less resistant to con- ditions created by full shade. While the larger number of these shrubs will produce the best results in half-shade, or even in full sun if given sufficient water, they are more or less tolerant to conditions existing under live oak trees, in courts, or on the north sides of buildings. Evergreen. Vaccinium ovatum (3 feet). *Tree ferns in variety (6 to 10 feet). Aucuba japonica (4 feet). *Coprosma Baueri (6 feet). Evonymus in variety (6 to 8 feet). Fatsia japonica (6 feet). Mahonia in variety (4 feet). Sollya heterophylla (3 feet). tAsystasia bella (3 feet). Hypericum calycinum (1 foot). Ligustrum in variety (6 to 10 feet). Osmanthus in variety (3 to 10 feet). Buxus sempervirens (2 to 8 feet). *Abutilon striatum (8 feet). Abelia grandiflora (6 feet). Azalea indica (4 feet). Hydrangea Hortensia (5 feet). Nandina domestica (6 feet). Berberis Darwinii (5 feet). *Trachelospermum jasminoides (3 feet). Jasminum humile (6 feet). *Fuchsia in variety (6 feet). Myrtus communis (3 to 5 feet). *Myrtus Ugni (4 feet). Eugenia apiculata (8 feet). *Philadelphus mexicanus (5 feet). Cotoneaster horizontalis (2 to 3 feet). *Reinwardtia trigyna (3 feet). Deciduous. Symphoricarpos racemosus (3 feet). Ribes speciosum (3 feet). Azalea sinense (3 feet). Kerria japonica (6 feet). Chsenomeles japonica (6 feet). Group II. Shrubs which thrive most successfully in half- shade in California. Many plants will produce the best results in full sun if favorable moisture conditions can be maintained throughout the summer, but the amount of sun expo- sure that plants in this list will withstand depends largely PLANTING PLANTING 2701 on the section of the state in which they are located and on the amount of water they receive. Because of neglect aided by the long dry season, they often do better, however, in half-shade where the soil does not dry out so rapidly. Evergreen. Daphne odora (3 feet). Erica in variety (2 to 5 feet). *Coprosma Baueri (6 feet). *Philadelphus mexicanus (5 feet). Abelia grandiflora (6 feet). Solly a heterophylla (3 feet). *Fuchsia in variety (6 feet). Azara microphylla (8 feet). Hydrangea Hortensia (5 feet Cotoneaster horizon- talis (2 to 3 feet). Camellia in variety (8 feet). Hypericum calycinum (1 foot). Hypericum Moseria- num (3 feet). Manonia in variety (4 feet). Fatsia japonica (6 feet). *Abutilon striatum (8 feet). *Trachelospermum jas- minoides (3 feet). Aucuba japonica (4 feet). Nandina domestica (6 feet). Escallonia rubra (6 feet). Pittosporum Tobira (12 feet). Pittosporum hetero- phyllum (3 feet). tCuphea in variety (2 feet). tClerodendron in va- riety (6 feet). Buxus in variety (2 to 8 feet). *Cestrum in variety (8 feet). Cornus capitata (10 feet). Azalea in variety (4 feet). Rhododendron in va- riety (5 feet). Osmanthus in variety (3 to 10 feet). Michelia fuscata (6 feet). Pyracantha crenulata (6 feet). Viburnum Tinus var. lucidum (10 feet). Garrya elliptica (8 feet). Arbutus Menziesii (25 feet). *Myrtus Ugni (4 feet). Ilex Aquifolium (6 to 10 feet). Maytenus Boaria (10 to 20 feet). *Heliotropium in variety (4 feet). *Plumbago capensis (4 feet). *Statice in variety (2 feet). Chorizema ilicifolium (5 feet). Ternstroemia japonica (8 feet). tAsystasia bella (3 feet). *Tibouchina splendens (5 feet). *Jacobinia in variety (3 feet). tStrobilanthes Dyerianus (5 feet). tTempletonia retusa (3 feet). tTheyetia nereifplia (8 feet). *Melianthus major (4 feet). *Tree ferns in variety (6 to 10 feet). Prunus Laurocerasus (8 to 10 feet). Deciduous. Chaenomeles japonica (6 feet). Dieryilla in variety (8 feet). Kerria japonica (6 feet). Deutzia in variety (4 feet). Berberis Thunbergii (3 feet). Pseonia suffruticosa (3 feet). Rhododendron, Hinodigiri (3 feet). Rhododendron sinense (3 feet). Ribes in variety (6 to 8 feet). Philadelphus in variety (6 feet). Spiraea Van Hputtei (4 feet). Spirsea cantoniensis (5 feet). Viburnum Opulus var. sterile (8 feet). Viburnum tomentosum var. plicatum (6 feet). Syringa in variety (6 to 10 feet). Magnolia in variety (6 to 10 feet). Group III. Shrubs which thrive most successfully in protected sunny locations. Many plants, native of countries warmer than Cali- fornia, require warm moist situations. Evergreen. Acacia in variety (5 to 20 feet). tAcocanthera spectabilis (6 feet). fBaubinia in variety (8 to 10 feet). Berberis Darwinii (6 to 8 feet). tBouvardia Humboldtii (5 feet). *Buddleia Davidii var. Veitchiana (6 to 8 feet). *Cantua buxifqlia (8 feet). *Carissa grandiflora (4 feet). *Cassia in variety (4 to 10 feet). Choisya ternata (6 feet). 3060. A bower or arbor of rustic work, with roses and clematis. — To show an English scene (Garden of S. Charrington, from "Gardening Illustrated"). Cistus in variety (2 to 4 feet). Cotpneaster in variety (2 to 8 feet). Cytisus in variety (6 to 8 feet). *Diosma ericoidea (4 feet). fDombeya natalensis (10 to 12 feet). tDombeya spectabilis (8 to 10 feet). *Duranta Plumieri (6 to 8 feet). Escallonia montevidensis (8 feet). Escallonia pulverulenta (8 to 10 feet). Escallonia rosea (8 feet). Eugenia apiculata (8 feet). tEugenia jambolana (10 to 15 feet). *Eugenia myrtifolia (10 to 15 feet). ? Eugenia uniflora (6 to 8 feet). Euphorbia pulcherrima (6 to 8 feet). Feijoa Sellowiana (8 feet). *Genista monosperma (6 to 8 feet). *Grevillea Thelemanniana (4 feet). *Hardenbergia monophylla (5 feet). fHibiscus heterophyllus (8 feet). fHibiscus Rosa-sinensis (8 to 10 feet), flochroma in variety (8 to 10 feet). Jasminum humile (6 feet). *Lantana in variety (4 to 6 feet). Leptospermum scoparium var. Chapmannii (8 feet). Leptospermum scoparium var. Nichollii (4 to 6 feeR. Leptospermuni scoparium var. bullatum (4 feet). Leptospermum laevigatum (6 to 10 feet). Lonicera nitida (4 to 6 feet). *Malvaviscus mollis (6 feet). Melaleuca in variety (6 to 10 feet). Metroeideroe lucida (6 feet). Metrosideros robusta (8 feet). Myrtus communis (3 to 5 feet). Nerium Oleander (8 to 10 feet). tOxera pulchella (2 to 4 feet). Photinia serrulata (10 to 12 feet). Pimelea femiginea (4 to 6 feet). Pittosporum eugenioides (10 to 15 feet). *Pittosportim rhombifolium (10 to 15 feet). Pittosporum tenuifolium (10 to 15 feet). 2702 PLANTING PLANTING *Pittosporum undulatum (10 to 15 feet). *Pittosporum viridiflorum (8 to 10 feet). Polygala Dalmaisiana (3 to 5 feet). Prunus lusitanica (8 feet). *Psidium Cattleianum (3 to 6 feet). Pyraeantha angustifolia (6 feet). Pyracantha coccinea (6 to 8 feet). Quillaja Saponaria (10 to 15 feet). * Raphiolepis indica (6 to 8 feet). Raphiolepis umbellata (4 to 6 feet). *Rhodorhiza florida (6 feet). fSalvia Sessei (6 feet). *Sparmannia africana (8 feet). Spartium junceum (6 to 8 feet). fSphseralcea umbellata (8 feet). *Solanum Rantonnetii (6 feet). *Streptosolen Jamesonii (3 to 6 feet). *Tecoma capensis (8 feet). tTecoma Smithii (6 to 8 feet). fTithonia diversifolia (8 to 10 feet). Veronica in variety (2 to 6 feet). Viburnum suspensum (6 feet). *Wigandia caracasana (8 to 10 feet;. Group IV. Shrubs resistant to soil and climatic condi- tions along the California seacoast. The plants in this list are fairly resistant to the effects of strong prevailing winds and thrive in dry sandy soils containing more or less salt and are therefore valuable for windbreaks and shelter plantings. In general, the finer the foliage and the more willowy or wire-like the branches, the more easily do they withstand the trying conditions. A noticeable exception is some few kinds of hardy palms which thrive under such conditions because of the stiff character of their leaves and stems. Evergreen. Cupressus macrocarpa (10 to 20 feet). Tamarix in variety (8 feet). Myrica californica (8 to 10 feet). Acacia longifolia (6 to 10 feet). *A triplex Breweri (6 feet). Casuarina in variety (10 to 25 feet). *Coprosma Baueri (6 feet). Rhus integrtfolia (6 feet). Leptospermum in variety (6 to 10 feet). Melaleuca in variety (6 to 10 feet). Callistemon in variety (4 to 8 feet). Myopprum lartum (8 to 12 feet). Veronica in variety (2 to 6 feet). *Anthyllis Barba-Jovis (4 to 6 feet). Juniperus in variety (2 to 8 feet). Ulex europoeus (6 feet). Rhamnus califojnica (8 to 10 feet). Ceanothus thyrsiflorus (6 to 10 feet). Acacia melanoxylon (10 to 25 feet). Acacia Farnesiana (10 to 12 feet). Acacia armata (6 to 8 feet). Coronilla glauca (4 to 6 feet). Pittosporum crassifolium (10 to 15 feet). Pittosporum phillyraeoides (10 to 15 feet). Pittosporum Tobira (8 to 10 feet). Escallonia rubra (6 feet). Dodonsea in variety (8 feet). Spartium junceum (6 to 8 feet). Lyonthamnus floribundus var. asplenifolius (15 to 20 feet). Medicago arborea (6 feet). Cytisus in variety (6 to 8 feet). Metrosideros tomentosa (6 to 12 feet). Phillyrea latifolia (10 feet). Polygala Dalmaisiana (3 to 5 feet). Maytenus Boaria (10 to 20 feet). Hakea in variety (8 to 10 feet). Lycium chinense (6 feet). Ceratonia Siliqua (8 to 12 feet). Eteagnus pungens (6 feet). Artemisia arbprescens (6 feet). *Statice in variety (1 foot). *Ficus macrophylla (10 to 20 feet). *Echium in variety (4 to 6 feet). Palms. Chamserops humilis (6 feet). Phoenix canariensis (15 feet). PhoEnix dactylifera (20 feet). Trachycarpus excelsus (20 feet). Sabal Palmetto (12 feet). Erythea armata (15 feet). Washingtonia filifera (20 feet). Erythea edulis (15 feet). Group V. Shrubs resistant to heat, drought, and neglect. In some semi-arid sections of California, it is neces- sary to use plants that will grow more or less success- fully under conditions of severe heat, drought, and neglect. Plants in this list are especially useful in those situations where no attention can be given after the plant is once established. Evergreen. Casuarina in variety (10 to 25 feet). Acacia in variety (5 to 20 feet). *A triplex Breweri (6 feet). Pittosporum phillyrseoides (10 to 15 feet). Olea europsea (10 to 15 feet). Pittosporum crassifolium (10 to 15 feet). Tristania conferta (10 to 20 feet). Photinia arbutifolia (8 to 10 feet). Spartium junceum (6 to 8 feet). Rhamnus californica (8 to 10 feet). Ceanothus in variety (6 to 10 feet). Cytisus in variety (6 to 8 feet). Hakea in variety (8 to 10 feet). Ligustrum in variety (8 to 10 feet). Callistemon in variety (4 to 8 feet). Melaleucas in variety (6 to 10 feet). Cistus in variety (2 to 4 feet). Albizzia Ipphantha (10 feet). Parkinsonia aculeata (8 to 10 feet). Nerium Oleander (8 to 10 feet). Myoporum laetum (8 to 12 feet). Raphiolepis umbellata (4 to 6 feet). Carpentaria californica (6 to 8 feet). Ceratonia Siliqua (8 to 12 feet). Evonymus japonica (6 to 8 feet). Arbutus Unedo (8 feet). Cassia tomentosa (8 feet). Cassia artemisipides (4 feet). Leptospermum in variety (6 to 10 feet). *Agonis flexuosa (8 to 10 feet). *Calothamnus quadrifidus (5 feet). Eteagnus pungens (6 feet). Romneya Coulteri (6 feet). *Buddleia in variety (6 to 8 feet). Coronilla glauca (4 to 6 feet). Dodonaea cuneata (6 to 8 feet). Dodontea viscpsa (8 feet). *Echium in variety (4 to 6 feet). Phillyrea latifolia (10 feet). Metrosideros tomentosa (6 to 12 feet). *Malvaviscus mollis (6 feet). Prunus ilicifplia var. integrifolia (10 to 12 feet). Prunus caroliniana (10 to 12 feet). Pyracantha crenulata (6 to 8 feet). Deciduous. Tamarix paryiflora (6 to 8 feet). Tamarix hispida var. aestivalis (6 to 8 feet). Chaenomeles japonica (6 feet). Punica Granatum (6 feet). Berberis vulgaris var. atropurpurea (6 to 8 feet). Evonymus europsea (8 feet). Prunus cerasifera var. atropurpurea (10 to 12 feet). Group VI. Shrubs which are especially free-flowering. Many species of ornamental shrubs are particu- larly free-flowering in California, while others possess several flowering periods throughout the year. -Because of their tendency to bloom in the fall and winter seasons, they are especially useful in the more inten- sively developed gardens where all-the-year-round effects are desired. Evergreen. Choisya ternata (6 feet). *Cestrum elegans (6 feet). Veronica in variety (2 to 6 feet). Polygala Dalmaisiana (3 to 5 feet). *Grevillea Thelemanniana (4 feet). *Rhodorhiza florida (6 feet). *Lantana in variety (4 to 6 feet). *Fuchsia in variety (6 feet). Sollya heterophylla (3 feet). Berberis Darwinii (6 to 8 feet). Escallonia rubra (4 to 6 feet). *Streptosolen Jamesonii (3 to 6 feet). Spartium junceum (6 to 8 feet). Abelia grandiflora (6 feet). tHeterocentron roseum (1 foot). *Genista monosperma (6 to 8 feet). Pimelea ferrugmea (4 to 6 feet). fBpuvardia Humboldtii (5 feet). Cistus ladaniferus var. maculatus (2 to 4 feet). Statice in variety (1 foot). *Anthyllis Barba-Jovis (4 to 6 feet). *Reinwardtia trigyna (3 feet). *Iochroma in variety (8 to 10 feet). Escallonia pulverulenta (8 to 10 feet1 *Jacobinia pauciflora (2 feet). PLANTING PLANTING 2703 fDzdalacanthus nervosus (2 feet). Cytisus racemosus (2 to 3 feet). *Duranta Plumieri (6 to 8 feet). Coronilla glauca (4 to 6 feet). Cassia artemisioides (4 feet). *Malvaviscus mollis (6 feet). tCuphea in variety (2 feet). *Philadelphus mexicanus (5 feet). Tibouchina splendens (5 feet). Escallonia rosea (8 feet). *Cestrum aurantiacum (6 to 8 feet). Erica mediterranea (3 feet). Erica melanthera (3 feet). *Plumbago capensis (4 feet). *TracheIospermum jasminoides (3 feet). Cassia tomentosa (8 feet). *Eugenia myrtifolia (10 to 15 feet). tHibiscus in variety (8 to 10 feet). Tecoma capensis (8 feet). *Swainsona galegifolia var. albiflora (6 feet). *Calothamnus quadrifidus (5 feet). Group VII. Shrubs bearing ornamental fruits and berries. The berried and fruit-bearing ornamental trees and shrubs form one of the most interesting classes of decorative plants. Not only do they produce a flower display throughout the spring and summer months but also add flashes of color for long periods in the fall and winter by their clusters of bright berries or fruits. Only those kinds bearing persistent fruit and of a color contrasting well with green foliage are acceptable in California. Such deciduous berried shrubs as have proved themselves adaptable are included in the list. Those producing berried effects. Pyracantha coccinea (6 to 8 feet). Pyracantha crenulata (6 feet). Pyracantha angustifolia (6 feet). Cotoneaster Franchetii (4 to 6 feet). Cotoneaster Dielsiana (4 to 6 feet). Cotoneaster horizontalis (2 to 3 feet). Cotoneaster pannosa (6 to 8 feet). Cotoneaster acuminata (6 to 8 feet). Cotoneaster burifolia (2 to 3 feet). Cotoneaster microphylla (2 to 3 feet). Cotoneaster frigida (8 to 10 feet). Photinia arbutifolia (8 to 10 feet). *Myrtus Ugni (4 feet). *Duranta Plumieri (6 to 8 feet). Berberis Darwinii (6 to 8 feet). Ilex Aquifolium (6 to 10 feet). *Cestrum elegans (6 feet). *Cestrum aurantiacum (6 to 8 feet). *Pittosporum rhqmbifolium (10 to 15 feet). *Pittosporum viridiflorum (10 feet). Arbutus Menziesii (10 to 20 feet). Lycium chinense (6 feet). Rhamnus californica (8 to 10 feet). Rhamnus crocea (4 feet). Nandina domestica (6 feet). Deciduous. Elseagnus umbellata (10 feet). Symphoricarpos albus (3 feet). Cratsegus cordata (10 feet). Berberis Thunbergii (3 feet). Sorbus Aucuparia (10 to 15 feet). Symphoricarpos vulgaris (3 feet). Sambueus racemosa (10 feet). Those producing fruit effects. Arbutus Unedo (8 feet). *Eugenia myrtifolia (10 to 15 feet) fEugenia uniflora (6 to 8 feet). Cornus capitata (10 feet). *Psidium in variety (4 to 8 feet). Aucuba japonica (4 feet). Eripbotrya japonica (10 to 12 feet). Feijoa Sellowiana (8 feet). Deciduous. Evonymus europsea (6 to 8 feet). Eyonymus alata (6 to 8 feet). Ribes speciosum (4 feet). Punica Granatum (6 feet). JDiospyros in variety (6 to 8 feet). Rosa rugosa (3 feet). Chsenomeles japonica (6 feet). Pyrus floribunda (10 to 12 feet) Group VIII. Shrubs for hedges (California). Many shrubs of a compact habit may be used as hedge-plants. There is, however, a fairly well-estab- lished group of desirable species that lend themselves more easily to training of this kind. Those listed below are used extensively for hedges and have been found to adapt themselves readily to the severe system of trim- ming and to produce the dense and compact form desired. Low edgings or boxings (6 to 18 inches). Berberis Darwinii. Buxus semperyirens var. suffruticosa. *Eugenia myrtifolia. Lonicera nitida. Veronica buxifolia. Myrtus communis var. microphylla. Myrtus Ugni. Evonymus japonica var. microphylla. Veronica Traversii. Veronica carnea. Cotoneaster microphylla. Erica mediterranea. *Diosma ericoides. *Jacobinia pauciflora. Cistus ladaniferus var. maculatus. Small hedges (2 to 6 feet). Berberis Darwinii. *Eugenia myrtifolia. Eugenia apiculata. Buxus sempervirens. Taxus baccata. Lonicera nitida. Osmanthus Aquifolium var. niyrtifolius. Prunus ilicifolia. Pittosporum tenuifolium. Pittosporum eugenioides. Myrtus communis. Escallonia rubra. *Atriplex Breweri. *Grevillea Thelemanniana. Ligustrum sinense. Ligustrum ovalifolium. Choisya ternata. Pyracantha crenulata. *Aberia caffra. Erica in variety. Elseagnus pungens. Pyracantha angustifolia. Veronica decussata. Veronica imperialis. Veronica elhptica. Pimelea ferruginea. Viburnum Tinus var. strictum. Leptospermum Isevigatum. Evonymus japonica. Acacia longifolia. Acacia armata. Ceanothus spinosus. *Psidium Cattleianum. *Lantana, dwarf hybrids. High hedges (6 to 12 feet). Pittosporum tenuifolium. Pittosporum eugenioides. *Pittosporum undulatum. Pittosporum crassifolium. Prunus ilicifolia var. integrifolia. Ligustrum ovalifolium. Ligustrum japonicum. Prunus caroliniana. Escallonia pulverulenta. Cupressus macrocarpa. Hakea suaveolens. Hakea saligna. Acacia longifolia. Acacia melanoxylon. Acacia retinodes. Acacia verticillata. Pyracantha coccinea. Spartium junceum. Group IX. Shrubs for ground-covers (California). There are often banks and slopes where a lawn would be too expensive to maintain and unless covered with green foliage would remain unsightly. Other situations, especially under and between trees and large shrubs, would be materially improved if the ground-surface were covered with woody vines and trailing shrubs. It will be necessary to prune out the leader or upright stem of many of these shrubs to encourage their spread- ing or horizontal growth. Juniperus chinensis var. procumbens (3 feet). Juniperus Sabina var. tamariscifolia (3 feet). Jasminum primulinum (6 feet). 2704 PLANTING PLANTING Sollya heterophylla (3 feet). Hypericum calycinum (1 foot). Hypericum Moserianum (3 feet). *Philadelphus mexieanus (5 feet). *Trachelospermum jasminoides (3 feet). tCuphea micropetala (3 feet). *Cuphea ignea (5 feet). Clianthus puniceus (3 to 6 feet). *Streptosolen Jamesonii (3 to 6 feet). *Plumbago capensis (4 feet). Myrtus communis (3 to 5 feet). Cotoneaster microphylja (2 to 3 feet). Cotoneaster horizontal^ (2 to 3 feet). *Coprosma Baueri (6 feet). Evonymus radicans (2 feet). Fuchsia Riccartonii (6 feet). Leptospermum leevigatum (6 to 10 feet). *Tecoma capensis (8 feet). *Reinwardtia trigyna (4 feet). *Capparis spinosa (3 feet). *Swainsona galegifolia var. albiflora (6 feet). Teucrium fruticans (6 feet). Coronilla glauca (4 to 6 feet). Melaleuca decussata (5 feet). Cistus ladaniferus var. maculatus (2 to 4 feet). Evonymus japonica var. viridi-variegata (4 feet). Lantana Sellowiana (4 feet). *Lantana Camara (4 to 6 feet). Chorizema ilicifolium (5 feet). *Melianthus major (4 feet). *Buddleia madagascariensis (6 to 10 feet). Jasminum humile (6 feet). *Solanurn Rantonnetii (6 feet). Artemisia arborescens (5 feet). Pentstemon cprdifolius (5 feet). *Heliotropium in variety (3 feet). Pittosporum heterophyllum (3 feet). *Fuchsia fulgens (5 feet). *Fuchsia corymbiflora (6 feet). Group X. Shrubs for quick effects (California") . Many shrubs are of rapid growth and if given heat and moisture will produce very quick effects. They are, therefore, especially suitable for screens, barriers, and mature effects in recently created gardens. Myoporum Isetum (8 to 12 feet). Albizzia lophantha (10 feet). Leptospermum Irovigatum (6 to 10 feet). Acacia in variety (5 to 20 feet). Melaleuca in variety (6 to 10 feet). Spartium junceum (6 to 8 feet). Casuarina in variety (10 to 25 feet). tTithonia diversifolia (8 to 10 feet). *Wigandia caracasana (8 to 10 feet). *Lantana in variety (4 to 6 feet). Cytisus in variety (6 to 8 feet). *Iochroma in variety (8 to 10 feet). *Cassia in variety (4 to 10 feet). *Buddleia in variety (6 to 8 feet). *Cestrum in variety (6 to 8 feet). *Plumbago capensis (4 feet). fSolanum Warscewiczii (8 feet). Dodonsea cuneata (6 to 8 feet). tBpcconia frutescens (8 feet). *Pittosporum undulatum (10 to 15 feet). Pittosporum eugenioides (10 to 15 feet). Pittosporum crassifolium (10 to 15 feet). *Coprosma Baueri (6 feet). Veronica in variety (2 to 6 feet). *Sparmannia africana (8 feet). Coronilla glauca (4 to 6 feet). *Anthyllis Barba-Jovis (4 to 6 feet). *Agonis flexupsa (8 to 10 feet). Fatsia japonica (6 feet). Ligustrum ovalifolium (6 to 8 feet). Escallonia in variety (6 to 10 feet). Pimelea ferruginea (4 to 6 feet). tCuphea micropetala (2 feet). *Streptosolen Jamesonii (3 to 6 feet). *Grevillea Thelemanniana (4 feet). *Atriplex Breweri (6 feet). *Mehanthus major (4 feet). Parkinsonia aculeata (8 to 10 feet). Ceanothus arborea (8 feet). tMuehlenbeckia platyclada (6 feet). fClerodendron in variety (6 feet). *Abutilon in variety (8 feet). fCarica quercifolia (6 to 8 feet). Agonis flexuosa, Schau. A tall shrub or tree from Austral.: Ivs. lanceolate, smooth, dark green, the margins tinged with purple: fl.-heads white, axillary, surrounded by broad bracts; stamens long, numerous, white. Group XI. Especially choice and neat shrubs. Those shrubs which are free-flowering, compact, and possess interesting and well-arranged foliage, are much in demand for the more intensively developed parts of a garden. They are particularly suitable for use on small home grounds, in formal gardens, and around the base-line of buildings. Erica in variety (4 feet). Diosma ericoides (3 feet). *Eugenia myrtifolia (10 to 15 feet). Choisya ternata (6 feet). Daphne odora (3 feet). *Grevillea Thelemanniana (4 feet). Leptospermum scoparium var. Nichollii (4 to 6 feet). Lonicera nitida (4 to 6 feet). Berberis Darwinii (6 to 8 feet). Abelia grandiflora (6 feet). Pimelea ferruginea (4 to 6 feet). *Myrtus Ugni (4 feet). tTempletonia retusa (3 feet). fAsystasia bella (3 feet). Sollya heterophylla (3 feet). Trachelospermum jasminoides (3 feet). *Philadelphus mexicanus (5 feet). Michelia fuscata (6 feet). ?Heterocentron roseum (1 foot). Dsedalacanthus nervosus (2 feet). Cassia artemisioides (4 feet). Eugenia apiculata (8 feet). Myrtus communis var. microphylla (2 to 3 feet). *Coprosma Baueri (6 feet). *Cneorum tricoccon (3 feet). Cotoneaster horizontalis (2 to 3 feet). Cotoneaster Franchetii (4 to 6 feet). Cotoneaster microphylla (2 to 3 feet). Ligustrum cpriaceum (3 to 6 feet). Ligustrum sinense (6 feet). *Genista monosperma (6 to 8 feet). fRhodorhiza flprida (6 feet). Aucuba japonica (4 feet). Azara microphylla (8 feet). Buxus in variety (2 to 8 feet). Camellia japonica (8 feet). Cytisus racemosus (2 to 3 feet). Evonymus japonica var. aureo-marginata (6 to 8 feet). Evonymus japonica var. viridi-variegata (4 feet). Mahonia japonica (4 feet). Melaleuca decussata (5 feet). Nandina domestica (6 feet). Osmanthus Aquifolium (4 feet). Veronica in variety (2 to 6 feet). *Carissa grandiflora (4 feet). Hardenbergia monophylla (5 feet). Jasminum primulinum (6 feet). Metrosideros lucida (6 feet). *Tibouchina splendens (5 feet). tSalvia Sessei (6 feet). *Fuchsia corymbiflora (6 feet). *Fuchsia fulgens (4 feet). *Fuehsia arborescens (6 feet). *Duranta Plumieri var. alba (3 to 6 feet). Cneorum tricoccon, Linn., the spurge olive, is a native of S. Eu.: smooth, evergreen, 1 or 2 ft. high: Ivs. narrow, entire, obtuse: fls. axillary; pedicels not adnate to the bracts. Cneorum is one of the Simarubacese, or by recent authorities made the sole representative of the family Cneoracese. Group XII. Ornamental native shrubs. While the native shrubs of California are not, in many cases, so effective and attractive for landscape purposes as most of the exotic material used, there is a growing interest in their ornamental qualities. They may be employed extensively to give character to the extremely naturalistic home grounds and to the typi- cally Californian garden. Only the more ornamental species in general cultivation are listed below. Carpenteria californica (6 to 8 feet). Ceanothus thyrsiflorus (8 feet). Photinia arbutifolia (8 to 10 feet). Lyonothamnus floribundus var. asplenifolius (15 to 20 feet). Prunus ilicifolia var. integrifolia (10 to 15 feet). Arbutus Menziesii (10 to 20 feet). Ceanothus arboreus (8 to 10 feet). Ceanothus spinosus (6 to 8 feet). Parkinsonia aculeata (8 to 10 feet). Garrya Fremontii (6 feet). Rpmneya Coulteri (6 feet). Ribes speciosum (4 feet). Vaccinium ovatum (3 feet). Mahonia Aquifolium (4 feet). Rhamnus californica (8 to 10 feet). Rhus integrifolia (6 feet). Rhus ovata (6 to 8 feet). Rhamnus crocea var. ilicifolia (4 feet). Umbellularia californica (15 to 30 feet). Cercocarpus parvifolius (8 feet). *Gaultheria Shallon (2 feet). PLANTING PLANTING 2705 Arctostaphylos in variety (6 feet). Fremontia californica (8 feet). Calycanthus occidentals (6 feet). Dendromecon rigid um (6 feet >. *Lavatera assurgentiflora (6 feet). *Mimulus glutinosus (4 feet). A — Tropseolum majus. i — Yitis (Cissus) antarctica. x — Vitis (Cissus) capensis. D — Wisteria chinensis. D — Wisteria multijuga. JOHN WM. GREGG. R. T. STEVENS. Vines for California. In countries where there is a maximum of sunlight, vines become a most important class of plant-mate- rial. The many vines used in California are roughly divided into classes according to the climatic divisions of the state. Tropical and semi-tropical evergreen vines find most favor in southern California, where gorgeous coloring and luxurious growth appear most in harmony with the landscape; while the half-hardy evergreens and the choicest deciduous vines are most suitable for use along the central California coast. On the other hand, the vine which loses its foliage in winter finds the greatest favor in the interior sections of the state, although such few evergreens as withstand several degrees of frost are often employed for decorative pur- poses. When very quick effects are wanted, the annual vine is often used. All vines except those clinging to rough surfaces need substantial support, while most vines require a certain amount of thinning and training. The tendency is to neglect the plant after it is once established and allow it to form thick unsightly masses of stems near the top of the support, thereby destroying such decora- tive beauty as the vine may possess. Vines should not be "headed back" or heavily pruned unless the plant is to be renovated, as a coarse rank growth is encour- aged. If possible, choose strong stems as leaders and train in a fan-like manner so as finally to cover the desired area. Spring-flowering vines should be pruned soon after blooming, while summer- and fall-flowering vines may be thinned in the spring. The foliage of evergreen vines may be best reduced by careful selec- tive thinning immediately after a blooming period. Always begin to train a vine as soon as possible; do not wait for it to begin to climb. Xo climbing roses have been included in the follow- ing lists, as it is felt that they should be considered as a separate class of plant-material. Such vines as are not marked with "D" or "A" are evergreen, while those without an "o" or "x" are hardy. D=deciduous; A=annual; o=not resistant to frost; x=resistant to 10° to 12° of frost. 1. Vines which cover objects and surfaces densely. The vines in this list have a tendency to cover their supports entirely, making a dense screen and thereby destroying architectural fines. D — Actinidia chinensis. D — Akebia quinata. x — Buddleia madagascariensis. D — Campsis chinensis. D — Campsis radicans. Cardiospennum hirsutum. D — Clematis montana. D — Clematis paniculata. x — Dolichos lignosus. Ficus pumila. Gelsemium sempervirens. Hedera netix. Hedera helix var. chryso- carpa. A — Humulus japonicus. D — Ipomoea Learii. x — Jasminum gracillimum. x — Jasminum grandiflorum. x — Jasminum officinale. Kennedya rubicunda. Lantana Sellowiaiia. Lonieera japoniea var. Hal- liana. Lonicera Periclymenum var. belgica. Melothria punctata. Muehlenbeckia complexa. x — Pandorea australis. o — Pandorea Brycei. x — Pandorea jasminoides. x — Pandorea jasminoides var. alba. D — Parthenocissus quinque- folia. D — Parthenocissus tricuspi- data. Passiflora cserulea. Passiflora cserulea var. alba, o — Passiflora edulis. x — Passiflora manicata. Passiflora mollissima. x — Pelargonium peltatum. D — Periploca graeca. x — Pithecoctenium muricatum. x — Plumbago capensis. x — Plumbago capensis var. alba. D — Pueraria hirsuta. x — Salpichroa rhomboidea. D — Senecio mikanioides. o — Solandra guttata. x — Serjania fuscifolia. x — Steptosolen Jamesonii. x — Tecoma capensis. 8. Vines producing light open tracery. Vines to be ornamental should decorate and not entirely cover. Their chief purpose is to soften and partially break hard architectural lines. It is the con- trast between foliage and background which produces decorative effect. Vines of this section are especially good for columns, walls, and frames. o — Abrus precatorius. D — Antigonon leptopus. o — Aristolochia triangularis. x — Asparagus asparagoides. x — Asparagus plumosus. x — Asparagus plumoeus var. comorensis. Bignonia Unguis-cati (B. Tweediana). D — Clematis HenryL D — Clematis Jackmanii. D — Clematis montana var. rubens. x — Cobsea scandens. x — Dioclea glycinoides. o — Dipladenia hybrida. a — Eccremocarpus scaber. x — Hardenbergia Comptoni- ana. Hedera helix, o — Hidalgoa WerckleL x — Hoya carnosa. x — Jasminum azqricum. x — Jasminum nitidum. D — Jasminum nudiflorum. x — Linaria Cymbalaria. D — Mandevilla suaveolens. Maurandia Barclaiana. x — Maurandia Lophospermum. a — ^Iomo^dica Balsamina. x — Pithecoctenium cynan- choides. x — Pithecoctenium muricatum. x — Pyrostegia venusta. Solanum jasminoides. x — Solanum Seaforthianum. Sollya heterophylla. o — Stigmaphyllon ciliatum. o — Stigmaphyllon littorale. o — Thunbergia grandiflpra. x — Trachelospermum jasmin- oides. 3. Vines as ground-covers on slopes, embankments, and under trees. Vines require little care, hold the soil and make a permanent effect in those situations where the soil is too poor or too shady to maintain a satisfactory lawn. Bignonia TTnguis-catL x — Duchesnea indica. Fragaria californica. Fragaria chiloensis. Hedera helix. a — Humulus japonicus. x — Jasminum primulinum. x — Lantana Camara. Lantana SeUowiana. Lippia canescens. Lonicera japoniea var. Hal- liana, x — Lotus Bertholetii. Mesembryanthemum cordifoh'um. Mesembryanthemum roseum. Muehlenbeckia chilensis. Muehlenbeckia complexa. x — Pelargonium peltatum. D — Senecio mikanioides. Sollya heterophylla. A — Tropaxdum majus. Vinca major. Vinca nunor. x — Vitis (Cissus) capensis. 4- Vines for stone, plaster, and brick surfaces. Because of their various ways of clinging to rough surfaces, these vines need no support. They should not be grown on wood surfaces which are to be painted. D — Bignonia capreolata. Bignonia Unguis-cati (B. Tweediana). x — Cissus striata. x — Clytostoma purpureum. D — Decumaria barbara. Evonymus radicans. Evonymus radicans var. roseo-marginata. Ficus pumila. Ficus pumila var. minim«- Hedera helix. Hedera helix var. chry- socarpa. D — Parthenocissus quinque- folia. D — Parthenocissus quinque- folia var. Engelmannii. D — Parthenocissus tricuspi- data. x — Phsedranthus buccina- torius. 5. Vines for quick effects. Useful to obtain mature effects in gardens. Rapid- growing deciduous vines are especially desirable for porches, pergolas, and arbors located in the large interior valleys. D — Actinidia chinensis. D — Aristolochia macrophylla (A. Sipho). Bignonia Unguis-cati (B. Tweediana). D — Boussingaultia basselloides. x — Buddleia madagascariensis. D — Campsis radicans. D — Clematis montana. D — Clematis paniculata. Coba?a scandens. x — Dolichos lignosus. x — Dolichos lignosus var. alba. A — Humulus japonicus. D — Humulus lupulus. D — Ipomcea Learii. D — Ipomoea setosa. x — Jasminum primulinum. x — Lantana Camara. Lathyrus splendens. Lonicera japoniea var. Halliana. Maurandia Barclaiana. Melothria punctata. x — Pandorea australis. o — Pandorea Bryfei- Passiflora carulea. Passiflora cserulea var. alba. o — Passiflora edulis. x — Passiflora manicata. x — Passiflora mollissima. 2706 PLANTING PLANTING o — Passiflora racemosa (P. princeps). x — Passiflora tubiflora. x — Pelargonium peltatum. x — Phsedranthus buccinato- rius. D — Phaseolus Caracalla. x — Philadelphus mexicanus. D — Pueraria nirsuta. x — Salpichroa rhomboidea. D — Sechium edule. D — Senecio mikanioides. Solarium jasminoides. D — Solanum Wendlandii. o — Solandra guttata. x — Tecoma capensis. D — Thunbergia alata. o — Thunbergia coccinea. A — Tropseolum majus. x — Streptosolen Jamesonii. x — Tecoma capensis. D — Tropseolum majus. Vinca major. Vinca major, variegated. Vinca minor. 6. Free-flowering vines for California. Many vines produce only foliage effects or bloom but once a year. The vines in this list bear flowers more or less continuously. They are especially suitable for arbors and trellises in the flower-garden. o — Allamanda cathartica var. Hendersonii. D — Antigonon leptopus. o — Beaumontia grandiflora. x — Bougainvillea braziliensis. x — Bougainvillea glabra. x — Bougainvillea spectabilis var. lateritia. Cardiospermum hirsutum. x — Chorizema ilicifolium. A — Clitoria Ternatea. x — Clytostoma callistegioides. Cobaja scandens. x — Dolichos lignosus. x — Dolichos lignosus var. alba, x — Hardenbergia Comptoniana x — Jasminum azoricum. x — Jasminum floribundum. x — Jasminum gracillimum. x — Jasminum grandiflorum. x — Jasminum, Maid of Orleans, o — Jasminum nitidum. x — Jasminum simplicifolium. Jasminum Sambac, Grand Duke, x — Lantana Camara. Lantana Sellowiana. Lathyrus latifolius var. albus. Lathyrus splendens. Lonicera japonica var. Hal- liana. Lonicera sempervirens. D — Mandevilla suaveolens. Manettia bicolpr. x — Pandorea jasminoides. x — Pandorea jasminoides var. alba. x — Passiflora militaris. o — Passiflora racemosa (P. princeps). x — Pelargonium peltatum. x — Phaedranthus buccina- torius. D — Phaseolus Caracalla. x — Pithecoctenium murica- tum. x — Plumbago capensis. x — Pyrostegia venusta. o — Schubertia grandiflora. o — Solandra grandiflora. Solanum jasminoides. x — Solanum Seaforthianum. D — Solanum Wendlandii. x — Sollya heterophylla. o — Stephanotis floribunda. o — Stigmaphyllon ciliatum. x — Swainsona galegifolia var. albiflora. x — Tecoma capensis. o — Thunbergia grandiflora. x — Trachelospermum jasmin- oides. D — Tropseolum majus. 7. Vines somewhat resistant to shade. Good for courts, north sides of buildings, under trees and on shady slopes. x — Asparagus asparagoides. x — Asparagus plumosus. x — Chorizema ilicifolium. x — Clianthus puniceus. x — Clytostoma callistegioides. Ficus pumila. Ficus pumila var. minima. Hedera colchica (H. Rseg- neriana). Hedera helix. x — Hoya carnosa. x — Jasminum azoricum. x — Jasminum gracillimum. x — Jasminum primulinum. x — Linaria Cymbalaria. Lippa canescens. D — Micromeria Chamissonis. x — Pandorea australis. D — Parthenocissus quinque- folia. D — Parthenocissus tricuspi- data. o — Quisqualis indica. D — Senecio mikanioides. x — Solanum Seaforthianum. Sollya heterophylla. o — Stephanotis floribunda. o — Thunbergia laurifolia. x — Trachelospermum jasmin- oides. Tradescantia virginiana. Vinca major. Vinca minor. x — Vitis (Cissus) antarctica. x — Vitis (Cissus) capensis. x — Vitis (Cissus.) rhombifolia. 8. Vines somewhat resistant to drought. Vines are largely natives of cool moist forest floors where the soil is deep and loose, but the following will endure a certain amount of drought and hard clay soils. Bignonia Unguis-cati (B. Tweediana). x — Bougainvilleas. x — Buddleia madagascariensis. x — Dioclea glycinoides. x — Dolichos lignosus. Eyonymus radicans. Ficus pumila. Hedera helix. x — Jasminum primulinum. x — Lantana Camara. x — Lantana Sellowiana. Lathyrus latifolius. Lathyrus splendens. Lippia canescens. Lonicera japonica var. Hal- liana. Lonicera Periclymenum var. belgica. Mesembryanthemum roseum. Muehlenbeckia complexa. x — Pandorea australis. Pandorea jasminoides. x — Passiflora manicata. x — Passiflora mollissima. x — Pelargonium peltatum. D — Periploca grseca. x — Plumbago capensis. x — Salpichroa rhomboidea. D — Senecio mikanioides. x — Serjania fuscifplia. Solanum jasminoides. Sollya heterophylla. 9. Vines for pergolas and arbors. For this purpose vines should not be allowed to make too heavy top growth and they should be so trained that a certain amount of their foliage is pendent. D — Antigonon leptopus. D — Aristolochia macrophylla (A. Sipho). o — Aristolochia elegans. Bignonia Unguis-cati (B. Tweediana). x — Bougainvillea braziliensis. o — Beaumontia grandiflora. D — Clematis montana. D — Clematis paniculata. x — Clytostoma purpureum. x — Dioclea glycinoides. Gelsemium sempervirens. x — Hardenbergia Compton- iana. Hedera colchica (H. Rseg- neriana). Hedera helix. Hedera helix var. chry- socarpa. o — Hidalgoa Wercklei. A — Humulus japonicus. — Jasminum azoricum. — Jasminum floribundum. — Jasminum grandiflorum. — Jasminum nitidum. — Jasminum officinale. — Jasminum primulinum. — Jasminum rigidum (J. li- gustrifolium). x — Lonicera Hildebrandiana. Lonicera japonica var. Hal- liana. D — Mandevilla suaveolens. Muehlenbeckia complexa. x — Pandorea jasminoides. x — Pandorea jasminoides var. alba. o — Pandorea Brycei. D — Periploca graeca (Silk Vine), x — Phsedranthus buccinato- rius. x — Philadelphus mexicanus. x — Pithecoctenium cynan- choides. .x — Pithecoctenium muricatum. o — Solandra guttata. Solanum jasminoides. x — -Solanum Seaforthianum. D — Solanum Wendlandii. x — Stauntonia hexaphylla. o — Stephanotis floribunda. o — Stigmaphyllon ciliatum. x— Tecoma capensis. o — Thunbergia grandiflora. x — Vitis (Cissus) capensis. x — Vitis Romanetii. D — Wisteria chinensis. D — Wisteria multijuga. D — Wisteria multijuga var. alba. x — Pandorea jasminoides. o — Passiflora edulis. o — Passiflora laurifolia. o — Passiflora ligularis. x — Phffidranthus buccina- torius. D — Pueraria hirsuta. D — Senecio mikanioides. x — Serjania fuscifolia. x — Solanum Seaforthianum. D — Solanum Wendlandii. x — Stauntonia hexaphylla. o — Thunbergia grandiflora. x — Vitis (Cissus) antarctica. x— Vitis (Cissus) capensis. x — Vitis (Cissus) hypoglauca. x — Vitis (Cissus) rhombifolia. 10. Foliage vines for California. Many vines are especially ornamental because of their foliage effects. Those with smooth bright green closely arranged leaves are most desirable. D — Actinidia chinensis. D — Ampelopsis arborea. D — Aristolochia macrophylla (A. Sipho). x — Asparagus asparagoides. x — Cissus striata. x — Clytostoma callistegioides. Cobsea scandens. x — Dolichos lignosus. Eyonymus radicans. Ficus pumila. Gelsemium sempervirens. A — Humulus japonicus. x— Jasminum azoricum x — Jasminum gracillimum. x — Jasminum rigidum (J. ligus- trifolium). x — Pandorea australis. Millettia megasperma, Benth., the "evergreen wisteria" from Austral, is a promising plant in California: woody climber :lfts. 7-13, obovate or obovate-oblong: fls. purple, in racemes 4-6 in. long which comprise a terminal panicle. JQHN WM GREGQ> R. T. STEVENS. KATHERINE D. JONES. PLAT ANUS (its ancient Greek name). Platanacex. PLANE-TREE. BUTTONWOOD. Ornamental trees with handsome dense foliage, often planted as shade and street trees. Deciduous, with the bark exfoliating in thin plates, but at the base of older trunks the bark is persistent, of darker color and furrowed: stipules conspicuous, usually connate into a tube, with spreading If.-like margin; petiole with the enlarged base inclosing the axillary bud: Ivs. palmately lobed, covered densely with stellate hairs when young: fls. monoecious, in dense globular heads, staminate and pistillate similar, but on separate peduncles; sepals and petals 3-8; staminate with 3-8 stamens, pistillate with 3-8 pistils with elongated styles: fr .-heads consisting of numerous narrowly obconical, 1-seeded nutlets surrounded at the base by long hairs. — Six or 7 species are known in N. Amer., south to Mex. and from S. E. Eu. to India. The planes are handsome trees with large and PLATANUS PLATANUS 2707 palmately lobed leaves and small greenish flowers in drooping heads, followed by similar heads of fruits remaining on the branches during the winter. The smooth light-colored often almost creamy white bark of the branches and limbs, usually mottled by darker blotches of the older bark, which peels off in large thin 3061. Platanus racemosa. (Xjfl plates, gives the tree a very characteristic appearance in winter, while in summer the plane-tree, with its large head of dense bright green foliage and with its massive trunk is a beautiful and majestic shade tree. The native P. occidentalis is hardy North and P. aceri- folia and P. orientalis hardy as far north as Massa- chusetts, while the southwestern and Mexican species cannot be cultivated in the North. From time imme- morial, the oriental plane, which was well known to the ancient Greek writers, has been famous for the large size it attains — trunks of 30 feet in diameter and more are reported to exist — and has been planted as a shade tree in western Asia and southern Europe, and today it is still one of the favorite street trees throughout the temperate regions of Europe. It has also been recog- nized in this country as one of the best street trees, even to be preferred to the native plane, which, unfor- tunately, suffers from the attacks of a fungus, Gteo- sporium nervisequum, while the oriental is not injured by it. The plane-trees stand pruning — even severe prun- ing— well. To what extent they are sometimes pruned in European cities without losing their vitality is shown in an interesting illustration in "Forest Leaves," Vol. Ill, p. 97. They are also easily transplanted even as larger trees. They grow best in a deep and rich moist soil. Propagation is by seeds sown in spring and only slightly covered with soil and kept moist and shaded; also by cuttings of ripened wood and by greenwood cuttings under glass in June taken with a heel, and some- times by layers. Varieties are also sometimes grafted in spring on seedlings of one of the species. The stellate hairs of the young leaves when detached by the wind, sometimes float in great quantities in the air and are liable to cause irritation and sometimes inflammation of the mucous membranes of the eye, nose, and mouth. But as this is likely to occur only during a very limited period late in spring it can hardly be considered as a serious objection to the use of platanus as a street tree. A. Fr. -heads 3 or more, in pendulous racemes. B. Lobes 5-7, dentate or lobed. orientalis, Linn. ORIENTAL, PLANE. Tree, to 80 ft., with usually very broad and round head on a compara- tively short trunk: bark of dull grayish or greenish white color: stipules small, usually with entire margin: Ivs. usually broadly cuneate at the base, deeply 5-7- lobed, rarely 3-lobed, with the sinuses reaching almost to or below the middle; lobes longer or much longer than broad, coarsely toothed or entire, glabrous or nearly so at maturity, 4-8 in. long: fr .-heads 2-4 on long, drooping stalks, bristly, the nutlets narrowed at the apex into a persistent style to 2 lines long. May. S. E. Eu. to India. G.F. 4:91. G.C. III. 23:25, 27; 29:363. Gn. 1, p. 550; 20, pp. 369, 371, 373. F.S.R. 2, pp. 75, 77. F.E.24:69. G.W. 14, pp. 688, 689. Var. digitata, Janko (P. umbraculifera, Hort., var. laciniata, Hort.). Lvs. cuneate or truncate or cuneate at the base, deeply 5-lobed, with narrow, elongated, coarsely toothed lobes. Gn. 1, pp. 572, 573; 20, p. 371. F.E. 18, p. 718, pi. 89. Var. cuneata, Loud. (P. cuneata, Willd.) . Often shrubby : Ivs. short-stalked, smaller, usually deeply 3-lobed and cuneate, with narrow-toothed lobes. Gn. 1, p. 618; 20, p. 371. G.C. III. 29:363.— The true oriental plane is rare in cult., the tree usually planted under this name being P. acerifolia. BB. Lobes S-o, usually entire. racemdsa, Nutt. (P. calif ornica, Benth.). Fig. 3061 (adapted from Pacific R. R. Report). Tree, to 100 or 120 ft., with a trunk often divided into several sts. : Ivs. usually cordate or truncate, deeply 3-5-lobed, thick and firm, deep green above, paler beneath and covered with a pale tomentum, 6-10 in. diam.; lobes ovate- lanceolate, entire or sometimes remotely, or sinuately toothed: fr.-heads bristly or rather smooth, sessile, 2-7; nutlets tomentose while young, becoming glabrous. S. Calif, and Low. Calif. S.S. 7:328. AA. Fr.-heads 1 or 2, rarely 3. acerifolia, Willd. (P. orientalis var. acerifolia, Ait. P. intermedia, P. integrifolia and P. macrophytta, Hort. P.damascena, Dode). LONDON PLANE. Fig. 3062. Prob- ably hybrid between P. orientalis and P. occidentalis and intermediate between the two, sometimes resembling 3062. Platanus acerifolia. ( x about more the one and sometimes more the other parent. Tree, to 100 ft. : Ivs. 3-5-lobed, usually truncate or broadly cu- neate at the base, the lobes broadly triangular, coarsely toothed, the middle lobe as long or slightly longer than broad : fr.-heads usually 2, rarely 3, bristly or sometimes scarcely so. Of garden origin. G.C. III. 29:363. Gn. 1, p. 588; 20, p. 371 and probably 1, p. 486, and 20, p. 370 (as P. occidentalis). F.E. 24:69 (as P. orientalis). Var. 2708 PLATANUS PLATYCERIUM pyramidalis, Jaen. (P. pyramidalis, Bolle). Of pyram- idal habit: Ivs. usually 3-lobed, often longer than broad, with usually rounded base. Var. tubifera, Jaen. (P. superba, Hort.). With very conspicuous elongated, tubular stipules. There are also some forms with variegated Ivs. Var. Suttneri, Hort., with the Ivs. spotted and marked white, and var. Kelseyana, Schneid. (var. aureo-variegata, Hort.), with yellow- variegated Ivs. — The London plane is more generally planted under the name of the oriental plane than the true P. orientalis. It resembles in foliage more the American plane and is of more pyramidal habit than the oriental plane, which in its typical form has a broad head, with wide-spreading branches, deeply divided, 5-7-lobed Ivs., and the fr. -heads usually in 3's and 4's. It is somewhat hardier than the oriental plane. occidental's, Linn. BTJTTONWOOD. BUTTONBALL. AMERICAN PLANE-TKEE. Also wrongly called SYCA- MORE. Fig. 3063. Large tree, attaining 130 or occasionally 170 ft., with a round-topped oblong or 3063. Platanus occidentalis. (XK) broad head and with a trunk 10 ft. or exceptionally more in diam., often of considerable height: bark of limb and branches of very light often almost creamy white color, at the base of the trunks dark brown, fissured: stipules large, with toothed margin: Ivs. as broad or broader than long, truncate or cordate, rarely cuneate at the base, usually 3-, sometimes 5-lobed, with shallow sinuses; lobes shorter than broad, coarsely toothed or entire, floccose-tomentose when young, at maturity only pubescent on the veins beneath, 4-9 in. broad: fr .-heads solitary, rarely in 2's, on 3-6-in.-long peduncles, about 1 in. across or more, comparatively smooth at length; nutlets with obtuse apex, with the rest of the style r&in. long or shorter. May. Maine to Ont. and Minn., south to Fla. and Texas. S.S. 7:326, 327. G.F. 2:354, 355; 9:55. Em. 1:261, 263. Gng. 4:343. Mn. 3, p. 69; 5, pp. 205, 209.— The most massive and perhaps the tallest of all deciduous trees of N. Amer. and an excellent street and park tree where it is not injured by fungous diseases. A doubtful variety is var. hispanica, Wesmael (P. hispanica, Lodd.). Lvs. large, 3-5-lobed, with very shallow sinuses, coarsely toothed, usually cordate at the base. Gn.l, p. 588; 20, p. 370.— The P. densicdma, Dode (B.S.D. 1908:68), described as having usually truncate or broadly cuneate Ivs. and 1-3 heads with acutish nutlets is probably not different from P. occidentalis or may belong to P. acerifolia. P. milgctris, Spach, comprises all species of the genus. — P. Wrightii, Wats. Tree, to 80 ft., often divided into several sts.: Ivs. usually cordate or truncate, deeply 3-7-lobed, with lanceolate, acuminate, entire or dentate lobes, tomentose beneath or nearly glabrous at length, 6-8 in. long: fr.-heads racemose, rather smooth, each on a short stalk. New Mex. and Ariz, to Calif. S.S. 7:329. The other species, as P. mexicAna, Moric., which is sometimes planted as a street tree in Mex., P. Lindeniana, Mart. & Gal., and P. glabrata, Fern., all natives of Mex., are not yet intro. ALFRED REHDER. PLATONIA (from a personal name) . Guttiferse. Trees, little known as yet in cult. : Ivs. leathery, closely and finely feather- veined: fls. large, rose, solitary, termi- nal, perfect; sepals 5, imbricate; petals 5, much larger than the calyx, scarcely convolute into an ovoid corolla; stamens 5; ovary 5-celled: fr. a fleshy indehis- cent 5-celled edible berry. Two species from Brazil. P. insignis, Mart. Large tree: Ivs. coriaceous, oblong, acute: fls. solitary, terminal, showy; sepals suborbicu- late, 2 outer smaller; petals broad-ovate, rose outside, white inside; ovary ovoid: berry subglobose or oval. Brazil. Intro, and distributed by the U. S. Dept. of Agric. PLATYCARYA (Greek for broad, and nut; alluding to the shape of the fruit). Syn., Fortunxa. Juglandacese. A monotypic genus distinguished from all other Jug- landaceae by its fertile fls. forming an upright cone-like spike. Small deciduous tree: the branches with solid pith: winter buds with imbricate scales: Ivs. odd-pinnate, similar to those of Carya Pecan, but smaller: staminate catkins axillary; pistil- late terminal, solitary: fr. a small, winged nut in the axils of densely imbricated, rigid and sharply pointed lanceolate bracts forming a terminal upright cone. Rarely cult, and not hardy north of the Middle states. It has grace- ful foliage, but its ornamental value is not great. Prop, by seeds and by layers, probably also by grafting on Carya. strobilacea, Sieb. & Zucc. (Fortunsea sinen- sis, Lindl.). Small tree, with upright glabrous branches: Ivs. 8-12 in. long; Ifts. 9-17, sessile, oblong-lanceolate, falcate, acuminate, doubly serrate, pubescent only on the midrib beneath, 3-4 in. long: fr.-bearing cone about 1-1 3^ in- long, oval, brown. Summer. Japan, China. S.Z. 2:149. F.S. 4, p. 3266. R.H. 1888, p. 88. J.H.S. 1846, p. 151. S.I.F. 1:17. ALFRED REHDER. PLATYCERIUM (Greek, broad horn; alluding to the shape of the Ivs.). Polypodiacese. STAG-HORN FERN. An anomalous genus of ferns with irregularly lobed thick Ivs. with the sori forming irregular patches over one or both surfaces. The sterile Ivs. are flat, rounded expansions closely adherent in layers to the substratum. In their native forests these ferns grow to the surface of trees and old plants and often form enormous nests. A few kinds of Platycerium are offered for sale in Amer. European growers list others, new ones appearing from time to tune, but the whole group is grown in America only as specimens in large collections. The word "disk," as used below, refers to the widest unbranched portion of the fertile frond. The stag-horn ferns are amongst the most beautiful and distinct of ferns — perhaps the most striking of all — because of their noble antlered appearance and their epiphytal habit. They have two kinds of fronds, bar- ren and fertile, the former being rounded disks which clasp the tree trunk, while the fertile fronds generally hang down and look like antlers. Occasionally the barren fronds are more or less antlered, as in P. grande, but never give so perfect a suggestion as do the fertile fronds. The species are all tropical, except P. alcicorne, which is therefore the easiest to grow and the common- est in cultivation. This species can endure a night temperature of 50° F. or even less. The glory of the genus, however, is P. grande (Fig. 3064). The barren fronds are exceptionally large, rounded, and wavy margined at the base, deeply cut above, forming an erect or arching background to the pendent fertile fronds, which fork more times and have much narrower segments than the barren fronds. Unfortunately this PLATYCERIUM PLATYCERIUM 2709 is the only species that does not produce suckers at the roots, by which all the others are easily propagated. It alone must be raised from spores, a long and anxious Erocess. The only kind that has an erect and rigid abit is P. Hillii, which therefore is grown in pots while all the others may be grown on a block of wood, and some in baskets. P. biforme differs from all others in having a separate and specialized structure on which the sori are borne, the other kinds bearing their spore- masses on the under surface of the fertile fronds at or near the last forks. P. biforme, though it has been advertised, is probably nowhere in cultivation in the world. There is an improved form of the common type known as P. aldcorne var. majus, which is stronger- growing and has thicker fronds, enabling it to endure a drier atmosphere. It is therefore one of the best, if not the best, for exhibition purposes. At the other extreme from the slender grace of P. aldcorne ar.d the rest is the bold and broad style of P. asthiopicum. The only one which bears no resemblance to antlers is P. angolense. All the species require a moist atmosphere, though the humidity should be reduced during the winter. With the exception of P. aldcorne they all demand a high temperature. All need perfect drainage, and in winter they should not have too much direct syringing, for they need a slight rest and are likely to spot or damp- off if water remains on the foliage too long. P. sethiopi- cum is said to be particularly sensitive. Stag-horn ferns are often grown on pieces of tree-fern stem. They are fastened to such support or to a board by means of wire, having first furnished the roots with a slit piece of peat for roothold and some sphagnum moss, to which may be added a little bone-meal for food and some charcoal for drainage. A little moss may be added every year or two. Eventually the barren fronds will entirely cover this material and the plants should then be left undisturbed for years. A stag-horn fern, with antlers spreading 6 or 8 feet, is a sight never to be forgotten. (W. H. Taplin and F. L. Atkins.) A. Plants not forked like a stag-horn. angolense, Welw. (P. sthibpicum var. angolense, Welw.). Fertile Ivs. wedge-shaped in outline and merely wavy at the margin, not divided into lobes. It is also distinct by reason of felt-like covering of rust- colored wool on the lower side of the Ivs. Barren Ivs. large, erect; fertile Ivs. attaining a length of 18 in. and a width of 9 in. at the top: spore-mass nearly as broad as the If. Angola (W. Afr.). G.C. III. 23:155 (repeated in 28:444). AA. Plants resembling a stag-horn. B. Sori borne on a special receptacle. biforme, Blume. According to Blume's plate and description, this differs from all other kinds in having the spores borne on a special appendage, which is kid- ney-shaped and attached below the first fork. Blume says there are 2 such appendages; that the barren Ivs. are roundish, entire below, lobed above: fertile Ivs. 3-5 ft. long, many times forked, pale green. Java. — The fertile Ivs. of P. biforme are said to grow 15 ft. long sometimes. The picture in Gn. 4, p. 295, labeled P. biforme seems to be distinct and anomalous, though somewhat like P. grande. BB. Sori borne on the last forks or near their base. c. Barren Ivs. stag-horn-like above. D. Fertile Ivs. in pairs. E. Plants glabrmis or nearly so. grande, J. Smith. Fig. 3064. This may be readily distinguished from P. aldcorne by its barren Ivs., which are also stag-like, while those of P. aldcorne are not. Barren Ivs. stalkless; segms. blunt, spongy, pale green, tomentose: fertile Ivs. in pairs, 3-6 ft. long: sori not at the base of every ultimate fork but against the upper edge of the disk, with an infertile fork project- ing beyond on either side. N. Austral. G.C. 1872: 1137; III. 8:97 (good, repeated in III. 10:698 and 28: 433). Gng. 5:169 (same as A.F. 6:701). F. 1850:47 (same as F.S. 6, p. 156). Not G.M. 40:135, which is P. sethiopicum. Mn. 1, p. 77 (erroneously as P. aldcorne). EE. Plants pubescent, with yellowish wool. Wallichii, Hook. As in P. grande, the sori are borne not at the base of the ultimate forks, but on a disk which is not squared off at its upper surface but rounded and projecting into the angle between the forks; sori roundish. Malay Penins. G.C. III. 28:435. Hook. Fil. Exot., pi. 97. 3064. Platycerium grande. DD. Fertile Ivs. in 3's. Willinckii, Moore. Distinguished from P. grande by the sori, which nearly fill the last forks but do not approach the base of the sinus. The Ivs. are thinly furnished with minute stellate hairs, at length glabrous and pale green. Moore says: "fertile fronds in 3's, elon- gate, pendent, with scarcely any disk, bipartite for about two-thirds of their length, one of the margins of each primary branch entire, the other bearing numerous lobes in about three series on a dichotomous plan." Strong features of this plant are the length, narrowness and acuteness of the forks, and also the narrowness of the "disk" or unbranched portion just below the pri- mary forks. Java. G.C. II. 3:303 (repeated in III. 10:701 and 28:431). A.G. 15:111. Gn. 10, p. 383 (repeated in Gn. 30, p. 300). CC. Barren Ivs. not stag-horn-like, entire or merely lobed. D. Segms. and sinuses of the fertile Ivs. very broad. aethiopicum, Hook. (P. Stemmaria, Beauv.). Bar- ren Ivs. rounded; fertile Ivs. 2-3 ft. long, clustered, pendent, twice dichotomous (not twice trichotomous, as some writers say) : sorus a V-shaped patch surround- ing the sinus. Guinea, Angola. Hooker's Garden Ferns, pi. 9. A.G. 15: 111. G.M. 40: 135 (erroneously as 2710 PLATYCERIUM PLATYCODON P. grande). — The fronds are said to be covered below with a thin cottony down. DD. Segms. and sinuses narrow. E. Unbranched portion of fertile Ivs. very long and narrow. Hfllii, Moore (P. alcicorne var. Hillii). Barren Ivs. like P. alcicorne, but the fertile Ivs. are erect, the unbranched portion longer, the forks more numerous and compact, the segms. shorter and more acute. Lvs. clustered thinly, covered when mature with white stel- late hairs; sori in oval or roundish masses, not at the base of the sinus but near the base of each of the last segms. The upper third of the fertile If. is "15-18 in. across, 3-parted, the central segms. with 1 or 2 side lobes near the apex, the 2 lateral segms. broader and twice or thrice forked into 5-10 ultimate lobes." — T. Moore. Queensland. G.C. II. 10:51, 428, 429. J.H. 111.32:497. EE. Unbranched portion of fertile Ivs. moderately long. alcicorne, Desv. Barren Ivs. rounded, convex, wavy margined; fertile Ivs. clustered, attaining 2-3 ft., 2-3 times dichotomous, the unforked portion erect, the segms. pendent, rather narrow and sharply cut, under surface covered with thin cottony down: sori in irregu- lar masses filling the last forks and a space across their bases, shown in B.R. 262, 263 (as Acrostichum alci- corne). Temp. Austral. A.G. 14:153; 15:111. Gn. 51, p. 259. G.C. III. 10:697. Not Mn. 1, p. 77, which is really P. grande. Var. majus, Moore, is stronger-growing, more upright, and with thick, leathery, dark green Ivs. Ac- cording to F. L. Atkins, the fertile Ivs. are more broadly cut than the type and seldom forked more than once. Polynesia. Veitch's Catalogue in 1873, p. 13. WILHELM MILLER. R. C. BENEDICT.! PLATYCLINIS (Greek, broad bed; in allusion to the clinandrium). Orchidacese. Epiphytic orchids, suitable for a warm greenhouse. These plants are by recent orchid students referred to Dendrochilum. In this account, the names under that genus are given in the parentheses. Pseudobulbs small, closely crowded, each with a single, narrow, evergreen If.: fls. borne in graceful, 3065. Platyclinis giumacea. drooping racemes 6-10 in. long, small and not showy, but the thread-like racemes arching from among the densely tufted green foliage give the plants a pleasing appearance; sepals and petals spread- ing; labellum 3-lobed; column short, with an erect- toothed clinandrium and a large, narrow, erect wing on each side of the clinandrium. — About 20 species in India, China, and the Malay Isls. The several species of Platyclinis are all small com- pact-growing plants, requiring but little root-space. They are of easy culture and readily adapt themselves to either pot or basket culture, the latter being prefer- able for those with pendulous flower-scapes. The roots do not like being disturbed, but when repotting is neces- sary it is best to do it just after the flowering period. The compost should consist of equal parts chopped live sphagnum moss and clean peat fiber. The roots should be carefully distributed and the compost pressed gently but firmly in around them, leaving the surface slightly convex when finished. At least two-thirds of the space should be devoted to free drainage with potsherds or bits of charcoal. A shaded location and moist atmo- sphere, with a temperature of 60° to 65° F. by night and 70° to 75° by day, will afford them satisfactory growing conditions. They require a liberal supply of water at the roots, with occasional syringing overhead in bright weather when growing, and should never be allowed to remain long dry even when at rest. The plants fre- quently produce side growths from the old pseudobulbs, which may be removed after the growths are matured, leaving three or more of the old pseudobulbs attached to each piece, thus increasing the stock. When no nat- ural break occurs, however, the plants may often be induced to break by slightly twisting, or notching the rhizome with a sharp knife, thereby retarding the flow of sap at that point. (Robert M. Grey.) giumacea, Benth. (Dendrochilum glumaceum, Lindl.). Fig. 3065. Pseudobulbs crowded, forming dense spread- ing masses, the young ones clothed with red scales: Ivs. solitary, broadly lanceolate, tapering to a petiole which is inclosed by the sheath: peduncle from the top of the pseudobulb, slender, bearing a long drooping spike of small white fls.; sepals and petals spreading, oblong, acuminate; middle lobe of the labellum rotund, curved, base with 2 fleshy ridges. Spring. Philippines. B.M. 4853. G.C. III. 18:552. G.M. 48:385. Gn.W. 16:665. filif6rmis, Benth. (Dendrochilum filiforme, Lindl.). Pseudobulbs crowded: Ivs. linear-lanceolate: fl.-st. thread-like, bearing a long, pendulous raceme of small, pale yellow fls.; sepals and petals obovate; labellum cuneate-rotund, auriculate at the base. Summer. Philippines. I.H. 25 : 323 (as Dendrochilum glumaceum) . G.F. 2:485. Cobbiana, Hemsl. (Dendrochilum Cobbia- num, Reichb. f.). Lvs. oblong-lanceolate: fls. in a zigzag raceme, pale yellow, with an orange lip; sepals and petals triangular- oblong; labellum cuneate-fan-shaped, retuse. Nov., Dec. Philippines. O. 1914, p. 123 — This is offered hi some catalogues under the name of P. autumnalis. P. bdrbifrons, Kranzl. Lvs. lanceolate, acute, 5-7 in. long, about 1 in. broad: racemes very slender, pendu- lous, many-fld. ; fls. greenish white, about rein, across; sepals and petals similar, ovate-lanceolate, acuminate; lip entire, obovate, apiculate. Sumatra. G.C. III. 31: 366 (desc.). — P. cucumerinum, Hort. (Dendrochilum cucumerinum, Reichb. f.). Lvs. long-petiolate, oblong, 5-nerved, up to 5 in. long, less than J^in. wide: scape slender, exceeding Ivs., with a pendulous raceme; fls. pellucid-green; sepals oblong, acute, /^in. long; petals similar, denticulate, lip 3-toothed. Philippines. — P. lati- fdlia, Hemsl. Pseudobulbs 1-lvd.: Ivs. elliptic-lanceo- late, lOin. long, 7-nerved: raceme many-fld., pendulous, on an erect scape; fls. greenish yellow; sepals triangu- lar-lanceolate, acute, %in. long; petals ovate-lanceo- late, acute, denticulate; lip brown-striped. Philippines. GEOKGE V. NASH. PLATYCODON (Greek, platys, broad, and kodon, bell; referring to the shape of the flower). Campanula- cese. Perennial smooth erect glaucous herbs, which are used in border planting. Leaves sparse, often opposite or whorled, subsessile, dentate: fls. large, solitary or few at the ends of the branches; calyx-tube adnate, turbinate, 5-lobed; corolla campanulate, 5-lobed; stamens free from the corolla; ovary inferior, 5-celled: caps, obovoid, top PLATYCODON PLATYLEPIS 2711 conical, loculicidal within the lobes of the calyx, 5- valved. — One species, E. Asia and Japan. This plant was first placed in Campanula by Jacquin, and later, 1 iy Schrader, in Wahlenbergia ; and it is still sometimes cult, under these names. In 1830 it was made a sepa- rate genus (Platycodon) by A. DeCandolle. It is dis- tinguished from Cam- panula by its broadly cup- shaped fls., the stamens dilated at the base, and the caps, opening at the top and not at the sides. From Wahlenbergia it differs in the valves of the caps, being oppo- site to the calyx-lobes instead of alternate with them. Several supposed species have been described at different times, but there seems to be no doubt that the genus is distinctly monotypic and that all forms can be referred as forms of the type P. grandi- florum, which has been widely distributed and thereby greatly modified. It has been found in a wild state from Dahuria to Manchuria, in China, in Siberia, Korea, and Japan. Platycodon requires a medium sandy loam, and does not succeed in either extremely stiff or sandy soils. It is particularly sensitive to ill-drained soils. Under suit- able soil conditions it is perfectly hardy and will even stand considerable neglect. It is desirable to keep the stems tied during the season, for if once allowed to fall they can never be raised without breaking. In autumn the old stems should not be cut away, but the plant allowed to die off naturally; otherwise the crown may be injured. It can be propagated either by division or by seeding, the latter being more surely successful and therefore preferable; besides, a greater variety of flowers is obtained in this way. More care and skill are necessary in propagation by division, because of the fleshy rootstock. It is best accomplished in spring, when the plant is breaking into new growth. One of the best single varieties of P. grandiflarum is "Die Fee." large and very free-flowering, sky-blue. Of the numerous semi-double and double sorts may be noted Goos & Koenemann's German introductions: Capri, deep blue, medium tall; Multiflora, with thickly set clear blue bells; Seidenball, lilac-purple, and the dark blue Vineta. Of French origin are Cloche bleue, navy blue, and Globe azure, sky-blue. (Richard Rothe.) grandifldrum, DC. (Campanula grandiflora, Jacq. Wahlenbergia grandiflora, Schrad.). CHINESE or JAP- ANESE BELLFLOWER. BALLOON FLOWER. Fig. 3066. Plant 1-2 ft. high, forming a dense, branching bush of upright habit: Ivs. lanceolate or ovate-lanceolate, gla- brous, unequally toothed: fls. large and open, attaining 3 in. diam., produced from tips of branches, inflated in the bud, hence sometimes called "balloon flower;" corolla 5-lobed, blue, pale blue-white, or variegated. June, July. G.C. III. 28:223. J.H. III. 30:123; 54: 331. F.S. 22:2332. B.M. 252. F.E. 15:647. G. 30: 421. Gn.W. 6:713. R.B. 39:347. Var. album, Hort. A white-flowering form. Var. autumnale, Voss. (P. aulumnale, Decne.). Later-flowering form from Man- 172 3066. Platycodon grandiflorum, (XM) churia. Gn. 45, p. 462. R.H. 1848:361; 1858, p. 547. G. 2:211. H.F. 8:172. J.F. 3:250. Var. japonicum, Hort. (P. japonicum, Hort.), is of stronger and bushier growth and freer-flowering. The fls. average 2^ in. across; the inner and outer lobes alter- nate with one another, giving the fl. the appearance of a 10-pointed star. — This variety was first procured by Dreer in 1895 from Leonard Lalle, Lyons, France, who offered it as a novelty that season. It proved to be a first-class and desirable sort and has been tested by Dreer since, who considers it one of the good hardy perennials. Var. Mariesii, Hort. (P. Mariesii, Hort.). Originally intro. into England from Japan by Maries, and supposed to be identical with var. glaucum of Siebold. It does not exceed 1 ft. in height: growth stouter and more com- pact: Ivs. thicker than in the type: fls. are as large or larger than the type and varying in color from deep purplish blue to pale blue or lavender and white. G.C. 111.14:163. G.M. 37:35. J.H. III. 35:29.; 63:152. Gn. 27:216; 45:462. A minor form of var. Mariesii, var. nana, Hort., is frequently offered in the trade as being dwarfer and more compact, with white or blue fls. Var. semi-d&plex, Hort. Two and one-half ft. high: fls. rich blue, darker veined, 23^-3 in. across, flattened, and with a second row of corolla-segms. G.M. 43:575. G.C. III. 28:223. Var. semi-plenum, Hort. Fls. semi- double, and varying in color from purple to white; said to have been developed from var. album. Var. striatum, Hort. A garden form with blue or white fls., striped with white or blue. ARNOLD V. STUBENRAUCH. F. TRACT HrBBARD.f PLATYCRATER (Greek, platys, broad, and crater, bowl; alluding to the broad enlarged calyx of the ster- ile fls.). Saxifragaceae. A monotypic genus allied to Hydrangea. The species is a woody plant, with oppo- site serrate Ivs. and white, comparatively large fls. in long-peduncled, loose cymes, the marginal ones sterile and with enlarged calyx; petals 4; stamens numerous: fr. a 2-celled many-seeded dehiscent caps. It is not hardy N. and of little decorative value. It thrives best in rather moist, porous soil and partly shaded position and is easily prop, by seeds, greenwood cuttings under glass, or layers. arguta, Sieb. & Zucc. Prostrate shrub: lys. oblong to oblanceolate, cuneate at the base, acuminate, gla- brous except on the veins beneath, thin, light green, 3-6 in. long: cymes 3-10-fld., on a l-2-in.-long peduncle; fls. slender-pedicelled, the sterile ones apetalous, 1 in. across, with broad, obtuse sepals; fertile smaller, with lanceolate sepals half as long as the oblong-ovate petals. July. Japan. S.Z. 1:27. Gt. 15:516. H.F. 1870:206. — Useful for rockwork in greenhouses. ALFRED REHDER. PLATYLEPIS (Greek, brood scale; presumably refer- ring to the fact that the sepals are broad). Orchidd- ceae. Terrestrial herbs with creeping rhizomes and ascending leafy sts., suitable for the warmhouse: Ivs. petiolate, ovate or ovate-lanceolate, membranous: fls. narrow, shortly pedicelled, arranged in dense spikes; bracts ovate; sepals subequal, narrow, free, connivent round the column; lateral united at the base into a very short chin.; petals narrow, slightly cohering with the dorsal sepal into a hood; lip sessile at the base of the column, erect, channelled, broadly ventricose at the base, cohering with the margins of the column; limb very little dilated; column elongated, subterete, cli- nandrium oblong, erect behind the rostellum. About 6 species, Trop. and S. Afr. P. australis, Rolfe. Lvs. ovate, 2-4 in. long, 15-21-nerved: infl. erect scapes 6-12 in. long, bearing an oblong or elongated many-fld. raceme 2-5 in. long; fls. small, green, with the upper half of the lip white. S. Afr. P. densifldra, Rolfe. Differs from the preceding in having narrower sepals, the 2712 PLATYLEPIS PLECTRANTHUS lateral not reflexed in the middle, narrower petals, and a lip not constricted in the middle. Mascarene Isls. Both species have been intro. at Kew Gardens, but probably are not in general cult. Storehouse plants. F. TRACY HUBBARD. PLATYLOMA is a name for ferns of the genus Pellxa which have a narrow indusium and a broad sorus. For P. Bridgesii and P. falcata, see Pellsea. PLATYSTEMON (Greek, broad, thread; referring to the broadened filaments). Papaveracese. Low annual herbs generally branched at the base, sometimes grown in flower-gardens. Stems erect or decumbent, glaucescent: Ivs. alter- nate or subopposite, linear- or oblong-lanceolate: fls. usually erect and solitary; sepals 3, ovate, caducous; petals 6, sometimes more, yellowish white or yellow or white, caducous or rarely persistent; stamens numerous; ovaries 6-20, distinct: fr. at maturity many carpels totally distinct or slightly joined, carpels moniliform. — About 60 species natives of the Pacific Coast according to Fedde (Engler's Pflanzenreich, hft. 40. IV: 104), or 1 species according to Gray and a large number of American authors. Platystemon grows wild through- out Calif., except in the mountains, and is said to prefer a loose soil. calif ornicus, Benth. (P. leiocdrpus, Fisch. & Mey.). CREAM-CUPS. Lvs. appearing opposite, sessile, ligu- late-linear: petals light yellow, cream-color or white: carpels linear, moniliform, sometimes hispid. B.M. 3579. B.R. 1679. B.2:65. Gn. 30, p. 313. G. 34:397. — P. leiocdrpus, Fisch. & Mey., is the smooth-fruited form and is considered by some to be a distinct species, but is said by Gray in the Synoptical Flora to be "a mere state." F.C. 2:76. B.M. 3750.— P. calif ornicus is frequently improperly called the California poppy but the true California poppy is Eschscholtzia calif ornica. F. TRACY HUBBARD. PLATYSTIGMA (Greek, broad stigma) . Papaveracex. Low slender California annuals with pale yellow fls. less than 1 in. across. They are among the few plants of the poppy family with entire Ivs. They are closely allied to Platystemon, but differ in having the filaments scarcely dilated, 3 stigmas instead of many, and the fr. a caps, which is 3-valved at the apex. Fls. commonly trimerous; stamens numerous, free; stigmas not con- fluent. Four species from Calif, and Ore. P. lineare^ is the only one with thick stigmas and also differs in its tufted habit, the others having leafy and branching sts. B.M. 3575, with pale yellow fls.; in B.R. 1954 it is shown with 3 white petals alternating with yellow ones. Platystigmas seem not to have been offered in Amer. By Fedde the species are referred to other genera. PLATYTHECA (Greek, broad anther-cells). Treman- dracese. Small shrub, somewhat heath-like, suitable for greenhouse culture. Leaves whorled: fls. 5-merous, numerous, borne toward the end of the branches, light purple, about 1 in. across, center marked with a red star; stamens dis- tinctly in 2 rows, anthers continuous on the same plane as the filament, with 4 parallel cells; disk inconspicuous: caps, loculicidally dehiscent, 4-valved. One species. Austral. — Platytheca belongs to a small beautiful and distinct family of Australian shrubs, composed of 3 genera, of which Tetratheca is the dominant type. The Tremandra family resembles the Polygala family in the structure of the caps., but differs in the regularity and estivation of the fl. ; it resembles the Pittosporacese in having a very small embryo immersed in copious albumen, and particularly the genus Cheiranthera in having anthers which open by a pore at the top. The three genera of Tremandracea? are distinguished from one another by the anthers; Tremandra differs from the other two in having the anthers jointed with the fila- ments; in Platytheca the anthers have 4 cells all in the same plane; in Tetratheca the anthers are 2-celled or 4-celled, with 2 cells in front of the 2 others. galioides, Steetz (P. verticilldta, Baill.). Lvs. linear, %in. long, about 10 in a whorl, hairy. Said to bloom in June. P.M. 13:171 (as Tetratheca verticillata) . G.C. III. 44:290. — This plant deserves to be better known. Cuttings of half-ripened wood root freely under a bell- glass in a shaded house at 60°. Cuttings rooted in February or March will make good plants in 5-inch pots in one year. In summer keep them plunged out- side, but covered with shaded sash. By trimming frequently they will make well-shaped plants, needing no supports. Kept in a coolhouse (45°) during winter, they will be covered with bloom in March and April. The fls. last but a short time, but the plant is so free that it is always covered with the blue bloom. H. D. DARLINGTON and WILHELM MILLER. PLECTOCOMIA (Greek, plaited hair; application obscure). Palmacese. Six species of East Indian climb- ing pinnate palms which fruit once and then die. One of the most interesting species is P. khasyana, which is figured in B.M. 5105 under the erroneous title of P. assamica. This species £-Min. long, on a scaly, not thickened stalk. Cent. Afr. elongate, L'Her. Tree, to 70 ft., with more or less whorled, densely leafy branches: Ivs. alternate, erect- spreading, narrowly linear-lanceolate, gradually nar- rowed at the apex "and acute; nearly pungent; midrib inconspicuous above, lJ^-2 in. long and about ^in. broad: staminate fls. solitary, axillary, sessile, about %in. long: seed globose, Mm- across, with a short fleshy receptacle on a slender stalk about Mm- long. S. Afr. BB. Under side of Ivs. with 2 glaucous lines. nubigena, Lindl. (Saxegothaea grdcilis, Hort.). Tree, or in cult., shrub: Ivs. spreading, crowded, linear-lan- ceolate, acute and mucronate, pungent, somewhat revo- lute at the margins, dark green and with a prominent midrib above, with 2 white bands beneath, 1-1 %in. long: fls. dioecious, the staminate clustered, %-l in. long: seed ovoid, Km- long, on a fleshy receptacle, very short-stalked. Chile. G.C. III. 10:171. AA. Lvs. Vy-Y^in. long. alpina, R. Br. Shrub or small tree, attaining 15 ft., with spreading branches: Ivs. indistinctly 2-ranked, linear to linear-oblong, obtuse, mucronulate, dark green, grooved or flat above, pale green beneath, J-i-% in. long: fls. dioecious, the staminate solitary or clus- tered, about liin. long: seed %w. long, on a fleshy receptacle. Austral. P. andina, Poepp. (Prumnopitys elegans, PhiL Stachycarpus andina. Van Tiegh.). Tree, attaining 20 ft., with upright or some- what spreading branches: Ivs. indistinctly 2-ranked, linear, dark green above, slightly glaucous beneath, H~1M in- long: fls. in spikes; receptacle not fleshy. Chile. G.C. III. 31:121. J.H.S. 37, p. 52. — P. Bldwillii, Hoibr.=P. spinulosa. — P. chilina, Rich.=P. saligna. — P. careana, Hort., incorrect spelling for P. karaiana= Cephalotaxus Harringtonia var. fastigiata. — P. coriacea. Rich. Tree, attaining 50 ft., with spreading branches; allied to P. macro- phylla: Ivs. lanceolate, acuminate, 2-4 in. long: fr. ovoid. Jamaica. Sometimes Cephalotaxus drupacea is cult, under this name. — P. dacrydimdes, A. Rich. Tall tree: Ivs. dimorphic, on young plants linear, spreading, 2-ranked, J^-J^in. long, on older plants shorter, imbricate, appressed or spreading: seed ovoid, small: receptacle scarlet, jiin. long. Xew Zeal. G.W. 6, p. 594. — P. formosensis, Dummer, from Formosa, allied to P. Nagi, but with smaller and thicker, lance-elh'ptic, obtusely truncate Ivs., is not yet intro. G.C. III. 52:295. — P. jamaicensis, Hort.=P. Purdieana. — P. koraiana, Sieb.— Cephalotaxus Harringtonia var. fastigiata. — P. montana, Lodd. (P. taxifolia, Kunth. Prumnopitys taxifolia, Mast.). Tree, attaining 60 ft., with spreading branches: Ivs. 2-ranked, linear, acute or obtuse, abruptly narrowed into a short petiole: fls. in spikes: no thickened receptacle. Peru, Colombia. — P. Xdgi, Pilger (P. Nageia, R. Br. Xageia jappnica, Gaertn.). Tree, attaining 90 ft., with spreading, sometimes pendulous branches: Ivs. mostly opposite, ovate to oblong-lanceolate, short- acuminate, 2-3 Yi in. long, bright green and glossy: fr. Jiin. across, subglobose. Japan. S.Z. 2:135. R.H. 1914, p. 77. — P. pectinate, Panch. (Acmopyle Pancheri, Pilger). Tree, to 60 ft.: Ivs. dimorphic, either linear, obtuse or acute, with 2 white bands beneath, about Jiin. long, or minute, acuminate, scale-like, appressed: staminate fls. terminal: seed globose, J^in. across, with a thickened recep- tacle. New Caledonia. B.M. 7854. — P. Purdieana, Hook. Tree, to 120 ft., with whorled horizontal branches: allied to P. macro- phylla: Ivs. oblanceolate, obtuse, mucronulate, bright green, 2-5 in. long, %in. wide. Jamaica. H.I. 7:624. — P. saligna, Don (P. chilina, Rich.). Tree, attaining 60 ft., allied to P. macrophylla_: Ivs. linear-lanceolate, acute, slightly falcate, 3—4 % in. long: staminate fls. 'clustered, about 1 in. long. Chile, Peru. — P. spicata, R. Br. (Prumnopitys spicata. Mast.). Tree, attaining 80 ft.: Ivs. 2-ranked, linear, obtusish, sessile, Ji-Jiin. long: fls. in spikes; receptacle not thickened. Xew Zeal. H.I. 6:543.— P. spinuldsa, R. Br. (P. Bid- willii, Hoibr.). Allied to P. macrophylla. Tree: Ivs. upright, lin- ear, acuminate and spiny-pointed, midrib distinct above, 1 ^-3 in. long. Austral. — P. taxifdlia, Kunth=P. montana. — P. Totdrra, A. Cunn. (P. Totara, Don). Tree, attaining 90 ft. with spreading branches: allied to P. alpina: Ivs. linear, acute or acuminate, Ji- 1H in. long. NewZeaL ALFRED REHDER. PODOLEPIS (Greek, foot and scale; referring to the unusual fact that the involucral scales have a foot- stalk or claw). Compdsitse. Australian herbs with yel- low, pink or purple rays, a few of which are cultivated as half-hardy annuals. Plants 6-12 in. high and bearing fls. which are chiefly interesting as representing an intermediate stage between the common type of composite with showy rays and the "everlasting fls." like Helichrysum, in which the rays are aborted and the showy parts are the stiff involucral scales. In Podolepis the involucral scales are generally colored, but are thin and nearly transparent, and overlap one another instead of stand- ing out like petals. — About 16 species belonging to an unfamiliar group of composites from Australia. Very little in cult, in America. The fol- lowing species are annuals with linear or lanceolate Ivs. and hemispherical involucres /^-Mm- diara. They need a porous soil with full exposure to the sun, and. they also do well in pots. See Annuals. A. Color of rays yellow. B. Involucral bracts acute. canescens, A. Cunn. (P. afflnis, Sond.). Rarely much exceeding 1 ft.: Ivs. mostly all basal, linear or linear- lanceolate, 1-2 in. long: involu- cral bracts slightly or not at all rugose; claws with broad scarious margins: rays 3-4-lobed slightly longer than the disk-fls. BB. Involucral bracts acuminate. aristate, Benth. (P. chrysdntha, Endl.). Fig. 3084. Often exceeding 1 ft. : Ivs. linear or lanceolate mostly st.-clasping and decurrent : involucral bracts not rugose, usually ending in a rigid. point or awn, the claws of the inner ones narrow and glandular: rays longer than the disk-fls., 3-4-lobed. R.H. 1857, p. 263. AA. Color of rays purple or lilac. gracilis, Graham. Often exceeding 1 ft., the smooth st. usually much branched: Ivs. linear, st.-clasping and often slightly decurrent: involucral bracts obtuse; claws narrow, glandular: rays entire or 2-lobed, Hm- l°ng: pappus not thickened upward. B.M. 2904 (disk-fls. mostly purple, some yellow). WILHELM MILLER. N. TAYLOR, f PODOL6BIUM: Oxylobium. PODOPHYLLUM (from Tournefort's anapodophyl- lum, duck's-f cot-leaf; from a fancied resemblance in the foliage). Berberidacese. MAY APPLE. MANDRAKE (erroneously). Herbs common in rich woods and copses throughout the eastern United States, a colony of which is most desirable for a wild garden. Hardy perennials herbs: sepals 6, petal-like; petals 6-9; stamens as many or twice as many as the petals; 3084. Podolepis aristata. ( X H) 2726 PODOPHYLLUM POGOSTEMON pistil 1 (rarely several) : berry with many seeds, which are inclosed in fleshy arils. — Podophyllum is a genus of about 5 species, — 1 American, 1 Himalayan and 3 from China. The May apple is one of the most prominent of the native low-growing spring herbs. The "apples" are yellowish egg-shaped fruits about 2 inches long, and have a rather mawkish taste. The leaves are very distinct, being shaped like a round shield with 5 to 7 lobes. The plant has two kinds of leaves, the solitary ones, and the others in pairs. The large centrally pel- tate leaves have no flower underneath. The flowers are nodding white waxlike cups which spring from the fork of the stem. They have a rather unpleasant smell. Some parts 'of the May apple plant are emetic and poisonous. Extract of podophyllum is common in drug- stores. For the drug trade, the rhizomes are collected late in summer and dried, the supply coming mostly from the Central States. The plants are offered by several dealers in hardy herbaceous perennials. They are of easy culture, re- 3085. Royal poinciana. — Poinciana regia. quiring deep rich soil and partial shade. They are useful only for spring effects, however, as the foliage dies down by midsummer or before. Later-growing vigorous perennials, as Polygonatum giganteum, may be associated with a planting of May apple, to occupy the ground in the later part of the season. P. Emodii requires a moister situation, and some prepare a peaty soil for it. Propagation is by division or by seed. The mandrake of Old World history and romance, is Mandragora. A. Frs. yellowish. peltatum, Linn. MAY APPLE. MANDRAKE (see Man- dragora, Vol. IV, p. 1982). Height 1-1^ ft.: Ivs. dark green, nearly 1 ft. across, 5-7-lobed, each lobe 2-cleft: fls. about 2 in. across. Also called wild lemon and hog apple. B.M. 1819. Gn. 21, p. 127. B.B. 2:92.— Blooms in April and fruits in May. It is a shade-loving species, although growing also in partial sun in moist and rich soil, from W. Quebec and W. New Eng. to Minn, and south to Fla. and Texas. AA. Frs. deep red. emddi, Wall. Lvs. 3-5-lobed: fls. white or pale rose: fr. large as a hen's egg, brilliant red. Himalayas. G.C. II. 18:241. — The foliage is a fine bronzy red in early spring, said to be edible. P. versiptlle, Hance. A perennial herb, with sts. about 3 ft. high, 2-forked at top, each fork bearing a lobed peltate If.: fls. pendulous, crimson, in clusters of 12-16 just under the Ivs. China. Intro, into England. B.M. 8154. R TRAcy HuBBARD f PODOSTIGMA (Greek words referring to the fact that the stigma has a foot or stalk). Asdepiadacese. This includes a half-hardy tuberous-rooted perennial herb which grows a foot high or less in low pine-barrens from N. C. to Fla. and bears in summer small greenish yellow fls. The genus is closely allied to Asclepias, and is distinguished by having the hoods remote from the anthers at the base of the long column, while in Ascle- pias the hoods are approximate to the anthers. P. pedicellate, Vail. Lvs. opposite, linear-lanceolate, nearly sessile: peduncles terminal and axillary, umbellately several-fld. The only species. — Advertised in 1881, but presumably not hardy N. POGONIA (Greek, beard; alluding to bearded label- lum). Orchiddcese. Hardy terrestrial orchids. Mostly small perennial herbs, with erect slender sts.: fls. solitary or in racemes; sepals and petals free, erect or ascending; labellum ses- sile, with broad base, spurless, with longi- tudinal ridges. — About 40 species, N. and S. Amer., with exception of 2 Chino-Japanese species. Pogonias are delicate plants requiring care in planting. The woodland species should have rich leaf -mold, with deep shade; the swamp species require peat or suitable light, rich soil, moist yet not wet. All the species are preferably planted in spring. A. Sepals and petals nearly equal in length. ophioglossoides, Ker. St. 8-15 in. high, slender, 1-3-lvd. : Ivs. 1-3 in. long, lanceolate or ovate: fls. solitary or in pairs, fragrant, pale rose, subtended by a foliaceous bract. June, July. In meadows and swamps, U. S. B.R. 148. G.F. 10:485. V. 2:269; 11:229.— This seems to be the only species that can be grown with success. It thrives in wet moss in boxes of sphagnum. Usually it is better to transplant from the wild each year than to attempt to prop, the plants. Sometimes it can be colonized in wet meadows. AA. Sepals longer than the petals. divaricate, R. Br. St. 1-2 ft. high, slender, bearing a solitary fl.: fl. 1 in. long; sepals dark; petals flesh-colored; lip as long as petals, green- ish, veined with purple. July. Swamps, N. J. to Fla. B.B. 1:468. P. pendula, Lindl.=Triphora. — P. verticittata, Nutt.=Isotria. HEINRICH HASSELBRING. POGOSTEMON (Greek, bearded stamen). Labiate. This includes the plant which produces the well-known perfumes called patchouli, or in India pucha-pat. Herbs or subshrubs: Ivs. opposite, rarely in 3's: fls. small, in solitary or panicled spikes formed of many dense whorls; calyx subequally 4-5-toothed; corolla- tube exserted or included; limb sub-2-lipped; lobes 4, lower usually longest; stamens 4, exserted, straight or declinate; filaments usually bearded; anther-cells con- fluent: nutlets smooth, ovoid or oblong. — About 40 species, 24 of which are distinguished in Flora of British India 4:631. Patchouli has a peculiar dry moldy smell and is one of the commonest perfumes in India. In the 1840's its presence was considered the sure test of a genuine Indian shawl, but the French manufacturers of imita- tion Indian shawls imported the perfume in the 1850's. Patchouli is no longer fashionable. Fuller accounts of it will be found in the "Cultural Industries of Queens- POGOSTEMOX POINSETTIA 2727 land," V. 8:247 and Gn. 27, p. 447. The plant has no ornamental value. lave plants were introduced into southern California, and were offered in 1900 in the East. Heyneanus, Benth. (P. Patchoidy, Pellet.). PAT- CHOULI PLANT. Herb, 2-3 ft. high: Ivs. long-stalked, ovate, acute, acuminate or obtuse, crenate, simply or doubh" toothed: spikes terminal and axillary, forming a panicled infl. ; whorls usually separate, forming inter- rupted spikes; fls. whitish, tinged purple. India and Burma. POINCIANA (M. de Poinci, governor of the Antilles in the seventeenth century). Leguminbsx. Small mostly broad-topped unarmed trees, with large and very showy flowers; one of the most conspicuous trees in southern Florida and the American tropics. Leaves bipinnate with numerous small Ifts. and with no stipels and inconspicuous stipules: fls. very showy, orange or scarlet, in large corymbose racemes, not papilionaceous, the 5 petals clawed and eroded or even fimbriate on the margin, the stamens 10 and free and exserted: fr. long and flat. — There are 2 or 3 species of Poinciana, all native to the oriental tropics. The genus has been confounded with Caesalpinia, but the calyx-segms. are valvate, whereas they are strongly imbricate (OF overlapping) in Caesalpinia. The P. pidcherrima, known as ''Barbados pride" and "bird-of paradise flower," is Caesalpinia pulcherrima; P. Gil- lifsii is C. Gilliesii. P. data, Linn., native to India, Arabia, and Trop. Afr., is planted in the Old World, but is not in the American trade. It reaches a height of 20- 30ft., with the petals scarcely exserted beyond thecal3'x. Conzattii, Rose. Small tree, with grayish bark: Ivs. glabrous, large, with commonly 4 pairs of pinna?; Ifts. 4 or 5 pairs, oblong to obovate: inn. a sessile raceme; sepals highly colored, obtuse; petals yellowish red: pod scvt he-shaped, pubescent. Mex. — Cult, in Mex. and S.' Calif. regia, Boj. ROYAL POINCIANA. PEACOCK FLOWER. FLOMBOYAXT. Figs. 3085-3087. Rapid-growing tree, reaching 20—40 ft., and making a wide-spreading pic- turesque top: Ivs. 1-2 ft. long, with 10-20 pairs of pin- nae, each pinna with numerous oval Ifts.: fls. 3—4 in. across, bright scarlet (upper petal striped with yellow and more cuneate), the obovate petals very prominently clawed (or narrow below) : pod 6 in. to 2 ft. long. Mada- gascar. B.M. 2884.— Now a popular tree in frostless countries, as in S. Fla,, S. Calif., Bermuda, and the W. Indian Isls. It is deciduous. One of the most striking and gorgeous of tropical trees. Sometimes seen under glass in the X. Caesalpinia pulcherrima is often confounded with it; but that plant is a shrub or at most only a small tree, with strongly overlapping calyx - segms. in the bud, smaller fls., and very long-exserted sta- mens- L. H. B. POINSETTIA (Eu- phorbia pidcherrima, which see), is one of the most popular plants for the Christ- regia. (XK) mas season. It is a shrub of tropical America with inconspicuous flowers but with flaming red leaves or bracts (with variations to pink and white), clustered near the top. It is for these leaves that the plant is grown (Fig. 1440, Vol. 3087. Poinciana regia. Poinsettias require rather a long period of rest. After the bracts are cut, lay them on their side near the pipes under a carnation - house bench . About the first of May is the best time to start them for cuttings. They should then be placed on a light bench in the full sun in a temperature of not less than 60°. The eyes will start into growth near the top of the cane, and by June 1 one can take the first batch of cuttings. These are found most suitable for stock plants as they grow rather tall to be of much use for decorative purposes. Pot the cuttings singly in small pots in sand. It is better to have a little sphagnum moss in the bottom of each pot for the roots to grip. Place them in a tight case shaded from the sun. The temperature should never be less than 65°. Water the cuttings every morning until they root, except on dull days. When rooted, pot them in 3J^-inch pots in equal parts of loam, leaf- mold, and sand. The next shift may be a 6-inch pot, and a good fibrous loam with a sixth part of sheep- manure added. They will form a fine large bract in this size pot, and require no further potting although they should be fed with manure-water until the yellow flower appears in the center of the bracts. After the first batch of cuttings has been removed, the stock plants should be planted out-of-doors. One gets far firmer and as man}' cuttings by this treatment, and the cuttings now secured and rooted may be used in various ways. Twelve cuttings rooted as advised above and placed in a 10-inch pot make a fine specimen plant for Christmas. Others may be grown about 2 feet high for single-stem plants. The last cuttings to be rooted for the season should be secured not later than the middle of August, and they are excellent for making up shallow pans for centerpieces for Christmas. Poinsettias should at all times be grown as near the glass as possible, and during the summer months the house should have full air day and night. Never, however, allow the temperature to drop below 60°, and avoid draughts, as this will tend to make the foliage drop, and the retaining of the leares is one of the attractive points in a well-grown plant of poinsettia. Insect pests that attack the poinsettia can be eradicated by the use of hydrocyanic gas, as advised for other plants. GEORGE F. STEWART. 2728 POISON BERRY POISONOUS PLANTS POISON BERRY: Oestrum. P. Dogwood: Rhiis vernix. P. Elder: Rhiis venenata. P. Hemlock: Conium maculatum. P. Ivy: Rhus Toxicodendron. P. Oak: Rhus Toxicodendron. P. Sumac: Rhus vermix. POISONOUS PLANTS. The plants that are injurious to man and the domestic animals may be divided into two groups: (1) those that cause injury by mechanical means; and (2) those that are poisonous. 3088. Leaf of poison ivy. ( X 1A) The first group includes those plants which are mainly harmful to farm cattle, causing serious troubles which may result eventually in the death of the animal. This group includes such plants as the crimson clover, Trifolium incarnatum, spiny cacti (Opuntia) , the hairs and spines of which form the hair- and spine-balls known as phyto-bezoars. The branched hairs of the calyx of the crimson clover, if eaten by horses and cattle, when in full flower, are rolled together to form the hair- balls which have been responsible for the death of many animals. The spines of species of Opuntia in Mexico and the southwestern United States cause the laceration of the mouth and tongue of cattle and death has resulted in a number of cases, where these spines have been rolled into phyto-bezoars. ^Egagropilae are balls formed from animal hairs which have been licked off and swallowed. Through the peristaltic movement of the intestines these have been rolled into balls. The silex in the stems of the scouring-rushes (Equisetum) is responsible for inflammation of the digestive organs of cattle. The hygrometric structures attached to the fruits of such grasses as Stipa capillata (Rus- sia), S. spartea (United States), Aristida hygrometrica (Queensland), and Heteropogon contortus (New Caledonia), by their spiral movements cause the pointed ends of the fruits to bore into the skin and flesh of ani- mals in those regions of the earth. The blue-mold, Aspergillus fumigatus, which lives at blood temperature, penetrates the lung tissues of calves and pigeons, and its masses of spores fill up the air-cavities and lung-pas- sages, causing asphyxiation. These are some of the illustrations of plants that kill, or cause injury, by mechanical means. The poisonous plants, however, are those that con- tain some chemical poison which either produces irritation, disease, or death by its direct action. The season of the year has a direct influence on the activity of a poisonous plant. Melter (1899) records that his horse ate 500 pounds of the dried hay of Passiflora incarnata in August without injury, while in March, eight months later, 25 pounds of the hay of this plant killed another horse. The condition or age of the plant is important. The poisonous principle in the spotted hemlock, Conium maculatum, is volatile, and hence the dried plant is less poisonous than the fresh. The leaves of wild black cherry, Prunus serotina, are more poison- ous when dry than when fresh, owing to the develop- ment of hydrocyanic acid. Some parts of a plant are more poisonous than others. For example, the seeds of the Jamestown weed, Datura Stramonium, are more deadly than the remainder of the plant. Again it may be said that the relative amounts of poisonous sub- stance vary in different individuals of the same species and that small doses of some poisons are taken with beneficial results, for instance the use in medicine of belladonna, strychnine, and aconite. The toxic proper- ties of plants are not due in all cases to the same chemi- cal substance. It is well known that several plants con- tain a number of toxic bodies. For example, the green hellebore, Veratrum viride, contains the alkaloids jeryin, cevadin, and veratrin. Sometimes the same poison is present in more than one species, as solanin in the tomato and the potato. Not all animals are equally affected by the same poison, as for example, the darnel which poisons men, dogs, horses, and sheep, but is innocuous to cows, pigs, and ducks. Some per- sons are susceptible to poison ivy, others are not. This susceptibilty may be increased by sickness, or a run- down condition. Some animals acquire a craving for certain injurious plants, as for example, the loco weeds of the United States, stemless loco weed, Oxytropis Lambertii, and in Australia, according to Maiden, the indigo plant, Swainsona galegifolia. Kobert divides poisonous plants into three groups: (1) irritants which cause gross anatomic changes, as crotqn-oil; (2) blood poisons, as ricin; (3) poisons which kill without ana- tomic changes, as morphin, digitalin, and the like; and a fourth class may be added, (4) skin-irritants, as poison ivy. The most poisonous lower plants are fungi belonging to the genus Amanita. The two most virulent are the toadstools, Amanita muscaria, which contains muscarin, and A . phalloides with phallin. Fortunately, an antidote has been discovered for the first in the administration of hypodermic injections of atropin beginning with 1-100 of a grain, and increasing the dose to a strength of 1-60 of a grain. For phallin, no antidote is known. Of the higher plants, the most noted poisonous ones are: Aconitum Napellus (monkshood); Delphinium Geyeri (larkspur); Oxytropis Lambertii and Astragalus mol- lissimus (loco weeds); Rhus radicans (poison ivy), which is a serious skin-irritant; Rhus vernix (poison 3089. Poison sumac. — Rhus vernix. ( X 14) sumac), which is also decidedly toxic to the skin; Cicuta maculata (cowbane), which contains two poisons conin and cicutoxin; Conium maculatum, the classic poisonous plant, from which came the death-draught of the philosopher Socrates; Kalmia latifolia and A". angustifolia, the two poisonous laurels; Datura Stra- monium (Jamestown weed); Atropa Belladonna (deadly nightshade) and others too numerous to mention. Popular interest usually attaches to the poison ivy, Rhus radicans or R. Toxicodendron (Fig. 3088), a root- climbing vine with ternate leaves, and the poison POISONOUS PLANTS POLEMONIUM 2729 sumac, Rhus vernix (Fig. 3089), with pinnate leaves. Both of these plants have white fruits and hence are easily distinguished from the non-poisonous sumacs. The poison ivy is everywhere in the eastern states along roads, fence-rows and uncultivated ground, while the poison sumac grows in swamps and is less common. Both are skin-irritants, causing what physicians call dermatitis. If the susceptible person thinks he has come into contact with the plants, he should wash his hands and face with alcohol, as this dissolves and removes the non- volatile oil, toxicodendrol. Smoke from a brushwood fire containing these plants is toxic, and so is the Japanese lacquer made from the inspis- sated juice of a sumac, Rhus vernicifera. Unfortunately, all parts of these plants are virulent and at all seasons of the year. One of the best remedies is an alcoholic solution of sugar of lead, and the extract of grindelia (sold at drug-stores) is sometimes used. Local remedies are fresh bean leaves, stems of touch-me-not (Impa- tiens) and plantain leaves (Planiago lancedata). At least, these leaves allay the burning sensation of the inflamed skin. An authoritative work on toxic plants is the "Manual of Poisonous Plants," by L. H. Pam- mel, professor of botanv in Iowa State College of Agri- culture, in two parts, Part I (1910) and Part II (1911) with a total of 977 pages. Other publications have been issued. Two plants much in prominence at the present time in Wyoming on account of their poisonous effect on livestock are discussed by H. G. Knight, as follows: '•Woody aster, Xylorrhiza Parryi (Fig. 3090), is found throughout the state of Wyoming, but is confined to certain districts characterized by a gumbo clay soil, more or less intermixed with gravel and containing more or less of alkali and other salts. This plant probably causes greater losses among sheep in the state of Wyo- ming than all other poisonous plants together, but may be easily recognized by those familiar with the range. So far as is known, sheep are the only species of range animal susceptible to poisoning by woody aster. No antidote is known and there is much question whether a satisfactory antidote will be obtained as the action of the poison is powerful and death comes speedily with many pathological changes." Pammel writes, "Death camas, Zygadenus interme- dius, is a near relative of the better known Zygadenus venenosus. In Wyoming the most common species is the Z. intermedium and the greatest losses noted have occurred in early spring when the plant is in bloom, and before early forage is plentiful. The plant grows on the sandy plain as well as in the drier and stonier foothills. It has been found that the poisonous -properties are due to the presence of alkaloids, one of which at least is new to science. An antidote has not as yet been determined." JOHN \^ HAKSHBERGER. POIVREA (N. Poivre, 1719-86; intendant of Mau- ritius). Combretacese. Mostly climbing shrubs: Ivs. opposite or alternate, entire: spikes axillary and termi- nal; calyx 5-lobed; petals 5; stamens 10, protruded; ovary 2-3-ovuled: fr. oval or oblong or 5-winged; seed solitary, pendulous, 5-angled. It includes a S. African shrub with orange-red fls. cult, in S. Fla. and Calif. The genus is referred by Bentham & Hooker to Combretum, a large genus containing some hand- some plants that are little known. Poivrea differs from the other combretums chiefly in the convolute cotyle- dons. P. bracteosa, Hochst. Unarmed shrub 8-10 ft. high: Ivs. opposite or in 3's, 2%-3x 1-1% in- petals clawed, reddish, 4 lines long: fr. oval, indistinctly 5- angled. Called "hiccup-nut" in Cape Colony. P. com- 6sa, Sweet. A large cumber with great panicles of blood-red fls. : fr. short-stalked, notched at both ends. Trop. Afr. B.R. 1165 (as Combretum comosum). POKER PLANT: Kniphofia. POKEWEED: Phytolacca. POLANISIA (Greek, many, unequal, referring to the stamens). Cappandaceae. Annual herbs, mostly glandular and having an unpleasant odor: Ivs. pal- mately 3-5-foliate, the uppermost reduced to bracts of the racemose fls.: fls. whitish or yellowish; sepals 4, lanceolate, deciduous; petals slender or clawed; receptacle depressed, bearing a gland at the base of the ovary; stamens 8 to numerous, somewhat unequal: fr. a nearly or quite sessile pod. — About 30 species, natives of temperate and tropical regions, of little value horti- culturally. P. trachysperma, Torr. & Gray. A branched glandular-pubescent viscous annual, 1-2 ft. high: Ivs. petioled, with 3 oblong If ts. : fls. yellowish white in termi- nal racemes, rather large: fr. a caps, more or less con- tracted at base, not stipitate. N. Amer. Intro, abroad. POLEMONIUM (ancient name, not explained; probably not from Greek polemos, war, but rather the philosopher Poleman). JACOB'S LADDER. GREEK 3090. Woody aster (Aster, or Xylorrhiza, Parryi), a poisonous plant of the Plains. VALERIAN. Polemoniaceae. Flower-garden herbs, with pinnate leaves and pretty blue, purplish white or yellowish flowers. Perennials, rarely annuals or biennials, tall or dwarf, often viscid, often with a creeping rhizome which is thick or slender: Ivs. alternate, odd-pinnate or pinnati- sect: fls. in racemes or thyrse-like panicles; calyx in- creasing after anthesis; corolla tubular, funnel-shaped, broadly bell-shaped or subrotate, 5-lobed, the lobes mostly obovate; stamens 5, alternate, with corolla-lobes inserted near the base, included or exserted: caps. 3- valved. Closely allied to Gilia and distinguished by the declinate stamens and the filaments usually pilose- appendaged at the base. — Brand, in the recent mono- graph (Engler's Pflanzenreich, IV. 250, hft. 27, 1907) accepts 29 species; mostly W. N. American, extending into Mex., but also in Eu., Asia and 2 in. S. Amer. This genus includes the Jacob's ladder, P. c&ruleum, an old-fashioned inhabitant of cottage gardens, which owes its popular name to the regular manner in which the numerous leaflets are arranged on the long leaves. It. is a hardy perennial herb, growing 1 to 3 feet high and bearing five-lobed bell-shaped flowers of blue or white, and nearly an inch across. Probably the finest species, however, is the plant known to afl gardeners as P. Richordsonii, which is a form of P. humile (or P. lanotum) that has doubled or trebled in size in culti- vation. A fine specimen of P. Richardsonii may have a terminal cluster 6^ inches across and 5 inches deep, with two dozen flowers each \% inches across. P. confertum differs in the great density of its inflores- cence, and by connoisseurs in alpine plants may be regarded as a very fine species. Most of the yellow- flowered forms are disappointing. Polemoniums are of easy culture in any deep rich loamy soil. P. caeruleum and P. reptans do well in partly shaded places not too dry. 2730 POLEMONIUM POLEMONIUM Polemoniums are easily raised from fall-sown seed. Also propagated by division. They are said to be impatient of soil on the leaves. album, 4, 9. caruleum, 9. carneum, 7. confertum, 2, 3. foliosissimum, 8. grandiflorum, 9. himalayanum, 9. INDEX. humile, 4. lanatum, 4. mellitum, 3. occidentale, 9. pauciflorum, 1. pulchellum, 4. pulcherrimum, 5. pumilum, 5. reptans, 6. Richardsonii, 4. Van-Bruntise, 9. variegatum, 9. A. Corolla tubular or funnelform, the tube longer than the lobes. 1. paucifldrum, Wats. Perennial, erect and branched, somewhat villous, 1-2 ft. : Ifts. 8-13 pairs, about 1 in. long: fls. yellowish, tubular, the tube 1-1 % in. long, much longer than the lobes, solitary or loosely corym- bose, long-pedunculate; stamens bearded at base, about equaling the corolla: caps, oblong. Mex. — The color is said to be a good clear yellow, tinged red outside. Offered by J. W. Manning in 1892, but subsequently dropped. 2. confertum, Gray. Perennial, with a thick woody rhizome, sticky, smelling of musk, 9-18 in. high: Ifts. very small and so crowded as to seem whorled: infl. a dense head; fls. honey-scented, deep blue, %-l in. long; corolla narrowly funnel-shaped; filaments naked or nearly so and not dilated at base. Rockies and Sierras. Gn. 10:506. G.C. II. 24: 12; III. 27:237. G.M. 55:459. G.W. 7, p. 356.— Intermediate between Pole- monium and Gilia. 3. mellitum, A. Nels. (P. confertum var. meWdum, Gray). An attractive species with white or pale fls., the 3091. Polemonium reptans. The leaflets are often much broader. ( X M) plant usually taller than P. confertum and the infl. more lax and leafy and becoming racemose or spike-like: corolla fully 1 in. long, the lobes only one-third or one- fourth the length of the tube: herbage heavily musk- scented, fls. honey-scented (whence the name). Rocky Mts. Nev. Gn.W. 25:557. AA. Corolla campanulate to rotate, the tube mostly shorter than the lobes. B. Plants low, with thickened rootstocks: Ifts. seldom y^in. long. 4. humile, Willd. (P. Richardsonii, Graham). Low, slender plant from somewhat creeping rootstocks, about 9 in. high: Ifts. 15-21, 2-6 lines long: fls. bell- shaped, blue or purplish. July, Aug. Arctic regions. B.M. 2800 (yellow eye). G.C. II. 19:793. B.R. 1303 (as P. cserulewn var. piliferum). — It has the odor of ripened grapes. Brand combines this plant with P. lanatum, Pallas, of the Arctic Zone and the Altai re- gion, making this form P. lanatum var. humile, Brand, with a wide range in the high N. P. Richardsonii, referred here, was raised from seeds collected at Great Bear Lake. The plant cult, as P. Richardsonii grows about 18 in. high, and bears profusely of bright blue fls. (varying to white in var. dloum, Hort.); probably the best of the genus, and in need of botanical study. Aside from references above, portraits occur in Gn. 78, p. 615; G.M. 45:494; Gn.W. 5:757; J.H. III. 54:101. Var. pulchellum, Gray (P. pulchellum, Bunge. P. lanatum var. pulchellum, Brand). Differs in having smaller fls. ranging from violet and lavender to nearly white and in the viscid pubescence, which is minute. Arctic coast and southward according to Gray, but restricted by Brand to Asia (Altai region). 5. pulcherrimum, Hook. (P. pumilum var. pulchel- lum, Rydb.). By Gray considered to be a more viscid lax or diffuse and small-fld. form of P. humile var. pulchellum, the corolla violet varying to white, and with narrower lobes. By Brand it is made to comprise the American forms passing as P. humile var. pulchellum, with much smaller fls.: sts. erect, more or less pilose and glandular- viscid, 10 or 12 in. or less high: radical Ivs. numerous, the Ifts. 17-27, small, ovate, obtuse and entire; st.-lvs. few: fls. in terminal corymbs, the corolla very variable, usually bicolored (blue with white tube), 5-8 lines long, the lobes oblong and much exceeding the short tube: caps, ovoid, much shorter than the calyx. High Rocky Mts. and northward. B.M. 2979. B.R. 1304 (as P. humile}. Gt. 9 : 292 (as P. pulchellum). BB. Plants weak and rather low, with a short rootstock: Ifts. y^-1 y?, in. long. 6. reptans, Linn. GREEK VALERIAN. Fig; 3091. Height 1 ft. or less: slender, weak and diffuse but never creeping (as the name would indicate): foliage not viscid or glandular; Ifts. 5-15, from lance-oblong to broad-ovate, acute, entire: fls. light blue, %in. across, in a loose panicle-like cluster terminating the st.; corolla J^-^in. long in cult., about ^4in. or more broad; calyx-lobes acute or obtuse; stamens not exserted: caps, about 3-seeded. Open woods, N. Y. to Ala., west to Minn, and Kans. April, May. B.M. 1887.— Said to be an easy prey to snails, especially in winter, when they attack the rootstocks. 7. carneum, Gray. St. lax or loosely branching, 1-2 ft. high, with a horizontal rootstock: Ifts. 5-17, often 1^2 in- long) ovate to oblong-lanceolate: fls. salmon or flesh-color fading to purplish, 1-1% m- across, the corolla-lobes rounded-obovate; calyx deeply 5-cleft, with ovate-oblong lobes. Mountain woods, Calif., Ore. G.C. III. 48 : 134.— Offered in Ore., 1892, but probably not in cult. now. Closely allied to P. reptans. BBB. Plants strong and erect, mostly tall, with slender rootstocks or roots: Ifts. usually large. c. Fls. not blue (seldom running to violet), yellowish, cream-color or salmon. 8. foliosissimum, Gray. Sts. solitary and erect, 1-3 ft. tall, simple or branched, hairy at base and viscid above, from a woody short rootstock: herbage strong- scented; Ivs. many; Ifts. lanceolate to ovate-lanceo- POLEMONIUM POLIANTHES 2731 late, usually less than 1 in. long: fls. commonly white or cream-colored, rarely violet, an inch or less long, corymbose-cymose. the corolla twice the length of the calyx: stamens and style not exserted: caps, nearly globose. Rocky Mts.— Cult, some years ago, but per- haps never offered in Amer. cc. Fls. blue (to white). 9. caeruleum, Linn. JACOB'S LADDER. CHARITY. Fig. 3092. Stout perennial herb, erect and leafy, 1-3 ft.: st. lightly hairy or nearly smooth, more or less glandular, angled: radical Ivs. forming dense tufts, on petioles 6 in. or more long, the Ifts. 11-21, lanceolate and mostly acuminate, entire; st.-lvs. smaller, very short-petioled or sessile near top of st.: fls. blue, many drooping in a panicle (frs. erect), 1 in. or less diam., the stamens not exserted; style pro- truded: corolla-lobes broad and spreading, subacute or mucronulate : calyx cam- panulate, with oblong acute lobes: caps, included in the calyx. Eu., mostly in copses and along streams, in moist or wet ground. Var. album, Hort. (P. album, Hort. . with white fls., is almost as popular as the type. Var. variegatum, Hort., has va- riegated foliage. There is also a dwarf form. — P. cserulfum is widespread and variable, and the geographic forms are sometimes set off as species. Var. himalaya- num, Baker (P. himalaya- num, Baker. P. grandi- florum, Hort., not Benth. P. caeruleum var. grandi- florum, J. W. Manning . is the Himalayan form, with large fls. \Yi in. across, lilac-blue or darker, the rounded lobes nearly Hm- across: calyx and axis of panicle very hairy. In separating the American forms, much is made of the character of the root- stock. Greene, who has studied them, describes the true P. csrruhum of Eu. and of gardens as having a tap-root surmounted by a stout short simple or branch- ing very leafy crown standing above ground. Hooker, however, speaks of the rootstock as short, creeping. The E. American representative, native in cold swamps and along streams, Vt. to Md., and probably not in regular cult., is now separated as P. Van-Bruntiae, Brit.; from P. caeruleum it differs in having horizontal stout rootstocks, more leafy st., exserted stamens, rounded (not mucronulate) petals, accrescent calyx which becomes twice or three times the size of that of P. cszruleum, broader and fewer Ifts., and fewer ovules. It bears considerable resemblance to P. reptans, but that species has a diffuse habit, fls. hah" the size, sta- mens included and calyx lobed only about one-third its length, the lobes obtuse. This species bears the name of Mrs. Van Brunt. The Rocky Mountain representative is separated as P. occidentale, Greene, differing from P. cscruleum in having slender rootstocks, upper part of st. viscid-pubescent, Ifts. narrower, lanceolate, stamens only the length of the corolla, the fruiting calyx not nearly so large and the lobes obtuse or obtusish. L_ jj. B.f 3092. Polemonium weroleum. POLlANTHES (name discussed below). Amaryl- lidacese. TUBEROSE. Tender summer-flowering bulb, producing long spikes of very fragrant blossoms; by successional plantings, it may be had at different seasons; commonly double-flowered. Developed Ivs. mostly basal, those on the st. short: perianth white; tube long, narrowly funnel-shaped, curved; segms. short, subequal; stamens affixed at the middle of the tube, not exserted; ovary 3-celled, free at apex; stigmas 3, ovate, falcate: fr. crowned by the persistent perianth; seeds flat. — As defined by Rose (1903), the genus contains about a dozen species, Mexican, and Bravoa is not clearly distinct. The com- mon tuberose, P. tuberosa, is unknown in a wild state; if it had its origin from any of the Mexican species, it must have come from P. gracilis. Possibly it is native in the Andes of S. Amer. The name Polianthes was given to the tuberose by Linnaeus in 1737 in his "Genera Plantarum." Unfortunately he wrote ''Polyanthes in another work, published in 1737. This was probably an error. Some writers have changed the spelling to Polyanthus, supposing that Linnaeus had in mind the idea of "many- flowered," from polys and anthos. Others have sup- posed he derived it from polis, a city. It seems probable, however, as Ben- tham & Hooker suggest, that Linnaeus had in mind polios, "shining," -"white," and anthos, "flower," which is much more applicable to the tuberose than are the other derivations. Consult Polyanthus for other mean- ings of the word Polyan- thus. The name "tuberose" is derived from tuberosa, this plant being the tube- rous hyacinth as distin- guished from the bulbous hyacinth. The name there- fore is tuber-ose,not tube-rose. tuberosa, Linn. TUBEROSE. Fig. 3093. Rootstock tuberous: sts. in clusters. 2-3 M ft. high: basal Ivs. 6-9 to a st., 1-1 Vi ft. long, Kin. or less wide, bright green, reddish near the base: st. with 8-12 reduced lys.: fls. 1M-2K in. long, pure waxy white, borne in pairs in a lax spike; segms. 1A~% in. long, the tube bent only near the base; filaments attached on upper part of corolla. B.M. 1817. B.R. 63. R.H. 1882, p. 429. F. 1881 p 27. Gn. 47, p. 330. It runs into double forms. Gn.W. 16:10. P BUssii, Hort., is a garden hybrid between Bravoa geminiflora and P. tuberosa.— P. grdcilis. Link & Otto (P. tuberosa yar. gracilis. Baker), supposed to be Mexican, is distinguished by slen- der habit and narrower Ivs.: perianth-tube long and slender; segms. linear. Possibly the original form of P. tuberosa. — P. maculata, Mart., is a Manfreda (p. 1983). ^ jj g j Culture of the tuberose for bloom. There are only two objections to the tuberose: its odor is too powerful for many persons, and, like the calla lily, it has funeral associations. Therefore, fashion has deserted it, at least in North America. Neverthe- less great quantities of the bulbs are grown in this 2732 POLIANTHES POLIANTHES country, and a good part of them are used here as well as exported. The tuberose is more popular than ever in Europe. It will always be a standard florists' flower, for the people like it, whatever fashion may decree. For the home garden, the bulbs are best procured in spring and planted outdoors after all danger of frost is over. The common tall-growing double sort is pre- ferred for this purpose, largely because the fls. open better during the unfavorable dry weather which often occurs in October. Cover the bulb about an inch with fine light soil. A bulb planted out June 1 will bloom in late summer or fall. Before frost comes, take up the bulbs and store them over winter in a rather warm (50° F.) dry place where no frost will touch them. If kept moist and cool during winter the bulbs are likely to rot at the center. Sound tubers will always be green at top or show some sign of life at the growing-point. The others are not worth planting. In the far North where the season is short, tuberose bulbs may be started indoors about the middle of May, the tubers being placed on a layer of damp moss. By florists, tuberoses are chiefly grown for summer and fall bloom. It is very difficult to force tuberoses so as to bloom from January to March, but they can be forced with comparative ease to bloom from April to June. Also flow- ers may readily be secured for November and December by re- tarding the bulbs. In forcing, the bulbs are started about the first of January, being placed close to- gether in boxes only 3 inches deep, with 2 inches or so of moss on the bottom. These boxes are placed over the pipe where a tempera- ture of 75° may be maintained. In four to five weeks the tubers will have sent roots all through the moss, and they should then be potted in 4- to 5-inch pots, or planted in a bench containing 4 or 5 inches of soil. The temperature should never be less than 75°, and 80° is better. For May and June bloom, successional batches may be planted at inter- vals of three or four weeks after New Year. The last crops will usually be the best. For November florists' bloom the bulbs are retarded in a cool dry place until the middle of August. The second batch should not be planted until about the middle of September. This lot should give good December bloom. For summer blooming in the open ground for florists, the form known as the "Tall Double" is the most to be preferred. In this variety, the flowers open better and are a clearer and purer white than those of the Pearl. The Albino is a single white tuberose, blooming in July and August. It is a very floriferous variety, with flowers that lack the brown or stained tint of some of the older forms. The odor is less powerful, and therefore more pleasant, than that of the ordinary tuberose. There are several interesting forms. PETER HENDERSON & Co. 3093 Polianthes toberoBa. Commercial production of tuberose bulbs. Tuberose bulbs were formerly grown extensively for commercial purposes in Italy, and are grown in a small way at the present time in South Africa, although the African bulbs are not in much favor with European florists because the bulbs ripen and are shipped in mid- summer and a great number fail to bloom. The foreign- grown bulbs are not imported into the United States and, owing to the superiority of the American-grown tuberoses and the low price at which they are produced, they have driven the Italian-grown bulbs out of the American market. About 80 per cent of the American crop is exported. The larger part of the product of this country is grown in a limited area in the southeastern part of the state of North Carolina, although there has been some falling off in recent years. Tuberose bulb-culture in the southern states was first attempted by F. A. Newbury in Duplin County, North Carolina, in 1868. Beginning with a dozen bulbs, he propagated stock until, in 1888, the yield was about 1,000,000 bulbs. During these years the crop was cultivated entirely by hand and consequently was very expen- sive. The prices received at first were $40 a 1,000, but since then prices have declined each year as quantity increased until, in 1888, bulbs were selling at $6 to $8 a 1,000, and in 1915 at $5 to $7. In 1888, the late H. E. Newbury, a brother, bought out the business, and he and J. F. Groom, another grower who had propagated considerable stock, ex- tended the business greatly, introducing less expensive methods of cultivation. By use of the horse-plow they were enabled greatly to reduce the selling price and to stimulate demand for bulbs, so that the crop of 1900, within a radius of 20 miles of one point (Magno- lia, North Carolina), amounted to 6,000,000 bulbs, selling at wholesale in carload lots at $3.50 a 1,000. This yield was secured from over 300 acres. The total yield of the American-grown stock in 1915 was prob- ably about 2,000,000 first-size bulbs. The crop is set in April, after the soil has been thoroughly pulverized. It is then laid off in rows or furrows 22 inches apart; into these is sown fertilizer at the rate of 600 pounds to the acre. About 400 pounds of cottonseed-meal and 20 bushels of good wood-ashes to the acre have given the best results, although any reli- able fertilizer with a good percentage of potash is good. The fertilizer is thoroughly mixed with the soil by run- ning a plow with point only in the furrow. Into this the sets or "seed," as they are called, are carefully placed upright by hand and covered with plow. Usually the bulblets are rather slow in starting off, and just as they begin to break through, the soil, which has become hardened or crusted, is raked or broken up. This assists the plant in getting up and also destroys any growth of grass which may have started. Cultivation is per- formed chiefly with a cotton-plow, using the sweeps to put earth to the plant and destroying any grass in the rows. Tillage is required every two weeks until August ; an occasional hoeing between plants by hand is neces- sary in order to loosen the soil and destroy weeds and grass not reached by the plow. The crop is matured and gathered between October 15 and November 15. The tops by this time have reached a length of 18 to 20 inches; these are cut off at the ground with a sharp weeding-hoe and the bulbs are plowed out very much as potatoes are. Women then lift out and shake off the earth, and the offsets are removed by hand. These sets are the seed-stock for next season. The bulbs are graded POLIAXTHE3 POLLEN 2733 as to size, carried to curing-houses, and by some placed on shelves to dry or cure out. The bulbs must be stirred or have their position changed every few days to pre- vent mold and rot. This stirring wears or breaks off the roots and tops of a good percentage of the bulbs, making a less sightly bulb, though not injuring its flowering property. The better and more modern way is to gather them by the roots in bunches of about ten, tie them together with a small cord and hang them upon frames, walls, and overhead of house and allow them to cure without disturbing them during the process of drying. While this would seem a rather expensive way, it really costs but a few cents a thousand, being done by small negro children at nominal wages. In recent years, artificial heat of 80° to 100° by means of furnace and flues similar to those used in tobacco-barns has been introduced, to hasten curing. Four to eight weeks are required properly to cure the bulbs for shipping, so that the first shipments begin to move about Decem- ber 1 to 10. Before shipment the bulbs are again sorted in order to get out any undersized bulbs that may have been overlooked; they are also counted and packed in paper-lined barrels, holding from 700 to 1,300, the number varying with size of bulbs and size of barrels. About 200 barrels, or 150,000 to 175,000 bulbs, con- stitute a carload. The bulk of the exports go through New York dealers. A few are exported direct. The variety mostly grown is Dwarf Pearl. This sends up a flowering stem about 15 inches long, the blossom being double. The Tall Double is similar except that the flowering stem is longer, about 24 inches or over. The White or Orange Flower has a long stem, with the blossom single or resembling the blossom of an orange tree. The Albino, a freak from the Pearl, is a dwarf single or orange-flowered variety, but its tendency in other latitudes is to go back to the double type, and consequently is likely to disappoint the grower who expects a single blossom. The foliage of all the above is a rich green. The variegated-leaved variety has a beautiful stripe of golden or silver hue on the outer edge of the foliage. The blossom is single and the habit is dwarf. The tuberose is treated as an annual and has to be replaced each season. A "number one" bulb (referring to size) is not less than 4 inches in circumference and measures up to 6 inches and over. ''Mammoth" bulbs are 6 to 8 inches in circumference; only a very small part of the crop will attain such measurement. A "number two" bulb is less than 4 inches and over 3 inches in circumference, and while in the South these will bloom as well as the larger bulbs they are not much sought by the northern dealers. The tuberose is a rather slow grower; hence in the North, where the frosts are much earlier than in the South, it is likely to get caught before its spike of bloom matures. To succeed in getting flowers in the North they should be started in pots under glass or in rooms free of frost in April and transplanted to open ground in early June. The soil should be deeply pul- verized. Choose a sandy loam if possible, and fertilize with manure containing a good percentage of potash. Keep the earth about the plant thoroughly stirred and do not let the plant suffer for moisture. H. E. NEWBURT. W. R. NEWBURY.t POLIOTHtRSIS (Greek, polios, white or grayish white and thyrsos; referring to the grayish white color of the inflorescence). Flacourtiacex. A deciduous tree allied to Idesia and differing chiefly in the valvate sepals, the 3 styles and in the capsular fr. Fls. monoe- cious, apetalous, with ovate to lanceolate valvate sepals; stamina te fls. with many free short stamens and a minute rudimentary ovary; pistillate fls. with a superior ovary, 3 reflexed styles 2-parted at the apex: fr. a caps, dehiscent into 3-4 valves; seeds many, winged. Similar in habit to Idesia, but Ivs. longer, purplish when unfolding; it is apparently of the same hardiness, as it has proved hardy in favorable localities at the Arnold Arboretum. Its cult, and prop, is the same as Idesia. The only species is P. sinensis, Oliver. Slender tree, to 40 ft.: young branchlets pubescent: Ivs. long-petioled, ovate to ovate-oblong, acuminate, 5- nerved at the base, dentate, pubescent below or nearly glabrous, 3—7 in. long: fls. in loose terminal panicles 4-8 in. long, greenish white, J4~Hm- across; sepals ovate to lanceolate, whitish tomentose outside: caps. %in. long, ovate-oblong. Cent. China. July. H.I. 19:1885. ALFRED REHDER. POLLEN, POLLINATION. Pollen is the fecunda- ting material contained in the anther, usually in the form of many very small grains. In many orchids it is in the form of masses of cohering parts or grains, termed pollinia. Pollen represents the male or fertiliz- ing phase of reproduction in seed plants. Forms of pollen are shown in Figs. 3094-3097. All gymnosperms (conifers, and the like) and angio- sperms (true flowering or ovary-bearing plants) normally reproduce by means of seeds. For the fertilization of the ovule, in order that seed may result, the interven- tion of the pollen is necessary. The "dust of the flower" is therefore of far more interest to the horticulturist than this old popular name would imply. Studies in hybridization and self-sterility have long made evi- dent the practical importance of a knowledge of pol- len. Every plant provides for the production of this material, and usually in definite pollen-bearing parts termed stamens. The stamens are organs of the flower, and as essential as the carpels. The pollen is produced in definite sacs or compartments of the anther, compris- ing the tip of the stamens; and V7nen the pollen is ripe, or mature, the fine grains are set free in quantity by the rupture of the inclosing sacs. The abundance of pollen produced may suggest wasteful management of the plant's resources, but a liberal supply of this sub- stance is necessary. Although it requires but a single one of the small grains to fertilize a single ovule and produce a seed, pollen-grains are produced often a thousandfold more abundantly than ovules. The best offspring are usually produced, when cross-fertilization occurs, and in the transfer of pollen from plant to plant it is only a small part which can reach its destination. There are manjr chances and such great losses that abundance of pollen is a necessary provision. 3094. Pollen-grains of Primula obcoaica (below) and Salvia. (Magnified) 3095. Pollen- 3096. Oddly marked grains of pollen-grain of Schaue- Browallia. ria flavicoma. (Magnified) (Magnified) In general, flowers are pollinated by the wind and by insects; that is, pollen is transported by these two agencies. Flowers principally dependent upon the wind for pollination are termed anemophilous, while those visited by insects are designated entomophilous. These distinguishing terms may also be applied to the pollen itself. Anemophilous pollen is of a more or less spherical form, readily yielding to the wind, and correlated with this is a dry and inadherent outer surface. Such is the case, for example, in the various families to which the oak, willow, grasses, and pine belong, all of which plants are devoid of any stock of brilliant color or rich odors that might attract bug, moth, butterfly, or bee. 2734 POLLEN POLLEN The pollen of the pine has even developed bladders, so as to be borne more lightly upon the wind. On the other hand, those plants largely dependent upon the visits of insects for pollination may have the pollen- grains provided with some kind of spines, ridges, fur- rows, or viscid coatings that they may the more readily adhere to hairy limbs or other surfaces of the insect which may come in contact with them. Here, then, is to be found a reason for the beauty and specializa- tion of external wall. In entomophilous pollen the elliptical form of grain predominates, but the general shape is extremely various; and the plants producing such pollen are usually provided with beauty of flower, fragrance, or other insect attraction. In order that the pollen which has been transported to the stigma may be effective, it must be healthy. Experiments have shown that weak and poorly nour- ished orchard trees often produce ineffective pollen. The nature of the season may also have much influence upon its character, continued rains causing great losses by preventing the maturity of this product as well as by mechanical injury and by precluding the winged carriers. Most plants have some special pro- vision for the protection of the pollen against rain; that is, either by the closing of the flower under moist con- ditions, or by the location of the anthers in a sheltered tube, under projecting hairs, lobes, or other corolla appendages. The individual particles of pollen are in the form of delicate grains only readily visible in some quantity, as in powdery masses. At the time when they are set free, the grains are generally entirely dis- tinct from one another, to be blown about by an accidental wind or carried by visiting in- sects. In some cases, however, the grains are jjjj~ bound together loosely ^ or by means of deli- cate glutinous threads (Rhododendron); they may be closely united in fours (heath family) ; or the whole tissue of an anther or its divi- sions may remain intact as ppllinia (some orchids, milkweed, and others). A particular species of plant will produce pollen quite constant in form and attire; but an aggregation of cul- tivated varieties originated from a single species may show considerable variation in this regard. Neverthe- less, form, size, color, surface markings, texture of wall, and translucency of contents are not fixed qualities even for related genera or species. See Figs. 3094- 3097 for different forms of pollen. When the healthy pollen of one plant falls upon the ripe stigma of a plant of the same species, the grams germinate in the sugary excretion of the stigma by the protrusion of a tube which penetrates the style and effects fertilization as described under Fertilization (Vol. Ill, page 1221). Furthermore, it is well known that while the flowers of many plants may be readily fertilized by their own pollen, the offspring are stronger when pollen from another plant or another variety has had access to the flower. Sometimes pollen from a foreign variety is absolutely essential to the best fruit- formation. This is particularly true of certain varieties of the pear. A poor quality of fruit can be prevented only by growing together different varieties. Again, although a plant may readily pollinate itself, yet" the pollen from another plant or variety may be prepo- tent over its own. That is to say, if the plant be pol- linated by its own pollen along with that of a foreign 3097. Pollen-grains of Abutilon stria turn (above). Bedding gera- nium (Pelargonium hortorum, on right). Chrysanthemum (on lower left). (All magnified) variety, that of the foreign variety will usually effect fertilization. This can be explained only on physiologi- cal grounds, and at present merely from a theoretical point of view. Any pollen penetrates and effects fertili- zation because it is attracted, first by substances in the style, and later by the egg-cell itself. When a foreign variety is prepotent it is so because it is more readily attracted, due, we may say, to a greater difference of potential between the two elements, the two elements from the same plant being more in equilibrium and less markedly attractive. As regards pollen from a foreign species, it seems to be the rule that hybridiza- tion does not occur so readily, and we must then assume that the differences have become so great as to cause repulsion. The detailed development of pollen is highly inter- esting and instructive on morphological grounds, but in this place a very brief account of the formation of the grains will suffice. The developmental phases in Big- nonia (Pyrostegia) venusta will serve as an example. A cross-section of the young flower-bud will show that in the anther-sac regions, semicircular layers of large well- nourished cells (called archesporial cells) are differ- entiated. These cells divide and the layer increases in extent, yet in this case it is always only one cell in thickness. When these cells have finally attained con- siderable size and provided themselves with a thick wall, they divide more or less simultaneously; and then each of these daughter-cells divides again by a division following quickly upon the first. Each cell has then formed four new cells within its original walls. The new cells remain thus united in fours until each is pro- vided with a stout wall of its own, and then they separate. Each cell is then an immature pollen-grain, and technically a spore, that is, exactly homologous with the microspores of the vascular cryptogams. As a rule, before these pollen-grains are set free, another change occurs denoting maturity. This consists in the division of the nucleus of the spore in such a way that two cells of unequal size result (in some conifers several small cells are formed). On germination the large cell, which now incloses the smaller, protrudes the tube which penetrates the style; whereas the nucleus of the small cell divides into two, and one of these fuses with the egg-cell in the ovule, thus fertilizing it. B. M. DUGGAK. Pollination. In botanical usage, pollination is the transfer of pollen from the anther to the stigma. In horticultural usage, particularly with reference to orchard fruits, the term is often applied in a general way to designate all the influences concerned in the setting of fruit. For the benefit of those who are uninformed in botany it may be said that pollination is concerned primarily with the "essential organs" of the flower, — the stamens and pistils. The stamens bear the pollen in their anthers, and they die after the pollen is shed. The pistils bear the ovary or seed-case, the style, and the stigma. The pollen falls upon the stigma. In some plants these organs are separated in different flowers or even on different plants. (Fig. 3098.) Aside from those cases in which the stamens and pistils are so intimately associated that the pollen falls directly upon the stigma, flowers are pollinated mainly in two ways: by wind and by insects. The grasses, sedges, and pines are examples of wind-pollinated plants. The flowers of wind-pollinated plants are usually incon- spicuous and without nectar or fragrance. They pro- duce a great abundance of light dry pollen, which is wafted away by the slightest breeze and is often carried many miles by a strong wind. The pistils of these plants are long and feathery, and thus are well adapted to catch flying pollen. The flowers of insect-pollinated plants, on the other hand, are usually showy, and have nectar or fragrance, POLLEN POLLEN 2735 or both. The pollen is more or less moist or sticky, so that it is not easily blown away. Insects are prob- ably attracted by the showy colors and by the perfume, both of which bespeak the presence of nectar. As the insect reaches down for the nectar, which is near the bottom of the flower, some parts of its body are almost sure to become dusted with pollen. When the insect visits another flower some of this pollen may be brushed upon the stigma and a fresh supply received. This pollen likewise may be carried to another flower, and so on. Thus cross-pollination, or the transfer of pollen from the anthers of one flower to the pistil of another, is accomplished. Many flowers, notably the orchids, have special modifications of structure appar- ently developed for the purpose of securing cross-pollination by insects and pre- venting self-pollination. The bodies of some insects, also, have corresponding adaptations which insure the cross-pollina- tion of certain flowers which they are in the habit of visiting most frequently. This correlation between flowers and their insect visitors has been the subject of extended observation. ''Fertilization of Flowers/' by Herman Muller, contains a bibliog- raphy of the subject up to 1886. For the distinction between fertilization and pol- lination, see the article Fertilization, page 1221. The value of crossing to plants was first clearly proved by Charles Darwin in 1859.* From the observations of Kolreuter, Sprengel, Knight, and his own exhaustive experiments, Darwin showed that con- tinued self-fertilization is likely to result in inferior offspring; while cross-fertiliza- tion, within certain limits, gives greater vigor to the offspring. Cross-fertilization between different flowers on the same plant usually has no appreciable advantage. The probable reason for this is that the plant resulting from the union of unlike parents, as in cross-fertilization between flowers on different plants, is more variable than one resulting from self-fertilization or crossing between different flowers on the same plant, and hence has a better chance of fitting into new conditions. Plants are endlessly modified to secure cross-fertilization and avoid self-fertiliza- tion. The principal means by which this end is gained are: (1) Special contrivan- ces in the structure of the flower which favor cross-pollination. (2) A difference in the time at which the pollen matures and the stigmas become receptive in the same flower (dichogamy). This condi- tion is very noticeable in some varieties of orchard fruits. The prematurity of the pistil is more common than the prematurity of the stamens. (3) Self- sterility, which is the inability of a flower to set fruit with its own pollen. Self-sterility is not usually due to a deficiency of pollen or to defective pistils. The pollen-grains often germinate on the stigma, but fertilization does not take place. The embryological reasons for this are not clearly understood. The ulti- mate cause of self-sterility in the grape tit ~ Sta 3098. Structure of the flower, to illustrate pollination. 1. Top. — The structure of a plum blossom: se, sepals; p, petals; «to, stamens; o, ovary; *, style; st, stigma. The pistil is composed of the ovary, style, and stigma. It contains the female part. The stamens are tipped with anthers in which the pollen, or male part, is borne. The ovary, o, ripens into the fruit. 2. Fuchsia, showing ovary at a, 3 stamens (one is removed) and the projecting style. 3. Buttercup, showing many small pistils in the center and stamens surrounding them. 4. Bottom. — Phlox, showing the 3-parted stigma, and the stamens included in the tube. has been studied by Dorsey. Cyto- logical studies of the pollen of self- sterile varieties showed distinct de- generative processes in the generative nucleus, or arrested development pre- vious to mitosis in the microspore nucleus. Dorsey concludes that self- sterility in the grape is not due to hybridity alone, as suggested by Beach, since there are both fertile and sterile hybrid varieties; but is due also to deep-seated influences operating to produce declinism and dioeci- ousness, the native species of grapes being mostly dioecious. Dorsey finds the nuclei of the pollen of many self-sterile varieties of native plums to be degenerated and disorganized. Degeneration of the pollen cannot be the main cause of self- sterility, however, since two self-sterile varieties may be mutually fruitful when planted together. About sixty species of plants are known to be more or less self-sterile. (4) The separation of the sexes in different flowers or on different individuals. It is thought by some that there is a gradual evolution among some kinds of plants toward unisexuality, and that adaptations for insect-pollination, dichogamy, and self-sterility are steps in this process. Self-sterility has an important economic aspect in the culture of certain fruits. It is common in varieties of pears, apples, plums, and grapes; it is uncommon or unknown in cherries, peaches, raspberries, currants, gooseberries, and strawberries. Whenever isolated trees or large blocks of a variety blossom full year after year, but drop most of the fruit before it is half- grown, the variety may be self-sterile, provided the failure cannot be attributed to excessive vegetative vigor, marked lack of vigor, disease (especially scab, brown- rot, and fire blight), insect attack, unfavor- able weather during the blossoming sea- son, or other untoward circumstance. Self- sterile varieties are detected experiment- ally by inclosing the unopened blossoms in thin paper sacks, and dusting the pistils, when receptive, with the pollen produced by these blossoms ; or by emas- culating them and hand -crossing with pollen of the same variety. If very few fruits are produced from a large number of these selfed blossoms, but the variety fruits abundantly when crossed with other sorts, it is self-sterile. A few varieties of fruits are more or less self-fruitful, as distinct from self -sterile; they bear good fruit with their own pollen, but the fruits are seedless, as in the banana. Ewert found that many apples in Germany have this parthenocarpic development; that is, they grow without fertilization. It is not common in North American varieties of fruits. Self -sterility is not a constant factor in any variety. It appears to be almost as easily influenced by the conditions under which the plant is grown as is the shape or color of the fruit. A variety is fre- quently self-sterile in one locality and self-fertile in another. Waite found sev- eral varieties of Japanese plums self- sterile, but concluded, "With plums, as 2736 POLLEN POLLEN with other fruits, self-sterility is purely relative; under favorable conditions these varieties are able to set fruit without cross-pollination." Powell proved that in different parts of the Delaware-Maryland peninsula the Kieffer pear is self-sterile, partially self-fertile, or completely self-fertile. The Ben Davis apple is self-sterile in Vermont, according to Waugh, but self- fertile in Kansas, in the experiments of Greene. Bartlett pear is self-sterile in most of the Atlantic States, but usually self-fertile on the Pacific Coast. Beach found that varieties of grapes which are weakly self-fertile vary in this respect in different localities, and even in different parts of the same vineyard, being entirely self-fertile in one place and completely self-sterile in another. It is quite evident that the degree of adaptation of a variety to its environment of soil and climate has much to do with its ability to fruit abundantly with its own pollen. It is not possible, therefore, to give a list of varieties that are self-sterile, and another list of those that are self-fertile, that would have more than local applica- tion. There are certain sorts, however, that are less dependable in this respect than others. Out of eighty- seven varieties of apples tested in Oregon by Lewis, fifty-nine were self-sterile, fifteen self-fertile, and thir- teen partially self-fertile. Powell found practically all the commerical varieties of apples in Delaware self- sterile, except several summer sorts. Some of the prominent commercial varieties that are usually more or less uncertain are: Arkansas (Mammoth Black Twig), Gravenstein, Grimes, Jonathan, King (of Tompkins), Limbertwig, Paragon, Northern Spy, Ortley, Rome, Spitzenburg (Esopus), Twenty Ounce. Winesap. Among those generally quite dependable are Ben Davis, Baldwin, Oldenburg, Rhode Island Greening, Yellow Transparent, Yellow Newtown. Anjou, Bartlett, Clairgeau, Clapp, Howell, Kieffer, Lawrence, Nelis, and Sheldon pears are frequently uncertain, while Angouleme (Duchess), Bosc, Flemish, and Seckel are usually self-fertile. Practically all the varieties of Japanese and native plums are self-sterile, the single exception, according to Waugh, being Robin- son. Wild Goose and Miner are notoriously infertile. Hooper and Backhouse report that the European varie- ties are largely self-sterile in England, but in America the defection is confined chiefly to Coe, French Prune, and Italian Prune. The experiments of Close, Whitten, and Howard, indicate that all the leading varieties of peaches are self-fertile, and are not benefited by cross- pollination. In Germany, however, Ewart finds peaches "sparingly self-sterile." No cherries are known to be self-sterile, although Napoleon, Belle de Choisy, and Reine Hortense have that reputation among com- mercial growers. Of one hundred and forty-five varieties of grapes tested by Beach, thirty-one were self-fertile, forty-one self-sterile, and seventy-three uncertain. Brighton, Herbert, Lindley, Merrimac, Salem, Wilder, and other hybrid varieties are decidedly unfruitful with their own pollen; while Concord, Delaware, Diamond, Niagara, Winchell, and Worden are among those strongly self- fertile. Reimer found the Scuppernong and other varie- ties of the Muscadine grape so defective in pollen that they are fruitful only when planted near male vines of the Muscadine. No varieties of the quince, raspberry, currant, gooseberry, or strawberry have been found self-sterile, but many varieties of strawberries lack well-developed stamens and so must be planted near perfect-flowered sorts. A self-sterile variety often may be made fruitful by planting near it another variety to supply pollen; or by top-grafting part of the tree with cions of another sort. No benefit is derived from other trees of the same variety, even if brought from a distance, since all are but divisions of the same original seedling. In the selection of a pollinizer, several points must be con- sidered: (1) The two sorts must blossom approximately at the same tune in order that cross-pollination may be possible. The transfer of pollen from one variety to another is performed mainly by insects. Waugh and Backhouse have shown that practically none of the pollen of the plum and other stone-fruits is carried by wind, it being moist and sticky. The same is true of pears, but apple pollen is somewhat drier and is wind- blown to a slight extent. The honey-bee is the most important pollen-carrier. Hooper estimates that in England 80 per cent of the cross-pollination is done by the hive bee, 15 per cent by various wild bees, especially the bumblebee, and 5 per cent by miscellaneous insects. In tree-fruits it is necessary to select varieties that come into bearing at about the same age, otherwise one might be without cross-pollination for the first two or three years. Several state experiment stations haye published lists of varieties blossoming at the same tune, for the guidance of the planter. See New York (Geneva) Bulletin No. 407. (2) There should be an affinity between the two varieties, so that the self-sterile sort may find the pollen of the other acceptable. This can be determined only by hand-crossing. Beach found that the pollen of self-sterile varieties of grapes is practicably incapable of fertilizing other varieties; but this does not hold for tree-fruits since two self -sterile varieties planted together usually are mutually fruit- ful. Powell found no affinity between Paragon and Stayman apples; Kerr none between Wild Goose and Whitaker plums, and there are a number of other instances. Undoubtedly some varieties are more accep- table as pollinizers of a self -sterile variety than others. Spitzenburg apples produced by Lewis from Jonathan pollen averaged 144 grams in weight; from Baldwin pollen, 157 grams. In general, however, varieties of the same species that blossom simultaneously cross-fertilize readily, and there is no appreciable and constant differ- ence in the fruit. (3) In commercial orchards the pollinizer should be a standard variety, valuable for market. (4) It should produce a large amount of pollen. Winesap produces little pollen; it would be unsatisfactory as a pollinizer for other sorts; Grimes, Ben Davis, and Rome are abundant pollen-bearers. Cross-pollinated fruits may be larger and heavier than self-pollinated fruits, but there is rarely any other influence. The shape, color, flavor, and keeping qual- ity remain the same, regardless of the variety selected as a pollinizer. Kieffer pears pollinated with Seckel look and taste no different from Kieffer pears pollinated with Le Conte. Many supposed instances of the immediate influence of pollen have been recorded, but in most cases proof is lacking that the changes were not due to bud- variation. It cannot be doubted that this influence is exerted occasionally, but certainly much less fre- quently than is commonly supposed. In small orchards there is no need of mixing the varieties with special reference to cross-pollination. In orchards covering more than 10 acres, it is desirable to intersperse the varieties at regular intervals. It is more convenient in spraying, harvesting, and other orchard operations to plant the pollinizer in a solid row instead of mixing it in the rows with the self -sterile sort. If the pollinizer is not very valuable, one row in ten may be sufficient; but usually one in four to six is safer. If the pollinizer is a valuable variety, the two should be alternated in blocks of four to six rows each. It is not necessary to plant more than one yariety as a pollinizer. Orchard pollination, however, is a broader problem than the mere detection of varieties that are inclined to be unfruitful when planted alone, and discovering which are the best pollinizers for each of them. Experi- ments in crossing and observations in orchards indicate that nearly all varieties, whether self-sterile or self- fertile, will produce more or better fruit with foreign pollen than with their own. Powell found that some self-fertile trees of Kieffer in Delaware bore a light crop POLLEN with their own pollen. 4 per cent of the self-pollinated blossoms producing fruit; but bore a much heavier crop when pollinated with Duchess, Lawrence, and other varieties, 76 per cent of the crossed blossoms pro- ducing fruit. Yellow Xewtown is distinctly self-fer- tile in Oregon, yet Lewis noted a decided improvement in the fruit when Jonathan and Grimes pollen was used upon it. He concluded, "All varieties of pome- fruits, at least of apples and pears, even though they may be termed self-fertile, are benefited by having other varieties planted with them as pollenizers." The benefit will usually more than offset the slight incon- venience in orchard management occasioned by this mixed planting. The chief economic problem for the experimenter, therefore, is to determine what commer- cial varieties may be planted together for best results; and the rational course for the fruit-grower is to prac- tise mixed planting on the basis of these experiments. Those who wish to study the subject of fruit-pollina- tion in greater detail should consult the following publi- cations: Vermont Experiment Station Reports, 1896- 1900; Delaware Experiment Station Reports, 1900- 1902; Oregon Experiment Station Bulletin No. 104, Circular No. 20, Research Bulletin No. 1; New York (Geneva) Experiment Station Reports, 1892-1895; Bulletins Nos. 153, 157, 169, 223; Wisconsin Experiment Station Reports, 1894-1896; New York (Cornell) Experiment Station Bulletin No. 181; North Carolina State Experiment Station Bulletins Nos. 201, 209; United States Department of Agriculture, Division of Vegetable Pathology, Bulletin No. 5; Minnesota Experiment Station Bulletin No. 144: Missouri Experi- ment Station Bulletin No. 117; Virginia Experiment Station Report 1909-1910. S. W. FLETCHEB. POLLIA (named after van der Poll). Commdina- ccst. Perennial herbs: sts. ascending from a creeping base or often erect, sometimes stout: Ivs. very large: infl. terminal panicles either lax thyrsoid, or short and dense; sepals 3, persistent; petals 3, small, obovate, white or pale rose; stamens 6 or 3 and 3 staminodes; ovary 3-celled, 2- to many-seeded: fr. a globose or ellipsoid indehiscent caps. — About 18 species in Afr., India. Malaya. E. Asia, the Philippines, and Austral. P. condensala, C. B. Clarke. Nearly glabrous: sts. 2-6 ft. long, thick: Ivs. 12x3 in., lanceolate-obovate, acu- minate at either end: panicle 20-40-fld., dense: sta- mens 3, fertile. Trop. Afr. Var. variegata, Hort., differs from the type in having the long dark green, oblong- lanceolate Ivs. variegated with yellowish white. Trop. Afr. R.B. 34:407. — -Grown for ornament. POLYANTHUS. In common speech Polyanthus means the florists' flower supposed to be derived chiefly from Primula elatior or its allies. The "Poly- anthus Narcissus" of trade catalogues is one of the forms of Narcissus Tazetta, an old synonym of which was Xarcissus Polyanthos. Polyanthus may also mean the tuberose, Polianthes, which see. There is no genus known as Polyanthus. POLYBOTRYA (Greek, many and grapes; referring to the massed sporangia). Polypodiacese. A small group of tropical ferns somewhat related to Dryopteris, but characterized by having the sporangia massed and covering the entire under side of the fertile Ivs. as in Acrostichum, to which the species have been re- ferred: Ivs. 1-4 times pinnate, the fertile Ivs. reduced so in tissue that they consist of little more than lf.- skeletons, affording space for the production of the sporangia. osmundacea, HBK. Rootstock wide, climbing, with long, linear scales: sterile Ivs. 2-3 ft. long, the lower pinnae 8-10 in. long, with numerous slightly stalked segms., veins free; fertile Ivs. tripinnate, with the lower pinna 1-2 ft. long. 4-8 in. wide, with narrow, cylindric POLYGALA 2737 segms. J^-Min. long. W. Indies to Brazil. — Probably the handsomest of the climbing kinds. Another cult, species sometimes included in this genus is designated here Olfersia cervina (Acrostichum cervinum), which see. R. C. BENEDICT. POLYCALtMMA: Myriocephalus. POLYCYCNIS (Greek, many and swan, probably referring to the lip and column which together bear some resemblance to a swan). Orchidacex. Epiphytic herbs with very short vaginate 1-lvd. sts.. scarcely thickened to a fleshy pseudpbulb: If. broad, plicate- veined, contracted to the petiole: scapes erect from the rhizome, few-sheathed; fls. rather large, pedicelled; sepals subequal, free, spreading, narrow; petals similar to the sepals or at the base narrower and substipitate, labellum affixed to the base of the column, spreading, sometimes 2-auricled at the base, column elongated, slender: fr. a caps. — About 7 species in Trop. Amer. P. Chdrlesworthti, Hort. Infl. long and arching, bearing about 50 fls. which are 1 in. across; sepals broad, yel- lowish, closely mottled with pale red-brown, the upper abruptly turned back; petals linear, twisted, yellow, slightly marked with red at the base; Up long, narrow, brownish with whitish hairs. British Guiana. Intro, abroad and offered for sale there. The following species may have been cult.: P. barbata, Reichb. f. (Cycnbches barbatum, Lindl.); P. gratibsa, Endres & Reichb. f.; P. lepida, Lind. & Reichb. f.; P. musdfera, Reichb. f. (Cycnbches musciferum, Lindl. & Paxt.); and P. vittata, Reichb. f . (Houlletia vittata, Lindl.). Warmhouse plants. F. TRACT HUBBARD. POLYGALA (Greek, much milk; from the old idea that some species increased the flow of milk). Poly- galacese. MILKWORT. Annual or perennial herbs, sub- shrubs, shrubs or very seldom trees, sometimes planted in the open or some kinds raised under glass for the bloom. . Leaves alternate or rarely opposite or verticulate, with or without stipules: infl. racemes or spikes, ter- minal, lateral, or forked, rarely axillary; fls. showy or 3099. Polygala pautifolia. small, colors various; calyx with very dissimilar sepals, the lateral (inner) pair larger; petals rarely 5, usually reduced to 3 ; stamens 8; ovary 2-celled : fr. a compressed 2-celled wing-margined or wingless caps. — About 550 species scattered through the temperate and subtropical regions of the world and a few species in the tropics. Polygalas from a cultural standpoint may be grouped as hardy and tender species and the latter are some- times cultivated under glass, frequently outdoors in the South, as in southern California. There are about 2738 POLYGALA POLYGALA forty North American species but only a few of them have been offered by dealers in native plants. The hardy species should be grown in rather light soil, but they require some moisture and are best adapted to partially shaded positions. They may be raised from seed sown in the fall or early spring. The more commonly cultivated species are the exotic ones, espe- cially the shrubby Cape kinds which grow from 2 to 4 feet or more high, bearing subterminal racemes of large flowers. INDEX. acuminata, 10. alba, 1. amatymbica, 10. apopetala, 9. Chamsebuxus, 2. cordata, 5. cordifolia, 5. dalmacina, 7. Dalmaisiana, 7. dalmatiana, 7. grandiflora, 2, 6. grandis, 5. latifolia, 5. longiflora, 6. major, 5. myrtifolia, 6, 7. oppositifolia, 5. paucifolia, 1. polygama, 4. purpurea, 2. Senega, 3. speciosa, 8. virgata, 8. A. Plants hardy. B. Fls. showy, }4-%in. long. c. Keel beautifully fringed. 1. paucifolia, Willd. FLOWERING WINTERGREEN. GAYWINGS. FRINGED MILKWORT. FRINGED POLYGALA. Fig. 3099. Trailer, 3-6 in. high: upper Ivs. clustered, ovate, 1^2 in. long; lower Ivs. distant, small, and be- coming mere bracts at the base: fls. bright rosy pur- ple, varying to white, 1-4 in the axils of the upper Ivs. or appearing terminal. May, June. New Bruns. to Winnipeg, and Ga. Prefers moist woods and sphag- num bogs. B.M. 2852 (petals white). B.B. 2:361. Var. alba was once offered by a Mass, dealer in hardy plants, where it grows wild. One sometimes finds violet-fld. forms. The species bears cleistogamous fls. cc. Keel merely 4-lobed. 2. Chamaebuxus, Linn. BOX-LEAVED MILKWORT. Evergreen trailer: upper Ivs. lanceolate or elliptical, mucronate; lower Ivs. smaller, obovate: peduncles axillary and terminal, about 2-fld. ; fls. as many as 10 on a stalk, typically yellow, more or less reddish toward the end of the keel; stamens united only at the base. April-June. Eu., low heaths and woods to highest Alps. L.B. C. 6:593. B.M. 316 (wings white: petals white at base, yellow or red at tip). Var. grandiflora, .Gaudin (var. purpurea, Neilr.), has purple wings, set off by yellow pet- als. Gn. 13:36; 30: 148 (charming: wings rosy pink). BB. Fls. not showy. c. Infl. a spike; fls. not pedicelled. 3. Senega, Linn. SENECA SNAKEROOT. MOUNTAIN FLAX. Fig. 3100. Height 1 ft. or less: Ivs. 1-2 in. long: fls. white or greenish, 1^2 lines long; crest small, few-lobed. May, June. Rocky woods, New Bruns. to Rockies, south to N. C. to Mo. B.B. 2:360. L.B.C. 14:1380. B.M. 1051. — Bears no under- ground fls. Root used in medicine. 3100. Polygala Senega. ( xlA) cc. Infl. a raceme; fls. pedicelled. 4. polygama, Walt. Height 1 ft. or less: Ivs. 1 in. or less long: fls. purple or rose, rarely nearly white, 2-3 lines long; crest relatively large, laciniate. June, July. Dry soil, Nova Scotia to Lake of the Woods, S. Fla. to Texas. B.B. 2:360. — Bears numerous underground fls. AA. Plants tender. B. Habit shrubby, erect, 2-3 ft. high or more. c. Lvs. opposite. 5. oppositifSlia, Linn. Probably the only species in the genus with opposite Ivs.; an abnormal feature in the whole family. Tall slender shrub: racemes few-fld.; fls. large, purplish. S. Afr. B.M. 492. B.R. 636 — Harvey gives 8 botanical varieties, of which probably the commonest in cult, is var. cordata, Harv. (P. cordifolia, Thunb., not Presl. P. oppositifolia var. major, Lindl. P. oppositifolia cordifolia, Voss). Gla- brous or downy: Ivs. broadly cordate, acute or acumi- nate: fls. bright purple-red or purple-violet. B.M. 2438. B.R. 1146. L.B.C. 12:1189. Var. latifdlia, Ker (P. grandis, Hort.). Lvs. heart-shaped, acute, smooth: fls. large, beautiful purple-violet, bearded. cc. Lvs. alternate. D. Lateral petals 2-cut. 6. myrtiffilia, Linn. Readily told from P. virgata, its infl. being a few-fld., leafy raceme, while that of P. virgata is many-fld. and leafless. Densely branched shrub, 3-8 ft. high, with large, showy fls. near the ends of the branches: Ivs. flat, variable in shape, but not subulate: lateral petals 2-lobed, the posterior lobe ear- shaped, reflexed. S. Afr. Var. grandiflora, Hook. (P. grandiflora, Hort., and L.B.C. 13:1227, not Walt. P. longifldra, Dietr.). Fls. over 1 in. long. B.M. 3616. B.R. 669. G.W. 10, p. 629. 7. Dalmaisiana, Hort. (P. myrtifolia var. Dalmais- iana, Hort.), also often wrongly offered in the trade as P. dalmacina and P. dalmatiana. It resembles P. myrtifolia var. grandiflora very closely: Ivs. rather tend- ing to be alternate, sessile, rather glaucous as in P. myrtifolia: fls. in terminal racemes, rather large, purple or rosy magenta with the base of the keel whitened or almost white. R.H. 1844:193. Gt. 5:161. R.B. 25: 145. G.W. 8, p. 316. — P. Dalmaisiana is said to be a hybrid P. myrtifolia var. grandiflora (P. grandiflora) crossed by P. oppositifolia var. cordata (P. cordifolia}. The pictures show some slight verification of this, but many authorities treat the plant as a variety of P. myrtifolia; this species and its varieties are very com- monly cult, in Calif., particularly the one known in gardens as P. dalmacina or P. dalmatiana; this flowers all the time and is very popular. The popularity of P. Dalmaisiana in Calif, is an example of the persistence of a good thing in gardens, though almost unknown to botanists. The spelling dalmatiana shows that some gardeners have thought the name a geographical one. The plant was named after M. Dalmais, a French gardener, who raised it from seed in 1839. As known in the trade, P. Dalmaisiana is a free-blooming plant with rosy or purplish fls. It goes under three or four names. It makes a good pot-plant, but is somewhat bare of foliage. It blooms from the ends of the rip- ened growth. It can be had in flower almost any time. The odd color and shape of the fls., and its free blooming, make it very attractive. It roots only fairly well from cuttings. Usually it propagates better by layering. Put in rich loam with well-rotted manure. It will stand considerable frost. t>D. Lateral petals not 2-cut. 8. virgata, Thunb. Glabrous shrub, 2-5 or even 15 ft. high, with rod-like branches terminating in many- fld., leafless racemes of purple or flesh-colored fls.: anterior sepals distinct; wings obtuse. S. Afr. — The POLYGALA POLYGONATUM 2739 typical form is advertised in S. Calif., but in Eu. probably the only form cult, is var. speciosa, Harv. (P. speciosa, Sims). Glabrous: lower Ivs. obovate or cuneate, upper more linear, all obtuse: raceme long and lax: bracts soon deciduous. S. Afr. B.M. 1780. L.B.C. 7:621. B.R. 150. B. 1:43. 9. apopetala, T. S. Brandeg. Frutescent, 2-3 ft. high: branches slender, pubescent: Ivs. knceolate, entire, obtuse, alternate, remote, short-petioled, nearly glabrous: fls. large, pink, on slender pedicels ^in. or more long; sepals 4, the upper and lower small, equal, cymbiform, margins ciliate, the lateral very large, nearly orbicular; petals 5, separate, upper strap-shaped, two-thirds as long as keel, lateral pointed, less than one- half as long, embraced with the 8 stamens by the large cymbiform keel, which is opened on the upper and lower edge and not cristate, or appendaged: seeds 2, large, ovoid, pubescent. Low. Calif. B.M. 8065.— In S. Calif. P. apopetala is said to grow up to 15 ft. or more in height and to be valuable economically as its young branches contain a very strong fiber and the pea-sized brown seeds which are plentifully produced yield as much as 38 per cent of excellent oil. The root has the same properties in a higher percentage as are contained in P. Senega. BB. Habit dwarf, 1 ft. or less high. 10. amarymbica, Eckl. & Zeyn. (P. acuminata, E. Mey. & Hort.?, not Willd.). Densely tufted, erect, 3-6 in. high: Ivs. lanceolate-acuminate, pungently mucronate: racemes lateral, few-fld., spreading or reflexed; fls. small, wings green, keel and petals flesh- color to purple; keel with a many-parted crest. S. Afr. — P. acuminata of the trade is probably not P. acumi- nata, Willd., which is Badiera acuminata. Badiera dif- fers from Polygala in having 2 of the sepals only a little larger than the others, instead of much larger. Two other species have been recently intro. into cult. : P. brack $p- oda. Tod., whose native country is not known, has erect growth, green very straight branches, long and very narrow Ivs., and numer- ous reddish purple fls. Intro, into Calif. — P. V&yrtdz, Costa. A small plant 4 in. high, hardy or half-hardy in England, growing only a few inches high, with linear, evergreen Ivs. and reddish purple fls. with a yellow keeL Spain. Closely resembles P. Chamaebuius. but has narrower Ivs. WlLHELM MlLLER. F. TRACY HrBBARD.f POLYGONATUM (Greek, many knee; alluding to the numerous joints of the rootstock). Liliaceae. SOLO- MON'S SEAL. Perennial herbs, with simple stems from creeping knotted rootstocks, sometimes planted. Stems naked below, above bearing nearly sessile or half-clasping nerved Ivs. and axillary nodding greenish fls.: perianth cylindrical, 6-lobed at the summit; sta- mens 6; ovary "3-celled with 2-6 ovules in each cell: berry globular, black or blue. — About 60 species, widely distributed in the temperate regions of the northern hemisphere. The genus is distinguished from its nearest allies by the cylindrical perianth-tube with short lobes and small undivided style. Polygonatums are graceful in their habit, the unbranched arching sts. bearing pendulous, tubular fls. 1-10 in the axils. The name Solomon's seal is connected with the horizontal root- stocks which are scarred by the death of the annual stems, each scar being likened to a seal (see Smilacina). Polygonatums are best suited for partially or wholly shaded positions, although they do well in the open in a well-prepared border. They like a deep rich soil not subject to drought. Easily propagated by division. They are among the best subjects for wild gardening. P. multiflorum is used abroad considerably for forcing and for house plants. Our native species are presumably equally desirable for all purposes. The Solomon's seal of English literature is P. multiflorum, which is proba- bly the commonest species native to Europe. There are several Himalayan and Japanese species. The common Solomon's seal of our nurseries is the European. P. multiflorum, the American kinds being listed only by specialists in native plants. The others here described are offered by Dutch bulb-growers. For extended articles on the forcing of P. multiflorum, see Gn. 26, p. 236 (or V. 7:337); 30, p. 49, and F.R. 3:594. A. Lvs. all whorled. verticillatum, All. St. 2-3 ft. high: Ivs. in whorls of 4-8, linear, 3-6 in. long: fls. in 2's or 3's. Eu., Himal- ayas.— P. macrophyttum, Link, is perhaps a distinct variety with more robust habit and larger Ivs. 3101. Polygonatum biflorum. (XJ4) AA. Lvs. alternate. B. Perianth 2-3 lines thick. officinale, All. Height l-l^ift. : fls. 1 or 2 in the axils: Ivs. oblong, 2-3 in. long, firmer than those of P. multi- florum: perianth-segms. greenish. Eu., Siberia. — P. ambiguum, Link, is offered as a distinct form abroad. latifdlium, Desf. (P. Thunbergii, C. Morr.). Height 2-4 ft.: fls. 1-5 in the axils: Ivs. oblong, 3-6 in. long: perianth-segm. greenish. Eu., Asia. — Intermediate in habit between P. officinale and P. multiflorum, but with earlier fls. BB. Perianth lY^-2 lines thick. c. Plant glabrous. multifldrum, All. Height 2-3 ft.: Ivs. oblong, 3-6 in. long: perianth-tube white; segms. greenish; fila- ments densely pilose. Eu., N. Asia, Himalayas. Gn. 26. p. 236; 30, p. 49; 69, p. 172. V. 7:337. Var. flore- r6seo, Hort., has rosy fls. — There are said to be varie- ties with double fls. and variegated foliage. The type seems to be more graceful than the varieties. This is the common Solomon's seal of Eu., where it is also called lady's seal and David's harp. commutatum, Dietr. (P. giganteum, Dietr.). Taller and more robust than P. biflorum, 1-8 ft. high: Ivs. \Yr§ in. long, 3-4 in. wide: fls. 1-8 in the axils; fila- ments somewhat flattened, smooth, not roughened. 2740 POLYGONATUM POLYGONUM May-July. Moist woods, N. H. to Man., S. Ga., La. to New Mex. and Utah. cc. Plant with Ivs. pubescent beneath. bifldrum, Ell. Fig. 3101. Height 8 in. to 3 ft.: Ivs. 2-4 in. long, K~2 in. wide: fls. often 2 in axils, some- times 1-4. April-July. Woods, New Bruns. to Mich., south to Fla. Mn. 8:49. P. intermedium as offered in the European trade is presumably P. intermedium, Dum., which is commonly considered nothing more than a form of P. multiflorum, All. — P. macrdnthum of foreign trade-lists is botanically unknown. The plant offered in the American trade as P. mdjus is not known botanically, but it is said to grow 3 ft. high and bear pendent creamy fls. in May and June. WILHELM MILLER. F. TRACY HUBBARD.! POLYGONELLA (diminutive of Polygonum). Poly- gonacese. About 7 species of American plants closely allied to Polygonum and of no horticultural standing, although one or two names may appear in the trade. P. polygama was offered in Mass, in 1881, but it is probably not hardy N. The genus differs from Poly- gonum in having only the inner sepals erect and the calyx enlarged in fr., while in Polygonum all the sepals are erect and the calyx is not enlarged in fr. polygama, Gray (P. parvifolia, Michx.). Diffuse shrub: Ivs. wedge-shaped, vertical, those on sterile shoots imbricated: racemes J^-1H in. long, very numer- ous, in an oblong or corymbose panicle; fls. white, yel- lowish or rose-color; filaments aU alike; stigmas nearly sessile. Aug., Sept. Dry sandy soil, Fla. to N. C. americana, Small (P. ericoldes, Engelm. & Gray. Gonopyrum americdnum, Fisch. fl spikes 5-8 in. or more long. Japan. — By some authors thought to be con-specific with the widespread P. virginianum, but Ivs. less acuminate, bracts shorter- ciliate, fls. and frs. much smaller. Var. variegatum, Hort., has Ivs. marbled with yellow and pale green: an attractive plant, forming good clumps 1% ft. high and persisting when well established. R.H. 1912, p. 259. EE. Fls. pink or red (sometimes varying to white), in erect usually simple stout spikes: plants grown for their fls. 10. Bistorta, Linn. (Bistdrta officinalis, Raf.). BIS- TORT. SNAKE WEED. Perennial, with a thick more or less spreading rootstock: st. simple, slender but strict, 1-2 ft.: Ivs. mostly radical, oblong-ovate and obtuse, undulate, glaucous beneath; st.-lvs. nearly sessile, broad at base; stipules J/£-3 in. long: fls. white or pink, in a single dense cylindrical or oblong spike an inch or two long; stamens exserted; styles 3. N. Eu. and N. Asia. —The astringent rootstock was once used medicinally, and has provided food in famine times. Var. super- bum, Hprt., is offered abroad, with conical heads of bright pink long-lasting fls. 11. amplexicaule, Don (P. oxyphyllum, Wall. P. multiflorum, Hort.). MOUNTAIN FLEECE. Strong- growing tufted green-stemmed perennial with slender fl.-sts. 2-3 ft. tall, from a woody branching rootstock: Ivs. cordate-ovate to cordate-lanceolate, short-petioled or clasping, the margin wavy and crenulate, long- acuminate; sheaths 1-2 in. long and split or lacerate: fls. rose-red or white, rather large (sometimes J^in. diam.) in strict long-peduncled spikes 2-6 in. long, the stamens 8 and exserted, the achene trigonous. Hima- laya, from 6,000-13,000 ft. altitude. B.R. 25:46. B.M. 6500. — An excellent border perennial, blooming in mid- summer. Some, at least, of the plants that have been cult, as mountain fleece are a native polygonum (P. Muhlenbergii), which grows nearly throughout N. Amer., including Mex. Var. speciosum, Hook. f. (P. speciosum, Wall.), has larger deep purplish red or claret- colored fls. 12. affine, Don (P. Brundnis, Wall.). Tufted gla- brous perennial, with flowering sts. \Yi ft. or less high, from a woody prostrate rootstock: Ivs. mostly radical, oblanceolate to spatulate to lance-oblong; sheaths rather long, brown, split or entire: fls. bright rose-red, in dense, erect, terminal obtuse spikes 2-3 in. long, the stamens 8, the achene trigonous. Himalaya, at ele- vations of 9,000-14,000 ft. B.M. 6472.— An excellent little plant for cool places, blooming in autumn. 13. vaccinifdlium, Wall. Tufted glabrous perennial with trailing and creeping branches, 1 ft. or less tall, and stout twisted rootstocks: fl.-branches leafy: lys. small (YT-% in. long), short-stalked, orbicular or ellip- tic, acute or acuminate, entire, somewhat glaucous beneath; stipules to J^in. long, brown, laciniate: fls. rose-red, J^in. diam., in subsessile racemes 2-3 in. long. Himalaya region, 9,000-14,000 and more ft. alti- tude. B.M. 4622. Gn. 39, p. 543; 43, p. 501; 45, p. 159. G.W. 9, p. 377. J.F. 2:117. 14. Posumbu, Hamilt. Dwarf compact perennial, with long-creeping st. which is ascendent or decumbent and simple or branched: Ivs. dark green and shining, 1-3 in. long, stalked, broad-lanceolate and narrow- acuminate, glabrous or somewhat hairy, ciliolate; stipules with stiff hairs longer than the sheath: fls. small, rose-colored, in many erect filiform racemes or spikes that are sometimes several inches long. Himalaya and to China and Japan. BEE. Fls. white to purplish, in panicled or corymbose heads. 15. chinense, Linn. (P. cymosum, Roxbg. P. poly- cephalum, Wall. P. corymbosum, Willd.). Shrubby perennial of diffuse or erect habit, 5 ft. high, from glabrous to glandular-pubescent, the many sts. angled and grooved: Ivs. 3-5 in. long, stalked, variable in shape, from linear-oblong to deltoid, ovate or even broader, entire or crenulate, the petiole usually 2-eared at base; stipules long and oblique at top : fls. white, rose-color or purplish, borne in many little heads that are panicled or corymbose with usually glandular-hairy peduncles; perianth 5-cleft; stamens 8. Himalaya region and Ceylon to China, Japan, and the Philippines. EEEE. Fls. white or greenish, in axillary clustered racemes or panicles or cymes: plants grown often for their general foliage effects and bold habit, mostly tall and sometimes woody. (More or less dioecious or polygamous.) F. Lvs. mostly on the lanceolate order, sometimes ovate, usually taper-based. 16. polystachyum, Wall. Shrubby, glabrous, or pubescent perennial, 3-6 ft., the branches grooved: Ivs. POLYGONUM POLYGON UM 2743 petioled or nearly sessile, oblong-lanceolate, narrow- acuminate, usually contracted and more or less cordate or truncate at base: fls. white or pink, %in. diam., in large thyrse-like spreading terminal panicles with branches erect or decurved and very slender pedicels; 2 outer sepals much smaller than the inner. Himalaya, 7,000-14,000 ft. altitude; Afghanistan. G.C. III. 53, suppl. May 17. G.M. 52:929. M.D.G. 1896:373, 385. — An excellent plant for late autumn bloom, in moist places. 17. lichiangense, W. W. Smith. Closely allied to P. polystachyum, but branches and stipules setose, Ivs. setose above and densely cinereo-tomentose beneath: erect, with a woody base, 2-4 ft., the branches striate: Ivs. very short-petioled, 2-5 in. long, lanceolate or oblong-lanceolate, caudate-acuminate, the margin more or less undulate; stipules about 1 in. long: fls. creamy white, in thyrspid-paniculate clusters at nearly every node, the pedicels slender and about 1 line long. Lichiang Range, China, 10,000^11,000 ft. altitude.— A recent, intro., with fl. -sprays said to resemble those of P. baldschuanicum. 18. campanulatum, Hook f. Pubescent or tomen- tose perennial, the sts. creeping or stoloniferous at base, forking above, 2-3 ft. : Ivs. stalked, 3-6 in. long, elliptic, lanceolate or ovate, acuminate, the base narrow or rounded, more or less pubescent above and below; stipules large, mostly deciduous: fls. pale pink or red in autumn, in divaricately branched nodding or droop- ing terminal clusters; perianth campanulate, ^ in. long or somewhat larger; stamens 8, with very long fila- ments. Himalayan region. G.C. III. 52:489. — Variable. FF. Lvs. much wider, on the oval or broad-oval order, usually (or at least the lower ones) very broad-based. 19. Sieboldii, De Vriese (P. cuspiddtum, Sieb. & Zucc., not Willd. P. Zuccarinii, Small). Fig. 3105. Strong stout handsome bushy somewhat woody perennial (stalks dying to the ground in winter), grow- ing 4-8 ft. high, the sts. gracefully curving outward: Ivs. short-oval to orbicular-ovate, truncate or slightly cordate at base, abruptly pointed, the strong side nerves uniting in marginal loops; sheaths short and flaring, deciduous: fls. small and whitish, very numer- ous, in drooping slender-panicled racemes, the sta- mens 8, and the achenes trigonous. Japan. B.M. 6503. R.H. 1858, p. 631; 1894, p. 54. Gn. 26, p. 317; 49, p. 238. G. 3:143. G.M. 47:861. G.W. 2, p. 76.— A very effective plant for bold mass effects, perfectly hardy in the northern states, and now frequently planted. It is everywhere known in the trade as P. cuspidatum. It produces clouds of bloom. Var. compactum, Hort. (P. compactum, Hook, f.), is of very compact habit, remaining sometimes only 2 ft. high, bearing many erect panicles of whitish fls.: a good subject. B.M. 6476. G.C. III. 47:123. Gn. 63, p. 56. Gn.W. 20:926. Var. spectabile, Hort. (P. cuspidatum var. spectdbile, de Norter). Shrubby, 3-5 ft.: Ivs. marbled with green, white, and red. R.B. 35, p. 233. 20. Weyrichii, F. Schmidt. Tall herb (3 ft.): sts. hispid, in the upper part tomentose: sheaths elongated, membranous, pilose, finally fissured and falling off: Ivs. short-petioled, ovate, acuminate, dull green and rugose above, whitish tomentose beneath, to 7 in. long, the lower ones broader and truncate at the base, the upper ones attenuate at the base, revolute at the margin: racemes axillary and terminal, forming a large terminal panicle; rachis fulvo-tomentose; pedicels articulate about the middle; bracts hyaline, glabrous, 2-lobed, 3-6-fld.; stamens 8: achenes 3-angled. Sag- halin. — A good hardy perennial for moist ground. 21. sachalinense, F. Schmidt. SACALINE. Fig. 3106. Exceedingly vigorous plant, spreading rapidly from the tips of strong underground shoots, the reddish gla- brous dead stalks often standing 8-12 ft. high through 174 the winter: Ivs. very large, frequently 1 ft. or more long, soft dull green, the blade oval-oblong, 13^-2 times as long as broad, shallow-cordate at base, scarcely pointed, the prominent side veins uniting by the ends: fls. greenish, in relatively small axillary clusters, the achene trigonous. Isl. of Sachalin, north of Japan, in Russian territory. B.M. 6540. R.H. 1876, p. 36; 1893, pp. 394, 395; 1894, p. 55. Gn. 21, p. 280; 62, p. 439. G. 5:311. G.C. II. 26:813 and III. 14:159 (in. fr,). G.M. 31:176. V. 17:161.— Recently intro. (in N. Amer. in 1894) for forage and for ornament. It is inveterately persistent when once established, and may easily become a pest. For forage it has little merit where other things can be grown, for it is too coarse. For planting in rough places, where a thick cover is 3106. Polygonum sachalinense. (X1A) required, it is one of the best of all coarse herbaceous perennials. It is perfectly hardy in the N. and seems to thrive anywhere. P. Sieboldii was once distributed as sacaline, but that species is much smaller, with smaller shorter and square-based Ivs., and with more profuse bloom. 22. Spaethii, Damm. St. erect, 10 ft. and more, thick, minutely puberulent but becoming glabrous, the young growth densely pubescent or somewhat hirsute: Ivs. petioled, cordate-ovate, acute or acumi- nate, the upper ones lanceolate, and attenuate at base, margin somewhat undulate and ciliate; sheath salver- shaped, densely pilose outside, the limb foliaceous, crenate and pilose: fls. in few-fld. paniculate spikes, short-pedicellate, carmine-red; stamens 5^-6: achene lenticular. China. — Much like P. sachalinense, but differs in its fls., and the pubescence or hairiness. 2744 POLYGONUM POLYPODIUM P. crlspulum, Sims=Atraphaxis buxifolia. — P. cymdsum, Trev. (Fagopyrum cymosum, Meissn.). Puberulous perennial: Ivs. triangular: fls. white, secund on long recurved branches of cymes. Himalaya to China. — P. mdlle, Don. Shrubby perennial, allied to P. polystachyum, the branches stout, terete and villous: Ivs. elliptic-lanceolate, pubescent or tomentose beneath: fls. white, in large thyrse-like tomentose terminal panicles. Himalaya. — P. mutiifldrum, Thunb. Tuberous-rooted climber, with reddish sts. : Ivs. cordate-ovate, acute, shining: fls. small and whitish, in spreading Eanicles. China and Japan. — P. plaiycaulon, Hort.=Muehlen- eckia platyclada. — P. scdndens, Hort., as once described, is a twiner, with firm Ivs., cordate at base, dark green above and claret- colored beneath. G.C. III. 28:187.— P. serlceum, Pall. Stout peren- nial, 4 ft., free-branching, with spirea-like panicles in July ana Aug. of white fls.: densely pubescent: Ivs. subsessile, oval-oblong, lanceo- late, attenuate at base: fls. in short simple racemes terminal or in upper axils. Siberia. — P. sphserost&chyum, Meissn. Allied to P. affine, from which it differs in the "dense broad cylindric or globose spike of blood-red pendulous fls.": tufted perennial, suitable for small rock-gardens. Himalaya. B.M. 6847. L H B POLYMNIA (the muse Polyhymnia). Compdsitae. American composites, mostly coarse, viscid and heavy- scented. The N. American species are tall branching peren- nials, with usually opposite thin Ivs., and the S. Ameri- can shrubby or tree-like. They have loose panicles of yellow or whitish fls. borne in summer. Heads broad, many-fld.; rays several? pistillate; disk-fls. perfect but sterile. — About 10 species. canadensis, Linn. CANADA or SMALL-FLOWERED LEAF-CUP. Height 2-5 ft., the st. clammy-hairy: Ivs. deltoid-ovate to hastate, thin, deeply angulate-lobed; lobes dentate, 4r-10 in. long: heads few in terminal clusters, 4-6 lines broad; rays minute or none. June- Sept. Damp, rich, shaded places, Vt., Ont. to Minn., south to Ga. and Ark. B.B. 2:405. Var. radiate, Gray, with whitish rays sometimes ^in. long, is also offered by one dealer in native plants: st.-lvs. are more per- fectly 3-lobed than in the type. N. TAYLOR.! POLYPODIUM (Greek, many feet; alluding to the extensive rootstocks). Polypodiacese. A large group of ferns, some hardy and some tender; the latter are often grown in under-glass collections. Ferns with naked rounded spri, and with the Ivs. jointed to the rootstocks, leaving a scar when they separate. As here treated the veins may be free or united to form areoles. The genus is a very extensive one, growing in all parts of the world, and has frequently been divided into a series of genera based on habit and the nature of venation, which is probably a more 3107. Polypodium vulgare. ( X V£) 3108. Sori and a single sporangium of Polypodium vul- gare. (Sori about natural size.) logical treatment; some of these genera, indeed, as Phymatodes and Phlebodium, have here been sepa- rated; the genus would be more homogeneous were others placed by themselves. See comments in con- nection with P. Lingua and P. Phyttltidis. For cul- ture, see Fern. californicum, 7. cambricum, 1. Catharinse, 8. falcatum, 2. fraxinifolium, 9. INDEX. incanum, 6. Lingua, 12. pectinatum, 4. Phyllitidis, 11. Plumula, 3. A. Veins free: Ivs. once pinnate. B. Sori large, conspicuous. 1. vulgare, Linn. WALL FERN. POLYPODY. Figs. 3107, 3108. Lf.-blades 4-10 in. long, on pale stalks half their length, 1-3 in. wide, cut nearly or quite to the rachis into entire or slightly toothed blunt pinna;. New England to Ala. and westward to Ore. ; also com- mon throughout Eu., where many forms are in cult. polypodioides, 6. subauriculatum, 10. tricuspe, 13. vacciniifolium, 5. vulgare, 1. 3109. Polypodium vacciniifolium. ( X 1A) Var. cambricum (Fig. 3110) occurs in N. Y. and New England. Very many other varieties are cult, in Eng- land but unknown to American trade. 2. falcatum, Kellogg. Lvs. 12-15 in. long, 4-8 in. wide, on long, straw-colored stalks; pinnae numerous, tapering to a slender point, sharply serrate. Calif, to Wash. BB. Sori smaller. 3. Plumula, HBK. Lvs. 9-18 in. long, narrow-lanceo- late, 1-2 in. wide; pinnae numerous, narrow, entire, blunt, the lower pairs scarcely smaller than those above; stalks blackish. Fla. and Trop. Amer. 4. pectinatum, Linn. Lvs. elliptic-lanceolate, 1-2^ ft. long, 2-6 in. wide, cut to the rachis into horizontal entire or toothed pinnae, the lower ones gradually reduced to short, triangular lobes. Fla. and Trop. Amer. AA. Veins uniting, forming regular areoles each with a single free included veinlet. B. Lvs. simple, undivided. 5. vacciniifdlium, Langs. & Fisch. Fig. 3109. Lvs. small, of two sorts, rising from slender, wide-creeping rootstocks; sterile lys. roundish or elliptic; sporophylls linear or ligulate, with large sori in a single row. Trop. Amer., from the W. Indies southward. BB. Lvs. pinnate. c. Fronds covered with flat scales underneath. 6. polypodioides, Hitchc. (P. incanum, Swartz). Lvs. 2-6 in. long, an inch or more wide, with entire pinna? which are usually more or less revolute; veins indistinct, from the thick texture. Va. and S. 111. to Brazil; commonly growing on trees in the southern states. — Known as resurrection fern from its ability to revive after long drying. cc. Fronds smooth beneath. D. Pinnx broad at base and often confluent. 7. californicum, Kaulf. Lvs. 4-9 in. long, 1-5 in. wide, cut into finely toothed pinnae which are mostly confluent at the base. Calif. — Has much the habit of the European forms of P. vulgare. POLYPODIUM POLYSCIAS 2745 8. Catharina, Langs. & Fisch. Lvs. 6-12 in. long, 3-5 in. wide, with numerous nearly opposite pinnae which are dilated at the base, contracted just above the base, and slightly enlarged and bluntly rounded at the tip; sori large near the midrib. Brazil. DD. Pinnae narrowed and distinct at base. 9. fraxinifdiium, Jacq. Lvs. 2-4 ft. long, 12-18 in. wide, on firm stalks 1-2 ft. long; pinnae 4-9 in. long, with a tough, somewhat leathery texture and entire margin. Columbia to Brazil and Peru. 10. subauriculatum, Blume. Stalks 6-12 in. long, glossy, from wide-creeping rootstocks: If .-blades 2-3 ft. or more long, 8-12 in. wide; sori in a single row immersed in the leaf. India to Austral. AAA. Veins (primary) distinct from midrib to the edge, connected by parallel trans- verse veinlets forming rows of similar areoles. B. Lvs. elongate, simple, smooth beneath. 11. Phyllitidis, Linn. (Cam- pyloneuron Phyllitidis, Presl). Lvs. 1-3 ft. long, 1-4 in. wide, with an acute point, and the lower part narrowed gradu- ally; areoles in rows of 6-12, usually with 2 sori each. Fla. to Brazil. — This species might more justly be placed in the genus Campyloneuron. BB. Lvs. with under surface tomentose. 12. Lingua, Swart z. Lf.- blades 4-8 in. long, 1-2 in. wide, the apex often cuspidate, the base narrowed or rounded; upper surface naked, the lower matted with reddish brown cottony scales, the sori in close rows of 4-6 each. Japan to Ceylon. — This species and the next are often more properly listed in the genus Cyclophorus. There are a few crested and other horticultural forms. 13. tricuspe, Swartz. Lvs. hastate, 2-4 in. each way, with a central lanceolate-triangular lobe and spreading lateral ones which are more or less auricled at the base. Japan and Korea. P. aureum=Phlebodium. — P. Dry6pteris=Phegopteris Dryop- teris. — P. 0Zatccum=Phymatodes. — P. hexagon opterum=Phegop- teris. — P. Kerandreanum=PhegopteTis. — P. lepiddpterit, Langs. =Phegopteris polypodioides. — P. Pkymatdde#=Phy- matodes. — P. plumdsum is a form of Asplenium FiUx-temina. — P. 7uerci'/dJi'um=Drynaria. — P. rtff£duiuf7i=Drynaria. — P. Swdrtzii L. M. UXDERWOOD. POLYPTERIS (Greek words meaning many-winged or feathered; referring to the pappus). Composite. This includes a handsome, rosy-flowered hardy annual known to the trade as Palafoxia Hookeriana. Polypteris is a genus of 4 species of X. American herbs: Ivs. mostly entire: alternate heads of peduncu- late, rose-purple or flesh-colored fls. borne in summer and autumn: involucre broadly bell-shaped or top- shaped; bracts common!}' in 2 series, more or less col- ored and petal-like toward the tips: rays wanting except in P. Hookeriana: achenes linear to club-shaped. 4-sided; pappus of 6-12 equal scales. Distinguished from Palafoxia by the colored tips of the involucral bracts and the deeply divided limb of the corolla. By some the genus is united with the older genus Palafoxia, which is also American. 3110. Polypodium vulgar e var. cambricum. (XH) Hookeriana, Gray (Palafoxia Hookeriana, Torr. & Gray). A stout annual 1-4 ft. high, sticky pubescent : Ivs. lanceolate, mostly 3-nerved below: heads 1 in. or more across; rays 8-10, deeply 3-cleft, rose-red, about J^in. long and showy. Sandy plains, Neb. to Texas. B.M. 5549. — Handsome plant; sometimes treated as an everlasting. N. TAYLOR^ POLYRRHIZA (Greek, many roots). Orchidacese. Epiphytes: sepals and petals spreading, labellum 3- lobed, lateral lobes small, angular, middle one with spreading lobes; spur long, filiform; column short; pol- linia 2. The following are intro. into American horti- culture: Linden!!, Rolfe (Dendrophylax Lindenii). Scape leafless, bearing a single white fl.; sepals and petals lanceolate; divisions of midlobe of labellum lanceolate: caps, smooth. On Oreodoxa Regia, and live oaks, S. Fla. funilis, Pfitz. (Dendrophylax funalis, Hort. (Eco- clades funalis, Lindl. Angraecum funole, Lindl.). Leaf- less, roots numerous, fleshy: peduncles 2-fld.; fls. white; sepals and petals oblong-lanceolate; labellum 3-lobed, with a long horn. Mountains of Jamaica. OAKES AMES. GEORGE V. NASH.f POLYSCIAS (many and shade; referring to the abundant foliage). Araliacese. Large shrubs or trees, glabrous, comprising the pinnate-leaved tender aralias of greenhouses, grown for the ornamental foliage. Leaves pinnate, with variable Ifts., in many horti- cultural forms much cut, modified and often varie- gated: fls. very small, usually 5-merous (sometimes 4-merous), the calyx truncate or toothed, the petals valvate, the ovary 5-8-loculed; the styles usually of the same number and distinct. — About 70 species are described, from India, Trop. Afr., and Pacific Isls., some of which probably belong in other.genera. Recent introductions from New Caledonia and other islands have given interesting forms for the cultivator. In cult, very rarely flowering; some specimens of P. fruticosa known to be 15 years old or more have never blossomed. From the temperate Aralia, comprising the Hercules' club, the genus is easily told by its lack of spines and also by the technical floral characters of little value to horticulturists, as the tender sorts rarely flower. From Panax, the ginseng, the genus is separated by its woody habit. From Fatsia, the true Polyscias is distinguished by having the pedicel usually articulated beneath the fl. The genus Dizygotheca is distinguished by digitate Ivs. of many Ifts., and 4-celled anthers and 10-celled ovary 3111. Aralia Chabrieri of greenhouses, but properly an EUeodendron. ( X J- (the allied genera have 2-celled anthers and mostly less than 10-celled ovary). The glasshouse aralias are much confused botanically. The genus Aralia as understood by the older botanists turns out to be a polymorphous group, and in the segregation of other genera it is often difficult properly to redistribute the species. This is particularly true 2746 POLYSCIAS POLYSCIAS of the cultivated forms, many of which are not only variable but the flowers and fruits may be unknown. Any arrangement of these forms must be considered to be tentative. Four distinct types or forms of tender greenhouse aralias are illustrated herewith. Fig. 3111 is the Aralia 3112. Dizygotheca elegantissima. The Aralia elegantissima of greenhouses. ( X M) Chabrieri of gardens. It has very long glossy stiffish long-pointed leaves with a dark red midrib, the margin entire or remotely denticulate and more or less revo- lute. These leaves are opposite or nearly so on short side branches, as if parts' in a compound leaf, and apparently confusion has arisen in descriptions. In the illustration, a leaf is shown at a, in the axil of which is a branch bearing the leaves. This plant, which is cultivated in its juvenile state, has been little under- stood botanically. It is not an aralia nor of the aralia family, although referred doubtfully to Polyscias. It is now considered to be Elseodendron orientate (see page 1107, where the matter is left in doubt). Harms, an authority on these plants, has recently gone over the question (Gt. 62, pp. 533-5, and 63, p. 117), and has concluded that the plant is E. orientale. Guillaumin (R.H. 1912, p. 491) considers it to be an Eteodendron but not E. orientale. The long linear leaves with red mid-nerves are merely the young form of the species, and they pass into the broad-lanceolate or shorter oval or obovate thick leaves of the mature plant. Aralia Chabrieri apparently appeared first under this 3113. Terminal leaflet of Polyscias fruticosa. Adapted from Blanco, Flora de Filipinas; much reduced. name in 1881 in the catalogue of Van Geert, Ghent. For portraits of it, see R.B. 13:20 (1887); R.H. 1891, p. 224; Gn. 39, p. 576. The florists' plant shown in Fig. 3112 is Dizygotheca elegantissima, Vig. & Guill. (Aralia elegantissima, Veitch). Very similar plants are Aralia Veitchii, Hort. Veitch, and its var. gracillima, Hort. Bull. (A. gracil- lima, Hort. A. gracilina, Lind. R.H. 1877, p. 38), its var. robusta, Hort., and A. Kerchoveana, Hort. It is not unlikely that all the plants mentioned above in this paragraph are foliar forms of one species, representing a juvenile state of a Dizygotheca (page 1062), although it is possible that other generic disposition will be made of these things when the different forms and the flowers and fruits are known. These names, as repre- sented in plants in the trade, however, are of two groups : (1) Aralia Veitchii, A. Veitchii robusta, and A. gracil- lima with undulate nearly or quite entire leaflets, which may be tentatively called Dizygotheca Veitchii, Hort.; (2) the other group is A. Kerchoveana and A. elegantissima, with strongly notch-toothed leaflets, which are about 1 in. broad in the former and about half as wide in the latter; the former is Dizygotheca Kerchoveana, Hort., and the latter D. elegantissima, Vig. & Guill. The plants shown in Figs. 3113 to 3117 are by some referred to Nothopanax; but until their position is better determined, they may be described tentatively under Polyscias. No- thopanax as under- stood by Harms has leaves pri- marily digitate whereas Polyscias has leaves on the pinnate order; as defined by others, however, Notho- panax comprises species with leaves simple, pinnate or pinnately decom- pound. As in many of the araliads, the leaves in this gen- eral group are very variable. Harms calls attention to the fact that in Nothopanax the leaves may be dif- ferent on the same plant in successive ages. On the young plants the leaves are mostly digitate with the leaflets often once-pinnatisect ; older plants have simple leaves and the leaflets entire or toothed or once-pinnatisect, or sometimes only digitate leaves. The culture of the several kinds of plants known to florists and greenhouse men as aralias is not difficult. Among the most desirable tropical kinds, are those known in the trade as Aralia (Elseodendron) Chabrieri, A. elegantissima, A . Veitchii, A . gracillima, A . leptophylla (all Dizygotheca), A.monstrosa, A. Victorise, A.plumatum, (all Polyscias) and others. Aralias are increased by cut- tings and by grafts. A. leptophylla, and the forms of A. Veitchii, are rarely propagated except by grafting. The stock considered by many to be the best to use is A. reticulata (probably Oreopanax reticulatum, Fig. 2676, Vol. IV, which is Meryta Denhamii). Cuttings of it about the thickness of an ordinary pencil may be secured, and established in small pots, when they may 3114. Polyscias Guilfoylei. POLYSCIAS POLYSCIAS 2747 be cut back to a little above the base, and the cion inserted. Either the cleft or wedge method has been successful. They must be kept in a night temperature of not less than 70°F., and placed in a tight moist case until they unite. Aralias may also be propagated from cuttings, eyes, or pieces of the root. A plant that has become bare of leaves may be -cut down near the pot; the stem should be cut in 2-inch lengths, and put in as eye-cuttings, in a brisk heat in the propagating- bed. The old stool may be put in bottom heat, when many of the varieties will throw several nice cuttings from the base. These should be removed with a heel, when about long, in as 3115. Polyscias Gullf oylei ( X K) 6 inches and put cuttings, in a bottom heat of about 75°, and potted off when rooted. To pro- cure root -cut- tings, one of the strongest plants should be turned out of the pot, and the soil washed out of the roots with a hose. Cut the stronger parts of the roots in 2-inch lengths, and place in small pots. The end nearest the stem should be nearest the surface of the pot. Plunge the pots in a tight case, in 70° to 75° bottom heat, and water carefully until they throw up shoots. — A sandy peat is the best soil in which to grow the finer rooting varieties. The stronger-growing kinds thrive in a richer compost, — say two parts fibrous loam, one part leaf-mold, a little well-rotted manure, charcoal, and sand enough to keep the whole porous. Greenhouse kinds should be in a night temperature of not over 50° when established in their pots. They may be set out- doors in a shady position in summer. The tropical kinds must be kept at not less than 60° night-tempera- ture. Aralias must at all times be shaded from strong sunshine. Watering with soot-water gives a nice gloss to the foliage. Aralia, or Panax, Victoria may be treated the same as the other aralias. Insect pests can be kept in check on aralias by the syringe and by fumi- gating with hydrocyanic gas, one-half ounce to the thousand cubic feet. The usual precautions of lower- ing the temperature to 60°, and having the foliage dry when the operation is performed, should be observed. (George F. Stewart.) paniculata, Baker (Termindlia elegans, Hort. Gili- bertia paniculata, DC.). Erect glabrous shrub: Ivs. pinnate, 6-9 in. long, usually with 7 Ifts. of which the terminal one is 7-9 in. long, oblong and obtuse, shining, deltoid or somewhat rounded at base: fls. in somewhat spicate (not paniculate) racemes 2-4 in. long, on very short and thick pedicels and not articulated ; petals and stamens about 16: fr. hemispherical, with 6 styles and as many grooves. Mauritius. — This is another example of the confusion which arises from the naming of garden plants before their fls. or frs. are known. For several years this plant was supposed to be a Terminalia (cf. G.C. III. 2, p. 366). pinnata, Forst. (Aralia latifolia, Wight & Am.). Lfts. orbicular to oblong, either nearly entire or with small and remote teeth, the base obtuse or heart-shaped, the apex acuminate: fls. 5^-7 in each umbel of the pani- cle. Malaya. — The Aralia latifolia of gardeners may not be the above plant, and it seems to be little cult. fruticdsa, Harms (Panax fruticosum, Linn. Aralia fruticosa, Hort. Nothdpanax fruticosum, Miq. Panax excelsum, Hort., at least in part). Fig. 3113. Erect shrub, to 6 or 8 ft. high, glabrous, the young branches with prominent lenticels: Ivs. more or less irregularly pinnately 3-compound, the petiole and rachis more or less spotted, and the petiole-base expanded and clasp- ing; Ifts. stalked, with the segms. also stalked and parted or cut into narrow-ovate or oblong or lanceolate ultimate segms. with scariously spinulose-toothed mar- gins and very acute apices, the whole If. having a much-divided soft appearance: infl. terminal and in the upper axils, 3-6 in. long and many-fld., the fls. umbel- late and short-pedicelled: fr. broad-ovoid, compressed, more than 1 in. long. Polynesia to India, commonly cult, and in many If. -forms. In some cases the Ivs. are much cut and the segms. are reduced to very narrow even to linear or thread-like forms. Var. plumata, Bailey (Panax plumatum, Hort. Nothdpanax fruticosum var. plumatum, Merr.), has smaller Ivs., 8 in. or less long, the ultimate segms. much smaller and finer and mostly lanceolate or linear-lanceolate. See also Panax Deleauanum, suppl. list, p. 2748. Guilfdylei, Bailey (Aralia Guilfoylei, Bull. Nothdpanax Guilfoylei, Merr.). Figs. 3114, 3115. Erect glabrous shrub, to 15 ft. and more, not much branched, with bright green usually white-edged foliage: Ivs. large, often 16 in. and more long, regularly pinnate, with more or less spotted or lined petiole which is expanded and clasping at base; Ifts. stoutly short-petio- late, well separated from each other, ovate to elliptic- ovate to nearly orbicular, tapering or rounded or trun- cate at base, with distinct and mostly rather remote short teeth which are sharply acuminate-pointed, in the usual cult, forms with white margins or variously white-shaded and blotched; terminal 1ft. large, often 6 in. long and 5 in. broad. Planted in tropical countries about yards and for screens or hedges, and probably native somewhere in the Pacific Isls.; often called "wild coffee" and "coffee tree," probably from the foliage. It may be seen now and then in green- houses, although mostly in the smaller and cut- Ivd. forms. It ap- pears rarely to froduce flowers. ts origin is not traced ; by some it is thought to be a modified form of P. pinnata or some related rec- ognized species. F.M. 1874: 100 — A. Guilfoylei ap- pears to have been first described in Bull's Catalogue for 1873 under "new plants an- nounced for the first time," as fol- 3116. Polyscias Guilfoylei var. laciniata. 2748 POLYSCIAS POLYSTACHYA lows: "This fine and distinct ornamental stove plant is a native of the South Sea Islands. It is of shrubby habit, with an erect stem, copiously dotted with lentic- ular markings, and having pinnate leaves on longish smooth terete petioles, and made up in the case of young plants of from three to seven stalked oblong- elliptic bluntish leaflets which are sometimes obscurely lobed, and irregularly spinose - serrate ; these leaflets vary in size from two to three inches long, and are neatly and evenly margined with creamy white, the surface being in addition occasionally splashed with gray." Var. laciniata, Bailey (Panax laciniatum, Hort.), Fig. 3116, has the white margins of the Ifts. deeply cut into very narrow spreading divergent teeth. Var. monstrosa, Bailey (Ardlia monstrosa and Panax monstrosum, Hort.), has the Ifts. irregularly cut and jagged, often very oddly so and of different sizes and shapes, the margins white and deep-toothed : one of the many If.-forms which are named laciniata, monstrosa, etc. R.H. 1891, p. 225. Gn. 39, p. 565. A form with golden green variegation is Panax monstrosum aureum of the lists. Var. Victdriae, Bailey (Panax Vic- torias, Rod. Ardlia Victdrise, Hort. Nothopanax fruticd- sum var. Victorias, Merr.). Fig. 3117. A small close- growing plant (as seen in cult.) with much-divided Ivs., the Ifts. or segms. small and of different sizes and shapes. A good compact form, frequent in green- houses, which constantly sends up new stalks and yields recurving tasselled light green white-margined foliage; recommended as a good table plant. G.C. II. 19:405. I.H. 31:521. Balfouriana, Bailey (Ardlia Balfouriana, Sander. Panax Bdlfourii, Sander). Compact and bushy shrub, in cult, well furnished with foliage from base to top: st. bronze-green, speckled with gray: Ivs. with long slender petioles (3-5 in. long) which are more or less marked and lined and dilated-clasping at base; Ifts. usually 3, long-stalked, orbicular or reniform in outline, cordate at base, very obtuse or broad at apex, coarsely 3117. Polyscias Guilfoylei var. Victorias. crenate or crenate-dentate, the teeth apiculate and sometimes with minor spinulose serratures, margined or blotched with white. Intro, from New Caledonia. — Thought to be a form of P. pinnata by some. R. Rumph- idna, Harms, is to be studied in this connection. filicifolia, Bailey (Ardlia filicifdlia, Moore. Panax filicifolium, Hort. A. spectdbilis, Hort.). Fig. 3118. Strong erect glabrous shrub, with large lenticels and usually with purplish branchlets: Ivs. variable, even on the same plant as it attains age (as in Fig. 3118); as commonly seen in cult, young plants, the Ifts. are long-lanceolate or narrowly oblong- lanceolate, narrowed at base, and deeply pinnatifid, the narrow acute segms. being spinulose-serrate ; on older shoots or plants, the Ifts. may be much larger and broader, still narrow at the base, and merely spinulose-dentate; as the plant matures it produces also very broad-ovate or broad-oblong thick nearly or quite entire Ifts., with broad or trun- cate or even sub- cordate base, very unlike those already des- cribed. Pacific Ids. I.H. 23: 240. J. H. III. 48:337. R. H. 1891, p. 224. Gn. 39, p. 565.— Known in some places in tropics as "angelica." The above ac- count comprises the cult, aralias that are most likely to be met with and to be referred to this group. Undoubtedly some of the garden names under Panax belong in Pplyscias. The following are names under Panax (not under Poly- scias) which are in doubt or of which combinations ap- pear not to be recog- nized under Poly- scias: Panax coch- leatum DC. (No- thopanax c o c h - lea turn, Merrill). Erect shrub, to 10 ft.: Ivs. simple, 2-5 in. across, nearly orbicular, cordate, somewhat concave above, remotely spinulose-dentate. Cult, in Pacific tropics. — P. crispatum, Bull ( Nothopanax crispa- tum, Merrill). Shrub, to 6 ft.: Ivs. triangular, decompound, the Ifts. deeply incised and toothed, oblong-obovate to broad-ovate, green, the lateral ones overlapping. Probably Brazil, but widely disseminated in tropics. — P. Deleauanum, Hort., is properly P. fruticosum var. Deleauanum, N. E. Br. A variation with irreg- ularly pinnate Ivs. and digitately cut segms., the ultimate segms. variable, but cuneate at base, toothed and cut and white- toothed. Polynesia. I.H. 30:492. Known also as Aralia Deleauana. — P. diffusum, Bull. Form of P. fruticosum, with bright green, crisped Ifts., which are linear-oblong and spiny-toothed. Polynesia. — P. dissectum, Bull. Erect, branching, the 2-pinnate Ivs. drooping, the Ifts. cuneate-obovate and toothed and often 2-lobed. — P. divari- catum, Sieb. & Zucc.=Acanthopanax divaricatus, p. 193. — P. dumi>- sum. Bull. Short-stemmed: Ivs roundish ovate, pinnately divided, the variable ultimate divisions spiny-toothed. — P. fissum. Bull. St. marked with pallid spots: Ivs. 3-pinnate, the Ifts. linear-lanceo- late and whitish toothed. Polynesia. — P. lepidum. Bull. Com- pact: Ivs. biternately divided, the end division largest; pinnules or ultimate Ifts. obliquely obovate, the central one in each case small (sometimes almost rudimentary) and more or less covered by its 2 lateral ones, the margins spiny-toothed and cut. Brazil. — Recent. Scarcely known in cult, in Amer. — P. Mastersianum, Sander. Of climbing habit, with long-stalked drooping pinnate Ivs. about 3 ft. long, the petiole greenish, tinged with pink and marked with white, the Ifts. oblong-lanceolate and toothed. Solomon Isls. G.C. III. 23:242. — P. multifidum, Hort., is properly P. fruticosum var. multif- idum, N. E. Br. Compact plant, with 3-pinnatisect Ivs. and linear or linear-lanceolate segms. lAiu. or less long, with bristly teeth. — P. Murrayi, Muell. (Aralia splendidissima, Hort.). Tree in its native place, with drooping, shining green pinnate Ivs. 3-4 ft. long, and many oblong-lanceolate Ifts. 3-6 in. long: umbels of brownish fls. in long, terminal panicles. S. Sea Isls. Austral. B.M. 6798. Perhaps true Aralia. — P. nitidum, Bull. Compact: Ivs. roundish obovate, toothed and somewhat spiny, sometimes with deep incis- ions. Brazil. — P. ornatum, Bull (Nothopanax ornatum, Merrill). Slightly branched shrub, to 10 ft.: Ivs. long, pinnate, the 11-17 Ifts. narrow-lanceolate and deeply blunt-toothed, sometimes pinnately lobed, irregular in shape: fls. greenish white, the panicles terminal or in the upper axils: fr. about Kin. long, purple. Probably Brazil, but widely cult, in tropics. — P. sessilifldrurn, Rupr. & Max.= Acanthopanax sessiliflorus, p. 192. L H B POLYSTACHYA (Greek, referring to the many spikelets). Orchiddcese. Tropical epiphytic orchids, few of which have showy flowers. 3118. Polyscias filicifolia. All leaflets from the same plant. ( X H) POLYSTACHYA POLYSTICHUM 2749 Sepals connivent or subpatent, the lateral ones con- nate with the short foot of the column into a mentum; column short: flowering sts. short, few-lvd., pseudo- bulbous.— About 80 species. For cult., see Orchid. luteola, Hook. (Dendrobium polystachyon, Swartz). Height 6-12 in. : Ivs. oblong-Unear or lanceolate-oblong, exceeded by the St.: fls. small, greenish yellow; lip 3-lobed to the middle. S. Fla. and Trop. Amer. P. appendiculata, KranzL Fls. small, yellow; upper sepal with short, subulate, spur-like appendage attached to back a little above base. Trop. Afr. — P. bicolor, Rolfe. Plant very small: sts. tufted: Ivs. lanceolate-oblong: scapes 3-5 in. long; fls. small; sepals light purple; petals cream-white. Seychelles. — P. campyloglosaa, Rolfe. Lvs, oblong or linear-oblong, 2-4 in. long: scape 2 in. long, 1- or few-fld.; fls. green, with brown on foot of column and base of lip. Trop. Afr. — P.\ coridcta, Rolfe. Lvs. linear-oblong, 4-6 in. long: racemes densely-fld., sparingly branched at base; fls. minute, deep yellow. Cent. Afr. — P. dendrobiiflora, Reichb. f. Fls. up to 20 together, in a short corymb, white, suffused with pale rose, resembling in size and shape Dendrobium Fytchianum. — P. ensifdlia, Lindl. Sts. erect, bearing linear-oblong Ivs. 4-6 in. long: fls. numerous, tawny yellow, borne on an erect infL Trop. Afr. — P. flfiubsa, Schlecht. Scape slender, about 1 ft. long, terminated by a lax raceme of small white fls, with a purple-spotted lip. E. Trop. Afr. G.C. III. 44:276. — P. golunginti*, Reichb. f. Plant about 4 in. high: infl. branched, with many small light yellow fls. — P. Haroldiana, Hort. Fls. white, sepals tinged with green, borne on a short spike. Trop. Afr. — P. Laurtntii, Wildem. Plant trailing: Ivs. fleshy, green: fls. in panicles, white or cream-white. Congo. — P. Latcrtncidna, Kranzl. St. pubescent: raceme 4-8-fld.; fls. yellowish green, the Up rose-pink; sepals spreading, puberulous, the dorsal ovate, acute, about }-im- long; petals incurved, oblong- oblanceolate, subobtuse, about as long as sepals; lip 3-lobed, about •ng, the front lobe fleshv, nearly orbicular. Trop. Afr. B.M. 8211. — P. mystacidioides, Wildem. Sts. branched, over 3 ft. long: Ivs. lanceolate, dull green, covered with tiny dots: fls. lurid purple and flesh-colored, J^in. long, solitary- Congo. — P. paniculdta, Rolfe. Pseudobulbs flattened, the young shoots blotched with purple: racemes panicled; fls. from coppery yellow to reddish orange. Trop. Afr. G.C. III. 48:462; 58:85. B.M. 8618.— P. ripens, Rolfe. Small, creeping: fls. about Jiin. long; sepals and petals buff-vellow striped with brown; lip deep red-brown. Uganda. — P. strMa, Rolfe. Panicle erect, 9 in. long; fls. HM. long, light greenish yellow, with faint purple streaks. Trop. Afr. GEORGE V. NASH.! POLYSTICHUM (Greek, many rows; referring to the sori). Polypodiacese. A group of ferns mostly of tem- perate regions, some species of which do well in living- rooms. Veins free and the roundish son covered by indusia that are peltate and attached to the leaf by a short cen- tral stalk. They are mostly easily grown and thrive best in shade. One species is very commonly grown for fern-dishes. All the species have also been described •me authors under the genus Aspidium. For cul- ture see Ferns. LNDEX. acrostichoides, 2. aculeatum, 6. amabile. 11. angulare, 8. arista turn, 13. Braunii, 9. capense, 12. coriafeum, 12. lepidocaulon, 4. Lonchitis, 1. munitum, 3. proliferum, 6. Richardii, 10. tensemen-sf, 7. Tsus-sinense, 7. varium. 14. viviparum, 5. A. Lis. simply pinnate throughout. B. Lower pinna? gradually reduced to mere lobes. 1. Lonchitis, Roth (Aspidium Lonchitis, Swartz). HOLLY FERN. Lvs. 9-20 in. long, rigid, the pinnae broadly lanceolate-falcate, the lowest triangular. N. Eu. and Amer., mostly in high latitudes. BB. Lower pinny scarcely if any smaller than those above. '2. acrostichoides, Sehott (Aspidium acrostichoides, Swartz). CHRISTMAS FERN. DAGGER FERN. Figs. 3119, 3120. Lvs. growing in dense crowns, with stalks 6-8 in. high, the pinnae linear-lanceolate, somewhat falcate, and serrulate with appressed teeth; spore-bear- ing pinnae contracted, with confluent sori. E. U. S. — One of our commonest species. The common name is due to the evergreen character of the Ivs. which are picked by the thousand and sold in bales to florists. 3. munitum, Kaulf. (Aspidium munitum, Kaulf.). Stalks 4-12 in. long, chaffy at base or throughout; pinnae long, linear-acuminate, serrate or doubly ser- rate; sori in a single row midway from midrib to mar- gin. Utah northward and westward. 4. lepidocaulon, Hook. Stipes densely clothed with large, heart-shaped scales: If .-blades short, with 12-15 pairs of pinnae, unequal-sided, scarcely toothed; sori usually in two rows. Japan. 3119. Christmas fern. — Polystichum acrostichoides. AA. Lvs. with auricles of pinnae forming distinct Ifts. 5. viviparum, Fee. Lf.-blades 12^18 in. long, 4-6 in. wide, with numerous lanceolate pinnae; lower basal margin obliquely truncate; sori in 2 or 4 rows. W. Indies. AAA. Lvs. bipinnote in the lower two-thirds. B. Pinnules auricled. 6. aculeatum, Roth (Aspidium aculeatum, Swartz). Lf.-blades 2 ft. or more long, 6-8 in. wide; pinnules twice as long as wide, with very conspicuous basal auricles. Eu. and Calif. Hardy. — P. proliferum, Hort., is an Australian form producing buds on the Ivs. A large number of varieties are grown and offered for sale by English florists, but they are not of a sort to be of value in American trade. 7. Tsus-sinense, J. Smith (the name is often incor- rectly spelled tensemense in the trade). Fig. 3121. Lvs. commonly 6 in. long, 2-3 in. wide, the petioles slender, dark, the Ivs. dark green. — Somewhat like P. aculeatum but well distinguished both in size and general appear- ance. This is one of the ferns commonly used for fern-dishes. 8. angulare, Willd. Lf.- blades 1-2 ft. long, rather narrowly lanceolate; pin- nules nearly triangular, two- thirds as broad as long, more or less incised. Eu. — Another favorite with Eng- lish growers who offer many varieties. Hardy. See P. aculeatum above. 9. Braunii, Lawson. Lf.- ,. blades 18-24 in. long, nar- \'\ rowly elliptic -lanceolate; pinnules 7-10 pairs to each pinna, broad, the upper basal edge parallel with the rachis. Europe and moun- tain regions of eastern 3120 Details of tip of America. — Sometimes con- fertile leaf of Polystichum sidered a variety of P. acrostichoides. a, son; b, in- aculeatum. dusium. 2750 POLYSTICHUM POMEGRANATE BB. Pinnules scarcely auricled. 10. Richardii, Hook. Lf.-blades 9-18 in. long, ovate- deltoid, with 12-15 pairs of pinnae; pinnules deeply toothed, texture coriaceous. New Zeal. 11. amabile, Blume. Lf.-blades 1 ft. or more long, 6-9 in. wide, with a lanceolate terminal pinna and 3-6 pairs of lateral ones; pinnules sub-rhomboidal, the upper and outer portions sharply spinulose serrate. India, Japan, and E. Indies. AAAA. Lvs. more than twice pinnate in the lower pinnae. 12. c a p e n s e , J. Smith (P. coridceum, Swartz). Stalks scat- tered, 1-2 ft. long: If.-blades 1-3 ft. long, leathery, sub -deltoid, the segms. lanceolate and bluntly lobed, the teeth not mucronate. S. Afr., S. Amer., and New Zeal. 3121. Polystichum Tsus-sinense. (Small plant.) 13. aristatum, Swartz. Stalks scattered, 12-18 in. long, scaly below: If.-blades 1-2 ft. long, 9-12 in. wide, 3-4-pinnatifid, the lower pinnae largest; texture firm, glossy; sori in 2 rows near the midrib. Japan to Ceylon and Austral. 14. vjirium, Presl. St. partly creeping: Ivs. lJ^-2 ft. long, 9-12 in. wide, narrowly triangular, 3-pinnate in lowest pinnae, somewhat leathery. Japan, China. — Similar to P. capense. . L. M UNDERWOOD. R. C. BENEDICT.! POMADERRIS (Greek, lid and skin, said to allude to the membranous covering of the capsule). Rham- nacese. Shrubs, more or less covered with hoary or ferruginous stellate tomentum. The Victorian hazel, P. apetala, is included here. Leaves alternate: fls. numerous, in small cymes usually forming terminal or axillary corymbs or pani- cles; calyx-tube adnate to the ovary, limb 5-parted, deciduous or reflexed; petals 5 or wanting; stamens 5, the filaments elongated and often suddenly attenuate and inflexed at the top; ovary more or less inferior: caps, small, the upper portion protruding above the calyx-tube, 3-valved. — About 22 species confined to Austral., New Caledonia and New Zeal. Several spe- cies have been cult, in England at different times but P. apetala seems to be the one most commonly cult. Prop, by cuttings of half-ripened shoots. apetala, Labill. Shrub or small tree, 6-15 ft. high, rarely more: Ivs. 2-4 in. long, oblong-ovate, obtuse or subacute, irregularly crenulate: panicles 3-7 in. long, terminal and axillary; calyx-tube short, stellate-tomen- tose; petals wanting: caps, obtuse, sparsely stellate- tomentose. Austral, and New Zeal. — Cult, in Calif, for ornament. Von Mueller in his "Select Extra-Tropical Plants," says it is "a tree attaining a height occasion- ally of 60 ft., but mostly smaller. The foliage is devoured with avidity by pasture animals, often in preference to ordinary good feed." P. mcciniifdlia, Reiss, an Australian species with ovate or nearly orbicular Ivs., cream-colored fls. in ovoid terminal panicles and with broad petals, has been cult, in England. G.C. III. 35:339. F. TRACY HUBBARD. POMEGRANATE is the vernacular of Punica Grana- twn, a small tree of southern Asia, grown both for orna- ment and for its edible fruit (Fig. 3122). See Punica. It is somewhat grown in the open in the southern states, and also as a pot- or tub-plant in greenhouses in the North. The natural habit of the pomegranate is of rather bushy growth, but by careful training a. tree 15 to 20 feet may be produced. This, however, seems possible only in the southern sections of the United States. A great many shoots spring from the base of the plant; these should be cut out, as it is contended that they withdraw the nutriment which should go to the fruit- bearing stems. The branches are slender, twiggy, nearly cylindrical, somewhat thorny. The leaves are lanceo- late, long, narrow, glossy green and with red veins. The flowers have a red thick fleshy calyx, crowned with bright scarlet crumpled petals and numerous stamens. The fruit is globular, topped with a crown-like calyx, and the interior consists of numerous seeds enveloped in a bright crimson or pink-colored pulp, seeds being arranged in segments, separated by a thin skin, and very acid in the typical variety. A cooling acescent drink, known as granadine, is made from the pulpy seeds, with the addition of water and sugar. This is much used in the South, and in certain parts of Europe, and is especially grateful in fevers. This plant will suc- ceed as far as the 35th degree of latitude north, but during extreme cold periods, the plants are sometimes injured by cold in that latitude. For higher latitudes it should be cultivated in tubs, and given a con- servatory during winter. For some sections of the South it is used for hedges. The fruit begins to ripen about September and can be kept for several weeks. The pomegranate is multiplied by hardwood cut- tings planted in open ground during February, or by layers and also by softwood cuttings during summer. As the plant forms many shoots, these are often used, as they usually are provided with rootlets. In Florida, Georgia, Alabama, Louisiana, and some of the other southern states, pomegranates are grown commer- cially and are shipped to the northern and eastern markets. There is a growing demand for the fruit of the pomegranate. The pomegranate is supposed to have been introduced into south- ern Europe by the Carthaginians, whose Latin name of "Puni- cus" was thus given and derived. A refer- ence is also found in the sacred scriptures. Theophrastus des- cribed it 300 years before the Christian era, and Pliny con- sidered it one of the most valuable fruits, both as to its beauty and medicinal proper- 3122. Pomegranate, in lengthwise ties. The bark of the section. ( x Yd POMEGRANATE PONCIRUS 2751 root is a well-known astringent employed in therapeu- tics, in dysentery and diarrhea; the rind of the fruit, when boiled, has for many generations past been the remedy for tenia, and a jet-black smooth writing ink is also made of it. The pomegranate is a native of some parts of Asia, and by some botanical authors is said to be found also in northern Africa and China. Although of such ancient origin and cultivation, there are but few varieties of the fruit-bearing section disseminated in this country and Europe, but, according to Firminger, several fine varieties have been grown in Bengal from seed brought from Cabul, one being seedless, another growing to the size of "an ordinary human head" and still another as large as a small shaddock. Varieties grown for fruit. Acid, or Wild. — With a sharp acid pulp: fruit often very large, from 3 to 4 inches diameter and with a bright-colored rind. Dwarf. — A form of the Acid variety, of very low and bushy growth: flowers single: fruit from 13^-2 inches diameter; pulp very acid. This can be grown in a pot, as it fruits very abundantly. Paper Shell. — Yen,- large, juicy, very sweet, and of excellent quality: skin thin, pale {yellow with crimson cheek; sides crimson: fine grower: good bearer and ships well. Rhoda. — Fruit crimson, of large size; skin thin but tough; crisp, sweet, and of exquisite flavor. Spanish Ruby, or Purple-seeded. — As cultivated in Louisiana, seems to be only a form of the Subacid. Fruit large and bright-colored with deep crimson pulp. It is considered the best of its class. Subacid. — Differs only from the Sweet in the more acidulated pulp. Sweet. — Fruit usually somewhat smaller than the Acid and with a darker-colored rind; pulp sweet. Wonderful. — This is said to be the largest of all pomegranates: fruit sometimes 5 inches diameter, bright crimson; pulp highly colored; very juicy; fine flavor: ripens early: good shipper. All these varieties are very ornamental from their abundant yield of bright scarlet flowers, which are pro- duced upon the extremities of the young branches of the same year's growth. When the plant is grown in a tree form, the branches should be annually cut back after the leaves drop. Varieties grown for ornament (non-fruiting). Double Dwarf, or Punica nana racemosa. — Of dwarf growth, with bright scarlet double flowers, which are borne in clusters. This is especially desirable for grow- ing in pots, as its flowers are abundant and lasting. Double Red. — With a very large calyx, from which protrude numerous large bright scarlet petals, larger than those of the common single type. These are pro- duced in abundance during summer and fall and resemble a bright scarlet pompon. Double Variegated, or Legrellei. — A very handsome variety with very large flowers, the petals being striped and mottled with yellow and scarlet. Double red blooms will frequently be found on the same stem with variegated blooms. As this is a sport of the Double Red it frequently reverts. Double Yellow. — Similar to the above in shape of flower, but latter are of a pale yellow color. Double White. — Form of flower is similar to Double Red, but color is pure white. L. A. BERCKMANS.! POMELO (contraction of pomplemoosef). A. name sometimes used in the East Indies for pummelo and in the United States for the grapefruit. Inasmuch as there are very many different varieties of Citrus grandis, it seems best to retain pummelo in its common East Indian sense as a generic term for all of them and to apply to the special form grown in the West Indies and the United States its old name grapefruit. The use of pomelo (a mere variant of pummelo) for the grape- fruit is likely to lead to confusion, especially as growers, shippers, dealers, and consumers all continue to use the name grapefruit. See Pummelo. WALTER T. SWINGLE. POMOLOGY: Fruit-growing, page 1290. POMPLEMOOSE (Dutch, pomplemoes, perhaps from Dutch pompoen, pumpkin, and old Javanese, limoes, a citrous fruit). A name sometimes used in East India instead of the more common pummelo for forms of Citrus grandis. PONCIRUS (French, poncire, a kind of citron). Rutacex, tribe Citreae. Small spiny deciduous tree native to North China, extensively used as a stock for oranges, also grown for hedges and often for ornament in regions too cold to permit of the culture of citrous fruits. This plant has been usually referred to Citrus, although DeCandolle, Rafinesque, Miquel, Penzig, Hance, Makino, and other botanists referred it to other genera. It differs from Citrus in having deciduous trifoliolate Ivs. : fl.-buds formed in early summer and passing the winter protected by bud-scales: fls. borne on old wood in early spring and nearly sessile, with petals opening flat and narrowed to a claw-like basej 3123. Poncinis trifoliata. (X}i) stamens entirely free; ovary 6-8- (usually 7-) celled: fr. densely and finely pubescent, the pulp vesicles con- taining oily matter in drops and having hair-like appendages which secrete a viscous fluid, the ovary wall showing orange-colored cellular eruptions between the bases of the pulp vesicles; pith with transverse plates of thick-walled cells; stomata of the green twigs situated at the bottom of deep narrow pits; and seed- lings with spirally arranged cataphylls, the lowest bract-like, the uppermost gradually merging into foli- age-lvs. In view of these numerous differences, all of them of taxonomic importance, there can be no doubt of the validity of the genus Poncirus. trifoliata, Raf . (Citrus trifoliata, Linn. Citrus fusca, Lour. Pseudxgle sepiaria, Miq. Pseud&gle trifoliata, 2752 PONCIRUS PONGAMIA Makino. Mglel sepidria, DC. Limdnia? trichocdrpa, Hance. Citrus triptera, Carr.). TRIFOLIATE ORANGE. Figs. 3123-3125. A small tree, spines long and stout: Ivs. deciduous, trifoliolate, often borne in tufts on old wood (see Fig. 3123); terminal Ifts. 1^-2^ in. long, lateral ones 1-2 in. long, sessile, petiole slightly winged: fls. 1^-2 in. across, white, the corolla opening nearly 3124. Flowers of Poncirus trifoliate. (X1A) flat, and the petals nar- rowed to a claw at base (Fig. 3124), stamens free, ovary 6-8- (generally 7-) celled: fr. very fragrant, dull lemon-colored, like a small orange in shape, but only 1 J/2-2 in. diam., and covered with fine downy hairs, oil-glands of peel abundant, filled with a very disagreeably flavored oil, pulp scanty, very aromatic, seeds ovoid, plump, very numer- ous, leaving little space for pulp. Illus. Kaempf. Amoen. 801. B.M. 6513. G.C. III. 27:269. Penzig, Studi sugli Agrumi, Atlas, pis. 13, 14. U. S. Dept. Agric. Yearbook 1904, pi. X. U. S. Dept. Agric. B.P.I. Circ. No. 46, figs. 1-^6, pi. 1. Comptes rendus 4 me Confer. Internat. Genet, p. 386. — The trifoliate orange has been known in N. China since ancient times, being repeatedly referred to in early works, and it was described and figured in the Chgng lei pen ts'ao, printed in 1108 A.D. It was early intro. into Japan and definitely referred to in the Mannyo shu, a Japanese MSS. work dating from the 8th century. Var. monstrosa, Swingle (Citrus trifoliata var. monstrosa, T. Ito in Encyclopedia Jap- onica, 2:1056). HIRYO, or FLYING DRAGON. This is a curious, very dwarf variety with tortuous branches and curved spines. The Ivs. are very small and incon- spicuous as the Ifts. are often reduced to mere fila- ments on which the oil-glands appear as node-like thickenings. This variety is esteemed in Japan for cult, as a dwarfed pot-plant. The writer introduced it from Japan into this country in 1915. The hybrids between Poncirus trifoliate, and the com- mon orange are called citranges. A number of varie- ties, Rusk, Colman, Morton, and so on, are grown for home use in the cotton-belt, north of the limit of suc- cessful orange-culture. See Citrange. Promising hardy hybrids have been made at the Department of Agricul- ture under the writer's direction between P. trifoliata and a number of other species of citrous fruits, such as the sour orange, mandarin, grapefruit, lemon, lime, calamondin, kumquat (Fortunella sp.), and others. These are being tested in the field. The principal use of the trifoliate orange is for stock upon which to graft the commonly cultivated citrous fruits. It is especially well adapted to rather rich somewhat moist, sandy loam soils, preferably with a clay subsoil, such as are common around the Gulf Coast. It is not at all adapted to light sandy soils, nor to strongly calcareous soils. Almost all kinds of citrous fruits grow readily on trifoliate stock but are dwarfed somewhat and usually forced into early bearing. The Satsuma orange as grown commercially in this country is practically limited to this stock as it does not grow at all on sour orange stock and succeeds only very imper- fectly on sweet orange stock. Trifoliate stock is also very widely used in Japan. In the states south of the Potomac and Ohio rivers the trifoliate orange is some- times used for hedges, for which purpose it is well adapted because of its dwarfed habit, strong thorns, handsome flowers, foliage, and fruits. Even in winter after the leaves have fallen its twigs remain green. It is very widely used for hedges in Japan. P. trifoliata is also of value as an ornamental tree for lawn planting, for which purpose care should be taken to secure large- flowered forms.' It can be grown for this purpose as far north as Philadelphia. The trifoliate orange shows surprisingly little variation. Millions of seedlings are grown every year in the larger citrous nurseries of this country but it is rare to see any perceptible variation in the character of the leaves and twigs. The flowers, however, do show variation, often having a partial staminody of the petals (rarely complete) which makes them smaller and less handsome than the normal large flowers. The fruits are usually nearly spherical but rarely are somewhat elongate and papillate, much like a very small lemon. WALTER T. SWINGLE. POND-APPLE: Annona glabra. P. Lily: Nuphar. P.-weed: Potamogeton. PONGAMIA (a native Malayan name). Legumi- nosse. A single arborescent or shrubby species of tropi- cal Asia and Australia, little known in this country. Leaves odd-pinnate; Ifts. opposite: fls. racemed; calyx campanulate, nearly truncate; corolla much exserted; standard broad; keel obtuse, the petals cohering at the tip; stamens monadelphous, the upper filament free low down; anthers oblong, versatile; ovary subsessile, 2-ovuled; style incurved, glabrous; stigma capitate: pod flattened, oblong, indehiscent, not at all winged or thickened at the sutures. It is related 3125. Poncirus trifoliata. PONGAMIA to Piscidia but differs from it by having t'he pods short, compressed, smooth, and 1-seeded instead of elongated, winged, and several-seeded. pinnata, W. F. Wight (Cytisus pinnata. Linn P. glabra, Vent. Pongam pinnata, Wight. Galedupa indica Lam.). A tall erect tree or climber, with glabrous branches and Ivs.: Ifts. 5-7, opposite, subcoriaceous, oblong or ovate, pointed, stalked, 2-4 in. long: fls. in a simple peduncled axillary raceme, nearly as long as the Ivs.; pedicels 2-4 joined together, M-M"*- long. with a pair of minute bractlets in the middle; corolla J^in. long, standard silky on the back: pod woody, glabrous, lA~lAin. thick, 1% in- l°ng> with a .sh^ decurved point. Intro, into U. S. in 1910. — Suitable as an ornamental in the southern states. The ash of the wood is used for dyeing. The seed yields a thick red- brown oil used for illuminating and medicinal purposes. The foliage is bright and very handsome. The tree sometimes reaches a height of 40 ft. Grown in S. Calif. P. L. RlCKEK. PONTEDERIA (G. Pontedera was an Italian botan- ist, 1688-1757). Pontederiacese. Perennial herbs of bogs and ponds with strong horizontal rootstocks, frequently used in water-gardens, and for naturalizing in wet places. Leaves long-petioled, ropt-lvs. with a sheathing stipule within the petiole: infl. a 1-lvd. st. bearing a spike of violet-blue ephemeral fls.; perianth funnel- form, 2-lipped, the 3 upper segms. united to form the 3-lobed upper lip, the 3 lower spreading and clawed; stamens 6 ; ovary 3-celled, 2 of the cells empty.— Two or 3 species from N. and S. Amer. Pontederias are well worth cultivation in bog-gardens and shallow ponds, and P. cordata is offered by dealers in native plants. It thrives best in water 10 to 12 inches deep. It transplants with ease. Propagated mostly by division. It grows as far north as Nova Scotia and Minnesota, and therefore is perfectly hardy in all parts of the country. cordata, Linn. PICKEREL- WEED. Growing in clumps: Ivs. heart-shaped, blunt, from a spathe-like bract: upper lobe of perianth marked with a pah- of yellow spots (rarely all white) ; calyx-tube in fr. crested with 6-toothed ridges. Nova Scotia to Ont., Minn., and Texas. B.M. 1156. Mn. 7:1. V. 2:196; 3:336. G.C. III. 52:466. Var. lancif&lia, Morong (P. lancifolia, Muhl. P. lanceolata, Nutt.), differs from the type in having lanceolate Ivs. N. Amer. B.M. 8108. For P. crdssipes. Mart., see Eichhornia crassipes. Vol. II, p. 1105. — P. montendensis, Hort., has appeared in the foreign journals but its botanical characters are unknown. G.W. 3, p. 619. F. TRACY HUBBARD. PONTHIEVA (named in honor of M. de Ponthieu). Orchidacese. Terrestrial, glabrous or pilose herbs which are not in common cultivation, though sometimes grown in gardens. Roots fascicled in a short rhizome: Ivs. subradical, ovate or lanceolate, membranaceous, more or less petioled: infl. a lax raceme borne on a simple elongated scape; the pedicels often glandular-pubescent: fls. medium-sized; sepals free, spreading; petals adnate to the column, narrower than the sepals; labellum adnate to the base of the column by a claw, ascending, with the lateral lobes winged; column short or rather long, terete, apex broadened: caps, oblong, erect, beakless. — About 30 species, Trop. and Subtrop. Amer. glandulSsa, R. Br. Plants 1-1 % ft- high, with lanceo- late-elliptical, pointed and short -petioled Ivs. which are 3-5 in. long: raceme 3-6 in. long; fls. green or greenish brown; outer sepal ovate-oblong, lateral ones flat; petals half -cordate-deltoid; labellum abruptly dilated above the claw, roundish with a terminal, linear appen- dage. W. Indies and S. Amer. B.M. 842 (as Neottia glandulosa). — Formerly offered by a dealer in native plants. Probably not hardy N. F. TRACY HUBBARD. POPULUS 2753 POPCORN: Corn. POPLAR: Populus. P., Yellow: Liriodendron. POPPY: Papaver. California P.: Eschscholtzia. Celandine P.: Stylophorum. Corn P. : Papaver Rhoeas. Horned P. : Glaucium. Opium P.: Papaver somniferum. Prickly P.: Argemone. Shirley P.: an improved strain of Papaver Rhceas. Tulip P.: Hunnemannia. Welsh. P. : Meconopsis cambrica. POPULUS (ancient Latin name, of disputed origin). Salicacese. POPLAR. ASPEN. COTTONWOOD. Soft- wooded trees of rapid growth, some kinds of which are much planted on roadsides and in grounds, particularly when quick results are desired. The poplars are dioecious, with both staminate and pistillate flowers naked but from a cup-shaped disk, and in slender mostly drooping precocious catkins in which the subtending scales are toothed, cut or cleft at the apex: stamens few or many, usually numerous, on distinct filaments: pistillate fls. with mostly a single 1-loculed mostly sessile ovary with short style and 2-4 often lobed long stigmas: fr. a small 2-4-valved caps., containing cottony seeds, the mature catkin sometimes with a necklace-like or moniliform character: Ivs. alternate, stalked, mostly broad: buds scaly 2 often resinous. — Species probably about 35-40, in the northern hemisphere, mostly extra-tropical, although very many more than this have been described, some of them being hybrids. The poplar of lumbermen is the tulip tree. (See Liriodendron.) Botanically the poplars comprise a most bewildering group, and there is wide divergence of opinion and prac- tice as to the limits and names of species. Many of the cultivated forms are assumed to be hybrids, but the origin of most of them, so far as parentage is con- cerned, can be little more than conjectured. It is likely that seedlings of some of these hybrids break up into forms much resembling the parents, and thereby still further contribute to the bewilderment. The trees being dioecious, the herbarium specimens may not represent both sexes; as the catkins appear in advance of the foliage, the specimens may not repre- sent the same plant or type; the foliage is very various, sometimes even on the same tree, and specimens are likely to be taken from the lower part of large trees where the leaves are small or from the terminal shoots of young trees on which the leaves are large and have a different character. Of some kinds only one sex is known. The habit of growth is also very characteristic even in species or forms on which the foliage is very similar, but this character is of course not represented in botanical specimens. It will be seen, therefore, that the usual herbarium collection may not have full value hi the determination of species. There is natu- rally a tendency to place great stress on leaf-forms in the description of species, even though hi some groups practically the whole range of forms may be found on single trees. These difficulties are particularly marked hi this country hi the P. deltoides-angidata group. • With regard to the variability of the leaves of Popu- lus, Schneider writes in "Plants W'ilsonianae," "it is helpful to keep the following in mind. L. A. Dode was the first who clearly described the variation of the leaves according to the age of the plants, the position of the branches, and the climatic and other conditions under which they were produced. ... I think it sufficient if we distinguish three different kinds of leaves: (1) the leaves of the offshoots or suckers (folia turionum radicalium) ; (2) the leaves of the normal but not the vigorous shoots of the young plants (folia ramorum [sed non turionum] plants juvenilis); and (3) the leaves of the old trees (folia arboris adultae fructiferae) . The leaves of the third land we usually find at the ends of vigorous branches of young plants when they are growing well and becoming mature. If we compare leaves of different species it is necessary to be very careful only to compare the same kinds of leaves. 2754 POPULUS POPULUS What has been said about the dependence on leaf- characters in descriptions applies also to the horti- cultural description; it is much needed that the culti- vated poplars shall be studied with the purpose to corre- late the characters of habit, leaves, buds, twigs, bark, flowers, and fruit. Probably some of the difficulty in distinguishing native species of Populus is due to the fact that we have not recognized the presence of European or other hybrids in this country. It is not unlikely that some of these forms appear even in places remote from habita- tions, as do the .introduced tree willows, and that they have been confused with the native kinds. There appear to be few important growing collec- tions of poplars in this country, nor have the impor- tant cultivated examples in different parts been looked up and studied. Many of the European nursery forms have been introduced here and there; but for ornamen- tal planting practically only two kinds are much called for, the Lombardy and the so-called Carolina, with "Russian poplars" and "Norway poplars" in the prairie and plains country. This is a pity, seeing that some of the forms are most interesting in habit and foliage, and in the red coloring of petioles and midribs, combined with other good features. The hybrid poplars have not been given suffi- cient attention in North America. Some of the first-genera- tion hybrids are re- markably vigorous. The Russian poplars are undoubtedly of several kinds, mostly, appar- ently, forms or hybrids of P. balsamifera allies. A very large collection of Asiatic poplars was made at the botanic gardens at St. Petersburg and also at the agricultural college at Moscow. The late J. L. Budd introduced many of these forms and they have become widely distributed in the prairie regions. It would not be strange if substitutions had been made in the course of time. The Norway poplar of the interior region is very like P. Sargentii in foliage, but it holds its leaves three weeks later in autumn than the native cottonwood and the central trunk does not break up so quickly, thereby making a better timber tree; it is a very rapid grower. It has proved to be a very valuable tree for Minnesota and the Dakotas and other parts, and is hardy in Mani- toba. On account of its very rapid growth and the straight strong trunk, it has been called the "Sudden Sawlog poplar." It appears to have been introduced into North America from Russia by Budd, and is said to have been discovered on the eastern slope of the Altai Mountains. It was disseminated in part hi this country by Norwegian settlers and thereby got the name of Norway poplar. Its botanical position or name is undetermined. Poplars of various kinds are considerably planted on the prairies and plains and form characteristic features on the landscape. Many of them withstand the trying climatic conditions and also grow very rapidly. The many kinds of cultivated poplars, which have been 3126. Populus canescens above, and P. alba var. pyramidalis (P. Bolleana). (X1A) largely introduced or tried in these regions, stretching into Canada, need careful study by the systematist. They are particularly numerous in the tacamahac or balsam-poplar group and are not well understood. In the irrigated regions of the Rocky Mountain country, the Lombardy poplar has long been a familiar object along ditches and thoroughfares. The poplars are amongst the easiest of all trees to propagate and to grow. They come readily from hard- wood cuttings, as do willows and currants. The weeping varieties are grafted head-high on erect kinds, P. gran- didentata or its derivatives apparently being used as a stock. Poplars thrive in almost any soil, although the cottonwood is most at home in lowlands and along streams, at least in the East. For shelter-belts they are very useful because of rapid growth and great hardiness. In Europe, where fagots and other similar materials are desired, poplars are often headed-back severely or pollarded, but this practice is very little known in North America. The poplars are also useful for tem- porary shelter for other trees and bushes. In this respect the common aspen (P. tremuloides) is a valuable tree in the reforestation of American lands. It springs up quickly in clearings, and during its comparatively short life holds the soil and protects other vegetation and finally contributes its own substance to the main- tenance of the stronger forests. In this way it prob- ably has exerted an effect upon the configuration of our forest areas and upon the fertility of the land from remote time. The same qualities make it valuable, in many cases, in extensive ornamental plantings. The fault in the planting of poplars is the tendency to plant too many and to allow them to give character to the place. About summer resorts, for example, poplars and willows are used much too freely. They give the place a look of cheapness and temporariness. They are planted in such places because they grow rapidly and thrive in unfavor- able conditions; but it is better to use them for temporary effects, allowing better trees, that are planted with them, gradually to take their places. The legitimate common use of poplars in orna- mental grounds is the production of minor or secondary effects. As a rule, they are less adapted to isolated plant- ing as specimen trees than to use in com- position,— as parts of general groups of trees, — where their characters will serve to break the monotony of heavier foli- age. The poplars are "gay" trees, as a rule, especially those, like the aspens, that have a trembling foliage. Their leaves are bright and the tops thin. A few of them in judicious positions give a place a sprightly air. This is particu- larly true of the common aspen, P. tremuloides, of the woods. Its light twinkling foliage and silver-gray limbs are always cheering and its autumn color is one of the purest golden yellows of our landscapes. It is well to have a tree of it standing in front of a group of maples or evergreens. Its whole expression is then one of familiarity. On the other hand, the poplars have then" interest as specimen trees as distinctly as do other kinds of trees, but one seldom sees well-grown mature examples. The age characters of some kinds of poplars, both in structure and in bark, are as interesting as are those of maples and oaks or other trees. Of many of the planted poplars, old specimens are practically unknown to the public. The cottonwood (P. deltoides) is one of the best poplars for permanent planting. It makes a noble tree, of durable and substantial appearance. But like the aspen, it is cheerful and restive. One is not moved to lie under it, as one is under a maple or an oak. Its leaves POPULUS POPULUS 2755 rustle with the lightest movement of air. The ripple of its foliage recalls the play of wavelets on a pebbly shore. The day is never so dark but the cottonwood reflects a flood of light. One should take care, however, to plant only the staminate tree, for the "cotton" of the seeds is very disagreeable on lawns and about dwellings when carried by the wind. In the plains and mountain states, the western cottonwood (P. Sargentii) is a characteristic tree. Some of the forms of the black poplar of Europe are especially satisfactory for the production of lively effects in planting. Of these, one of the most distinct is the form known to nurserymen as Populus elegans. It has a most pleasing light and tremulous foliage, the effect of which is heightened by a twiggy character of growth and a reddish cast to the leaf-stalks and young shoots. It is an elegant tree, and well adapted to planting in front of heavier foliage in the most conspicuous part of the grounds. Some of the silver- or white-leaved poplars produce the most striking contrasts of foliage, especially if set near darker trees. Bolles' poplar (Populus Botteana of the nurseries) is one of the best of these trees. Its habit is something like that of the Lombardy. The upper surface of the deeply lobed leaves is dark dull green, while the under surface is almost snowy white. Such emphatic trees as this should usually be par- tially obscured by planting them amongst other trees so that they appear to mix with the other foliage, or else they should be seen at some distance. Other varieties 3127. Populus tremula. ( X J$) of the common white poplar or abele are frequently useful, although most of them sprout badly and may become a nuisance. The Lombardy poplar (P. nigra var. italica) is probably the most striking and distinct tree that is suited to planting in the North. As single specimens scattered here and there in mixed plantings, or when seen over or behind buildings, it may be most picturesque and satisfactory; but the tendency is to plant it too freely. The very fact that it is emphatic is the reason why it should be planted sparingly when artistic effects are desired. The catkins of poplars, particularly the staminate ones, are usually attractive, as they appear in early spring; but they are of short duration. Fig. 3130. The following sketch includes all the poplars known to be offered by American nurserymen or to be subjects of rather general planting, together with exotic forms that are likely to appear in this country. For litera- ture, see Wesmael, DC. Prodr. 16, pt. 2, pp. 323- 31; Sargent, Silva of North America, vol. 9 (quoted below as S.S.). A very recent careful treatment of the poplars appears in Volume VII of Elwes & Henry, "Trees of Great Britain and Ireland;" from this work some of the following characterization is drawn. Subsequently, the black poplars (P. nigra-deltoides group) have been worked over by Henry in Transactions of the Royal Scottish Arboricultural Society, 30, pt. 1. Discussions of the genus of recent date will be found in C. K. Schneider, "Handbuch der Laubholzkunde" (1906) and Dode in Mdmoires Soci6t6 d' Histoire Naturelle d'Autun (1905). For an account of the new and old Chinese species, see Schneider in "Plantae Wilsonianae," Vol. III. INDEX. acuminata, 19. euxylon, 146. pendula, 1, 2, 4, 5, 6. adenopoda, 4. Fargesii, 15. Petroswkyana, 28- are then graded by hand and packed in barrels for shipment. Great care is used in handling the new potatoes to prevent unnecessary bruising. Mechanical diggers have not given satisfaction in the trucking region of the South, primarily because they bruise and break the skin, thus causing the tubers to present discolorations when placed on the market. T. C. JOHNSON*. POTATO, AIR: Dioscorea buOnfera. P. Onion: Onion. P., Sweet: Sweet Potato, and Ipomcea Batatas. POTENTILLA (diminutive of Latin potens, power- ful; referring to the medicinal properties). Rosaces. CIXQUEFOIL. FIVE-FINGER. A large group of perennial, rarely annual, herbs and shrubs found throughout the North Temperate and frigid zones; somewhat planted. Leaves compound: appendages of the calyx 5, borne at the base of the 5 sepals, which in turn are borne upon the edge of a cup-shaped, dry receptacle; stamens 10-30, together with the 5 rounded petals inserted upon the margin of the receptacle (perigynous) ; pistils many, in fr. becoming minute achenes; style deciduous. Those in cultivation are all hardy perennial plants 3157. Potentilla, one of the hybrid garden forms known as P. coccinea; of the P. atrosanguinea group. suitable for border planting. The most valuable dou- ble-fld. forms are hybrids. Monograph by T. Wolf, Bibliot. Dot. Heft 71:1908. The American potentulas are generally rather unat- tractive plants with small flowers. They are, as a rule, very tenacious of Ufe and do well with ordinary care. P. fruticosa, a handsome and distinct low shrub, pre- fers moist positions, but will grow in even very dry soil. When thoroughly established in moist soil, it is difficult to eradicate. P. argentea should be given a dry soil, preferably about rocks. It is tenacious of life and is rather attractive. P. Hippiana, a western species with comparatively large foliage of decided gray color, is hardy East. It is a good perennial, preferring dryish 2772 POTENTILLA POTENTILLA soil. P. tridentata is an attractive evergreen species forming thick mats. It does well in any fairly rich soil in open or partially shaded positions. Potentillas are ptopagated by division or seed, the hybrids only by division. P. fruticosa may be increased by greenwood cuttings. (F. W. Barclay.) Hybrid potentillas (Fig. 3157) have nearly all the good qualities in a border plant, — handsome foliage and free-blooming habit. They continue in bloom from spring until autumn, although most profusely in June and July. They cannot be said to be reliably hardy in the latitude of Boston, probably not above Washington. They do not grow over 2 feet and seldom need staking. A heavy soil suits them best. Choice varieties are propa- gated by division of the rootstock in spring; cuttings will not root. They run mostly in shades of maroon, scarlet, and orange, often beautifully banded with yellow. They bear seed freely, and when carefully hybridized one may get a very fine strain with a good proportion of double blooms. Seedlings bloom the second year. Some of the species make neat rock-plants, especially P. tridentata, P. verna, and P. argentea, — the last, though common, is valuable in places in which other plants will not grow. (T. D. Hatfield.) alba, 9. albicans, 1 alpestris, 27. ambigua, 5. Anserina, 31. argentea, 21. arguta, 11. argyrophylla, 18. atrosanguinea, 19. calabra, 21. canadensis, 30. cinerea, 29. dahurica, 1. dubia, 26. eriocarpa, 6. INDEX. formosa, 15. Friedricksenii, 1. fruticosa, 1. glandulosa, 12. Gordonii, 33. gracilis, 14. grandiflora, 24. hsematochrus, 17. Hippiana, 13. insignis, 18. laciniata, 23. laciniosa, 23. nepalensis, 15. nitida, 8. pacifica, 32. palustris, 3. pyrenaica, 25. recta, 22. rupestris, 10. Salcsoviana, 2. speciosa, 7. sulphurea, 22. Thurberi, 16. Tonguei, 15. tridentata, 4. Veitchii, 1. verna, 28. villosa, 20. Vilmoriniana, 1. ARTIFICIAL KEY TO THE SPECIES. A. St. distinctly shrubby, diffusely branched 1. fruticosa AA. St. herbaceous or merely suffruticose. B. Basal Ivs. pinnate, 5-7-foliolate. c. Lvs. white-tomentose, at least be- neath. D. Fls. cymose: Ifts. whitened both sides 13. Hippiana DD. Fls. lateral, solitary at the nodes: Ifts. usually green above. E. Carpels dorsally furrowed: peduncles and sts. pilose; tomentum lustrous 31. Anserina EE. Carpels dorsally rounded: peduncles and sts. glabrate; tomentum dull 32. pacifica cc. Lvs. green both sides. D. Fls. white, rose, or dark purple; infl. more or less lax, diffusely cymose; petals exceeding the E. Lfts. round-elliptic or rhom- bic-ovate: carpels glabrous, smooth or rugulose: inft. glandular 10. rupestris EE. Lfts. oblong or cuneate-oblong or oblong-lanceolate: infl. not glandular. F. Carpels densely pilose: pet- als large, obovate, showy. 2. Salesoviana FF. Carpels glabrous: petals minute, ovate-lanceolate . 3. palustris DD. Fls. creamy yellow; infl. con- gested; petals not longer than the sepals 11. arguta ODD. Fls. bright yellow. E. Lfts. minute, ^-^in. long, dissected: petals shorter than the sepals 33. Gordonii EE. Lfts. large, 1 in. long or more, dentate or incised 12. glandulosa BB. Basal Ivs. palmately 5-7-foliolate. c. Fls. white: Ivs. white-silky or glau- cous beneath 9. alba cc. Fls. yellow. D. Lvs. white-woolly or white stel- late-canescent, at least beneath. E. Caudex with abundant rooting stolons: sts. scarcely exceed- ing the basal Ivs., pilose with long horizontal yellow- ish hairs: Ivs. canescent... .29. cinerea EE. Caudex without stolons: sts. much exceeding the Ivs., without the above hairs. F. St. 16-28 in. high: fls. 7-9 lines broad 14. gracilis FF. St. 6-16 in. high: fls. 4-7 lines broad 21. argentea DD. Lvs. green beneath, or somewhat silky. E. Fls. lateral, solitary at each node 30. canadensis EE. Fls. terminal and solitary or cymose. F. Lfts. large, 2-6 in. long: plants large. G. Infl. glandular: Its. ru- gose, coarsely serrate- dentate 22. recta GO. Infl. glandless: Irs. not rugose, laciniate-pin- natifid 23. laciniosa FF. Lfts. small, l/r~l l/t in- long: plants low. G. Style conical: fls. 1 in. broad 25. pyrenaica GG. Style clavate: fls. 5-12 lines broad. H. Stipules of basal Ivs. broadly ovate or ovate-lanceolate: sto- lons scarcely elon- gated, clothed with dead stipules 27. alpestris HH. Stipules of basal Ivs. linear, elongated: stolons much elonga- ted, rooting, not clothed with dead stipules 28. verna ccc. Fls. purple or rose. D. Lvs. and sts. velvety with yellow- ish hairs: Ivs. almost tomen- tose beneath 17. haematochrus DD. Lvs. and sts. not yellowish hairy: Ivs. green both sides. E. Lfts. 5: petals clear purple with dark veins and dark spot at base: infl. not glandular 15. nepalensis EE. Lfts. mostly 7: petals dark purple: infl. glandular 16. Thurberi BB. Basal Ivs. palmately, or rarely pin- nately, 3-foliolate. c. Fls. rose, white, or creamy white. D. Lfts. glabrous, or slightly stri- gose beneath, 3-toothed: fls. white 4. tridentata DD. Lfts. white-silky on both sides, 3-toothed or entire: fls. rose, rarely white 8. nitida DDD. Lvs. tomentose at least beneath; teeth several. E. Petals white or cream, nar- row, cochleate, and dorsally villous 7. speciosa EE. Petals purple or red, broadly obovate, glabrous 19. atrosanguinea cc. Fls. yellow. D. Lvs. white-tomentose beneath, white-silky above (see also P. grandiflora). E. Margin of Ifts. incised-ser- rate: fls. 1-1 ]4 in. broad. . 18. argyrophylla EE. Margin of Ifts. crenate-ser- rate: fls. %-l in. broad 20. villosa POTENTILLA POTENTILLA 2773 DD. Lts. not tomentose beneath. E. Lfts. 3-toothtd at apex 5. ambigua EE. Lfts. sereral-toothed. F. The Ifts. small, Yiin. long or less: fls. 3-6 lines broad 26. dubia FF. The Ifts. larger: fls, %in. broad or more. G. Achenes pilose 6. eriocarpa GG. Achenes glabrous, either smooth or rugose 24. grandiflora Section I. TRICHOCARP.E. Carpels completely or in part pilose (except P. palustris): receptacle long- and dense-pilose. Subsection A. RHOPALOSTYLJ:. Style clavaie. 1. fruticosa, Linn. St. shrubby, much branched, mostly 1-4 ft. high, with peculiar shreddy bark: Ivs. all cauline, pinnate; Ifts. 3-7, small, 6-12 lines long, oblong-linear, acute, silky, with revolute margins: fls. numerous, bright yellow, showy, 8-16 lines broad; receptacle, carpels, and disk all long-hairy; style sub- basal, clavate. June-Aug. Boggy or dry, more or less calcareous soil, Eu., Asia, X. N. Amer. J.H. III. 31 :602. — A useful shrub, flowering throughout the summer. Var. Vilmoriniana, Bean, has Ivs. silvery white be- neath and fls. creamy white. Var. albicans, Rehd. & Wilson, is similar but has yellow fls. China, and cult. Var. dahurica, Lehm., is white-fld. L.B.C. 10:914 (as P. glabra). Var. Veitchii, Bean, white-fld., is P.fruti- cosaxP. dahurica (P. Friedricksenii, Spaeth). B.M. 8637. In nature, P. fruticosa runs into many forms. Subsection B. NEMATOSTYLU£. Styk filiform. Series A. SL'FFKUTICCLO&E. Suffruiicose: fl.-bearing sts. terminal on the determinate plant axis. 2. Salesoviana, Steph. Sts. 12-24 in. high, woody at base, laxly cymose above, and silky villous: stipules broadly scarious, fuscous: basal Ivs. pinnate; Ifts. 7-9, rarely 5, lower much smaller, all short-petiolulate, oblong or cuneate-oblong, coarsely and sharply serrate, thick or subcoriaceous, green and glabrous above, pale appressed pilose below, often furfuraceous and canes- cent: fls. 1% in. broad; sepals purple outside, yellowish within, twice as long as the appendages; petals broadly obovate, entire, about equaling the sepals, lilac or white suffused with rose; carpels villous; style lateral, filiform. June-Aug. Asia. B.M. 7258. — A beautiful and striking plant of dry stony places. 3. palustris, Scop. (Comarum palustre, Linn.). Suf- fruticose: stolons long, creeping and branched: aerial sts. ascending, 8 in. to 2 ft. long, glabrous, laxly cjinose above and more or less pilose or glandular: basal Ivs. pinnate, long-petioled; Ifts. 2-3 pairs, contiguous, thick, not veiny, sessile, oblong-lanceolate, 1-3 in. long, evenly and sharply serrate, green above, glaucous beneath, often puberulent, rarely silky: fls. few; sepals dark purplish, large; petals small, ovate-lanceolate, acuminate, pale purple, often villous or ciliate, shorter than the sepals; receptacle spongy; carpels glabrous; style lateral, filiform. June-Aug. Very wet marshes, Arctic and Temp. Eu., Asia, and N. Amer. — A strik- ing species for aquatic gardens. 4. tridentata, Soland. Caudex somewhat woody: sts. 1-12 in. high, slender: branches erect-spreading, ap- pressed-pubescent : Ivs. mostly basal, long-petioled, ternate; Ifts. J^-2 in. long, oblanceolate, truncate and 2-3-toothed at apex, cuneate and entire below, coria- ceous, dark green, glabrous or strigose and paler beneath : fls. several, small, 3-5 lines broad, in a terminal, nearly naked cyme; petals oval, entire, exceeding the calyx, white; carpels villous; style sub-basal, long-filiform. June-Aug. Rocky places, *X. E. N. Amer. — Good for dry banks and rockeries. 5. ambigua, Camb. Sts. slender, subrepent or as- cending, tufted and branched, woody below: Ivs. ter- nate; Ifts. subcoriaceous, lateral sessile, terminal long- stalked, obovate or orbicular-cuneate, nearly as broad as long, coarsely and obtusely 3-toothed, green above, glaucous beneath, appressed pilose on both sides or subglabrous: fls. solitary on the branches, long-pedun- cled, %-l in. broad; peduncles strigose; appendages and sepals subequal; petals suborbicular, slightly retuse, much exceeding the sepals, yellow: carpels pilose. July, Aug. Himalayas. 6. eriocarpa, Wall. Caudex branched, woody: fl.-sts. flaccid, simple, ascending, 4-8 in. long, almost leafless, sparsely pilose or subglabrate, 1-2-fld.: basal ivs. ternate or pinnately 3-foliate; Ifts. more or less long- stalked, obovate-rhomboid, coarsely and sharply 5-7- toothed above, green both sides, subglabrous: fls. con- spicuous, 1^4 in. broad, long-peduncled; appendages broad, usually longer than the sepals; petals round- ovate, much exceeding the sepals, soft yellow with large orange blotch; carpels long-pilose; style subterminal, filiform or slightly swollen at the middle or above. July, Aug. Himalayas.— iShowy for borders and rockeries. Series B. HERBAGES. Herbaceous: fl-bearing sts. lateral on the indeterminate plant axis. 7. specidsa, Willd. Caudex thick, branched, woody: fl.-sts. ascending, 2-10 in. long, few-lvd.: basal Ivs. ternate, long-petioled; Ifts. thick, obovate, terminal slightly stalked, all crenate-dentate above base, with short teeth, white-tomentose on both sides or only below: fls. 3-8, short-pedicelled, 7-9 lines broad; ap- pendages narrow; sepals rather obtuse; petals scarcely exceeding the sepals, long-canaliculate-unguiculate, terminating in a very small ovate-cochleate limb, tardily deciduous, white or yellowish white, dorsally ciliate or more or less villous; carpels pilose; style subterminal, slender, not dilated. June-Aug. S. Eu. 8. nitida, T,irni. Cespitose; caudex subligneous: fl.- sts. ascending, short, 1-2 in. long, usually not exceed- ing the Ivs., apex 1-2-fld.: peduncles often glandular: basal Ivs. ternate (rarely 4-5-nate), short-petioled, crowded; Ifts. thick, sessile, oblong-obovate or sub- cuneate, apex with 3 incurved teeth, rarely entire, densely white-silky on both faces: fls. conspicuous, 9-12 lines broad or more; appendages narrow, shorter than the purple sepals; petals very short-clawed, broadly obovate, emarginate, twice as long as the sepals, rose or lilac, rarely white; filaments and anthers purple; carpels pilose; style subterminal, long, slender, purple. July, Aug. Mountains of S. Eu. — "One of the most beautiful of alpine fls." 9. alba, Linn. Caudex thick, branched: fls.-sts. short, not exceeding the basal Ivs., weak, decumbent, laxly 2-5-fld., sericeo- villous: basal Ivs. long-petioled, 5-foliolate, some often ternate or 7-foliolate; Ifts. ses- sile or short-stalked, all symmetrical but the outer shorter, oblong-lanceolate, apex acute and serrate, teeth few, appressed, terminal smaller, green and gla- brous above, more or less densely white-silky, becoming glabrous and glaucous beneath: fls. long-peduncled, showy, 9-12 lines broad; appendages very narrow, shorter than the sepals; petals broadly obcordate, somewhat longer than the sepals, white; carpels pilose; stvle subterminal, slender. April-June, and often Aug.-Oct. Cent, Eu. G. 37:98. Section II. GYMNOCARP.E. Carpels glabrous: receptacle short-pilose to almost glabrous. Subsection A. CLOSTEROSTYUE. Style subbasal, fusiform. 10. rupestris, Linn. Caudex thick, subligneous: sts. erect, 20 in. high or more, few-lvd., dichotomously branched and laxly corymbose above, glandular-hairy and hirsute: basal Ivs. long-petioled, pinnate; Ifts. 2-4 pairs, decreasing downward, distant, round-elliptic or rhombic-ovate, lateral sessile, terminal sessile or 2774 POTENTILLA POTENTILLA stalked, margin irregularly biserrate, pilose and green on both faces, often glandular: fls. ^-1 in. broad, long- pedicelled; appendages much shorter and narrower than the sepals, often bi- or trifid; petals obovate, entire, equaling or much exceeding the sepals, white; carpels smooth or rugulose; style subbasal, glandular-thick- ened in the middle. May-July. Eu., Asia, and moun- tains of W. N. Amer. — Grows well in dry soil. 11. argfita, Pursh. Similar to P. rupestris, but with a more strict habit, more glandular-hirsute pubescence, more congested infl., and smaller cream-colored petals which scarcely exceed or are shorter than the sepals; calyx enlarging more in fr., and receptacle becoming elongated, much swollen and almost fleshy. June-Aug. N. Amer. — Good for dry rocky soil. 12. glandulosa, Lindl. Similar to P. rupestris and P. arguta: differs from the former in its golden yellow or pale yellow fls., and from the latter both in the color of the fls., and in the dichotomous and laxly cymose infl. June-Aug. W. N. Amer. — Grows well in dry sterile ground. Subsection B. CONOSTYLJE. Style subterminal, conical. Series A. EBIOTRICHL^E. Plant with some true tomentum. 13. Hippiana, Lehm. St. erect, 1-2 ft. high, silky, laxly cymose above: basal Ivs. rather large, pinnate; Ifts. 3-5 pairs, whitish-silky above, white-tomentose beneath, uppermost somewhat confluent, the others decreasing regularly toward base of If., obovate-cuneate, 1-2 K in. long, obtusely incised-toothed : fls. ^-1 in. . , . . broad; appendages nearly equaling the calyx, acute; petals obovate, retuse, slightly exceeding the sepals, bright yellow; carpels glabrous, rugose; style papil- lose-thickened at base, tapering above to the enlarged stigma. June, July. W. N. Amer. 14. grficilis, Douglas. Erect and rather tall, about 2 ft. high, more or less white-hairy, erect-branched and cymose-paniculate above: basal Ivs. long-petioled, digitate; Ifts. 5-7, obovate or oblanceolate, 1-2 in. long, deeply and regularly incised-dentate, sparsely pilose or glabrous and green above, white-tomentose beneath: fls. 6-9 lines broad, showy; petals obcordate, exceeding the acuminate sepals, yellow; carpels glabrous and smooth; style subterminal, slender, thickened at the base. June-Aug. W. N. Amer. 15. nepalensis, Hook. (P. formosa, Don. P. Tdnguei, Hort.). St. stout, erect or ascending, 1-2 ft. high, pur- ple : the branches laxly paniculate or raceme-like, hir- sute, not glandular: radical Ivs. long-petioled, pal- mately 5-foliolate, often 12 in. long; Ifts. oblong-obo- vate, 2-3 in. long, veiny and rugose, crenate-serrate except toward the base, with broad and short sub- acute teeth, green both sides, sparsely appressed-pilose : fls. long-pedicelled, showy, 9-12 lines broad; calyx purple within; petals broadly obcordate, deeply emar- ginate, nearly twice the length of the sepals, clear pur- ple with darker veins and dark-purple base; carpels glabrous, rugulose; style subterminal, thickened at the base, tapering above. July, Aug. Himalayas.— The branches elongate zigzag-like during the summer. A fine species. 16. Thurberi, Gray. Similar to P. nepalensis, but finely glandular-hairy all over: Ivs. mostly 7-foliolate: petals dark purple and scarcely exceeding the sepals: infl more cymose. June-Aug. New Mex. and S. Cam. — Good for border planting. 17. haemat6chrus, Lehm. St. stout, ascending, 8-16 in. high, densely cymose above, pubescent or canescent with yellowish hairs: basal Ivs. with long and stout petioles, palmately 7-, rarely 5-foliolate; Ifts. oblong- obovate, obtuse, thick, elevated-veiny beneath, cre- nate-serrate with small teeth, velvety above with yel- lowish subappressed hairs, more or less densely white-tomentose below: fls. on thick pedicels, 9-10 lines broad; sepals purple within; petals broadly obcordate, longer than the sepals, dark purple; carpels glabrous, smooth; style subterminal, red, much thickened at the base. June-Aug. Mountains of Mex. — The yellowish pubescence is characteristic. 18. argyrophylla, Wall. (P. insignis, Royle). Sts. erect, 8-16 in. high, nearly simple, leafy, cymosely few-fld., above puberulent and whitish tomentose : basal Ivs. large, long-petioled, mostly ternate; Ifts. subses- sile, broadly obovate or elliptic-ovate or obovate- oblong, more or less rugose beneath, coarsely incised- serrate with acute teeth, more or less densely silky above, rarely subglabrate, densely white-tomentose beneath: fls. long-pedicelled, showy, 1-1 J^ in. broad; petals broadly obcordate, twice the length of the sepals, yellow; carpels glabrous, smooth; style subterminal, greatly thickened at the base. June-Aug. Himalayas. — This species and the next are two of the most com- mon species in cult., and are extensively hybridized with each other and with P. nepalensis, giving rise to most of the hybrid potentillas of the trade. (Fig. 3157.) 19. atrosanguinea, Wall. Similar to P. argyrophylla, but larger, more branched, Ivs. less heavily silky-glossy and less white-tomentose beneath, usually more bluntly toothed: petals, stamens, and styles dark purple. June- Aug. Himalayas. — Parent of many garden forms. 20. villosa, Pall. Sts. stout, ascending, 4-12 in. high, few-lvd., cymosely few-fld., densely silky-villous : basal Ivs. long-petioled, ternate; Ifts. sessile or nearly so, thick and veiny, suborbicular-cuneate. 9-15 lines long, lateral oblique at the base, all coarsely crenate-serrate with short teeth, margin somewhat revolute, densely silky-pilose above, densely white-tomentose beneath: fls. 9-12 lines broad, showy; sepals and bracteoles equal; petals broadly obcordate, 2-3 times the length of the sepals, golden yellow; carpels glabrous, smooth or rugulose; style subterminal, conical, moderately thickened at the base. June, July. Arctic Asia and N. W. Amer. — Showy, with beautiful If.-rosettes. 21. argentea, Linn. Sts. several, ascending, rarely prostrate, slender, 4-20 in. long, laxly paniculate or corymbose above, white-tomentose: basal Ivs. long- petioled, palmately 5- rarely 7-foliolate; Ifts. broadly cuneate-obovate, 4-14 lines long, coarsely and regu- larly incised-dentate with 2-5 pairs of teeth, margins revolute, from green and glabrous to densely silky or tomentose above, densely white-tomentose beneath, very rarely tomentose and green beneath: fls. long- pedicelled, 5-7 lines broad; petals obovate, emarginate, scarcely exceeding the sepals, sulfur-yellow; carpels glabrous, rugulose; style subterminal, conical, papil- lose-thickened at the base. June-Aug. or Oct. Eu. and Asia, intro. in N. Amer. — Good for dry, sterile soil. Var. calabra. Sir. (P. calabra, Ten.). Lfts. dilated-fan-shaped, incised on outer edge, whitened on both sides: plant low: sts. stout, declined, condensed- cymose: fls. relatively large. Italy. Series B. ORTHOTRICH^. Plant with no true tomentum; pilose and often glandular. 22. recta, Linn. Sts. stout, erect, strict, 12-28 in. high, leafy, dichotomously much branched and widely corymbose above, hirsute or pilose and pubescent, and more or less glandular: basal Ivs. large, long-petioled, palmately 5-7-f oliolate ; Ifts. 2-4 in. or more long, the outer smaller, all usually sessile, oblong, linear-oblong or oblong-obovate, regularly and coarsely serrate- dentate, green both sides, villous and rugose, thin: fls. 8-12 lines broad; petals obcordate, deeply emarginate, equaling or somewhat exceeding the sepals, yellow to golden yellow; carpels glabrous, very rugose; style swollen at the base. June, July. Eu. — Very hand- some and showy. Var. sulph&rea, Lam. Petals sulfur- yellow, much exceeding the sepals: sts. and Ivs. lighter POTENTILLA POTENTILLA 2775 green. Widespread in Eu. Intro, as a weed in E. N. Amer. 23. lacinifisa, Waldst. & Kit. (P. ladniata, Amer. Hort.). St. stout, erect, forming clumps, 12-20 in. high, mostly reddish, laxly corymbose above, long-pilose with soft spreading hairs: basal Ivs. palmately 7-f olio- late, rarely 5-foliolate; Ifts. green and pilose on both surfaces, not rugose, the terminal folded, ah1 oblanceo- late-oblong, 2-3 in. long, laciniate-pinnatifid, with 6-12 pairs of lanceolate or linear and incised teeth: fls. and feneral habit as in P. recta, to which it is closely related. .Eu. 24. grandiflora, Linn. Sts. ascending or erect, from a thick caudex, 4—15 in. high, the erect branches of the cyme few-fld., densely villous above, eglandular: basal Ivs. long-petioled, mostly ternate; Ifts. 7-15 lines long, lateral obliquely obovate, terminal cuneate-obovate, ah1 incised-serrate toward the apex with 6-10 ovate or oblong acutish teeth, pubescent above, densely short- villous beneath, veiny, rarely whitened: fls. conspicuous, 9-15 lines broad; petals broadly obcordate, emarginate, much exceeding the sepals, golden yellow; carpels glabrous, smooth or obsoletely rugose; style papillose- thickened at the base. July, Aug. Alps.— A good bor- der plant. 25. pyrenaica, Ram. St. stout, arcuate-ascending from a thick subcespitose caudex, 4-10 in. long, racemosely few-fld. above, pilose or somewhat can- escent: basal Ivs. both short- and long-petioled, pal- mately 5-foliolate; Ifts. small, sessile, cuneate-obovate or cuneate-oblong-obovate, 4-9 lines long, the outer smaller, all entire below, dentate toward apex with 5-7 pairs of short acutish or obtuse teeth, green and subglabrous above, densely pilose and subsericeous beneath: fls. 1 in. broad; petals large, broadly obovate, emarginate, much longer than the sepals, golden yel- low; carpels glabrous, stria te-rugulose; style thickened below. July, Aug. Pyrenees.— Closely related to P grandiflora. Subsection C. GOMPHOSTYI^E. Style subterminal, rardy lateral, clavate: plant with no true tomentum. 26. dubia, Zimm. Cespitose, forming mats, runners wanting: sts. slender, prostrate or ascending, %-2 in. long, scarcely as long as the Ivs., 1-fld., rarely 2-3-fld., pilose, eglandular: basal Ivs. short-petioled, ternate; Ifts. small, 4-5 lines long, broadly obovate, the outer strongly oblique, the terminal slightly petioled, all with 2-3 pairs of ovate, acute, or obtuse teeth, light green and glabrous above, strigose on the veins beneath: fls. small, 3-6 lines broad; appendages broad, obtuse or rounded; petals broadly obovate, slightly emarginate, exceeding the sepals, yellow; carpels glabrous, smooth or rugulose; style somewhat thickened below. July, Aug. Mountains of Eu. G. 36:483. — The smallest of European potentillas. 27. alpestris, Hall. f. Caudex densely clothed with stipules; runners almost wanting: sts. slender, arcuate- ascending, rarely strict, few-lvd., 2-8 in. long, somewhat exceeding the basal Ivs., laxly dichotomous-ramose at top, pilose above, rarely glandular: basal Ivs. short- petioled, appendages 5-foliolate, rarely 3- or 7-foliolate; Ifts. mostly sessile, obovate, crenate-dentate or deeply incised-serrate with 2-5 pairs of obtuse teeth, strigose or glabrous above, pilose or villous on the veins beneath, green both sides: fls. long-pedicelled, ^-1 in. broad; petals broadly obovate, emarginate, more or less exceed- ing the sepals, golden yellow, rarely paler, often with an orange spot at the base; carpels glabrous, rugulose or smoothish; style subterminal, clavate. June— Sept. Arctic and Alpine Amer., Eu., and Asia. — A close rela- tive of P. verna but not forming such extended mats. Extremely variable. 28. verna, Linn. Caudex emitting runners, forming a thick turf: sts. numerous, decumbent or ascending, 176 2-6 (rarely 12) in. long, dichotomously branched and laxly corymbose, pilose, rarely glandular, usually reddish: basal Ivs. long-petioled, palmately 5-foliolate, rarely 7-foliolate; Ifts. sessile or nearly so, cuneate- obovate, H-1H m- Ipng, toward the apex crenate- dentate to deeply incised-serrate, sparsely pilose and green above, green and pilose beneath : fls. long-slender- pedicelled ; appendages oblong, obtuse ; petals obovate to broadly obcordate, emarginate, longer than the sepals, golden yellow, rarely paler; carpels glabrous, rugose; style subterminal, clavate. March-May, often also Aug., Sept. Eu. — Very variable. Dry or stony soil. For banks and rockeries. 29. cinerea, Chaix. Forming mats: sts. slender, ascending, 2-4 in. high, scarcely exceeding the basal Ivs., few-fld.; basal Ivs. palmately 5-foliolate, rarely 3-4-foliolate; Ifts. narrowly cuneate-oblong-obovate or nearly oblong, rounded at apex, short-crenate-dentate, thick, rugose, sparingly stellate-tomentose above, densely so beneath, long-hirsute on both faces; appen- dages dilated and often bifid, scarcely shorter than the ovate, obtuse sepals; petals oblong-obovate, pale yellow, much exceeding the sepals; carpels glabrous, rugose; style subterminal, clavate. April-June. Alps. 3158. Potentilla Anserina, showing a plant in early summer before the runners start. Later the flowers are borne on the runners. 30. canadensis, Linn. Sts. slender, at first ascend- ing, later prostrate and creeping, simple, flagelliform, 12-24 in. or more long, leafy, bearing solitary long- peduncled fls. at the nodes, villous, eglandular: basal and cauline Ivs. slender-petioled, palmately 5-foliolate; Ifts. cuneate-obovate or oblong, coarsely dentate-serrate except at the base, green both sides, pubescent or gla- brate above, more or less strigose-pilose beneath : fls. 5-6 lines broad; appendages narrowly lanceolate; petals broadly obovate, slightly emarginate, yellow, longer than the sepals; carpels glabrous; style subterminal, from clavate to fusiform. May-Aug. E. N. Amer. Mn. 3:38. — Good for dry, sterile, open soil. Subsection D. LEPTOSTYI^E. Style lateral, short-fili- form, of equal diam. throughout: plant with or without tomentum. 31. Anserina, Linn. SILVER- WEED. Fig. 3158. Caudex thick; sts. simple, slender, prostrate and creep- ing, rooting at the nodes, often 2K or 3 ft. long, bearing solitary, long-peduncled fls. at the nodes, pilose-sericeous with ascending or somewhat spreading hairs: basal Ivs. numerous, large, pinnate, mostly short-pedicelled ; Ifts. many pairs, decreasing in size downward, with minute ones interspersed, linear-oblong to oblong-ovate, ^-1 l/i in. long, sharply serrate, green or whitened above, densely white to lustrous silky-tomentose beneath, very rarely green both sides: fls. large, 8-10 lines broad; 2776 POTENTILLA POTHOS appendages usually lobed; petals obovate, entire, ex- ceeding the sepals, golden yellow; carpels at maturity glabrous, thick, ovoid, corky, dorsally furrowed; style lateral, filiform. May- Aug. Gravelly, more or less cal- careous shores. Most widespread of all potentillas, through the cold and temperate portions of all countries except possibly Afr. — Very decorative. 32. pacifica, Howell. Similar to P. Anserina; but sts., peduncles, petioles, and rachis glabrous or early glabrate: Ifts. dull-tomentose beneath: achenes later- ally compressed, firmer, rounded on the back, not fur- rowed. Along the coast of temperate and arctic E. and W. Amer., and E. Asia. — This species may be in the trade as P. Anserina. 33. Gordonii, Baill. (Ivesia Gordonii, Torr. & Gray. Horkelia Gordonii, Hook.). Caudex stout, woody, and cespitose: sts. erect, 4-12 in. high, and, like the Ivs., glandular-pubescent or glabrous: Ivs. pinnate, mostly basal, numerous; Ifts. 10-20, divided into 3-5 oblong or linear segms.; cauline Ivs. few. very small: fls. small and inconspicuous, in a crowded cyme; petals yellow, spatulate, shorter than the sepals; stamens 5-20, inserted on the edge of the cup-shaped receptacle at a distance from the carpels; style filiform, basal. Subal- pine W. U. S. — Forms dense mats in dry soil. This spe- cies belongs properly to Horkelia (a genus apparently not known to the gardeners) and is generically distinct from Potentilla because of the more deeply cup-shaped receptacle. It is, however, known in the trade as a potentilla. Following are some of the hybrid potentillas, the exact botanical status of which has not been worked out and which have not been standardized as to nomenclature: P. tricolor (P. argyrophylla X P. atrosanguinea, according to Wolf), orange and vermilion. — P. cardinale (P. atrosanguinea x P. nepalensis, according to Wolf), brilliant cardinal. — Dr. Andre, golden yellow suffused with vermilion. — Eldorado, purple suffused with yellow. — Emile, bright bronzy red. — Gloire de Nancy, golden yellow. — Hamlet, dark carmine. — P. Hopwoodiana (P. nepalensis X P. recta, according to Wolf). Lfts. 5-6: petals at base deep rose, at center pale rose, margins whitish. — P. htfbrida, name applied to various hybrids. R.H. 1890, p. 305. Gn. 16:462; 25:514. — Jeane Salter, orange, shaded scarlet. — Le Vesuve, floriferous, light red margined with yellow or scarlet. — P. Mac Nabiana (P. argyrophylla X P. atrosanguinea, according to Wolf). — Mars, dark velvety red. — M. Daudin, beautiful amber. — O'Briana, pink and salmon. — P. perfecta, maroon, shaded lemon. — P. purpurea, deep purple. — P. verslcolor, carmine- and yellow- flaked. — Victor Lemoine, light red striped with yellow. — Wm. Rollinson, mahogany-brown, suffused with orange. The status of the following trade names cannot be determined: P. amaena, P. cauc&sicum, P. concolor, P. lanugindsa, P. minima, P. nesstnsis, P. splendent. R M WlEQAND 3159. Pothos aureus of the horticulturists. ( X K) POTERIUM (Greek for drinking cup; because the foliage of one species was used in the preparation of a medicinal drink). Rosacese. Linnaeus placed certain rosaceous plants in the genera Poterium and San- guisorba, the latter having precedence of publication. Many subsequent authors have united these genera. Focke, however (Engler & Prantl, Die Natiirlichen Pflanzenfamilien), re-defines the genus Poterium to include one species, the P. spinosum of S. Eu., allowing the other species to remain in Sanguisorba. As thus understood, Poterium is monoecious, the lower fls. in the spike staminate, the upper pistillate, the stamens many and hanging, the styles 2, the fr. somewhat fleshy, colored, and inclosed in the calyx, the Ivs. pinnate. These plants are known as burriet, although the name applies more correctly to Sanguisorba alone. P. spinosum, Linn., is a small spiny shrub with nearly glabrous serrate Ifts., somewhat downy branches, small greenish fls. in oblong spikes and reddish berry-like fr. It is offered in S. Calif. Grows 3 ft., the branchlets ending in spines. Said to be a very interesting orna- mental undershrub. Recently P. obttlsum, Franch. & Sav. (P. obtusdtum, Hort. Sanguisorba obtusa, Maxim.), has been offered abroad : it is from Japan, said to be the finest of the burnets yet introduced: 3 ft. : Ivs. long, pin- nate, Ifts. about 6 pairs, oblong, rounded at end, ser- rate, petioluled: fl.-sts. much branched, the crimson spikes about 3 in. long and 1 in. diam. Summer. G.C. III. 59:2. For P. canadense and P. Sanguisorba, see Sanguisorba. L. H. B. POTHOS (Potha is said to be a Ceylonese name). Aracese. Tall-climbing branching shrubs (more or less herbaceous as known in cultivation) of the oriental tropics. Leaves thick and often shining, entire or lobed, sometimes blotched or variegated: fls. small and per- fect, crowded on a spadix, with 6 perianth-segms. and 6 stamens, the ovary 3-loculed and with a rounded or mushroom-like sessile stigma: fr. a 1-3-seeded berry: spathe usually persistent and wide-spreading or deflexed at maturity. Rhaphidophora has an oblong or linear stigma. — About 50 species. Several names are in the hort. trade, but not all of them belong to Pothos. In fact, the genus Pothos is very ill-defined in cult, be- cause species are named before fls. and frs. are known and determinations are often wrongly made. Some of them are to be referred to Scindapsus and others per- haps to Rhaphidophora. The species of Pothos send out cord-like roots that cling to damp walls. For P. argyrosa, see Scindapsus pictuj var. For monograph, see Engler, Das Pflanzenreich, IV. 23 B (1905). They are warmhouse foliage plants and require the same general treatment as Philodendron. A. Lvs. green, not banded or mottled. nitens, Bull. Lvs. obliquely ovate-acute, cordate at base, shining purplish green; needs further botani- cal definition. Malaya. AA. Lvs. mottled or banded. afcreus, Lind. Fig. 3159. Strong evergreen climber with cordate-ovate-acute Ivs., which are variously blotched and mottled with yellowish white, the body color being bright green. Solomon Isl. I.H. 27:381. S.H. 1:334. — The generic position of this plant — which is one of the commonest ones in cult. — is in doubt. It probably belongs to Scindapsus so treated by Engler. In a dark place the handsome markings of the Ivs. tend to disappear. Branches will grow in water for a time. Prop, by cuttings or layers. argenteus, Bull. Lvs. obliquely ovate-acuminate, sil- very gray, with a deep green margin and a deep green band along the midrib ; needs further definition. Borneo. P. celatocaiilis, N. E. Br.=Monstera latevaginata. — P. Loureiri, Hook. & Arn. Climbing, branched, with aerial roots: petioles 4-5 POTHOS POTS 2777 in. long, linear, flat: blades decurved, much shorter than petiole, linear-lanceolate, acuminate: spathe 1 }•£- 2 in. long, linear to linear- lanceolate; spadix stipulate, 2-4 in. long, eylindric, green: berries smooth, scarlet, about ?jin. long. S. China. B.M. 7744. L. H. B. POTHUAVA: Jtchmea. POT MARIGOLD: Calendula. POTS. Of the three firms of interest to horticul- turists that are eligible to the Century Club because of one hundred years or more in the same business, are A. H. Hews A: Co., potters, and J. M. Thorburn & Co., of New York, and D. Landreth & Co., of Philadelphia. This indicates the age of the flower-pot business in this count ry. The first entry in the oldest Hews account book reads as fofiows: Weston, April 19, 1775, Lemuel Jones, to Ware, debtor: 0£ 2s. 8d. From 1788 to 1810, a period of twenty-one years, there is a continuous account. The i~*< charges within that entire term cover about as many pages as are now often entered in a da}- ; and the amount in dollars and cents does not compare with single sales of the present 3150. time. Through all the years up to 1807 the term "flower-pots" does not once appear, and it is much to be regretted that the first sale of flower- pots and the name of the purchaser cannot be found. In 1861, after war was actually declared, business conditions were much depressed. The members of the Hews firm felt sure that there would be no demand for flower-pots, they being more of a luxury than a neces- sity, and that the factory must close. At that time the writer succeeded in securing permission to make his first venture as salesman "on the road." Going first to C. M. Hovey, he secured what was a good order for those times, some 10,000 or more pots for the spring trade of 1862. Not once after that, during the Civil War, was the firm able, in the spring and fall rush, to fill all their orders for flower-pots. It is not that these orders were remarkably large or numerous, but they were beyond the capacity of the firm. In 1866, prices were a third or a half higher than they are today. The firm first got fairly under way with machinery for mak- ing small flower-pots in 1869. Until about 1864 or 1865, common flower-pots throughout the world had always been made by hand on the potter's wheel. There have been, indeed, many different forms of this wheel, but it had always been propelled by hand- or foot-power. When, in the early fifties, a wheel was made to be propelled by the foot, with two sizes of pulleys and a balance-wheel whereby the speed of the wheel was increased in the proportion of three to one, it was thought that perfection had been reached. Much time, though very little money, had been spent previous to the fifties in attempts to make a pot machine. It was left to William Linton, of Balti- more, an experienced practical potter, to perfect and patent the first machine. From him two machines were purchased and the exclusive right to use them in Massachusetts. In a short time great improvements were made on his patent. America was far ahead of Europe in this kind of machinery, as also in improved machinery in general. The machine made only small pots, up to about 5 inches in diameter; and while it had previously taken an experienced man to make his thousand 3-inch pots in ten hours, a smart boy without any previous experience whatever could make 3,000 on the machine in the same time. When the standard pot was adopted, about twenty- five years ago, the hand-process was practically aban- doned in the principal potteries in favor of what is tech- nically called the jigger. This is a revolving disc pro- pelled by machinery. These discs, or jigger-heads, are made of different sizes and fitted with various rings. Plaster molds are made in very large numbers for each size of pot, and the larger standard pots (6- to 12-inch) are all made at the present time in these molds. The old methods have now passed. The making of the pot is not its only cost : previous to that comes the preparation of the clay. The hundred years from 1765 to 1865 saw no improvement in the pro- cess of preparing it for use. It was ground in a wooden tank or tub, propelled by an ox. The various other processes remained as crude in 1865 as they had been the century previous: the drying, firing, and all con- nected with the manufacture. The capacity of our flower-pot drying-rooms of today far exceeds the Pots of various sizes. All are "standard" pots except the rimless one at the right, which is a "rose pot." entire product of any one year prior to 1865. At that time the custom of using wood for drying and firing pots still continued. It required three cords of white pine and from thirty to forty hours' labor thoroughly to fire a small furnace. Today three tons of bituminous coal will fire five times as much pottery in fifteen hours. Grades of clay used in the manufacture of flower-pots are almost as numerous as the banks in which they are found, and require many different methods of treat- ment. To separate the stones from the clay has always been a very perplexing as well as expensive problem. The clay is first plowed by means of a horse and cap- stan, whereby one horse will do the work of twenty men with picks. This clay is then loaded in dump- carts and carried to the mill, where it is shoveled through a disintegrator, which expels the larger stones and crushes the smaller ones. It then falls on an end- less belt and is carried to a revolving drier. This is a western device, with which, by the use of crude petro- leum for heat, from 20 to 25 per cent of moisture is evaporated from the clay, and while it passes through a direct blaze of white heat there is sufficient moisture all the time to prevent it from burning. (Burning of the 3161. Fern-pans. A form of pottery useful for small bulbs and many shallow-rooted subjects of which spreading masses are desired. clay at this stage would make it worthless.) To demon- strate this point beyond question, paper and dry shav- ings have been passed through with the clay, and they came out without even scorching. From the drier, the clay goes into large bins, where it must remain twenty-four hours, so that portions of it which have become too dry and hard may absorb the moisture from that not dry enough. From these bins it is carried to whippers, which beat the clay without further crushing the stone. From the whipper it goes to the revolving screens, and thence to the elevators. The next process is mixing, or, as it is termed, "pug- 2778 POTS POTTING ging." This is all done by machinery. From one machine the clay comes out very soft and plastic, to be worked in plaster molds. From the other the clay comes out into hard cubes for the iron molds of the machine. The pot machine and the jigger of today each does the work of six to eight men at -the wheel. The difference in cost between a good and a poor pot is very slight, and if the florist will demand and accept nothing but a first-class pot, a standard in quality as well as size will soon be reached. To be standard in quality a pot must be of clay properly prepared, be of uniform firing, and of a smooth surface inside as well as put. It must also be of right porosity, a condition which can be attained by the proper mixture of clay. Moreover, a machine-made pot should have a smooth rim on the inside, so that the man standing at his bench potting thousands of plants a day, as is being done constantly in large establishments, may have flesh remaining on his thumbs at night. Such a pot must also be able to stand transportation and years of usage if necessary. "Standard" flower-pots, such as are now used by American florists, are shown in Figs. 3160, 3161. A. H. HEWS. POTSHERDS. Gardener's name for broken pots and crocks, a material used in the bottom of pots, pans, boxes, and the like, to provide drainage. Coal- clinkers, gravel, and other inert materials, are often used for the same purpose. POTTING. The first stage in the life of the plant is when the seedling is transplanted from the seed-bed or the cutting is put in the cutting-bench. It is only when either is potted that it can truly be said to take on the dignity of a plant. It is then out of swaddling clothes and enters the ranks of its big brothers and sisters, on the way to making its bow in society; to live per- chance in the window of the tenement or on the fire- escape; mayhap to refresh the eye of the patient in the sick-room; or to lose its identity in rows of its fellows in great glass houses where the blossoms are garnered and sent to market; perhaps to take its place in row upon row of its kind and make an arabesque pattern or gay border, and so delight the eye or regale the senses with sweet odors. The mechanical operation of potting includes also "shifting," i.e., transferring the plant from a small to a larger pot. Repotting signifies the same, generally speaking, as shifting; but speaking technically it means shaking out an established plant and putting it in a pot of the same size or one smaller, according to its needs. The actual operation of potting is very simple, and yet it must be well done to give the young plant a fair start 3162. Potting a cutting. The moment when the thumbs come into play. in life. Careless potting is responsible for many losses in plants. The larger part of rooted cuttings and seed- lings should be potted in 2-inch pots, and it is essential, particularly in the case of rooted cuttings, that it be done at the proper stage of development of the roots. When the roots are from Y% to J^ inch long they may be said to be at their best for potting. If sooner, the plants are not likely to develop so rapidly in the pot as if left in the cutting-bench; if later, they are harder to handle, injury is liable to result, and they do not so readily recover from the shock incident to the change. The operation of potting as practised in commercial florists' establishments is as follows: The soil having been prepared, the workman places the empty pots at his left hand, the cuttings in front of him, and an empty "flat" to receive the potted plants at his right. With a simultaneous movement he takes an empty pot in his left hand and a handful of soil in his right. He "sets" the pot in front of him, fills it with soil, and while doing so reaches for the cutting, retaining a small portion of soil in his hand. With the index finger of the right hand he makes a hole in the center of the pot of soil, inserts the cutting, drops the portion of soil which he retained in his right hand into the hole, takes the pot between the index and middle fingers of both hands to steady it and obtain leverage, places his thumbs on each side of the cutting and parallel with his body (Fig. 3162), the right on the side away from his body, the left on the other side, and presses evenly and firmly; then shifts his thumbs so that they are at right angles with his body and presses again; transfers the potted plant with his right hand to the "flat," placing it with a little force to level the loose soil on top, reaching for another empty pot with his left hand as he does this, and repeats the movements. It is marvelous how rapidly these motions are made by expert workmen, and the work can be done as well rapidly as slowly when the cuttings are in the proper condition as to root-develop- ment already described. There was a time when 5,000 a day of ten hours was considered the maximum, and it is still good work for the average workman. James Markey, an employe of the late Peter Henderson, repeatedly potted 10,000 verbena cuttings with two boys to assist in taking away the plants as potted, sup- plying him with empty pots and cuttings, the requisite quantity of soil having been previously placed on the bench. The writer was his only assistant when he made his first great effort at "breaking the record," when he succeeded in potting 7,500 in ten hours. Upon one occasion he potted 11,500 verbena cuttings in a day of ten hours, which is the highest number ever reached. At a potting contest held in Madison Square Garden in New York city in 1892, George Martin potted 1,373 cuttings in one hour, the material used being arborvitae cuttings without roots. The "standard" pots (Fig. 3160) cannot be handled so rapidly as those without rims, for the reason that the lower edges of the rim are sharp and rough and make the fingers of the work- man sore. Consequently the pots without rims are to be preferred. The essentials in good potting are to put the cutting in the center of the pot and at the proper depth, to firm the soil thoroughly and evenly, and to leave % inch, or a little less, between the top <.f the soil and the upper edge of the pot to receive water. Included in potting is the care of the plants imme- diately after being potted and until they have taken root in the pots. First in importance is the "setting" of the plants on the bench; care should be taken that they are "set" perfectly level so that they will hold water. They should be watered thoroughly and shaded as soon as they are set. The best method of shading when large quantities are potted is by the use of lath shutters. These are made by nailing common laths on three par- allel pieces of furring strip, allowing 1 inch space between the laths. They may be made any length, 3 feet being a very convenient size. Inverted pots of a sufficient height to clear the young plants make very handy sup- ports for these shutters. During late spring and summer it will be necessary to supplement this method of sha- ding by covering the shutters with paper or muslin, the muslin being preferred. Sew the muslin in 10-yard lengths, giving pieces 2 yards wide. Sprinkle the muslin copiously at intervals as it becomes dry. This care must be kept up for three to six days according to conditions; the shutters should be put over the plants early in the morning, first watering the plants; an hour or so later POTTING POTTING 2779 3163. Implement for finning the soil in large pots. the muslin should be put on, provided the sun is shi- ning brightly. After the second day the period for cover- ing the plants should be shortened by putting shutters and muslin on later and taking them off earlier until the plants are sufficiently established to get along with- out them. An important detail is to have about 3^ inch of sand on the bench to retain moisture and allow for the proper "setting" of the plants. Another very important detail, in case new pots are used, is thoroughly to saturate them with water before filling, allow- ing sufficient time for the water to evapo- rate from the surface before using. It is bad practice to work with wet pots, and worse still with wet soil. A good test of the proper amount of moisture in soil for potting is when it molds in the hand only under strong pressure. Another essential, in case old pots are used, is to see that they are clean inside at all events; they should be clean outside as well, but if any old soil is found adhering to the inside of the pot it should be cleaned out and thrown away. Potting large plants from the open ground, such as carnations, roses, geraniums, and shrubs, is an entirely different operation from the foregoing. These all require pots 5 inches in diameter and over, and sufficient pressure cannot be given with the thumbs properly to firm the soil. It is necessary, therefore, to use a stick about an inch wide, and sharpened down to J^ inch at the end. (Fig. 3163.) The handle should be round, and in a large place where much heavy potting and shifting are done it pays to have some of these sticks in regular tool stock. After the plant is placed in the pot and the latter filled with soil, take the stem of the plant at the sur- face between the index fingers and thumbs, the other fingers extended down the sides of the pot, lift the pot about an inch and set it back with a smart shock, at the same time pressing the plant down and steadying it; this settles the soil considerably in the pot. Next take the stick described above and run it around the inside edge of the pot twice or so to pack the soil, add more soil to fill up, finish by pressing evenly and firmly the entire surface with the thumbs, allowing H mc^ °f space between the surface of the soil and the upper edge of the pots to hold water. What has been said about new and clean pots applies with even greater force to large pots. The potting of orchids is a radically different opera- tion from the potting of purely terrestrial plants, about which the preceding has been written. Consider cattleyas as an example: being epiphytes, they do not require soil in which to grow; put them in as small pots as pos- sible. The material for potting best suited to these and most orchids is fibrous peat and live sphagnum moss in equal proportions, add- ing a small portion of broken charcoal. If freshly imported pieces are to be potted, cut away all the old dead roots, pseudo- bulbs and leaves. If the formation of the piece is uneven, it should be cut in two, so as to combine the parts thus separated into a more symmetrical whole, with the growths pointing to the center. Have the pot thoroughly clean, fill it about half with clean "crocks" and small pieces of charcoal, adjust the piece in the center of the pot, 3164. Potting an orchid. The pot is cut in two to show the proper conditions inside. distributing eventy any roots which remain; but first spread a layer of moss over the "crocks," then press the preparation of peat and moss evenly and moder- ately firm around the piece and in the interstices between the roots, finishing up high around the center; insert some small-sized stakes at the proper places to support the piece, tie the growth to them, and the job is finished. Fig. 3164 will show better than words can des- cribe how the plant should look after it is potted. Repotting, when necessary, is almost identical in its details with potting itself. The spring is the best time to do it, even with species which flower Ul autumn. Care- 3165. "Shifting" an established plant fully remove all the into a larger pot. old crocks and other material, so as not to injure the roots, a pointed stick being the best implement for the purpose. Then replace as carefully with new material in a clean pot. The undersigned dwells upon cleanliness repeatedly, for herein lies the great essential in successful plant- growing. Potting orchids in baskets, which sounds paradoxical, is identical with potting them in pots as far as the essential details of manipulation are con- cerned. The potting of bulbs is discussed under Bulb. "Shifting" is the technical term used in the florist's trade when plants are transferred to larger pots. (See Fig. 3165.) When the plant exhausts the soil in the small pot it must be put in a larger one to maintain growth. The trained eye detects at a glance by the appearance of the plant when it requires a "shift." Those lacking such training can discover it by turning the plant out of the pot and examining the roots. (See Fig. 3166.) If the outside of the ball of soil on the lower portion is well netted with roots as in Fig. 3167, and particularly if most of them have lost the fresh creamy white color of healthy "work- ing" roots, then the plant must be at once shifted, or it will soon reach that stage which is the bane of the careless plant-grower, viz., "pot-bound." "Knocking out" is the technical term used by florists to describe the turning of a plant out of a pot. The best way to do this is to take the pot in the right hand, invert it in passing it to the left, as the plant should be placed between the index and mid- dle fingers of the left hand, give the pot a smart tap on its rim on the edge of the bench and the ball of soil is separated from the pot; place the plant in a flat ready for the purpose, and repeat. One tap is all that is necessary in ninety-nine cases out of a hundred. It is bad practice to get into the habit of giving a series of taps, as it makes slow work. We are considering now the first shift, i. e., from a 2-inch to a 3-inch pot. The plants having been knocked out, the next opera- tion is to "shoulder" them. This consists of removing 3166. A plant may be turned out of its pot to as- certain whether it needs a "shift." 2780 POTTING POTTING 3167. Repotting a sickly plant. The "shoulder" is rubbed off as at b, replaced by fresh soil and the whole ball of earth reduced in size. (Only a frac- tion of the plant's height is shown.) the shoulder or edge of the ball of soil with the thumb and forefinger down to where the roots begin. (Fig. 3167.) The object of this is obvious, to remove leached-out soil and supply a fresh, nutritious portion in its place, so as to get the greatest possible advantage from shifting. Everything being made ready, the operator proceeds by putting a portion of soil in the bottom of the pot sufficient to raise the ball of soil flush with the edge of the pot. As this is being done, reach for the plant with the left hand and put it in the center of the pot; simultaneously take a handful of soil in the right hand and fill the pot, then grasp the pot between the index and middle fingers of each hand, place the thumbs on each side of the plant at right angles with the body, lift the pot about Yi inch and set it back on the bench with a smart rap, pressing with the thumbs at the same time; change the thumbs to right angles with their former position and press again, then change so as to press where they have not touched already; three pressures of the thumbs and the rap on the bench, and the operation is done. A smart operator with two boys will shift 5,000 plants in ten hours. This amount of work is made possible only by elimi- nating all unnecessary motions and making them synchronous with each hand in reaching for soil, pot, and plant as described. One hand should not be idle while the other is employed. See Figs. 3168-3172 for good and bad examples of potting. Be careful in shifting not to set the plants too deep. The tendency of roots is downward, and only enough of the stem to steady the plant in the pot should be in the soil Plants set too deeply in the pots are easily over- watered, because so much soil is not within the influ- ence of root-action. A few plants which root from the crown, like lilies, should be set deeper than such plants as roses, geraniums, fuchsias, palms, and all plants whose root-action is mainly downward. Do not give too great a shift at one time; that is, do not attempt to shift from a 2-inch pot to a 5- or 6-inch. As a rule, an inch at a time is best, especially for com- mercial purposes, where plants are grown to be shipped some distance. In private places soft- wooded plants may be shifted in spring from 2- to 4-inch pots and from 4- to 6-inch, as the question of ship- ping does not enter. But it would not be safe even with these to do the same in late fall when growth is slower and the days are grow- ing shorter. Hard- wooded plants, such as palms, azaleas, and the like, and even roses should never be shifted more than an inch at a time; in fact, it is better not to shift them later than September in any case. The spring is the best time to do it. Drainage is necessary in all pots over 4 inches and for hard-wooded plants even that size is better drained. This is technically called "crocking," i. e., placing pot- 3168. Good and bad potting. The cutting should be placed in the center. sherds in the bottom of the pot to allow the quick pas- sage of water and admit air to the roots. Place a large piece over the hole in the bottom of the pot and the remainder in smaller pieces. There are usually enough broken pots around a place to supply the needs. Char- coal is an excellent material for supplying pot-drainage, none better. An inch or so of drainage is sufficient in a 5- or 6-inch pot, 2 inches or so for all sizes above 3169. Too deep. 3170. Too high. these. A bottom of broken stone, cinders or gravel is essential upon which to stand the pots, as such a stratum accelerates drainage, while at the same time providing a moist surface so beneficial to plants in a greenhouse. A few words of caution may not be out of place before closing this branch of the subject. Never shift plants while the ball of soil is wet; it should be dry enough to crumble readily to the touch. Never shift into dirty pots; it will pay to clean them, especially the inside. Never shift a pot-bound plant without loosen- ing the soil on the surface of the ball. A few smart raps with the closed fist will do it; or better still repot as now described. Repotting is necessary frequently when plants have become pot-bound, or when from any cause they appear to require it; such, for instance, as debility from over- shifting, over-watering or neglect of any kind. In such cases the soil should be washed from the roots almost entirely and the plant put into a pot a size or two smaller than it has been growing in, taking care to firm the soil well, and if a shrubby plant prune it back according to its needs and conditions. Shade such plants until danger of wilting is past and water spa- ringly until new and vigorous growths appear, showing that the subjects have regained their normal health. There are a few cultural details intimately associated with potting which may with profit be added as a closing paragraph. The high narrow pot shown on the extreme right of the line of pots in Fig. 3160 is fre- quently used for roses and palms by some, especially for Cocos Weddelliana, which makes a long tap-root and which it is almost invariably fatal to break. It is feasible, however, to avoid this if the seeds are sown in 6-inch pots, using 4 inches of clinkers as a bottom. These check the downward growth and induce develop- ment of fibrous roots in the soil, so that the tap-root may be cut off below them and the ordinary 2-inch pot used with safety. It is not necessary to use the deep pot for roses in any case. Plants which exceed the diameter of the pot should be given room to allow for development. The best market growers plunge the pots in soil to half their depth, as it is necessary in the spring months because of the rapid evaporation of water. This refers especially to geraniums, fuchsias, heliotropes, petunias, and the like. Care must be taken, however, to lift them occasionally so as to prevent the roots from getting hold in the soil through the hole in the bottom of the pot. Ten inches apart from center to POTTING PREXAXTHES 2781 center for such plants will not be too much if stocky plants well set with good flowers are wanted; and in these days such plants will bring enough in the best markets "to pay for the space and trouble. For 2- and 3-inch pots use sifted soil, but for 4-inch and over, sou well broken, but having plenty of fiber from sod in it, should be used. Always water plants thoroughly after -• . 3171. Pot too full. 3172. Good. shifting so as to soak the soil to the bottom, and do not water again until they show dryness half way down the pot on the outside. PATRICK O'MABA. POURR£TIA: POURTHL& A: Photinia. POUTERIA (native name). Sapotacex. Trees or shrubs with small often short-peduncled fls. in clusters: corolla with 4 rounded lobes and a tube about twice as long ; staminodes free, petal-like, borne at the edge of the tube; stamens borne at the base or middle of the tube, becoming free; ovary swollen at base, hairy, 2-4-celled, gradually produced into the long style: fr. a 1-4-seeded berry, hairy or glabrous, occasionally pointed. — About 30 species m Trop. Amer. P. suaris, Hemsl. Tree with rather slender flowering branches: Ivs. crowded at the ends of the branches, narrow-oblong to lanceolate, about 4 in. long, coriaceous: fls. very small in fascicles borne in the axils of the fallen lys. : fr. pear-shaped with a thin edible pericarp possessing a delicate perfume. Uruguay. Intro, into gardens abroad. PRATIA (named after Prat-Bernon, withFreycinet's voyage). Campanulaceae. Slender prostrate or creeping herbs, rarely ascending or erect, sometimes grown for ornament. Leaves alternate, toothed: infl. axillary, in 1-fld. peduncles; fls. rather small, often unisexual; calyx-tube adnate to the ovary, 5-parted; corolla oblique, split to the base at the back, 2-lipped, upper lip 2-parted. lower lip 3-lobed; stamens 5, 2 lower tipped with short bris- tles, 3 upper naked; ovary 2-ceued: fr. a globose or obovoid berry. — About 30 species, mostly from Austral. and New Zeal., but also in S. E. Asia and S. Amer. Several species seem to be more or less extensively cult. abroad. The genus is very closely related to Lobelia and similarly cult., differing from it in the indehiscent more or less succulent fr. They are used both as greenhouse and hardy herbaceous rockwork plants, depending on the species. angulata, Hook. (Lobelia littoralis, Cunn.). Fig. 3173. Perennial herb, very variable, slender, creeping or prostrate, glabrous or sometimes slightly pubescent : sts. 2-12 in. long: Ivs. short-petiolate, orbicular or ovate-oblong to obovate: fls. white with purple streaks: berry globose or broadly ovoid, purplish red. New Zeal. G. 34:757. G.M. 53:897. G.C. III. 47:98. J.H. III. 71:57. — Hardy in England and used as a creeper for rockwork. Var. arenaria, Hook, f . (P. arenaria, Hook, f .). Lvs. larger, obscurely toothed: peduncles very short. Auckland Isls. — Well adapted for shady localities; a quick-growing creeper with many white, star-like fls. begonifdlia, Lindl. Small, creeping, rooting, and pubescent: Ivs. cordate-ovate, denticulate: fls. green, marked pink: berry short-ellipsoid, finally smooth, black. India, Malaya. B.R. 1373. — Sometimes grown in the greenhouse. repens, Gaud. Creeping: Ivs. petiolate, rather reni- form, undulately subcrenate: peduncles rather long, axillary, 1-fld.; fls. white with a violet tint. June- Oct. Falkland Isls. — Hardy in England; well adapted for a sunny position on rockwork. P. ilicifdlia, Hort., listed abroad as a charming little creeping plant with evergreen foliage studded through all the summer months with large pure white fls. followed by large lilac-colored berries, and loving a damp spot, is unknown botanically. F. TRACY HUBBARD. PREMNA (Greek, stump of a tree in allusion to the low sts. of most species). Verbenacex. Shrubs, sub- shrubs or trees, sometimes climbing: Ivs. opposite, entire or dentate: cymes panicled or corymbose; fls. often polygamous; calyx small, cup-shaped, subequal or 2-lipped; corolla tubular, throat hairy, limb 2-lipped, 5-lobed or subequally 4-lobed; stamens 4, didynamous; ovary 2- or 4-celled, 4-ovuled: drupe small, surrounded below by the calyx, globose or oblong-obovoid. — About 80 species, inhabitants of the warmer regions of the Old World. P. Gaudichaiidii, Schau. Branches puberulent: Ivs. long-petiolate, broad-ovate, short- acuminate, entire: infl. terminal, corymbose pani- cles, many-fld.; fls. small; calyx short cup-shaped, subbilabiate; corolla subequally 4-lobed. Marianne Isls. This is known as "ahgao" and is said to be exten- sively used in Guam for the construction of buildings. The following E. Indian species have occasionally been cult, in hothouses abroad: P. esculenta, Roxbg., has vellowish white fls. in May and purple fr.: st. grows about 6-8 ft. high; P. integrifolia, Linn., with greenish white fls. in July, about 10-12 ft. high, and P. lati- folia, Roxbg., with dirty white fls. in June, growing about 15 ft. high. PRENANTHES (Greek words, meaning drooping blossom). Composite. RATTLESNAKE ROOT. Tall peren- nial herbs, a few species of which are offered by col- lectors for use in wild-gardens. Leafy-stemmed, with dull-colored heads borne in spike-like terminal panicles: Ivs. alternate, lower ones 3173. Pratia angulata. (XJi) petiolate, sagittate, cordate, often much divided; upper ones auriculate and much narrower and smaller: heads 5-30-fld.: achenes terete, 4-5-angled, usually striate. — About 16 species, of which 10 are native of N. Amer. (The N. American forms are by some botanists separated as Nabalus.) The species are extremely variable. They are of easy cult, in any good soil, but are very weedy and of little importance horticulturally. 2782 PRENANTHES PRIMULA A. Involucre glabrous. B. Heads 5-7 -fid.; involucre very narrow, only 1 line thick. altissima, Linn. A variable species, mostly per- fectly smooth: st. 3-7 ft., slender: Ivs. membranous, all stalked, ovate, heart-shaped: fls. greenish yellow; pap- pus straw-colored or whitish. July-Oct. In open or shade, Canada to Ga. and Tenn. BB. Heads 8-16-fld.; involucre broader, l%-3 lines thick. c. Pappus deep cinnamon-brown. alba, Linn. St. 2-5 ft. high, usually smooth and glau- cous or purplish: Ivs. angulate or somewhat triangular halberd-form, the uppermost usually undivided: inn. thyrsoid-paniculate; fls. dull white. Aug., Sept. Open woods and sandy soil, Canada to Ga. and 111. B.B. 3:289.- Mn. 3:161. cc. Pappus straw-colored. serpentaria, Pursh (Ndbalus Fraseri, DC.). St. usually about 2-4 ft. high, sometimes purple-spotted: fls. purplish, greenish white or yellowish. July-Oct. Ont. to Fla. and Ky. B.B. 3:289.— Little known in cult, and usually only a weed as a wild plant. AA. Involucre hirsute-pubescent. racemdsa, Michx. St. 6 in. to 2 ft. high: st.-lvs. mainly sessile, while they are mostly petiolate in the other species here described: fls. purplish. Aug., Sept. Moist open places, Canada to N. J. and Colo. B.B. 3:291- F.W.BARCLAY. N. TAYLOR.f PRESTOEA (named after H. Prestoe, of the Bo- tanic Gardens at Trinidad). Palmacex. Slender dwarf palms with a reed-like, annulate caudex, occasionally grown in the warmhouse : Ivs. long and slender-petioled, pinnatisect at the base, upper segms. connate in an oblong blade, 2-cleft at the apex, lower segms. narrow: spathes 2, membranaceous, finally lacerate; spadices short-peduncled, fuscous-pubescent, with strict erect- spreading branches: fls. small, monoecious; male fls. asymmetrical, calyx 3-lobed, minute, petals obliquely ovate, stamens 6, ovary rudimentary; female fls. larger than the male, globose, sepals reniform-rotun- date, petals broadly ovate, ovary obovoid-oblong, 1- celled. Three species, W. Indies and Colombia. P. pubigera, Hook. f. (Hyospathe pubigera, Griseb. & Wendl.). Trunk 10-12 ft. high: Ivs. 3-4 ft. long, green with pale nerves, glabrous; lower segms. somewhat dis- tant, linear-acuminate, 1^-2 ft. long, upper more or less cohering and forming oblong or oblong-linear blades: exterior spathe 2-keeled, 5 in. long, interior 12-15 in. long; lower branches of spadix about 6 in. long, thickened at base, glomerules somewhat distant: fls. minute and sessile. Trinidad. PRESTONIA (named for Dr. Charles Preston). Apocynacese. Tall climbing pubescent or glabrous shrubs, among which is P. venosa, a tender foliage plant once offered in America as E chiles nutans. Leaves opposite, with a few well-separated pinnate veins: cymes often densely corymbose or almost umbel- liform, pseudo-axillary; calyx nearly 5-parted with 5 entire or lacerated scales inside at the base; corolla salver-shaped with 5 linear erect scales below the throat, which is constricted, 5-lobed; ovary 2-carpelled, ovules numerous in each carpel: follicles hard, erect or diver- gent at base. — About 30 species, natives of Trop. Amer. Prestonia venosa is cultivated for the network of crimson veins on its foliage. The plant blooms rarely, and its flowers are inferior to Echites or Dipladenia. When properly cultivated it makes a charming sub- ject, but if neglected it is as worthless as a weed. It can hardly be propagated by cuttings; the fleshy roots are cut into pieces 1 to 2 inches long. The plant demands a temperature of 85° F., with an atmosphere as moist as possible. Foliage should never be syringed. Young plants should be raised every season, as older plants become unsightly. The plant was formerly con- siderably grown, being trained to a balloon-shaped wire trellis. Needs warmth to bring out the markings. — From Lowe's "Beautiful Leaved Plants." venosa, Mottet (Echites nutans, Anders. Haemadic- tyon venbsum, Lindl.). Lvs. opposite, ovate-lanceo- late, villous beneath: fls. yellow, in pedunculate pan- icles; corolla-lobes roundish, wavy. St. Vincent in the W. Indies. B.M. 2473. Lowe 58. F. TRACY HUBBARD.! PRICKLY ASH: Xanthoxylum. P. Comfrey: Symphytum asperrimum. P. Pear: Opuntia. P. Poppy: Argemone. PRIDE OF INDIA: Melia Azedarach. PRIM: Ligustrum. PRIMROSE: Primula. Arabian P.: Arnebia cornuta. Cape P.: Streptocarpus. Common P.: Primula rulgaris. English P.: Primula vulgaris. Evening P.: (Enothera. PRIMULA (Primula veris, the "first in spring,'1 was an old appellation of one or more of the species). Primulaceae. PRIMROSE. Low plants, for the most part herbaceous, mostly spring-blooming but a few kinds used for winter flowering, producing usually clusters of attractive flowers mostly in white, pink, and rose, but sometimes in red, blue, and yellow. Perennial (plant sometimes monocarpic or blooming but once), with monopetalous salverform fls. in clus- ters on scapes that arise from a radical cluster of simple entire or lobed Ivs. : corolla-tube usually surpassing the 5-toothed or 5-cleft calyx; corolla with 5 spreading lobes, which are commonly notched or retuse at the end and more or less narrowed at the base; stamens 5, affixed to the corolla-tube: ovary 1-loculed, with many ovules on an axile placenta, and 1 undivided filiform style and a capitate stigma, dehiscent by 5-10 valves: bracts of the floral involucre sometimes If .-like.: the fls. of some species are strongly dimorphic or trimor- phic, — the stamens and pistils of different lengths in different fls. of the same species (Fig. 3174). See Dar- win's work, "The Different Forms of Flowers on Plants of the Same Species;" this polymorphism is associated with cross- pollination. Often the herbage is covered with a loose meal or farina or powder. — Primulas are natives to the N. Temp, zone, only one being known in the cold parts of S. Amer., one in Java, and sparingly in Afr. They are mostly boreal or alpine plants. About a score are native to the colder parts of N. Amer. Twenty-five years ago, Pax (Monographische Ubersicht iiber die Arten der Gattung Primula, Leipzig, 1888, and in Engler's Bot. Jahrbiicher, vol. 10), admitted 145 species. Pax & Knuth, in Engler's Das Pflanzenreich, hft. 22 (iv. 237), 1905, describe 208 species and many marked hybrids, and others have been recognized since that time. The number of species now known is upward of 300, with the greatest exten- sion in China (about one-half the species), about 70-75 in the Himalayan region, and the remainder in Japan, N. Amer., Eu., and Eurasia. P. mogellanica occurs in Patagonia, but is apparently not in cult. The latest horticultural treatment is by S. Mottet, Monographic du genre primevere, Paris, 1915; this work follows the systematic analysis of Pax & Knuth, which also is adopted herewith. The fancier of primules must 3174. Dimorphism in stamens and style of Polyantha primrose. PRIMULA PRIMULA 2783 also have the proceedings of the Primula Conference held in London in 1913, comprising botanical and hor- ticultural discussions (Journ. Roy. Hort. Soc. 39). The discussion contains a full synonymy of the Chi- nese and other Asiatic species by Balfour and of European species by MacWatt. For cult, and horti- cultural descriptions (for England), the reader should consult H. M. Paul, "Handbook of the Hardy Primula," 1911. For evening primrose and Mexican primrose, see (Enothera. Notwithstanding the volume of the recent litera- ture, a comprehensive monograph is still lacking, due to the great extension of the genus by contemporary explorers. Further collecting in the Himalaya-Thibet- China region will undoubtedly discover many more forms. The numbers of new species have made it necessary- to extend and to recast the sections as defined by Pax -i, 175. chartacea, 69. latifolia, 53. salisburgensis. 22. chinrnsis, 60. leucophylla, 100. saimonea, 168. ciliata, 34, 41. lichiangensis, 80. sappbirina, 114. dartisflora, 62. lilacina, 168. saxatilis, 71. Clcmentinx, 157. Lindsayi. 30. scotica, 144. Clusiana, 39. Listeri, 65. secundiflora, 198. coccinea, 41. Littoniana, 126. semi-plena, 63. Cockburniana, 165. longiflora, 151. semperflorent. 60. oognata. 150. Ian ffi folia. 129. septemloba, 75. Columns. 97. longit uba . 179. serratifolia. 162. commutata, 44. longobarda, 37. sibirica, 132. concinna, 149. MtahSA. Sibthorpii, 102. conspersa, 133. luteola, 140. Siebpldii, 62. cordifolia. 98. •conmoria, 97. macrocalji, 97. magellanica. 148. sikJomensis, 1S1. Silva-Taroucana, 31. cortusoid€S, 62, 70, 80. magnified, 141. simensis, 58. Cottia. 45. malacoides, 83. simiUt, 34. Couriii. 58. malvacea, 66. nnrm^H, 60, 193. Cowslip. 07. Mandarine, 60. sinolisteri, 64. cridaUntit, 25. marginal a, 51. sinomollis, 74. crispa, 115. Maximowicrii, 188. sinopurpurea, 193. Croutsei, 102. megasesefolia, 94. sonchifolia, 166. Cusickiana, 197. membranifolia, 179. spectabilis, 36. cynoglottifolia, 53. micrantha, 25. sphserocephala, 12L daonensii, 42. microdonta, 183. spieata, 105. darialica, 138. minima, 46. splendens, 168. davurira, 146. minutissima, 86. stellata, 60. defies. 123. mistassinica, 147. striata, 168. Delavayi, 89. Miyabeana. 173. Stuartii, 185, 191. denticulata, 115, 116. modesta, 145. Sturii, 23. deorum, 55. mollis, 73. suaveolens, 97. Dinyana, 18. Alunroi, 131. Sueptitrii, 32. discolor, 8. Murtti, 18. suffnitescens, 200. domestica, 97. Muretiana. 18. superba, 63. drv-adifolia, 108. musfaroidf*. 122. szechuanica, 187. efarinosa, 137. musooides, 154. tangutica. 189. elatior, 98. nessensis, 117. Tewfikiana, 33. elliptica, 139. nivalis. 41, 190, 191, tibetica, 134. elongata, 186. 192, 193. tosaensis, 96. Elwesiana, 88. nivea, 41. TraiUii, 131. erosa. 115. obconica, 63, 65. turkestanica, 192. ezscapa, 41. oblanceolata, 172. t>Tolensis, 49. Facchinii, 9. Obristii. 34. umbrella, 158. Fair>- Primrose, S3. oculata, 76. undulata, 63. farinosa, 143, 145, odorata. 97. uniflora, 112. 146. 147. 148, 192. cenensis, 42. Unique. 31, 165. Fauriei, 199. officinalig, 97. rolmenona. 25. filicifolia, 60. Olga?. 142. tariabilis, 103. fimbriata. 60, 63. orbicularis, 184. variegata, 116. Fire Ball, 116. oreodoza, 63, 71. Veitfhiana, 79. Floerkeana, 10. ovalifolia, 90. Veitchii, 79. floribunda, 56. Oxlip, 98. venusta. 24. florida. 107. Palinuri, 35. Venzoi, 25. Forbesii, 85. Pallasii. 98. veris, 97, 102. Forrestii, 91. mnnonica, 97. verticillata, 57, 58, 59. Forsteri. 11. Parrv-i. 174 Viali. 126. Fortunei, 29. parra, 63. \-illosa. 44. frondosa, 136. patens, 62. Yilmoriniana, 63. Gagntpainii, 68. Paxiana. 82. vinciflora. v" Gambeliana, 152. pedemontana. 40. violodora. 72. geraniifolia, 81. petiolaris, 159, 160. visoosa, 53. gigfntta, 98. Petitmenginii , 63. \-ittata. 176. Gittii, 106. Pe>Titschii, 19. vochinensis. 26. Giraldiana, 122. pinnatifida, 109. rulgaris, 102. glabra, 118. plena. 83. Warei. 143. fflabretcfm, 65. poculiformit, 63. Watsonii. 125. glaucescens. 37. Poissonii, 170. Wattii, 106. glutinosa. 54. Polyantha, 103. Wilsonii, 1. 1. Goeblii. 12. polvneura, 78. Winter!, 160. gracilenta, 127. Portae, 8. Wulfeniana, 38. grandinora, 56, 62, praenitens, 60. yunnanensis, 156. 63,70,119,141. KEY TO THE SECTIONS OR GROUPS. I. Plants of hybrid origin, of many kinds, more or less in cult. I. HYBRIDS, p. 2786. II. Plants of specific difference, representing wild or native species of Primula. A. Young hs. involute (edges turned inward), B. Lts. mostly thick or coriaceous: fls. umbellate: bracts of involucre usually not If. -like II. AURICULA, p. 2787. BB. LTS. thin or membranaceous: fls. in super- imposed whorls or Terticels: bracts of involucre leafy. III. FLORIBCN-D.E, p. 2791. AA. Young Its. retolute (edges turned backward). B. Lrs. lobed and distinctly petioled, the lobes den- tate or crenate. IV. SIXENSES, p. 2791. BB. LTS. not lobed or only indistinctly so. C. Calyx leafy, strongly accrescent (increasing in size) after flowering. V. MONOCARPIC.E, p. 2795. CC. Calyx little or not leafy or accrescent: plant stoloniferous. VI. MIXUTISSI>LE, p. 2796 CCC. Calyx as in cc.: plant not stoloniferous. D. Fl. solitary on a bractless scape. VII. OMPHALOGBAMMA, p. 2796. DD. Fls. usually many (sometimes solitary) on a bracted scape. E. Foliage usually pilose or pubescent. F. Blossoms distinctly pedicellate (each one on a stalk). G. Lf. -texture coriaceous or nearly so, strongly rugose. H. Length of Its. 4 in. or less. VIII. BULLAT.E, p. 2796. HH. Length of ITS. 4 in. or more. IX. CAROLIXELLA, p. 2797. OG. Lf.-texture thin or membranaceous, rugose. H. Base of If. -blade cordate; petiole distinct. X. FALLACES, p. 2797. HH. Base of If. -blade usually atten- uate into a petiole. XI. VERNALES, p. 2797. FF. Blossoms sessile or very short-pedi- cellate. G. Bracts of involucre short and broad. XII. SOLDAXELLOIDE-E, p. 2799. GG. Bracts lanceolate or subulate. XIII. CAPITATE, p. 2800. ZE. Foliage usually glabrous or only minutely pubescent. F. Bracts of involucre gibbous or saccate at base. XIV. FABIXOS.E, p. 2801. FF. Bracts not gibbous or saccate. G. Base of If. -blade cordate; petiole distinct: caps, cylindrical. H. Corotta funnelform. XV. CORDIFOLLE, p. 2804. HH. Corolla cylindrical. XVI. SREDDfSKYA, p. 2804. GG Base of If .-blade gradually narrowed into petiole: caps, globose. H. Umbel 1—2-fld.: hs. somewhat coriaceous: plants low, some- times very small. XVII. TEXELLJE, p. 2804. HH. Umbel several- to many-fld.: hs. either petioled or narrowed •i',ito a winged base, the midrib very wide: plant mostly low, but scape sometimes long. XVIII. PETIOLARES, p. 2805. Umbel several- to many-fld.: plant tall. i. Blossoms pedicellate, in super- posed umbels: Ins. mem- branaceous or papery, ser- rulate or denticulate. XIX. CAXKRIEXIA. p. 2805. n. Blossoms very short-pediceUed or nearly sessile, mostly in simple umbels: Ivs. usually coriaceous, obtusely dentic- ulate. XX. CALLIAXTH^, p. 2807. 2786 PRIMULA PRIMULA GGG. Base of If, -blade narrowed into a winged petiole, the If. -margin entire or denticulate: caps, cylindrical. XXI. NIVALES, p. 2807. GGGG. Base of If .-blade cuneate or rounded, contracted to petiole, the margins usually coarsely toothed toward apex: caps, cylindrical or ovoid. XXII. MACROCARP.E, p. 2808. I. HYBRIDS AND REPUTED HYBRIDS. Several hybrid primulas have attained more or less prominence in cult, aside from those in the Vernales group (P. elatior-veris-acaulis set), and they are briefly described here ; P. kewensis is apparently the best known of them in cult. In a genus so vast and abounding in beautiful forms, many good cultural hybrids are to be expected, although the number of artificial ones is sur- prisingly small considering the number of species and the length of time some of them have been in cult. For an account of Primula hybrids in nature, see Farrer, Journ. Roy. Hort. Soc. 39:112-28; also the mono- graph by Pax & Knuth. A. Fls. yellow. 1. kewensis, W. Wats. (P. floribunda x P. verticil- lata). Fig. 3175. A hybrid that appeared in one of the houses at Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, in 1897, blooming in 1899: it has some of the mealiness of P. verticillata and the general appearance of a robust form of P. floribunda: Ivs. in rosette, 6-8 in. long and 1 H-2 in. wide, obovate-spatulate, tapering to a petiole-like base, margins wavy and dentate: scapes many, 1 ft. high, slender but erect, glabrous, bearing 2-4 whorls of 6-10 bright yellow fragrant fls. on slender pedicels: bracts large, dentate: calyx campanulate, the lobes regular and acute; corolla-tube 1 in. long, the limb %in. across, the lobes nearly circular and notched. G.C. III. 27:195. R.H. 1908:400. Gn. 59, p. 198; 64:10. G.M. 43:232; 51:320. G. 26:99. Gn.M. 15:18. Gn.W. 20:249; 21:214.— A var. farindsa, Hort., is listed, the sts. and foliage covered with silvery white powder. P. kewensis is a good winter bloomer of long season, and a desirable companion for P. sinensis and P. obconica; requires the general treatment of P. obconica. A A. Fls. not yellow, in shades of red or purple, sometimes white. B. Plants of the Auricula section or type. 2. admontensis, Gusm. Said to be a hybrid between P. Auricula and P. Clusiana, but probably a P. Clusiana form or P. Clusiana x P. minima: described by Paul as a very dwarf -growing plant, hardly 3 in. high: fls. large, purplish lilac, in June: Ivs. fleshy, round-oval, evergreen. Admont, in Steiermark, Aus- tria.— Said to thrive in full sun in limestone soil. 3. ArctStis, Kerner. One of the numerous hybrid progeny of P. Auricula and P. hirsuta (see P. pubescens, No. 20) : as a garden plant, said to have acquired some of the characteristics of both parents: fls. lilac-purple or white, in May and June, on scapes 4-5 in. high. — Succeeds in partly shady places in sandy loam; natural hybrid. 4. Berninae, Kerner (P. hirsuta x P. viscosa). Three to 4 in.: fls. large, rosy purple, on short sts.; April, May. — A natural hybrid. 5. bifldra, Huter. Natural hybrid of P. glutinosa and P. minima: fls. in 2's, deep rose-colored, rising scarcely more than 1 in. above the foliage, early. — Requires partial shade and a well-drained position. 6. Bilekii, Hort. A natural form from the Tyrol, probably hybrid of P. minima and P. hirsuta: very small, resembling P. minima but slightly taller, bearing pro- fusely of large pale rose-colored fls.; late spring and early summer. 7. Bowlesii, Farr. (P. pedemontana x P. viscosa). A natural hybrid, usually larger than P. pedemontana, the upper face of Ivs. densely glandulose, scale longer, pedicels longer and densely glandular, the umbel few- fld. and 1-sided; smaller than P. viscosa, the fls. wider, the Ivs. and pedicels with more or less rufous glands: intermediate between the parents, with which it was found. Intro. 1911. 8. discolor, Leyb. (P. Porte?, Huter). Natural hybrid of P. Auricula x P. cenensis: said by Paul to be "a charming plant for sunny places on the rockery:" 3-4 in.: fls. lilac-purple with silvery white eye; April- June. 9. Facchinii, Schott. Natural hybrid of P. minima X P. spectabilis: said to inherit the strength and vigor of P. spectabilis and the free-flowering qualities of P. minima: 3 in. : fls. rosy purple, usually 2 or 3 to each 3175. Primula kewensis. (X;a) St.; May, June. — Paul says that it is essentially a rock- plant, succeeding in shady positions as well as in full sun in light sandy soil. G.W. 15, p. 273. 10. Floerkeana, Schrad. Natural hybrid, P. gluti- nosa x P. minima: an excellent plant, intermediate between the parents: 3 in. or less: fls. bright rose, in heads. — Succeeds best in partly shaded places in rock- ery, in peaty loam. 11. F6rsteri, Stein. Natural hybrid of P. hirsuta x P. minima: resemblance closer to P minima, but with 2 or 3 larger fls., which are rosy purple with white throat, carried 3-4 in. above the foliage. Brenner Alps. G.C. III. 52:490.— Prefers loamy soil in partial shade; blooms in early spring and also in autumn. 12. Goeblii, Kerner (P. Goebelii, Hort.). Natural offspring of P. Auricula x P. hirsuta: 4-5 in.: Ivs. stiff and fleshy, in close rosettes: fls. brownish violet; PRIMULA PRIMULA 2787 May-July. — Sunny position in rockery. See P. pubescens, No. 20. 13. Heeri, Bruegg. Natural hybrid of P. hirsuta and P. integrifolia: a showy dwarf tufted plant, with loose heads in June of bright purple fls. — Shady place in the rock-garden, in light loam. 14. Huteri, Kerner. Natural offspring of P. glu- tin